UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, DC 20549

FORM 20-F

(Mark One)

 

¨REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR 12(g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

 

þANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year endedDecember 31, 20152017

OR

 

¨TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transitionperiod from                    to                    

OR

 

¨SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report                    

 

Commission file numbers Barclays PLC 1-09246
 Barclays Bank PLC 1-10257

BARCLAYS PLC

BARCLAYS BANK PLC

(Exact Names of Registrants as Specified in their Charter[s])

ENGLAND

(Jurisdiction of Incorporation or Organization)

1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, ENGLAND

(Address of Principal Executive Offices)

PATRICK GONSALVES,GARTH WRIGHT, +44 (0)20 7116 2901, PATRICK.GONSALVES@BARCLAYS.COM3170, GARTH.WRIGHT@BARCLAYS.COM

1 CHURCHILL PLACE, LONDON E14 5HP, ENGLAND

*(Name, Telephone, E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act:

Barclays PLC

 

Title of Each Class  Class  

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered      Registered

25p ordinary shares

  New York Stock Exchange*


Title of Each Class  

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered    

American DepositoryDepositary Shares, each
representing four 25p ordinary shares

  New York Stock Exchange

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes due
2024

  New York Stock Exchange

2.75% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2019

  New York Stock Exchange

2.00% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2018

  New York Stock Exchange

3.65% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2025

  New York Stock Exchange

2.875% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2020

  New York Stock Exchange

5.25% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2045

  New York Stock Exchange

3.25% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2021

  New York Stock Exchange

4.375% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2026

New York Stock Exchange

5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes due 2026  

New York Stock Exchange

3.20% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2021

New York Stock Exchange

Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2021

New York Stock Exchange

Floating Rate Senior Notes due 2023

New York Stock Exchange

3.684% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2023

New York Stock Exchange

4.337% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2028

New York Stock Exchange

4.950% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2047

New York Stock Exchange

4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes due 2028

New York Stock Exchange

3.250% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2033

  New York Stock Exchange

 

*Not for trading, but in connection with the registration of American Depository Shares, pursuant to the requirements ofto the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Barclays Bank PLC

 

Title of Each Class

  

Name of Each Exchange

On Which Registered

Callable Floating Rate Notes 2035  New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 2New York Stock Exchange*

American Depository Shares, Series 2, each representing one Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 2

2.650% Fixed Rate Senior Notes due 2021
  New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 3New York Stock Exchange*

American Depository Shares, Series 3, each representing one Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 3

New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 4New York Stock Exchange*

American Depository Shares, Series 4, each representing one Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 4

Floating Rate Notes due 2021
  New York Stock Exchange
Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Shares, Series 5  New York Stock Exchange*

American Depository Shares, Series 5, each representing one Non-Cumulative Callable Dollar Preference Share, Series 5

  New York Stock Exchange
5.140% Lower Tier 2 Notes due October 2020  New York Stock Exchange
Floating Rate Senior Notes due December 9 2016New York Stock Exchange


iPath® Bloomberg Commodity Index Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Agriculture Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Aluminum Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Cocoa Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Coffee Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Copper Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Cotton Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Energy Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Grains Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Industrial Metals Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Lead Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Livestock Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Natural Gas Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Nickel Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Platinum Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Precious Metals Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Softs Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Sugar Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Bloomberg Tin Subindex Total ReturnSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P GSCI® Total Return Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P GSCI® Crude Oil Total Return Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® CBOE S&P 500 BuyWrite IndexSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® MSCI India IndexSM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® EUR/USD Exchange Rate ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® GBP/USD Exchange Rate ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® JPY/USD Exchange Rate ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN  NYSE Arca


iPath® S&P 500 VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Inverse S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Extended Russell 1000® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Extended Russell 2000® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Enhanced MSCI EAFE® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Long Enhanced MSCI Emerging Markets Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Short Enhanced MSCI Emerging Markets Index ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Long Extended S&P 500® TR Index ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Global Carbon ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Optimized Currency Carry ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® US Treasury Steepener ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury Flattener ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury 2-year Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury 2-year Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury 10-year Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury 10-year Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury Long Bond Bull ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury Long Bond Bear ETN  NASDAQ
iPath® Pure Beta Broad Commodity ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta S&P GSCI®GSCI®-Weighted ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Cocoa ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Coffee ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Cotton ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Sugar ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Aluminum ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Copper ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Lead ETNNYSE Arca


iPath® Pure Beta Nickel ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Crude OilNickel ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Seasonal Natural GasPure Beta Crude Oil ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta AgricultureSeasonal Natural Gas ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta GrainsAgriculture ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta SoftsGrains ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Industrial MetalsSofts ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta EnergyIndustrial Metals ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta LivestockEnergy ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Pure Beta Precious MetalsLivestock ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® US Treasury 5-year BullPure Beta Precious Metals ETNNASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury 5-year Bear ETNNASDAQ
iPath® S&P 500 Dynamic VIX ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® InverseUS Treasury 5-year Bull ETNNASDAQ
iPath® US Treasury 5-year Bear ETNNASDAQ
iPath® S&P 500 Dynamic VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN (II)  NYSE Arca
iPath® GEMS IndexTMInverse S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETN (II)  NYSE Arca
iPath® GEMS Asia 8IndexTM ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Asian and Gulf Currency RevaluationGEMS Asia 8 ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® S&P MLPAsian and Gulf Currency Revaluation ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+iPath® S&P 500® VEQTOR™MLP ETN  NYSE Arca
iPath® Series B S&P GCSI Crude Oil Return Index ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Agriculture Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Aluminum Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Coffee Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Copper Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Cotton Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Energy Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Grains Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Industrial Metals Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Livestock Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Nickel Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Platinum Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Precious Metals Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Softs Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Sugar Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Tin Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B Bloomberg Natural Gas Subindex Total ReturnSM ETNNYSE Arca
iPath® Series B S&P 500 VIX Short-Term FuturesTM ETNsCBOE BZX Exchange
iPath® Series B S&P 500 VIX Mid-Term FuturesTM ETNsCBOE BZX Exchange
Barclays ETN+ S&P 500® VEQTOR™ ETNNYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ Shiller CAPETM ETNs  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ Select MLP ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ FI Enhanced Europe 50 ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays ETN+ FI Enhanced Global High Yield ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays OFI SteelPath MLPETN+ FI Enhanced Europe 50 ETN Series B  NYSE Arca
Barclays Women in Leadership ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays Return on Disability ETN  NYSE Arca
Barclays Inverse US Treasury Composite ETN  NASDAQ


*Not for trading, but in connection with the registration of American Depository Shares, pursuant to the requirements to the Securities and Exchange Commission.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act: None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act: None

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuers’ classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

Barclays PLC  25p ordinary shares   16,804,603,949 
Barclays Bank PLC  £1 ordinary shares   2,342,558,515 
  £1 preference shares   1,000 
  £100 preference shares20,930
100 preference shares   31,856 
  $0.25 preference shares   237,000,000106,000,000 
  $100 preference shares   58,133 

Indicate by check mark if each registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.

Yesþ  No¨

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrants are not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act 1934.

Yes¨  Noþ

Note—Checking the box above will not relieve any registrant required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 from their obligations under those Sections.

Indicate by check mark whether the registrants: (1) have filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) have been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.

Yesþ  No¨

Indicate by check mark whether the registrants have submitted electronically and posted on their corporate Web sites, if any, every Interactive Data File required to be submitted and posted pursuant to Rule 405 of Regulation S-T (§ 232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit and post such files).

Yes¨  No¨

Indicate by check mark whether each registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, or a non-accelerated filer.filer, or an emerging growth company. See definition of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer, and large accelerated filer”“emerging growth company” in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act. (Check one):

Barclays PLC

 

Large Accelerated Filerþ  Accelerated Filer¨  Non-Accelerated Filer ¨  Emerging growth company

Barclays Bank PLC

 

Large Accelerated Filer¨  Accelerated Filer¨  Non-Accelerated Filer þ  Emerging growth company

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards* provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act.

The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

*Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

U.S. GAAP¨

International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board þ

Other¨


*If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow:

Item 17¨

Item 18¨

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined in Rule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).

Yes¨  Noþ

(APPLICABLE ONLY TO ISSUERS INVOLVED IN BANKRUPTCY PROCEEDINGS DURING THE PAST FIVE YEARS.)

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has filed all documents and reports required to be filed by Section 12, 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 subsequent to the distribution of securities under a plan confirmed by a court.

Yes¨  No¨


SEC Form 20-F Cross reference information

SEC Form 20-F Cross reference information
Form 20-F item number  

Page and caption references


in this document*

1  Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers  Not applicable
2  Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable  Not applicable
3  Key Information  
  

A.  Selected financial data

  Selected financial data186, 189, 312-313, 431-432166, 168, 211, 275-276, 409-410
  

B.

Capitalization and indebtedness

  Not applicable
  

C.

Reason for the offer and use of proceeds

  Not applicable
  

D.   Risk factors

  Risk factors79-84
4  87-94
4Information on the Company  
  

A.

History and development of the company

  

43-44, 285-286 (note 36)162,204 (Note 6), 291 (note206 (Note 9), 216 (Note
16), 264 (Note 38), 299-305 (note 46)265-266 (Note 39), 434-435, 476-478

269-
271 (Note 43), 272-274, 388-389,
  

B.  Business overview

  Business overviewiii (Market and other data), 177, 181-182, 191-192, 215, 218-220 (note 1)155-162, 170-180,
201-202 (Note 2), 231-233 (note 15), 261-271 (note239-247 (Note 29)
  

C.   Organizational structure

  Organizational structure285-286 (note162, 260-261 (Note 36), 299-305 (note 46)295-300 (Note 45)
  

D.

Property, plants and equipment

  255231 (Note 21), 233-234 (Note 23), 256-257 (Note 24), 258 (Note236
(Note 25)
4A  Unresolved staff comments  Not applicable
5  Operating and Financial Review and Prospects  
  

A.  Operating results

  Operating results145-146, 177-182, 184-208, 221-30679, 82, 143, 155-162, 164-180, 213-215
(Note 15), 239-247 (Note 29), 347
  

B.

Liquidity and capital resources

  103-105, 115-116, 130, 148-171, 177-182, 231-233 (note100, 113-114, 116, 124-136, 137-143, 192,
213-215 (Note 15), 272-275 (note239 (Note 28), 248-251
(Note 30), 276 (note251 (Note 31), 291-293 (note261, 264 (Note 38),
265-266 (Note 39), 297 (note 43), 441343-349, 362-365
  

C.

Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.

  Not applicable44
  

D.

Trend information

  
  

E.  Off-balance sheet arrangements

  Off-balance sheet arrangements261 (note239 (Note 28), 286-290 (note261-264 (Note 37), 291-293 (note265-266
(Note 39)
  

F.

Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations

  411364-365
  

G.   Safe harbor

  Safe harboriii (Forward-looking statements)
6  Directors, Senior Management and Employees  
  

A.

Directors and senior management

  3-5, 324-3295-6, 286-289
  

B.  Compensation

  Compensation50-83, 281-284 (note51-71, 253-254 (Note 34), 255-259 (Note 35), 294-296 (note
267-268 (Note 41), 385, 408
  

C.   Board practices

  Board practices6-49, 67-715-6, 13, 57-60, 70-71, 72
  

D.   Employees

  Employees49 (Full time employees by region), 193, 195, 197, 199, 201, 202, 20447, 48, 170, 173, 177, 178
  

E.  Share ownership

  Share ownership51-71, 253-254 (Note 34), 267-268 (Note 41),
292-294
7  50-83, 279-280 (note 34), 294-296 (note 41), 333-335
7Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions  
  

A.  Major shareholders

  Major shareholders44, 32345, 284-285
  

B.

Related party transactions

  294-296 (note179, 267-268 (Note 41), 431, 453 (note r)300, 385, 408
  

C.

Interests of experts and counsel

  Not applicable
8  Financial Information  
  

A.

Consolidated statements and other financial information

  184-185, 208-305, 434-455188-192, 211 (Note 12), 239-247 (Note 29),
251 (Note 31), 195-271, 273, 275-276, 386-
387, 404-406
  

B.

Significant changes

  Not applicable
9  The Offer and Listing  
  

A.

Offer and listing details

  312-314275-276
  

B.

Plan of distribution

  Not applicable
  

C.   Markets

  Markets312-314275
  

D.

Selling shareholders

  Not applicable
  

E.

Dilution

  Not applicable
  

F.

Expenses of the issue

  Not applicable
10  Additional Information  
  

A.

Share capital

  Not applicable
  

B.

Memorandum and Articles of Association

  43-45, 307-31143-46, 272-274
  

C.   Material contracts

  Material contracts81-82, 276 (note 31)57-60
  

D.   Exchange controls

  Exchange controls318279
  

E.  Taxation

  Taxation314-318277-279
  

F.

Dividends and paying assets

  Not applicable
  

G.

Statement by experts

  Not applicable
  

H.   Documents on display

  Documents on display318279
  

I.    Subsidiary information

  Subsidiary information260-261 (Note 36), 295-300
11  285-286 (note 36) 299-305 (note 46)
11Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosure about Market Risk  101-102, 138-147, 297 (note 43), 376-391


87, 118-121, 143-144, 146-148, 331-337
Form 20-F item number12  

Page and caption references

in this document*

12Description of Securities Other than Equity Securities  
  

A.

Debt SecuritiesNot applicable
B.Warrants and Rights

  Not applicable
  C.Other Securities

B.  Warrants and Rights

  Not applicable
  D.American Depositary Shares312, 316-320
13Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and Delinquencies

C.   Other Securities

  Not applicable
14  

D.   American Depositary Shares

275-276, 280-281
13Defaults, Dividends Arrearages and DelinquenciesNot applicable
14Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds  Not applicable


15  Controls and Procedures  
  

A.

Disclosure controls and procedures

  324286
  

B.

Management’s annual report on internal control over financial reporting

  4041
  

C.

Attestation report of the registered public accounting firm

  210186
  

D.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

  4041
16A  Audit Committee Financial Expert  1012
16B  Code of Ethics  322283
16C  Principal Accountant Fees and Services  16-18, 296 (note19-20, 269 (Note 42), 321 (External auditor objectivity and independence: Non-Audit Services)282
16D  Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees  Not applicable
16E  Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers  45, 276 (Share repurchase)46,251
16F  Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant  324Not applicable
16G  Corporate Governance  322283
17  Financial Statements  Not applicable (See Item 8)
18  Financial Statements  Not applicable (See Item 8)
19  Exhibits  Exhibit Index

 

 *Captions have been included only in respect of pages with multiple sections on the same page in order to identify the relevant caption on that page covered by the corresponding Form 20-F item number.


LOGO

Positioned for growth,

LOGO

  Return to stability

sharing and success

 

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC

20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Notes

The termterms Barclays or Group refersrefer to Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries. Unless otherwise stated, the income statement analysis compares the year ended 31 December 20152017 to the corresponding twelve months of 20142016 and balance sheet analysis as at 31 December 20152017 with comparatives relating to 31 December 2014.2016. The abbreviations ‘£m’ and ‘£bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of Pounds Sterling respectively; and the abbreviations ‘$m’ and ‘$bn’ represent millions and thousands of millions of US Dollars respectively.

Comparatives have been restated to reflect the implementation of the Group structure changesrespectively; and the reallocationabbreviations ‘m’ and ‘bn’ represent millions and thousands of elementsmillions of the Head Office results under the revised business structure. These restatements were detailed in our Form 6-K filed with the SEC dated 14 July 2014.

References throughout this document to ‘provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange’ mean ‘provisions held for certain aspects of ongoing investigations involving certain authorities and litigation including Foreign Exchange.’Euros respectively.

The information in this documentannouncement, which was approved by the Board of Directors on 21 February 2018, does not comprise statutory accounts within the meaning of Section 434 of the Companies Act 2006. Statutory accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015,2017, which includeincludes certain information required for the Joint Annual Report on Form 20-F of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC to the US SEC (2015 20-F)Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) and which contain an unqualified audit report under Section 495 of the Companies Act 2006 (which does not make any statements under Section 498 of the Companies Act 2006) have beenwill be delivered to the Registrar of Companies in accordance with Section 441 of the Companies Act 2006.

Barclays is a frequent issuer in the debt capital markets and regularly meets with investors via formal road-shows and other ad hoc meetings. Consistent with its usual practice, Barclays expects that from time to time over the coming quarter it will meet with investors globally to discuss these results and other matters relating to the Group.

Strategic Update

On 1 March 2016, Barclays also announced certain strategy updates of the Group, including in relation to reorganisation of operating segments into Barclays UK and Barclays Corporate & International, the intention to reduce the Group’s stake in Barclays Africa Group Limited, the contribution of certain assets to the Non-Core segment, revised guidance on future dividends and new Group financial targets. Further information can be found in the Form 6-K regarding the “Group Chief Executive Officer—Strategy Update” filed by Barclays on 1 March 2016, which is incorporated herein by reference.

Certain non-IFRS measures

Barclays management believes that the non-International Financial Reporting Standards (non-IFRS)non-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of itsthe financial statements becauseas they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the business’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by BarclaysBarclays’ management. However, any non-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. As management reviewsRefer to the adjusting items described belowappendix on pages 181 to 183 for further information, reconciliations and calculations of non-IFRS performance measures included throughout this document, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures.

There are a number of key judgement areas, for example impairment calculations, which are based on models and which are subject to ongoing adjustment and modifications. Reported numbers reflect best estimates and judgements at a Group level, segmental results are presented excluding these itemsthe given point in accordance with IFRS 8; “Operating Segments”. Statutory and adjusted performance is reconciled at a Group level only.time.

Key non-IFRS measures included in this document, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures, are:

Adjusted profit before taxAverage allocated equity represents the average shareholders’ equity that is the non-IFRS equivalent of profit before tax as it excludes the impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, losses on sale relatingallocated to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology, and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted profit after tax represents profit after tax excluding the post-tax impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, loss on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology, and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;


– Adjusted attributable profit represents adjusted profit after tax less profit attributable to non-controlling interests.businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is attributable profit. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted income and adjusted total income net of insurance claims represents total income net of insurance claims adjusted to exclude the impact of own credit, revision of Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology and gain on US Lehman acquisition assets. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted net operating income represents net operating income excluding the impact of own credit; the gain on US Lehman acquisition assets and revision of ESHLA valuation methodology. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted total operating expenses represents operating expenses excluding impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted litigation and conduct represents litigation and conduct excluding the provisions for UK customer redress and the provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange. A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted cost: income ratio represents adjusted operating expenses (defined above) compared to adjusted income (defined above). A reconciliation to IFRS is presented on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted compensation: net operating income ratio represents compensation costs: net operating income ratio excluding the impact of own credit; and the revision of ESHLA valuation methodology.average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 192iii;

– Average allocated tangible equity is calculated as the average of the previous month’s period end allocated tangible equity and the current month’s period end allocated tangible equity. The average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity for the Group;

– Adjusted compensation: operating income ratio represents compensation costs: operating income ratioquarter/year is the average of the monthly averages within that quarter/year. Period end allocated tangible equity is calculated as 12.0% (2016: 11.5%) of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the impact of credit impairment charges and other provisions; own credit; gain on US Lehman acquisition and revision of ESHLA valuation methodology.assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 192iii;

– Average tangible equity is calculated as the average of the previous month’s period end tangible equity and the current month’s period end tangible equity. Period end tangible equity is calculated as 12.0% (2016: 11.5%) of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. The average tangible shareholders’ equity for the Group;quarter/year is the average of the monthly averages within that quarter/year. The comparable IFRS measure is average equity. A reconciliation is provided on page iii;

Adjusted basicBasic earnings per ordinary share excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and the re-measurement of US DTAs represents adjusted attributable profit (page 205)excluding the impact of excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and the re-measurement of US DTAs divided by the basic weighted average number of shares in issue. The comparable IFRS measure is basic earnings per share, whichshare. A reconciliation is provided on page 183;

– Operating expenses excluding UK Bank Levy and litigation and conduct charges represents profit after taxoperating expenses excluding the impact of UK Bank Levy and non-controlling interests, divided by the basic weighted average numberimpact of shares in issue.charges for litigation and conduct. The comparable IFRS measure is operating expenses. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192183;

– Profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and the re-measurement of US DTAs represents profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary shareholders excluding the impact of charges for litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and the re-measurement of US DTAs. The comparable IFRS measure is attributable profit. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 183;

– Profit before tax excluding impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL and loss on sale of BAGL represents profit/(loss) before tax excluding the impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL and loss on sale of BAGL. The comparable IFRS measure is profit before tax. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 179;

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F
i


– Return on average allocated equity represents the return on shareholders’ equity that is allocated to the businesses. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page iv;

– Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and the re-measurement of US DTAs BAGL is calculated as profit attributable to ordinary equity holders excluding the impact of charges for litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and the re-measurement of US DTAs BAGL, including an adjustment for the Group;tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average allocated tangible equity. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page 183;

Adjusted returnReturn on average shareholders’allocated tangible equity representsis calculated as the annualised adjustedstatutory profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests, the impact of own credit on retained earnings, and other equity instruments.allocated tangible equity. The comparable IFRS measure is return on equity. A reconciliation is provided on page iv;

– Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity which representsis calculated as the annualised statutory profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on page 192 for the Group;

– Adjusted return on average tangible shareholders’ equity represents annualised adjusted profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests, the impact of own credit on retained earnings, and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.equity. The comparable IFRS measure is return on average tangible shareholders’ equity which represents annualised profit after tax for the period attributable to ordinaryequity. A reconciliation is provided on page iv;

– Tangible net asset value per share is calculated by dividing shareholders including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments, adjusted for the deduction ofless goodwill and intangible assets, and goodwill. A reconciliation to IFRS is providedby the number of issued ordinary shares. The components of the calculation have been included on page 192 for the Group;

– Barclays Core results are non-IFRS measures because they represent the sum of five Operating Segments, each of which is prepared in accordance with IFRS 8; “Operating Segments”: Personal183; and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard, Africa Banking, Investment Bank and Head Office. A reconciliation to IFRS is provided on pages 191 and 192;


– Constant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average exchange rate for the year ended 31 December 2015 for the income statement and the 31 December 2015 closing exchange rate for the balance sheet to eliminate the impact of movement in exchange rates between the two periods;

– Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) is calculated according to the definition and methodology detailed in the standard provided by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision. The original guidelines released in December 2010 (‘Basel III: International Framework for Liquidity Risk Measurement, Standards and Monitoring’, December 2010) were revised in October 2014 (‘Basel III: The Net Stable Funding Ratio’, October 2014). The metric is a regulatory ratio that is not yet finalised in local regulations and, as such, represents a non-IFRS measure. This definition and the methodology used to calculate this metric is subject to further revisions ahead of the implementation date and our interpretation of this calculation may not be consistent with that of other financial institutions;

– Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) is calculated according to the Commission Delegated Regulation of October 2014 that supplements Regulation (EU) 575/2013 (CRDIV) published by the European Commission in June 2013. The metric is applicable from 01 October 2015 and as such is a binding measure as at 31 December 2015;

– Transitional CET1 ratio according to FSA October 2012. This measure is calculated by taking into account the statement of the Financial Services Authority, the predecessor of the Prudential Regulation Authority, on CRD IV transitional provisions in October 2012, assuming such provisions were applied as at 1 January 2014. This ratio is used as the relevant measure starting 1 January 2014 for purposes of determining whether the automatic write-down trigger (specified as a Transitional CET1 ratio according to FSA October 2012 of less than 7.00%) has occurred under the terms of the Contingent Capital Notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC on November 21, 2012 (CUSIP: 06740L8C2) and April 10, 2013 (CUSIP: 06739FHK0). Please refer to page 150139 for a reconciliation of this measure to CRD IV CET1 ratio.

Forward-looking statements

This document contains certain forward-looking statements within the meaning of Section 21E of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended, and Section 27A of the US Securities Act of 1933, as amended, with respect to the Group. Barclays cautions readers that no forward-looking statement is a guarantee of future performance and that actual results or other financial condition or performance measures could differ materially from those contained in the forward-looking statements. These forward-looking statements can be identified by the fact that they do not relate only to historical or current facts. Forward-looking statements sometimes use words such as ‘may’, ‘will’, ‘seek’, ‘continue’, ‘aim’, ‘anticipate’, ‘target’, ‘projected’, ‘expect’, ‘estimate’, ‘intend’, ‘plan’, ‘goal’, ‘believe’, ‘achieve’ or other words of similar meaning. Examples of forward-looking statements include, among others, statements or guidance regarding or relating to the Group’s future financial position, income growth, assets, impairment charges, and provisions, business strategy, structural reform, capital, leverage and other regulatory ratios, payment of dividends (including dividend pay-out ratios)payout ratios and expected payment strategies), projected levels of growth in the banking and financial markets, projected costs or savings, original and revisedany commitments and targets in connection with the strategic cost programme and the impact of any regulatory deconsolidation resulting from the sell down of the Group’s interest in Barclays Africa Group Strategy Update, rundown of assets and businesses within Barclays Non-Core,Limited, estimates of capital expenditures and plans and objectives for future operations, projected employee numbers, IFRS 9 impacts and other statements that are not historical fact. By their nature, forward-looking statements involve risk and uncertainty because they relate to future events and circumstances. These may be affected by changes in legislation, the development of standards and interpretations under International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS),including the implementation of IFRS 9, evolving practices with regard to the interpretation and application of accounting and regulatory standards, the outcome of current and future legal proceedings and regulatory investigations, future levels of conduct provisions, the policies and actions of governmental and regulatory authorities, geopolitical risks and the impact of competition. In addition, factors including (but not limited to) the following may have an effect: capital, leverage and other regulatory rules (including with regard to the future structure of the Group) applicable to past, current and future periods; United Kingdom (UK), United States (US),UK, US, Africa, Eurozone and global macroeconomic and business conditions; the effects of continued volatility in credit markets; market related risks such as changes in interest rates and foreign exchange rates; effects of changes in valuation of credit market exposures; changes in valuation of issued securities; volatility in capital markets; changes in credit ratings of any entities within the Group or any securities issued by such entities; the potential for one or more countries exiting the Eurozone; the implementationimplications of the strategic cost programme;exercise by the United Kingdom of Article 50 of the Treaty of Lisbon and the disruption that may result in the UK and globally from the withdrawal of the United Kingdom from the European Union and the success of future acquisitions, disposals and other strategic transactions. A number of these influences and factors are beyond the Group’s control. As a result, the Group’s actual future results, dividend payments, and capital and leverage ratios may differ materially from the plans, goals, expectations and expectationsguidance set forth in the Group’s forward-looking statements. Additional risks and factors which may impact the Group’s future financial condition and performance are identified in our filings with the SEC (including, without limitation, our annual report on form 20-F for the fiscal year ended 31 December 2017), which arewill be available on the SEC’s website at http://www.sec.gov.


AnySubject to our obligations under the applicable laws and regulations of the United Kingdom and the United States in relation to disclosure and ongoing information, we undertake no obligation to update publicly or revise any forward-looking statements, made herein speak onlywhether as of the date they are made and it should not be assumed that they have been revised or updated in the lighta result of new information, future events or future events. Except as required by the Prudential Regulation Authority, the Financial Conduct Authority, the London Stock Exchange plc (the LSE) or applicable law, Barclays expressly disclaims any obligation or undertaking to release publicly any updates or revisions to any forward-looking statements contained herein to reflect any change in Barclays’ expectations with regard thereto or any change in events, conditions or circumstances on which any such statement is based. The reader should, however, consult any additional disclosures that Barclays has made or may make in documents it has published or may publish via the Regulatory News Service of the LSE and/or has filed or may file with the SEC.otherwise.

Market and other data

This document contains information, including statistical data, about certain Barclays markets and its competitive position. Except as otherwise indicated, this information is taken or derived from Datastream and other external sources. Barclays cannot guarantee the accuracy of information taken from external sources, or that, in respect of internal estimates, a third party using different methods would obtain the same estimates as Barclays.

Uses of Internet addresses

This document contains inactive textual addresses to internet websites operated by us and third parties. Reference to such websites is made for information purposes only, and information found at such websites is not incorporated by reference into this document.

References to Pillar 3 report

This document contains references throughout to Barclays annual risk report, the Pillar 3. Reference to the aforementioned report is made for information purposes only, and information found in said report is not incorporated by reference into this document.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F
ii


                                                                                          

 

 Average allocated equitya

  

 

 

 

 

2017

 

£bn

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£bn

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£bn

 

 

 

 Barclays UK   13.6    13.4    13.7 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   24.9    23.2    23.1 
Consumer, Cards and Payments   5.6    5.0    4.0 
 Barclays International   30.5    28.2    27.1 
 Head Officeb   10.6    8.0    3.9 
 Barclays Non-Core   2.4    7.8    11.2 
 Barclays Group   57.1    57.4    55.9 
      
      

 

 Effect of Goodwill and intangibles

  

 

 

 

    

£bn

 

 

 

   £bn    £bn 
 Barclays UK   (4.4)    (4.5)    (4.4) 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   (1.0)    (1.4)    (1.2) 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   (1.4)    (1.3)    (1.0) 
 Barclays International   (2.4)    (2.7)    (2.2) 
 Head Officeb   (1.4)    (1.4)    (1.3) 
 Barclays Non-Core   (0.0)    (0.1)    (0.3) 
 Barclays Group   (8.2)    (8.7)    (8.2) 
      
      

 

 Average allocated tangible equityc

  

 

 

 

    

£bn

 

 

 

   £bn    £bn 
 Barclays UK   9.1    8.9    9.3 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   24.0    21.9    21.9 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   4.2    3.6    3.0 
 Barclays International   28.1    25.5    24.9 
 Head Officeb   9.3    6.5    2.6 
 Barclays Non-Core   2.4    7.8    10.9 
 Barclays Group   48.9    48.7    47.7 

ContentsNotes

a This table shows the allocation of Group average equity across IFRS reporting segments.

b Includes the Africa Banking discontinued operation.

c This table shows average tangible equity for the Group and average allocated tangible equity for the IFRS reporting segments.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F
iii


                                                                                          

 

 Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent

  

 

 

 

 

2017

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2016

 

£m

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

 

 

 Barclays UK   893    857    (33) 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   269    1,342    1,180 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   698    1,153    620 
 Barclays International   967    2,495    1,800 
 Head Office   (864)    109    11 
 Barclays Non-Core   (409)    (1,899)    (2,405) 
 Africa Banking discontinued operation   (2,335)    189    302 
 Barclays Group   (1,748)    1,751    (324) 
      
      

 

 Average allocated equitya

  

 

 

 

    

£bn

 

 

 

   £bn    £bn 
 Barclays UK   13.6    13.4    13.7 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   24.9    23.2    23.1 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   5.6    5.0    4.0 
 Barclays International   30.5    28.2    27.1 
 Head Officeb   10.6    8.0    3.9 
 Barclays Non-Core   2.4    7.8    11.2 
 Barclays Group   57.1    57.4    55.9 
      
      

 

 Return on average allocated equityc

  

 

 

 

    

%

 

 

 

   %    % 
 Barclays UK   6.6%    6.4%    (0.2%) 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   1.1%    5.8%    5.1% 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   12.5%    23.1%    15.3% 
 Barclays International   3.2%    8.8%    6.6% 
 Barclays Group   (3.1%)    3.0%    (0.6%) 

Notes

a This table shows average equity for the Group and average allocated equity for the IFRS reporting segments.

b Includes the Africa Banking discontinued operation.

c This table shows return on average equity for the Group and return on average allocated equity for the IFRS reporting segments.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F
iv


Governance

    

 

Governance

Page

 

OurThis section sets out our corporate governance processes and the role they play in supporting the delivery of our strategy, including reports from the Chairman and each of the Board Committee Chairmen.

    

Directors’ report

2

§  Who we are

  3

§  What we did in 2015

6

§  How we comply

35

§  Other statutory information

42
People46
Remuneration report50

 

Risk review

Directors’ report
  

Page

The management of risk plays a central role in the execution of Barclays’ strategy and insight into the level of risk across businesses and portfolios and the material risks and uncertainties the Group face are key areas of management focus.

Material existing and emerging risks56
Risk management94
Risk performance110

§  Credit risk

111

§  Market risk

138

§  Funding risk - capital

148

§  Funding risk - liquidity

154

§  Operational risk

172

§  Conduct risk

174

§  Supervision and regulation

177

Financial review

  Page 

 

A review of the performance of Barclays, including the key performance indicators, and our businesses’ contribution to the overall performance of the Group.UK Corporate Governance Code

 

 

Key performance indicators

184

Consolidated summary income statement186
Income statement commentary187
Consolidated summary balance sheet189
Balance sheet commentary190
Analysis of results by business191
Margins analysis207

Financial statements

Page

Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosure on the financial performance of the Group.

Consolidated financial statements209
Notes Index to the financial statements221

§   Performance/returndisclosures

  1872 

§  Assets and liabilities held at fair value

230

§  Financial instruments held at amortised cost

253

§  Non-current assets and other investments

255

§  Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

259

§  Capital instruments, equity and reserves

272

§  Employee benefits

279

§  Scope of consolidation

285

§  Other disclosure matters

294

Additional informationLetter from the Chairman

 

Page

Additional shareholder information307
Additional information321
Barclays’ approach to managing risks

§  Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

336

§  Management of credit risk

354

§  Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

370

§  Management of market risk

376

§  Management of operational risk

393

§  Management of funding risk

397

§  Management of conduct risk

406
Additional financial disclosure410
Barclays Bank PLC data434
Glossary456
Shareholder information476

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  1


Governance

Contents

Our corporate governance processes and the role they play in supporting the delivery of our strategy, including reports from the Chairman and each of the Board Committee Chairmen.

    

Page 

Governance: Directors’ report3 

 

Who we are

 

 

§ Board of Directors

 

§   Group Executive Committee

 5 
  

§ Board diversityGroup Executive Committee

 

 

 7 

 

What we did in 20152017

 

 

§ Chairman’s introductionBoard report

 

8
 

§ Deputy Chairman’s statementBoard Audit Committee report

 811 
 

§ Board AuditRisk Committee Reportreport

 922 
 

§   Board Risk Committee Report

19 

§ Board Reputation Committee Reportreport

 2427 
  

§ Board Nominations Committee Reportreport

 

 

27 

33

 

How we comply

 

 

35 

38

 

Other statutory information

 

 

42 

43

People

 

 

46 

47

Remuneration report

 

 

50 

51

LOGO

 

2  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    1


 


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Board of Directors1UK Corporate Governance Code – index to disclosures

    

“The purpose of corporate governance is to facilitate effective, entrepreneurial and prudent management that can deliver the long-term success of the company.”

The UK Corporate Governance Code

The UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) is not a rigid set of rules. It consists of principles (main and supporting) and provisions. The Listing Rules require companies to apply the main principles and report to shareholders on how they have done so.

You can find our disclosures as follows:

 

Board of Directorsa

Barclays understands the importance of having a Board containing the right balance of skills, experience and diversity and the composition of the Board is regularly reviewed by the Board Nominations Committee. The skills and experience of the current Directors and the value they bring to the Board is described below. Full biographies can be accessed online via home.barclays/investorrelations

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

Age: 68

Appointed:

1 January 2015

Leadership

  Page

Relevant skills and experience

JohnEvery company should be headed by an effective board which is a former CEO of Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited with extensive financial services experience across retail, commercial and investment banking, gained both globally and incollectively responsible for the UK. John has a proven track record of implementing cost reduction, cultural transformation and driving through strategic change; most recently demonstrated during his time as chairman of Aviva plc. He is also an experienced non-executive director and chairman. John became Chairman at the conclusionlong-term success of the April 2015 AGM. He became Executive Chairman in July 2015 and held this position until 1 December 2015, when he resumed the role of Chairman.company.

Other principal appointments

Old Oak Holdings Limited; Westfield Corporation;

Chairman, The CityUK

Committees

Nom*

 

LOGO

Jes Staley

Group Chief Executive

Age: 59

Appointed:

1 December 2015

Board of Directors

  5

Relevant skills Composition of the Board

39

There should be a clear division of responsibilities at the head of the company between the running of the board and experience

Jes has nearly four decadesthe executive responsibility for the running of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JP Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, and later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management, and ultimately heading the company’s global investment bank. Most recently, Jes served as managing partner at BlueMountain Capital. These rolesbusiness. No one individual should have provided him with a vast experience in leadership and he brings a wealthunfettered powers of investment banking knowledge to the Board. Jes joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.decision.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

None

 

Roles on the Board

38

The chairman is responsible for leadership of the board and ensuring its effectiveness on all aspects of its role.

LOGO

Sir Gerry Grimstone

Deputy Chairman and

Senior Independent

Director

Age: 66

Appointed:

1 January 2016

Roles on the Board

 38

As part of their role as members of a unitary board, non-executive directors should constructively challenge and help develop proposals on strategy.

Roles on the Board

 38

Effectiveness

Page

The board and its committees should have the appropriate balance of skills, experience, independence and knowledge of the company to enable them to discharge their respective duties and responsibilities effectively.

Relevant skills Board of Directors

5

Board Diversity

4

There should be a formal, rigorous and experience

Sir Gerry bringstransparent procedure for the appointment of new directors to the Board a wealthboard.

Appointment and re-election of investment banking, financial services and commercial experience gained through his senior roles at Schroders and his various former board positions. Sir Gerry has global business experience acrossDirectors

35

All directors should be able to allocate sufficient time to the UK, Hong Kong, the Middle East and the US.company to discharge their responsibilities effectively.

 

Sir Gerry has significant experience as anon-executive director and chairman. He is currently the chairman of Standard Life plc, independent non-executive board member of Deloitte LLP and the lead non-executive at the Ministry of Defence.Attendance

38

Other principal appointments Time commitment

Financial Services Trade and Investment Board;

The Shareholder Executive

Committees

Nom, Rep*

39

LOGO

Mike Ashley

Non-executive

Age: 61

Appointed:

18 September 2013

All directors should receive an induction on joining the board and should regularly update and refresh their skills and knowledge.

   

Relevant skills Induction

39

Training and experiencedevelopment

40

Mike has deep knowledgeThe board should be supplied in a timely manner with information in a form and of auditing and associated regulatory issues, having worked at KPMG for over 20 years, where he was a partner. Mike was the lead engagement partner on the audits of large financial services groups including HSBC, Standard Chartered and the Bank of England. While at KPMG, Mike was Head of Quality and Risk Management for KPMG Europe LLP, responsible for the management of professional risks and quality control. He also held the role of KPMG UK’s Ethics Partner.appropriate to enable it to discharge its duties.

Other principal appointments

ICAEW Ethics Standards Committee; European Financial Reporting Advisory Group’s Technical Expert Group; Chairman, Government Internal Audit Agency; Charity Commission; International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants

Committees

Aud*, Nom, Ris

 

LOGO

Tim Breedon

Non-executive

Age: 58

Appointed:

1 November 2012

Information provided to the Board

  40

Relevant skillsThe board should undertake a formal and experience

Tim joined Barclays after a distinguished career with Legal & General, where, among other roles, he was the group chief executive until June 2012. Tim’s experience as a CEO enables him to provide challenge, advice and support to the Executive onrigorous annual evaluation of its own performance and decision-making.

Tim brings to the Board extensive financial services experience, knowledgethat of risk managementits committees and UK and EU regulation, as well as an understanding of the key issues for investors.individual directors.

Other principal appointments

Marie Curie Cancer Care; Chairman, Apax Global

Alpha Limited

Committees

Aud, Nom, Rem, Ris*

 

LOGO

Crawford Gillies

Non-executive

Age: 59

Appointed:

1 May 2014

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

  36

Relevant skills and experience

Crawford has extensive business and management experience, gained with Bain & Company and Standard Life plc. These roles have provided him with experience in strategic decision-making and knowledge of company strategy across various sectors and geographical locations.

Crawford has also held board and committee chairman positions during his career, notably as chairman of the remuneration committees of Standard Life plc and MITIE Group PLC.

Crawford intendsAll directors should be submitted for re-election at regular intervals, subject to retire from his position at Standard Life plc in 2016.continued satisfactory performance.

Other principal appointments

SSE plc; Control Risks Group Holdings Limited

Committees

Aud, Nom, Rem*

 

LOGO

Reuben Jeffery III

Non-executive

Age: 62

Appointed:

16 July 2009

Relevant skills and experience

Reuben has extensive financial services experience, particularly within investment banking and wealth management, through his role as CEO and president of Rockefeller & Co. Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. and his former senior roles with Goldman Sachs, including as the managing partner of the Paris office.

His various government roles in the US, including as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission, provides the Board with insight into the US political and regulatory environment.

Other principal appointments

International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission; Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP; Advisory Board of J. Rothschild Capital Management Limited; Financial Services Volunteer Corps; The Asia Foundation

Committees

Nom, Ris

aFull Director biographies can be found on pages324 to327
1The composition Composition of the Board is correct as at 29 February 2016.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  3


LOGO

Wendy Lucas-Bull

Non-executive

Age: 62

Appointed:

19 September 2013

  

Relevant skills and experience

Wendy has significant financial services and African banking experience gained through CEO and senior executive roles on the boards of large South African banks, including Barclays Africa Group Limited. As a CEO she has a track record of successful financial turnaround and cultural transformation of a major South African bank. Her expertise in asset management, investment, commercial and retail banking on the continent is invaluable to the Board given its operations in the region.

Wendy’s previous experience of leading on a number of conduct-related consultations also provides Barclays with valuable insight into conduct risk issues.

Other principal appointments

Chairman, Barclays Africa Group Limited; Chairman, Absa Bank Limited; Chairman, Absa Financial Services; Afrika Tikkun NPC (non-profit); Peotona Group Holdings

Committees

Rep

39 

LOGO

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance

Director

Age: 47

Appointed:

15 October 2013

Appointment and re-election of Directors

  

Relevant skills and experience

Tushar joined Barclays in 2013 having spent the previous four years in senior management roles with JP Morgan, most recently as the CFO of its Corporate & Investment Bank.

Throughout his time with JP Morgan he gained strategic financial management and regulatory relations experience. Since joining the Board he has been a driving influence on the Group’s strategic cost programme, and managing the Group’s capital plan, particularly in response to structural reform.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

None

35 

LOGO

Dambisa Moyo

Non-executive

Age: 47

Appointed:

1 May 2010

Accountability

  

Relevant skills and experience

Dambisa is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, having completed a PhD in economics. Dambisa has a background in financial services and a wide knowledge and understanding of African economic, political and social issues, in addition to her experience as a director of companies with complex, global operations.

Other principal appointments

SABMiller Plc; Barrick Gold Corporation; Seagate Technology plc

Committees

Rem, Rep

Page 

LOGO

Frits van Paasschen

Non-executive

Age: 54

Appointed:

1 August 2013

The board should present a fair, balanced and understandable assessment of the company’s position and prospects.

Relevant skills and experience

Frits is an experienced director, having held the position of CEO and non-executive director in a number of leading global organisations, most recently as CEO of Starwood Hotels and Resorts Worldwide, Inc. These roles have provided him with both a global business perspective and a clear understanding of key management issues, as well as experience of enhancing customer experience in a retail environment.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

Rep

 

LOGO

Diane de Saint Victor

Non-executive

Age: 61

Appointed:

1 March 2013

Risk management

  

Relevant skills and experience

Diane holds the roles of executive director, general counsel and company secretary of ABB Limited, a listed international power and automation technologies company. Diane’s legal background, combined with her knowledge of regulatory and compliance requirements, bring a unique perspective to the discussions of the Board and its Committees.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

Aud, Rep

77 

LOGO

Diane Schueneman

Non-executive

Age: 63

Appointed:

25 June 2015

Relevant skills and experience

Diane joined Barclays after an extensive career at Merrill Lynch, holding a variety of senior roles. Diane brings a wealth of experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. Diane’s experience is a good addition to discussions of the Board and the Board Risk Committee. Diane will also join the Board Audit Committee with effect from 1 March 2016.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

Ris

LOGO

Steve Thieke

Non-executive

Age: 69

Appointed:

7 January 2014

Relevant skills and experience

Steve has significant experience in financial services, in both investment banking with JP Morgan, where among other roles he served as the chairman of the risk management committee, and in regulation, through roles with the Federal Reserve Bank of New York and the Financial Services Authority. Steve also has significant board experience, having served in both executive and non-executive director roles in his career.

Other principal appointments

None

Committees

Rem, Ris

Company Secretary

LOGO

Lawrence Dickinson

Age: 58

Appointed:

19 September 2002

Relevant skills and experience

Since joining Barclays as a graduate in 1979, Lawrence has worked in a number of roles, including as Chief of Staff to the CEO and as the Private Bank’s Chief Operating Officer. Lawrence is a member and Treasurer of the GC100, the Association of General Counsels and Company Secretaries of the FTSE100. In August 2015 Lawrence also became Group Chief of Staff to the Chairman.

Committee membership key
AudBoard Audit Committee
NomBoard Nominations Committee
RemBoard Remuneration Committee
RepBoard Reputation Committee
RisBoard Risk Committee
*Committee Chairman

4  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are

Group Executive Committee1

Group Executive Committeea

Biographies for Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, and Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, who are members of the Group Executive Committee, which is chaired by Jes Staley, can be found on pages 324 and 326.

     
LOGO

The board is responsible for determining the nature and extent of the principal risks it is willing to take in achieving its strategic objectives. The board should maintain sound risk management and internal control systems.

LOGOLOGO

Michael Harte

Bob Hoyt Risk management and internal control

Thomas King

Chief Operations andGroup GeneralChief Executive,

Technology Officer

  40

The board should establish formal and transparent arrangements for considering how they should apply the corporate reporting, risk management and internal control principles, and for maintaining an appropriate relationship with the company’s auditors.

Counsel

Board Audit Committee report

  11

Investment Bank

Accountability

40
LOGO

Remuneration

 Page LOGOLOGO

Executive directors’ remuneration should be designed to promote the long-term success of the company. Performance-related elements should be transparent, stretching and rigorously applied.

Robert Le Blanc Remuneration report

 51 

There should be a formal and transparent procedure for developing policy on executive remuneration and for fixing the remuneration packages of individual directors. No director should be involved in deciding his or her own remuneration.

 

Jonathan Moulds Remuneration report

 51

Relations with shareholders

 Page

There should be a dialogue with shareholders based on the mutual understanding of objectives. The board as a whole has responsibility for ensuring that a satisfactory dialogue with shareholders takes place.

 

Maria Ramos

Chief Risk Officer

Stakeholder engagement

42

The board should use general meetings to communicate with investors and to encourage their participation.

Stakeholder engagement

42

2    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Group ChiefChief Executive,

Operating Officer

Barclays Africa Group

     

Governance: Directors’ report

Chairman’s introduction

LOGOLOGOLOGO

Tristram Roberts

LOGO  

Michael RoemerThroughout this period of activity and change, your Board has been providing critical oversight of executive management to oversee the successful execution of the Group’s long term strategy.

 

Amer Sajed

Group HumanGroup Head ofInterim Chief
Resources DirectorComplianceExecutive,

LOGO

    

Barclaycard

LOGO    

Ashok Vaswani

    
    
Chief Executive,  

Dear Fellow Shareholders

Welcome to my 2017 corporate governance report. In my Chairman’s letter in the Strategic report, I highlighted the significant milestones and achievements for Barclays in 2017, including the further sell-down of our interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited, the closure of Barclays Non-Core, progress towards the establishment of our ring-fenced bank in 2018 as well as preparations for the UK’s departure from the EU. Throughout this period of activity and change, your Board has been providing critical oversight of executive management to oversee the successful execution of the Group’s long term strategy.

I firmly believe and have often said that the role of the Board is to create long term, sustainable value for our shareholders. In order to do this, we must have a robust corporate governance framework, providing systems of checks and controls to ensure accountability and drive better decision-making, and also policies and practices which ensure that the Board and its Committees operate effectively. Part of this is creating an environment which encourages a constructive relationship between the Board and executive management to enable an appropriate level of debate, challenge and support in the decision-making process. I am pleased to report that in 2017 your Board and executive management continued to demonstrate this dynamic as we worked together in executing strategy.

The impending changes to our Group corporate structure following structural reform has been a significant area of focus for the Board in 2017 and no doubt will continue to be at the forefront of our minds in 2018. After approving for appointment Sir Gerry Grimstone as the Chairman of Barclays International and Sir Ian Cheshire as the Chairman of Barclays UK, we worked closely with both of them to recruit high quality candidates to build the boards of those two entities. Our aim is to ensure that corporate governance within Barclays is in line with best practice for FTSE100 companies and as a Board we will work hard to ensure that our governance framework is always providing the

  
Personal and
Corporate Banking

strong foundation needed for effective management of the Group.

 

aExecutive

Board changes in 2017

Through the Board Nominations Committee, biographies can be foundwe are always considering whether we have the right mix of individuals on pages 327 to 329

1Thethe Board, providing an appropriate balance and diversity of skills, experience and perspectives. It is important that it is inherent within the composition of the Board that a broad range of perspectives and views are able to be provided which are representative of our customers, clients and employees as the foundations of our bank. In addition, we are also regularly thinking about Board succession planning and ensuring we have a strong pipeline of directors to steer the Group Executive Committee is correct as at 29 February 2016.

over the long-term. With this in mind, we brought on three new non-executive Directors in 2017: Sir Ian Cheshire, Matthew Lester and Mike Turner CBE, all of whom have significant board-level experience and bring specific sector and technical expertise to your Board. During 2017, Diane de Saint Victor and Steve Thieke, both non-executive Directors, left the Board and I thank them on behalf of the Board for their contributions and service.

Board diversity

The Board has a balanced and diverse range of skills and experience. All Board appointments are made on merit, in the context of the diversity of skills, experience, background and gender required to be effective.

Balance of non-executive Directors: executive Directors

 

LOGO

   1    Chairman  1
   2    Executive Directors  2
   3    Non-executive Directors  11
      
      
      
      
      
            

Gender balance

 

Male: Female

10:4

LengthWith the changes in 2017, our current female representation on the Board sits at 21%. Last year I reported that we set ourselves a Board diversity target of tenure

(Chairmanhaving 33% female representation on the Board by 2020. We are conscious that our gender diversity balance on the Board has fallen from 2016, but remain committed to achieving the target that we have set. Ensuring diversity of gender, as well as diversity in its other forms such as ethnicity, is built into our governance processes around Board composition and non-executive Directors)

0-3 years

9

LOGO

3-6 years

2

LOGO

>6 years

1

LOGO

Geographical mix

(Chairmansuccession planning, and non-executive Directors)

UK

5

LOGO

Continental Europe

1

LOGO

US

4

LOGO

Other

2

LOGOyou can read more about this in the Board Nominations Committee report on pages 33 to 37.

 

 

Industry/background experience

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)a

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    3


Financial Services

10

Political/regulatory contacts

9

Current/recent Chair/CEO

8

Accountancy/financial

2

International (US)

4

International (Europe)

4

International (Rest of the World)

4

Operations and Technology

1

Retail/marketing

1

Note

a Individual Directors may fall into one or more categories

 

Governance: Directors’ report

Chairman’s introduction

    

Conduct, culture and values

The Board also actively supports diversity throughout the Group. To attract and retain the best talent, we need to create an environment in which colleagues can thrive, develop and achieve their ambitions. I am very proud of the initiatives that we have at Barclays to encourage diversity and support inclusion among colleagues. Most recently, we launched a campaign aimed at increasing mental health awareness as Barclays aims to become a “mental health confident” organisation, and we are delighted that our Chief Internal Auditor, Sally Clark, is the Executive sponsor for “Be Well”, our well-being initiative. Everything we do at Barclays is underpinned by theBarclays Values and Purpose, and we must act with respect, transparency and integrity in our interactions with stakeholders and with each other to create the right culture, and encourage the right behaviours by colleagues, across the Group. With that framework, we can build and maintain the trust and confidence of our stakeholders and the market.

An important part of our strategy in relation to cultural progress and embedding ourBarclays Values is our citizenship strategy, the Shared Growth Ambition, where our long-term aim is to create and grow a collection of products, services and partnerships that improve the lives of people in the communities that we serve. In 2017 we launched Barclays’ “green bonds” as part of our support for the transition to a sustainable and low carbon economy. This was the first green bond issued by a UK bank using UK assets, and you can read more about this in Barclays’ Strategic report. Initiatives like this not only enable us to contribute meaningfully to society, but also enable us to better understand the environment in which we operate and our wider societal obligations, supporting the Board’s objective of delivering sustainable returns to shareholders.

 

LOGO Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  5You can read more about the
Shared Growth Ambition at
home.barclays/citizenship


Stakeholder views

WhatAs a Board we didare conscious of the impact that our business and decisions have on our customers, clients and employees as well as our wider societal impact. It is through an appreciation of our stakeholders that we can create a strategy aimed at delivering sustainable returns to our shareholders over the long term. The Board is supported in 2015this role by the Board Reputation Committee, which monitors key indicators across the areas of conduct, culture, citizenship and customer satisfaction, as well as Barclays’ reputation and events that occur which may impact the trust in our brand.

Chairman’s introduction

LOGO

The role of any board,Board receives information about, and engages with, our various stakeholders throughout the year and one of the most important dates in which I passionately believe,our calendar is to create and deliver long-term, sustainable value.”

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I joined Barclays in January 2015 as a non-executive Director and succeeded Sir David Walker as Chairman following the April 2015our Annual General Meeting, (AGM). I would like to extend my thanks and appreciation to Sir David for all that he did for Barclays during his tenure.

This is my first report to you as Chairman and is perhaps not quite the report I anticipated writing when I first took up this role. From 17 July to 30 November 2015, I served as Executive Chairman,which gives the Board having asked mean opportunity to take on this role on an interim basis following its decision to search for a new Group Chief Executive to succeed Antony Jenkins. I welcomemeet our shareholders and hear their views. During the flexibility afforded to us by the UK Corporate Governance Code that allowed us to operate under these revised governance arrangements for a short period of time and ensure continuity of focus and leadership. I was ably supported by my fellow Directors and by the Group Executive Committee during my period as Executive Chairman and thank them for their individual and collective guidance and input. I was delighted that, under the leadership of Sir Michael Rake, we were able to progress the search for a new Group Chief Executive quickly and welcome Jes Staley toyear the Board in December 2015, at which point I reverted to my roleis kept informed of non-executive Chairman. Jes has a track recordshareholder views through regular

updates from the Head of Investor Relations, as an outstanding leader and I believe he has the skills and experience to take Barclays forward to deliver improved shareholder returns and reclaim its positionwell as the UK’s pre-eminent bank. Jes and I are already enjoying a constructive and positive time working together.

The roleviews of employees through the results of the Board

The roleBarclaysYour View employee opinion surveys. Another key stakeholder of any board,Barclays is our regulators, and oneduring 2017 the Board invited representatives of our regulators to attend meetings to hear directly their views and expectations of Barclays. All of these views form the context in which I passionately believe, is to createBoard decision-making takes place and deliver long-term, sustainable value. Barclays is a standout brandfeeds into the considerations and has first-class retail, cards, commercial and investment banking businesses, but this has not translated into shareholder value in recent years. To deliver that value sustainably, we need to be much more focused on what is attractive, what we are good at, and where we are good at it. Put simply, we need to create a tangible and compelling reason for our shareholders to invest in us. This has drivendebate when determining the Board’s focus on three priorities during 2015: focus on our core segments and markets; generate shareholder value; and instil a high performance and customer culture, with strong ethical values.Group’s strategy.

Board appointments, performanceeffectiveness

To deliver our strategy and succession planning

Oneachieve the delivery of the key aspectslong-term, sustainable value for shareholders requires an effective Board. It is an important part of my role as Chairman to satisfy myself that the Board – both collectively and one which was especially important during my tenure as Executive Chairman, is to ensure that Barclays has an effective and cohesive, yet challenging Board,its individual members – operates effectively. Each year, we conduct a self-assessment of our performance with the optimum balanceaid of experience, skills, expertisean independent facilitator. As part of this process, I receive a report on the performance of our individual Directors, and personal attributes. I have sought to promote a culture of integrity and transparency, enabling Board debate that allows diverse perspectives and constructive challenge. Certainly, the Board did not shy away from difficult conversations and decisions during 2015, always with a focus on what was needed to drive forward execution of the strategy to generate sustainable value for Barclays and its shareholders.

The Barclays Board has undergone a significant amount of change in recent years and saw further changes during 2015. In addition to my own appointment, we welcomed Diane Schueneman to the Board in June 2015 and Jes Staley in December 2015. Diane brings valuable operations and technology experience to the Board. Sir David Walker and Sir John Sunderland left the Board in April 2015, following the AGM, with Antony Jenkins leaving the Board in July 2015. Finally, in October 2015, we announced that Sir Gerry Grimstone would succeed Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman andour non-executive Directors, led by our Senior Independent Director, with effect from 1 January 2016. Sir Michael retired fromhave the Board at the end of 2015 and I would like to thank him for his dedicated service and commitment over his eight years as a non-executive Director, including being Senior Independent Director since October 2011 and Deputy Chairman since July 2012. Sir Michael offers his own perspective on governance during 2015 on page 8.

6  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Chairman’s introduction

I am also delighted to report that we have met the Board diversity target we set back in 2012, which was that 25% of the Board by the end of 2015 should be women. We have now agreed a new diversity target, which is that 33% of the Board by the end of 2020 should be women, although our overriding principle is that all appointments to the Board are made on merit, taking into account the skills and experience that the Board needs now and may need in the future to support delivery of our strategy.

I am on record as saying that Barclays needs to reduce its internal bureaucracy by becoming leaner and more agile and consequently more effective and the Board and its processes are no exception to this. One of the steps I took on becoming Chairman wasopportunity to review the Board’s governance structure, with assistance from the Company Secretary, in order to simplify and streamline the principal Board Committees, in particular those Board Committees with responsibility for oversight of risk. As a result, the Board decided to disband the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee, with its responsibilities for oversight of enterprise-wide risk being assumed by the Board as a whole. We also concluded that the Board Financial Risk Committee should assume responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk, in addition to financial risk, leaving the Board Conduct, Operational and Reputational Risk Committee to focus on conduct and culture, reputational risk and citizenship. The Board Audit Committee continued to focus on the control aspects of operational risk. The Board Committees have subsequently been renamed to more accurately reflect their responsibilities.

As part of our discussions on Board and Board Committee succession planning, membership of each Committee was also reviewed to ensure that it had the right balance of skills, experience and perspectives and also to ensure that individual Directors were not being over-burdened by Committee responsibilities. Board Committees play a vital role in supporting the Board in its oversight of internal control and financial reporting, risk and risk management and reward and remuneration. Each of the Board Committee Chairmen report below on how their committees discharged their responsibilities during 2015 and the material matters each considered. The Board Nominations Committee has continued to play a role in succession planning for Group Executive Committee and senior leadership roles and, having had the opportunity during 2015, as Executive Chairman, to work even more closely with Group Executive Committee members, I was able to bring some fresh perspectives on the talent pipeline and talent management processes. More detail on the Board Nominations Committee’s work on succession planning can be found on page 28.

It is important to periodically obtain an independent perspective on the effectiveness of the Board and particularly so in a year when our conventional Board governance processes were temporarily revised. We have conducted an externally facilitated review of the effectiveness of the Board each year since 2004, and for 2015 we asked Independent Board Evaluation to facilitate that review.my performance. I am pleased to advisereport that the overall outcomeresults of the review wasfindings showed that your Board and its Committees are still operating effectively. There are, of course, areas to work on and challenges ahead once the Boardnew Group structure is operating effectively, althoughcrystallised following the stand-up of our new ring-fenced bank in 2018. Ensuring that there are some areas that could be enhanced. A report onis clear accountability and delineated responsibilities in the evaluation processnew structure, not just between boards but also between committees and between the boards and the outcomes mayexecutive team, will be found on pages 33 and 34.

Culture and values

People matter more than anything else in any business: it is a company’s people that make it great help it stand out from its competitors and make it an attractive proposition for customers and investors. As a Board, we are responsible for ensuring that Barclays’ people do things – the right things – in the right way by setting the tone from the top, by living Barclays’ culture and values in everything that we do and in the decisions we make, by holding the Group Executive Committee to account for the integrity of our Purpose and Values and by creating a culture in which doing the right thing is integral to the way we operate, globally. In an organisation as large and as complex as Barclays, that can be, and is, a challenge, but we are only too alive to the consequence of getting this wrong. I have personally endorsed our Code of Conduct, The Barclays Way, and the Board Reputation Committee has been monitoring, on behalf of the Board, the progress we are making to embed cultural change.

Shareholder and regulatory engagement

Meaningful engagement with our shareholders and regulators is a key pillar of our approach to corporate governance. We welcome open and constructive discussion with our stakeholders, particularly with regard to governance and succession planning, strategy and remuneration.focus for us in 2018. You can read more about how we have engaged with key stakeholders during 2015 in this report. I also hope to meet with many of our private shareholders at our AGM, which will be held on 28 April 2016. A significant activity during 2015 was our external audit tender, on which we engaged with a number of our major shareholders,the findings and you can read a report from Tim Breedon, who chaired our Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee,the review process undertaken for 2017 on page 18.36.

Looking ahead

2015 has not been without its challenges, but I believe that we now have2018 will be another pivotal year for Barclays with the leadership in place to take forward execution of our new Group corporate structure, and I look forward to working closely with the boards of Barclays UK and Barclays International to embed a strong framework to ensure clear, effective and consistent corporate governance. We will continue to work closely with executive management on improving performance within the Group’s businesses, without losing sight of the need to constantly be acting in line with the Barclays Values and Purpose to build on and retain the trust and confidence of our customers, clients, employees. Together with your Board, we remain focused on working hard to execute the Group’s strategy at pace,in order to deliver oncreate sustainable long-term value for our priorities and generate the long-term sustainable value that will benefit not only Barclays’ shareholders, but society at large.shareholders.

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman

2921 February 2018

Board diversity

The Board has a balanced and diverse range of skills and experience. All Board appointments are made on merit, in the context of the diversity of gender, skills, experience and background required to be effective.

Balance of non-executive Directors:

executive Directors

LOGO

Gender balance

LOGO

Length of tenure

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)

LOGO

1 0-3 years6
2 3-6 years4
3 6-9 years2
Industry experience

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)*

1 Financial Services12 (100%)
2 Political/regulatory experience12 (100%)
3 Current/recent Chair/CEO5 (42%)
4 Accountancy/auditing2 (17%)
5 Operations and Technology1 (8%)
6 Retail/marketing1 (8%)
International experience**

(Chairman and non-executive Directors)*

1 International (UK)10 (83%)
2 International (US)2 (17%)
3 International (Rest of the World)2 (17%)

Note

*Individual Directors may fall into one or more categories
**In relation to Board experience based on the location of the headquarters/registered office of a company

4    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are – Board of Directors

Board of Directorsa

Barclays understands the importance of having a Board with the right balance of skills, experience and diversity, and the composition of the Board is regularly reviewed by the Board Nominations Committee. The skills and experience of the current Directors and the value they bring to the Barclays Board are highlighted below.

LOGO

Full biographies can be accessed online via

www.home.barclays/investorrelations

LOGO

  John McFarlane

  Chairman

  Appointed:

  1 January 2015

Relevant skills and experience

John is Chairman of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC. He is a senior figure in global banking and financial services circles having spent over 40 years in the sector.

John is currently chairman of TheCityUK and a member of the Financial Services Trade and Investment Board and the European Financial Round Table. Other current non-executive directorships include Westfield Corporation, Old Oak Holdings Limited and The International Monetary Conference. John was previously chairman of Aviva plc where he oversaw a transformation of the company FirstGroup plc, and the Australian Bankers Association. He was also a non- executive director of The Royal Bank of Scotland, joining at the time of the UK government rescue. Prior to that he was CEO of Australia and New Zealand Banking Group Limited for 10 years, group executive director of Standard Chartered and head of Citibank in the UK.

Other current appointments

Member of Cranfield School of Management Advisory Board; Member of Institut International d’Etudes Bancaires; Member of the President’s Committee Confederation of British Industry

Committees

Nominations (Chairman)

LOGO

  Jes Staley

  Group Chief

  Executive

  Appointed:

  1 December 2015

Relevant skills and experience

Jes joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015. He has nearly four decades of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JP Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management and ultimately heading the company’s Global Investment Bank. Jes is currently a member of the Institute of International Finance and formerly served as managing partner at BlueMountain Capital. These roles have provided him with a vast experience in leadership and he brings a wealth of investment banking knowledge to Barclays’ Board.

Other current appointments

None

Committees

None

LOGO

  Sir Gerry Grimstone

  Deputy Chairman and   Senior

  Independent Director

  Appointed:

  1 January 2016

Relevant skills and experience

Sir Gerry brings to the Board a wealth of investment banking, financial services and commercial experience gained through his senior roles at Schroders and his various board positions. Sir Gerry has global business experience across the UK, Asia, the Middle East and the US. Sir Gerry has significant experience as a non-executive director and chairman. He is currently the chairman of Standard Life Aberdeen plc, independent non-executive board member of Deloitte NWE LLP, board adviser to the Abu Dhabi Commercial Bank and the lead non-executive at the Ministry of Defence.

Other current appointments

Financial Services Trade and Investment Board

Committees

Nominations, Reputation (Chairman)

LOGO

  Mike Ashley

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  18 September 2013

Relevant skills and experience

Mike has deep knowledge of auditing and associated regulatory issues, having worked at KPMG for over 20 years, where he was a partner. Mike was the lead engagement partner on the audits of large financial services groups including HSBC, Standard Chartered and the Bank of England. While at KPMG, Mike was Head of Quality and Risk Management for KPMG Europe LLP, responsible for the management of professional risks and quality control. He also held the role of KPMG UK’s Ethics Partner.

Other current appointments

ICAEW Ethics Standards Committee; International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants; Chairman, Government Internal Audit Agency; Charity Commission

Committees

Audit (Chairman), Nominations, Risk, Reputation

 

aFull Director biographies can be found on pages 286 to 288

LOGO

  Tim Breedon CBE

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  1 November 2012

Relevant skills and experience

Tim joined Barclays after a distinguished career with Legal & General, where, among other roles, he was the group chief executive until June 2012. Tim’s experience as a CEO enables him to provide challenge, advice and support to the executive on performance and decision-making.

Tim brings to the Board extensive financial services experience, knowledge of risk management and UK and EU regulation, as well as an understanding of the key issues for investors.

Other current appointments

Marie Curie; Chairman, Apax Global Alpha Limited; Chairman, The Northview Group

Committees

Audit, Nominations, Remuneration, Risk (Chairman)

LOGO

  Sir Ian Cheshire

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  3 April 2017

Relevant skills and experience

Sir Ian joined Barclays in April 2017 as a non-executive Director and the Chairman of Barclays UK. From his lengthy executive career including his time as Group Chief Executive of Kingfisher plc, Sir Ian brings to the Board substantial business experience particularly in the international retail sector, as well as experience in sustainability and environmental matters. He holds strong credentials in leadership as well as being highly regarded by the Government for his work with various Government departments.

Other current appointments

Business Disability Forum President’s Group; Debenhams plc; Maisons du monde; Menhaden plc; lead non-executive director for the Government

Committees

Nominations

LOGO

  Mary Francis CBE

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  1 October 2016

Relevant skills and experience

Mary has extensive board-level experience across a range of industries. She is a non-executive director of Swiss Re Group and Ensco plc and was formerly senior independent director of Centrica and a non-executive director of the Bank of England, Aviva and Alliance & Leicester. She held senior executive positions in the UK Treasury and Prime Minister’s Office and in the City as Director General of the Association of British Insurers. She brings to Barclays strong understanding of the interaction between public and private sectors and skills in strategic decision-making and all aspects of board governance.

Other current appointments

Advisory Panel of The Institute of Business Ethics

Committees

Remuneration, Reputation

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  7    5


WhatGovernance: Directors’ report

Who we did in 2015

Statement from Sir Michael Rake,

Deputy Chairman until 31 December 2015are – Board of Directors

    

    

 

LOGO

  Crawford Gillies

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  1 May 2014

LOGORelevant skills and experience

“In asking the Chairman to take on executive responsibilities…we were mindfulCrawford has extensive business and management experience, gained with Bain & Company and Standard Life plc. These roles have provided him with experience in strategic decision-making and knowledge of company strategy across various sectors and geographical locations.

Crawford has also held board and committee chairman positions during his career, notably as chairman of the need to ensure that our Board governance arrangements remained effective.”remuneration committees of Standard Life plc and MITIE Group PLC and is a senior independent director at SSE plc.

Other current appointments

Chairman, The Edrington Group Limited

Board allocation of time (%)Committees

          2015     2014  
LOGO  1   Strategy formulation and   56     47  
  implementation monitoring    
  2   Finance (incl. capital and liquidity)   11     17  
  3   Governance and Risk (incl. regulatory issues)   29     32  
  4   Other (incl. compensation)   4     4  
      
      
      
      
      

Dear Fellow Shareholders

In early July 2015, we announced the departure of Antony Jenkins as Group Chief Executive and the appointment of John McFarlane as Executive Chairman, pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive. The non-executive Directors had reflected long and hard on the issue of Group leadership and had concluded that new leadership, bringing a new set of skills, was required to accelerate the pace of execution going forward. These events were extensively reported at the time and, rather than revisit them, I would simply like to reiterate here the Board’s appreciation of Antony’s contribution at what was a critical period for Barclays.

In asking the Chairman to take on executive responsibilities, albeit for an interim period, we were mindful of the need to ensure that our Board governance arrangements remained effective and to maintain an appropriate balance of responsibilities on the Board and in the running of the Company until such time as a new Group Chief Executive was appointed. I wanted to give you my perspective on how we approached that and, in particular, how my role as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director evolved during this time.

First, as Executive Chairman, John McFarlane relinquished his membership of the principal Board Committees on which he served, to ensure they continued to be composed solely of non-executive Directors and without any impediment to their ability to provide independent and constructive challenge to executive management. Specifically, John stood down as Chairman of both the BoardAudit, Nominations, Committee and the Board Reputation Committee and I became Chairman of both committees in his place.

Secondly, I took primary responsibility for the search for a new Group Chief Executive, leading the Board Nominations Committee through this process. As the relationship between the Chairman and Group Chief Executive is pivotal to the effectiveness of the Board, John worked closely with me during this process and his insight and guidance on the skills and qualities we needed in the new Group Chief Executive was invaluable. During the search process, I reported regularly to my non-executive colleagues on the Board on progress and on potential candidates, ensuring that they had the opportunity to provide their views and feedback. You can read more about the search for our new Group Chief Executive on page 32. We announced in late October 2015 that Jes Staley would join the Board as Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. John subsequently resumed his chairmanship of the Board Nominations Committee, however, I continued to chair the Board Reputation Committee for the remainder of 2015.

Thirdly, my general interaction with our main stakeholders – our major shareholders and our regulators in the UK and US – increased during the period that John served as Executive Chairman.

Finally, I also maintained close contact with both John and members of senior management to ensure there were no significant issues arising from a governance perspective during this period.

2015 was my last year on the Barclays Board. I joined the Board in January 2008 and served through an eventful and difficult period for both Barclays and the financial services industry as a whole. Barclays announced in October 2015 that I would retire from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015 and I have spent time with my successor as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, Sir Gerry Grimstone, to ensure a smooth handover. I have been proud to serve on the Barclays Board and wish my fellow Directors continuing success for the future.

LOGO

Sir Michael Rake

Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director until

31 December 2015

Remuneration (Chairman)

 

8  |  
LOGO

  Reuben Jeffery III

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  16 July 2009

Relevant skills and experience

Reuben has extensive financial services experience, particularly within investment banking and wealth management, through his role as CEO and president of Rockefeller & Co. Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. and his former senior roles with Goldman Sachs, head of the European Financial Institutions Group. His various government roles in the US, including as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission and as undersecretary of state, provides Barclays’ Board with insight into the US political and regulatory environment.

Other current appointments

Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP; Financial Services Volunteer Corps; The Asia Foundation

Committees

Nominations, Risk

LOGO

  Matthew Lester

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  1 September 2017

Relevant skills and experience

Matthew joined Barclays as a non-executive Director in September 2017 and contributes strong financial management and regulatory experience to the Board, having held a number of senior finance roles across a range of business sectors, including financial services. Most recently was chief financial officer of Royal Mail Group. Matthew’s financial expertise enables him to analyse effectively complex reporting and risk management processes. He is currently a non-executive director of Man Group plc and Capita plc, where he also chairs the audit and risk committees of both companies.

Other current appointments

None

Committees

Audit, Risk

LOGO

  Tushar Morzaria

  Group Finance Director

  Appointed:

  15 October 2013

Relevant skills and experience

Tushar joined Barclays in 2013 having spent the previous four years in senior management roles with JP Morgan Chase, most recently as the CFO of its Corporate & Investment Bank. Throughout his time with JP Morgan he gained strategic financial management and regulatory relations experience. Since joining the Barclays Board he has been a driving influence on the Group’s cost reduction programme and managing the Group’s capital plan, particularly in response to Structural Reform.

Other current appointments

Member of the 100 Group main committee

Committees

None

LOGO

  Dambisa Moyo

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  1 May 2010

Relevant skills and experience

Dambisa is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, having completed a PhD in economics. Dambisa has a background in financial services and a wide knowledge and understanding of African economic, political and social issues, in addition to her experience as a director of companies with complex, global operations. She served as a non-executive director of SABMiller plc (2009-2016) and Seagate Technology (2015-2017).

Other current appointments

Chevron Corporation; Barrick Gold Corporation

Committees

Remuneration, Reputation

LOGO

  Diane Schueneman

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  25 June 2015

Relevant skills and experience

Diane joined Barclays after an extensive career at Merrill Lynch, holding a variety of senior roles, including responsibility for banking, brokerage services and technology provided to the company’s retail and middle market clients, and latterly for IT, operations and client services worldwide. She brings a wealth of experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. Diane is a member of the board of Barclays US LLC, Barclays’ US intermediate holding company and chair of Barclays Services Limited.

Other current appointments

None

Committees

Audit, Risk

LOGO

  Mike Turner CBE

  Non-executive

  Appointed:

  1 January 2018

Relevant skills and experience

Mike has considerable business and board level experience gained from his lengthy career with BAE Systems PLC where he was CEO as well as his non-executive positions. He has a strong commercial background and experience in strategy and operational performance culture. Mike brings significant leadership and strategic oversight experience to the Board, particularly from his roles as chairman of Babcock International Group PLC and GKN Plc.

Other current appointments

Member of the UK Government’s Apprenticeship Ambassadors Network

Committees

Reputation

Company Secretary

LOGO

  Stephen Shapiro

  Appointed:

  1 November 2017

Relevant skills and experience

Stephen was appointed Company Secretary in November 2017 having previously served as the Group Company Secretary and Deputy General Counsel of SABMiller plc. Prior to this, he practised law as a partner in a law firm in South Africa, and subsequently in the UK. Stephen has extensive experience in corporate governance, legal, regulatory and compliance matters. Stephen has also previously served as Chairman of the ICC UK’s Committee on Anti-Corruption as well as on working groups of the GC100, providing business input into key areas of legislative and policy reform.

6    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Directors’ report

Who we are – Group Executive Committee

Group Executive Committeea

LOGO

Biographies for Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, and Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, who are members of the Group Executive Committee, which is chaired by Jes Staley, can be found on pages 5 and 6.

LOGO

  Paul Compton

  Group Chief Operating   Officer

LOGO

  Bob Hoyt

  Group General Counsel

LOGO

  Laura Padovani

  Interim Group Chief   Compliance Officer

LOGO

  Tristram Roberts

  Group Human   Resources Director

Group Executive Committee meetings are also attended on a regular basis by the Chief Internal Auditor, Sally Clark, and by an ex-officio member, drawn from senior management. The current ex-officio member is Barry Rodrigues, Head of Barclaycard International.

LOGO

  Tim Throsby

  President, Barclays

  International and Chief

  Executive Officer,

  Corporate and

  Investment Bank

LOGO

  Ashok Vaswani

  CEO, Barclays UK

LOGO

  C S Venkatakrishnan

  Chief Risk Officer

aExecutive Committee biographies can be found on pages 288 to 289

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    7


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152017

Board Audit Committee report

 

 

 

LOGOThe Role of the Board

The Board of Directors is responsible for promoting the highest standards of corporate governance in Barclays.

LOGO

Further details about our corporate governance framework, policies and

Board responsibilities can be found online at home.barclays/corporategovernance

We act in a way that we consider promotes the success of Barclays for the benefit of shareholders as a whole, and are accountable to the shareholders for creating and delivering sustainable value. It is our responsibility as the Board to ensure that management not only delivers on short-term objectives, but promotes the long-term growth of Barclays. Our corporate governance framework embeds what we believe are the right culture, values and behaviours throughout the Group and supports our role in determining strategic objectives and policies.

In addition to setting strategy and overseeing its implementation, we are also responsible for ensuring that management maintains an effective system of internal control. An effective system of internal control should provide assurance of effective and efficient operations, internal financial controls and compliance with law and regulation. In meeting this responsibility, we consider what is appropriate for the Group’s business and

reputation, the materiality of financial and other risks and the relevant costs and benefits of implementing controls. See page 40 for further details on those systems of controls.

The Board is the decision-making body for matters that, owing to their strategic, financial or reputational implications or consequences, are considered significant to the Group. A formal schedule of powers reserved to the Board ensures that our control of these key decisions is maintained. A summary of the matters reserved to the Board can be found athome.barclays/corporategovernance. It includes the approval of appointments to the Board, Barclays’ strategy, financial statements, capital expenditure and any major acquisitions, mergers or disposals.

Board Committees

The main Board Committees are the Board Audit Committee, the Board Nominations Committee, the Board Remuneration Committee, the Board Reputation Committee

and the Board Risk Committee. Pursuant to authority granted under our Articles of Association, each Board Committee has had specific responsibilities delegated to it by the Board. Further information on the role and activities of each of the Board Committees can be found in this report on pages 11 to 37 and in their individual terms of reference, which have been approved by the Board and are available athome.barclays/corporategovernance.

In addition, the Regulatory Investigations Committee was formed in 2012 and focused on providing Board-level oversight of regulatory investigations. In 2017, this Committee was disbanded with residual matters being brought under the oversight of the Board Audit Committee or falling directly under the Board’s oversight, as appropriate.

You can read more about what the Board and each of the Board Committees did during 2017 on the following pages.

LOGO

8    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Strategic goalsPrincipal risks

Strategy formulation and monitoring

Debated and provided input to management on the formulation of overall Group strategy, and reflected on the Group strategy with longer term views on what could be done to accelerate returns and build capital. The topics covered include:LOGOLOGO

    potential growth opportunities, and key trends and risks, for Barclays UK and Barclays International

     constraints and risks to strategy execution, including economic assumptions, expected regulatory requirements on capital and solvency ratios, anticipated changes to accounting rules including IFRS 9, investor expectations, and potential impacts for clients and customers

    a strategic approach to costs optimisation, including analysing the impact on costs of different structural initiatives such as product redesign and automation

    impact of continuing legacy conduct issues on capital requirements and profit targets

    options for the location of Barclays’ operations in Europe, driven by the EU Referendum result.

Discussed regular updates from the Group Chief Executive on the progress being made against the Group’s 2017 execution priorities and capital targets, received insights on stakeholder, employee and cultural matters (including results from employee opinion surveys), and updates on items of focus for the Group Executive Committee.LOGOLOGO
Considered the strategy, and assessed the progress of execution of strategy, in the businesses within each of Barclays UK and Barclays International.LOGOLOGO
Monitored the progress of the sell down of the Group’s remaining interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited.LOGOLOGO
Monitored the progress of the rundown and subsequent closure of Barclays Non-Core.LOGOLOGO
Monitored the progress of the Group’s execution of its structural reform programme – see the case study on page 10 for further details.LOGOLOGO
Monitored the potential implications of the UK’s preparations to leave the EU following the EU Referendum result; approved and monitored progress of the expansion of Barclays Bank Ireland’s operations in preparation for Brexit – see the case study on page 10 for further details.LOGOLOGO

Finance, including capital and liquidity

Debated and approved the Group’s Medium Term Plan for 2017-2019.LOGOLOGO
Regularly assessed financial performance of the Group and its main businesses through reports from the Group Finance Director.LOGOLOGO
Reviewed and approved Barclays’ financial results prior to publication, including approving final and interim dividends.LOGOLOGO
Discussed market and investor reaction to Barclays’ strategic and financial results announcements, with insights provided by the Head of Investor Relations.LOGOLOGO
Provided input, guidance and advice to senior management on the high-level shape of Barclays’ 2018-2020 Medium Term Plan and subsequently approved the final plan.LOGOLOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    9


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board report

Strategic goalsPrincipal risks

Governance and risk, including regulatory issues

Debated and approved the 2017 risk appetite for the Barclays Group.LOGOLOGO
Regularly assessed Barclays’ overall risk profile and emerging risk themes, hearing directly from the Chief Risk Officer and the Chairman of the Board Risk Committee.LOGOLOGO
Received reports on Barclays’ operational and technology capability, including specific updates on cyber risk capability and the strategy for technology and infrastructure services.LOGOLOGO
Approved the Group’s 2017 Recovery Plan and US Resolution Plan.LOGOLOGO
Invited representatives of Barclays’ UK and US regulators to meetings to enable the Board to hear first-hand about regulatory expectations and their specific views on Barclays.LOGOLOGO
Considered and debated proposals for the establishment of a programme to further enhance Barclays’ management information framework across all businesses and entities within the Group.LOGOLOGO
Discussed and received regular updates directly from the Chief Controls Officer on the Group’s internal controls and framework, and monitored progress of the Barclays Internal Control Enhancement Plan (the programme for remediation of identified risk and control issues).LOGOLOGO
Considered regular updates from the Group General Counsel on the legal and regulatory risks and issues facing Barclays –refer to note 29 in the financial statements.LOGOLOGO
Considered matters relating to Board succession and approved appointments to the Board and Board Committees.
Received and considered regular updates from the Chairmen of the Board’s principal Board Committees on the matters discussed at Board Committee meetings. See the reports of each Board Committee set out on the following pages for further details.LOGOLOGO
Received regular updates (following the establishment of each respective board) from the Chairs of the Barclays UK and Barclays International divisional boards and the Group Service Company.LOGOLOGO
Considered updates on views of major shareholders, particularly in the period leading up to the 2017 Annual General Meeting.LOGOLOGO
Discussed the Board and Committee governance framework in the context of structural reform, and considered significant developments in UK corporate governance and other corporate governance matters.
Considered the results of the 2016 Board effectiveness review and proposed action plan, and considered the process for and findings of the 2017 Board effectiveness review. See page36 for further details of this process and the findings for 2017.LOGOLOGO
Other, including compensation
Considered progress on Barclays’ talent and succession planning (and hosted receptions for key talent within the Group), and received updates on the Bank’s diversity and inclusion initiatives, including from the Chairman of the Board Nominations Committee.LOGOLOGO
Considered and approved the 2017 incentive funding pools for the Group and allocation among each business and function – see the Remuneration report on pages51 to 74 for further details.LOGOLOGO

Governance in Action – Structural reform and Brexit

Execution of structural reform

The execution of our structural reform programme was a significant focus for the Group in 2017 as we move towards the legal entity stand up of our ring-fenced bank in 2018. Building on from the work carried out in 2016, the Board continued to closely monitor and evaluate progress on the execution of the programme in 2017. Specific matters addressed by the Board included the following:

 

“We have continued to play a role in changing  overseeing the culture and building a greater senseestablishment of personal accountability, not just at a senior level within the Group but throughout the organisation, for maintaining the control environment.”Service Company, which was launched on 1 September 2017

 

  monitoring the stakeholder communications plan (including, in particular, the communications plan for customers and employees)

  considering regular updates on migrating sort codes with a focus on any potential impact on customers and clients

  overseeing and approving various transfers of assets and liabilities among Barclays Group entities including establishing a Committee to provide appropriate Board-level oversight of the processes involved

  with the support of the Board Nominations Committee, debating the composition of, and appointments to each of, the boards of Barclays UK, Barclays International and the Group Service Company and discussing the appropriate governance arrangements for the new Group structure.

Preparations for Brexit

Another area of focus for the Board was preparations for the impact of the UK’s exit from the EU. Barclays has created an internal programme specifically in relation to the planning and preparation for Brexit. The Board debated potential EU hubs for Barclays’

European operations and decided to pursue expansion in Ireland where we have been operating for over 40 years and have an existing banking licence held by Barclays

Bank Ireland. Specific matters considered by the Board included debating the feasibility of a significant expansion of Barclays Bank Ireland’s operations, the transfer of capital and resources to Barclays Bank Ireland and assessing the progress being made with applications for the necessary regulatory licensing requirements with the relevant authorities.

The successful completion of the Group’s structural reform programme and further progress on our Brexit plans will continue to be areas of focus for the Board in 2018.

10    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Audit Committee report

LOGO

Solid progress has been made in turning the controls enhancement programme into a ‘business as usual’

activity, with an emphasis on achieving sustainable

progress.

LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

MyIn writing this report for 2014 emphasisedI have reflected on how Barclays has been working to embed the rolesignificant strategic changes put in place during 2016 while responding to new challenges driven by the Committee has in ensuring that Barclays operates with a strong control environment and,external landscape, in particular the delivery of Structural Reform and preparation for Brexit.

As I reported in 2017, the Committee continues to consider a critical part of its role itto be ensuring that the commitment to strengthening Barclays’ control environment is playingmaintained throughout this transformational period. My Committee colleagues and I have been encouraged by the increased rigour applied to oversight of the Group control environment following the creation of the Chief Controls Office at the end of 2016. This has given the Committee greater clarity and transparency regarding thematic control environment issues impacting the Group, and has helped to highlight areas of the business where there may be a concentration of issues and where focus on remediation is required. Regular updates on the overall control environment framework have also continued to be provided to the Board over the course of the year, underlining the importance that the Board of Barclays places on this programme of activity.

Solid progress has been made in changingturning the culturecontrols enhancement programme into a ‘business as usual’ activity, with an emphasis on achieving sustainable progress. The Committee has observed heightened focus and building a greater senseattention across the organisation on the importance of personal accountability, not just at ahaving robust processes in place across the business to self-identify controls issues and ensure that there are effective remediation plans in place for which senior levelmanagement are accountable. The embedding of the Chief Controls Office as part of the first line of management within the Group but throughoutorganisation has also been helpful in delineating more clearly for the organisation for maintaining that control environment. During 2015, with the agreementrespective roles of the Boardsecond and third lines of defence. The controls office has taken over the Boardco-ordination of the Risk Committee, the Committee assumed primary responsibility for assessing and tracking the progress of embedding the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), which is the way in which Barclays approaches enterprise risk managementControl Self-Assessment process and is the bedrock of our management of internal risk and control. In particular, the Committee was keenthis will

continue to find ways in which the ERMF could be linked to the Group’s assessment of Management’s Control Approach (MCA), both to drive the right behaviours and provide a more objective method of assessing MCA. In terms of specific control issues, an area of focus forin 2018 as management develops a more detailed, granular self-assessment process which should assist in proactively identifying controls which require remediation. Further details may be found in the Risk Management and Internal Control section on page 40.

The Committee during 2015 was operationshas continued to engage with senior management regarding areas of controls weaknesses in their businesses and technology, where there arehas received presentations from a number of material control issuesdifferent areas of the Group is addressing. organisation on the actions taken to address unsatisfactory audit reports.

In assessing control issues for disclosure in the Annual Report, the Committee has appliedcontinued to apply similar definitions to those used for assessing internal financial controls for the purposes of Sarbanes-Oxley and has concludedSarbanes-Oxley. The conclusion we have reached is that there are no control issues that are considered to be a material weakness, which would therefore merit specific disclosure. Further

The Committee has continued to oversee the performance and effectiveness of internal and external audit, the main independent assurance mechanisms that serve to protect shareholders’ interests.

I continue to hold regular meetings with the Chief Internal Auditor and members of her senior management team to ensure I am aware of current work programmes and any emerging issues. I also agreed the Chief Internal Auditor’s objectives and the outcomes of her performance assessment and remuneration. The Committee also held a networking event with Barclays Internal Audit (BIA) during 2017, enabling Committee members to meet on a less formal basis with senior members of the BIA management team.

During 2017, the Committee continued to monitor closely the implementation of the action plan to address the recommendations arising from the review undertaken by the PRA of BIA to increase its effectiveness.

The Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors requires an independent external review of

internal audit functions to be carried out at least every five years and during 2017, the Committee commissioned an independent external quality assessment of BIA, further details of which may be found on page 19. The Committee was satisfied with the conclusions drawn in the Risk Management and Internal Control section on page 39.report, while noting that there were a number of areas for potential development. The Committee alsoconsidered that the need for a period of stability and consolidation within BIA would be particularly important to embedding existing initiatives and the Committee will continue to monitor this and other recommendations during 2018. In preparation for Structural Reform, BIA has aligned its audit planning and reporting to the new legal entity structure.

The Committee continued to addressexercise its responsibility for ensuring the significantintegrity of Barclays’ published financial information by debating and challenging the critical judgements and estimates made by management. The exercise of appropriate judgement in preparing the financial statements is critical in ensuring that needBarclays reports to be madeits shareholders in connection witha fair, balanced and transparent way. During the course of 2017, the Committee oversaw Barclays’ transition to KPMG as Barclays’ statutory auditor which was approved by shareholders at the 2017 annual general meeting. The lead audit partner is Guy Bainbridge who has held this role since KPMG’s appointment as the Group’s auditor. KPMG has brought fresh challenge and insight not only on accounting judgements and policies but also on financial statements, primarily those relating to conduct and litigation provisions andcontrols which the valuations of specific financial instruments, derivatives assets and portfolios, particularly those where there is a lack of observable market data. MoreCommittee has found valuable. The report that follows sets out details of the material matters addressedconsidered by the Committee are givensince my last report. One of the key developments in accounting policy in 2017 has been Barclays’ preparation for the report below.implementation of the IFRS 9 impairment standard on 1 January 2018. The Committee also spent time carefully consideringreviewed the requirements ofguidance note to non-executive Directors from the new viability statementPRA in relation to IFRS 9 implementation and confirmedwas comfortable that as indicated in last year’s report, three years was the appropriate period, as it accorded withareas highlighted by the Group’s Medium Term Plan.PRA were being

A significant activity for the Committee during 2015 was the external audit tender, which was conducted by an Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, chaired by Tim Breedon. As I was until 2013 a partner of KPMG, one of the bidding audit firms, I took no part in the external audit tender process, other than providing input to its initial design. Tim Breedon reports separately on the external audit tender process below.

  

The role of Board Audit Committee Chairman continues to be a full and busy one. During 2015, I had significant interaction with our regulators, meeting with representatives from our UK and US regulators and also participating in trilateral meetings with our auditors and UK regulators. I also took the opportunity to liaise with my fellow audit committee chairmen in other financial services companies, to discuss common issues and share practice, and I met with a group of investors to discuss disclosure issues, in particular with regard to realised profits. I carried on with my practice of meeting with representatives from senior management to discuss specific issues, such as customer complaints or cyber risk, in addition to my regular meetings with the Group Finance Director and Chief Internal Auditor. I also visited Barclays Africa, attending the African chairmen’s conference. I held regular private meetings with my fellow Committee members ahead of Committee meetings to ensure I had a good sense of the matters that concerned them most and likewise met regularly with the lead audit partner of the external auditor.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2015 was evaluated as part of the independently facilitated Board effectiveness review and I am pleased to report that the outcomes were positive. The Committee was regarded as effective and considered to be very thorough and detailed. The review commented on the continuing need to balance the demands of a busy agenda and programme of work with the need to cover issues in appropriate detail. We will also be seeking to strengthen the level of technical accounting experience on the Committee. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and 34.

Looking ahead

Barclays continues to face an unprecedented level of change, driven by both internal and external factors and it will be critical to ensure that a culture of strong control is maintained as the Group implements its strategy and also as it positions itself for structural reform. The Committee will continue to seek to ensure that management maintains its focus on building personal accountability for upholding a strong and effective control environment and is supportive of the pilot programme being implemented in 2016 that will require certain business personnel to spend time working in a control function before being promoted. 2016 will also see the Committee focus on the transition to a new auditor, KPMG, who will become Barclays auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year. We will be seeking to ensure that the quality of the audit performed by the existing auditor, PwC, is maintained until the end of its tenure and that KPMG has completed the steps it needs to undertake to ensure it is fully independent of Barclays’ and has a strong understanding of the business before it takes up office.

LOGO

Mike Ashley

Chairman, Board Audit Committee

29 February 2016

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  9    11


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Audit Committee report

    

 

 

addressed. Further details of the Committee’s consideration of the judgements and financial impacts relating to the implementation of the new standard may be found in the ‘Governance in Action’ section of the Committee report on page 21.

I have continued to hold the role of Whistleblower’s Champion, a position required by the FCA to be held at Board level. As champion, I continue to have specific responsibility for the integrity, independence and effectiveness of the Barclays’ policies and procedures on whistleblowing, including the procedures for protecting employees who raise concerns from detrimental treatment. As Whistleblower’s Champion and as Chairman of the Committee, I have been involved in overseeing the implementation of the suggested enhancements following the benchmarking review undertaken in 2017 at the request of the Board of Barclays.

Responsibility for the oversight of litigation, investigation and competition matters has transitioned to the Committee, in line with the Committee’s existing responsibility for the oversight of matters related to disclosure and provisioning. The Committee has received regular updates on these matters from the Group General Counsel, with matters of particular significance to the Group continuing to be subject to oversight by the Board of Barclays.

I attended meetings of the IHC audit committee to gain a first-hand insight into the issues being addressed by that committee and have held regular meetings with the chairmen elect of the Barclays UK and Barclays International audit committees. The chairmen or chairmen elect of all those entities have attended at least one Committee meeting during 2017. I also met frequently with other members of senior management, including the Group Finance Director, and continued my engagement with Barclays’ regulators both in the UK and US. I have reported regularly on the activities of the Committee to the Board of Barclays.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2017 was assessed as part of an internal committee effectiveness review. The conclusion of my Board colleagues and standing attendees at Committee meetings was that the Committee is regarded as operating effectively and the Board takes assurance from the quality of the Committee’s work. It is considered well constituted with the right balance of skills and experience. The main area identified for improvement was the need to manage a demanding agenda efficiently so that time is allocated to the most significant items for discussion.

Last year’s review commented on the need to strengthen the depth of financial and accounting expertise on the Committee via new appointments, which I am pleased was addressed through the appointment of Matthew Lester to the Committee when he joined the Board of Barclays in September 2017. The review also highlighted the need to ensure that the way in which the Committee works with the Board Reputation and Board Risk Committees continues to capture all significant issues effectively while minimising any overlap. I continued to work closely with my fellow Board Committee chairmen during 2017, particularly with the Board Risk Committee chairman in order to clarify the responsibility of the respective committees for operational risk issues, which each Committee has a role in overseeing.

You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on page 36.

Looking ahead

In 2018, in addition to overseeing management’s progress in continuing to embed the role of the Chief Controls Office and the Group’s management of controls remediation, the Committee will be focusing on some significant accounting issues, including in particular, monitoring the impact of IFRS 9 and the resultant disclosures. The Committee is looking forward to working with the audit committees of Barclays UK and Barclays International as we discharge our responsibilities and focus on ensuring efficient and effective coverage of the business under the new group structure. We have already agreed an allocation of responsibilities, and embedding the necessary reporting and information flows across the three audit committees to ensure all of them can discharge their responsibilities efficiently will be a key area of focus.

Mike Ashley

Chairman, Board Audit Committee

21 February 2018

Committee allocation of time (%)

LOGO

      2017    2016
1 Control issues    11*        23
2 Business control environment    15        19
3 Financial results    33        36
4 Internal audit matters     25        11
5 External audit matters      8          6
6 

Other

(incl governance

and compliance)

      8          4

*The time allocation in 2017 has reduced following the streamlining of the reporting of control issues through the Chief Controls Office.
The increased time allocation to internal audit matters in 2017 reflects the role of the Committee in (i) overseeing the recommendations arising from the review undertaken by the PRA of Barclays Internal Audit to increase its effectiveness, and (ii) the independent external quality assessment of Barclays Internal Audit which was commissioned by the Committee in 2017.

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. Dambisa Moyo retired fromDirectors, with membership designed to provide the Committee atbreadth of financial expertise and commercial acumen it needs to fulfil its responsibilities. Its members as a whole have experience of the end of August 2015 following a review of Board Committee compositionbanking and size by the Board, which resultedfinancial services sector in the membership of each Board Committee being refreshed. Diane Schueneman was appointedaddition to the Committee with effect from 1 March 2016.general management and commercial experience. Mike Ashley, who is the designated financial expert on the Committee for the purposes of the US Sarbanes-Oxley Act. Although each memberAct, is a former audit partner who during his executive career acted as lead engagement partner on the audits of the Committee has financial and/ora number of large financial services experience,groups. Following the Board has determinedBoard’s finding that the Committee would benefit fromcould be strengthened by the appointment of an additional member with direct accounting and auditing experience, and consideration is being given to further appointmentsMatthew Lester was appointed to the Board and Committee in order to deepen its expertise in these areas.with effect from 1 September 2017. During his executive career, Matthew held a number of senior finance roles across a range of business sectors, including financial services, and most recently was the Chief Financial Officer of Royal Mail Group. You can find more details of the experience of Committee members in their biographies on pages 35 and 4.6.

The Committee met 10 times in 20152017 and the chart on page 17above shows how it allocated its time. Meetings are generally arranged well in advance and are scheduled in line with Barclays’ financial reporting timetable. One additional meeting was held purelyarranged to consider presentations from the three audit firms biddingselect an appropriate service provider for the external audit tenderindependent review of Barclays Internal Audit and was not attended by Mike Ashley.to undertake an early review of particular issues relevant to the financial statements. Committee meetings were attended by management, including as required the Group

12    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Controls Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Chief Operating Officer, General Counsel and Head of Compliance, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions. The lead audit partner of theKPMG (the Group’s external auditorauditor), Guy Bainbridge, attended all Committee meetings except the meeting to evaluate the external audit tender proposals, and thesince January 2017. The Committee held a number of private sessions with each of the Chief Internal Auditor or the lead audit partner, which were not attended by management. The lead audit partner of PwC, the Group’s previous external auditor, attended meetings until the end of February 2017 to deliver its final audit report to the Committee on the 2016 financial statements before PwC resigned as the Group’s statutory auditor.

 

Member Meetings attended/eligible to attend
Mike Ashley* 9/10
Tim Breedon10/10
Crawford Gillies10/10
Dambisa Moyo (to 31 August 2015)6/7
Diane de Saint Victor7/10

*Did not attend the meeting that considered the appointment of a new statutory auditor given that KPMG, where until 2013 he was a partner, was one of the bidding audit firms.
Unable to attend certain meetings owing to prior business commitments. Input was provided to the Committee Chairman prior to the meeting.

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee is responsible for:

§assessing the integrity of the Group’s financial reporting and satisfying itself that any significant financial judgements made by management are sound

§evaluating the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls, including internal financial controls and

§scrutinising the activities and performance of the internal and external auditors, including monitoring their independence and objectivity.

LOGO

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

10  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below.

Significant financial statement reporting issues

Assumptions and estimates or judgements are an unavoidable and significant part of the financial reporting process and are evaluated carefully by the Committee ahead of the publication of Barclays’ results announcements. The Committee examined in detail the main judgements and assumptions made by management, any sensitivity analyses performed and the conclusions drawn from the available information and evidence, with the main areas of focus during the year set out below. Where appropriate, the Committee sought input and guidance from the external auditor and welcomed its challenge on specific matters. In addition to these main areas of focus, the Committee also covered matters relating to Barclays’ pension scheme, taxation and accounting policy choices.

Area of focusReporting issueRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Conduct provisionsMike Ashley

(see Note 27 to the financial statements).

Barclays makes certain assumptions and estimates, analysis of which underpins provisions made for the costs of customer redress, such as for Payment Protection Insurance (PPI), Packaged Bank Accounts (PBA) and rates provided to certain customers on foreign exchange transactions.

In debating Barclays’ financial results statements, the Committee examined the provisions held for the costs of customer redress.

In respect of PPI, the Committee:

§  analysed the judgements and estimates with regard to the PPI provision, taking into account estimated overturn rates, the estimation policy on missing data, and complaints trend data

§  evaluated Financial Ombudsman Service overturn rates and trends, provisions utilisation, latest flow forecasts and how reasonable high and low end scenarios had been determined in order to assess the range of reasonable possible future costs

§  debated proposed additional provisions and whether the analysis performed by management was consistent with prior periods

§  assessed the Group’s ability to forecast trends in PPI complaints, discussing the levels of uncertainty in the projections

§  debated the potential range of outcomes that might arise from the Plevin case (the 2014 UK Supreme Court ruling in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Ltd) and the potential impact on the future range of provisions arising from the proposed timebar on claims.

The Committee agreed that an additional provision of £150m should be taken at the first quarter but requested a full review of forecasts for PPI redress for the second quarter 2015. Having assessed the outputs of that review, it agreed to increase the provision at the half year by £600m. Following the review at the third quarter, the Committee concluded that no additional provisions were required but asked management to conduct further review and analysis for the 2015 year end to ensure that provisions were within an acceptable range. In deliberating the analyses presented by management in connection with the 2015 full year results, and considering in particular the potential impact resulting from the FCA’s consultation on introducing a time limit for claims and addressing the Plevin case, the Committee agreed with management’s proposal to increase the provision at the year end by £1,450m. The Committee and management will continue to monitor closely any changes in customer or claims management companies’ behaviour in light of the Plevin case and the proposed timebar.
With regard to PBA redress, the Committee:

The Committee endorsed management’s recommendation that an expense of £282m for PBA should be provided for in the first half and agreed it should be disclosed as a separate item in the interim results. Having examined claims trend data, it concluded that no further provisions were required during 2015.

The Committee agreed with the proposal to make a provision of £290m in the third quarter and that this provision should be separately disclosed. The remediation is still at an early stage and the Committee noted that there were no significant developments in the fourth quarter. The Committee therefore agreed that no adjustment was required in the provision at the end of 2015.

§  debated the practice of providing for future costs where persistent levels of complaints are received

§  assessed PBA claims experience throughout 2015, examining the level of provisions against forecast volumes and actual claims experience

§  evaluated management’s analysis of complaint levels and trends and the outputs of product reviews.

In relation to redress to certain customers regarding rates provided on foreign exchange transactions, the Committee:

§  examined the results of the internal review conducted by management on foreign exchange transactions

§  evaluated the Group’s proposal for calculating remediation for the customers affected.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  11


Area of focusReporting issueRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Legal, competition and regulatory provisions

(see Notes 27 and 29 to the financial statements).

Barclays makes judgements in respect of provisions for legal, competition and regulatory matters.

§  Evaluated advice on the status of current legal, competition and regulatory matters.

§  Assessed management’s judgements and estimates of the levels of provisions to be taken and the adequacy of those provisions, based on available information and evidence.

The Committee discussed provisions and utilisation for Foreign Exchange and ISDAFix litigation and agreed that any residual provision should be retained and not released in the first half.

Having reviewed the information available to determine what could be reliably estimated, the Committee agreed that the provision at the full year should be set at £1,237m for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange.

Further information may be found on pages 266 and 267.

Valuations

(see Notes 13 to 18 to the financial statements).

Barclays exercises judgement in the valuation and disclosure of financial instruments, derivative assets and certain portfolios, particularly where quoted market prices are not available, in particular the Group’s Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio, which during 2015 represented the most material judgement in view of widening credit spreads on social housing bonds and budget changes impacting social housing portfolios.

§  Debated fair value balance sheet items. This included evaluating a report from the Valuations Committee, analysing social housing bonds credit spread performance and debating the appropriateness of the valuation model.

§  Assessed how the ESHLA portfolio might be accounted for under IFRS 9.

§  Debated uncollateralised derivatives and differences in pricing ranges and the potential impact on the Group’s financial statements.

§  Examined the significant valuation disparity between the Group and a counterparty in relation to a specific long-dated derivative portfolio.

The Committee concluded that there should be no change to the fair value approach. It also agreed with management’s recommendation that an additional prudential valuation adjustment of £300m should be made in respect of the ESHLA portfolio, reflecting an increase in credit uncertainty for social housing sector loans arising from some widening of social housing bond credit spreads.

The Committee noted that despite attempts by the front office trading team, the Group Finance Director and the Chairman of the Committee, it had not proved possible to gain a complete understanding of the causes of the valuation disparity from the relevant counterparty. Nonetheless, a significant element was understandable in light of the different underlying positions held and the Committee took further comfort from a third party valuation provided in relation to ongoing consideration of restructuring the trades. The Committee concluded that the Group’s valuation methodology was appropriate and also noted that the Group was protected against counterparty credit risk through a collateral escrow arrangement.

Impairment

(see Note 7 to the financial statements).

Where appropriate, Barclays models potential impairment performance, allowing for certain assumptions and sensitivities, to agree allowances for credit impairment, including agreeing the timing of the recognition of any impairment and estimating the size, particularly where forbearance has been granted.

§  Assessed impairment experience against forecast and whether impairment provisions were appropriate.

§  Evaluated the results of the review and stress tests conducted by management of the Group’s exposures to the oil and gas sector in light of the reduction in oil prices.

§  Debated management’s analysis of the emergence and outturn periods for the Barclaycard portfolios.

The Committee agreed with the proposed adjustments to emergence and outcome periods and determined that the allowances for credit impairment on loans and advances were appropriate and adequately supported by model outputs.

In relation to the oil and gas sector, the Committee determined that the proposed provisions were appropriate but noted that further stress was possible in the event of a prolonged period of lower oil prices.

12  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

Area of focusReporting issueRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Going concern

(see page 45 for further information).

Barclays is required to confirm that the going concern basis of accounting is appropriate.

§  Assessed a working capital report prepared by Barclays Treasury, covering forecast and stress tested forecasts for liquidity and capital compared to current and future regulatory requirements, while taking into account levels of conduct and litigation provisioning and possible further provisions that may be required.

After examining forecast working capital, along with Barclays’ ability to generate capital and raise funding in current market conditions, the Committee concluded that Barclays’ liquidity and capital position remained appropriate, that there were no material uncertainties and that the going concern basis of accounting remained appropriate.

Viability

For the 2015 reporting year onwards, the Directors are required to make a statement in the Annual Report as to the longer-term viability of Barclays.

§  At the request of the Board, evaluated at the year end a report from management that set out the view of Barclays’longer-term viability. This report was based on Barclays Medium Term Plan (MTP) and covered forecasts for capital, liquidity and leverage, including forecast performance against regulatory targets, outcomes of the stress test of the MTP and forecast capital and liquidity performance against stress hurdle rates, funding and liquidity forecasts and an assessment of global risk themes and the Group’s risk profile.

Taking into account the assessment by the Board Risk Committee of stress testing results and risk appetite, the Committee agreed to recommend the viability statement to the Board for approval, although it emphasised the need for the statement to refer specifically to the key risks to viability, in particular those outside the Group’s direct control.

Fair, balanced and understandable reporting

(including Country by Country reporting and Pillar 3 reporting).

Barclays is required to ensure that its external reporting is fair, balanced and understandable.

§  At the request of the Board, assessed, via discussion with and challenge of management, whether disclosures in Barclays’ published financial statements were fair, balanced and understandable, taking into account comments received from investors and others.

§  Evaluated reports from the Disclosure Committee on its assessment of the content, accuracy and tone of the disclosures.

§  Sought and obtained confirmation from the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director that they considered the disclosures to be fair, balanced and understandable.

§  Evaluated the outputs of Barclays’ Turnbull assessments and Sarbanes- Oxley s404 internal control process.

§  Established via reports from management that there were no indications of fraud relating to financial reporting matters.

§  Assessed disclosure controls and procedures.

§  Requested that management report on and evidence the basis on which representations to the external auditors were made.

Having assessed all of the available information and the assurances provided by management, the Committee concluded that the processes underlying the preparation of Barclays’ published financial statements were appropriate in ensuring that those statements were fair, balanced and understandable.

In assessing Barclays’ financial results statements, the Committee requested that certain amendments were made to disclosures on litigation and also provided input on other key disclosure items, including the US Wealth disposal, guidance on Barclays Non-Core, adjusting items, dividends and outlook statements. It also debated the proposed statements to be made by the Chairman and Group Chief Executive, suggesting amendments.

The Committee concluded that the disclosures and process underlying the production of the 2015 Annual Report and Financial Statements were appropriate and recommended to the Board that the 2015 Annual Report and Financial Statements are fair, balanced and understandable.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  13


Other significant matters

Other matters addressed by the Committee focused on the effectiveness of Barclays’ internal controls, the performance and effectiveness of the internal audit function, the performance, objectivity and independence of the external auditor, PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP (PwC) and the arrangements being made to ensure that the incoming auditor, KPMG LLP (KPMG), achieves full independence prior to commencing the Barclays’ audit. The most significant matters are described below.

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Internal control

Read more about the Barclays’ Internal control and risk management processes on page 39.

The effectiveness of the control environment in operations and technology (O&T) and the status and remediation of any material control issues.

§  Evaluated on a regular basis, the O&T control environment, including the status of any open material control issues, emerging risks and closed control issues, taking the opportunity to directly challenge and question functional leaders.

§  Scrutinised the status of specific material control issues and their associated remediation plans, including in particular those relating to access management, security of secret and confidential data, cyber risk, IT infrastructure and application issues and third party supplier management.

§  Debated any slippage to remediation programmes and whether this was a cultural indicator of the Group’s approach.

§  Conducted a deep dive on security of secure and confidential data control issues, discussing in particular the cultural changes that the businesses needed to make.

§  Assessed the threat presented by cyber risk, including the impact of any confirmed cyber attacks.

§  Debated the progress of remediation of third party supplier management control issues, including the potential impacts of the Group’s focus on cost management and of decentralisation.

Having assessed the status of material control issues and their remediation, the Committee suggested that resilience should be elevated as a material control issue and requested a deep dive. The deep dive has been scheduled for early 2016. The Committee also requested further updates on cyber risk and third party supplier management, both of which are scheduled to take place in early 2016.

The Committee requested a deep dive on access management control issues, which took place during 2015.

The effectiveness of the business control environment, including the status of any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.

§  Assessed individual reports on the control environment in PCB, Barclaycard, Barclays Africa and US Investment Banking operations, including questioning directly the heads of those businesses.

§  Debated the importance of maintaining an effective control environment as the Group decentralises certain functional activities.

The Committee requested, and received, an update on decentralisation and its potential impact on the Group’s control environment.
The progress being made on embedding the ERMF to support a strong and effective internal control environment.

§  Assessed the results of a self-assessment pilot exercise conducted by the principal business units, as the first line of defence.

§  Evaluated a proposal for a revised approach to the internal control attestation process to link it to the ERMF.

§  Deliberated on the challenge of embedding conduct risk management as part of the ERMF.

§  Debated the effectiveness of the systems being used to support risk and control assessments by the first line of defence.

§  Focused on the need for effective challenge by the second line of defence.

§  Debated what metrics could be used to provide line of sight to control issues and whether a more objective approach to MCA ratings could be developed.

The Committee suggested to management that the assessment of MCA ratings could be more closely aligned to the ERMF. It subsequently considered and approved a proposal to align the MCA and ERMF, recommending that this be implemented with effect from 1 January 2016. The Committee requested further work on the revised approach to the internal control attestation process, so that the revised approach could be implemented for the 2015 year end attestation. The Committee asked for a further update on the effectiveness of the challenge by the second line of defence once all risk and control assessments had been completed. This update is scheduled to be provided in early 2016.

14  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
The adequacy of the Group’s arrangements to allow employees to raise concerns in confidence without fear of retaliation and the outcomes of any substantiated cases.

§  Debated the enhancements made to the Group’s whistleblowing framework, including changes in the team, communications to employees and re-publication of the Raising Concerns Policy.

§  Evaluated the level of substantiated cases and trends in reporting.

The Committee welcomed the steps that had been taken to strengthen the Group whistleblowing team and to enhance awareness and visibility across the Group of whistleblowing processes and the Raising Concerns Policy. It asked for more granular reporting to be made to the Committee, including ensuring that any cases of retaliation were clearly highlighted and that Barclays Africa incidents were reported to the Committee on the same basis as the rest of the Group. This information is now being received.

To enable an assessment of effectiveness, the Committee asked for Barclays’ processes to be benchmarked against its peers. It was subsequently presented with the results of the benchmarking exercise and concluded that Barclays’ processes were appropriate.

Internal auditThe performance of internal audit and delivery of the internal audit plan, including scope of work performed, the level of resources and the methodology and coverage of the internal audit plan.

§  Focused on how to accelerate the remediation of any control weaknesses and the importance of having a culture of closing issues effectively, including debating a new approach to audit issues management, which requires issues to be remediated within six months of identification, with any extension to that time period requiring the approval of a member of the Group Executive Committee.

§  Evaluated progress of the internal audit plan for 2015 and debated the plan for 2016, including assessing the proposed internal audit coverage and key control themes identified.

§  Assessed internal audit resources and attrition levels.

§  Debated the outcomes from Barclays Internal Audit’s annual self-assessment.

The Committee supported the approach to enforcing even greater accountability and ensuring greater visibility at Group Executive Committee and senior management level of the remediation of control issues and audit issues management. It confirmed its agreement to the key control themes identified by internal audit, although it asked for execution risk to be covered specifically. The Committee approved changes to internal audit’s methodology and the approach to audit coverage and issues validation, which has been implemented from 1 January 2016. The Committee asked for internal audit reports to comment as a matter of course on the effectiveness of both first and second lines of defence when evaluating their audit findings. Having assessed internal audit’s reports on a regular basis, the Committee confirmed completion of the internal audit plan for the first half of 2015 and approved the plan for the second half of the year, including approving the resources requested. It also approved the plan for the first half of 2016. In view of the Group’s focus on cost management, the Committee asked for an assessment of the impact on the internal audit plan of any proposed headcount reductions and for this to be reported to the Committee along with any revised plan. The Committee was content with the outcomes of the self-assessment of internal audit performance, although requested an update on the quality assurance programme, which will be provided in 2016.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  15


Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
External auditThe work and performance of PwC, including the maintenance of audit quality during the period of transition to a new auditor.

§  Convened a separate session with the key members of the PwC audit team to discuss the 2015 audit plan and agree areas of focus.

§  Assessed regular reports from PwC on the progress of the 2015 audit and any material issues identified.

§  Debated the draft audit opinion ahead of 2015 year end.

The Committee was also briefed by PwC on critical accounting estimates, where significant judgement is needed.

The Committee approved the audit plan and the main areas of focus, including impairment, valuations, conduct redress provisions, litigation and regulation and IT systems and controls. The Committee asked PwC to comment on the Group’s reconciliations processes and how they compared to other financial institutions.

Read more about the Committee’s role in assessing the performance, effectiveness and independence of the external auditor and the quality of the external audit below.

The external audit tender, which was conducted during 2015, and the arrangements for the transition to a new auditor.

§  Received regular updates from the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee on the progress of the audit tender.

§  Convened a special meeting to evaluate final presentations from the three audit firms who responded to the request for proposal.

§  Assessed and endorsed the proposed process to ensure that KPMG was independent by 1 July 2016.

The Committee decided to look further at potential reputation risk before making a recommendation to the Board. Having done so, it concluded on two firms for recommendation to the Board for consideration, indicating its preferred option of KPMG. In July 2015, Barclays announced the appointment of KPMG as its statutory auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year.

Read more about the external audit tender and the processes in place to ensure KPMG’s independence below.

The Committee also covered the following matters:

§  ensured it was updated on the implementation of IFRS 9, including the work under way to develop the Group’s approach, project status, resourcing and employee training. The Committee requested, and received, a specific briefing session on IFRS 9, covering the key assumptions and judgements that will be required

§  debated the Group’s plan for recovery and resolution and the process by which it was developed, including assessing the forward-looking trigger indicators

§  tracked progress of plans to ensure an attestation could be made to the Group’s regulators with regard to financial crime controls

§  assessed status reports on the Group’s controls around client assets and encouraged management to ensure that complexity, and the associated compliance costs, was taken into account when deciding which products to be offered

§  evaluated regular reports on regulatory issues

§  approved revisions to its terms of reference and recommended them to the Board for approval

§  approved a revised Group Retail Impairment Policy.

Assessing external auditor effectiveness, auditor objectivity and independence and non-audit services

The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness, objectivity and independence of the Group’s auditor, PwC. This responsibility was discharged throughout the year at formal committee meetings, during private meetings with PwC and via discussions with key executive stakeholders. In addition to the matters noted above, during 2015, the Committee:

§  approved the terms of the audit engagement letter and associated fees, on behalf of the Board, having scrutinised the results of Barclays’ formal evaluation of PwC. More information on the formal evaluation is provided below

§  appraised PwC’s approach to key accounting judgements and how they were communicated and agreed with management and the Committee

§  recognising that PwC, and its predecessor firms, has been Barclays external auditor since 1896 and that it had been more than 10 years since the external audit was last tendered, conducted an external audit tender, identified KPMG as the preferred candidate for appointment as Barclays’ new auditor and made a recommendation to the Board. Details of the audit tender process, which was overseen by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, can be found on page 18

§  discussed and agreed revisions to the Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor and regularly analysed reports from management on the services that PwC provided to Barclays. Following the appointment of KPMG as auditor from 1 January 2017, the Committee also commenced oversight of new non-audit service engagements with KPMG in recognition of the potential threats to independence. Read more about non-audit services below

§  instructed Barclays Internal Audit to undertake a review of a sample of non-audit services provided by PwC to ensure that the final deliverables aligned to the scope of work approved by the Committee. No concerns were identified by this review

§  evaluated and approved revisions to the Group Policy on Employment of Employees from the Statutory Auditor and ensured compliance with the policy by regularly assessing reports from management detailing any appointments made

§  analysed the results of the inspection of PwC by the Financial Reporting Council’s Audit Quality Review Team and confirmed support for the actions PwC proposed to take to address areas identified for improvement

§  assessed the draft report to the PRA prepared by PwC regarding its detailed audit work on specific topics, in particular, impairment.

PwC’s performance, independence and objectivity during 2015 were formally assessed at the beginning of 2016. A questionnaire incorporating best practice recommendations from a number of professional and governance bodies, and taking account of key findings from the 2014 review, was completed by key stakeholders across the Group. The questionnaire was designed to evaluate PwC’s audit process in its entirety and addressed matters including the quality of planning and communication, technical knowledge, the level of scrutiny and challenge applied and PwC’s understanding of the business. The subsequent report provided empirical data on which the Committee assessed PwC. It also reflected specific comments made by respondents, giving the Committee a valuable insight into management’s views. The Committee was particularly interested in assessing whether audit quality was being maintained throughout the period of transition to a new auditor. The results of the evaluation confirmed that both PwC and the audit process were effective. Having considered the results of the evaluation, the Committee recommended to the Board and to shareholders that PwC should be reappointed as the Group’s auditors at the AGM on 28 April 2016, noting that this would be PwC’s final year as Group auditor.

16  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Audit Committee report

Non-audit services

In order to safeguard the auditor’s independence and objectivity, Barclays has in place a policy setting out the circumstances in which the auditor may be engaged to provide services other than those covered by the Group audit. The Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor (the Policy) applies to all Barclays’ subsidiaries and other material entities over which Barclays has significant influence. The core principle of the Policy is that non-audit services (other than those legally required to be carried out by the Group’s auditor) should only be performed by the auditor in certain, controlled circumstances. The Policy sets out those types of services that are strictly prohibited and those that are allowable in principle. Any service types that do not fall within either list are considered by the Committee Chairman on a case by case basis, supported by a risk assessment provided by management.

The Committee has pre-approved all allowable services up to £100,000, or £25,000 for tax advisory services, however, all proposed work, regardless of the fees, must be sponsored by a senior executive and recorded on a centralised online system, with a detailed explanation of the clear commercial benefit arising from engaging the auditor over other potential service providers. The audit firm engagement partner must also confirm that the engagement has been approved in accordance with the auditor’s own internal ethical standards and does not pose any threat to the auditor’s independence or objectivity.

All requests to engage the auditor are assessed by independent management before work can commence. Requests for allowable service types in respect of which the fees are expected to meet or exceed the above thresholds must be approved by the Chairman of the Committee before work is permitted to begin. Services where the fees are expected to be £250,000 or higher must be approved by the Committee as a whole. All expenses and disbursements must be included in the fees calculation.

During 2015, all engagements where expected fees met or exceeded the above thresholds were evaluated by either the Committee Chairman or the Committee as a whole who, before confirming any approval, assured themselves that there was justifiable reason for engaging the auditor and that its independence and objectivity would not be threatened. Two requests were declined in 2015 (2014: two). On a quarterly basis, the Committee scrutinised details of individually approved and pre-approved services undertaken by the auditor in order to satisfy itself that they posed no risk to the auditor’s independence, either in isolation or on an aggregated basis. A breakdown of the fees paid to the auditor for non-audit work can be found in Note 42 on page 296, with non-audit fees representing 23.5% (2014: 25.7%) of the audit fee. Significant categories of engagement undertaken in 2015 included:

§attest and assurance services required by regulators in connection with reviews of internal controls including reviews of the suitability of design and operating effectiveness of controls related to custody of securities and funds within Barclays Wealth Americas

§tax compliance services in respect of assignments initiatedpre-January 2011 in connection with Barclays international and expatriate employees, involving co-ordination and filing of statutory tax returns, social security applications and additional compliance filings

§transaction support on secured funding transactions, including the provision of audits required by the Bank of England and the issue of comfort letters

§provision of advice and market insight in respect of regulatory requirements relating to remuneration structure, incentive funding and risk adjustment and remuneration reporting.

Independence of KPMG

Following the appointment of KPMG as Barclays’ auditor with effect from 1 January 2017, the Committee was concerned to ensure that KPMG obtained independence from Barclays during 2016, enabling it to familiarise itself with Barclays and receive a structured, formal handover from PwC. In order to ensure KPMG’s independence, and to allow the Committee to assess whether any non-audit work being conducted by KPMG in the meantime is appropriate, both in terms of type and scale, Barclays is in the process of exiting any current relationships or assignments that may prevent KPMG obtaining independent status and

has implemented procedures to manage the types of relationships and assignments that KPMG provides going forward. In particular, KPMG is not permitted to provide any service that may continue beyondmid-2016 if it has potential to cause independence issues. Since October 2015, the Committee has required all new engagements to be considered in light of the Policy and is maintaining oversight of them on the same basis as for the current auditor. The Committee has reserved the right to decline any proposed engagement with KPMG.

The fees paid to KPMG for non-audit work during 2015 were £38m. Significant categories of engagement undertaken in 2015 included:

§international tax compliance services for expatriate employees of Barclays, including expatriate tax returns, tax counselling, tax equalisation, international social security and other employment tax issues

§independent approved person review (s.166) of interest rate swaps to small businesses, covering the sale of interest rate hedging products to retail customers

§the building of an internal lean self-sufficiency capability to support end-to-end value stream improvements of core business processes within Group Operations and Technology

§assistance in the establishment and running of the programme management office associated with the African brand migration project

§support in the implementation of the Group conduct risk programme

§support with the development of the anti-money laundering programme and the provision of related advice

§support for Barclaycard in the assessment and restructuring of its pricing model

§review and remediation of know your customer documentation requirements for Barclays politically exposed persons and special focus clients in the US, UK, Switzerland, Monaco, India, Singapore and Hong Kong

§support for the development and embedding of the Basel II-compliant models in Spain.

The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014

Barclays intends to comply with the requirements of The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014, which relates to the frequency and governance of tenders for the appointment of the external auditor and the setting of a policy on the provision of non-audit services.

Board Audit Committee allocation of time (%)

          2015     2014  

 

LOGO

 

 

 

 

1

 

  

 

 

Control issues

  

 

 

 

18

 

  

  

 

 

 

24

 

  

  2   Business control environment   16     10  
  3   Financial results   27     42  
  4   Internal audit matters   7     8  
  5   External audit matters (including external audit tender)   26     11  
  6   Other (including governance and compliance)   6     5  
      
      
      

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  17


     10/10 

Governance in Action – external audit tender

As indicated in last year’s Annual Report, Barclays decided to undertake an external audit tender in 2015, with a view to replacing our external audit firm from the 2017 financial year onwards. This was done to conform with the auditor rotation requirements of the final statutory audit services order published in October 2014 by the UK’s Competition and Markets Authority, which took effect in January 2015.

In December 2014, we established an Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee, to oversee the external audit. I was asked to chair the Sub-Committee and Crawford Gillies and Colin Beggs, Chairman of the BAGL Audit Committee, were the other members. The tender process completed in summer 2015 and the Board announced in July 2015 that it had appointed KPMG as Barclays Auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year.

One of the Sub-Committee’s key objectives was to ensure that the selection process was efficient, fair, effective, open and transparent. It established and published the following weighted key assessment criteria: Audit Quality (50%), Cultural Fit (20%), Corporate Fit (15%) and Experience (15%). No fee information was available to the Board Audit Committee before the recommendation was finalised. Three levels of governance were implemented to manage and support the process.

Timeline and key activities

LOGO

Governance body

Purpose

Core Audit Tender

Team

§  Assist the audit firms to put the best solution forward for consideration.

§  Conduct a detailed assessment of the audit firms following the design approved by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee.

Audit Tender Oversight

Sub-Committee

§  Agree objectives and desired outcomes for the audit tender.

§  Approve the design of the audit tender process.

§  Construct and agree a shortlist of firms to be asked to participate.

§  Oversee the implementation of the audit tender process.

Board Audit Committee

§  Recommend to the Board, from at least two potential candidates, the preferred firm to be appointed.

A number of firms were invited to participate in the audit tender, including firms outside the ‘Big 4’ auditors. We published key information on the tender in a timely manner, including making the request for proposal available on Barclays’ website. We also wrote to our major shareholders, setting out the process and details of the tendering audit firms, which we considered essential to transparency. Enhanced compliance procedures were established. We then undertook a broad and structured evaluation of each firm through site visits and workshops with the tendering firms, covering all the major businesses of the Group, the control functions and specific audit exercises, which were also attended by members of the Board Audit Committee. Ongoing feedback was provided to the tendering audit firms through a single point of contact in order to ensure that each was given the best chance possible of putting forward a credible proposal to the Board Audit Committee.

At the conclusion of the audit tender process, the Board Audit Committee was able to recommend to the Board the preferred firm to be appointed, from two shortlisted firms. All tendering firms met the minimum thresholds set by the Audit Tender Oversight Sub- Committee and, following a full assessment of the proposals and detailed questioning of the audit firms, KPMG was identified as the preferred firm, based on audit quality, evaluation scores and its extensive experience of auditing banks. Mike Ashley and Sir Michael Rake, both former partners of KPMG, took no part in the evaluation process or the Board Audit Committee’s recommendation and both recused themselves when the Board discussed and approved the appointment.

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee

   10/10 

Crawford Gillies

   10/10

Diane Schueneman*

   8/10

Matthew Lester

(from 1 September 2017)

   1/3 

 

18  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee reporta

LOGO

“In 2016 the Committee will continue to supervise the level and deployment of risk appetite, as well as the Group’s funding and capital position, as we respond to regulatory requirements and our expectations of continued volatility in external conditions.”

Dear Fellow Shareholders

Over the past year, the Board Risk Committee reviewed management’s responses to a range of external challenges. These included a slowdown in China and other emerging markets, falling oil and commodity prices, as well as some industry trends toward more aggressive lending terms in certain core markets, including UK property and international leveraged finance. Risk appetite, as well as country, sector and individual exposures, were carefully monitored to ensure that business activity and limits appropriately reflected external risks. We were pleased to see impairment remain broadly flat on 2014 levels and within planning expectations, despite increasingly challenging conditions in some markets.

A key activity for the Committee is recommending risk appetite to the Board and monitoring performance against the agreed appetite on its behalf. The context in which we set our Medium Term Plan (MTP) and risk appetite for 2015 was based on our assessment of our key markets, including risk factors arising from the near term geopolitical, macroeconomic and market environment and the potential for further conduct and litigation charges. Matters for particular focus were the UK housing market, where new mortgage regulations, a potential rise in interest rates, the growth in the buy-to-let market and ongoing high levels of household debt were expected to have an impact; continuing economic and political uncertainty in Europe; weak economic prospects for South Africa; and the potential effects of ongoing weakness in oil prices. 2015 risk appetite and risk triggers were set to position Barclays conservatively given this environment. During 2015, significant stress in emerging markets and economies became evident, underpinned by a slowing in the Chinese economy and resultant market volatility. Consequently, Barclays took early action to reduce its risk appetite to emerging markets, particularly Africa, and also remained vigilant to the potential impacts arising from a downturn in economic growth, indebtedness generally and further weakness in capital markets.

At the end of 2014, the Committee asked for a review of the Group’s process for setting risk appetite and during 2015 approved a revised methodology that takes a scenario-based approach, with stress testing as the basis of the risk appetite framework. This revised methodology was used to set risk appetite for 2016, with the Committee also approving the stress testing themes, the severity of the proposed stress and the financial constraints.

Note

a   The name of the Committee changed from the Board Financial Risk Committee in June 2015

Another key area of focus during 2015 was the structural reform programme, where the Committee was asked by the Group Chairman to oversee progress of the planning process, particularly with regard to structural options, their capital and liquidity implications and the potential risks for the Group, its customers and for the financial system. Now that the programme has moved into its implementation phase, the Board will directly oversee programme execution, although the Committee will continue to exercise oversight of capital and liquidity aspects, including assessing capital on a legal entity basis. From July 2015, the Committee also assumed oversight responsibility for operational risk, agreeing to focus on the financial and capital aspects of operational risk, while the Board Audit Committee oversees the control aspects.

The role of Board Risk Committee Chairman is not confined to the Committee’s regular meetings. During 2015, I continued to have significant interaction with our regulators, meeting regularly with representatives from our UK and US regulators. I held regular meetings with the Chief Risk Officer and members of his senior management team, with Barclays Treasurer and the Chief Operating Officer. I also liaised closely with the Chairman of Board Audit Committee, particularly on those matters where the remit of the two committees might overlap, including with regard to the implementation of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework and operational risk issues.

Committee performance

The Committee’s performance during 2015 was evaluated as part of the independently facilitated annual Board effectiveness review and I am happy to report that the outcomes were positive. The Committee was regarded as effective and as taking a thorough and detailed approach to its responsibilities. The main area identified for improvement was ensuring that the papers presented to the Committee strike the right balance between providing data for information and providing insight and analysis to encourage greater debate and I will be working with the Chief Risk Officer and Barclays Treasurer to address this during 2016. You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and 34.

Looking ahead

The Committee expects its areas of focus for 2016 to be guided by the ongoing level of change faced by the Group as it implements its strategy and executes the structural reform programme, with a particular focus on capital and liquidity management across legal entities. We will also continue to monitor and react to any emerging risks arising in our key markets in the UK, US and South Africa as a consequence of any macroeconomic deterioration or disruption in financial market conditions.

LOGO

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

29 February 2016

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  19


Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is comprised solely of independent non-executive Directors. Following a review by the Board during 2015 of Board Committee composition, Dambisa Moyo stepped down from the Committee with effect from 31 August 2015 and Diane Schueneman joined the Committee with effect from 1 September 2015. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages3 and 4.

The Committee met seven times in 2015, with two of the meetings held in New York. Two additional meetings were held at short notice for the sole purpose of considering and approving revised risk limits in connection with specific transactions and, with the consent of the Committee Chairman, were not attended by all Committee members. The chart on page23 shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2015. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Barclays Treasurer and General Counsel, as well as representatives from the businesses. Representatives from the external auditor also attended meetings.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Tim Breedon7/7
Mike Ashley7/7
Reuben Jeffery III*5/7
Dambisa Moyo (to 31 August 2015)*3/5
Diane Schueneman (from 1 Sept 2015)2/2
Steve Thieke*5/7Did not attend due to personal circumstances.
*with the consent of the Chairman didDid not attend owing to existing commitments with other boards (the Committee meeting dates were set before Matthew joined the two meetings held at short notice to consider specific transaction limitsBoard).

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee’s responsibilities include:Committee is responsible for:

 

§ recommending toassessing the Boardintegrity of the total level ofGroup’s financial reporting and operational risk the Group is prepared to take (risk appetite) to create long-term shareholder valuesatisfying itself that any significant financial judgements made by management are sound

 

§ monitoringevaluating the effectiveness of the Group’s internal controls, including internal financial and operational risk appetite, including setting limits for individual types of risk, e.g., credit, market and funding riskcontrols

 

§ scrutinising the activities and performance of the internal and external auditors, including monitoring the Group’s financialtheir independence and operational risk profileobjectivity

 

§ ensuring that financial and operational risk is taken into account duringoverseeing the due diligence phase of any strategic transaction andrelationship with the Group’s external auditor

 

§ providing input from a financialreviewing and operational risk perspective intomonitoring the deliberationseffectiveness of the Board Remuneration Committee.Group’s whistleblowing procedures

overseeing significant legal and regulatory investigations, including the proposed litigation statement for inclusion in the statutory accounts.

 

LOGOLOGO 

The Committee’s terms of

reference are available at

home.barclays/corporategovernancecorporategovernance.

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 20152017 and in evaluating Barclays’ 2017 Annual Report and financial statements, are described below:on the following pages.

Financial statement reporting issues

The Committee’s main responsibility in relation to Barclays’ financial reporting is to review with both management and the external auditor the appropriateness of Barclays’ financial statements, including quarterly results announcements and half-year and annual financial statements and supporting analyst presentations, with its primary focus being on:

the quality and acceptability of accounting policies and practices

any correspondence from financial reporting regulators in relation to Barclays’ financial reporting

material areas where significant judgements have been made, along with any significant assumptions or estimates, or where significant issues have been discussed with or challenged by the external auditor

an assessment of whether the Annual Report, taken as a whole, is fair, balanced and understandable and provides the information necessary for shareholders to assess Barclays’ position and performance, business model and strategy.

Accounting policies and practices

The Committee discussed reports from management in relation to the identification of critical accounting judgements and key sources of estimation uncertainty, significant accounting policies and the proposed disclosure of these in the 2017 Annual Report. Following discussions with both management and the external auditor, the Committee approved the critical accounting judgements, significant accounting policies and disclosures, which are set out in note 1, ‘Significant accounting policies’, to the consolidated financial statements.

There was one significant change in accounting policy during the period which was the early adoption of IFRS 9 (Financial Instruments) in relation to own credit, resulting in the recognition of fair value movements through the Statement of Comprehensive Income. Further information regarding this change can be found in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements. Two new significant accounting standards became effective from 1 January 2018, IFRS 9 (Financial Instruments) and IFRS 15 (Revenue Recognition). Further information regarding these changes can be found in note 1 to the consolidated financial statements. During 2017, the Committee was regularly updated on Barclays’ preparations for the implementation of IFRS 9, in particular in relation to the new expected loss model which represents a fundamental change in approach

to impairment. The Committee discussed with management the key technical decisions and interpretations required and Barclays’ approach to these. Further details of the Committee’s role in overseeing the Group’s IFRS 9 preparations can be found on page 21, ‘Governance in Action’.

Financial reporting regulators and Barclays

The Committee from time to time considers comment letters and papers from external bodies including the SEC and the Financial Reporting Council (FRC). In that regard, the Committee considered the following:

The FRC’s Year-End Advice Letter to Audit Committee Chairs and Finance Directors which highlighted key developments for 2017/18 annual reports.

The FRC’s Annual Review of Corporate Reporting which summarised key characteristics of good corporate reporting for the 2017/18 reporting year.

The PRA note of advice to Non-executive Directors regarding IFRS 9 implementation which set out a series of questions for consideration to ensure audit committees were well prepared for the transition and its implications.

The Committee sought to ensure that Barclays took due account of the matters raised in the letters and papers described above in its external reporting and has sought to enhance and clarify relevant disclosures.

The Committee from time to time considers comment letters from the SEC in relation to its reviews of Barclays’ Annual Report and other publicly filed financial statements. Such comment letters and Barclays’ responses are made publicly available by the SEC on its website, www.sec.gov, once it has closed each such review. Barclays received one comment letter from the SEC during 2017 requesting clarification from the SEC in relation to its 2017 half year filing. Barclays responded to clarify the queries raised by the SEC. The letter did not raise any material concerns or disclosure items.

Significant judgements and estimates

The significant judgements and estimates and actions taken by the Committee in relation to the 2017 Annual Report and financial statements are outlined below. The significant judgements and estimates are broadly comparable in nature to prior years. Each of these matters was discussed with the external auditor during the year and, where appropriate, have been addressed n the Auditors’ Report on pages 186 to 187.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    13


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Audit Committee report

 

Area of focusReporting issueRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Conduct provisions

(refer to Note 27 to the

financial statements)

Barclays makes certain assumptions and estimates, analysis of which underpins provisions made for the costs of customer redress, such as for Payment Protection Insurance (PPI).

 Regularly analysed the judgements and estimates made with regard to Barclays’ provisioning for PPI claims, taking into account forecasts and assumptions made for PPI complaints and actual claims experience for Barclays and the industry as a whole, including the volume of invalid PPI claims.

 Debated the impact on the future range of provisions arising from (i) the FCA’s introduction of August 2019 as the timebar on claims, (ii) the PPI marketing campaign, and (iii) the progress of the proposed fee cap on the submission of PPI complaints by Claims Management Companies which is being considered by the UK Parliament.

 Evaluated proposed additional provisions for PPI, considering whether the total provision is within the modelled range of future outcomes, and whether the external auditor agreed with management’s analysis and approach.

 Monitored the position on provisions for alternative PPI (card protection and payment break plan insurance) and considered whether further provisions were required.

The Committee and management continue to monitor closely any changes in customer or claims management companies’ behaviour in light of the FCA timebar and marketing campaign and the ongoing impact of the Plevin case. Having regard to the actual claims experience over 2017 the Committee agreed with management’s assessment that the current provision of £1,600m was appropriate. The Committee noted that this estimate remains subject to significant uncertainty in particular regarding the level of valid customer claims that may be received in the period to August 2019. In this context the Committee was satisfied that sensitivities to the key variables were appropriately disclosed.

Legal, competition

and regulatory

provisions

(refer to Notes 27 to 29

to the financial

statements)

Barclays is engaged in various legal, competition and regulatory matters. The extent of the impact on Barclays of these matters cannot always be predicted, but matters can give rise to provisioning for contingent and other liabilities depending on the relevant facts and circumstances. The level of provisioning is subject to management judgement on the basis of legal advice and is therefore an area of focus for the Committee.

 Evaluated advice on the status of current legal, competition and regulatory matters.

 Assessed management’s judgements and estimates of the levels of provisions to be taken and the adequacy of those provisions, based on available information and evidence.

 Considered the adequacy of disclosure, recognising that any decision to set provisions involves significant judgement.

The Committee discussed provisions and utilisation. Having reviewed the information available to determine what was both probable and could be reliably estimated, the Committee agreed that the level of provision at the year end was appropriate. The Committee also considered that the disclosures made provided the appropriate information for investors regarding the legal, competition and regulatory matters being addressed by the Group.

Valuations

(refer to Notes 14 to 18

to the financial

statements)

Barclays exercises judgement in the valuation and disclosure of financial instruments, derivative assets and certain portfolios, particularly where quoted market prices are not available, including the Group’s Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio.

 Evaluated reports from Barclays Valuations Committee, with particular focus on the matters below.

 Monitored the valuation methods applied by management to significant valuation items, including the ESHLA portfolio, a valuation disparity with a third party in respect of a specific long-dated derivative portfolio, and the approach to the marking of Own Credit.

 Monitored and discussed the impact of negative interest rates on derivative valuation.

 Considered the treatment of the re-integration of Non-Core residual operations into the core business.

The Committee discussed these matters and agreed that a minor modification be made to the valuation of the specific long-dated derivative portfolio where there existed significant valuation disparity. This did not result in a material change to the fair value recorded by the Group. The Committee noted that, following efforts by management to restructure derivative agreements impacted by negative interest rates, any residual uncertainty was now insignificant.

14    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Area of focusReporting issue Role of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Impairment

(refer to Note 7 to the

financial statements)

Where appropriate, Barclays models potential impairment performance, allowing for certain assumptions and sensitivities, the size, particularly where to agree allowances for credit impairment, including agreeing the timing of the recognition of any impairment and estimating forbearance has been granted.

 Assessed impairment experience against forecast and whether impairment provisions were appropriate.

 Evaluated credit impairment reports (reviewed by the Group Impairment Committee) presented by the Chief Risk Officer.

 Considered a report from the Chief Risk Officer on the position in the US Cards portfolio and monitored the position to determine whether increase in impairment would be required.

 Considered a report from the Group Impairment Committee on the adequacy of loan impairment allowances as at 31 December 2017, including assessing internal and external trends, methodologies and key management estimates.

The Committee reviewed model adjustments made by management to ensure that impairment allowances were set at appropriate and adequate levels. The Committee reviewed the impairment charge in Barclaycard US arising in the third quarter from the asset sale in the first quarter. The Committee also reviewed three material single name charges in the Corporate Bank.

The committee agreed that the provision levels for impairment were appropriate.

Tax

(refer to Note 10 to the

financial statements)

Barclays is subject to taxation in a number of jurisdictions globally and makes judgements with regard to provisioning for tax at risk and on the recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets.

 Evaluated the appropriateness of tax risk provisions to cover existing tax risk.

 Confirmed the forecasts and assumptions supporting the recognition and valuation of deferred tax assets was in line with Barclays Medium Term Plan.

 Monitored the impact to Barclays of the new US framework for tax legislation covering a broad range of tax proposals which was enacted on 22 December 2017 and which had a substantial impact on the measurement of the Group’s US deferred tax assets. The Committee also considered the potential impact of the Base Erosion Anti-abuse Tax (BEAT) which was introduced as part of the new legislation.

The Committee reviewed Barclays’ global tax risk and associated provisions for the full year and noted that the level of tax provisions remained at about the same level, although the amount of gross tax risk was assessed as slightly reduced.

In relation to the treatment of deferred tax assets the Committee noted that those due to US tax losses (£1,520m) are forecast to be utilised by 2019 which is significantly earlier than the first expiry date of 2028.

The Committee agreed with management’s view that it was appropriate not to take account of any potential future BEAT liabilities in the measurement of the deferred tax assets. It noted that this would be in line with recent US GAAP pronouncements and as disclosed management is also continuing to assess the full impact to the Group of the complex provisions in the new US legislation.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    15


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Audit Committee report

Area of focusReporting issueRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Fair, balanced and understandable reporting

(including country-by-country reporting and Pillar 3 reporting)

Barclays is required to ensure that its external reporting is fair, balanced and understandable. The Committee undertakes an assessment on behalf of the Board in order to provide the Board with assurance that it can make the statement required by the UK Code on Corporate Governance.

 Assessed, through discussion with and challenge of management, including the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director, whether disclosures in Barclays’ Annual Report and other financial reports were fair, balanced and understandable.

 Evaluated reports from Barclays’ Disclosure Committee on its assessment of the content, accuracy and tone of the disclosures.

 Established through reports from management that there were no indications of fraud relating to financial reporting matters.

 Evaluated the outputs of Barclays’ internal control assessments and Sarbanes-Oxley s404 internal control process.

 Assessed disclosure controls and procedures.

 Confirmed that management had reported on and evidenced the basis on which representations to the external auditors were made.

Having evaluated all of the available information and the assurances provided by management, the Committee concluded that the processes underlying the preparation of Barclays’ published financial statements, including the 2017 Annual Report and financial statements, were appropriate in ensuring that those statements were fair, balanced and understandable.

In assessing Barclays’ financial results statements over the course of 2017, the Committee specifically addressed and provided input to management on the disclosure and presentation of:

 the classification of Barclays’ holding in Barclays Africa as an available for sale asset with effect from 1 June 2017

 the closure of Barclays Non-Core business and the reintegration of the remaining businesses and portfolio

 the Group Finance Director’s presentations to analysts

 the level of segmental reporting.

The Committee recommended to the Board that the 2017 Annual Report and financial statements are fair, balanced and understandable.

16    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Other significant matters

Apart from financial reporting matters the Committee has responsibility for oversight of the effectiveness of Barclays’ internal controls, the performance and effectiveness of BIA and

the performance, objectivity and independence of the external auditor. The most significant matters considered during 2017 are described in the table below.

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken

Risk appetite, i.e.Internal control

Read more about the level ofBarclays’ internal control and risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives.management processes on

page 40.

  The methodology for calculatingeffectiveness of the leveloverall control environment, including the status of risk appetite.any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.  

§  Requested a reviewEvaluated and tracked the status of the Group’s risk appetite process and methodology and debated proposalsmost material control issues identified by management via regular reports from management to move to a scenario-based stress testing approach.the Chief Controls Officer, assessed against the new Controls Maturity Model created as part of the Barclays Internal Controls Enhancement Programme (BICEP).

§  Evaluated the proposed MTP stress test, agreeing on a scenario involving a global recession from an economic slowdownstatus of specific material control issues and associated remediation plans, including in China.

§  Debated the severity of the scenarioparticular those relating to model risk, resilience, cyber, compliance, technology, credit risk, transaction operations and how it would apply across the Group’s main markets of the UK, USdata management which remained open as at December 2017 and South Africa and how it alignedwhich were reported as ‘on track’ to regulatory stress tests.

The Committee challenged the parameters proposed by management and asked for a parameterreturn to be linked to PBT. It also asked for early consideration to be given to the impact of IFRS 9 on the Group’s risk appetite and stress testing assumptions. This work is under way and will be reported to the Committee in the first half of 2016. Given the change in methodology, the Committee requested early sight of the design and outputs as the new risk appetite process was implemented, resulting in a workshop being held in December 2015. All non-executive Directors were invited to attend the workshop.

Stress testing, i.e. testing whether the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress.satisfactory status within agreed timeframes.

 

The Group’s stress testing exercises,

 Considered the second line of defence role in the oversight of operational risk controls, including scenario selection and constraints, the results and implications of stress tests, including stress tests run by the Bank of England (BoE), and regulatory feedbackfinancial controls over operational risk.

 Evaluated reports on the methodology and results.

§  Debated proposalsinternal control environment from management to move to a scenario-based risk appetite setting approach and approved a change to the Group’s methodology.external auditor.

§  Discussed lessons learned from specific control incidents and how these could be applied to Barclays’ business globally.

 Assessed the progress of the BoE stress testenhancements being made to Barclays’ risk and evaluatedcontrol self-assessment (RCSA) process.

 Clarified the preliminary results, including discussing any potential areasrole and responsibilities of sensitivity.the Committee in relation to the split of responsibility for operational risk between the Committee and the Board Risk Committee.

 

  

The Committee approvedwelcomed the stress test resultspositive change in approach that the BICEP programme had driven across the business, notably that the first line of defence was now more focused on proactively self-identifying control issues rather than waiting for submissionthem to be highlighted by the second or third lines of defence. The Committee continued to emphasise the importance of a disciplined self-assessment by management.

The Committee provided feedback on the reporting of material control issues, requesting further detail regarding completion dates, key milestones and current status for significant remediation projects to enable closer monitoring and help drive accountability at the appropriate management level.

The Committee challenged the application of the lessons learned process in view of the low level of coverage of significant control incidents. Management has taken steps to enhance the process and ensure compliance. Going forward this will be tracked by the Chief Controls Office.

The Committee has continued to use the output from the RCSA process in its review of the control environment. While providing a reasonable overview of the control environment, the Committee welcomes management’s plans to put in place a more granular process which should provide greater visibility on controls requiring remediation and associated risks. This approach was piloted in 2017 and will be rolled out across the Group in 2018.

The effectiveness of the control environment in each individual business, including the status of any material control issues and the progress of specific remediation plans.

 Assessed reports on individual businesses and functions on their control environment, questioned the heads of the relevant businesses or functions on control concerns and scrutinised any identified control failures and closely monitored the status of remediation plans or workstreams to enhance the respective control environments.

 Received updates directly from senior management, and scrutinised action plans, in relation to remediation plans following unsatisfactory audit findings.

 Reviewed updates from management on the Designated Market Activity (DMA) remediation plan which addresses Barclays’ regulatory commitments to the BoE. ItFed and other US and UK regulators in relation to sales and trading practices across the FX Rates and other markets related business areas.

The Committee received deep dive control environment presentations from Barclays International and Barclays UK. These provided further detail of management’s assessment of the business unit control environment and key areas of focus, including key controls hot spots for the businesses.

The Committee also received a number of presentations from business heads following unsatisfactory audit reports. The Committee challenged the business regarding their role in identifying the control issues and requested confirmation from management regarding the remediation programme, timeframe and accountability for delivery and which are subsequently evaluatedmonitored.

The Committee was encouraged that the BoE stress testing results and feedback fromlevel of resources being devoted to the BoEDMA programme now shows that it is on the stress test.track to meet its milestones.

 

 

 

20  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    17


 


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152017

Board RiskAudit Committee report

 

 

 

 

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
Structural reform, i.e. the progress of structural reform, including the challenges to execution.  The impacteffectiveness of structural reform on the Group’s principal risks, includingcontrol environment in the impact on capital and liquidity for individual Group legal entitiesChief Operating Office (COO) and the potential overall impact on the safetystatus and soundnessremediation of the UK financial system.any material control issues.  

§  Debated structural reformScrutinised on a regular basis the COO control environment, taking the opportunity to directly challenge and question functional leaders, including the impactChief Operating Officer on the capital and liquidity flight paths for individual legal entities, in particular, the prospective credit ratingprogress of Barclays Bank PLC in the structural reform structure.remediation plans.

§  EvaluatedClarified the respective impacts on capital, liquidity and onCommittee’s ongoing responsibility for the general safeness and soundnessoversight of controls matters relating to the Group of different ring fence bank (RFB) structures.Service Company.

 The Committee received a deep dive control environment presentation from the Chief Information Officer regarding Technology control issues.

  

The Committee recognisedwas pleased to note continuing progress over 2017 to address control issues in accordance with the designagreed timescales.

The Committee also received updates on the following matters:

 Data

 Security of Secret and implementation challenges of the programmeConfidential Data (SSCD)

 Client Assets and supported management in proposing structuresMoney (CASS), and perimeters that best ensured the safety and soundness of all elements of the Group. It requested a workshop on structural reform to provide the Committee with an in-depth view of the key challenges. The workshop was held in December 2015 and all non-executive Directors were invited to attend.

  Payments.

 

Liquidity and funding, i.e. having sufficient financial resources available to enable the Group to meet its obligations as they fall due.  Compliance with regulatory requirementsThe adequacy of the Group’s arrangements to allow employees to raise concerns in confidence without fear of retaliation and internal liquidity risk appetite (LRA).the outcomes of any substantiated cases.  

§  AssessedConsidered the results of the “Your View Survey” in relation to employee views on a regular basis liquidity performance against requirements.their ability to safely speak up in their business/ function and whether they could report instances of dishonest or unethical behaviour without fear.

§  DebatedReceived an update on enhancements to Barclays’ whistleblowing programme following the credit ratingsannouncement of Barclays PLCthe PRA/FCA investigations and Barclays Bank PLC and potential market reaction to a ratings downgrade following removalthe outcome of sovereign support notching.the independent review that was commissioned by the Board.

§  Questioned the costMonitored instances of additional liquidityretaliation reports and asked for options to reduce the cost to be considered.whether any instances had been substantiated.

 Monitored whistleblowing metrics, including case load and case ageing.

 

  

The Committee ensured that management had in place optionsdiscussed the importance of ongoing dialogue and regular training to manage any impact on liquidity of a ratings downgrade. It agreedensure that the costroute for escalations was clear and cases were directed to the relevant team for investigation and resolution.

The Committee supported the focus on training both to colleagues on the channels available, and also managers on how to handle whistleblowing issues. The Committee also emphasised the importance of maintaining surplus liquiditysharing positive outcomes of whistleblowing incidents where possible.

The Committee was appropriate.pleased to note that volumes of cases remain proportionate to Barclays’ size and footprint.

As Whistleblowing Champion, the Chairman of the Committee made an annual report to the Board on whistleblowing matters.

Capital and leverage,Internal audit

i.e., having sufficient capital resources to meet the Group’s regulatory requirements, maintain its credit rating and support growth and strategic options.

  The flight path to achieving required regulatoryperformance of BIA and delivery of the internal targetsaudit plan, including scope of work performed, the level of resources and capitalthe methodology and leverage ratios.coverage of the internal audit plan.  

§  Debated on a regular basis, capital performance against plan, trackingScrutinised and agreed internal audit plans and methodology and deliverables for 2017 and the capital flight path, any challenges/headwinds and regulatory developments.

§  Evaluated optionsfirst half of 2018, including reviewing the number of audits for delivery following the alignment of the Audit Universe to maximise capital and capital ratios in order to meet regulatory and market expectations.Barclays new structure following Structural Reform.

 

The Committee supported

 Monitored BIA’s response to feedback received from the forecast trajectoryPRA as part of its review of internal audit, including independence and impact, quality and weight of resources, productivity and methodology.

 Monitored delivery of the actions identified by management to manageagreed audit plans, including assessing internal audit resources and hiring levels and any impacts on the Group’s capital position.

audit plan and reviewing the reasons for the postponement of audits in greater depth.

Country  Debated audit risk, i.e. appetite and issue validation.

 Tracked the levels of riskunsatisfactory audits, including discussing the Group is preparedtime taken to take in specific countries.

The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political instability and economic weakness in South Africa, one of its main markets.

§  Debated economic conditions in South Africaissue audit reports and the future outlook.reasons for any delays.

§  ExaminedDiscussed BIA’s assessment of the actions already taken to manage risks, improve controlsmanagement control approach and asset qualitycontrol environment in Barclays UK, Barclays International and develop triggers for additional action in the event of further macro deterioration.functions.

§  MonitoredEvaluated the impact on South Africaoutcomes from BIA’s annual self-assessment.

 Commissioned an independent external review of BIA. The reviewer was selected as a result of a tender process also run by the slowdown in China and the fall in commodity prices.Committee.

  

The Committee sought additional information aroundreceived semi-annual thematic controls reports from BIA and a quarterly operational report during 2017.

The Committee reiterated its support for BIA’s recruitment plans which reflected significant activity during 2017 to ensure appropriate audit coverage to support the focus on BIA quality across the audit cycle. The Committee Chairman provided input into the recruitment of the two key roles of Head of Internal Audit in Barclays UK and Barclays International.

The Committee observed that the issues arising from unsatisfactory audits indicated that there was still work to do in embedding the required level of control consciousness across the Group and ensuring that control exceptions were highlighted clearly in management reporting. The Committee also requested that senior management support BIA in holding individuals accountable for failure to remediate risks effectively where they had failed BIA validation.

The Committee confirmed that it was satisfied with the outcome of the self-assessment of BIA performance and the independent external review, both of which evidenced that the function generally conforms to the standards set by the Institute of Internal Auditors. It further confirmed that it felt able to rely on the work of BIA in discharging its own responsibilities.

The Committee is providing oversight over the actions that had been taken to managearising from the risk profile in South Africa, including the impactexternal review. See page 19 below for further details of the actions taken to date. It requested a deep dive on the risk profile of the South African business, inviting the South African business heads to present on the actions that had been taken and how the business was positioned for a further economic downturn, including the impact of a further country rating downgrade.review.

 

 

 

 

18    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  21


    

    

    

 

 

 

 

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
External auditThe work and performance of KPMG

 Met with key members of the KPMG audit team to discuss the 2017 audit plan and agree areas of focus.

 Assessed regular reports from KPMG on the progress of the 2017 audit and any material accounting and control issues identified.

 Discussed KPMG’s feedback on Barclays’ critical accounting estimates and judgements.

 Discussed KPMG’s draft report on certain control areas and the control environment ahead of the 2017 year end.

 Discussed the approach to KPMG’s annual report to the PRA which will be issued following completion of the 2017 audit.

 Considered the draft SOX controls report and the draft audit opinion.

The Committee approved the audit plan and the main areas of focus.

The Committee also approved the principal services agreement and terms of engagement in connection with KPMG’s appointment as the Group’s auditors.

Read more about the Committee’s role in assessing the performance, effectiveness and independence of the external auditor and the quality of the external audit below.

The Committee also covered the following matters:

 tracked the progress of specific work being done to enhance Barclays’ financial crime controls, including the function’s investigation capabilities, in particular in relation to prevention and detection activities. The Committee also assessed the Group Money Laundering Officer’s annual report

 assessed the status of the programme in place to ensure Barclays’ compliance with client assets (CASS) regulatory requirements, including approving the annual client assets audit report and discussing the potential impact of Structural Reform on client assets

 evaluated the outcomes of the assessment of the Committee’s performance and any areas of Committee performance that needed to be enhanced

 reviewed and updated its terms of reference, recommending them to the Board for approval.

In addition to these matters, as highlighted above in the section of the table headed ‘Internal audit’ the Committee commissioned an independent review of BIA which was undertaken by Deloitte during the second half of 2017. The Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors requires an independent external review of internal audit functions to be carried out at least every five years. Following a selection process, the Committee commissioned Deloitte to conduct this review reporting directly to the Committee. The report concluded that:

 BIA demonstrates general conformance with the relevant standards and guidelines.

 BIA has an effective core audit methodology which reflects investment in Agile ways of working and data analytics which has helped to drive continuous improvement. In this respect it is aligned with or ahead of peers.

 BIA’s purpose and remit is clearly defined and the function is positioned appropriately within the governance framework of the organisation/ its role as an objective third line of defence. This role has been supported by the clearer delineation of the first line role of the newly created Chief Controls Office.

 The focus on increased headcount in BIA will help drive audit capacity and capability through enhanced specialist skills/ knowledge. Deloitte reported that BIA cares about its people and has created a supportive environment in which to work.

 While there are opportunities to improve BIA’s impact, they are able to deliver effective feedback on the operation of controls that address key risks.

The report paid close attention to the matters raised in the 2016 PRA letter regarding BIA, and Deloitte met with the PRA as part of its review. The Committee was satisfied with the conclusions drawn in the report, while noting the potential development areas identified, in particular, extending the use of data analytics. BIA has drawn up an action plan in response to the review and the Committee will continue to monitor the delivery of this plan.

External auditor

Following an external audit tender in 2015, PWC was replaced in 2017 as Barclays’ statutory auditor by KPMG. Guy Bainbridge of KPMG is Barclays’ senior statutory auditor with effect from the audit for the 2017 financial year.

Assessing external auditor effectiveness, auditor objectivity and independence and non-audit services

The Committee is responsible for assessing the effectiveness, objectivity and independence of the Group’s Auditor, KPMG and in 2017 the Committee was particularly concerned to ensure that the external auditor transition period was managed effectively. This responsibility was discharged throughout the year at formal Committee meetings, during private meetings with KPMG and via discussions with key executive stakeholders. In addition to the matters noted above, during 2017 the Committee:

 approved the terms of the audit engagement letter and associated fees, on behalf of the Board

 discussed and agreed revisions to the Group policy on theProvision of Services by theGroup Statutory Auditorand regularly analysed reports from management on the non-audit services provided to Barclays.

 evaluated and approved revisions to the Group policy onEmployment of Employeesor Workers from the Statutory Auditorand ensured compliance with the policy by regularly assessing reports from management detailing any appointments made

 was briefed by KPMG on critical accounting judgements and estimates

 assessed any potential threats to independence that were self-identified and reported by KPMG

 reviewed the report on KPMG issued by the FRC’s Audit Quality Review team.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    19


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Audit Committee report

KPMG’s performance, independence and objectivity during 2017 were formally assessed at the beginning of 2018 by way of a questionnaire completed by key stakeholders across the Group. The questionnaire was designed to evaluate KPMG’s audit process and addressed matters including the auditor transition, quality of planning and communication, technical knowledge, the level of scrutiny and challenge applied and KPMG’s understanding of the business. In addition KPMG have nominated a senior partner on the audit team reporting to the Senior Statutory Auditor to have specific responsibility for ensuring audit quality. The Committee therefore met with the partner concerned without the Senior Statutory Auditor in order to receive a report on his assessment of audit quality.

Taking into account the results of all of the above, the Committee considered that KPMG maintained their independence and objectivity and the audit process was effective.

Non-audit services

In order to safeguard the Auditor’s independence and objectivity, Barclays has in place a policy setting out the circumstances in which the Auditor may be engaged to provide services other than those covered by the Group audit.The Group Policy on the Provision of Services by the Group Statutory Auditor (the “Policy”) applies to all Barclays’ subsidiaries and other material entities over which Barclays has significant influence. The Policy therefore included Barclays Africa Group Limited up until the point of accounting deconsolidation. The core principle of the Policy is that non-audit services (other than those legally required to be carried out by the Group’s Auditor) should only be performed by the Auditor in certain, controlled circumstances. The Policy sets out those types of services that are strictly prohibited and those that are allowable in principle. Any service types that do not fall within either list are considered by the Committee Chairman on a case by case basis, supported by a risk assessment provided by management.

Under the Policy, the Committee has pre-approved all allowable services for which fees are less than £100,000, or less than £25,000 for tax advisory and tax planning services. However, all proposed work, regardless of the fees, must be sponsored by a senior executive and recorded on a centralised online system, with a detailed explanation of the clear commercial benefit arising from engaging the auditor over other potential service providers. The audit firm engagement partner must also confirm that the engagement has been approved in accordance with the auditor’s own internal ethical standards and does not pose any threat to the auditor’s independence or objectivity. All requests to engage the auditor are assessed by independent management before work can commence. Requests for allowable service types in respect of which the fees are expected to meet or exceed the above thresholds must be approved by the Chairman of the Committee before work is permitted to

begin. Services where the fees are expected to be £250,000 or higher must be approved by the Committee as a whole. All expenses and disbursements must be included in the fees calculation. The thresholds remained the same following the annual review of the Policy in 2017.

During 2017, all engagements where expected fees met or exceeded the above thresholds were evaluated by either the Committee Chairman or the Committee as a whole who, before confirming any approval, assured themselves that there was justifiable reason for engaging the auditor and that its independence and objectivity would not be threatened. No requests to use KPMG were declined in 2017 (2016: one). On a quarterly basis, the Committee scrutinised details of individually approved and pre-approved services undertaken by KPMG in order to satisfy itself that they posed no risk to independence, either in isolation or on an aggregated basis. For the purposes of the Policy, the Committee has determined that any pre-approved service of a value of under £50,000 is to be regarded as clearly trivial in terms of its impact on Barclays’ financial statements and has required the Group Financial Controller to specifically review and confirm to the Committee that any pre-approved service with a value of £50,000-£100,000 (or up to £25,000 for tax advisory and tax planning services) may be regarded as clearly trivial. The Committee undertook a review of pre-approved services at its meeting in December 2017 and satisfied itself that such pre-approved services were clearly trivial in the context of their impact on the financial statements.

The fees payable to KPMG for the year ended 31 December 2017 amounted to £48m, of which £10m (2016: £17m) was payable in respect of non-audit services (KPMG was appointed as the Group’s statutory auditor from the financial year beginning 1 January 2017). A breakdown of the fees payable to the auditor for statutory audit and non-audit work can be found in Note 42. Of the £10m of non-audit services provided by KPMG during 2017, the significant categories of engagement, i.e. services where the fees amounted to more than £500,000, included:

audit-related services: services in connection with Client Asset Sourcebook Rules (“CASS) audits (while the CASS audit fell within the auditor’s scope of services, the fees for such services did not form part of the global fee arrangements and therefore required separated Audit Committee approval pursuant to the Policy)
quality assurance: support in connection with reports on the internal controls applicable to IBOR submission processes

transaction support: ongoing attestation and assurance services for treasury and capital markets transactions to meet regulatory requirements, including regular reporting obligations and verification reports

The fees paid to PwC for non-audit work during 2017, in the period before they resigned as the Group’s statutory auditor, and after they had resigned but before they were non-independent of certain Group entities (and therefore still fell within the Policy), were £3m (2016: £8m). Significant categories of engagement approved in 2017 included:

transaction support: ongoing support for treasury and capital markets transactions, including providing comfort and accounting letters to meet trust deed and regulatory obligations (this ongoing support transitioned to KPMG during 2017).

The Committee also reviewed the level of consultancy spend with PwC during 2017, which it had asked to be monitored in the immediate period after they stepped down as the Group’s auditors. Work with an estimated value of £1m million was awarded to PwC during the year (this was in addition to the £3m in fees paid to PwC for non-audit services referred to above).

The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014

An external audit tender was conducted in 2015 and the decision was made to appoint KPMG as Barclays’ external auditor with effect from the 2017 financial year, with PwC resigning as the Group’s statutory auditor at the conclusion of the 2016 audit.

Barclays is in compliance with the requirements of The Statutory Audit Services for Large Companies Market Investigation (Mandatory Use of Competitive Tender Processes and Audit Committee Responsibilities) Order 2014, which relates to the frequency and governance of tenders for the appointment of the external auditor and the setting of a policy on the provision of non-audit services.

20    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


  Governance in Action – Preparation for IFRS 9

A significant activity for the Committee during 2017 has been overseeing the Group’s preparation for the implementation of IFRS 9.

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments is effective from 1 January 2018 and replaces the IAS 39 accounting standard. The new standard sets out the recognition and measurement requirements for financial instruments and has three parts: classification and measurement of financial assets, the requirements for impairment of financial assets and a hedge accounting model that is designed to more closely reflect risk management. As permitted, Barclays intends to continue with the existing IAS 39 hedge accounting model. The new impairment accounting model however has a significant impact on Barclays and the changes are complex and wide ranging classification and measurement also results in a number of much less significant changes. IFRS 9 has therefore been the subject of significant regulatory and market focus. Barclays has worked with the industry and regulators to agree a transitional framework for regulatory capital and on disclosures and has taken note of the best practice recommendations they have issued for the management of the transition to the new standard.

The Committee received regular updates on the status, judgements and financial impacts relating to the implementation of IFRS 9 during 2017 and the first quarter of 2018. It has overseen the steps required for Barclays’ transition to the new standard, in particular the delivery into production of the models and controls which are required for its implementation.

Throughout the process, the Committee emphasised to management the importance of developing the models to support business decision making to manage risk and ensure appropriate customer outcomes. The Committee reviewed the internal governance and validation processes in Risk and Finance and received regular updates from KPMG on their assurance work. The Committee also received reports from BIA following the audits undertaken in respect of the IFRS 9 programme, with a number of further audits planned for 2018. The Committee also reviewed the key estimates made by management in considering future economic scenarios and the criteria for determining when significant credit deterioration is observed.

In line with its terms of reference, the Committee has been closely involved in the review of all material external financial reporting relating to IFRS 9 and is focussed on ensuring clarity, completeness and appropriateness of the Group’s disclosures, particularly given the complexity and technical challenges of this standard. The Committee reviewed the best estimate impact on the Group which was disclosed in Barclays’ third quarter results and the updated IAS 8 disclosures included in the 2017 financial statements.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    21


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Risk Committee report

LOGO

The Committee continued to monitor UK economic trends, consumer behaviour and portfolio performance, and a prudent approach to lending was maintained.

LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

The focus of the Committee during 2017 has continued to be on assessing the impact of important macro-economic and market developments on the risk profile of the Group. Credit risk management during 2017 was primarily concerned with the level of exposure to consumer debt both in the UK and US. In the UK, the Committee in 2016 had accepted the recommendation of Management to pursue a conservative approach to managing growth and balances in credit card debt. This had been prompted by the rising level of personal debt in the UK and concerns of weaker growth and higher inflation resulting from the country’s vote to leave the European Union. This theme persisted in 2017, as the Committee continued to monitor UK economic trends, consumer behaviour and portfolio performance, and a prudent approach to lending was maintained. In the US, in late 2016, there had been nascent signs of weakness in the consumer credit portfolio. The Committee had requested Management to perform detailed analyses of the balances and, based on this work, approved in early 2017 the sale of a proportion of the weaker segments of the portfolio. This action, along with increased conservatism during the year in lending and portfolio quality, has moderated the impact on Barclays of increasing delinquencies among US credit card borrowers being seen among US credit card lenders.

While the impairment performance of the Bank was largely within plan, wholesale credit performance in the UK was slightly weaker than in the US. The Bank experienced higher impairment in its corporate lending book in the UK from the default of certain borrowers in the service sector. In the US, improved economic conditions, and higher energy prices resulted in favourable corporate impairment trends compared to 2016.

In recent years, the Committee has been closely supervising the strengthening of the capital position of the Bank. Progress continued in 2017 as the Bank’s capital ratios continued to improve. In assessing the adequacy of the Bank’s capital position, the Committee took into account current financial performance, the impact of expected regulatory developments (including structural reform), and estimates of the costs of resolving past conduct and litigation issues. Likewise, the Committee is pleased that the liquidity risk in the Bank has been closely monitored and strengthened over the past year.

An important role of the Committee each year is to recommend the risk appetite of the Bank to the Board: its ability to earn an appropriate return while being able to withstand shocks in the market and economic environment. In addition, the Committee monitors closely the assessment of the Bank’s performance under a variety of regulatory stress tests. We evaluate not just the outcome of these analyses but the means by which they are performed, particularly the assessment of model risk. These efforts increased in 2017, as the Bank prepared for the first stress test of the US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC), in addition to completing the newly introduced Biennial Exploratory Scenario for the Bank of England stress test.

The Committee assesses external conditions as part of establishing risk appetite. These remain challenging and our objective was to position the Bank conservatively to deal with economic uncertainty. Key themes that developed during 2017 with potential to have a significant first order impact on Barclays’ businesses included heightened political and economic risk in the UK in the backdrop of Brexit negotiations, increased geo-political risk impacting the delicately poised global economy, and a shortage of new transaction flow in Leveraged Finance underwriting driving tighter terms. Other emerging risks with potential to impact Barclays include volatility in the UK Pension scheme, UK property price stress and volatility in financial markets after a long period of quiescent asset

appreciation. The Committee maintains regular oversight of exposure to the key risk themes it has identified and actions taken by Management in response.

During the year, the Committee also evaluated the financial and capital impacts of operational risk. The Committee has noted, and encouraged, the efforts by Management to improve the Risk and Control Self-Assessment programme in Operational Risk. This work is important in an environment of heightened cyber risk and increased operational complexity as the Bank implements structural reform.

As in past years, the Committee reviewed the execution by Management of material regulatory programmes and initiatives. These included the BCBS239 effort to improve the quality and reliability of data and information, and IFRS 9, a new standard for the estimation of credit impairment.

Committee performance

The performance of the Committee during 2017 was assessed as part of an internal annual Committee effectiveness review. The conclusion of my Board colleagues was that the Committee is considered to operate effectively and that the Board continues to have a high degree of confidence in the diligence and coverage of the Committee. Feedback from the review indicated that the Committee was both effective and influential in identifying areas of risk where Barclays needs to change its performance or adjust its risk profile.

One of the areas identified for improvement was to consider whether the Committee would benefit from deeper expertise by including a member with a risk function management background and we will give further consideration to this in 2018. The review also highlighted the need to ensure that the way in which the Committee works with the Board Reputation and Board Audit Committees continues to capture all significant issues effectively while minimising any overlap. I continued to work closely with my fellow Board Committee Chairmen during

22    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


2017, particularly with the Board Audit Committee Chairman in order to clarify the responsibility of each committee in relation to operational risk matters during the year which each Committee has a role in overseeing. We will work to embed this further in 2018. The Committee will also focus on ensuring there is a framework in place to ensure clear allocation of responsibilities regarding the Committee’s interaction with the risk committees of Barclays UK and Barclays International under the new Group structure.

You can read more about the outcomes of the Board effectiveness review on page 40.

Looking ahead

2018 is important for Barclays as it completes the restructuring required under the structural reform programme. As a result, the firm will have two important subsidiary legal entities in Barclays UK, the core domestic franchise in the UK, and Barclays International, the Corporate and Investment Banking and international consumer businesses of the firm. These will be in addition to the US Intermediate Holding Company, which is part of Barclays International. The Committee will pay close attention to the executive’s management of risk within and across these entities.

We expect that credit and employment conditions in the UK will continue to be uncertain, as future trade and economic arrangements with the EU take shape. In the US, the impact of the corporate tax reform on the health of companies and consumers will need assessment. Lastly, the Committee will continue to monitor the risk to Barclays from volatility in financial markets, which have experienced many years of steady asset appreciation.

Tim Breedon

Chairman, Board Risk Committee

21 February 2018

  Committee allocation of time (%)

  LOGO

    2017     2016 

1 Risk profile/risk appetite (incl capital and liquidity management)

   53    52 

2 Key risk issues

   26    26 

3 Internal control/risk policies

   12    8 

4 Other (incl remuneration and governance issues)

   9    14 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages 5 to 6.

The Committee met nine times in 2017, with two of the meetings held at Barclays’ New

York offices. The chart above shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2017. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief

Executive, Group Finance Director, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Barclays Treasurer and Group General Counsel, as well as representatives from the businesses and other representatives from the Risk function. Representatives from Barclays’ external auditor, KPMG, and until March 2017, representatives from the outgoing external auditor, PwC, also attended meetings.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to  attend

Tim Breedon

9/9

Mike Ashley

9/9

Reuben Jeffery

9/9

Diane Schueneman

9/9
Matthew Lester (from 1 September 2017)3/3
Steve Thieke (to 10 May 2017)3/3

Committee role and responsibilities

The Committee’s main responsibilities include:

reviewing and recommending to the Board the Group’s financial and operational risk appetite

monitoring the Group’s financial and operational risk profile

commissioning, receiving and considering reports on key financial and operational risk issues

LOGOThe Committee’s terms of reference are available at
home.barclays/corporategovernance

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    23


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Risk Committee report

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2017 are described below:

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Risk appetite and stress testing, i.e. the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives, including testing whether the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress.The risk context to Medium Term Plan (MTP), the financial parameters and constraints and mandate and scale limits for specific business risk exposures; the Group’s internal stress testing exercises, including scenario selection and financial constraints, stress testing themes and the results and implications of stress tests, including those run by the Bank of England (BoE).

  Assessed the risk context for the 2017 MTP, including general economic and financial conditions and how these had been reflected in planning assumptions.

  Debated the assumptions, parameters and results of the internal stress test of the risk appetite of the 2017 MTP.

  Discussed and agreed mandate and scale limits for Credit, Market and Treasury and capital risk.

  Evaluated the BoE annual cyclical stress test results, and the results of a stress test under the BoE biennial exploratory scenario.

  Observed and debated regulatory and market reaction to the publication of BoE stress test results.

  Considered and approved internal stress test themes and the financial constraints and scenarios for stress testing risk appetite for the 2018 MTP.

  Considered the Federal Reserve Board’s feedback on the US Intermediate Holding Company’s Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (“CCAR”) capital plan following the submission of the CCAR stress test results.

The Committee recommended the proposed risk appetite for 2017 to the Board for approval, although noted that this may need to be revisited to take account of the impact of IFRS 9 in due course. It encouraged management to make further progress on enhancing infrastructure used to conduct the internal stress test. The Committee approved the 2017 annual stress test results for submission to the BoE, including the range of management actions and overlays designed to mitigate risk impacts.

Similarly, the Committee approved the results of the stress test under the BoE biennial exploratory scenario and recommended that the results should be taken into consideration for strategy projections.

In recommending the internal stress test and risk appetite for the 2018 MTP, the Committee noted and considered that the severity of the internal stress test had been higher than normal, which provided added resilience to the various challenges for the MTP, such as macroeconomic issues.

Capital and funding, i.e. having sufficient capital and financial resources to meet the Group’s regulatory requirements and its obligations as they fall due, to maintain its credit rating, to support growth and strategic options.The trajectory to achieving required regulatory and internal targets and capital and leverage ratios.

  Debated on a regular basis, capital performance against plan, tracking the capital trajectory, any challenges and opportunities and regulatory policy developments.

  Assessed on a regular basis, liquidity performance against both internal and regulatory requirements.

  Regularly monitored capital and funding requirements on a legal entity basis.

  Assessed the possible implications of litigation and investigations on the Group’s liquidity position, including a review of the Bank’s liquidity risk control framework.

  Monitored the funding risk and capital volatility associated with the Barclays pension scheme.

The Committee supported the forecast capital and funding trajectory and the actions identified by management to manage the Group’s capital position. It approved the proposed capital and liquidity processes for Barclays UK for submission to the regulator as part of its banking licence application.

The Committee considered and approved the Group capital adequacy assessment together with the methodologies and results of the reverse stress testing for the submission of the 2017 Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) as well as the Group’s 2017 Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

Political and economic risk, i.e. the impact on the Group’s risk profile of political and economic developments and macroeconomic conditions.  The potential impact on the Group’s risk profile of political developments, such as elections in other European countries, as well as continuing to monitor the UK general election and budget statement,impact of the potential exitaftermath of countries from the Eurozone, and weakening macroeconomic conditions, such as disruption and volatility in financial markets.UK’s EU Referendum.  

§  AssessedMonitored progress on actions to mitigate the risk of the potential impact of negative interest rates in the UK general election and steps that could be taken to manage any market volatility.on Barclays.

§  EvaluatedMonitored the potential risks arising fromimpacts of Brexit, including a general macroeconomic slowdown and from financial markets disruption, including the global impact of the economic slowdown in China.“hard” Brexit.

§  Assessed global consumer indebtedness indicatorsConsidered trends in the UK economy, including risk of inflation amid negative real wage growth.

  Continued to monitor the risks relating to South Africa while Barclays still had control of Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL).

  Monitored Barclays’ exposures to certain products, and with particular focus on redenomination risk, and the potential impact of rising consumer debt on the Group’s risk profile.

§  Debated the Group’s Eurozone exposures in the context of the potential break-up of the Eurozone in the event of a Greek exit and assessedsingle country leaving the Group’s levels of redenomination risk in the Eurozone.Euro.

 

  

Following the further sell-down of the equity stake in Barclays Africa and the subsequent proportionate regulatory deconsolidation, the Committee agreed that South Africa should be removed as an ongoing risk theme, although it continued to maintain oversight of any emerging risk. It also agreed to remove negative interest rates as a key risk theme on the basis that the actions previously identified and agreed to mitigate the risk were nearing completion.

The Committee asked managementsuggested that monitoring geo-political risks in Europe should be broadened to evaluate macroeconomic conditions and market indicators to inform the strategic plan and risk appetite proposals for 2016, soinclude other regions, but requested that the Group is positioned appropriately.

Retail credit risk,

i.e. UK property market, interest rate risk.

The potential overheating of the UK housing market, particularly in London and the South East and the Group’s risk appetite for and management of sectors such as the buy-to-let sector.

§  Debated UK property market indicators and conditions, particularly in the high loan to value (LTV) andthe buy-to-let markets and potential economic and political risks to that market.

§  Evaluated the Group’s lending criteria and its approach to assessing customers on affordability.

§  Assessed the potential impact of an increase in interest rates on customers, including how customers had been stress tested and assessed against affordability criteria.

The Committee encouraged management toChina continue to takebe reported as a conservative approach to UK mortgage lending in the buy-to-let market and emphasised the need to keep risks and exposures within agreed appetite.

Specific sectorseparate geo-political risk theme.

i.e. the Group’s risk profile in sectors showing signs of stress, such as the oil sector.

The Group’s exposures to the oil and commodities sectors in light of the price weakness and volatility in these sectors during 2015.

§  Regularly assessed the Group’s exposures to the oil sector, including assessing steps taken with regard to the credit strategy for the sector, how the portfolio was performing and whether this was in line with expectations.

§  Evaluated the Group’s exposures to the commodities sector and actions taken to identify any names at risk and reduce exposures.

The Committee supported the actions that had been taken by management to manage the Group’s risks and exposures to the oil and commodities sectors. It requested a stress test to assess the impact of further (and longer) oil price weakness on the Group’s lending portfolio, including indirect exposure.

Operational Risk

From 1 July 2015, the Committee took responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk.

The Group’s operational risk capital requirements and any material changes to the Group’s operational risk profile and performance versus risk appetite.

§  Evaluated operational risk capital and debated the potential for an increase in regulatory operational capital requirements.

§  Debated whether Barclays advanced status for calculating operational risk capital should be retained.

§  Tracked operational risk key indicators via regular reports from the Head of Operational Risk.

The Committee focused its oversight of operational risk on the financial and capital implications, debating in particular the potential impact of regulatory operational risk requirements.

 

 

 

22  |  24    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Risk Committee report

     
Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken

Risk governance,

i.e. the capability, governance and controls that the Group has over the management of risk.

The development of a scorecard to assist the Committee in assessing risk capability across the Group; further enhancement to the limit framework and governance of leveraged finance; the actions being taken to enhance controls and governance around risk models.

§  Requested development of a risk capability scorecard.

§  Regularly debated conditions in the leveraged finance market, tracking market indicators and the Group’s risk exposures and assessing the limit framework for leveraged finance and underwriting, including proposed changes to the framework to strengthen controls.

§  Assessed the progress of enhancements to risk models controls and governance, including the role of the Group’s Independent Validation Unit.

§  Evaluated revisions proposed to the ERMF.

The Committee approved the approach to the risk capability scorecard and requested a formal annual assessment of capability, with the option of an external assessment every three years. The Committee approved a revised limit framework for leveraged finance transactions and approved underwriting limits in general. The Committee concluded that good progress had been made on enhancing the controls and governance around risk models and asked management to focus on improving the quality of models and data quality further. The Committee also recommended the revised ERMF to the Board for approval.

RemunerationThe scope of any risk adjustments to be taken into account by the Board Remuneration Committee when making remuneration decisions for 2015.

§   Evaluated the Risk function’s view of performance, which informed remuneration decisions for 2015.

The Committee supported the Risk function’s view of 2015 risk performance and endorsed the report that had been submitted to the Board Remuneration Committee.

The Remuneration Report on pages50 to 83 includes more detail on how risk is taken into account in remuneration decisions.

 

In addition, the Committee also covered the following matters in 2015:

 

§  regularly tracked the utilisation of risk appetite and evaluated the Group’s risk profile

 

§  evaluated the impact of the Swiss franc revaluation on the Group’s electronic trading systems and asked for any lessons learned to be applied to other electronic platforms

 

§  debated risk related matters arising from regulatory assessments and the actions needed to address any specific issues raised

 

§  approved regulatory submissions, including the Individual Capital Adequacy Assessment Process and the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment

 

§  assessed and debated a report on its own performance during 2014, including considering whether its remit should be revised to cover operational risk and assessing the degree of challenge and support and value it provided to the Risk function

 

§  discussed and agreed on its own training needs, resulting in two workshops being held in 2015, one on risk appetite and one on structural reform, with a further briefing session on the impact of IFRS 9 planned for 2016

 

§  approved amendments to its terms of reference to reflect its revised remit and to ensure they remained in line with best practice and

 

§  discussed and agreed its specific responsibilities for the oversight of operational risk, focusing on the capital and financial impacts, leaving the Board Audit Committee to oversee operational risk control issues.

  Board Risk Committee allocation of time (%)  
            2015  2014  
  

 

LOGO

 1 Risk profile/risk appetite  43  57 
    (including capital and liquidity management)     
   2 Key risk issues  31  19 
   3 Internal control/risk policies  11  11 
   4 Other (including remuneration and  15  13 
    governance issues)     
         
         
         
  

LOGO

  Read more about Barclays’ risk management on pages 95 to  
    109 and 336 to 409  
      
            
            
            
            
            
            
            
            
            
 

    

 

 

                   

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  23


What we did in 2015

Board Reputation Committee reporta

LOGO

‘The Committee’s responsibilities were reshaped during 2015 to focus on three main pillars: conduct and compliance; reputation; and citizenship.’

Dear Fellow Shareholders

The Board Reputation Committee underwent a period of change during 2015, in terms of both a reassessment of Board Committee responsibilities and membership. John McFarlane succeeded Reuben Jeffery III as Chairman of the Committee in March 2015 and, following John’s appointment as Executive Chairman in July 2015, the Board asked me to assume the role of Committee Chairman, a position I held until my retirement from the Board at the end of December 2015.

The Committee’s responsibilities were reshaped during 2015 to focus on three main pillars: conduct and compliance; reputation; and citizenship. Culture and conduct are the bedrock of the organisation and, with the right culture, much of Barclays’ exposure to conduct risk can be reduced. To this end, the Committee has continued to focus on these issues, assessing progress against plans for embedding our conduct risk programme and implementing cultural change throughout the Group. We assessed deep-dive reports into conduct risk within key businesses, such as Barclays Africa and the Cards business, and evaluated the findings of a report by Air Marshal Sir David Walker, commissioned by management to give an independent view on whether we are making progress with cultural change. I am pleased to report that, although there is more to be done, progress on both has been good and there is strong commitment throughout the Group to embedding the necessary changes.

The Committee also tracked the exposure of Barclays, and the financial sector generally, to reputational risks. Reputational risk is a risk type that is constantly evolving, with potential new risks emerging while we are implementing controls to manage identified risks. Consequently, we have taken a thematic approach to identifying our key reputational risks and have ensured that we look ahead to identify emerging risks enabling us to mitigate them early. You can read more on pages25 and 26 about the significant matters addressed during the year.

Committee performance

As part of the annual Board effectiveness review the performance of the Board’s committees was considered and I am pleased to report that the Committee is considered to be effective. The Committee is relatively new and areas for improvement included continuing to refine its agenda, particularly with regard to compliance and conduct risk, and ensuring that it does not duplicate the work of other Board Committees. Please turn to the report of the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and 34 for more details.

Looking ahead

My successor, Sir Gerry Grimstone, will be assessing the areas of focus for the Committee in 2016 and I wish him and the Committee well for the future.

LOGO

Sir Michael Rake

Chairman, Board Reputation Committee until 31 December 2015

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee comprises independent non-executive Directors, with the exception of Wendy Lucas-Bull, who the Board has decided to deem as non-independent for the purposes of the UK Corporate Governance Code, owing to her position as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. During 2015, there were a number of changes to the membership of the Committee, which are set out in the table below.

The Committee met four times during 2015 and the chart on page26 shows how it allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by management, including the Group Chief Executive, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, General Counsel, Group Corporate Relations Director and the Heads of Compliance, Conduct Risk and Operational Risk, as well as representatives from the businesses and other functions.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend
Reuben Jeffery III (Chairman and member to
31 March 2015)
1/1
John McFarlane (Chairman from 1 April 2015 –
16 July 2015)
2/2
Sir Michael Rake (Chairman and member from
17 July 2015 – 31 December 2015)
2/2
Mike Ashley (to 31 August 2015)2/2
Tim Breedon (to 31 August 2015)2/2
Wendy Lucas-Bull4/4
Dambisa Moyo4/4
Diane de Saint Victor4/4
Sir John Sunderland (to 23 April 2015)1/1
Frits van Paasschen (from 1 September 2015)2/2

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

§  ensure, on behalf of the Board, the efficiency of the processes for identification and management of conduct and reputational risk and

§  oversee Barclays’ Citizenship Strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

Until the end of June 2015, the Committee also had responsibility for oversight of operational risk. Following a review by the Board of its governance arrangements, responsibility for the oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk was reallocated to the Board Financial Risk Committee, which was renamed the Board Risk Committee. The Board Audit Committee oversees the control aspects of operational risk.

LOGO

The Committee’s terms of reference are available at

home.barclays

Note

a   Formerly called the Board Conduct, Operational and Reputational Risk Committee

24  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Reputation Committee report

    

    

    

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2015 are described below:

 

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
ConductCredit risk, i.e. the potential for financial loss if customers fail to fulfil their contractual obligations.  Progress on embeddingConditions in the conductUK housing market, particularly in London and the South East; levels of UK consumer indebtedness, particularly in the context of the risk management framework, focus on specific conduct risksof inflation and continued reductionnegative real wage growth; and the performance of customer complaint levels.the UK and US Cards businesses, including levels of impairment.  

§  Continued its monitoringto assess and monitor conditions in the UK property market in case of signs of stress.

  Evaluated how management was tracking and responding to rising levels of consumer indebtedness, particularly unsecured credit in both the UK and US.

  Discussed the PRA’s statement on consumer credit and unsecured lending in the UK, and considered Barclays’ response to the PRA statement.

  Scrutinised the performance of the UK and US Cards businesses, including the level of impairment.

  Reviewed and approved proposals for frameworks relating to Securities Financial Limits and Maximum Exposure Governance.

  Scrutinised a strategic review of business activity in the Corporate and Investment Bank (CIB).

The Committee focused on effective collections capability as an important tool of risk management.

The Committee encouraged management to carry on with its conservative approach to UK lending.

The Committee approved changes to the risk appetite levels for US Cards.

The Committee requested more granular detail of the impact of strategy changes on risk limits and oversight.

Operational risk, i.e. costs arising from human factors, inadequate processes and systems or external events.The Group’s operational risk capital requirements and any material changes to the Group’s operational risk profile and performance of specific operational risks against agreed risk appetite.

  Tracked operational risk key indicators via regular reports from the Head of Operational Risk.

  Debated specific areas of emerging risks, including conduct risk, programme via quarterly reports from management.

§  Specifically assessedcyber, execution risk, technology and data, including the status of the conduct risk programmescontrols that had been put in Barclays Africaplace for managing and across the Cards business.

§  Monitored regulators’ views of Barclays’ conduct risk management and reporting via updates from management.

§  Assessed progress made in reducing numbers of complaints, including those escalated to the Financial Ombudsman Service.avoiding such risks.

 

  The Committee welcomedfocused its attention on the progress made in embedding the conduct risk programmefinancial and requested more visibilitycapital impacts of the status of specific conduct risks. Itoperational risk. In relation to fraud, it encouraged management to continue to apply lessons learned from past events to prevent similar events occurring now or in the future. It was content with the progress made in embedding conduct risk in Barclays Africa, but encouraged greater simplification of the governance structuresfurther integrate strategy, models and communication. It also encouraged management to do more to reduce the number of complaints.operations.

Operational riskRisk framework and governance

(to July 2015)

  The frameworks, policies and talent and tools in place to support effective risk management of Barclays’ operational risk profile and exposure to significant operational risks.oversight.  

§  Monitored Barclays’ operational risk profile via quarterly reportsprogress on the implementation of an enhanced modelling framework, including receiving updates from management.Barclays Internal Audit on findings in relation to specific modelling processes.

§  Evaluated management’s strategyTracked the progress of significant risk management projects, including the progress on achieving compliance with the Basel Committee for addressing cyberBanking Supervision 239 (BCBS239) regulation for risk data aggregation principles as well as the roll out of the Risk and Control Self Assessment (RCSA) process across the Group. Please see the “Governance in Action” box on page 26 for further details about the Committee’s role in overseeing the RCSA process.

  Assessed risk management matters raised by Barclays’ regulators and the actions being taken by management to respond.

  Endorsed Legal risk and monitored its progress.Model risk, as new Principal Risks under the ERMF, forming part of the Committee’s roles and responsibilities in future.

§  Assessed Barclays’ exposure to technology risk and examined plans to resolve identified control issues byReviewed the endimplementation of the year.Enterprise Risk Management Framework during 2017 which had been designed to address feedback from the PRA following a review of the EMRF.

  

The Committee focused its attention on emerging risks and thoserequested a gap analysis together with an action plan to whichremediate specific weaknesses identified in the internal audit in relation to modelling.

The Committee assessed during the year the Group’s exposurerisk management capability in the form of a Risk Capability Scorecard and reviewed and approved proposals for the external third party evaluation which was increasing. It supported tactical and strategic actions proposed by managementscheduled to mitigate the Group’s risks, including endorsing management’s strategy for addressing cyber risk. The Committee also satisfied itself that progressbe performed in managing technology risk was good and there was a healthy focus on embedding the right culture.

early 2018.

Reputational issuesRemuneration  Ensuring that Barclays anticipates, identifies and manages reputational issues that may impact it orThe scope of any risk adjustments to be taken into account by the industry now or in the future.Board Remuneration Committee when making remuneration decisions for 2017.  

§  Tracked Barclays’ exposureDebated, in a joint meeting with the Board Reputation Committee, the Risk function’s view of 2017 performance, making a recommendation to reputational risks via twice-yearly management reports.

§  Examined the effectiveness ofBoard Remuneration Committee on the current reputationfinancial and operational risk framework, including assessing case studies on specific reputational matters.factors to be taken into account in remuneration decisions for 2017.

  The Committee took a thematic approach to its assessmentdiscussed the report of reputational risksthe Chief Risk Officer and guided managementconsidered the proposal put forward in its approach to managing them. It satisfied itself asrelation to the effectivenessimpact of relevant risk factors in determining 2017 remuneration decisions, noting that it should also include positive events such as the reputation risk framework.2017 Banking Standards Board report which had reported improvements on 2016.

 

 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |    25


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Risk Committee report

    

 

         

In addition, the Committee also covered the following matters in 2017:

  assessed Barclays’ exposures to the leveraged finance market, general conditions in that market and approved an updated leveraged finance framework which would be submitted annually to the Committee for approval

  was briefed by PwC on main risk issues identified during the 2016 year-end audit, specifically impairment, post-model adjustments, forbearance control issues, key valuation judgements (including in relation to the ESHLA portfolio), and key assumptions used in the pension scheme liabilities

  requested and evaluated a report on partnership programmes in the US Cards business with a focus on risk profile and credit quality

  considered a report on the effectiveness of the Committee and any areas of the Committee’s performance that could be improved

  reviewed and updated its terms of reference, recommending them to the Board for approval.

Governance in Action – Risk and Control Self Assessment Programme  

A key focus of the Committee in 2017 was oversight of the implementation of a revised Risk and Control Self Assessment (RCSA) programme. The RCSA enhancement programme was established as part of Barclays’ commitment to the effective management the Group’s Operational risk and extend both the scope of coverage across a wider range of risks, and also improve the granularity of management’s risk and control assessments of business processes. The programme is the firm-wide process led approach for management to identify and regularly assess material inherent risks and their associated controls, in order to mitigate these risks and reduce the likelihood and/or severity of losses to the firm from a Risk event.

In 2017, a number of pilot RCSAs were rolled out across the Group in addition to the regular RCSA process, which was also enhanced. Improvements were also made in the assessment of inherent risk values and the aggregation process for risk and control assessments across risk types. During the year, the Committee reviewed progress in terms of the RCSAs completed across the Group, and also considered the next steps in the review process and the results of the residual risk assessments. Based on the results of the pilot RCSAs undertaken,

the Committee was satisfied that the process will improve management’s understanding of the risk and control environment, so they can prioritise and remediate ineffective controls where required.

Following completion of the pilot RCSA programme, the Committee considered the ways in which the RCSA programme could be enhanced for the wider implementation of the programme in 2018. The Committee considered specific revisions of the 2017

RCSA programme with the aim of:

  improving the identification of inherent risk, control effectiveness and residual risk by going into detail at a more granular process level

  increasing the degree of independent challenge provided by all three lines of defence

  increasing the granularity of assessments for a further set of pilot RCSAs to estimate inherent risk at activity level by risk type, together with the identification and assessment of detailed operating controls by activity and residual risk.

The Committee will continue to work with management in 2018 on further refining and enhancing the RCSA programme.

26    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Reputation Committee report

LOGO

The Committee has been well positioned during 2017, a time of significant organisational change for the Group, to ensure that our people, whether within Barclays UK, Barclays International or the Group Service Company, continue to demonstrate behaviours and conduct that are consistent with the Barclays Values.

LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

This is my second report to you as Chairman of the Board Reputation Committee. At the conclusion of my last report I commented that the Committee, by way of its membership, executive engagement and reporting processes, had built a strong foundation on which to base its future operations and drive Barclays to be a governance leader in conduct, culture and reputation matters. This strong foundation has ensured that the Committee has been well positioned during 2017, a time of significant organisational change for the Group, to ensure that our people, whether within Barclays UK, Barclays International or the Group Service Company, continue to demonstrate behaviours and conduct that are consistent with theBarclays Values.

On two occasions during 2017 the Committee extended an invite to representatives of the Banking Standards Board (BSB) to present and discuss the outcomes of their 2016 and 2017 assessments of Barclays. As an independent third party with insights across the banking industry as a whole, the Committee attaches significant value to the insights offered by the BSB and I would like to extend my personal thanks to Dame Colette Bowe and her team at the BSB for their continuing work to promote the highest standards of behaviour in UK banking and restore public trust in the sector. We were encouraged to hear that the results had generally improved between 2016 and 2017 and were particularly pleased to see how strongly theBarclays Values still resonate with our colleagues. The Committee also carefully considered the BSB’s feedback on results relating to colleague resilience and you will find an outline of our discussion on colleague well-being on page 29.

One of the key challenges faced by the Committee is how to maintain oversight of Group Conduct and Culture matters as a whole, without overlooking the cultural differences that, naturally and quite rightly, exist between our different operating businesses and support functions. During the year the Committee actively discussed this challenge and, in an attempt to address this, I rebalanced the Committee’s agenda by introducing business and functional “Deep Dive” sessions into each meeting. The Deep Dives allow the Committee to understand the conduct, culture and customer satisfaction issues being faced in specific areas of the business and the actions undertaken to address them. Whilst consideration of our well-refined dashboards and Reputation risk reports ensure that Group-level metrics, challenges and initiatives remain clearly visible and subject to Committee consideration and challenge. You can read about some of the Deep Dives undertaken by the Committee during 2017 on the following pages.

A significant output from the Committee during 2017 resulted from discussions around Barclays’ historic commitments to the financing of certain fossil fuels projects, which resulted in a decision to develop a more proactive approach to the management of sustainability issues across the Barclays business. I would encourage you to refer to the Governance in Action box on page 32 for further details on this initiative.

Committee performance

Through the process of the annual Board effectiveness review, which confirmed the continued effectiveness of the Committee, the ongoing evolution of the Committee’s role and the increased impact that it had during the last year was clearly acknowledged. An area that the review identified for further consideration was the continued oversight of Conduct and Reputation risk matters in the post-structural reform corporate structure, which I will ensure is addressed by the Committee ahead of April 2018.

Looking ahead

Finally, I would like to record my thanks to Mike Roemer, who stepped down as Group Chief Compliance Officer in October 2017, for his outstanding contribution to the work of the Committee during his tenure in that role. I would also like to thank Diane de Saint Victor, who stepped down from the Committee on her retirement from the Board in May 2017. I look forward to working with our new Committee member, Mike Turner and, subject to regulatory approval, our new Group Chief Compliance Officer, Laura Padovani, as we continue to support the delivery of the Board’s collective vision of theBarclays Values.

Sir Gerry Grimstone

Chairman, Board Reputation Committee

21 February 2018

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    27


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Reputation Committee report

  Committee allocation of time (%)

  LOGO

    2017   2016* 

1 Conduct and compliance

   36%    33% 

2 Culture

   20%    21% 

3 Customer satisfaction

   14%    6% 

4 Citizenship

   16%    13% 

5 Brand & other Reputation risk

   14%    27% 

* 2016 figures have been rebased according to the significant matters considered by the Committee in 2017.

 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. During 2017, Diane de Saint Victor stepped down from the Committee and the Barclays Board with effect from 10 May 2017.

The Committee met four times during 2017 and the chart to the left shows how it allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by representatives from management, including the Group Chief Executive, Chief Compliance Officer, Chief Internal Auditor, Chief Risk Officer, Group General Counsel, Group Chief of Staff, Group HR Director and the Heads of Corporate Communications, Citizenship and Reputation, as well as senior representatives from the businesses and other functions. A representative from KPMG, Barclays’ external auditor, attended each Committee meeting during the year and representatives from the BSB attended two meetings during 2017.

MemberMeetings attended/eligible to attend

Sir Gerry Grimstone

4/4

Mike Ashley

4/4

Mary Francis

4/4

Dambisa Moyo

4/4
Diane de Saint Victor (to 10 May 2017)1/1

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

support the Board in promoting its collective vision of Barclays’ purpose, values, culture and behaviours

ensure, on behalf of the Board, the efficiency of the processes for identification and management of Conduct and Reputation risk

oversee Barclays’ conduct in relation to its corporate and societal obligations, including setting the guidance, direction and policies for Barclays’ approach to customer and regulatory matters and Barclays’ Citizenship Strategy, including advising the Board and management on these matters.

LOGOThe Committee’s terms of reference
are available at
home.barclays/corporategovernance

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 2017 are described below:

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
Conduct riskMonitoring the risks that can arise from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.

  Discussed updates from management on Conduct risk and considered performance against Conduct risk indicators at each meeting.

  Discussed the specific Conduct risks associated with certain business areas and the status of initiatives in place to address those risks and further strengthen the culture of the business.

  Received reports from Barclays Internal Audit (BIA) in respect of internal audit activities on conduct risk management matters, including details of any unsatisfactory audit reports and remediation steps identified.

  Discussed and approved the Conduct Risk Framework, with Conduct risk having been identified as a Principal Risk under the Barclays Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF).

  Received forward looking information on regulatory developments, including the issuance of new consultations by regulators, that might have a Conduct risk impact on Barclays in the future.

  Approved the annual Compliance Plan.

  Considered and approved the proposed methodology for calculating Conduct risk adjustments to incentive pools.

In line with its re-categorisation under the ERMF, the Committee adopted Board-level oversight of financial crime risk and conducted a Deep Dive into this area. The Conduct dashboard report was updated to include financial crime information and metrics, and the Committee was encouraged by management’s open and transparent approach to engaging with regulators on financial crime matters.

The Committee considered the differing regulatory requirements placed on the UK and US Cards businesses and have suggested that a “Barclays view” should overlay the requirements of local regulations to ensure that all retail facing businesses within the Group operate within a framework that prioritises the concept of “Treating Customers Fairly”.

During discussion of the realignment of businesses between Barclays UK and Barclays International, the Committee encouraged management to take advantage of opportunities presented by structural reform to address some areas of Conduct risk by harmonising policies and operations, in areas such as collections and affordability assessments.

The Committee considered an update from BIA on the use of Conduct risk information by legal entities within the Group and their assessment of reporting mechanisms and the escalation of issues up the organisational hierarchy.

28    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


     

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Cultural changeprogress  TheReviewing management’s progress being made on embedding of cultural change.a values-based culture across the organisation.  

§  EvaluatedDebated culture dashboards presented at each meeting and the outputs of an independent review by Air Marshal Sir David Walker.progress being made to embed cultural change across Barclays globally.

§  AssessedReceived regular updates on colleague engagement metrics and the results of employee YourView surveys and considered proposed changes to the YourView methodology.

  Approved the adaption of the Culture dashboard to include the monitoring of cultural attributes across the firm.

  Considered and discussed with representatives of the BSB the results of their 2016 and 2017 Annual Reviews of Barclays.

  Considered a Deep Dive analysis on culture within Barclaycard UK, including the process and challenges of integrating the UK Cards business into Barclays UK.

  Considered feedback from the FCA on the Conduct and Culture dashboards.

  Received information on management’s initiatives to improve colleague well-being and resilience, including actively encouraging employees to work dynamically and providing a supportive environment in which colleagues feel able to talk about the impacts of stress and mental health concerns.

  Considered draft disclosures on the Gender Pay Gap within the Group and industry comparators.

Through consideration of the Culture dashboards and YourView results, the Committee was encouraged by the consistently strong sustainable engagement scores achieved throughout 2017. Improvements have been made in the area of colleague enablement, however the Committee appreciated management’s acknowledgement that further improvement is still required in this area, notably in terms of reducing perceived bureaucracy throughout the organisation.

The Committee discussed the importance of a culture in which colleagues feel able to speak up and raise concerns. Particular attention has been paid to whistleblowing metrics throughout the year and, on recommendation of the Committee, the YourView survey system now contains a direct link to Barclays’ whistleblowing resources with the intention of further encouraging and supporting employees to report instances of unethical or inappropriate behaviour.

Additional and more detailed information is becoming available to the Committee, by way of reporting on cultural attributes, on what employees perceive to be the most prevalent facets of Barclays’ organisational culture. It is intended that this information be used to monitor attainment of a set of desired attributes and facilitate further discussion and action in order to achieve this.

By way of discussion of the FCA’s feedback on Barclays’ dashboards, the Committee acknowledged that the dashboards are just one of a number of key management information tools used to set its agenda and facilitate an industry-wide reportongoing discussion with management on culture which leads, in some cases, to deliberate actions being taken by the Group and business executive committees.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    29


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Reputation Committee report

Area of Thirty (G30)focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Customer satisfactionEnsuring fair outcomes for customers by monitoring complaints volumes, the standard and quality of complaints handling processes and other relevant metrics.

  Debated complaints dashboards and performance against key indicators at each meeting.

  Gave consideration to the impact that matters, such as an effective communication channel, have on customer complaints volumes.

  Considered the quality of the processes in place to address and resolve customer complaints.

  Monitored trends in the underlying causes of complaints and considered forward looking analysis to identify events (both industry wide and Barclays-specific) which could influence the volume and timings of complaints.

  Considered the differing complaints profiles of the Barclays UK and Barclays International businesses and the actions being undertaken to positively improve the customer journey by utilising complaints management information (MI).

  Requested further insight into banking conductthe first line management of customer complaints and cultureconducted a Deep Dive into Barclays UK’s complaints handling processes (Barclays UK receives the majority of Barclays’ customer complaints given its retail focus).

  Requested additional Deep Dives on areas of the Barclays International business that have a retail customer base and how Barclays’ practices benchmarked againstconsidered the best practices and suggestions outlined in that report.complaints profiles of those businesses.

  Considered the progress being made by relevant businesses to improve their respective net promoter score (NPS).

  

The Committee endorsed Air Marshal Sir David Walker’swas pleased to see a general downward trend in the number of complaints received by Barclays during 2017.

While the Committee still receives a Group-wide report which confirmedon complaints, underlying reporting has been refined in line with organisational changes to ensure the Committee receives a clear view on the complaints metrics of Barclays UK and Barclays International respectively. The Committee made recommendations to management, in the context of the structural reform programme, in respect of ensuring a consistent “Barclays” customer experience is received by retail clients whether they are being serviced by Barclays UK or Barclays International.

The Committee developed its viewunderstanding of how complaints MI is mapped by Barclays UK in order to identify root causes and received information on the strategic initiatives being undertaken to address them. The Committee’s Deep Dive also led to further refinement of the Barclays UK Complaints dashboards to include complaints volumes by channel. The analysis of the data revealed a high level of customer satisfaction with Barclays’ online bank offering.

The Committee was pleased to see an increase in Barclays UK’s NPS during the course of 2017 and support management’s objective of further increasing NPS to ensure Barclays UK remains competitive against challenger and start-up banks.

In relation to Barclays International’s business areas, the Committee was encouraged to hear that progress had been goodcomplaints volumes were at an all-time low within Barclaycard US (BCUS) but that there was morenoted management’s desire to do to achieveimprove the cultural change required. It encouraged management to continue to prioritise progress on cultural change.business’s net promoter score against key US competitors. The Committee also concluded that manyconsidered the approach being taken by Barclays Partner Finance (BPF) to identify potential areas of the actions Barclays had taken in responsefuture complaints and proactively reaching out to the Salz Review recommendations had aligned its practices with those proposed in the G30 report.customers to resolve issues before complaints arise.

 

30    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


     

Area of focusMatter addressedRole of the CommitteeConclusion/action taken
Citizenship  The delivery ofMonitoring progress against the 2015Shared Growth Ambition (Barclays’ Citizenship Plan for 2016-2018) and developmentthe effectiveness of a Shared Growth Plan for 2016-2018.policy statements on Citizenship matters.  

§  Tracked progress againstConsidered the current 2015 Citizenship plan via six-monthly reports from management.dashboards presented at each meeting and assessed status updates on the Shared Growth Ambition.

§  WithReviewed Barclays’ ratings and relative peer ranking in external Environment, Social, Governance (ESG) benchmarks and tracked external perceptions on Citizenship through stakeholder and media analysis.     

  Received information on new Citizenship initiatives such as the current#Digisafe campaign which aims to educate individuals to better protect themselves against digital fraud.     

  Received an update from Barclays’ Global Head of Financial Crime in respect of the function’s development of intelligenceled initiatives to combat fraud.     

  Reviewed and recommended the approval of Barclays’ statement on modern slavery.

The Committee was very pleased to see that Citizenship Plan comingmetrics demonstrate a high level of colleague pride in the contribution Barclays makes to completion,the community and society.

The Committee is very encouraged by management’s decision to dedicate resource to financial crime, skills and employability and digital empowerment initiatives that provide benefits not only to Barclays and its customers, but to the banking industry and UK population more generally.

Reputation and brandEnsuring that the Barclays brand is proactively managed and Reputation risks and issues are identified and managed appropriately.

  Reviewed Reputation risk updates from management, receiving specific information on those issues deemed to constitute the most significant Reputation risks and issues in each quarter.     

  Regularly evaluated the proposed Shared Growth Planmeasures being taken to enhance the Barclays brand and to understand, and propose action to improve, where appropriate, external perceptions of the Bank.     

  Considered whether the process for 2016-2018.identifying, managing and overseeing Reputation risk was functioning effectively.

  

The Committee notedapproved the Reputation Risk Framework, confirming that all targetsReputation risk is now a Principal Risk under the ERMF. Significant discussion also took place in respect of the 2015 Citizenship Plan had been met or exceeded, with the exception of our newcorrelation between cultural indicators, conduct outcomes and renewed household lending target, which had not been possible to achieve owing to market and trading conditions. It endorsed the 2016-2018 Shared Growth Plan, particularly the proposal to link the plan to Barclays’ core purpose and values and to focus on employability skills.Reputation risk.     

 

The Committee requested further refinement of the Reputation risk reporting received to include sentiment analysis of media coverage and metrics on Barclays’ social media presence.     

The Corporate Relations priorities for 2017 were pre-approved by the Committee and fulfilment of those priorities kept under review throughout the year. This process improved management’s ability to more effectively understand and monitor external perceptions of Barclays among key stakeholders.     

The Committee requested that management undertake work to further refine the components of Reputation risk, clarify the process for identifying risks, enhance management oversight and give consideration to how the overall process can be better communicated.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    31


     
 

The Committee also covered the following matters:

 

§   assessed progress of the programme to implement enhanced controls in the Investment Bank over conflicts of interest between Barclays and third parties

 

§   evaluated outcomes of regulatory thematic reviews of conduct issues and controls

 

§   evaluated the levels of attestation by colleagues globally to The Barclays Way, the Group’s code of conduct

 

§   assessed the status of specific remediation programmes being implemented by the business

 

  Board Reputation Committee allocation of time (%)    
            2015     2014    
  

 

LOGO

 

  1   Citizenship   6     2    
    2   Reputational issues   13     7    
   

 

 

 

3

 

  

 Culture, conduct and compliance   57     52    
    4   Operational risk   19     33    
    5   Other   6     6    
          
          
          
          

Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Reputation Committee report

§  provided input to

The Committee also covered the Board Remuneration Committee on conduct and reputation issues to be taken into consideration for 2015 remuneration decisionsfollowing matters:

 

§   tracked progress againstreceived a report on management’s annual review of the Compliance function’s business plan, including updates on resourcing and attrition levels

§  monitored progresseffectiveness of Barclays’ plans for compliance with the Volcker Rule (restrictions on proprietary trading and certain fund investments by banks operating in the US)

 

§   received a report from management on Barclays’ Swap Dealer Annual Compliance Report

 discussed the outcome of an externally facilitated review on Barclays compliance with the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD) and its comparative performance against its peers.

 approved, from a Reputation risk perspective, a proposal to restructure certain intra-group shareholdings and enhance capital utilisations

assessed and discussed a report on the Committee’s performance during 2014

 

§   approved revisions toreviewed and updated its terms of reference and recommended them to the Board for approval andreference.

 

§  considered and approved Group Compliance Policies.

LOGO 

 Read

Governance in Action – Responding to Stakeholder Concerns

During the year, the Committee gave consideration to Barclays’ exposure to environmental, social and sustainability matters through its business relationships and challenged management to establish a more aboutformal and proactive approach to documenting policy positions and guidelines in relevant sectors.

In response to recommendations from the Committee, management commenced work to review Barclays’ risk managementinvolvement and practices in certain ‘sensitive sectors’ and is in the process of drawing up proposals for sector-specific policies that will articulate the forward looking intentions of Barclays in these areas. The Committee will be reviewing and approving these policies during 2018 and look forward to reporting on their content and implementation in next year’s Annual Report.

 pages 95 to 109

The Committee considers that the establishment of sector-specific policies and 336 to 409guidelines will be a significant step in further enhancing the role that Barclays plays in the wider business community and believe they will improve the quality of the Company’s future reporting on climate change and other matters of social and environmental interest.

  
LOGO 

Read more about Barclays’ risk

management on pages 77 to 78 and in our

Pillar 3 Report, which is available online

atbarclays.com/annualreport

 

   
 
       

 

26  |  32    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152017

Board Nominations Committee reporta

LOGO

In 2017 we made significant progress towards our new Group governance structure in preparation for structural reform and the stand up of our ring-fenced bank in 2018, with appointments having been made to both the Barclays UK and Barclays International divisional boards.

 

LOGO

Dear Fellow Shareholders

In 2017 we made significant progress towards our new Group governance structure in preparation for structural reform and the stand up of our ring-fenced bank in 2018, with appointments having been made to both the Barclays UK and Barclays International divisional boards. We are delighted to welcome the new directors to those boards, led by Sir Gerry Grimstone as Chairman of Barclays International (subject to regulatory approval) and Sir Ian Cheshire as Chairman of Barclays UK (which will become our ring-fenced bank). We continued to refine the details of how the Group Board will interact with those boards and the boards of our other strategically significant subsidiaries, building on the Governance Guiding Principles created in 2016. We look forward to working collaboratively with them to ensure that the roles and responsibilities of each board are clear, while providing effective governance of the Group and protection of shareholder interests.

In view of the significant changes to our Group corporate structure, and always bearing in mind the long term strategy of the Group, the Committee continues to regularly consider our Board composition and succession plans, ensuring it comprises the right balance of diversity, skills and experience to provide the strategic oversight needed to steer the business of the Group. We conducted searches for non-executive Directors in 2017 and were pleased to appoint Matthew Lester and Mike Turner CBE to the Board, in addition to the appointment of Sir Ian Cheshire. Matthew, Mike and Sir Ian each bring with them significant board-level experience and you can find out more about their background and relevant skills and experience that they bring to the Board in their profiles on pages 5 to 6.

I have previously emphasised that it is a key part of our role to be satisfied that there are proper processes in place for executive succession, and this continues to remain another key consideration of the Committee. We closely monitored the status and progress

of the Barclays Talent and Succession strategy, providing input and guidance to management to ensure we attract and retain the best talent for the Group. As a Committee, we also discuss ways in which we can develop and nurture high performing individuals within senior management to strengthen our succession pipeline, including the use ofex officio posts to relevant executive committees to give those individuals exposure to Group matters and leadership.

Our people are the driving force in sustaining our business and we firmly believe in the benefits of having a diverse workforce. I am proud to see the number and variety of diversity and inclusion initiatives we have at Barclays to develop and support colleagues, and ultimately to encourage them to grow their careers with us. While we recognise that diversity is not only about gender, it is nevertheless an important element of diversity and we have set ourselves a target of 33% female representation on the Board by 2020, which as a Board we remain committed to achieving. Please see page 37 for further information about our approach to diversity at both Board and Group Executive Committee levels.

Committee performance

The performance of the Committee was assessed as part of the annual Board effectiveness review and I am pleased to report that the results show that it is performing effectively, with the role and responsibilities of the Committee clear and well understood. One area identified for consideration is that the Committee should be mindful of ensuring that all non-executive Directors receive the same flow of information in relation to decisions and discussions by the Committee, which I will address in my updates to the Board as Chairman of the Board Nominations Committee, and outside of scheduled Board meetings to the extent appropriate. The report on the Board effectiveness review can be found on page 36.

Looking ahead

In 2018 we look forward to the execution of our new Group structure and to the implementation of robust processes providing clear, consistent and effective corporate governance for the Group post-structural reform. Throughout this period of change, the Committee will continue to ensure that we have the right people leading the strategic direction of Barclays, motivating colleagues and sustaining our business over the long term.

John McFarlane

Chairman, Board Nominations Committee

21 February 2018

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    33


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2017

Board Nominations Committee report

  Committee allocation of time (%)

  LOGO

    2017     2016 
1 Corporate governance matters   8    20 
2 Board and Committee composition   42    36 
3 Succession planning and talent   33    31 
4 Board effectiveness   11    8 
5 Other   6    5 

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. John McFarlane, as Chairman of the Board, is also Chairman of the Committee. Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies, and Sir Gerry Grimstone, being the Chairmen of each of the other Board Committees, and Sir Ian Cheshire (as Chairman of Barclays UK) and Reuben

Jeffery III, are also members of the Committee. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages 5 and 6.

During 2017 there were three meetings of the Committee, including one held at Barclays’ New York offices. Attendance by members at Committee meetings is shown below and the chart to the left shows how the Committee allocated its time. Committee meetings were attended by the Group Chief Executive, with the Group HR Director, the Head of Talent, and the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion attending as appropriate.

 

LOGO

“The importance of people as a driving force in sustaining a business over the long term.”

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I have often stressed the importance of people as a driving force in sustaining a business over the long term through their expertise, innovation and commitment. This is equally true of your Board, where it is crucially important that we have strong leaders able to make tough, strategic decisions while energising colleagues and galvanising them into action. It is with this in mind that the Committee approached appointments.

During 2015 we announced the appointment of two new non-executive Directors and a new Group Chief Executive. Board Committee membership was refreshed and we also took the opportunity to review the composition and roles of the Board Committees. In addition, we considered the requirements for independent non-executive directors for the boards of our strategically significant subsidiaries, including those that will be formed as the Group implements structural reform. We continued to foster executive succession by supporting new initiatives and by directly engaging with senior executives, for example, by mentoring individual senior executives, in order to nurture high potential individuals and help build a stronger succession pipeline.

The Committee was pleased that the Board achieved its target of having 25% female representation on the Board by the end of 2015. The target has subsequently been increased to 33% by 2020. While we also achieved our aspiration to reach 23% female representation within our senior leadership population by the end of 2015, we recognise that we need to sustain our focus to attract more senior women to Barclays, and to enable women to grow their careers with us. That will ensure we reach our 2018 goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles. We remain committed to maintaining the momentum of our gender diversity programme.

Committee performance

As part of the annual Board effectiveness review, a separate exercise was conducted to assess the Committee’s performance. The assessment found that the Committee is performing effectively. Please see the report on the Board effectiveness review on pages 33 and34 for more details. I would like to thank my fellow Committee members for their hard work and support during 2015, particularly Sir Michael Rake, who chaired the Committee during the period that I was Executive Chairman, and led the search for a new Group Chief Executive.

Looking ahead

We are preparing to implement a new structure in 2016 which will enable us to prepare for structural reform, simplify the organisation and speed up execution of the individual business strategies. These changes give us the opportunity to make sure that we have the right people in senior roles and that we also take action to build strength in each of the business executive teams for the longer term.

LOGO

John McFarlane

Chairman, Board Nominations Committee

29 February 2016

Committee composition and meetings

The Committee is composed solely of independent non-executive Directors. John McFarlane, as Chairman of the Board, is also Chairman of the Committee. Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies, being the Chairmen of each of the other Board Committees, Reuben Jeffery III and Sir Gerry Grimstone, the Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, are also members of the Committee. Details of the skills and experience of the Committee members can be found in their biographies on pages3 and 4.

During 2015, there were eight meetings of the Committee, including four additional meetings on Group Chief Executive succession. Attendance by members at Committee meetings is shown below. The chart on page30 shows how the Committee allocated its time during 2015.

Committee meetings were attended by the Group Chief Executive or Executive Chairman, with the HR Director, the Global Head of Leadership, Learning & Talent, the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion and representatives from Spencer Stuart presenting on specific items.

Member Meetings attended/eligible to attend
John McFarlane  Sir David Walker (Chairman until 23 April 2015) 2/2
3/3 John McFarlane* (Chairman from 24 April 2015 –
16 July 2015 and from 1 December 2015)*
4/4
Sir Michael Rake (Chairman from 17 July 2015 to
1 December 2015)
8/8
Mike Ashley 8/83/3
Tim Breedon  Tim Breedon3/3 7/8
Crawford Gillies  Crawford Gillies (from 24 April 2015)3/3 7/7
Sir Gerry Grimstone  3/3
Reuben Jeffery III6/7
  Sir John Sunderland (until 23 April 2015)3/3 2/2
Sir Ian Cheshire (from 9 May 2017)  0/1

 

*   John McFarlane stood down as a member of the Committee during the period 17 July – 30 November 2015, when he was Executive Chairman. No Director with executive responsibilities may be a member of the Committee

Sir Ian Cheshire did not attend one meeting owing to prior business commitments,

Note

The Chairman but his views and comments were made available to, and considered by, the Group Chief Executive excuse themselves from meetings when the Committee focuses on the matter of succession to their roles.

Committee.

 

Committee role and responsibilities

The principal purpose of the Committee is to:

 

§
support and advise the Board in ensuring that the composition of the Board and its Committees is appropriate and enables them to function effectively

 

§
examine the skills, experience and diversity on the Board and plan succession for key Board appointments, planning ahead to deal with upcoming retirements and to fill any expected skills gaps

 

§
provide Board-level oversight at Board level, of the Group’s talent management programme and diversity and inclusion initiatives

 

§
agree the annual Board effectiveness review process and monitor the progress of any actions arising and

 

§
ensure the Board has appropriate corporate governance standards and practices in place and keep the Board’s governance arrangementsthese under review and make appropriate recommendations to the Board to ensure that they are consistent with best practice corporate governance standards.

practice.
LOGO

You can find the Committee’s terms of reference at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

Note

a   The name of the Committee changed from the Board Corporate Governance and Nominations Committee in June 2015

 

LOGO  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  27The Committee’s terms of reference are available at


home.barclays/corporategovernance

 

The Committee’s work

The significant matters addressed by the Committee during 20152017 are described below:

 

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
Board appointmentsand Board Committee composition  The refreshmentmembership of the Barclays PLC Board and the current and future composition of the Board Committee membership to secure individuals withand its Committees.

  Reviewed the desiredBoard skills matrix and discussed the key skills and experience needed on the Board in lightthe context of future strategic direction.

§  Conducteddirection, including any areas requiring strengthening for skills and succession and conducted a search for successors to Sir Michael Rake and Antony Jenkins.non-executive Directors.

§  Evaluated a gap analysis ofConsidered the skills and experience oncomposition of the Board and identified the requirement for new non-executive Directors with financial services experience, and the preference to appoint more UK-based Directors given the time commitments associated with Board Committee appointments.in a post-structural reform environment.

 

  Reviewed the membership, size and composition of Board Committees.

  

The Committee recommendedidentified the appointments of Sir Gerry Grimstone as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independentneed to appoint an additional non-executive Director Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive and Diane Schueneman as a non-executive Director.with chairman or CEO experience to add further depth to the Board.

 

During the year it recommended for appointment to the Board Mike Turner CBE, Sir Ian Cheshire (brought on as Chairman of Barclays UK) and Matthew Lester (following the Committee’s previous recommendation of an additional non-executive Director with accounting and auditing experience). The Committee agreed that a search would be conducted for an additional female non-executive Director to promote diversity of gender on the Board and in recognition of the Board’s commitment to achieving 33% female representation on the Board by 2020.

The Committee agreed to review the role, purpose and composition of the Group Board once the Barclays UK and Barclays International Boards were fully constituted and operational as divisional boards. It noted that changes to Board Committee membership may take place once those boards, as well as the Group Service Company board, were operational so that a holistic view can be taken on appropriate memberships and cross-memberships of boards and committees.

Please refer to pages 30 and 32page 35 for moredetails of the Board’s approach to therecruitment of new Directors and the case study of the recruitment of Jes Staley in particular.

Board and Board Committee structure, size and compositionDirectors.The restructure of the Board and Board Committees to allow the Board to focus on the Group’s commercial and strategic performance. The optimum size of the Board, the potential impact of structural reform and the need to constitute subsidiary boards.

§  Reassessed the structure, size and composition of the Board and Board Committees, as well as the current roles and responsibilities of the Board Committees, and recommended a number of changes to the Board.

§  Requested a working plan for Board succession over the next three years.

The Committee agreed that the size of the Board should be reduced over time and more matters should be delegated to the principal Board Committees. The Committee agreed that non-executive Directors should normally not serve on more than two Board Committees, to avoid being over-stretched, and to reduce the Committees in size over time to a maximum of four members, while taking care to ensure appropriate cross-membership. The Committee recommended revised Board-level responsibilities for oversight of risk, including the Board re-taking overall responsibility for enterprise-wide risk, disbanding the Board Enterprise Wide Risk Committee and reallocating responsibility for oversight of the capital and financial aspects of operational risk to the Board Risk Committee.

Succession planning and talent managementThe management of Board succession and oversight of the leadership needs of the Group to enable it to meet its strategic aims and its changing make-up resulting from the effects of structural reform.

§  Examined regular reports on succession plans and talent management of the leadership of the Group to address succession planning in the short-term and internal talent development.

§  Debated options for Directors to engage with members of the Group Executive Committee and senior management to help in nurturing high potential individuals and to support building a stronger succession pipeline.

The Committee agreed a proposal for Committee members to partner high potential senior management. The Committee endorsed the Group’s rapid development programme for high potential talent and agreed to support the programme by providing an insight into the role of the Board and its priorities. The Committee also endorsed the introduction of an improved talent assessment process and assessed the efficacy of the Group’s external talent acquisition process. The Committee examined the results of internal and external benchmarking exercises, including external benchmarking of senior management roles against similar roles in equivalent companies as part of the work on Group Executive Committee succession.

 

 

 

 

28  |34    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

 

 

 

 

Area of focus  Matter addressed  Role of the Committee  Conclusion/action taken
Board effectivenesscomposition of Barclays UK and Barclays International in preparation for the legal entity stand up in 2018 under the structural reform programme  The 2015 Board effectiveness reviewcomposition of the BoardBarclays UK and its Committees. The progress made against the actions identified in the 2014 Board effectiveness review.Barclays International divisional boards.  

§  Considered the effectiveness of the 2014 Board effectiveness review processboard skills matrix for Barclays UK and agreed the approach to be taken to the 2015 Board effectiveness review.Barclays International.

§  Regularly examined progressConsidered updates on the establishment of boards of Barclays UK and Barclays International and discussed the action plan arising from the outcomessuitability of the 2014 Board effectiveness review.potential candidates identified to join those boards.

  

The Committee, setin reviewing the criteriaskills matrices for conductBarclays UK and Barclays International following appointments to those boards, is of the 2015 Board effectiveness review, includingview that there do not appear to be any skills gaps across the appointmenttwo boards, subject to the recruitment of a new external facilitator, Independent Board Evaluation,non-executive Director with retail banking experience to the Barclays UK board. It discussed opportunities for interaction between the Barclays PLC, Barclays UK and Barclays International boards and agreed an action plan to address the matters arising from the 2014 Board effectiveness review.

See pages 33consider opportunities for engagement at board and 34 for a full description of the process and outputs from the 2014 and 2015 effectiveness reviews.committee level going forward.

 

Governance implications of structural reformExecutive succession planning and talent management  The establishment of governance principles for theSuccession planning and talent management at Group under structural reform.Executive Committee level.  

§  Scrutinised proposed governance guiding principlesConsidered updates on, and progress being made against, Barclays’ Talent and Succession strategy, including monitoring diversity within the talent pipeline.

  Discussed updates from the Group HR Director on Group Executive Committee succession plans, including assessing emergency cover, the existing talent pipeline and any potential gaps.

  Considered individuals identified as potential Group Executive Committee successors and discussed next steps for their development.

  Considered the succession plans for the Group post-structural reform, which set out ultimate decision-making powers, while respectingmost critical business unit and functional roles and discussed how to develop the rights and responsibilities of the boards of the strategically significant subsidiaries: the ring-fence bank (RFB), Barclays Bank PLC, the US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) and Barclays Africa Group (BAGL).

§  Discussed the potential composition of the RFB and Barclays Bank PLC boards in light of regulatory requirements.high performing individuals identified.

 

  

The Committee endorsedwelcomed the progress made in the Group Executive Committee succession planning, but noted that there was further work to be done in ensuring we are able to recruit and supportedretain the governance guiding principles.best talent for the Group. It noted that the boards of Barclays UK and Barclays International, once established, would be able to take a more granular view of succession to some of the roles. The Committee provided views onalso discussed the outline boarduse ofex officioposts to both the Group Executive Committee and committee composition of the RFB and Barclays Bank PLC for the Board’s consideration.

Significant subsidiary board compositionThe composition of Barclays’ US IHC board and associated committees.

§   Determined the required structure and composition of the IHC board.

§   Endorsed the implementation of measuresbusiness executive committees to allow potential future IHC board candidates the opportunitygive senior individuals exposure to build their knowledge of Barclays US businesses ahead of the formal creation of the IHC board in 2016.

The Committee agreed the proposed composition of the IHC board, including the appointments of Steve Thieke as chairman and Diane SchuenemanGroup matters as a non-executive director. It oversawfurther way of developing those individuals to ensure a healthy pool of potential candidates in the establishment of a US Governance Review Board to allow proposed IHC board members to familiarise themselves with Barclays’ US businesses.succession pipeline.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  29


 

In addition, the Committee covered the following matters:

 

§ considered the reviewresults of, non-executive Directors’ performance, independence and time commitment as partthe action plan in respect of, the Committee’s assessment of their eligibility2016 Board effectiveness review and the process for re-electionthe 2017 Board and Committee effectiveness review

 

§ considerationreviewed and confirmed the effectiveness of a new targetthe processes for Board diversity beyond the endauthorising Directors’ conflicts of 2015 in the Company’s Board Diversity Policyinterests and recommended it to the Board for approvalDirectors’ induction and training

 

§ updatingconsidered a report on the effectiveness of the Charter of Expectations and Corporate Governance in BarclaysCommittee

 

§ proposals for the 2015 Corporate Governance Report

§its annual review of the Directors’ register of interests and authorisations granted and

§changes toreviewed the Committee’s terms of reference.

Board Nominations Committee allocation of time (%)

          2015     2014  

 

LOGO

  1   Corporate governance matters   17     21  
  2   Board and Committee composition   24     20  
  3   Succession planning and talent (includging CEO succession)   47     43  
  4   Board effectiveness   6     11  
  5   Other   6     5  
      
      
      

Appointment and re-election of Directors

The Committee reviews Board and Board Committee composition includingis a standing item for consideration at each Committee meeting. This includes the consideration of potential new non-executive Directors, at eachDirector appointments, both in respect of its meetings. In addition to seeking successorsplanned succession for known retirements fromand as a result of the Board, the Committee monitorsongoing review of the skills and experience needed on the Group needsBoard in order for it to be ablecontinue to operate effectively.

The Committee frequently considers a skills matrix for the Board, which identifies the core competencies, skills, diversity and experience required for the Board to deliver its strategic aims toand govern the Group appropriately,effectively. Certain attributes identified in the skills matrix have a target weighting attached to ensure that risks threatening performancethem and these are identified and either addressed or mitigated, andregularly updated over time to set ‘the tone fromreflect the top’ in terms of Barclays’ corporate culture and values. In 2015, the Committee also focused on the need to identify non-executive directors to serve on the boards

needs of the Group’s strategically significant subsidiaries.

WhenGroup. The Committee reviews the skills matrix when considering a new appointment to the Board, the Committee relies on assessments ofas well as reviewing the current and expected Board and Board Committee composition, in ordercomposition. This helps to assess thedetermine a timeline for proposed appointments andto the Board.

When recruiting a skills matrix that identifies the core competencies, skills, experience and diversity required for the Board to function effectively, with target weightings for each attribute. These assessments are regularly updated to take account of the Group’s needs over time.

The approach to recruiting new non-executive Directors is to createDirector, the specific skills that are needed are identified, for example, an individual specification with reference to the role requirements, including time commitment,international experience, or recent history serving on a particular board committee. TheCharter of Expectations contains the key competencies and behaviours set outskills expected of non-executive Directors, and these, in our Charter of Expectations and the desired key skills and experience identified from the skills matrix.addition to other details such as expected time commitment, will be included in an individual specification. The Committee as a whole then considers curriculum vitae and references of

for potential candidates. Any candidates who are assessed by the Committee as a whole, before shortlisted candidates arewill be interviewed by members of the Committee. For certain Board positions, the Committee seeks engagement withand, if applicable, key shareholders and Barclays’ regulators as partmay be asked to provide feedback on the proposed appointment. The Board is updated on the progress of the selection process. Feedbackrecruitment and interview process, and any feedback from these partiesthe interviews is taken into account before any recommendation is madeprovided to the Board which is kept informed of progress throughout the selection and recruitment process. An illustration of the rigorous process applied to appointments can be found in the case study and timeline of the process to identify Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive, which is set out on page 32.alongside a recommendation for appointment.

Executive search firms MWM Consulting, Egon Zehnder International and Spencer StuartBuchanan Harvey were instructed to assist with our Director searches in 2015. None of these firmsthe search for non-executive Directors during 2017. Neither firm has any other connection withto Barclays, other than to provide executive recruitment services. Open advertising for

Group Board positions was not used during 2015,in 2017, as the Committee believes that targeted recruitment is the optimal way of recruiting for Board positions. Both of the firms used for non-executive Director recruitment have signed up to the Voluntary Code of Conduct for Executive Search Firms, which include measures designed to improve gender diversity on boards.

In 2017, Barclays announced the appointmentappointments of two newSir Ian Cheshire, Matthew Lester and Mike Turner CBE as non-executive Directors, during 2015: Diane Schueneman and Sir Gerry Grimstone. In addition, Barclays announced the appointment of Jes Staley as Group Chief Executive. Each of them brings valuedwith each Director bringing specific skills and experience which contribute to fill the efficacy ofrole previously identified by the Board as a whole. As previously reported, Diane Schueneman brings expertise in operations and technology to the Board, which she gained in financial services organisations,Committee as well as wide-rangingall having extensive board-level experience (see pages 5 to 6 for details of implementing changeeach Director’s experience and achieving turnaround in business successbackground). Diane de Saint Victor and profitability. Sir Gerry Grimstone, who succeeded Sir Michael Rake as Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director, is well known, commands great respect withinSteve Thieke both stood down from the financial services industry and brings immense experience, integrity and knowledge to his roles at Barclays. Jes Staley hasBoard with effect from the leadership skills and wide-ranging experience to deliver shareholder value and to take the Group forward strategically and, in particular, possesses a good understanding of corporate and investment banking. Biographical information is provided on pages 3 and 4, with further details available online at home.barclays

Changes in the compositionend of the Board and the Committee’s reassessment of the structure, size and composition of the Board and its Committees resulted in a refresh of the membership of Board Committees, as well as their roles and responsibilities, during 2015. Details of the changes are included in each of the Board Committee reports.2017 AGM.

The Directors in office at the end of 20152017 were subject to an effectiveness review, as described below.on page 36. Based on the results of the review the Board accepted the view of the Committee that each Director proposed for election or re-election continuedcontinues to be effective and that they had each demonstrated the level of commitment required in connection with their role on the Board and the needs of the business.

 

 

 

30  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    35


 


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 20152017

Board Nominations Committee report

 

 

 

 

Diversity statement

The Financial Reporting Council maintains that one of the ways in which constructive board debate can be encouraged is through having sufficient diversity on the board. Barclays agrees with this view and, when it adopted a Board Diversity Policy in 2012, stated the Board’s aspirational goal of achieving 25% female representation on the Board by 2015. Female representation on the Board exceeded 25% at the end of 2015, having increased during the year with the appointment of Diane Schueneman. Noting that the latest progress report onWomen on Boards from the Davies Review has suggested a target of 33% by 2020, Barclays has adopted this new target in its Board Diversity Policy.

The Committee assisted the Board in achieving its target of 25% by ensuring that this was recorded on the Board skills matrix and, in particular, that the search firms were aware of the priority. The Committee also supported a number of initiatives to grow the talent pipeline within the Group and sought opportunities to engage with female members of senior management. Diversity as a whole, including gender, was also taken into account when evaluating the effectiveness of the Board. The comprehensive brief provided to Independent Board Evaluation for this year’s review included an evaluation of boardroom dynamics and the effects of diversity. The consultant accordingly assessed the impact of diversity including gender, age, the internationality of the Directors, the breadth of experience, qualifications and skills, concluding that there was a good degree of diversity on the Board with a range of different experiences and outlooks and that the Chairman should continue to nurture inputs from all Directors to derive the benefits of this diversity.

Below Board level, Barclays met its target of 23% female representation among the Managing Director and Director population in 2015. To achieve the target, the Committee endorsed programmes to embed accountability for diversity and inclusion throughout the Group. These efforts included Balanced Scorecard aligned targets for hiring, promotion and attrition set for each business or function, expansion of diversity data to include greater focus, expanding global campaigns to raise awareness and refined communications to drive impact. More details of Barclays’ diversity and inclusion strategy may be found on pages 47 to 49.

LOGO

You can find the Board Diversity Policy at

home.barclays/corporategovernance

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

Barclays conductsProcess

Each year, an externally facilitated review ofevaluation is conducted on the effectiveness of the Board, the Board Committees and individual DirectorsDirectors. Full external evaluations of Board effectiveness have been undertaken in the past two years. In view of the impending new Group corporate structure, following which another external evaluation will be carried out once the structure has had time to settle, the Board decided to focus this year’s review on individual Director performance to monitor the Board’s progress and to inform the Chairman each year. For 2015,agenda of the next full external review process.

Independent Board Evaluation facilitated the effectiveness review for 2016 and was facilitatedengaged again to conduct the 2017 Board review, also again led by Ffion Hague. Independent Board Evaluation is an independent external consultancy with no other connection to Barclays. Consistent with Barclays. The review process involved the consultant,previous years, Ffion Hague attending certain Board and Board Committee meetings in November and December 2015 as an observer, alongside detailedcarried out interviews conducted accordingwith the Directors to a set agenda with Directors, membersobtain feedback on the effectiveness of the Group Executive Committee, the Company Secretary and other members of the executive and senior management. Feedback was also sought from external stakeholders. Board throughout 2017.

Independent Board Evaluation preparedissued a report forto the Board on the findings fromof the review process, which was presented to the Board in December 2015.effectiveness review. In addition, the Chairman was provided with a report and feedback on the performance of each of the

Directors, and the Senior Independent Director received a report on the Chairman. A similar process was followed for the Board Committees. Independent Board Evaluation provided feedback to each

Following consideration of the Committee Chairmen on the performance of each Committee. The feedback is scheduled to be discussed by each Committee in early 2016.

Having assessed the findings of the 2017 Board and Committee effectiveness review,reviews, the Directors wereremain satisfied that the Board and each of its Committees operated effectively during 2015. Nonetheless, the Board identifiedCommittees are operating effectively.

Outcomes of 2017 review

Board performance is considered to be improving, with more effective and insightful questions being asked in Board debates and a number of actions to help maintainbetter balance being struck between support and improve its effectiveness. These, togetherchallenge. In particular, the Directors were positive about:

the preparations for structural reform

project execution, such as the remediation of control issues and preparations for Brexit

the recruitment of high quality new Board members and members for the boards of Barclays UK and Barclays International.

The Directors were also pleased with an updateprogress on strengthening the actions taken following the 2014 review, are set out on pages 33senior executive team and 34.

Directors’ Conflicts of Interest

Barclays requiresdeepening relationships between Directors to declare any potential or actual conflict of interest that could interfere with a Director’s ability to act in the best interests of the Group.and key executives. The Board has adopted procedures for ensuring that its powers to authorise Directors’ conflicts operate effectively. A register of actual and potential conflicts and of any authorisation of a conflict grantedexecutive team feels well supported by the Board and is maintainedgrateful for that support.

Business performance is a concern for Board members, and the Board is focused on improving this within the Group. This will be a particular area of focus in 2018. The

restructuring of the Group in April 2018 is also a significant focus for the Group and regarded as a major challenge. The Board is cognisant of the challenges of ensuring the new Group corporate structure is effective and efficient, and is conscious of the need to maintain good governance overall and minimise duplication. The interaction between the Group Board and the boards of our strategically significant subsidiaries will be closely monitored and thought will be given to identifying opportunities for engagement with subsidiary board members to develop and maintain a good working relationship. The impact of the new structure on Board work and governance will be a key area of review for the 2018 external evaluation of the Board.

Committee effectiveness

The 2017 Board Committee effectiveness review was carried out internally, led by the Company SecretarySecretary. A questionnaire was circulated to all Committee members with a report of the findings of the effectiveness review provided to the Chair of each Committee as well as an update to the Board. The conclusion from the Committee reviews is that the Committees are working well, and reviewed annually byyou can read more about the findings for each Board Nominations Committee.Committee within each Committee Chairman’s letter.

 

 

Progress against 2016 findings

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  31


Following the 2016 Board effectiveness review facilitated by Independent Board Evaluation, a number of findings were identified and the summary below sets out the Board’s progress against those actions in 2017.

 

2016 findingsActions taken/findings in 2017
LOGOBoard priorities  

Governance in action:Create regular broad-based risk oversight Board sessions to allow Directors to look across the appointment of

Jes Staleyrisk spectrum.

 

Role requirements

The Committee, which has responsibility for identifying suitable candidates to joinSchedule a debate on the Board, agreed the desired attributes for a successor to Antony Jenkins as Group Chief Executive (CEO). In addition to strong and motivational leadership qualities, the Committee sought candidates with significant experience of retail and/or commercial and investment banking in large scale, complex organisations and an excellent track record of delivery and credibility with regulators and internal and external stakeholders. Personal attributes sought included strategic thinking and the ability to lead and manage change, especially cultural change.

Process

The Committee directed the selection process. As the Chairman had accepted the role of Executive Chairman until a successor was in place, it was agreed that he would step down from the Committee to ensure that it remained composed of independent non-executive Directors and that I would lead the process. It was also agreed that the Committee as a whole would be involved in shortlisting and interviewing candidates and, once preferred candidates had been agreed, to involve the rest of the Board and key senior executives. Spencer Stuart, an external search consultant,non-executive Directors and link the conclusions to revised Board objectives to help focus the Board’s agenda.

Time was engaged to assist withscheduled for free-ranging discussion around risk, strategy and the search and selection process.Bank’s long term plan during the Board’s annual strategy session.

 

Search

Having establishedThe review reported that there were currently no potential candidates within the Group with the spreadBoard discussion was more focused and depth of experience required for the role, the Committee examinedstruck a ‘long list’ of candidates produced as a result of the global searchbalance between support and received a presentation from Spencer Stuart covering the prospects for consideration. The Committee identified the most credible prospects to be contacted and invited to interview and requested that the views of the Group’s regulators on the preferred type of candidate for the role also be obtained.challenge.

 

I asked Committee members to consider sources for potential candidates that might be approached directly and to recommend potential candidates for the role. In addition, although John McFarlane did not take part in the selection process, he was consulted for his view and insights. I also ensured that Board members were kept up-to-date throughout the process.

 

RecruitmentBoard/executive relationship

As Jes Staley emerged as the preferred candidate

Positive and had confirmed his interest in the role, he undertook a series of interviews involving me, the Chairman and members of the Committee. He also met with the remaining members ofconstructive relations between the Board and the Group Executive Committee.new management team were reported.

The review found that the relationship between the Board and executive management deepened during 2017, with executive management feeling well supported.

Optimise communication and collaborationa

Continue to optimise the information flow between Directors in the run-up to structural reform in 2018.

 

In additionConsider agreeing common values for the Group and the banking subsidiary boards in the new structure.

The Chairman continued to hold meetings with non-executive Directors ahead of Board meetings to brief them on current issues.

Further principles and practices were developed for interaction between the Board and the boards of Barclays UK and Barclays International, building on the Governance Guiding principles created in 2016.

Board appointment process

Continue to refine the Board skills matrix to ensure it aligns with the Group’s strategy and informs the succession plan for key Board roles. Implement more regular reporting to the regular communicationBoard on potential non-executive Directors under consideration.

The Board skills matrix and succession plan were kept under review, with separate skills matrices established for the Barclays UK and Barclays International boards. Board members were updated on recruitment progress and details of potential candidates.

Director induction

Continue to enhance the Director induction process with a focus on providing broader governance training to anyone who has not previously served on a UK PLC board.

The induction programme was reviewed to factor in tailored governance training for new Directors and was extended also to directors of Barclays UK, Barclays International and the Group Service Company.

Reporting to the Boardb

Review reporting arrangements on strategy implementation and review the KPIs or dashboard reports for key initiatives.

The form and content of reporting to the Board held an additional meeting specificallywas reviewed and refreshed by management to discussensure that the proposed appointmentBoard is provided with appropriate management information on strategy and to allow Directors to share their feedback on Jes Staley before approving his appointment, which was announced on 28 October 2015.

LOGO

Sir Michael Rakeexecution priorities.

 

Notes

a  In 2016 this finding was named “Greater awareness of Board Committee work”.

b  In 2016 this finding was named “Dealing more strategically with global regulation”.

 

 

32  |  36    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Directors’ report

What we did in 2015

Board Nominations Committee report

Review of Board and Board Committee effectiveness

Board priorities

Exhibiting and upholding the Company’s values

Leveraging Board experience in support of executives

Greater awareness of Board Committee work

2014 findings

To refine the Board’s priorities for 2015.

2014 findings

To continue the embedding of cultural change across and deeper into the organisation and provide effective oversight of progress.

2014 findings

To continue to build effective relationships between the Board and business and functional heads.

2014 findings

To continue to deepen the Board’s focus on the key priorities and main issues facing each of the Board Committees and to ensure that the Board Committee structure remains appropriate and fit for purpose.

Actions taken in 2015

In 2015 the Board re-focused its time on three key themes:

§  focus on core

§  accelerate earnings growth

§  high performance ethic.

A set of execution priorities was developed for each theme  and progress against these priorities was reported to the Board on a regular basis.

Actions taken in 2015

The Board Reputation Committee received reports on the progress of cultural change in 2015.

Members of senior management completed a survey on cultural change, the results of which were shared with the Board Reputation Committee.

The results of the employee opinion survey and a values survey were shared with the Board.

Actions taken in 2015

John McFarlane has, and will continue to, discuss his key priorities as Chairman with senior management.

Members of the Board Nominations Committee are mentoring high-potential senior managers.

Actions taken in 2015

The Board Committee structure was updated in 2015, following review by the Board Nominations Committee. The revised structure was approved by the Board and implemented from July 2015.

In line with prior years, all non-executive Directors may attend Board Committee meetings on request, with the agreement of the Committee Chairman. All non-executive Directors were invited to attend Board Risk Committee workshops on risk appetite and on structural reform.

2015 findings

To ensure that the Board agenda is optimised, including time for ‘blue-sky’ discussion of major risks.

2015 findings

No specific matters were raised during the 2015 review.

2015 findings

To continue to ensure that all non-executive Directors have the  opportunity to contribute to strategic debate.

2015 findings

To continue to raise awareness across all Board members of the significant issues considered by Board Committees and to continue to refine the remit and scope of the Board Reputation Committee.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will identify opportunities for more free-ranging Board discussions, including discussion of risk.

A revised set of Board objectives will be agreed in order to track progress.

Actions to be taken in 2016

No actions are proposed for 2016.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will continue to identify ways in which the skills and experience of individual non-executive Directors may be leveraged, including partnering individual non-executive Directors with members of the Group Executive Committee.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will provide opportunities for Board Committee Chairmen to provide more detailed briefings to non-Committee members on the work of their Committee.

We will review the role and scope of the Board Reputation Committee with its new Chairman.

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  33


    

    

    

    

 

     

Diversity on the Board and Group Executive Committee

The Board continues to have regard to the Hampton-Alexander Review recommendations to improve gender diversity among FTSE leadership teams and the Parker Review recommendations on the ethnic diversity of UK boards.

The Committee recognises the importance of ensuring that there is broad diversity inclusive of, but not limited to, gender, ethnicity, geography and business experience on the Board, while continuing to recommend all appointments based on merit in the context of the skills and experience required. Barclays’ approach to Board diversity is set out in full in theBoard Diversity Policy, which can be found online athome.barclays/corporategovernance. OurBoard Diversity Policy recognises that a truly diverse Board will include and make good use of the differences in skills, experience, background, race, gender and other distinctions brought by each Director, with such differences

With regard to ethnic diversity, the Board considers that Barclays is currently well-positioned in terms of representation at Board level and also at Group Executive Committee level when taking into account the Parker Review definition (being “individuals of Black, East Asian, Latin American, Middle Eastern or South Asian ethno-cultural backgrounds”). The Board will continue to monitor the overall diversity of our leadership pipeline to ensure we are attracting the broadest spectrum of leaders to Barclays.

During 2017, the Committee received regular updates from the Global Head of Diversity and Inclusion covering the full spectrum of Barclays’ diversity and inclusion agenda, including the actions being taken regarding dynamic working, colleague inclusion, workforce diversity, mental health awareness and social mobility. The Committee is pleased with the progress being made and discussed ways in which inclusion might be tracked. Management is continuing to work on drawing together indicators across the Group to develop a metric to measure progress on inclusion.

being considered in determining the optimum composition of the Board. When executive search firms are engaged to assist with the recruitment of a new Director, diversity is identified as a key factor. In addition, the external Board evaluation considered diversity when assessing the effectiveness of the Board. The Barclays Board target of 33% female representation among Directors by 2020 is formally reflected in theBoard Diversity Policy as well as being noted in the Board skills matrix. Noting the current gender diversity balance on the Board, and as mentioned earlier in this report, the Committee has commissioned the recruitment of a further female non-executive Director to strengthen the diversity of gender on the Board. Further details about the current diversity balance of the Board can be found on page 4.

The Committee is also mindful of the current gender diversity balance of the Group Executive Committee, but is satisfied with the overall level of diversity across that Committee standing at 33% and with the percentage of women among the direct reports of Group Executive Committee members strengthening our succession pipeline. Further, Barclays is committed to achieving 33% female representation among the Group Executive Committee and their direct reports by 2020, and is currently reporting 25% female representation among this population. In 2017, the Group Executive Committee continued the initiative introduced by the Group Chief Executive in 2016 of having oneex-officio position on the Committee to broaden the scope of perspectives and contributions made, with each appointee serving for a four-month rotation.

LOGO

Further details about the current diversity balance of the Board can be found on page 4. More details on Barclays diversity and inclusion strategy and the progress made can be found on page 47.

          

Improvements to the Board appointment process

Director induction

Effective handling of legacy issues

Dealing more strategically with global regulation

2014 findings

To continue to ensure that the Board has sufficient visibility of executive succession planning and the talent pipeline.

2014 findings

To extend the new Director induction programme to involve senior executives below Group Executive Committee level and to continue to support new Board Committee Chairmen.

2014 findings

To continue to focus on the existing priority of overseeing the resolution of legacy issues.

2014 findings

To continue to focus the Board’s  time on strategy and strategic options.

Actions taken in 2015

The non-executive Directors attended a briefing on talent management and succession planning in April 2015.

The Board Nominations Committee considered Group Executive Committee succession in October 2015. In November 2015, the HR Director attended the Board meeting to provide an update on talent and succession.

Actions taken in 2015

Directors have been offered the opportunity of additional meetings with senior executives as part of their induction programmes.

Actions taken in 2015

Work has continued in 2015 to resolve historical legal and conduct risks. Several outstanding  issues have been resolved in 2015.

Actions taken in 2015

Additional time was allocated to the discussion of business strategy at Board meetings in 2015. In particular, the Investment Bank and structural reform were both covered in depth.

The Group’s three strategic priorities: focus on core; accelerate earnings growth; and high performance ethic, were developed with the Board’s collective input.

Representatives from the Group’s UK and US regulators attended Board and Board Committee meetings during the year.

2015 findings

To continue to assess the skills and experience needed on the Board and to ensure that Board composition is balanced between UK and international members.

To enhance Board succession planning, particularly in respect of key roles.

2015 findings

To enhance the Board training and induction programme, with particular focus on the training needs of Board members from outside the financial services sector.

2015 findings

No specific matters were raised during the 2015 review.

2015 findings

To continue to provide opportunities for Board members  to provide early input to thinking on major issues and decisions.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will develop a revised Board succession plan for discussion by the Board Nominations Committee, including planning for succession to key roles, considering the optimum size of the Board and the balance of UK and overseas Directors.

We will schedule additional updates to the Board on talent  management and succession planning.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will schedule as part of the Board’s training programme for 2016 specific briefings for non-executive Directors who do not have a financial services background.

Actions to be taken in 2016

No actions are proposed for 2016.

Actions to be taken in 2016

We will continue to allocate sufficient time for Board discussion of strategic priorities and options.

 

34  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Leadership

The Role of the Board

As members of the Board of Directors, we have a collective responsibility to create and deliver sustainable value for our shareholders, in a manner that is supported by the right culture, values and behaviours throughout the Group. To support our role in determining the strategic objectives and policies of the Group, there exists a well-defined Corporate Governance framework. We aim to achieve long-term and sustainable value and it is our responsibility as the Board to ensure that management effectively delivers on short-term objectives, while promoting the long-term growth of Barclays.

In addition, we have further responsibility for ensuring that management maintains both an effective system of internal control and an effective risk management and oversight process. When carrying out these responsibilities we consider the Group’s business and reputation, the materiality of risks that are inherent in the business and the relevant costs and benefits of implementing controls. The Group’s internal control system provides assurance of internal financial controls, compliance with law and regulation and effective and efficient operations.

The Board is the decision-making body for those matters that are considered of significance to the Group owing to their strategic, financial or reputational implications or consequences. To retain control of these key decisions, certain matters have been identified that only we as the Board can approve and there is in place a formal schedule of powers reserved to the Board. As Directors we must act in accordance with the Company’s constitution and only exercise powers for the purposes for which they have been conferred. A summary of the matters reserved to the Board is available at home.barclays/corporategovernance. These matters include the approval of Barclays’ strategy, interim and full year financial statements and any major acquisitions, mergers, disposals or capital expenditure.

Specific responsibilities have been delegated to Board Committees and each Committee has its own terms of reference, which are available on home.barclays/corporategovernance. Each Committee reports to, and has its terms of reference approved by, the Board and the minutes of Committee meetings are shared with the Board. The main Board Committees are the Board Audit Committee, the Board Nominations Committee, the Board Remuneration Committee, the Board Reputation Committee and the Board Risk Committee.

In addition to the principal Board Committees, the Regulatory Investigations Committee, which was formed in late 2012, focuses on providing Board-level oversight of regulatory investigations. This Committee met six times in 2015. John McFarlane is Chairman of the Committee and the other current Committee members are Mike Ashley, Sir Gerry Grimstone, Diane de Saint Victor and Jes Staley. Antony Jenkins, Sir Michael Rake, Sir John Sunderland and Sir David Walker also served on the Committee during 2015, stepping down when they left the Board.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  35    37


Attendance

In 2015 we attended both scheduled and additional Board meetings, as disclosed in the table below. The Chairman met privately with non-executive Directors ahead of scheduled Board meetings. If, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was not able to attend a Board meeting, he or she ensured that their views were known to the Chairman.

Board attendance

 Independent   
 
 
 
Scheduled
meetings
eligible to
attend
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Scheduled
meetings
attended
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Additional
meetings
eligible to
attend
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Additional
meetings
attended
  
  
  

Group Chairman

                      

John McFarlane

 On appointment   8     8     2     2  
                       

Executive Directors

                      

Tushar Morzariaa

 Executive Director   8     8     2     1  

Jes Staley

 Executive Director   1     1     0     0  
                       

Non-executive Directors

                      

Mike Ashley

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Tim Breedon

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Crawford Gillies

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Reuben Jeffery III

 Independent   8     7     2     2  

Wendy Lucas-Bullb

 Non-Independent   8     8     2     2  

Dambisa Moyo

 Independent   8     8     2     1  

Frits van Paasschen

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Sir Michael Rake

 Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director   8     7     2     2  

Diane de Saint Victor

 Independent   8     8     2     2  

Diane Schueneman

 Independent   5     5     1     1  

Steve Thieke

 Independent   8     8     2     2  
                       

Former Directors

                      

Sir David Walker

 On appointment   3     3     0     0  

Antony Jenkins

 Executive Director   4     4     1     1  

Sir John Sunderland

 Independent   3     3     0     0  
                       

Secretary

                      

Lawrence Dickinson

     8     8     2     2  

Notes

a Although eligible to attend, as an executive Director, Tushar Morzaria did not attend the additional meeting held to consider and approve the appointment of the new Group Chief Executive.
b Although we have reached the conclusion that all non-executive Directors exhibit independence of character and judgement, we continue to disclose that, for the purposes of the Code, Wendy Lucas-Bull was not designated as independent owing to her chairmanship of Barclays Africa Group Limited, a62%-owned subsidiary of Barclays.

36  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

Board Governance Framework

LOGO

 

Leadership

As highlighted earlier in this report, the Board of Directors is responsible for promoting the highest standards of corporate governance in Barclays. We act in a Boardway that we may, underconsider promotes the authoritysuccess of our ArticlesBarclays for the benefit of Associationshareholders as a whole, and where appropriate, delegate all or anyare accountable to the shareholders for creating and delivering sustainable value. We are responsible for setting strategy and overseeing its implementation, and also ensuring that management maintains an effective system of our powers to an individual Director or to a Committee of Directors. Furtherinternal control.

For further information onabout the operations of eachrole of the Barclays Board Committees can be found on the pages referenced above. Board Committee membership is reviewed regularly byand its responsibilities, together with the Board Nominations Committee.governance framework, please see page 8.

Roles on the Board

AsExecutive and non-executive Directors we have establishedshare the same duties and are subject to the same constraints. However, in line with the principles of the Code, a clear division of responsibilities between runninghas been established. The Chairman is responsible for leading and managing the work of the Board, and running the business of the Group. It is the responsibility of the Chairman to lead the Board and to ensure that it operates effectively, while the responsibility for the day-to-day management of Barclays has been delegated to the Group

Chief Executive.

Role profiles setting out the responsibilities of the Chairman, the Group Chief Executive, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director, non-executive Directors, Executive Directors, Committee Chairmen and the Company Secretary can be found inBarclays Charter of Expectations, which is available on home.barclays/corporategovernance.Barclays Charter of Expectationsalso sets out high-performance indicators for non-executive Directors.

The Group Chief Executive is supported in this role by the Group Executive Committee, which is responsible for making and implementing operational decisions while running the Group’s day-to-day business.Committee. Further information on membership of the Group Executive Committee can be found on page 5.7.

As a Board we have set out our expectations of each Director in Barclays’ Charter of Expectations. This includes role profiles and the behaviours and competencies required for each role on the Board, namely the Chairman, Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director, non-executive Directors, executive Directors and Committee Chairmen. The Group Executive Management structure has been designedCharter of Expectations is reviewed annually to support management’s decision-making responsibilities, alignedensure it remains relevant and up-to-date. It is published onhome.barclays/corporategovernance to personal accountabilityensure that there is complete transparency of the standards we set for ourselves.

Attendance

As members of the Board of Directors we are expected to attend every Board meeting. In 2017, we attended both scheduled and delegated authority, while embedding riskadditional Board meetings, as recorded in the table below. The Chairman met privately with the non-executive Directors ahead of each scheduled Board meeting, and controlif, owing to exceptional circumstances, a Director was not able to attend a Board meeting they ensured that their views were made known to the Chairman in business decision-making.advance of the meeting.

Board Attendance  Independent  

Scheduled
Meetings
eligible

to attend

   Scheduled
Meetings
attended
   %
attendance
   

Additional
Meetings
eligible

to attend

   Additional
meetings
attended
   %
attendance
 
Group Chairman              
John McFarlane  On appointment   8    8    100    7    7    100 
Executive Directors              
Tushar Morzaria  Executive Director   8    8    100    4    4    100 
Jes Staley  Executive Director   8    8    100    4    4    100 
Non-executive Directors              
Mike Ashley  Independent   8    8    100    7    7    100 
Tim Breedon  Independent   8    8    100    7    6    86 
Sir Ian Cheshire  Independent   6    5    83    4    4    100 
Mary Francis  Independent   8    8    100    7    7    100 
Crawford Gillies  Independent   8    7    88    7    7    100 
Sir Gerry Grimstone  Senior Independent Director   8    8    100    7    7    100 
Reuben Jeffery III  Independent   8    8    100    7    7    100 
Matthew Lester  Independent   3    3    100    1    1    100 
Dambisa Moyo  Independent   8    7    88    7    7    100 
Diane Schueneman  Independent   8    8    100    7    7    100 
Mike Turner CBEa  Independent   -    -    n/a            n/a 
Former Directors              
Diane de Saint Victor  Independent   3    3    100    3    3    100 
Steve Thieke  Independent   3    3    100    3    3    100 
Secretary              
Stephen Shapiro      2    2    100            n/a 
Former Secretaries              
Lawrence Dickinson     1    1    100    1    1    100 
Claire Davies      5    5    100    6    6    100 

Note

a Mike Turner CBE joined the Board with effect from 1 January 2018. As part of his induction programme, he attended the December 2017 board meeting.

38    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Board Committee cross-membership

The table below shows the number of cross-memberships of our non-executive Directors across our Board Committees.

   

Board Audit

Committee

  Board Nominations
Committee
  Board Remuneration
Committee
  Board Reputation
Committee

Board Risk  

Committee  

  

 

4

 

  

 

3

  

 

1

  

 

1

Board Reputation   Committee  

  

 

1

 

  

 

2

  

 

2

  

Board Remuneration   Committee  

  

 

2

    

  

 

2

    

Board Nominations   Committee  

  

 

3

    

      

Effectiveness

Composition of the Board

The Board Nominations Committee is responsible for reviewing Board composition, considering succession plans for bothIn line with the Board and senior executives, selecting and appointing new Directors and consideringrequirements of the resultsCode, a majority of the Board effectiveness review. For more information on the work of this Committee in 2015 please turn to page 27.

Our individual biographies can be found onpages 3 and 4: these include our relevant skills and experience, Board Committee membership and any other principal appointments. Details of changes to the Board in 2015 and year to date are disclosed on page 6.

independent non-executive Directors. The Board currently comprises a Chairman, who was independent on appointment, two Executiveexecutive Directors and11 eleven non-executive Directors. In line with the Code, independent non-executive Directors form a majority of our Board. Each year weWe consider the independence of our non-executive Directors annually, using the guidanceindependence criteria set out in the Code and by reviewing performance against behaviours determined by usthat we have identified as essential in order for a Director to be considered independent. TheseAs part of this process, the Board keeps under review the length of tenure of all Directors, which is a factor that is considered as part of its deliberations when determining independence of our non-executive Directors. The independence criteria are disclosedcan be found inCorporate Governance in Barclays which canathome.barclays/corporategovernance.

The Board Nominations Committee considers Board succession planning and regularly reviews the composition of the Board and the Board Committees to ensure that there is an appropriate balance and diversity of skills, experience, independence and knowledge. The size of the Board is not fixed and may be viewed at home.barclays/corporategovernance. Havingrevised from time to time to reflect the changing needs of the business and the Board Nominations Committee will consider the balance of skills and experience of current Directors when considering a proposed appointment.

Each year we carry out an effectiveness review in order to evaluate our performance as a Board, as well as the performance of each of the Board Committees and individual Directors. This annual review assesses whether each of us continues to discharge our respective duties and responsibilities effectively and is considered this guidance, we have determined those non-executivewhen deciding whether individual Directors who are standingwill offer themselves for election or re-election at the 2016 AGMAGM. More information on the 2017 Board effectiveness review can be found on page 36.

Our biographies containing our relevant skills and experience, Board Committee membership and other principal appointments can be found on pages 5 and 6. Details of changes to be independent.the Board in 2017 and year to date are disclosed on page 3.

Executive Directors’The service contracts for the executive Directors and the letters of appointment for the Chairman and non-executive Directors are available for inspection at the Company’sour registered office.

Time commitment

We are expected to allocate sufficient time to our role on the Board in order to discharge our responsibilities effectively. This includes attending, and being well-prepared for, all Board and Board Committee meetings, as well as making time to understand the business, meet with executives and regulators, and complete ongoing training. As stated in ourCharter of Expectations, time commitment is agreed with each non-executive Director on an individual basis. Set out below is the average expected time commitment for the role of non-executive Directors and the other non-executive positions on the Board. For these additional positions there is an expectation that, in order to effectively fulfil extra responsibilities, additional time commitment is required.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  37


We carry out an annual effectiveness review in order to evaluate our performance as a Board. This evaluation includes an assessment of the effectiveness of Board Committees and individual Directors, to ensure that each of us continues to contribute effectively to the decision-making of the Board. Independence and the existence of any conflicts of interest are considered as part of the effectiveness evaluation. We take the outcomes of the review into account when deciding whether Directors will offer themselves for election or re-election at the AGM.

More information on the Board effectiveness review can be found on page 33 and 34.

Time commitmentRole

In order to effectively discharge our responsibilities, non-executive Directors must commit sufficient time to their role. Set out below is the average time commitment for each non-executive position on the Board. In practice, however, time commitment is agreed on an individual basis and for certain Board positions additional time commitment will often be required in order to fulfil extra responsibilities, such as those of the Deputy Chairman, Senior Independent Director and Committee Chairmen. In addition, in exceptional circumstances, we are expected to commit significantly more time than disclosed below.

Role  Expected time commitment
Chairman  80% of a full-timefull time position
Deputy Chairman  At least 0.5 days a week
Senior Independent Director  As required to fulfil the role
Non-executiveNon- executive Director  30-3630 days a year (membership of one Board Committee included, increasing to 40-5040 days a year if a member of two Board Committees)
Committee Chairmen  50-60At least 60 days (inclusive ofa year (including non-executive Director time commitment)

It is expected that ourThe Chairman willmust commit as muchto expend whatever time as is necessary to fulfil his duties withand, while this is expected to be equivalent to 80% of a full time position, his responsibilities to Barclays takingChairmanship of the Group, and leadership of the Board, has priority over other business commitments. The Chairman and non-executive DirectorsIn exceptional circumstances, we are alsoall expected to allocate sufficientcommit significantly more time to understandingour work on the business, through meetings with regulators and executives and undergoing training to ensure ongoing business awareness. This time is in addition to that spent preparing for, and attending, Board and Board Committee meetings. When appropriate, a Director joining a Board Committee will be given a specific Board Committee induction programme.Board.

Induction

FollowingOn appointment each Director undergoesto the Board, all Directors receive a comprehensive induction that has beenwhich is tailored to the new Director’s individual requirements. The personal induction programmeschedule is designed and organised byto quickly provide the Company Secretary in consultationnew Director with the Chairman and in doing so they consider how to develop each Director’san understanding of how the Group works and the key issues that it faces. The Company Secretary consults the Chairman when designing an induction schedule, giving consideration to the particular needs of the new Director. When a Director is joining a Board Committee the schedule includes an induction to the operation of that committee.

The purposeOn completion of the induction programme, isthe Director should have sufficient knowledge and understanding of the nature of the business, and the opportunities and challenges facing Barclays, to provide Directors withenable them to effectively contribute to strategic discussions and oversight of the information they need to become as effective as possible within the shortest practicable time afterGroup.

Following their appointment in 2017, Sir Ian Cheshire, Matthew Lester and Mike Turner CBE received induction programmes on joining the Board. Typically, a new Director will meetIn line with normal practice, they met with the Company Secretary, the current non-executive Directors and members of the Group Executive Committee and certain other senior management, allowing an opportunity to familiarise themselves with various businesses and discuss specific matters with senior individuals. When an induction programme is complete, in addition to understanding the Group’s business, a new Director should have a clear understanding of Barclays’ relationships with its shareholders, regulators and customers and clients.executives.

In 2015, John McFarlane and Diane Schueneman both received tailored induction programmes on joining the Board. Feedback was sought from both new Directors to ensure that the induction programme remains effective.

Training and development

In order to ensure that our non-executive Directors have the necessary knowledge and understanding of the Group’s business to enable them to contribute effectively at Board and Board Committee meetings they are regularly provided with the opportunity for training and development.

As part of the annual performance evaluation process the individual development needs of each non-executive Director are reviewed and discussed with the Chairman. Training can be provided through one-to-one meetings with senior executives, in order to receive further insight into a particular area of the Group’s business, or as part of dedicated training on a particular issue identified by the Directors and the Company Secretary.

Our Directors have a continuing responsibility to fulfil their duties as members of the Board and Board Committees and this is managed through the provision of focused training and development opportunities.

During 2015, non-executive Directors attended briefings on the following subjects:

§talent management and succession planning

§Senior Managers Regime, and
§operational resilience.

Board Committees also undertook specific training and details can be found in the respective Committee Chairmen’s reports.

During 2015, individual Directors also attended regular meetings with our regulators, external auditors and major shareholders. In addition, the Board Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee carried out site visits as part of the audit tender process.

The following provides more detail of a specific training session that took place in 2015.

Governance in action: training and development

Following the July 2015 Board meeting, the non-executive Directors attended a briefing session on the Senior Managers Regime, led by Barclays Compliance. The Senior Managers Regime commences in March 2016 and, although only certain non-executive Directors will be in scope, there are a number of governance, reporting and conduct requirements that will apply to all Board Directors. The briefing session provided an overview of the Senior Managers Regime, with particular focus on the following:

§  an introduction to ‘Reasonable Steps’, including practical examples

§  the roles and responsibilities of non-executive Directors in scope

§  guidance for non-executive Directors who are not in scope, and

§  the Conduct Rules (standards that will be expected of all employees in a regulated firm).

In addition, Barclays Compliance detailed the work needed in order for Barclays to be ready for implementation of the regime in early 2016. This timetable included scheduling individual briefing sessions with in-scope non-executive Directors.

In late 2015/early 2016, Mike Ashley, Tim Breedon, Crawford Gillies and Sir Gerry Grimstone each had individual meetings with Barclays Compliance in order to cover the reasonable steps that, as a result of their particular role on the Board, each of them will be expected to take under the Senior Managers Regime. The session included a review of case studies, which focused on each Director’s prescribed responsibilities under the Senior Managers Regime. The Directors were briefed ahead of the meetings and provided with supporting documentation in advance. These meetings were also attended by the Company Secretary and external advisers.

 

 

38  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    39


 


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

    

    

Training and development

In order to continue to contribute effectively to Board and Board Committee meetings, Directors are regularly provided with the opportunity to take part in ongoing training and development and can also request specific training that we may consider necessary or useful. As part of our annual performance review with the Chairman, we discuss any particular development needs that can be met through either formal training or meeting with a particular senior executive. In 2017, Directors received ongoing training in relation to legal and regulatory developments, including in relation to the requirements of, and responsibilities under, the UK Senior Managers Regime.

Conflicts of Interest

In accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Association the Board has the authority to authorise conflicts of interest. Directors are required to declare any potential or actual conflicts of interest that could interfere with their ability to act in the best interests of the Group. The Company Secretary maintains a conflicts register, which is a record of actual and potential conflicts, together with any Board authorisation of the conflict. The authorisations are for an indefinite period but are reviewed annually by the Board Nominations Committee, which also considers the effectiveness of the process for authorising Directors’ conflicts of interest. The Board retains the power to vary or terminate the authorisation at any time.

Information provided to the Board

AsThe Role Profile for the Chairman, as set out in the Code, the Chairman is responsibleourCharter of Expectations, confirms his responsibility for ensuring that members of the Board receivesreceive accurate, timely and high qualityhigh-quality information. In particular, we require information about the Company’sBarclays’ performance at appropriate intervals and in an appropriate manner to enable itus to take sound decisions, monitor effectively and provide advice to promote the success of the Company. OurWorking in collaboration with the Chairman, the Company Secretary supports the Chairman inis responsible for ensuring good governance and consults Directors to ensure that good information flows betweenexist and that the Board receives the Board Committees and the senior executives. In addition to providing dedicated support for the Board, the Company Secretary maintains dialogue with our Directorsinformation it requires in order to confirm thatbe effective.

Throughout the information they require in order to fulfil their responsibilities as a member ofyear both the Board is being received. If there is a need for independentexecutive Directors and professional advice this can be sought bysenior executives keep the Board via the Company Secretary or directly, at Barclays expense.

Directors expect to be kept informed of key developments in the business by boththrough regular reports and updates. These are in addition to the Executive Directors and senior management, and take seriously their responsibility to request any further explanations as required. Thepresentations that the Board and Board Committee annual forward calendarsCommittees receive as part of businesstheir formal meetings. Directors are formulatedable to ensure thatseek independent and professional advice at Barclays’ expense, if required, to enable Directors receive regular reports and presentations, in addition to periodic communications advising of any updates to the businessfulfil their obligations as members of the Company, current events and the regulatory environment.Board.

Accountability

Risk managementManagement and internal controlInternal Control

The Directors have responsibilityare responsible for ensuring that management maintainmaintains an effective system of risk management and internal control and for assessing its effectiveness. Such a system is designed to identify, evaluate and manage, rather than eliminate, the risk of failure to achieve business objectives and can only provide reasonable and not absolute assurance against material misstatement or loss.

Barclays is committed to operating within a strong system of internal control that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing itself to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage. Barclays has an overarching framework that sets out the Group’s approach to internal governance, (theBarclays Guide). TheBarclays Guide, which establishes the mechanisms and processes by which management implements the strategy set by the Board directsto direct the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating its authority and assessing compliance.

A key component of theThe Barclays Guide is theEnterprise Risk Management Framework(ERMF). The purpose of the ERMF is to identify and set minimum requirements in respect of the main risks to achieving the Group’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are effective. The key elements of the Group’s system of internal control, which is aligned to the recommendations ofThe Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Internal Control – Integrated Framework (2013 COSO), are set out in the risk control frameworks relating to each of the Group’s principal and key risks.Principal Risks. As well as incorporating our internal requirements, these reflect material Group-wide legal and regulatory requirements relating to internal control and assurance.

Effectiveness of internal controls

Key controls are assessed on a regular basis for both design and operating effectiveness. Issues arising out of business risk and control assessments and other internal and external sources are examined to identify pervasive themes. Where appropriate, control issues are reported to the Board Audit Committee.Committee (BAC). In addition, the BAC receives regular reports are made to the Board Audit Committee byfrom management, Barclays Internal Audit (BIA) and the Finance, Compliance and Legal functions covering, in particular, financial controls, compliance and other operational controls.

Risk management and internal control framework

The ERMF is the Group’s internal control framework. Itframework, which is refreshed annually with an assessment of operational maturity provided toannually. There are eight Principal Risks under the Board Audit Committee. In 2015, the Board Audit Committee received quarterly reports on the effectiveness of the control environment: these reports covered risksERMF: Credit risk, Market risk, Treasury and controls including financial, operationalcapital risk, Operational risk, Model risk, Reputation risk, Conduct risk and complianceLegal risk.

The Board Audit CommitteeBAC formally reviews the system of internal control and risk management annually. Throughout the year endingended 31 December 20152017 and to date, the Group has operated a system of internal control that provides reasonable assurance of effective operations covering all controls, including financial and operational controls and compliance with laws and regulations. Processes are in place for identifying, evaluating and managing the principal risksPrincipal Risks facing the Group in accordance with theGuidance on Risk Management, Internal Control and Related Financial and Business ReportingReporting’ published by the Financial Reporting Council.

The review of the effectiveness of the system of risk management and internal control is achieved through a four-step approach which is centred on reviewing the effectiveness of theThe Barclays Guide and its component parts, including the ERMF.parts:

 

1.Governance Risk and Control meetings of the businessBusiness and functional executive committeesFunctional Executive Committees monitor, review and challenge the effective operation of key risk management and control processes, including the results of audits and reviews undertaken by Barclays Internal AuditBIA (which include assessments of the control environmentControl Environment and management’s control approach)Management Control Approach) and examinations and assessments undertaken by our primary regulators, on an ongoing basis as part of the system of risk management and internal control. The remediation of issues identified within the control environmentControl Environment is regularly monitored by management and the Board Audit Committee.BAC.

 

2.Testing of the Governance Risk and Control meetings, held withinby the executive committeesExecutive Committees, provides assurance that the committees are effectively overseeing the control environmentControl Environment and associated risk management and internal control processes.

 

3.The owners of the key governance processes which comprise theThe Barclays Guideundertake a review to confirm that processes have been implemented and are operating effectively.implemented.

 

4.The annual review of the system of risk management and internal control brings together the results of the activities completed in steps 1 to 3 to ensure that each of the key processes has been effectively reviewed.

In 2015,

40    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Regular reports are made to the Board received regular reports covering risks of Group-level significance. Over the year, theThe Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee examinedexamine reports covering the principal risks (credit risk, market risk, capital risk, liquidity risk, operational risk and conduct risk)Principal Risks as well as reports on risk measurement methodologies and risk appetite. Further details of risk management procedures and potential risk factors are given in the Risk Management sectionreview and risk management sections on pages 8775 to 93.162.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  39


Controls over financial reporting

A framework of disclosure controls and procedures is in place to support the approval of the Group’s financial statements. The Legal and Technical Review Committee isSpecific governance committees are responsible for examining the Group’sGroups’ financial reports and disclosures to ensure that they have been subject to adequate verification and comply with applicable standards and legislation. The Committee reports itsThese committees report their conclusions to the Disclosure Committee. The Disclosure Committee examines the content, accuracy and tone of the disclosures and reports its conclusions to the Board Audit Committee,BAC which debates its conclusions and provides further challenge. Finally, the Board scrutinises and approves results announcements and the Annual Report, and ensures that appropriate disclosures have been made. This governance process ensures that both management and the Board are given sufficient opportunity to debate and challenge the Group’sGroups’ financial statements and other significant disclosures before they are made public.

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over financial reporting. Internal control over financial reporting is a process designed under the supervision of the principal executive and principal financial officers to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external reporting purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as adopted by the European Union and issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). Internal control over financial reporting includes policies and procedures that pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect transactions and dispositions of assets; provide reasonable assurances that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS and that receipts and expenditures are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and the respective Directors; and provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Internal control systems, no matter how well designed, have inherent limitations and may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that internal controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

Management has assessed the internal control over financial reporting of Barclays PLC Group’s and Barclays Bank PLC Group’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2015.2017. In making its assessment, management has utilised the criteria set forth byout in the 2013 COSO framework. Managementframework and concluded that, based on its assessment, the internal control over financial reporting was effective as of 31 December 2015.2017. Our independent registered public accounting firm has issued a report on the Barclays PLC’sPLC Group internal control over financial reporting, which is set out on page 210.186.

The system of internal financial and operational controls is also subject to regulatory oversight in the UK and overseas. Further information on supervision by the financial services regulators is provided under Supervision and Regulation in the Risk review section on pages 177155 to 182.162.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There have been no changes in the Group’sGroups’ internal control over financial reporting that occurred during the period covered by this report which have materially affected or are reasonably likely to materially affect the Group’sGroups’ internal control over financial reporting.

Remuneration

Remuneration

We haveThe Board has delegated responsibility tofor the Board Remuneration Committee to determineconsideration and approval of the remuneration arrangements forof the Chairman, our Executiveexecutive Directors, and other senior executives and certain other Group employees to the Board Remuneration Committee. The Board as determined bya whole, with the Committee. Additional informationnon-executive Directors abstaining, considers annually the fees paid to non-executive Directors. Information on the activities of the Board Remuneration Committee including its membership and activities in 2015,2017 can be found in the Remuneration report on pages 70 and 71 in the Directors’ remuneration report,51 to 74, which forms part of the corporate governance statement.

Stakeholder engagement

We describe below how we engage with our stakeholders.

Investor engagement

The Board is committed to promoting effective channels of communication with shareholders and upholding good corporate governance as a means of building stronger and more engaged relationships with them. Our comprehensive investor engagement initiatives help us to understand their views about Barclays, which are communicated regularly to the Board. Our shareholder communication guidelines, which underpin all investor engagement, are available on our website at home.barclays/barclays-investor-relations/corporate-governance/shareholder-communication-guidelines.html.

Institutional investors

In 2015, our engagement with institutional investors took place throughout the year, following our quarterly results as well as outside the reporting cycle. This allowed the opportunity for existing and potential investors to engage with us regularly, and promoted dialogue on longer-term strategic developments, as well as about the recent financial performance of the Group.

The Directors, in conjunction with the senior executive team and Investor Relations, participated in varied forms of engagement across multiple geographic locations, reflecting the diverse nature of our equity and debt institutional ownership. Divisional management also presented extensively to investors, promoting greater awareness and understanding of our operational businesses and other functions.

In the past year, discussions with investors focused on the continued execution of our strategic plan outlined in 2014, and the steps taken in 2015 to improve our returns to shareholders, while adapting to the changing regulatory environment and addressing legacy issues. Meetings focused on corporate governance matters also took place throughout the year, covering topics including management changes, remuneration and other AGM-related matters. Following the appointment of Sir Gerry Grimstone as Senior Independent Director on 1 January 2016, our major investors were offered a meeting with him.

During 2015, we held quarterly results briefings, including an in-person presentation for the 2014 results announcement in March 2015, and quarterly breakfast briefings for equity and debt sellside analysts, hosted by the Group Finance Director. For fixed income investors, we held conference calls at our full year and half year results, hosted by our Group Finance Director and Group Treasurer, as well as quarterly briefings for credit analysts.

An independent audit of investor views took place in April 2015. Interviews with a cross-section of institutional shareholders and non-holders, were conducted on specific topics including strategy, business performance and the management team. The findings of the investor audit were presented to the Board.

To enable the effective distribution of information to all investors, transcripts of executive management speeches were uploaded to the investor relations section of the website, alongside associated presentation materials. In 2015, we received the UK Investor Relations Society’s award for the Best Use of Digital Communications, reinforcing the importance placed on using our website to engage with the market. For example, we introduced short videos providing a summary of our results from our Chairman, Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director.

 

 

40  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    41


 


Governance: Directors’ report

How we comply

    

    

Private shareholders

Throughout 2015, we continued to communicate with our private shareholders using our shareholder mailings. Also, shareholders can choose to sign up to Shareview so that they receive information about Barclays and their shareholding directly by email. On a practical level, over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Shares Not Taken Up (SNTU) cheque following the Rights Issue in September 2013. During 2015, we conducted a tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their SNTU monies together with any unclaimed dividends. By the end of the year, we had returned over £2.2m to our shareholders. In addition, we launched a special share dealing service in October 2015 for shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders could donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Shareholders donated nearly £130,000.

Our Annual General Meeting (AGM)

Our AGM continues to be a key date in the diary for the Board. It affords us our primary opportunity to engage with shareholders, particularly our private shareholders, on the key issues facing the Group and any questions they may have. The majority of Directors, including the Chairman, were available for informal discussion before and after the formal business of our 2015 AGM. All resolutions proposed at the 2015 AGM, which were considered on a poll, were passed with votes for ranging from 88.5% to 99.9% of the total votes cast.

The 2016 AGM will be held on Thursday 28 April 2016 at the Royal Festival Hall in London. The Notice of AGM can be found in a separate document, which is sent out at least 20 working days before the AGM and also made available at home.barclays/agm. Voting on the resolutions will again be by poll and the results will be announced via the Regulatory News Service and made available on our website on the same day. We encourage any shareholders who are unable to attend on the day to vote in advance of the meeting via home.barclays/investorrelations/vote or through Shareview (www.shareview.co.uk).

LOGO

 

 Stakeholder engagement

Investor Engagement

The Board is committed to promoting effective channels of communication with our shareholders and upholding good corporate governance as a means of building stronger and more engaged relationships with them. Our comprehensive Investor Relations engagement with the market helps us to understand investor views about Barclays, which are communicated regularly to the Board. Our shareholder communication guidelines, which underpin all investor engagement, are available on our website athome.barclays/investorrelations.

Institutional Investors

In 2017, our Investor Relations engagement with institutional investors took place throughout the year, both following our quarterly results as well as outside of the reporting cycle. This allowed the opportunity for existing and potential new investors to engage with Barclays regularly, promoting dialogue on longer-term strategic developments as well as on the recent financial performance of the Group.

The Directors, in conjunction with the senior executive team and Investor Relations, participated in varied forms of engagement, including investor meetings, seminars and conferences across many geographic locations, reflecting the diverse nature of our equity and debt institutional ownership. Divisional management also presented extensively to investors, promoting greater awareness and understanding of our operating businesses.

During 2017, discussions with investors were focused on the completion of our restructuring, including the sell down of our interest in Barclays Africa Group Limited to 14.9% and the closure of Non-Core in June, as well as our revised Group financial targets and our plans to achieve them within the specified timelines. Investors were also kept informed about progress on structural reform, in particular the set up of the UK ring-fenced bank, which we expect to take place in the second quarter of 2018.

Investor meetings focused on corporate governance also took place throughout the year, with the Chairman, Senior Independent Director, other Board representatives and the Company Secretary.

We held conference calls/webcasts for our quarterly results briefings and an in-person presentation for our 2016 full year results in March 2017, all hosted by the Group Chief Executive and Group Finance Director. In addition, the Group Finance Director held a

quarterly breakfast briefing for sellside analysts, with a transcript of the discussions uploaded to our website. For fixed income investors we held conference calls at our full year and half year results, hosted by our Group Finance Director and Group Treasurer.

The Investor Relations section of our website is an important communication channel that enables the effective distribution of information to the market in a clear and consistent manner. Executive management presentations, speeches and, where possible, webcast replays are uploaded to our website on a timely basis.

Private Shareholders

During 2017, we continued to communicate with our private shareholders through our shareholder mailings. Shareholders can also choose to sign up to Shareview so that they receive information about Barclays and their shareholding directly by email. On a practical level, over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Shares Not Taken Up (SNTU) cheque following the Rights Issue in September 2013. In 2017, we continued the tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their SNTU monies and any unclaimed dividends and by the end of the year, we had returned approximately £200,000 to our shareholders, in addition to the £1.65m returned in 2016 and £2.2m in 2015. Each year we launch a Share Dealing Service aimed at shareholders with relatively small shareholdings for whom it might otherwise be uneconomical to deal. One option open to shareholders is to donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift. As a result of this initiative, more than £61,000 was donated in 2017, taking the total donated since 2015 to over £299,000.

Our AGM

The Board and the senior executive team continue to consider our AGM as a key date for shareholder engagement. The AGM provides us with our main opportunity to engage with shareholders, particularly our private shareholders, on the key issues facing the Group and any questions they may have. A number of Directors, including the Chairman, were available for informal discussion either before or after the meeting. All resolutions proposed at the 2017 AGM, which were considered on a poll, were passed with votes “For” ranging from 85.67% to 99.95% of the total votes cast.

The 2018 AGM will be held on Tuesday 1 May 2018 at the QEII Conference Centre in London. The Notice of AGM can be found in a separate document, which is sent out at least 20 working days before the AGM and also made available at

home.barclays/agm. Voting on the resolutions will again be by poll and the results will be announced via the Regulatory News Service and made available on our website on the same day. We encourage any shareholders who are unable to attend on the day to vote in advance of the meeting viahome.barclays/ investorrelations/vote or through Shareview(www.shareview.co.uk).

2017 engagement timeline

LOGO

 

42    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  41


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

 

 

The Directors present their report together with the audited accounts for the year ended 31 December 2015.2017.

Other information that is relevant to the Directors’ Report, and which is incorporated by reference into this report, can be located as follows:

Contents    Page
Employee involvement  44-4947
Policy concerning the employment of disabled persons  48
Financial instruments  230-254212
Hedge accounting policy  231200
Remuneration policy, including details of the remuneration of each Director and Directors’ interests in shares  50-8351
Corporate governance report  2-491
Risk review  84-18275

Disclosures required pursuant to Listing Rule 9.8.4R can be found on the following pages:

    

Page

Long-term incentive schemes  7781
Waiver of Director emoluments  29570
Allotment for cash of equity securities  276251
Waiver of dividends  4243

The particulars of important events affecting the Company since the financial year end can be found in Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Profit and dividends

The adjusted profit for the financial year, after taxation, was £3,713m (2014: £3,798m). Statutory profitloss after tax for 20152017 was £623m (2014: £845m)£894m (2016: profit £2,828m). The final dividend for 20152017 of3.5p 2.0p per share will be paid on 5 April 20162018 to shareholders whose names are on the Register of Members at the close of business on 112 March 2016.2018. With the interim dividendsdividend totalling 3p1.0p per ordinary share, paid in June, September and December 2015,2017, the total distribution for 20152017 is 6.5p (2014: 6.5p)3.0p (2016: 3.0p) per ordinary share. The interim and final dividends for 20152017 amounted to £1,081m (2014: £1,057m)£509m (2016: £757m).

For 2018, Barclays anticipates resuming a total cash dividend of 6.5p, subject to regulatory approvals.

The nominee companiescompany of certain Barclays’ employeesemployee benefit trusts holding shares in Barclays in connection with the operation of the Company’s share plans havehas lodged evergreen dividend waivers on shares held by themit that have not been allocated to employees. The total amount of dividends waived during the year ended 31 December 20152017 was £6.4m.£0.68m (2016: £2.6m).

Barclays understands the importance of the ordinary dividend for our shareholders. Barclays is therefore committed to maintaining an appropriate balance between total cash returns to shareholders, investment in the business, and maintaining a strong capital position. Going forward, Barclays intends to pay an annual ordinary dividend that takes into account these objectives, and the medium-term earnings outlook of the Group. It is also the Board’s intention to supplement the ordinary dividends with additional returns to shareholders as and when appropriate.

The Board notes that in determining any proposed distributions to shareholders, the Board will consider the expectation of servicing more senior securities.

Board of Directors

The names of the current Directors of Barclays PLC, along with their biographical details, are set out on pages 35 and 46 and are incorporated into this report by reference. Changes to Directors during the year are set out in the table below.

Name  Role  

Effective date of
appointment/


resignation

Diane Schueneman

Sir Ian Cheshire
Non-executive Director  

Appointed

3 April 2017

Matthew LesterNon-executive Director

  

Appointed

Appointed 25 June 2015

1 September 2017

James (Jes) Staley

Mike Turner CBE
Non-executive Director  

Appointed

Executive1 January 2018

Diane de Saint VictorNon-executive Director

  

Retired

Appointed 1 December 2015

10 May 2017

Sir Gerald (Gerry) Grimstone

Stephen Thieke
Non-executive Director  

Retired

Non-executive Director

Appointed 1 January 2016

Sir John Sunderland

Non-executive Director

Retired 23 April 2015

Sir David Walker

Non-executive Director

Retired 23 April 2015

Antony Jenkins

Executive Director

Resigned 16 July 2015

Sir Michael Rake

Non-executive Director

Retired 31 December 2015

10 May 2017

John McFarlane succeeded Sir David Walker as Chairman of Barclays with effect from the conclusion of the Barclays PLC AGM in April 2015. John McFarlane held the position of Executive Chairman with effect from 17 July 2015 to 1 December 2015, when Jes Staley took up the position of Group Chief Executive.

42  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Appointment and retirement of Directors

The appointment and retirement of Directors is governed by the Company’s Articles of Association (the Articles), the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code), the Companies Act 2006 and related legislation.

The Articles may only be amended by a special resolution of the shareholders. The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy among the Directors. Any such Director holds office only until the next AGM and may offer himself/herself for election.re-election. The Code recommends that all directors of FTSE 350 companies should be subject to annual re-election. All Directors will stand for election or re-election at the 2018 AGM.

Directors’ indemnities

Qualifying third party indemnity provisions (as defined by section 234 of the Companies Act

2006) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 20152017 for the benefit of the then Directors and, at the date of this report, are in force for the benefit of the Directors in relation to certain losses and liabilities which they may incur (or have incurred) in connection with their duties, powers or office. In addition, the Company maintains Directors’ and& Officers’ Liability Insurance which gives appropriate cover for legal action brought against its Directors.

Qualifying pension scheme indemnity provisions (as defined by section 235 of the Companies Act 2006) were in force during the course of the financial year ended 31 December 20152017 for the benefit of the then Directors, and at the date of this report are in force for the benefit of directors of Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited as Trustee of the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund. The directors of the Trustee are indemnified against liability incurred in connection with the Company’scompany’s activities as Trustee of the retirement fund.Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    43


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Similarly, qualifying pension scheme indemnities were in force during 20152017 for the benefit of directors of Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited as Trustee of Barclays Bank International Limited Zambia Staff Pension Fund (1965), Barclays Capital International Pension Scheme (No.1), Barclays Capital Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme, and Barclays PLC Funded Unapproved Retirement Benefits Scheme. The Directorsdirectors of the Trustee are indemnified against the liability incurred in connection with the Company’scompany’s activities as Trustee of the schemes above.

Political donations

The Group did not give any money for political purposes in the UK, the rest of the EU or outside of the EU, nor did it make any political donations to political parties or other political organisations, or to any independent election candidates, or incur any political expenditure during the year.

In accordance with the US Federal Election Campaign Act, Barclays provides administrative support to a federal Political Action Committee (PAC) in the US funded by the voluntary political contributions of eligible employees. The PAC is not controlled by Barclays and all decisions regarding the amounts and recipients of contributions are directed by a steering committee comprising employees eligible to contribute to the PAC. Contributions to political organisations reported by the PAC during the calendar year 20152017 totalled $79,500 (2014: $103,000)$67,250 (2016: $12,500).

Environment

Barclays’ climate action programmeBarclays focuses on addressing environmental issues where we believe we have the greatest potential to make a difference. The programme focusesWe focus on managing our own carbon footprint and reducing our absolute carbon emissions, developing products and services to help enable the transition to a low-carbon economy, and managing the risks of climate change to our operations, clients, customers and society at large.

We invest in improving the energy efficiency of our operations and offset the emissions remaining through the purchase of carbon credits.credits, sourced from verified projects. We also have a long-standing commitment to managing the environmental and social risks associated with our lending practices, which is embedded into our creditCredit risk processes. A governance structure is in place to facilitate clear dialogue across the business and with suppliers around

issues of potential environmental and social risk.

We have disclosed global greenhouse gas emissions (GHG) that we are responsible for as set out by the Companies Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ Report) Regulations 2013. We provide fuller disclosure acrosson (i) financing solutions for the lower carbon economy, (ii) environmental risk management and (iii) management of our carbon emissions withinand environmental footprint in the Barclays Citizenship Data Supplement foundEnvironmental, Social and Governance (ESG) Report available on our website home.barclays/athome.barclays.com/citizenship. We have also provided initial disclosures aligned with the Task Force on Climate-Related Financial

Disclosures (TCFD) in the Strategic Report and ESG Report.

 

   

Reporting 

yeara

2015 

  

Reporting 

yeara

2014 

  

Reporting 

yeara

2013 

  

Comparison 

yeara

2012 

Global GHG

emissionsb

            

Total CO2e (tonnes)b

  701,600   853,376   1,036,755   1,119,145 

Scope 1 CO2e emissions (tonnes)c

  65,340   49,939   58,372   47,904 

Scope 2 CO2e emissions (tonnes)d

  500,086   678,443   791,766   880,995 

Scope 3 CO2e emissions (tonnes)e

  136,174   124,993   186,616   190,245 

Intensity ratio

            

Total full time employees (FTE)

  129,400   132,300   139,600   139,200 

Total CO2e per FTE (tonnes)

  5.42   6.45   7.43   8.04 
   Current 
Reporting 
Yeara
2017 
  Previous
Reporting
Year
2016
  Previous
reporting
Year
2015
 
Global Green House Gas (GHG) Emissionsb 
Total CO2e emissions (tonnes)  347,165   402,531   479,934 
Scope 1 CO2e emissions (tonnes)c  25,627   26,721   29,144 
Scope 2 CO2e emissions (tonnes)d  250,897   308,473   342,012 
Scope 3 CO2e emissions (tonnes)e  70,641   67,336   93,989 
Intensity Ratio 
Total Full Time Equivalent (Full Time Equivalent)  79,900   76,500   85,800 
Total CO2e emissions (tonnes) per FTEf  4.34   5.26   5.59 
Scope 2 CO2e market based emissions (tonnes)d  298,469   337,483     

Notes

a2015, 2014 and 2013 reporting years cover Q4 from the previous year and Q1, 2, 3 of theThe carbon reporting year in question.for our GHG emissions is 1 October to 30 September. The carbon reporting year is not fully aligned to the financial reporting year covered by the Directors’ report. This report is produced earlier than previous carbon reporting to allow us to report within the year end financial reporting timelines. The 2012 reporting year is the full calendar year (Jan 2012 – Dec 2012).
bThe methodology used to calculate our CO2e emissionsGHG is the operational control approach on reporting boundariesGreenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG): A Corporate Accounting and carbon emissions methodology asReporting Standard Revised Edition, defined by the World Resources Institute/World Business Council for Sustainable Development (WRI/WBCSD) Greenhouse Gas Protocol (GHG): A Corporate Accounting and Reporting Standard, Revised Edition.. We have adopted the operational control approach on reporting boundaries to define our reporting boundary. Where properties are covered by Barclays’ consolidated financial statements but are leased to tenants, who are invoiced for utilities, these emissions are not included in the Group GHG calculations. For properties whereWhere Barclays is responsible for the tenant, landlords provide Barclays with utility bills whichcosts, these emissions are included in our emissions reporting.included.
  §On 1 June 2017 we completed the sale of a 33.7% stake in Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) resulting in a non-controlling position. In 2017 we have restated our GHG emissions through to the 2015 baseline to account for this and BAGL emissions are not reported from 2015 onwards in order to ensure accurate tracking against our 30% carbon reduction commitment. In addition, we have restated our Scope 3 emissions to remove erroneous air data which was identified as part of the 2017 reporting process.
cScope 1 covers direct combustion of fuels and company–company owned vehicles (from UK and South Africa only, which areis the most material contributors). Fugitive emissions reported in Scope 1 cover emissions from UK, Americas, Asia Pacific and Europe.
§dScope 2 coverslocation and market emissions fromcover electricity and steam purchased for own use. Market based emissions have been reported for 2017 and 2016 only.
§eScope 3 covers indirect emissions from business travel (global flights and ground transport) from the UK and South Africa. We have improved our coverage for car hire data and now include data from the US and India. Ground transportation data (excluding Scope 1 company cars) covers those countries where this type of transport is material and robust data is available.

In cases where we have collected new data for previously unreported consumption, we have restated the baseline if the new data amounts to a material change greater than 1% of the total consumption. If the change is less than 1%, we have reported consumption from the point at which the data became available. If it is greater than 1%, we have restated the baseline and previous years’ figures based on actual or estimated figures. Reasons for restatements in data are due to more accurate data being available which led to replacements of estimates with actual data for 2012, 2013 and 2014.

cFugitive emissions reported in Scope 1 for 2015, 2014 and 2013 cover emissions from UK, Americas, Asia-Pacific and South Africa. Fugitive emission data for 2012 is not available. Business travel reported in Scope 1 covers company cars in the UK and South Africa. This covers the majority of our employees where we have retail operations with car fleets.
dScope 2 carbon emissions from electricity have been calculated using location–based carbon conversion factors as defined by the GHG Protocol 2015. We are mindful of the new location and market based methodology for accounting Scope 2 electricity emissions and these emissions will be reported in future reports.
eScope 3 is limited to emissions from business travel which covers global flights and ground transport from the UK, USA and South Africa. We have improved our coverage forIndia. USA and India ground transport covers onwards car hire data and now include data fromonly which is provided directly by the US and India.supplier. Ground transportation data (excluding Scope 1 company cars) covers only countries where this type of transport is material androbust data is available.available directly from the supplier.
fIntensity ratio calculations have been calculated using location based emission factors only.

Research and development

In the ordinary course of business, the Group develops new products and services in each of its business divisions.

Share capital

Share capital structure

The Company has ordinary shares in issue. The Company’s Articles also allow for the issuance of sterling, US dollar, euro and yen preference shares (preference shares). No preference shares have been issued as at 2619 February 20162018 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Ordinary shares therefore represent 100% of the total issued share

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  43


capital as at 31 December 20152017 and as at 2619 February 20162018 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report). Details of the movement in ordinary share capital during the year can be found in Note 31 on page 276.251.

Voting

Every member who is present in person or represented at any general meeting of the Company, and who is entitled to vote, has one vote on a show of hands. Every proxy present has one vote. The proxy will have one vote for and one vote against a resolution if he/she has been instructed to vote for or against the resolution by different members or in one direction by a member while another member has permitted the proxy discretion as to how to vote.

On a poll, every member who is present or represented and who is entitled to vote has one vote for every share held. In the case of joint holders, only the vote of the senior holder (as determined by order in the share register) or hishis/her proxy may be counted. If any sum payable remains unpaid in relation to a member’s shareholding, that member is not entitled to vote that share or exercise any other right in relation to a meeting of the Company unless the Board otherwise determine. determines.

If any member, or any other person appearing to be interested in any of the Company’s ordinary shares, is served with a notice under section 793 of the Companies Act 2006 and does not supply the Company with the information required in the notice, then the Board, in its absolute discretion, may direct that that member shall not be entitled to attend or vote at any meeting of the Company. The Board may further direct that if the shares of the defaulting member represent 0.25% or more of the issued shares of the relevant class, that dividends or other monies payable on those shares shall be retained by the Company until the direction ceases to have effect and that no transfer of those shares shall be registered (other than certain specified ‘excepted transfers’). A direction ceases to have effect seven days after the Company has received the information requested, or when the Company is notified that an excepted transfer of all of the relevant shares to a third party has occurred, or as the Board otherwise determines.

44    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Transfers

Ordinary shares may be held in either certificated or uncertificated form. Certificated ordinary shares shall be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Company Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. Transfers of uncertificated ordinary shares shall be made in accordance with the Companies Act 2006 and CREST Regulations.

The Board is not bound to register a transfer of partly-paid ordinary shares or fully-paid shares in exceptional circumstances approved by the FCA. The Board may also decline to register an instrument of transfer of certificated ordinary shares unless it is (i) duly stamped, and deposited at the prescribed place and accompanied by the share certificate(s) and such other evidence as reasonably required by the Board to evidence right to transfer, (ii) it is in respect of one class of shares only, and (iii) it is in favour of a single transferee or not more than four joint transferees (except in the case of executors or trustees of a member).

In accordance with the provisions of Section 84 of the Small Business, Enterprise and Employment Act 2015, preference shares may only be issued in registered form. Preference shares shall be transferred in writing in any usual or other form approved by the Company Secretary and executed by or on behalf of the transferor. The Company’s registrar shall register such transfers of preference shares by making the appropriate entries in the register of preference shares. Each preference share shall confer, in the event of a winding up or any return of capital by reduction of capital (other than, unless otherwise provided by their terms of issue, a redemption or purchase by the Company of any of its issued shares, or a reduction of share capital), the right to receive out of the surplus assets of the Company available for distribution among the members and in priority to the holders of the ordinary shares and any other shares in the Company ranking junior to the relevant series of preference shares and pari passu with any other class of preference shares (other than any class of shares then in issue ranking in priority to the relevant series of preference shares), repayment of the amount paid up or treated as paid up in respect of the nominal value of the preference share together with any premium which was paid or treated as paid when the preference share was issued in addition to an amount equal to accrued and unpaid dividends.

Variation of rightsRights

The rights attached to any class of shares may be varied either with the consent in writing of the holders of at least 75% in nominal value of the issued shares of that class, or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate meeting of the holders of the shares of that class. The rights of shares shall not (unless expressly provided by the rights attached to such shares) be deemed varied by the creation of further shares ranking equally with them or subsequent to them.

Limitations on foreign shareholders

There are no restrictions imposed by the Articles of Association or (subject to the effect of any economic sanctions that may be in force from time to time) by current UK laws which relate only to non-residents of the UK and which limit the rights of such non-residents to hold or (when entitled to do so) vote the ordinary shares.

Exercisability of rights under an employee share scheme

Employee Benefit Trusts (EBTs) operate in connection with certain of the Group’s Employee Share Plans (Plans). The trustees of the EBTs may exercise all rights attached to the shares in accordance with their fiduciary duties other than as specifically restricted in the relevant Plan governing documents. The trustees of the EBTs have informed the Company that their normal policy is to abstain from voting in respect of the Barclays shares held in trust. The trustees of the Global Sharepurchase EBT and UK Sharepurchase EBTs may vote in respect of Barclays shares held in the EBTs, but only as instructed by participants in those Plans in respect of their partnership shares and (when vested) matching and dividend shares. The trustees will not otherwise vote in respect of shares held in the Sharepurchase EBTs.

Special rights

There are no persons holding securities that carry special rights with regard to the control of the Company.company.

Major shareholdersa

Major shareholders do not have different voting rights from those of other shareholders. Information provided to the Company by majorsubstantial shareholders pursuant to the FCA’s Disclosure RulesGuidance and Transparency Rules (DTRs) are published via a Regulatory Information Service and is available on the Company’s website. As at 31 December 2015,2017, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the DTRsDisclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares.

 

    Person interested  

Number of

Barclays shares

    

% of total  

voting rights  

attaching to  

issued share  

capitala 

The Capital Group Companies Incb  1,172,090,125    6.98  
Qatar Holding LLCc  813,964,522    6.65  
BlackRock, Inc.d  822,938,075    5.02  
Norges Bank  506,870,056    3.02  
Person interested  

Number of

Barclays Shares

   % of total 
voting 
rights 
attaching 
to issued 
share 
capitalb
 
The Capital Group    
Companies Incc   1,172,090,125    6.98  
Qatar Holding LLCd   1,017,455,690    5.99  
BlackRock, Ince   1,010,054,871    5.92  

Notes

aSignificant shareholders for the last 3 years are shown on page 323.284.
bThe percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.
cThe Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. On 14 February 2018, CG disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,167,912,211 ordinary shares of the Company as of 29 December 2017, representing 6.8% of that class of shares.
dQatar Holding LLC is wholly ownedwholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority. On 17 January 2018, Qatar Holding LLC disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 941,620,690 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2017, representing 5.52% of that class of shares.
eTotal shown includes 1,408,6182,009,814 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. On 2530 January 2016,2018, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,109,026,1561,145,415,782 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2015,2017, representing 6.6%6.7% of that class of shares.

Between 31 December 2017 and 19 February 2018 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report), the Company was notified that BlackRock, Inc. now holds 990,743,261 Barclays shares, representing 5.80% of the total voting rights attached to issued share capital.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    45


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Powers of Directors to issue or buy back the Company’s shares

The powers of the Directors are determined by the Companies Act 2006 and the Company’s Articles. The Directors are authorised to issue and allot shares and to buy back shares subject to annual shareholder approval at the AGM. Such authorities were granted by shareholders at the 20152017 AGM. It will be proposed at the 20162018 AGM that the Directors be granted new authorities to allot and buy back shares.

44  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Directors’ report

Other statutory information

Repurchase of shares

The Company did not repurchase any of its ordinary shares during 2015 (2014:2017 (2016: none). As at26 19 February 20162018 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report) the Company had an unexpired authority to repurchase ordinary shares up to a maximum of 1,650,234,6021,696m ordinary shares.

Distributable reserves

As at 31 December 2017, the distributable reserves of Barclays PLC (the Parent company) were £6,728m and the distributable reserves of Barclays Bank PLC were £24,021m.

As at the date of this report, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Bank UK PLC (our future ring-fenced bank) intend to carry out a process in the second half of 2018 to increase their respective distributable reserves. Each process will require the relevant company to obtain shareholder and court approval, and for Barclays PLC we will be seeking shareholder approval at our 2018 AGM. In each case, the processes will involve the conversion of the share premium account into a distributable reserve, which is a reclassification within the equity of each company and will have no regulatory capital impact. Further information will be included in the Barclays PLC AGM Notice of Meeting (please see page 74 for further details about our AGM and how you can vote).

Change of control

There are no significant agreements to which the Company is a party that are affected by a change of control of the Company following a takeover bid. There are no agreements between the Company and its Directors or employees providing for compensation for loss of office or employment that occurs because of a takeover bid.

Going concern

The Group’s business activities, and financial position, thecapital, factors likely to affect its future development and performance and its objectives and policies in managing the financial riskrisks to which it is exposed and its capital are discussed in the Risk Management section.review and Risk management sections.

The Directors considered it appropriate to prepare the financial statements of the Group and Company on a going concern basis.

In preparing each of the Group and parent Company financial statements, the directors are required to:

assess the Group and Parent Company’s ability to continue as a going concern, disclosing, as applicable, matters related to going concern; and

use the going concern basis of accounting unless they either intend to liquidate the Group or the Parent company’s or to cease operations, or have no realistic alternative but to do so.

Disclosure of informationInformation to auditorthe Auditor

Each Director confirms that, so far as he/she is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which the Company’s auditors are unaware and that each Directorof the Directors has taken all the steps that he/she ought to have taken as a Director to make himself/herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that the Company’s auditors are aware of that information. This confirmation is given pursuant to section 418 of the Companies Act 2006 and should be interpreted in accordance with and subject to those provisions.

Directors’ responsibilities

The following statement, which should be read in conjunction with the reportReport of the independent registered public accounting firm set out on page 210,186 and 187, is made with a view to distinguishing for shareholders the respective responsibilities of the Directors and of the auditors in relation to the accounts.

The Directors are required by the Companies Act 2006 to prepare accountsGroup and Company financial statements for each financial year and, with regards to Group accounts, in accordance with Article 4 of the IAS Regulation. The Directors have prepared groupGroup and individualCompany accounts in accordance with IFRS as adopted by the EU. The accounts are required by law and IFRS to present fairlyUnder the financial position of the Company and the Group and the performance for that period. The Companies Act 2006, provides, in relation to such accounts,the Directors must not approve the financial statements unless they are satisfied that references to accounts givingthey give a true and fair view are references to fair presentation.of the state of affairs of the Group and parent Company and of their profit or loss for that period.

The Directors consider that, in preparing the accounts on pages 211 to 305,financial statements, the Group and the additional information contained on pages 111 to 182, the GroupCompany has used appropriate accounting policies, supported by reasonable judgements and estimates, and that all accounting standards which they consider to be applicable have been followed.

Having taken all the matters considered by the Board and brought to the attention of the Board during the year into account, the Directors are satisfied that the Annual Report and Financial Statements, taken as a whole, are fair, balanced and understandable, and provide the information necessary for shareholders to assess the Group and Company’s position and performance, business model and strategy.

Directors are responsible for such internal control as they determine is necessary to enable the preparation of financial statements that are free from material misstatement, whether due to fraud or error.

Directors’ responsibility statement

The Directors have responsibility for ensuring that the Company and the Group keep accounting records which disclose with reasonable accuracy the financial position of the Company and the Group and which enable them to ensure that the accounts comply with the Companies Act 2006.

The Directors are also responsible for preparing a Strategic Report, Directors’ Report, Directors’ Remuneration Report and Corporate Governance Statement in accordance with applicable law and regulations.

The Directors are responsible for the maintenance and integrity of the Annual Report and Financial Statements as they appear on the Company’s website. Legislation in the UK governing the preparation and dissemination of financial statements may differ from legislation in other jurisdictions.

The Directors have a general responsibility for taking such steps as are reasonably open to them to safeguard the assets of the Group and Company and to prevent and detect fraud and other irregularities.

The Directors, whose names and functions are set out on pages 35 and 4,6, confirm to the best of their knowledge that:

(a) the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, and

(a)the financial statements, prepared in accordance with the applicable set of accounting standards, give a true and fair view of the assets, liabilities, financial position and profit or loss of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole; and

(b) the management report, which is incorporated into the Directors’ Report on pages 3 to 45, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

(b)the management report, on page 2 to 50 which is incorporated in the Directors’ Report, includes a fair review of the development and performance of the business and the position of the Company and the undertakings included in the consolidation taken as a whole, together with a description of the principal risks and uncertainties that they face.

By order of the Board

LOGO

Lawrence DickinsonStephen Shapiro

Company Secretary

2921 February 2016

Barclays PLC2018

Registered in England, England.

Company No. 48839

 

 

46    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  45


GovernanceGovernance: Directors’ report

People

    

    

During 2015As highlighted in Our People and Culture we have continued to make progress towards increasing the diversity of our work to enhance support forworkforce underpinned by an inclusive culture and engaged employees. Below provides an overview of some of the programmes, initiatives and ways in which we are supporting our colleagues, which in their careers andturn enables us to enable them to contribute to the long-term success of Barclays.

Culture, values and learning

We are intosupport our third year of cultural change at Barclays. We have defined a common set of Values and Behaviours and embedded them into our core people processes so that they are recognised and understood by our colleagues. Having set the tone from the top by driving cultural change through our Group Executive Committee and business/ functional senior leaders, we have delivered a number of group-wide initiatives to embed the organisational culture. Our leadership development programme is underpinned by our Values, and ensures all senior management are aware of, and are enabled to role model our Values and Behaviours. Both the Barclays Leadership Academycustomers, clients and the Global Curriculum, which provides colleagues with development resources focused on personal and behavioural skill, are widely available and provide a consistent approach to core and leadership development.

We continue to assess candidate alignment to our Values and Behaviours through our recruitment and promotion processes and we also ensure new joiners attend the ‘Being Barclays’ Global Induction programme, which provides an in-depth experience of the Values and life at Barclays. All colleagues are required to attest and demonstrate their understanding of expected behaviours through the Global Code of Conduct (The Barclays Way).community.

Early careers and apprenticeships

Barclays is committed to helping young people achieve their ambitions when they enter the world of work, so ourOur Early Careers propositionoffering includes graduate, internship and apprenticeship programmes which provide structured support to young people.programmes. In 2015,2017 we launched our Bolder Apprenticeship Programme, targeting long-term unemployed adultshired over the age of 24, which is the first of its kind in the UK780 interns and underlines our commitment to tackling societal issues675 graduates, and attracting diverse talent.

since 2012 we have created over 3,400 apprenticeships. We provide pathways for progression from apprentice to graduate supported by recognised qualifications and, in doing so, help to create an internal talent pipeline. In 2015,During 2017, we launched a new graduate programme across a number of our business areas to attract the workforce of the future, and within Technology and Barclays hired over 1,000 interns, 800 graduates and have created over 2,500 apprenticeships since 2013. During 2015UK we increased our gender diversity across our internship programmes by 8% to 42% female representation.the number of opportunities for both interns and graduates.

My CareerInternal Mobility

By supporting internal mobility across Barclays and mentoring toolmaking it simple and easy for colleagues to move internally, we hope to successfully retain and develop our internal talent. We have developed multiple tools and resources for colleagues to find internal career opportunities and for managers to find and assess suitable internal candidates. In 2017 our rate of internal hiring was 40%, a reduction on 2016, which can be attributed to factors including a strategic move to hire externally for specific skill sets, particularly within Technology, and a focus on converting temporary staff into permanent roles.

Leadership and Learning

ColleagueIn 2017, a consistent Barclays Leadership Capability framework launched across the organisation. Our leadership and learning solutions are underpinned by this framework and our values. The Barclays Academies and our Global Curriculum provide colleagues with face-to-face, virtual and self-managed development both personalresources. All new joiners undertake the ‘Being Barclays’ induction, providing an in-depth understanding of the values and professional,expected behaviours through the Global Code of Conduct (The Barclays Way).

Industrial relations and Managing change

Barclays has a long-standing partnership approach to industrial relations and we value the relationships we have with over 14 trade unions, works councils and staff associations globally. Within the UK we have a formal partnership with Unite which has been in place for over 17 years. Following joint review, the partnership agreement was extended in 2017 for a priority in 2015. We launchedfurther 5 years. As part of the ‘My Career’ online portal which providesreview, Unite recognition was extended to cover an additional 1,500 employees. Throughout 2017, we have continued to have regular and constructive dialogue with employee representatives and employees on a wide range of information and tools to help colleagues understand their potential and make informed career decisions. We recognise the importance of great mentor relationships and have deployed an online tool to match mentors and mentees based on skill sets and experience.

Wellbeing

Our new global wellbeing programme, ‘Be Well’ launched in 2015, aiming to support employee engagement and improve health and well-being. The programme includes existing health and well-being resources,topics. Earlier this year, as well as new investment in areas such as employee health screenings, a global speaker series and a new global portal which acts as a gateway to education materials and events.

Performance management

Colleagues are encouraged to align their objectives to business and team goals and behavioural expectations are set in relation to our Values. Performance is assessed against both ‘what’ colleagues do and ‘how’ they do it. The ‘Values in Action’ framework provides all colleagues with the tools to assess ‘what’ objectives they achieved and ‘how’ they achieved them, together with a guide on expected behaviours in line with the Values. Our global recognition plan allows colleagues to recognise the outstanding achievements of those who have demonstrated our Values, with over 188,500 colleagues receiving a Values ‘Thank You’ in 2015.

Managing change

Where business restructuring has been necessary to support the transformationpart of our businessimplementation of structural reform, we consulted with Unite and cost profile, we have consultedemployee forums on potential job losses with employee representatives, as well as the impacted individuals. Our aim has beensuccessful transfer of c. 53,000 employees to treat all colleagues with respect andnew legal employing entities. We seek to avoid compulsory redundancies wherever possible.where possible and try to find ways in which we can achieve this during the consultation period. We have placedcontinue to place significant emphasis on both voluntary redundancy programmes as well as internal redeployment via “Internals First”.through our ‘Internals First’ programme. We also aim to keep in touch with former colleagues through the Barclays Global Alumni Programme.

Internals First supportsPerformance Management

Barclays approach to performance management is key to the delivery of our strategy and to drive a values-based culture. Colleagues align their objectives (‘what’ they will deliver) to business and team goals to support our strategy and good customer outcomes. Behavioural expectations (‘how’ they will achieve their objectives) are set in the context of our values. Our global recognition programme provides colleagues the opportunity to recognise the achievements of those who have been impacted by change and provides individual support to ensure that we retain talent within Barclays. Internals First is deployed in alldemonstrated our main locations and is managed by a dedicated team. In 2015, 935 colleagues registered for Internals First support and we redeployed 39% of them within Barclays. Throughout 2015, colleagues attended Internals First Career and Networking Events and opted for outplacement support services.

During 2015, we also developed ‘Be Informed’, which is available on both desktop and mobile devices. This intuitive support site gives transparent and helpful advice for colleagues who are impacted by change, including how to manage change, further career options available to them and where to go for help and support during periods of uncertainty.

When an employee does leave Barclays as a consequence of restructuring, our commitment is to ensure they are given the best support for the next stage in their career and life. Following an extensive review, a new globally consistent career transition service has been implemented which offers personalised advice and support for all employees placed at risk of redundancy.

Industrial relations

values. We continue to advocate and practisesee a partnership approach to industrial relations and valueyear-on-year increase in the relationships we havenumber of colleagues receiving a values ‘Thank You’ message, with over 30 trade unions, works councils and staff associations around the world. In particular, our formal partnership with Unite since 2000 is one of the longest standing210,000 messages sent in the UK. During 2015, we have continued to have regular, constructive dialogue with employee representatives on a wide range of topics that affect employees, facilitated through established regional consultation forums which bring together representatives from across our businesses.

We are confident that through all these established core people processes and others, we have created the right landscape at Barclays to sustain the desired organisational culture. We also believe that while we have a common purpose, Values, and vision, this can mean different things for different parts of our business and so we need to continue to shape our culture in a way that makes sense for each of our business areas. To that end, in 2015, each business CEO was tasked with driving the organisational culture for their business and we supported this by deploying business-specific training academies across the Group. This will continue into 2016.

46  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance

People

Your View

Barclays’ recognises the importance of listening to our colleagues and maintaining open, two-way dialogues between the organisation and colleagues. The views of our colleagues shape the decisions we make, helping us create an environment that colleagues want to work in, which we in turn believe will help drive high performance.

We deployed a global colleague survey, ‘Your View’ once again in 2015 to seek the views of colleagues. This year’s survey was more focused, based on the insights derived from the previous year’s survey, and asked for our colleagues’ views on a range of topics, including our Values, leadership and line management, the working environment, and citizenship. The results showed a near-universal understanding among colleagues of the Values and related behaviours (97% favourable) with 81% agreeing that role modelling the Values is central to creating the right culture at Barclays.

Compared to 2014, colleagues feel an increased sense of job accomplishment and enthusiasm, believe more strongly in Barclays’ goals, and are more likely to recommend Barclays as a place to work. Sustainable Engagement is at 75%, a 3% increase compared to 2014. This is a strong result, suggesting action taken during 2015 is having an impact, notwithstanding the continued and sustained change we have experienced. We have performed an in-depth review of the results of the survey with all senior leaders, and will continue to focus our efforts on improving employee engagement in 2016.

Barclays regularly updates employees regarding the financial and economic factors affecting the company’s performance throughout the year, using a variety of communications channels. These include CEO and senior leader email communications, line manager briefing packs, video interviews and talking points which are distributed to employees every quarter to coincide with Barclays’ financial reporting calendar. They are all designed to build awareness and understanding of Barclays’ results and the broader macroeconomic environment, and to drive dialogue around what the figures mean and how employees should respond. We also hold a variety of events for all employees, across each business division and function throughout the year, which provide employees the chance to hear directly from the CEO, ExCo member or leader and to ask them questions. We have also recently introduced an ‘Ask the Experts’ communication which gives perspectives from across the bank on what Barclays’ results mean and how they are received by different stakeholders such as investors, politicians and the media.

Flagship campaigns are released to all employees each quarter, covering topics such as wellbeing, recognition and dynamic working. Each quarter, colleagues and managers receive interactive updates to raise awareness of the tools being introduced to help them develop their careers at Barclays and to provide them with the opportunity to understand and engage in employee initiatives. Colleagues are also kept informed through regular intranet and email updates about the progress Barclays is making across activity such as our Diversity and Inclusion agenda, Performance Management and annual Pay and Reward processes.

Employees are invited to share their opinion on what it is like to work at Barclays through regular interactive events with senior leaders. These events provide employees with the opportunity to discuss their perspective on a range of areas to help senior management understand what is working well and where we need to improve. Any changes that are implemented as a result of colleague feedback are communicated through leadership briefings and engagement initiatives at an individual business/function level.2017.

Colleagues are also encouraged to be involved with the company’sCompany’s performance by participating in Barclaysour all-employee shareplans,share plans, which have been running successfully for over 10 years. Further details of our approach to remuneration are included in the Remuneration Report pages 5351 to 74.

Employee Communications

Barclays regularly updates employees on the financial and 54.economic factors affecting the Company’s performance and the delivery of the strategy through Group CEO and senior leader communications, line manager briefing packs, interviews and talking points distributed to employees every quarter in accordance with our financial reporting calendar. We hold a variety of events for employees to hear directly from the Group Executive Committee and employees are kept regularly informed about what is happening in their area and across Barclays through engagement initiatives and communications. Campaigns and colleague stories throughout the year highlight our Citizenship work and how we are supporting our customers, clients and colleagues.

Diversity and inclusionInclusion

Barclays’We aim to ensure that employees of all backgrounds are treated equally and have the opportunity to be successful. Our global Diversity and Inclusion (D&I) strategy sets out objectives, initiatives and frames our plans for each ofacross five core pillars: Gender, LGBT, Disability, Multicultural and Multigenerational. CentralMultigenerational, in support of that ambition. Our approach to each pillar is building an inclusive culture, whichwork environment is whyfocused on upskilling our leadership and we continue to build leadership competency aboutprovide a range of development opportunities including our Unconscious Bias Training which has been delivered to over 10,000 leaders across Barclays, and have had more than 10,000 participants undertake the training. Following our 2014 programme to engage senior leaders, our ‘Everyday Ism’s’ programme has this year opened up dialogue with colleagues more widely focusing on stereotypes, assumptions and bias.

An important aspect of our D&I agenda is ensuring people from all backgrounds have equal opportunity to join, and progress through, our organisation. In support of this, we have established candidate shortlist diversity goals for senior positions to provide focus during talent decisions, and ensure hiring panels are diverse to broaden assessment perspectives.

This ethos begins with our most senior roles. Having achieved the target we set ourselves in 2012 to increase Board level diversity to 25%, we have now challenged ourselves to achieve a minimum of 33% by 2020. To strengthen the pipeline, we have consecutively achieved our year on year goals towards representation of women in senior roles to 26% by 2018. We have more to do, but are pleased when progress towards greater inclusion is recognised. During 2015, respected organisations such as Stonewall in the UK,Dynamic Working Mother in the US and Community Business in Asia have praised our programmes and achievements, citing our D&I work as innovative and robust.

Gender

Sustaining progress towards our Balanced Scorecard and Board Diversity goals remains a core focus. Our Board membership has increased to four women, with one woman on Group Executive Committee. Our female senior leadership population stood at 23% at the end of 2015 representing a consecutive 1% increase year-on-year since 2011. Women are also leading countries where we operate, for example in Ireland, Brazil, Singapore, Botswana and Gibraltar.

At all levels, our gender pipeline is strengthening thanks to extensive programmesline manager clinics which focus on building capability and fostering gender intelligence. Our internal HeForShe campaign, in partnership with the United Nations, asks colleagues to pledge a specific commitment that will contribute to gender parity. Since launching HeForShe, 60% of new Women’s Initiative Network members have been male, and men have also taken active roles as mentors and sponsors.

Also new this year is our Returnship programme which is enabling senior women who needed to pause their career, the opportunity to refresh their skills and confidence in preparation for a return to leadership roles. For the eighth year running, we were pleased to be included in The Times Top 50 Workplaces for Women in the UK, and for the third successive year to be named in ‘Working Mother’ 100 Best Companies in the US.

Female representation

LOGO

Above shows the positive change in female representation within Barclays from 2014 (H2) to 2015 (H2)

attended by over 4,000 leaders.

LGBT

An inclusive culture is vital forthat enables colleagues to have the freedom and choice to bring their whole selves to work is built on having leadership participation and visible role models. Now in particular for peopleits third year, our Spectrum Allies campaign has identified over 8,000 leaders globally who have pledged to be open about their sexual orientation if they choose to. Our Your Viewchallenge homophobia, biphobia and transphobia in the workplace and provide support to LGBT colleagues. Through the ‘Your View’ survey saw 5%we provide colleagues with the opportunity to identify as being LGBT, with 7% of global colleagues identifying as being LGBT globally, a 1% increase since 2014. Enablingin 2017. This year was the fourth consecutive year that culture are our Global Allies – colleagues from every region who share our commitment to LGBT equalityBarclays supported Pride in London as the headline sponsor. The #lovehappenshere theme reached over 3 million people across multiple communications channels and who take an active role in shaping an LGBT-inclusive workplace. The Allies programme is led by Spectrum, our employee network for anyone interested in LGBT matters. Since 2001, Spectrum has been an important contributor of insight and innovation and now connects colleagues across the world,UK over 1,000 Barclays colleagues participated in regional Pride events across the UK.

Independent recognition reflects the progress we are making and the impact of our strategy. For the fifth consecutive year, Stonewall has recognised Barclays as one of only 12 Top Global Employers. The Human Rights Campaign has awarded Barclays with the Spectrum App providing access outside the workplace.100% on their corporate equity index.

 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |    47


    

Governance: Directors’ report

People

    

 

‘#PrideHeroes’ was the theme of Pride in London, which we were again the lead sponsors of in 2015. More than 400 colleagues, leaders, friends and family came together for Pride, with many more joining other events across our regions of operation. A specially ‘Pride wrapped’ DLR train carried the ‘#RidewithPride’ message across London, with ATM’s up and downDisability

Under the UK communicatingGovernment’s Department of Work and Pensions Disability Confident scheme, Barclays has been recognised as a Disability Confident Leader for our support for LGBT equality. ATM messaging also conveyed our advocacy for IDAHOBIT (International Day Against Homophobia, Biphobia and Transphobia). For World AIDS Day, £ for £ matching augmented colleague fundraising for organisations leading on the treatment and prevention of AIDS.

Independent recognition reflects the sustained impact of our global work and further motivates usefforts to continue to shape our culture so that colleagues can be themselves at work. In Singapore, we won best LGBT employee network at this year’s ALMA Awards, and Stonewall continue to name us as one of just eight ‘Star Performer’ organisations that are seen as leaders globally. Colleagues across a range of levels were this year recognised in the Financial Times OUTstanding list of 100 LGBT business leaders, and in the Pride Power List.

Disability

Our aspiration to become ‘the most accessible bank’ remains firm. Understanding where we need to focus attention is key which is why we value our Disability Listening forums to bring together colleagues who have insight withsupport those who have influence to turn ideas into action. We listen to our customers too, directly and via our external partners – from RNIB to Leonard Cheshire – as parta disability. This year, alongside PwC, we have further scaled the ‘This is Me in the City’ initiative along with the Lord Mayor of our continual improvement ethos. Their feedback contributed to us becoming the first bank to receive an accreditation from AbilityNet for our Mobile Banking app, reflecting its improved accessibility functionality.

In another first, we successfully launched our Return on Disability Exchange Traded Notes (ETNs) on the New York Arca Stock Exchange.City of London. The ETNs are a first of a kind investment product, linked to the performance of an index developed in conjunction with The Return on Disability Group. They provide investors with exposure to US based companies that have acted to attract and serve people with disabilities, and their friends and family, as customers and employees.

Continually improving our own workplace is a steadfast aim, and is why we expanded ‘This Is Me’ from a UK to a global campaign. Originally focused on mental health through ‘This Is Me’ colleagues tell their stories as to how disability touches their lives. The stories told via ‘This Is Me’ included members of our Reach employee network, which connects anyone interested in disability. The inclusive culture enabled by Reach is instrumental in helping us attract peopleand wellbeing campaign now includes over 280 organisations across London who have pledged to focus on eliminating the stigma associated with mental health in their workplace (over 1 million employees collectively). In 2018, through these partnerships, we plan to expand ‘This is Me’ further in the UK. Continuing our commitment to increase employment of those with a disability so that they bring their talentor mental health condition, this year we expanded our Able to us. Our apprenticeshipEnable internship in the UK. This 13 week paid programme is just one career route that we are ensuring is fully accessibleaimed at recruiting talented individuals of all ages with a background of mental health conditions, providing them with opportunities to all.

Awardsgain work experience, learn new skills and recognition from exemplar organisations, including the Business Disability Forum, indicates that we are fast moving towards our own ‘most accessible’ ambition but we want to share learning with others. To celebrategrow their experience and recognise the 25th anniversary of the American Disability Act (ADA), we partnered with the New York Mayor’s Office to host the only B2B event in the ADA calendar to stimulate thought leadership and encourage partnership. Our Your view Survey saw over 6% of colleagues identifying as having a disability globally, a 1 percentage point improvement from previous year results.

We recognise ability is multi-faceted. We give full and fair consideration to applications from candidates who may have a disability. Our people processes ensure all colleagues can progress their careers, with comprehensive training and

development, and through tailored and needs-based workplace adjustments where relevant. Employees who become disabled during their employment with us can access a full range of services and support ensuring, where-ever possible, we retain their talent. Ongoing reviews ensure adjustments are updated and relevant to individual requirements, providing the ability for colleagues to move between roles with consistent support.confidence.

Multigenerational

We benefit fromOur Dynamic Working campaign is relevant to colleagues at every life stage. It addresses the diverse perspectivesneeds of employees froma workforce comprised of five generations, and need to ensure our workplace is inclusive for all. ‘Work’ and ‘place’ are increasingly becoming less co-joined, with shifts in technology and generational expectations requiring us to think and act differently. Dynamic Working, our signature campaign relevant to colleagues’ every life stages with the strapline of ‘how do your work your life’, encourages dialogue aboutby encouraging the integration of personal and professional responsibilities through smarter working. With flexibilitywork patterns. The campaign is having a positive impact on colleague engagement with the 59% of colleagues actively working dynamically in 2017 reporting 5% points higher than the Group sustainable engagement result. Dynamic Working is also enabling Barclays to have a positive impact on the retention of diverse talent, examples include a 13% improvement in maternity returners retained after 12 months, and agility at95% of those taking Shared Parental Leave are fathers.

Addressing the core, more than 12,000 line managers and their teams have participatedchanging needs of a multigenerational workforce will be an ongoing focus in workshops, presentations and training to open up discussions about how work could be done differently.2018 but we are pleased that Working Families UK has recognised Barclays as one of the top 10 Employers for Working Families in 2017.

Multigenerational

 

LOGO

Above shows the different generations working at Barclays and the percentage change over 2014 (H2) and 2015 (H2)

Changing careers is another important time, which is why our Armed Forces Transitioning, Employment and Rehabilitation (AFTER) programme also continued to see ex-military talent join our company, or be supported to gain relevant work-ready skills. Our ‘LifeSkills’ programme continue to prepare young people for their first steps into the world of work and our Emerge network ensures new joiners, whatever their career stage, feel connected from the moment they arrive.

In Singapore, we won the Most Empowering Company for Mums award by the National Trades Union Congress while in the US we were included in the ‘100 Best Companies for Working Mothers’. In the UK, our approach to Talent Attraction was recognised by Working Mums as well as by Business In the Community who felt our apprenticeship and ‘LifeSkills’ programmes were award winning.LOGO

48  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance

People

Multicultural

OurDuring 2017, the Embracing Us campaign was launched in celebration of World Cultural Day, aiming to challenge global footprint covers more than 50 countries, making multicultural inclusion imperative. Fostering cross-cultural connections is enabled by Embracestereotypes and mind-sets in relation to nationality, faith, ethnicity, race and language. During the campaign our multicultural network, which brings together allEmbrace, engaged over 15,000 colleagues through multiple communications channels, leadership forums and Being Colour Brave development workshops. Barclays Apprenticeship Programme reflects our commitment to recruit a diverse workforce. Since the programme launched, we have focused on recruiting those who share an interestare NEET (Not in all aspects of race, ethnicity, nationality and faith. Embrace took an active role in Interfaith week, when leaders hosted discussions to gain insight and ideas for better serving our multicultural customers and clients, and for engaging colleagues across our global community. Embrace also helped us mark important cultural and religious calendar dates throughout 2015 such as Diwali and Eid, creating communications and events to bring to life the rich multicultural diversityEducation, Employment or Training). 19% of our people. Day-to-day, this diversity is enabled by, for example, a dedicated quiet room in many of our larger sites for prayer and reflection, and by serving halal and kosher food in our canteens.

Ensuringapprentices identify as Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic, (BAME) female entrepreneurs can sustain and develop their businesses has been a shared focus via our partnership with8% points higher than the UK Women’s Business Council, and in 2015 we also supported the Black British Business Awards to celebrate the achievements of BAME leaders in the UK.

Insight from BAME colleagues has been put into practice for our attraction and recruitment processes, including profiling available roles in jobsites dedicated to the diverse job-seeker and targeting high calibre candidates for ournational apprenticeship programmes. 26%average. In addition, 46% of our Bolder apprentices have been fromare female and 8% identify as a BAME background, evidencing our engagement approach is working butperson with a disability. Through this scheme we will continue to strive to ensure our workforce is representativeare making a positive impact on youth unemployment and social mobility.

The multicultural profile of our communities.the organisation was acknowledged externally by the City of London and the Social Mobility Commission through the Social Mobility Employer Index as a Top 50 Employer in 2017.

Multicultural

 

LOGOLOGO

Above shows the percentage of underrepresented populations that make up our global and regional populations. Note that underrepresentedUnderrepresented populations are defined regionally to ensure inclusion withof all groups in the workplaceworkplace. For the purposes of comparability 2016 figures exclude Barclays Africa Group Limited headcount. UK includes Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-Disclosed and US includes Hispanic/Latino, Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-Disclosed.

Permanent Employees by region 
    2017   2016   2015 
United Kingdom   48,700    46,400    49,000 
Continental Europe and Middle East   3,600    4,700    7,400 
Americas   10,400    9,700    10,600 
Asia Pacific   17,200    15,700    18,800 
Africa   -    42,800    43,600 
Total   79,900    119,300    129,400 

Gender Pay Gap Disclosure

The gender pay gap measures the difference between the average male pay and the average female pay as a proportion of the average male pay. For example, average male pay of £100 per hour and average female pay of £85 per hour would indicate a gender pay gap of 15%. The calculation does not take into consideration the role that an employee performs or the seniority of the employee. As a result, gender pay gaps are often driven by higher proportions of women than men in more junior, lower paid roles and fewer women than men in senior, more highly paid roles.

Equal Pay legislation in the UK specifically relates to an employee’s role, making it unlawful for an employer to pay individuals differently for performing the same or similar work. This right for women and men to receive the same pay for the same, or similar work, or work of equal value, has been a requirement under UK law since 1970. Paying our colleagues fairly and equitably relative to their role, skill, experience and performance is central to our global reward structures and benefits policies, which are reviewed regularly to ensure that there is no unfair bias in how employees are paid. At Barclays we are confident that men and women across our organisation are paid equally for doing the same job.

The difference between the gender pay gap and Equal Pay can be illustrated by the fact that men and women who are paid equally for the same or similar roles, can still generate a gender pay gap driven by the relative proportions of men and women across the organisation. This is illustrated in graphic B.

Our gender pay gap results shown in graphic C reflect the distribution of men and women between corporate grades within Barclays. As illustrated in graphic A, the percentage of women in our more senior corporate grades is lower than the percentage of women at Barclays overall. This correlates with the ordinary pay quartile data in graphic C, in which the entire population is arranged in order of ordinary pay (fixed pay), from lowest to highest, and then divided into four equal sub-populations. The numbers of male and female employees in each sub-population is then expressed as a proportion. The ordinary pay quartiles reflect the high proportions of women in more junior, lower paid roles (particularly evident in Barclays UK within the retail branch network) and the high proportions of men in senior, highly paid roles (particularly evident in Barclays International).

 

aUK includes Asian, Mixed, Black, Other
48    Barclays PLC and Non-disclosed.Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


bUS includes Hispanic/Latino, Asian, Mixed, Black, Other and Non-disclosed.
cSouth Africa includes African, Indian, Coloured, Other, and Non-disclosed.

    

    

FTE by regionGraphic A

Female representation

LOGO

The mean pay gap shown in graphic C is the difference between the average hourly pay of men and women. The median pay gap is the difference between the midpoints in the ranges of hourly pay of men and women. It arranges the hourly pay rates from highest to lowest and identifies the hourly pay in the middle of the range. The mean bonus gap is based on actual bonuses paid and does not make any adjustments to the amounts paid to employees who work a reduced number of hours.

The demographics of our population and the resulting gender pay gaps emphasise the importance of maintaining our firm commitment to increasing female representation across Barclays, particularly among the senior leadership population. We welcome the introduction of gender pay gap reporting to bring further focus to our commitment to improving gender diversity – a commitment that is, and will remain, at the core of our talent management and leadership succession processes.

How we are addressing the gender pay gap

We recognise that tackling the gender pay gap will take time and therefore it is key that we remain focused on improving gender diversity through a workplace environment and culture that supports and empowers women. At Barclays, our focus goes beyond simply addressing the gender pay gap and extends to our internal and external gender equality commitments. Across both our organisation, and in the financial services industry, we are dedicated to enabling women to fulfil their career aspirations. To achieve this goal and thereby narrow our gender pay gap, we will continue to focus on ensuring there is no bias in the hiring, promotion, development and retention of women at Barclays.

Gender Diversity Commitments

As a founding signatory of the HM Treasury Women in Finance Charter and supporter of the Hampton-Alexander Review, to support our commitment to gender equality, we proactively set gender targets and we have made good progress towards these targets. Our goal to

Graphic B Illustrative example of the difference between gender pay gap and equal pay

 

LOGO

    2015     2014     2013  
United Kingdom   49,000     48,600     54,400  
Continental Eurpe   7,400     9,900     9,800  
Americas   10,600     10,900     11,100  
Africa and Middle East   43,600     44,700     45,800  
Asia Pacific   18,000     18,200     18,500  
Total   129,400     132,300     139,600  

LOGO

Graphic C

LOGO

 

 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |    49


Governance: Directors’ report

People

improve the percentage of female Managing Directors and Directors to 26% by the end of 2018 (23% at the end of 2017) has subsequently expanded with commitments of 33% female representation across our Board of Directors by 2020 (21% at the end of 2017) and 33% female representation among the Group Executive Committee and their direct reports (25% at the end of 2017). Alongside these targets, Barclays has been focused on and will continue to develop, a range of extensive initiatives, programmes and policies to improve gender diversity. Below are some highlights of the ways in which we are increasing female representation at Barclays and enabling women to fulfil their career aspirations.

Creating New Career Opportunities

We have expanded our graduate and apprenticeship programmes, reflecting our commitment to improve employment opportunities, tackle societal issues and attract diverse talent. We have transformed the way we recruit for our graduate programmes to drive diversity and inclusion as students are able to demonstrate ability and potential throughout the process, so that recruitment outcomes are based on performance and not on the basis of subjects studied, universities attended and previous work experience. In doing so we hope to increase the number of female graduate hires to 50% (40% at the end of 2017, up from 31% in 2014). For those looking to re-enter the workforce after taking time out of their careers, our Encore! Returnship Programme provides opportunities for experienced professionals to join a paid programme with a view to securing a permanent role at Barclays at the end of the programme. More broadly, we have policies and practices in place to ensure that all recruitment decisions are fair and candidate shortlists are diverse.

Talent Management and Leadership Development

The creation of ex-officio positions on the Group Executive Committee and across the business unit and functional Executive Committees in 2016 by the Group CEO, has provided development opportunities for a number of our high potential female leaders and has broadened the scope of the perspectives and decision making across our leadership teams. Our Unconscious Bias training, now attended by over 10,000 leaders, supports the continued elimination of bias from our people processes, and successful events that we run each year such as the Global Women in Leadership conference and the Enterprise Leaders Summit focus on building capability and upskilling leaders.

Cultural Change

Providing a workplace that encourages colleagues to achieve their personal and professional goals is key to supporting and retaining our employees. We aim to do this through our progressive maternity, paternity, adoption and shared parental leave policies which go beyond the statutory requirements, as well as through our flexible working campaign Dynamic Working. Dynamic Working

Internally we are committed to:

Leadership accountability including gender diversity targets and the introduction of a gender taskforce

Focusing on a more inclusive work environment to ensure all colleagues have the flexibility to achieve personal and professional goals

Ensuring we are developing leaders who are equipped to meet the demands of a more diverse workforce

2020 Gender Diversity Commitments

  Board of Directors 33%

  Leadership 33%

(Group ExCo and their direct reports)

Cultural Change

  Dynamic Working

  Progressive parental policies

  Barclays’ Win Gender Network                                      

Talent Management

  Leadership Succession Planning

  Ex-Officio Leadership roles

  Internal Mobility                                                             

Leadership Development

  Unconscious Bias Training

  Global Women in Leadership Conference

  Enterprise Leaders Summits

Externally we are committed to:

Engaging men globally in gender equality in partnership with the United Nations

Providing enhanced employment opportunities and attracting diverse candidates

Community impact

UN HeForShe

 Global Impact Champion                                               

Barclays Role Models

  External engagement of Barclays’ senior women

   across Financial Services, IT and STEM                        

Creating New Career Opportunities

  Encore! Returnship Programme

  Expanded Apprenticeship Programme

 50% Female Graduate Hires                                        

Strategic Partnerships

  Women’s Business Council

  30% Club

supports colleagues in all stages of their lives in achieving an optimal work and life balance, helping them with parenthood, studies, caring and hobbies. Across Barclays, our Women’s Initiative Network (Win) provides colleagues with career development and networking opportunities including mentoring, career fairs and senior leader speaker events.

Strategic Partnerships

Barclays recognises that gender equality extends to the communities in which we work, support and live and greater gender equality is integral to our long-term investments to drive societal change. We demonstrate this through strategic partnerships, external engagement and leadership commitment, including but not limited to, our multi-year commitment to the United Nations HeForShe campaign and our partnership with the Women’s Business Council.

So what next?

Our existing pipeline of female talent is being further strengthened through the launch of a global gender taskforce, comprising of leaders from across the organisation who believe passionately in gender diversity and who will focus on new and improved initiatives to further accelerate our progress against our gender diversity commitments. We acknowledge that there is still a lot of work to do, but our determination and commitment to building a diverse and inclusive workforce

through attracting, retaining and developing world class professionals is paramount, and we are working hard to foster an environment in which all employees have the opportunity to succeed, regardless of race, religion or belief, age, gender, disability, sexual orientation, gender identity or nationality.

LOGOFurther details on the gender pay gap and Barclays commitments to gender diversity and equality can be found at home.barclays/diversity.

Under the Companies Act 2006, Barclays is required to report on the gender breakdown of our employees and ‘senior managers’. Of our global workforce of 79,900 (45,100 male, 34,800 female), 555 were senior managers (401 male, 154 female), which include Officers of the Group, certain direct reports of the Chief Executive, heads of major business units, certain senior Managing Directors, and directors on the boards of undertakings of the Group, but exclude individuals who sit as directors on the Board of the Company. The definition of senior managers within this disclosure has a narrower scope than the Managing Director and Director female representation data provided above.

50    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

    

    

LOGO

 

‘The Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.’

   Remuneration Committee members

    Chairman

    Crawford Gillies (member from 1 May 2014,

                               Chairman from 24 April 2015)

    Sir John Sunderland (until 23 April 2015)

    Members

    Sir David Walker (until 23 April 2015)

    Tim Breedon

    Steve Thieke

    Dambisa Moyo (from 1 September 2015)

 

LOGOWe are committed to pay being aligned to performance, while ensuring that we are able to attract and retain the employees critical to delivering our strategy.

LOGO

 Contents

Page
Annual statement51
At a glance – performance and pay for 201753
2017 Group incentives54
Remuneration policy for all employees55
Directors’ remuneration policy58
Annual report on Directors’ remuneration61

 

Remuneration

Committee members

ContentsChairman

  

Crawford Gillies  

Page

Members

Tim Breedon  
Mary Francis  
Dambisa Moyo  
      
Annual statement50
At a Glance – Performance and pay52
Remuneration policy for all employees53
2015 incentives55
Annual report on Directors’ remuneration59
Additional remuneration disclosures72
Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)75

The tables marked ‘audited’ in the report have been audited by PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

Dear Fellow Shareholders

I am pleased to introduce my first Remuneration report asAs Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee, having taken over from Sir John Sunderland on 24 April 2015.I am pleased to introduce the Remuneration report for 2017.

As in previous years, we are committed to pay being aligned to performance, while ensuring that we are able to attract and retain the employees critical to delivering our strategy.

The Committee thought carefully about Barclays’believes that our pay outcomes for 2017 reflect overall Group performance, recognising improvements in profit before tax and significant achievements in restructuring the Group, while acknowledging the need for further improvement in returns.

Further details on our performance and the decisions we have made on remuneration philosophy during 2015, and we agreed a revised, simplified statement, which articulates Barclays’ overarching approach to remuneration. This is set out in full on page 53 and is the background to our 2015 decisions.

The Committee’s priorities are to ensure that Barclays pays for sustainable performance, aligns remuneration with risk and delivers a greater proportion of the income we generate to our shareholders.outlined below.

Performance and payPay

The Committee’s 2015 pay decisions took full consideration2017 has been a year of financial performance, both on an adjustedsignificant strategic progress for the Group, achieving a number of milestones to deliver a simpler organisation. These include the sell down of our shareholding in Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) and a statutory basis,subsequent proportionate regulatory deconsolidation, the closure of Non-Core and non-financial performance including progress towards the launch of the Group Service Company. A great deal has been accomplished in relation to the UK ring-fencing requirements, establishing the necessary entity structure, processes and governance.

As well as positioning the simplified Group for growth in 2018, targets within the Balanced Scorecard. The Committee also recognised the need to improve returns to shareholders and to accelerate delivery. We are committed to moving this forward in a manner that is consistent with Barclays’ Values to ensure that legacy events are not repeated.

Although there were improvements in the Core operating businesses, adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m for 2015. Statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m. The Group’s capital positionBarclays has continued to strengthen withachieved a CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio of 11.4% and a leverage ratio of 4.5% at13.3%, within the end of the year. Cost targets have been met and Barclays Non-Core has made significant progressstate target range. Group profit before tax (PBT) is up 10% from 2016 to £3,541m driven by an £882m reduction in reducing its risk weighted assets.operating expenses.

Against this background, the Committee approved a Group incentive pool for 2015 is again significantly lower than in prior years,of £1,506m, down by £191m or 10% in absolute terms at £1,669m compared to2% from 2016. This decision recognises the incentive pool of £1,860m for 2014. Similarly,strong strategic execution across the 2015 Investment Bank incentive pool is down 7%.

Total compensation costsGroup, while being clear that Group returns are down 6%,not yet where our shareholders, and the compensationBoard, want them to adjusted net income ratio is 37.2%, down from 37.7% in 2014. Compensationbe. The Committee also recognises the need to statutory net income ratio is 35.7%, down from 38.5% in 2014. The Core compensationensure that areas of strong performance within the businesses are rewarded competitively, with key talent retained to adjusted net income ratio isdeliver against our growth strategy going into 2018 and beyond. This pool also down at 34.7% (2014: 35.7%). For a reconciliation of total incentive awards granted to the relevant income statement charge, see table on page 56.

Risk and conduct

A central feature of our remuneration philosophy is that remuneration must be aligned with risk, and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Group incentive pool outlined above is afterreflects appropriate adjustments the Committee has made for both risk and conduct events. In addition to specific risk and conduct events, we also adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks, non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct issues as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. Individuals who are directly or indirectly accountable for risk and conduct events have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards throughmatters, which continue to be taken very seriously by the application of malus. Further details can be found on page 56.Committee.

Key remuneration decisions for executive Directors

2015 saw a change in Group Chief Executive. AllThe Committee considered the executive Directors’ performance against the financial and strategic/non-financial performance measures which had been set to reflect company priorities for 2017. Separately, performance against their personal objectives was assessed on an individual basis.

Based on Jes Staley’s performance against the performance measures set at the beginning of the associated remuneration decisions were madeyear, the Committee approved a 2017 bonus of £1,065,000 (48.5% of maximum) of which 62.4% will be deferred in accordance with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by our shareholders at the 2014 Annual General Meeting (AGM).

We announced on 28 October 2015 that Jes Staley was to become Group Chief Executive with effect from 1 December 2015. He was appointed on a salary of £1,200,000 and Role Based Pay of £1,150,000 commensurate with market pay levels. He was not eligibleshares for a 2015 bonus or a grant underperiod of up to seven years. The Committee’s deliberations on his 2017 personal performance have taken account of delivery against financial commitments including achieving the 2016-2018 long term incentive plan (LTIP) cycle.end state target range for the CET1 ratio as well as improvements to our cost: income ratio, while recognising that there is still some way to go in getting returns to where management, the Board and our investors expect them to be. The Committee approvedhas also taken account of the grantearly completion of a share ‘buy-out’ award to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by a previous employer which was forfeited as a resultthe strategic restructuring, including the sell down of him joining Barclays.BAGL and closure of Non-Core.

 

 

50  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    51


 


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual statement from the Chairman of the Board Remuneration Committee

    

    

The award was made on terms aligned toCommittee noted the forfeited award. Jes Staley satisfied, atsignificant work that has taken place in planning following the date of joining, the executive Directors’ shareholding requirement of four times salary through his personal purchase of 2,790,000 Barclays shares.

During the four month period between Antony Jenkins’ departure as Group Chief Executive and Jes Staley starting in the role, John McFarlane served as Executive Chairman. He indicated to the Committee that he did not wish his remuneration to be increased during that time, and therefore his fee remained unchanged for the period during which he served as Executive Chairman.

EU referendum outcome. The Committee also approved compensation arrangements on Antony Jenkins’ departurerecognised that Jes Staley has made continued progress towards ensuring a high performing culture in line with our Values, and Barclays has made improvements in some customer and client metrics such as Group Chief Executive duringa reduction in customer complaints, while noting the year. Further details can be found on page 68.

Bonusesneed for bothfurther improvement. As announced last year, the Committee will keep Jes Staley’s 2016 variable remuneration under review pending the outcome of the executive Directorsinvestigation relating to his involvement in role at the start of 2015 were determineda whistleblowing matter. The Committee will make a final decision on outcome once that investigation is complete.

Based on Tushar Morzaria’s performance against the financial, Balanced Scorecard and personalperformance measures set at the beginning of the year. Theyear, the Committee approved a pro-rated2017 bonus award of £505,000£747,000 (50.5% of maximum) of which 46.5% will be deferred in shares for Antony Jenkins. A 2015 bonus awarda period of £701,000 was approved for Tushar Morzaria.up to seven years. The Committee in particular noted that Tushar Morzaria took on significantly increased executive responsibilitieshad been instrumental in the second half of 2015 and we regard this bonus as fully deserved in recognition of his strong performance. Further detailsexecution of the Committee’s 2015 decisions forstrategy including the executive Directors are set outsell down of BAGL, the closure of Non-Core, the setting up of the ring-fenced bank in the UK and in Barclays achieving its end state range capital position. Tushar Morzaria has also demonstrated effective management of key external stakeholders.

The Committee decided to make an award under the 2018-2020 Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) cycle to Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria (based on pages 59 to 61.

During the year, we alsotheir performance in 2017) with a face value at grant of 120% of their respective Total fixed pay at 31 December 2017. The Committee reviewed the performance measures of ourthe LTIP to ensure they are appropriate given our growth strategy and align the interests of executive Directors and shareholders. WeReturn on tangible equity (RoTE) and cost: income ratio have changed the financial measures and given them an increased weighting of 70% for the award to be granted in 2016 and added a comprehensive Risk Scorecardbeen retained as the new risk measure which willkey financial metrics, with the weighting on RoTE increased to 50% to emphasise the focus on Barclays’ managementimproving returns across the Group. The calibrations have also been established to maintain direct alignment with the Group’s financial targets. The weighting on the cost: income ratio remains unchanged at 20%. CET1 ratio remains a key financial metric, but given the end state target range of principal risks (including Conduct Risk). Before formal approval, we engaged with shareholdersc13% has been achieved, the Committee concluded that this would now be more appropriate as an underpin measure on these changes. Tushar Morzaria is the only participant in this LTIP cycle. Further details are set out on pages 62 and 63.

Regulatory developments

The volume and pace of regulatory change has continued during 2015.

The PRA made revisions to the Remuneration part of its Rulebook (formerly the UK Remuneration Code) which apply from 1 January 2016. These include the seven, five and three year ‘tiered’ deferral requirements for Senior Managers and different categories of Material Risk Taker (MRT) respectively, and the potential extension of the clawback period to 10 years for Senior Managers (under certain circumstances). These changes, which apply globally to Barclays as a UK-headquartered bank, further emphasise the competitive disadvantages attributable to the lackRoTE instead of a global level regulatory ‘playing field’.

Further revisions to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook are expected during 2016 as a consequence of the European Banking Authority’s (EBA) final Guidelines on sound remuneration policies. The most significant changes include a prohibition on the payment of dividends on deferred shares and an increase to a one year (from six months) holding period for incentive awards delivered in shares to the large majority of MRTs. The Guidelines apply from 1 January 2017. The application of the Guidelines to UK firms, once confirmed by the PRA and FCA, will contribute to changes to our Directors’ remuneration policy in 2017.

Agenda for 2016standalone measure.

In line with legal requirements, we will be seeking shareholder approval for ourthe Directors’ remuneration policy (DRP) approved at the 2017 AGM. As a Committee weAGM, both executive Directors’ Fixed Pay will be unchanged for 2018 at £2,350,000 for Jes Staley and £1,650,000 for Tushar Morzaria.

Fair pay agenda

We are committed to fair pay, ensuring that all our employees are appropriately and fairly rewarded for their contributions. This concept touches on many areas of our work, including fair pay for the lowest paid in our organisation, as well as the alignment of executive reward outcomes with business performance. Additionally, the Board is committed to individuals being able to progress through the organisation based on capability and performance and irrespective of any other difference such as gender, age, ethnicity, religion, sexual orientation or disability. We take employees’ views into consideration throughout our deliberations and continue to review potential approaches to build on this.

Barclays’ commitment to fair pay is illustrated by the repositioning of the incentive pools over recent years, during which incentive funding has been directed to provide more to junior employees, and our remuneration policyactive engagement on pay matters with our unions to ensure that future arrangementsour staff are fully alignedfairly treated across the organisation. The current 2017-2019 pay deal with Unite commits to a 7.5% agreed salary increase for the Unite recognised population and a minimum increase of 10% for the most junior graded employees over the course of the three year deal. Barclays is also a long-standing supporter of the Living Wage under which Barclays commits to pay all UK permanent employees and those UK employees of third party contractors at least the current London or UK Living Wage. This is a commitment which we have also extended to our strategyUK employed apprentices. By March 2018, the entry level for permanent, non-apprentice employees will already be above the Living Wage target level set for 2020 by the Government, two years early. Similarly, Barclays will meet the 2020 target level for its apprentice population by 2019.

Further detail of our activities in relation to accelerate deliveryfair pay may be found on page 56.

Barclays has published its UK Gender Pay Gap report for the first time this year in line with UK requirements and further details can be found in the People section on page 48.

Looking ahead

The Committee continues to shareholdersmonitor with interest the Government’s proposals in a manner consistent with Barclays’ Values and also to meet new regulatory requirements. Thisrespect of the UK Corporate Governance Code, which will be developed overan area of focus for the coming monthsCommittee and the Board going into 2018.

In relation to fair pay, we have already chosen to publish our pay ratios on page 49 of this report, two years in advance of the Government requirements to reflect the ratios between the pay of our Group Chief Executive and our UK employees. We will continue to review our fair pay policies and practices to ensure that they remain appropriate as this important topic continues to evolve.

We will also continue to work on the remuneration aspects of changes associated with Structural Reform, such as the addition of Remuneration Committees representing the two main subsidiary businesses.

We will, of course, continue to engage constructively with regulators, shareholders and regulators as we do so.other stakeholders and value the insight these discussions provide.

Our Remuneration report

We have provided an ‘At a glance’ summary of 20152017 performance and pay on the next page. The Annualannual report on Directors’ remuneration provides further details. An abridged version of the DRP, as approved at the 2017 AGM, is set out on pages 58 to 60 for information.

The report has been prepared in accordanceIn line with the remuneration disclosures required byUK regulations, we are seeking shareholder approval at the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) (Amendment) Regulations 2013. The2018 AGM for the Remuneration report (other than the part containing the Directors’ remuneration policy) will be subject to an advisory vote by shareholders at the 2016 AGM.

On behalfabridged version of the Board

LOGODRP). Further details can be found in the 2018 AGM Notice of Meeting.

Crawford Gillies

Chairman, Board Remuneration Committee

2921 February 20162018

 

 

51  |  52    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration report

At a GlanceglancePerformanceperformance and pay for 2017

    

    

 

How did we performGroup performance and pay

Key strategic highlights

  Non-Core closed early

  BAGL sell down and subsequent accounting deconsolidation

  Launch of the Group Service Company

  Preparatory work to establish UK ring-fenced entity

£3,541m

Profit before tax

up 10%

5.6%

Group RoTE ex. litigation

and conduct and other

material items*

73%

Cost: income ratio

favourable 3%

Pay outcomes

  Group incentive pool has reduced by 57% since 2010

  Group compensation to net income ratio reduced to 38.0% from 39.0%

£7,123m

Total compensation costs

down 4%

£1,506m

Group incentive pool

down 2%

  *  Material items consist of charges for PPI, losses relating to the sell down of BAGL and a one-off net charge due to the re-measurement of US deferred tax assets.

Executive Directors: Performance outcomes
 Annual bonus2015-2017 Long-term incentive plan
 (a) Jes Staley(b) Tushar Morzaria(Tushar Morzaria only)

£1,065k

48.5% of maximum

 £747k

 50.5% of maximum

 £882k*

 52.7% of maximum

*   By reference to Q4 2017 average share price

LOGOLOGO

Executive Directors: Remuneration outcomes

Jes Staley*Tushar Morzaria
LOGOLOGO

* Jes Staley was not a participant in 2015?the 2014-2016 and 2015-2017 LTIP cycles; the LTIP figures for 2016 and 2017 are therefore zero for him.

Executive Directors: Share ownership

Shareholding requirement policy:

  minimum of 200% of Total fixed pay* (i.e. Fixed Pay plus Pension) within 5 years from date of appointment

  shareholding requirement for 2 years post termination of 100% of Total Fixed Pay (or pro-rata thereof) introduced from 2017.

* Equivalent to 457% of salary for Jes Staley under the previous DRP.

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    53


Governance: Remuneration report

2017 Group incentives

This section provides details of how the 2017 total incentive award decisions were made.

2017 pay and performance headlines

The key performance considerations which the Committee took into account in making its remuneration decisions for 2017 are highlighted below:

Significant strategic progress was made in 2017 with restructuring completed including:

the closure of Non-Core

completion of BAGL sell down

launch of the Group Service Company

preparatory work to establish the UK ring-fenced entity

Group profit before tax was up 10% at £3,541m (2016: £3,230m). Group profit before tax (excluding material items) was up 16% at £4,242m (2016: £3,649m*)

Group RoTE was negative 3.6% (2016: positive 3.6%). Excluding litigation and conduct and other material items, Group RoTE was 5.6%

Group CET1 ratio was up to13.3% (2016: 12.4%).

The pay outcomes and decisions can be summarised as follows:

total compensation costs decreased 4% to £7,123m (2016: £7,445m)

the Group incentive pool was down 2% at £1,506m (2016: £1,533m)

Group compensation to net income ratio was 38.0% (2016: 39.0%)

Corporate and Investment Bank (CIB) front office incentive awards were also slightly down at £864m (2016: £875m). CIB front office compensation to net income ratio was 26.1% (2016: 26.7%)

robust differentiation based on business and individual performance.

* Material items in 2016 included provisions for UK customer redress (£1bn), gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited (£615m) and own credit (£35m).

2017 incentive award decisions

The Committee’s 2015 pay2017 incentives decisions took full consideration of financial and non-financial performance. Statutory profit before tax decreased between 2014performance and 2015 by 8%, whilealso the absolute reduction in the Group incentive pool was 10%.

material repositioning of incentives undertaken since 2010. Since 2010, the Group incentive pool has declined steadily, from £3,484m in 2010 to £1,669m£1,506m in 20152017 – a decrease of more than 50%57% over fiveseven years. Over the same period, Group statutory profit before tax is down 65%

LOGO

Notes

a  Part of the reduction in incentive pools in 2014 was due to the introduction of Role Based Pay (RBP).

b  The 2015 Group incentive pool has been restated from £1,669m to reflect the treatment of BAGL as a discontinued operation. The 2010 – 2014 Group incentive pools have not been restated.

Total incentive awards granted – current year

        Barclays Group         
    Year ended
31.12.17
£m
  

      Year ended
31.12.16

£m

  % change 
Incentive awards granted    
Incentive pool   1,432   1,459   2 
Commissions and other incentives   74   74   - 
Total incentive awards granted   1,506   1,533   2 
Reconciliation of incentive awards granted to income statement charge:    
Less: deferred bonuses granted but not charged in current year   (304  (300  (1
Add: current year charges for deferred bonuses from previous years   462   690   33 
Othera   26   (26    
Income statement charge for performance costs   1,690   1,897   11 
Total compensation costs   7,123   7,445   4 
Proportion of incentive pool that is deferred   31%   30%     

Note

a Difference between incentive awards granted and income statement charge for commissions and other incentives.

 

Group incentive pool

LOGO

How much were executive Directors paid in 2015?

All of the Committee’s 2015 decisions in relation to executive Directors’ remuneration were made within the parameters of the Directors’ remuneration policy which was approved at the 2014 AGM.

    

 

Antony Jenkinsa

£000

   

 

Tushar Morzaria

£000

  

  

   
 
Jes Staleyb
£000
  
  
    2015    2014    2015     2014     2015  
Fixed Pay          
Salary   598    1,100    800     800     100  
Role Based Pay (RBP)   516    950    750     750     96  
Benefits   89    100    82     95     48  
Pension   197    363    200     200     33  
Variable pay          
Annual Bonusc   505    1,100    701     900       
LTIPd   1,494    1,854                
Total pay   3,399            5,467    2,533     2,745     277  

Notes

aThe 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole period pursuant to the LTIP rules. In accordance with his contractual entitlements, Antony Jenkins will receive salary, RBP, benefits and pension, in instalments, until 7 July 2016 subject to mitigation. Full details of his leaving arrangements can be found on page 68.
bThe 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive. On joining Barclays, Jes Staley was granted a share award of 896,450 Barclays shares to compensate him for an unvested share award granted to him by JP Morgan. The award will be delivered on 14 March 2016 in line with the vesting date of the original JP Morgan award.
c2015 bonus awards reflect the formulaic outcome of 2015 performance against the financial measures and the Committee’s assessment of progress towards the Balanced Scorecard targets. These resulted in a total of 22.1% (out of 50% maximum) and 15% (out of 35%) of the maximum bonus being payable respectively. Personal objectives were assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.
dOver the 2013-2015 LTIP performance period, a return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) of 0.21% and a loan loss rate (LLR) of 53 bps resulted in nil (out of 50%) outcome for RoRWA and 30% (out of 30%) for LLR. The Balanced Scorecard assessment was 9% (out of 20%). Therefore 39% of the maximum number of shares will be considered for release in March 2016, subject to an additional two year holding period.

How will executive Directors’ pay be structured?

2016 Fixed pay

    
 
Salary
£000
  
  
   
 
RBP
£000
  
  
   
 
Pension
£000
  
  
Jes Staley   1,200     1,150     396  
Tushar Morzaria   800     750     200  

Salary, RBP, pension and benefits are unchanged from 2015.

Variable pay
2016 Annual Bonus
Maximum 80% of fixed pay

2016 performance measures and weighting:

Financial

    Adjusted profit before tax

20%    

    CET1 ratio

20%    

    Adjusted costs

    10%    
50%  

Balanced Scorecard

35%  

Personal objectives

15%  

2016-2018 Long term incentive plan
Maximum 120% of fixed pay

2016-2018 cycle performance measures and weighting:

Financial

    Adjusted return on tangible equity (subject to CET1 ratio underpin)

25%    

    CET1 ratio

25%    

    Cost: income ratio

    20%    
70% 

Balanced Scorecard

15% 
Risk Scorecard54    (new Risk measure which will focus on Barclays’ management of principal risks, including Conduct Risk)15% 

Tushar Morzaria is the only participant in the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.

52  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration report

Remuneration policy for all employees

    

    

This section sets out Barclays’ remuneration policy for all employees, explaining the philosophy underlying the structure of remuneration packages, and how this links remuneration to the achievement of sustained high performance and long-term value creation.

 

This section sets out Barclays’ remuneration policy for all employees, explaining the philosophy underlying the structure of remuneration packages, and how this links remuneration to the achievement of sustained high performance and long-term value creation.

Remuneration philosophy

In October 2015, the Committee formally adopted a revised, simplified remuneration philosophy which articulates Barclays’ overarching remuneration approach and is set out below.

 

Barclays’ Remunerationremuneration philosophy

   

Attract and retain talent needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy

  

Long termLong-term success depends on the talent of our employees. This means attracting and retaining an appropriate range of talent to deliver against our strategy, and paying the right amount for that talent

 

Align pay with investor interests

  

Ensure employees’ interests are aligned with those of investors (equity and debt holders), both in structure and the appropriate balance of returns

 

Reward sustainable performance

  

Sustainable performance means making a positive contribution to stakeholders, in both the short and longer term, playing a valuable role in society

 

Support Barclays’ Values and culture

  

Results must be achieved in a manner consistent with our Values. Our Values and culture should drive the way that business is conducted

 

Align with risk appetite, risk exposure and conduct expectations

  

Designed to reward employees for achieving results in line with the Bank’s risk appetite and conduct expectations

 

Be clear, transparent and as simple as possible

  

All employees and stakeholders should understand how we reward our employees. Remuneration structures should be as simple as possible so that everyone can understand how they work and the behaviours they reward

 

RemunerationPerformance and performanceremuneration

Barclays’ remuneration philosophy links remuneration to achieving sustained high performance and creating long-term value. Our remuneration philosophy applies to all employees globally across Barclays and aims to reinforce our belief that effective performance management is critical to enabling the wholedelivery of Barclays. It ensures that all employeesour business strategy in line with our Values. Employees who adhere to the Barclays’ Values and contribute to Barclays’ success are aligned with and support the achievement of Barclays’ Group priorities.rewarded accordingly.

This is achieved by linking remuneration to a broadbasing performance assessment of performance, based on expectedclear standards of delivery and behaviour, which are discussedand starts with employees at the start of, and throughout, the performance year. Under the Barclays’ performance management approach, employees are encouraged to align each ofaligning their objectives (‘what’ they will deliver) to business and team goals in order to support the delivery of the business strategy and behaviouralgood client/customer outcomes. Behavioural expectations (‘how’ people will achieve their objectives) are set in relation tothe context of our Values. This ensures that clear expectations are set for not only ‘what’ employees are expected to deliver, but also ‘how’ they are expected to go about it.

Individual performancePerformance is then evaluatedassessed against both financial and non-financial criteria. Other factors are also taken into consideration within the overall performance assessment, including core job responsibilities, behaviours towards risk and control, colleague and stakeholder feedback as well as input from the Risk and Compliance functions, where appropriate.

Through our approach to performance, the equal importance of both ‘what’ (performance against objectives)an individual has delivered as well as ‘how’ the individual has achieved this is emphasised, encouraging balanced consideration of each dimension. Both of these elements are assessed and the ‘how’ (demonstrationrated independently of our Values). This evaluation takes into account various factors including:

§performance against agreed objectives (both financial and non-financial) and core job responsibilities

§adherence to relevant risk policies and procedures and control frameworks

§behaviour in line with Barclays’ Values

§colleague and stakeholder feedback

§input from the Risk and Compliance functions where there are concerns about the behaviour of any individuals or the risk of the business undertaken.

each other. There is no specific weightingrequirement to have an overall rating which allows for more robust and reflective conversations between managers and team members on the financial and non-financial considerations for employees because allindividual components of them are important to the determinationperformance.

A key part of the overall performance assessment.philosophy promotes ongoing quality dialogue throughout the year. This helps manage performance messages effectively and allows for more timely recognition as well as appropriate coaching, feedback and support where needed.

LinkingBy linking individual performance assessment and remuneration decisions to both the Barclays’ business strategy and our Values and, in this way promotes the delivery of sustainable individual and business performance, and establishesturn, to remuneration decisions, a clear alignment between what we are striving to achieve, how we go about this, and ultimately, how we recognise this in individual financial terms is achieved.

Risk, conduct and remuneration

Another key feature of our remuneration philosophy is the alignment of remuneration with our risk appetite and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Committee takes risk and conduct events very seriously and ensures that there are appropriate adjustments to individual remuneration and, where necessary, the incentive pool.

The Remuneration Review Panel, which reports to the Committee, supports the Committee in this process. The Panel is chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and includes senior representatives from the key control functions of Risk, Compliance, Internal Audit, Legal and HR as well as the CEOs of Barclays UK and Barclays International. It sets the policy and Barclays’processes for assessing compensation adjustments for risk and conduct events.

We have robust processes for considering risk and conduct as part of individual performance management processes with outcomes reflected in individual remuneration decisions. Line managers have primary accountability for ensuring that risk and conduct issues are considered when assessing performance and making remuneration decisions. In addition, there is a secondary review by the control functions for individuals involved in significant failures of risk management, conduct issues, regulatory actions or other major incidents which impact either the Group or business to ensure these issues are also considered. When considering individual responsibility, a variety of factors are taken into account such as whether an individual was directly responsible or whether the individual, by virtue of seniority, could be deemed indirectly responsible, including staff who drive the Group’s culture and set its strategy.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  53    55


Governance: Remuneration report

Remuneration policy for all employees

    

Remuneration structure

The remuneration structure for employees is aligned with that for executive Directors, set out in detail in the Directors’ remuneration policy which was approved by shareholders at the 2014 AGM. A full copy of the policy can be found on the Barclays PLC website. An abridged version is at pages 75 to 83 of this Report.

Employees receive salary, pension and other benefits and are eligible to be considered for an annual bonus. Employees in some customer-facing businesses participate in incentive plans including plans based on a balanced scorecard of performance which has good customer outcomes at its centre. The plans also recognise how results have been achieved in line with Barclays’ Values. Some senior employees receive Role Based Pay (RBP). Remuneration of PRA Material Risk Takers (MRTs) is subject to the 2:1 maximum ratio of variable to fixed pay. A total of 1,523 (2014: 1,277) individuals were MRTs in 2015.

Barclays is a long standing supporter of the Living Wage. As an accredited Living Wage employer, Barclays commits to ensure that all permanent UK employees and those UK employees of third party contractors who provide services to us at our sites, are paid at least the current London or UK Living Wage. This is a commitment which we have also extended to all our UK employed apprentices.

Fixed remuneration

 

Salary

Salaries reflect individuals’ skillsActions which may be taken where risk management and experience and are reviewed annually in the context of annual performance assessment. They are increased where justified by role change, increased responsibility or a change in the latest available market data. Salaries may also be increased in line with local statutory requirements and in line with union and works council commitments.conduct falls below required standards include:

 

 

Role Based Pay (RBP)Adjustment

  

 

A small number of senior employees receiveCurrent year annual bonuses are adjusted downwards where individuals are found to be responsible (either directly or indirectly) in a class of fixed pay called RBP to recognise the seniority, breadth and depth of their role.risk or misconduct event.

 

 

Pension and benefits

The provision of a competitive package of benefits is important to attracting and retaining the talented staff needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy. Employees have access to a range of country specific company funded benefits, including pension schemes, healthcare, life assurance and Barclays share plans as well as other voluntary employee funded benefits. The cost of providing these benefits is defined and controlled. Gracechurch Services Corporation is used to employ US nationals seconded overseas allowing them to retain eligibility to US benefits.

Variable remuneration

Annual bonusMalus

  

 

AnnualDeferred unvested bonuses incentivise and reward the achievement of Group, business and individual objectives, and reward employees for demonstrating individual behaviours in line with Barclays’ Values.

The ability to recognise performance through variable remuneration enables the Group to control its cost base flexibly and to react to events and market circumstances. Bonuses remain a key feature of remuneration practice in the highly competitive and mobile market for talent in the financial services sector. The Committee is careful to control the proportion of variable to fixed remuneration paid to individuals.

Bonus deferral levels are significantly in excess of PRA requirements.

The typical deferral structures include:

  For MRTs:     For non-MRTs:     For Managing Directors in the Investment Bank:
 

Incentive award

  Amount deferred            

Incentive award

  

Amount deferred            

      Incentive award  

Amount deferred

 < £500,000  40%    Up to £65,000  0%    All values  100%
 ³ £500,000  60%    > £65,000  

Graduated level

of deferral

     

Deferred bonuses are generally delivered in equal portions as deferred cash under the Cash Value Plan (CVP) and deferred shares under the Share Value Plan (SVP), each typically vesting in annual tranches over threefrom prior years subject to the rules of the plans (as amended from time to time) and continued service.

Deferred bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) at its discretion. Events which may lead the Committee to do this include, but are not limited to, employee misconduct or a material failure of risk management.

 

 

Clawback

  

 

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to a MRTMaterial Risk Taker (MRT) on or after 1 January 2015 in respect of years for which they are a MRT. Barclays may apply clawback if, at any time during the seven year period from the date on which variable remuneration is awarded to a MRT: (i) there is reasonable evidence of employee misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm or the business unit suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to and responsibility for that incident.

Share plans

  

Alignment of senior employees with shareholders is achieved through deferral of incentive pay intoClawback may be extended to 10 years for PRA Senior Managers where there are outstanding internal or regulatory investigations at the SVP. We also encourage wider employee shareholding through the all employee share plans. 82%end of the global employee population (excluding Africa) are eligible to participate.7 year clawback period.

 

54  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

2015 incentives

This section provides details of how 2015 total incentive award decisions were made.

2015 pay and performance headlines

The key performance considerations which the Committee took into account in making its remuneration decisions for 2015 are highlighted below:

§Group adjusted profit before tax was down 2% to £5,403m (2014: £5,502m) while the Investment Bank adjusted profit before tax was up 17% at £1,611m (2014: £1,377m)

§Group statutory profit before tax was down 8% at £2,073m (2014: £2,256m)

§the CET1 ratio was up to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%)

§the leverage ratio was up to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%)

§Balanced Scorecard – progress has been made against the Balanced Scorecard in respect of 2018 targets.

The pay outcomes and decisions can be summarised as follows:

§the Group compensation to adjusted net income ratio improved to 37.2% (2014: 37.7%). The Core compensation to adjusted net income ratio also improved to 34.7% (2014: 35.7%)

§the Group compensation to statutory net income ratio improved to 35.7% (2014: 38.5%)

§total compensation costs decreased 6% to £8,339m (2014: £8,891m). Total compensation costs in the Investment Bank were down 5% at £3,423m (2014: £3,620m)

§total incentive awards granted were £1,669m, down 10% on 2014. Investment Bank incentive awards granted were £976m, down 7% on 2014

§there has been strong differentiation on the basis of individual performance to allow the Group to more effectively manage compensation costs

§average value of incentive awards granted per Group employee is £12,900 (2014: £14,100) and the average value of incentive awards granted per Investment Bank employee is £46,500 (2014: £51,400)

§levels of bonus deferral continue to significantly exceed the minimum requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and are expected to remain among the highest deferral levels globally. 2015 bonuses awarded to Managing Directors in the Investment Bank were again 100% deferred.

2015 pay – Questions and answers

How do you justify a 2015 incentive pool of £1,669m?

The Committee remains focused on aligning pay to performance and setting pay at a level which is no more than necessary but is motivational to ensure that we accelerate the delivery of shareholder value.

In line with our financial performance, the final 2015 incentive pool at £1,669m is down 10% on 2014.

The following chart illustrates the reduction in variable remuneration over the period from 2010.

Barclays incentive pools

LOGO

Notes

a2013 Investment Bank incentive pool has been restated from £1,574m to reflect the business reorganisation. The 2010, 2011 and 2012 Investment Bank incentive pools have not been restated.
bPart of the reduction in incentive pools in 2014 was due to the introduction of Role Based Pay.
cFor a reconciliation of total incentive awards granted to the relevant income statement charge, see table on page 56.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  55


What have you done in terms of conduct adjustments in 2015?

A key feature of our revised remuneration philosophy is the alignment of remuneration with risk appetite and with the conduct expectations of Barclays, our regulators and stakeholders. The Committee takes risk and conduct events very seriously and ensures that there are appropriate adjustments to individual remuneration and, where necessary, the incentive pool.

The Remuneration Review Panel, which reports to the Committee, supports the Committee in this process. The Panel is chaired by the Chief Risk Officer and includes senior representatives from the key control functions of Risk, Compliance, Internal Audit, Legal and HR. It sets the policy and processes and is responsible for assessing and recommending to the Committee compensation adjustments for risk and conduct events.

We have a robust process for considering risk and conduct as part of individual performance management reviews with outcomes reflected in individual incentive decisions. When considering individual responsibility, a variety of factors are taken into account such as:

§whether the individual was solely responsible for the event or whether others were also responsible, if not directly involved,

§whether the individual was aware (or could reasonably have been expected to be aware) of the failure,

§whether the individual took or missed opportunities to take adequate steps to address the failure, and

§whether the individual, by virtue of seniority, could be deemed indirectly responsible, including staff who drive the Group’s culture and set its strategy.

Individuals who were directly or indirectly accountable for an event have had their remuneration adjusted as appropriate. This includes reductions in current year bonus levels and reductions in vesting amounts of deferred awards through the application of malus. In addition, a number of employees have been terminated for responsibility and accountability for risk and conduct events resolved during the year. The Committee fully acknowledges the impact such risk and conduct events have on shareholders and believes it is wholly appropriate that this should be reflected in incentive decisions for those whose performance and conduct falls short of Barclays’ standards.

The Committee recognises that conduct events continue to weigh on Group performance, impacting profitability and returns, so in addition to reductions to individuals’ incentive outcomes, materialbonuses, the Committee considers and makes collective adjustments have also been made to the incentive pool for conduct. These included, but were not limited to,specific risk and conduct events. For 2017, the settlement reached with the New York State Departmentimpact of Financial Services in respect of its investigation into electronic trading of Foreign Exchange, the settlements reached with the US Securities and Exchange Commission and New York State Attorney General in respect of those agencies’ investigations relating to the operation of LX (an alternative trading system), and the settlement reached with the FCA following an investigation into whether Barclays carried out the appropriate due diligence in connection with a transaction it executed in 2012.

The Committee also made a further adjustment in respect of the settlements reached with a number of authorities in May 2015 in relation to investigations into certain sales and trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market and the setting of the US Dollar ISDAFIX benchmark, over and above the substantialthese collective adjustments, made in 2014 as part of the Committee’s prudent approach towards incentive funding. The Committee took a similar prudent approach in determining 2015 incentive funding.

The overall impact on the incentive pool resulting from both the direct financial impact on performance and the additional adjustments applied by the Committee, is a reduction in excess of £600m.c. £180m.

We have also in addition to the adjustment for specific risk and conduct issues, adjusted the incentive pool to take account of an overall assessment of a wide range of future risks (including Conduct),including conduct, non-financial factors that can support the delivery of a strong risk management, control and conduct culture and other factors including reputation, impact on customers, markets and other stakeholders.

Total incentive awards granted – current year and deferred (audited)

         Barclays Group               Investment Bank       
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change     
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change  
Total current year bonus   839     885     5     367     381     4  
Total deferred bonus   661     757     13     579     634     9  
Bonus pool   1,500     1,642     9     946     1,015     7  
Commissions, commitments and other incentives   169     218     22     30     38     21  
Total incentive awards granted   1,669     1,860     10     976     1,053     7  
Proportion of bonus that is deferred   44%     46%       61%     62%    
Total employees (full time equivalent)   129,400     132,300     2     21,000     20,500     (2
Average bonus per employee   £12,900     £14,100     9     £46,500     £51,400     10  

Deferral levels vary according to The Committee was supported in its consideration of this adjustment by the incentive award quantum. With reductions in incentive award levels, this has reduced the proportion of the bonus that is deferred.

Deferred bonuses are delivered, subject to the rules, and only once an employee meets certain conditions, including continued service. This creates a timing difference between the communication of the bonus poolBoard Risk Committee and the chargesBoard Reputation Committee.

Fair pay agenda

Barclays continues to look holistically at different aspects of how we pay our people, to ensure that appearwe deliver fair and effective pay for performance, with pay decisions that are aligned with Barclays’ Values.

This can be described as our fair pay agenda, which incorporates a number of themes currently highlighted by the government and the media, although in the income statement which are reconciled in the table below:practice our approaches to many of these aspects have evolved over many years.

ReconciliationOur main areas of total incentive awards granted to income statement charge (audited)

         Barclays Group          Investment Bank            
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change     
 

 

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
   % change  
Total incentive awards for 2015   1,669     1,860     10     976     1,053     7  
Less: deferred bonuses awarded in 2015   (661   (757   13     (579   (634   9  
Add: current year charges for deferred bonuses from previous years   874     1,067     18     736     854     14  
Othera   2     (108     51     12    
Income statement charge for performance costs   1,884     2,062     9     1,184     1,285     8  

Note

a Difference between incentive awards granted and income statement charge for commissions, commitments and other incentives

focus are:

 

◾   

Fair pay for the lowest paid

–  Ensuring our people receive a fair day’s pay for a fair day’s work

–  Since 2004, Barclays has been a Living Wage accredited employer, with all UK permanent employees and those UK employees of third party contractors who provide services to us at our sites being paid at least the current National or London Living Wage. This is a commitment we have also extended to all our UK employed apprentices. By March 2018, the entry level pay for permanent, non-apprentice employees, will already be above the Living Wage target level set for 2020 by the Government, two years early. Similarly, Barclays will meet the 2020 target Living Wage level for its apprentice population by 2019

–  Our current pay deal with Unite (2017-2019) commits to a 7.5% agreed salary increase budget for the Unite recognised population. As part of the pay deal, our commitment to track the Living Wage and continue to progress junior pay will provide a 10% increase across the three years for the most junior employees.

◾   

Ensuring every individual has the opportunity to progress through the organisation and earn more

–  Supporting initiatives to eliminate any ‘glass ceiling’ and ensure equal opportunities for progression for every individual

–  We are an equal opportunities employer and have a number of initiatives in place to support diversity in our workplace e.g. increasing female representation at all levels across Barclays remains a core focus of our talent management and leadership succession processes

–  Barclays has published its UK Gender Pay Gap for the first time this year (page 49), as well as continuing to report the proportion of women at our more senior corporate grades.

◾   

Equal pay

–  Barclays fully supports equal pay legislation (in place in the UK since 1970)

–  Barclays is committed to ensuring all employees are fairly paid for the work they do, and that men and women receive equal pay for the same or similar roles. We are explicit with those who make pay decisions that those pay decisions must not, directly or indirectly, take into account an individual’s gender, age, ethnicity, religion, sexual orientation, marital status, pregnancy, maternity, shared parental, paternity or parental leave, veteran status or disability

–  To ensure our pay decisions are fair, and reflect our legal obligations, Barclays has a number of policies and processes in place to ensure that line management decisions that are made at the beginning on hiring and throughout the employment cycle are free from unlawful bias. This includes ensuring that our internal policies and processes are neutral in their application and free from any conscious or unconscious bias. We also share key data annually with Unite concerning their recognised population on pay distribution.

◾   

Ensuring employees, like any other stakeholders, are appropriately represented in remuneration decision-making

–  Employee views are represented by senior management to the Committee. We continue to review potential approaches to build on this

–  Employees are represented by their management through our internal remuneration decision-making processes. We are also proud of our long-standing relationship with Unite, through which we engage positively on remuneration.

56    |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration report

2015 incentives

 

 

◾   

Ensuring executive pay and employee pay are linked to business performance

–  The view that executive and employee remuneration should both be linked to the performance of the company is one shared by the Committee

–  Pay approaches for our executive Directors are demonstrably aligned to business performance through financial, non-financial performance and risk based performance measures, as described in the DRP

–  Similar performance considerations are made by the Committee when determining the appropriate level of incentive funding for all of our people.

Remuneration structure

The remuneration structure for employees is closely aligned with that for executive Directors, set out in detail in the DRP which can be found on pages 108 to 120 of the 2016 Annual Report. The primary exception being that the executive Directors participate in the Barclays’ LTIP and receive part of their Fixed Pay in Barclays PLC shares.

Employees receive salary, pension and other benefits and are eligible to be considered for an annual bonus. Employees in some customer-facing businesses participate in formulaic incentive plans, including plans which have good customer outcomes as the primary performance measure. The plans also recognise how results have been achieved in line with Barclays’ Values. Some senior employees also receive Role Based Pay (RBP). Remuneration of MRTs is subject to the 2:1 maximum ratio of variable to fixed remuneration. A total of 1,641 (2016: 1,561) individuals were MRTs in 2017. Capital requirements regulation (CRR) quantitative disclosures on MRTs are set out on pages 189 to 191 of Barclays PLC 2017 Pillar 3 Report.

The remuneration of employees engaged in control functions is determined independently from the business they support and within the parameters of the incentive pool allocated to them by the Committee. Remuneration for control function employees is less weighted towards variable remuneration as compared to front office employees and variable remuneration is typically limited to one times fixed remuneration. This leads to less volatility in overall control function remuneration as compared to front office outcomes.

§Fixed remuneration

Salary Employees only become eligible to receive payment from

Salaries reflect individuals’ skills and experience and are reviewed annually in the context of annual performance assessment. They are increased where justified by role change, increased responsibility or a deferred bonus once all ofchange in the relevant conditions have been fulfilled, including the provision of services to the Group.

appropriate market rate. Salaries may also be increased in line with local statutory requirements and in line with union and works council commitments.

 

§Role Based Pay (RBP) The income statement charge for performance costs reflects

A small number of senior employees receive a class of fixed pay called RBP to recognise the charge for employees’ actual services provided to the Group during the relevant calendar year (including where those services fulfil conditions attached to previously deferred bonuses). It does not include charges for deferred bonuses where conditions have not been met.

seniority, breadth and depth of their role.

 

§Pension and benefits As a consequence, the 2015 incentive awards granted decreased 10% compared to 2014, while the income statement charge for performance costs decreased by 9%.

Income statement charge (audited)

    Barclays Group     Investment Bank  
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Year ended
31.12.14

£m

  
  

  

   % change     
 

 

Year ended
31.12.15

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
   % change  

Deferred bonus charge

   874     1,067     18      736      854     14   

Current year bonus charges

   839     885          367      381       

Commissions, commitments and other incentives

   171     110     (55)     81      50     (62)  

Performance costs

   1,884     2,062          1,184      1,285       

Salariesa

   4,954     4,998          1,847      1,749     (6)  

Social security costs

   594     659     10      248      268       

Post retirement benefitsbc

   545     624     13      112      120       

Allowances and trading incentives

   147     170     14      56     ��64     13   

Other compensation costs

   215     378     43      (24)     134       

Total compensation costsd

   8,339     8,891          3,423      3,620       

 

Other resourcing costs

                              

Outsourcing

   1,034     1,055          15      9     (67)  

Redundancy and restructuring

   134     358     63      84      239     65   

Temporary staff costs

   697     530     (32)     248      176     (41)  

Other

   185     171     (8)     51      42     (22)  

Total other resourcing costs

 

   2,050     2,114          398      466     15   

Total staff costs

   10,389     11,005          3,821      4,086       
                               

Compensation as % of adjusted net income

   37.2%     37.7%       45.5%      47.6%    

Compensation as % of statutory net income

   35.7%     38.5%          45.5%      47.6%       

Compensation as % of adjusted income

   34.0%     34.6%       45.2%      47.7%    

Compensation as % of statutory income

   32.8%     35.2%          45.2%      47.7%       

Notes

aSalaries include Role Based Pay and fixed pay allowances.
bPost retirement benefits charge includes £246m (2014: £242m) in respect of defined contribution schemes and £(130)m credit (2014: £382m) in respect of defined benefit schemes.
c2015 post-retirement benefits have been adjusted to exclude the impact

The provision of a £429m (2014: nil) gain on valuationcompetitive package of benefits is important to attracting and retaining the talented staff needed to deliver Barclays’ strategy. Employees have access to a componentrange of thecountry-specific company-funded benefits, including pension schemes, healthcare, life assurance and Barclays’ share plans as well as other voluntary employee funded benefits. The cost of providing these benefits is defined benefit liability. Including the gain would result in a compensation: adjusted net income ratio of 35.3% and a compensation: adjusted income ratio of 32.3%. The aforementioned gain is already included in the statutory ratios.

dIn addition, £236m of Group compensation (2014: £250m) was capitalised as internally generated software.
controlled.

 

§Variable remuneration Total staff costs decreased 6% to £10,389m, principally reflecting a 9% decrease in performance costs and a 63% decrease in redundancy and restructuring charges.

 

§Annual bonus Performance costs decreased 9%, reflecting

Annual bonuses incentivise and reward the achievement of Group, business and individual objectives, and reward employees for demonstrating individual behaviours in line with Barclays’ Values.

The ability to recognise performance through variable remuneration enables the Group to control its cost base flexibly and to react to events and market circumstances. Bonuses remain a 18% decreasekey feature of remuneration practice in the chargeshighly competitive and mobile market for deferred bonuses, a 5% decreasetalent in the bonus charge partially offset byfinancial services sector. The Committee is careful to control the proportion of variable to fixed remuneration paid to individuals and also to ensure an increase in other performance charges.

appropriate amount is deferred to future years.

 

The typical deferral structures are:

§                                                     For MRTs: Redundancy                                 For non-MRTs:
Incentive award        Amount deferredIncentive award          Amount deferred

< £500,000        40% of total awardUp to £65,000        0%

£500,000 to £1,000,000        60% of total award> £65,000        Graduated level of deferral

> £1,000,000        60% up to £1,000,000

        100% above £1,000,000

Deferred bonuses are generally delivered in equal portions as deferred cash and restructuring charges decreased 63% to £134m, predominantly duedeferred shares subject to the non-recurrencerules of the 2014 restructuring costsdeferred cash and share plans (as amended from time to time) and continued service. Deferred bonuses are subject to either a 3, 5 or 7 year deferral period in line with regulatory requirements.

Where dividend equivalents cannot be delivered on deferred bonus shares, the Investment Bank.number of deferred bonus shares awarded will be calculated using a share price discounted to reflect the absence of dividend equivalents during the vesting period.

Share plans

Alignment of senior employees with shareholders is achieved through deferral of incentive pay. We also encourage wider employee shareholding through the all-employee share plans. 86% of the global employee population is eligible to participate (up from 82% in 2016).

Deferred bonuses awarded are expected to be charged to the income statement in the years outlined in the table that follows.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |    57


��Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

    

 

Year in which income statement chargeThis section sets out a summary of the Barclays’ forward-looking DRP and is expectedprovided for information only. The DRP was approved at the 2017 AGM held on 10 May 2017 and applies for three years from that date. The full DRP can be found on pages 108 to be taken for deferred bonuses awarded to datea120 of the 2016 Annual Report or at home.barclays/annualreport.

Remuneration policy summary – executive Directors

    Actual   Expectedb 
    
 
 
Year ended
31.12.14
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.15
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Year ended
31.12.16
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
2017 and
beyond
£m
  
  
  
Barclays Group        
Deferred bonuses from 2012 and earlier bonus pools   488     117     13       
Deferred bonuses from 2013 bonus pool   579     293     111     17  
Deferred bonuses from 2014 bonus pool        464     194     100  
Deferred bonuses from 2015 bonus pool             370     247  
Income statement charge for deferred bonuses   1,067     874     688     364  
Investment Bank                    
Deferred bonuses from 2012 and earlier bonus pools   398     101     11       
Deferred bonuses from 2013 bonus pool   456     239     93     13  
Deferred bonuses from 2014 bonus pool        396     167     80  
Deferred bonuses from 2015 bonus pool             341     217  
Income statement charge for deferred bonuses   854     736     612     310  

 

Bonus pool component Expected grant dateElement and purpose  Expected payment date(s)cOperation Year(s)Implementation in which income statement charge arisesd
Current year cash bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2016

§   2015

Current year share bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2016

§   2015

Deferred cash bonus

§   March 2016

§   March 2017 (33.3%)

§   2016  (48%)

2018

§   March 2018 (33.3%)

§   2017  (35%)

§   March 2019 (33.3%)

§   2018  (15%)

  

§   2019 (2%)Fixed Pay

Deferred share bonus

§   March 2016To reward skills and experience appropriate for the breadth and depth of the role and to provide the basis for a competitive remuneration package

  

§   March 2017 (33.3%)Fixed Pay is determined with reference to market practice and historical market data (on which the Committee receives independent advice), and reflects the individual’s experience and role.

Total compensation is benchmarked against comparable roles in banks.

50% of Fixed Pay is delivered in cash (paid monthly), and 50% is delivered in shares. The shares are delivered quarterly and are subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). As the executive Directors beneficially own the shares, they will be entitled to any dividends paid on those shares.

There are no performance measures.

Malus and clawback provisions do not apply to Fixed Pay.

 

No change from 2017.

§   2016  (48%)Jes Staley: £2,350,000

   Tushar Morzaria: £1,650,000

These amounts are fixed and will not change during the policy period for these individuals.

§   March 2018 (33.3%)

§   2017  (35%)

§   March 2019 (33.3%)

§   2018  (15%)

  

Pension

To enable executive Directors to build long-term retirement savings

  Executive Directors receive an annual cash allowance in lieu of participation in a pension arrangement.

No change from 2017.

   Jes Staley: £396,000

   Tushar Morzaria: £200,000

These amounts are fixed and will not change during the policy period for these individuals.

  

§   2019 (2%)Benefits

To provide a competitive and cost effective benefits package appropriate to the role and location

Executive Directors’ benefits provision includes, but is not restricted to, private medical cover, annual health check, life and ill health income protection, car cash allowance, and use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

In addition to the above, if an executive Director were to relocate, additional support would be provided for a defined and limited period of time in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy. Barclays will pay the tax on relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay tax on any other employment income.

No change from 2017.

Notes

a

Annual bonus

To reward delivery of short-term financial targets set each year, the individual performance of the executive Directors in achieving those targets, and their contribution to delivering Barclays’ strategic objectives

Delivery in part in shares with a holding period increases alignment with shareholders. Deferred bonuses encourage longer term focus and retention

The actual amount chargedmaximum annual bonus opportunity is 80% of Total fixed pay. For these purposes Total fixed pay is Fixed Pay plus Pension.

The performance measures include financial and payments madenon-financial measures which also include risk-related measures and personal objectives. Financial measures will be at least 60% of the bonus opportunity. The Committee has discretion to vary the measures and their respective weighting within each category.

Annual bonuses are delivered as a combination of cash and shares, a proportion of which may be deferred and/or subject to a holding period.

Deferral proportions and vesting profiles will be structured so that, in combination with any LTIP award, the proportion of variable pay that is deferred is no less than that required by regulations.

Dividend equivalents are payable on vested deferred bonus shares. If dividend equivalents are not permissible under regulations, the number of shares to be awarded will be determined using a share price discounted by reference to the expected dividend yield.

A notional discount may be applied to deferred bonuses for the purposes of calculating the 2:1 cap to the extent permitted by regulations.

Awards are subject to all conditions being met priormalus during the vesting period and clawback for a period of seven years (10 years in specific circumstances) from the date of award.

Details of performance measures are set out on page 67.

Shares issued are subject to a holding period of one year after vesting.

As dividend equivalents are not permissible under regulations, the expectednumber of shares to be awarded will be calculated using a share price discounted to reflect the absence of dividend equivalents during the vesting period.

58    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Element and purposeOperationImplementation in 2018

Annual bonus

continued

Non-deferred cash components of any bonus are paid following the performance year to which they relate, normally in March. Non-deferred share bonuses are also awarded normally in March and are subject to a holding period (after the payment date and will vary comparedof tax) in line with regulations.

Deferred share bonuses are structured so that no deferred shares vest faster than permitted by regulations (currently in five equal tranches with the above expectation. In addition, employees receiving a deferred cash bonus may be awarded a service creditfirst vesting on or around the third anniversary of 10%grant and the last tranche vesting on or around the seventh anniversary of the initial value of the award at the timegrant). Any shares that the final instalment is made, subject to continued employment. Dividend equivalent shares may also be awarded under SVP awards.

bDoes not include the impact of grants which will be made in 2016 and 2017.
cShare awards may bevest are subject to an additional holding period.period (after payment of tax) in line with regulations.

d

Long Term Incentive Plan

(LTIP) award

To reward execution of Barclays’ strategy over a multi-year period

Long-term performance measurement, deferral and holding periods encourage a long-term view and align executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders. Malus and clawback provisions discourage excessive risk-taking and inappropriate behaviours

The income statement chargemaximum annual LTIP award is 120% of Total fixed pay. For these purposes Total fixed pay is Fixed Pay plus Pension.

Forward-looking performance measures will be based on financial performance and other long-term strategic measures. Financial measures will be at least 70% of the total opportunity. Straight line vesting applies between threshold and maximum for the financial measures with no more than 25% vesting at threshold performance.

LTIP awards are structured so that when combined with the annual bonus the proportion of variable pay that is deferred is no less than that required by regulations.

The Committee has discretion to vary the measures year on year and their respective weighting within each category. The Committee also has discretion to amend targets, measures and the number of awards in exceptional circumstances and to reduce the vesting of any award, including to nil, if it deems that the outcome is not consistent with performance.

Dividend equivalents are payable on vested deferred shares. If dividend equivalents are not permissible under the regulations, the number of shares to be awarded will be determined using a share price discounted by reference to the expected dividend yield.

A notional discount may be applied to LTIP awards for the purposes of calculating the 2:1 cap to the extent permitted by regulations.

Awards are subject to malus during the vesting period over which conditionsand clawback for a period of seven years (10 years in specific circumstances) from the date of award.

No LTIP award vests before the third anniversary of grant and an award vests no faster than permitted by regulations (currently in five equal tranches with the first tranche vesting on or around the third anniversary of grant and the last tranche vesting on or around the seventh anniversary of the grant date). Any shares that vest are met.subject to an additional holding period (after payment of tax) in line with regulations.

Details of performance measures and targets for awards to be made in 2018 (in respect of 2017) are set out on page 65.

For awards to be made in respect of 2018, the measures and targets will be determined at the end of 2018 for the performance period commencing on 1 January 2019.

On vesting, the award is subject to a holding period of one year.

As dividend equivalents are not permissible under regulations, the number of shares to be awarded will be calculated using a share price discounted to reflect the absence of dividend equivalents during the vesting period.

Shareholding requirement

To further enhance the alignment of shareholders’ and executive Directors’ interests in long-term value creation

Executive Directors must build up a shareholding of 200% of Total fixed pay (i.e. Fixed Pay plus Pension) within five years from the date of appointment as executive Director.

Executive Directors must also continue to hold a shareholding of 100% of Total fixed pay (or pro-rata thereof) for two years post-termination.

No change from 2017.

(Equivalent to 457% of salary for the Group Chief Executive under the previous DRP.)

Executive Directors are also entitled to participate in all employee share plans, for example Barclays Sharesave and Barclays Sharepurchase, on the same basis as all other employees.

 

58  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    59


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy

Remuneration policy summary – non-executive Directors

Element and purposeOperationImplementation In 2018

Fees

Reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees and are set to attract non-executive Directors who have relevant skills and experience to oversee the implementation of our strategy

Fees are set at a level which reflects the role, responsibilities and time commitment which are expected from the Chairman, Deputy Chairman and non-executive Directors

The Chairman and Deputy Chairman are paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities. The Chairman has a minimum time commitment equivalent to at least 80% of a full-time role. The other non-executive Directors receive a basic Board fee, with additional fees payable where individuals serve as a member or Chairman of a Committee of the Board.

Fees are reviewed each year by the Board as a whole. Other than in exceptional circumstances, fees will not increase by more than 20% above the current fee levels during this policy period (basic fees last increased in 2011).

£30,000 (Chairman: £100,000) after tax and national insurance contributions per annum of each non-executive Director’s basic fee is used to purchase Barclays’ shares which are retained on the non-executive Director’s behalf until they retire from the Board.

Some non-executive Directors may also receive fees as directors of subsidiary companies of Barclays PLC.

No change from 2017.
Benefits

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover subject to the terms of the Barclays’ scheme rules from time to time, and is provided with the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Benefits which are minor in nature and do not exceed a cost of £500 may be provided to non-executive Directors in specific circumstances.

No change from 2017.
Expenses

The Chairman and non-executive Directors are reimbursed for any reasonable and appropriate expenses incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays.

No change from 2017.

Service contracts and letters of appointment

All executive Directors have a service contract whereas all non-executive Directors have a letter of appointment. Copies of the service contracts and letters of appointment are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office. The dates of the current Directors’ service contracts and letters of appointment are shown in the table below.

Effective date
Chairman
John McFarlane1 January 2015 (non-executive Director), 24 April 2015 (Chairman)
Executive Directors
Jes Staley1 December 2015
Tushar Morzaria15 October 2013
Non-executive Directors
Mike Ashley18 September 2013
Tim Breedon1 November 2012
Sir Ian Cheshire3 April 2017
Mary Francis1 October 2016
Crawford Gillies1 May 2014
Sir Gerry Grimstone1 January 2016
Reuben Jeffery III16 July 2009
Matthew Lester1 September 2017
Dambisa Moyo1 May 2010
Diane Schueneman25 June 2015
Mike Turner1 January 2018

60    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

 

This section explains how our Directors’ remuneration policy was implemented during 2017.

  This section explains how our Directors’ remuneration policy was implemented during 2015.

Executive Directors

Executive Directors: Single total figure for 20152017 remuneration (audited)

The following table shows a single total figure for 20152017 remuneration in respect of qualifying service for each executive Director together with comparative figures for 2014.2016.

 

    

 

Salary

£000

  

  

   
 
Role Based Pay
£000
  
  
   
 
Taxable benefits
£000
  
  
   Annual bonus £000     

 

LTIP

£000

  

  

   

 

Pension

£000

  

  

 

Total

£000

  

  

        2015     2014     2015     2014     2015     2014       2015      2014     2015     2014         2015         2014        2015     2014  
 Antony Jenkinsa   598     1,100     516     950     89     100     505     1,100     1,494     1,854     197     363     3,399    5,467  
 Tushar Morzaria   800     800     750     750     82     95     701     900               200     200     2,533    2,745  
 Jes Staleyb   100          96          48                                 33           277       
                                                                                                                                                
    Fixed Paya   Taxable benefits   Annual bonus   LTIP   Pension   Total 
   £000   £000   £000   £000   £000   £000 
    2017   2016   2017   2016   2017   2016   2017   2016   2017   2016   2017   2016 
Jes Staleyb   2,350    2,350    62    169    1,065    1,318            396    396    3,873    4,233 
Tushar Morzariac   1,614    1,550    44    44    747    854    882    1,008    200    200    3,487    3,656 

Notes

aThe 2015 figures for Antony Jenkins relate to the period to 16 July 2015 when he ceased to be a Director, save in the case of the LTIP which relates to the whole performance period. Details of his leaving arrangements are provided on page 68.
bThe 2015 figures for Jes Staley relate to the period from 1 December 2015 when he joined the Board as Group Chief Executive.

John McFarlane was appointed Executive Chairmana The 2016 figures for Fixed Pay relate to Salary and RBP.

b Jes Staley’s 2016 benefits figure includes relocation expenses.

c Tushar Morzaria’s Fixed Pay increased to £1,650,000 with effect from 17 July 2015 pending the appointment of a new Group Chief Executive. At his request, he received no increase in fees. Details of his fees are provided on page 67. John McFarlane is not eligible to participate in Barclays’ cash, share or long-term incentive plans or pension plans.10 May 2017.

Additional information in respect of each element of pay for the executive Directors (audited)

SalaryFixed Pay

Jes Staley commenced employment as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015 on a salary of £1,200,000 per annum. Tushar MorzariaFixed Pay was paid a salary of £800,000 per annum as Group Finance Director. Antony Jenkins was paid a salary of £1,100,000 per annum.

Role Based Pay (RBP)

Executive Directors receiveintroduced for 2017, replacing Salary and RBP, whichand is delivered quarterly50% in cash and 50% in shares subject(subject to a 5 year holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year)pro-rata). The value shown is of shares at the date awarded.

Taxable benefits

Taxable benefits include private medical cover, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, relocation, home leave related costs, car allowance, the use of a companyCompany vehicle and driver when required for business purposes and other benefits that are considered minor in nature.

Annual bonus

Annual bonuses are discretionary and are typically awarded in Q1 following the financial year to which they relate. The 2015 bonus awards reflect the Committee’s assessment of the extent to whichCommittee considered the executive Directors achieved their Financial (50%Directors’ performance against the financial (60% weighting) and Balanced Scorecard (35%strategic/non-financial (20% weighting) performance measures andwhich had been set to reflect company priorities for 2017. Performance against their individual personal objectives (15%(20% weighting) was assessed on an individual basis.

2017 annual bonus outcomes

Financial (60% weighting)

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures was based on a straight-line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

The formulaic outcome from 2017 performance against the financial measures set at the beginning of the year gave a total of 22.5% out of 60% being payable attributable to those measures. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

                                                                                
Financial performance measure  Weighting   

Threshold

25%

   

Maximum

100%

   

2017

Actual

   

2017

Outcome

 
Profit before tax (excluding material items)   22.5%    £5.10bn    £6.20bn    £4.24bn    0% 
CET1 ratio   22.5%    12.6%    13.0%    13.3%    22.5% 
Cost: income ratio (excluding material items)   15.0%    67.0%    63.0%    70.0%    0% 
Total Financial   60%                   22.5% 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    61


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Strategic (20% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the strategic measures, organised around three main categories, was assessed by the Committee. The Committee used the following scale in relation to each measure: 0% to 1% firmly below performance expectations, 1.5% to 3% slightly below performance expectations, 3.5% to 5.5% meeting or slightly exceeding performance expectations, and 6% to 7% clearly above performance expectations. Based on this approach to assessing performance against 2017 Group Performance Measurement Framework milestones, the Committee agreed a 13% outcome out of a maximum of 20%. More informationThe assessment is provided in the following table.

Measure

2017

Outcome

Customer and Client

 We have continued to make progress with our customer and client agenda. However, complaints remain an ongoing area of focus for management and the Board

3.0%

 Barclays Relationship Net Promoter Score (NPS) ended the year with an improved score of +14 (2016: +10) while Barclaycard UK Relationship NPS remained relatively flat (2017: +9). Barclaycard International business also continued to perform well on Relationship NPS

 Underlying UK complaint volumes (Barclays UK, excluding PPI) reduced 13% year on year, however, there has been a small increase in PPI complaints (up 2% year on year) driven largely by the FCA deadline announcement. Barclays UK complaint volumes, including PPI, were down 7% year on year. Barclays International complaints reduced by 19% year on year. Complaints reduction remains a priority across the Group, and despite improvements in 2017, Barclays has more work to do, as can be seen from our position in the H1 2017 FCA complaints tables in the UK

 The number of customers and clients in the UK using our digital services on a regular basis has increased to over 10 million customers (2016: nearly 9.5m)

 In our home markets of the UK and US, our CIB ranked 6th place by fee share across M&A, equity and debt capital markets and syndicated loan transactions (2016: 5th); and we were highly encouraged by the 1st place CIB ranking in the UK (Dealogic).

Colleague

 Overall this has been a year of progress on increasing the diversity of our workforce and in building an inclusive and engaged culture

4.5%

 Employee sustainable engagement improved by 3% year on year to 78%, with the majority of key survey question results recording improvements and the rest remaining stable

 We remain focused on improving our gender diversity. We have made a 1% improvement in the percentage of female Managing Directors and Directors to 23% (on a like for like basis excluding Africa). Recognising the importance of strengthening our talent pipeline, we also have an ambition for 50% female graduate hires and have ended 2017 at 40%

 External recognition includes: Stonewall recognising Barclays as one of 12 Top Global Employers; the Human Rights Campaign awarding Barclays 100% on their corporate equality index; Working Families UK recognising Barclays as one of the top 10 Employers for Working Families in 2017; and Barclays was acknowledged as a Top 50 Employer through the Social Mobility Employer Index in 2017.

Citizenship

 This has been a very positive year in the Citizenship space, with further progress in many areas

 We helped upskill over 2.1 million people (2016 1.7 million), driven by a range of regional employability partnerships and our flagship LifeSkills programme in the UK

5.5%

 Barclays delivered £31.7bn in financing for selected social and environmental segments (2016: £30.5bn)

 We helped empower around 205,000 people (2016: 249,000) through initiatives such as: Barclaycard Initial for those with a limited credit history; our Digital Eagles network, comprised of specially trained Barclays’ employees working to provide free technology support to customers and non-customers; and the continued development of learning platforms

 We reduced carbon emissions by 26.1% against the 2015 baseline, making good progress against our target of 30% reduction by 2018

 We also achieved 89% (2016: 88%) on-time payment by value to our suppliers, ahead of our target of 85%, and published an updated Statement on Modern Slavery.

13% out of 20%

Further details on the Group Performance Measurement Framework can be found on pages 15 to 22.

62    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Individual outcomes including assessment of personal objectives

Performance against each of the executive Directors’ individual personal objectives (20% weighting overall) was assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.

(i) Jes Staley

A summary of the assessment for Jes Staley against his specific performance measures andis provided in the outcomes for the 2015 bonuses isfollowing table.

Performance measure      Weighting   

2017 

        Outcome 

Financial  See table on page 61  60%   22.5% 
Strategic  See table on page 104  20%   13.0% 
Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below  20%   13.0% 
Total     100%   48.5% 
Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee     48.5% 

The Committee assessed Jes Staley’s performance against his 2017 personal objectives (as set out on pages 60page 126 of the 2016 Annual Report). In relation to the joint personal objectives, the Committee has taken account of delivery against financial commitments including achieving the end state target range for the CET1 ratio as well as improvements to our cost: income ratio, while recognising that there is still some way to go in getting returns where management, the Board and 61.our investors expect them to be. The Committee has also recognised the early closure of Non-Core and successful reintegration of remaining assets/businesses into Core as well as the achievement of the accounting deconsolidation and proportional regulatory consolidation of BAGL. It noted that the Structural Reform programme has been well executed, with the launch of the Group Service Company achieved. The Committee noted the significant work that has taken place in planning following the EU referendum outcome. Risk and control have also continued to be managed effectively, with further progress in resolving legacy conduct and litigation matters.

In relation to his individual objectives, the Committee recognises that Jes Staley was not eligiblehas made continued progress towards ensuring a high performing culture in line with our Values, and employee engagement has been strengthened in 2017. Barclays has made improvements in some customer and client metrics such as a reduction in customer complaints, while noting the need for further improvement. Succession planning for senior roles has been improved, and continued progress made in improving the percentage of women in senior leadership roles (5th consecutive year increasing the percentage of female Managing Directors and Directors). Finally, significant improvements have been made to the Group's control environment, with a 2015 bonus.focus on operations and technology infrastructure, particularly through the establishment of the Group Service Company.

60%While recognising the strong strategic delivery, given some of each executive Director’s 2015 bonus will be deferred in the formremaining challenges, particularly around returns, the Committee judged that 13% of a share awardmaximum of 20% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment for Jes Staley resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 48.5% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. The Committee considered the outcome and agreed that a 2017 annual bonus of £1,065,000 (48.5% of maximum) was appropriate, of which 62.4% is deferred under the Share Value Plan vesting over three yearsin line with one third vestingthe Group-wide deferral structure.

(ii) Tushar Morzaria

A summary of the assessment for Tushar Morzaria against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

Performance measure      Weighting   

2017 

Outcome 

Financial  See table on page 61  60%   22.5% 
Strategic  See table on page 104  20%   13.0% 
Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below  20%   15.0% 
Total     100%   50.5% 
Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee     50.5% 

The Committee assessed Tushar Morzaria’s performance against his 2017 personal objectives (as set out on page 126 of the 2016 Annual Report). In relation to the joint personal objectives, the Committee recognised Tushar Morzaria's contribution to the financial outcomes, including achieving the end state target range for the CET1 ratio as well as improvements to our cost: income ratio. The Committee also recognised that Tushar Morzaria had been instrumental in the execution of the strategy including the closure of Non-Core, the accounting deconsolidation and proportional regulatory consolidation of BAGL and the Structural Reform programme in the UK. He has also made significant contributions to Barclays' planning in response to the EU referendum outcome and plays a key leadership role in managing risk and control as well as settling legacy conduct and litigation issues.

In relation to his individual objectives, the Committee recognises that he is extremely well respected by both internal and external stakeholders including the Board, regulators, stakeholders, investors and colleagues across the organisation, effectively managing external relationships and the reputation of the Group. He has also continued to strengthen his team within Finance and has exemplified the Values expected by the Board - he is tireless in his commitment to the organisation and defines the notion of partnership. Given his strong personal performance during 2017, the Committee judged that 15% of a maximum 20% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment for Tushar Morzaria resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 50.5% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. The Committee considered the outcome and agreed that a 2017 annual bonus of £747,000 (50.5% of maximum) was appropriate, of which 46.5% is deferred under the Share Value Plan in line with the Group-wide deferral structure.

In line with the DRP, and due to the regulations prohibiting dividend equivalents being paid on unvested deferred share awards, the number of shares awarded to each year. 20%executive Director under the Share Value Plan will be paidcalculated using a share price at the date of award, discounted to reflect the absence of dividend equivalents during the vesting period. The valuation will be aligned to IFRS 2, with the market expectations of dividends during the deferral period being assessed by an independent adviser. These shares will vest in cash and 20% delivered in shares.five equal tranches from the third to seventh anniversary (subject to the rules of the Share Value Plan as amended from time to time). All shares (whether deferred or not deferred)not) are subject to a further six monthone year holding period from the point of release. 20152017 bonuses are subject to clawback provisions and, additionally, unvested deferred 20152017 bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    63


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

LTIP

The LTIP amount included in Antony Jenkins’ 2015Tushar Morzaria’s 2017 single total figure is the value of the amount scheduled to be released in relation to the LTIP award granted in 20132015 in respect of performance period 2013-2015.2015-2017 (by reference to Q4 2017 average share price). As Tushar Morzaria and Jes Staley werewas not participantsa participant in this cycle, the LTIP figure in the single figure table is shown as zero for them.him. Release is dependent on, amongstamong other things, performance over the period from 1 January 20132015 to 31 December 2015.2017 with straight-line vesting applied between the threshold and maximum points. The performance achieved against the performance targets is as follows.follows:

 

Performance measure  Weighting      Threshold  Maximum vesting  Actual    % of award vesting Weighting           Threshold  Maximum vesting  Actual % of award vesting

Return on risk weighted

assets (RoRWA)

  50%  13% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.1%  Average annual RoRWA of 1.6%  0.21%    0%
Net generated equitya 30%    7.5% of award vests for Net generated equity of £1,363m  Net generated equity of £1,844m  £3,427m 30.0%
Core return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) excluding own credit 20%    5% of award vests for average annual Core RoRWA of 1.34%  Average annual Core RoRWA of 1.81%  0.68% 0.0%
Non-Core drag on return on equity (RoE) excluding material items 10%    2.5% of award vests for Non-Core drag on RoE of -4.02%  Non-Core drag on RoE of -2.97%  -3.85% 3.7%
Loan loss rate  30%  10% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 75bps  Average annual loan loss rate of 60bps or below  53bps    30% 10%    2.5% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bps  Average annual loss rate of 55bps or below  54bps 10.0%
Balanced Scorecard  20%  Performance against the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 20%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.  See below    9% 30%    Performance against the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting.  See below 9.0%
Total                39%              52.7%

Note

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  59


a Net generated equity is a metric which converts changes in the CET1 ratio into an absolute capital equivalent measure. The measure is expressed as an average over the period.

A summary of the Committee’s assessment against the Balanced Scorecard performance measure over the three year performance period is provided below.

 

CategoryPerformance

Vesting out of

maximum 4%

for each ‘C’

 Customer and ClientThe Customer and Client Relationship metrics remained stable at 4th place as a strong performance in corporate banking, combined with improvements in Barclaycard UK and Barclays current accounts, was offset by the impact of reshaping the Wealth business and competitive challenges in South Africa. The Client Franchise Rank remained stable at 5th place in challenging market conditions.2%
 Colleague

There has been continued advancement towards Barclays’ 2018 gender goal of 26% women in senior leadership roles; at 23% by the end of 2015.

Sustained Engagement is currently 75%, a positive result in light of the on-going change the organisation has experienced in 2015. Further work is required to achieve the 2018 target.

2%
 CitizenshipIn Citizenship Plan, 10 out of 11 metrics on target shows Barclays is having a positive impact on the communities in which it operates, with lending to households the only initiative to lose momentum primarily as a result of market and trading conditions.3%
 ConductWhile Conduct reputation as measured by the YouGov survey improved over the period, the Committee nevertheless determined that, by reference to the material conduct events that crystallised during the performance period, nil vesting was appropriate.0%
 CompanyThere has been a significant strengthening in the CET1 ratio, which is ahead of 2018 target, however there is plenty of work to do to deliver an acceptable return to shareholders, with adjusted RoE slightly down on 2014.2%
 Total9%
Category Weighting                Performance Vesting out of maximum
6% for each ‘C’
Customer and Client     6%   

 Barclays UK Relationship NPS ended the year with a score +14, with improvement also seen in Barclaycard UK Relationship NPS (c.+2). However, performance against peers remained 4th throughout the period, below our 2018 target of 1st

 

 Client Franchise Rank remained stable at 5th throughout the period. While this is a positive result given our shift in strategy to focus more narrowly on geographies and businesses of strength in the Investment Bank, we are not on track to achieve the 2018 target of Top 3.

 1%
Colleague 6%   

 Continued improvement of +1% per year in the female representation across senior leadership roles (on a like for like basis excluding Africa) to 23% at the end of 2017

 

 Colleague engagement improved from 74% in 2014 to 75% in 2015 and 2016 and to 78% in 2017. However engagement remains significantly below our 2018 targets.

 2%
Citizenship 6%   

 Met or exceeded 10/11 initiatives in 2015 and 6/6 Shared Growth Ambition goals in 2016 and 2017. Of particular note:

 

    –  Financing to social and environmental segments rising to £31.7bn in 2017

 

    –  Global carbon emissions decreased 26.1% against the 2015 baseline

 

    –  Supplier payment on time exceeded target of 85% throughout the period.

 4%
Conduct 6%   

 Conduct reputation, as measured by the YouGov survey, has remained at 5.4 over the period and below our 2018 target of 6.5.

 0%
Company 6%  

 Significant strengthening in the CET1 ratio over the period, with the CET1 ratio now within our end-state target range

 2%
   

 However, returns excluding material items (both RoE and RoTE) were below target through much of the period

 
      

 Cost: income ratio improved but still below long term target.

  
Total 30%     9%

The LTIP award is also subject to a discretionary underpin whereby the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax.Group. The Committee was satisfied that this underpin was met, and accordingly determined that the award should be considered for release to the extent of 39%at 52.7% of the maximum number of shares under the total award. The shares are scheduled to be released in March 2016.2018. After release, the shares are subject to an additional two year holding period.

Pension

Executive Directors are paid cash in lieu of pension contributions. This is market practiceThe cash allowance in 2017 was £396,000 for senior executives in comparable roles.

2015 Annual bonus outcomes

The Committee considered each ofJes Staley and £200,000 for Tushar Morzaria. No other benefits were received by the eligible executive Directors’ performance against the financial and non-financial measures which had been set to reflect the strategic priorities for 2015. Performance against their individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) is assessed on an individual basis. The Committee may exercise its discretion to amend the formulaic outcome of assessment against the targets.

Financial (50% weighting)

The approach taken to assessing financial performance against each of the financial measures is based on a straight line outcome between 25% for threshold performance and 100% applicable to each measure for achievement of maximum performance.

The formulaic outcomeDirectors from 2015 performance against the financial measures gave a total of 22.1% out of 50% being payable attributable to those measures. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

 Financial

 performance measure

  Weighting        Threshold 25%     Maximum 100%       2015 Actual       
 
2015
    Outcome
  
  
 Adjusted profit before tax  20%       £5,801m     £7,022m       £5,403m       0.0%  
 Adjusted costs (ex CTA)  10%       £16,780m     £15,182m       £16,205m       5.2%  
 CET1 ratio  10%       10.47%     11.34%       11.4%       10.0%  
 Leverage ratio  10%        4.17%     4.72%       4.5%       6.9%  
 Total Financial  50%                           22.1%  
any Barclays’ pension plans.

 

60  |  64    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

Progress in relation to each of the five ‘Cs’ of the Balanced Scorecard was assessed by the Committee. The Committee took an approach based on a three-point scale in relation to each measure, with 0% to 3% for ‘below’ target, 4% or 5% for a ‘met’ target, and 6% or 7% for ‘above’ target progress against a particular Balanced Scorecard component.

Based on this approach to assessing performance against 2015 Balanced Scorecard milestones, the Committee agreed a 15% outcome out of a maximum of 35%. A summary of the assessment is provided in the following table.

 Balanced Scorecard – 5 Cs   Weighting      Metric   
 
2015
Target
  
  
   
 
2015
Actual
  
  
  

2015

Assessment

by the

Committee

  

2015  

Outcome out  

of maximum  

  7% for each ‘C’  

 Customer and Client   7%      PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking weighted average ranking of Relationship Net Promoter Score v peer sets Client Franchise Risk   4th     4th    Met target  4.0%  
              
             5th     5th    Met target   
 Colleague   7%      Sustained engagement of colleagues’ score   82-88%     75%    Below target  
          % women in senior leadership   23%     23%    Met target  2.0%  
 Citizenship   7%      Citizenship Plan – initiatives   11/11     10/11    Below target  3.0%  
 Conduct   7%      Conduct Reputation (You Gov Survey)   5.6/10     5.4/10    Below target  3.0%  
 Company   7%      Adjusted return on equity   5.9%     4.9%    Below target  
          CET1 ratio   11.0%     11.4%    Above target  3.0%  
 Total Balanced Scorecard   35%                      15.0%  

Individual outcomes including assessment of personal objectives

Performance against each of the executive Directors’ individual personal objectives (15% weighting overall) was assessed by the Committee on an individual basis.

(i) Antony Jenkins

A summary of the assessment for Antony Jenkins against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

 Performance measure         Weighting    Outcome  
 Financial  See table on page 60     50%    22.1%  
 Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs  See table above     35%    15.0%  
 Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below      15%    11.0%  
 Total         100%    48.1%  
 Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee          48.1%  

The Committee determined at the time of his departure that he would remain eligible for a pro rated 2015 bonus for the part of the year in which he was Group Chief Executive, subject to an assessment post year end of the relevant performance measures and the general discretion of the Committee. Although it was deemed the appropriate time for Barclays to change Group Chief Executive in mid-2015, the Committee recognised that during the first half of the year Antony Jenkins showed full commitment to continuing to embed a customer and client focused culture backed by the Barclays’ Values and to delivering on financial commitments with particular focus on capital accretion, reducing costs and continuing the run-down of Non-Core. He was also responsible for ensuring that the Conduct Risk Framework was embedded into the business. Given Antony Jenkins’ overall personal performance in the first half of the year, the Committee judged that 11% of a maximum of 15% was appropriate.

In aggregate, the performance assessment resulted in an overall formulaic outcome of 48.1% of maximum bonus opportunity being achieved. The resulting 2015 bonus, pro rated for service, is £505,000.

(ii) Tushar Morzaria

A summary of the assessment for Tushar Morzaria against his specific performance measures is provided in the following table.

 Performance measure         Weighting    Outcome  
 Financial  See table on page 60     50%    22.1%  
 Balanced Scorecard – 5Cs  See table above     35%    15.0%  
 Personal objectives  Judgemental assessment – see below      15%    13.0%  
 Total         100%    50.1%  
 Final outcome approved by the Remuneration Committee          50.1%  

The Committee concluded that Tushar Morzaria had delivered a strong personal performance throughout the year, and noted that during the second half of the year (pending Jes Staley’s arrival) this was achieved while discharging considerably increased executive responsibilities. During 2015, Tushar Morzaria continued to drive transformational change, encouraging focus on the simplification of the operating model, including improved process and technology. He managed external relationships very effectively, in particular with shareholders, investors and regulators. He personally worked hard on improving colleague engagement and diversity and actively participated in supporting and promoting Barclays’ Citizenship agenda. He has managed risk effectively and embedded a positive risk culture. He has also fully embedded the Conduct Risk Framework into the activities of Group Finance, Tax and Treasury. The Committee, in particular, recognised Tushar Morzaria’s role in the significant improvement in the Bank’s capital position and in driving further focus on close and effective cost management during 2015. Given this strong personal performance, the Committee judged that 13% of a maximum of 15% attributable to individual objectives was appropriate.

As a result, the formulaic outcome for Tushar Morzaria would be 50.1% of maximum bonus opportunity. The resulting 2015 bonus is £701,000.

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  61


    

    

 

Executive Directors: other LTIP awards

The Directors’ remuneration reporting regulations require inclusion in the single total figure of only the value of the LTIP awards whose last year of performance ends in the relevant financial year and whose vesting outcome is known. For 2015,2017, this is the award to Antony JenkinsTushar Morzaria under the 2013-20152015-2017 LTIP cycle and further details are set out on page 59.64. This section sets out other LTIP cycles in which the executive Directors participate, the outcome of which remains dependent on future performance.

LTIP awards to be granted during 20162018

The Committee decided to make an award under the 2016-20182018-2020 LTIP cycle to Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria (based on their performance in 2017) with a face value at grant of 120% of histheir respective Total fixed pay at 31 December 2015. Jes Staley is not eligible for a grant under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle.2017.

The 2016-20182018-2020 LTIP award will be subject to the following forward-looking performance measures.

 

Performance measure Weighting  Threshold Maximum vesting

 Adjusted returnAverage Return on tangible

equity (RoTE) excluding

50%

10% of award vests for average RoTE of 7.75%

(based on an assumed CET1 ratio of c.13%)

Average RoTE of 10.25%
material items

Vesting of this element will depend on CET1 levels during the performance period:

  If CET1 goes below the mandatory distribution restrictions (MDR) hurdlea in any year of the period, no part of the RoTE element will vest

  If CET1 goes below the MDR hurdle +150bps but remains above the hurdle during the period, the Committee will exercise its discretion to determine what portion of the RoTE element should vest, based on the causes of the CET1 reduction.

Average cost: income ratio excluding material items20%

4% of award vests for average cost: income

ratio of 62.5%

Average cost: income ratio of 58%
Risk Scorecard15%The Risk Scorecard captures a range of risks and is aligned with the annual incentive risk alignment framework reviewed with the regulators. The current framework measures performance against three broad categories - Capital and Liquidity, Control Environment and Conduct - using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics. The framework may be updated from time to time in line with the Group’s risk strategy. Specific targets within each of the categories are deemed to be commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure will be made in the 2020 Remuneration report, subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.
Strategic/Non-financial15%

The evaluation will focus on key performance measures from the Group Performance Measurement Framework, with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress throughout the period against each category. Performance against the Strategic/Non-financial measures will be assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. The measures are organised around three main categories: Customer and Client, Colleague and Citizenship. Each of the three main categories has equal weighting. Measures will likely include, but will not be limited to, the following:

  Customer and Client: NPS for consumer businesses, client rankings and market shares for the CIB, complaints performance and volume of lending provided to customers and clients.

  Colleague: Diversity and Inclusion statistics (including women in senior leadership), Employee sustainable engagement survey scores and conduct and culture measures.

  Citizenship: Delivery against our Shared Growth Ambition, Colleague engagement in Citizenship activities and external benchmarks and surveys.

Note

a The CET1 ratio underpin in 2018 will reference the expected end-state MDR hurdle, currently expected to be 11.4%.

Straight-line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial measures.

The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    65


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Outstanding LTIP awards

(i) LTIP awards granted during 2016

The performance measures for the awards made under the 2016-2018 LTIP cycle are as follows:

Performance measureWeighting        ThresholdMaximum vesting
Return on tangible equity 25%  6.25% of award vests for average adjusted RoTE of 7.5% average adjustedAverage RoTE of 10.0%
(RoTE) excluding material of 7.5%
items  CET1 ratio must remain at or above an acceptable level for any of this element to vest. The threshold will be reviewed and set annually based on market conditions and regulatory requirements (11%(11.3% on 31 December 2018)
CET1 ratio as at 31 December 2016).

CET1 ratio as at 31
December 2018

 25%  6.25% of award vests for CET1 ratio of 11.6% CET1 ratio of 12.7%
Cost:income ratio excluding 20%  5% of award vests for average cost:income ratio of 66% averageAverage cost:income ratio of 58%
material itemsratio of 66%
Risk Scorecard 15%  Performance against the Risk Scorecard is assessed by the Committee, with input from the Group Risk function, Board Risk Committee and Board Reputation Committee as appropriate, to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. TheSince its introduction in 2016, the Risk Scorecard has been aligned by the Committee to the annual incentive risk alignment framework reviewed with the regulators. Following this alignment, the current framework measures performance against three broad categories – Risk Profile (including Conduct),Capital and Liquidity, Control Environment and Risk CapabilityConduct – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics. Specific targets within each of the categories are deemed to be commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure of performance will be made in the 2018 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.
Balanced Scorecard 15%  Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. Assessment will be made against progress towards the 2018 targets.

Straight-line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial measures.

The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

(ii) LTIP awards granted during 2017

An award was made to Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria on 23 June 2017 under the 2017-2019 LTIP cycle at a share price on the date of grant of £1.9545, in accordance with our DRP. This is the price used to calculate the face value below.

    % of
Total fixed pay
   Number
        of shares
   

      Face value

at grant

         Performance
period
 
Jes Staley   120%    1,685,955    3,295,200    2017-2019 
Tushar Morzaria   120%    1,074,443    2,100,000    2017-2019 

The performance measures for the 2017-2019 LTIP awards are as follows:

Performance measureWeighting        ThresholdMaximum vesting

Return on tangible equity

(RoTE) excluding material

25%

6.25% of award vests for average

RoTE excluding material items of 7.5%

Average RoTE excluding material items of 9.5%
itemsCET1 ratio must remain at or above an acceptable level for any of this element to vest. The threshold will be reviewed and set annually based on market conditions and regulatory requirements (11.3% on 31 December 2018)
CET1 ratio as at 31 December 201925%

6.25% of award vests for CET1 ratio 100 basis

points above the MDR hurdle

CET1 ratio 200 basis points above the MDR hurdle
Cost: income ratio excluding20%5% of award vests for average cost:Average cost: income ratio of 58%
material itemsincome ratio of 63%
Risk Scorecard15%The Risk Scorecard captures a range of risks and is aligned with the annual incentive risk alignment framework reviewed with the regulators. The current framework measures performance against three broad categories – Capital and Liquidity, Control Environment and Conduct – using a combination of quantitative and qualitative metrics. The framework may be updated from time to time in line with the Group’s risk strategy. Specific targets within each of the categories are deemed to be commercially sensitive. Retrospective disclosure will be made in the 2019 Remuneration report.
Strategic/Non-Financial15%

The evaluation will focus on key performance measures from the Group Performance Measurement Framework, with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress throughout the period against each category. Performance against the Strategic/Non-financial measures will be assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 15%. The measures are organised around three main categories: Customer and Client, Colleague and Citizenship. Each of the three main categories has equal weighting. Measures will likely include, but will not be limited to, the following:

  Customer and Client: NPS for consumer businesses, Client rankings and market shares for the Corporate and Investment Bank, complaints performance and volume of lending provided to customers and clients.

  Colleague: Diversity and Inclusion statistics (including women in senior leadership), Employee sustainable engagement survey scores and conduct and culture measures.

  Citizenship: Delivery against our Shared Growth Ambition, Colleague engagement in Citizenship activities and external benchmarks and surveys.

Straight line

66    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Straight-line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial measures.

The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group.

Outstanding LTIP awards

(i) LTIP awards granted during 2014Executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2018

The performance measuresexecutive Directors’ package for the awards made under the 2014-2016 LTIP cycle are shown below.2018 can be summarised as follows. Further details can be found on pages 58 to 59.

 

  Performance measureJes Staley  WeightingTushar Morzaria  ThresholdMaximum vestingComments
 Return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA)50%23% of award vests for average annual RoRWA of 1.08%Average annual RoRWA of 1.52%
 Loan loss rate20%7% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bpsAverage annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below
 Balanced Scorecard30%Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2016 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the RoRWA and loan loss rate measures. If the Committee is satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group based on profit before tax, depending on the extent of its satisfaction, the percentage of Barclays shares that may be considered for release by the Committee under the RoRWA measure can be increased or decreased by 10% of the total award, subject always to a maximum of 50% of the award. Performance outcome will be determined at the end of the performance period. For Antony Jenkins, the resulting number of shares will then be pro-rated to his termination date.

(ii) LTIP awards granted during 2015

Awards were made on 16 March 2015 under the 2015-2017 LTIP cycle at a share price on the date of grant of £2.535, in accordance with our remuneration policy to the executive Directors. This is the price used to calculate the face value below.

    % of fixed pay     Number of shares     Face value at grant     Performance period  
 Antony Jenkins   120%     1,142,248     £2,895,599     2015-2017  
 Tushar Morzaria   120%     828,402     £2,099,999     2015-2017  

62  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

The performance measures for the 2015-2017 LTIP awards are as follows:

Performance measure

Weighting        ThresholdMaximum vesting

Net generated equitya

30%7.5% of award vests for Net Generated Equity of £1,363mNet Generated Equity of £1,844m

Core return on risk weighted assets (RoRWA) excluding own credit

20%5% of award vests for average annual Core RoRWA of 1.34%Average annual Core RoRWA of 1.81%

Non-Core drag on adjusted return on equity (RoE)

10%2.5% of award vests for Non-Core drag on adjusted RoE of –4.02%Non-Core drag on adjusted RoE of –2.97%

Loan loss rate

10%2.5% of award vests for average annual loan loss rate of 70bpsAverage annual loan loss rate of 55bps or below

Balanced Scorecard

30%Performance against the Balanced Scorecard is assessed by the Committee to determine the percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 30%. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard has equal weighting. The targets within each of the 5Cs are deemed to be commercially sensitive. However, retrospective disclosure of the targets and performance against them will be made in the 2017 Remuneration report subject to commercial sensitivity no longer remaining.

Note

aNet generated equity is a metric which converts changes in the CET1 ratio into an absolute capital equivalent measure. For remuneration purposes, Net generated equity will exclude inorganic actions such as rights issues, as determined by the Committee.

Straight line vesting applies between the threshold and maximum points in respect of the financial and risk measures. The award is subject to a discretionary underpin by which the Committee must be satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Group. For Antony Jenkins, the resulting number of shares will then be pro-rated to his termination date.

Executive Directors: pension (audited)

Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria receive cash in lieu of pension. The 2015 cash in lieu of pension shown below for Jes Staley is for the period 1 December 2015 to 31 December 2015.

Antony Jenkins left the UK pension scheme in April 2012, and then started receiving cash in lieu of pension. He has benefits in both the final salary 1964 section and in the cash balance Afterwork section. The accrued pension shown below relates to his 1964 section pension only. The other pension entries relate to his benefits in both sections. Antony Jenkins ceased to be an executive Director on 16 July 2015. The 2015 cash in lieu of pension shown below is for the period 1 January 2015 to 16 July 2015.

      
 
 
 

 

Accrued
pension at
31 December
2015

£000

  
  
  
  

  

     
 
 
 
 
 
 
Increase in
value of
accrued
pension over
year net of
inflation
£000
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Normal
retirement

date

  
  

  

     
 
 
 
Pension value
in 2015 from
DB Scheme
£000
  
  
  
  
     
 
 
 
2015
Cash in lieu
of pension
£000
  
  
  
  
     
 
2015 Total
£000
  
  
 Antony Jenkins     4       0     11 July 2021       0       197       197  
 Tushar Morzaria                            200       200  
 Jes Staley                               33       33  

Executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 2016

The introduction of new deferral and LTIP requirements in the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook and EBA Guidelines will require some structural changes as to how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy will be implemented in 2016. It is therefore our intent to consult with shareholders over proposed changes once formulated. This section explains how the approved Directors’ remuneration policy would be implemented in 2016 under the current framework.

Jes StaleyTushar MorzariaComments
 SalaryFixed Pay  £1,200,0002,350,000  £800,0001,650,000  No change from 2015.2017.
 RBPPension  £1,150,000396,000  £750,000200,000  Delivered quarterly in shares subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years. No change from 2015.2017.
 PensionMaximum Bonus  33%80% of salaryTotal fixed paya  25%80% of salaryTotal fixed paya  Fixed cash allowance in lieu of participation in pension plan. No change from 2015.Total variable opportunity unchanged.

 Maximum bonus

80% of fixed pay

80% of fixed pay

Variable remuneration for the executive Directors is delivered through bonus and LTIP, both of which are currently deferred over three years. Variable remuneration for the 2016 performance year will be delivered in line with the requirements of the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook, including the vesting requirements. Awards under the LTIP will be delivered in shares. The performance and holding periods will be determined before the awards are made in Q1 2017. Vesting will be dependent on performance over the performance period and subject to a further holding period after vesting.
Maximum LTIP  120% of Total fixed paya  120% of Total fixed paya  
Bonus and LTIP combined for regulatory        
         

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  63deferral purposes.


Note

a Total Fixed Pay

The Directors’ remuneration policy sets out the policy on RBP for executive Directors. Following the EBA Guidelines, published in December 2015, and despite the formal power to reduce RBP in the Directors’ remuneration policy, the Committee has agreed, as they also did in 2015, that total fixed pay (salary and RBP elements) will not be reduced in 2016. The Committee will review the structure of RBP in light of the change in regulation and any changes will be reflected in the Directors’ remuneration policy which will be presented to shareholders for approval at the 2017 AGM.is defined as Fixed Pay plus Pension.

Clawback and malus

Clawback applies to any variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors on or after 1 January 2015. Barclays may apply clawback if at any time during the seven year period from the date on which any variable remuneration is awarded: (i) there is reasonable evidence of individual misbehaviour or material error, and/or (ii) the firm suffers a material failure of risk management, taking account of the individual’s proximity to and responsibility for, that incident. For variable remuneration awards granted to executive Directors in respect of 2016 onwards, the clawback period may be extended to 10 years in circumstances where the Company or a regulatory authority has commenced an investigation which could potentially lead to the application of clawback.

As set out in the Directors’ remuneration policy, malus provisions will continue to apply to unvested deferred awards.

Deferral

A seven year deferral period (with no vesting prior to the third anniversary of award, and vesting no faster than on a pro rata basis between the third and seventh year), will apply to any deferred variable remuneration awarded to the executive Directors in respect of the 2016 performance year onwards.

20162018 Annual bonus performance measures

Performance measures with appropriately stretching targets have been selected to cover a range of financial and non-financial goals that support the key strategic objectives of the Company. The performance measures and weightings are shown below.

 

Financial (50%(60% weighting)

 

§  Adjusted profit

Proffit before tax (20%excluding material items (40% weighting)

 

§  Adjusted costs (10% weighting)

Payout of this element will depend on the CET1 ratio during the performance year:

A performance target range

has been set for each financial measure.

measure.

 

§If CET1 goes below the expected end-state MDR hurdlea during the year, no part of this element will pay out
If CET1 goes below the end-state MDR hurdle + 150bps but remains above the hurdle during the period, the Committee will exercise its discretion to determine what portion of this element should pay out, based on the causes of the CET1 reduction
Cost: income ratio excluding material items (20% weighting)

.

Strategic/Non-financial (20%

Balanced Scorecard (35% weighting)

 

Progress towardsThe evaluation will focus on key performance measures from the fiveGroup Performance Measurement Framework, with a detailed retrospective narrative on progress during the year Balanced Scorecard targetsagainst each category. Performance against the Strategic/Non-financial measures will be assessed by the Committee atto determine the year end.percentage of the award that may vest between 0% and 20%. The measures are organised around three main categories: Customer and Client, Colleague and Citizenship. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard will havethree main categories has equal weighting

weighting.

Personal (15% weighting)

 

Measures will likely include, but will not be limited to, the following:

Customer and Client: NPS for consumer businesses, Client rankings and market shares for the Corporate and Investment Bank, complaints performance and volume of lending provided to customers and clients
Colleague: Diversity and Inclusion statistics (including women in senior leadership), Employee sustainable engagement survey scores and conduct and culture measures
Citizenship: Delivery against our Shared Growth Ambition, Colleague engagement in Citizenship activities and external benchmarks and surveys.
Personal (20% weighting)The executive Directors have the following joint personal objectives for 2016:

2018:
 

§  structure the business effectively, ensuring it is focused

deliver on a sustainable core proposition with a simpler performing portfolio, with the majority of restructuring completed in 2016

2018 financial goals such that we remain on track to achieve our returns targets
 

§  make significant progress in exiting Non-Core by

seek opportunities for further cost savings and optimise the end of 2016

capital allocation within the Group
 

§  deliver on financial commitments with particular focus on improvement in cost and productivity, as evidenced by an improved profit and a lower cost:income ratio

complete the Structural Reform programme successfully, ensuring the UK ring-fenced bank is fully operational
 

§

finalise the implementation plan for an effective Brexit outcome
continue to drive strategic initiatives to enhance growth in shareholder value in the medium term
manage risk and conductcontrol effectively and make significantcontinued progress in ensuring that legacy events are both resolved expediently and not repeated.

resolving outstanding conduct matters.
 

In addition, individual personal objectives for 20162018 are as follows:

Jes Staley:

 

§   implement the new management structure to support structural reform, including a new operating model designed to improve efficiency

Jes Staley:
 

§  make substantive progress towards a higher performing culture in line with our Values, while strengthening employee engagement at all levels

continue to strengthen the Bank’s cyber readiness, operational and financial controls
 

§  foster an externally focused

further improve customer and customer-centric culture.

client satisfaction, with a particular focus on reducing the number of overall complaints
as part of the ongoing succession planning for Group and Business Unit/Functional Executive Committees, continue the focus on improving the percentage of women in senior leader positions.
 Tushar Morzaria:
 

§   demonstrate effective management of external relationships and reputation

 

§continue to strengthen team performance (especially following the performance ethiccreation of the Group Service Company), talent base and employee engagement in Group Finance, Tax and Treasury while also improving productivity.

demonstrate effective management of external relationships and reputation.

Note

a The end-state MDR hurdle is currently expected to be 11.4%.

Detailed calibration of the Financial and Balanced Scorecard targets is commercially sensitive and it is not appropriate to disclose this information externally on a prospective basis. Disclosure of achievement against the targets will be made in the 20162018 Annual Report subject to the targets no longer being commercially sensitive. The Committee may exercise its discretion to amend the formulaic outcome of assessment against the targets. Any exercise of discretion will be disclosed and explained.

64  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Illustrative scenarios for executive Directors’ remuneration

The charts below show the potential value of the current executive Directors’ 20162018 total remuneration in three scenarios: ‘Minimum’ (i.e. fixed pay only)Fixed Pay, Pension and benefits), ‘Maximum’ (i.e. fixed payFixed Pay, Pension, benefits and the maximum variable pay that may be awarded) and ‘Mid-point’ (i.e. fixed payFixed Pay, Pension, benefits and 50% of the maximum variable pay that may be awarded). For the purposes of these charts, the value of benefits is based on an estimated annual value.value for 2018. The scenarios do not reflect share price movement between award and vesting. LTIP is included at face value; the amount received and included in the single total figure for remuneration will depend on performance over the performance period.

A significant proportion of the potential remuneration of the executive Directors is variable and is therefore performance related.performance-related. It is also subject to deferral, additional holding periods, malus and clawback.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    67


Total remuneration opportunity:Group Chief Executive (£000)

 

Total remuneration opportunity:Group Finance Director (£000)

LOGOLOGO

Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

LOGO

In the above illustrative scenarios, benefits include regular contractual benefits. Additional ad hoc benefits may arise, for example, overseas relocation of executive Directors, but will always be provided in line with the Directors’ remuneration policy.DRP.

Performance graph and table

The performance graph below illustrates the performance of Barclays over the financial years from 2009 to 20152017 in terms of total shareholder return compared with that of the companies comprising the FTSE 100 index. The index has been selected because it represents a cross-section of leading UK companies.

 

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  65


LOGO

In addition, the table below provides a summary of the total remuneration of the relevant Group Chief Executive over the same period as the previousabove graph. For the purpose of calculating the value of the remuneration of the Group Chief Executive, data has been collated on a basis consistent with the ‘single figure’ methodology.

The table also provides pay ratios of the Group Chief Executive’s total remuneration to average remuneration for UK employees and the Group Executive Committee (Group ExCo) respectively.

Year   2009     2010     2011      2012      2012      2013      2014     
2015 
  
   2015      2015   
Group Chief Executive   
 
John
Varley
  
  
   
 
John
Varley
  
  
   
 
Bob 
Diamond 
  
  
   
 
Bob 
Diamonda
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkinsb
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
   
 
Antony 
Jenkins 
  
  
  

 

Antony 

Jenkinsb

  

  

   

 

John 

McFarlanec

  

  

   
 
Jes 
Staleyd
  
  
Group Chief Executive single figure of total
remuneration £000s
   2,050     4,567     11,070e     1,892      529      1,602      5,467f    3,399     305      277   
Annual bonus against maximum
opportunity %
   0%     100%     80%      0%      0%      0%      57%     48%     N/A      N/A   
Long-term incentive vesting against
maximum opportunity %
   50%     16%     N/Af     0%      N/Ag     N/Ag     30%     39%     N/Ag     N/Ag  

Year  2009   2010   2011  2012      2013  2014      2015      2016  2017 
Group Chief Executive   
John
Varley
 
 
   
John
Varley
 
 
   
Bob
Diamond
 
 
  
Bob
Diamond
 
a 
  
Antony
Jenkins
 
b 
  
Antony
Jenkins
 
 
  
Antony
Jenkins
 
 
  

Antony

Jenkins

 

b 

  

John

McFarlane

 

c 

  
Jes
Staley
 
d 
  
Jes
Staley
 
 
  
Jes
Staley
 
 
Group Chief Executive single figure of total remuneration £000s   2,050    4,567    11,070e   1,892   529   1,602   5,467f   3,399   305   277   4,233   3,873 
Annual bonus against maximum opportunity %   0%    100%    80%   0%   0%   0%   57%   48%   N/A   N/A   60%   48.5% 
Long-term incentive vesting against maximum opportunity %   50%    16%    N/Ag   0%   N/Ag   N/Ag   30%   39%   N/Ag   N/Ag   N/Ag   N/Ag 
Ratio of single figure of total remuneration to:               
UK employee median   75 x    165 x    391 x   84 x    54 x   175 x    126 x    137 x   119 x 
UK employee mean   39 x    86 x    204 x   44 x       29 x   94 x       69 x       73 x   65 x 
Ratio of single figure of total remuneration to:               
Group ExCo median   0.5 x    1.0 x    2.4 x   1.2 x    0.4 x   2.2 x    1.6 x    1.1 x   1.0 x 
Group ExCo mean   0.3 x    0.5 x    1.3 x   0.8 x       0.4 x   2.0 x       1.3 x       1.1 x   0.7 x 

Notes

aBob Diamond left the Board on 3 July 2012.
bAntony Jenkins became Group Chief Executive on 30 August 2012 and left the Board on 16 July 2015.
cJohn McFarlane was Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015. His fees, which remained unchanged, have been pro-rated for his time in the position. He was not eligible to receive a bonus or LTIP.
dJes Staley became Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015.
eThis figure includes £5,745k tax equalisation as set out in the 2011 Remuneration report. Bob Diamond was tax equalised on tax above the UK rate where that could not be offset by a double tax treaty.
fAntony Jenkins’ 2014 pay is higher than in earlier years since he declined a bonus in 2012 and 2013 and did not have LTIP vesting in those years.
gNot a participant in a long-term incentive award which vested in the period.

As we focus on our fair pay agenda, we are publishing our CEO pay ratios two years in advance of the disclosure becoming a statutory requirement. The pay ratios compare amounts disclosed in the single total figure table for the Group Chief Executive to (a) the median and mean annual total compensation of all UK employees, and (b) the median and mean annual total compensation of the Group ExCo. Where there was more than one Group Chief Executive in a given year (2012 and 2015), the pay ratio references the sum of the Group Chief Executive single total figure for that year.

68    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


It is worth noting that the ratios can be volatile. This is a result of a number of factors, including the tenure of our Group Chief Executives and the variation in LTIP payouts (in some years, the Group Chief Executive may not be a participant in a vesting LTIP). Our current Group Chief Executive’s Fixed Pay is fixed for the duration of the current DRP, his 2017 bonus has reduced from 2016 and he has no LTIP vesting this year. This contrasts with the outcome for more junior populations where average fixed pay and average bonuses have increased between 2016 and 2017.

Percentage change in Group Chief Executive’s remuneration

The table below shows how the percentage change in the Group Chief Executive’s salary, benefits and bonus between 20142016 and 2015 compares2017 compared with the percentage change in the average of each of those components of pay for UK based employees.

 

    Salary     Role Based Pay                    Benefits        Annual bonus   
Group Chief Executivea   0.0%     0.0%      20.0%b  (15.6%) 
Average based on UK employeesc   3.0%     12.2%d    0.0%    (8.0%) 
    Fixed Pay                Benefits         Annual bonus 
Group Chief Executive   0%    -63.3%    -19.2% 
Average based on UK employeesa   3.3%    0.6%    1.2% 

NotesNote

aThe 2015 figures for the Group Chief Executive are based on former Group Chief Executive, Antony Jenkins, and are annualised in order to provide a meaningful comparison of the year on year change in remuneration for the Group Chief Executive and UK based employees.
bThe percentage change in benefits for the Group Chief Executive represents an increase in the cost to Barclays of existing benefits. There was no change in actual benefit provision to the former Group Chief Executive from 2014 to 2015.
cCertain populations were excluded to enable a meaningful like for like comparison.
dThe majority of the increase was due to the introduction of Role Based Pay to certain populations, including new MRTs required to comply with PRA/EBA requirements.

a Certain populations were excluded to enable a meaningful like for like comparison.

We have chosen UK based employees as the comparator group as it is the most representative group for pay structure comparisons.

Relative importance of spend on pay

A year on year comparison of the relative importance of payGroup compensation costs and distributions to shareholders is shown below. 2015 Group compensation costs have reduced by 6% and dividends to shareholders have increased 2% from 2014.

 

 Group Compensation Costs (£m) Dividends to Shareholders (£m)
LOGOLOGO

LOGO

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

The table below shows the number of employees in the Barclays Group as at 31 December 2016 and 2017 in bands by reference to total remuneration. Total remuneration comprises salary, RBP, other allowances, bonus and the value at award of LTIP awards.

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

    Number of employees 
                   2017                       2016                       2016 
Remuneration band       Constant
currency
   Actual 
£0 to £25,000   31,406    33,434    33,989 
£25,001 to £50,000   24,280    23,081    22,927 
£50,001 to £100,000   17,604    16,942    17,063 
£100,001 to £250,000   9,818    9,453    9,098 
£250,001 to £500,000   2,113    2,183    2,093 
£500,001 to £1,000,000   811    829    771 
£1,000,001 to £2,000,000   262    273    264 
£2,000,001 to £3,000,000   70    65    61 
£3,000,001 to £4,000,000   21    26    21 
£4,000,001 to £5,000,000   5    7    7 
£5,000,001 to £6,000,000   7    9    9 
Above £6,000,000   4    3    2 

Barclays is a global business. Of those employees earning above £1m in total remuneration for 2017 in the table above, 61% are based in the US, 32% in the UK, and 7% in the rest of the world.

The number of employees paid above £1m is down year on year on a constant currency basis (369 in 2017 vs. 383 in 2016).

 

66  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    69


 


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

    

 

Chairman and non-executive Directors

Remuneration for non-executive Directors reflects their responsibilities and time commitment and the level of fees paid to non-executive Directors of comparable major UK companies.

Chairman and non-executive Directors: Single total figure for 20152017 fees (audited)

      Fees       Benefits       Total  
      
 
2015
£000
  
  
     
 
2014
£000
  
  
     
 
2015
£000
  
  
     
 
2014
£000
  
  
     
 
2015
£000
  
  
     
 
2014
£000
  
  
Chairman                        
John McFarlanea     628              11              639         
Sir David Walkerb     285       750       6       19       291       769  
Non-executive Directors                        
Mike Ashley     207       213                     207       213  
Tim Breedon     232       240                     232       240  
Crawford Gilliesc     178       91                     178       91  
Reuben Jeffery III     135       160                     135       160  
Wendy Lucas-Bulld     358       367                     358       367  
Dambisa Moyo     152       151                     152       151  
Frits van Paasschen     88       80                     88       80  
Sir Michael Rakee     250       250                     250       250  
Diane de Saint Victor     135       135                     135       135  
Diane Schuenemanfk     74                            74         
Sir John Sunderlandg     60       190                     60       190  
Steve Thiekehk     184       131                     184       131  
Fulvio Contii            37                            37  
Simon Fraserj            47                            47  
Total     2,966       2,842       17       19       2,983       2,861  
      Fees     Benefits     Total 
      2017
                £000
     2016
                £000
     2017
                £000
     2016
                £000
     2017
                £000
     2016
                £000
 
Chairman                        
John McFarlane     800      800      2      1      802      801 
Non-executive Directors                        
Mike Ashley     215      207                  215      207 
Tim Breedon     225      220                  225      220 
Sir Ian Cheshirea     360                        360       
Mary Francisb     135      29                  135      29 
Crawford Gillies     195      195                  195      195 
Sir Gerry Grimstonec     375      250                  375      250 
Reuben Jeffery III     120      120                  120      120 
Matthew Lesterd     45                        45       
Dambisa Moyo     135      135                  135      135 
Diane de Saint Victore     38      118                  38      118 
Diane Schuenemanfg     308      232                  308      232 
Steve Thiekefh     87      221                  87      221 
Wendy Lucas-Bulli           64                        64 
Frits van Paasschenj           35                        35 
Total     3,038      2,626      2      1      3,040      2,627 

Non-executive Directors are reimbursed expenses that are incurred for business reasons. Any tax that arises on these reimbursed expenses is paid by Barclays.

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover and the use of a companyCompany vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

Notes

aJohn McFarlaneSir Ian Cheshire joined the Board as a non-executive Director and the Barclays UK Board as Chairman with effect from 3 April 2017. The 2017 figure includes fees of £300,000 for his role on the Barclays UK Board.
bMary Francis joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman from 24 April 2015. The total includes non-executive Director fees of £78,000 for the period from 1 January 2015 to 24 April 2015.
bSir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.October 2016.
cCrawford GilliesSir Gerry Grimstone joined the Board as a non-executive Director from 1 January 2016 succeeding Sir Michael Rake as Senior Independent Director and Deputy Chairman. He was appointed Chairman of the Barclays International Divisional Board on 1 August 2017. His Board Deputy Chairman fees were reduced to £150,000 with effect from this appointment. The 2017 figure includes fees of £167,000 for his role on the Barclays International Divisional Board.
dMatthew Lester joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 May 2014.September 2017.
deDiane de Saint Victor retired from the Board with effect from 10 May 2017.
fDiane Schueneman and Steve Thieke both served in 2016 on the US Governance Review Board and subsequently the board of the US intermediate holding company on its formation. The 20142016 figures include fees of $138,000 and $150,000 respectively for their roles on the US Governance Review Board and the board of the US intermediate holding company. In 2016, Steve Thieke also waived fees of $63,000. The 2017 figures include fees of $170,000 and $63,000 respectively for their role on the board of the US intermediate holding company. In 2017, Steve Thieke also waived fees of $34,000.
gDiane Schuneneman was appointed Chair of the Group Service Company Board on 1 September 2017. The 2017 figure has been updated toincludes fees of £41,000 for her role on the Group Service Company Board.
hSteve Thieke retired from the Board with effect from 10 May 2017.
iWendy Lucas-Bull retired from the Board with effect from 1 March 2016. 2016 figures include fees received by Wendy Lucas-Bull for her role as Chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The 2015 figure includes fees received by her in 2015 for that role.BAGL.
ejSir Michael RakeFrits van Paasschen retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
fDiane Schueneman joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
gSir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 2328 April 2015.
hSteve Thieke joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 7 January 2014.
iFulvio Conti retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
jSimon Fraser retired from the Board with effect from 24 April 2014.
kDiane Schueneman and Steve Thieke both served in 2015 on the US Governance Review Board, which is an advisory board set up as the forerunner of the board of our US intermediate holding company which will be established during 2016. The 2015 figures for Diane Schueneman and Steve Thieke include fees of $37,500 and $75,000 for these roles respectively.

Chairman and non-executive Directors: Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in 20162018

20162018 fees, subject to annual review in line with policy, for the Chairman and non-executive Directors are shown below.

 

   
 
1 January 2016  
£000  
  
  
   
 
1 January 2015
£000
  
  
   
 
Percentage
Increase
  
  
  1 January 2018
£000
   1 January 2017
£000
 
Chairmana   800b     750          800    800 
Deputy Chairmana   250       250     0  
Board member   80       80     0  
Deputy Chairmanb   250    250 
Board memberc   80    80 
Additional responsibilities          
Senior Independent Director   30       30     0     30    30 
Chairman of Board Audit or Board Remuneration Committee   70       70     0     70    70 
Chairman of Board Risk Committee   60       60     0     70    70 
Chairman of Board Reputation Committee   50       50     0     50    50 
Membership of Board Audit or Board Remuneration Committee   30       30     0     30    30 
Membership of Board Reputation or Board Risk Committee   25       25     0     25    25 
Membership of Board Nominations Committee   15       15     0     15    15 

Notes

aThe Chairman and Deputy Chairman dodoes not receive any other additional responsibility fees in addition to the Chairman and Deputy Chairman fees respectively.fees.
bJohn McFarlaneThe Deputy Chairman does not receive any additional fees in respect of being a member or Chairman of Board Committees or for his role as Senior Independent Director. The current Deputy Chairman’s fees have been reduced to £150,000 with effect from his appointment as Chairman of the Barclays International Divisional Board.
cThe basic Board member fee payable to non-executive Directors was appointed Chairman on 24 April 2015 on fees of £800,000.last increased in May 2011.

 

70    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  67


    

    

 

Payments to former Directors

Former Group Chief Executive: Antony Jenkins

Antony Jenkins ceased to be Group Chief Executive on 16 July 2015. In accordance with his contractual entitlements, Antony Jenkins will receive base salary, RBP, benefits and pension until 7 July 2016 (the Termination Date). These payments are being made in instalments and are subject to mitigation in the event that Antony Jenkins brings his termination date forward.

The Committee carefully considered the circumstances of Antony Jenkins’ departure, taking into account his contribution in bringing the Group to a much stronger position during a difficult period for the Group. Against that background, the Committee agreed to exercise its discretion to treat Antony Jenkins as an eligible leaver for the purposes of his variable pay in accordance with the Directors’ remuneration policy approved by shareholders at the 2014 AGM. The Committee agreed that:

§Antony Jenkins would remain eligible for an annual bonus in respect of 2015, pro-rated to 16 July 2015

§Antony Jenkins’ 260,355 deferred shares will be considered for release in full on the scheduled release dates. After release, the shares will be subject to an additional 6 month holding period

§the unvested LTIP awards granted to Antony Jenkins in 2014 and 2015 will be considered for release on the scheduled release dates subject to achievement of the applicable performance measures and time pro-rated to the Termination Date. The maximum number of shares (subject to the achievement of the applicable performance measures) after reduction for time pro-rating are LTIP 2014-2016: 1,418,805 shares and LTIP 2015-2017: 475,937 shares. After vesting, the shares will be subject to an additional two year holding period

§all outstanding unvested deferred awards are subject to malus provisions

The Company has paid £106k in respect of outplacement services and legal costs in connection with Antony Jenkins’ termination of employment in line with the approved Directors’ remuneration policy on terminations.

Former Group Finance Director: Chris Lucas

In 2015,2017, Chris Lucas continued to be eligible to receive life assurance cover, private medical cover and payments under the Executive Income Protection Plan (EIPP). Full details of his eligibility under the EIPP were disclosed in the 2013 Directors’ Remuneration report (page 91 of 2013 Form 20-F).report. Chris Lucas did not receive any other payment or benefit in 2015.2017.

Other policy information

Outside appointments

During the period while he was Executive Chairman, John McFarlane retained fees in respect of external directorships at Westfield Corporation Limited of $62k and at Old Oak Holdings Limited of £37k.

Directors’ shareholdings and share interests

Executive Directors’ shareholdings and share interests

The chart below shows the value of Barclays’ shares held beneficially by Jes Staley and Tushar Morzaria as at 2619 February 20162018 that count towards the shareholding requirement of, as a minimum, Barclays’ shares worth four times salary.200% of Total fixed pay (i.e. Fixed Pay plus Pension). The current executive Directors have five years from their respective date of appointment to meet this requirement. At close of business on 2619 February 2016,2018, the market value of BarclaysBarclays’ ordinary shares was £1.6910.

Jes Staley (£000)

LOGO

Tushar Morzaria (£000)

LOGO

£2.01.

 

68  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-FJes Staley (£000)Tushar Morzaria (£000)
Requirement£5,492Requirement£3,700
Actual£9,132 Actual£4,354 
  


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

Interests in Barclays PLC shares

The table below shows shares owned beneficially by all the Directors and shares over which executive Directors hold awards which are subject to either deferral terms and/or performance measures. The shares shown below that are subject to performance measures are based on the maximum number of shares that may be released (before pro-rating for Antony Jenkins).

Interests in Barclays PLC shares (audited)released.

 

                   
 

 

Total as at
31 December

2015 (or date

  
  

  

     
     Unvested      
    Owned outright     
 
 
Subject to
performance
measures
  
  
  
   
 
 
Not subject to
performance
measures
  
  
  
   
 
 
of retirement
from the Board,
if earlier)
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total as at
26 February
2016
  
  
  
Executive Directors          
Antony Jenkinsa   5,540,236     4,579,983     260,355     10,380,574       
Tushar Morzaria   931,310     2,204,213     741,829     3,877,352     3,877,352  
Jes Staleyb   2,812,997          896,450     3,709,447     3,709,447  
Chairman          
John McFarlanec   11,995               11,995     11,995  
Sir David Walkerd   151,455               151,455       
Non-executive Directors          
Mike Ashley   23,547               23,547     23,547  
Tim Breedon   19,196               19,196     19,196  
Crawford Gillies   58,856               58,856     58,856  
Reuben Jeffery III   184,988               184,988     184,988  
Wendy Lucas-Bull   14,672               14,672     14,672  
Dambisa Moyo   40,696               40,696     40,696  
Frits van Paasschen   17,184               17,184     17,184  
Sir Michael Rakee   75,670               75,670       
Diane de Saint Victor   21,579               21,579     21,579  
Diane Schuenemanf   2,000               2,000     2,000  
Sir John Sunderlandg   139,081               139,081       
Steve Thieke   23,123               23,123     23,123  
Sir Gerry Grimstoneh                       97,045  
         Unvested   Total as at      
    Owned outright   Subject to
performance
measures
   Not subject to
performance
measures
   

31 December

2017 (or date

of retirement

from the Board,

if earlier)

   

Total as at

19 February

2018

 
Executive Directors          
Jes Staley   4,543,088    3,172,878    492,782    8,208,748    8,208,748 
Tushar Morzaria   2,166,204    1,685,955    398,406    4,250,565    4,250,565 
Chairman          
John McFarlane   72,043            72,043    72,043 
Non-executive Directors          
Mike Ashley   73,517            73,517    73,517 
Tim Breedon   37,124            37,124    37,124 
Sir Ian Cheshirea   82,851            82,851    82,851 
Mary Francis   14,099            14,099    14,099 
Crawford Gillies   77,796            77,796    77,796 
Sir Gerry Grimstone   110,972            110,972    110,972 
Reuben Jeffery III   211,189            211,189    211,189 
Matthew Lesterb   10,000            10,000    10,000 
Dambisa Moyo   59,036            59,036    59,036 
Diane de Saint Victorc   42,823            42,823     
Diane Schueneman   27,255            27,255    27,255 
Steve Thieked   59,724            59,724     
Mike Turnere                    

Notes

aAntony Jenkins leftSir Ian Cheshire joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 16 July 2015.3 April 2017.
bJes StaleyMatthew Lester joined the Board as Group Chief Executivea non-executive Director with effect from 1 December 2015.September 2017.
cJohn McFarlaneDiane de Saint Victor retired from the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 10 May 2017.
dSteve Thieke retired from the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 10 May 2017.
eMike Turner joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 1 January 2015 and as Chairman with effect from 24 April 2015. He was Executive Chairman from 17 July 2015 to 30 November 2015.2018.
dSir David Walker retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
eSir Michael Rake retired from the Board with effect from 31 December 2015.
fDiane Schueneman joined the Board as a non-executive Director with effect from 25 June 2015.
gSir John Sunderland retired from the Board with effect from 23 April 2015.
hSir Gerry Grimstone joined the Board as Senior Independent Director and Deputy Chairman with effect from 1 January 2016. On appointment, he held 97,045 Barclays PLC shares.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  69    71


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

    

 

Barclays Board Remuneration Committee

The Board Remuneration Committee is responsible for overseeing Barclays’ remuneration as described in more detail below.

Terms of Reference

The role of the Committee is to:

 

§ set the overarching principles and parameters of remuneration policy across the Group;Group

 

§ consider and approve the remuneration arrangements of (i) the Chairman, (ii) the executive Directors, (iii) members of the Barclays Group Executive Committee and any other senior executives specified by the Committee from time to time, and those(iv) all other Group employees whose total annual compensation exceeds an amount determined by the Committee from time to time (currently £2m or more)£2m)

 

§ exercise oversight for remuneration issues.

The Committee considers all aspects of the design and operation of remuneration policy to ensure a coherent approach is taken in respect of all employees. In discharging this responsibility the Committee seeks to ensure that the policy assesses, among other things, the impact of pay arrangements on culture and all elements of risk management. The Committee also considersapproves incentive pools for all major businesses and approves buy-outs of forfeited rights for new hires of £2m or more, and packages on termination where the total discretionary value is £1m or more. Itfunctions, reviews the policy relating to all remuneration plans including pensions,design and provision of retirement benefits, and considers and approves measures designed to promote the alignment of the interests of shareholders and employees. ItThe Committee and its members work as necessary with other Board Committees, and is also responsible for the selectionauthorised to select and appointment ofappoint its independent remuneration adviser.own advisers as required.

The Terms of Reference can be found at home.barclays/corporategovernance or from the Company Secretary on request.

Chairman and members

The Chairman and members of the Committee are as follows:

 

§ Crawford Gillies, Committee member since 1 May 2014 and Chairman since 24 April 2015

 

§ Tim Breedon, Committee member since 1 December 2012

 

§ Steve Thieke,Mary Francis, Committee member since 6 February 20141 November 2016

 

§ Dambisa Moyo, Committee member since 1 September 2015

Former Chairman and members

Members who left the Committee during 2015 were as follows:

§Sir John Sunderland, Committee member since 1 July 2005 and Committee Chairman from 24 July 2012 to 23 April 2015

§Sir David Walker, Committee member from 1 September 2012 to 23 April 20152015.

All current members are considered independent by the Board.

Remuneration Committee attendance in 20152017

    
 
Number of meetings
eligible to attend
  
  
   
 
Number of
                meetings attended
  
 
Crawford Gillies   7     7  
Tim Breedon   7     7  
Steve Thieke   7     7  
Dambisa Moyo   4     4  
Sir John Sunderland   1     1  
Sir David Walker   1     1  
Meetings attended/eligible to attend
Crawford Gillies7/7
Tim Breedon7/7
Mary Francis7/7
Dambisa Moyo7/7

The performance of the Committee is reviewed each year as part of the Board Effectiveness Review. The December 2015results of the January 2018 review were positive and concluded that Board members have confidence in the effectivenessCommittee is composed of the Committee.right level of experience and skills. Full details of the Board Effectiveness reviewReview can be found on pages 33 and 34.page 36.

Advisers to the Remuneration Committee

During 2015,Between February 2016 and September 2017, the Board Remuneration Committee did not engage an independent adviser.

PricewaterhouseCoopers (PwC) was appointed as the independent adviser to the Committee in October 2017. Prior to the appointment of KPMG as auditors on 31 March 2017 (and formally approved at the 2017 AGM in May 2017), PwC was advised by Towers Watson (now known as Willis Towers Watson.the Group’s external auditor. The Committee is satisfied that the advice provided by Towers WatsonPwC to the Committee is independent. Towers Watsonindependent and objective. PwC is a signatory to, and its appointment as adviser to the Committee is conditional on adherence to the voluntary UK Code of Conduct for executive remuneration consultants.

Throughout 2017, Willis Towers Watson’s work in 2015 included advisingWatson continued to provide the Committee and providing the latestwith market data on compensation and trends when considering incentive levels and remuneration packages. A representative from

PwC and Willis Towers Watson attends Committee meetings. When requested by the Committee, Towers Watson is available to advise and meet with the Committee members separate from management.

Fees for Committee work are charged on a time/cost basis and Towers Watson waswere paid a total of £195,000£78,000 in aggregate (excluding VAT) in fees for itstheir advice to the Committee in 20152017 relating to the executive Directors (either exclusively or along with other employees within the Committee’s Terms of Reference).

Towers Watson provides pensionsIn addition to advising the Committee, PwC provided unrelated consulting advice advice on health and benefits provision, assistance and technology support for employee surveys and performance management, and remuneration data to the Group. Towers Watson also provides pensions adviceGroup in respect of corporate taxation, climate-related financial disclosures, data strategy, technology consulting and administration services to the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

The Committee regularly reviews the objectivity and independence of the advice it receives from Towers Watson.internal audit.

In the course of its deliberations, the Committee also considers the views of the Group Chief Executive, the Group Human Resources Director and the Group Reward and Performance Director. The Group Finance Director and the Chief Risk Officer provide regular updates on Group and business financial performance and the Group’s risk profile respectively.

No Barclays‘Barclays’ employee or Director participates in discussions with, or decisions of, the Committee relating to his or her own remuneration. No other advisers provided significant services to the Committee in the year.

 

70  |  72    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration report

Annual report on Directors’ remuneration

    

    

 

Remuneration Committee activities in 20152017

The following provides a summary of the Committee’s activities during 20152017 and at the January and February 20162018 meetings when 2015at which 2017 remuneration decisions were finalised.

 

Meeting Fixed and variable pay issues Governance, risk and other mattersa
January 2017

February 2015◾   

 2016 incentive funding proposals including risk adjustments

§◾   

 2016 bonus proposals for senior executives

   

Barclays deferral approach
February 2017

◾   

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 20152017 fixed pay

◾   

 Approved 2016 Remuneration report

§

§

§

§◾   

 

Risk adjustment and malus review

Approved 2014 Remuneration report

Review of 2014 reward communications strategy

Finance and Risk updates

Committee effectiveness
 

§◾   

 

Approved 20152017 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

 
 

§◾   

 

Approved group salary and RBPGroup fixed pay budgets for 2015

2017
 
 

§◾   

 

Approved final 20142016 incentive funding

including risk adjustments
 
  

§◾   

 

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 20142016 bonuses and 20152017-2019 LTIP awards for executive Directors

April 2017

 

    

May 2015

§ 

2015 early incentive funding projections◾   

 

Consideration of whistleblowing event

§

May 2017

◾   

 

Non-executive Directors’ fees for subsidiary boards

Consideration of the outcomes of the 2014 Board Committees’ effectiveness review

July 2017

◾   

Incentive funding approach

◾   

Structural Reform update

◾   

2017 ex ante risk adjustment methodology

◾   

Gender Pay Gap reporting
   

§◾   

 

Update on EBA consultation on draft revised remuneration guidelines

§

Employee compensation adjustment review

Annual all employee share plans update
      

§◾   

 

Non-executive Directors’ fees for subsidiary boards

Barclays’ remuneration approach review

October 2017

◾   

2017 incentive funding projections including risk adjustments

◾   

US benefits arrangements

◾   

Annual review of Group Chairman’s remuneration

 

July 2015◾   

BAGL – approach for 2017 pay round

December 2017

◾   

Initial considerations on executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2017 bonuses and 2018 fixed pay and bonus approach

◾   

Review of Committee activity, Terms of Reference and Control Framework

◾   

2018 LTIP performance measures  
 

§◾   

 

Review of Committee activity and Terms of Reference

2017 incentive funding proposals including risk adjustments  

§

Consideration of process for appointment of Committee’s independent adviser from April 2016

§

Update on July 2014 PRA consultation and resulting changes to the Remuneration part of the PRA Rulebook

§

Scope of remuneration philosophy review

§

Employee compensation adjustment review

October 2015

§

Approved Jes Staley’s remuneration arrangements

§

Remuneration philosophy review

(Two meetings)

November 2015

§

2015 incentive funding projections

§

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

§

2016 LTIP performance measures

§

Updates on headcount and attrition

§

2015 payround shareholder engagement planning

§

Employee compensation adjustment review

December 2015

§

Initial considerations on senior executives’ 2016 fixed pay

§

Review of draft 2015 Remuneration report

§

2015 incentive funding proposals and initial proposals for senior executives’ 2015 bonuses

§

§

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

Updates on headcount and attrition

January 2016

§

2015 incentive funding proposals

§

Finance and Risk updates

February 2016

(Two meetings)

§

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2016 fixed pay

§

§

§

§

Approved 2015 Remuneration report

Finance and Risk updates including ex ante risk adjustment

Appointment of Committee independent adviser

Updates on headcount and attrition

§

Approved 2016 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

§

Approved Group fixed pay budgets for 2016

§

Approved final 2015 incentive funding

  

§◾   

 

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2015 bonuses and 2016 LTIP awards for executive Directorschanges to deferral plans

 

    
January 2018

◾   

2017 incentive funding proposals including risk adjustments

◾   

Non-executive Directors’ fees for subsidiary boards

◾   

2017 bonus proposals for senior executives

February 2018

◾   

Approved executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2018 fixed pay

◾   

Approved 2017 Remuneration report

◾   

Review of Committee effectiveness

◾   

Approved 2018 executive Directors’ annual bonus performance measures

◾   

Group fixed pay budgets for 2018

◾   

Approved final 2017 incentive funding including risk adjustments

◾   

Approved proposals for executive Directors’ and senior executives’ 2017 bonuses and 2018-2020 LTIP awards for executive Directors

Regular items: market and stakeholder updates including PRA/FCA, US Federal Reserve and other regulatory matters; updates fromNote

aThe Committee is also provided with updates at each scheduled meeting on: regulatory and stakeholder matters, Finance and Risk, Remuneration Review Panel meetings, operation of the Committee’s Control Framework on hiring, retention and termination, headcount and employee attrition, and extant LTIP performance.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    73


Governance: Remuneration Review Panel meetings; operation of the Committee’s Control Framework on hiring, retention and termination; and LTIP performance updates.report

Statement of shareholder voting at Annual General Meeting

The table below shows the voting result in respect of our remuneration arrangements at the AGM held on 23 April 2015 and the last policy vote at10 May 2017:

   

For

% of

votes cast
Number

   

Against

% of

votes cast
Number

   Withheld
Number
 
Advisory vote on the 2016 Remuneration report   97.22%    2.78%   
    11,879,285,601    339,664,546    152,439,545 
Binding vote on the Directors’ remuneration policy   97.91%    2.09%   
    12,062,616,141    257,416,828    51,369,054 

At the AGM held on 24 April 2014:

   For

% of

votes cast

Number

  Against

% of

votes cast

Number

  Withheld

Number

Advisory vote on the 2014 Remuneration report  97.50%  2.50%  
   11,385,216,004          291,926,107          63,613,057        

Binding vote on the Directors’ remuneration policy

  93.21%  6.79%  
   9,936,116,114  723,914,712  154,598,278
2014, shareholders of Barclays PLC voted 96.02% (10,364,453,159 votes) for the resolution in respect of a fixed to variable remuneration ratio of 1:2 for ‘Remuneration Code Staff’ (now known as MRTs). On 14 December 2017, the Board of Barclays PLC as shareholder of Barclays Bank PLC approved the resolution that Barclays Bank PLC and any of its current and future subsidiaries be authorised to apply a ratio of the fixed to variable components of total remuneration that exceeds 1:1, provided the ratio does not exceed 1:2.

 

74    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  71


Governance: Remuneration report

Additional remuneration disclosures

This section contains voluntary disclosures about levels of remuneration for our eight most highly paid senior executive officers and levels of remuneration of employees in the Barclays Group.

2015 total remuneration of the eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level

The table below shows remuneration for the eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level who were Key Management Personnel in 2015.

Eight highest paid senior executive officers below Board level

    

 
 

1

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

2

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

3

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

4

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

5

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

6

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

7

2015
£000

  

  
  

   

 
 

8

2015
£000

  

  
  

Fixed Pay (salary and RBP)   3,150     1,500     1,700     1,300     2,050     1,192     878     661  
Current year cash bonus        600     320     320     100     140     180     204  
Current year share bonus        600     320     320     100     140     180     204  
Deferred cash bonus   3,150     900     480     480     150     210     270     306  
Deferred share bonus   3,150     900     480     480     150     210     270     306  
Total remuneration   9,450     4,500     3,300     2,900     2,550     1,892     1,778     1,681  

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

The table below shows the number of employees in the Barclays Group in 2014 and 2015 in bands by reference to total remuneration. Total remuneration comprises salary, RBP, other allowances, bonus and the value at award of LTIP awards.

Total remuneration of the employees in the Barclays Group

    Number of employees  
Remuneration band                                2015                                  2014  
£0 to £25,000   71,886     72,262  
£25,001 to £50,000   31,804     33,760  
£50,001 to £100,000   21,196     20,491  
£100,001 to £250,000   9,903     9,000  
£250,001 to £500,000   2,266     2,323  
£500,001 to £1,000,000   761     871  
£1,000,001 to £2,500,000   268     301  
£2,500,001 to £5,000,000   50     55  
Above £5m   5     3  

Barclays is a global business. Of those employees earning above £1m in total remuneration for 2015 in the table above, 55% are based in the US, 34% in the UK, and 11% in the rest of the world.

The number of employees paid above £1m has reduced from 359 in 2014 to 323 in 2015.

72  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Governance: Remuneration reportRisk review

Additional remuneration disclosuresContents

    

    

Outstanding share plan and long-term incentive plan awards (audited)

 

Plan   
 
 
Number of shares under
award at 1 January
2015 (maximum)
  
  
  
   
 
 
Number of shares
awarded in year
(maximum)
  
  
  
   
 
Market price
on award date
  
  
   
 
Number of shares
released
  
  
   
 
Market price
on release date
  
  
Antony Jenkins          
Barclays LTIP 2012-2014   1,139,217          £1.81     332,286     £2.67  
Barclays LTIP 2012-2014   1,371,280          £1.86     400,030     £2.67  
Barclays LTIP 2013-2015   1,545,995          £3.06            
Barclays LTIP 2014-2016   1,891,740          £2.31            
Barclays LTIP 2015-2017        1,142,248     £2.54            
Share Value Plan 2012   332,377          £2.53     332,377     £2.54  
Share Value Plan 2012   1,079,970          £1.86     1,079,970     £2.54  
Share Value Plan 2015        260,355     £2.54            
Tushar Morzaria          
Barclays LTIP 2014-2016   1,375,811          £2.31            
Barclays LTIP 2015-2017        828,402     £2.54            
Share Value Plan 2013   733,877          £2.51     411,437     £2.54  
Share Value Plan 2014   309,557          £2.31     103,185     £2.54  
Share Value Plan 2015        213,017     £2.54            
Jes Staley          
Share Value Plan 2015        896,450     £2.34            

 

The interests shown in the table above are the maximum number of Barclays’ shares that may be received under each plan (before pro-rating for Antony Jenkins). Executive Directors do not pay for any share plan or long-term incentive plan awards. Antony Jenkins received 178,527 dividend shares from Share Value Plan (SVP) and LTIP awards and Tushar Morzaria received 19,669 dividend shares from SVP awards released in 2015.

 

The SVP 2015 award granted to Jes Staley was made in respect of awards he forfeited as a result of accepting employment at Barclays. This award was made in line with the Barclays’ recruitment policy and was made on no more favourable terms than those forfeited awards.

 

Outstanding Cash Value Plan (CVP) awards (audited)

   

   

  

Plan             
 
 

 

Value under award at
1 January 2015
(maximum)

£000

  
  
  

  

   
 
Value paid in year
£000
  
  
   
 

 

 

Value under award at
31 December 2015

((maximum)

£000

  
  

  

  

Antony Jenkins          
Cash Value Plan 2012             750     750       

A ‘service credit’ was added, on the final vesting date, to the third and final vesting amount which, for the award shown, was 10% of the original award amount. Antony Jenkins received the CVP award as part of his 2011 bonus, which was awarded in respect of performance in his role as CEO of Retail and Business Banking.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  73


     Number of shares lapsed in 2015    

Number of shares under award at 31 December 2015

(maximum)

    

Value of release

£000

    

End of performance period

or first scheduled release date

    

Last scheduled

release date

    806,931        887        
    971,250        1,068        
        1,545,995        31/12/2015    14/03/2016
        1,891,740        31/12/2016    06/03/2017
        1,142,248        31/12/2017    05/03/2018
            844        
            2,743        
        260,355        14/03/2016    05/03/2018
        1,375,811        31/12/2016    06/03/2017
        828,402        31/12/2017    05/03/2018
        322,440    1,045    17/03/2014    05/03/2018
        206,372    262    16/03/2015    06/03/2017
        213,017        14/03/2016    05/03/2018
         896,450        14/03/2016    14/03/2016

74  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Barclays’ forward looking remuneration policy for Directors was approved at the 2014 AGM held on 24 April 2014 and applies for three years from that date. The full policy can be found on pages 76 to 86 of the 2013 Form20-F or at home.barclays/annualreport.

This section sets out an abridged version of the Directors’ remuneration policy and is provided for information only.

This remuneration policy sets out the framework for how the Committee’s remuneration strategy will be executed for the Directors over the three years beginning on the date of the 2014 AGM. This is to be achieved by having a remuneration policy that seeks to:

§provide an appropriate and competitive mix of fixed and variable pay which, through its short and long-term components, incentivises management and is aligned to shareholders;

§provide direct line of sight with Barclays’ strategy through the incentive programmes; and

§comply with and adapt to the changing regulatory landscape.

Remuneration policy for executive Directors

 

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

A. Fixed pay

Salary

To reward skills and experience appropriate for the role and provide the basis for a competitive remuneration package

Salaries are determined with reference to market practice and market data (on which the Committee receives independent advice), and reflect individual experience and role.

Executive Directors’ salaries are benchmarked against comparable roles in the following banks: Bank of America, BBVA, BNP Paribas, Citigroup, Credit Suisse, Deutsche Bank, HSBC, JP Morgan, Lloyds, Morgan Stanley, RBS, Santander, Société Générale, Standard Chartered and UBS. The Committee may amend the list of comparator companies to ensure it remains relevant to Barclays or if circumstances make this necessary (for example, as a result of takeovers or mergers).

Salaries are reviewed annually and any changes are effective from 1 April in the financial year.

Salaries for executive Directors are set at a point within the benchmark range determined by the Committee taking into account their experience and performance. Increases for the current executive Directors over the policy period will be no more than local market employee increases other than in exceptional circumstances where the Committee judges that an increase is needed to bring an executive Director’s salary into line with that of our competitors. In such circumstances Barclays would consult with its major shareholders.

Role Based Pay

To enable competitive remuneration opportunity in recognition of the breadth and depth of the role

Paid quarterly in shares which are subject to a holding period with restrictions lifting over five years (20% each year). As the executive Directors beneficially own the shares, they will be entitled to any dividends paid on those shares.

RBP will be reviewed and fixed annually and may be reduced or increased in certain circumstances. Any changes are effective from 1 January in the relevant financial year.

 

 

The maximum RBP for executive Directorsmanagement of risk is set at £950,000 fora critical underpinning to the

execution of Barclays’ strategy. The material risks and

uncertainties the Group Chief Executive, Antony Jenkins,faces across its business and £750,000 for the Group Finance Director, Tushar Morzaria. It is not pensionable (except where required under local law). These amounts may be reduced but

portfolios are at the maxima and may not be increased above this level.

There are no performance measures.key areas of management focus.

 

Pension

To enable executive Directors to build long-term retirement savings

 

Executive Directors receive an annual cash allowance in lieu of participation in a pension arrangement.

The maximum annual cash allowance is 33% of salary for the Group Chief Executive and 25% of salary for the Group Finance Director and any other executive Director.

Benefits

To provide a competitive and cost effective benefits package appropriate to role and location

Executive Directors’ benefits provision includes private medical cover, annual health check, life and ill health income protection, tax advice, car cash allowance, and use of a company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.LOGO

    

Additional benefits may be offered that are minor in nature or are normal market practice in a country to which an executive Director relocates or from which an executive Director is recruited.

    

In addition to the above, if an executive Director were to relocate, additional support would be provided for a defined and limited period of time in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including provision of temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights. Barclays will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay the tax on his or her other employment income.

    

 

The maximum valueFor a more detailed breakdown of the benefit is determined by the nature of the benefit itself and costs of provision may depend on external factors, e.g. insurance costs.

our Risk Management approach please see pages 301 to 361.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  75


Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

 

Element and purposeRisk management  Operation  Maximum value and performance measuresAnnual Report

Overview of Barclays’ approach to risk

B. Variable Pay   Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)

77
management. A detailed overview together

   Principal Risks

77
with more specific information on policies

   Risk Appetite for the Principal Risks

77
that the Group determines to be of particular

   Roles and responsibilities in the management of risk

77
significance in the current operating

   Barclays’ Risk Culture

78
environment can be found in Barclays PLC
Pillar 3 Report 2017 or at Barclays.com.      

Annual bonus

To reward delivery of short-term financial targets set each year, the individual performance of the executive Directors in achieving those targets, and their contribution to delivering Barclays’ strategic objectives

While financial objectives are important, the Balanced Scorecard (which also includes Group financial targets) plays a significant role in bonus determination, to ensure alignment with Barclays’ strategy

Deferred bonuses encourage long-term focus and retention. Delivery substantially or fully in shares with a holding period increases alignment with shareholders. Deferred bonuses are granted by the Committee (or an authorised sub-committee) at its discretion, subject to the relevant plan rules

Determination of annual bonus

Individual bonuses are discretionary and decisions are based on the Committee’s judgement of executive Directors’ performance in the year, measured against Group and personal objectives.

Delivery structure

Executive Directors are Code Staff and their bonuses are therefore subject to deferral of at least the level applicable to all Code Staff, currently 40% (for bonuses of no more than £500,000) or 60% (for bonuses of more than £500,000). The Committee may choose to defer a greater proportion of any bonus awarded to an executive Director than the minimum required by the PRA Remuneration Code. At least half the non-deferred bonus is delivered in shares or share-linked instruments.

Deferred bonuses for executive Directors may be delivered in a combination of shares or other deferral instruments.

Participants may, at the Committee’s discretion, also receive the benefit of any dividends paid between the award date and the relevant release date in the form of dividend shares.

Operation of risk and conduct adjustment and malus

Any bonus awarded will reflect appropriate reductions made to incentive pools in relation to risk events. Individual bonus decisions may also reflect appropriate reductions in relation to specific risk and conduct events.

All unvested deferred bonuses are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil) for any reason. These include, but are not limited to:

§  A participant deliberately misleading Barclays, the market and/or shareholders in relation to the financial performance of the Barclays Group

§  A participant causing harm to Barclays’ reputation or where his/her actions have amounted to misconduct, incompetence or negligence

§  A material restatement of the financial statements of the Barclays Group or the Group or any business unit suffering a material down turn in its financial performance

§  A material failure of risk management in the Barclays Group

§  A significant deterioration in the financial health of the Barclays Group

Timing of receipt

Non-deferred cash components of any bonus are paid following the performance year to which they relate, normally in February. Non-deferred share bonuses are awarded normally in March and are subject to a six-month holding period.

Deferred share bonuses normally vest in three equal portions over a minimum three-year period, subject to the provisions of the plan rules including continued employment and the malus provisions (as explained above). Should the deferred awards vest, the shares are subject to an additional six-month holding period (after payment of tax).

The maximum annual bonus opportunity is 80% of fixed pay.

The performance measures by which any executive Director bonuses are assessed include Group, business and personal measures, both financial and non-financial. Financial measures may include, but are not restricted to such measures as net income, adjusted profit before tax, return on equity, CET1 ratio and return on risk weighted assets. Non-financial measures are based on the Balanced Scorecard. Personal objectives may include key initiatives relating to the role of the Director or in support of Barclays’ strategic objectives. The Balanced Scorecard may be updated from time to time in line with the Group’s strategy. In making its assessment of any bonus, the Committee will consider financial factors to guide 50% of the bonus opportunity, the Balanced Scorecard 35%, and personal objectives 15%. Any bonus is discretionary and any amount may be awarded from zero to the maximum value.

76  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

B. Variable Pay continued

Long Term Incentive Plan (LTIP) award

To reward execution of Barclays’ strategy and growth in shareholder value over a multi-year period

Long-term performance measurement, holding periods and the malus provisions discourage excessive risk-taking and inappropriate behaviours, encourage a long-term view and align executive Directors’ interests with those of shareholders

Performance measures balance incentivising management to deliver strong risk-adjusted financial returns, and delivery of strategic progress as measured by the Balanced Scorecard. Delivery in shares with a further two-year holding period increases alignment with shareholders

Determination of LTIP award

LTIP awards are made by the Committee following discussion of recommendations made by the Chairman (for the Group Chief Executive’s LTIP award) and by the Group Chief Executive (for other executive Directors’ LTIP awards).

Delivery structure

LTIP awards are granted subject to the plan rules and are satisfied in Barclays’ shares (although they may be satisfied in other instruments as may be required by regulation).

For each award, performance measures are set at grant and there is no retesting allowed of those conditions. The Committee has, within the parameters set out opposite, the flexibility to vary the weighting of performance measures and calibration for each award prior to its grant.

The Committee has discretion, and in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in exceptional circumstances to amend targets, measures, or number of awards if an event happens (for example, a major transaction) that, in the opinion of the Committee, causes the original targets or measures to be no longer appropriate or such adjustment to be reasonable. The Committee also has the discretion to reduce the vesting of any award if it deems that the outcome is not consistent with performance delivered, including to zero.

Participants may, at the Committee’s discretion, also receive the benefit of any dividends paid between the award date and the relevant release date in the form of dividend equivalents (cash or securities).

Operation of risk adjustment and malus

The achievement of performance measures determines the extent to which LTIP awards will vest. Awards are also subject to malus provisions (as explained in the Annual bonus paragraphs above) which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil).

Timing of receipt

Barclays LTIP awards have a five-year period in total from grant to when all restrictions are lifted. This will include a minimum three-year vesting period and an additional two-year holding period once vested (after payment of tax)

The maximum annual LTIP award is 120% of fixed pay.

Vesting is dependent on performance measures and service.

Following determination of the financial measures applicable to an LTIP cycle, if the Committee is satisfied with the underlying financial health of the Barclays Group (based on profit before tax) it may, at its discretion, adjust the percentage of shares considered for release up or down by up to 10% (subject to the maximum % for the award calibrated against financial performance measures).

Performance measures will be based on financial performance (e.g. measured on return on risk weighted assets), risk metrics (e.g. measured by loan loss rate) and the Balanced Scorecard which also includes financial measures. The Committee has discretion to change the weightings but financial measures will be at least 50% and the Balanced Scorecard will be a maximum of 30%. The threshold level of performance for each performance measure will be disclosed annually as part of the implementation of remuneration report.

Straight line vesting applies between threshold and maximum for the financial and risk measures.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  77


Remuneration policy for executive Directors continued

Element and purposeOperationMaximum value and performance measures

C. Other

All employee share plans

To provide an opportunity for Directors to voluntarily invest in the Company

Executive Directors are entitled to participate in:

(i)  Barclays Sharesave under which they can make monthly savings over a period of three or five years linked to the grant of an option over Barclays’ shares which can be at a discount of up to 20% on the share price set at the start.

(ii)  Barclays Sharepurchase under which they can make contributions (monthly or lump sum) out of pre-tax pay (if based in the United Kingdom) which are used to acquire Barclays’ shares.

(i)  Savings between £5 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per month. There are no performance measures.

(ii)Contributions of between £10 and the maximum set by Barclays (which will be no more than the HMRC maximum) per tax year which Barclays may match up to HMRC maximum (current match is £600). There are no performance measures.

Previous buy out awards

Tushar Morzaria currently holds an unvested buy-out award under the Barclays Joiners Share Value Plan which was granted to him in respect of awards he forfeited as a result of accepting employment at Barclays. This award was made in line with the Barclays’ recruitment policy.

The award was no more generous than and mirrored as far as possible the expected value and timing of vesting of the forfeited awards granted by JP Morgan.

Shareholding requirement

To further enhance the alignment of shareholders’ and executive Directors’ interests in long-term value creation

Executive Directors must build up a shareholding of 400% of salary over five years from the later of: (i) the introduction of the new requirement in 2013; and (ii) the date of appointment as executive Director. They have a reasonable period to build up to this requirement again if it is not met because of a share price fall.

Shares that count towards the requirement are beneficially owned shares including any vested share awards subject only to holding periods (including vested LTIPs, vested deferred share bonuses and RBP shares). Shares from unvested deferred share bonuses and unvested LTIPs do not count towards the requirement.

Barclays’ shares worth a minimum of 400% of salary must be held within five years.

Outside appointments

To encourageself-development and allow for the introduction of external insight and practice

Executive Directors may accept one board appointment in another listed company.

Chairman’s approval must be sought before accepting appointment. Fees may be retained by the executive Director. None of the executive Directors currently hold an outside appointment.

Not applicable.

78  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Notes to the table on pages 75 to 78:

Performance measures and targets

The Committee selected the relevant financial and risk based performance measures because they are key to the bank’s strategy and are important measures used by the executive Directors to oversee the direction of the business. The Balanced Scorecard has been selected as it demonstrates the performance and progress of Barclays as measured across the following dimensions (5Cs): Customers & Clients, Colleagues, Citizenship, Conduct and Company. Each of the 5Cs in the Balanced Scorecard will have equal weighting. All targets are set to be stretching but achievable and aligned to enhancing shareholder value.

The Committee is of the opinion that the performance targets for the annual bonus and Balanced Scorecard element of the LTIP are commercially sensitive in respect of the Company and that it would be detrimental to the interests of the Company to disclose them before the start of the relevant performance period. The performance against those measures will be disclosed after the end of the relevant financial year in that year’s remuneration report subject to the sensitivity no longer remaining.

Differences between the remuneration policy of the executive Directors and the policy for all employees of the Barclays Group

The structure of total remuneration packages for executive Directors and for the broader employee population is similar. Employees receive salary, pension and benefits and are eligible to be considered for a bonus and to participate in all employee share plans. The broader employee population typically does not have a contractual limit on the quantum of their remuneration and does not receive RBP which is paid only to some, but not all, Code Staff. Executive Director RBP is determined on a similar basis to other Code Staff.

The Committee approaches any salary increases for executive Directors by benchmarking against market data for named banks. Incremental annual salary increases remain more common among employees at less senior levels.

As with executive Directors, bonuses for the broader employee population are performance based. Bonuses for executive Directors and the broader employee population are subject to deferral requirements. Executive Directors and other Code Staff are subject to deferral at a minimum rate of 40% (for bonuses of no more than £500,000) or 60% (for bonuses of more than £500,000) but the Committee may choose to operate higher deferral rates. For non-Code Staff, bonuses in excess of £65,000 are subject to a graduated level of deferral. The terms of deferred bonus awards for executive Directors and the wider employee population are broadly the same, in particular the vesting of all deferred bonuses (subject to service and malus conditions).

The broader employee population is not eligible to participate in the Barclays LTIP.

How shareholder views and broader employee pay are taken into account by the Committee in setting policy and making remuneration decisions

We recognise that remuneration is an area of particular interest to shareholders and that in setting and considering changes to remuneration it is critical that we listen to and take into account their views. Accordingly, a series of meetings are held each year with major shareholders and shareholder representative groups (including the Association of British Insurers, National Association of Pension Funds and ISS). The Committee Chairman attends these meetings, accompanied by senior Barclays’ employees (including the Reward and Performance Director and the Company Secretary). The Committee notes that shareholder views on some matters are not always unanimous, but values the insight and engagement that these interactions and the expression of sometimes different views provide. This engagement is meaningful and helpful to the Committee in its work and contributes directly to the decisions made by the Committee.

The Committee takes account of the pay and employment conditions of the broader employee base when it considers the remuneration of the executive Directors. The Committee receives and reviews analysis of remuneration proposals for employees across all of the Group’s businesses. This includes analysis by corporate grade and by performance rating and information on proposed bonuses and salary increases across the employee population and individual proposals for Code Staff and highly paid individuals. When the Committee considers executive Director remuneration, it therefore makes that consideration in the context of a detailed understanding of remuneration for the broader employee population and uses the all employee data to compare remuneration and ensure consistency throughout the Group. Employees are not consulted directly on the Directors’ remuneration policy.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  79


Executive Directors’ policy on recruitment

Element of remunerationCommentaryMaximum value
Salary

Determined by market conditions, market practice and ability to recruit.

For a newly appointed executive Director, whether through external recruitment or internal promotion, if their salary is at a level below the desired market level, the Committee retains the discretion to realign their salary over a transitional period which may mean that annualised salary increases for the new appointee are higher than that set out in the salary section of the remuneration policy.

In line with policy.
Role Based Pay

Determined by role, market practice and ability to recruit. Percentage may decrease or increase in certain circumstances subject to maximum value.

100% of salary.
Benefits

In line with policy.

In line with policy.
PensionIn line with policy.

33% of salary (Group Chief Executive), 25% of salary (Group Finance Director) and 25% if another executive Director is appointed.

Annual BonusIn line with policy.80% of fixed pay.
Long Term Incentive PlanIn line with policy.120% of fixed pay.
Buy out

The Committee can consider buying out forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards that the new executive Director has forfeited as a result of accepting the appointment with Barclays, subject to proof of forfeiture where applicable.

As required by the PRA Remuneration Code, any award made to compensate for forfeited remuneration from the new executive Director’s previous employment may not be more generous than, and must mirror as far as possible the expected value, timing and form of delivery, the terms of the forfeited remuneration and must be in the best long-term interests of Barclays. Barclays deferral policy shall however apply as a minimum to any buy out of annual bonus opportunity.

The value of any buy out is not included within the maximum incentive levels above since it relates to a buy out of forfeited bonus opportunity or incentive awards from a previous employer.

Where a senior executive is promoted to the Board, his or her existing contractual commitments agreed prior to his or her appointment may still be honoured in accordance with the terms of the relevant commitment including vesting of any pre-existing deferred bonus or long-term incentive awards.

80  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Executive Directors’ policy on payment for loss of office (including a takeover)

The Committee’s approach to payments in the event of termination is to take account of the individual circumstances including the reason for termination, individual performance, contractual obligations and the terms of the deferred bonus plans and long-term incentive plans in which the executive Director participates.

Standard provisionPolicyDetails
Notice periods in executive Directors’ service contracts

12 months’ notice from the Company.

6 months’ notice from the executive Director.

Executive Directors may be required to work during the notice period or may be placed on garden leave or if not required to work the full notice period may be provided with pay in lieu of notice (subject to mitigation where relevant).

Pay during notice period or payment in lieu of notice per service contracts12 months’ salary payable and continuation of pension and other contractual benefits while an employee.

Payable in phased instalments (or lump sum) and subject to mitigation if paid in instalments and executive Director obtains alternative employment during the notice period or while on garden leave.

In the event of termination for gross misconduct neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is given.

Treatment of Role Based PayCeases to be payable from the executive Director’s termination date. Therefore, RBP will be paid during any notice period and/or garden leave, but not where Barclays elects to make a payment in lieu of notice (unless otherwise required by local law).

Shares to be delivered on the next quarterly delivery date shall be pro rated for the number of days from the start of the relevant quarter to the termination date. Where Barclays elects to terminate the employment with immediate effect by making a payment in lieu of notice, the executive Director will not receive any shares that would otherwise have accrued during the period for which the payment in lieu is made (unless required otherwise by local law).

Treatment of annual bonus on termination

No automatic entitlement to bonus on termination, but may be considered at the Committee’s discretion and subject to performance measures being met and pro rated for service. No bonus would be payable in the case of gross misconduct or resignation.

Treatment of unvested deferred bonus awards

Outstanding deferred bonus awards would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation or termination for gross misconduct. However in the case of death or if the Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group or in circumstances where Barclays terminates the employment (other than in cases of cause or gross misconduct), he or she would continue to be eligible to be considered for unvested portions of deferred awards, subject to the rules of the relevant plan unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. Deferred awards are subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of deferred bonuses (including to nil).

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event, the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards would vest early or whether they should continue in the same or revised form following the change of control. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange existing awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company.

In an eligible leaver situation, deferred bonus awards may be considered for release in full on the scheduled release date unless the Committee determines otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the awards may be subject to an additional holding period of six months.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  81


Executive Directors’ policy on payment for loss of office (including a takeover) continued

Standard provision

PolicyDetails
Treatment of unvested
awards under the LTIP

Outstanding unvested awards under the LTIP would lapse if the executive Director leaves by reason of resignation or termination for gross misconduct. However, in line with the plan rules approved by shareholders, in the case of death or if the Director is an ‘eligible leaver’ defined as leaving due to injury, disability or ill health, retirement, redundancy, the business or company which employs the executive Director ceasing to be part of the Group (or for any other reason if the Committee decides at its discretion), he or she would continue to be entitled to be considered for an award. Awards are also subject to malus provisions which enable the Committee to reduce the vesting level of awards (including to nil).

In the event of a takeover or other major corporate event (but excluding an internal reorganisation of the Group), the Committee has absolute discretion to determine whether all outstanding awards vest subject to the achievement of any performance conditions. The Committee has discretion to apply a pro rata reduction to reflect the unexpired part of the vesting period. The Committee may also determine that participants may exchange awards for awards over shares in an acquiring company with the agreement of that company. In the event of an internal reorganisation, the Committee may determine that outstanding awards will be exchanged for equivalent awards in another company.

In an eligible leaver situation, awards may be considered for release on the scheduled release date, pro rated for time and performance, subject to the Committee’s discretion to determine otherwise in exceptional circumstances. After release, the shares (net of deductions for tax) are subject to an additional holding period of two years.
Repatriation

Except in a case of gross misconduct or resignation, where a Director has been relocated at the commencement of employment, the Company may pay for the Director’s repatriation costs in line with Barclays’ general employee mobility policy including temporary accommodation, payment of removal costs and relocation flights. The company will pay the executive Director’s tax on the relocation costs but will not tax equalise and will also not pay tax on his or her other income relating to the termination of employment.

Other

Except in a case of gross misconduct or resignation, the Company may pay for the executive Director’s legal fees and tax advice relating to the termination of employment and provide outplacement services. The Company may pay the executive Director’s tax on these particular costs.

82  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Governance: Remuneration report

Directors’ remuneration policy (abridged)

Remuneration policy for non-executive Directors

Element and purposeOperation

Fees

Reflect individual responsibilities and membership of Board Committees and are set to attract non-executive Directors who have relevant skills and experience to oversee the implementation of our strategy

The Chairman and Deputy Chairman are paid an all-inclusive fee for all Board responsibilities. The Chairman has a minimum time commitment equivalent to at least 80% of a full-time role. The other non-executive Directors receive a basic Board fee, with additional fees payable where individuals serve as a member or Chairman of a Committee of the Board.

Fees are reviewed each year by the Board as a whole against those for non-executive Directors in companies of similar scale and complexity. Fees were last increased in May 2011.

The first £30,000 (Chairman: first £100,000) after tax and national insurance contributions of each non- executive Director’s basic fee is used to purchase Barclays’ shares which are retained on the non-executive Director’s behalf until they retire from the Board.

Benefits

For Chairman only

The Chairman is provided with private medical cover subject to the terms of the Barclays scheme rules from time to time, and is provided with the use of a Company vehicle and driver when required for business purposes.

No other n on-executive Director receives any benefits from Barclays. Non-executive Directors are not eligible to join Barclays’ pension plans.

Bonus and share plans

Non-executive Directors are not eligible to participate in Barclays cash, share or long-term incentive plans.

Notice and termination provisions

Each non-executive Director’s appointment is for an initial six year term, renewable for a single term of three years thereafter and subject to annual re-election by shareholders.

Notice period:

Chairman: 12 months from the Company (six months from the Chairman). Non-executive Directors: six months from the Company (six months from the Non-executive Director).

Termination payment policy

The Chairman’s appointment may be terminated by Barclays on 12 months’ notice or immediately in which case 12 months’ fees and contractual benefits are payable in instalments at the times they would have been received had the appointment continued, but subject to mitigation if they were to obtain alternative employment. There are similar termination provisions for non-executive Directors based on six months’ fees. No continuing payments of fees (or benefits) are due if a non-executive Director is not re-elected by shareholders at the Barclays Annual General Meeting.

In accordance with the policy table above, any new Chairman and Deputy Chairman would be paid an all-inclusive fee only and any new non-executive Director would be paid a basic fee for their appointment as a Director, plus fees for their participation on and/or chairing of any Board committees, time apportioned in the first year as necessary. No sign-on payments are offered to non-executive Directors.

Discretion

In addition to the various operational discretions that the Committee can exercise in the performance of its duties (including those discretions set out in the Company’s share plans), the Committee reserves the right to make either minor or administrative amendments to the policy to benefit its operation or to make more material amendments in order to comply with new laws, regulations and/or regulatory guidance. The Committee would only exercise this right if it believed it was in the best interests of the Company to do so and where it is not possible, practicable or proportionate to seek or await shareholder approval in General Meeting.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  83


Risk review

Contents

The management of risk plays a central role in the execution of Barclays’ strategy and insight into the level of risk across businesses and portfolios and the material risks and uncertainties the Group face are key areas of management focus.

For a more detailed breakdown of our Risk performance and Risk management contents please see pages 336-409.

Page
Material existing and emerging risks   

Insight into the level of risk across our business and portfolios, the material existing

and emerging risks and uncertainties we face

and the key areas of management focus.

§Credit risk87
§Market risk88
§Funding risk88
§Operational risk89
§Conduct risk91
§

  

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal risk

Risk

79

   Credit risk

81

   Market risk

81

   Treasury and capital risk

82

   Operational risk

82

   Model risk

83

   Conduct risk

83

   Reputation risk

84
   92

   Legal risk and legal, competition and regulatory matters

  84
Principal Risk management      
Overview of Barclays’ approach to risk management.management for  

§   Credit risk management

  85
each Principal Risk with focus on

   Management of credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit risk

326
organisation and structure and roles and

   Market risk management strategy

87
responsibilities.

   Management of securitisation exposures

338

   Treasury and capital risk management

88

   Operational risk management

90

   Model risk management

92

   Conduct risk management

93

   Reputation risk management

94
   95

§

Governance structure   Legal risk management

  95
§Risk governance and assigning responsibilities97
§Principal risks and Key risks98
§Credit risk management99
§Market risk management101
§Funding risk management103
§Capital risk management103
§Liquidity risk management105
§Operational risk management106
§

Conduct risk management

108
Risk performance      

Credit risk:

The risk of suffering financial loss should the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

§firm from  

Credit risk overview and summary of performance

  11297
§the failure of clients, customers or  

Analysis of the balance sheet

  11297
§

counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the firm, including

the whole and timely payment of principal,

interest, collateral and other receivables.

  

Maximum   The Group’s maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancementenhancements held

  11398
  

§

The Group’s approach to managemanagement and representrepresentation of credit quality

  115100
  

§   Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

  102

Loans and advances to customers and banks

  117105
  

§

Analysis of the concentration of credit risk118
§Group exposures to specific countries and industries119
§Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

106

   Analysis of problem loans

109

   Impairment

114

   Analysis of debt securities

115
   122

§

Analysis of loans on concession programmes131
§derivativesAnalysis of problem loans134
§

Impairment

  137115

Market risk:

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatilityloss arising from

�� 

   Market risk overview and summary of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.performance

  §118
potential adverse changes in the value of the  Market risk overview, measures in the Group and summary of
performance
139

§

Balance sheet view of trading and banking books

  140119
§firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in  

Traded marketMarket risk

  141120
§market variables including, but not limited to,  Business scenario stresses142

§

Review of regulatory measures142
§Non-traded market risk143
§Foreign exchange risk145
§Pension risk review146
§

Insurance risk review

  147121

Funding risk – Capital:

The risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources.

§Capital risk overviewinterest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and summary of performance149
§Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements149
§Capital resources150
§

Leverage ratio requirements

153

Funding risk – Liquidity:

The risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

§Liquidity risk overview and summary of performance155
§Liquidity risk stress testing155
§Liquidity pool158
§Funding structure and funding relationships159
§Wholesale funding160
§Term financing162
§Encumbrance162
§Credit ratings166
§Liquidity management at Barclays Africa Group Limited167
§

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

167

84  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Contents

Page  
Risk performance continuedasset correlations.    

Operational risk:

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

§

§

Operational risk overview and summary of performance in the period

Operational risk profile

173

173

Conduct risk:

The risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or the Group because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

§
§
§
§
§

Conduct risk overview

Reputation risk

Summary of performance

Salz recommendations

Conduct reputation measure

175

175

175

176

176

Supervision and regulation:

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant body of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisation to conduct banking and financial services business.

§Supervision of the Group177
§Global regulatory developments177
§Influence of European legislation178
§EU developments178
§Regulation in the UK179
§Resolution of UK banking groups179
§Structural reform of banking groups180
§Compensation schemes180
§Regulation in the US181
§

Regulation in Africa

182

The Pillar 3 report of Barclays published on 1 March 2016 contains additional information on Barclays’ risk as well as capital management. Readers may access the complete Pillar 3 report at the Barclays investor relations web site. The Pillar 3 report is not incorporated by reference into and is not part of the 2015 20-F.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  85    75


Risk review

Contents

Risk performance continuedAnnual Report
Treasury and capital risk – Liquidity:The

   Liquidity risk overview and summary of performance

124
risk that the firm is unable to meet its

   Liquidity risk stress testing

124
contractual or contingent obligations or that

   Liquidity pool

126
it does not have the appropriate amount,

   Funding structure and funding relationships

127
tenor and composition of funding and

   Encumbrance

129
liquidity to support its assets.

   Credit ratings

132

   Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

133
Treasury and capital risk – Capital:The risk

   Capital risk overview and summary of performance

137
that the firm has an insufficient level or

   Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

138
composition of capital to support its normal

   Analysis of capital resources

139
business activities and to meet its regulatory

   Analysis of risk weighted assets

141
capital requirements under normal operating

   Analysis of leverage ratio and exposures

142

environments or stressed conditions (both

actual and as defined for internal planning or

regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans.

   Foreign exchange risk

143

   Pension risk review

144

   Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities

145
Treasury and capital risk – Interest rate risk

   Interest rate risk in the banking book overview and summary of performance

146
in the banking bookThe risk that the firm is

   Net interest income sensitivity

147
exposed to capital or income volatility

   Economic capital by business unit

147
because of a mismatch between the interest

   Analysis of equity sensitivity

148
rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and

   Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

148
liabilities.
Operational risk:The risk of loss to the firm

   Operational risk overview and summary of performance

149
from inadequate or failed processes or

   Operational risk profile

150
systems, human factors or due to external events (for example fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.
Model risk:The risk of the potential adverse

   Model risk overview and summary of performance

151
consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.
Conduct risk:The risk of detriment to

   Conduct risk overview and summary of performance

152
customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct.
Reputation risk:The risk that an action,

   Reputation risk overview and summary of performance

153
transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.
Legal risk:The risk of loss or imposition of

   Legal risk overview and summary of performance

154
penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.
Supervision and regulation:The Group’s

   Supervision of the Group

155
operations, including its overseas offices,

   Global regulatory developments

156
subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a

   Financial regulatory framework

157
significant body of rules and regulations.

   Structural reform

162

76    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

Introduction

Barclays engages in activities which entail risk taking, every day, throughout its business. This section introduces these risks, and outlines key governance arrangements for managing them. These include roles and responsibilities, frameworks, policies and standards, assurance and lessons learned processes. The Group’s approach to fostering a strong Risk Culture is also described.

Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)

The ERMF sets the strategic direction for risk management by defining standards, objectives and responsibilities for all areas of Barclays. It supports the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO) in embedding effective risk management and a strong Risk Culture.

The ERMF sets out:

Principal Risks faced by the Group

Risk Appetite requirements

Roles and responsibilities for risk management

Risk Committee structure.

Principal Risks

The ERMF identifies eight Principal Risks and sets out associated responsibilities and risk management standards.

Risk appetite for the Principal Risks

Risk Appetite is defined as the level of risk which the Group is prepared to accept in the conduct of its activities. The Risk Appetite of the Group specifies the level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities.

Risk Appetite is approved and disseminated across legal entities and businesses, including by use of Mandate and Scale limits to enable and control specific activities that have material concentration risk implications for the Group.

Roles and responsibilities in the management of risk

The Three Lines of Defence

All colleagues are responsible for understanding and managing risks within the context of their individual roles and responsibilities, as set out in the “Three Lines of Defence”.

First Line of Defence

The First Line comprises all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client facing areas of the Group and all associated support functions, including Finance, Treasury, Human Resources and the Chief Operating Officer (COO) function. Employees in the First Line are responsible for:

identifying all the risks and developing appropriate policies, standards and controls to govern their activities

LOGO

operating within any and all limits which the Risk and Compliance functions establish in connection with the Risk Appetite of the Group

escalating risk events to senior managers in Risk and Compliance.

Second Line of Defence

Employees of Risk and Compliance comprise the Second Line of Defence. The role of the Second Line is to establish the limits, rules and constraints under which First Line activities shall be performed, consistent with the Risk appetite of the Group, and to monitor the performance of the First Line against these limits and constraints.

Third Line of Defence

Employees of Internal Audit comprise the Third Line of Defence. They provide independent assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control over current, systemic and evolving risks.

The Legal function does not sit in any of the three lines, but supports them all. The Legal function is, however, subject to oversight from Risk and Compliance, with respect to operational and conduct risks.

Risk Committees

Business Risk Committees consider Risk matters relevant to their business, and escalate as required to the Group Risk Committee (GRC), whose Chairman in turn escalates to Board Committees and the Board.

There are three Board-level forums which oversee the application of the ERMF and review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: the Board Risk Committee, the Board Audit Committee, and the Board Reputation Committee. Additionally, the Board Remuneration Committee oversees pay practices focusing on aligning pay to sustainable performance. Finally, the main Board of Barclays receives regular information on the risk profile of the Group, and has ultimate responsibility for risk appetite and capital plans.

The Chairman of each Committee prepares a statement each year on the Committee’s activities, which are included in this report on pages 3 to 37.

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays Bank PLC) responsibilities is the approval of Risk Appetite (see page 126 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2017). The Group CRO regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the ERMF.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    77


Risk review

Risk management

Barclays’ risk management strategy

LOGO

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions taken by management are reviewed to verify that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the Chairman of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are independent non-executive directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Group CRO attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s Risk Appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodologies, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissions in-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the Group CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, and quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half-yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputation risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance and risk profile, and proposals on ex-ante and ex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Summaries of the relevant skills, experience and background of the Directors of the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 5 to 6. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board Committees are available from the Corporate Governance section of Barclays’ website at:home.barclays/about-barclays/barclays-corporate-governance.html.

Barclays’ Risk Culture

Risk Culture can be defined as “norms, attitudes and behaviours related to risk awareness, risk taking and risk management”. At Barclays this is reflected in how we identify, escalate and manage risk matters.

Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way Globally, all colleagues must attest to the “Barclays Way”, our Code of Conduct, and all frameworks, policies and standards applicable to their roles. The Code of Conduct outlines the Purpose and Values which govern our Barclays Way of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues’ working relationships, specifically (but not exclusively) with other Barclays employees, customers and clients, governments and regulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community.

Embedding of a values-based, conduct culture

The Group Executive Committee reconfirmed Conduct, Culture and Values as one of its execution priorities for 2017 with the aim of embedding the cultural measurement tool developed in 2016. The effectiveness of the Risk and Control environment, for which all colleagues are responsible, depends on the continued embedment of strong values. Please see the Board Reputation Committee report on pages 27 to 32 for further details.

Induction programmes support new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the Group does business and the link to Barclays’ values. The Leadership Curriculum covers the building, sustaining and supporting of a trustworthy organisation and is offered to colleagues globally.

Other Risk Culture drivers

In addition to values and conduct, we consider the following determinants of Risk Culture:

Management and governance:This means a consistent tone from the top and clear responsibilities to enable identification and challenge.

Motivation and incentives:The right behaviours are rewarded and modelled.

Competence and effectiveness:This means that colleagues are enabled to identify, co-ordinate, escalate and address risk and control matters.

Integrity: Colleagues are willing to meet their risk management responsibilities; colleagues escalate issues on a timely basis.

78    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

    

    

 

This section describes the material risks which senior management is currently focused on and believe could cause the Group’s future results of operations, financial condition and prospects to differ materially from current expectations.

LOGOFor more information about the major risk policies which underlie risk exposures, see the consolidated policy-based qualitative information in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report. A summary of this information may also be found in this report in the Risk management section between pages 336 to 409.

86  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

This section describes the materialMaterial risks are those to which senior management payspay particular attention and which they believe could cause the future resultsdelivery of the Group’s strategy, results of operations, financial condition andand/or prospects to differ materially from current expectations.

Emerging risks are those that have largely unknown components, the impact of which could crystallise over a longer time horizon. These expectations include the ability to pay dividends, maintain appropriate levels of capital and meet capital and leverage ratio targets, and achieve stated commitments. In addition, risks relating to the Group that are notcould currently known, or that are currently deemedbe considered immaterial but over time may individually or cumulatively have the potential to materially affect the future resultsGroup’s strategy and cause the same outcomes as detailed above regarding material risks. In addition, certain factors beyond the Group’s control, including escalation of terrorism or global conflicts, natural disasters and similar calamities, although not detailed below, could have a similar impact on the Group.

The risks described below are material risks that senior management has identified with respect to the Group, which is defined as Barclays PLC and its consolidated subsidiaries (including the Barclays Bank PLC Group). In connection with the planned implementation in the first half of 2018 of ring-fencing certain of the Group’s operations, financial conditionUK businesses, Barclays Bank PLC will transfer what are materially the assets and prospects.

Materialbusiness of the Barclays UK division to another subsidiary of the Group, Barclays Bank UK PLC. Senior management expects that upon this transfer, the material risks and their impact are described belowwith respect to the Barclays Bank PLC Group will be the same in two sections: i)all material respects as those risks whichwith respect to the Group. For more information on certain risks senior management believes are likelyhas identified with respect to impact a single Principal Risk; and ii) risks which senior management believes are likely to affect more than one Principal Risk. Certain risks below have been classified as an ‘emerging risk’, which is a risk that has the potential to have a significant detrimental effect on the Group’s performance, but currently the outcome and the time horizon for the crystallisation of its possible impact is more uncertain and more difficult to predict than for other risk factors that are not identified as emerging risks.

More information on the management of risks may be found in Barclays’ Approach to Managing Risk in the Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.Group, see v) Certain potential consequences of ring-fencing to Barclays Bank PLC.

Material existing and emerging risks bypotentially impacting more than one Principal Risk

i) Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues

Credit risk

The financial conditionGroup offers a broad range of services, including to retail, institutional and government customers, in a large number of countries. The breadth of these operations means that deterioration in the Group’s customers, clients and counterparties, including governments and other financial institutions,economic environment, or an increase in political instability in countries where the Group is active, or in any systemically important economy, could adversely affect the Group.Group’s operating performance, financial condition and prospects.

The GroupAlthough economic activity continued to strengthen globally in 2017 a change in global economic conditions and the reversal of the improving trend may suffer financial loss if anyresult in lower client activity of its customers, clients or market counterparties fails to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group. The Group may also suffer loss when the value of its investment in the financial instruments of an entity falls as a result of that entity’s credit rating being downgraded. In addition, the Group may incur significant unrealised gains and/or losses due to changes in the Group’s credit spreads or those of third parties, as these changes affect the fair valuean increase of the Group’s derivative instruments, debt securitiesdefault rates, delinquencies, write-offs, and impairment charges, which in turn could adversely affect the Group’s performance and prospects.

In several countries, reversals of capital inflows, as well as fiscal austerity, have already caused deterioration in political stability. This could be exacerbated by a renewed rise in asset price volatility or sustained pressure on government finances. In addition, geopolitical tensions in some areas of the world, such as the Korean Peninsula, the Middle East and Eastern Europe, are already acute and at risk of further deterioration, thus potentially increasing market uncertainties and adverse global economic and market conditions.

In the US, there is uncertainty around the policy platform of the administration which took office in 2017. There is the possibility of significant changes in policy in sectors including trade, healthcare and commodities which may have an impact on associated Barclays portfolios. A significant proportion of the Group’s portfolio is located in the US, including a major credit card portfolio and a range of corporate and investment banking exposures. Stress in the US economy, weakening GDP, an unexpected rise in unemployment and/or an increase in interest rates could lead to increased levels of impairment.

Most major central banks have indicated that they expect prevailing loose monetary policies to tighten. Should ‘normalisation’ paths diverge substantially, flows of capital between countries could alter significantly, placing segments with sizeable foreign currency liabilities, in particular emerging markets, under pressure. In addition, possible divergence of monetary policies between major advanced economies risks triggering further financial market volatility (see also ii) Interest rate rises adversely impacting credit conditions, below).

In the UK, the vote in favour of leaving the EU (see iii) Process of UK withdrawal from the European Union, below) has given rise to political uncertainty with attendant consequences for investment and market confidence. The initial impact was a depreciation of Sterling resulting in higher costs for companies exposed to imports and a more favourable environment for exporters. Rising domestic costs resulting from higher import prices may impact household incomes and the affordability of consumer loans and mortgages. In turn this may affect businesses dependent on consumers for revenue. There has also been a reduction in activity in both commercial and residential real estate markets which has the potential to impact value of real estate assets and adversely affect mortgage assets.

Sentiment towards emerging markets as a whole continues to be driven in large part by developments in China, where there is some concern around the ability of authorities to manage growth while transitioning from manufacturing towards services. Although the Chinese government’s efforts to stably increase the weight of domestic demand have had some success, the pace of credit growth remains a concern, given the high level of leverage and despite regulatory action. A stronger than expected slowdown could result if authorities fail to appropriately manage the end of the investment and credit-led boom.

Deterioration in emerging markets could affect the Group holds or issues, and loans held at fair value.

i) Deterioration in political and economic environment

The Group’s performance is at risk from deterioration in the economic and political environment which may result from a number of uncertainties, including the following:

a) Specific regions

Political instability, economic uncertainty or deflation in regions in which the Group operates could weaken growth prospects and have an adverse impact on customers’ ability to service debt and so resultif it results in higher impairment charges for the Group. These include:Group via sovereign or counterparty defaults.

China (emerging risk)

Economic uncertaintyMore broadly, a deterioration of conditions in China continues tothe key markets where the Group operates could affect performance in a number of emerging economies, particularly those with high fiscal deficits and those reliant on short-term external financing and/ways including, for example: (i) deteriorating business, consumer or investor confidence leading to reduced levels of client activity, including demand for borrowing from creditworthy customers, or indirectly, a material reliance on commodity exports. Their vulnerability has been further impacted by the fall, and sustained volatility in oil prices, the strong US dollar and the winding down of quantitative easing policies by some central banks. Theadverse impact on GDP growth in significant markets and therefore on Group performance; (ii) higher levels of default rates and impairment; (iii) mark to market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in factors such as credit ratings, share prices and solvency of counterparties (iv) reduced ability to obtain capital from other financial institutions for the Group may vary depending on the vulnerabilities present in each country, but the impact may result in increased impairment charges through sovereign defaults, or the inability or unwillingnessoperations; and (v) lower levels of clientsfixed asset investment and counterparties in that country to meet their debt obligations.productivity growth overall.

South Africa

The negative economic outlook in South Africa continues, with a challenging domestic and external environment. Recent political events including changes to leaders in the Finance Ministry have added to the domestic challenges. Real GDP growth remains low as a result of declining global demand, in particular China, prices for key mineral exports, a downturn in tourism, persistent power shortages and slowing

house price growth. In the retail sector, concerns remain over the level of consumer indebtedness and affordability as the slowdown in China impacts the mining sector with job losses increasing. Emerging market turmoil has added further pressure on the Rand, which has continued to depreciate against major currencies. The decline in the economic outlook may impact a range of industry sectors in the corporate portfolio, with clients with higher leverage being impacted most.

b)ii) Interest rate rises including as a result of slowing of monetary stimulus, could impact consumer debt affordability and corporate profitabilityadversely impacting credit conditions

To the extent that central banks increase interest rates in certain developed markets, particularly in ourthe Group’s main markets, in the UK and the US, they are expectedthere could be an impact on consumer debt affordability and corporate profitability.

While interest rate rises could positively impact the Group’s profitability, as retail and corporate business income may increase due to be small and gradual in scale during 2016, albeit following differing timetables. The first of these occurred in the US with a quarter point rise in December 2015. While an increase may support Group income, any sharpermargin de-compression, future interest rate increases, if larger or more frequent than expected changesexpectations, could cause stress in the loan portfolio and underwriting activity of the Group, particularly in relation to non-investment grade lending, leading to the possibility of the Group incurring higher impairment.Group. Higher credit losses and a requirement to increase the Group’s level ofdriving an increased impairment allowance would most notably occurimpact retail unsecured portfolios and wholesale non-investment grade lending.

Interest rates rising faster than expected could also have an adverse impact on the value of high quality liquid assets which are part of the Group Treasury function’s investment activity that could consequently create more volatility through the Group’s available for sale reserves than expected.

iii) Process of UK withdrawal from the European Union

The uncertainty and increased market volatility following the UK’s decision to leave the EU in 2019 is likely to continue until the exact nature of the future trading relationship with the EU becomes clear. The potential risks associated with an exit from the EU include:

Increased market risk with the impact on value of trading book positions, mainly in Barclays International, expected to be driven predominantly by currency and interest rate volatility.

Potential for credit spread widening for UK institutions which could lead to reduced investor appetite for Barclays’ debt securities, which could negatively impact the cost of and/or access to funding. Potential for continued market and interest rate volatility could affect the interest rate risk underlying, and potentially affect the value of, the assets in the banking book, as well as

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    79


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

securities held by Barclays for liquidity purposes.

Changes in the long-term outlook for UK interest rates which may adversely affect IAS 19 pension liabilities and the market value of equity investments funding those liabilities.

Increased risk of a UK recession with lower growth, higher unemployment and falling UK house prices. This would likely negatively impact a number of Barclays’ portfolios, particularly in Barclays UK, notably: higher Loan-to-Value mortgages, UK unsecured lending including credit cards and Commercial Real Estate exposures.

Changes to current EU “Passporting” rights which will likely require adjustments to the current model for the Group’s cross-border banking operation which could increase operational complexity and/or costs.

The ability to attract, or prevent the departure of, qualified and skilled employees may be impacted by the UK’s future approach to the EU freedom of movement and immigration from the EU countries and this may impact Barclays’ access to the EU talent pool.

The legal framework within which Barclays operates could change and become more uncertain as the UK takes steps to replace or repeal certain laws currently in force, which are based on EU legislation and regulation (including EU regulation of the banking sector). Certainty of existing contracts, enforceability of legal obligations and uncertainty around the outcome of disputes may be affected until the impacts of the loss of the current jurisdictional arrangements between UK and EU courts and the universal enforceability of judgements across the EU (including the status of existing EU case law) are fully known.

iv) Regulatory change agenda and impact on business model

The Group remains subject to ongoing significant levels of regulatory change and scrutiny in many of the countries in which it operates (including, in particular, the UK and the US). As a result, regulatory risk will remain a focus for senior management and consume significant levels of business resources. Furthermore, a more intensive regulatory approach and enhanced requirements together with the uncertainty (particularly in light of the UK’s decision to withdraw from the EU) and potential lack of international regulatory co-ordination as enhanced supervisory standards are developed and implemented may adversely affect the Group’s business, capital and risk management strategies and/or may result in the Group deciding to modify its legal entity structure, capital and funding structures and business mix, or to exit certain business activities altogether or not to expand in areas despite otherwise attractive potential.

The most significant of the regulatory reforms affecting the Group in 2018 is the creation of the ring-fenced Bank under the Bank’s structural reform programme (for more on Structural Reform, see Supervision and Regulation on page 162).

The implementation of these changes involves a number of risks which include:

The Group is restructuring its intra-group and external capital, funding and liquidity arrangements to meet regulatory requirements and support business needs. The changes will impact the sources of funding available to the different entities including their respective ability to access the capital markets. These changes may affect funding costs.

The changes to the Group structure may negatively impact the assessment made by credit rating agencies and creditors over time. The risk profile and key risk drivers of the ring-fenced bank and the non ring-fenced bank will be specific to the activities and risk profile of each entity. As a result, different Group entities such as Barclays Bank PLC may also be assessed differently in future which could result in differences in credit ratings. Changes to the credit assessment at the Group or individual entity level, including the potential for ratings downgrades and ratings differences across entities, could impact access and cost of certain sources of funding.

Implementation of ring-fencing introduces a number of execution risks. Technology change could result in outages or operational errors. Legal challenge to the ring-fence transfer scheme may delay the transfer of assets and liabilities to the ring-fenced bank. Delayed delivery could increase reputational risk or result in regulatory non-compliance.

There is a risk that Barclays does not meet regulatory requirements across the new structure. Failure to meet these requirements may have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability, operating flexibility, flexibility of deployment of capital and funding, return on equity, ability to pay dividends, credit ratings, and/or financial condition.

In addition to Structural Reform there are several other significant pieces of legislation/areas of focus which will require significant management attention, cost and resource:

Changes in prudential requirements, including the proposals for amendment of the CRD IV and the BRRD (as part of the EU’s risk reduction measures package) may impact minimum requirements for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) (including requirements for internal MREL), leverage, liquidity or funding requirements, applicable buffers and/or add-ons to such minimum requirements and risk weighted assets calculation methodologies all as may be set by international, EU or national authorities from time to time. Such or similar changes to prudential requirements or additional supervisory and prudential expectations, either individually or in aggregate, may result in, among other things, a need for further management actions to meet the changed requirements, such as: increasing capital, MREL or liquidity resources, reducing leverage and risk weighted assets; restricting distributions on capital instruments; modifying the terms of outstanding capital instruments; modifying legal entity structure

(including with regard to issuance and deployment of capital, MREL and funding for the Group); changing the Group’s business mix or exiting other businesses; and/or undertaking other actions to strengthen the Group’s position. (See Treasury and capital risk on pages 122 to 148 and Supervision and Regulation on pages 158 to 159 for more information).

The derivatives market has been the subject of particular focus for regulators in recent years across the G20 countries and beyond, with regulations introduced which require the reporting and clearing of standardised over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives and the mandatory margining of non-cleared OTC derivatives. Reforms in this area are ongoing with further requirements expected to be implemented in the course of 2018. More broadly, the recast Markets in Financial Instruments Directive in Europe (MiFID II), which came into force in January 2018, has fundamentally changed the European regulatory framework, and entails significant operational changes for market participants in a wide range of financial instruments as well as changes in market structures and practices. In addition, the EU Benchmarks Regulation which also came into force in January 2018 regulates the administration and use of benchmarks in the EU. Compliance with this evolving regulatory framework entails significant costs for market participants and is having a significant impact on certain markets in which the Group, notably Barclays International, operates. Other regulations applicable to swap dealers, including those promulgated by the US Commodity Futures Trading Commission, have imposed significant costs on the Group’s derivatives business. These and any future requirements, including the US SEC’s regulations relating to security-based swaps and the possibility of overlapping and/or contradictory requirements imposed on derivative transactions by regulators in different jurisdictions, are expected to continue to impact such business.

The Group and certain of its members are subject to supervisory stress testing exercises in a number of jurisdictions. These exercises currently include the programmes of the BoE, the EBA, the FDIC and the FRB. These exercises are designed to assess the resilience of banks to adverse economic or financial developments and enforce robust, forward-looking capital and liquidity management processes that account for the risks associated with their business profile. Assessment by regulators is on both a quantitative and qualitative basis, the latter focusing on the Group’s or certain of its members’ business model, data provision, stress testing capability and internal management processes and controls. The stress testing requirements to which the Group and its members are subject are becoming increasingly stringent. Failure to meet requirements of regulatory stress tests, or the failure by regulators to approve the stress test results and capital plans of the Group, could result in the Group being

80    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


required to enhance its capital position, limit capital distributions or position additional capital in specific subsidiaries. For more information on stress testing, please see Supervision and Regulation on page 158.

The introduction and implementation of both PSD2 and the Open API standards and data sharing remedy imposed by the UK Competition and Markets Authority following its Retail Banking Market Investigation Order (together “Open Banking”) from January 2018 is anticipated to transform the traditional UK banking model and conventional relationship between a customer and their bank. It will do this by providing customers with the ability to share their transactional data with authorised third party service providers either for aggregation or payment services. It is anticipated that these aggregation or payment services will be offered by third parties to Barclays customers. Members of the Barclays Group will be able to offer these same services to customers of other banks. A failure to comply with Open Banking requirements could expose Barclays to regulatory sanction, potential financial loss and reputational detriment. While Open Banking will affect the Group as a whole, the impact is likely to be particularly relevant for Barclays UK.

v) Certain potential consequences of ring-fencing to Barclays Bank PLC

In connection with the planned implementation in the first half of 2018 of ring fencing certain of the Group’s retail unsecuredbusinesses, Barclays Bank PLC will transfer what are materially the assets and secured portfoliosbusiness of the Barclays UK division to another subsidiary of the Group, Barclays Bank UK PLC. Senior management expects that upon this transfer, the material risks with respect to the Barclays Bank PLC Group will be the same in all material respects as those risks with respect to the Group. However, senior management has identified certain potential differences in risks with respect to the Barclays Bank PLC Group as compared to risks to the Group.

The transfer of the assets and liabilities of the Barclays UK division from Barclays Bank PLC will mean that the Barclays Bank PLC Group will be less diversified than the Group as a whole. Barclays Bank PLC will not be the parent of Barclays Bank UK PLC and thus will not have recourse to the assets of Barclays Bank UK PLC. Relative to the Group, the Barclays Bank PLC Group will be, among other things:

more focused on businesses outside the UK, particularly in the US, and thus more exposed to the US economy and more affected by movements in the US dollar (and other non-sterling currencies) relative to sterling, with a relatively larger portion of its business exposed to US regulation;

more focused on wholesale businesses, such as corporate and investment banking and capital markets, which expose Barclays Bank PLC Group to a broader range of market conditions and to counterparty and operational risks and thus the financial performance of Barclays Bank PLC may be subject to greater fluctuations relative to that

of the Group as a whole or that of the ring-fenced bank;

more dependent on wholesale funding sources, as the UK retail deposit base will be transferred to the ring-fenced bank. The UK retail mortgage assets will also be transferred to the ring-fenced bank, which reduces Barclays Bank PLC’s access to funding sources reliant on residential mortgage collateral. The Barclays Bank PLC Group may therefore experience more difficult financing conditions and/or higher costs of funding including in situations of stress. As a result of the implementation of ring-fencing, different Group entities, such as Barclays Bank PLC, may be assessed differently by credit rating agencies, which may result in different, and possibly more negative, assessments of Barclays Bank PLC’s credit and thus in lower credit ratings than the credit ratings of the Group, which in turn could adversely affect the sources and costs of funding for Barclays Bank PLC; and

potentially subject to different regulatory obligations, including different liquidity requirements and capital buffers.

As a result of any or all of the foregoing, implementation of ring-fencing may adversely affect the market value and/or liquidity of securities issued by Barclays Bank PLC.

Material existing and emerging risks impacting individual Principal Risks

i) Credit risk

a) Impairment

The introduction of the impairment requirements ofIFRS 9 Financial Instruments, implemented on 1 January 2018, results in higher impairment loss allowances that are recognised earlier, on a more forward looking basis and on a broader scope of financial instruments than is the case under IAS 39 and, as a result, ofwill have a reduction in recoverability and value ofmaterial impact on the Group’s assets, coupledfinancial condition. Measurement involves increased complex judgement and impairment charges will tend to be more volatile. Unsecured products with a decline in collateral values.

Interest rate increases in developed markets may also negativelylonger expected lives, such as revolving credit cards, are the most impacted. The capital treatment on the increased reserves has the potential to adversely impact emerging economies, asregulatory capital flowsratios. In addition, the move from incurred to mature marketsexpected credit losses has the potential to take advantage ofimpact the higher returns and strengtheningGroup’s performance under stressed economic fundamentals.conditions or regulatory stress tests. For more information please refer to Note 1 on pages 195 to 200.

ii)b) Specific sectors

The Group is subject to risks arising from changes in credit quality and recovery rate of loans and advances due from borrowers and counterparties in a specific portfolio. Any deterioration in credit quality could lead to lower recoverability and higher impairment in a specific sector. The following provides examples ofare areas of uncertainties to the Group’s portfolio which could have a material impact on performance.

UK real estate market.With UK property representing a significant portion of the overall UK Corporate and Retail credit exposure, the Group is at risk from a fall in property prices in both the residential and commercial sectors in the UK.

a) UK property

With UK property representing the most significant portion of the overall PCB credit exposure, the Group is at risk from a fall in property prices in both the residential and commercial sectors in the UK. Strong house price growth in London and the South East of the UK, fuelled by foreign investment, strong buy to letbuy-to-let (BTL) demand and subdued housing supply, has resulted in affordability levels reaching record levels; averagemetrics becoming stretched. Average house prices as at the end of 20152017 were more than seven5.6 times average earnings. A fall in house prices, particularly in London and the South East of the UK, would lead to higher impairment and negative capital impact as loss given default (LGD) rates increase. Potential losses would likely be most pronounced in the higher loan to value (LTV) segments.

The proposal on BTL properties announced by the UK Chancellor of the Exchequer in 2015, changing both the level of tax relief on rental income and increasing levels of stamp duty from April 2016, may cause some dislocation in the BTL market. Possible impacts include a reduced appetite in the BTL market and an influx of properties for sale causing downward pricing pressure, as well as reduced affordability as increased tax liabilities reduce net retail yields. As a consequence this may lead to an increase in BTL defaults at a time when market values may be suppressed, with the potential that, while the Group carefully manages such exposures, it may experience increased credit losses and impairment from loans with high LTV ratios.

b) Natural Resources (emerging risk)

The risk of losses and increased impairment is more pronounced where leverage is higher, or in sectors currently subject to strain, notably oil and gas, mining and metals and commodities. Sustained oil price depression continues and is driven by ongoing global excess supply. While the positioning of these portfolios is relatively defensive and focuses on investment grade customers or collateralised positions, very severe stress in this market does have the potential to significantly increase credit losses and impairment.

 

 Barclays PLCLarge single name losses.The Group has large individual exposures to single name counterparties both in its lending activities and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Reportin its financial services and trading activities, including transactions in derivatives and transactions with brokers, central clearing houses, dealers, other banks, mutual and hedge funds and other institutional clients. The default of such counterparties could have a significant impact on Form 20-F  |  87the carrying value of these assets. In addition, where such counterparty risk has been mitigated by taking collateral, credit risk may remain high if the collateral held cannot be realised, or has to be liquidated at prices which are insufficient to recover the full amount of the loan or derivative exposure. Any such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results due to, for example, increased credit losses and higher impairment charges.


 

Leverage finance underwriting.The Group takes on sub-investment grade underwriting exposure, including single name risk, particularly in the US and Europe. The Group is exposed to credit events and market volatility during the underwriting period. Any adverse events during this period may potentially result in loss for the Group, mainly through Barclays International, or an increased capital requirement should there be a need to hold the exposure for an extended period.

c) Large single name lossesii) Market risk

The Group has large individual exposures to single name counterparties. The default of such counterparties could haveMarket volatility

Elevated market volatility, which can be triggered and/or aggravated by disappointment in economic data, divergent monetary policies, political uncertainty or conflicts, would likely entail a significant impactdeflation of assets which in turn may put under strain counterparties and have knock-on effects on the carrying value of these assets. bank.

In addition, where such counterparty risk has been mitigated by taking collateral, credit risk may remain high if the collateral held cannot be realised, or has to be liquidated at prices which are insufficient to recover the full amount of the loan or derivative exposure. Any such defaults could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s results due to, for example, increased credit losses and higher impairment charges.

d) Leverage Finance underwriting

The Group takes on significant sub-investment grade underwriting exposure, including single name risk, particularly focused in the US and Europe and to a lesser extent in South Africa and other regions. The Group is exposed to credit events and market volatility during the underwriting period. Any adverse events during this period may potentially result in loss for the Group or an increased capital requirement should there be a need to hold the exposure for an extended period.

Market risk

The Group’s financial position may be adversely affected by changes in both the level and volatility of prices leading to lower revenues, or reduced capital:

i) Concerns of major unexpected changes in monetary policy and quantitative easing programmes, foreign exchange movements or slowdown in emerging market economies spilling over to global markets (emerging risk)

The trading business model is focused on client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution.

The Group’s trading business is generally exposed to a rapid unwindingprolonged period of quantitative easing programmes and deterioration inelevated asset price volatility, particularly if it negatively affects the macro environment driven by concerns in global growth. An extremely high leveldepth of volatility in asset pricesmarketplace liquidity. Such a scenario could affect market liquidity and cause excess market volatility, impactingimpact the Group’s ability to execute client trades and may also result in lower client flow-driven income and/or market-based losses on its existing portfolio losses.

A sudden and adverse volatility in interest or foreign currency exchange rates also has the potentialof market risks. These can include having to detrimentally impact the Group’s incomeabsorb higher hedging costs from non-trading activity.

This is because the Group has exposure to non-traded interest rate risk, arising from the provision of retail and wholesale non-traded banking products and services, including, products which do not have a defined maturity date and have an interest raterebalancing risks that does not change in line with base rate movements, e.g. current accounts. The level and volatility of interest rates can impact the Group’s net interest margin, which is the interest rate spread earned between lending and borrowing costs. The potential for future volatility and margin changes remains in key areas such as in the UK benchmark interest rate to the extent such volatility and margin changes are not fully addressed by hedging programmes.

The Group is also at risk from movements in foreign currency exchange rates as these impact the sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated assets in the banking book, exposing it to currency translation risk.

ii) Adverse movements in the pension fund

Adverse movements between pension assets and liabilities for defined benefit pension schemes could contribute to a pension deficit. The liabilities discount rate is a key driver and, in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IAS 19), is derived from the yields of high quality corporate bonds (deemedneed to be those with AA ratings)managed dynamically as market levels and consequently includes exposure to both risk-free yieldstheir associated volatilities change.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    81


Risk review

Material existing and credit spreads. Therefore, the Group’s defined benefits scheme valuation would be adversely affected by a prolonged fall in the discount rate or a persistent low rate and/or credit spread environment. Inflation is another significant risk driver to the pension fund, as the liabilities are adversely impacted by an increase in long term inflation expectation. However in the long term, inflation and rates risk tend to be negatively correlated and therefore partially offset each other.emerging risks

Fundingiii) Treasury and capital risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage), liquidity and other regulatory requirements.

The Group may not be able to achieve its business plans due to: i)to, among other things: a) being unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios; ii)b) being unable to meet its obligations as they fall due; iii)c) rating agency methodology changes resulting in ratings downgrades; and iv)d) adverse changes in foreign exchange rates on capital ratios.ratios; e) adverse movements in the pension fund; f) non-traded market risk/interest rate risk in the banking book.

i) a) Inability to maintain prudential ratios and other regulatory requirements

Inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios

Should the Group be unable to maintain or achieve appropriate capital ratios this could lead to: an inability to support business activity; a failure to meet regulatory capital requirements including any additional capital add-ons or the requirements of regulator set for regulatory stress tests; increased cost of funding due to deterioration in investor appetite or credit ratings; restrictions on distributions including the ability to meet dividend targets; and/or the need to take additional measures to strengthen the Group’s capital or leverage position. While the requirements in CRD IV are now in force in the UK, further changes to capital requirements could occur, whether as a result of (i) further changes to EU legislation by EU legislators (for example, implementation of Bank of International Settlements (BIS) regulatory update recommendations), (ii) relevant binding regulatory technical standards updates by the European Banking Authority (EBA), (iii) changes to UK legislation by the UK government, (iv) changes to PRA rules by the PRA, or (v) additional capital requirements through Financial Policy Committee (FPC) recommendations. Such changes, either individually and/or in aggregate, may lead to further unexpected additional requirements in relation to the Group’s regulatory capital.

Additional prudential requirements may also arise from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and the US proposals on bank structural reform and current proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the BoE proposals on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in December 2015. The BoE stated its intentions to communicate MREL requirements to UK banks during 2016. Many of the proposals are still subject to finalisation and implementation and may have a different impact when in final form. The impact of these proposals is still being assessed. Overall, it is likely that these changes in law and regulation will have an impact on the Group as they are likely, when implemented, to require changes to the legal entity structure of the Group and how businesses are capitalised and funded. Any such increased prudential requirements may also constrain the Group’s planned activities, lead to forced asset sales and balance sheet reductions and could increase the Group’s costs, impact on the Group’s earnings and restrict the Group’s ability to pay dividends. Moreover, during periods of market dislocation, as currently seen, or when there is significant competition for the type of funding that the Group needs, increasing the Group’s capital resources in order to meet targets may prove more difficult and/or costly.

ii)b) Inability to manage liquidity and funding risk effectively

FailureInability to manage its liquidity and funding risk effectively may result in the Group either not having sufficient financial resources to meet its payment obligations as they fall due or, although solvent, only being able to meet these obligations at excessive cost. This could cause the Group to fail to meet regulatory liquidity standards, be unable to support day-to-day banking activities (including meeting deposit withdrawals or funding new loans) or no longer be a going concern.

The stability of the Group’s current funding profile, in particular that part which is based on accounts and savings deposits payable on demand or at short notice, could be affected by the Group failing to preserve the current level of customer and investor confidence. The Group also regularly accesses the capital markets to provide long-term funding to support its operations. Several factors, including adverse macroeconomic conditions, adverse outcomes in legal, regulatory or conduct matters and loss of confidence by investors, counterparties and/ or customers in the Group, can affect the ability of the Group to access the capital markets and/ or the cost and other terms upon which the Group is able to obtain market funding.

iii)c) Credit rating changes and the impact on funding costs

AAny potential or actual credit rating assesses the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and is based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, liquidity, accounting and governance. Any adverse event to one or more of these attributes may lead to a downgrade, which in turnagency downgrades could result in contractual outflows to meet contractual requirements on existing contracts.

88  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks tosignificantly increase the Group’s future performance

Furthermore, outflows related to a multiple notchborrowing costs, credit rating downgrade are included in the LRA stress scenariosspreads and a portion of the liquidity pool held against this risk. There is a risk that any potential downgrades could impactmaterially adversely affect the Group’s performance should borrowing costsinterest margins and liquidity changeposition which may, as a result, significantly versusdiverge from current expectations.

For further information, please refer to Credit Ratings in Such adverse changes would also have a negative impact on the Liquidity Risk Performance section on page 166.Group’s overall performance.

iv)d) Adverse changes in foreign exchangeFX rates onimpacting capital ratios

The Group has capital resources, and risk weighted assets and leverage exposures denominated in

foreign currencies. Therefore changesChanges in foreign currency exchange rates may adversely impact the sterlingSterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and risk weighted assets.these items. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements, and aany failure to appropriately manage the Group’s balance sheet to take account of foreign currency movements could result in an adverse impact on regulatory capital and leverage ratios.

e) Adverse movements in the pension fund

Adverse movements in pension assets and liabilities for defined benefit pension schemes could result in a pension deficit which, depending on the specific circumstance, may require the Group to make substantial additional contributions to its pension plans. The liabilities discount rate is a key driver and, in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IAS 19), is derived from the yields of high quality corporate bonds (deemed to be those with AA ratings) and consequently includes exposure to both UK sovereign gilt yields and corporate credit spreads.

Therefore, the valuation of the Group’s defined benefits schemes would be adversely affected by a prolonged fall in the discount rate due to a persistent low rate and/or credit spread environment. Inflation is another significant risk driver to the pension fund, as the liabilities are adversely impacted by an increase in long-term inflation expectations.

f) Non-traded market risk/interest rate risk in the banking book

A liquidity buffer investment return shortfall could increase the Bank’s cost of funds and impact the capital ratios. The impact is difficult to predict with any accuracy, but it may have a material adverse effectBank’s structural hedge programmes for interest rate risk in the banking book rely heavily on the Group if capital and leverage ratios fall below required levels.

Operational risk

The operational risk profile of the Group may changebehavioural assumptions, as a result, the success of human factors, inadequatethe hedging strategy is not guaranteed. A potential mismatch in the balance or failed internal processes and systems, or external events.duration of the hedge assumptions could lead to earnings deterioration.

iv) Operational risk

a) Cyber threat

The Group is exposed to many typesfrequency of operational risk. This includes: fraudulent and other internal and external criminal activities; breakdowns in processes, controls or procedures (or their inadequacy relative to the size and scope of the Group’s business); systems failures or an attempt, by an external party, to make a service or supporting infrastructure unavailable to its intended users, and the risk of geopolitical cyber threat activity which destabilises or destroys the Group’s information technology, or critical infrastructure the Group depends upon but does not control. The Group is also subject to the risk of business disruption arising from events wholly or partially beyond its control, for example, natural disasters, acts of terrorism, epidemics and transport or utility failures, which may give rise to losses or reductions in service to customers and/or economic loss to the Group. All of these risks are also applicable where the Group relies on outside suppliers or vendors to provide services to it and its customers. The operational risks that the Group is exposed to could change rapidly and there is no guarantee that the Group’s processes, controls, procedures and systems are sufficient to address, or could adapt promptly to, such changing risks to avoid the risk of loss.

i) Cyber attacks (emerging risk)

The risk posed by cyber attacks continues to grow. grow on an annual basis and is a global threat and is inherent across all industries, including the financial sector. As the financial sector remains a primary target for cyber criminals, 2017 saw a number of highly publicised attacks involving ransomware, theft of intellectual property, customer data and service unavailability across a wide range of organisations.

The proliferationcyber threat increases the inherent risk to the availability of online marketplaces trading criminalthe Group’s services and stolento the Group’s data has reduced barriers of entry for criminals to perpetrate cyber attacks, while at the same time increasing motivation.

Attacker capabilities continue to evolve as demonstrated by a marked increase in denial of service attacks, and increased sophistication of targeted fraud attacks by organised criminal networks. We face a growing threat to our information (whether it is held by usthe Group or in ourits supply chain), to the integrity of our financial transactions, and to the availability of our services. All of these necessitate a broad intelligence and response capability.

Given the level of increasing global sophistication and scope of potential cyber attacks, future attacks may lead to significant breaches of security which jeopardise the sensitive information and financial transactions of the Group, its clients, counterparties or customers, or cause disruption to systems performing critical functions.and customers. Failure to adequately manage cyber threatsthis threat and to continually reviewevolve enterprise security and update processes inprovide an active cyber security response to new threatscapability could result in increased fraud losses, inability to perform critical economic functions, customer detriment, potential regulatory

censure and penalty, legal liability, reduction in shareholder value and reputational damage.

b) Service resilience

Loss of or disruption to the Group’s business processing, whether arising through impacts on technology systems, real estate services, personnel availability or the support of major suppliers, represents a material inherent risk theme for the Group.

Building resilience into business processes and into the services of technology, real estate and suppliers on which those processes depend can reduce disruption to the Group’s business activities or avoid it altogether. Failure to do so may result in significant customer detriment, cost to reimburse losses incurred by our customers, potential regulatory censure or penalty, and reputational damage.

c) Outsourcing

The Group depends on suppliers for the provision of many of its services and the development of future technology driven product propositions, though the Group continues to be accountable for risk arising from the actions of such suppliers. Failure to monitor and control the Group’s suppliers could potentially lead to client information, or critical infrastructures and services, not being adequately protected or available when required.

The dependency on suppliers and sub-contracting of outsourced services introduces concentration risk where the failure of specific suppliers could have an impact on our ability to continue to provide services that are material to the Group, especially for those individual businesses within the Group to which many services are provided centrally by the newly established Group Service Company.

Failure to adequately manage outsourcing risk through control environments which remain robust to ever changing threats and challenges could result in increased losses, inability to perform critical economic functions, customer detriment, potential regulatory censure and penalty, legal liability and reputational damage.

ii) Infrastructured) Operational precision and technology resiliencepayments

As the dependency on digital channels and other technologies grows, the impact of technology issues can become more material and immediate. This is also the case in many other industries and organisations but particularly impactful in the banking sector.

The Group’srisk of material errors in operational processes, including payments, are exacerbated during the present period of significant levels of structural and regulatory change, the evolving technology real-estatelandscape, and supplier infrastructure is criticala transition to the operation of its businesses and to the delivery of products and services to customers and clients and to meet our market integrity obligations. Sustained disruption to services provided by Barclays, either directlydigital channel capabilities.

Material operational or through third parties,payment errors could have a significant impact to customers and todisadvantage the Group’s reputationcustomers, clients or counterparties and may also lead to potentially large costs to rectify the issue and reimburse losses incurred by customers, as well as possiblecould result in regulatory censure and penalties.penalties, legal liability, reputational damage and financial loss by the bank.

iii)e) New and emergent technology

Technological advancements present opportunities to develop new and innovative ways of doing business across the Group, with new solutions being developed both in-house and in association with third party companies. Introducing new forms of technology has the potential to increase inherent risk.

82    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Failure to closely monitor risk exposure could lead to customer detriment, loss of business, regulatory censure, missed business opportunity and reputational damage.

f) Fraud

Fraud is a constantly evolving risk to the Group. This is exacerbated during periods of significant change, including the digitisation of products, which carry higher levels of inherent risk. As the Group continues to invest in new and upgraded fraud systems, criminals continually adapt and become ever more sophisticated in their approach. Risks from social engineering and attempts to trick customers into authorising payments also continue to grow and increasing regulatory focus is placing more responsibility on the industry to protect consumers.

In addition, internal fraud arising from areas such as failure of the Group’s trading controls could result in high profile material losses together with regulatory censure / penalties and significant reputational damage.

g) Ability to hire and retain appropriately qualified employees

The Group requireshas resource requirements to support existing revenue streams, moves into new business models and to deliver complex multi-year regulatory commitments and mandatory change. These commitments require diversified and specialist skilled colleagues and Barclays’ ability to attract, develop and retain such a diverse mix of highly skilledtalent is key to the delivery of its core business activity and qualified colleagues to deliver its strategy and so is dependent on attracting and retaining appropriately qualified individuals. Barclays ability to attract and retain such talentstrategy. This is impacted by a range of external and internal factors.

External regulatory changesregulation such as the introduction of the Individual Accountability Regime and the required deferral and claw backclawback provisions of our compensation arrangements may make Barclays a less attractive proposition relative to both our international competitors and other industries. Similarly, meeting the requirementsimpact of structural reform may increaseexit of the competitivenessUK from the EU, in March 2019 (see Process of UK withdrawal from the market for talent. Internally, restructuring of our businesses and functions, and an increased focusEuropean Union on costs may allpage 79), could potentially have ana more immediate impact on employee engagementour ability to hire and retention.retain key employees.

Failure to attract or prevent the departure of appropriately qualified and skilled employees who are dedicated to overseeing and managing current and future regulatory standards and expectations, or who have the necessary diversified skills required to deliver the Group strategy, could negatively impact our financial performance, control environment and level of employee engagement. Additionally, this may result in disruption to service which could in turn lead to disenfranchising certain customer groups, customer detriment and reputational damage.

iv) Losses due to additional tax chargesh) Tax risk

The Group is subjectrequired to comply with the domestic and international tax laws inand practice of all countries in which it operates, including tax laws adopted at the EU level, andhas business operations. There is impacted by a number of double taxation agreements between countries. There is risk that the Group could suffer losses due to additional tax charges, other financial costs or reputational damage due toas a rangeresult of possible factors. This includes a failurefailing to comply with such laws and

practice, or correctly assessby failing to manage its tax affairs in an appropriate manner, with much of this risk attributable to the applicationinternational structure of relevantthe Group. The Tax Cuts and Jobs Act has introduced substantial changes to the US tax law,system, including the introduction of a failure to deal withnew tax, authorities inthe Base Erosion Anti-Abuse Tax. These changes have increased the Group’s tax compliance obligations and require a timelynumber of system and effective manner or an incorrect calculationprocess changes which introduce additional operational risk. In addition, increasing customer tax reporting requirements around the world and the digitisation of the administration of tax estimates for reported and forecast tax numbers. Such charges, or the conduct of any dispute with a relevant tax authority, could leadhas potential to adverse publicity, reputational damage and potentially to costs materially exceeding current provisions, which could have an adverse effect onincrease the Group’s operations, financial conditions and prospects.tax compliance burden further.

v)i) Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying relevant accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements include provisions for conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters, fair value of financial instruments, credit impairment charges for amortised cost assets, impairment and valuationtaxes, fair value of available for sale investments, calculation of current and deferred tax and accounting forfinancial instruments, pensions and post-retirements benefits.post-retirement benefits, and provisions including conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters. There is a risk that if the judgement exercised, or the estimates or assumptions used, subsequently turn out to be incorrect, this could result in significant loss to the Group, beyond what was anticipated or provided for.

As part of the assets in the Non-Core business, the Group holds a UK portfolio of generally longer term loans to counterparties in ESHLA sectors, which are measured on a fair value basis. The valuation of this portfolio is subject to substantial uncertainty due to the long dated nature of the portfolios, the lack of a secondary market in the relevant loans and unobservable loan spreads. As a result of these factors, the Group may be required to revise the fair values of these portfolios to reflect, among other things, changes in valuation methodologies due to

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  89


changes in industry valuation practices and as further market evidence is obtained in connection with the Non-Core asset rundown and exit process. For further information refer to Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilities of the Group’s consolidated financial statements.

The further development of standards and interpretations under IFRS could also significantly impact the financial results, condition and prospects of the Group.

j) Data management & information protection

The introductionGroup holds and processes large volumes of data, including personally identifiable information, intellectual property, and financial data. Failure to accurately collect and maintain this data, protect it from breaches of confidentiality and interference with its availability exposes the Bank to the risk of loss or unavailability of data (including customer data covered under vi), c) Data protection and privacy below), data integrity issues and could result in regulatory censure, legal liability and reputational damage.

v) Model risk

a)Enhanced model risk management requirements

Barclays relies on models to support a broad range of business and risk management activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures (including the calculation of impairment), conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, supporting new business acceptance and risk/ reward evaluation, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements.

Models are, by their nature, imperfect and incomplete representations of reality because they rely on assumptions and inputs, and so

they may be subject to errors affecting the accuracy of their outputs. For instance, the quality of the impairment requirementsdata used in models across Barclays has a material impact on the accuracy and completeness of IFRS 9 Financial Instruments willour risk and financial metrics.

Models may also be misused. Model errors or misuse may result in impairmentthe Group making inappropriate business decisions and being recognised earlier thansubject to financial loss, regulatory risk, reputational risk and/or inadequate capital reporting.

vi) Conduct risk

There is the case under IAS 39 becauserisk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays from the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct. This risk could manifest itself in a variety of ways:

a) Product governance and life cycle

Ineffective product governance, including design, approval and review of products, inappropriate controls over internal and third party sales channels and post sales services could lead to poor customer outcomes, as well as regulatory sanctions, financial loss and reputational damage.

b) Financial crime

The Group may be adversely affected if it requires expected lossesfails to effectively mitigate the risk that its employees or third parties facilitate, or that its products and services are used to facilitate financial crime (money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption and sanctions evasion). A major focus of US and UK government policy relating to financial institutions continues to be recognised beforecombating money laundering and enforcing compliance with US and EU economic sanctions. The failure to comply with such regulations may result in enforcement actions by the loss event arises. Measurement will involve increased complexityregulators and judgement including estimationin the imposition of probabilities of defaults, losses given default,severe penalties, with a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at defaultconsequential impact on the Group’s reputation and assessing increases in credit risk. It is expected to have a material financial impact, but it will not be practical to disclose reliable financial impact estimates until the implementation programme is further advanced.results.

For more information please referc) Data protection and privacy

Proper handling of personal data is critical to Note 1 Significant accounting policiessustaining long-term relationships with our customers and clients and to meeting privacy laws and obligations. Failure to protect personal data can lead to potential detriment to our customers and clients, reputational damage, regulatory sanctions and financial loss, which under the new EU Data Protection Regulation may be substantial.

d) Regulatory focus on pagesculture and accountability218

Regulators around the world continue to 220.emphasise the importance of culture and personal accountability and the adoption and enforcement of adequate internal reporting and whistleblowing procedures in helping to promote appropriate conduct and drive positive outcomes for customers, clients and markets. Failure to meet the requirements and expectations of the UK Senior Managers Regime, Certification Regime and Conduct Rules may lead to regulatory sanctions, both for the individuals and the firm.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    83


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

vii) Reputation risk

vi)a) Barclays’ association with sensitive sectors and its impact on reputation

A risk arising in one business area can have an adverse effect upon Barclays’ overall reputation; any one transaction, investment or event that, in the perception of key stakeholders reduces their trust in the Group’s integrity and competence, has the potential to give rise to reputation risk for Barclays and may result in loss of business, regulatory censure and missed business opportunity.

Barclays’ association with sensitive sectors is an area of concern for stakeholders and the following topics are of regular interest:

Disclosure of climate risks and opportunities, including the activities of certain sections of the client base. This is becoming the subject of increased scrutiny from regulators, NGOs and other stakeholders.

The risks of association with human rights violations through the perceived indirect involvement in human rights abuses committed by clients and customers.

The manufacture and export of military and riot control goods and services by clients and customers.

viii) Legal risk and legal, competition and regulatory matters

Legal disputes, regulatory investigations, fines and other sanctions relating to conduct of business and financial crimebreaches of legislation and/or regulations may negatively affect the Group’s results, reputation and ability to conduct its business. Legal outcomes can arise as a consequence of legal risk or because of past and future actions, behaviours and business decisions as a result of other Principal Risks.

The Group conducts diverse activities in a highly regulated global market and therefore is therefore exposed to the risk of fines and other sanctions relating to the conduct of its business. In recent years, authorities have increasingly investigated past practices, vigorously pursued alleged breaches and imposed heavy penalties on financial services firms. This trend is expected to continue. In relation to financial crime, aA breach of applicable legislation and/or regulations could result in the Group or its staff being subject to criminal prosecution, regulatory censure, fines and other sanctions in the jurisdictions in which it operates, particularly in the UK and the US. Where clients, customers or other third parties are harmed by the Group’s conduct, this may also give rise to legal proceedings, including class actions. Other legal disputes may also arise between the Group and third parties relating to matters such as breaches, enforcement of legal rights or obligations arising under contracts, statutes or common law. Adverse findings in any such matters may result in the Group being liable to third parties seeking damages, or may result in the Group’s rights not being enforced as intended.

Details of material legal, competition and regulatory matters to which the Group is currently exposed are set out in Note29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters. 29. In addition to those material ongoing matters specifically described in Note 29, the Group is engaged in various other legal proceedings in

the UK and US and a number of other overseas jurisdictions which arise in the ordinary course of business. The Group is also subject to requests for information, investigations and other reviews by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged. In light ofThe Group is cooperating with the uncertainties involvedrelevant authorities and keeping all relevant agencies briefed as appropriate in legal, competitionrelation to these matters and regulatory matters, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s results, operations or cash flow for a particular period, dependingothers described in Note 29 on among other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the period.an ongoing basis.

The outcome of material, legal, competition and regulatory matters, both those to which the Group is currently exposed and any others which may arise in the future, is difficult to predict. However, it is likely that in connection with any such matters the Group willmay incur significant expense, regardless of the ultimate outcome, and any such matters could expose the Group to any of the following:following outcomes: substantial monetary damages, settlements and/or fines; remediation of affected customers and clients; other penalties and injunctive relief; additional litigation; criminal prosecution in certain circumstances; the loss of any existing agreed protection from prosecution; regulatory restrictions on the Group’s business operations including the withdrawal of authorisations; increased regulatory compliance requirements; suspension of operations; public reprimands; loss of significant assets or business; a

negative effect on the Group’s reputation; loss of investor confidence by investors, counterparties, clients and or customers; risk of credit rating agency downgrades; potential negative impact on the availability and/or cost of funding and liquidity; and/or dismissal or resignation of key individuals. In light of the uncertainties involved in legal, competition and regulatory matters, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s results of operations or cash flow for a particular period, depending on, among other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the period.

In January 2017, Barclays PLC was sentenced to serve three years of probation from the date of the sentencing order in accordance with the terms of its May 2015 plea agreement with the DOJ. During the term of probation Barclays PLC must, among other things, (i) commit no crime whatsoever in violation of the federal laws of the US, (ii) implement and continue to implement a compliance program designed to prevent and detect the conduct that gave rise to the plea agreement and (iii) strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by relevant regulatory or enforcement agencies. Potential consequences of breaching the plea agreement include the imposition of additional terms and conditions on the Group, an extension of the agreement, or the criminal prosecution of Group entities, which could, in turn, entail further financial penalties and collateral consequences and have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, operating results or financial position.

There is also a risk that the outcome of any legal, competition or regulatory matters in

which the Group is involved may give rise to changes in law or regulation as part of a wider response by relevant law makers and regulators. An adverseA decision in any one matter, either against the Group or another financial institution facing similar claims, could lead to further claims against the Group.

vii) Risks arising from regulation of the financial services industry

The financial services industry continues to be the focus of significant regulatory change and scrutiny which may adversely affect the Group’s business, financial performance, capital and risk management strategies. For further information on regulations affecting the Group, including significant regulatory developments, see the section on Supervision and Regulation.

a) Regulatory change

The Group, in common with much of the financial services industry, remains subject to significant levels of regulatory change and increasing scrutiny in many of the countries in which it operates (including, in particular, the UK and the US). This has led to a more intensive approach to supervision and oversight, increased expectations and enhanced requirements. As a result, regulatory risk will remain a focus for senior management and consume significant levels of business resources. Furthermore, this more intensive approach and the enhanced requirements, uncertainty and extent of international regulatory coordination as enhanced supervisory standards are developed and implemented may adversely affect the Group’s business, capital and risk management strategies and/or may result in the Group deciding to modify its legal entity structure, capital and funding structures and business mix, or to exit certain business activities altogether or not to expand in areas despite otherwise attractive potential.

b) Changes in prudential requirements, including changes to CRD IV

The Group’s results and ability to conduct its business may be negatively affected by changes to, or additional supervisory expectations.

In July 2015, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE published a policy statement directing the PRA to require all major UK banks and building societies to hold enough Tier 1 capital to satisfy a minimum leverage ratio of 3% and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 35% of the institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate. The FPC also directed that UK G-SIBs and domestically systemically important banks should meet a supplementary leverage buffer ratio of 35% of corresponding risk-weighted capital buffer rates. The PRA published a policy statement, finalised rules and a supervisory statement implementing the FPC’s directions in December 2015 and the new leverage ratio framework came into force on 1 January 2016.

In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, which will take effect in 2019. Barclays continues to monitor the potential effects on its capital position arising from these rules and from (i) revisions to the BCBS’s standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk; and (ii) the BCBS considering the position regarding the limitation of the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and applying RWA floors based on the standardised approaches.

Changes to, or additional supervisory expectations, in relation to capital and/or leverage ratio requirements either individually or in aggregate, may lead to unexpected enhanced requirements in relation to the Group’s capital, leverage, liquidity and funding ratios or alter the way such ratios are calculated. This may result in a need for further management actions to meet the changed requirements, such as: increasing capital or liquidity resources, reducing leverage and risk weighted assets; modifying legal entity structure (including with regard to issuance and deployment of capital and funding for the Group); changing the Group’s business mix or exiting other businesses; and/or undertaking other actions to strengthen the Group’s position.

90  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

c) Market infrastructure reforms

The derivatives markets are subject to extensive and increasing regulation in many of the Group’s markets, including, in particular, Europe pursuant to the European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) and in the US under the Dodd Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (DFA). Certain of these increased regulatory requirements have already come into force, with further provisions expected to become effective in stages, including through a new recast version of the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive and a new regulation (the Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation) in Europe.

It is possible that additional regulations, and the related expenses and requirements, will increase the cost of and restrict participation in the derivatives markets, thereby increasing the costs of engaging in hedging or other transactions and reducing liquidity and the use of the derivatives markets.

Changes in regulation of the derivatives markets could adversely affect the business of the Group and its affiliates in these markets and could make it more difficult and expensive to conduct hedging and trading activities, which could in turn reduce the demand for swap dealer and similar services of the Group and its subsidiaries. In addition, as a result of these increased costs, the new regulation of the derivatives markets may also result in the Group deciding to reduce its activity in these markets.

d) Recovery and resolution planning

There continues to be a strong regulatory focus on ‘resolvability’ from regulators, particularly in the UK, the US and South Africa. The Group made its first formal Recovery and Resolution Plan (RRP) submissions to the UK and US regulators in mid-2012 and made its first Recovery Plan submission to the South African regulators in 2013. Barclays continues to work with the relevant authorities to identify and address potential impediments to the Group’s ‘resolvability’.

In the UK, RRP work is considered part of continuing supervision. Removal of potential impediments to an orderly resolution of the Group or one or more of its subsidiaries is considered as part of the BoE and PRA’s supervisory strategy for each firm, and the PRA can require firms to make significant changes in order to enhance resolvability. Barclays provides the PRA with a Recovery Plan annually and with a Resolution Pack every other year.

In the US, Barclays is one of several systemically important banks required to file resolution plans with the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) and the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) (collectively, the Agencies) under provisions of the DFA. Pursuant to the resolution plan regulation in the US, a joint determination by the Agencies that a resolution plan is not credible or would not facilitate an orderly resolution under the US Bankruptcy Code may result in a bank being made subject to more stringent capital, leverage, or liquidity requirements, or restrictions on growth, activities or operations in the US.

Additionally, there are further resolution-related proposals in the US, such as the Federal Reserve’s proposed regulation requiring internal total loss absorbing capital (TLAC) for Barclays’ US Intermediate Holding Company (IHC) that will be established during 2016, and increased record keeping and reporting requirements for obligations under qualified financial contracts (QFC proposal) that may, depending on final rules, materially increase the operational and financing costs of Barclays’ US operations.

In South Africa, the South African Treasury and the South Africa Reserve Bank are considering material new legislation and regulation to adopt a resolution and depositor guarantee scheme in alignment with FSB principles. Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) and its primary subsidiary Absa Bank Limited, will be subject to these schemes when they are adopted. It is not clear what shape these schemes will take, or when the schemes will be adopted, but current proposals for a funded deposit insurance scheme and for operational continuity may result in material increases in operational and financing costs for the BAGL group.

While the Group believes that it is making good progress in reducing potential impediments to resolution, should the relevant authorities ultimately determine that the Group or any significant subsidiary could

not be resolved in an orderly manner, the impact of potential structural changes that may be required to address such a determination (whether in connection with RRP or other structural reform initiatives) may impact capital, liquidity and leverage ratios, as well as the overall profitability of the Group, for example, due to duplicated infrastructure costs, lost cross-rate revenues and/or additional funding costs.

viii) Regulatory action in the event of a bank failure

The EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) contains provisions similar to the Banking Act on a European level, many of which augment and increase the powers which national regulators are required to have in the event of a bank failure.

The UK Banking Act 2009, as amended (the Banking Act) provides for a regime to allow the BoE (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury) to resolve failing banks in the UK. Under the Banking Act, these authorities are given powers to make share transfer orders and property transfer orders. Amendments introduced by the Banking Reform Act gave the BoE statutory bail-in power from 1 January 2015. This power enables the BoE to recapitalise a failed institution by allocating losses to its shareholders and unsecured creditors. It also allows the BoE to cancel liabilities or modify the terms of contracts for the purposes of reducing or deferring the liabilities of the bank under resolution, and gives it the power to convert liabilities into another form (e.g. equity). In addition to the bail-in power, relevant UK resolution authorities are granted additional powers under the Banking Act including powers to direct the sale or transfer of a relevant financial institution or all or part of its business in certain circumstances. Further, parallel developments such as the implementation in the UK of the FSB’s TLAC requirements may result in increased risks that a bank would become subject to resolution authority requirements by regulators seeking to comply with international standards in this area. Please see Funding risk, inability to maintain appropriate prudential ratios on page 88.

If any of these powers were to be exercised, or there is an increased risk of exercise, in respect of the Group or any entity within the Group, this might result in a material adverse effect on the rights or interests of shareholders and creditors including holders of debt securities and/or could have a material adverse effect on the market price of shares and other securities issued by the Group. Such effects could include losses of shareholdings/associated rights including, the dilution of percentage ownership of the Group’s share capital, and may result in creditors, including debt holders, losing all or a part of their investment in the Group’s securities.

Conduct risk

Barclays is committed to Group-wide changes to business practices, governance and mindset and behaviours so that good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity are integral to the way Barclays operates. Improving our reputation will demonstrate to customers that in Barclays they have a partner they can trust. Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to the Group’s customers, clients, counterparties or the Group itself because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

During 2015 potential customer impact and reputation risk inherent in varied emerging risks has been managed across the Group and escalated to senior management for discussion. These risks will remain prevalent in 2016 and beyond and the most significant of these include:

i) Organisational change

The Group is at risk of not being able to meet customer and regulatory expectations due to a failure to appropriately manage the: i) complexity in business practice, processes and systems; ii) challenges faced in product suitability, automation and portfolio-level risk monitoring; iii) resilience of its technology; and, iv) execution strategy, including the failure to fulfil the high level of operational precision required for effective execution in order to deliver positive customer outcomes.

ii) Legacy issues

Barclays remains at risk from the potential outcomes of a number of investigations relating to our past conduct. While we are continuing to embed cultural change and improved governance, many stakeholders

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  91


will remain sceptical and so until there is clear and sustained evidence of consistent cultural and behavioural change, the risk to Barclays’ reputation will remain. Barclays continues to work to rebuild customer trust and market confidence impacted by legacy issues.

For further information in respect of such investigations and related litigation and discussion of the associated uncertainties, please see the Legal, competition and regulatory matters note on page 261.

iii) Market integrity

There are potential risks arising from conflicts of interest, including those related to the benchmark submission process. While primarily relevant to the Investment Bank, these potential risks may also impact the corporate and retail customer base. The Group may be adversely affected if it fails to mitigate the risk of individuals making such inappropriate judgement by the enhancing of operating models, and effective identification and management of conflicts of interest, controls and supervisory oversight.

iv) Financial crime

The Group, as a global financial services firm, is exposed to the risks associated with money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption and sanctions. As a result, the Group may be adversely affected if it fails to effectively mitigate the risk that its employees or third parties facilitate, or that its products and services are used to facilitate financial crime.

Any one, or combination, of the above risks could have significant impact on the Group’s reputation and may also lead to potentially large costs to both rectify this issue and reimburse losses incurred by customers and regulatory censure and penalties.

Material existing and emerging risks potentially impacting more than one Principal Risk

i) Structural reform (emerging risk)

The UK Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the UK Banking Reform Act) and associated secondary legislation and regulatory rules, require the separation of the Group’s UK and EEA retail and SME deposit taking activities into a legally, operationally and economically separate and independent entity and restrict the types of activity such an entity may conduct (so-called ‘ring fencing’).

The PRA issued a policy statement (PS10/15) in May 2015 setting up legal structures and governance requirements that the UK regulator considers as ‘near-final’. A PRA Consultation was issued in October 2015 relating to post ring fencing prudential requirements and intra-group arrangements among other matters. PRA final rules are expected in 2016. UK ring fencing rules will become binding from January 2019 and Barclays has an internal structural reform programme to implement the changes required by these new regulations (alongside other group structural requirements applicable to or in the course of development for the Group both in the UK and other jurisdictions in which the Group has operations – such as the proposed move towards a single point of entry (Holding Company) resolution model under the BoE’s preferred resolution strategy and the requirement under section 165 of the DFA to create a US intermediate holding company (IHC) to hold the Group’s US banking and non-banking subsidiaries) and to evaluate the Group’s strategic options in light of all current and proposed global structural reform initiatives. Changes resulting from this work will have a material impact in the way the Group operates in the future through increased cost and complexity associated with changes required by ring fencing laws and regulations. Specifically, in order to comply with the UK Banking Reform Act and the DFA, it is proposed that:

§Barclays will create a new UK banking entity which will serve as the ring fenced bank (RFB). It is expected to serve retail and small business customers as well as UK Wealth and credit card customers

§Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC) is expected to serve corporate, institutional and investment banking clients and will also serve international Wealth and credit card customers; it is also expected to house both the Corporate Banking payments and Barclaycard merchant acquiring businesses

§many of the Group’s US businesses (including Barclays Bank Delaware and Barclays Capital Inc., the Group’s US broker-dealer subsidiary) will be organised under an IHC
§the Group will establish a number of service companies in order to support its revised operating entity structure.

Implementation of these changes involves a number of risks related to both the revised Group entity structure and also the process of transition to that revised Group structure. Those risks include the following:

§the establishment and ongoing management of the RFB and BBPLC as separate entities will require the Group to evaluate and restructure its intra-group and external capital, funding and liquidity arrangements to ensure they continue to meet regulatory requirements and support business needs. The changes required by ring fencing will in particular impact the sources of funding available to the different entities, including restricting BBPLC’s access to certain categories of deposit funding

§while the Group will seek to manage the changes to business mix and capital, funding and liquidity resources so as to maintain robust credit ratings for each of its key operating entities, the restructuring required by ring fencing is complex and untested, and there is a risk that the changes may negatively impact the assessment made by credit rating agencies, creditors and other stakeholders of the credit strength of the different entities on a standalone basis. Adverse changes to the credit assessment, including the potential for ratings downgrades, could in turn make it more difficult and costly for the Group’s entities to obtain certain sources of funding

§the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015 provide that, after 1 January 2026, ring fence banks cannot be or become liable for pension schemes outside of the ring fence. To comply with the regulations, the Group will need to decide which Group entities will participate in the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) from 2026, and reach a mutually satisfactory position with the UKRF Trustee regarding past service liabilities. The Group is currently discussing a variety of options with the UKRF Trustee, and engaging with the PRA and the UK Pensions Regulator

§execution risk associated with moving a material number of customer accounts and contracts from one legal entity to another and in particular the risk of legal challenge to the ring-fenced transfer scheme that will be used in order to transfer certain assets and liabilities from BBPLC to the RFB

§customer impacts derived from operational changes related to, for example, the reorganisation of sort codes. In addition, uncertain and potentially varying customer preference in terms of being served by the RFB or BBPLC may increase the execution risk associated with ring fencing; customers may also be impacted by reduced flexibility to provide products through a single entity interface

§at the European level, the draft Bank Structural Reform Regulation contains powers restricting proprietary trading and, if certain conditions are met, for the mandated separation of core retail banking activity from certain trading activities save where a bank is already subject to a national regime which provides for the separation of such activities in a manner compatible with the regulation. The regulation is currently in draft form and no single version (including the scope of any national derogation) has yet been agreed by the Council of Ministers, the European Commission and the European Parliament. The implementation date for these proposals will depend on the date on which any final legislation is agreed. Accordingly, the potential impact on the Group remains unclear.

These, and other regulatory changes and the resulting actions taken to address such regulatory changes, may have an adverse impact on the Group’s profitability, operating flexibility, flexibility of deployment of capital and funding, return on equity, ability to pay dividends, credit ratings, and/or financial condition.

ii) Business conditions, general economy and geopolitical issues

The Group’s performance could be adversely affected in relation to more than one Principal Risk by a weak or deteriorating global economy or political instability. These factors may also occur in one or more of the Group’s main countries of operation.

The Group offers a broad range of services to retail, institutional and government customers, in a large number of countries. The breadth of

 

 

92  |  84    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Material existing and emerging risks

Material existing and emerging risks to the Group’s future performance

these operations means that deterioration in the economic environment, or an increase in political instability in countries where it is active, or any other systemically important economy, could adversely affect the Group’s performance.

Global growth is expected to remain modest, with low single digit growth in advanced economies alongside a slowdown in emerging markets. This moderate economic performance, lower commodity prices and increased geopolitical tensions mean that the distribution of risks to global economic activity continues to be biased to the downside.

As the US Federal Reserve embarks on monetary policy tightening, the increasing divergence of policies between major advanced economies risks triggering further financial market volatility. The sharp change in value of the US dollar during 2015 reflected this and, has played a major role in driving asset price volatility and capital reallocation as markets adjusted. Changes to interest rate expectations risk igniting further volatility and US dollar appreciation, particularly if the US Federal Reserve were to increase rates faster than markets currently expect.

Emerging markets have already seen growth slow following increased capital outflows, but a deeper slowdown in growth could emerge if tighter US interest rate policy drives further reallocation of capital. Moreover, sentiment towards emerging markets as a whole continues to be driven in large part by developments in China, where there is significant concern around the ability of authorities to manage the growth transition towards services. A stronger than expected slowdown could result if authorities fail to appropriately manage the end of the investment and credit-led boom, while the consequences from a faster slowdown would flow through both financial and trade channels into other economies, and affect commodity markets.

Commodity prices, particularly oil prices, have already fallen significantly, but could fall further if demand growth remains weak or supply takes longer than expected to adjust. At the same time, countries with high reliance on commodity related earnings have already experienced a tightening of financial conditions. A sustained period of low prices risks triggering further financial distress, default and contagion.

In several countries, reversals of capital inflows, as well as fiscal austerity, have already caused deterioration in political stability. This could be exacerbated by a renewed rise in asset price volatility or sustained pressure on government finances. In addition, geopolitical tensions in some areas of the world, including the Middle East and Eastern Europe are already acute, and are at risk of further deterioration.

While in Europe, risks of stagnation, entrenched deflation and a Eurozone break up have diminished, they remain a risk.

In the UK, the referendum on EU membership gives rise to some political uncertainty and raises the possibility of a disruptive and uncertain exit from the EU, with attendant consequences for investment and confidence. Following the referendum in June 2016, in the event that there is a vote in favour of leaving the EU, a period of negotiation is likely, widely anticipated to be around two years, with unpredictable implications on market conditions.

A drop in business or consumer confidence related to the aforementioned risks may have a material impact on GDP growth in one or more significant markets and therefore Group performance. At the same time, even if output in most advanced economies does grow, it would also be likely to advance at a slower pace than seen in the pre-crisis period. Growth potential could be further eroded by the low levels of fixed asset investment and productivity growth.

For the Group, a deterioration of conditions in its key markets could affect performance in a number of ways including, for example: (i) deteriorating business, consumer or investor confidence leading to reduced levels of client activity; (ii) higher levels of default rates and impairment; and (iii) mark to market losses in trading portfolios resulting from changes in credit ratings, share prices and solvency of counterparties.

iii) Business change/execution (emerging risk)

As Barclays moves towards a single point of entry (Holding Company) resolution model and implementation of the structural reform programme execution, the expected level of structural and strategic change to be implemented over the medium term will be disruptive and is likely to increase funding and operational risks for the Group and could impact its revenues and businesses. These changes will include: the creation and rundown of Non-Core; the delivery against an extensive agenda of operational and technology control and infrastructure improvements; and, planned cost reductions. Execution may be adversely impacted by external factors (such as a significant global macroeconomic downturn or further significant and unexpected regulatory change in countries in which the Group operates) and/or internal factors (such as availability of appropriately skilled resources or resolution of legacy issues). Moreover, progress in regard to Barclays’ strategic plans is unlikely to be uniform or linear and progress on certain targets may be achieved more slowly than others.

If any of the risks outlined above were to occur, singly or in aggregate, they could have a material adverse effect on the Group’s business, results of operations and financial condition.

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  93


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Credit risk management

 

 

 

Credit risk (audited)

An overview of Barclays’ approach to risk management
Page

Barclays’ risk management strategy

Introduction

95

Risk management strategy

95

Governance structure

95

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

97

Principal and Key risks

98

Credit risk management

Overview99
Organisation and structure99
Roles and responsibilities100

Credit risk mitigation

100

Market risk management

Overview101
Organisation and structure102

Roles and responsibilities

102

Funding and capital risk management

Overview103
Organisation and structure103

Roles and responsibilities

103

Liquidity risk management

Overview105
Organisation and structure105

Liquidity risk management

105

Operational risk management

Overview106
Organisation and structure106

Roles and responsibilities

107

Conduct risk management

Overview108
Organisation and structure108
Roles and responsibilities108

The risk of loss to the firm from the failure of clients, customers or counterparties, including sovereigns, to fully honour their obligations to the firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables.

 

 

LOGO

For a more detailed breakdown on our Risk review and Risk management contents please see pages 117 and 118. More detailed information on how Barclays manages these risks can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

94  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

A more comprehensive overview, together with more specific information on Group policies, can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report or at home.barclays/annualreport

Introduction

This section outlines the Group’s strategy for managing risk and how risk culture has been developed to ensure that there is a set of objectives and practices which are shared across the Group. It provides details of the Group’s governance, specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment, committee structures and how responsibilities are assigned.

Risk management strategy

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a well established strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes.

At a strategic level, the Group’s risk management objectives are to:

§identify the Group’s significant risks

§formulate the Group’s risk appetite and ensure that the business profile and plans are consistent with it

§optimise risk/return decisions by taking them as closely as possible to the business, while establishing strong and independent review and challenge structures

§ensure that business growth plans are properly supported by effective risk infrastructure

§manage the risk profile to ensure that specific financial deliverables remain achievable under a range of adverse business conditions

§help executives improve the control and coordination of risk taking across the business.

A key element in the setting of clear management objectives is the ERMF, which sets out key activities, tools, techniques and organisational arrangements so that material risks facing the Group are identified and understood, and that appropriate responses are in place to protect Barclays and prevent detriment to its customers, employees or community. This will help the Group meet its goals, and enhance its ability to respond to new opportunities.

The ERMF covers those risks incurred by the Group that were foreseeable, continuous and material enough to merit establishing specific Group-wide control frameworks. These are known as Principal and Key Risks. See Principal and Key Risks on page 98 for more information.

The aim of the risk management process is to provide a structured, practical and easily understood set of three steps, Evaluate, Respond and Monitor (the E-R-M process), that enables management to identify and assess risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and then monitor the effectiveness of the response and changes to the risk profile.

1. Evaluate: risk evaluation must be carried out by those individuals, teams and departments who manage the underlying operational or business process, and so are best placed to identify and assess the potential risks, and also include those responsible for delivering the objectives under review.

2. Respond: the appropriate risk response effectively and efficiently ensures that risks are kept within appetite, which is the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy. There are three types of response: i) accept the risk but take necessary mitigating actions such as use of risk controls; ii) stop the existing activity/do not start the proposed activity; or iii) continue the activity but transfer risks to another party via the use of insurance.

Barclays risk management strategy

LOGO

3. Monitor: once risks have been identified and measured, and controls put in place, progress towards objectives must be tracked. Monitoring must be ongoing and can prompt re-evaluation of the risks and/or changes in responses. Monitoring must be carried out proactively. In addition to ‘reporting’, it includes ensuring risks are maintained within risk appetite, and checking that controls are functioning as intended and remain fit for purpose.

The process is orientated around material risks impacting delivery of objectives, and is used to promote an efficient and effective approach to risk management. This three step risk management process:

§can be applied to every objective at every level in the bank, both top-down or bottom-up

§is embedded into the business decision making process

§guides the Group’s response to changes in the external or internal environment in which existing activities are conducted

§involves all staff and all three lines of defence (see pages 97).

Governance structure

Risk exists when the outcome of taking a particular decision or course of action is uncertain and could potentially impact whether, or how well, the Group delivers on its objectives.

The Group faces risks throughout its business, every day, in everything it does. Some risks are taken after appropriate consideration – such as lending money to a customer. Other risks may arise from unintended consequences of internal actions, for example an IT system failure or poor sales practices. Finally, some risks are the result of events outside the Group but which impact its business – such as major exposure through trading or lending to a market counterparty which later fails.

All employees must play their part in the Group’s risk management, regardless of position, function or location. All employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies that are relevant to their activities, know how to escalate actual or potential risk issues, and have a role appropriate level of awareness of the ERMF (see Risk governance and assigning responsibilities for more information on page 97), risk management process and governance arrangements.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  95


Board oversight and flow of risk related information

LOGO

 

Furthermore, from March 2016 members of the Board, Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals will be subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Members of the SMR are held to four additional specific rules of conduct in which they must:Overview

1.take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group is effectively controlled

2.take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards

3.take reasonable steps to ensure that any delegated responsibilities are to the appropriate individual and that the delegated responsibilities are effectively discharged

4.disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect to be made aware of.

There are three key board-level forums which review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: the Board itself; the Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee.

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays PLC) responsibilities is the approval of risk appetite, which is the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives. The Chief Risk Officer regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the Internal Control and Assurance Framework (Group Control Framework). It oversees the management of the most significant risks through regular review of risk exposures and related key controls. Executive management responsibilities relating to this are set out in the ERMF.

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, actions being taken by management are reviewed to ensure that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the Chair of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are non-executive directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO) attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodology, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissions in-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses. The Chair of the Committee prepares a statement each year on its activities.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputational risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ Citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

In addition, the Board Audit and Board Remuneration Committees receive regular risk reports to assist them in the undertaking of their duties.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance from the BRC, regular updates on the risk profile and proposals for the ex-ante and ex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Summaries of the relevant business, professional and risk management experience of the Directors of the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 3 and 4. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board Committees are available from the Corporate Governance section at: home.barclays/corporategovernance.

The CRO manages the independent Risk function and chairs the Financial Risk Committees (FRC) and the Operational Risk Review Forum (ORRF), which monitor the Group’s financial and non-financial risk profile relative to agreed risk appetite.

The Group Treasurer heads the Treasury function and chairs the Treasury Committee which manages the Group’s liquidity, maturity transformation and structural interest rate exposure through the setting of policies and controls, monitors the Group’s liquidity and interest rate maturity mismatch, monitors usage of regulatory and economic capital, and has oversight of the Group’s capital plan.

The Head of Compliance chairs the Conduct and Reputational Risk Committee (CRRC) which assesses the quality of the application of the Reputation and Conduct Risk Control Frameworks. It also recommends conduct risk appetite, sets policies to ensure consistent adherence to that appetite, and reviews known and emerging reputational and conduct related risks to consider if action is required.

96  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

Responsibility for risk management resides at all levels of the Group, from the Board and the Executive Committee down through the organisation to each business manager and risk specialist. These responsibilities are distributed so that risk/return decisions are taken at the most appropriate level, as close as possible to the business, and are subject to robust and effective review and challenge. Responsibilities for effective review and challenge also reside at all levels.

The ERMF articulates a clear, consistent, comprehensive and effective approach for the management of all risks in the Group and creates the context for setting standards and establishing the right practices throughout the Group. The ERMF sets out a philosophy and approach that is applicable to the whole bank, all colleagues and to all types of risk. It sets out the key activities required for all employees to operate Barclays risk and control environment, with specific requirements for key individuals, including the CRO and CEO, and the overall governance framework designed to support its effective operation. See Risk Culture in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information.

The ERMF supports risk management and control by ensuring that there is a:

§sustainable and consistent implementation of the three lines of defence across all businesses and functions

§clear segregation of activities and duties performed by colleagues across the Group

§framework for the management of Principal Risks

§consistent application of Barclays’ risk appetite across all Principal Risks

§clear and simple policy hierarchy.

Three lines of defence

The enterprise risk management process is the ‘defence’, and organising businesses and functions into three ‘lines’ enhances the E-R-M process by formalising independence and challenge, while still promoting collaboration and the flow of information between all areas. The three lines of defence operating model enables the Group to separate risk management activities:

First line: manage operational and business processes; design, implement, operate, test and remediate controls.

First line activities are characterised by:

§ownership of and direct responsibility for the Group’s returns or elements of Barclays’ results

§ownership of major operations, systems and processes fundamental to the operation of the bank

§direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to financial performance.

Second line: oversee and challenge the first line and provide second line risk management activity.

Second line activities are characterised by:

§oversight, monitoring and challenge of the first line of defence activities

§design, ownership or operation of Key Risk Control Frameworks impacting the activities of the first line of defence

§operation of certain second line risk management activities (e.g. financial rescue of a firm)

§no direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to revenue (measures related to mitigation of losses and balancing risk and reward are permissible).

Third line: provide assurance that the E-R-M process is fit for purpose, and that it is being carried out as intended.

Third line activities are characterised by:

§providing independent and timely assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control.

Following the annual review, in 2016, we have further refined the three lines of defence model by clarifying that responsibilities for risk management and control are defined in relation to the activities individuals undertake as part of their role. The three key activities are: ‘Setting Policy and Conformance’ (second line); ‘Managing Operational or Business Process’ (first and second line); and ‘Providing Independent Assurance’ (third line). Second and third line activities have not changed, however we have emphasised the key responsibilities of the first line, which includes colleagues’ responsibility for understanding and owning the process end to end, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks. Performed appropriately and by all colleagues, together these responsibilities will drive a stronger risk and control environment at Barclays, benefitting our customers, clients, shareholders and regulators.

Reporting and control

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  97


Principal and Key Risks

Principal Risks comprise individual Key Risks to allow for more granular analysis. As at 31 December 2015, the five Principal Risks were: i) Credit; ii) Market; iii) Funding; iv) Operational; and v) Conduct. Since the beginning of 2015, Reputation Risk has been recognised as a Key Risk within Conduct Risk given their close alignment and the fact that as separate Principal Risks they had a common Principal Risk Officer.

Risk management responsibilities for Principal and Key Risks are set out in the ERMF. The ERMF creates clear ownership and accountability; ensures the Group’s most significant risk exposures are understood and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite and risk tolerances; and ensures regular reporting of risk exposures and control effectiveness.

For each Key Risk, the Key Risk Officer is responsible for developing a risk appetite statement and overseeing and managing the risk in line with the ERMF. This includes the documentation, communication and maintenance of a Key Risk Control Framework which sets out, for every business across the firm, the mandated control requirements in managing exposures to that Key Risk. These control requirements are given further specification, according to the business or risk type, to provide a complete and appropriate system of internal control.

Business and Function Heads are responsible for obtaining ongoing assurance that the key controls they have put in place to manage the risks to their business objectives are operating effectively. Reviews are undertaken on a six-monthly basis and support the regulatory requirement for the Group to make an annual statement about its system of internal controls. At the business level, executive management hold specific Business Risk Oversight Meetings to monitor all Principal Risks.

Key Risk Officers report their assessments of the risk exposure and control effectiveness to Group-level oversight committees and their assessments form the basis of the reports that go to the:

Board Risk Committee:

§Financial Risk Committee has oversight of Credit and Market Risks

§Treasury Committee has oversight of Funding Risk

§Operational Risk Review Forum has oversight of the risk profile of all Operational Risk types.

Board Reputation Committee:

§Conduct and Reputation Risk Committee has oversight of Conduct and Reputation Risks.

The following sections provide an overview of each of the five Principal Risks, and details of the structure and organisation of the relevant management function and its roles and responsibilities, including how the impact of the risk to the Group may be minimised.

98  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Credit risk management

Credit risk

The risk of suffering financial loss should any of the Group’s customers, clients or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

Overview

The granting of credit is one of the Group’s major sources of income and, as a Principal Risk, the Group dedicates considerable resources to its control. The credit risk that the Group faces arises mainly from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients. Other sources of credit risk arise from trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties, available for sale assets and reverse repurchase agreements (reverse repos).loans.

Credit risk management objectives are to:

 

§ maintain a framework of controls to ensureenable credit risk taking isto be based on sound credit risk management principlesprinciples;

 

§ identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolioportfolio;

 

§ control and plan credit risk takingrisk-taking in line with external stakeholder expectations and avoiding undesirable concentrationsconcentrations;

 

§ monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controlscontrols;

 

§ ensure thatenable risk-reward objectives areto be met.

More information ofcovering the reporting of credit risk can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.Report 2017.

Organisation and structure

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are larger in number but smaller in value and are, therefore, managed on a homogenoushomogeneous portfolio basis.

Credit risk management responsibilities have been structured so that decisions are taken as close as possible to the business, while ensuringenforcing robust review and challenge of performance, risk infrastructure and strategic plans. The credit risk management teams in each business are accountable to the relevant Business Credit Risk Officer (BCRO)CRO who, in turn, reports to the Group CRO.

Board oversight and flow of risk related information

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  99


Roles and responsibilities

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting policies for approval of transactions (principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models.

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers entrusted with the higher levels of delegated authority. The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority require the support of the Group Senior Credit Officer (GSCO)Officers (GSCOs), the Group’s most senior credit risk sanctioner.sanctioners. For exposures in excess of the GSCO’sGSCOs’ authority, approval byfrom the Group CRO is required. In the wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product.

The role of the Central Risk function is to provide Group-wide direction, oversight and challenge of credit risk taking.risk-taking. Central Risk sets the Credit Risk Control Framework, which provides the structure within which credit risk is managed, together with supporting credit risk policies.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    85


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Credit risk management

Credit risk mitigation

The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate the counterparty credit risks. These can broadly be divided into three types: netting and set-off; collateral; and risk transfer.

netting and set-off

collateral

risk transfer

Netting and set-off

In most jurisdictions in which the Group operates, credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting and set-off. In exposure terms, this credit risk mitigation technique has the largest overall impact on net exposure to derivative transactions, compared with other risk mitigation techniques.

For derivative transactions, the Group’s normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements typically allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from a derivative transactiontransactions against the Group’s obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to be set-off against one another.

Collateral

The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

 

§ home loans:a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellingsdwellings. The value of collateral is impacted by property market conditions which drive demand and therefore value of the property. Other regulatory interventions on ability to repossess, longer period to repossession and granting of forbearance may also affect the collateral value.

 

§ wholesale lending:a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various formsforms.

§ other retail lending:includes charges over motor vehiclesvehicle and other physical assets,assets; second lien charges over residential property, which are subordinate to first charges held either by the Group or by another party; and finance lease receivables, for which typically the Group retains legal title to the leased asset and has the right to repossess the asset on the default of the borrower.

 

§ derivatives:the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex (CSA))Annex) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in placeplace. These annexes to master agreements provide a mechanism for further reducing credit risk, whereby collateral (margin) is posted on a regular basis (typically daily) to collateralise the mark to market exposure of a derivative portfolio measured on a net basis. The Group may additionally negotiate the receipt of an independent amount further mitigating risk by collateralising potential mark to market exposure moves.

 

§ reverse repurchase agreements:collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed priceprice.

 

§ financial guarantees and similar off-balanceoff- balance sheet commitments:cash collateral may be held against these arrangements.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in two main ways:

 

§ if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more credit worthycreditworthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced

 

§ where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced.

Detailed policies are in place to ensure thatappropriately recognise and record credit risk mitigation is appropriately recognised and recorded and more information can be found in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.Report 2017.

 

 

100  |  86    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Market risk management

 

 

Market risk (audited)

The risk of a reductionloss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheetinterest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and liquidity pools.asset correlations.

Overview

Traded market risk

Traded marketMarket risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices.

Non-tradedOrganisation and structure

Market risk in the businesses resides primarily in Barclays International and Group Treasury. These businesses have the mandate to incur market risk. Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business Committees and Group Committees, including the Market Risk Committee.

Banking book operations generate non-tradedRoles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins due to changes in interest rates. The principal banking businesses engage in internal derivative trades with Treasury to manage their interest rate risk to within its defined risk appetite. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from four key sources:management are to:

 

§ prepayment risk: balance run-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of productsunderstand and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectationscontrol market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

 

§ recruitment risk: the volume of newfacilitate business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwind or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expectedgrowth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

 

§ residualcontrol market risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on whichbusinesses according to the Group setsallocated appetite

To meet the above objectives, a well established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF. See page 77 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

The BRC recommends market risk appetite to the Board for their approval. The Market Risk Principal Risk Lead (PR Lead) is responsible for the Market Risk Control Framework and, under delegated authority from the Group CRO, agrees with the Business CROs a limit framework within the context of the approved market risk appetite.

The Market Risk Committee approves and makes recommendations concerning the Group-wide market risk profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Risk Framework and associated standards and policies; reviewing arising market or regulatory issues, limits and utilisation; and risk appetite levels to the Board. The Committee is chaired by the PR Lead and attendees include the business heads of market risk, business aligned market risk managers and Internal Audit.

The head of each business is accountable for all market risks associated with its activities, while the head of the market risk team covering each business is responsible for implementing the risk control framework for market risk.

More information on market risk management can be found in Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2017.

Management Value at Risk

estimates the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is becausepotential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, over one day for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margina given confidence level

 

differs from the Regulatory value at risk (VaR) used for capital purposes in scope, confidence level and horizon

backtesting is performed to test the model is fit for purpose.

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level is used for all trading books and some banking books.

The Management VaR model in some instances may not appropriately measure some market risk exposures, especially for market moves that are not directly observable via prices. Market risk managers are required to identify risks which are not adequately captured in VaR (‘risks not in VaR’ or ‘RNIVs’).

When reviewing VaR estimates, the following considerations are taken into account:

the historical simulation uses the most recent two years of past data to generate possible future market moves, but the past may not be a good indicator of the future;

the one-day time horizon may not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be closed out or hedged within one day;

VaR is based on positions as at close of business and consequently, it is not an appropriate measure for intra-day risk arising from a position bought and sold on the same day;

VaR does not indicate the potential loss beyond the VaR confidence level.

Limits are applied at the total level as well as by risk factor type, which are then cascaded down to particular trading desks and businesses by the market risk management function.

See page 120 for a review of management VaR in 2017.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

§Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    87


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Treasury and capital risk management

Treasury and capital risk

Liquidity risk:The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets

Capital risk:The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans

Interest rate risk in the banking book:The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities.

Overview

Barclays Treasury manages treasury and capital risk on a day-to-day basis with the Treasury Committee acting as the principal management body. To enforce effective oversight and segregation of duties and in line with the ERMF, the Treasury and capital Risk function is responsible for oversight of key capital, liquidity, interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB) and pension risk management activities. The following describes the structure and governance associated with the risk types within the Treasury and capital Risk function.

Liquidity risk management (audited)

Overview

The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and maintaining that the business is sustainable. There is a control framework in place for managing liquidity risk and this is designed to meet the following objectives:

To maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite as expressed by the Board
To maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Roles and responsibilities

The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for the management and governance of the liquidity risk mandate defined by the Board and the production of ILAAPs. Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing liquidity risk within the set risk appetite. The CRO for treasury and capital risk reports to the Group CRO.

Barclays’ comprehensive control framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) set by the Board.

The Board sets the LRA based on the internal liquidity risk model and external regulatory requirements namely the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR). The LRA is represented as the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented in line with the control framework and policy for liquidity risk.

The control framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor, limit and stress test the Group’s balance sheet and contingent liabilities and the Recovery Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds. Together, these tools reduce the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due. The control framework is subject to internal conformance testing and internal audit review.

The liquidity stress tests assess the potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows if a stress occurs.

The Group maintains a range of management actions for use in a liquidity stress, these are documented in the Group Recovery Plan. Since the precise nature of any stress event cannot be known in advance, the actions are designed to be flexible to the nature and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that can be drawn upon as required. The Barclays Group Recovery Plan also contains more severe recovery options to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress. Any stress event would be regularly monitored and reviewed using key management information by key Treasury, Risk and business representatives.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Capital risk management (audited)

Overview

Capital risk is managed through ongoing monitoring and management of the capital position, regular stress testing and a robust capital governance framework.

Roles and responsibilities

The management of capital risk is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management, and is embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate.

Capital risk management is underpinned by a control framework and policy. The capital

88    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F lag risk: the risk of being unable to re-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to mandatory notification periods. This is highly prevalent in managed rates saving products (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rate.


management strategy, outlined in the Group and legal entity capital plans, is developed in alignment with the control framework and policy for capital risk, and is implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group’s objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, internal stress tests and results of regulatory stress tests, and the Group recovery plan. The Treasury Committee is responsible for monitoring and managing capital risk in line with the Group’s capital management objectives, capital plan and risk frameworks. The Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the capital risk profile and control environment, providing Second Line oversight of the management of capital risk. The BRC reviews the risk profile, and annually reviews risk appetite and the impact of stress scenarios on the Group capital plan/forecast in order to agree the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Local management assures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing and monitoring capital and reports to the Group Finance Director. The Treasury and Capital Risk function contains a Capital Risk Oversight team, and is an independent risk function that reports to the Group CRO and is responsible for oversight of capital risk and production of ICAAPs.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process.increase. The Group monitors the marketpension risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances the Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Insurance riskInterest Rate Risk in the Banking Book

InsuranceOverview

Banking book operations generate non-traded market risk, is managedprimarily through the mismatch between the duration of assets and liabilities and where interest rates on products reset at different dates. As per the Group’s policy to remain within Africa Banking,the defined risk appetite, interest rate and FX risks residing in the banking books of the businesses are transferred to Treasury where four categories of insurancethey are centrally managed. Currently, these risks are transferred to Treasury via funding arrangements, interest rate or FX swaps. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk are recognised: short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk, and life and insurance investment risk.

Insurance risk arises when:from seven key sources:

 

§ aggregate insurance premiums receivedRepricing/Residual risk:the impact from policyholders under a portfoliothe mismatch between the run-off of insurance contracts are inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policiesproduct balances and the expenses associated withinterest rate hedges or from unhedged liquidity buffer investments;

Structural risk: the change to the net interest income on hedge replenishment due to adverse movements in interest rates, assuming that the balance sheet is held static;

Prepayment risk:the potential loss in value if actual prepayment or early withdrawal behaviour from customers deviates from the expected or contractually agreed behaviour, which may result in a hedge or funding adjustment at a cost to the bank. Exposures are typically considered (where appropriate) net of any applicable offsetting early repayment charges. This risk principally relates to early repayment of fixed rate loans or withdrawal from fixed rate savings products;

Recruitment risk:the potential loss in value if the actual completion or drawdown behaviour from customers deviates from the expected behaviour, which may result in a hedge or funding adjustment at a cost to the bank. This risk principally relates to the completion timing around the Bank’s fixed rate mortgage pipeline process;

Margin compression risk:the effect of internal or market forces on a bank’s net margin where, for example, in a low rate environment any fall in rates will further decrease interest income earned on the assets whereas funding cost cannot be reduced as it is already at the minimum level.
Lag risk:arises from the delay in re-pricing customer rates for certain variable/ managed rate products, following an underlying change to market interest rates. This is typically driven by either regulatory constraint around customer notification on pricing changes, processing time for the Group’s notification systems or contractual agreements within a product’s terms and conditions.

Asset swap spread risk: the spread between Libor and sovereign bond yields that arises from the management of the portfolio of policiesliquidity buffer investments and claimsits associated hedges.

Furthermore, liquidity buffer investments are generally subject to Available for Sale (AFS) accounting rules, whereby changes in the value of these assets impact capital via Other Comprehensive Income, creating volatility in capital directly.

Roles and responsibilities

The Non-traded Market Risk team provides risk management oversight and monitoring of all traded and non-traded market risk in Treasury and customer banking books, which specifically includes:

interest rate risk assessment in the customer banking books,

 

§ premiums are not invested to adequately matchreview and challenge the duration, timingbehavioural assumptions used in hedging and size of expected claimstransfer pricing,

 

§ unexpected fluctuations in claims arise or excessive exposure (e.g. in individual or aggregate exposures) relative to capacity is retainedrisk management of the liquidity buffer investments and funding activities,

oversight of balance sheet hedging,

review of residual risk in the entity.hedge accounting solution and hedging of net investments,

Insurance entities also incur market risk (on the investment of accumulated premiums and shareholder capital), credit risk (counterparty exposure on investments and reinsurance transactions), liquidity risk and operational risk from their investments and financial operations.

proposes and monitors risk limits to manage traded and non-traded market risk within the agreed risk appetite.
 

 

Organisation and structure

LOGO

LOGO

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  101    89


Overview of the business market risk control structure

LOGO

Organisation and structure

Traded market risk in the businesses resides primarily in the Investment Bank, Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core. These businesses have the mandate to incur traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is mostly incurred in PCB, Barclaycard and Treasury.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk management are to:

§understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

§facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

§ensure that traded market risk in the businesses is controlled according to the allocated appetite

§control non-traded market risk in line with approved appetite

§control insurance risk in line with approved appetite

§support the Non-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensure the above objectives are met, a well-established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF (evaluate-respond-monitor). See page 95 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

More information on market risk management can be found in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

102  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Funding and capitalOperational risk management

    

Funding risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage) and liquidity ratios. Group Treasury manage funding risk on a day-to-day basis with the Group Treasury Committee acting as the key governance forum.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

§meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

§support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds

§support its growth and strategic options.

Overview

Organisation and structure

Capital management is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management and is therefore embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate. Capital demand and supply is actively managed on a centralised basis, at a business level, at a local entity level and on a regional basis taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment in which Barclays operates.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group’s capital management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the Risk Appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices.

Capital planning

Capital forecasts are managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short term (one year) and medium term (three to five years) financial planning cycles. Barclays’ capital plans are developed with the objective of maintaining capital that is adequate in quantity and quality to support the Group’s risk profile, regulatory and business needs. As a result, the Group holds a diversified capital base that provides strong loss absorbing capacity and optimised returns.

Barclays’ capital forecasts are continually monitored against relevant internal target capital ratios to ensure they remain appropriate, and consider risks to the plan including possible future regulatory changes.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  103


LOGO

Regulatory requirements

Capital planning is set in consideration of minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Group regulatory capital requirements are determined by the PRA.

Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to which is measured through both risk weighted assets (RWAs) and leverage.

Capital held to support the level of risk identified is set in consideration of minimum ratio requirements and internal buffers. Capital requirements are set in accordance with the firm’s level of risk.

Governance

The Group and legal entity capital plans are underpinned by the Capital Risk Framework, which includes capital management policies and practices approved by the Principal Risk Officer. These plans are implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, stress tests and recovery plan. The Treasury Committee manages compliance with the Group’s capital management objectives. The Committee reviews actual and forecast capital demand and resources on a bi-monthly basis. The Board Risk Committee annually reviews risk appetite and then analyses the impacts of stress scenarios on the Group capital forecast in order to understand and manage the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Monitoring and managing capital

Capital is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Stress testing: internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Actual recent economic, market and regulatory scenarios are used to inform the assumptions of the stress tests and assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA. Legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible, stressed conditions.

Risk mitigation: as part of the stress testing process, actions are identified that should be taken to mitigate the risks that could arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook.

As an additional layer of protection, the Barclays Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available for the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the event that stress events are more extreme than anticipated.

Senior management awareness and transparency: Treasury works closely with Risk, businesses and legal entities to support a proactive approach to identifying sources of capital ratio volatilities which are considered in the Group’s capital plan. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to the Treasury Committee, associated with clear escalation channels to senior management.

Capital management information is readily available at all times to support the Executive Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making, as may be required.

The Group submits its Board approved ICAAP document to the PRA on an annual basis, which forms the basis of the Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA.

Capital allocation:capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive Committee and monitored by the Treasury Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite, growth and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, allocated adequate capital to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Transferability of capital: the Group’s policy is for surplus capital held in Group entities to be repatriated to BBPLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. The Group is not aware of any material impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources, in line with the above policy, or repayment of intra-Group liabilities when due.

More information on capital risk management can be found in pages 402 to 403.

104  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Funding risk – Liquidity

Liquidity risk

The risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a wide range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

Overview

The Board has formally recognised a series of risks that are continuously present in Barclays and materially impact the achievement of Barclays objectives, one of which is Funding risk. Liquidity risk is recognised as a key risk within Funding risk. The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. Liquidity risk is managed through the Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework) which is designed to meet the following objectives:

§to maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite (LRA) as expressed by the Board

§to maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Organisation and structure

Barclays Treasury operates a centralised governance control process that covers all of the Group’s liquidity risk management activities. As per the ERMF, the Key Risk Officer (KRO) approves the Key Risk Control Framework for Liquidity Risk (Key Risk Control Framework) under which the Treasury function operates. The KRO is in the Risk function. The Key Risk Control Framework is subject to annual review. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA and is subject to annual review.

The Board sets the LRA, over Group stress tests, being the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented and managed by the Treasury Committee through the Key Risk Control Framework.

Liquidity risk management

Barclays has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the LRA. The Key Risk Control Framework is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

Liquidity is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through:

Group Stress test risk appetite and planning: Established Group stress test LRA together with the appropriate limits for the management of liquidity risk. This is the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

Liquidity limits: Management of limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures and these serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

Internal pricing and incentives: Active management of the composition and duration of the balance sheet and of contingent liquidity risk through the transfer of liquidity premium directly to the business.

Early warning indicators: Monitoring of a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk in the market or specific to Barclays. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions.

Contingency Funding Plan: Maintenance of a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP) which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity.

RRP: In accordance with the requirements of the PRA Rulebook: Recovery and Resolution, Barclays has developed a Group Recovery Plan. The key objectives are to provide the Group with a range of options to ensure the viability of the firm in a stress, set consistent early warning indicators to identify when the Recovery Plan should be invoked and to enable the Group to be adequately prepared to respond to stressed conditions. The Group continues to work with the authorities on RRP, including identifying and addressing any impediments to resolvability.

LOGO

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  105


Risk review

Risk management

Operational risk management

Operational risk

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impactThe risk of loss to the Group resultingfirm from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, human factors or from andue to external event. The impactsevents (for example, fraud) where the root cause is not due to the Group can be financial, including lossescredit or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.market risks.

 

Overview

The management of operational risk has twothree key objectives:

 

§ minimiseDeliver an operational risk capability owned and used by business leaders which is pragmatic, relevant, and enables business leaders to make sound risk decisions over the impact of losses suffered, both in the normal course of business (small losses) and from extreme events (large losses)long term.

 

§ improveProvide the frameworks, policies and tools to enable management to meet their risk management responsibilities while the Second line of defence provides robust, independent, and effective oversight and challenge.

Deliver a consistent and aggregated measurement of operational risk that will provide clear and relevant insights, so that the right management ofactions can be taken to keep the Groupoperational risk profile consistent with the Group’s strategy, the stated risk appetite, the client franchise, and strengthen its brand and external reputation.other stakeholder needs.

The Group is committed to the management and measurement of operational risk and was granted a waiver by the FSA (now the PRA) to operate an Advanced Measurement Approachadvanced management approach (AMA) for operational risk, under Basel II, which commenced in January 2008. The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using AMA (93%(94% of capital requirements); however, in specific areas,, except for small parts of the organisation acquired since the original permission (6% of

capital requirements) using the Basic Indicator Approach (7%) is applied.(BIA). The Group works to benchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the further development of advanced techniques.banks.

The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal controlcontrols that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing the Group to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage.damages. The Group has an overarching frameworkERMF that sets out the approach to internal governance. This guideThe ERMF establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating authority and monitoring compliance.

Organisation and structure

Operational risk comprises a number of specific Key Risksrisks defined as follows:follow:

 

§ external supplier: inadequate selectionData Management and ongoing management of external suppliers

§financial crime: failure to comply with anti-money laundering, anti-bribery, anti-corruption and sanctions policies. In early January 2016, the oversight of financial crime was transferred to Group Compliance

§financial reporting: reporting misstatementInformation Risk: The risk that Barclays information is not captured, retained, used or omission within external financial or regulatory reporting

§fraud: dishonest behaviour with the intent to make a gain or cause a loss to others

§information: inadequate protection of the Group’s informationprotected in accordance with its value and sensitivitylegal and regulatory requirements.

 

§ legal: failureFinancial Reporting Risk:The risk of a material misstatement or omission within the Group’s external financial, regulatory reporting or internal management reporting.

Fraud Risk:The risk of financial loss when an internal or external party acts dishonestly with the intent to identifyobtain an undue benefit, cause a loss to, or to expose either the Group or its customers and manage legal risksclients to a risk of loss.

 

§ payments process: failure in operationPayments Process Risk:The risk of payments processesbeing processed inaccurately, with delays, without appropriate authentication and authorisation.

 

§ people: inadequate people capabilities, and/or performance/reward structures, and/or inappropriate behavioursPeople Risk:The risk that Barclays is exposed to by virtue of being an employer (excluding Health and Safety related risk).

 

§ premisesPremises and security:Security Risk:The risk of interruption to Barclays’ business due to the unavailability of premises (to meet business demand) and/and infrastructure as a result of intentional or safe working environments,accidental damage to premises and inadequate protection ofmoveable assets, physical assets, employeessecurity breaches and customers against external threatssafety and security incidents.

 

§Supplier Risk:The risk that is introduced to the firm or entity as a consequence of obtaining services or goods from another legal entity as a result of inadequate selection, inadequate exit and supplier management, resulting in operational, financial, or reputational risk to the bank, failure of services and/or negative customer impact.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

90    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F taxation: failure


Tax Risk:The risk of unexpected tax cost in relation to complyany tax for which Barclays is liable, or of reputational damage on tax matters with key stakeholders such as tax laws and practice which could lead to financialauthorities, regulators, shareholders or the public. Tax cost includes tax, interest or penalties additional tax charges or reputational damagelevied by a taxing authority.

 

§ technology (including cyber security):Technology Risk:The risk that comes about due to dependency on technological solutions and is defined as failure to develop, deploy and deploy secure, stable and reliablemaintain technology solutions which includes risk of loss or detriment to Barclays’that are stable, reliable and deliver what the business and customers as a result of actions committed or facilitated through the use of networked information systemsneeds.

 

§ transaction operations:Transaction Operations Risk:The risk of Customer/Client or Bank detriment due to unintentional error and/or failure in the managementend-to-end process of critical transaction processes.initiation, processing and fulfilment of an interaction between a Customer/Client and the Bank with an underlying financial instrument (e.g. mortgage, derivative product, trade product etc.).

In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational key risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk. For more information on conduct risk please see pages 108 and 109.

These risks may result in financial and/or non-financial impacts including legal/regulatory breaches or reputational damage.

damages.

Reporting and control

LOGO

106  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk management

Operational risk management

Roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests with the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by business unit management through specific meetings which cover governance, risk and control. Businesses are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event drivenevent-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, material control issues, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

The Group Head of Operational Risk as Principal Risk Officer, is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Operational Risk Management Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group.

Operational risk managementRisk Management (ORM) acts in a second line of defence capacity, and is responsible for defining and overseeing the implementation of the framework and monitoring Barclays operational risk events,profile. ORM alerts management when risk exposureslevels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite in order to drive timely decision making and material control issues.actions by the first line of defence. Through attendance at Business Unit Governance, Risk and ControlsCommittee meetings, it providesORM provide specific risk input into the issues highlighted and the overall risk profile of the business. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered by the Group Principal Risk Officer through the second line of defence review meetings, which also consider material control issues and their effective remediation.meetings. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the BRC or the BAC.

Specific reports are prepared by businesses, Key Risk Officers and Group Operational RiskFor further information on a regular basis for ORRF, BRC and BAC.

operational risk management, Risk and control self-assessmentsControl Self-assessments and key indicators

The Group identifies and assesses all material risks within each business and evaluates the key controls in place to mitigate those risks. Managers in the businesses use self-assessment techniques to identify risks, evaluate the effectiveness of key controls in place, and assess whether the risks are effectively managed within business risk appetite. The businesses are then able to make decisions on what action, if any, is required to reduce the level of riskscenarios, please refer to the Group. These risk assessments are monitored on a regular basis to ensure that each business continually understands the risks it faces.

Key Indicators (KIs) are metrics which allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile. KIs include measurable thresholds that reflect the risk appetite of the business and are monitoredmanagement section on pages 350 to alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions.353.

 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  107    91


Risk review

Principal Risk management

ConductModel risk management

 

 

Model risk

The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.

Overview

Barclays uses models to support a broad range of activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements.

Since models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, they may be subject to errors affecting the accuracy of their output. Model errors can result in inappropriate business decisions being made, financial loss, regulatory risk, reputational risk and/or inadequate capital reporting. Models may also be misused, for instance applied to products that they were not intended for, or not adjusted, where fundamental changes to their environment would justify re-evaluating their core assumptions. Errors and misuse are the primary sources of model risk.

Robust model risk management is crucial to assessing and managing model risk within a defined risk appetite. Strong model risk culture, appropriate technology environment, and adequate focus on understanding and resolving model limitations are crucial components.

Organisation and structure

Barclays allocates substantial resources to identify and record models and their usage, document and monitor the performance of models, validate models and adequately address model limitations. Barclays manages model risk as an enterprise level risk similar to other Principal Risks.

Barclays has a dedicated Model Risk Management (MRM) function that consists of

two main units: the Independent Validation Unit (IVU), responsible for model validation and approval, and Model Governance and Controls (MGC), covering model risk governance, controls and reporting, including ownership of model risk policy and the model inventory.

The model risk management framework consists of the model risk policy and standards. The policy prescribes group-wide, end-to-end requirements for the identification, measurement and management of model risk, covering model documentation, development, implementation, monitoring, annual review, independent validation and approval, change and reporting processes. The policy is supported by global standards covering model inventory, documentation, validation, complexity and materiality, testing and monitoring, overlays, risk appetite, as well as vendor models and stress testing challenger models.

Barclays is continuously enhancing model risk management. The function reports to the Group CRO and operates a global framework. Implementation of best practice standards is a central objective of the Group. Model risk reporting flows to senior management as depicted below:

Roles and responsibilities

The key model risk management activities include:

Correctly identifying models across all relevant areas of the firm, and recording models in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventory. The heads of the relevant model ownership areas (typically, the Business Chief Risk Officers, Business Chief Executive Officers,
the Treasurer, the Chief Financial Officer, etc.) annually attest to the completeness and accuracy of the model inventory. MGC undertakes regular conformance reviews on the model inventory.

Enforcing that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model. The model owner must sign off models prior to submission to IVU for validation. The model owner works with the relevant technical teams (model developers, implementation, monitoring, data services, regulatory) to maintain that the model presented to IVU is and remains fit for purpose.

Overseeing that every model is subject to validation and approval by IVU, prior to being implemented and on a continual basis. While all models are reviewed and re-approved for continued use each year, the validation frequency and the level of review and challenge applied by IVU is tailored to the materiality and complexity of each model. Validation includes a review of the model assumptions, conceptual soundness, data, design, performance testing, compliance with external requirements if applicable, as well as any limitations, proposed remediation and overlays with supporting rationale. Material model changes are subject to prioritised validation and approval.

Defining model risk appetite in terms of risk tolerance, and qualitative metrics which are used to track and report model risk.

Maintaining specific standards that cover model risk management activities relating to stress testing challenger models, model overlays, vendor models, and model complexity and materiality.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

92    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Conduct risk management

Conduct risk

The risk thatof detriment is caused to customers, clients, counterpartiesmarket integrity, competition or Barclays from the Group becauseinappropriate supply of inappropriate judgement in the executionfinancial services, including instances of our business activities.wilful or negligent misconduct.

Overview

The Group defines, manages and mitigates conduct risk with the goal of providing goodpositive customer and client outcomes, and protecting market integrity.integrity and promoting effective competition. This includes taking reasonable steps to assure the Group’s culture and strategy are appropriately aligned to these goals, products and services are reasonably designed and delivered to meet the needs of customers and clients, as well as promoting the fair and orderly operation of the markets in which the Group does business and that the Group does not commit or facilitate money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption or breaches of economic sanctions.

The Group has defined seven Key Risks thatProduct Lifecycle, Culture and Strategy and Financial Crime are the main sub risk types to Conduct Risk:categories under conduct risk.

§our products or services do not meet customers’ needs or have the potential to cause customer detriment

§the way we design and undertake transaction services has the potential to cause customer detriment

§the way we design or undertake customer servicing has the potential to cause customer detriment

§our strategy or business model has the potential to cause customer detriment

§our governance arrangements or culture has the potential to cause customer detriment

§we fail to obtain and maintain relevant regulatory authorisations, permissions and licence requirements

§damage to Barclays’ reputation is caused during the conduct of our business.

Organisation and structure

The Conductgovernance of conduct risk within Barclays is fulfilled through management Committees and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) derives its authority fromforums operated by the Barclays Group HeadFirst and Second Lines of Compliance. Defence with clear escalation and reporting lines to the Board.

The purpose ofGRC is the CRRC is to reviewmost senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitormonitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Conduct and Reputation Risk. In addition, specific committees monitor conduct risk and the control environment at the business level.risk.

Roles and responsibilities

The Conduct Risk Principal RiskManagement Framework (PRF)(CRMF) comprises a number of elements that allow the Group to manage and measure its conduct risk profile.

The PRF is implemented acrossSenior Managers have ownership within their areas for managing conduct risk. These individuals have a Statement of Responsibilities identifying the Group:

§vertically, through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk framework that meets the requirements detailed within the ERMF

§horizontally, with Group Key Risk Officers (KROs) required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each element of the Conduct Risk PRF.

activities and areas for which they are accountable. The primary responsibility for managing conduct risk and compliance with control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises. The Conduct Risk Accountable Executive for each business is responsible for ensuring the implementationFirst Line Business Control Committees provide oversight of and adherencecontrols relating to the PRF.conduct risk.

The Conduct Principal RiskGroup Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Conduct Risk PRF andCRMF for overseeing Group-wide Conduct Riskconduct risk management. This includes defining and owning the relevant conduct risk policies and oversight of the implementation of controls to manage the risk.

Businesses are required to report their conduct risks on both a quarterly and an event drivenevent-driven basis. The quarterly reports detail conduct risks inherent within the business strategy and include forward looking horizon scanning analysis as well as backward looking evidence-based indicators from both internal and external sources. For details please refer to

The Business Unit Risk Committees and the Risk Review, Conduct Risk Performance section of this report (page 175).

Financial Crime Business level reportsOversight Committees are reviewed within Compliance. Compliance then creates Group level reportsthe primary Second Line governance forums for consideration by CRRC and RepCo. The Group periodically assesses its managementoversight of conduct risk through independent auditsprofile and addresses issues identified.

Event-driven reporting consistsimplementation of the CRMF. The responsibilities of the Business Unit Risk Committees include approval of the conduct risk tolerance and the business defined key indicators. Additional responsibilities include the identification and discussion of any emerging conduct risks or issues that breach certain thresholds for severity and probability. Any such risks or issues must be promptly escalated to the business and the appropriate KRO.exposures which have been identified.

In 2015 Reputation Risk was re-designated as a Key Risk under the Conduct Risk Principal Risk. The Reputation Key Risk Framework outlines the processes and actions required of the business. These include regular and forward looking reviews of current and emerging reputation risks so that a topical and comprehensive reputation risk profile of the organisation can be maintained.

 

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

LOGO

 

108  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    93


 


Risk review

Principal Risk management

ConductReputation risk management

 

 

Reputation risk is

The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the riskfirm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

Overview

A reduction of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders (e.g. customers, clients, colleagues, shareholders, regulators, opinion formers) to be inappropriate or unethical. Damage to the Group’s brandtrust in Barclays’ integrity and consequent erosion of our reputation reducescompetence may reduce the attractiveness of the GroupBarclays to stakeholders and maycould lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value.

Organisation and structure

The GRC is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of reputation risk.

Roles and responsibilities

The Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing a reputation risk framework and policies including limits against which data is monitored, reported on and escalated, as required.

Reputation risk may arise inis by nature pervasive and can be difficult to quantify, requiring more subjective judgement than many different ways,other risks. The Reputation Risk Framework sets out what is required to manage reputation risk effectively and consistently across the bank.

The primary responsibility for example:identifying and managing reputation risk and adherence to the control requirements sits with the business and support functions where the risk arises.

Barclays International and Barclays UK are required to operate within established reputation risk appetite and their component businesses submit quarterly reports to the Group Reputation Management team, highlighting their most significant current and potential reputation risks and issues and how they are being managed. These reports are a key internal source of information for the quarterly reputation risk reports which are prepared for the GRC and RepCo.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

 

§94    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F failure to act in good faith and in accordance with


Risk review

Principal Risk management

Legal risk management

Legal risk

The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.

Overview

The Legal Risk Management Framework (LRMF) prescribes Group-wide requirements for the identification, escalation, measurement and management of legal risk, covering assessment, risk tolerance, key indicators and governance. The LRMF is supported by Group-wide legal risk policies and associated standards aligned to the following legal risks:

Contractual Arrangements the Group’s valuesrights and coderemedies in its relationships with other parties not being enforceable as intended due to the absence of conductappropriate contractual documentation or defects therein.

 

§ Litigation Managementfailure (real or perceived) to comply withadequately manage litigation involving the law or regulation, or association (real or implied) with illegal activityGroup.

 

§ failures in corporate governance, managementIntellectual Property (IP)– failure to protect the Group’s IP assets or technical systemsthe Group infringing valid IP rights of third parties.

 

§ Competition/Anti-trustfailure to complyadequately manage competition/anti-trust issues or failure to manage relationships with internal standards and policiescompetition/anti-trust authorities.

 

§ association with controversial sectors or clientsUse of Law Firms– failure to control instruction of external law firms.

 

§ associationContact with controversial transactions, projects, countriesRegulators– failure to manage interactions with regulators or governmentsfailure to manage the receipt and handling of regulatory information from a regulatory or government agency appropriately.

The LRMF requires businesses and functions to integrate the management of legal risk within their strategic planning and business decision making, including adopting processes to identify legal risk exposures and managing adherence to the minimum control requirements.

In addition to legal risk detailed above, legal outcomes, including losses or the imposition of penalties, damages, fines and sanctions, may arise because of past and future actions, behaviours and business decisions aligned to the Principal Risk which gave rise to the outcome, including but not limited to conduct and operational risk. Details of current contentious legal matters in relation to the Group are set out in Note 29.

Organisation and structure

Business/function risk forums have oversight of their legal risk profile and implementation of the LRMF. The Legal Executive Committee oversees, challenges and monitors legal risk across the Group. The GRC is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of risk. Escalation paths from this forum exist to the BRC.

Roles and responsibilities

The primary responsibility for identifying and managing legal risk and adherence to the minimum control requirements sits with the businesses/functions where the risk resides.

On behalf of the businesses/functions, the aligned General Counsel or members of Legal senior management provide oversight and challenge of the legal risk profile, for example by undertaking legal risk tolerance assessments, and providing advice on legal risk management. Legal risk tolerance assessments include both quantitative and qualitative criteria such as:

Risk and control self-assessment, lessons learned, testing and monitoring processes.

 

§ association with controversial business decisions, including but not restricted to, decisions relating to: products (in particular new products), delivery channels, promotions/advertising, acquisitions, branch representation, sourcing/supply chain relationships, staff locations, treatmentAnalysis of financial transactionslegal risk material control issues or weaknesses.

 

§ association with poor employment practices.Potential legal risks resulting from upcoming changes in the control environment, systems, or internal organisational structures.

In each case,

Potential implications on the Group of forthcoming changes in the external legal and regulatory environment and/or prevailing decisions from courts and enforcing authorities as they relate to defined legal risks.

The Group General Counsel supported by the Global Head of Legal Risk, Governance and Control is responsible for maintaining an appropriate LRMF and for overseeing Group-wide legal risk may arise from failure to comply with either stated norms, which are likely to change over time, so an assessment of reputation risk cannot be static. If not managed effectively, stakeholder expectations of responsible corporate behaviour will not be met.

Reputation risk may also arise and cause damage to the Group’s image, through association with clients, their transactions or their projects if these are perceived by external stakeholders to be environmentally damaging. Where the Group is financing infrastructure projects which have potentially adverse environmental impacts, the Group’s Client Assessment and Aggregation policy and supporting Environmental and Social Risk Standard will apply. This policy identifies the circumstances in which the Group requires due diligence to include assessment of specialist environmental reports. These reports will include consideration of a wide range of the project’s potential impacts including on air, water and land quality, on biodiversity issues, on locally affected communities, including any material upstream and downstream impacts, and working conditions together with employee and community health and safety. Adherence to the Environmental and Social Risk Standard is the mechanism by which Barclays fulfils the requirements of the Equator Principles. These Principles are an internationally recognised framework for environmental due diligence in project finance. Barclays was one of four banks which collaborated in developing the Principles, ahead of their launch in 2003 with 10 adopting banks. There are now more than 80 banks worldwide which have adopted the Equator Principles (see www.equator-principles.com).management.

 

Organisation and structure

 

LOGO

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  109    95


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

Maintaining our risk profile at an acceptable and appropriate level is essential to ensure our continued performance. This section provides a review of the performance of the Group in 2015 for each of the five Principal Risks, which are credit, market, funding, operational, and conduct risk.

 

Summary of Contents

Page
Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Group and mainly arises from exposure to wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts entered into with clients.

   Credit risk overview and summary of performance

97

   The Group’s maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancements

       held97

   The Group’s approach to management and representation of credit quality

100

– Asset credit quality

100

– Debt securities

100

– Balance sheet credit quality

100
This section provides a macro view of the Group’s credit exposures.
  

 

   Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

102
The Group reviews and monitors risk

Page

– Geographic concentrations

102
concentrations in a variety of ways.

– Industrial concentrations

103
This sections outlines performance against key
concentration risks at a macro Group level.

   Loans and advances to customers and banks

105
In addition to Group wide concentrations, Credit Risk monitors exposure performance across a range of specific portfolios.

   Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

106

– Secured home loans

106

– Credit cards and unsecured loans

107

– Wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost

108
The Group monitors exposures to assets where there is a heightened likelihood of default and assets where an actual default has occurred.

   Analysis of problem loans

109

– Age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but  not impaired

109

– Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired

109

– Potential credit risk loans and coverage ratios

110

– Impaired loans

111
This section outlines the exposure to assets that have been classified as impaired analysing the exposures between business units and by key product types.

– Forbearance

112

The Group, from time to time, agrees to the suspension of certain aspects of customer/client credit agreements, generally during temporary periods of financial difficulties where the Group is confident that the customer/client will be able to remedy the suspension.

 

  
This section outlines the Group’s current exposure to assets with this treatment.

The Group holds impairment provisions on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for incurred losses in

the lending book. An impairment allowance may either be identified or unidentified and individual or collective.

   Impairment

   

114
Credit risk  

– Impairment allowances

111 

Market risk   138 114

– Management adjustments to models for impairment

   114
Funding risk – capital risk

   Analysis of debt securities

   148 115

   Analysis of derivatives

   115
Funding risk – liquidity risk
154 This section outlines the movements in allowance for impairment by asset class exposure, material management adjustments to model output, analysis of debt securities and derivatives.  
Operational risk172   
Conduct risk174 

 

    LOGO

For a more detailed breakdown on our Risk review and Risk management contents please see pages 84-85

110  |  96    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Analysis of credit risk

Credit risk is the risk of the Group suffering financial loss should any of its customers, clients, or market counterparties fail to fulfil their contractual obligations to the Group.

This section details the Group’s credit risk profile and provides information on the Group’s exposure to loans and advances to customer and banks, maximum exposures with collateral held, and net impairment charges raised in the year. It provides information on balances that are categorised as credit risk loans, balances in forbearance, as well as exposure to and performance metrics for specific portfolios and asset types.

Key metrics

§Credit impairment charges in 2015 were 2% lower than 2014:

+£32m Group Core

Loan impairment broadly stable reflecting benign economic conditions in the UK and US

+£30m Retail Core

Performance across key portfolios has remained stable and within expectations

+£2m Wholesale Core

Performance benefiting from economic conditions in the UK and US markets offset by impact of stress in Oil and Gas portfolios

-£139m Non-Core

Lower charge reflects sale of Spanish business and higher recoveries in Portugal

§Net Loans and advances to customers and banks decreased by 6% in 2015.

§The loan loss rate was stable at 47bps.

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  111


    

    

    

 

Credit risk

Credit risk is theThe risk of loss to the Group suffering financial loss should anyfirm from the failure of itsclients, customers clients or market counterparties, failsincluding sovereigns, to fulfilfully honour their contractual obligations to the Group.firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables.

All disclosures in this section (pages 112-137)97 to 116) are unaudited unless otherwise statedstated.

Key metrics

Loan impairment charges in 2017 were 1% lower than 2016:

Group-£19m
Loan impairment reduced slightly reflecting lower charges in Barclays UK and in the Barclays International wholesale portfolios partially offset by an adjustment relating to an asset sale in US cards
Retail+£42m
Overall the retail portfolios have remained stable and broadly within expectations. Notwithstanding this, impairment charges increased primarily due to an adjustment relating to an asset sale in US cards
Wholesale-£61m

Impairment charges have decreased, despite a large single name impairment. The lower impairment outcome was driven by a range of releases and materially lower charges to the Oil sector.

Overview

Credit risk represents a significant risk to the Group and mainly arises from exposure to wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts entered into with clients. A summary of performance may be found below.

This section provides an analysis of areas of particular interest or potentially of higher risk, including: i) balance sheet, including the maximum exposure, and collateral, credit quality and loans and advances; ii) areas of concentrations, including the Eurozone;concentrations; iii) exposure to and performance metrics for specific portfolios and assets types, including home loans and credit cards and UK commercial real estate;cards; iv) exposure and performance of loans on concession programmes, including forbearance; v) problem loans, including credit risk loans (CRLs); and vi)forbearance; and v) impairment, including impairment stockallowances and management adjustments to model outputs.

The topics covered in this section may be found inPlease see the credit risk section of the contents on page 84. Please see risk management section on pages 94-10985 to 86 for details of governance, policies and procedures.

Summary of performance in the period

CreditLoan impairment charges in 2015 fell 2%decreased £19m to £2.1bn which principally reflected the benign economic conditions in the UK and US and effective risk management, including the strengthening of the Retail Impairment Policy. These supported generally stable delinquency rates in retail and lower default rates in wholesale where large single names were limited in number and focused on the Oil and Gas sector.

The level of CRL reduced to £7.8bn principally due to a reduction in Non-Core and Personal and Corporate Banking. The coverage ratios for home loans, unsecured retail portfolios and corporate loans remain broadly in line with expected severity rates for these types of portfolios.

Net£2,333m. Total loans and advances net of impairment decreased by £34.1bn to customers and banks reduced 6% to £440.6bn reflecting a£415.4bn net £12.7bn decrease in Non-Core businesses,cash collateral and settlement balances and a £21.4bn decrease in other lending, primarily in Corporate and Investment Bankbank. Overall, this resulted in a 4bps increase in the LLR to 57bps.

Credit risk loans (CRLs) decreased to £6.0bn (December 2016: £6.5bn) and Africa Banking offset by increases in Personal and Corporate Banking.the CRL coverage ratio increased to 78% (December 2016: 71%) mainly within retail portfolios.

The loan loss rate was broadly stable at 47bps (2014: 46bps).

Analysis of the balance sheetBalance Sheet

The

Group’s maximum exposure and collateral and other credit enhancements held

Basis of preparation

The following tables present a reconciliation between the Group’s maximum exposure and its net exposure to credit risk; reflecting the financial effects of collateral, credit enhancements and other actions taken to mitigate the Group’s exposure.

For financial assets recognised on the balance sheet, maximum exposure to credit risk represents the balance sheet carrying value after allowance for impairment. For off-balance sheet guarantees, the maximum exposure is the maximum amount that the Group would have to pay if the guarantees were to be called upon. For loan commitments and other credit related commitments that are irrevocable over the life of the respective facilities, the maximum exposure is the full amount of the committed facilities.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F     97


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)             
   

Maximum

exposure

£m

 

 

 

   

Netting

and set-off

£m

 

 

 

  Collateral   
      Cash  Non-cash  Risk transfer  Net exposure 
As at 31 December 2017     £m  £m  £m  £m 
On-balance sheet:                          
Cash and balances at central banks   171,082                171,082 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   2,153                2,153 
Trading portfolio assets:        
Debt securities   51,200                51,200 
Traded loans   3,140          (128     3,012 
Total trading portfolio assets   54,340          (128     54,212 
Financial assets designated at fair value:        
Loans and advances   11,037       (440  (5,497  (344  4,756 
Debt securities   15                15 
Reverse repurchase agreements   100,040       (426  (99,428     186 
Other financial assets   519                519 
Total financial assets designated at fair value   111,611       (866  (104,925  (344  5,476 
Derivative financial instruments   237,669    (184,265  (33,092  (6,170  (5,885  8,257 
Loans and advances to banks   35,663       (6  (583  (37  35,037 
Loans and advances to customers:        
Home loans   147,002       (158  (146,554     290 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   55,767       (241  (3,995  (16  51,515 
Corporate loans   162,783    (6,617  (224  (45,819  (4,341  105,782 
Total loans and advances to customers   365,552    (6,617  (623  (196,368  (4,357  157,587 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   12,546          (12,226     320 
Financial investments - debt securities   57,129          (463  (853  55,813 
Other assets   869                869 
Total on-balance sheet   1,048,614    (190,882  (34,587  (320,863  (11,476  490,806 
Off-balance sheet:        
Contingent liabilities   19,012       (318  (1,482  (228  16,984 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   812       (27  (11  (4  770 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   314,761       (46  (31,058  (1,753  281,904 
Total off-balance sheet   334,585       (391  (32,551  (1,985  299,658 
                           
Total   1,383,199    (190,882  (34,978  (353,414  (13,461  790,464 

This and subsequent analyses of credit risk include only financial assets subject to credit risk. They exclude other financial assets not subject to credit risk, mainly equity securities held for trading, as available for sale or designated at fair value, and traded commodities. Assets designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities to customers under investment contracts have also not been included as the Group is not exposed to credit risk on these assets. Credit losses in these portfolios, if any, would lead to a reduction in the linked liabilities and not result in a loss to the Group. For off-balance sheet exposures certain contingent liabilities not subject to credit risk such as performance guarantees are excluded.

The Group mitigates the credit risk to which it is exposed through netting and set-off, collateral and risk transfer. Further detail on the Group’s policies to each of these forms of credit enhancement is presented on pages 100.in the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2017.

Overview

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the Group’s net exposure to credit risk after taking into account netting and set-off, collateral and risk transfer decreased 6%increased 7% to £701.4bn, reflecting a decrease in maximum exposure of 14% and a reduction in the level of mitigation held by 21%.£790.5bn. Overall, the extent to which the Group holds mitigation against its total exposure reduced slightlydecreased to 48% (2014: 53%43% (2016: 47%).

Of the remaining exposure left unmitigated, a significant portion relates to cash held at central banks, available for salefinancial investment debt securities issued by governments and cash collateral and settlement balances, all of which are considered to be lower risk. Increases in cash held at central banks and financial investment debt securities in the period have driven the increase in the Group’s net exposure to credit risk. Trading portfolio liability positions, which to a significant extent economically hedge trading portfolio assets but which are not held specifically for risk management purposes, are excluded from the analysis. The credit quality of counterparties to derivative, available for salederivatives, financial investments and wholesale loan assets are predominantly investment grade. Further analysis on the credit quality of assets is presented on pages 115-116.100 to 101.

Where collateral has been obtained in the event of default, the Group does not, as a rule, use such assets for its own operations and they are usually sold on a timely basis. The carrying value of assets held by the Group as at 31 December 2015,2017, as a result of the enforcement of collateral, was £69m (2014: £161m)£nil (2016: £16m).

 

 

112  |  98    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

    

 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)  
   Maximum      Netting     

 

Collateral       

  

   Risk      Net  
   exposure      and set-off      Cash      Non-cash      transfer      exposure  
 As at 31 December 2015   £m      £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  
 On-balance sheet:                              
 Cash and balances at central banks   49,711      –      –      –      –      49,711  
 Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,011      –      –      –      –      1,011  
 Trading portfolio assets:            
 Debt securities   45,576      –      –      –      –      45,576  
 Traded loans   2,474      –      –      (607)     (1)     1,866  
 Total trading portfolio assets   48,050      –      –      (607)     (1)     47,442  
 Financial assets designated at fair value:            
 Loans and advances   17,913      –      (21)     (5,850)     (515)     11,527  
 Debt securities   1,383      –      –      –      –      1,383  
 Reverse repurchase agreementsa   49,513      –      (315)     (49,027)     –      171  
 Other financial assets   375      –      –      –      –      375  
 Total financial assets designated at fair value   69,184      –      (336)     (54,877)     (515)     13,456  
 Derivative financial instruments   327,709      (259,582)     (34,918)     (7,484)     (5,529)     20,196  
 Loans and advances to banks   41,349      –      (4)     (4,072)     (64)     37,209  
 Loans and advances to customers:            
 Home loans   155,863      –      (221)     (154,355)     (634)     653  
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   67,840      (12)     (1,076)     (14,512)     (1,761)     50,479  
 Corporate loans   175,514      (8,399)     (593)     (45,788)     (4,401)     116,333  
 Total loans and advances to customers   399,217      (8,411)     (1,890)     (214,655)     (6,796)     167,465  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   28,187      –      (166)     (27,619)     –      402  
 Available for sale debt securities   89,278      –      –      (832)     (811)     87,635  
 Other assets   1,410      –      –      –      –      1,410  
 Total on-balance sheet   1,055,106      (267,993)     (37,314)     (310,146)     (13,716)     425,937  
 Off-balance sheet:            
 Contingent liabilities   20,576      –      (604)     (1,408)     (104)     18,460  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   845      –      (33)     (57)     (3)     752  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb   93      –      –      (91)     –      2  
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   281,369      –      (313)     (24,156)     (662)     256,238  
 Total off-balance sheet   302,883      –      (950)     (25,712)     (769)     275,452  
                               
 Total   1,357,989      (267,993)     (38,264)     (335,858)     (14,485)     701,389  

 

 

Notes

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bForward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)         
    Maximum   Netting  Collateral         
As at 31 December 2016  

exposure

£m

   

and set-off

£m

  

Cash

£m

  Non-cash
£m
  Risk transfer
£m
  Net exposure
£m
 
On-balance sheet:                          
Cash and balances at central banks   102,353                102,353 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,467                1,467 
Trading portfolio assets:        
Debt securities   38,789                38,789 
Traded loans   2,975          (270     2,705 
Total trading portfolio assets   41,764          (270     41,494 
Financial assets designated at fair value:        
Loans and advances   10,519       (17  (4,107  (432  5,963 
Debt securities   70                70 
Reverse repurchase agreements   63,162       (688  (62,233     241 
Other financial assets   262                262 
Total financial assets designated at fair value   74,013       (705  (66,340  (432  6,536 
Derivative financial instruments   346,626    (273,602  (41,641  (8,282  (5,205  17,896 
Loans and advances to banks   43,251       (4  (4,896  (22  38,329 
Loans and advances to customers:        
Home loans   144,765       (184  (143,912     669 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   57,808       (235  (5,258  (95  52,220 
Corporate loans   190,211    (8,622  (320  (52,029  (5,087  124,153 
Total loans and advances to customers   392,784    (8,622  (739  (201,199  (5,182  177,042 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   13,454       (79  (13,242     133 
Financial investments - debt securities   62,879          (533  (1,286  61,060 
Other assets   1,205                1,205 
Total on-balance sheet   1,079,796    (282,224  (43,168  (294,762  (12,127  447,515 
Off-balance sheet:        
Contingent liabilities   19,908       (247  (1,403  (130  18,128 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   1,005       (24  (18  (3  960 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   302,681       (321  (26,548  (1,704  274,108 
Total off-balance sheet   323,594       (592  (27,969  (1,837  293,196 
                           
Total   1,403,390    (282,224  (43,760  (322,731  (13,964  740,711 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  113    99


 Maximum exposure and effects of collateral and other credit enhancements (audited)  
   Maximum      Netting     

 

Collateral       

  

   Risk      Net  
   exposure      and set-off      Cash      Non-cash      transfer      exposure  
 As at 31 December 2014   £m      £m      £m      £m      £m      £m  
 On-balance sheet:                              
 Cash and balances at central banks   39,695      –      –      –      –      39,695  
 Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,210      –      –      –      –      1,210  
 Trading portfolio assets:            
 Debt securities   65,997      –      –      –      –      65,997  
 Traded loans   2,693      –      –      –      –      2,693  
 Total trading portfolio assets   68,690      –      –      –      –      68,690  
 Financial assets designated at fair value:            
 Loans and advances   20,198      –      (48)     (6,657)     (291)     13,202  
 Debt securities   4,448      –      –      –      –      4,448  
 Reverse repurchase agreements   5,236      –      –      (4,803)     –      433  
 Other financial assets   469      –      –      –      –      469  
 Total financial assets designated at fair value   30,351      –      (48)     (11,460)     (291)     18,552  
 Derivative financial instruments   439,909      (353,631)     (44,047)     (8,231)     (6,653)     27,347  
 Loans and advances to banks   42,111      (1,012)     –      (3,858)     (176)     37,065  
 Loans and advances to customers:            
 Home loans   166,974      –      (274)     (164,389)     (815)     1,496  
 Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   69,022      –      (954)     (16,433)     (1,896)     49,739  
 Corporate loans   191,771      (9,162)     (620)     (40,201)     (5,122)     136,666  
 Total loans and advances to customers   427,767      (9,162)     (1,848)     (221,023)     (7,833)     187,901  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   131,753      –      –      (130,135)     –      1,618  
 Available for sale debt securities   85,539      –      –      (938)     (432)     84,169  
 Other assets   1,680      –      –      –      –      1,680  
 Total on-balance sheet   1,268,705      (363,805)     (45,943)     (375,645)     (15,385)     467,927  
 Off-balance sheet:            
 Contingent liabilities   21,263      –      (781)     (848)     (270)     19,364  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   1,091      –      (6)     (8)     (3)     1,074  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements   13,856      –      –      (13,841)     –      15  
 Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   276,315      –      (457)     (17,385)     (793)     257,680  
 Total off-balance sheet   312,525      –      (1,244)     (32,082)     (1,066)     278,133  
                               
 Total   1,581,230      (363,805)     (47,187)     (407,727)     (16,451)     746,060  

114  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

 

 

The Group’s approach to managingmanagement and representingrepresentation of credit quality

Asset credit quality

All loans and advances are categorised as either ‘neither past due nor impaired’, ‘past due but not impaired’, or ‘past due and impaired’, which includes restructured loans. For the purposes of the disclosures in the balance sheet credit quality section below and the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section (page 117)114):

 

§a loan is considered past due when the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract

§the impairment allowance includes allowances against financial assets that have been individually impaired and those subject to collective impairment

§ loans neither past due nor impaired consist predominantly of wholesale and retail loans that are performing. These loans, although unimpaired may carry an unidentified impairment

 

§ loans that area loan is considered past due but not impaired consist predominantlyand classified as “Higher risk” when the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of wholesale loans that are past due but individually assessed as not being impaired. These loans, although individually assessed as unimpaired, may carry an unidentified impairment provisionthe loan contract

 

§ impaired loans thaton forbearance programmes, as defined on page 111, are individually assessed consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due and for which an individual allowance has been raisedcategorised as “Higher risk”

 

§ the impairment allowance includes allowances against financial assets that have been individually impaired loans that are collectively assessed consist predominantly of retail loans that are one day or more past due for which aand those subject to collective allowance is raised. Wholesale loans that are past due, individually assessed as unimpaired, but which carry an unidentified impairment provision, are excluded from this category.impairment.

Home loans, unsecured loans and credit card receivables that are subject to forbearance in the retail portfolios are included in the collectively assessed impaired loans column in the tables in the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section (page 117). Included within wholesale loans that are designated as neither past due nor impaired is a portion of loans that have been subject to forbearance or similar strategies as part of the Group’s ongoing relationship with clients. The loans will have an internal rating reflective of the level of risk to which the Group is exposed, bearing in mind the circumstances of the forbearance, the overall performance and prospects of the client. Loans on forbearance programmes will typically, but not always, attract a higher risk rating than similar loans which are not. A portion of wholesale loans under forbearance is included in the past due but not impaired column, although not all loans subject to forbearance are necessarily impaired or past due. Where wholesale loans under forbearance have been impaired, these form part of individually assessed impaired loans.

The Group uses the following internal measures to determine credit quality for loans that are performing:

 

Default Grade

Retail lending
Probability of
default




  
Wholesale lending
Probability of
default
  


Credit Quality
descriptionDescription

 
1-30.0-0.60%  0.0-0.05%                   Strong 
4-5  0.05-0.15%  
6-8  0.15-0.30%  
9-11  0.30-0.60%     
12-14  0.60-10.00%0.60-2.15%   Satisfactory 
15-19  2.15-11.35%     
 20-2110.00%+20 - 21  11.35%+   Higher riskRisk 

For retail clients, a range of analytical tools is used to derive the probability of default of clients at inception and on an ongoing basis.

For loans that are performing, these descriptions can be summarised as follows:

Strong: there is a very high likelihood of the asset being recovered in full.

Satisfactory: while there is a high likelihood that the asset will be recovered and therefore, of no cause for concern to the Group, the asset may not be collateralised, or may relate to unsecured retail facilities, such as credit card balances and unsecured loans, which have been classified as satisfactory, regardless of the fact that the output of internal grading models may have indicated a higher classification.facilities. At the lower end of this grade there are customers that are being more carefully monitored, for example, corporate customers which are indicating some evidence of deterioration, mortgages with a high loan to value, and unsecured retail loans operating outside normal product guidelines.

Higher risk: there is concern over the obligor’s ability to make payments when due. However, these have not yet converted to actual delinquency. There may also be doubts over the value of collateral or security provided. However, the borrower or counterparty is continuing to make payments when due and is expected to settle all outstanding amounts of principal and interest.

Loans that are past due are monitored closely, with impairment allowances raised as appropriate and in line with the Group’s impairment policies. These loans are all considered higher risk for the purpose of this analysis of credit quality.

Debt securities

For assets held at fair value, the carrying value on the balance sheet will include, among other things, the credit risk of the issuer. Most listed and some unlisted securities are rated by external rating agencies. The Group mainly uses external credit ratings provided by Standard & Poor’s, Fitch or Moody’s. Where such ratings are not available or are not current, the Group will use its own internal ratings for the securities.

Balance sheet credit quality

The following tables present the credit quality of Group assets exposed to credit risk.

Overview

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the ratio of the Group’s assets classified as strong remained broadly stable at 85% (2014: 84%89% (2016: 86%) of total assets exposed to credit risk.

Traded assets remained mostly investment grade with the following proportions being categorised as strong: 96% (2014: 94%) of total derivative financial instruments, 95% (2014: 91%) of debt securities held for trading and 99% (2014: 98%) of debt securities held as available for sale. The credit quality of counterparties to reverse repurchase agreements held at amortised cost, and designated at fair value categorised as strong was 83% (2014: 78%). The credit risk of these assets is significantly reduced as balances are largely collateralised.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  115


In the loan portfolios, 89% of home loans (2014: 86%) to customers are measured as strong. The majority of credit card, unsecured and other retail lending remained satisfactory, reflecting the unsecured nature of a significant proportion of the balance, comprising 76% (2014: 71%) of the total. The credit quality profile of the Group’s wholesale lending remained stable with counterparties rated strong at 72% (2014: 72%).

Further analysis of debt securities by issuer and issuer type and netting and collateral arrangements on derivative financial instruments is presented on pages 129115 and 130116 respectively.

Balance sheet credit quality (audited)

  

   
 
 
 

 

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 

 

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

£m

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
Maximum
exposure to
credit risk
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Higher risk
(B-and
below)

%

  
  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015

                                

Cash and balances at central banks

  49,711            49,711    100    0    0    100  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  922    62    27    1,011    91    6    3    100  

Trading portfolio assets:

        

Debt securities

  43,118    2,217    241    45,576    95    5    0    100  

Traded loans

  329    1,880    265    2,474    13    76    11    100  

Total trading portfolio assets

  43,447    4,097    506    48,050    90    9    1    100  

Financial assets designated at fair value:

        

Loans and advances

  16,751    790    372    17,913    94    4    2    100  

Debt securities

  1,378    3    2    1,383    100    0    0    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga

  41,145    8,352    16    49,513    83    17    0    100  

Other financial assets

  313    62        375    83    17    0    100  

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  59,587    9,207    390    69,184    86    13    1    100  

Derivative financial instruments

  313,114    13,270    1,325    327,709    96    4    0    100  

Loans and advances to banks

  39,059    1,163    1,127    41,349    94    3    3    100  

Loans and advances to customers:

        

Home loans

  139,252    9,704    6,907    155,863    89    6    5    100  

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

  12,347    51,294    4,199    67,840    18    76    6    100  

Corporate loans

  125,743    39,600    10,171    175,514    72    22    6    100  

Total loans and advances to customers

  277,342    100,598    21,277    399,217    70    25    5    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  23,040    5,147        28,187    82    18    0    100  

Available for sale debt securities

  88,536    632    110    89,278    99    1    0    100  

Other assets

  1,142    233    35    1,410    81    17    2    100  

Total assets

  895,900    134,409    24,797    1,055,106    85    13    2    100  

 

As at 31 December 2014

          ��                     

Cash and balances at central banks

  39,695            39,695    100    0    0    100  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

  1,134    47    29    1,210    94    4    2    100  

Trading portfolio assets:

        

Debt securities

  60,290    5,202    505    65,997    91    8    1    100  

Traded loans

  446    1,935    312    2,693    16    72    12    100  

Total trading portfolio assets

  60,736    7,137    817    68,690    89    10    1    100  

Financial assets designated at fair value:

        

Loans and advances

  18,544    844    810    20,198    92    4    4    100  

Debt securities

  4,316    130    2    4,448    97    3    0    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  4,876    346    14    5,236    93    7    0    100  

Other financial assets

  269    168    32    469    57    36    7    100  

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  28,005    1,488    858    30,351    92    5    3    100  

Derivative financial instruments

  414,980    24,387    542    439,909    94    6    0    100  

Loans and advances to banks

  39,453    1,651    1,007    42,111    94    4    2    100  

Loans and advances to customers:

        

Home loans

  143,700    13,900    9,374    166,974    86    8    6    100  

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

  15,369    49,255    4,398    69,022    23    71    6    100  

Corporate loans

  137,102    42,483    12,186    191,771    72    22    6    100  

Total loans and advances to customers

  296,171    105,638    25,958    427,767    69    25    6    100  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

  102,609    29,142    2    131,753    78    22    0    100  

Available for sale debt securities

  84,405    498    636    85,539    98    1    1    100  

Other assets

  1,336    282    62    1,680    79    17    4    100  

Total assets

  1,068,524    170,270    29,911    1,268,705    84    13    3    100  

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

 

116  |  100    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

    

As the principal source of credit risk to the Group, loans and advances to customers and banks is analysed in detail below:

Loans and advances to customers and banks

 

Analysis of loans and advances and impairment to customers and banks  
    

 

 

Gross

L&A

£m

  

  

  

   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
chargesa
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Personal & Corporate Banking   137,212     713     136,499     1,591     1.2     199     15  
Africa Banking   17,412     539     16,873     859     4.9     273     157  
Barclaycard   43,346     1,835     41,511     1,601     3.7     1,251     289  
Barclays Core   197,970     3,087     194,883     4,051     2.0     1,723     87  
Barclays Non-Core   11,610     369     11,241     845     7.3     85     73  
Total Group Retail   209,580     3,456     206,124     4,896     2.3     1,808     86  
Investment Bank   92,321     83     92,238     241     0.3     47     5  
Personal & Corporate Banking   87,855     914     86,941     1,794     2.0     182     21  
Africa Banking   14,955     235     14,720     541     3.6     80     53  
Head Office and Other Operations   5,922          5,922                      
Barclays Core   201,053     1,232     199,821     2,576     1.3     309     15  
Barclays Non-Core   34,854     233     34,621     345     1.0     (20   (6
Total Group Wholesale   235,907     1,465     234,442     2,921     1.2     289     12  
Group Total   445,487     4,921     440,566     7,817     1.8     2,097     47  
Traded loans   2,474     n/a     2,474          
Loans and advances designated at fair value   17,913     n/a     17,913          
Loans and advances held at fair value   20,387     n/a     20,387          
Total loans and advances   465,874     4,921     460,953          
As at 31 December 2014              
Personal & Corporate Bankingb,c   136,544     766     135,778     1,733     1.3     215     16  
Africa Banking   21,334     681     20,653     1,093     5.1     295     138  
Barclaycard   38,376     1,815     36,561     1,765     4.6     1,183     308  
Barclays Core   196,254     3,262     192,992     4,591     2.3     1,693     86  
Barclays Non-Core   20,259     428     19,831     1,209     6.0     151     75  
Total Group Retail   216,513     3,690     212,823     5,800     2.7     1,844     85  
Investment Bank   106,377     44     106,333     71     0.1     (14)     (1)  
Personal & Corporate Bankingb   88,192     873     87,319     2,112     2.4     267     30  
Africa Banking   16,312     246     16,066     665     4.1     54     33  
Head Office and Other Operations   3,240          3,240                      
Barclays Core   214,121     1,163     212,958     2,848     1.3     307     14  
Barclays Non-Core   44,699     602     44,097     841     1.9     53     12  
Total Group Wholesale   258,820     1,765     257,055     3,689     1.4     360     14  
Group Total   475,333     5,455     469,878     9,489     2.0     2,204     46  
Traded loans   2,693     n/a     2,693          
Loans and advances designated at fair value   20,198     n/a     20,198          
Loans and advances held at fair value   22,891     n/a     22,891          
Total loans and advances   498,224     5,455     492,769          

Loans and advances at amortised cost net of impairment decreased to £440.6bn (2014: £469.9bn):

§Non-Core decreased £18.1bn to £45.9bn driven by reclassification of Portuguese and Italian loans now held for sale and a reduction in Europe Retail driven by a run-off of assets

 

§Investment Bank decreased by £14.1bn to £92.2bn reflecting a decrease in cash collateral balances and a decrease in settlement balances as a result of reduced trading volumes

§Barclaycard increased by £5.0bn to £41.5bn as a result of business growth across the portfolio.

CRLs decreased £1.7bn to £7.8bn primarily due to a reduction of £0.9bn in Non-Core relating to the reclassification of the Portuguese business as held for sale and improved economic conditions for Corporate portfolios.

Loan impairment charges improved 5% to £2,097m, with a loan loss rate of 47bps (2014: 46bps). This reflected higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business in Non-Core, lower impairments in PCB due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges, partially offset by increased impairment in Barclaycard driven by growth in the business and updates to impairment model methodologies. Loan loss rates for Africa Banking increased reflecting lower year-end loans and advances balances due to Rand depreciation.

Notes

aExcluding impairment charges on available for sale investments and reverse repurchase agreements.
bUK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed. 2014 figures have been revised to reflect this, with net loans and advances of £8.4bn, credit risk loans of £482m and impairment charges of £48m reclassified to Wholesale.
c2014 PCB Credit Risk Loans have been revised by £151m to align the methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.

Balance sheet credit quality (audited) 
As at 31 December 2017  

Strong

(including
investment
grade)

£m

   

Satisfactory

(BB+ to B)

£m

   

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

£m

   

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

£m

   

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

   

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

   

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

%

   

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

 
Cash and balances at central banks   171,082            171,082    100            100 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   2,088    56    9    2,153    97    3        100 
Trading portfolio assets:                
Debt securities   48,489    2,085    626    51,200    95    4    1    100 
Traded loans   1,432    1,189    519    3,140    45    38    17    100 
Total trading portfolio assets   49,921    3,274    1,145    54,340    92    6    2    100 
Financial assets designated at fair value:                
Loans and advances   9,457    817    763    11,037    86    7    7    100 
Debt securities       15        15        100        100 
Reverse repurchase agreements   82,263    17,692    85    100,040    82    18        100 
Other financial assets   482    37        519    93    7        100 
Total financial assets designated at fair value   92,202    18,561    848    111,611    82    17    1    100 
Derivative financial instruments   229,262    7,863    544    237,669    96    4        100 
Loans and advances to banks   34,590    926    147    35,663    97    3        100 
Loans and advances to customers:                
Home loans   135,576    5,781    5,645    147,002    92    4    4    100 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   26,026    24,801    4,940    55,767    47    44    9    100 
Corporate loans   113,505    36,786    12,492    162,783    70    22    8    100 
Total loans and advances to customers   275,107    67,368    23,077    365,552    76    18    6    100 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   11,430    1,101    15    12,546    91    9        100 
Financial investments - debt securities   57,107    18    4    57,129    100            100 
Other assets   482    355    32    869    55    41    4    100 
Total assets   923,271    99,522    25,821    1,048,614    89    9    2    100 
                
Balance sheet credit quality (audited) 
As at 31 December 2016  

Strong

(including
investment
grade)

£m

   

Satisfactory

(BB+ to B)

£m

   

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

£m

   

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

£m

   

Strong
(including
investment
grade)

%

   

Satisfactory
(BB+ to B)

%

   

Higher risk
(B- and
below)

%

   

Maximum
exposure to
credit risk

%

 
Cash and balances at central banks   102,353            102,353    100            100 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,328    130    9    1,467    91    9        100 
Trading portfolio assets:                
Debt securities   37,037    1,344    408    38,789    96    3    1    100 
Traded loans   594    1,977    404    2,975    20    66    14    100 
Total trading portfolio assets   37,631    3,321    812    41,764    90    8    2    100 
Financial assets designated at fair value:                
Loans and advances   9,692    533    294    10,519    92    5    3    100 
Debt securities   59    11        70    84    16        100 
Reverse repurchase agreements   53,151    9,999    12    63,162    84    16        100 
Other financial assets   244    18        262    93    7        100 
Total financial assets designated at fair value   63,146    10,561    306    74,013    85    14    1    100 
Derivative financial instruments   330,737    14,963    926    346,626    95    5        100 
Loans and advances to banks   39,159    3,830    262    43,251    91    9        100 
Loans and advances to customers:                
Home loans   136,922    2,589    5,254    144,765    95    1    4    100 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   5,343    50,685    1,780    57,808    9    88    3    100 
Corporate loans   140,414    37,170    12,627    190,211    74    19    7    100 
Total loans and advances to customers   282,679    90,444    19,661    392,784    72    23    5    100 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   9,364    4,090        13,454    70    30        100 
Financial investments - debt securities   62,842    30    7    62,879    100            100 
Other assets   1,085    117    3    1,205    90    10        100 
Total assets   930,324    127,486    21,986    1,079,796    86    12    2    100 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  117    101


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

 

Analysis of gross loans and advances by product  
    
 
Home Loans
£m
  
  
   
 
 

 

 

Credit cards,
unsecured
and other

retail lending

£m

  
  
  

  

  

   

 

 

Corporate

Loans

£m

  

  

  

   
 

 

Group
Total

£m

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015        
Personal & Corporate Banking   135,380     21,026     68,661     225,067  
Africa Banking   10,368     7,633     14,366     32,367  
Barclaycard        41,559     1,787     43,346  
Investment Bank             92,321     92,321  
Head Office and Other Operations             5,922     5,922  
Total Core   145,748     70,218     183,057     399,023  
Barclays Non-Core   10,633     1,016     34,815     46,464  
Group Total   156,381     71,234     217,872     445,487  
As at 31 December 2014        
Personal & Corporate Banking   136,022     23,837     64,877     224,736  
Africa Banking   12,959     8,375     16,312     37,646  
Barclaycard        38,376          38,376  
Investment Bank             106,377     106,377  
Head Office and Other Operations             3,240     3,240  
Total Core   148,981     70,588     190,806     410,375  
Barclays Non-Core   18,540     1,779     44,639     64,958  
Group Total   167,521     72,367     235,445     475,333  

Analysis of the concentration of credit risk

A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties are located in a geographical region or are engaged in similar activities and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic or other conditions. The Group implements limits on concentrations in order to mitigate the risk. The analyses of credit risk concentrations presented below are based on the location of the counterparty or customer or the industry in which they are engaged. Further detail on the Group’s policies with regard to managing concentration risk is presented on page 126 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.311.

Geographic concentrations

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the geographic concentration of the Group’s assets remained broadly consistent with 2014. 40% (2014: 38%) of the exposure2016. Exposure is concentrated in the UK 31% (2014: 31%42% (2016: 41%), in the Americas 33% (2016: 33%) and 20% (2014: 22%Europe 21% (2016: 21%) in Europe.

Information on exposures to selected Eurozone countries is presented on page 119..

 

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)  
As at 31 December 2015   
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Europe

£m

  

  

   
 
Americas
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Africa and
Middle East
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Asia

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks   14,061     19,094     13,288     2,055     1,213     49,711  
Items in the course of collection from other banks   543     72          396          1,011  
Trading portfolio assets   7,150     10,012     23,641     2,111     5,136     48,050  
Financial assets designated at fair value   22,991     5,562     35,910     3,039     1,682     69,184  
Derivative financial instruments   99,658     103,498     101,592     3,054     19,907     327,709  
Loans and advances to banks   10,733     9,918     13,078     2,900     4,720     41,349  
Loans and advances to customers   239,086     47,372     69,803     33,461     9,495     399,217  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga   5,905     4,361     15,684     915     1,322     28,187  
Available for sale debt securities   20,509     40,344     20,520     3,999     3,906     89,278  
Other assets   868     4     131     314     93     1,410  
Total on-balance sheet   421,504     240,237     293,647     52,244     47,474     1,055,106  
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities   9,543     3,020     5,047     2,505     461     20,576  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   594     58          193          845  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb   9     5     65          14     93  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   104,797     34,370     125,456     13,600     3,146     281,369  
Total off-balance sheet   114,943     37,453     130,568     16,298     3,621     302,883  
Total   536,447     277,690     424,215     68,542     51,095     1,357,989  

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bForward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited) 
As at 31 December 2017  United
Kingdom
£m
   

Europe

£m

   

Americas

£m

   Africa and
Middle East
£m
   

Asia

£m

   

Total

£m

 
On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks   53,068    57,179    56,034    63    4,738    171,082 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   987    1,166                2,153 
Trading portfolio assets   10,603    13,620    25,680    473    3,964    54,340 
Financial assets designated at fair value   33,922    23,725    46,288    1,611    6,065    111,611 
Derivative financial instruments   81,656    81,566    57,858    2,792    13,797    237,669 
Loans and advances to banks   10,251    11,847    8,044    1,714    3,807    35,663 
Loans and advances to customers   253,702    39,687    63,246    2,541    6,376    365,552 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   203    375    10,521    32    1,415    12,546 
Financial Investments - debt securities   17,471    23,598    14,110    114    1,836    57,129 
Other assets   592    13    148    33    83    869 
Total on-balance sheet   462,455    252,776    281,929    9,373    42,081    1,048,614 
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities   7,603    3,039    6,708    529    1,133    19,012 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions   800    5        7        812 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   105,112    36,079    168,003    1,601    3,966    314,761 
Total off-balance sheet   113,515    39,123    174,711    2,137    5,099    334,585 
Total   575,970    291,899    456,640    11,510    47,180    1,383,199 
            
Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited) 
As at 31 December 2016  United
Kingdom
£m
   

Europe

£m

   

Americas

£m

   Africa and
Middle East
£m
   

Asia

£m

   

Total

£m

 
On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks   30,485    40,439    24,859    77    6,493    102,353 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   969    498                1,467 
Trading portfolio assets   8,981    9,171    19,848    435    3,329    41,764 
Financial assets designated at fair value   25,821    10,244    33,181    733    4,034    74,013 
Derivative financial instruments   108,559    107,337    105,129    1,493    24,108    346,626 
Loans and advances to banks   7,458    12,674    16,894    1,778    4,447    43,251 
Loans and advances to customers   253,752    47,050    81,045    3,089    7,848    392,784 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   218    309    11,439    92    1,396    13,454 
Financial Investments - debt securities   18,126    27,763    12,030    251    4,709    62,879 
Other assets   987        137    10    71    1,205 
Total on-balance sheet   455,356    255,485    304,562    7,958    56,435    1,079,796 
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities   8,268    3,275    6,910    702    753    19,908 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions   915    9        40    41    1,005 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   106,427    35,476    156,077    1,694    3,007    302,681 
Total off-balance sheet   115,610    38,760    162,987    2,436    3,801    323,594 
Total   570,966    294,245    467,549    10,394    60,236    1,403,390 

 

118  |  102    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk concentrations by geography (audited)  
As at 31 December 2014   
 
 
United
Kingdom
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Europe

£m

  

  

   
 
Americas
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Africa and
Middle East
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Asia

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks   13,770     12,224     9,365     2,161     2,175     39,695  
Items in the course of collection from other banks   644     158          408          1,210  
Trading portfolio assets   12,921     15,638     31,061     2,498     6,572     68,690  
Financial assets designated at fair value   21,274     1,591     3,986     2,999     501     30,351  
Derivative financial instruments   133,400     147,421     129,771     2,332     26,985     439,909  
Loans and advances to banks   7,472     12,793     13,227     3,250     5,369     42,111  
Loans and advances to customers   241,543     60,018     76,561     39,241     10,404     427,767  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   20,551     22,655     81,368     928     6,251     131,753  
Available for sale debt securities   22,888     33,368     22,846     4,770     1,667     85,539  
Other assets   837          232     483     128     1,680  
Total on-balance sheet   475,300     305,866     368,417     59,070     60,052     1,268,705  
Off-balance sheet:            
Acceptances, endorsements and other contingent liabilities            
Contingent liabilities   10,222     2,542     5,517     2,757     225     21,263  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   851     36          186     18     1,091  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements   4,462     5,936     701     2     2,755     13,856  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   108,025     34,886     116,343     14,911     2,150     276,315  
Total off-balance sheet   123,560     43,400     122,561     17,856     5,148     312,525  
Total   598,860     349,266     490,978     76,926     65,200     1,581,230  

Group exposures to specific countries (audited)

The Group recognises the credit and market risk resulting from the ongoing volatility in the Eurozone and continues to monitor events closely while taking coordinated steps to mitigate the risks associated with the challenging economic environment. These contingency plans have been reviewed and refreshed to ensure they remain effective.

The following table shows Barclays’ exposure to specific Eurozone countries monitored internally as being higher risk and thus being the subject of particular management focus. The basis of preparation is consistent with that described in the 2014 Form 20-F.

The net exposure provides the most appropriate measure of the credit risk to which the Group is exposed. The gross exposure is also presented below, alongside off-balance sheet contingent liabilities and commitments.

During 2015, the Group’s net on-balance sheet exposures to Spain, Italy, Portugal, Ireland, Cyprus and Greece decreased by £17.2bn to £26.1bn primarily due to a £13.4bn reduction in Spain following the sale of the Spanish business. The £7.0bn decrease in residential mortgages relates predominantly to Portuguese and Italian loans reclassified to held for sale within the Financial institutions category.

As at 31 December 2015, the local net funding deficit in Italy was3.8bn (2014:9.9bn) and the deficit in Portugal was1.4bn (2014:1.9bn). The net funding surplus in Spain was0.2bn (2014:4.3bn).

Net exposure by country and counterparty (audited)  
    
 
Sovereign
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Financial
institutions
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Corporate
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Residential
mortgages
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Other retail
lending

£m

  
  

  

   

 
 
 
 

Net

on-balance
sheet
exposure
£m

  

  
  
  
  

   
 
 
 
 
Gross
on-balance
sheet
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Contingent
liabilities and
commitments
£m
  
  
  
  
As at 31 December 2015                
Spain   90     623     1,176     7     311     2,207     7,944     2,073  
Italy   1,708     2,283     1,039     9,505     675     15,210     20,586     2,701  
Portugal   87     3,346     152     6     700     4,291     4,555     1,299  
Ireland   9     2,824     1,282     37     51     4,203     7,454     2,673  
Cyprus   29     6     59     16     46     156     391     1  
Greece   1     3     14     4     3     25     975       
Total   1,924     9,085     3,722     9,575     1,786     26,092     41,905     8,747  
As at 31 December 2014                
Spain   108     14,043     1,149     12     248     15,560     24,873     2,863  
Italy   1,716     485     1,128     13,530     1,114     17,973     25,967     3,033  
Portugal   105     7     531     2,995     1,207     4,845     5,050     1,631  
Ireland   37     3,175     1,453     43     50     4,758     9,445     2,070  
Cyprus   28     12     61     6     16     123     707     26  
Greece   1     11     15               27     1,279       
Total   1,995     17,733     4,337     16,586     2,635     43,286     67,321     9,623  

Other country risks being closely monitored include exposures to Russia and China.

Net exposure to Russia of £1.4bn (2014: £1.9bn) largely consists of retail loans and advances of £1.0bn (2014: £0.6bn). The retail loans and advances are predominantly secured against property in the UK and south of France. Gross exposure to Russia was £2.5bn (2014: £3.8bn) including derivative assets with financial institutions. The gross exposure is mitigated by offsetting derivative liabilities.

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  119


    

    

    

    

 

Net exposure to China of £3.7bn (2014: £4.8bn) largely consists of loans and advances (mainly cash collateral and settlement balances) to sovereign of £1.4bn (2014: £1.7bn) and financial institutions of £1.1bn (2014: £1.4bn). The gross exposure to China excluding offsetting derivative liabilities was £3.9bn (2014: £5.0bn).

IndustrialIndustry concentrations (audited)

As at 31 December 2015, the industrialThe concentration of the Group’s assets by industry remained broadly consistent year on year. 42% (2014: 49%) ofAs at 31 December 2017, total assets were concentrated towards banks and other financial institutions was 36% (2016: 43%), predominantly within derivative financial instruments which decreased during the year.instruments. The proportion of the overall balance concentrated towards governments and central banks increased to 20% (2016: 14%) and towards home loans remained stable at 12% (2014: 11%) and home loans at 12% (2014: 12% (2016: 11%).

 

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)  
As at 31 December 2015  

 

Banks

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 
 
Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Manu-
facturing
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

 

Energy
and

water

£m

  
  

  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
Business
and other
services
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Other

£m

  

  

  

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks                  49,711                            49,711  
Items in the course of collection from other banks  1,011                                            1,011  
Trading portfolio assets  1,897    11,826    970    538    25,797    2,554    315    2,727    550        876    48,050  
Financial assets designated at fair value  14,015    35,109    104    8,642    7,380    33    191    3,402    229        79    69,184  
Derivative financial instruments  185,782    114,727    2,701    2,940    6,113    4,538    1,063    5,346            4,499    327,709  
Loans and advances to banks  36,829                4,520                            41,349  
Loans and advances to customers      80,729    12,297    23,519    5,940    7,743    13,830    25,728    155,863    60,162    13,406    399,217  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga  8,676    18,022        1,011    305        35    138                28,187  
Available for sale debt securities  9,745    6,114    68    43    67,645    182    107    5,134            240    89,278  
Other assets  312    1,077            20                        1    1,410  
Total on-balance sheet  258,267    267,604    16,140    36,693    167,431    15,050    15,541    42,475    156,642    60,162    19,101    1,055,106  
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities  1,152    4,698    3,142    958    9    3,073    1,301    4,645    100    548    950    20,576  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions  378    17    142    1        3    129    50   ��    123    2    845  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsb  78    15                                        93  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments  946    31,152    35,865    11,337    871    26,217    15,054    23,180    11,708    111,988    13,051    281,369  
Total off-balance sheet  2,554    35,882    39,149    12,296    880    29,293    16,484    27,875    11,808    112,659    14,003    302,883  
Total  260,821    303,486    55,289    48,989    168,311    44,343    32,025    70,350    168,450    172,821    33,104    1,357,989  

Net on-balance sheet exposure to the Oil and Gas sector was £4.4bn (2014: £5.8bn), with contingent liabilities and commitments to this sector of £13.8bn (2014: £12.5bn). Impairment charges were £106m (2014: £1m). The ratio of the Group’s total net exposures classified as strong or satisfactory was 97% (2014: 99%) of the total net exposure to credit risk in this sector.

If average oil prices remained at $30 per barrel throughout 2016, estimated additional impairment of approximately £250m would result. If average oil prices were to reduce to $25 per barrel throughout 2016, estimated additional impairment of approximately £450m would result.

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bForward starting reverse repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss, new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited) 
As at 31 December 2017  

Banks

£m

   Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
   Manu-
facturing
£m
   Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
   

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

   Energy
and
water
£m
   

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

   Business
and other
services
£m
   

Home
loans

£m

   Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending
£m
   Other
£m
   

Total

£m

 
On-balance sheet:                        
Cash and balances at central banks                   171,082                            171,082 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   2,153                                            2,153 
Trading portfolio assets   4,682    10,672    3,311    807    26,030    3,900    598    3,324    128        888    54,340 
Financial assets designated at fair value   21,468    78,506    38    4,666    4,812    2    3    2,083    28        5    111,611 
Derivative financial instruments   126,248    87,272    2,383    2,103    5,811    8,179    576    2,972            2,125    237,669 
Loans and advances to banks   27,780                7,883                            35,663 
Loans and advances to customers       74,923    9,249    23,706    9,433    6,104    12,450    20,483    147,002    54,205    7,997    365,552 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   7,241    4,844        153    307            1                12,546 
Financial investments - debt securities   10,146    1,379            44,827    103        674                57,129 
Other assets   147    701            21                            869 
Total on-balance sheet   199,865    258,297    14,981    31,435    270,206    18,288    13,627    29,537    147,158    54,205    11,015    1,048,614 
Off-balance sheet:                        
Contingent liabilities   1,572    3,556    3,236    675    8    2,605    969    4,947    4    389    1,051    19,012 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions   524        192                71    23            2    812 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   1,026    31,427    37,913    12,956    384    31,702    14,436    34,392    10,785    126,169    13,571    314,761 
Total off-balance sheet   3,122    34,983    41,341    13,631    392    34,307    15,476    39,362    10,789    126,558    14,624    334,585 
Total   202,987    293,280    56,322    45,066    270,598    52,595    29,103    68,899    157,947    180,763    25,639    1,383,199 

 

120  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    103


 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited) 
As at 31 December 2016  

Banks

£m

   Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
   Manu-
facturing
£m
   Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
   

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

   Energy
and
water
£m
   

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

   Business
and other
services
£m
   

Home
loans

£m

   Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending
£m
   Other
£m
   

Total

£m

 
On-balance sheet:                        
Cash and balances at central banks                   102,353                            102,353 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,467                                            1,467 
Trading portfolio assets   2,231    7,998    1,625    565    21,047    3,733    324    2,972    257        1,012    41,764 
Financial assets designated at fair value   14,714    49,783    3    5,699    856    5    33    2,811    33    2    74    74,013 
Derivative financial instruments   182,664    139,066    2,913    3,488    6,547    4,585    810    3,392            3,161    346,626 
Loans and advances to banks   38,932                4,319                            43,251 
Loans and advances to customers       91,812    12,337    24,200    12,028    7,384    12,967    21,838    144,765    56,730    8,723    392,784 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   2,596    10,568        38    252                            13,454 
Financial investments - debt securities   12,842    4,877            44,263        43    807            47    62,879 
Other assets   975    205            25                            1,205 
Total on-balance sheet   256,421    304,309    16,878    33,990    191,690    15,707    14,177    31,820    145,055    56,732    13,017    1,079,796 
Off-balance sheet:                        
Contingent liabilities   1,484    4,232    3,387    707    8    2,649    1,032    4,847    40    531    991    19,908 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions   433        377                157    38                1,005 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   1,021    29,329    38,829    11,876    400    29,699    14,741    26,359    9,610    126,708    14,109    302,681 
Total off-balance sheet   2,938    33,561    42,593    12,583    408    32,348    15,930    31,244    9,650    127,239    15,100    323,594 
Total   259,359    337,870    59,471    46,573    192,098    48,055    30,107    63,064    154,705    183,971    28,117    1,403,390 

104    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

    

Credit risk concentrations by industry (audited)                                      
As at 31 December 2014  

 

Banks

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 
 
Other
financial
insti-
tutions
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Manu-
facturing
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Const-
ruction
and
property
£m
 
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 

Govern-
ment and
central
bank

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

 

Energy
and

water

£m

  
  

  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Wholesale
and retail
distribu-
tion and
leisure

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
Business
and
other
services
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
 

 

Home
loans

£m

  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Cards,
unsecured
loans and
other
personal
lending

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Other

£m

  

  

  

 

Total

£m

  

  

On-balance sheet:            
Cash and balances at central banks                  39,695                            39,695  
Items in the course of collection from other banks  1,210                                            1,210  
Trading portfolio assets  2,894    17,718    1,466    593    39,201    2,745    385    2,751            937    68,690  
Financial assets designated at fair value  5,113    1,548    70    9,358    10,378    73    207    3,127    393        84    30,351  
Derivative financial instruments  257,463    149,050    2,519    3,454    7,691    7,794    1,510    6,227            4,201    439,909  
Loans and advances to banks  40,265                1,846                            42,111  
Loans and advances to customers      103,388    11,647    22,842    7,115    8,536    13,339    22,372    166,974    58,914    12,640    427,767  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending  38,946    86,588        4,845    739        24    611                131,753  
Available for sale debt securities  11,122    8,365    68    45    61,341    194    27    4,084            293    85,539  
Other assets  635    995        14    24            12                1,680  
Total on-balance sheet  357,648    367,652    15,770    41,151    168,030    19,342    15,492    39,184    167,367    58,914    18,155    1,268,705  
Off-balance sheet:            
Contingent liabilities  1,159    5,177    2,709    698        2,757    1,157    6,496    45    191    874    21,263  
Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions  470    12    197    14        1    218    62    55    28    34    1,091  
Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements  2,128    11,724            4                            13,856  
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments  2,643    29,645    28,589    11,449    2,400    24,830    12,771    24,534    16,119    110,091    13,244    276,315  
Total off-balance sheet  6,400    46,558    31,495    12,161    2,404    27,588    14,146    31,092    16,219    110,310    14,152    312,525  
Total  364,048    414,210    47,265    53,312    170,434    46,930    29,638    70,276    183,586    169,224    32,307    1,581,230  

As the principal source of credit risk to the Group, loans and advances to customers and banks is analysed in detail below:

Analysis of loans and advances and impairment to customers and banks 
As at 31 December 2017   

Gross
L&A

£m

 
 

 

   

Impairment
allowance
£m
 
 
 
   

L&A net of
impairment
£m
 
 
 
   

Credit risk
loans

£m

 
 

 

   

CRLs % of
gross L&A
%
 
 
 
   

Loan
impairment
charges

£m

 
 
a 

 

  

Loan loss
rates

bps

 
 

 

Barclays UK   159,397    1,649    157,748    1,950    1.2    764   48 
Barclays International   30,775    1,542    29,233    1,275    4.1    1,285   418 
Head Office   9,333    296    9,037    710    7.6    16   17 
Barclays Non-Coreb                       30    
Total Group retail   199,505    3,487    196,018    3,935    2.0    2,095   105 
Barclays UK   28,960    190    28,770    432    1.5    19   7 
Barclays International   170,299    862    169,437    1,421    0.8    219   13 
Head Office   7,103    113    6,990    206    2.9    1   1 
Barclays Non-Coreb                       (1   
Total Group wholesale   206,362    1,165    205,197    2,059    1.0    238   12 
Total loans and advances at amortised cost   405,867    4,652    401,215    5,994    1.5    2,333   57 
Traded loans   3,140    n/a    3,140    n/a      
Loans and advances designated at fair value   11,037    n/a    11,037    n/a      
Loans and advances held at fair value   14,177    n/a    14,177    n/a      
Total loans and advances   420,044    4,652    415,392    5,994      
As at 31 December 2016                                  
Barclays UK   155,729    1,519    154,210    2,044    1.3    866   56 
Barclays International   33,485    1,492    31,993    1,249    3.7    1,085   324 
Barclays Non-Core   10,319    385    9,934    838    8.1    102   99 
Total Group retail   199,533    3,396    196,137    4,131    2.1    2,053   103 
Barclays UK   15,204    282    14,922    591    3.9    30   20 
Barclays International   180,102    748    179,354    1,470    0.8    258   14 
Head Office   4,410        4,410                
Barclays Non-Core   41,406    194    41,212    299    0.7    11   3 
Total Group wholesale   241,122    1,224    239,898    2,360    1.0    299   12 
Total loans and advances at amortised cost   440,655    4,620    436,035    6,491    1.5    2,352   53 
Traded loans   2,975    n/a    2,975    n/a      
Loans and advances designated at fair value   10,519    n/a    10,519    n/a      
Loans and advances held at fair value   13,494    n/a    13,494    n/a      
Total loans and advances   454,149    4,620    449,529    6,491      

Notes

aExcluding impairment charges on available for sale investments and reverse repurchase agreements.
bBarclays Non-Core represents charges for the six months ended 30 June 2017, primarily relating to Italian mortgages transferred into Head Office on 1 July 2017.

Total loans and advances decreased by £34.1bn to £415.4bn, including a net £12.7bn decrease in cash collateral and settlement balances and a £21.4bn decrease in other lending, primarily in Corporate and Investment Bank.

Credit risk loans (CRLs) decreased to £6.0bn (2016: £6.5bn) and the ratio of CRLs to gross loans and advances remained stable at 1.5% (2016: 1.5%). Loan impairment charges decreased £19m to £2,333m. Overall, this resulted in an increase of 4bps in the loan loss rate to 57bps.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  121    105


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

 

Analysis of specific portfolios and asset types

This section provides an analysis of principal portfolios and businesses in the retail and wholesale segments. In particular, home loans, credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loans are covered for retail segments while exposures in Investment Bank and PCB including watch list analysis are covered for wholesale segments.

In general, benign economic conditions in the UK and US aided better performance in 2015. South African portfolios were resilient despite challenging market conditions with economic growth being affected by weak manufacturing and low commodity prices.loans.

Secured home loans

TotalThe UK home loans to retail customers of £156bn (2014: £161bn) represented 75% (2014: 72%portfolio comprises first lien home loans and accounts for 90% (2016: 89%) of the Group’s total retailhome loan balances. The reduction in balances was principally driven by: Portuguese home loans and part of the Italian home loans portfolio being redesignated as held for sale; and, South African home loans due to the depreciation of the Rand.

The two principal portfolios listed below account for 88% of home loans in the Group’s retail portfolios, and comprise first lien mortgages.

 

Home loans principal portfolios  
    
 
 
 
Gross loans
and
advances
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

>90 day
arrears

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Non-
performing
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Gross
charge-off
rates

%

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

  
  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015            
PCB – UK   127,750     0.2     0.7     0.3     0.4     10.1  
Africa Banking – South Africa   9,180     0.9     4.0     1.6     3.2     26.4  
As at 31 December 2014            
PCB – UK   126,668     0.2     0.6     0.4     0.4     8.3  
Africa Banking – South Africa   11,513     0.7     4.8     1.9     4.1     31.1  
Home loans principal portfoliosa 
   Barclays UK 
As at 31 December  2017   2016 
Gross loans and advances (£m)   132,132    129,136 
90 day arrears rate, excluding recovery book (%)   0.1    0.2 
Non-performing proportion of outstanding balances (%)   0.4    0.6 
Annualised gross charge-off rates (%)   0.2    0.3 
Recovery book proportion of outstanding balances (%)   0.3    0.4 
Recovery book impairment coverage ratio (%)   11.2    9.1 

PCB – UK:Note

aGross loans and advances include loans and advances to customers and banks. Risk metrics based on exposures to customers only.

Portfolio performance remained steady reflecting the continuing low base rate environment house price appreciation, and benignstable economic conditions. The non-performing proportion of outstanding balances decreased due to an improved performance and a reduction in repossession stock. The recovery book impairment coverage ratio increased driven by a reduction in the number of customers entering recoveries, reflecting lower entries into collections and better customer payments rates from those in collections.

Within the UK home loans portfolio:

 

§ owner-occupied interest onlyinterest-only home loans comprised 32% (2014: 33%28% (2016: 31%) of total balances. The decrease was driven by a greater attrition rate compared to new business flow. The average balance weighted LTV on these loans reduced to 44.7% (2014: 48.7%39.7% (2016: 41.7%), primarily driven by increases in the House Price Index (HPI) across core regions and >90the 90 day arrears rate excluding recovery book remained broadly steady at 0.3% (2016: 0.2% (2014: 0.1%)

 

§ buy-to-let home loans comprised 11% (2016: 9% (2014: 8%) of total balances. The average balance weighted LTV reducedincreased to 54.6% (2014: 57.6%53.7% (2016: 52.6%), and >90the 90 day arrears rate excluding recovery book remained steady at 0.2% (2014:0.1% (2016: 0.1%).

The recoveries impairment coverage increased to 10.1% (2014: 8.3%). In 2015, management adjustments to impairment allowances were better aligned to appropriate segments of the portfolio, resulting in a reduction of the impairment allocated to the recoveries book. The overall impairment coverage of the total home loans portfolio remained unchanged.

Africa Banking – South Africa:Gross loans and advances reduced by 20%, primarily driven by the depreciation of the Rand and repayments on the existing book. The improvement in the charge-off rates to 1.6% (2014: 1.9%) resulted from the focus on collections strategies and reduced rolls through delinquency cycles.

122  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Home loans principal portfolios – distribution of balances by LTVa  
  
 
Distribution of
balances
  
  
  
 
Impairment coverage
ratio
  
  
  
 
 
Non-performing
proportion of
outstanding balances
  
  
  
  
 
 
Non-performing
balances impairment
coverage ratio
  
  
  
  
 
 
Recoveries proportion
of outstanding
balances
  
  
  
  
 
 
Recoveries
impairment coverage
ratio
  
  
  
As at 31 December  
 
2015
%
  
  
  
 
2014
%
  
  
  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

PCB UK            
<=75%  92.1    90.2    0.1        0.6    0.6    4.7    2.8    0.4    0.3    6.8    4.6  
>75% and <=80%  3.4    4.2    0.2    0.2    1.0    1.2    13.5    6.9    0.8    0.8    15.7    9.2  
>80% and <=85%  2.1    2.3    0.3    0.2    1.0    1.4    16.7    8.9    0.7    0.9    21.4    11.3  
>85% and <=90%  1.4    1.4    0.3    0.4    1.3    1.7    15.7    13.0    1.0    1.3    17.8    15.9  
>90% and <=95%  0.6    1.0    0.6    0.4    1.8    1.9    25.7    13.7    1.5    1.3    28.2    17.8  
>95% and <=100%  0.2    0.4    1.3    1.0    4.0    2.9    25.4    21.4    3.5    2.2    27.9    26.4  
>100%  0.2    0.5    3.4    2.4    7.0    6.0    35.6    28.6    5.6    4.3    41.2    36.1  
Africa Banking –            
South Africa            
<=75%  76.1    74.6    0.7    0.7    0.6    0.5    13.6    16.2    1.8    1.9    17.9    20.4  
>75% and <=80%  6.8    7.7    1.6    1.5    1.0    0.9    18.4    20.0    3.3    3.0    21.4    23.5  
>80% and <=85%  5.3    5.9    1.9    2.0    1.0    1.1    19.2    21.1    3.5    4.2    21.1    23.7  
>85% and <=90%  3.8    4.3    2.3    2.5    0.9    1.0    20.2    22.3    4.8    5.1    21.8    24.3  
>90% and <=95%  2.6    2.5    3.7    4.3    1.2    1.4    23.8    26.3    5.9    8.7    24.2    27.6  
>95% and <=100%  1.8    1.5    4.8    5.4    1.3    1.5    25.6    23.4    7.8    11.6    26.0    24.1  
>100%  2.8    3.5    14.1    16.4    1.9    1.9    29.7    32.5    26.7    37.1    29.7    32.9  

Home loans principal portfolios – Average LTV                
  PCB – UK    Africa Banking – South Africa  
As at 31 December  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

  

 

2015

%

  

  

  

 

2014

%

  

  

Portfolio marked to market LTV (%):    
Balance weighted  49.2    51.6    58.4    59.9  
Valuation weighted  37.3    39.8    39.1    40.2  
Performing balances (%):    
Balance weighted  48.8    51.5    57.5    58.6  
Valuation weighted  37.3    39.7    38.6    39.5  
Non-performing balances (%):    
Balance weighted  56.5    62.1    79.3    87.0  
Valuation weighted  45.1    49.8    59.3    64.7  
For >100% LTVs:    
Balances (£m)  310    641    257    390  
Marked to market collateral (£m)  260    558    218    324  
Average LTV: balance weighted (%)    123.0    120.9    121.1    124.2  
Average LTV: valuation weighted (%)  118.5      114.8    117.7    120.3  
% of balances in recoveries  5.6    4.4    26.6    37.1  

Balance weighted LTV in the UK reduced to 49.2% (2014: 51.6%) due to an increase in average house prices, particularly in London and the South East. The overall non-performing impairment coverage in the UK remained flat year on year but increased across LTV ranges, due to granular alignment of management adjustments across portfolio segments.

PCB – UK: The house price appreciation resulted in a 52% reduction in home loans that have LTV >100% to £310m (2014: £641m).

Africa Banking – South Africa: Balances with >100% LTV reduced 34% to £257m (2014: £390m), primarily due to a reduction in the size of the recovery book as older and higher risk loans were written off, in addition to the depreciation of the Rand.

Home loans principal portfolios – new lending                
  PCB – UK    Africa Banking – South Africa  
As at 31 December  2015    2014    2015    2014  
New bookings (£m)    18,812    20,349    1,621    1,590  
New mortgages proportion above 85% LTV (%)  8.2    6.6    40.8    33.5  
Average LTV on new mortgages: balance weighted (%)  63.9    64.8    75.7    74.8  
Average LTV on new mortgages: valuation weighted (%)  55.0    57.0    66.9    65.4  

PCB – UK:New lending during 2015 reduced by 8%, reflecting an unchanged risk profile against heightened market activity in the prime residential segment.

Africa Banking – South Africa:The proportion of new home loans with LTV above 85% increased to 40.8% (2014: 33.5%) due to a revised strategy which allowed a greater proportion of higher LTV loans to be booked for lower risk customers.

Home loans principal portfolios – distribution of balances by LTVa 
    Distribution of
balances
  Impairment coverage
ratio
  Non-performing
proportion of
outstanding balances
  Non-performing
balances impairment
coverage ratio
  Recovery book
proportion of
outstanding  balances
  

Recovery book
impairment coverage

ratio

 
As at 31 December  

2017

%

  

2016

%

  

2017

%

  

2016

%

  

2017

%

  

2016

%

  

2017

%

  

2016

%

  

2017

%

  

2016

%

  

2017

%

  

2016

%

 
Barclays UK             
<=75%   91.1   91.8   0.1   0.1   0.5   0.6   4.3   4.2   0.2   0.4   7.5   5.9 
>75% and <=80%   4.1   3.5   0.1   0.2   0.5   0.6   18.6   17.1   0.3   0.4   28.0   22.1 
>80% and <=85%   2.6   2.1   0.1   0.2   0.4   0.8   16.4   20.4   0.2   0.6   27.8   25.0 
>85% and <=90%   1.2   1.3   0.2   0.3   0.5   0.7   23.8   23.0   0.3   0.6   30.7   25.4 
>90% and <=95%   0.6   0.8   0.4   0.4   0.9   1.1   28.7   28.3   0.6   0.8   38.9   33.7 
>95% and <=100%   0.2   0.3   0.6   0.7   1.2   1.9   25.6   23.4   0.9   1.5   27.7   27.0 
>100%   0.2   0.2   4.2   3.1   6.7   5.7   42.0   38.6   5.9   5.0   47.2   40.9 

Note

aPortfolio marked to market based on the most updated valuation including recoveriesrecovery book balances. Updated valuations reflect the application of the latest house price indexHPI available in the country as at 31 December 2015.2017.

Home loans principal portfolios - Average LTV 
    Barclays UK 
As at 31 December  2017   2016 
Portfolio marked to market LTV (%):    
Balance weighted   47.6    47.7 
Valuation weighted   35.2    35.6 
Performing balances (%):    
Balance weighted   47.6    47.3 
Valuation weighted   35.6    35.5 
Non-performing balances (%):    
Balance weighted   49.8    52.5 
Valuation weighted   39.1    41.7 
For >100% LTVs:    
Balances (£m)   215    239 
Marked to market collateral (£m)   188    210 
Average LTV: balance weighted (%)           127.7            118.4 
Average LTV: valuation weighted (%)   118.6    113.1 
% of balances in recovery book   5.9    5.0 

 

106    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  123


    

    

    

    

 

Exposure to interest only owner-occupied home loans excluding part and part interest only (P&P IO)a          
As at 31 December   2015     2014  
Interest only balances, excluding P&P IO (£m)    33,901      35,328  
Interest only home loans maturity years (£m):    
2016   703     864  
2017   1,043     1,180  
2018   1,131     1,249  
2019   1,080     1,195  
2020   1,090     1,176  
2021-2025   7,359     7,632  
Post 2025   21,155     21,104  
Total Impairment coverage (bps)   11     8  
Marked to market LTV: total balances (%)    
Balance weighted   44.7     48.7  
Valuation weighted   34.7     37.6  
For >100% LTVs: (£m)    
Balances   178     349  
Marked to market collateral   150     302  
Overview of performing portfolio    
Performing balances (£m)   33,690     35,155  
Marked to market LTV: performing balances (%)    
Balance weighted   44.6     48.6  
Valuation weighted   34.6     37.5  
Overview of non-performing portfolio    
Non-performing balances (£m)   211     173  
Non-performing proportion of interest only balances excluding P&P IO (%)   0.6     0.5  
Marked to market LTV: non-performing balances (%)    
Balance weighted   61.4     66.2  
Valuation weighted   49.8     54.1  

Interest only mortgages account for £50bn (2014: £51bn) ofBalance pay down coupled with benefits from the total balance of £128bn (2014: £127bn) of UKHPI increase resulted in a 10% reduction in home loans. This comprised £40bn (2014: £42bn)loans that have LTV >100% to owner-occupied customers, and £10bn (2014: £9bn) to buy-to-let customers.£215m (2016: £239m).

Of the £40bn exposure to owner-occupied customers, £34bn (2014: £35bn) was interest only, with the remaining £6bn (2014: £7bn) representing the interest only component of part and part mortgages.

Home loans principal portfolios – new lending          
    Barclays UK 
As at 31 December  2017   2016 
New bookings (£m)   22,665    19,885 
New mortgages proportion above 85% LTV (%)   6.0    8.6 
Average LTV on new mortgages: balance weighted (%)   63.8    63.4 
Average LTV on new mortgages: valuation weighted (%)   56.0    54.4 

The averageBarclays UK:New lending during 2017 increased by 14%, reflecting heightened market activity while maintaining a steady risk profile. Average balance weighted LTV for interest only owner-occupied balances reduced to 44.7% (2014: 48.7%) as property prices appreciated. The increase in impairment coverage to 11bps (2014: 8bps) was due to (i) enhancements in methodology, where management adjustments to impairment allowances were allocated on a more granular basis to their appropriate segments; and (ii) a broadening of the high risk definition used on interest only mortgages. The overall impairment coverage of the total home loans portfolio remained unchanged.

Exposures to mortgage current accounts (MCA) reserves

The MCA reserve is a secured overdraft facility previously available to home loan customers in the UK on either a fully amortising or interest only mortgage loan, which allows them to borrow against the equity in their home. It permits draw-down up to an agreed available limit on a separate but connected account to the main mortgage loan facility. The balance drawn must be repaid on redemption of the mortgage.

Of the total 917k home loan customers in the UK, 442k have MCA reserves, with total reserve limits of £11.3bn (2014: £17.9bn).

As at 31 December   2015     2014  
Total outstanding of home loans with MCA reserve balances (£bn)        53.6          62.2  
As a proportion of outstanding UK home loan balances (%)   42.0     49.1  
Home loan customers with active reserves (000s)   442     505  
Total reserve limits (£bn)   11.3     17.9  
Utilisation rate (%)   48.9     32.3  
Utilisation (£bn)   5.5     5.8  
Marked to market LTV: balance weighted (%)   43.7     47.7  

Total outstanding balances which are an aggregate of the mortgage account and the drawn reserve, reduced 14% to £53.6bn (2014: £62.2bn), during the period reflecting paydowns in the main mortgage account.

Reduction in portfolio reserve limits to £11.3bn (2014: £17.9bn) is due to an active limit management programme, combined with natural mortgage redemptions from the existing book during the period. As a result, the utilisation rate increased to 48.9% (2014: 32.3%). MCA balances havenew lending remained broadly stable at £5.5bn (2014: £5.8bn), while the63.8% (2016: 63.4%).

Head Office: Italian home loans of £9.2bn (2016: £10.0bn) are secured on residential property with an average balance weighted marked to market LTV reduced to 43.7% (2014: 47.7%of 61.0% (2016: 61.8%) due toand CRL coverage of 41% (2016: 36%). 90 day arrears and gross charge-off rates remained stable at 1.4% (2016: 1.2%) and 0.8% (2016: 0.8%) respectively while the CRL book coverage ratio increased, as a result of an increaseupdate in average house prices and repayment on the main mortgage loan.

Althoughcollateral valuation for accounts in the product has been withdrawn from sale, existing customers can continue to draw against their available reserves.

Note

aA part and part home loan is a product in which part of the loan is interest only and part is amortising. Analysis excludes the interest only portion of the part and part book which contributes £6.2bn (2014: £6.6bn) to the total owner occupied interest only balance of the £40.1bn (2014: £41.9bn). The total exposure on part and part book is £9.9bn (2014, £9.8bn) and represents 8% of total UK home loans portfolio.

124  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit riskrecovery book.

Credit cards, overdrafts,unsecured loans and unsecured loansother retail lending

The principal portfolios listed below accounted for 91% (2014:87% (2016: 88%) of the Group’s total credit cards, overdraftsunsecured loans and unsecured loans.other retail lending.

 

Principal portfolios   
 
 
 
Gross loans
and
advances
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

30 day
arrears,
excluding
recoveries

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

90 day
arrears,
excluding
recoveries

%

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Gross
charge-off
rates

%

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
proportion
of
outstanding
balances

%

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Recoveries
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

  
  
  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015            
Barclaycard            
UK cardsa   18,502     2.3     1.2     5.2     3.6     82.6  
US cardsa   16,699     2.2     1.1     3.9     2.0     84.8  
Barclays Partner Finance   3,986     1.5     0.6     2.4     2.5     85.2  
Germany cards   1,419     2.3     1.0     3.8     2.7     81.2  
Personal & Corporate Banking            
UK personal loans   5,476     1.9     0.8     3.0     7.5     73.9  
Africa Banking            
South Africa cards   1,886     8.5     5.0     8.4     7.4     72.6  
As at 31 December 2014            
Barclaycard            
UK cardsa   17,447     2.5     1.2     4.3     4.9     87.6  
US cardsa   14,005     2.1     1.0     3.7     1.8     87.1  
Barclays Partner Finance   3,399     1.5     0.7     2.4     2.7     76.8  
Germany cards   1,355     2.5     1.1     3.8     3.4     82.8  
Personal & Corporate Banking            
UK personal loans   4,953     2.0     0.9     3.4     10.0     76.3  
Africa Banking            
South Africa cards   2,364     8.1     4.6     7.6     5.9     75.7  
Credit cards, unsecured loans and other retail lending principal portfolios 
    

Gross loans

and

advances

£m

 

 

a 

 

  




30 day
arrears,
excluding
recovery
book

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




90 day
arrears,
excluding
recovery
book

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

   



Annualised
gross
charge-off
rate

%

 
 
 
 

 

   




Recovery
book
proportion of
outstanding
balances

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

   




Recovery
book
impairment
coverage
ratio

%

 
 
 
 
 

 

As at 31 December 2017           
Barclays UK           
UK cardsb   17,686   1.8    0.8    5.0    3.4    80.5 
UK personal loans   6,255   2.5    1.2    3.3    4.7    77.2 
Barclays International           
US cardsb   21,350   2.6    1.3    5.0    2.8    82.9 
Barclays Partner Finance   3,814   1.3    0.5    2.6    2.4    78.1 
Germany cards   1,976   2.5    1.0    3.8    2.7    78.0 
As at 31 December 2016           
Barclays UK           
UK cardsb   17,833   1.9    0.9    5.5    3.0    83.8 
UK personal loans   6,076   2.1    0.9    3.1    4.7    77.2 
Barclays International           
US cardsb   23,915   2.6    1.3    4.5    2.4    83.6 
Barclays Partner Finance   4,041   1.5    0.6    2.5    2.6    81.5 
Germany cards   1,812   2.6    1.0    3.7    2.7    79.0 

UK cards: In 2015, both early and late stage arrears remained stable within UK cards. The increase in charge-off rate and the reduction in recoveries as a proportion of outstanding was due to the acceleration of delinquent accounts to charge-off prior to debt sale. The decrease in recovery coverage ratio was driven by enhancements to impairment methodology, which took into account the improvement in recoveries and the impact of debt sales.

US cards: Gross loans and advances increased 19% to £16.7bn (2014: £14bn) principally driven by increased new business volumes. Arrears and charge-off rates remained broadly in line with 2014. The decrease in recoveries impairment coverage ratio was due to enhancements to impairment methodology and improvements in recovery expectation.

UK personal loans: Arrears and charge-off rates fell despite a 11% growth in gross loans and advances and reflected the benign economic conditions in the UK.

Barclays Partner Finance: Gross loans and advances increased 17% to £4.0bn (2014: £3.4bn). Portfolio arrears and charge-off rates remained broadly steady in 2015. The recoveries impairment coverage ratio increased following a management adjustment for the secured motor segment (portfolio started in 2012), which took into account changes to expected recoveries performance as the portfolio matured.

Germany cards: The decrease in recoveries proportion of outstanding balances was due to write off of legacy accounts previously held in recoveries until system migration activities were concluded.

South Africa cards: The increased arrears reflected bookings growth in 2015 in line with business strategy and weaker economic conditions. The gross charge-off rate and the recoveries proportion of outstanding balances percentage increased during 2015 due to additional charge-off in the Edcon portfolio as it was aligned with the Group’s charge-off policy.

NoteNotes

aGross loans and advances includes loans and advances to customers and banks. Risk metrics based on exposures to customers.
bFor UK and US cards, outstanding recoveriesrecovery book balances for acquired portfolios recognised at fair value (which have no related impairment allowance) have been excluded from the recoveriesrecovery book impairment coverage ratio. Losses have been recognised where related to additional spend from acquired accounts in the period post acquisition.

UK cards: The annualised gross charge-off rate, which was higher in 2016 due to accelerated asset sales, normalised in 2017 to 5.0% (2016: 5.5%) in line with expectations. The recovery book proportion of outstanding balances increased, reflecting accelerated charge-off of non-compliant forbearance plans. However, the recovery book impairment coverage ratio decreased, reflecting the one time asset sale impact of accounts with lower recovery expectations.

UK personal loans: The 30 day arrears rate increased to 2.5% (2016: 2.1%) and the 90 day arrears rate increased to 1.2% (2016: 0.9%) reflecting increased flow into delinquency from some 2016 bookings due to higher incidences of fraud and poorer performance on customers with multiple loans, coupled with a weaker performance in collections operations. Both the recovery book proportion of outstanding balances of 4.7% (2016: 4.7%) and the recovery book impairment coverage ratio of 77.2% (2016: 77.2%) remained stable.

US cards: The annualised gross charge-off rate increased to 5.0% (2016: 4.5%) broadly in line with trends across the industry and also reflecting a one-off asset sale contributing to a drop in outstanding balances. As a result, recovery book proportion of outstanding balances increased to 2.8% (2016: 2.4%).

Barclays Partner Finance: Portfolio arrears and the annualised gross charge-off rate remained broadly stable during 2017.

Germany cards: 90 day arrears and the annualised gross charge-off rate remained stable, while the recovery book coverage ratio improved reflecting better recoveries. In addition, Germany consumer loans increased to £1.4bn (2016: £1.2bn).

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  125    107


Exposure to UK Commercial Real Estate (CRE)

The UK CRE portfolio includes property investment, development, trading, and house builders but excludes social housing and contractors.

UK CRE summary          
    2015     2014  
As at 31 December    
UK CRE loans and advances (£m)   11,617     11,681  
Past due balances (£m)   183     393  
Balances past due as % of UK CRE balances (%)   1.6     3.4  
Impairment allowances (£m)   99     100  
Past due coverage ratio (%)   54.1     25.7  
Total collateral (£m)a   27,062     25,205  
Twelve months ended 31 December    
Impairment charge (£m)   4     23  

Maturity analysis of exposure to UK CRE                                        
   Contractual maturity of UK CRE loans and advances at amortised cost            
As at 31 December   
 
 
Past due
balances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than
six months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
six months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
one year
but not
more than
two years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
two years
but not
more than
five years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
Over
five years
but not
more than
ten years
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Over
ten years
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total loans
& advances
£m
  
  
  
2015   183     801     751     941     5,779     1,076     2,087     11,617  
2014   393     838     839     1,287     4,161     1,939     2,224     11,681  

Total loans and advances at amortised cost remained broadly stable at £11.6bn (2014: £11.7bn) with growth limited to high quality assets. The total collateral increased by 7% to £27.1bn.

The UK CRE businesses operate to specific lending criteria and the portfolio of assets is continually monitored through a range of mandates and limits. The improvement in the past due coverage ratio in 2015 was driven by the sale of three unimpaired real estate loans.

UK CRE LTV analysis                              
   Balances     
 
Balances as proportion
of total
  
  
   Collateral held  
As at 31 December   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Group            
<=100%   9,045     9,011     78     78     26,927     25,036  
>100% and <=125%   119     149     1     1     106     138  
>125%   47     167          1     29     31  
Unassessed balancesb   1,636     1,748     14     15            
Unsecured balances   770     606     7     5            
Total   11,617     11,681     100     100     27,062     25,205  

Portfolio LTVs have reduced due to appreciating commercial property values. Unsecured balances primarily relate to working capital facilities granted to CRE companies.

Notes

aBased on the most recent valuation assessment.
bCorporate Banking balances under £1m.

126  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

    

Investment Bank

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost                           
    
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   10,174          10,174               –      –   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   7,259          7,259               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   31,451     83     31,368     241     0.8     47      15   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   43,437          43,437               –      –   
Total   92,321     83     92,238     241     0.3     47        
As at 31 December 2014              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   10,275          10,275               (3)     (3)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   9,626          9,626               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   28,436     44     28,392     71     0.2     (11)     (4)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   58,040          58,040               –      –   
Total   106,377     44     106,333     71     0.1     (14)     (1)  

Non-Core Wholesale

The table below details Non-Core loans and advances which form part of the Wholesale risk portfolio.

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost                           
    
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   258          258               (7)     (271)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   10,131          10,131               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   5,277     233     5,044     345     6.5     (13)     (25)  
Cash collateral and settlement balances   19,188          19,188               –      –   
Total   34,854     233     34,621     345     1.0     (20)     (6)  
As at 31 December 2014              
Loans and advances to banks              
Interbank lending   373          373               –      –   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   11,622          11,622               –      –   
Loans and advances to customers              
Wholesale lending   8,978     602     8,376     841     9.4     53      59   
Cash collateral and settlement balances   23,726          23,726               –      –   
Total   44,699     602     44,097     841     1.9     53      12   

Wholesale lending decreased £3.7bn to £5.3bn driven by the reclassification of Portuguese loans now held for sale and rundown of legacy loan portfolios. Wholesale loans predominantly relate to capital equipment loans, legacy Collateralised Loan Obligations (CLO) and legacy Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDO).

Loan impairment charges improved £73m to a release of £20m reflecting higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

CRLs decreased to £345m (2014: £841m) as a result of the reclassification of Portuguese loans now held for sale and continued rundown of the Non-Core Investment Bank portfolio.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  127
Wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost                                  
Analysis of wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost                         
    

Gross
L&A

£m

   Impairment
allowance
£m
   L&A net of
impairment
£m
   

Credit risk
loans

£m

   CRLs % of
gross L&A
%
   Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  

Loan loss
rates

bps

 
As at 31 December 2017             
Banks   27,520        27,520                
Other financial institutions   73,849    20    73,829    108    0.1    2    
Manufacturing   9,193    64    9,129    162    1.8    (46  (50
Construction   3,180    34    3,146    21    0.7    (6  (19
Property   20,353    61    20,292    256    1.3    (27  (13
Government and central bank   16,403    1    16,402    35    0.2        
Energy and water   6,214    124    6,090    235    3.8    (21  (34
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   12,497    217    12,280    253    2.0    53   42 
Business and other services   20,147    505    19,642    361    1.8    264   131 
Home loansa   5,598    48    5,550    268    4.8    11   20 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga   4,452    33    4,419    272    6.1    (4  (9
Other   6,956    58    6,898    88    1.3    12   17 
Total wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost   206,362    1,165    205,197    2,059    1.0    238   12 
As at 31 December 2016             
Banks   35,979        35,979                
Other financial institutions   91,673    14    91,659    89    0.1    6   1 
Manufacturing   12,373    130    12,243    226    1.8    37   30 
Construction   3,418    40    3,378    58    1.7    5   15 
Property   20,541    137    20,404    464    2.3    27   13 
Government and central bank   15,847        15,847                
Energy and water   7,569    181    7,388    348    4.6    102   135 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   12,995    169    12,826    258    2.0    38   29 
Business and other services   21,210    284    20,926    331    1.6    54   25 
Home loansa   5,497    48    5,449    190    3.5    9   16 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga   5,329    129    5,200    207    3.9    6   11 
Other   8,691    92    8,599    189    2.2    15   17 
Total wholesale loans and advances at amortised cost   241,122    1,224    239,898    2,360    1.0    299   12 


Wholesale Personal and Corporate Banking

The table below details Personal and Corporate Banking loans and advances which form part of the Wholesale risk portfolio.

Analysis of loans and advances at amortised cost                                   
    
 
Gross L&A
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
L&A net of
impairment
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Credit risk
loans

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

CRLs % of
gross L&A

%

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
charges
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Loan loss
rates

bps

  
  

  

As at 31 December 2015              
Banks   3,593          3,593                      
Other financial institutions   6,321     16     6,305     46     0.7     2     3  
Manufacturing   6,762     37     6,725     51     0.8     2     3  
Construction   3,267     38     3,229     47     1.4     1     3  
Property   15,309     166     15,143     645     4.2     2     1  
Government and central bank   1,304          1,304                      
Energy and water   2,216     79     2,137     103     4.6     82     370  
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   11,333     165     11,168     261     2.3     (8   (7
Business and other services   16,536     223     16,313     271     1.6     54     33  
Home loansa   5,730     20     5,710     142     2.5            
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lendinga   8,714     1     8,713     14     0.2     4     5  
Other   6,770     169     6,601     214     3.2     43     64  
Total   87,855     914     86,941     1,794     2.0     182     21  
As at 31 December 2014b              
Banks   5,507          5,507               1     2  
Other financial institutions   5,357     13     5,344     85     1.6     26     49  
Manufacturing   7,174     47     7,127     106     1.5            
Construction   3,094     40     3,054     58     1.9     7     21  
Property   15,480     194     15,286     833     5.4     36     23  
Government and central bank   1,187          1,187                      
Energy and water   1,950     2     1,948     2     0.1     3     16  
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   10,928     175     10,753     342     3.1     56     52  
Business and other services   14,160     177     13,983     344     2.4     54     38  
Home loansa   6,864     36     6,828     96     1.4     34     50  
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   9,628     60     9,568     16     0.2     22     23  
Other   6,863     129     6,734     229     3.3     28     40  
Total   88,192     873     87,319     2,111     2.4     267     30  

Wholesale PCB loans and advances and CRLs remained broadly stable at £87.9bn (2014: £88.2bn) and £1.8bn (2014: £2.1bn) respectively.

Loan impairment charges improved 32% to £182m due to the benign economic environment in the UK. This led to a decrease in the loan loss rate to 21bps (2014: 30bps).

Analysis of Wholesale balances on watch list

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on a graded watch list comprising four categories graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default:

§Category 1: a temporary classification for performing obligors who exhibit some unsatisfactory features

§Category 2: performing obligors where some doubt exists, but the belief is that the obligor can meet obligations over the short term

§Category 3: obligors where definite concern exists with well defined weaknesses and failure in the short term could arise should further deterioration occur

§Category 4: non-performing obligors, insolvent or regulatory default. High risk of loss.

NotesNote

aIncluded in the above analysis are Wealth and Investment ManagementPrivate Banking exposures measured on an individual customer exposure basis.
bUK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed. 2014 figures have been restated to reflect this, with net loans and advances of £8.4bn, credit risk loans of £482m and impairment charges of £48m being reclassified to Wholesale.

Wholesale loans and advances decreased £34.8bn to £206.4bn (2016: £241.1bn), including a net £12.7bn decrease in settlement and cash collateral balances and a £22.1bn decrease in other lending, mainly in the Corporate and Investment Bank.

CRLs decreased £0.3bn to £2.1bn (2016: £2.4bn), primarily in the property and energy sectors, with fewer large name exposures arising this year compared to 2016.

Loan impairment charges decreased to £238m (2016: £299m), reflecting the trend in CRLs. The loan loss rate remained stable at 12bps (2016: 12bps).

 

128  |  108    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Analysis of problem loans

Loans that are past due or assessed as impaired within this section are reflected in the balance sheet credit quality tables on page 101 as being Higher risk.

Age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired

The following table presents an age analysis of gross loans and advances that are past due but not impaired. Loans that are past due but not impaired consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due but individually assessed as not being impaired. These loans although individually assessed as unimpaired may carry an unidentified impairment provision.

Loans and advances past due but not impaired (audited)                              
    

    Past due
up to 1
month

£m

       Past  due
1-2
months
£m
       Past  due
2-3
months
£m
   

    Past due
3-6

months
£m

   

    Past due

6 months

and over
£m

   

Total

£m

 
As at 31 December 2017            
Loans and advances designated at fair value   653        20        10    683 
Home loans   3    1            22    26 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending           12    31    66    109 
Corporate loans   6,272    277    129    85    98    6,861 
Total   6,928    278    161    116    196    7,679 
As at 31 December 2016            
Loans and advances designated at fair value   29    8    18        16    71 
Home loans   1            33    31    65 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   2        2    11    77    92 
Corporate loans   6,962    1,235    149    178    354    8,878 
Total   6,994    1,243    169    222    478        9,106 

Loans and advances past due but not impaired decreased by £1.4bn to £7.7bn, mainly due to fewer large corporate loans past due 1-2 months.

Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired

The following table presents an analysis of gross loans and advances into those collectively or individually assessed as impaired. The table includes an age analysis for loans and advances collectively assessed as impaired.

Loans that are collectively assessed as impaired consist predominantly of retail loans that are one day or more past due for which a collective allowance is raised. Wholesale loans that are past due, individually assessed as unimpaired, but which carry an unidentified impairment provision, are excluded from this category.

Loans that are individually assessed as impaired consist predominantly of wholesale loans that are past due and for which an individual allowance has been raised.

Home loans, unsecured loans and credit card receivables that are subject to forbearance in the retail portfolios are included within the collectively assessed for impairment category. Where wholesale loans under forbearance have been impaired, these form part of individually assessed impaired loans.

Loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)                               
    Past due
up to
1 month
£m
   Past due
1-2  months
£m
   Past due
2-3  months
£m
   Past due
3-6  months
£m
   Past due
6 months
and over
£m
   Total
collectively
assessed
£m
   Individually
assessed for
impairment
£m
   Total
£m
 
As at 31 December 2017                
Home loans   2,622    465    200    304    477    4,068    922    4,990 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   989    344    245    511    1,808    3,897    302    4,199 
Corporate loans   546    34    20    28    85    713    1,384    2,097 
Total   4,157    843    465    843    2,370    8,678    2,608    11,286 
As at 31 December 2016                
Home loans   2,866    795    201    298    452    4,612    820    5,432 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   1,135    354    250    516    1,702    3,957    492    4,449 
Corporate loans   288    53    35    72    131    579    1,580    2,159 
Total   4,289    1,202    486    886    2,285    9,148    2,892    12,040 

Loans and advances assessed as impaired decreased by £0.8bn to £11.3bn, reflecting a stable or generally improving trend in the ageing of impaired loans across the Group.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    109


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Potential credit risk loans (PCRLs) and coverage ratios

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs comprise two categories of loans: credit risk loans (CRLs) and potential problem loans (PPLs).

CRLs comprise three classes of loans:

Impaired Loans: comprises loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised. This category also includes all Retail loans that have been transferred to a recovery book. See page 111 for further analysis of impaired loans.

Accruing past due 90 days or more: comprises loans that are 90 days or more past due with respect to principal or interest.

Restructured loans: comprises loans not included above where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. For information on restructured loans refer to disclosures on forbearance on pages 111 to 114.

PPLs are loans that are currently complying with repayment terms but where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with such terms in the near future. If the credit quality of a wholesale loan on a watch list deteriorates to the highest category, or a Retail loan deteriorates to delinquency cycle 2 (typically when past due 60 to 90 days), consideration is given to including it within the PPL category.

                                                                                                            
Potential credit risk loans and coverage ratios by business                              
    CRLs   PPLs   PCRLs 
As at 31 December  

2017

£m

   2016
£m
   

2017

£m

   2016
£m
   

2017

£m

   2016
£m
 
Barclays UK   1,950    2,044    266    310    2,216    2,354 
Barclays International   1,275    1,249    198    192    1,473    1,441 
Head Office   710        9        719     
Barclays Non-Core       838        11        849 
Total retail   3,935    4,131    473    513    4,408    4,644 
                               
Barclays UK   432    591    168    94    600    685 
Barclays International   1,421    1,470    763    1,530    2,184    3,000 
Head Office   206        22        228     
Barclays Non-Core       299        59        358 
Total wholesale   2,059    2,360    953    1,683    3,012    4,043 
Group total   5,994    6,491    1,426    2,196    7,420    8,687 
            
    Impairment allowance   CRL coverage   PCRL coverage 
As at 31 December  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2017

%

   

2016

%

   

2017

%

   

2016

%

 
Barclays UK   1,649    1,519    84.6    74.3    74.4    64.5 
Barclays International   1,542    1,492    120.9    119.5    104.7    103.5 
Head Office   296        41.7        41.2     
Barclays Non-Core       385        45.9        45.3 
Total retail   3,487    3,396    88.6    82.2    79.1    73.1 
                               
Barclays UK   190    282    44.0    47.7    31.7    41.2 
Barclays International   862    748    60.7    50.9    39.5    24.9 
Head Office   113        54.9        49.6     
Barclays Non-Core       194        64.9        54.2 
Total wholesale   1,165    1,224    56.6    51.9    38.7    30.3 
Group total   4,652    4,620    77.6    71.2    62.7    53.2 

CRLs decreased to £6.0bn (2016: £6.5bn) with the Group’s CRL coverage ratio increasing to 77.6% (2016: 71.2%) mainly within retail portfolios. The CRL coverage ratio for retail portfolios increased to 88.6% (2016: 82.2%) primarily due to movements in Barclays UK.

PPLs decreased to £1.4bn (2016: £2.2bn) primarily within Barclays International. The decrease was driven by Corporate and Investment Bank where the volume of PPL cases has decreased significantly.

110    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

    

Watch list rating of wholesale balancesa                                                  
   Watch list 1     Watch list 2     Watch list 3     Watch list 4     Total  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
Energy and Water   1,247     160     314     1,011     447     480     285     49     2,293     1,700  
Manufacturing   928     483     539     347     138     162     267     395     1,872     1,387  
Agriculture, Forestry, Fishing & Miscellaneous Activities   425     277     496     517     544     324     275     445     1,740     1,563  
Wholesale and Retail, Distribution and Leisure   626     249     582     939     272     388     260     536     1,740     2,112  
Property   424     513     410     600     378     1,458     498     1,212     1,710     3,782  
Business and Other Services   220     241     516     583     639     214     149     157     1,524     1,196  
Transport   86     98     121     148     208     285     98     111     513     641  
Construction   65     47     175     131     108     136     84     147     432     461  
Financial Institutions/Services   (59   29     69     391     62     345     302     325     374     1,090  
Other   53     75     69     91     119     72     88     29     329     268  
Total   4,015     2,172     3,291     4,758     2,915     3,865     2,306     3,405     12,527     14,200  
As a percentage of total balances   32%     15%     26%     34%     23%     27%     19%     24%     100%     100%  

Total watch list

Impaired loans

The following table represents an analysis of impaired loans in line with the disclosure recommended by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce. Impaired loans are a subcomponent of CRLs and comprise loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised. This category also includes all retail loans that have been transferred to a recovery book. For the majority of products, transfer to a recovery unit occurs for loans that are past due over 6 months unless a forbearance agreement is agreed. Earlier transfer points may occur depending on specific circumstances. Impaired loans may include loans that are still performing, fully collateralised loans or where indebtedness has already been written down to the expected realisable value.

Movement in impaired loans                                   
    

At beginning
of year

£m

   

Classified
as impaired
during
the year

£m

   

Transferred
to not
impaired
during
the year

£m

  Repayments
£m
  Amounts
written off
£m
  Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  Exchange
and other
adjustments
£m
  

Balance

at
31 December
£m

 
2017           
Home loans   1,140    247    (203  (149  (26     16   1,025 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   1,704    1,878    (66  (214  (1,467     27   1,862 
Corporate loans   1,770    1,065    (271  (664  (202     (181  1,517 
Total impaired loans   4,614    3,190    (540  (1,027  (1,695     (138  4,404 
2016           
Home loans   1,337    308    (150  (171  (19     (165  1,140 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   2,200    1,761    (17  (136  (1,605  (92  (407  1,704 
Corporate loans   2,098    984    (427  (220  (331  (15  (319  1,770 
Total impaired loans   5,635    3,053    (594  (527  (1,955  (107  (891  4,614 

Forbearance

Forbearance measures consist of concessions towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting their financial commitments (“financial difficulties”).

Analysis of forbearance programmes                              
    Balances   Impairment allowance   Impairment coverage 
As at 31 December  

2017

£m

                2016
£m
   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2017

%

   

2016

%

 
Barclays UK   847    926    226    237    26.7    25.6 
Barclays International   210    243    86    57    41.0    23.5 
Head Office   186        11        5.9     
Barclays Non-Core       211        9        4.3 
Total retail       1,243    1,380    323    303    26.0    22.0 
Barclays UKa   606    589    31    62    5.1    10.5 
Barclays Internationala   2,347    2,044    519    257    22.1    12.6 
Barclays Non-Core       269        50        18.5 
Total wholesale   2,953    2,902    550    369    18.6    12.7 
Group totalb   4,196    4,282    873    672    20.8    15.7 

Notes

a In 2017, ESHLA balances fell by 12%were reclassified from Barclays International to £12.5bn principallyBarclays UK reflecting the salemanagement of the corporate businessportfolio.

b Barclays Non-Core retail balances of £186m were reclassified into Head Office and £158m wholesale balances were reclassified into Barclays International.

Balances on forbearance programmes decreased 2% driven by better portfolio performance.

Retail balances on forbearance reduced 10% to £1.2bn, reflecting an overall decrease in Spain.both Barclays UK and Barclays International portfolios.

Total watch list

Barclays UK: Reduction was driven by UK cards portfolio, where balances on forbearance plans were lower due to an asset sale and application of tighter entry criteria. For the UK home loans portfolio the reduction was due to stable economic conditions and reduced forbearance entries.

Barclays International:US cards forbearance balances decreased due to an asset sale of high risk accounts. The increase in impairment allowance was driven by updated modelling methodology.

Wholesale balances on forbearance remained broadly stable at £3.0bn (2016: £2.9bn). Across the principal portfolios, the flow of new cases into forbearance during 2017 was offset by a range of repayments and credit improvements where clients returned to energythe performing book and water increased by 35%a modest level of write offs.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    111


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Retail forbearance programmes

Forbearance on the Group’s principal retail portfolios in the US and UK is presented below. The principal portfolios account for 71% (2016: 73%) of total retail forbearance balances.

Analysis of key portfolios in forbearance programmes                                    
         Balances on forbearance programmes        

Marked

to market

LTV of

forbearance

balances:

balance

weighted

%

   

Marked

to market

LTV of

forbearance

balances:

valuation

weighted

%

   

Impairment

allowances

marked

against

balances on

forbearance

programmes

£m

   

Total

balances on

forbearance

programmes

coverage

ratio

%

 
                Of which:              
   

            Total

£m

   

% of gross

retail loans and

advances

%

       Past due of which:         
       

Up-to-date

£m

   

1-90 days

past due

£m

   

91 or

more days

past due

£m

         
                   
                   
                   
                    
As at 31 December 2017                  
Barclays UK                  
UK home loans   355    0.3    237    79    39    43.2    31.0    4    1.1 
UK cards   302    1.7    153    98    51    n/a    n/a    179    59.3 
UK personal loans   77    1.2    48    21    8    n/a    n/a    30    39.0 
Barclays International                  
US cards   148    0.7    107    30    11    n/a    n/a    58    39.2 
As at 31 December 2016                  
Barclays UK                  
UK home loans   390    0.3    188    149    53    44.7    31.3    3    0.8 
UK cards   337    1.9    255    59    23    n/a    n/a    185    54.9 
UK personal loans   94    1.5    58    26    10    n/a    n/a    38    40.4 
Barclays International                  
US cards   186    0.8    139    35    12    n/a    n/a    38    20.4 

UK home loans:Improvement driven by stable economic conditions and a reduction in forbearance entries.

UK cards:Balances on forbearance plans reduced due to an asset sale and tighter entry criteria. The forbearance impairment coverage ratio increased due to the inclusion of additional forbearance populations in 2017 which carry higher impairment provision rates.

UK personal loans:Impairment allowance held against forbearance stock decreased in line with the overall forbearance balance and the coverage ratio remained relatively stable.

US cards:Balances were lower due to asset sale of high risk accounts while impairment allowance increased due to a change in methodology.

Forbearance by type                                           
   Barclays UK      Barclays International 
   UK home loans   UK cards   UK personal loans     US cards 
As at 31 December  

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

   

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

   

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

      

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

 
Payment concession   94    96    84    45                  
Interest only conversion   75    84                          
Term extension   184    210            8    16          
Fully amortising                   54    65     135    97 
Repayment plana           96    218    15    13     13    89 
Interest rate concession   2        122    74                   
Total   355    390    302    337    77    94      148    186 

Note

a Repayment plan represents a reduction to £2,293m (2014: £1,700m),the minimum payment due requirements and interest rate.

UK cards: The reduction in the Repayment Plan book was driven by aone-time acceleratedcharge-off of legacy accounts in addition to reduced inflow as a result of tighter entry criteria. This reduction was partially offset by the inclusion of new segments following a review of the forbearance population to better align with policy.

112    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Wholesale forbearance programmes

The tables below detail balance information for wholesale forbearance cases.

Analysis of wholesale balances in forbearance programmesa                          
        Balances on forbearance programmes        

Impairment

allowances

marked

against

balances on

forbearance

programmes

     
           Of which:     

Total

balances on

forbearance

programmes

coverage

ratio

 
           

Performing

balances

   

Impaired

up-to-date

balances

             
       

% of gross

wholesale

loans and

advances

       

Balances

between

1 and 90 days

past due

   

Balances

91 days

or more

past due

     
                   
   

Total

    balances

               
                 
    £m   %   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   % 
As at 31 December 2017                
Barclays UK   606    2.1    378    8    89    131    31    5.1 
Barclays International   2,347    1.4    1,587    300    57    403    519    22.1 
Total   2,953    1.4    1,965    308    146    534    550    18.6 
As at 31 December 2016                
Barclays UK   589    3.9    187    93    78    231    62    10.5 
Barclays International   2,044    1.1    1,285    567    33    159    257    12.6 
BarclaysNon-Core   269    0.6    57    44    25    143    50    18.6 
Total   2,902    1.2    1,529    704    136    533    369    12.7 

Note

a In 2017, certain ESHLA balances were reclassified from Barclays International to Barclays UK reflecting the increased stressmanagement of the portfolio.

Wholesale forbearance reporting split by exposure class                    
       Personal and         
   Corporate   trusts           Other           Total 
    £m   £m   £m   £m 
As at 31 December 2017        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   5            5 
Restructure: maturity date extension   373    26        399 
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   297            297 
Restructure: payment other than cash   16            16 
Change in security   9            9 
Adjustments ornon-enforcement of covenants   1,477    101    1    1,579 
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   474    174        648 
Total   2,651    301    1    2,953 
As at 31 December 2016        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   32            32 
Restructure: maturity date extension   411    107        518 
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   346    1        347 
Restructure: payment other than cash   10            10 
Change in security   7            7 
Adjustments ornon-enforcement of covenants   1,242    155        1,397 
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   438    153        591 
Total   2,486    416        2,902 
        
Wholesale forbearance reporting split by business unit                    
       Barclays   Barclays     
   Barclays UK   International   Non-Core   Total 
    £m   £m   £m   £m 
As at 31 December 2017        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   3    2        5 
Restructure: maturity date extension   90    309        399 
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   199    98        297 
Restructure: payment other than cash       16        16 
Change in security       9        9 
Adjustments ornon-enforcements of covenants   223    1,356        1,579 
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   91    557        648 
Total   606    2,347        2,953 
As at 31 December 2016        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   3    29        32 
Restructure: maturity date extension   114    316    88    518 
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   180    164    3    347 
Restructure: payment other than cash       10        10 
Change in security   1    6        7 
Adjustments ornon-enforcements of covenants   132    1,212    53    1,397 
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   159    307    125    591 
Total   589    2,044    269    2,902 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    113


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Wholesale forbearance flows in 2017
£m
As at 1 January 20172,902
Added to forbearance        2,157
Removed from forbearance (credit improvement)(632
Fully or partially repaid and other movements(1,277
Written off/moved to recovery book(197
As at 31 December 20172,953

Impairment

Impairment allowances

Impairment allowances remained stable at £4,652m (2016: £4,620m) during the year.

Movements in allowance for impairment by asset class (audited)                           
                       Amounts     
       Acquisitions     Exchange         charged to     
   At beginning   and  Unwind of  and other  Amounts      income   Balance at 
   of year   disposals  discount  adjustments  written off    Recoveries   statement   31 December 
    £m   £m  £m  £m  £m  £m   £m   £m 
2017            
Home loans   467       (5  (4  (29      29    458 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   3,060       (43  (223  (2,042  252    2,051    3,055 
Corporate loans   1,093    (5     (13  (258  82    240    1,139 
Total impairment allowance   4,620    (5  (48  (240  (2,329  334    2,320    4,652 
2016            
Home loans   518    (3  (5  (108  (23      88    467 
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   3,394    (2  (70  (709  (1,806  296    1,957    3,060 
Corporate loans   1,009          81   (364  69    298    1,093 
Total impairment allowance   4,921    (5  (75  (736  (2,193  365    2,343    4,620 

Management adjustments to models for impairment

Management adjustments to models for impairment are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not incorporated into the relevant impairment models, or to reflect additionally known facts and circumstances at the period end. Adjustments typically increase the model derived impairment allowance. Where applicable, management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development.

Management adjustments to models of more than £10m with respect to impairment allowance in our principal portfolios are presented below.

Principal portfolios that have management adjustments greater than £10m                    
   2017   2016 
   Total       Total     
   management       management     
   adjustments       adjustments     
   to       to     
   impairment   Proportion   impairment   Proportion 
   allowances,   of total   allowances,   of total 
   including   impairment   including   impairment 
   forbearance   allowances   forbearance   allowances 
As at 31 December  £m   %   £m   % 
Barclays UK        

UK cards

   49    5    312    34 

UK home loans

   71    72    70    69 

UK business lending

   70    31    69    33 
Barclays International        

Corporate Banking

   68    11    71    14 

Barclays Partner Finance

   37    24    59    37 

UK cards:Adoption of new PD models resulted in ayear-on-year release of PMAs.

UK home Loans: To capture the potential impact from an increase in the oil and gas sector as a result of the oil price. Watch list balances in manufacturing increased duehouse price to increased stressearnings ratio, change in the automotive sector.impairment methodology and increased coverage on interest-only loans maturing in the next five years.

UK business lending: To align to impairment policy requirements, potential impact from commercial property price deterioration and the susceptibility of minimum debt service customers to interest rate rises.

Corporate banking:Most material adjustment related to the risk associated with the potential of rate rises impacting low interest cover clients.

Barclays Partner Finance: Adoption of new PD models resulted in ayear-on-year release of PMAs.

114    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Analysis of debt securities

Debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group’s treasury management portfolio for liquidity and regulatory purposes, and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group.

The following tables provide an analysis of debt securities held by the Group for trading and investment purposes by issuer type, and where the Group held government securities exceeding 10% of shareholders’ equity.

Further information on the credit quality of debt securities is presented on pages 115100 to 116. Further disclosure on sovereign exposures to selected Eurozone countries is presented on page 119.101.

 

Debt securities                    
   2015     2014  
As at 31 December   £m     %     £m     %  
Of which issued by:        
Governments and other public bodies   96,537     70.9     106,292     68.1  
Corporate and other issuers   26,166     19.2     29,557     19.0  
US agency   8,927     6.6     11,460     7.3  
Mortgage and asset backed securities   4,009     2.9     8,396     5.4  
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   598     0.4     279     0.2  
Total   136,237     100.0     155,984     100.0  
        
Government securities                    
As at 31 December             

 

 

2015

Fair value

£m

  

  

  

   

 
 

2014

Fair value
£m

  

  
  

US       26,119     32,096  
UK       22,372     28,938  
France       8,874     6,259  
Germany             6,619     7,801  

Note

aBalances represent on-balance sheet exposures and comprise PCB, Barclays Africa, Non-Core and Investment Bank.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  129


Debt securities                    
    2017   2016 
As at 31 December  £m   %   £m   % 
Of which issued by:        
Governments and other public bodies   69,981    64.5    64,852    63.7 
Corporate and other issuers   27,955    25.8    28,284    27.8 
US agency   7,868    7.3    6,208    6.1 
Mortgage and asset backed securities   2,520    2.3    2,372    2.3 
Bank and building society certificates of deposit   21    0.1    23    0.1 
Total   108,345        100.0    101,739        100.0 
        
Government securities                    
As at 31 December            2017
Fair value
£m
   2016
Fair value
£m
 
United States       21,570    16,284 
United Kingdom             19,475    20,145 

Analysis of derivatives (audited)

The tables below set out the fair valuevalues of the derivative assets together with the value of those assets subject to enforceable counterparty netting arrangements for which the Group holds offsetting liabilities and eligible collateral.

 

Derivative assets                  
Derivative assets (audited)Derivative assets (audited)           
   2015   2014    2017   2016 
As at 31 December   
 
 
Balance
sheet assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Counterparty
netting

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Net
exposure
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Balance
sheet assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 

 

Counterparty
netting

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
Net
exposure
£m
  
  
  
  

Balance
sheet
assets

£m

   

Counterparty
netting

£m

   Net
exposure
£m
   

Balance
sheet
assets

£m

   

Counterparty

netting

£m

   Net
exposure
£m
 
Foreign exchange   54,936     40,301     14,635     74,470     58,153     16,317     54,943    42,117    12,826    79,744    59,040    20,704 
Interest rate   231,426     190,513     40,913     309,946     253,820     56,126     153,043    117,559    35,484    228,652    185,723    42,929 
Credit derivatives   18,181     14,110     4,071     23,507     19,829     3,678     12,549    9,952    2,597    16,273    12,891    3,382 
Equity and stock index   13,799     8,358     5,441     14,844     10,523     4,321     14,698    12,702    1,996    17,089    12,603    4,486 
Commodity derivatives   9,367     6,300     3,067     17,142     11,306     5,836     2,436    1,935    501    4,868    3,345    1,523 
Total derivative assets   327,709     259,582     68,127     439,909     353,631     86,278     237,669    184,265    53,404    346,626    273,602        73,024 
Cash collateral held         34,918           44,047           33,092          41,641 
Net exposure less collateral         33,209           42,231               20,312          31,383 

Derivative asset exposures would be £295bn (2014: £398bn)£217bn (2016: £315bn) lower than reported under IFRS if netting were permitted for assets and liabilities with the same counterparty or for which the Group holds cash collateral. Similarly, derivative liabilities would be £295bn (2014: £397bn)£217bn (2016: £317bn) lower reflecting counterparty netting and collateral placed. In addition,non-cash collateral of £7bn (2014:£6bn (2016: £8bn) was held in respect of derivative assets. The Group received collateral from clients in support of over the counter derivative transactions. These transactions are generally undertaken under International Swaps and Derivative Association (ISDA) agreements governed by either UK or New York law.

Exposure relating to derivatives, repurchase agreements, reverse repurchase agreements, stock borrowing and loan transactions is calculated using internal PRA approved models. These are used as the basis to assess both regulatory capital and capital appetite and are managed on a daily basis. The methodology encompasses all relevant factors to enable the current value to be calculated and the future value to be estimated, for example, current market rates, market volatility and legal documentation (including collateral rights).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    115


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

The table below sets out the fair value and notional amounts of Over the Counter (OTC)OTC derivative instruments by type of collateral arrangement.

 

Derivatives by collateral arrangement                              
   2015     2014  
   
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

   
 
 

 

Notional
contract
amount

£m

  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

      

 

Assets

£m

  

  

   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

     

 

Assets

£m

  

  

   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Unilateral in favour of Barclays            
Foreign exchange   15,645     242     (308   15,067     191     (158
Interest rate   4,365     846     (65   5,826     940     (72
Credit derivatives   277     2     (7   226     3     (4
Equity and stock index   303     4     (146   310     3     (8
Commodity derivatives   905     150     (30   2,455     158     (120
Total unilateral in favour of Barclays   21,495     1,244     (556   23,884     1,295     (362
Unilateral in favour of counterparty            
Foreign exchange   50,343     810     (2,107   24,861     681     (2,713
Interest rate   121,231     4,436     (6,981   138,396     6,073     (8,751
Credit derivatives   140     3     (1   403     6     (19
Equity and stock index   827     100     (83   1,100     133     (137
Commodity derivatives   74          (3   2,881     359     (138
Total unilateral in favour of counterparty   172,615     5,349     (9,175   167,641     7,252     (11,758
Bilateral arrangement            
Foreign exchange   2,878,125     46,831     (50,899   3,350,366     67,496     (70,919
Interest rate   7,315,345     197,900     (188,293   9,032,753     263,812     (256,697
Credit derivatives   663,090     13,617     (11,985   887,041     18,290     (17,002
Equity and stock index   144,108     4,991     (8,297   162,615     6,033     (10,498
Commodity derivatives   36,794     3,164     (3,104   68,400     6,254     (6,377
Total bilateral arrangement   11,037,462     266,503     (262,578   13,501,175     361,885     (361,493
Uncollateralised derivatives            
Foreign exchange   271,819     7,008     (5,424   303,341     6,028     (5,452
Interest rate   193,565     6,091     (2,907   199,615     8,572     (3,524
Credit derivatives   7,881     467     (700   8,716     565     (800
Equity and stock index   6,672     2,204     (3,075   5,789     2,115     (2,406
Commodity derivatives   13,347     1,733     (1,667   26,099     2,806     (2,766
Total uncollateralised derivatives   493,284     17,503     (13,773   543,560     20,086     (14,948
Total OTC derivative assets/(liabilities)   11,724,856     290,599     (286,082   14,236,260     390,518     (388,561

Derivatives by collateral arrangement           
         2017            2016      
   

Notional

contract

amount

£m

   Fair value  

Notional

contract

amount

£m

   Fair value 
     

Assets

£m

   Liabilities
£m
    

Assets

£m

   Liabilities
£m
 
Unilateral in favour of Barclays                             
Foreign exchange   18,280    484    (345  17,713    607    (274
Interest rate   5,495    868    (26  6,666    1,017    (60
Credit derivatives              174    3    (2
Equity and stock index   6    3       390    3    (147
Commodity derivatives   243        (9  753    33    (26
Total unilateral in favour of Barclays   24,024    1,355    (380  25,696    1,663    (509
Unilateral in favour of counterparty           
Foreign exchange   21,052    720    (1,851  20,837    786    (2,549
Interest rate   74,412    8,458    (9,934  108,915    3,795    (5,979
Credit derivatives   283    6    (3  152    3    (7
Equity and stock index   1,030    432    (53  1,121    312    (49
Commodity derivatives   515    4    (6  1,231    67    (66
Total unilateral in favour of counterparty   97,292    9,620    (11,847  132,256    4,963    (8,650
Bilateral arrangement           
Foreign exchange   4,318,754    48,660    (46,403  3,772,477    70,464    (68,788
Interest rate   8,060,574    135,465    (131,334  7,335,641    187,155    (179,650
Credit derivatives   404,069    7,337    (5,903  608,859    11,422    (9,994
Equity and stock index   144,255    6,178    (9,099  192,448    6,146    (9,692
Commodity derivatives   11,801    630    (575  11,766    1,318    (1,442
Total bilateral arrangement   12,939,453    198,270    (193,314  11,921,191    276,505    (269,566
Uncollateralised derivatives           
Foreign exchange   380,823    4,442    (4,256  363,921    7,490    (6,287
Interest rate   202,053    4,215    (1,715  184,362    5,723    (2,459
Credit derivatives   6,808    252    (327  5,872    383    (510
Equity and stock index   16,448    884    (5,917  13,706    2,558    (3,385
Commodity derivatives   4,661    60    (266  16,389    504    (748
Total uncollateralised derivatives   610,793    9,853    (12,481  584,250    16,658    (13,389
Total OTC derivative assets/(liabilities)   13,671,562        219,098    (218,022  12,663,393        299,789    (292,114

 

130  |  116    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

CreditMarket risk

 

 

Analysis of loans on concession programmes

Re-age activity

Re-age is applicable only to revolving products where a minimum due payment is required. Re-age refers to returning of a delinquent account to up to date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees).

The following are the principal portfolios in which re-age activity occurs.

Principal portfolios – core portfolios               
   New re-ages in the year     
 
New re-ages as proportion
of total outstanding
  
  
   

 

30 day arrears at

12 months since re-age

  

  

As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

UK cards   117     163     0.7     1.0     40.5     43.4  
US cards   36     31     0.2     0.2     47.2     46.8  

 

UK cards: The reduction of new to re-ages in the year is due to changes in operational and qualification criteria resulting in reduced volume of accounts qualifying for re-age. Enhanced criteria has also led to lower 30 day arrears at 12 months after re-age.

 

US cards: The increase in new to re-ages is in line with portfolio growth, the ratio as a proportion of total outstanding remained stable at 0.2%.

 

Re-age activity in South Africa and Europe card portfolios are not considered to be material. For further detail on policy relating to the re-ageing of loans, please refer to page 368.

 

Forbearance

 

   

  

  

  

Analysis of forbearance programmes               
   Balances     Impairment allowance     Impairment coverage  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

Personal and Corporate Bankinga   589     931     33     63     5.6     6.8  
Africa Banking   209     299     29     45     13.8     15.1  
Barclaycard   729     972     247     394     33.9     40.5  
Barclays Core   1,527     2,202     309     502     20.2     22.8  
Barclays Non-Core   246     419     20     49     8.3     11.7  
Total retail   1,773     2,621     329     551     18.5     21.0  
Investment Bank   210     106     4     10     2.1     9.4  
Personal and Corporate Banking   1,764     1,590     253     225     14.3     14.2  
Africa Banking   228     132     17     7     7.5     5.3  
Barclays Core   2,202     1,828     274     242     12.4     13.2  
Barclays Non-Core   230     651     117     271     50.7     41.6  
Total wholesale   2,432     2,479     391     513     16.1     20.7  
Group total   4,205     5,100     720     1,064     17.1     20.9  

Balances on forbearance programmes reduced 18% to £4.2bn (2014: £5.1bn) driven primarily by; (i) fewer customers requiring forbearance as macroeconomic conditions improved; and (ii) the ongoing impact of enhanced qualification criteria. The decrease in impairment coverage to 17.1% (2014: 20.9%) reflected coverage reduction across both the wholesale and retail portfolios.

Retail balances on forbearance reduced by 32% to £1.8bn and reflected a decrease across all businesses.

Summary of ContentsPage
Outlines key measures used to summarise the market risk profile of the bank such as value at risk (VaR). A distinction is made between management and regulatory measures.

§   Market risk overview and summary of performance

118
Provides a Group-wide overview of where assets and liabilities on the Group’s balance sheet are managed within regulatory traded andnon-traded books. 

PCB:Migration   Balance sheet view of Business Banking from Retail to Corporate amounting to £239m.trading and banking books

§  Barclaycard:Primarily due to multiple asset sales through the year and updated entry criteria for forbearance programmes, which reduced inflows in the UK cards portfolio.119

§ Africa Banking:Updated qualifying criteria in South African home loans

The Group discloses details on management measures of market risk. Total management VaR includes all trading positions and depreciationis presented on a diversified basis by risk factor.

This section also outlines the macroeconomic conditions modelled as part of the Rand.Group’s risk management framework.

   Traded market risk

120

Wholesale balances on forbearance reduced by 2% to £2.4bn as the removal of assets following the sale of the Spanish corporate business was partially offset by the migration of Business Banking forborne assets into the UK Corporate Bank. Excluding these movements, the overall level of forborne balances was broadly stable.

See over for more information on these portfolios.

Note

a

   Review of management measures

120

– The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR

120

– Business scenario stresses

120

   Review of regulatory measures

121
The forbearance definition has been tightened duringGroup’s regulatory measures of market risk under the year based on observed performance to more accurately reflect signsapproved internal models approach are also disclosed.

– Analysis of financial distress. As a result an elementregulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and Comprehensive Risk Measure

121

– Breakdown of the MCA population has been reclassified as highmajor regulatory risk instead of forbearance. 2014 forbearance balances have been restated for a like for like comparison.measures by portfolio

121

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  131    117


Retail forbearance programmes

Forbearance on the Group’s principal retail portfolios in the UK, US and South Africa is presented below. The principal portfolios listed below account for 70% (2014: 83%) of total retail forbearance balances.

 Analysis of key portfolios in forbearance programmes  
   Balances on forbearance programmes   Marked   Marked   Impairment     
           Of which:   to market   to market   allowances   Total 
               Past due of which:   LTV of   LTV of   marked   balances on 
                       forbearance   forbearance   against   forbearance 
       % of gross           91 or more   balances:   balances:   balances on   programmes 
       loans and       1-90 days   days past   balance   valuation   forbearance   coverage 
   Total   advances   Up-to-date   past due   due   weighted   weighted   programmes   ratio 
    £m     %     £m     £m     £m     %     %     £m     %  
As at 31 December 2015                  
Home loans                  
PCB – UKa   445     0.3     211     177     57     48.0     34.1     4     0.8  
Africa Banking – South Africa   125     1.3     50     64     11     67.5     53.6     7     5.5  
Credit cards                  
UK   448     2.4     414     31     3     n/a     n/a     159     35.5  
US   133     0.8     92     30     11     n/a     n/a     30     22.7  
Unsecured loans                  
UK   85     1.6     59     22     3     n/a     n/a     21     24.6  
As at 31 December 2014                  
Home loans                  
PCB – UK   522     0.4     257     206     59     52.1     36.8     3     0.6  
Africa Banking – South Africa   207     1.8     95     99     13     71.1     57.4     13     6.5  
Credit cards                  
UK   724     4.3     679     41     4     n/a     n/a     324     44.8  
US   98     0.7     67     22     9     n/a     n/a     22     22.1  
Unsecured loans                  
UK   121     2.4     83     33     5     n/a     n/a     25     20.9  

Loans in forbearance in the principal home loans portfolios decreased 22% to £570m (2014: £729m).

§PCB – UK (home loans): Balances under forbearance decreased 15% to £445m, principally due to an update to the entry criteria, and fewer customers requiring forbearance in a stable macroeconomic environment. Total past due balances reduced 12% to £234m in line with falling total balances under forbearance.

§Africa Banking – South Africa (home loans): Reduction in forbearance balances to £125m (2014: £207m) was due to enhanced qualification criteria which resulted in a more appropriate and sustainable programme for customers, and depreciation of the Rand.

Forbearance balances on principal credit cards, overdrafts and unsecured loan portfolios decreased by 29% to £666m.

§UK Cards: The reduction in forbearance balances was driven by the implementation of enhanced qualification criteria and asset sales. Balances in arrears and coverage ratio reduced in line with balance reduction.

§US Cards: The increase in balances on forbearance programmes was in line with asset growth on the US portfolio. Balances in arrears remained low as a proportion of the total and coverage was stable.

Forbearance by type  
   Home loans – Barclays Core portfolios  
   UK     South Africa  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
Interest only conversion   94     100            
Interest rate reduction             1     1  
Payment concession   103     106     97     161  
Term extension   248     316     28     45  
Total   445     522     125     207  

Note

aThe forbearance definition has been tightened during the year based on observed performance to more accurately reflect signs of financial distress. As a result, an element of the MCA population has been reclassified as high-risk instead of forbearance. 2014 forbearance balances have been restated for a like for like comparison. (2014 MCA balances: £1.3bn).

132  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

CreditMarket risk

 Forbearance by type                              
   Credit cards and unsecured loans – Barclays Core portfolios  
   UK cards     US cards     UK personal loans  
As at 31 December   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
Payment concession   21     31                      
Term extension                       6     28  
Fully amortising             69     58    ��79     93  
Repayment plana   427     693     64     40            
Total   448     724     133     98     85     121  

Payment concessions reduced to £21m (2014: £31m)The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in UK cards following its withdrawal from forbearance offering in 2014.

Repayment plan balances in UK cards decreased to £427m (2014: £693m) driven by a debt sale and the continued reduction in new repayment plan volumes, following the implementation of enhanced qualification criteria in 2012.

Wholesale forbearance programmes

The tables below detail balance information for wholesale forbearance cases.

 Analysis of wholesale balances in forbearance programmes                           
   Balances on forbearance programmes   Impairment     
           Of which:   allowances   Total 
    
 
 
Total
balances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
% of gross
loans and
advances
%
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Performing
balances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Impaired
up-to-date
balances
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Balances
between 1
and 90 days
past due
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  

 

 

 

 

 

Balances

91 days

or more

past due

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

marked

against

balances on

forbearance

programmes

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

balances on

forbearance

programmes

coverage

ratio

%

  

  

  

  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015                
Investment Bank   210     0.2     81          100     29     4     2.1  
Personal & Corporate Banking   1,764     2.0     578     661     93     432     253     14.3  
Africa Banking   228     1.5     103     4          121     17     7.5  
Total Barclays Core   2,202     1.1     762     665     193     582     274     12.4  
Barclays Non-Core   229     0.7     38     103     2     87     117     50.7  
Group   2,431     1.0     800     768     195     669     391     16.1  
As at 31 December 2014                
Investment Bank   106     0.1     52          22     32     10     9.4  
Personal & Corporate Banking   1,590     2.0     574     587     38     391     225     14.1  
Africa Banking   132     0.8     30     47     13     42     7     5.0  
Total Barclays Core   1,828     0.9     656     634     73     465     242     13.2  
Barclays Non-Core   651     1.5     36     336     41     238     271     41.6  
Group   2,479     1.0     692     970     114     703     513     20.7  

Wholesale forbearance reporting split by exposure class                    
    
 
Corporate
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Personal
and trusts
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Other
£m
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
As at 31 December 2015        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   158               158  
Restructure: maturity date extension   716     24     62     801  
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   317     1          318  
Restructure: payment other than cash   12               12  
Change in security   7     1          8  
Adjustments or non-enforcement of covenants   295     92          387  
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   538     208          746  
Total   2,043     326     62     2,431  
As at 31 December 2014        
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   180               180  
Restructure: maturity date extension   600     79     4     683  
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   335     25     4     364  
Restructure: payment other than cash   7     9          16  
Change in security   17               17  
Adjustments or non-enforcement of covenants   383     53          436  
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   607     175     1     783  
Total   2,129     341     9     2,479  

Note

aRepayment plan represents a reduction to the minimum payment due requirements and interest rate.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  133


 Wholesale forbearance reporting split by business unit                       
    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Investment
Bank

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

Africa
Banking

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

Barclays
Non-Core

£m

  
  

  

  

Total

£m

As at 31 December 2015          
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   131          4     23    158
Restructure: maturity date extension   370     162     153     116    801
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   248     2     68         318
Restructure: payment other than cash   1     11              12
Change in security   8                   8
Adjustments or non-enforcements of covenants   338     2          47    387
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   668     33     3     43    747
Total   1,764     210     228     229    2,431
As at 31 December 2014          
Restructure: reduced contractual cash flows   125          1     54    181
Restructure: maturity date extension   314     72     78     219    683
Restructure: changed cash flow profile (other than extension)   178     2     49     135    364
Restructure: payment other than cash   13               3    16
Change in security   11               6    17
Adjustments or non-enforcements of covenants   329               107    436
Other (e.g. capital repayment holiday; restructure pending)   620     32     4     127    783
Total   1,589     106     134     651    2,479

Wholesale forbearance decreased 2% to £2.4bn with an impairment coverage ratio of 16.1% (2014: 20.7%). Personal & Corporate Banking accounted for the largest portion with 73% (2014: 64%) of total balances held as forbearance.

Overall forbearance balances in Core portfolios rose by 20% to £2.2bn, driven primarily by the migration of forborne Business Banking assets into the PCB UK Corporate Banking portfolio from PCB Retail.

Non-Core balances remain focused on the European corporate portfolios and reduced by 65% to £230m following the salevalue of the Spanish corporate business.firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations

All disclosures in this section pages118 to 121 are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Key metrics

 

 Wholesale forbearance flows in 2015aAverage Management value at risk   -10% 
in 2017 at £19m (2016: £21m) remained relatively stable.  

Balance

£m


As at 1 January 20152,479
Added to forbearanceb1,302
Removed from forbearance (credit improvement)(190
Fully or partially repaid and other movementsc(936
Written off/moved to recoveries(224
As at 31 December 20152,431

Analysis of problem loans

Impaired loans and loans past due within this section are reflected in the balance sheet credit quality tables on page 116 as being Higher Risk.

Age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired (audited)

The following table presents an age analysis of loans and advances that are past due but not impaired.

 Loans and advances past due but not impaired (audited)                              
    
 
 
Past due up
to 1 month
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
1-2 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
2-3 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Past due
3-6 months
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Past due
6 months
and over
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
As at 31 December 2015            
Loans and advances designated at fair value   70     14               209     293  
Home loans   22     8     6     24     80     140  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   288     14     15     93     120     530  
Corporate loans   5,862     897     207     226     280     7,472  
Total   6,242     933     228     343     689     8,435  
As at 31 December 2014            
Loans and advances designated at fair value   594     48     1          33     676  
Home loans   46     6     17     135     230     434  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   64     29     14     139     194     440  
Corporate loansd   5,251     630     874     190     387     7,332  
Total   5,955     713     906     464     844     8,882  

Notes

aRefer to sustainability of loans under forbearance in Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information.
bIncludes £239m transitioned to wholesale forbearance categories within the UK SME Businesses previously in Retail.
cIncludes £321m removed following the sale of the Non-Core Business in Spain.
dCorporate loan balances past due up to 1 month have been revised down by £1,953m to better reflect the ageing of the loans.

134  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F
This small reduction was driven by a 25% decrease in average credit risk 


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Impaired loans

The following table represents an analysis of impaired loans in line with the disclosure requirements from the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce. For further information on definitions of impaired loans refer to the identifying potential credit risk loans section of Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

Movement in impaired loans                                
   
 

 

At beginning
of year

£m

  
  

  

  
 

 

 

 

Classified as
impaired

during the

year

£m

  
  

  

  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Transferred
to not
impaired
during the
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

Repayments

£m

  

  

  

 

 

Amounts

written off

£m

  

  

  

  
 
 
 
Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Exchange
and other
adjustmentsa
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Balance at
31 December
£m
  
  
  
2015        
Home loans  1,503    602    (192  (272  (97      (207  1,337  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  2,613    2,226    (112  (269  (1,873      (385  2,200  
Corporate loans  2,683    1,032    (558  (208  (333  (43  (475  2,098  
Total impaired loans  6,799    3,860    (862  (749  (2,303  (43  (1,067  5,635  
2014        
Home loans  1,983    762    (352  (412  (161      (317  1,503  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  3,385    2,089    (108  (361  (1,885      (507  2,613  
Corporate loans  5,142    1,167    (729  (658  (1,211      (1,028  2,683  
Total impaired loans  10,510    4,018    (1,189  (1,431  (3,257      (1,852  6,799  

 

For information on restructured loans refer to disclosures on forbearance on pages 131 to 134.

 

Analysis of loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)

The following table presents an age analysis of loans and advances collectively impaired and total individually impaired loans.

 

  

  

  

 Loans and advances assessed as impaired (audited)                  
   
 
 
Past due up
to 1 month
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
Past due
1-2 months
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
Past due
2-3 months
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
Past due
3-6 months
£m
  
  
�� 
  
 
 
 
Past due
6 months
and over
£m
  
  
  
  
  

 

Total

£m

  

  

  
 
 
 
Individually
assessed for
impairment
£m
  
  
  
  
  

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015        
Home loans  3,672    1,036    278    364    812    6,162    648    6,810  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  1,241    691    284    541    1,792    4,549    964    5,513  
Corporate loans  251    76    45    76    96    544    1,786    2,330  
Total  5,164    1,803    607    981    2,700    11,255    3,398    14,653  
As at 31 December 2014        
Home loans  5,155    1,424    335    470    1,050    8,434    455    8,889  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending  1,196    738    299    532    2,225    4,990    800    5,790  
Corporate loans  284    30    24    25    148    511    2,679    3,190  
Total  6,635    2,192    658    1,027    3,423    13,935    3,934    17,869  

The decrease in collectively impaired loans to £11.3bn (2014: £13.9bn) predominantly relates to home loans within the past due up to 1 month category. MCA forbearance balances previously allocated into this category (2014 MCA balances: £1.3bn) no longer form part of the forbearance programme nor collectively assessed for impairment.

Note

aVaR, primarily due to tighter credit spreads.Exchange and other adjustments includes the reclassification of the Portuguese loans now held for sale and the Spanish loans held for sale in 2014.

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  135


Potential credit risk loans (PCRLs) and coverage ratios

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs comprise two categories of loans: credit risk loans (CRLs) and potential problem loans (PPLs). For further information on definitions of CRLs and PPLs refer to the identifying potential credit risk loans section of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report.

 Potential credit risk loans and coverage ratios by business                                          
     CRLs       PPLs       PCRLs  
As at 31 December     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Personal & Corporate Bankinga     1,591       1,733       263       264       1,854       1,997  
Africa Banking     859       1,093       154       161       1,013       1,254  
Barclaycard     1,601       1,765       249       227       1,850       1,992  
Barclays Core     4,051       4,591       666       652       4,717       5,243  
Barclays Non-Core     845       1,209       13       26       858       1,234  
Total Group retail     4,896       5,800       679       678       5,575       6,477  
Investment Bank     241       71       450       107       691       178  
Personal & Corporate Bankinga     1,794       2,112       567       614       2,361       2,726  
Africa Banking     541       665       245       94       786       759  
Barclays Core     2,576       2,848       1,262       815       3,838       3,663  
Barclays Non-Core     345       841       109       119       454       960  
Total Group wholesale     2,921       3,689       1,371       934       4,292       4,623  
Group total     7,817       9,489       2,050       1,612       9,867       11,100  
                        
      Impairment allowance       CRL coverage       PCRL coverage  
As at 31 December     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     
 
2015
%
  
  
     
 
2014
%
  
  
     
 
2015
%
  
  
     

 

2014

%

  

  

Personal & Corporate Bankinga,b     713       766       44.8       44.2       38.5       38.4  
Africa Banking     539       681       62.7       62.3       53.2       54.3  
Barclaycard     1,835       1,815       114.6       102.8       99.2       91.1  
Barclays Core     3,087       3,262       76.2       71.1       65.4       62.2  
Barclays Non-Core     369       428       43.7       35.4       43.0       34.7  
Total Group retail     3,456       3,690       70.6       63.6       62.0       57.0  
Investment Bank     83       44       34.4       62.0       12.0       24.7  
Personal & Corporate Bankinga     914       873       50.9       41.3       38.7       32.0  
Africa Banking     235       246       43.4       37.0       29.9       32.4  
Barclays Core     1,232       1,163       47.8       40.8       32.1       31.7  
Barclays Non-Core     233       602       67.5       71.6       51.3       62.7  
Total Group wholesale     1,465       1,765       50.2       47.8       34.1       38.2  
Group total     4,921       5,455       63.0       57.5       49.9       49.1  

§CRLs decreased 17.6% to £7.8bn, with the Group’s CRL coverage ratio increasing to 63.0% (2014: 57.5%).

§CRLs in retail portfolios have decreased 15.6% to £4.9bn. This is primarily driven by Non-Core as a result of the sale of the Portuguese business and rundown of assets in Europe. Another driver of the decrease is the Africa retail portfolios reducing as a result of improved recoveries. Retail CRL coverage increased to 70.6% (2014: 63.6%), due to the decrease in the retail CRL portfolio.

§Wholesale CRL portfolios decreased by 20.8% to £2.9bn. This is primarily driven by reductions in Non-Core as a result of the sale of the Portuguese corporate loans and continued rundown of the Non-Core Investment Bank portfolio; and within PCB due to the improved economic environment. Investment Bank CRLs increased £170m to £241m predominantly relating to the Oil and Gas sector. Wholesale CRL coverage increased to 50.2% (2014: 47.8%), driven by the decrease in CRLs in 2015.

Notes

aUK Business Banking has been reclassified from Retail to Wholesale in line with how the business is now managed.
b2014 PCB CRLs, PPLs and PCRLs have been revised by £151m, £121m and £273m respectively to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.

136  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Credit risk

Impairment

Impairment allowances

Impairment allowances decreased 10% to £4,921m primarily within Non-Core as a result of the reclassification of impairments held against the Portuguese loans now held for sale.

Movements in allowance for impairment by asset class (audited)  
    
 

 

At beginning
of year

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Acquisitions
and
disposals
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Unwind of
discount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Exchange
and other
adjustmentsa
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Amounts
written off
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Recoveries
£m
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Amounts
charged to
income
statement
£m
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Balance at
31 December
£m
  
  
  
2015                
Home loans   547          (32)     (64)     (94)     7     154     518  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   3,345          (105)     (170)     (1,848)     301     1,871     3,394  
Corporate loans   1,563          (12)     (383)     (335)     92     84     1,009  
Total impairment allowance   5,455          (149)     (617)     (2,277)     400     2,109     4,921  
2014                
Home loans   788          (23)     (200)     (191)     17     156     547  
Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending   3,603     13     (116)     (307)     (1,679)     126     1,705     3,345  
Corporate loans   2,867          (14)     (540)     (1,167)     78     339     1,563  
Total impairment allowance   7,258     13     (153)     (1,047)     (3,037)     221     2,200     5,455  

Management adjustments to models for impairment

Management adjustments to models for impairment are applied in order to factor in certain conditions or changes in policy that are not incorporated into the relevant impairment models, or to ensure that the impairment allowance reflects all known facts and circumstances at the period end. Adjustments typically increase the model derived impairment allowance. Where applicable, management adjustments are reviewed and incorporated into future model development.

Management adjustments to models of more than £10m with respect to impairment allowance in our principal portfolios are presented below.

Principal portfolios that have management adjustments greater than £10m (unaudited)  
   2015     2014  
As at 31 December   
 
 
 
 

 

Total management
adjustments to
impairment stock,
including
forbearance

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Proportion of total
impairment stock
%
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 

 

Total management
adjustments to
impairment stock,
including
forbearance

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Proportion of total
impairment stock
%
  
  
  
PCB        
UK home loans   68     67     52     55  
UK personal loans   75     16     48     10  
UK overdrafts   37     29     30     19  
UK large corporate and business lending   183     26     98     14  
Africa Banking        
South Africa home loans   22     17     22     11  
Barclaycard        
UK cards   147     17     62     5  
US Cards   58     9     10     2  
Barclays Partner Finance   41     28     9     7  
Germany Cards   20     21     3     3  

During 2015, the Retail Impairment Policy was significantly strengthened and models enhanced.

UK home loans: Adjustments to capture the potential impact from increase in the house price to earnings ratio, change in the impairment methodology and increased coverage on interest only loans maturing in the next five years.

UK personal loans: Adjustments to incorporate revised impairment policy requirements, and for updated model requirements.

UK overdrafts: Principally for updated model-related requirements and adjustments to align to revised impairment policy.

UK large corporate and business lending: In business lending to reflect policy changes affecting customers on forbearance and impairment treatment. In corporate lending to account for single name losses, adjustment to allow for small names yet to emerge within the oil and gas sector, and the susceptibility of minimum debt service customers to interest rate raises not currently captured in models.

South Africa home loans: Primarily to incorporate the uncertainty in the macroeconomic outlook. The adjustment has increased by 27% in local currency.

Barclaycard: Predominantly to align to new impairment policy requirements in models, and to increase coverage on forbearance programmes and accounts in recoveries.

Note

aExchange and other adjustments includes the reclassification of impairments held against the Portuguese loans now held for sale and the Spanish loans held for sale in 2014.

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  137


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Analysis of market risk

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pools.

This section contains key disclosures describing the Group’s market risk profile, highlighting regulatory as well as management measures.

Key metrics

Measures of traded market risk, such as Value at Risk (VaR), decreased in the year primarily due to the removal of certain banking book assets from VaR, reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses.

We saw a reduction in associated risk measures and lower income from reduced activity

85%

of days generated positive trading revenue

-23%

reduction in management VaR

10%

increase in average daily trading revenue

138  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Market risk is the risk of a reduction in earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as a consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity pool.

All disclosures in this section (page 139 to 147) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview of market risk

This section contains key statistics describing the market risk profile of the Group. This includes risk weighted assets by major business line, as well as Value at Risk (VaR) measures.bank. A distinction is made between regulatory and management measures within the section. The market risk management section on pages 376108 to 391115 provides descriptions of these metrics:

 

§ page 140page119 provides a view of market risk in the context of the Group’s balance sheet

 

§ pages 101 to 102 coverpage 129 covers the management of traded market risk. Management measures are shown from page 141page162 and regulatory equivalent measures are shown from page 142page163.

§non-traded market risk, arising from our banking books, is reviewed from page 143.

Measures of market risk in the

Group and accounting measures

Traded market risk measures such as VaR and balance sheet exposure measures have fundamental differences:

 

§ balance sheet measures show accruals-based balances or marked to market values as at the reporting date

 

§ VaR measures also take account of current marked to market values, but in addition hedging effects between positions are considered

 

§ market risk measures are expressed in terms of changes in value or volatilities as opposed to static values.

For these reasons, it is not possible to present direct reconciliations of traded market risk and accounting measures. The table ‘Balance sheet view ofsplit by trading and banking books’, on page 140,119, helps the reader understand the main categories of assets and liabilities subject to regulatory market risk measures.

Summary of performance in the period

TheOverall, the Group has seenmaintained a decrease in marketsteady risk from reduced risk positions, notably in equities and interest rates, in addition to risk reduction in Non-Core businesses:profile:

 

§ measures of traded market risk such as VaR, decreased in the year mainly due to the removal of certain banking book assets from the measure (now reported as non-traded market risks), reduced client activity, and risk reduction in Non-Core businesses

§average trading revenue, in contrast, increased 10% compared with the previous year

§market risk RWAs fell from 2014 levels due to the implementation of diversification of the general and specific market risk VaR charges, partially offsethave been relatively stable over 2017, characterised by the inclusion of cost of funding RNIV into VaR

§Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR), a key measure of interest rate risklow volatility in the banking book (IRRBB), decreased in 2015, primarily driven by PCB due to increased hedging; and in Treasury driven by increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio, partially offset by reduced mismatch between assets and liabilities in the wholesale funding portfolio

§other market risks, such as pension risk and insurance risk, are disclosed from page 146 onwards.environment.
 

 

118    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  139


    

    

    

    

Balance sheet view of trading and banking books

As defined by the regulatory rules, a trading book consists of positions held for trading intent or to hedge elements of the trading book. Trading intent must be evidenced in the basis of the strategies, policies and procedures set up by the firm to manage the position or portfolio. The table below provides a Group-wide overview of where assets and liabilities on the Group’s balance sheet are managed within regulatory traded andnon-traded books.

The balance sheet split by trading book and banking books is shown on an IFRS accounting scope of consolidation. The reconciliation between the accounting and regulatory scope of consolidation is shown in the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report. The reconciling items are all part of the banking book.Report 2017.

 

Balance sheet split by trading and banking books

               

As at 31 December 2015

   
 

 

Banking
book

£m

  
a 

  

   
 

 

Trading
book

£m

  
  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

Cash and balances at central banks

   49,711          49,711  

Items in course of collection from other banks

   1,011          1,011  

Trading portfolio assets

   3,355     73,993     77,348  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   25,263     51,567     76,830  

Derivative financial instruments

   296     327,413     327,709  

Available for sale financial investments

   90,267          90,267  

Loans and advances to banks

   39,779     1,570     41,349  

Loans and advances to customers

   380,406     18,811     399,217  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   28,187          28,187  

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

   3,010          3,010  

Investments in associates and joint ventures

   573          573  

Property, plant and equipment

   3,468          3,468  

Goodwill and intangible assets

   8,222          8,222  

Current tax assets

   415          415  

Deferred tax assets

   4,495          4,495  

Retirement benefit assets

   836          836  

Non-current assets classified as held for disposal

   7,364          7,364  

Total assets

   646,658     473,354     1,120,012  

Deposits from banks

   45,344     1,736     47,080  

Items in course of collection due to other banks

   1,013          1,013  

Customer accounts

   401,927     16,315     418,242  

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   25,035          25,035  

Trading portfolio liabilities

        33,967     33,967  

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   7,027     84,718     91,745  

Derivative financial instruments

   1,699     322,553     324,252  

Debt securities in issue

   69,150          69,150  

Subordinated liabilities

   21,467          21,467  

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

   10,610          10,610  

Provisions

   4,142          4,142  

Current tax liabilities

   903          903  

Deferred tax liabilities

   122          122  

Retirement benefit liabilities

   423          423  

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   5,997          5,997  

Total liabilities

   594,859     459,289     1,054,148  

Included within the trading book are assets and liabilities which are included in the market risk regulatory measures. For more information on these measures (VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR) see the risk management section on page 383.

Balance sheet split by trading and banking books                     
      

Banking

booka

     

Trading

book

     Total 
As at 31 December 2017    £m     £m     £m 
Cash and balances at central banks     171,082            171,082 
Items in course of collection from other banks     2,153            2,153 
Trading portfolio assets     1,555      112,205      113,760 
Financial assets designated at fair value     7,874      108,407      116,281 
Derivative financial instruments     924      236,745      237,669 
Financial investments     58,916            58,916 
Loans and advances to banks     32,464      3,199      35,663 
Loans and advances to customers     343,771      21,781      365,552 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending     12,546            12,546 
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets     2,389            2,389 
Investments in associates and joint ventures     718            718 
Property, plant and equipment     2,572            2,572 
Goodwill and intangible assets     7,849            7,849 
Current tax assets     482            482 
Deferred tax assets     3,457            3,457 
Retirement benefit assets     966            966 
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale     1,193            1,193 
Total assets     650,911      482,337      1,133,248 
Deposits from banks     35,337      2,386      37,723 
Items in course of collection due to other banks     446            446 
Customer accounts     415,783      13,338      429,121 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing     40,338            40,338 
Trading portfolio liabilities           37,351      37,351 
Financial liabilities designated at fair value     4,368      169,350      173,718 
Derivative financial instruments     389      237,956      238,345 
Debt securities in issue     73,314            73,314 
Subordinated liabilities     23,826            23,826 
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities     8,565            8,565 
Provisions     3,543            3,543 
Current tax liabilities     586            586 
Deferred tax liabilities     44            44 
Retirement benefit liabilities     312            312 
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale                  
Total liabilities     606,851      460,381      1,067,232 

Note

aThe primary risk factors for banking book assets and liabilities are interest rates and to a lesser extent, foreign exchange rates. Credit spreads and equity prices will also be factors where the Group holds debt and equity securities respectively, either as financial assets designated at fair value (see Note 14) or as available for sale (see Note 16). of the financial statements.

Included within the trading book are assets and liabilities which are included in the market risk regulatory measures. For more information on these measures (VaR, SVaR, IRC and CRM) see page 334.

 

140  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    119


 


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

Traded market risk review

Review of management measures

The following disclosures provide details on management measures of market risk. See the risk management section on page 383pages 332 to 333 for more detail on management measures and the differences when compared to regulatory measures.

The table below shows the Total managementtotal Management VaR on a diversified basis by risk factor. Total managementManagement VaR includes all trading positions in the Investment Bank, Non-Core, Africa BankingCIB and Head Office.

Limits are applied against each risk factor VaR as well as Total managementtotal Management VaR, which are then cascaded further by risk managers to each business.

The daily average, maximum and minimum values of management VaR (audited)

  

                    
        2015               2014       

Management VaR (95%)

           Average             Higha            Lowa            Average             Higha            Lowa 

For the year ended 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Credit risk

   11     17     8     11     15     9  

Interest rate risk

   6     14     4     11     17     6  

Equity risk

   8     18     4     10     16     6  

Basis risk

   3     4     2     4     8     2  

Spread risk

   3     6     2     4     8     3  

Foreign exchange risk

   3     6     1     4     23     1  

Commodity risk

   2     3     1     2     8     1  

Inflation risk

   3     5     2     2     4     2  

Diversification effecta

   (22   n/a     n/a     (26   n/a     n/a  

Total management VaR

   17     25     12     22     36     17  

Average interest rate VaR decreased by £5m to £6m (Dec 14: £11m) during 2015 as certain banking book positions were transferred from the Investment Bank to Head Office Treasury, reflecting the operational transferThe daily average, maximum and minimum values of responsibility (see page 143). These positions are high quality and liquid banking book assets and are now reported as non-traded market risk exposures. Similarly, lower spread risk and basis riskmanagement VaR in 2015 reflect reduced risk taking.

Management VaR (95%, one day) (audited)                                    
        2017                 2016        
For the year ended 31 Decembera  Average
£m
   Highb
£m
     Lowb
£m
     Average
£m
   Highb
£m
     Lowb
£m
 
Credit risk   12    18      8      16    24      9 
Interest rate risk   8    15      4      7    13      4 
Equity risk   8    14      4      7    11      4 
Basis risk   5    6      3      5    9      3 
Spread risk   5    8      3      3    5      2 
Foreign exchange risk   3    7      2      3    5      2 
Commodity risk   2    3      1      2    4      1 
Inflation risk   2    4      1      2    3      2 
Diversification effectb   (26   n/a      n/a      (24   n/a      n/a 
Total management VaR   19    26      14      21    29      13 

Average equities risk VaR reduced by 20% to £8m, reflecting reduced cash portfolio activities and a more conservative risk profile maintained in the derivatives portfolio.

Average foreign exchange risk VaR decreased by 25% to £3m as a result of lower activity in the first half of the year, partially offset by higher volatility in the global foreign exchange market seen in the second half of the year.

Inflation risk VaR increased by £1m to £3m, primarily due to increased volatility in the inflation market.

Average commodity risk VaR remained stable at £2m, but the high levels reduced significantly year-on-year due to the portfolio having been largely divested, and reduced client flows impacted by lower oil prices.

Group management VaR

Daily trading revenue

LOGO

LOGO

The chart above presents the frequency distribution of our daily trading revenues for all material positions included in VaR for 2015. This includes daily trading revenue generated in the Investment Bank (except for Private Equity and Principal Investments), Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core.

The basis of preparation for trading revenue was changed in 2015 to align better with and reflect the portfolio structure included in Group Management VaR. 2014 figures have been presented on a comparable basis. Disclosed trading revenue includes realised and unrealised mark to market gains and losses from intraday market moves but excludes commission and advisory fees. The trading revenue measure is based on actual trading results and holding periods. In contrast, the VaR shows the volatility of a hypothetical measure. To construct this measure, positions are assumed to be held for one day, and the aggregate unrealised gain or loss is the measure. VaR and the actual revenue figure are not directly comparable. VaR informs risk managers of the risk implications of current portfolio decisions.

NoteNotes

aIncludes BAGL.
bDiversification effects recognise that forecast losses from different assets or businesses are unlikely to occur concurrently, hence the expected aggregate loss is lower than the sum of the expected losses from each risk factor area. Historic correlations between losses are taken into account in making these assessments. The high and low VaR figures reported for each category did not necessarily occur on the same day as the high and low VaR reported as a whole. Consequently a diversification effect balancesbalance for the high and low VaR figures would not be meaningful and areis therefore omitted from the above table.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  141


The average daily net revenue increasedManagement VaR remained relatively stableyear-on-year characterised by 10% to £10.1m; there were more positive trading revenue daysa low volatility environment. Theyear-on-year reduction in 2015 than in 2014, with 85% (2014: 82%) of days generating positive trading revenue.

The dailyCredit VaR chart illustrates an average declining trend in 2015. Intermittent VaR increases were due to increased client flow in periods of heightened volatility in specific markets and subsequent risk management of the position.was driven primarily by tighter credit spreads.

Group Management VaRa (£m)

LOGO

Business scenario stressesScenario Stresses

As part of the Group’s risk management framework, on a regular basis the performance of the trading business in hypothetical scenarios characterised by severe macroeconomic conditions is modelled. Up to sixseven global scenarios are modelled on a regular basis, for example, a sharp deterioration in liquidity, a slowdown in the global economy, terrorist attacksglobal recession, and a sovereign peripheral crisis.sharp increase in economic growth.

Throughout 2015In 2017, the scenario analyses showed that the biggestlargest market risk related impactimpacts would be due to a severe deterioration in marketfinancial liquidity and a sovereign peripheral crisis.global recession.

120    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Review of regulatory measures

The following disclosures provide details on regulatory measures of market risk. See page 334 for more detail on regulatory measures and the differences when compared to management measures.

The Group’s market risk capital requirement comprises of two elements:

 

§ the market risk of trading book positions booked to legal entities within the scope of the Group’s PRA waiver where the market risk isare measured under a PRA approved internal models approach, including Regulatory VaR, Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR), Incremental Risk Charge (IRC) and All PriceComprehensive Risk (APR)Measure (CRM) as required

 

§ the trading book positions that do not meet the conditions for inclusion within the approved internal models approach. The capital requirement for these positions isapproach are calculated using standardised rules.

The table below summarises the regulatory market risk measures, under the internal models approach. See Table 76: MR1-A - Market Risk - own fund requirements on page 97 of the Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2017 for a breakdown of capital requirements by approach.

 

Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APR

                            
      
 
Year end
£m
  
  
     
 
Average
£m
  
  
     
 
Max
£m
  
  
     
 
Min
£m
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

                

Regulatory VaR

     26       28       46       20  

SVaR

     44       54       68       38  

IRC

     129       142           254           59  

APR

     12       15       27       11  

As at 31 December 2014

                

Regulatory VaR

     29       39       66       29  

SVaR

     72       74       105       53  

IRC

     80       118       287       58  

APR

     24       28       39       24  
                                                                
Analysis of Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and Comprehensive Risk Measurea                          
    Year-end
£m
     Avg.
£m
     Max
£m
     Min
£m
 
As at 31 December 2017              
Regulatory VaR(1-day)   28      27      39      19 
Regulatory VaR(10-day)b   90      85      123      60 
SVaR(1-day)   59      63      105      41 
SVaR(10-day)b   186      200      331      130 
IRC   188      202      326      142 
CRM         1      2       
As at 31 December 2016              
Regulatory VaR(1-day)   33      26      34      18 
Regulatory VaR(10-day)b   105      84      108      57 
SVaR(1-day)   65      56      75      34 
SVaR(10-day)b   205      178      236      109 
IRC   154      155      238      112 
CRM   2      5      12      2 

Notes

aIncludes BAGL.
bThe 10 day VaR is based on scaling of 1 day VaR model output since VaR is currently not modelled for a 10 day holding period. More information about Regulatory and Stressed VaR methodology is available in Barclays Pillar 3 Report 2017.

Overall, there was a lower risk profile during 2015:an increase in IRC in 2017, with no significant movements in other internal model components:

 

§ Regulatory VaR/SVaR:reduction in a Regulatory Average VaR/SVaR is driven by application of diversificationwas broadly unchanged compared to the general and specific market risk VaR charges which resulted in an overall RWA reductionprevious year.

 

§ IRC:the IRC increase Increase was mainly driven by the implementation of an updated IRC model in Q4 15 which features a more refined correlation structure, adoption of a continuous transition matrix and a local currency adjustment for sovereign issuancepositional increases.

 

§ APR:reducedCRM: Reduced to zero as a result of further reductionsthe final positions matured in a specific legacy portfolio.

 

Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolio

  

As at 31 December 2015

   

 

Macro

£m

  

  

   

 

Equities

£m

  

  

   
 
Credit
£m
  
  
  

 
 

Client Capital

Management
£m

  

  
  

   
 
Treasury
£m
  
  
   
 
Africa
£m
  
  
   
 
Non-Core
£m
  
  

Regulatory VaR

   10     8     5    12     4     4     3  

SVaR

   25             33             15            18             11             6             12  

IRC

           197     5     79    99     13          62  

APR

                                12  
Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolioa 
As at 31 December 2017  Macro
£m
     Equities
£m
     Credit
£m
     

Barclays
International
Treasury

£m

     Banking
£m
     Group
Treasury
£m
     Barclays
Non-Core
£m
     

Financial
Resource

Managementb

£m

 
Regulatory VaR(1-day)   13      6      19            5      6            8 
Regulatory VaR(10-day)   42      20      59            16      18            25 
SVaR(1-day)   23      11      41            10      11            20 
SVaR(10-day)   72      35      130      1      30      35            64 
IRC   203      5      270            1      10            65 
CRM                                              
                              
Breakdown of the major regulatory risk measures by portfolioa 
As at 31 December 2016  Macro
£m
     Equities
£m
     Credit
£m
     

Barclays
International
Treasury

£m

     Banking
£m
     Group
Treasury
£m
     Barclays
Non-Core
£m
     

Financial
Resource

Managementb

£m

 
Regulatory VaR(1-day)   14      12      6      14      12      5      6       
Regulatory VaR(10-day)   44      38      20      45      40      15      21       
SVaR(1-day)   22      43      7      30      18      9      22       
SVaR(10-day)   69      137      24      95      58      30      69       
IRC   220      8      146      196      25      10      18       
CRM                                       2       

Note

aExcludes BAGL.
bThe movement from Barclays International Treasury to Financial Resource Management was due to changes in the hierarchy.

The table above shows the primary portfolios which are driving the trading businesses’ modelled capital requirement as at 20152017 year end. The standalone portfolio results diversify at the total level and are not necessarily additive. Regulatory VaR, SVaR, IRC and APRCRM in the prior table show the diversified results at a group level.

142  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

Non-traded market risk

Overview

The non-traded market risk framework covers exposures in the banking book, mostly consisting of exposures relating to accrual accounted and available for sale instruments. The potential volatility of the net interest income of the bank is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric that is monitored regularly and reported to senior management and the Board Risk Committee as part of the limit monitoring framework.

Net interest income sensitivity

The table below shows a sensitivity analysis on pre-tax net interest income for the non-trading financial assets and financial liabilities including the effect of any hedging. The sensitivity has been measured using the Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) methodology. Note that this metric is simplistic in that it assumes a large parallel shock occurs instantaneously across all major currencies and ignores the impact of any management actions on customer products.

                                                                                                                                          
  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unit  
   
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
  
 
Africa
£m
  
  
  

 

Non-Core

£m

a 

  

  

 

Treasury

£m

b 

  

  
 
Total
£m
  
  

  As at 31 December 2015

      

  +200bps

  305    (31  28    27    (131  198  

  +100bps

  152    (14  14    14    (63  103  

  -100bps

  (385  10    (11      (26  (412

  -200bps

  (433  14    (14      (36  (469

  As at 31 December 2014c

      

  +200bps

  464    (59  26    6    14    451  

  +100bps

  239    (27  13    3    10    238  

  -100bps

  (426  26    (9  (1  (29  (439

  -200bps

  (430  29    (17  (1  (39  (458

Overall the NII sensitivity of the Group to sudden changes in interest rates has decreased. The main drivers of the change in NII sensitivities are:

§PCB:The reduction in NII sensitivity was due to increased hedging of certain deposit products exposure to interest rate changes

§Barclaycard:The reduction in NII is due to a decrease in the period of time that the book can be repriced post a change in interest rates

§Non-Core:The increase is predominantly due to a change in the hedge profile following the announced disposals in Europe

§Treasury:The increase in NII sensitivity is primarily driven by an increased exposure in the short dated available for sale bond portfolio This results in a higher duration mismatch between assets and liabilities which an up-shock scenario creates a negative impact. In a down shock scenario the full benefit of this is not realised due to the rates being floored as zero, resulting in a net negative Nil impact from Treasury under these simple modelling assumptions.

  Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currency (audited)                    
   2015     2014  
  As at 31 December   
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

+100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis
points

£m

  
  

  

  GBP

   94     (368   184     (406

  USD

   (15   (30   (11   (11

  EUR

   (6   (8   21     3  

  ZAR

   6     (5   10     (8

  Other currencies

   24     (1   34     (17

  Total

   103     (412   238     (439

  As percentage of net interest income

   0.82   (3.28)%    1.97   (3.63)% 

Notes

aOnly retail exposures within Non-Core are included in the calculation.
bTreasury includes both accrual and fair value accounted positions modelled with an appropriate holding period. It excludes hedge accounting ineffectiveness. Although hedge accounting ineffectiveness is recorded within net interest income, it is excluded in this analysis as it is driven by fair value movements rather than interest accruals.
c2014 comparatives have been revised to reflect the inclusion of all Treasury banking books and the exclusion of hedge ineffectiveness.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  143    121


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and capital risk

 

Economic Capital by business unit

Barclays measures some non-traded market risks using an economic capital (EC) methodology. EC is predominantly calculated using a daily VaR model and then scaled up to a one-year EC confidence interval (99.98%). For more information on definitions of prepayment, recruitment and residual risk, and on how EC is used to manage market risk, see the market risk management section on page 389.

  Economic capital for non-trading risk by business unit                        
    
 
 
 
Personal &
Corporate
Banking
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
Barclaycard
£m
  
  
   

 
 

Africa

Banking
£m

  

  
  

   

 

Non-Core

£m

a 

  

   
 
Total
£m
  
  

  As at 31 December 2015

         

  Prepayment risk

   35    7               42  

  Recruitment risk

   64    1          5     70  

  Residual risk

   7    2     126     5     140  

  Total

   106    10     126     10     252  

  As at 31 December 2014

         

  Prepayment risk

   32    15               47  

  Recruitment risk

   148    1               149  

  Residual risk

   12    3     34     16     65  

  Total

   192    19     34     16     261  

PCB recruitment risk:The reduction of EC for PCB is driven by lower levels of recruitment risk associated with hedging mismatch for savings and mortgage products as at 31 December 2015. The mortgage book in particular saw significant falls in recruitment risk due to lower levels of pre-hedging, particularly within mortgages of longer tenor.

Africa Banking residual risk: The significant changes in EC for Africa Banking are mainly due to the adoption of new behavioural assumptions for residual risk which went live on 1 January 2015.

Analysis of equity sensitivity

The table below measures the overall impact of a +/- 100bps movement in interest rates on available for sale and cash flow hedge reserves. This data is captured using PV01 which is an indicator of the shift in asset value for a 1 basis point shift in the yield curve. Note that the methodology used to estimate the impact of the negative movement applied a 0% floor to interest rates.

  Analysis of equity sensitivity                    
   2015     2014  
  As at 31 December   
 

 

+100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 

 

+100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 

 

-100 basis 
points 

£m 

  
  

  

  Net interest income

   103      (412)     238      (439)  

  Taxation effects on the above

   (31)     124      (57)     105   

  Effect on profit for the year

   72      (288)     181      (334)  

  As percentage of net profit after tax

   11.56%     (46.23)   21.42%      (39.53)%  

  Effect on profit for the year (per above)

   72      (288)     181      (334)  

  Available for sale reserve

   (751)     1,052      (698)     845   

  Cash flow hedge reserve

   (3,104)     1,351      (3,058)     2,048   

  Taxation effects on the above

   1,157      (721)     901      (694)  

  Effect on equity

   (2,626)     1,394      (2,674)     1,865   

  As percentage of equity

   (3.99)   2.12%     (4.05)   2.83%  

As discussed in relation to the net interest income sensitivity table on page 143, the impact of a 100bps movement in rates is largely driven by PCB and Treasury. The available for sale reserve change in sensitivity was mainly driven by changes in portfolio composition, primarily due to an increase in available for sale assets held on a shorter dated outright basis. Note that the movement in the available for sale reserve would impact CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital but the movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not impact CET1 capital.

Note

Summary of Contents

Page
Liquidity risk performance
The risk that the firm, although solvent, either

   Liquidity overview and summary of performance

124
does not have sufficient financial resources

   Liquidity risk stress testing

124
available to enable it to meet its obligations

– Liquidity Risk Appetite

125
as they fall due, or can secure such resources

– Liquidity regulation

125
only at excessive cost.

– Internal and regulatory stress tests

125

This section provides an overview of the

Group’s liquidity risk.
The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and

   Liquidity pool

126
is not used to support payment or clearing

– Composition of the liquidity pool

126
requirements. The liquidity pool is intended

– Liquidity pool by currency

126
to offset stress outflows, and comprises the

– Management of the Group liquidity pool

126
following cash and unencumbered assets.

– Contingent liquidity

127
The basis for sound liquidity risk

   Funding structure and funding relationships

127
management is a solid funding structure that

– Deposit funding

127
reduces the probability of a liquidity stress

– Behavioural maturity profile

128
leading to an inability to meet funding

– Wholesale funding

128
obligations as they fall due.
Asset encumbrance arises from collateral

   Encumbrance

129
pledged against secured funding and other

On-balance sheet

130
collateralised obligations. Barclays funds aOnly

Off-balance sheet

130
portion of trading portfolio assets and other

– Repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements

131
securities via repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing, and pledges a portion of customer loans and advances as collateral in securitisation, covered bond and other similar secured structures.
In addition to monitoring and managing key

   Credit ratings

132
metrics related to the retail exposures within Non-Corefinancial strength of the
Group, Barclays solicits independent credit ratings.

These ratings assess the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and are captured inbased on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings, funding, asset quality, liquidity, accounting and governance.

Provides details on the measure.contractual maturity

   Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities

133
of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities.

 

144  |  122    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Market risk

 

 

Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

Changes in value of the available for sale exposures flow directly through capital via the equity reserve. The volatility of the value of the available for sale investments in the liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure, i.e. the non-traded market risk VaR.

Although the underlying methodology to calculate the non-traded VaR is the same as the one used to calculate traded management VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. The non-traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the available for sale exposures. This is used for internal management purposes and although it is not formally backtested like the regulatory VaR (as shown on page 142), it is reviewed on a regular basis by risk managers to ensure it remains adequate for risk appetite and monitoring purposes.

These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment. As such available for sale volatility is a risk which is taken into account in the IRRBB internal capital assessment, which is covered by the Pillar 2 capital framework.

 

Volatility of the Available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

LOGO

Analysis of volatility of the available for sale portfolio in liquidity pool

                     
     2015  

For the year ended 31 December

     
 
Average
£m
  
  
     
 
High
£m
  
  
     
 
Low
£m
  
  

Non-traded market VaR (daily, 95%)

     41.6       48.5       37.0  

The non-traded VaR is mainly driven by volatility of interest rates in developed markets in the chart above.

The increase in VaR seen in H215 is due to the volatility in the government and swap rate markets observed in that period, particularly in the US and the UK. The subsequent decrease was due to subsiding market volatility in combination with a reduction in exposure.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk.

a) Transactional foreign currency exposure

Transactional foreign exchange exposure represents exposure on banking assets and liabilities denominated in currencies other than the functional currency of the transacting entity.

The Group’s risk management policies prevent the holding of significant open positions in foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio managed by the Investment Bank which is monitored through VaR.

Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk outside of the Investment Bank is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk functions and minimised by the businesses.

b) Translational foreign exchange exposure

The Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in foreign currencies, principally USD, EUR and ZAR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

The Group’s strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange movements, by ensuring that the CET1 capital movements broadly match the revaluation of the Group’s foreign currency RWA exposures.

The economic hedges primarily represent the USD and EUR preference shares and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments that are held as equity, which are accounted for at historic cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting purposes.

Page

Capital risk performance
Capital risk is the risk that the firm has an

   Capital risk overview and summary of performance

137
insufficient level or composition of capital to

   Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

138
support its normal business activities and to      –  Capital138
meet its regulatory capital requirements      –  Leverage138
under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This also includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans.
This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides details of the leverage ratios and exposures.
This section outlines the Group’s capital

  Analysis of capital resources

139
ratios, capital composition, and provides      –  Capital ratios139
information on significant movements in      –  Capital resources139
CET1 capital during the year.      –  Movement in CET1 capital140
This section outlines risk weighted assets by

  Analysis of risk weighted assets

141
risk type, business and macro drivers.      –  Risk weighted assets by risk type and business141
      –  Movement analysis of risk weighted assets141
This section outlines the Group’s leverage

  Analysis of leverage ratios and exposures

142
ratios, leverage exposure composition, and      –  Leverage ratios and exposures142
provides information on significant movements in the IFRS and leverage balance sheet.
The Group discloses the two sources of foreign

  Foreign exchange risk

143
exchange risk that it is exposed to.      –  Transactional foreign currency exposure143
      –  Translational foreign exchange exposure143
      –  Functional currency of operations143
A review focusing on the UK retirement fund,

  Pension risk review

144
which represents the majority of the Group’s      –  Assets and Liabilities144
total retirement benefit obligation.      –  IAS19 Position144
      –  Risk Measurement145
This section outlines the Group’s Minimum

  Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities

145
requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) position and ratios.

Interest rate risk in the banking book performance

A description of thenon-traded market risk framework is provided.

The Group discloses a sensitivity analysis onpre-tax net interest income fornon-trading financial assets and liabilities. The analysis is carried out by Business Unit and currency.

The Group measures somenon-traded market risks, in particular prepayment, recruitment, and residual risk using an Economic Capital methodology

The Group discloses the overall impact of a parallel shift in interest rates on Available for Sale and cash flow hedges.

The Group measures the volatility of the value of the Available for Sale instruments in the liquidity pool throughnon-traded market risk VaR.

  Interest rate risk in the banking book overview and summary of performance

146

  Net interest income sensitivity

147
      –  by business unit147
      –  by currency147

  Economic Capital by business unit

147

  Analysis of equity sensitivity

148

  Volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

148

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  145    123


  Functional currency of operations (audited)                              
    

 

 

 

 

Foreign

currency

net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Borrowings

which hedge

the net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

which hedge

the net

investments

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Structural

currency

exposures

pre-economic

hedges

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Economic

hedges

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Remaining

structural

currency

exposures

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  As at 31 December 2015            
  USD   24,712     8,839     1,158     14,715     7,008     7,707  
  EUR   2,002     630     14     1,358     1,764     (406
  ZAR   3,201     4     99     3,098          3,098  
  JPY   383     168     205     10          10  
  Other   2,927          1,294     1,633          1,633  
  Total   33,225     9,641     2,770    ��20,814     8,772     12,042  
  As at 31 December 2014            
  USD   23,728     5,270     1,012     17,446     6,655     10,791  
  EUR   3,056     328     238     2,490     1,871     619  
  ZAR   3,863          103     3,760          3,760  
  JPY   364     164     208     (8        (8
  Other   2,739          1,198     1,541          1,541  
  Total   33,750     5,762     2,759     25,229     8,526     16,703  

During 2015, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased by £4.7bn to £12.0bn (2014: £16.7bn). The decrease is broadly in line with the overall RWA currency profile, with a reduction in USD RWAs in the year. Foreign currency net investments remained stable at £33.2bn (2014: £33.8bn).

Pension risk review

The UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) represents approximately 92% (2014: 92%) of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations globally. The other material overseas schemes are in South Africa and in the US and they represent approximately 4% (2014: 4%) and 2% (2014: 2%) respectively of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. As such, this risk review section focuses exclusively on the UKRF. Note that the scheme is closed to new entrants.

Pension risk arises as the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline, or the investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase.

See page 390 for more information on how pension risk is managed.

Assets

The Board of Trustees defines an overall long term investment strategy for the UKRF, with investments across a broad range of asset classes. This ensures an appropriate mix of return seeking assets to generate future returns as well as liability matching assets to better match the future pension obligations. The main market risks within the asset portfolio are due to movements in interest rates and equities, as shown by the analysis of scheme assets within Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits.

The fair value of the UKRF plan assets was £26.8bn. See Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits.

146  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

MarketTreasury and Capital risk – Liquidity

    

 

Liabilities

The retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an IAS 19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long term inflation rate and the discount rate (AA corporate bond yield curve):

§an increase in long term inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities

§an increase in the discount rate corresponds to a decrease in liabilities.

PensionLiquidity risk is generated through the Group’s defined benefit schemes and this risk is set to reduce over time as our main defined benefit schemes are closed to new entrants, and in many cases closed to future accruals. The chart below outlines the shape of the UKRF’s liability cash flow profile that takes account of future inflation indexing of payments to beneficiaries, with the majority of the cash flows (approximately 83%) falling between 0 and 40 years, peaking within the 21 to 30 year band and reducing thereafter. The shape may vary depending on changes in inflation expectation and mortality and it is updated in line with the triennial valuation process.

For more detail on liability assumptions see Note 35 to the financial statements.

Proportion of the IAS 19 liability cash flows

LOGO

Risk measurement

In line with Barclays risk management framework, the assets and liabilities of the UKRF are modelled within a VaR framework to show the volatility of the pension positions on a total portfolio level. This ensures that the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the UKRF obligations and investments are adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a monthly basis. It is discussed at pension risk fora such as the Market Risk Committee, Pensions Management Group and Pension Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities following an IAS 19 basis (see Note 35 Pension and post-retirement benefits in the financial statements). The trustees receive quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis.

The pension liability is also sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions (see Note 35).

In addition to this, the impact of pension risk to the Group is taken into account as part of the stress testing process. Stress testing is performed internally at least on an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of the regulatory stress tests and exercises indicated that the UKRF risk profile is resilient to severe stress events.

The defined benefit pension scheme affects capital in two ways. An IAS 19 deficit impacts the CET1 capital ratio, and pension risk is also taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment.

Triennial valuation

Please see Note 35 Pensions and retirement benefits for information on the funding position of the UKRF.

Insurance risk review

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking primarily in the Wealth, Investment Management & Insurance (WIMI) portfolios and is reported across four significant categories. Please see page 138 of the Barclays PLC 2015 Pillar 3 Report for more information on the definitions and governance procedure.

The risk types below mainly determine the regulatory capital requirements. The year-on-year decrease in risk appetite was agreed as part of the medium-term planning process.

  Analysis of insurance riska                    
   2015     2014  
  As at 31 December   
 
Position
£m
  
  
   
 
Appetite
£m
  
  
   
 
Position
£m
  
  
   
 
Appetite
£m
  
  

  Short term insurance underwriting risk

   30     32     40     44  

  Life insurance underwriting risk

   17     20     21     28  

  Life insurance mismatch risk

   12     20     16     40  

  Life and short-term insurance investment risk

   11     18     12     14  

In 2015, the largest year-on-year movement was in short-term insurance underwriting risk where the reduction in the position reflected the closure of the Agriculture book to new insurance business.

For mismatch risk, the 2015 Appetite was materially lower than the 2014 Appetite as the level of mismatch between policyholder assets and policyholder liabilities decreased following the adoption of improved reserving methodologies and sign off by the independent statutory actuary function. As a result, while 2015 Position has reduced in absolute terms, the utilisation against appetite has increased.

From 2016 onwards, the methodology for assessment of Insurance Risk will change from a CAR-based approach to a Solvency Assessment and Management (SAM) based approach (the Solvency II equivalent) which is considered to be a more robust risk management approach with well-developed methodologies.

Note

aThe figures in the table are reported using Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) approach.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  147


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

Analysis of capital risk

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources, which could lead to: (i) a failurefirm is unable to meet regulatory requirements; (ii) a change to credit rating;its contractual or (iii) an inabilitycontingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support business activity and growth.

This section details Barclays’ capital position providing information on both capital resources and capital requirements. It also provides detail of the leverage ratio and exposures.

Key metrics

11.4% fully loaded

Common Equity Tier 1 ratio

RWAs decreased by £44bn to £358bn. Non-Core RWAs decreased £29bn to £47bn as a result of the sale of the Spanish business and the rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bank RWAs decreased by £14bn to £108bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.

4.5% leverage ratio

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn predominantly due to the rundown in Non-Core of £156bn to £121bn.

148  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

§meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the US and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied

§support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds and

§support its growth and strategic options.

More details on monitoring and managing capital risk may be found in the Risk Management sections on pages 103 to 104.its assets.

All disclosures in this section (pages 149124 to 153) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio, among other metrics, is a measure of the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. Maintenance of our capital is vital in order to meet the minimum capital requirements of regulatory authorities and to fund growth within our businesses.

This section provides an overview of the Group’s: i) regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements; ii) capital resources; iii) risk weighted assets (RWAs); and iv) leverage ratio and exposures.

Summary of performance in the period

Barclays continues to be in excess of minimum CRD IV transitional and fully loaded capital ratios and PRA capital and leverage ratios.

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a £43.5bn reduction in RWAs to £358.4bn partially offset by a decrease in fully loaded CRD IV CET1 capital of £0.7bn to £40.7bn.

The RWA reduction was primarily driven by a £29bn decrease in the Non-Core RWAs to £47bn as a result of the sale of the Spanish business and a rundown of legacy structured and credit products. Investment Bank RWAs decreased £14bn to £108bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

CET1 capital decreased £0.7bn to £40.7bn after absorbing adjusting items and dividends paid and foreseen.

The leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%), driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure to £1,028bn (2014: £1,233bn). This was predominantly due to the rundown of the Non-Core business of £156bn to £121bn.

Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

Capital – Fully loaded

Barclays’ current regulatory requirement is to meet a fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio of 9% by 2019, plus a Pillar 2A add-on. The 9% comprises the required 4.5% minimum CET1 ratio and, phased in from 2016, a Combined Buffer Requirement made up of a Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB) of 2.5% and a Globally Systemically Important Institution (G-SII) buffer of 2%.

Barclays’ Pillar 2A requirement as per the PRA’s Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) is subject to review at least annually. Under current PRA guidance, the Pillar 2A add-on for 2016, will be 3.9% of which 56% will need to be met in CET1 form, equating to approximately 2.2% of RWAs. Basel Committee consultations and reviews might further impact the Pillar 2A requirement in the future.

In addition, a Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCCB) and/or additional Sectoral Capital Requirements (SCR) may be required by the BoE to protect against perceived threats to financial stability. These buffers could be applied at the Group level or at a legal entity, sub-consolidated or portfolio level. No SCR has been set to date by the BoE, while the CCCB is currently 0% for UK exposures. Other national authorities determine the appropriate CCCBs that should be applied to exposures in their jurisdiction. During 2016, CCCBs will start to apply for our exposures in Hong Kong, Norway and Sweden. Based on current exposures we do not expect this to be material.

Capital – Transitional

On a transitional basis, the PRA has implemented a minimum requirement CET1 ratio of 4%, Tier 1 ratio of 5.5% and Total Capital ratio of 8%.

From 1 January 2015, the transitional capital ratios are equal to the fully loaded ratios following the PRA’s acceleration of transitional provisions relating to CET1 deductions and filters. The adjustment relating to unrealised gains on available for sale debt and equity that was applied throughout 2014 as an exception no longer applies.

Grandfathering limits on capital instruments, previously qualifying as Tier 1 and Tier 2, are unchanged under the PRA transitional rules.

Leverage

In addition to the Group’s capital requirements, minimum ratios have also been set in respect of leverage. The leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordance with the requirements of the EU Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) which was amended effective from January 2015. The leverage calculation uses the end-point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure. During 2015 Barclays was measured against the PRA leverage ratio requirement of 3%.

In December 2015, the PRA finalised the UK leverage ratio framework in which it adopted the FPC’s recommendations on leverage ratio requirements. These recommendations have been finalised in the Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and have been incorporated as part of the updated PRA rulebook, effective January 2016. This would result in a fully phased in leverage ratio requirement of 3.7% for Barclays. The minimum requirement would increase in the event that Barclays was subject to: (i) an increased CCCB; and/or (ii) Barclays was reclassified into a higher G-SII category. Furthermore from January 2016, firms are required to report quarterly leverage ratio information, including an average ratio.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  149


Capital resources

The CRR and Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) implemented Basel III within the EU (collectively known as CRD IV) on 1 January 2014. The rules are supplemented by Regulatory Technical Standards and the PRA’s rulebook, including the implementation of transitional rules. However, rules and guidance are still subject to change as certain aspects of CRD IV are dependent on final technical standards and clarifications to be issued by the EBA and adopted by the European Commission and the PRA. All capital, RWA and leverage calculations reflect Barclays’ interpretation of the current rules.

Key capital ratios

          

As at 31 December

   2015       2014 

Fully Loaded CET1

   11.4%       10.3% 

PRA Transitional CET1a

   11.4%       10.2% 

PRA Transitional Tier 1b,c

   14.7%       13.0% 

PRA Transitional Total Capitalb,c

   18.6%       16.5% 
      

Capital resources (audited)

          

As at 31 December

   

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

    

2014 

£m 

Shareholders’ equity (excluding non-controlling interests) per the balance sheet

   59,810       59,567 

Less: other equity instruments (recognised as AT1 capital)

   (5,305)      (4,322)

Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends

   (631)      (615)

Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)

   950       1,227 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

      

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

   (1,602)      (2,199)

Goodwill and intangible assets

   (8,234)      (8,127)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding temporary differences

   (855)      (1,080)

Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges

   (1,231)      (1,814)

Excess of expected losses over impairment

   (1,365)      (1,772)

Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from own credit

   127       658 

Defined benefit pension fund assets

   (689)      – 

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

   (57)      (25)

Other regulatory adjustments

   (177)      (45)

Fully loaded CET1 capital

   40,741       41,453 

Regulatory adjustments relating to unrealised gains

   –       (583)

PRA transitional CET1 capital

   40,741       40,870 

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

      

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

   5,305       4,322 

Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

   6,718       6,870 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

   (130)      – 

Transitional AT1 capitald

   11,893       11,192 

PRA transitional Tier 1 capital

   52,634       52,062 

Tier 2 capital

      

Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts

   1,757       800 

Qualifying Tier 2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries

   12,389       13,529 

Other regulatory adjustments and deductions

   (253)      (48)

PRA transitional total regulatory capital

   66,527       66,343 

Notes

aThe CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) as applicable to Barclays’ Tier 2 Contingent Capital Notes was 13.1% based on £46.8bn of transitional CRD IV CET1 capital and £358bn RWAs. The transitional CET1 ratio according to the FSA October 2012 transitional statement would be 13.1%. This is calculated as CET1 capital as adjusted for the transitional relief (£46.8bn), divided by CRD IV RWAs. The following transitional relief items are added back to CET1 capital: Goodwill and Intangibles (£4.9bn), Deferred tax asset (£0.5bn), Debt valuation adjustment (£0.1bn), Expected losses over impairment (£0.8bn) and Excess minority interest (£0.2bn), partially offset by the defined benefit pension adjustment of £0.5bn.
bThe PRA transitional capital is based on the PRA Rulebook and accompanying supervisory statements.
cAs at 31 December 2015, Barclays’ fully loaded Tier 1 capital was £46,173m, and the fully loaded Tier 1 ratio was 12.9%. Fully loaded total regulatory capital was £62,103m and the fully loaded total capital ratio was 17.3%. The fully loaded Tier 1 capital and total capital measures are calculated without applying the transitional provisions set out in CRD IV and assessing compliance of AT1 and Tier 2 instruments against the relevant criteria in CRD IV.
dOf the £11.9bn transitional AT1 capital, fully loaded AT1 capital used for the leverage ratio comprises the £5.3bn capital instruments and related share premium accounts, £0.3bn qualifying minority interests and £0.1bn capital deductions. It excludes legacy Tier 1 capital instruments issued by subsidiaries that are subject to grandfathering.

150  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

Movement in CET1 capital

2015 

£m 

Opening balance as at 1 January

41,453 

Loss for the period attributable to equity holders

(49)

Own credit

(531)

Dividends paid and foreseen

(1,372)

Decrease in regulatory capital generated from earnings

(1,952)

Net impact of share awards

609 

Available for sale reserves

(245)

Currency translation reserves

(41)

Other reserves

Increase in other qualifying reserves

332 

Retirement benefit reserve

916 

Defined benefit pension fund asset deduction

(689)

Net impact of pensions

227 

Minority interests

(277)

Additional value adjustments (PVA)

597 

Goodwill and intangible assets

(107)

Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences

225 

Excess of expected loss over impairment

407 

Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments

(32)

Other regulatory adjustments

(132)

Decrease in regulatory adjustments and deductions

681 

Closing balance as at 31 December

40,741 

§During 2015, the fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%) driven by a significant reduction in RWAs.

§CET1 capital decreased by £0.7bn to £40.7bn, after absorbing adjusting items, with the following significant movements:

a £1.4bn reduction for dividends paid and foreseen

a £0.2bn net increase as the retirement benefit reserve increased £0.9bn, offset by £0.7bn pension asset deduction

a £0.7bn increase due to lower regulatory deductions and adjustments including a £0.6bn decrease in PVA, a £0.4bn decrease in expected losses due to the sale of the Spanish business and disposals across the Investment Bank, partially offset by a £0.3bn decrease in eligible minority interests.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  151


 Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business  
   Credit risk               Counterparty credit riska       Market riskb                  
 
Operational
risk
  
  
   Total RWAs  
    

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

IRB

£m

  

  

   

 

Std

£m

  

  

   

 

IRB

£m

  

  

  

 

Std

£m

  

  

  

 

IMA

£m

  

  

  £m     £m  
 As at 31 December 2015             
 Personal & Corporate Banking   31,506     71,352     242     1,122    30        16,176     120,428  
 Barclaycard   17,988     17,852                      5,505     41,345  
 Africa Banking   8,556     17,698     22     487    885    682    5,604     33,934  
 Investment Bank   4,808     39,414     11,020     10,132    9,626    13,713    19,620     108,333  
 Head Office and Other Operations   1,513     2,763     32     59    48    1,230    2,104     7,749  
 Total Core   64,371     149,079     11,316     11,800    10,589    15,625    49,009     311,789  
 Barclays Non-Core   5,078     11,912     1,397     9,231    679    10,639    7,651     46,587  
 Total risk weighted assets   69,449     160,991     12,713     21,031    11,268    26,264    56,660     358,376  
             
 As at 31 December 2014             
 Personal & Corporate Banking   32,657     70,080     238     1,049    26        16,176     120,226  
 Barclaycard   15,910     18,492                      5,505     39,907  
 Africa Banking   9,015     21,794     10     562    948    588    5,604     38,521  
 Investment Bank   5,773     36,829     13,739     11,781    18,179    16,480    19,621     122,402  
 Head Office and Other Operations   506     2,912     234     62    7    521    1,326     5,568  
 Total Core   63,861     150,107     14,221     13,454    19,160    17,589    48,232     326,624  
 Barclays Non-Core   10,679     19,416     3,023     18,406    2,236    13,088    8,428     75,276  
 Total risk weighted assets   74,540     169,523     17,244     31,860    21,396    30,677    56,660     401,900  
             
 Movement analysis of risk weighted assets  
 Risk weighted assets                  
 
Credit risk
£bn
  
  
  
 

 

Counterparty
credit risk

£bn

  
a 

  

  

 

Market risk

£bn

b 

  

  
 

 

Operational
risk

£bn

  
  

  

   
 
Total RWAs
£bn
  
  
 As at 1 January 2015         244.0    49.1    52.1    56.7     401.9  
 Book size         8.3    (10.6  (9.5       (11.8
 Acquisitions and disposals         (14.2      (0.4       (14.6
 Book quality         0.1    (1.7  0.7         (0.9
 Model updates         (2.1  (1.1  (2.7       (5.9
 Methodology and policy         2.3    (1.9  (2.6       (2.2
 Foreign exchange movementc         (8.0  (0.1           (8.1
 Other                                     
 As at 31 December 2015                  230.4    33.7    37.6    56.7     358.4  

RWAs decreased £43.5bn to £358.4bn, driven by:

§Book size: RWAs decreased £11.8bn primarily due to a reduction in holdings of US bonds and equities and a reduction in derivatives and securities financing transactions. This was partially offset by a growth in corporate lending, particularly in Africa and the UK

§Acquisitions and disposals: RWAs decreased £14.6bn primarily due to disposals in Non-Core, including the sale of the Spanish business

§Model updates: RWAs decreased £5.9bn primarily due to implementation of diversification benefits across advanced general and specific market risk, as well as a recalibration of a credit risk model within the Investment Bank and Non-Core

§Methodology and policy: RWAs decreased £2.2bn primarily due to the implementation of collateral modelling for mismatched FX collateral, and a transfer of securities financing transactions in certain businesses from the banking book to trading book, enabling further collateral offset

§Foreign exchange movements decreased RWAs by £8.1bn primarily due to depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

Notes

aRWAs in relation to default fund contributions are included in counterparty credit risk.
bRWAs in relation to credit valuation adjustment (CVA) are included in market risk.
cForeign exchange movement does not include FX for modelled counterparty risk or modelled market risk.

152  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – Capital

Leverage ratio and exposures

The leverage ratio applicable to the Group has been calculated in accordance with the requirements of the CRR which was amended effective from January 2015. The leverage calculation below uses the end point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure.

At 31 December 2015, Barclays’ leverage ratio was 4.5%, which exceeds the expected end point minimum requirement of 3.7% as outlined by the PRA Supervisory Statement SS45/15 and the updated PRA rulebook, comprising of the 3% minimum requirement, and the fully phased in G-SII buffer.

 Leverage exposure          
    

 

 

As at

31.12.15

£bn

  

  

  

   

 

 

As at

31.12.14

£bn

  

a 

  

 Accounting assets    
 Derivative financial instruments   328     440  
 Cash collateral   62     73  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   28     132  
 Financial assets designated at fair valueb   77     38  
 Loans and advances and other assets   625     675  
 Total IFRS assets   1,120     1,358  
    
 Regulatory consolidation adjustments   (10   (8
 Derivatives adjustments    
 Derivatives netting   (293   (395
 Adjustments to cash collateral   (46   (53
 Net written credit protection   15     27  
 Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives   129     179  
 Total derivatives adjustments   (195   (242
    
 Securities financing transactions (SFTs) adjustments   16     25  
    
 Regulatory deductions and other adjustments   (14   (15
 Weighted off-balance sheet commitments   111     115  
 Total fully loaded leverage exposure   1,028     1,233  
    
 Fully loaded CET1 capital   40.7     41.5  
 Fully loaded AT1 capital   5.4     4.6  
 Fully loaded Tier 1 capital   46.2     46.0  
    
 Fully loaded leverage ratio   4.5%     3.7%  

§During 2015 the leverage ratio increased significantly to 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a reduction in the leverage exposure of £205bn to £1,028bn.

§Total derivative exposurescdecreased £76bn to £195bn:

PFE decreased £50bn to £129bn, mainly as a result of continued Non-Core rundown and optimisations including trade compressions and tear-ups

other derivative assets decreased £14bn to £51bn, driven by a net decrease in IFRS derivatives. The decrease was mainly within interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives due to net trade reduction and an increase in major interest forward curves

net written credit protection decreased £12bn to £15bn due to a reduction in business activity and improved portfolio netting.

§Taken together, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and financial assets designated at fair value decreased £65bn to £105bn, reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging.

§Loans and advances and other assets decreased £50bn to £625bn driven by £37bn reduction in trading portfolio assets primarily due to Non-Core rundown, a reduction in trading activities in the Investment Bank, as well as a £10bn decrease in settlement balances and a £5bn decrease in Africa reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by lending growth of £3bn in Barclaycard.

§SFT adjustments decreased by £9bn to £16bn due to maturity of trades and a reduction in trading volumes.

Notes

a2014 comparatives have been prepared on a BCBS 270 basis. Barclays does not believe that there is a material difference between the BCBS 270 leverage exposure and a leverage exposure calculated in accordance with the EU delegated act.
bIncluded within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £50bn (2014: £5bn).
cTotal derivative exposures includes IFRS derivative financial instruments, cash collateral and total derivative adjustments.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  153


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

Analysis of liquidity risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that a firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost.

This section details the Group’s liquidity risk profile and provides information on the way the Group manages that risk.

Key metrics

133% LCR

The Group strengthened its liquidity position during the year, increasing its surplus to internal and regulatory requirements.

£9bn Term Issuance

The Group maintains access to stable and diverse sources of funding across customer deposits and wholesale debt.

154  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

Liquidity risk is the risk that the Group, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

All disclosures in this section (pages 155 to 171)136) are unaudited and exclude BAGL unless otherwise stated.

Key metrics

LCR154%
The Group strengthened its liquidity position during the year, increasing its surplus to internal and regulatory requirements.
Term Issuance£12bn

The Group maintains access to stable and diverse sources of funding across customer deposits and wholesale debt.

Overview

The Group has a comprehensive Key Risk Control Framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk. The Liquidity Framework meets the PRA’s standards and is designed to ensuremaintain that the Group maintainsGroup’s liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality, and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite. The Liquidity Framework is delivered via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring.

Liquidity risk is managed separately at Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) due to local currency and funding requirements. Unless stated otherwise, all disclosures in this section exclude BAGL and they are reported on a stand-alone basis. Adjusting for local requirements, BAGL liquidity risk is managed on a consistent basis to the Group.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s: i) summary of performance, ii) liquidity risk stress testing; ii) internal and regulatory stress tests;testing, iii) liquidity pool;pool, iv) funding structure and funding relationships;relationships, v) wholesale funding;encumbrance, vi) term financing;credit ratings, and vii) encumbrance; viii) repurchase agreements; ix) credit ratings; x) liquidity management at BAGL and xi) contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities.

For further detail on liquidity risk governance and framework see page 105.pages 343 to 345.

Summary of performance in the period

The Group maintained a surpluscontinued to maintain surpluses to its internal and regulatory requirements in 2015.requirements. The liquidity pool was £145bn (2014: £149bn)increased to £220bn (December 2016: £165bn) reflecting the approach of holding a conservative liquidity position and through net deposit growth, the unwind of legacyNon-Core portfolios, money market borrowing and drawdown from the Bank of England Term Funding Scheme. The Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) was 133% (2014: 124%increased to 154% (December 2016: 131%), equivalent to a surplus of £37bn (2014: £30bn). While the liquidity pool may reduce in future, the Group intends£75bn (December 2016: £39bn) to continue to maintain a prudent surplus to regulatory requirements.100%.

Wholesale funding outstanding excluding repurchase agreements reduced to £142bn (2014: £171bn)was £157bn (December 2016: £158bn). The Group issued £9bn£11.5bn equivalent of term funding net of early redemptions during 2015,capital and senior unsecured debt from Barclays PLC (the Parent company) of which £4bn£6.1bn was in public and private senior unsecured debt, issued byand £5.4bn in capital instruments. In the holding company, Barclays PLC. During Q415, Barclays PLC also issued EUR Tier 2 securitiessame period £6.1bn of £1bn equivalent. All the capital and debt proceeds raised by Barclays PLC have been used to subscribe for instruments at Barclays Bank PLC capital and senior public term instruments either matured or were redeemed, including the operating company with a ranking corresponding to the securities issued by Barclays PLC.$1.375bn 7.1% Series 3 USD preference shares.

Liquidity risk stress testing

Under the Liquidity Framework, the Group has established a Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) together with the appropriate limits for the management of the liquidity risk. This is the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The key expression of the liquidity risk is through internal stress tests. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingentstressed outflows for each of three stressspecific scenarios.

124    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Liquidity Risk Appetite

As part of the LRA, the Group runs three primaryshort term liquidity stress scenarios, aligned to the PRA’s prescribed stresses:

 

§ a 90-day market-wide stress event

 

§ a 30-day Barclays-specific stress event

 

§ a combined30-day market-wide and Barclays-specific stress event.

Under normal market conditions, the liquidity pool is managed to be at a target of at least 100% of anticipated outflows under each of these stress scenarios. The30-day Barclays-specific combined stress scenario, results in the greatest net outflows of each of the liquidity stress tests .Thetests. The combined 30-dayLRA scenario assumes outflows consistenthas been enhanced and improved to capture a Barclays specific stress coinciding with a firm specificmarket stress forover the first two weeksfull stress horizon. As part of the LRA, Barclays also establishes the minimum LCR limit. Barclays also evaluates its long-term LRA, one year stress period, followed by relatively lower outflows consistent with a market-wide stress fortest based on prolonged closure of capital markets.

Key LRA assumptions include:

For the remainder of the stress period.

year ended 31 December 2017

 

Drivers of

Liquidity Risk

  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  155


Key LRA Combined stress - key assumptions include:

For the year ended 31 December 2015

 Liquidity risk driverBarclays-specific stress

Wholesale securedSecured

 and unsecured

 funding

  

§   Zero rollover of maturing wholesale unsecured liabilities maturing, senior unsecured debt funding

and conduit commercial paper.Unsecured

   Loss of repo capacity onnon-extremely liquid repos at contractual maturity date

Funding Risk

   Roll of repo for extremely liquid repo at wider haircut at contractual maturity date

   Withdrawal of contractual buyback obligations, excess client futures margin, Prime Brokerage client cash and overlifts

 

§   No benefit assumed from reverse repos covering firm short positions.

§   Rollover of trades secured on extremely liquid collateral.

§   Varying rollover of trades secured on liquid collateral, subject to haircut widening.

§   Zero rollover of trades secured on less-liquid collateral.

§   100% of contractual buybacks will occur.

§   Haircuts applied to the market value of marketable assets held in the liquidity buffer.buffer

 

Retail and Corporate

   Retail and Corporate deposit outflows as counterparties seek to diversify their deposit balances

 Deposit outflowFunding Risk

Intra-day Liquidity
Risk

 

  

§   Substantial deposit outflows in PCBLiquidity held against intraday requirements for the settlement of cash and Barclaycard as the Group is seen as greater credit risk than competitors.securities under a stress

 FundingIntra-Group
Liquidity Risk

 concentration

 

  

§   Additional outflows recognised against concentration of providers of wholesale financing (largest unsecured counterparty unwilling to roll).

 Intra-day liquidity

§   Anticipated liquidity required toLiquidity support additional intra-day requirements at cash payment and securities settlement venues based on historical peak usage and triparty settlement based on forward maturities of trades.

 Intra-group

§   Anticipated liquidity required to supportfor material subsidiaries, based on stand-alone stress tests.subsidiaries. Surplus liquidity held within certain subsidiaries is not taken as a benefit to the   wider Group.Group

 

 Off-balance sheetCross-Currency
Liquidity Risk

§   Drawdown on committed facilities based on facility type, counterparty type and counterparty creditworthiness.

§   Outflow of all collateral owed to counterparties but not yet called.

§   Collateral outflows based on Monte Carlo simulation and historical stress outflows.

§   Increase in the Group’s initial margin requirement across all major exchanges.

§   Outflows as a result of a multi-notch downgrade in credit rating.

 Franchise viability

 

  

§   Liquidity required in order to meet outflows that are non-contractual in nature but necessary in order to support the Group’s ongoing franchise (for example, market-making activities and non contractual debt buyback).

 Cross currency risk

§   Net settlementCurrency liquidity cash flows at contractual maturity for physically settled FX forwards and cross currency swaps are reflected.

Off-balance Sheet

   Drawdown on committed facilities based on facility and counterparty type

Liquidity Risk

   Collateral outflows due to a 2 notch credit rating downgrade

   Increase in the Group’s initial margin requirement across all major exchanges

   Variation margin outflows from collateralised risk positions

   Outflow of collateral owing but not called

 

§   No benefit assumed from surplus net inflows in non-G10 currencies.

 Mitigating actions

  

§   Monetisation of unencumbered assets that are of known liquidity value to the firm but held outside the liquidity pool (subject to haircut/valuation adjustment).

 Internalisation Risk

§   Loss of internal sources of funding within the Prime Brokerage Synthetic Business.synthetics business

Franchise-Viability
Risk

  

   Liquidity held in order to meet outflows that arenon-contractual in nature, but are necessary in order to support the firm’s   ongoing franchise (e.g. debt buybacks)

Funding
Concentration Risk

§   Acceleration of term profile associated with Prime Brokerage Clients deleveraging their portfolios asymmetrically by closing short positions.Liquidity held against largest wholesale funding counterparty refusing to roll

 

Liquidity regulation

Since October 2015, the Group manages its liquidity profile against the new CRD IV liquidity regime implemented by PRA. The CRD IV regime defines the liquidity risk ratio, liquidity pool asset eligibility and net stress outflow applied against Barclays reported balances.

The Group monitors its position against the CRD IV Interim LCRDelegated Act Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) and the Basel III Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR).

The LCR is designed to promote short-term resilience of a bank’s liquidity risk profile by ensuring that it hasholding sufficient high quality liquid resourcesHigh Quality Liquid Assets to survive an acute stress scenario lasting for 30 days. The NSFR has a time horizon of at least six12 months and has been developed to promote a sustainable maturity structure of assets and liabilities.

The PRA regime requires phased compliance with theCRD IV LCR standard frombecame effective on 1 October 2015, atwith a minimum ratio requirement in the UK of 80% increasingas at 31 December 2016; this increased to 90% on 1 January 2017 and then to 100% byon 1 January 2018. The methodology forAs of 31 December 2017, the Group reported a CRD IV LCR is based off the final published Delegated Act which became EU law in October 2015.of 154% (2016: 131%).

In October 2014, the BCBS published a final standard for the NSFR with the minimum requirementrequirement. On 23 November 2016 the European Commission published draft amendments to the CRR including its proposed implementation of NSFR in the EU. This proposal made a number of changes from the Basel NSFR, particularly in the treatment of derivative and secured financing transactions. In October 2017, the BCBS agreed to allow national discretion for the NSFR’s treatment of derivative liabilities. Barclays continues to assess the impact of these changes on its NSFR ratio, and notes that NSFR is not proposed to be introduceda binding regulation in January 2018 atthe EU until two years after the European legislation is finalised. We remain above 100% on an ongoing basis. The methodology for calculating the NSFR iswell ahead of implementation timelines, based on ana conservative interpretation of the Basel standards published in October 2014 and includes a number of assumptions which are subject to change prior to adoption by the European Commission through the CRD IV.

Based on the CRD IV and Basel III standards respectively, as at 31 December 2015, the Group had a surplus to both of these metrics with a CRD IV Interim LCR of 133% (2014: 124%) and a Basel III NSFR of 106% (2014: 102%).

156  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performancerules.

Funding risk – liquidity

Comparing internalInternal and regulatory liquidity stress tests

The LRA short term stress scenarios and the CRD IV Interim LCR are all broadly comparable, short-term stress scenarios in which the sense that adequacy of defined liquidity resources is assessed against contractual and contingentnet stressed outflows over a short term stress outflows.horizon. The CRD IV Interim LCR stress tests provide an independent assessment of the Group’s liquidity risk profile.

 

Stress Test  Barclays short term LRA  CRD IV Interim LCRBasel III NSFR
Time Horizon  30 - 90 days  30 days6+ months
Calculation  Liquid assets to net cash outflows  Liquid assets to net cash outflows

Stable funding resources to stable

funding requirements

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the Group held eligible liquid assets well in excess of 100% of net stress requirementsoutflows for all threeboth the 30 day combined market and Barclays specific LRA scenariosscenario and the CRD IV Interim LCR requirement.LCR.

 

 Compliance with internal and regulatory stress tests  
 As at 31 December 2015   

 

 

 
 

 

Barclays’ LRA

(one month

Barclays

specific
requirement

£bn

  

  

  

  
)a 

  

     
 
 

 

CRD IV
Interim
LCR

£bn

  
  
b 

  

 Total eligible liquidity pool   145       147  
 Asset inflows   1       18  
 Stress outflows      
 Retail and commercial deposit outflows   (50     (72
 Wholesale funding   (15     (12
 Net secured funding   (12     (1
 Derivatives   (8     (6
 Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure   (6     (5
 Drawdowns of loan commitments   (7     (32
 Intraday   (13       
 Total stress net cash flows   (110     (110
 Surplus   35       37  
 Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net cash flows   131%       133%  
 As at 31 December 2014   124%       124%  
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    125

In 2015, the Group strengthened its liquidity position, building a larger surplus to its internal


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and regulatory requirements. Capital risk – Liquidity

Compliance with internal and regulatory stress tests          
As at 31 December 2017   

Barclays’

Short Term

LRA (30 day

combined

requirement)

£bn

 

 

 

 

a,b 

 

   

CRD IV LCR

£bn

b 

 

Eligible liquidity buffer   220    215 
Net stress outflows   (175   (140
Surplus   45    75 
Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net outflows as at 31 December 2017   126%    154% 
Liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net outflows as at 31 December 2016   120%    131% 

Notes

aOf the three stress scenarios monitored as part of the short term LRA, the 30 day combined stress scenario results in the lowest ratio at 126% (2016: 144%). This compares to 139% (2016: 134%) under the 90 day market-wide scenario and 131% (2016: 120%) under the 30 day Barclays specific scenario.
b31 December 2016 reflects the Barclays specific scenario results of 120% being the lowest ratio of the three scenarios. LCR and LRA includes BAGL in 2016.

The Group plans to maintain its surplus to the internal and regulatory stress requirements at an efficient level, while considering risks to market funding conditions and its liquidity position. The continuous reassessment of these risks may lead to appropriate actions being taken with respect to sizing of the liquidity pool.

Note

aOf the three stress scenarios monitored as part of the LRA, the 30-day Barclays-specific scenario results in the lowest ratio at 131% (2014: 124%). This compares to 144% (2014: 135%) under the 90-day market-wide scenario, and 133% (2014: 127%) under the 30-day combined scenario.
bIncludes BAGL.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  157


Liquidity pool

Liquidity pool

The Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 20152017 was £145bn (2014: £149bn)£220bn (2016: £165bn). During 2015,2017, themonth-end liquidity pool ranged from £142bn£165bn to £168bn (2014: £134bn£232bn (2016: £132bn to £156bn)£175bn), and themonth-end average balance was £155bn (2014: £145bn)£202bn (2016: £153bn). The liquidity pool is held unencumbered and is not used to support payment or clearing requirements. Such requirements are treated as part of our regular business funding. The liquidity pool is intended to offset stress outflows, and comprises the following cash and unencumbered assets.

 

 Composition of the Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015  
      Liquidity pool of which CRD IV LCR eligible      
     

 

 

     
      
 

 

      Liquidity
pool

£bn

  
  

  

  

 

    Cash

£bn

  

  

  

 

   Level 1

£bn

  

  

  

 

Level 2A

£bn

  

  

     
 
 
2014
      Liquidity
pool
  
  
  
 Cash and deposits with central banksa     48    45    1           37  
 Government bondsb           
 AAA rated     63        63           73  
 AA+ to AA- rated     11        7    4       12  
 Other government bonds     1        1             
 Total government bonds     75        71    4       85  
 Other           
 Supranational bonds and multilateral development banks     7        7           9  
 Agencies and agency mortgage-backed securities     8        6    2       11  
 Covered bonds (rated AA- and above)     4        2    2       3  
 Other     3                   4  
 Total Other     22        15    4       27  
 Total as at 31 December 2015     145    45    87    8      
 Total as at 31 December 2014     149    37    99    7         

 

 The Group liquidity pool is well diversified by major currency and the Group monitors LRA stress scenarios for major currencies.

 

  

 Liquidity pool by currency  
     

 

 

 

 

USD

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

EUR

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

GBP

£bn

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Other

£bn

 

  

  

    

 

 

 

 

Total

£bn

 

  

  

 Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015     41    33    46    25       145  
 Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2014     46    27    54    22       149  
Composition of the Group liquidity pool as at 31 December 2017                         
         Liquidity pool of which CRD IV LCR  eligible   2016 
    

Liquidity
pool

£bn

   

Cash

£bn

   

Level 1

£bn

   

Level 2A

£bn

   

Liquidity
pool

£bn

 
Cash and deposits with central banksa   173    169            103 
Government bondsb          
AAA to AA-   31        29       
BBB+ to BBB-   2        2       
Other LCR Ineligible Government bonds   1                  
Total government bonds   34        31        39 
          
Other          
Government Guaranteed Issuers, PSEs and GSEs   6        5    2   
International Organisations and MDBs   4        4       
Covered bonds   2        2       
Other   1        1          
Total Other   13        12    2    23 
Total as at 31 December 2017   220    169    43    2   
Total as at 31 December 2016   165    101    55    3      

Notes

aOf which over 99% (2016: over 98%) was placed with the Bank of England, US Federal Reserve, European Central Bank, Bank of Japan and Swiss National Bank.
bOf which over 84% (2016: over 90%) are comprised of UK, US, Japanese, French, German, Danish, Swiss and Dutch securities.

The Group liquidity pool is well diversified by major currency and the Group monitors LRA stress scenarios for major currencies.

                                                                                          
Liquidity pool by currency                         
   USD   EUR   GBP   Other   Total 
    £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn 
Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2017   70    55    71    24    220 
Liquidity pool as at 31 December 2016   44    36    49    36    165 

Management of the Group liquidity pool

The composition of the Group liquidity pool is efficiently managed. The maintenance of the liquidity pool increases the Group’s costs as the interest expense paid on the liabilities used to fund the liquidity pool is greater than the interest income received on liquidity pool assets. This cost can be reduced by investing a greater portion of the Group liquidity pool in highly liquid assets other than cash and deposits with central banks while maintaining a minimum level of cash in the liquidity pool to meet cash outflows on the first day of a Barclays-specific stress and enough cash and same day settlement securities to meet all outflows in the first three days of the stress. These assets in the liquidity pool primarily comprise highly rated government bonds, and their inclusion in the liquidity pool does not compromise the liquidity position of the Group.

The composition of the liquidity pool is subject to limits set by the Board Treasury Committee and the independent Creditliquidity risk, credit risk and Marketmarket risk functions. In addition, the investment of the liquidity pool is monitored for concentration risk by issuer, currency and asset type. Given the incremental returns generated by these highly liquid assets, the risk and reward profile is continuously managed.

The Group manages the liquidity pool on a centralised basis. As at 31 December 2015, 94%2017, 93% (2016: 91%) of the liquidity pool was located in Barclays Bank PLC (2014: 92%) and was available to meet liquidity needs across the Group. The residual liquidity pool is held predominantly within Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI)., a subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The portion of the liquidity pool outside of Barclays Bank PLC is held against entity-specific stressed outflows and regulatory requirements. To the extent the use of this portion of the liquidity pool is restricted due to regulatory requirements, it is assumed to be unavailable to the rest of the Group.

 

Notes

aOf which over 97% (2014: over 95%) was placed with the BoE, US Federal Reserve, European Central Bank, Bank of Japan and Swiss National Bank.
bOf which over 92% (2014: over 95%) are UK, US, Japanese, French, German, Danish, Swiss and Dutch securities.

158  |  126    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

    

 

Contingent liquidity

In addition to the Group liquidity pool, the Group has access to other unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these are not relied on in the Group’s LRA, a portion of these assets may be monetised in a stress to generate liquidity through use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale.

In either a Barclays-specific, market-wide or market-widecombined liquidity stress, liquidity available via market sources could be severely disrupted. In circumstances where market liquidity is unavailable or available only at heavily discounted prices, the Group could generate liquidity via central bank facilities. The Group maintains a significant amount of collateralpre-positioned at central banks and available to raise funding.

For more detail on the Group’s other unencumbered assets see page 163.129.

Funding structure and funding relationships

The basis for sound liquidity risk management is a solid funding structure that reduces the probability of a liquidity stress leading to an inability to meet funding obligations as they fall due. The Group’s overall funding strategy is to develop a diversified funding base (geographically, by type and by counterparty) and maintain access to a variety of alternative funding sources, to provide protection against unexpected fluctuations, while minimising the cost of funding.

Within this, the Group aims to align the sources and uses of funding. As such, retail and commercial customercorporate loans and advances are largely funded by customer deposits, with the surplus primarily funding the liquidity pool. Other assets, together with other loans and advances to customers and unencumbered assets are funded by long-term wholesale debt and equity.

The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements. The liquidity pool is predominantly funded through wholesale markets. Derivative liabilities and assets are largely matched. A substantial proportion of balance sheet derivative positions qualify for counterparty netting and the remaining portions are largely offset once netted against cash collateral received and paid.

These funding relationships are summarised below:

 

 Assets   
 
       2015
£bn
  
  
   
 
       2014
£bn
  
  
   Liabilities   
 
       2015
£bn
  
  
   
 
       2014
£bn
  
  
 Loans and advances to customersa   336     346    Customer accountsa   374     366  
 Group liquidity pool   145     149    < 1 Year wholesale funding   54     75  
      > 1 Year wholesale funding   88     96  
 Other assetsb   135     153    Equity and other liabilitiesb   104     112  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingc

   178     271    Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowingc   178     271  
 Derivative financial instruments   326     439    Derivative financial instruments   322     438  
 Total assets   1,120     1,358    Total liabilities and equity   1,120     1,358  

Deposit funding (Includes BAGL) (audited)

  

   2015     2014  

Funding of loans and advances to customers

   
 
 
Loans and
advances to
customers
  
  
  
   
 
Customer
deposits
  
  
   
 
 
Loan to
deposit
ratio
  
  
  
   
 
 
Loan to
deposit
ratio
  
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

   £bn     £bn     %     %  

Personal and Corporate Banking

   218     305      

Barclaycard

   40     10      

Africa Banking

   30     31      

Non-Core (retail)

   12     2            

Total retail and corporate funding

   300     348     86     89  

Investment Bank, Non-Core (wholesale) and Other

   99     70            

Total

   399     418     95     100  

Assets

  

2017

£bn

   

2016

£bn

       

Liabilities

  

2017

£bn

   

2016

£bn

 
Loans and advances to customersa   313    326     Customer accountsa   387    374 
Group liquidity pool   220    165     < 1 Year wholesale funding   57    70 
        > 1 Year wholesale funding   100    88 
Other assetsb   89    185     Equity and other liabilities   78    151 
Reverse repurchase agreements, trading portfolio assets, cash collateral and settlement balancesc   273    190     Repurchase agreements, trading portfolio liabilities, cash collateral and settlement balances   273    190 
Derivative financial instruments   238    347     Derivative financial instruments   238    340 
Total assets   1,133    1,213     Total liabilities   1,133    1,213 

 

 

Deposit funding (audited)                    
        2017        2016 

Funding of loans and advances to customers

As at 31 December 2017

  Loans and
advances to
customers
£bn
   Customer
deposits
£bn
   

Loan to
deposit ratio

%

   

Loan to
deposit ratio

%

 
Barclays UK   184    193     
Barclays International   101    162           
Total retail and corporate fundingd   285    355    80%    89% 
Barclays International and Head Office   81    74           
Total Barclays Group   366    429    85%    93% 

Notes

aExcludingExcludes cash collateral and settlement balances.
bBAGL Group balances other than customerOther assets include trading portfolio assets that are not part of repurchase agreements, loans and advances of £29bnto banks and customer deposits of £29bn are included in other assets and liabilities.asset categories.
cComprised ofIncludes reverse repurchase that provide financing to customers collateralised by highly liquid securities on a short-term basis or are used to settle short-term inventory positionsagreements and repo financing ofother similar secured lending and trading portfolio assets.assets that are part of repurchase agreements.

d
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  159Excludes investment banking balances other than interest earning lending. Comparatives have been restated to include interest earning lending balances within the investment banking business.


PCB, Barclaycard, Non-Core (Retail) and Africa Banking activities are largely funded with customer deposits. As at 31 December 2015, the loan to deposit ratio for these businesses was 86% (2014: 89%). The Group loan to deposit ratio as at 31 December 2015 was 95% (2014: 100%).

The excess of the Investment Bank’s loans and advances over customer deposits is funded with long-term debt and equity. The Investment Bank does not rely on customer retail deposit funding from PCB.

As at 31 December 2015, £129bn (2014: £128bn)2017, £153bn (2016: £139bn) of total customer deposits were insured through the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) and other similar schemes. In addition to these customer deposits there were £4bn (2014:(2016: £4bn) of other liabilities are insured by governments.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    127


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Liquidity

Although contractually current accounts are repayable on demand and savings accounts at short notice, the Group’s broad base of customers, numerically and by depositor type, helps protect against unexpected fluctuations in balances. Such accounts form a stable funding base for the Group’s operations and liquidity needs. The Group assesses the behavioural maturity of both customer assets and liabilities to identify structural balance sheet funding gaps. Customer behaviour is determined by quantitative modelling combined with qualitative assessment taking into account for historical experience, current customer composition, and macroeconomic projections. These behavioural profiles represent our forward looking expectation of therun-off profile. The relatively low cash outflow within one year demonstrates that customer funding remains broadly matched with customer assets from a behavioural perspective.

 

Behavioural maturity profile (Includes BAGL)

                                   
         Behavioural maturity profile cash outflow/(inflow)  
    
 
 
 
Loans and
advances to
customers
£bn
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Customer
deposits
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

Customer
funding
surplus/
(deficit)

£bn

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Not more
than one
year

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 
 
Over one
year but
not more
than five
years
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
More than
five years
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
Total
£bn
  
  

As at 31 December 2015

              

Personal and Corporate Banking

   218     305     87     18     3     66     87  

Barclaycard

   40     10     (30   (10   (10   (10   (30

Africa Banking

   30     31     1     2     1     (2   1  

Non-Core (Retail)

   12     2     (10   (1   (2   (7   (10

Total

   300     348     48     9     (8   47     48  

As at 31 December 2014

              

Personal and Corporate Banking

   217     299     82     19     3     60     82  

Barclaycard

   37     7     (30   (10   (10   (10   (30

Africa Banking

   35     35          2     (2          

Non-Core (Retail)

   20     8     (12        (2   (10   (12

Total

   309     349     40     11     (11   40     40  

Wholesale funding

Wholesale funding relationships are summarised below:

Assets

   

 

      2015

£bn

  

  

   
 
      2014
£bn
  
  
   

Liabilities

   
 
      2015
£bn
  
  
   
 
      2014
£bn
  
  

Trading portfolio assets

   28     37    

Repurchase agreements

   70     124  

Reverse repurchase agreements

   42     87        

Reverse repurchase agreements

   34     45    

Trading portfolio liabilities

   34     45  

Derivative financial instruments

   326     440    

Derivative financial instruments

   322     439  

Liquidity pool

   97     109    

Less than one year wholesale debt

   54     75  

Other assetsa

      103        122    

Greater than one year wholesale debt and equity

      150        157  

Repurchase agreements fund reverse repurchase agreements and trading portfolio assets. Trading portfolio liabilities are settled by the remainder of reverse repurchase agreements (see Note 19 Offsetting financial assets and liabilities for further detail on netting).

Derivative liabilities and assets are largely matched. A substantial proportion of balance sheet derivative positions qualify for counterparty netting and the remaining portions are largely offset once netted against cash collateral received and paid.

Wholesale debt, along with the surplus of customer deposits to loans and advances to customers, is used to fund the liquidity pool. Term wholesale debt and equity largely fund other assets.

Behavioural maturity profile                           
                  

Behavioural maturity profile

cash outflow/(inflow)

 
    Loans and
advances to
customers
£bn
   Customer
deposits
£bn
   Customer
funding
surplus/
(deficit)
£bn
  

Not more
than one
year

£bn

  

Over one
year but
not more
than five
years

£bn

  

More than

five years
£bn

 
As at 31 December 2017         
Barclays UK   184    193    9   1   (19  27 
Barclays Internationala   101    162    61   6   19   36 
Total   285    355    70   7   -   63 
As at 31 December 2016         
Barclays UK   166    189    23   (2  (19  44 
Barclays Internationala   118    152    34   (6  7   33 
BarclaysNon-Core   19        (19  (1  (6  (12
Total   303    341    38   (9  (18  65 

Note

aPredominantly available for sale investments, financial assets designated at fair value and loans and advancesExcludes investment banking balances other than interest earning lending. Comparatives have been restated to banks funded by greater than one year wholesale debt and equity and trading portfolio assets.

160  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-Finclude interest earning lending balances within the investment banking business.


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

Composition of wholesaleWholesale fundinga

The Group maintains access to a variety of sources of wholesale funds in major currencies, including those available from term investors across a variety of distribution channels and geographies, money markets, and repo markets. The Group has direct access to US, European and Asian capital markets through its global investment banking operations and long-term investors through its clients worldwide, and is an active participant in money markets. As a result, wholesale funding is well diversified by product, maturity, geography and major currency.

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the Group’s total wholesale funding outstanding (excluding repurchase agreements) was £142bn (2014: £171bn). £54bn (2014: £75bn) of wholesale funding matures in less than one year,£157.4bn (2016: £157.8bn), of which £14bn (2014: £22bn)a relates to term funding.

As at 31 December 2015, outstanding wholesale funding comprised £25bn (2014: £33bn) of£20.4bn (2016: £25.8bn) was secured funding and £117bn (2014: £138bn) of£137.0bn (2016: £132.0bn) unsecured funding.

In preparation for a Single Point of Entry resolution model, Barclays continues to issue debt capital and term senior unsecured funding out of Barclays PLC, the holding company, replacing maturing debt in Barclays Bank PLC.

Maturity profile of wholesale fundingb

  

   
 
 

 

Not more
than one
month

£bn

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
month but
not more
than three
months

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
months
but not
more than
six
months

£bn

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over six
months
but not
more than
one year

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 

 

Sub-total
less than
one year

£bn

  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than four
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over four
years but
not more
than five
years

£bn

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

More than
five years

£bn

  
  

  

  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

Barclays PLC

                                            

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

                          0.8    1.3    0.9    3.1    6.1  

Senior unsecured (privately placed)

                          0.1                0.1  

Subordinated liabilities

                                  0.9    0.9    1.8  

Barclays Bank PLC

                                            

Deposits from banks

  9.5    3.1    1.3    0.8    14.7    0.1                0.3    15.1  

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

  0.5    4.9    3.4    5.3    14.1    1.0    0.6    0.9    0.4    0.5    17.5  

Asset backed commercial paper

  2.2    3.3    0.2        5.7                        5.7  

Senior unsecured (public benchmark)

      1.3        1.4    2.7    3.6        4.3    1.3    3.9    15.8  

Senior unsecured (privately
placed)c

  0.6    1.6    2.3    4.8    9.3    5.1    5.4    3.7    3.0    8.5    35.0  

Covered bonds

          1.1        1.1    4.4    1.0    1.6        4.2    12.3  

Asset backed securities

  0.7                0.7    0.5    1.4    1.3    0.5    0.3    4.7  

Subordinated liabilities

                      1.1    3.0    0.2    0.9    14.0    19.2  

Otherd

  2.3    1.1    0.3    1.5    5.2    0.7    0.3    0.4    0.4    1.6    8.6  

Total as at 31 December 2015

  15.8    15.3    8.6    13.8    53.5    16.5    12.6    13.7    8.3    37.3    141.9  

Of which secured

  4.2    3.9    1.6    0.3    10.0    5.1    2.4    2.8    0.5    4.5    25.3  

Of which unsecured

  11.6    11.4    7.0    13.5    43.5    11.4    10.2    10.9    7.8    32.8    116.6  

Total as at 31 December 2014

  16.8    23.2    14.4    21.0    75.4    14.0    16.1    6.5    14.0    45.4    171.4  

Of which secured

  5.3    7.8    1.7    2.2    17.0    2.7    5.1    0.1    2.4    6.0    33.3  

Of which unsecured

  11.5    15.4    12.7    18.8    58.4    11.3    11.0    6.4    11.6    39.4    138.1  

Outstanding wholesale Unsecured funding includes £35bn (2014: £45bn)£44.8bn (2016: £37.6bn) of privately placed senior unsecured notes in issue. These notes are issued through a variety of distribution channels including intermediaries and private banks.

During the year, the Group issued £11.5bn equivalent of capital and senior unsecured debt from Barclays PLC (the Parent company), of which £6.1bn was in public senior unsecured debt and £5.4bn in capital instruments. In the same period, £6.1bn of Barclays Bank PLC capital and senior public term instruments either matured or were redeemed, including the $1.375bn 7.1% Series 3 USD preference shares.

As at 31 December 2017 wholesale funding of £57.2bn (2016: £70.3bn) matures in less than one year, of which £13.8bnb (2016: £21.5bn) relates to term funding. Although not a requirement, the liquidity pool exceeded the wholesale funding maturing in less than one year by £91bn (2014: £74bn)£163bn (2016: £95bn).

The Group expects to continue issuing public wholesale debt in 2018 from Barclays PLC (the Parent company), in order to maintain compliance with indicative MREL requirements and maintain a stable and diverse funding base by type, currency and market.

128    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

    

Maturity profile of wholesale fundingb                                                       
   <1
month
   1-3
   months
   3-6
   months
   6-12
   months
   <1
   year
   1-2
   years
   2-3
   years
   3-4
   years
   4-5
   years
   >5
   years
      Total 
    £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn 
Barclays PLC                      
Senior unsecured (Public benchmark)       0.7        0.1    0.8    1.5    1.0    4.2    4.0    9.6    21.1 
Senior unsecured (Privately placed)               0.1    0.1            0.2        0.5    0.8 
Subordinated liabilities                           1.1            5.4    6.5 
Barclays Bank PLC (including subsidiaries)                                                       
Deposits from banks   5.4    4.7    0.7    0.6    11.4    0.1    0.1    0.3            11.9 
Certificates of deposit and commercial paper   2.4    8.1    7.1    7.0    24.6    1.2    0.8    0.6    0.4    0.1    27.7 
Asset backed commercial paper   1.9    4.1    0.4        6.4                        6.4 
Senior unsecured (Public benchmark)                       2.5    0.6    0.6        1.1    4.8 
Senior unsecured (Privately placed)c   0.5    0.9    3.6    2.9    7.9    9.9    6.7    1.8    3.1    14.6    44.0 
Covered bonds       1.0            1.0    1.8    1.0    1.0    2.4    1.3    8.5 
Asset backed securities           0.6    0.2    0.8    1.7    1.0        0.1    1.8    5.4 
Subordinated liabilities   2.3    0.1    0.8        3.2    0.1    0.8    5.2    3.5    4.5    17.3 
Otherd   0.5        0.1    0.4    1.0    0.2    0.2    0.3        1.3    3.0 
Total as at 31 December 2017   13.0    19.6    13.3    11.3    57.2    19.0    13.3    14.2    13.5    40.2    157.4 
Of which secured   1.9    5.1    1.1    0.2    8.3    3.5    2.0    1.0    2.5    3.1    20.4 
Of which unsecured   11.1    14.5    12.2    11.1    48.9    15.5    11.3    13.2    11.0    37.1    137.0 
Total as at 31 December 2016   16.6    17.3    16.4    20.0    70.3    14.3    14.4    8.6    14.1    36.1    157.8 
Of which secured   3.7    5.6    3.4    2.3    15.0    1.8    3.2    0.4    1.0    4.4    25.8 
Of which unsecured   12.9    11.7    13.0    17.7    55.3    12.5    11.2    8.2    13.1    31.7    132.0 

Notes

aTerm funding maturities comprise public benchmark and privately placed senior unsecured notes, covered bonds/asset backed securities (ABS) and subordinated debt where the original maturity of the instrument was more than one year.
bThe composition of wholesale funds comprises the balance sheet reported deposits from banks, financial liabilities at fair value, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities, excluding cash collateral and settlement balances.balances and collateral swaps. It does not include collateral swaps, including participation in central bank facilities reported within repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing.
bTerm funding comprises public benchmark and privately placed senior unsecured notes, covered bonds, asset-backed securities (ABS) and subordinated debt where the BoE’s Funding for Lending Scheme. Included within deposits from banks are £6bnoriginal maturity of liabilities drawn in the European Central Bank’s facilities.instrument was more than 1 year.
cIncludes structured notes of £28bn, £8bn£33.4bn, £7.2bn of which maturematures within one1 year.
dPrimarily comprised of fair value deposits £5bn and secured financing of physical gold £3bn.£1.7bn.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  161


Currency composition of wholesale debt

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the proportion of wholesale funding by major currencies was as follows:

 

Currency composition of wholesale funding                                
   
 
        USD
%
  
  
   
 
        EUR
%
  
  
   
 
        GBP
%
  
  
   
 
        Other
%
  
  
  

        USD

%

   

        EUR

%

   

        GBP

%

   

        Other

%

 
Deposits from banks   25     51     19     5     48    21    27    4 
Certificates of deposits and commercial paper   25     60     14     1     50    40    9    1 
Asset backed commercial paper   92     8               85    10    5     
Senior unsecured (public benchmark)   43     20     28     9     59    23    12    6 
Senior unsecured (privately placed)   39     21     18     22  
Senior unsecured (Privately placed)   46    28    10    16 
Covered bonds/ABS   27     41     31     1     30    42    28     
Subordinated liabilities   44     19     37          40    30    29    1 
Total as at 31 December 2015   38     31     23     8  
Total as at 31 December 2014   35     32     25     8  
Total as at 31 December 2017   50    28    10    12 
Total as at 31 December 2016   48    32    16    4 

To manage cross-currency refinancing risk, the Group manages to foreign exchange cash flow limits, which limit risk at specific maturities. Across wholesale funding, the composition of wholesale funding is materially unchanged.

Term financing

The Group issued £9bn (2014: £15bn) of term funding net of early redemptions during 2015. The Group has £14bn of term debt maturing in 2016 and £16bn maturing in 2017a.

The Group expects to continue issuing public wholesale debt in 2016, in order to maintain a stable and diverse funding base by type, currency and distribution channel.

Encumbrance

Asset encumbrance arises from collateral pledged against secured funding and other collateralised obligations. Barclays funds a portion of trading portfolio assets and other securities via repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing, and pledges a portion of customer loans and advances as collateral in securitisations,securitisation, covered bond and other similar secured structures. Barclays monitors the mix of secured and unsecured funding sources within the Group’s funding plan and seeks to efficiently utilise available collateral to raise secured funding and meet other collateralised obligations.collateral requirements.

Encumbered assets have been defined consistently with the Group’s reporting requirements under Article 100 of the CRR. Securities and commodities assets are considered encumbered when they have been pledged or used to secure, collateralise or credit enhance a transaction which impacts their transferability and free use. This includes external repurchase or other similar agreements with market counterparts.

Excluding assets positioned at central banks, as at 31 December 2015, £157bn (2014: £176bn)2017, £193bn (2016: £168bn) of the Group’s assets were encumbered, primarily due to cash collateral posted, firm financing of trading portfolio assets and other securities and funding secured against loans and advances to customers.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    129


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Liquidity

Assets may also be encumbered under secured funding arrangements with central banks, such as the Funding for Lending Scheme.banks. In advance of such encumbrance, assets are often positioned with central banks to facilitate efficient future draw down. £88bn (2014: £99bn)£70bn (2016: £63bn) ofon-balance sheet assets were positioned at the central banks, consisting of encumbered assets and collateralpre-positioned and available for use in secured financing transactions.

£212bn (2014: £270bn)342bn (2016: £277bn) of on and off-balanceoff balance sheet assets not positioned at the central bank were identified as readily available and available for use in secured financing transactions. Additionally, they include cash and securities held in the Group liquidity pool as well as unencumbered assets which provide a source of contingent liquidity. While these additional assets are not relied upon in the Group’s LRA, a portion of these assets may be monetised to generate liquidity through use as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale. Loans and advances to customers are only classified as readily available if they are already in a form, such that, they can be used to raise funding without further management actions. This includes excess collateral already in secured funding vehicles.

£208bn (2014: £208bn)198bn (2016: £231bn) of assets not positioned at the central bank were identified as available as collateral. These assets are not subject to any restrictions on their ability to secure funding, to be offered as collateral, or to be sold to reduce potential future funding requirements, but are not immediately available in the normal course of business in their current form. They primarily consist of loans and advances which would be suitable for use in secured funding structures but are conservatively classified as not readily available because they are not in transferable form.

Not available as collateral consistconsists of assets that cannot be pledged or used as security for funding due to restrictions that prevent their pledge or use as security for funding in the normal course of business.

Derivatives and reverse repo assets relate specifically to derivatives, reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending. These are shown separately as theseon-balance sheet assets cannot be pledged. However, these assets can give rise to the receipt ofnon-cash assets which are held off-balanceoff balance sheet, and can be used to raise secured funding or meet additional funding requirements.

In addition, £265bn (2014: £313bn)£548bn (2016: £406bn) of the total £306bn (2014: £396bn)£608bn (2016: £466bn) securities accepted as collateral, and heldoff-balance sheet, wereon-pledged, the significant majority of which related to matched-book activity where reverse repurchase agreements are matched by repurchase agreements entered into to facilitate client activity. The remainder relates primarily to reverse repurchasesrepurchase agreements used to settle trading portfolio liabilities as well as collateral posted against derivativederivatives margin requirements.

 

Asset encumbrance                                                         
         Assets encumbered as a result of  transactions
with counterparties other than central banks
     

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

 
                             Assets  Assets not positioned at the central  bank      

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2017

   
Assets
£bn
 
 
   

As a result

of covered

bonds

£bn

 

 

 

 

   


As a

result of

securitis-

ations
£bn

 

 

 

 
 

   
Other
£bn
 
 
   
Total
£bn
 
 
     


positioned
at the
central
banks

£bn

 
 
 
b 

 

  


Readily
available
assets
£bn
 
 
 
 
   


Available
as
collateral
£bn
 
 
 
 
   




Not

available
as
collateral
£bn

 

 
 
 
 

   

Derivatives

and

Reverse

repos

£bn

 

 

 

 

 

   
Total
£bn
 
 
Cash and balances at central banks   171.1                        171.1                171.1 
Trading portfolio assets   113.8            73.9    73.9        39.9                39.9 
Financial assets at fair value   116.3            4.8    4.8        1.5    10.0        100.0    111.5 
Derivative financial instruments   237.7                                    237.7    237.7 
Loans and advances – banksa   11.1                        3.2    7.0    0.9        11.1 
Loans and advances – customersa   312.9    11.2    18.4    13.0    42.6     70.0   20.9    179.4            270.3 
Cash collateral   58.6            56.4    56.4        2.2                2.2 
Settlement balances   18.6                                18.6        18.6 
Financial investments   58.9            15.5    15.5        43.0    0.4            43.4 
Reverse repurchase agreements   12.5                                    12.5    12.5 
Non current assets held for sale   1.2                            1.2            1.2 
Other financial assets   20.5                                 20.5        20.5 
Totalon-balance sheet   1,133.2    11.2    18.4    163.6    193.2      70.0   281.8    198.0    40.0    350.2    940.0 

Off-balance sheet                         
    Collateral
received
£bn
   Collateral
received
of which
on-
pledged
£bn
   Readily
available
assets
£bn
   Available
as
collateral
£bn
   Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
 
Fair value of securities accepted as collateral   608.4    547.6    60.1        0.7 
Total unencumbered collateral           341.9    198.0    40.7 

Notes

a Excluding cash collateral and settlement balances.

b Includes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note

aIncludes £0.6bn of bilateral secured funding in 2016 and £0.4bn in 2017.
40 to the financial statements page266.

 

162  |  130    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

Asset encumbrancea

  

      
   
 
Assets encumbered as a result of transactions
with counterparties other than central banks
  
  
     

 

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

  

  

      Assets    Assets not positioned at the central bank   

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2015

  
 
Assets
£bn
  
  
  

 
 

 

As a result

of covered
bonds

£bn

  

  
  

  

  

 
 
 

 

As a

result of
securitis-
ations

£bn

  

  
  
  

  

  
 
Other
£bn
  
  
  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

 

positioned 

at 

central  banksc

£bn 

  

  

   

  

  
 
 
Readily
available
assets £bn
  
  
  
  

 

 
 

Available

as

collateral
£bn

  

  

  
  

  
 
 
 
 
Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 

 

Derivatives
and Reverse
repos

£bn

  
  
  

  

  
 
Total
£bn
  
  

Cash and balances at central banks

  47.9                       –     47.9                47.9  

Trading portfolio assets

  74.8            49.1    49.1     –     25.7                25.7  

Financial assets at fair value

  72.5            2.5    2.5     –     3.2    17.7    1.3    47.8    70.0  

Derivative financial instruments

  325.5                     –                 325.5    325.5  

Loans and advances – banksb

  19.6                     –     7.9    10.2    1.5        19.6  

Loans and advances – customersb

  307.3    16.4    5.9    8.0    30.3     86.4     14.8    175.8            277.0  

Cash collateral

  62.6            62.6    62.6     –                       

Settlement balances

  20.4                     –             20.4        20.4  

Available for sale financial investments

  87.0            12.2    12.2     –     72.2    1.0    1.6        74.8  

Reverse repurchase agreements

  28.2                     –                 28.2    28.2  

Non-current assets held for sale

  7.3                     1.9     1.2    3.2    1.0        7.3  

Other financial assets

  19.9                      –             19.9        19.9  

Total on-balance sheet

  1,073.0    16.4    5.9    134.4    156.7      88.3     172.9    207.9    45.7    401.5    916.3  

 Off-balance sheet  
   
 
 
Collateral
received
£bn
  
  
  
  
 
 

 
 
 

Collateral
received of
which

on-
pledged
£bn

  
  
  

  
  
  

  
 
 
 
Readily
available
assets
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
Available as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
  
  
  
  
  
 Fair value of securities accepted as collateral  305.9    265.4    39.0        1.5  
 Total unencumbered collateral          211.9    207.9    47.2  

Notes

aThe format of this disclosure has been updated following the issuance of a ‘Dear CFO’ letter by the PRA. The revised format continues to satisfy the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force on encumbrance disclosure.
bExcluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
cIncludes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  163


    

    

    

    

Asset encumbrancea

  

      
   

 

Assets encumbered as a result of transactions

with counterparties other than central banks

  

  

     

 

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

  

  

      Assets     Assets not positioned at the central bank   

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2014

  

 

Assets

£bn

  

  

  

 

 

 

As a result

of covered

bonds

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

As a

result of

securitis-

ations

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

Other

£bn

  

  

  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

 

positioned 

at the 

central 

banksc

£bn 

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Readily

available

assets

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Not

available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Derivatives

and

Reverse

repos

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

Total

£bn

  

  

Cash and balances at central banks

  37.8                     –     37.8                37.8  

Trading portfolio assets

  111.9            50.7    50.7     –     61.2                61.2  

Financial assets at fair value

  34.2            2.3    2.3     –     3.5    20.7    2.5    5.2    31.9  

Derivative financial instruments

  438.6                     –                 438.6    438.6  

Loans and advances – banksb

  19.5                     –     8.6    9.2    1.7        19.5  

Loans and advances – customersb

  311.1    20.4    9.2    10.3    39.9     93.4     8.7    169.1            271.2  

Cash collateral

  72.6            72.6    72.6     –                       

Settlement balances

  30.8                     –             30.8        30.8  

Available for sale financial investments

  82.0            9.3    9.3     –     70.0    0.5    2.2        72.7  

Reverse repurchase agreements

  131.7                     –                 131.7    131.7  

Non-current assets held for sale

  15.6        1.5        1.5     5.1     0.2    8.3    0.5        14.1  

Other financial assets

  18.8                      –             18.8        18.8  

Total on-balance sheet

  1,304.6    20.4    10.7    145.2    176.3      98.5     190.0    207.8    56.5    575.5    1,128.3  

 Off-balance sheet     
    

 

 

Collateral

received

£bn

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Collateral

received

of which

on-

pledged

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Readily

available

assets

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Not

available

as

collateral

£bn

  

  

  

  

  

   
 Fair value of securities accepted as collateral   395.7     313.0     79.9          2.8                            
 Total unencumbered collateral             269.9     207.8     59.3     

 

 

Asset encumbrance                                                         
       Assets encumbered as a result of transactions
with counterparties other than central banks
     

Other assets (comprising assets encumbered at the central bank

and unencumbered assets)

 
             Assets  Assets not positioned at the central bank     

On-balance sheet

As at 31 December 2016

   
Assets
£bn
 
 
   


As a result
of covered
bonds

£bn

 
 
 

 

   



As a
result of
securitis-
ations
£bn
 
 
 
 
 
   
Other
£bn
 
 
   
Total
£bn
 
 
     

positioned

at the

central

banks

£bn

 

 

 

b 

 

  


Readily
available
assets
£bn
 
 
 
 
   

Available

as

collateral

£bn

 

 

 

 

   

Not
Available

as

collateral

£bn

 
 

 

 

 

   


Derivatives
and
Reverse

repos

£bn

 
 
 

 

 

   
Total
£bn
 
 
Cash and balances at central banks   102.4                        102.4                102.4 
Trading portfolio assets   80.2            51.2    51.2        29.0                29.0 
Financial assets at fair value   78.6            3.2    3.2        1.5    10.7        63.2    75.4 
Derivative financial instruments   346.6                                    346.6    346.6 
Loans and advances – banksa   20.2                        10.1    9.0    1.1        20.2 
Loans and advances – customersa   325.7    16.5    6.2    8.0    30.7     63.0   23.8    208.2            295.0 
Cash collateral   68.8            68.8    68.8                         
Settlement balances   21.3                                21.3        21.3 
Financial investments   63.3            13.6    13.6        49.3    0.4            49.7 
Reverse repurchase agreements   13.5                                    13.5    13.5 
Non current assets held for sale   6.4                        1.2    3.1    2.1        6.4 
Other financial assets   21.0                                 21.0        21.0 
Totalon-balance sheet   1,148.0    16.5    6.2    144.8    167.5      63.0   217.3    231.4    45.5    423.3    980.5 

Off-balance sheet                         
    Collateral
received
£bn
   Collateral
received
of which
on-
pledged
£bn
   Readily
available
assets
£bn
   Available
as
collateral
£bn
   Not
available
as
collateral
£bn
 
Fair value of securities accepted as collateral   466.2    405.5    59.7        1.0 
Total unencumbered collateral           277.0    231.4    46.5 

Notes

aThe format of this disclosure has been updated following the issuance of

a ‘Dear CFO’ letter by the PRA. The revised format continues to satisfy the recommendations of the Enhanced Disclosure Task Force on encumbrance disclosure.

bExcluding cash collateral and settlement balances.
cIncludes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements.

164  | ��Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidityb Includes both encumbered and unencumbered assets. Assets within this category that have been encumbered are disclosed as assets pledged in Note 40 to the financial statements page

266.

Repurchase agreements and reverse repurchase agreements

Barclays enters into repurchase and other similar secured borrowing agreements to finance its trading portfolio assets. The majority of reverse repurchase agreements are matched by offsetting repurchase agreements entered into to facilitate client activity. The remainder are used to settle trading portfolio liabilities.

Due to the high quality of collateral provided against secured financing transactions, the liquidity risk associated with this activity is significantly lower than unsecured financing transactions. Nonetheless, Barclays manages to gross and net secured mismatch limits to limit refinancing risk under a severe stress scenario and a portion of the Group’s liquidity pool is held against stress outflows on these positions. The Group secured mismatch limits are calibrated based on market capacity, liquidity characteristics of the collateral and risk appetite of the Group.

The cash value of repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions will typically differ from the market value of the collateral against which these transactions are secured by an amount referred to as a haircut (or over-collateralisation)overcollateralisation). Typical haircut levels vary depending on the quality of the collateral that underlies these transactions. For transactions secured against extremely liquid fixed income collateral, lenders demand relatively small haircuts (typically ranging from0-2%). For transactions secured against less liquid collateral, haircuts vary by asset class (typically ranging from5-10% for corporate bonds and other less liquid collateral).

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the significant majority of repurchasesrepurchase activity related to matched-book activity. The Group may face refinancing risk on the net maturity mismatch for matched-book activity.

 

Net matched-book activitya,b

Negative number represents net repurchase agreement (net liability)

   
 
 
Less than 
one month 
£bn 
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
One month 
to three 
months 
£bn 
  
  
  
  
  Over three    months    £bn   

As at 31 December 2015

      

Extremely liquid fixed income

   (12.9)     7.3     5.6   

Liquid fixed income

   0.3      0.6     (0.9)  

Equities

   7.0      (1.5)    (5.5)  

Less liquid fixed income

   1.6      (0.4)    (1.2)  

Total

   (4.0)     6.0     (2.0)  

As at 31 December 2014

      

Extremely liquid fixed income

   (8.9)     6.3     2.6   

Liquid fixed income

   (0.1)     0.5     (0.4)  

Equities

   8.9      (3.0)    (5.9)  

Less liquid fixed income

   1.2      0.3     (1.5)  

Total

   1.1      4.1     (5.2)  
Net matched-book activitya,b,c             
Negative number represents net repurchase agreement (net liability)  Less than
one month
£bn
  One month
to three
months
£bn
  Over three
months
£bn
 
As at 31 December 2017    
Extremely liquid Fixed Incomed   (36.4  18.1   16.1 
Liquid Fixed Income   (0.9  1.5   (1.4
Equities   9.7   (5.6  (8.8
Less liquid Fixed Income   1.7   (0.7  (2.2
Total   (25.9  13.3   3.7 
As at 31 December 2016    
Extremely liquid Fixed Income   (21.8  11.6   10.7 
Liquid Fixed Income   (0.4  0.8   (0.7
Equities   6.1   (0.5  (9.6
Less liquid Fixed Income   0.6   (0.2  (1.3
Total   (15.5  11.7   (0.9

Notes

a Includes collateral swaps.

b Includes financing positions for prime brokerage clients which are reported as customer payables or receivables on balance sheet.

c Values are reported on a cash value basis.

d Extremely liquid fixed income is defined as very highly rated sovereigns and agencies, typically rated AA+ or better. It excludes liquid fixed income, equities and other less liquid collateral.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    131


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Liquidity

The residual repurchase agreement activity is the firm-financing component and reflects the GroupBarclays funding of a portion of its trading portfolio assets. The primary risk related to firm-financing activity is the inability to roll-over transactions as they mature. However, 50% (2014: 54%) of firm-financing activity was secured against highly liquid assets.

 

Firm financing repurchase agreementsa,b

  

   
    
 
 
Less than
  one month
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

  One month
to three
months

£bn

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Over three
months

£bn

  
  

  

           Total   £bn  

As at 31 December 2015

        

Extremely liquid fixed income

   28.8     8.3     0.3    37.4  

Liquid fixed income

   2.0     0.6     1.1    3.7  

Highly liquid

   10.9     6.3     10.2    27.4  

Less liquid

   2.7     1.1     1.9    5.7  

Total

   44.4     16.3     13.5    74.2  

As at 31 December 2014

        

Extremely liquid fixed income

   33.4     4.1     2.2    39.7  

Liquid fixed income

   3.6     0.3     0.6    4.5  

Highly liquid

   13.1     5.0     4.1    22.2  

Less liquid

   2.3     1.3     3.3    6.9  

Total

   52.4     10.7     10.2    73.3  

Firm financing repurchase agreementsa,b,c                    
    

Less than

one month

£bn

   

One month

to three

months

£bn

   

Over three
months

£bn

   

Total

£bn

 
As at 31 December 2017        
Extremely liquid Fixed Incomed   37.2    10.3    1.4    48.9 
Liquid Fixed Income   4.1    1.5    2.5    8.1 
Highly liquid               17.4                21.4                15.7                54.5 
Less liquid   2.1    1.9    12.6    16.6 
Total   60.8    35.1    32.2    128.1 
As at 31 December 2016        
Extremely liquid Fixed Income   28.3    7.1    1.1    36.5 
Liquid Fixed Income   2.8    0.8    1.2    4.8 
Highly liquid   13.2    8.9    14.0    36.1 
Less liquid   1.9    0.8    2.6    5.3 
Total   46.2    17.6    18.9    82.7 

Notes

a

a Includes collateral swaps.

bIncludes financing positions for prime brokerage clients which are reported as customer payables/receivables on-balance sheet.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  165


b Includes financing positions for prime brokerage clients which are reported as customer payables or receivables on balance sheet.

c Values are reported on a cash value basis.

d Extremely liquid fixed income is defined as very highly rated sovereigns and agencies, typically rated AA+ or better. It excludes liquid fixed income, equities and other less liquid collateral.

Credit ratings

In addition to monitoring and managing key metrics related to the financial strength of the Group, Barclays also subscribe tosolicits independent credit rating agency reviews byratings from Standard & Poor’s Global (S&P), Moody’s, Fitch and Rating and Investment Information (R&I). These ratings assess the creditworthiness of the Group, its subsidiaries and branches and are based on reviews of a broad range of business and financial attributes including risk management processes and procedures, capital strength, earnings,profitability, funding, liquidity, accountingasset quality, strategy and governance.

 

Credit ratingsa            
As at 31 December 2015                                         2017  Standard & Poor’s  Moody’s  Fitch
Barclays Bank PLC      
Long-termAA1A
Short-termA-1P-1F1
OutlookStableNegativeRating Watch Positive
Barclays Bank UK PLC    
Long-termA- (Stable)A2 (Stable)  A (Stable)(prelim)(P) A1A+ (EXP)
Short-term Short-termA-1 (prelim)  A-2(P)P-1  F1 (EXP)
OutlookStableUnassignedStable
 Stand-alone ratingBBB+BAA2

A

Barclays PLC      
Long-term  BBB (Stable)  Baa3 (Stable)Baa2  A (Stable)
Short-term  A-2  P-3  F1
OutlookStableNegativeStable

Barclays’All credit rating agencies took rating actions this year to assign initial ratings carryto Barclays Bank UK PLC in anticipation of the establishment of this entity as the UK ring-fenced bank in April 2018. There were also rating actions on the existing entities of Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays PLC by some of the credit rating agencies as detailed below.

In September 2017, Fitch assigned an expected rating to Barclays Bank UK PLC of A+, reflecting a one notch uplift from the expected standalone rating of A. This is due to the sufficient amount of junior debt they expect to be outstanding in Barclays Bank UK PLC, referred to as qualifying junior debt (QJD). In the same rating action, Fitch revised the outlook of Barclays Bank PLC from stable to rating watch positive in anticipation of assigning QJD uplift of one notch during 2018.

In October 2017, S&P upgraded long and short-term ratings of Barclays Bank PLC by one notch toA/A-1 fromA-/A-2 as S&P finalised their view of the status of Barclays Bank PLC. They determined that Barclays Bank PLC would remain core to the Group revising their previous expectation of a highly strategic status.

Simultaneously, Barclays Bank PLC was assigned a preliminary rating of A with a stable outlook within anticipation that it too would be core to the Group. In November 2017, S&P Moody’s and Fitch. Fitch affirmedalso revised their view of UK economic risk for the ratings in December 2015 as part of its periodic review, noting the balance of Barclays’ stable PCB and strong Barclaycard businesses against the InvestmentUK banking sector, which led to outlooks for Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Non-Core performance.UK PLC being revised from negative to stable.

CreditMoody’s assigned a provisional rating agencies took industry wide actionsto Barclays Bank UK PLC in 2015 driven by evolving resolution frameworks. This involved the reassessmentOctober 2017 of the likelihood of sovereign support resulting in downward pressure on senior credit ratings. They also updated their methodologies which provided some mitigation to reflect the subordination of junior debt available to absorb losses ahead of senior bank creditors.

As a consequence, S&P downgraded(P)A1. The negative outlooks for Barclays PLC the holding company, by two notches and Barclays Bank PLC have remained in place since the operating company, by one notchoutcome of the EU referendum in H115. Moody’s downgraded Barclays PLC by three notches while affirmingJune 2016. Since October 2017, the ratingimplementation of ring-fencing has been included in the rationale for the maintenance Barclays Bank PLC also in H115. There was no impact on Barclays’ stand-alone credit ratings with all credit rating agencies.PLC’s negative outlook.

During the year, Barclays also solicitedsolicits issuer ratings from R&I for which they assignedand the ratings ofA- for BarclaysB PLC and A for Barclays BankBB PLC were affirmed in July 2017 with stable outlooks.

 Contractual credit rating downgrade exposure (cumulative cash flow)  
   Cumulative cash outflow 
    
 
 
One-notch
downgrade
£bn
  
  
  
   
 
 
Two-notch
downgrade
£bn
  
  
  
 As at 31 December 2015    
 Securitisation derivatives   2     3  
 Contingent liabilities   1     1  
 Derivatives margining        1  
 Liquidity facilities   1     1  
 Total contractual funding or margin requirements   4     6  
 As at 31 December 2014    
 Securitisation derivatives   5     6  
 Contingent liabilities   8     8  
 Derivatives margining        1  
 Liquidity facilities   1     2  
 Total contractual funding or margin requirements   14     17  

Note

aRefers to Standard & Poor’s Stand-Alone Credit Profile (SACP), Moody’s Bank Financial Strength Ratio (BFSR)/Baseline Credit Assessment (BCA) and Fitch Viability Rating (VR).
A credit rating downgrade could result in outflows to meet collateral requirements on existing contracts. Outflows related to credit rating downgrades are included in the LRA stress scenarios and a portion of the liquidity pool is held against this risk. Credit ratings downgrades could also result in reduced funding capacity and increased funding costs.

 

166  |  132    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

Funding risk – liquidity

    

    

LiquidityThe contractual collateral requirement followingone- andtwo-notch long-term and associated short-term downgrades across all credit rating agencies, would result in outflows of £4bn and £6bn respectively, and are fully reserved for in the liquidity pool. These numbers do not assume any management at BAGL Group (audited)

Liquidity risk is managed separately at BAGL Group dueor restructuring actions that could be taken to local currency,reduce posting requirements. These outflows do not include the potential liquidity impact from loss of unsecured funding, such as from money market funds, or loss of secured funding capacity. However, unsecured and regulatory requirements.

In addition tosecured funding stresses are included in the GroupLRA stress scenarios and a portion of the liquidity pool as at 31 December 2015, BAGL Groupis held £6bn (2014: £7bn) of liquidity pool assets against BAGL specific anticipated stressed outflows. The liquidity pool consists of notes and coins, central bank deposits, government bonds and Treasury bills.these risks.

The BAGL loan to deposit ratio as at 31 December 2015 was 102% (2014: 102%).

As at 31 December 2015, BAGL had £9bn (2014: £9bn) of wholesale funding outstanding, of which £5bn (2014: £5bn) matures in less than 12 months.

Additional information on liquidity management at BAGL can be found in the Barclays Africa Group Annual Report.

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)

The table on the next pagebelow provides detail on the contractual maturity of all financial instruments and other assets and liabilities. Derivatives (other than those designated in a hedging relationship) and trading portfolio assets and liabilities are included in the ‘on demand’ column at their fair value. Liquidity risk on these items is not managed on the basis of contractual maturity since they are not held for settlement according to such maturity and will frequently be settled before contractual maturity at fair value. Derivatives designated in a hedging relationship are included according to their contractual maturity.

Financial assets designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities to customers under investment contracts have been included in other assets and other liabilities as the Group is not exposed to liquidity risk arising from them; any request for funds from creditors would be met by simultaneously liquidating or transferring the related investment.

Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)                              
As at
31 December 2017
  

On

demand
£m

  Not more
than three
months
£m
  

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  

Over six
months
but not
more

than nine
months
£m

  Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  

Over two
years

but not
more
than three

years

£m

  

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

Over five

years but

not more
than ten
years

£m

  

Over ten

years

£m

   

Total

£m

 
Assets             
Cash and balances at central banks   170,236   846                            171,082 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   2,153                               2,153 
Trading portfolio assets   113,760                               113,760 
Financial assets designated at fair value   14,800   77,288   8,828   4,570   1,252   2,095   160   196   557   6,535    116,281 
Derivative financial instruments   237,504   41            71   22   15   1   15    237,669 
Financial investments   30   2,378   2,717   97   504   5,675   3,928   16,162   17,059   10,366    58,916 
Loans and advances to banks   3,439   30,227   1,256   77   125   247   93   11      188    35,663 
Loans and advances to customers   12,022   70,816   8,511   5,519   7,622   35,969   26,151   39,435   48,382   111,125    365,552 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   7,522   4,446   578                         12,546 
Other financial assets      759            110                869 
Total financial assets   561,466   186,801   21,890   10,263   9,503   44,167   30,354   55,819   65,999   128,229    1,114,491 
Other assetsa                                            18,757 
Total assets                                            1,133,248 
Liabilities             
Deposits from banks   4,967   30,826   718   438   214   74   135   316   35       37,723 
Items in the course of collection due to other banks   446                               446 
Customer accounts   334,961   74,812   7,381   3,386   3,628   2,684   500   882   231   656    429,121 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   3,550   17,841   4,516   2,136   1,396   310   93   10,006   490       40,338 
Trading portfolio liabilities   37,351                               37,351 
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   13,298   102,860   10,570   5,918   3,139   10,515   7,281   5,879   4,923   9,335    173,718 
Derivative financial instruments   237,235   10   3         10   5   4   41   1,037    238,345 
Debt securities in issue   907   17,120   8,395   5,107   1,562   8,136   3,883   12,819   10,983   4,402    73,314 
Subordinated liabilities      2,402   791   7   23   57   1,959   8,751   5,466   4,370    23,826 
Other financial liabilities      3,793            781                4,574 
Total financial liabilities   632,715   249,664   32,374   16,992   9,962   22,567   13,856   38,657   22,169   19,800    1,058,756 
Other liabilitiesa                                            8,476 
Total liabilities                                            1,067,232 
Cumulative liquidity gap   (71,249  (134,112  (144,596  (151,325  (151,784  (130,184  (113,686  (96,524  (52,694  55,735    66,016 

Note

a As at 31 December 2017, other assets includes balances of £1,193m (2016: £71,454m) and other liabilities includes balances of £0m (2016: £65,292m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 43 for details.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  167    133


  Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)
  

As at

31 December 2015

  
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 
 
 

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  
  
  
  

  
  
  

  
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
 
 
Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 

 
 
 
 

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  
  

  
  
  
  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  
 
 

 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more

than ten
years

£m

  
  
 

  
  

  

  
 

 

Over ten
years

£m

  
  

  

 

Total  

£m  

 Assets           
 Cash and balances at central banks  49,580    131                                   49,711 
 Items in the course of collection from other banks  631    380                                   1,011 
 Trading portfolio assets  77,348                                       77,348 
 Financial assets designated at fair value  5,692    46,941    1,722    1,372    583    1,021    587    424    867    16,172   75,381 
 Derivative financial instruments  326,772    28    3    1    53    328    61    257    147    59   327,709 
 Loans and advances to banks  5,354    31,539    1,954    366    468    588    991    43    12    34   41,349 
 Loans and advances to customers  29,117    76,337    13,935    7,084    12,332    27,616    27,318    48,707    50,737    106,034   399,217 
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending  2    24,258    3,296    292    205    74    35    1    24       28,187 
 Available for sale investments  467    2,396    1,792    4,936    2,088    11,537    14,659    17,898    21,445    13,049   90,267 
  Other financial assets      1,304                100                   1,404 
  Total financial assets  494,963    183,314    22,702    14,051    15,729    41,264    43,651    67,330    73,232    135,348   1,091,584 
  Other assetsa                                         28,428 
  Total assets                                         1,120,012 
 Liabilities           
 Deposits from banks  5,717    38,720    1,355    540    335    97    9    67    236    4   47,080 
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks  1,013                                       1,013 
 Customer accounts  312,921    80,114    7,605    4,253    5,304    2,845    912    1,654    622    2,012   418,242 
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing  66    17,346    3,479    1,975    876    843    52        398       25,035 
 Trading portfolio liabilities  33,967                                       33,967 
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value  319    52,185    3,152    3,470    2,317    6,093    5,458    7,446    4,139    5,533   90,112 
 Derivative financial instruments  323,786    80    92    49    49    42    13    57    70    14   324,252 
 Debt securities in issue  50    14,270    5,615    4,322    4,469    10,164    4,797    13,037    10,028    2,398   69,150 
 Subordinated liabilities  2            9    28    1,254    2,994    2,194    8,741    6,245   21,467 
  Other financial liabilities      2,685                1,075                   3,760 
  Total financial liabilities  677,841    205,400    21,298    14,618    13,378    22,413    14,235    24,455    24,234    16,206   1,034,078 
  Other liabilitiesa                                         20,070 
  Total liabilities                                         1,054,148 
  Cumulative liquidity gap  (182,878  (204,964  (203,560  (204,127  (201,776  (182,925  (153,509  (110,634  (61,636  57,506   65,864 

Note

aOther assets includes balances of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and other liabilities includes balances of £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 44 for details.

168  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Risk performance

FundingTreasury and Capital risk – liquidityLiquidity

 

 

  Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (including BAGL) (audited)  
  

As at

31 December 2014

  
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
  
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
 
 
 

 
 
 

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

  
  
  
  

  
  
  

  
 

 
 

 

 
 

Over six
months

but not
more

than nine

months
£m

  
  

  
  

 

  
  

  
 
 
 
 
 
Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
 

 
 
 
 

Over one
year

but not
more than
two years
£m

  
  

  
  
  
  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Over ten
years

£m

  
  

  

 

Total

£m

  
 Assets            
 Cash and balances at central banks  39,466    229                                   39,695 
 Items in the course of collection from other banks  828    382                                   1,210 
 Trading portfolio assets  114,717                                       114,717 
 Financial assets designated at fair value  5,732    3,139    1,540    797    602    2,696    1,322    1,253    1,038    18,538   36,657 
 Derivative financial instruments  438,270    26    6    8    7    204    274    443    439    232   439,909 
 Loans and advances to banks  5,875    31,138    3,236    225    944    404    233    20    36       42,111 
 Loans and advances to customers  24,607    99,208    9,225    6,900    9,241    35,477    24,653    48,486    54,168    115,802   427,767 
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending  144    117,977    9,857    2,013    941    28    116    109    22    546   131,753 
 Available for sale investments  513    1,324    2,045    3,576    844    10,804    16,705    10,107    23,683    16,465   86,066 
  Other financial assets      1,469                176                   1,645  
  Total financial assets  630,152    254,892    25,909    13,519    12,579    49,789    43,303    60,418    79,386    151,583   1,321,530  
  Other assetsa                                         36,376  
  Total assets                                         1,357,906  
 Liabilities            
 Deposits from banks  7,978    48,155    1,041    504    298    187    95    69    57    6   58,390 
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks  1,177                                       1,177 
 Customer accounts  317,449    86,626    7,284    5,442    3,245    4,208    494    1,219    713    1,024   427,704 
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing  40    111,766    7,175    2,847    1,989    119    116        427       124,479 
 Trading portfolio liabilities  45,124                                       45,124 
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value  665    6,554    3,493    4,056    3,244    7,015    5,524    9,573    6,174    8,851   55,149 
 Derivative financial instruments  438,623    29    7    12    5    62    69    78    268    167   439,320 
 Debt securities in issue  10    19,075    11,146    9,712    4,791    7,568    10,560    10,350    11,376    1,511   86,099 
 Subordinated liabilities      235    48    15        37    1,259    1,947    10,938    6,674   21,153 
  Other financial liabilities      3,060                815                   3,875  
  Total financial liabilities  811,066    275,500    30,194    22,588    13,572    20,011    18,117    23,236    29,953    18,233   1,262,470  
  Other liabilitiesa                                         29,478  
  Total liabilities                                         1,291,948  
  Cumulative liquidity gap  (180,914  (201,522  (205,807  (214,876  (215,869  (186,091  (160,905  (123,723  (74,290  59,060   65,958  
Contractual maturity of financial assets and liabilities (audited)                              
As at
31 December 2016
  On
demand
£m
  Not more
than three
months
£m
  

Over three
months
but not
more

than six

months
£m

  

Over six
months

but not
more

than nine
months
£m

  Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
  

Over one
year
but not
more than
two years

£m

  

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  

Over three

years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  

Over five

years but

not more

than ten

years

£m

  

Over ten
years

£m

   

Total

£m

 
Assets             
Cash and balances at central banks   102,031   322                            102,353 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   1,467                               1,467 
Trading portfolio assets   80,240                               80,240 
Financial assets designated at fair value   15,558   43,270   5,518   2,376   2,081   686   90   129   771   8,129    78,608 
Derivative financial instruments   345,625   5   400   5   2   14   168   175   123   109    346,626 
Financial investments   40   1,015   3,064   741   2,666   10,127   9,031   15,148   12,768   8,717    63,317 
Loans and advances to banks   4,858   34,346   2,753   480   133   412   236   20   13       43,251 
Loans and advances to customers   26,929   85,993   7,522   6,310   8,245   29,326   25,602   44,776   48,233   109,848    392,784 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   7,043   3,678   892   144   905   792                13,454 
Other financial assets      1,128            77                1,205 
Total financial assets   583,791   169,757   20,149   10,056   14,032   41,434   35,127   60,248   61,908   126,803    1,123,305 
Other assetsa                                            89,821 
Total assets                                            1,213,126 
Liabilities             
Deposits from banks   5,906   39,610   1,120   672   351   193   13   328   21       48,214 
Items in the course of collection due to other banks   636                               636 
Customer accounts   317,963   86,081   5,305   3,023   4,528   2,836   1,262   1,043   441   696    423,178 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   5,480   9,235   1,934   917   1,326   311      83   474       19,760 
Trading portfolio liabilities   34,687                               34,687 
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   15,285   41,583   3,970   4,112   1,827   7,540   5,762   5,773   3,588   6,591    96,031 
Derivative financial instruments   339,646   4         2   10   34   46   75   670    340,487 
Debt securities in issue   27   16,731   11,713   5,902   6,867   3,166   8,069   9,186   10,152   4,119    75,932 
Subordinated liabilities      8         1,317   3,230   56   7,487   6,575   4,710    23,383 
Other financial liabilities      3,198            1,189                4,387 
Total financial liabilities   719,630   196,450   24,042   14,626   16,218   18,475   15,196   23,946   21,326   16,786    1,066,695 
Other liabilitiesa                                            75,066 
Total liabilities                                            1,141,761 
Cumulative liquidity gap   (135,839  (162,532  (166,425  (170,995  (173,181  (150,222  (130,291  (93,989  (53,407  56,610    71,365 

Note

a As at 31 December 2017, other assets includes balances of £1,193m (2016: £71,454m) and other liabilities includes balances of £0m (2016: £65,292m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 43 for details.

Expected maturity dates do not differ significantly from the contract dates, except for:

 

§ trading portfolio assets and liabilities and derivative financial instruments, which may not be held to maturity as part of the Group’s trading strategies

 

§ retail deposits, which are included within customer accounts, are repayable on demand or at short notice on a contractual basis. In practice, these instruments form a stable base for the Group’s operations and liquidity needs because of the broad base of customers both numerically and by depositor type (see behaviouralBehavioural maturity profile on page 160)128); and

 

§ financial assets designated at fair value held in respect of linked liabilities, which are managed with the associated liabilities.

 

Note

aOther assets includes balances of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and other liabilities includes balances of £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) relating to amounts held for sale. Please refer to Note 44 for details.

134    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  169


    

    

    

    

 

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities on an undiscounted basis (audited)

The table below presents the cash flows payable by the Group under financial liabilities by remaining contractual maturities at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the contractual undiscounted cash flows of all financial liabilities (i.e. nominal values).

The balances in the below table do not agree directly to the balances in the consolidated balance sheet as the table incorporates all cash flows, on an undiscounted basis, related to both principal as well as those associated with all future coupon payments.

Derivative financial instruments held for trading and trading portfolio liabilities are included in the on demand column at their fair value.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value in respect of linked liabilities under investment contracts have been excluded from this analysis as the Group is not exposed to liquidity risk arising from them.

 

  Contractual maturity of financial liabilities – undiscounted (including BAGL Group) (audited)  
      

 

 

On

demand

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Not more

than three

months

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

months but

not more

than six

months

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Over six

months but

not more

than one year

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over one

year

but not

more than

three years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over three

years but

not more

than five

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

 

Over five

years but

not more

than ten

years

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Over ten

years

£m

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

 As at 31 December 2015                  
 Deposits from banks   5,717     38,721     1,357     877     108     70     239     10     47,099  
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks   1,013                                        1,013  
 Customer accounts   312,921     80,142     7,640     9,655     3,858     1,854     744     3,087     419,901  
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   66     17,349     3,482     2,853     898          491          25,139  
 Trading portfolio liabilities   33,967                                        33,967  
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   319     52,202     3,165     5,830     11,851     7,840     4,690     8,694     94,591  
 Derivative financial instruments   323,786     81     94     102     57     59     80     16     324,275  
 Debt securities in issue   50     14,352     5,845     9,277     16,777     14,175     11,276     4,547     76,299  
 Subordinated liabilities   2     253     403     344     6,057     3,737     9,969     6,313     27,078  
  Other financial liabilities        2,685               1,075                    3,760  
  Total financial liabilities   677,841     205,785     21,986     28,938     40,681     27,735     27,489     22,667     1,053,122  
 As at 31 December 2014                  
 Deposits from banks   7,978     48,155     1,042     804     287     75     62     29     58,432  
 Items in the course of collection due to other banks   1,177                                        1,177  
 Customer accounts   317,449     86,659     7,364     8,854     4,851     1,399     1,046     2,218     429,840  
 Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   40     111,769     7,178     4,837     236          428          124,488  
 Trading portfolio liabilities   45,124                                        45,124  
 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   665     6,561     3,508     7,378     12,854     10,285     7,170     14,273     62,694  
 Derivative financial instruments   438,623     30     7     17     137     85     314     341     439,554  
 Debt securities in issue   10     19,481     11,406     14,952     19,416     11,352     12,075     2,760     91,452  
 Subordinated liabilities        380     324     171     1,403     4,339     11,218     6,683     24,518  
  Other financial liabilities        3,060               815                    3,875  
  Total financial liabilities   811,066     276,095     30,829     37,013     39,999     27,535     32,313     26,304     1,281,154  

Contractual maturity of financial liabilities - undiscounted (audited) 
           Over three                         
           months   Over six   Over one   Over three   Over five         
           but not   months   year   years but   years but         
       Not more   more   but not   but not   not more   not more         
   On   than three   than six   more than   more than   than five   than ten   Over ten     
   demand   months   months   one year   three years   years   years   years   Total 
    £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

As at 31 December 2017

                  

Deposits from banks

   4,967    30,831    720    654    213    316    36        37,737 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   446                                446 

Customer accounts

   334,961    74,830    7,383    7,020    3,197    884    231    725    429,231 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   3,550    17,847    4,526    3,557    410    10,259    490        40,639 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   37,351                                37,351 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   13,298    102,983    10,609    9,118    18,142    6,177    5,490    12,834    178,651 

Derivative financial instruments

   237,235    9    3        15    5    48    1,755    239,070 

Debt securities in issue

   907    17,614    8,565    7,025    13,786    13,928    12,687    6,734    81,246 

Subordinated liabilities

       2,822    1,816    685    5,501    10,232    6,243    6,231    33,530 
Other financial liabilities       3,793            781                4,574 
Total financial liabilities   632,715    250,729    33,622    28,059    42,045    41,801    25,225    28,279    1,082,475 
As at 31 December 2016                  

Deposits from banks

   5,906    39,617    1,122    1,025    207    328    21        48,226 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   636                                636 

Customer accounts

   317,963    86,101    5,325    7,565    4,266    1,120    1,403    1,013    424,756 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   5,480    9,249    1,939    2,253    312    83    474        19,790 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   34,687                                34,687 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   15,285    41,599    3,986    5,979    13,445    5,899    3,900    8,443    98,536 

Derivative financial instruments

   339,646    4        2    44    48    84    1,086    340,914 

Debt securities in issue

   27    17,126    11,894    13,285    12,915    10,505    12,282    6,054    84,088 

Subordinated liabilities

       398    680    3,117    7,089    9,324    7,842    4,866    33,316 
Other financial liabilities       3,198            1,189                4,387 
Total financial liabilities   719,630    197,292    24,946    33,226    39,467    27,307    26,006    21,462    1,089,336 

 

170  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    135


 


Risk review

Risk performance

FundingTreasury and Capital risk – liquidityLiquidity

    

 

Maturity of off-balanceoff balance sheet commitments received and given (audited)

The table below presents the maturity split of the Group’s off-balanceoff balance sheet commitments received and given at the balance sheet date. The amounts disclosed in the table are the undiscounted cash flows (i.e. nominal values) on the basis of earliest opportunity at which they are available.

 

  Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments received (including BAGL)  
      
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over nine
months
but not
more
than one
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Over ten
years
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

 As at 31 December 2015                      
 Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance   6,329     138     4     5     32     84     12     97     4     17     6,722  
  Forward starting repurchase agreementsa        392          73                                   465  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments received   6,329     530     4     78     32     84     12     97     4     17     7,187  
 As at 31 December 2014                      
 Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance   6,571     60     37     38     39     152     138     203     65          7,303  
  Forward starting repurchase agreementsa        10,778                                             10,778  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments received   6,571     10,838     37     38     39     152     138     203     65          18,081  
                       
  Maturity analysis of off-balance sheet commitments given (including BAGL) (audited)  
      
 
 
On
demand
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Not more
than three
months
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over three
months
but not
more
than six
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
 

 

Over nine
months
but not
more
than one
year

£m

  
  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over one
year but
not more
than two
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 
 

 

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

  
  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Over ten
years
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

 As at 31 December 2015                      
 Contingent liabilities   17,421     933     493     140     590     423     158     161     164     138     20,621  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   617     30     10          61     119          8               845  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa        93                                             93  
  Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   274,020     1,152     1,564     1,116     1,071     873     554     906     78     35     281,369  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments given   292,058     2,208     2,067     1,256     1,722     1,415     712     1,075     242     173     302,928  
 As at 31 December 2014                      
 Contingent liabilities   17,304     1,770     352     162     102     410     55     83     1,037     49     21,324  
 Documentary credits and other short-term trade-related transactions   869     75     13          19     115                         1,091  
 Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa        13,735          121                                   13,856  
  Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   262,540     4,045     1,722     844     646     3,638     877     1,846     137     20     276,315  
  Total off-balance sheet commitments given   280,713     19,625     2,087     1,127     767     4,163     932     1,929     1,174     69     312,586  
Maturity analysis ofoff-balance sheet commitments received (audited) 
    

On

demand

£m

   

Not more

than three

months
£m

   

Over three
months
but not
more

than six
months
£m

   Over six
months
but not
more
than nine
months
£m
   Over nine
months
but not
more than
one year
£m
   Over one
year but
not more
than two
years
£m
   

Over two
years but
not more
than three
years

£m

   

Over three
years but
not more
than five
years

£m

   

Over five
years but
not more
than ten
years

£m

   Over ten
years
£m
   

Total

£m

 

As at 31 December 2017

                      
Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance   6,373    5    2    3    1    8    7    5    3    4    6,411 
Forward starting repurchase agreements       29                                    29 
Total off balance sheet commitments received   6,373    34    2    3    1    8    7    5    3    4    6,440 
As at 31 December 2016                      
Guarantees, letters of credit and credit insurance   6,044    18    1    410    2    23    1    3            6,502 
Forward starting repurchase agreements   102    246        1            18                367 
Total off balance sheet commitments received   6,146    264    1    411    2    23    19    3            6,869 
  
Maturity analysis ofoff-balance sheet commitments given (audited) 
           Over three   Over six                             
           months   months   Over nine   Over one   Over two   Over three   Over five         
           but not   but not   months   year but   years but   years but   years but         
       Not more   more   more   but not   not more   not more   not more   not more         
   On   than three   than six   than nine   more than   than two   than three   than five   than ten   Over ten     
   demand   months   months   months   one year   years   years   years   years   years   Total 
    £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
As at 31 December 2017                      

Contingent liabilities

   16,047    1,085    560    92    242    346    80    59    245    256    19,012 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions   34    593    147    26    6    5    1                812 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   311,481    1,144    883    77    778    44    47    259    2    46    314,761 
Totaloff-balance sheet commitments given   327,562    2,822    1,590    195    1,026    395    128    318    247    302    334,585 
As at 31 December 2016                      

Contingent liabilities

   17,111    425    845    233    285    355    187    88    259    151    19,939 
Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions   987    10    8                                1,005 
Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments   300,043    479    415    604    818    55    47    150        70    302,681 
Totaloff-balance sheet commitments given   318,141    914    1,268    837    1,103    410    234    238    259    221    323,625 

136    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and capital risk – Capital

Capital risk

The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans.

All disclosures in this section pages 137 to 145 are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Key metrics

Fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 ratio13.3%
Average UK leverage ratio4.9%

Overview

The fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio, among other metrics, is a measure of the capital strength and resilience of Barclays. Maintenance of our capital is vital in order to meet the minimum capital requirements, and to cover the Group’s current and forecast business needs, and associated risks in order to provide a viable and sustainable business offering.

This section provides an overview of the Group’s: (i) regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements; (ii) capital resources; (iii) risk weighted assets (RWAs); and (iv) leverage ratios and exposures.

More details on monitoring and managing capital risk may be found in the Risk Management sections on pages 346 and 347.

Summary of performance in the period

Barclays continues to be in excess of minimum transitional and end point capital requirements, and regulatory minimum leverage requirements.

The fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 13.3% (December 2016: 12.4%) principally due to a reduction in risk weighted assets (RWAs) of £52.6bn to £313.0bn. CET1 capital decreased £3.6bn to £41.6bn.

The sell down of Barclays’ holding in BAGL to 14.9%, resulting in regulatory proportional consolidation, increased the CET1 ratio by c.60bps with a £31.1bn reduction in RWAs offset by £1.8bn reduction due to BAGL minority interests no longer being included in CET1 capital.

Losses in respect of the discontinued operation due to the impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL allocated to goodwill, and the recycling of the BAGL currency translation reserve losses to the income statement, had no impact on CET1.

The CET1 ratio increased by a further c.50bps as a result of their RWA reductions, excluding the impact of foreign currency movements, including reductions on Non-Core.

Excluding the impacts of BAGL and foreign currency movements, CET1 capital decreased further as profits relating to continuing operations, after absorbing the impact of the US DTAre-measurement, were more than offset by the redemption of USD preference shares and the payment of pension deficit reduction contributions in the year.

The average UK leverage ratio increased to 4.9% (December 2016: 4.5%) primarily driven by the issuance of additional tier 1 capital (AT1) securities, the reduction in Non-Core related exposures and due to BAGL’s regulatory proportional consolidation.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    137


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Capital

Regulatory minimum capital and leverage requirements

Capital

Barclays’ end point CET1 regulatory requirement is expected to be 11.4% comprising of a 4.5% Pillar 1 minimum, a 2.5% Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB), a 1.5% Global Systemically Important Institution(G-SII) buffer, a 2.4% Pillar 2A requirement, and an expected 0.5% Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB).

The CCB and theG-SII buffer, determined by the PRA in line with guidance from the Financial Stability Board (FSB), are subject to phased implementation at 25% per annum from 2016 with full effect from 2019. The CCB has been set at 2.5% with 1.25% applicable for 2017. TheG-SII buffer for 2017 was set at 2% with 1% applicable for 2017. On 21 November 2016, the FSB confirmed that theG-SII buffer for 2018 has been set at 1.5% with 1.1% applicable for 2018. On 21 November 2017, the FSB confirmed that theG-SII buffer will remain at 1.5% applicable for 2019.

On 25 September 2017, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) reaffirmed that it expects to increase the UK CCyB rate from 0% to 0.5% applicable from 27 June 2018 and to 1% applicable from 28 November 2018. Based on current UK exposures, Barclays’ CCyB is expected to be approximately 0.5% from November 2018. Other national authorities also determine the appropriate CCyBs that should be applied to exposures in their jurisdiction however based on current exposures these are not material.

Barclays’ Pillar 2A requirement as per the PRA’s Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) for Q417 and 2018 is 4.3% of which at least 56.25% needs to be met in CET1 form, equating to approximately 2.4% of RWAs. Certain elements of the Pillar 2A requirement are a fixed quantum while others are a proportion of RWAs and are based on a point in time assessment. The Pillar 2A requirement is subject to at least annual review.

For regulatory reporting purposes, BAGL is treated on a proportional consolidation basis based on Barclays’ holding in BAGL of 14.9%. The CRD IV CET1 transitional minimum capital requirement for 2017 is 9.2% which comprised of a 4.5% Pillar 1 minimum, a 2.4% Pillar 2A requirement, a 1.25% CCB, a 1%G-SII buffer and a 0% CCyB.

Leverage

In October 2017, following the FPC recommendation, the PRA increased the minimum requirement for the UK leverage ratio from 3% to 3.25%.

Barclays is subject to a leverage ratio requirement that is implemented on a phased basis, with a transitional requirement of 3.6% as at 31 December 2017; this comprises the 3.25% minimum requirement, a transitionalG-SII additional leverage ratio buffer(G-SII ALRB) of 0.35% and a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB) which is currently nil. Although the leverage ratio is expressed in terms of tier 1 capital, 75% of the minimum requirement, equating to 2.4375%, needs to be met with CET1 capital. In addition, theG-SII ALRB and CCLB must be covered solely with CET1 capital. The CET1 capital held against the 0.35% transitionalG-SII ALRB was £3.4bn. The fully loaded expected end point UK leverage requirement is 4.0%.

138    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Capital Resources

The CRR and Capital Requirements Directive (CRD) implemented Basel III within the EU (collectively known as CRD IV) on 1 January 2014. The rules are supplemented by Regulatory Technical Standards and the PRA’s rulebook, including the implementation of transitional rules. However, rules and guidance are still subject to change as certain aspects of CRD IV are dependent on final technical standards and clarifications to be issued by the EBA and adopted by the European Commission and the PRA.

Capital ratios         
As at 31 December  2017  2016 
Fully loaded CET1a,b   13.3%   12.4% 
PRA transitional tier 1c,d   17.2%   15.6% 
PRA transitional total capitalc,d   21.5%   19.6% 
   
Capital resources (audited)         
As at 31 December  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Total equity (excludingnon-controlling interests) per the balance sheet   63,905   64,873 
Less: other equity instruments (recognised as AT1 capital)   (8,941  (6,449
Adjustment to retained earnings for foreseeable dividends   (392  (388
Minority interests (amount allowed in consolidated CET1)      1,825 
Other regulatory adjustments and deductions   
Additional value adjustments (PVA)   (1,385  (1,571
Goodwill and intangible assets   (7,908  (9,054
Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding temporary differences   (593  (494
Fair value reserves related to gains or losses on cash flow hedges   (1,161  (2,104
Excess of expected losses over impairment   (1,239  (1,294
Gains or losses on liabilities at fair value resulting from own credit   83   86 
Defined-benefit pension fund assets   (732  (38
Direct and indirect holdings by an institution of own CET1 instruments   (50  (50
Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount above 10% threshold)      (183
Other regulatory adjustments   (22  45 
Fully loaded CET1 capital   41,565   45,204 
Additional tier 1 (AT1) capital   
Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts   8,941   6,449 
Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries   3,538   5,445 
Other regulatory adjustments and deductions   (130  (130
Transitional AT1 capitale   12,349   11,764 
PRA transitional tier 1 capital   53,914   56,968 
Tier 2 (T2) capital   
Capital instruments and the related share premium accounts   6,472   3,769 
Qualifying T2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiaries   7,040   11,366 
Other regulatory adjustments and deductions   (251  (257
PRA transitional total regulatory capital   67,175   71,846 

Notes

aThe transitional regulatory adjustments to CET1 capital are no longer applicable resulting in CET1 capital on a fully loaded basis being equal to that on a transitional basis.
bThe CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) as applicable to Barclays’ tier 2 Contingent Capital Notes was 13.9% based on £43.5bn of transitional CRD IV CET1 capital and £313bn RWAs. The transitional CET1 ratio according to the FSA October 2012 transitional statement would be 13.9%. This is calculated as CET1 capital as adjusted for the transitional relief (£43.5bn), divided by CRD IV RWAs. The following transitional relief items are added back to CET1 capital: Goodwill and Intangibles (£1.6bn), Deferred tax asset (£0.1bn) and Expected losses over impairment (£0.2bn).
cThe PRA transitional capital is based on the PRA Rulebook and accompanying supervisory statements.
dAs at 31 December 2017, Barclays’ fully loaded tier 1 capital was £50,376m, and the fully loaded tier 1 ratio was 16.1%. Fully loaded total regulatory capital was £64,646m and the fully loaded total capital ratio was 20.7%. The fully loaded tier 1 capital and total capital measures are calculated without applying the transitional provisions set out in CRD IV and assessing compliance of AT1 and T2 instruments against the relevant criteria in CRD IV.
eOf the £12.3bn transitional AT1 capital, fully loaded AT1 capital comprises the £8.9bn of contingent convertible instruments issued by Barclays PLC (the holding company) and related share premium accounts, and £0.1bn capital deductions. It excludes £3.5bn legacy tier 1 capital instruments issued by subsidiaries that are subject to grandfathering. For the leverage ratio, only the AT1 capital on a fully loaded basis is applicable.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    139


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Capital

Movement in CET1 capital

2017

£m

Opening balance as at 1 January45,204
Loss for the period attributable to equity holders(1,283
Own credit relating to derivative liabilities78
Dividends paid and foreseen(978
Decrease in retained regulatory capital generated from earnings(2,183
Net impact of share schemes86
Available for sale reserve438
Currency translation reserve3
Other reserves(920
Decrease in other qualifying reserves(393
Pensionsre-measurements within reserves53
Defined-benefit pension fund asset deduction(694
Net impact of pensions(641
Minority interests(1,825
Additional value adjustments (PVA)186
Goodwill and intangible assets1,146
Deferred tax assets that rely on future profitability excluding those arising from temporary differences(99
Excess of expected loss over impairment55
Deferred tax assets arising from temporary differences (amount above 10% threshold)183
Other regulatory adjustments(68
Decrease in regulatory capital due to adjustments and deductions(422
Closing balance as at 31 December41,565

CET1 capital decreased to £41.6bn (December 2016: £45.2bn) due to the following:

a £1.3bn loss for the period attributable to equity holders reflecting profit after tax of £1.1bn, including the net tax charge of £0.9bn due to there-measurement of US DTAs in Q417 offset by £2.3bn of losses in respect of the discontinued operation. The discontinued operation losses, resulting from the impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL allocated to goodwill and the recycling of BAGL currency translation reserve losses to the income statement, had no impact on CET1 capital with offsetting movements in the goodwill and intangible assets deduction and other qualifying reserves

a £1.0bn decrease for dividends paid and foreseen

a £0.4bn increase in the available for sale reserve primarily due to gains from changes in fair value on BAGL’s remaining shares held as available for sale

The currency translation reserve remained flat in the year largely due to the £1.4bn recycling of BAGL losses to the income statement which were offset by a £1.3bn decrease driven by the depreciation of period end USD against GBP

a £0.9bn decrease in other reserves which included a £0.5bn decrease as a result of USD preference share redemptions and £0.4bn of separation payments in relation to the sale of Barclays’ holding in BAGL

a £0.6bn decrease net of tax as a result of movements relating to pensions. The pension asset capital deduction increase relates to the UK Retirement Fund, which is the Group’s main pension scheme, moving from a small deficit in December 2016 to a £1.0bn surplus largely due to payment deficit contributions

a £1.8bn decrease due to BAGL minority interests which are no longer eligible as a result of proportional consolidation of BAGL

a £1.1bn increase due to a reduced goodwill and intangible assets deduction largely as a result of the impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL allocated to goodwill.

140    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk weighted assets

Risk weighted assets (RWAs) by risk type and business 
   Credit risk        Counterparty credit riska       Market risk                Operational
risk
   Total
RWAs
 

As at 31 December

2017

  

Std

£m

   

IRB

£m

   

Std

£m

   

IRB

£m

   

Settlement
Risk

£m

   

CVA

£m

  

Std

£m

  

IMA

£m

  £m   £m 
Barclays UK   3,811    54,955                         12,167    70,933 
Barclays International   49,058    69,520    17,000    17,243    101    2,776   13,313   13,547   27,708    210,266 
Head Officeb   2,907    9,766    65    633        225   88   1,365   16,785    31,834 
Barclays Group   55,776    134,241    17,065    17,876    101    3,001   13,401   14,912   56,660    313,033 

As at 31 December

2016

      
Barclays UK   5,592    49,591    47                     12,293    67,523 
Barclays International   53,201    82,327    13,515    13,706    30    3,581   9,343   9,460   27,538    212,701 
Head Officeb   9,048    27,122    77    1,157        927   482   2,323   12,156    53,292 
BarclaysNon-Core   4,714    9,945    1,043    6,081    37    2,235   477   2,928   4,673    32,133 
Barclays Group   72,555    168,985    14,682    20,944    67    6,743   10,302   14,711   56,660    365,649 
                                                 
Movement analysis of risk weighted assets 
Risk weighted assets                           

Credit risk

£bn

  Counterparty
credit riska
£bn
  

Market risk

£bn

  

Operational

risk

£bn

   Total
RWAs
£bn
 
As at 31 December 2016             241.5   42.4   25.0   56.7    365.6 
Book size             (11.0  (1.2  5.4       (6.8
Acquisitions and disposals             (31.7  (1.5  (1.6      (34.8
Book quality             (3.5  0.5   0.1       (2.9
Model updates             (1.4            (1.4
Methodology and policy             0.6   (2.2  (0.6      (2.2
Foreign exchange movementc                            (4.5            (4.5
As at 31 December 2017                            190.0   38.0   28.3   56.7    313.0 

Notes

aRWAs in relation to default fund contributions are included in counterparty credit risk.
bIncludes Africa Banking RWAs.
cForeign exchange movement does not include FX for modelled counterparty risk or modelled market risk.

RWAs decreased £52.6bn to £313.0bn:

book size decreased RWAs by £6.8bn primarily due to portfolio rundowns related to BarclaysNon-Core, there-measurement of US DTAs as a result of the US Tax Cuts and Jobs Act and securitisation transactions, partially offset by increased trading activity in investment bank businesses

acquisitions and disposals decreased RWAs £34.8bn primarily as a result of the proportional consolidation of BAGL

book quality decreased RWAs £2.9bn primarily due to changes in risk profile in CIB

model updates decreased RWAs £1.4bn primarily due to model changes in Africa Banking prior to the sell down of Barclays holding in BAGL

methodology and policy decreased RWAs £2.2bn primarily due to a revised calculation basis for modelled derivative exposures

foreign exchange movements decreased RWAs £4.5bn primarily due to the depreciation of period end USD against GBP.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    141


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Capital

Leverage ratios and exposures

Barclays is required to disclose an average UK leverage ratio which is based on capital and exposure measures on the last day of each month in the quarter; as well as a UK leverage ratio which is based on the last day of the quarter. Both approaches exclude qualifying claims on central banks from the leverage exposures. Barclays is also required to disclose a Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) leverage ratio, which is based on the end point CRR definition of tier 1 capital and the CRR definition of leverage exposure.

Leverage exposure         
Leverage ratios  As at
31.12.17
£bn
  As at
31.12.16
£bn
 
Average UK leverage exposure   1,045   1,137 

Average fully loaded tier 1 capital

   51.2   51.6 
Average UK leverage ratio   4.9%   4.5% 
UK leverage ratio   5.1%   5.0% 
CRR leverage ratio   4.5%   4.6% 
UK leverage exposure         
Accounting assets   
Derivative financial instruments   238   347 
Cash collateral   53   67 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   12   13 
Financial assets designated at fair valuea   116   79 
Loans and advances and other assets   714   707 
Total IFRS assets   1,133           1,213 
Regulatory consolidation adjustments   8   (6
Derivatives adjustments   
Derivatives netting   (217  (313
Adjustments to cash collateral   (42  (50
Net written credit protection   14   12 
Potential Future Exposure (PFE) on derivatives   120   136 
Total derivatives adjustments   (125  (215
Securities financing transactions (SFTs) adjustments   19   29 
Regulatory deductions and other adjustments   (13  (15
Weightedoff-balance sheet commitments   103   119 
CRR leverage exposure   1,125   1,125 
Qualifying central bank claims   (140  (75
UK leverage exposure   985   1,050 
Fully loaded CET1 capital   41.6   45.2 
Fully loaded AT1 capital   8.8   6.8 
Fully loaded tier 1 capital   50.4   52.0 

Note

aForward starting reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreementsIncluded within financial assets designated at fair value through profit and loss, new forward startingare reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £100bn (December 2016: £63bn).

The average UK leverage ratio increased to 4.9% (December 2016: 4.5%) primarily driven by the issuance of AT1 securities, the reduction in Non-Core related exposures and due to BAGL’s regulatory proportional deconsolidation.

The CRR leverage ratio decreased to 4.5% (December 2016: 4.6%). The difference between the average UK leverage ratio and the CRR leverage ratio movement is primarily driven by an increase in cash at central banks, which are excluded from the UK leverage ratio calculation. Additionally, the year end fully loaded tier 1 capital is lower than the average due to the re-measurement of US DTAs as a result of the US Tax Cuts and Jobs Act in December;

loans and advances and other assets increased by £7bn to £714bn. This was primarily due to a £69bn increase in cash and balances at central banks largely driven by an increase in the cash contribution to the Group liquidity pool mainly exempt under UK leverage rules and a £70bn decrease in assets held for sale driven by the sell down of Barclays’ holding in BAGL.

reverse repurchase agreements are withinincreased £36bn to £112bn, primarily due to an increase in matched book trading

net derivative leverage exposures decreased £33bn to £166bn due to a reduction in interest rate and foreign exchange derivatives, the scoperundown ofNon-Core related assets, a decrease in cash collateral and the depreciation of period end USD and JPY against GBP

regulatory consolidation adjustments increased £14bn to £8bn primarily due to the proportional consolidation of BAGL following the sell down of Barclays’ holding

weighted off balance sheet commitments decreased £16bn to £103bn primarily due to the proportional consolidation of BAGL following the sell down of Barclays’ holding.

142    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional Barclays regulatory disclosures are prepared in accordance with the EBA Guidelines on disclosure requirements under Part Eight of Regulation (EU) No 575/2013 (see Barclays PLC Pillar 3 Report 2017) and will be disclosed on 22 February 2018, available at home.barclays/results.

Foreign exchange risk (audited)

The Group is exposed to two sources of foreign exchange risk.

a) Transactional foreign currency exposure

Transactional foreign currency exposures represent exposure on banking assets and liabilities, denominated in currencies other than the functional currency of the transacting entity.

The Group’s risk management policies prohibit the holding of significant open positions in foreign currencies outside the trading portfolio managed by Barclays International which is monitored through VaR.

Banking book transactional foreign exchange risk outside of Barclays International is monitored on a daily basis by the market risk function and minimised by the businesses.

b) Translational foreign exchange exposure

The Group’s investments in overseas subsidiaries and branches create capital resources denominated in foreign currencies, principally USD and EUR. Changes in the GBP value of the net investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

The Group’s strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange movements, by matching the CET1 capital movements to the revaluation of the Group’s foreign currency RWA exposures.

Functional currency of operations

Functional currency of operations (audited) 
    Foreign
currency
net
investments
£m
   

Borrowings

which hedge
the net
investments
£m

  

Derivatives

which hedge
the net
investments
£m

  Structural
currency
exposures
pre-
economic
hedges
£m
   Economic
hedges
£m
  Remaining
structural
currency
exposures
£m
 
As at 31 December 2017         
USD   27,848    (12,404  (540  14,904    (6,153  8,751 
EUR   2,489    (3     2,486    (2,127  359 
ZAR   8          8       8 
JPY   467    (152  (301  14       14 
Other   2,475       (1,299  1,176       1,176 
Total   33,287    (12,559  (2,140  18,588    (8,280  10,308 
As at 31 December 2016         
USD   29,460    (12,769     16,691    (7,898  8,793 
EUR   2,121    (363     1,758    (2,053  (295
ZAR   3,679       (2,571  1,108       1,108 
JPY   438    (209  (224  5       5 
Other   2,793       (1,318  1,475       1,475 
Total   38,491    (13,341  (4,113  21,037    (9,951  11,086 

The economic hedges primarily represent the USD and EUR preference shares and Additional Tier 1 (AT1) instruments that are held as equity. These are accounted for at historic cost under IFRS and do not qualify as hedges for accounting purposes.

During 2017, total structural currency exposure net of hedging instruments decreased by £0.8bn to £10.3bn (2016: £11.1bn). Foreign currency net investments decreased by £5.2bn to £33.3bn (2016: £38.5bn) driven predominantly by the decrease in ZAR investments following the partial disposal of the Group’s investment in BAGL and accounting deconsolidation of the remaining holding. The hedges associated with these investments decreased by £2.8bn to £14.7bn (2016: £17.5bn).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    143


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Capital

Pension risk review

The UK Retirement Fund (UKRF) represents approximately 96% (2016: 96%) of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations globally. As such this risk review section focuses exclusively on the UKRF. The UKRF is closed to new entrants and there is no new final salary benefit being accrued. Existing active members accrue a combination of a cash balance benefit and a defined contribution element. Pension risk arises as the market value of the pension fund assets may decline, investment returns may reduce or the estimated value of the pension liabilities may increase.

See page 347 for more information on how pension risk is managed.

Assets

The Trustee Board of the UKRF defines its overall long-term investment strategy with investments across a broad range of asset classes. This results in an appropriate mix of return seeking assets as well as liability matching assets to better match future pension obligations. The main market risks within the asset portfolio are against interest rates and equities. The split of scheme assets is shown within Note 35. The fair value of the UKRF assets was £30.1bn as at 31 December 2017 (2016: £31.8bn).

Liabilities

The UKRF retirement benefit obligations are a series of future cash flows with relatively long duration. On an IAS 19 basis these cash flows are sensitive to changes in the expected long-term price inflation rate (RPI) and the discount rate (AA corporate bond yield curve):

An increase in long-term expected inflation corresponds to an increase in liabilities

A decrease in the discount rate corresponds to an increase in liabilities.

Pension risk is generated through the Group’s defined benefit schemes and this risk is set to reduce over time as the main defined benefit scheme is closed to new entrants. The chart below outlines the shape of the UKRF’s liability cash flow profile as at 31 December 2017 that takes account of the future inflation indexing of payments to beneficiaries. The majority of the cash flows (approximately 88%) fall between 0 and 40 years, peaking between 11 and 20 years and reducing thereafter. The shape may vary depending on changes to inflation and longevity expectations and any members who elect to transfer out. Transfers out will bring forward the liability cash flows.

For more detail on the UKRF’s financial and demographic assumptions see Note 35 to the financial statements.

 Proportion of liability cash flows

  IAS19 Pension Position in 2017

LOGOLOGO

The graph above shows the UKRF’s net IAS 19 pension position for eachquarter-end for the past two years. The volatility shown by the fluctuation in the net IAS 19 pension position is reflective of the movements observed in the market.

In Q2 2016 the UKRF IAS 19 position deteriorated as the AA discount rate moved lower, driven by both a decrease in long-dated government bond yields as well as a tightening in credit spreads.

During H2 2016 this trend continued driven by the outcome of the EU Referendum in June as well as the Bank of England’s announcement on quantitative easing in August. These events drove significant market moves adversely affecting the UKRF AA discount rate. For example the market index IBOXX £-Corp AA yield was 53bps lower between June and September.

Gilt yields reverted higher in the months following September 2016 which was also reflected in a higher AA discount rate. As a result the net IAS 19 position ended 2016 close to zero.

During 2017 the net improvement in the IAS 19 position was largely driven by bank contributions. Changes to market levels, in particular equity prices and interest rates, largely offset each other over the year.

Please see Note 35 for the sensitivity of the UKRF to changes in key assumptions.

144    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk measurement

In line with Barclays’ risk management framework the assets and liabilities of the UKRF are modelled within a VaR framework to show the volatility of the pension positions on a total portfolio level. This enables the risks, diversification and liability matching characteristics of the UKRF obligations and investments to be adequately captured. VaR is measured and monitored on a monthly basis. Risks are reviewed and reported regularly at forums including the Board Risk Committee, the Group Risk Committee, the Pensions Management Group and the Pension Executive Board. The VaR model takes into account the valuation of the liabilities based on an IAS 19 basis (see Note 35). The Trustee receives quarterly VaR measures on a funding basis.

The pension liability is also sensitive to post-retirement mortality assumptions which are reviewed regularly. See Note 35 for more details.

In addition the impact of pension risk to the Group is taken into account as part of the stress testing process. Stress testing is performed internally on at least an annual basis. The UKRF exposure is also included as part of regulatory stress tests.

Barclays defined benefit pension schemes affects capital in two ways:

An IAS 39 and19 deficit is treated as a liability on the Group’s balance sheet. Movement in a deficit due tore-measurements, including actuarial losses, are recognised immediately through Other Comprehensive Income and as derivativessuch reduces shareholders’ equity and CET1 capital. An IAS 19 surplus is treated as an asset on the balance sheet.sheet and increases shareholders’ equity; however it is deducted for the purposes of determining CET1 capital.

In the Group’s statutory balance sheet an IAS 19 surplus or deficit is partially offset by a deferred tax liability or asset respectively. These may or may not be recognised for calculating CET1 capital depending on the overall deferred tax position of the Group at the particular time.

Pension risk is taken into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment undertaken by the PRA at least annually. The Pillar 2A requirement forms part of the Group’s overall regulatory minimum requirement for CET1 capital, Tier 1 capital and total capital. More detail on minimum regulatory requirements can be found in the capital risk management section on page 346.

Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)

Under the Bank of England’s statement of policy on MREL, the BoE will set MREL for UK globally systemically important banks(G-SIBs) as necessary to implement the total loss-absorbing capacity (TLAC) standard and institution or group-specific MREL requirements will depend on the preferred resolution strategy for that institution or group.

The MREL requirements will be phased in from 1 January 2019 and will be fully implemented by 1 January 2022, at which timeG-SIBs with resolution entities incorporated in the UK, including Barclays, will be required to meet an MREL equivalent to the higher of (i) two times the sum of its Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements or (ii) the higher of two times its leverage ratio or 6.75% of leverage exposures. However, the PRA will review the MREL calibration by the end of 2020, including assessing the proposal for Pillar 2A recapitalisation which may drive a different 1 January 2022 MREL requirement than currently proposed. In addition, it is proposed that CET1 capital cannot be counted towards both MREL and the combined buffer requirement (CBR), meaning that the CBR will effectively be applied above both the Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements relating to own funds and MREL.

Barclays’ indicative MREL requirement is currently expected to be 29.1% of RWAs from 1 January 2022 consisting of the following components:

Loss absorption and recapitalisation amounts consisting of 8% Pillar 1 and 4.3% Pillar 2A buffers respectively

Regulatory buffers including a 1.5%G-SII buffer, 2.5% Capital Conservation Buffer and 0.5% from the planned introduction of a 1% Countercyclical Capital Buffer for the UKa

MREL position and ratios          
MREL ratios  2017   2016 
Fully loaded CET1 capital   13.3%    12.4% 
Additional tier 1 (AT1) capital instruments and related share premium accounts   2.9%    1.8% 
Tier 2 (T2) capital instruments and related share premium accounts   2.1%    1.0% 
Term senior unsecured funding   6.8%    4.6% 
Total Barclays PLC (the Parent company) MREL ratio   25.0%    19.8% 
Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiariesb   1.1%    1.5% 
Qualifying T2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiariesb   2.2%    3.0% 
Total MREL ratio on a transitional basis, including eligible Barclays Bank PLC instruments   28.2%    24.2% 
MREL position  £m   £m 
Fully loaded CET1 capital   41,565    45,204 
AT1 capital instruments and related share premium accounts   8,941    6,449 
T2 capital instruments and related share premium accounts   6,472    3,769 
Term senior unsecured funding   21,166    16,785 
Total Barclays PLC (the Parent company) MREL position   78,144    72,207 
Qualifying AT1 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiariesb   3,408    5,315 
Qualifying T2 capital (including minority interests) issued by subsidiariesb   6,789    11,109 
Total MREL position on a transitional basis, including eligible Barclays Bank PLC instruments   88,341    88,631 
Total RWAs   313,033    365,649 

Notes

a2022 requirements subject to Bank of England review by the end of 2020.
bIncludes other AT1 capital regulatory adjustments and deductions of £130m (December 2016: £130m) and other T2 capital regulatory adjustments and deductions of £251m (December 2016: £257m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    145


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Interest rate risk

Interest rate risk in the banking book

The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its(non-traded) assets and liabilities.

All disclosures in this section (pages 146 to 148) are unaudited and exclude BAGL unless otherwise stated.

Key metrics

AEaR+£76m
across the Group from a positive 100bps shock in interest rates. The Group maintains access to stable and diverse sources of funding across customer deposits and wholesale debt.

Overview

Thenon-traded market risk framework covers exposures in the banking book, mostly relating to accrual accounted and Available for Sale instruments. The potential volatility of net interest income is measured by an Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) metric which is monitored regularly and reported to Senior Management and the BRC as part of the limit monitoring framework.

For further detail on interest rate risk in the banking book governance and framework see pages 347 to 348.

Summary of performance in the period

Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR), is a key measure of interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB). The additional sensitivity measure of a positive 100bps shock was added for 2017, driven by the rise in GBP base rate in November 2017.

146    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Interest rate risk in the banking book

Net interest income sensitivity

The table below shows a sensitivity analysis onpre-tax net interest income fornon-trading financial assets and financial liabilities, including the effect of any hedging. The sensitivity has been measured using the Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR) methodology as described on page 347. Note that this metric assumes an instantaneous parallel change to interest rate forward curves. The model floors shocked market rates at zero; changes in Net Interest Income (NII) sensitivity are only observed where forward rates are greater than zero. The main model assumptions are: (i) one year time horizon; (ii) balance sheet is held constant; (iii) balances are adjusted for assumed behavioural profiles (e.g. considers that customers may remortgage before the contractual maturity); and (iv) behavioural assumptions are kept unchanged in all rate scenarios.

Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by business unita,b,c                  
    Barclays UK
£m
  

Barclays

International
£m

  Barclays
Non-Core
£m
   Total
£m
 
As at 31 December 2017      
+100bps   45   31       76 
+25bps   11   9       20 
-25bps   (61  (22      (83
As at 31 December 2016      
+100bps   19   46   6    71 
+25bps   5   16   1    22 
-25bps   (130  (90      (220

Notes

aExcludes investment banking business.
bExcludes Treasury operations, which are driven by the firm’s investments in the liquidity pool, which are risk managed using value-based risk measures described on pages 342 to 344. Treasury’s NII (AEaR) sensitivity to a +25/-25bps move is £13m / £(2)m respectively.
cExpected fixed rate mortgage pipeline completions in Barclays UK assumed to be consistent with level and timing of pipeline hedging.

NII asymmetry arises due to the current low level of interest rates. Modelled NII sensitivity to a -25bp shock to rates has however reduced year on year as a result of the change in UK base rate increasing from 0.25% to 0.5% in November 2017.

Both Barclays UK and Barclays International exposures to falling rates have reduced as a result of the higher base rate environment and the movement of customer savings rates away from the implicit customer savings market 0% floor.

Net interest income sensitivity (AEaR) by currencya                    
   2017   2016 
As at 31 December 2017  

  +25 basis

points

£m

   

  -25 basis

points

£m

   

  +25 basis

points

£m

   

  -25 basis

points

£m

 
GBP   12    (76   9    (215
USD   1    (1   3    (5
EUR   4    (1   7    1 
Other currencies   3    (5   3    (1
Total   20    (83   22    (220
As percentage of net interest income   0.20%    (0.84%   0.21%    (2.09%

Note

aBarclays UK and Barclays International sensitivity (excluding Investment Banking business and Treasury).

Economic Capital by business unit

Barclays measures somenon-traded market risks using an economic capital (EC) methodology. EC is predominantly calculated using a VaR model using a 99% confidence interval aligning to other regulatory submissions. For more information on definitions of prepayment, recruitment and residual risk, and on how EC is used to manage IRRBB risk, see the treasury and capital risk management section on pages 347 to 348.

Economic Capital by business unit               
    Barclays UK
£m
   

Barclays 

Internationala

£m 

   Total
£m
 
As at 31 December 2017      
Prepayment risk   20    13     33 
Recruitment risk   64        65 
Residual risk   3        6 
Total   87    17     104 
As at 31 December 2016      
Prepayment risk   27        35 
Recruitment risk   18        20 
Residual risk   1    35     36 
Total   46    45     91 

Note

aOnly retail exposures within Barclays International are captured in the measure.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    147


Risk review

Risk performance

Treasury and Capital risk – Interest rate risk

Recruitment risk in Barclays UK has increased by £46m due to higher volumes of pipeline hedging, as a result of increased customer appetite for fixed rate mortgages.

Analysis of equity sensitivity

Equity sensitivity table measures the overall impact of a +/- 25bps movement in interest rates on retained earnings, available for sale and cash flow hedge reserves. This data is captured using DV01 metric which is an indicator of the shift in value for a 1 basis point in the yield curve.

Analysis of equity sensitivity                    
   2017   2016 
As at 31 December  

    +25 basis

points

£m

   

    -25 basis

points

£m

   

    +25 basis

points

£m

   

    -25 basis

points

£m

 
Net interest income   20    (83   22    (220
Taxation effects on the above   (6   25    (7   66 
Effect on profit for the year   14    (58   15    (154
As percentage of net profit after tax   (1.57%   6.52%    0.54%    (5.45%
Effect on profit for the year (per above)   14    (58   15    (154
Available for sale reserve   (164   219    (154   114 
Cash flow hedge reserve   (616   598    (732   692 
Taxation effects on the above   195    (204   222    (202
Effect on equity   (571   555    (649   450 
As percentage of equity   (0.87%   0.84%    (0.91%   0.63% 

As indicated in relation to the net interest income sensitivity table on page 147, the impact of a 25bps movement in rates is largely driven by Barclays UK.

The year on year movement in cash flow hedge reserve sensitivities was driven by structural changes in business activities and related hedging. Movements in the available for sale reserve would impact CRD IV fully loaded CET1 capital, however the movement in the cash flow hedge reserve would not impact CET1 capital.

Volatility of the Available for Sale portfolio in the liquidity pool

Changes in value of Available for Sale exposures flow directly through capital via the Available for Sale reserve. The volatility of the value of the Available for Sale investments in the Liquidity pool is captured and managed through a value measure rather than an earning measure, i.e. theNon-Traded Market Risk VaR.

Although the underlying methodology to calculate thenon-traded VaR is identical to the one used in Traded Management VaR, the two measures are not directly comparable. TheNon-Traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the Available for Sale exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment.

Non-traded Value at Risk (£m)

LOGO

Analysis of volatility of the available for sale portfolio in the liquidity pool 
     2017     2016 
For the year ended 31 December            Average
£m
             High
£m
             Low
£m
             Average
£m
             High
£m
             Low
£m
 
Non-Traded Market Value at Risk (daily, 95%)     36      50      27      40      46      32 

Non-traded VaR shown was mainly driven by volatility of interest rates in developed markets. The increases in late Spring and early Autumn were driven primarily by additional outright interest rate risk exposure taken in the liquidity pool at those times.

148    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

Operational risk

The risk of loss to the firm from inadequate or failed processes or systems, human factors or due to external events (for example, fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Key metrics

87%

of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50k or less

75%

of events by number are due to external frand

Overview

Operational risks are inherent in the Group’s business activities and it is not always cost effective or possible to attempt to eliminate all operational risks. The Operational Risk Management Framework is therefore focused on identifying operational risks and confirming that they are assessed and managed within the Group’s approved risk appetite. More material losses are less frequent and the Group seeks to reduce the likelihood and impact of these in accordance with its risk appetite.

The Operational Principal Risk comprises the following risks: data management and information, financial reporting, fraud, payments process, people, premises and security, supplier, tax, technology and transaction operations.

For definitions of these risks see pages 90 to 91. In order to provide complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct, legal and model risks.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events above the Bank’s reportable threshold, which have had a financial impact in 2017.

LOGO

For information on conduct risk events

please see page 152.

Summary of performance in the period

During 2017, total operational risk losses increased to £309m (2016: £209m) while the number of recorded events for 2017 decreased to 2,949 from 3,414 events recorded during the prior year. The loss for the year was primarily driven by events falling within the execution, delivery and process management and external fraud categories, with a limited number of high impact events.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    |  171149


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

    

 

Analysis of operational risk

Operational risk is the risk of direct or indirect impacts resulting from human factors, inadequate or failed internal processes and systems or external events.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events which have had a significant impact in 2015.

A small reduction in the number of recorded incidents occurring during the period

83%

of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events had a loss value of £50,000 or less

67%

of events are due to external fraud

172  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Operational risk

Operational risk is defined as any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

All disclosures in this section (page 173) are unaudited.

Overview

Operational risks are inherent in all the Group’s business activities and are typical of any large enterprise. It is not cost effective to attempt to eliminate all operational risks and in any event it would not be possible to do so. Small losses from operational risks are expected to occur and are accepted as part of the normal course of business. More material losses are less frequent and the Group seeks to reduce the likelihood of these in accordance with its risk appetite.

The Operational Principal Risk comprises the following Key Risks: External suppliers, Financial crime, Financial reporting, Fraud, Information, Legal, Payments process, People, Premises and security, Taxation, Technology (including cyber security) and Transaction operations. For definitions of these key risks see page 106. In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from Operational risk, the Operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the Operational key risks listed above to cover areas included within Conduct risk.

This section provides an analysis of the Group’s operational risk profile, including events, those which are above the Bank’s reportable threshold, which have had a financial impact in 2015.

For more information on Conduct risk events please see page 175.

Summary of performance in the period

During 2015, total operational risk lossesa increased to £241.3m (2014: £143.9m) with a 3% reduction in number of recorded events as compared to last year driven by a limited number of events in execution, delivery and process management category.

Losses were mainly due to execution, delivery and process management impacts, external fraud and business disruption and system failures.

Operational risk profile

Within operational risk, a high proportion of risk events have a low associated financial cost andwhile a very small proportion of operational risk events will have a material impact on the financial results of the Group. In 2015, 82.6% (2014: 78.0%)2017, 87% of the Group’s net reportable operational risk events by volume had a value of less than £50,000 or less and(2016: 86%), although this type of event accounted for 11.1% (2014: 30.5%only 16% (2016: 22%) of the Group’s total net loss impact.operational risk losses.

The analysis below presents the Group’s operational risk events by Basel event category:

 

§ Execution, deliveryDelivery and process managementProcess Management impacts increased to £137.5m (2014: £81.3m)£222m (2016: £165m) and accounted for 57.0% (2014: 56.5%72% (2016: 69%) of overall operational risk losses. The events in this category are typical of the banking industry as a whole where high volumes of transactions are processed on a daily basis. The increasesincrease in impacts wereimpact was largely driven by a limited number of events with higher loss valuesvalues.

 

§ External fraud (66.6%)Fraud is the category with the highest frequency of events (75% of total events in 2017, up from 71% in prior year) where high volume, low value events are also consistent with industry experience, driven by debit and credit card fraud. ThisThese accounted for 27.4%20% of overall operational risk losses in the year from 29.7% last2017, slightly down compared to 25% for prior year.

Business Disruption impacts increased to £24m, accounting for 8% of total operational risk losses in 2017, mainly driven by a few events with significant impacts. Overall the volume of events in this category remained low and decreased from 2016.

The Group’s operational risk profile is informed bybottom-up risk assessments undertaken by each business unit andtop-down qualitative review from the GovernanceOperational Risk and Control CommitteesManagement for each of the key risks.risk type. External fraudFraud and technologyTechnology are highlighted as key operational risk exposures. DevelopmentsThe operational risk profile is also informed by a number of risk themes: execution, resilience, cyber and data. These represent threats to the Group but have scope which extends across multiple risk types, and therefore require a risk management approach which is integrated within relevant risk and control frameworks.

Investment continues to be made in new and enhanced fraud prevention systems and transaction profiling tools underway to combat the increasing externallevel of fraud frequency especially inattempts being made and to minimise any disruption to genuine transactions. Fraud remains an industry wide threat and the credit cards, digital banking, unauthorised trading and social engineering.

Cyber security riskGroup continues to be an area of attention givenwork closely with external partners on various prevention initiatives. Technology, resilience and cyber security risks evolve rapidly so the increasing sophistication and scope of potential cyber-attack. Risks to technology and Cyber security change rapidly and require Group maintains

continued focus and investment.investment in the control environment to manage these risks, and actively partners with peers and relevant organisations to understand and disrupt threats originating outside the Group.

For further information see Risk management section pages 106 to 107.

LOGO

For further information, see operational

risk management section (pages 90 to 91).

LOGOOperational risk events by risk category

% of total risk events by count

LOGO

Operational risk events by risk category

% of total risk events by value

LOGO

Note

aFigures includeThe data disclosed includes operational risk losses for reportable events (excluding BAGL) having an impact of +/-³ £10,000 and excludeexcludes events that are conduct or legal risk, aggregatedaggregate and boundary events. A boundary event is an operational risk event that results in a credit risk impact. Due to the nature of risk events that continue to evolve, prior year losses are updated.

150    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Risk performance

Model risk

 Model risk

The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Model risk is a focal area of management and the Board. It is an important component of regulators’ assessment of Barclays’ risk management capabilities. Models are used to support a broad range of business and risk management activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risks, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, supporting new business acceptance and risk/reward evaluation, managing client assets, or meeting reporting requirements.

Summary of performance in the period

The Principal Risk framework for model risk was established in 2016. In 2017, the framework was enhanced and embedded further in the organisation by:

Strengthening of the Group-wide Model Risk Management (MRM) framework, policy and associated standards, validation templates and procedures.

Enhancement of Board oversight of model risk, through the establishment of a model risk tolerance framework and periodic updates to the Board on the progress of the MRM implementation.

Improved collection and attestation of the Group’s global inventory of models.

Reporting metrics on policy adherence and breaches.
Enhancement of model development and model identification processes, with the areas of model ownership throughout the firm establishing their own model control functions.

In addition to the governance outlined above, which details how new models are validated and existing models are internally controlled and assessed, models have been classified based on their materiality (the level of reliance placed on the model output for decision making or reporting), and their complexity. A strengthened programme of review and validation for such material models commenced during 2017. In 2018, model risk governance will be broadened beyond the quantitative models of the firm to include “non-modelled methods” covering certain material decision making and capital planning functions of the firm, such as the primary stress testing programmes and impairment estimations.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  173    151


Risk review

Risk performance

Conduct risk

Analysis of conduct risk

Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or Barclays because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

This section details Barclays’ conduct risk profile and provides information on key 2015 risk events and risk mitigation actions Barclays has taken.

Conduct risk

5.4/10 on the conduct

Reputation Balanced

Scorecard Measure

Driven by improvements in the following components:

 

§Operates openly and transparently

§Has high quality products and services

§Delivers value for money for customers and clients

 

174  |

Conduct risk

The risk of detriment to customers, clients, market integrity, competition or Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-Ffrom the inappropriate supply of financial services, including instances of wilful or negligent misconduct

 All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

  


Risk reviewOverview

Risk performance

Conduct risk

Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is causedBarclays strives to ourcreate and maintain mutually beneficial long-term relationships with its customers clients, counterparties or Barclays because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities.

All disclosures in this section (pages 175 to 176) are unaudited unless otherwise stated

Conduct risk

Doing the right thing in the right wayand clients. This means taking personal accountability for understanding their needs and providing suitablethem with products and services that meet those needs appropriately and help them manage their financial affairs.

As a transatlantic consumer, corporate and investment bank, Barclays also plays a critical role in promoting fair, open and transparent markets, as well as fostering shared growth for customersall. This means abiding by standards that in many cases are higher than those set by the laws and clients is central to Barclays’ strategy. Barclays is committed to Group-wide changes to business practices, governance and mindset and behaviours soregulations that good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity are integralapply to the way Barclays operates. Improving our reputation in the market will demonstrate to customers that in Barclays they have a partner they can trust.Group.

The FCA expects Barclays Board and Senior Management, supported by a governance structure and suitable management information to: have oversight of and mitigate conduct risks; consistently promote appropriate conduct outcomes; and drive the embedding of a conduct focused culture.

A key driver in delivering effective structural reform is balancing regulatory requirements and ensuring good outcomes for customers. The structural reform programme expects conduct risks to be managed through existing committees with escalation to the Structural Reform Programme Implementation Steering Committee as appropriate.

Furthermore, Barclays is working to implement new regulatory requirements related to Individual Accountability which apply to all UK banks and certain investment firms. The three new interlinking elements under the new rules on Strengthening Personal Accountability are: Senior Managers Regime, Certification Regime and a new set of Conduct Rules. These represent some of the most important regulatory changes in banking to date. At Barclays, we welcome these changes, and recognise the importance of how strengthening personal accountability will enhance the way we work, and will provide us with a framework to demonstrate our integrity and professionalism.

Reputation risk

Reputation risk is designated as a key risk by Barclays. It is defined as the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical. While reputation risk can arise anywhere in the business, it isIn 2017, aligned with the Conduct Principalrevised Enterprise Risk due toManagement Framework (ERMF), the significant correlation between them as issues relatingoversight of financial crime was transferred to conduct have material reputation impact.risk from operational risk.

The Reputation Key Risk Framework governs how Barclays’ businesses and functions implement effective risk management in this area, including identification, evaluation, prioritisation, mitigation, escalation and reporting of current and emerging reputation risks. Forward looking reputation risk horizon scanning is undertaken centrally and validated via ongoing stakeholder dialogue with a variety of relevant opinion formers. This provides an informed and broad view of the external reputation environment and identifies issues and themes likely to impact the reputation of Barclays and the finance sector.

Summary of performance in the period

Throughout 2014Barclays is committed to continuing to drive the Conduct Risk Programme designed relevant governance, reporting, training, and definitionright culture throughout all levels of roles and responsibilities, and from January 2015the organisation. Barclays will continue to enhance effective management of conduct risk and appropriately consider the relevant tools, governance and management was fully integrated within the businesses.

Following stakeholder feedback additional improvements have been made to enhanceinformation in decision making processes. Focus on management of conduct risk managementis ongoing and the Group Dashboards are a key component of this.

The Group continues to review the role and impact of conduct issues in 2015. The main aimsthe remuneration process at both the individual and business level.

Businesses have been to:continued to assess the potential customer, client and market impacts of strategic change and structural reform. As part of the 2017 Medium-Term Planning Process, material conduct risks associated with strategic and financial plans were assessed.

§simplify the governance processes

§improve the quality, completeness and reliability of Management information reported, including reporting against forward looking risk indicators

§improve the quality of Conduct Material Risk Assessment through more explanation of what good looks like and provision of targeted support to both the business and Compliance

§develop more productive relationships with internal stakeholders and other control functions, including colleagues across Compliance

§increase staff awareness of Conduct risk through e-learning

§align Conduct risk management more closely with HR colleagues

§build a relationship with Operational risk to leverage technology and in recognition of the high level of crossover between the two risks

§improve the consideration of Conduct risk in strategy setting and review processes.

Throughout 2015,2017, conduct risks were raised by businesses for consideration by the RepCo.Board Reputation Committee (RepCo). RepCo has reviewed the risks raised and whether the managementmanagement’s proposed actions proposed were appropriate to ensure conductmitigate the risks were managed effectively.

Below are general themes of conduct risk RepCo received regular updates with regards to key risks and control discussed by Senior Management at the RepCo in 2015.

§Barclays continues to be party to litigation and regulatory actions involving claimants who consider that inappropriate conduct by the Group has caused damage. Details in respect of such investigations and related litigation are included in Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters on page (261).

§The need to ensure that customers, and especially vulnerable customers, experiencing financial difficulty are treated appropriately and with due regard to their circumstances as a means to ensuring good customer outcomes.

§There are potential risks arising from conflicts of interest,issues including those related to the benchmark submission process. While primarily relevant to the Investment Bank, these potential risks may also impact the corporate and retail customer base. Barclays seeks to mitigate these risks by the maintaining of clear operating models and effective identification and management of conflicts of interest controls and supervisory oversight.

§The risk of mismanagement of customer data.

§Due to the volume and pace of strategic change, good customer outcomes are not sufficiently considered and achieved.

§Customers have degraded access to systems and information such as transaction delays, inability to access funds and incorrect information, increased risk of fraudulent activity and payment delays.

§The risk of digitisation that automated channels may not deliver the services that customers expect, the impact on vulnerable customers, fraud and cyber security risk. The need for strong and robust product design to ensure the minimisation or avoidance of adverse customer outcomes through the sale of products, services and advice inappropriate for a target market.

§Client assets sourcebook (CASS) – Due to the unprecedented level of change the firm is to implement over the next 12 months, the current stable environment relating to CASS is affected.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  175


Such conduct related themes also carry material reputation risk implications. Another area of reputation risk that continues to intensify relates to public,structural reform and regulatory and political concerns around the integration of climate change issues and impacts into finance sector operations and strategy.

§The intergovernmental conference on climate change in December 2015 agreed to keep global warming to within 2ºC, which will require significant and far reaching policy and regulation to constrain the combustion of fossil fuel reserves. This will impact many sectors, however, there has been significant activity during 2015 on furthering the finance sector’s understanding of the potential financial, operational and strategic implications of climate change. In particular, the Financial Stability Board (FSB) recommended a proposal to the G20 for the creation of an industry-led disclosure task force on climate-related risks in November 2015. This taskforce has been established with the mandate to consider the physical, liability and transition risks associated with climate change; identify effective corporate financial disclosures and develop a set of recommendations for climate-related disclosures. Improving the quality and consistency of climate financial risk disclosures by companies will enable the effective disclosure and analysis of material information by lenders, insurers, investors and other stakeholders.

Barclays participates in a number of industry groups looking at these issues and is assessing the implications for our global business.

Increasing the awareness of all staff of the importance of good customer outcomes and protecting market integrity has been a priority in 2015. Over 97% of Barclays staff have successfully completed training in this area.

The Group continued to incur significant costs in relation to litigation and conduct matters, please refer to Note 29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters and Note 27 Provisions for further detail. Litigation and conduct chargesCosts include customer redress and remediation, as well as expenses including damages, fines remediation of affected customers or clients, other penalties or settlements incurred in connection with legal, competition and regulatory matters.

settlements. Resolution of these matters remains a necessary and important part of delivering the Group’s strategy but there are early signs that we are driving better outcomesand an ongoing commitment to improve oversight of culture and conduct.

The Board and Senior Management received Group Dashboards setting out key indicators in relation to conduct, culture, citizenship and complaints. These continue to be evolved and enhanced to allow effective oversight and decision making. Barclays has operated at the overall set tolerance for customers from a more thoughtful consideration of our customers’ needs.

As a result of increased awareness and early consideration of conduct risk inthroughout 2017. The tolerance is assessed by the business a numberthrough Key Indicators which are aggregated and provide an overall rating which is reported to the RepCo as part of actions have been takenthe Conduct Dashboard.

Barclays remained focused on the continuous improvements being made to improve customer outcomes including:manage risk effectively, with an emphasis on enhancing governance and management information to help identify risks at earlier stages.

 

§152    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F proactive consideration and management of potential customer detriment associated with Barclays’ strategy to simplify its business and product. For example, change programmes monitoring customers subject to multiple changes including platform and online migrations


§
 application of more stringent residential mortgage requirements to buy-to-let mortgage applicants, ensuring better lending decisions

Risk review

§enhanced surveillance monitoring in the Investment Bank identifying and proactively managing activity which appear to cause unusual market impact

Risk performance

Reputation risk

    

§improvements in key areas such as bereavement and power of Attorney and ongoing training to equip staff to support customers in vulnerable circumstances and

 

§separation plans of Non-Core businesses to consider customer outcomes.

Salz recommendations

The Board commissioned a review of Barclays’ business practices in July 2012, led by Sir Anthony Salz. The report contained 34 recommendations that can be categorised broadly under Regulatory, Culture, Board Governance, People Pay and Management Oversight and Risk Management. Please refer to previous annual updates for further detail of past actions taken. All actions to implement the recommendations have been completed and independently validated. The Group continues to monitor the actions to ensure that they become fully embedded throughout the organisation.

Conduct reputation measure

To aid monitoring of progress in the management of conduct, a ‘Conduct Reputation’ measure is included within Barclays’ Balanced Scorecard. The conduct measure is developed through a conduct and reputation survey, undertaken by YouGov, across a range of respondents including business and political stakeholders, the media, NGOs, charities and other opinion formers across key geographies (the UK, Europe, Africa, the US and Asia).

In 2015 Barclays made progress on its Conduct measure recording a score of 5.4 (2014: 5.3). ‘Operates openly and transparently’, ‘Has high quality products and services’ and ‘Delivers value for money for customers and clients’ have all improved according to audience perception. Performance on two components, ‘Treats staff well at all levels of the business’ and ‘it can be trusted’ have declined slightly. In terms of target we are below where we would like to be for 2015, although overall progress on the measure is in line with our expectations and puts our 2018 target within reach.

 

176  |  

Reputation risk

The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and competence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

   All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

Reputation risk wasre-designated as a Principal Risk under Barclays’ Enterprise Risk Management Framework with effect from

January 2017.

Reputation risk may arise from any business decision or activity. It may also arise as a result of issues and incidents relevant to other Principal Risks, in particular othernon-financial risks e.g. conduct or operational risk. Reputation risks and issues are identified via regular information gathering from within the business and from external stakeholders.

Some risks and issues are specific to Barclays, whilst others are also relevant to the banking sector more generally.

Barclays has set tolerances for reputation risk, which take into account the risks arising from specific events or decisions and longer term strategic themes. The primary responsibility for managing reputation risk lies with each business and function, where there are processes in place to identify, assess and manage reputation risks and issues.

There are circumstances, however, where it is necessary to escalate to Group level the evaluation of the reputation risk associated with particular decisions beyond an individual, business or function. The GRC is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of reputation risk.

Summary of performance in the period

Barclays is committed to identifying reputation risks and issues as early as possible and managing them appropriately. Throughout 2017, reputation risks and issues were overseen by the Board Reputation Committee (RepCo), which reviews the processes and policies by which Barclays identifies and manages reputation risk.

RepCo reviewed risks raised by the businesses and considered whether management’s proposed actions, for example attaching conditions to proposed client transactions or increased engagement with impacted stakeholders, were appropriate to mitigate the risks effectively. RepCo also received regular updates with regard to key reputation risks and issues, including: legacy conduct issues; Barclays’ association with sensitive sectors; cyber and data security; fraud and scams that could impact Barclays customers and the resilience of key Barclays systems and processes.

In 2017, the central reputation management team received 581 referrals from across the businesses (625 referrals in 2016) for consideration. These referrals covered a variety of sectors including, but not limited to, defence, fossil fuels and mining.

As part of Barclays 2017 Medium Term Planning process, material reputation risks associated with strategic and financial plans were also assessed.

The effectiveness of the supporting governance arrangements and management information, including the impact of other Principal Risks on Barclays’ reputation, were reviewed by the Board and senior management during 2017. Following this, RepCo requested certain refinements to reputation risk reporting and processes, which are in progress.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    153


Risk review

Risk performance

Legal risk

 Legal risk

The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Overview

The Group conducts diverse activities in a highly regulated global market and therefore is exposed to the risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages, fines, sanctions and other legal outcomes relating to a failure to meet its legal obligations in the conduct of its business. Legal risk encompasses the failure of the Group to appropriately escalate or manage contractual arrangements, litigation, intellectual property, competition/anti-trust issues, use of law firms and its contact with regulators. The multitude of laws and regulations pertaining to the Group’s activities across the globe are by nature dynamic resulting in a level of legal risk that cannot be avoided. A Legal Risk Management Framework (LRMF) prescribes the requirements for identification, escalation, measurement and management of legal risk to support effective risk management across the Group.

Summary of performance in the period

In 2017, Barclays remained focused on continuous improvements to manage legal risk effectively, with an emphasis on enhancing governance to help identify risks at earlier stages and escalate as appropriate.

This is supported by the LRMF which includes legal risk tolerances, key indicators and governance. The LRMF is supported by legal risk policies and associated standards covering six areas of identified legal risk and mandatory minimum control requirements. For further information, see legal risk management on page 95. Legal risk policies and tolerances were reviewed and enhanced during 2017 to reflect the LRMF.

Business and functions have progressed implementing the requirements outlined in the LRMF within their areas, including strengthening evaluation and monitoring of their legal risk profile. Mandatory training in relation to legal risk was rolled out across the Group in Q4 2017.

The Legal Function organisation and coverage model aligns expertise to businesses, functions, products, activities and geographic locations. It continues to provide legal support, oversight and challenge across the organisation, including advising on appropriate identification, management and escalation of legal risk and potential legal outcomes aligned to other Principal Risks. A legal risk oversight committee, as part of the Legal Executive Committee, meets on a quarterly basis to oversee, challenge and monitor legal risk across the Group.

Overall, in 2017 significant progress has been made to implement legal risk as a new Principal Risk across the Group. As the LRMF matures, Barclays will continue to strengthen and embed consistent Group-wide processes to support management and monitoring of legal risk as well as drive continued education to support proactive identification and escalation of legal risk issues.

154    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

    

    

 

Supervision of the Group

The Group’s operations, including its overseas offices,branches, subsidiaries and associates, are subject to a significant bodylarge number of rules and regulations that are a condition for authorisationauthorisations to conduct banking and financial services business.business in each of the jurisdictions in which the Group operates. These apply to business operations, affectimpact financial returns and include reservecapital, leverage and liquidity requirements, authorisation, registration and reporting requirements, and prudential andrestrictions on certain activities, conduct of business regulations.regulations and many others. These requirements are set in legislation and by the relevant central banks and regulatory authorities that authorise, regulate and supervise the Group in the jurisdictions in which it operates. TheOften, the requirements may reflect global standards developed by among others,international bodies such as the G20, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), the International Organisation of Securities Commissions (lOSCO) and the International OrganizationFinancial Stability Board (FSB). Various bodies, such as central banks and self-regulatory organisations, also create voluntary Codes of Securities Commissions. TheyConduct which affect the way the Group does business.

Regulatory developments impact the Group globally. We focus particularly on EU, UK and US regulation due to the location of Barclays’ principal areas of business. Regulations elsewhere may also reflect requirements imposed directlyhave a significant impact on Barclays due to the location of its branches, subsidiaries and, in some cases, clients. For more information on the risks related to supervision and regulation of the Group, including regulatory change, please see the Risk Factor entitled ‘Regulatory Change agenda and impact on Business Model’ on page 80.

Supervision in the EU

Financial regulation in the UK is to a significant degree shaped and influenced by or derived from, EU legislation. This provides the structure of the European Single Market, an important feature of which is the framework for the regulation of authorised firms in the EU. This framework is designed to enable a credit institution or investment firm authorised in one EU member state to conduct banking or investment business in another member state through the establishment of branches or by the provision of services on a cross-border basis without the need for local authorisation. Barclays’ operations in Europe are authorised and regulated by a combination of both home and host regulators. The impact of the UK’s departure from the EU in this respect and, more broadly, its impact on the UK domestic regulatory framework, is yet to be determined.

In the UK, the BoEBank of England (BoE) has responsibility for monitoring the UK financial system as a whole.whole, including by way of conducting annual stress tests on UK banks. Theday-to-day regulation and supervision of the Group is divided between the PRA – which is established as partPrudential Regulation Authority (PRA) (a division of the Bank of England –BoE) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA).

In addition, the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE has significant influence on the prudential requirements that may be imposed on the banking system through its powers of direction and recommendation. The FPC has direction powers over leverage ratios and sectoral capital requirements, which it sets in relation to exposures to specific sectors judged to pose a risk to the financial system as a whole and which apply to all UK banks and building societies generally, rather than to the Group specifically. The government has also made the FPC responsible for the Basel III countercyclical capital buffer, introduced in the EU under the CRD and CRR (collectively known as CRD IV).

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (as amended)(FSMA) remains the principal statute under which financial institutions are regulated in the UK. Barclays Bank PLC is authorised under FSMA to carry on a range of regulated activities within the UK. It is alsoand Barclays Bank UK PLC are authorised and subject to solo and consolidated prudential supervision by the PRA and subject to conduct regulation and supervision by the FCA. Barclays is also subject to prudential supervision by the PRA on a Group consolidated basis. Barclays Bank UK PLC’s authorisation is subject to restrictions on activities expected to be lifted prior to April 2018. Barclays Services Limited is an appointed representative of Barclays Bank PLC and Clydesdale Financial Services Limited (the principals). This status enables Barclays Services Limited to undertake activities which would otherwise require authorisation, with the principals assuming regulatory responsibility for the conduct of Barclays Services Limited as their appointed representative. Barclays Bank PLC’s German, French and Italian branches are also subject to direct supervision by the European Central Bank (ECB). Barclays Bank Ireland PLC, which is licensed as a credit institution by the Central Bank of Ireland, has submitted an application for an extension of its current licence to support the Group’s ability to provide services to EU clients after Brexit.

In its role as supervisor, the PRA seeks to maintain the safety and soundness of financial institutions with the aim of strengthening, but not guaranteeing, the protection of customers and the financial system. The PRA’s continuing supervision of financial institutions is conducted through a variety of regulatory tools, including the collection of information by way of prudential returns, reports obtained from skilled persons, visits to firms and regular meetings with management to discuss issues such as performance, risk management, conduct and culture and strategy.

The regulation and supervision of market conduct matters is the responsibility of the FCA. FCAThe FCA’s regulation of the UK firms in the Group is carried out through a combination of continuous assessment;assessment, regular thematic work and project work based on the FCA’s sector assessments, which analyse the different areas of the market and the risks that may lie ahead; and responding to crystallised risks, seeking to ensure remediation as appropriate.

Global regulatory developments

Regulatory change continues to affect all large financial institutions; globally notably through the G20, Financial Stability Board (FSB) and Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS), regionally through the EU and nationally, especially in the UK and US. Further changes to prudential requirements and further refinements to the definitions of capital and liquid assets may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings. Similarly, increased requirements in relation to capital markets activities and to market conduct requirements may affect the Group’s planned activities and could increase costs and thereby contribute to adverse impacts on the Group’s earnings.

The programme of reform of the global regulatory framework previously agreed by G20 Heads of Government in April 2009 has continued to be taken forward throughout 2015 and into 2016.

ahead.

The FSB has been designated by the G20 as the body responsible for co-ordinating the delivery of the global reform programme in relation to the financial services industry. It has focused particularly on the risks posed by systemically important financial institutions. In 2011, G20 Heads of Government adopted FSB proposals to reform the regulation of Global Systematically Important Financial Institutions (G-SIFIs), including Global Systematically Important Banks (G-SIBs). A key element of this programme is that G-SIFIs should be capable of being resolved without recourse to taxpayer support. Barclays has been designated a G-SIB by the FSB. G-SIBs are subject to a number of requirements, including additional loss absorption capacity above that required by Basel III standards (see below). The surcharges rise in increments from 1% to 2.5% of risk weighted assets (with an empty category of 3.5% for institutions that increase the extent of the systemic risk they pose which is intended to discourage institutions from developing their business in a way that heightens their systemic nature). This additional buffer must be met with common equity.

In its November 2015 list of G-SIBs, the FSB confirmed Barclays position in a category that requires it to meet a 2% surcharge. The additional loss absorbency requirements apply to those financial institutions identified in November 2014 as G-SIBs and will be phased in starting from January 2016, with full implementation due to have taken place by January 2019. G-SIBs have also been required to meet higher supervisory expectations for data aggregation capabilities since 1 January 2016. In the EU the requirements for a systemic risk buffer have been implemented through mechanisms under CRD IV.

The BCBS issued the final guidelines on Basel III capital and liquidity standards in June 2011, with revisions to counterparty credit risk in July and November 2011. Regulatory liquidity revisions were agreed in January 2013 to the definitions of high quality liquid assets and net cash outflows for the purpose of calculating the Liquidity Coverage Ratio, as well as establishing a timetable for phasing in the standard from January 2016. The requirements of Basel III as a whole are subject to a number of transitional provisions that run to the end of 2018. The Group is, however, primarily subject to the EU’s implementation of the Basel III standard through CRD IV (see below).

The BCBS also maintains a number of active workstreams that will affect the Group. In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its fundamental review of the trading book, which will take effect in 2019. The Committee also continues to focus on the consistency of risk weighting of assets and explaining the variations between banks. This includes revisions to the standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk. The Committee is also considering whether to limit the use of internal models in certain areas (for example, removing the Advanced Measurement Approach for operational risk) and applying RWA floors based on the standardised approaches. The final standards for measuring and controlling large exposures were published by the Basel Committee in April 2014 to take effect in 2019. Also in April 2014, the Basel Committee published the final standard for calculating regulatory capital for banks’ exposure to Central Counterparties (CCPs). In conjunction with the International Organization of Securities Commissions, the BCBS published a revised version of the framework for margin requirements for non-centrally cleared derivatives in March 2015, which recommends the phasing in of requirements for initial and variation margin from 1 September 2016.

In November 2015 the FSB finalised its proposals to enhance the loss absorbing capacity of G-SIBs to ensure that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution to implement an orderly resolution which minimises the impact on financial stability, ensures the continuity of critical functions and avoids exposing taxpayers to losses. To this end, the FSB has set a new minimum requirement for ‘Total Loss Absorbing Capacity’ (TLAC). From 1 January 2019, the FSB will expect Barclays and other G-SIBs to meet a minimum TLAC requirement of 16% of the risk weighted assets of their respective resolution groups, rising to 18% from 1 January 2022. From that time, G-SIBs will also be expected to hold TLAC equivalent to at least 6% of the Basel III leverage ratio denominator, rising to 6.75% from 1 January 2022. The BCBS is also consulting on the capital treatment of banks’ TLAC holdings from other issuers.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  177


Also in November 2015, Barclays re-adhered to a protocol which was developed by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) in coordination with the FSB to support cross-border resolution and reduce systemic risk. By re-adhering to this protocol Barclays is able, in ISDA Master Agreements and related credit support agreements, as well as certain repo and stock lending agreements, entered into with other adherents, to opt in to different resolution regimes such that cross-default and direct default rights that would otherwise arise under the terms of such agreements would be stayed temporarily (and in some circumstances overridden) on the resolution of one of the parties.

Influence of European legislation

Financial regulation in the UK is to a significant degree shaped and influenced by EU legislation. This provides the structure of the European Single Market, an important feature of which is the framework for the regulation of authorised firms. This framework is designed to enable a credit institution or investment firm authorised in one EU member state to conduct banking or investment business through the establishment of branches or by the provision of services on a cross-border basis in other member states without the need for local authorisation. Barclays’ operations in Europe are authorised and regulated by a combination of both home and host regulators.

EU developments

The EU continues to develop its regulatory structure in response to the financial and Eurozone crises. At the December 2012 meeting of EU Finance Ministers it was agreed to establish a single supervisory mechanism within the Eurozone. The European Central Bank (ECB) has had responsibility for the supervision of the most significant credit institutions, financial holding companies or mixed financial holding companies within the Eurozone since November 2014. The ECB can also extend its supervision to institutions of significant relevance that have established subsidiaries in more than one participating member state and with significant cross-border assets or liabilities.

Notwithstanding the new responsibilities of the ECB, the European Banking Authority (EBA), along with the other European Supervisory Authorities, remains charged with the development of a single rulebook for the EU as a whole and with enhancing co-operation between national supervisory authorities. The European Securities Markets Authority (ESMA) has a similar role in relation to the capital markets and to banks and other firms doing investment and capital markets business. The progressive reduction of national discretion on the part of national regulatory authorities within the EU may lead to the elimination of prudential arrangements that have been agreed with those authorities. This may serve to increase or decrease the amount of capital and other resources that the Group is required to hold. The overall effect is not clear and may only become evident over a number of years. The EBA and ESMA each have the power to mediate between and override national authorities under certain circumstances.

Responsibility for day-to-day supervision remains with national authorities and for banks, like Barclays Bank PLC, that are incorporated in countries that will not participate in the single supervisory mechanism, is expected to remain so. Barclays Bank PLC Italian and French branches are, however, also subject to direct supervision by the ECB.

Basel III and the capital surcharge for G-SIBs have been, or will be, implemented in the EU by CRD IV. The provisions of CRD IV either entered into force automatically on, or had to be implemented in member states by, 1 January 2014. Much of the ongoing and outstanding implementation is expected to be done through binding technical standards being developed by the EBA, that are intended to ensure a harmonised application of rules through the EU, some of which are still in the process of being developed and adopted.

A significant addition to the EU legislative framework for financial institutions has been the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) which establishes a framework for the recovery and resolution of EU credit institutions and investment firms. The BRRD is intended to implement many of the requirements of the FSB’s ‘Key Attributes of Effective Resolution Regimes for Financial Institutions’. The BRRD entered into force in July 2014. All of the provisions of the BRRD had to be implemented in the law of EU Member States by 1 January 2015 except for those relating to bail-in which had to be implemented in Member States by 1 January 2016.

As implemented, the BRRD gives resolution authorities powers to intervene in and resolve a financial institution that is no longer viable, including through the transfers of business and, when implemented in relevant member states, creditor financed recapitalisation (bail-in within resolution) that allocates losses to shareholders and unsecured and uninsured creditors in their order of seniority, at a regulator determined point of non-viability that may precede insolvency. The concept of bail-in will affect the rights of unsecured creditors subject to any bail-in in the event of a resolution of a failing bank.

The BRRD also requires competent authorities to impose a ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities’ (‘MREL’) on financial institutions to facilitate the effective exercise of the bail-in tool referred to above. This will have to be co-ordinated with the FSB’s TLAC standards mentioned above and, as set out in more detail below, the BoE has stated that MREL for UK G-SIBs will be set consistently with those standards. The BRRD also requires the development of recovery and resolution plans at group and firm level. The BRRD sets out a harmonised set of resolution tools across the EU, including the power to impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to terminate, accelerate or close out contracts. There are also significant funding implications for financial institutions, which include the establishment of pre-funded resolution funds of 1% of covered deposits to be built up over 10 years, although the proposal envisages that national deposit guarantee schemes may be able to fulfil this function (see directly below). The UK Government uses the bank levy to meet the ex ante funding requirements set out in the BRRD.

The Directive on Deposit Guarantee Schemes provides that national deposit guarantee schemes should be pre-funded, with the funds to be raised over a number of years. The funds of national deposit guarantee scheme are to total 0.8% of the covered deposits of its members by the date 10 years after the entry into force of the recast directive. In the UK, the pre-funding requirements of the UK Financial Services Compensation Scheme are met through the bank levy.

In October 2012, a group of experts set up by the European Commission to consider possible reform of the structure of the EU banking sector presented its report. Among other things, the Group recommended the mandatory separation of proprietary trading and other high risk trading activities from other banking activities. The European Commission issued proposals to implement these recommendations in January 2014. These proposals would apply to institutions that have been identified as G-SIBs under CRD IV and envisage, among other things: (i) a ban on proprietary trading in financial instruments and commodities; and (ii) rules on the economic, legal, governance, and operational links between the separated trading entity and the rest of the banking group.

Contemporaneously, the European Commission also adopted proposals to enhance the transparency of shadow banking, especially in relation to securities financing transactions. These proposals have still yet to be considered formally by the European Parliament and by the Council.

178  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) has introduced requirements designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market, some of which are still to be brought in. When it is fully in force, EMIR will require entities that enter into any form of derivative contract, including interest rate, foreign exchange, equity, credit and commodity derivatives: to report specified details of every derivative contract that they enter to a trade repository (this requirement is already in force); implement risk management standards for all bilateral over-the-counter derivatives trades that are not cleared by a central counterparty (this requirement is also partly in force, but requirements relating to the mandatory provision of margin are to be phased in from 2016); and clear, through a central counterparty, over-the-counter derivatives, but only where those derivatives are subject to a mandatory clearing obligation. The obligation to clear derivatives will only apply to certain counterparties and specified types of derivative. EMIR has potential operational and financial impacts on the Group, including by imposing collateral requirements.

CRD IV aims to complement EMIR by applying higher capital requirements for bilateral, uncleared over-the-counter derivative trades. Lower capital requirements for cleared derivatives trades are only available if the central counterparty through which the trade is cleared is recognised as a ‘qualifying central counterparty’ which has been authorised or recognised under EMIR (in accordance with binding technical standards).

Amendments to the Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (known as MiFID II) came into force in July 2014. These amendments take the form of a directive and a regulation, and will affect many of the investment markets in which the Group operates and the instruments in which it trades, and how it transacts with market counterparties and other customers. Changes to the MiFID regime include the introduction of a new type of trading venue (the organised trading facility), to capture non-equity trading that falls outside the current regime.

Investor protections have been strengthened, and new curbs imposed on high frequency and commodity trading. Pre- and post-trade transparency has been increased, and a new regime for third country firms introduced. The changes also include new requirements for non-discriminatory access to trading venues, central counterparties, and benchmarks, and harmonised supervisory powers and sanctions across the EU. While the final implementation date of MiFID II remains subject to discussions between various European bodies, member states will not have to apply the provisions of MiFID II until 3 January 2017 at the earliest, although recent communications by several European bodies has suggested that this date might be delayed by 12 months. Many of the provisions of MiFID II and its accompanying regulation will be implemented by means of technical standards to be drafted by ESMA. While ESMA has published its final report in respect of some of these technical standards, the impacts on the Group will not be clear until all of the relevant technical standards have been finalised and adopted.

Regulation in the UK

Recent developments in banking law and regulation in the UK have been dominated by legislation designed to ring-fence the retail and SME deposit-taking business of large banks. The content and the impact of this legislation are outlined above. The Banking Reform Act put in place a framework for this ring-fencing and secondary legislation passed in 2014 elaborated on the operation and application of the ring-fence. Ring-fencing rules have been consulted on by the PRA and the FCA and it is expected that final rules will be published during the first half of 2016 which will further determine how ring-fenced banks will be permitted to operate.

In addition to, and complementing a EU-wide stress testing exercise conducted on a sample of EU banks by the EBA, and in response to recommendations from the FPC, the BoE conducted a variant of the EU-wide stress test in 2014. The ‘UK variant’ test explored particular UK macroeconomic vulnerabilities facing the UK banking system. Key parameters of the test – including the design of the UK elements of the stress scenario – were designed by the BoE and approved by the FPC and the PRA. The BoE published key elements of its 2014 stress test in March 2015 and the results of its 2015 stress test on 1 December 2015. The FPC determined that no macroprudential actions on bank capital were required in response to the results of either test.

Both the PRA and the FCA have continued to develop and apply a more assertive approach to supervision and the application of existing standards. This may include application of standards that either anticipate or go beyond requirements established by global or EU standards, whether in relation to capital, leverage and liquidity, resolvability and resolution or matters of conduct. The PRA has implemented the European capital regime under CRD IV in the UK and has required banks to meet a 4.5% Pillar 1 CET1 requirement since 1 January 2015, which is up from 4% in 2014. The PRA has expected Barclays, in common with six other major UK banks and building societies, to meet a 7% CET1 ratio at the level of the consolidated Group since 1 January 2016.

The FCA has retained an approach to enforcement based on credible deterrence that has continued to seeseen significant growth in the size of regulatory fines. The approach appears to be trending towards a more US model of enforcement including vigorous enforcement of criminal and regulatory breaches, heightened fines and proposed measures related to increased corporate criminal liability.

The FCA has focused strongly on conduct risk and on customer outcomes and will continue to do so. This has included a focus on the design and operation of products, the behaviour of customers and the operation of markets. This may impactaffect both the incidence of conduct costs and increase the cost of remediation.

On 1 AprilThe FCA and the PRA have also increasingly focused on individual accountability within firms. This focus is reflected in the Senior Managers and Certification Regime (the SMCR) which came into force in 2016. The SMCR, which implements the recommendations in the final report of the Parliamentary Commission on Banking Standards relating to individual accountability in banks, imposes a regulatory approval, accountability and fitness and propriety framework in respect of senior or key individuals within relevant firms.

The UK Serious Fraud Office (SFO) has played an active role in recent years in investigating and prosecuting complex fraud, bribery and corruption. If, as a result of an investigation, the SFO determines that it has sufficient evidence to support a realistic prospect of conviction, and to prosecute would be in the public interest, the SFO may bring forward a prosecution. Alternatively, the SFO may consider using a Deferred Prosecution Agreement (DPA). DPAs, which were introduced in February 2014, are judicially supervised agreements between the FCA took overSFO and organisations that could be prosecuted whereby the SFO suspends prosecution while the organisation in question complies with conditions imposed on it by the DPA, such as the payment of fines.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    155


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Supervision in the US

Barclays’ US activities and operations are subject to umbrella supervision by the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB), as well as additional supervision, requirements and restrictions imposed by other federal and state regulators. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their US branches and subsidiaries are subject to a comprehensive regulatory framework involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations, including the International Banking Act of 1978, the Bank Holding Company Act of 1956 (BHC Act), the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001, the Commodity Exchange Act, the federal securities laws, and the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act of 2010 (DFA), which comprehensively amended the regulation of consumer creditfinancial institutions in the UK.US in response to the financial crisis, including by amending the other aforementioned statutes. ln some cases, US requirements may impose restrictions on Barclays’ global activities in addition to its activities in the US.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC, along with Barclays US LLC (BUSL), Barclays’top-tier US holding company that holds substantially all of Barclays’ US subsidiaries and assets (including Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Bank Delaware) are regulated as bank holding companies (BHCs) by the FRB. BUSL is subject to requirements that are similar to those applicable to large US domestic bank holding companies, including in respect of capital adequacy, capital planning and stress testing (including FRBnon-objection to proposed capital distributions), risk management and governance, liquidity, leverage limits and financial regulatory reporting. Barclays Bank PLC’s US branches are also subject to enhanced prudential supervision requirements relating to, among others, liquidity and risk management.

Because the BHC Act generally restricts the activities of BHCs to banking and activities closely related to banking, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BUSL have elected to be treated as financial holding companies under the BHC Act. Financial holding company status allows these entities to engage in a variety of financial and related activities, directly or through subsidiaries, including underwriting, dealing and making markets in securities. Failure to maintain financial holding company status could result in increasingly stringent penalties and ultimately, in the closure or cessation of certain operations in the US. To qualify as a financial holding company, Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC, as foreign banking organisations and BHCs, and BUSL, as a BHC, must maintain certain regulatory capital ratios above minimum requirements and must be deemed to be “well managed” for U.S. bank regulatory purposes. In addition, any US depository institution subsidiaries of the foreign banking organisation or BHC must also maintain certain regulatory capital ratios above minimum requirements and be deemed to be “well managed” and must have at least a “satisfactory” rating under the Community Reinvestment Act of 1977.

In addition to umbrella oversight by the FRB (and applicable Federal Reserve Banks), certain of Barclays’ branches and subsidiaries are regulated by additional authorities based on the location or activities of those entities. The New York and Florida branches of Barclays Bank PLC are subject to extensive supervision and regulation by, as applicable, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYSDFS) and the Florida Office of Financial Regulation. Barclays Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered commercial bank, is subject to supervision and regulation by the Delaware Office of the State Bank Commissioner. The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) pursuant to the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, which also provides for FDIC supervisory authority over Barclays Bank Delaware and requires that Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BUSL act as a source of strength for the insured bank. This could, among other things, require these entities to inject capital into Barclays Bank Delaware if it fails to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements.

Barclays’ US securities broker/dealer and investment banking operations, primarily conducted through Barclays Capital Inc., are also subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) and other government agencies and self-regulatory organisations (SROs) as part of a comprehensive scheme of regulation of all aspects of the securities and commodities business under US federal and state securities laws.

Similarly, Barclays’ US commodity futures, commodity options and swaps-related and client clearing operations are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), the National Futures Association and other SROs. Barclays Bank PLC is also prudentially regulated as a swaps dealer so is subject to the FRB swaps rules with respect to margin and capital requirements.

Barclays’ US retail and consumer activities, including the US credit card operations of Barclays Bank Delaware, are subject to direct supervision and regulation by the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB). The CFPB has ledthe authority to examine and take enforcement action related to compliance with federal laws and regulations regarding the provision of consumer financial services and the prohibition of ‘unfair, deceptive or abusive acts and practices’.

Supervision in Asia Pacific

Barclays’ operations in Asia Pacific are supervised and regulated by a broad range of national regulators including: the Japan Financial Services Agency, the Bank of Japan, the Hong Kong Monetary Authority, the Hong Kong Securities and Futures Commission, the Monetary Authority of Singapore, the Reserve Bank of India, the Securities and Exchange Board of India and the People’s Bank of China, China’s State Administration of Foreign Exchange and the China Banking Regulatory Commission. Such supervision and regulation extends to activities conducted through branches of Barclays Bank PLC in the Asia Pacific region as well as subsidiaries of the Group.

Global regulatory developments

Regulatory change continues to affect all large financial institutions. Such change emanates from global institutions such as the G20, FSB, IOSCO and BCBS, the EU regionally, and national regulators, especially in the UK and US. The level of regulatory and supervisory uncertainty faced by the Group and the financial markets more broadly continues to remain elevated in our primary markets. In the EU, the legislative and regulatory bodies have been implementing, and continue to propose, multiple financial regulatory reforms, and the conditions of the UK’s eventual exit from the EU remain unclear, so the extent to which the UK will continue to follow EU legislation after Brexit remains unclear. In the US, the financial regulatory environment continues to evolve due to political developments and the ongoing implementation of regulations arising from the DFA. Furthermore, the application of various regional rules on a cross-border basis increases regulatory complexity for global financial institutions. For more information, please see the Risk Factor entitled ‘Regulatory Change agenda and impact on Business Model’ on page 80.

The programme of reform of the global regulatory framework previously agreed by G20 Heads of Government in April 2009 has continued to be taken forward throughout 2017. The G20 continues to monitor emerging risks and vulnerabilities in the financial system and has stated that it will take action to address them if necessary.

The FSB has been designated by the G20 as the body responsible forco-ordinating the delivery of the global reform programme in relation to the financial services industry. It has focused particularly on the risks posed by systemically important financial institutions. In 2011, G20 Heads of Government adopted FSB proposals to reform the regulation of global systemically important financial institutions (G-SIFls), including global systemically important banks(G-SIBs), such as Barclays. In December 2017, the BCBS finalised ‘Basel III’ (the BCBS international regulatory framework for banks), with the majority of the December 2017 changes expected to be implemented by 1 January 2022, including by regulators in many jurisdictions where Barclays operates.

156    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial regulatory framework

Financial services regulation can broadly be categorised as follows: (a) prudential regulation, which aims to promote safety and soundness of financial institutions and reduce risk in the financial system; (b) recovery and resolution, a key aspect of which is to ensure that G-SIFls are capable of being resolved without recourse to taxpayer support and minimising market disruption; (c) structural reform and the Volcker rule; (d) market infrastructure regulation, aimed at enhancing client protection, financial stability and market integrity; and (e) conduct, culture and other regulation.

(a) Prudential regulation

Certain Basel III standards were implemented in EU law through the Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV), which came into effect in 2014 and included new or enhanced requirements for the quality and quantity of capital, liquidity and leverage. Beyond the minimum standards required by CRD IV, the PRA has expected Barclays, in common with other major UK banks and building societies, to meet a 7% Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio at the level of the consolidated group since 1 January 2016.

G-SIBs are subject to a regulatory regime for consumer credit whichnumber of additional prudential requirements, including the requirement to hold additional loss absorbing capacity and additional capital buffers above the level required by Basel III standards. The level ofG-SIB buffer is considerably more intensive and intrusive than was the case when consumer credit was regulatedset by the OfficeFSB according to a bank’s systemic importance and can range from 1% to 3.5% of Fair Trading.risk weighted assets. TheG-SIB buffer must be met with common equity.

In 2014November 2017, the FSB published an update to its list ofG-SIBs, maintaining the 1.5%G-SIB buffer that applies to Barclays. The additionalG-SIB buffer has been phased in from January 2016, from whenG-SIBs were required to meet 25% of their designated buffer. This increased to 50% in 2017, 75% in 2018 and will increase to 100% in January 2019. Barclays is also subject to, among other buffers, a countercyclical capital buffer (CCyB) based on rates determined by the regulatory authorities in each jurisdiction in which Barclays maintains exposures. These rates may vary in either direction. On 27 June 2017, the FPC raised the UK CCyB rate from 0% to 0.5% with binding effect from 27 June 2018. In November 2017, the FPC raised the UK CCyB rate from 0.5% to 1% with binding effect from 28 November 2018. In May 2016, the FPC set out a framework for determining a systemic risk buffer (SRB) for ring-fenced bodies and large building societies (SRB Firms). The SRB is a firm-specific buffer, that is designed to increase the capacity of SRB Firms to absorb stress, and which must be met solely with CET1. The framework set out by the PRA, which sets SRB at rates between 0% and 3% of risk weighted assets, will apply from 1 January 2019.

In January 2016, the BCBS endorsed a new market risk framework, including rules made as a result of its “fundamental review of the trading book” (FRTB). The implementation of this framework has now been delayed, with the BCBS setting an expected implementation date of 1 January 2022 to allow for a review of the calibration of the framework.

The BCBS’s finalisation of Basel III, noted above, among other things, eliminated model-based approaches for certain categories of risk weighted assets (RWAs) (for example, operational risk RWAs, CVA volatility and credit risk RWAs for equity exposures), revised the standardised approach’s risk weights for a variety of exposure categories, replaced the four current approaches for operational risk (including the advanced measurement approach) with a single standardised measurement approach, established 72.5% of standardised approach RWAs for exposure categories as a floor for RWAs calculated under advanced approaches (referred to as the “output floor”), and forG-SIBs introduced a leverage ratio buffer in an amount equal to 50% of the applicableG-SIB buffer used for RWA purposes (meaning, for Barclays, a leverage ratio buffer of 0.75%). The majority of the final Basel III changes are expected to be implemented commencing 1 January 2022, with a five-yearphase-in period for the output floor.

The BCBS has also published final standards on the securitisation framework and interest rate risk in the banking book and guidelines onstep-in risk. The final standards for measuring and controlling large exposures were published by the BCBS in April 2014 to take effect in 2019. In November 2016, the European Commission adopted a proposal (commonly referred to as CRD V) to begin the legislative process for introducing these standards within the EU. These proposals, if implemented in their current form, would, among other things, implement FRTB by overhauling existing rules relating to standardised and advanced market risk and the FCA consultedrules governing the inclusion of positions in the regulatory trading book. The proposals would also enhance rules for counterparty credit risk, in line with BCBS proposals finalised in 2014, strengthen requirements relating to leverage and large exposures and introduce a net stable funding ratio (NSFR), requiring banks to fund their assets with stable sources of funds. CRD V also proposes to require that where (i) two or more credit institutions or investment firms established in the EU have a common parent undertaking established outside the EU and (ii) the group has been identified as aG-SIB or has entities in the EU (whether subsidiaries or branches) with total assets of at least30 billion, the group must establish an intermediate parent undertaking, authorised and established in, and subject to the supervision of, an EU member state.

IFRS 9 (an accounting standard that covers accounting for financial instruments), which was adopted into EU law by the European Commission in November 2016, came into force on 1 January 2018. In October 2016, the BCBS issued two documents on the treatment of accounting provisions in the regulatory framework, to take account of the future move to expected credit loss provisioning under IFRS and Financial Accounting Standards Board (FASB) standards. One paper considered transitional arrangements to phase in the immediate capital impact of the new accountability mechanismsprovisioning standards, while the other discussed more fundamental changes to the recognition of provisions in regulatory capital and changes to the risk weighting framework. The BCBS then published an interim approach (including transitional arrangements) on 29 March 2017, retaining the current regulatory treatment of provisions under the Basel framework for individuals working in banks, includingan interim period and proposing to consider more thoroughly the longer term regulatory treatment of provisions. On 28 December 2017, an EU Regulation came into force to provide transitional arrangements for mitigating the impact of the introduction of IFRS 9, in large part, on CET1 capital arising from the expected credit loss accounting measures set out in IFRS 9. The Regulation has applied since 1 January 2018.

In the US, BUSL and Barclays Bank PLC’s US branches are subject to enhanced prudential supervision requirements as required by the DFA and described above in “Supervision in the US”.

In addition to prudential regulations already promulgated under the DFA, the FRB has issued proposed regulations for NSFR implementation. The NSFR, as proposed by the FRB, would apply to US bank holding companies with more than $250bn in total assets or $10bn or more inon-balance sheet foreign exposures, including BUSL, and consolidated depositary institution subsidiaries of such banking organisations with more than $10bn in assets, including Barclays Bank Delaware. Under the proposed rule, such entities would be required to maintain a new ‘Senior Managers Regime’ (aimed atminimum level of available stable funding that equals or exceeds the amount of required stable funding over a limitedone-year period. Although the proposal provides for an effective date of 1 January 2018, the FRB has not finalised its NSFR proposal and the schedule for finalisation is uncertain.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    157


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

Stress testing

The Group and certain of its members are subject to supervisory stress testing exercises in a number of individualsjurisdictions. These exercises currently include the annual stress testing programmes of the BoE, the FDIC and the FRB and the biannual stress testing programme of the EBA. These exercises are designed to assess the resilience of banks to adverse economic or financial developments and ensure that they have robust, forward-looking capital planning processes that account for the risks associated with seniortheir business profile. Assessment by regulators is on both a quantitative and qualitative basis, the latter focusing on the Group’s data provision, stress testing capability and internal management responsibilitiesprocesses and controls. Failure to meet requirements of regulatory stress tests, or the failure by regulators to approve the stress test results and capital plans of the Group or its members subject to these exercises, could result in the Group or certain of its members being required to enhance its capital position or limit capital distributions, to any external holders of its equity or capital or within the Group.

In the US, certain financial institution intermediate holding companies formed in 2016, including BUSL, were not required to participate in the FRB’s Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR) process in 2017. These firms, however, were required under the FRB’s capital plan rule to submit a firm) and a ‘Certification Regime’ (aimed at assessing and monitoring the fitness and propriety of a wider range of employees who could pose a risk of significant harmcapital plan to the firmFRB that was subject to a confidential review process based on the assessment criteria in the capital plan rule. These capital plans were not subject to the FRB’s quantitative assessment - which evaluates a firm’s ability to meet its capital requirements under stress - under CCAR or any of its customers). This represents the implementation of recommendations made by the Parliamentary Committee on Banking Standardssupervisory stress testing in this area. The FCA2017.

(b) Recovery and PRA have published final rules on most aspectsResolution

Stabilisation and resolution framework

An important component of the Senior Managers RegimeEU legislative framework is the 2014 Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) which establishes a framework for the regime will enter into force on 7 March 2016.

recovery and resolution of EU credit institutions and investment firms. The UK implemented the BRRD through the Bank Recovery and Resolution of UK banking groups

TheOrder 2014, which amended the Banking Act 2009 (the Banking Act) providesand the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA), and the Banks and Building Societies (Depositor Preference and Priorities) Order 2014, which amended the Insolvency Act 1986 (among other insolvency legislation).

Under the Banking Act, UK resolution authorities are empowered to intervene in and resolve a regimeUK financial institution that is no longer viable. Pursuant to allowthese laws, the BoE (or, in certain circumstances, HM Treasury) to resolve failing banks in the UK, in(in consultation with the PRA and HM Treasury as appropriate. Under the Banking Act the BoEappropriate) has several stabilisation options where a banking institution is given powers to:failing or likely to fail: (i) make share transfer instruments pursuant to whichsome or all or some of the securities issued by a UKor business of the bank may be transferred to a commercial purchaser; (ii) the power to transfer allsome or someall of the property, rights and liabilities of a UKthe bank to a commercial purchaser or a ‘bridge bank’, which is a company wholly owned by the BoE; andBoE or to a commercial purchaser; (iii) transfer the impaired or problem assets of the relevant financial institution to an asset management vehicle to allow them to be managed over time. In addition, undertime; (iv) cancel or reduce certain liabilities of the Banking Act, HM Treasury is giveninstitution or convert liabilities to equity to absorb losses and recapitalise the power to take a bankinstitution and (v) transfer the banking institution into temporary public ownershipownership. In addition, the BoE may apply for a court insolvency order in order to wind up or liquidate the institution or to put the institution into special administration. When exercising any of its stabilisation powers, the BoE must generally provide that shareholders bear first losses, followed by making onecreditors in accordance with the priority of their claims under normal insolvency proceedings.

In order to enable the exercise of its stabilisation powers, the BoE may impose a temporary stay on the rights of creditors to terminate, accelerate or more share transfer ordersclose out contracts, and in which the transferee is a nominee of HM Treasury or a company wholly owned by HM Treasury. A share transfer instrument or share transfer order can extend to a wide range of securities including shares and bonds issued by a UK bank (including Barclays Bank PLC) or its holding company (Barclays PLC) and warrants for such shares and bonds. Certain of these powers also extend to companies within the same group as a UK bank.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  179


The Banking Act also gives the authorities powerssome cases to override events of default or termination rights that might otherwise be invoked as a result of the exercise of thea resolution powers. The Banking Act powers apply regardless of any contractual restrictions and compensation that may be payable in the context of both share transfer orders and property appropriation.

The resolution powers described above were supplemented with effect from 31 December 2014 by a ‘bail-in’ power introduced under the Banking Reform Act. This power allows for the cancellation or modification of one or more liabilities (with the exception of ‘excluded liabilities’).

Excluded liabilities include (among other things): deposits protected under a deposit insurance scheme, secured liabilities (to the extent that they are secured), client assets and assets with an original maturity of less than seven days which are owed to a credit institution or investment firm. The BoE’s new bail-in powers were brought into force with effect from 1 January 2015.

action. In a consultation paper published in 2015, the BoE indicated that during 2016 it would notify banks of the final MREL requirements which would apply to them from 1 January 2020, when the regime will become fully effective. The Bank intends to apply MREL standards on a transitional basis from 2016 until that time. As noted above, during the consultation process, the BoE announced that it intends to set MREL for UK G-SIBs consistently with the FSB’s TLAC standards, and will not set any TLAC requirement for a UK G-SIB which is separate from or different to its MREL.

Since 20 February 2015, UK banks and their parents have also been required to include in debt instruments, issued by them under the law of a non-EEA country, terms under which the relevant creditor recognises that the liability is subject to the exercise of bail-in powers by the BoE. Similar terms will be required in contracts governing other liabilities of UK banks and their parents if those liabilities are governed by the law of a non-EEA country, are not excluded liabilities underaddition, the Banking Act 2009 and are issued, entered into or arise after 31 December 2015. The PRA has made rules and will be consulting further in relation to contractual recognition of bail-in of liabilities governed by third country laws.

The Banking Act also gives the BoE the power to override, vary, or impose conditions or contractual obligations between a UK bank, its holding company and its group undertakings, in order to enable any transferee or successor bank to operate effectively after any of the resolution tools have been applied. There is also power for HM Treasury to amend the law (excluding provisions made by or under the Banking Act) for the purpose of enabling it to use theits powers under this regime powers effectively, potentially with retrospective effect.

The Financial Services Act 2010, among other things, requires the UK regulators to make rules about remuneration and to require regulated firms to have a remuneration policy that is consistent with effective risk management. The Banking Act also amended FSMApowers apply regardless of any contractual restrictions and compensation that may be payable.

In July 2016, the PRA issued final rules on ensuring operational continuity in resolution. The rules will apply from 1 January 2019 and will require banks to ensure that their operational structures facilitate effective recovery and resolution planning and the continued provision of functions critical to the economy in a resolution scenario.

In November 2016, the European Commission proposed a package of amendments to the BRRD, including the introduction of two new moratorium tools. On 28 December 2017, an EU directive came into force harmonising the priority ranking of unsecured debt instruments under national insolvency laws. EU member states are required to transpose the directive into national law by 29 December 2018.

The BoE’s preferred approach for the resolution of the Group is abail-in strategy with a single point of entry at Barclays PLC. Under such a strategy, Barclays PLC’s subsidiaries would remain operational while Barclays PLC’s eligible liabilities would be written down or converted to equity in order to recapitalise the Group and allow for the FCAcontinued provision of services and operations throughout the resolution.

While regulators in many jurisdictions have indicated a preference for single point of entry resolution, additional resolution or bankruptcy provisions may apply to make rules requiring firmscertain of Barclays Bank PLC’s subsidiaries or branches. In the US, Title II of the DFA established the Orderly Liquidation Authority, a regime for orderly liquidation of systemically important financial institutions, which could apply to operateBUSL. Specifically, when a collective consumer redress schemesystemically important financial institution is in default or danger of default, the FDIC may be appointed receiver under the Orderly Liquidation Authority instead of the institution being resolved through a voluntary or involuntary proceeding under the US Bankruptcy Code. In certain circumstances, including insolvency, violations of law and unsafe business practices, the licensing authorities of each US branch of Barclays Bank PLC and of Barclays Bank Delaware have the authority to dealtake possession of the business and property of the applicable Barclays entity they license or to revoke or suspend such licence. Specific resolution regimes may apply to certain Barclays entities or branches in other jurisdictions in which Barclays does business.

TLAC and MREL

The BRRD requires competent authorities to impose a ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities’ (‘MREL’) on financial institutions to facilitate their orderly resolution without broader financial disruption or recourse to public funds. Following the finalisation of the BRRD, in November 2015, the FSB finalised its proposals to enhance the loss absorbing capacity ofG-SIBs to ensure that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution to implement an orderly resolution which minimises the impact on financial stability, ensures the continuity of critical functions and avoids exposing taxpayers to losses. To this end, the FSB has set a new minimum requirement for ‘total loss absorbing capacity’ (TLAC). As the TLAC standard requires a certain amount of those loss absorbing resources to be committed to subsidiaries orsub-groups that are located in host jurisdictions and deemed material for the resolution of theG-SIB as a whole, the FSB published guiding principles on internal TLAC on 6 July 2017. These provide guidance on the size and composition of the internal TLAC requirement, cooperation and co-ordination between home and host authorities and the trigger mechanism for internal TLAC.

158    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


The EU has proposed to implement the TLAC standard (including internal TLAC) via the MREL requirement and the European Commission has proposed amendments in its CRD V proposal to achieve this. As the proposals remain in draft, it is uncertain what the final requirements and timing will be. Under the BoE’s statement of policy on MREL, the BoE will set MREL for UKG-SIBs as necessary to implement the TLAC standard and institution or group-specific MREL requirements will depend on the preferred resolution strategy for that institution or group. The MREL requirements will be phased in from 1 January 2019 and will be fully implemented by 1 January 2022, at which timeG-SIBs with cases of widespread failure by regulated firmsresolution entities incorporated in the UK, including Barclays, will be required to meet an MREL equivalent to the higher of (i) two times the sum of its Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements or (ii) the higher of two times its leverage ratio or 6.75% of leverage exposures. However, the PRA will review the MREL calibration by the end of 2020, including assessing the proposal for Pillar 2A recapitalisation which may drive a different 1 January 2022 MREL requirement than currently proposed. In addition, it is proposed that CET1 capital cannot be counted towards both MREL and the combined buffer requirement (CBR), meaning that the CBR will effectively be applied above both the Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A requirements relating to own funds and MREL.

In October 2016, the BCBS published its final standard on the prudential treatment of banks’ investments in TLAC instruments issued by other institutions, confirming that internationally active banks (bothG-SIBs andnon-G-SIBs) must deduct their holdings of TLAC instruments that do not otherwise qualify as regulatory requirements,capital from their own Tier 2 capital. Where the investing bank owns less than 10% of the issuing bank’s common shares, TLAC holdings are to be deducted from Tier 2 capital only to the extent that they exceed 10% of the investing bank’s common equity (or 5% fornon-regulatory capital TLAC holdings); below this threshold, holdings would instead be subjected to risk-weighting.G-SIBsmay only apply risk-weighting tonon-regulatory capital TLAC holdings by the 5% threshold where those holdings are in the trading book and are sold within 30 business days.

In December 2016, the FRB issued final regulations for TLAC, which apply to BUSL. The FRB’s final TLAC rule, while generally following the FSB term sheet, contains a number of provisions that are more restrictive. For example, the FRB’s TLAC rule includes provisions that require BUSL (the Barclays IHC) to have created consumer detriment.(i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible long-term debt, (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital plus eligible long-term debt), and (iii) a specified common equity buffer. In addition, the FRB’s TLAC rule would prohibit BUSL, for so long as the Group’s overall resolution plan treats BUSL as anon-resolution entity, from issuing TLAC to entities other than the Group and itsnon-US subsidiaries.

Bank Levy

The BRRD requires EU member states to establish apre-funded resolution financing arrangement with funding equal to 1% of covered deposits by 31 December 2024 to cover the costs of bank resolutions. Where the amount of suchpre-funding is insufficient, the BRRD requires that EU member states raise subsequent contributions. The UK government raises bothpre-funded and subsequent contributions that would be required were thepre-funded contributions not to cover costs or other expenses incurred by use of the resolution funds by way of a tax on the balance sheets of banks known as the “Bank Levy”.

Recovery and Resolution Planning

The PRA has made rules that require authorised firms to draw up recovery plans and resolution packs.packs, as required by the BRRD. Recovery plans are designed to outline credible recovery actions that authorised firms could implement in the event of severe stress in order to restore their business to a stable and sustainable condition. The resolution pack contains detailed information on the authorised firm in question which will be used to develop resolution strategies for that firm, assess its current level of resolvability against the strategy, and to inform work on identifying barriers to the implementation of operational resolution plans. In the UK, recovery and resolution planning (RRP) work is considered part of continuing supervision. Removal of potential impediments to an orderly resolution of the Group or one or more of its subsidiaries is considered as part of the BoE’s and PRA’s supervisory strategy for each firm, and the PRA can require firms to make significant changes in order to enhance resolvability. Barclays currently provides the PRA with a recovery plan annually and with a resolution pack every other year.

In addition to establishing the FPC, PRA and FCA,US, Title I of the Financial Services Act 2012 among other things clarifies responsibilities between HM TreasuryDFA and the BoEimplementing regulations issued by the FRB and the FDIC require each bank holding company with assets of US $50 billion or more, including Barclays, to prepare and submit annually a plan for the orderly resolution of subsidiaries and operations in the event of future material financial distress or failure. Barclays’ next submission will be due on 1 July 2018.

Similar requirements (which include powers for competent authorities to adopt resolution measures) are in force or expected to come into force imminently in various other jurisdictions, which will affect the Group to the extent it has operations in a financial crisis by givingrelevant jurisdiction.

(c) Structural reform and the ChancellorVolcker rule

Recent developments in banking law and regulation in the UK have included legislation designed to ring-fence the retail and smaller business deposit-taking businesses of the Exchequer powers to direct the BoE where public funds are at risk and there is a serious threat to financial stability.large banks. The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2012 also establishes2013 put in place a framework for this ring-fencing and secondary legislation passed in 2014 elaborated on the objectivesoperation and accountabilitiesapplication of the FPC, PRA and FCA; amends the conditions which need to be met by a firm before it can be authorised; gives the FPC, PRA and FCA additional powers, including powers of direction over unregulated parent undertakings (such as Barclays PLC) where this is necessary to ensure effective consolidated supervision of the Group; and gives the FCA a power to make temporary product intervention rules for a maximum period of six months, if necessary without consultation. The Financial Services Act 2013 also created a new criminal offence relating to the making of a false or misleading statement, or the creation of a false or misleading impression, in connection with the setting of a benchmark.

Structural reform of banking groups

In addition to providing for the bail-in stabilisation power referred to above, the Banking Reform Act requires,ring-fence. Ring-fencing will require, among other things: (i)things, the separation of the retail and SMEsmaller business deposit-taking activities of UK banks in the UK and branches of UK banks in the European Economic Area (EEA) into a legally distinct, operationally separate and economically independent entity, which will not be permitted to undertake a range of activities (so called ring-fencing); (ii) the increase of the loss absorbing capacity of ring-fenced banks and UK headquartered global systemically important banks to levels higher than required under CRD IV and (iii) preference to deposits protected under the Financial Services Compensation Scheme if a bank enters insolvency.

The Banking Reform Act also implements key recommendations of the Parliamentary Commission on Banking Standards. Recommendations thatfrom 1 January 2019. Ring-fencing rules have been implemented include: (i) the establishment of a reserve power forpublished by the PRA, to enforce full separation of UK banks under certain circumstances; (ii) the creation of a ‘senior manager’s’ regime for senior individuals in the banking and investment banking sectors to ensure better accountability for decisions made; (iii) the establishment of a criminal offence of causing a financial institution to fail; and (iv) the establishment of a regulator for payment systems.

The Banking Reform Act is primarily an enabling statute which provides HM Treasury with the requisite powers to implement the policy underlying the legislation through secondary legislation. Secondary legislation relating to the ring-fencing of banks has now been passed. Parts of the secondary legislation became effective on 1 January 2015 and the rest will come into effect on 1 January 2019 by which date UKfurther determining how ring-fenced banks will be permitted to operate. Further rules published by the FCA set out the disclosures thatnon-ring-fenced banks are required to be compliantmake to prospective account holders ofnon-ring-fenced banks who are individuals. Barclays’ approach to compliance with the structural reform requirements. The PRA published ‘near final’ rulesterms of the UK ring-fencing regime is described in the section entitled ‘Structural Reform’ on page 162.

US regulation places further substantive limits on the legal structureactivities that may be conducted by banks and governanceholding companies, including foreign banking organisations such as Barclays. The “Volcker Rule”, which was part of ring-fenced banks in May 2015the DFA and a consultation paper on post-ring-fencing prudential requirements and intra-group arrangements (among other things) in October 2015. PRA final rules are expected in 2016.

Compensation schemes

Banks, insurance companies and other financial institutionswhich came into effect in the UK are subjectUS in 2015, prohibits banking entities from undertaking certain proprietary trading activities and limits such entities’ ability to a single compensation scheme (the Financial Services Compensation Scheme – FSCS) which operates when an authorised firm is unablesponsor or is likely to be unable to meet claims made against it by its customers because of its financial circumstances. Most deposits made with branches of Barclays Bank PLC within the EEA are coveredinvest in certain private equity funds and hedge funds (in each case broadly defined). As required by the FSCS. Most claims made in respect of investment business will also be protected claims if the business was carried on from the UK or from a branchrule, Barclays has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and monitoring programme addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities (both inside and outside of the bank or investment firm in question in another EEA member state. The FSCS is funded by levies on authorised UK firms such as Barclays Bank PLC. In the event that the FSCS raises those funds more frequently or significantly increases the levies to be paid by firms, the associated costs to the Group may have a material impact on the Group’s results.US).

 

 

180  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    159


 


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

    

    

 

(d) Market infrastructure regulation

In recent years, regulators have focused on improving transparency and reducing risk in markets, particularly risks related toover-the-counter (OTC) transactions. This focus has resulted in a variety of new regulations across the G20 countries and beyond that require or encourageon-venue trading, clearing, posting of margin and disclosure of information related to many derivatives transactions. Some of the most significant developments are described below.

The European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) has introduced requirements designed to improve transparency and reduce the risks associated with the derivatives market, some of which are still to be fully implemented. EMIR requires that certain entities that enter into derivative contracts: report such transactions; clear certain over the counter (OTC) transactions where mandated to do so; and implement risk mitigation standards in respect of uncleared OTC trades. The obligation to clear derivatives only applies to certain counterparties and specified types of derivatives. In October 2016, the European Commission adopted a delegated regulation relating to the exchange of collateral, one of the risk mitigation techniques under EMIR. Provisions relating to initial margin have entered into force, subject to aphase-in until 1 September 2020. Provisions relating to variation margin have already entered into force. EMIR has potential operational and financial impacts on the Group, including by imposing collateral requirements.

The European Commission has recently proposed various technical changes to EMIR, some of which could result in certain central counterparties (CCPs) used by the Group being forced to relocate to a Eurozone jurisdiction. The changes proposed may have additional operational and financial impacts on the Group’s derivatives business.

CRD IV aims to complement EMIR by applying higher capital requirements for bilateral, uncleared OTC derivative trades. Lower capital requirements for cleared derivative trades are only available if the CCP through which the trade is cleared is recognised as a ‘qualifying central counterparty’ (QCCP) which has been authorised or recognised under EMIR. Higher capital requirements may apply to the Group following the UK’s departure from the EU if UK CCPs are then no longer regarded as QCCPs and vice versa.

The new Markets in Financial Instruments Directive and Markets in Financial Instruments Regulation (collectively referred to as MiFID II) have applied in large part since 3 January 2018. MiFID II affects many of the investment markets in which the Group operates, the instruments in which it trades and the way it transacts with market counterparties and other customers. Changes introduced by MiFID II include, among others: the introduction of a new type of trading venue (the organised trading facility), capturingnon-equity trading that fell outside the MiFID I regime; the strengthening of conduct of business requirements, including in relation to conflicts of interest; the expansion of the concept of, and requirements applicable to, firms which systematically trade against proprietary capital (systematic internalisers); and increased obligations on firms to secure best execution for their client. In addition, MiFID II mandates a trading obligation for certain types of cleared derivatives.

MiFID II strengthens investor protections, imposes new curbs on high frequency and commodity trading, increasespre-and post-trade transparency and introduces a new regime for third country(non-EU) firms. MiFID II also includes new requirements relating tonon-discriminatory access to trading venues, central counterparties and benchmarks, research unbundling and harmonised supervisory powers and sanctions across the EU.

Some final rules and guidance on the application of MiFID II are yet to be published, and so we anticipate continuing development of application of the rules within the market into 2018.

US regulators have imposed similar rules as the EU with respect to the mandatoryon-venue trading and clearing of certain derivatives, and post-trade transparency, as well as in relation to the margining of OTC derivatives. US regulators have addressed the applicability of certain of their regulations to cross-border transactions, and are continuing to review and consider their rules with respect to their application on a cross-border basis, including with respect to their registration requirements in relation tonon-US swap dealers and security-based swap dealers. The regulators may adopt further rules, or provide further guidance, regarding the cross-border applicability of such rules. In December 2017, the CFTC and the European Commission recognised the trading venues of each other’s jurisdiction to allow market participants to comply with mandatoryon-venue trading requirements while trading on certain venues recognised by the other jurisdiction.

The EU Benchmarks Regulation came into force in June 2016. Although some provisions have applied since 2016, the majority of provisions have applied since 3 January 2018 (subject to transitional provisions). This Regulation applies to the administration, contribution of data to and use of benchmarks within the EU. Financial institutions within the EU will be prohibited from using benchmarks unless their administrators are authorised, registered or otherwise recognised in the EU. This may impact the ability of Barclays to use certain benchmarks in the future.

In 2015, the European Commission launched work on establishing a Capital Markets Union (CMU) within the EU. The CMU aims to increase the availability ofnon-bank financing in the EU, deepen the EU single market for financial services and promote growth and financial stability. The CMU work programme is now being considered in light of Brexit. Recent proposals have therefore included considerably broadened central supervisory powers for the European Supervisory Authorities (ESAs) (including in relation to outsourcing, and delegation and risk transfer by entities authorised in the EU to entities or branches in third countries) and an increased focus by the ESAs on ongoing equivalence assessments in the context of third country regimes in various EU regulations and directives.

Certain participants in US swap markets are required to register with the CFTC as ‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’ and/or, following the compliance date for relevant SEC rules, with the SEC as ‘security-based swap dealers’ or ‘major security-based swap participants’. Such registrants are subject to CFTC, and would be subject to SEC regulation and oversight. The SEC finalised the rules governing security based swap dealer registration in 2015 but clarified that registration timing is contingent upon the finalisation of certain additional rules under Title VII of DFA, several of which are still pending. Additional SEC rules governing security-based swap transactions, including security-based swap reporting, will become effective after the security-based swap dealer registration date. Entities required to register are subject to business conduct, record-keeping and reporting requirements and will be subject to capital and margin requirements in connection with transactions with certain US andnon-US counterparties. Barclays Bank PLC has provisionally registered with the CFTC as a swap dealer and is subject to CFTC rules on business conduct, record-keeping and reporting. With respect to margin and capital, Barclays is subject to the rules of the FRB in connection with its swap dealer business.

160    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


The CFTC has approved certain comparability determinations that permit substituted compliance withnon-US regulatory regimes for certain swap regulations related to business conduct and other requirements, while other determinations remain pending. Most recently, in October 2017, the CFTC issued an order permitting substituted compliance with EU margin rules for certain uncleared derivatives. However, as Barclays is subject to the margin rules of the FRB, it will not benefit from the CFTC’s action unless the FRB takes a similar approach. The CFTC has stated that its transaction-level rules (such as margin and documentation requirements) would apply to certain transactions entered into between anon-US swap dealer and anon-US counterparty, if the transactions are arranged, negotiated or executed by personnel in the US, but has delayed the compliance date for this requirement until the effective date of future CFTC action addressing the way in which each transaction-level requirement must be applied.

It is unclear whether further changes will be made to the CFTC’s proposed rules or when they will become effective. In addition, it is uncertain whether and to what degree other US regulators, such as the FRB, will take an approach similar to the CFTC’s regarding substituted compliance.

(e) Conduct, culture and other regulation

Conduct and culture

On 7 March 2016, the PRA and FCA introduced measures to increase the individual accountability of senior managers and other covered individuals in the banking sector. The new regime comprises the ‘Senior Managers Regime’, which applies to a limited number of individuals with senior management responsibilities within a firm, the ‘Certification Regime’, which is intended to assess and monitor the fitness and propriety of a wider range of employees who could pose a risk of significant harm to the firm or its customers, and conduct rules that individuals subject to either regime must comply with. From March 2017, the conduct rules have applied more widely to other staff of firms within the scope of the regime. The Financial Services Act 2010, among other things, requires the UK regulators to make rules about remuneration and to require regulated firms to have a remuneration policy that is consistent with effective risk management.

The Banking Act also amended FSMA to allow the FCA to make rules requiring firms to operate a collective consumer redress scheme to deal with cases of widespread failure by regulated firms to meet regulatory requirements that may have created consumer detriment.

Our regulators have also enhanced their focus on the promotion of cultural values as a key area for banks, although they generally view the responsibility for reforming culture as primarily sitting with the industry.

Data protection and PSD2

Barclays has to comply with national data protection laws, governing the collection, use and disclosure of personal data, in a majority of the countries in which it operates. From 25 May 2018, data protection laws throughout the EU will be replaced by a single General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) which enhances the rights and protections available to data subjects. The UK government has confirmed the UK will adopt and apply the GDPR from May 2018 and a bill has been published to implement GDPR. The impact across Barclays will be significant, affecting not only Group entities operating and processing personal data within the EU but also those outside the EU offering goods or services to, or monitoring, individuals within the EU. The GDPR contains significant financial penalties for data protection breaches andnon-compliance, of up to 4% of Group global turnover.

A number of recent developments have indicated a clear political and regulatory desire to make customer transactional account information more easily accessible to customers and parties providing services to them, such as the revised Payment Services Directive (PSD2) (which, in accordance with the requirements under that Directive, must have been implemented by 13 January 2018). In addition to attempting to harmonise conduct rules for all providers of electronic payment services in the EU, PSD2 also creates a new prudential authorisation regime fornon-bank payment services providers. PSD2 replaces the previous Payment Services Directive, and has a wider scope, applying transparency and information requirements to payment transactions in all currencies where the provider of at least one leg of the payment service is located in the EU.

Cyber security

Regulators in the EU and US have been increasingly focused on cyber security risk management for banking organisations and have proposed laws and regulations and other requirements that necessitate implementation of a variety of increased controls for regulated Barclays entities. These include, among others, the adoption of cyber security policies and procedures meeting specified criteria, minimum required security measures, enhanced reporting, compliance certification requirements and other cyber and information risk governance measures. When implemented, the proposals may increase technology and compliance costs for Barclays.

Sanctions and financial crime

The UK Bribery Act 2010 introduced a new form of corporate criminal liability focused broadly on a company’s failure to prevent bribery on its behalf. The legislation has broad application and in certain circumstances may have extraterritorial impact as to entities, persons or activities located outside the UK, including Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries. In practice, the legislation requires Barclays to have adequate procedures to prevent bribery which, due to the extraterritorial nature of the status, makes this both complex and costly.

On 30 September 2017, the Criminal Finances Act 2017 introduced new corporate criminal offences of failing to prevent the facilitation of UK and overseas tax evasion. The legislation has very broad extra-territorial application and may impact entities, persons or activities located outside the UK, including Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries. It also requires Barclays to have reasonable prevention procedures in place to prevent the criminal facilitation of tax evasion by persons acting for, or on behalf of, Barclays.

In the US, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their US subsidiaries are subject to a comprehensive regulatory framework involving numerous statutes, rules and regulations, including the International Banking Act of 1978, the Bank Holding CompanySecrecy Act, of 1956 (BHC Act), the USA PATRIOT Act of 2001 and the DFA. This legislation regulates the activities ofregulations thereunder contain numerous anti-money laundering and anti-terrorist financing requirements for financial institutions. In addition, Barclays including its US banking subsidiaries andis subject to the US branches of Barclays Bank PLC,Foreign Corrupt Practices Act, which prohibits certain payments to foreign officials, as well as imposing prudential restrictions, such as limits on extensions of creditrules and regulations relating to economic sanctions and embargo programs administered by Barclays Bank PLC’s US branches and the US banking subsidiaries to a single borrowerOffice of Foreign Assets Control which restrict certain business activities with certain individuals, entities, groups, countries and to affiliates. The New York and Florida branches of Barclays Bank PLC are subject to extensive federal and state supervision and regulation byterritories.

Two significant new regulatory rules will be coming into force in the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (FRB) and, as applicable,US in 2018: the New York State Department of Financial Services (DFS) Rule 504 and the Florida OfficeUS Department of Treasury’s Financial Regulation. BarclaysCrime Enforcement Network (FinCEN) Customer Due Diligence (CDD) Rule. Rule 504 enumerates detailed transaction filtering and screening requirements for potential Bank Delaware, a Delaware chartered commercial bank, is subjectSecrecy Act and anti-money laundering violations and transactions with sanctioned entities, applicable to supervision and regulationinstitutions regulated by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC), the Delaware Office of the State Bank Commissioner and the Consumer Financial Protection Bureau (CFPB). The deposits of Barclays Bank Delaware are insured by the FDIC. The licensing authority of each US branch ofDFS (including Barclays Bank PLC, hasNew York branch) and requires a senior bank official to certify compliance. The CDD Rule requires Barclays to identify natural beneficial owners above a certain threshold of clients that are legal entities within the authority, in certain circumstances, to take possession ofUS market.

In some cases, US state and federal regulations addressing sanctions, money laundering and other financial crimes may impact entities, persons or activities located outside the business and property of Barclays Bank PLC located in the state of the office it licenses or to revoke or suspend such licence. Such circumstances generally include violations of law, unsafe business practices and insolvency.

US, including Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are bank holding companies registered with the FRB, which exercises umbrella supervisory authority over Barclays’ US operations. Barclays is required to implement by July 2016 a US intermediate holding company (IHC) which will hold substantially all of Barclays’ US subsidiaries and assets (including Barclays Capital Inc. and Barclays Bank Delaware, other than Barclays’ US branches and certain other assets and subsidiaries). This IHC will also be a US bank holding company and generally regulated as such under the BHC Act. As part of this supervision, the IHC will also generally be subject to substantially similar enhanced prudential supervision requirements as US bank holding companies of similar size, including: (i) regulatory capital requirements and leverage limits; (ii) mandatory stress testing of capital levels , and submission of a capital plan; (iii) supervisory approval of capital distributions by the IHC to Barclays Bank PLC; (iv) additional substantive liquidity requirements, including requirements to conduct monthly internal liquidity stress tests for the IHC (and also, separately, for Barclays Bank PLC’s US branch network), and to maintain a 30-day buffer of highly liquid assets; (v) other liquidity risk management requirements, including compliance with liquidity risk management standards established by the FRB, and maintenance of an independent function to review and evaluate regularly the adequacy and effectiveness of the liquidity risk management practices of Barclays’ combined US operations; and (vi) overall risk management requirements, including a US risk committee and a US chief risk officer. The IHC will also be subject to TLAC requirements pursuant to proposed regulations issued by the Federal Reserve in the fall of 2015. Barclays is well advanced in its plans to transfer the relevant US subsidiaries and assets into a newly incorporated IHC, and to implement the related DFA and other requirements, to meet the prescribed deadlines.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC have each elected to be treated as a financial holding company under the BHC Act. Financial holding companies may generally engage in a broader range of financial and related activities, including underwriting and dealing in all types of securities, than are permitted to registered bank holding companies that do not maintain financial holding company status. Financial holding companies such as Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are required to meet or exceed certain regulatory capital ratios and other requirements to be considered ‘well capitalised’ and be deemed to be ‘well managed’ in order to maintain their status as such. Once established, Barclays’ IHC would also need to meet similar requirements for FHC purposes. Barclays Bank Delaware is also required to meet certain capital ratio requirements and be deemed to be ‘well managed’. In addition, Barclays Bank Delaware must have at least a ‘satisfactory’ rating under the Community Reinvestment Act of 1977 (CRA). Entities ceasing to meet any of these requirements are allotted a period of time in which to restore capital levels or the management or CRA rating. Should the relevant Barclays entities fail to meet the above requirements, during the allotted period of time they could be prohibited from engaging in new types of financial activities or making certain types of acquisitions in the US. If the capital level or rating is not restored, the Group may ultimately be required by the FRB to cease certain activities in the US. More generally, Barclays’ US activities and operations may be subject to other requirements and restrictions by the FRB under its supervisory authority, including with respect to safety and soundness.

Under the Federal Deposit Insurance Act, as amended by the DFA, Barclays and the IHC (once established) are required to act as a source of financial strength for Barclays Bank Delaware. This could, among other things, require Barclays and/or the IHC to inject capital into Barclays Bank Delaware if it fails to meet applicable regulatory capital requirements.

Regulations applicable to US operations of Barclays Bank PLC and its subsidiaries impose obligations to maintain appropriate policies, procedures and controls to detect, prevent and report money laundering and terrorist financing and to ensure compliance with US economic sanctions against designated foreign countries, nationals and others.subsidiaries. The enforcement of these regulations has been a major focus of US state and federal government policy relating to financial institutions in recent years. Failureyears, and failure of a financial institution to maintain and implement adequate programmes to combat money laundering and terrorist financing or to ensure economic sanction compliance could have serious legal, financial and reputational consequences for the institution.

Barclays’ US securities broker/dealer, investment advisory and investment banking operations are also subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC), the Financial Industry Regulatory Authority (FINRA) and other government agencies and self-regulatory organisations (SROs) as part of a comprehensive scheme of regulation of all aspects of the securities and commodities business under the US federal and state securities laws.

Similarly, Barclays US commodity futures and commodity options-related operations are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC), the National Futures Association and other SROs.

Barclays’ US credit card activities are subject to ongoing supervision and regulation by the CFPB, which was established by the DFA. The statute gave the CFPB the authority to examine and take enforcement action against any US financial institution with over $10bn in total assets, such as Barclays Bank Delaware, with respect to its compliance with federal laws and regulations regarding the provision of consumer financial services (including credit card and deposit services) and with respect to ‘unfair, deceptive or abusive acts and practices.’ One of the laws the CFPB enforces is the Credit Card Accountability, Responsibility and Disclosure Act of 2009 which prohibits certain pricing and marketing practices for consumer credit card accounts.

 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  181    161


Risk review

Supervision and regulation

    

LOGO

Note

a Illustration of Barclays business divisions in preparation for regulatory ring-fencing. Plans are subject to internal and regulatory approvals and may change.

Structural Reform

Overview

Barclays intends to achieve ring-fencing separation by transferring the Barclays UK division of Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays Bank UK PLC, the ring-fenced bank of the Group. Immediately following the transfer, Barclays Bank PLC’s shares in Barclays Bank UK PLC will be distributed to the Parent company, Barclays PLC, establishing Barclays Bank UK PLC as a direct subsidiary of Barclays PLC. Barclays Bank PLC will continue to house the Barclays International division. The two banking entities will operate alongside one another, together with Barclays Services Limited (ServCo), as subsidiaries of Barclays PLC within the Barclays Group.

In order to achieve this target-state structure, Barclays will need to undertake a number of legal transfers, including the transfer of customer andnon-customer assets, liabilities and contractual arrangements.

Barclays is using a court approved statutory ring-fencing transfer scheme (RFTS) process as set out in the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 to conduct the majority of these transfers. In addition to the transfers conducted through the RFTS, certain items will be transferred via separate arrangements. Barclays is on track to be compliant with ring-fencing requirements well in advance of the 1 January 2019 statutory deadline.

Timeline

Barclays’ Structural Reform timeline, including progress to date and indicative future milestones is as follows:

2015:

Barclays Bank UK PLC, the legal entity which will become the ring-fenced bank, was incorporated.

2016:

Barclays UK and Barclays International business divisions were established

Barclays’ US intermediate holding company was established as an umbrella holding company for Barclays’ US subsidiaries, including Barclays Capital Inc. (US broker-dealer) that operates key investment banking businesses and Barclays Bank Delaware that operates Barclaycard US

Barclays Bank UK PLC banking authorisation application was submitted to the regulators

ServCo became a direct subsidiary of Barclays PLC.

2017:

Banking licence (with restrictions) granted to Barclays Bank UK PLC in April 2017

The majority of assets, liabilities, and other items connected with service provision were transferred from Barclays Bank PLC to ServCo, resulting in the execution of the ServCo build being substantially complete
Transfers of employees to the target structure employing entities took place in September 2017 under the Transfer of Undertakings (Protection of Employment) Regulations 2006
Sort codes have been split between Barclays Bank UK PLC and Barclays Bank PLC, with the last tranche completed in January 2018, so that each of the Group’s sort codes is aligned to a single bank

RFTS court process has been initiated with the Directions Hearing held at the High Court of England and Wales on 10 November 2017, where the Barclays Group’s communications programme for notifying customers and other stakeholders of the RFTS was approved.

2018:

Sanction Hearing will be held on 26 and 27 February 2018 at which the Court will be asked to sanction Barclays’ RFTS

Subject to the Court sanctioning the RFTS, Barclays UK businesses and related items will be transferred to Barclays Bank UK PLC at the RFTS effective date, currently expected to be 1 April 2018

Immediately following the RFTS transfers, the shares in Barclays Bank UK PLC will be transferred from Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays PLC, establishing Barclays Bank UK PLC as a direct subsidiary of Barclays PLC.

Illustrative unauditedpro-forma financials for Barclays Bank UK PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are available at home.barclays/results.

162    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

    

    

    

The DFA’s ultimate impact on the Group continues to remain uncertain and some rules are not yet fully implemented. In addition, market practices and structures may change in response to the requirements of the DFA in ways that are difficult to predict but that could impact Barclays business. Nonetheless, certain provisions of the DFA are particularly likely to have a significant effect on the Group, including:

 

§Restrictions on proprietary trading and fund-related activities:Theso-called ‘Volcker Rule’ which was promulgated by the relevant US regulatory agencies, including the FRB, the FDIC, the SEC, and the CFTC, prohibits banking entities, including Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and their various subsidiaries and affiliates, from undertaking certain ‘proprietary trading’ activities and will limit the sponsorship of, and investment in, private equity funds (including non-conforming real estate and credit funds) and hedge funds, in each case broadly defined, by such entities. These restrictions are subject to certain exceptions and exemptions, including exemptions for underwriting, market-making and risk-mitigating hedging activities as well as exemptions applicable to transactions and investments occurring solely outside of the US. As required by the rule, Barclays has developed and implemented an extensive compliance and monitoring programme (both inside and outside of the US) addressing proprietary trading and covered fund activities. These efforts are expected to continue as the FRB and the other relevant US regulatory agencies further implement and monitor these requirements and Barclays may incur additional costs in relation to such efforts. The Volcker Rule is highly complex and its full impact will not be known with certainty until market practices and structures further develop under it. The prohibition on proprietary trading and the requirement to develop an extensive compliance programme came into effect in July 2015. The FRB subsequently extended the compliance period through July 2016 for investments in and relationships with covered funds that were in place prior to 31 December 2013, and indicated that it intends to further extend the compliance period through July 2017.

§Resolution plans:The DFA requires non-bank financial companies supervised by the FRB, such as Barclays, and bank holding companies with total consolidated assets of $50bn or more to submit annually to the FRB, the FDIC, and the Financial Stability Oversight Council (FSOC), a plan for a ‘the firm’s rapid and orderly’ resolution in the event of material financial distress or failure. As required, Barclays submitted its most recent annual US resolution plan to the US regulators on 1 July 2015.

§Regulation of derivatives markets:Among the changes mandated by the DFA is a requirement that many types of derivatives that used to be traded in the over-the-counter markets be traded on an exchange or swap execution facility and centrally cleared through a regulated clearing house. The DFA also mandates that many swaps and security-based swaps be reported and that certain of that information be made available to the public on an anonymous basis. In addition, certain participants in these markets are required to register with the CFTC as ‘swap dealers’ or ‘major swap participants’ and/or, following the compliance date for relevant SEC rules, with the SEC as ‘security based swap dealers’ or ‘major security- based swap participants’. Such registrants would be subject to CFTC and SEC regulation and oversight. SEC finalised the rules for security based swap dealers in August 2015 with an effective date of October 2015. The SEC clarified that registration timing is contingent upon the finalisation of rules under Title VII of DFA in 2016 and no earlier than six months after such date. Barclays Bank PLC has registered as a swap dealer. Entities required to register are subject to business conduct and record-keeping requirements and will be subject to capital and margin requirements.

In this regard, US prudential regulators and the CFTC recently finalised and issued their respective rules imposing initial and variation margin requirements on transactions in uncleared swaps and security-based swaps. Such requirements will become effective over a period of time beginning in September, 2016. The margin requirements can be expected to increase the costs of over-the-counter derivative transactions and could adversely affect market liquidity.

These registration, execution, clearing, reporting and compliance requirements could adversely affect the business of Barclays Bank PLC and its affiliates, including by reducing market liquidity and increasing the difficulty and cost of hedging and trading activities.

§CFPB and consumer protection regulations and enforcement:Since its creation, the CFPB has issued a number of regulations aimed at protecting consumers of financial products including credit card and deposit customers. The CFPB has also initiated several high-profile public actions against financial companies, including major credit card issuers. Settlements of those actions have included monetary penalties, customer remediation requirements, and commitments to modify business practices.

§TLAC in the US:In 2015, the FRB also issued its own TLAC proposal that, while generally following the FSB framework, contains a number of provisions that are more restrictive. If ultimately adopted in its current form, the US TLAC proposal would require the Barclays IHC, subject to certain phase-in provisions between 2019 and 2022: (i) a specified outstanding amount of eligible long term debt (LDT), (ii) a specified outstanding amount of TLAC (consisting of common and preferred equity regulatory capital plus LTD), and (iii) a specified internal common equity buffer, in each case issued to a controlling parent of the IHC. The US TLAC proposal also contains certain other requirements, including that the LTD must be cancellable or convertible into equity of the IHC upon the order to the FRB if the IHC is in default or danger of default and certain other requirements are met. If finally adopted by the FRB, these requirements may increase the funding costs of the IHC.

Regulation in Africa

Barclays’ operations in South Africa, including Barclays Africa Group Limited, are supervised and regulated mainly by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB), the Financial Services Board (SAFSB) as well as the Department of Trade and Industry (DTI). The SARB oversees the banking industry and follows a risk-based approach to supervision, while the SAFSB oversees financial services such as insurance and investment business and focuses on enhancing consumer protection and regulating market conduct. The DTI regulates consumer credit through the National Credit Regulator, established under the National Credit Act (NCA) 2005, as well as other aspects of consumer protection not regulated under the jurisdiction of the SAFSB through the Consumer Protection Act (CPA) 2008. It is intended that regulatory responsibilities in South Africa will in future be divided between the SARB which will be responsible for prudential regulation and the SAFSB will be responsible for matters of market conduct. The transition to ‘twin peaks’ regulation will commence in 2016. Barclays’ operations in other African countries are primarily supervised and regulated by the central banks in the jurisdictions where Barclays has a banking presence. In some African countries, the conduct of Barclays’ operations and the non-banking activities are also regulated by Financial Market Authorities.

 

182  |

A review of the performance of Barclays, PLCincluding the key

performance indicators, and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-Fthe contribution of each of our

businesses to the overall performance of the Group.

  


Financial review

Contents

A review of the performance of Barclays, including the key performance indicators, and our businesses’ contribution to the overall performance of the Group.

 

Financial review     

Page

Financial review
  

§   Key performance indicators

  184164
  

§   Consolidated summary income statement

  186166
  

§   Income statement commentary

  187167
  

§   Consolidated summary balance sheet

  189168
  

§   Balance sheet commentary

  190169
  

§   Analysis of results by business

  170
191  

   Non-IFRS performance measures

181

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  183    163


Financial review

Key performance indicators

    

    

In assessing the financial performance of the Group, management uses a range of Key Performance Indicators (KPIs) which focus on the Group’s financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost management.

 

In assessing the financial performance of the Group, management uses a range of KPIs which

focus on the Group’s financial strength, the delivery of sustainable returns and cost

management. Significant strategic progress was made in 2017 with the closure of Barclays

Non-Core and sell down of our stake in Barclays Africa, marking the completion of our

restructuring and enabling us to set new targets for Group returns and costs.

TheNon-Core segment was closed on 1 July 2017 with RWAs of £23bn, below guidance of

approximately £25bn as set out in the 2016 KPIs. With the closure ofNon-Core we no longer

have a Core andNon-Core distinction within the Group and hence the previous target of Group

RoTE to converge with Core RoTE has been updated. The Group is now targeting RoTE,

excluding litigation and conduct, of greater than 9% in 2019 and greater than 10% in 2020,

based on a Group CET1 ratio of c.13%.

Guidance for Group operating expenses, excluding litigation and conduct, is£13.6-13.9bn in

2019 and to have a cost: income ratio of below 60%.

Non-IFRS performance measures

Barclays’ management believes that thenon-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the business’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements

of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of the Group. They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by Barclays’ management. However, anynon-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS

measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well. Refer to pages 181 to 183 for further information and calculations ofnon-IFRS performance measures included throughout this section, and the most directly comparable IFRS measures.

Definition

  Why is it important and how the Group performed    

CRD IV fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1)CET1 ratio

Capital requirements are part of the regulatory framework governing how banks and depository institutions are supervised. Capital ratios express a bank’s capital as a percentage of its risk weighted assets (RWAs)RWAs as defined by the PRA.

 

In the context of CRD IV, the fully loaded CET1 ratio is a measure of capital that is predominantly common equity as defined by the Capital Requirements Regulation.CRR.

  

The Group’s capital management objective is to maximise shareholders’shareholder value by prudently optimisingmanaging the level mix, and distribution to businessesmix of its capital resources, while maintaining sufficient capital resources to: ensure the Group is welland all of its subsidiaries are appropriately capitalised relative to itstheir regulatory minimum regulatoryand stressed capital requirements, set bysupport the PRA and other regulatory authorities; support its credit rating; and support itsGroup’s risk appetite, growth and strategic objectives.options, while seeking to maintain a robust credit proposition for the Group and its subsidiaries.

 

The Group’s CRD IV fully loaded CET1 ratio increased to 11.4% (2014: 10.3%13.3% (2016: 12.4%) due, as RWAs decreased £53bn to a £44bn reduction in RWAs£313bn and CET1 capital reduced to £358bn, demonstrating continued progress on£41.6bn (2016: £45.2bn). The 90bps improvement was driven by organic capital generation from continuing operations, and the Non-Corebenefit of the proportional consolidation of BAGL and rundown together with reductions in the Investment Bank, which wasofNon-Core, partially offset by a decreaseadverse movements in CET1 capital to £40.7bn (2014: £41.5bn).reserves and the net impact of there-measurement of US DTAs.

 

Group target: CET1 ratio target of150-200bps above the expected end point regulatory minimum level, providing450-500bps buffer to the Bank of England stress test systemic reference point.

  

13.3%

 CRD IV fully loaded CET1 ratio

  2016: 12.4%

  2015: 11.4%

164    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 

2015:11.4%

2014: 10.3%

2013: 9.1%


DefinitionWhy is it important and how the Group performed    

LeverageAverage UK leverage ratio

The ratio is calculated as the average fully loaded Tiertier 1 Capitalcapital divided by average UK leverage exposure. The average exposure measure excludes qualifying central bank claims.

  

The leverage ratio isnon-risk based and is intended to act as a supplementary measure to the risk basedrisk-based capital metrics such as the CET1 ratio.

 

The average UK leverage ratio increased to 4.9% (2016: 4.5% (2014: 3.7%) driven by a decrease in average UK leverage exposure to £1,045bn (2016: £1,137bn), reflectingpartially offset by a reductiondecrease in the leverage exposure of £205bnaverage fully loaded tier 1 capital to £1,028bn and an increase in Tier 1 Capital to £46.2bn (2014: £46.0bn)£51.2bn (2016: £51.6bn). Tier 1 Capital includes £5.4bn (2014: £4.6bn) of Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities.

 

Group target: maintaining the leverage ratio

above the expected end point minimum requirement.

  

2015:4.5%4.9%

2014: 3.7%Average UK leverage ratio

2013:

2016: 4.5%

2015: n/a

Return on average shareholders’ equity (RoE)

RoE is calculated as profit for the yearafter tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of other equity holdersinstruments, as a proportion of the parent, divided by average shareholders’ equity for the year excluding non-controlling interests and other equity interests.

Adjusted RoE excludes post tax adjusting items for gains on US Lehman acquisition assets, movements in own credit, the revision to the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) valuation methodology, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

Average shareholders’ equity for adjusted
RoE excludes the impact of own credit on
retained earnings.

instruments.

  

This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on shareholders’ equity.

RoE for the Group decreased to (3.1%) (2016: 3.0%) reflecting an attributable loss of £1,922m (2016: profit of £1,623m).

(3.1%)

Group RoE

2016: 3.0%

2015: (0.6%)

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity

RoTE is calculated as profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excluding non- controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

This measure indicates the return generated by the management of the business based on shareholders’ tangible equity. Achieving a target RoERoTE demonstrates the Group’sorganisation’s ability to execute its strategy and align management’s interests with the shareholders’. RoERoTE lies at the heart of the Group’s capital allocation and performance management process.

 

Adjusted RoERoTE for the Group decreasedwas negative 3.6% (2016: positive 3.6%) reflecting an attributable loss of £1,922m (2016: profit of £1,623m), which included charges for litigation and conduct of £1,207m, a £1,090m impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL, a £1,435m loss on the sale of 33.7% of BAGL’s issued share capital and aone-off net charge of £901m due to 4.9% (2014: 5.1%) driven by a 3% reductionthere-measurement of US DTAs in Group adjusted attributable profit, as average shareholders’ equity remained in line at £56bn (2014: £56bn).Q417.

 

Statutory RoERoTE for the Group decreasedexcluding litigation and conduct, losses related to negative 0.6% (2014: negative 0.2%) driven by an increasethe sell down of BAGL and there-measurement of US DTAs was 5.6%. Based on a CET1 ratio of 13% this would have been 5.5%.

Group target: Group RoTE, excluding litigation and conduct, of greater than 9% in attributable loss.2019 and greater than 10% in 2020, based on a CET1 ratio of c.13%.

  

(3.6%)

Group adjusted RoE

2015:4.9%RoTE

 

2014: 5.1%2016: 3.6%

2013: 4.3%a

Group statutory RoE

2015: (0.6%(0.7%)

2014: (0.2%)

2013: 1.0%

Note

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

184  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 

 

5.6%

Group RoTE excluding

litigation and conduct, losses

related to Barclays’ sell down

of BAGL and the re-

measurement of US DTAs

Definition

Why is it important and how the Group performed

Operating expenses excluding costs to achieve

Defined as adjusted totalTotal operating expenses excluding costs to achieve.

Adjusted operating expenses exclude provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, and losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.expenses.

  

Barclays views the active management and control of operating expenses as a key strategic objective.

Adjusted operating expenses excludingarea for banks; those who actively manage costs to achieve of £793m (2014: £1,165m), decreased 4% to £16,205m.

Statutory operating expenses, excluding costs to achieve of £793m (2014: £1,165m), increased 3% to £19,884m.and control them effectively will gain a strong competitive advantage.

 

Operating expenses infor the Core business, excluding costs to achieve of £693m (2014: £953m),Group were broadly£15.5bn (2016: £16.3bn). Excluding litigation and conduct charges, Group operating expenses were £14.2bn, in line at £15,106m (2014: £15,105m).

Group adjusted

2015: £16,205m

2014: £16,904m

2013: £18,511mawith 2017 guidance.

 

Group statutory

2015: target: operating expenses, excluding litigation and conduct, of£19,884m13.6-13.9bn

2014: £19,264m

2013: £20,763m

Core

2015: £15,106m

2014: £15,105m

2013: £16,377m

Non-Core RWAs

RWAs are a measure of assets adjusted for associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the rules as implemented by CRD IV and local regulators.2019.

  

£15.5bn

Barclays Non-Core was established as a separate unit in 2014 and groups together assets which do not fit with the strategic objectives of the Group. Reducing Non-Core RWAs will rebalance the Group to deliver higher and more sustainable returns.Operating expenses

 

Non-Core RWAs have reduced from £110bn in December 2013 to £47bn, resulting in an equity allocation of £7.2bn as at December 2015, 13% of the Group total. This is down from £15.1bn as at December 2013, which was 28% of the Group total.2016: £16.3bn

2015: £18.5bn

 

£14.2bn

Operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct

2016: £15.0bn

2015: £14.1bn

Cost: income ratio

Operating expenses divided by total income.

  

This is a measure management uses to assess the productivity of the business operations. Restructuring the cost base is a key execution priority for management and includes a review of all categories of discretionary spending and an analysis of how we can run the business to ensure that costs increase at a slower rate than income.

The Group cost: income ratio reduced to 73% (2016: 76%) driven by a 5% reduction in operating expenses, partially offset by a 2% reduction in total income. The reduction in operating expenses was primarily driven by lowerNon-Core related operating expenses.

Group target: a cost: income ratio of below 60%.

  

73%

Non-CoreCost: income ratio

 

2016: 76%

2015: £47bn84%

2014: £75bn

2013: £110bn

 

Note

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigation and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  185    165


Financial review

Consolidated summary income statement

    

    

For the year ended 31 December

   

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2013a

£m 

  

  

   

 

2012 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2011 

£m 

  

  

Continuing operations

          

Net interest income

   12,558      12,080      11,600      11,654      12,201   

Non-interest income net of claims and benefits on insurance contracts

   11,970      13,648      16,296      17,707      16,312   

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims

   24,528      25,728      27,896      29,361      28,513   

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

   496      461      259      –      –   

Own credit gain/(charge)

   430      34      (220)     (4,579)     2,708   

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

   –      (935)     –      –      –   

Gain/(loss) on disposal of BlackRock, Inc. investment

   –      –      –      227      (58)  

Gains on debt buy-backs

   –      –      –      –      1,130   

Statutory total income net of insurance claims

   25,454      25,288      27,935      25,009      32,292   

Adjusted credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,114)     (2,168)     (3,071)     (3,340)     (3,802)  

Impairment of BlackRock, Inc. investment

   –      –      –      –      (1,800)  

Statutory credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,114)     (2,168)     (3,071)     (3,340)     (5,602)  

Adjusted operating expenses

   (16,998)     (18,069)     (19,720)     (18,562)     (19,289)  

Provisions for UK customer redress

   (2,772)     (1,110)     (2,000)     (2,450)     (1,000)  

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

   (1,237)     (1,250)     (173)     –      –   

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

   429      –      –      –      –   

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

   (96)     –      (79)     –      (597)  

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

   (3)     –       –     –      –   

Statutory operating expenses

       (20,677)         (20,429)         (21,972)         (21,012)         (20,886)  

Adjusted other net (expenses)/income

   (13)     11      (24)     140      60   

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

   (577)     (446)     –      –      –   

Losses on acquisitions and disposals

   –      –      –      –      (94)  

Statutory other net (expenses)/income

   (590)     (435)     (24)     140      (34)  

Statutory profit before tax

   2,073      2,256      2,868      797      5,770   

Statutory taxation

   (1,450)     (1,411)     (1,571)     (616)     (1,902)  

Statutory profit after tax

   623      845      1,297      181      3,868   

Statutory (loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   (394)     (174)     540      (624)     2,924   

Statutory profit attributable to non-controlling interests

   672      769      757      805      944   

Statutory profit attributable to other equity holdersb

   345      250      –      –      –   
    623      845      1,297      181      3,868   

Selected statutory financial statistics

                         

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

   (1.9p)     (0.7p)     3.8p      (4.8p)     22.9p   

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

   (1.9p)     (0.7p)     3.7p      (4.8p)     21.9p   

Dividends per ordinary share

   6.5p      6.5p      6.5p      6.5p      6.0p   

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityb

   (0.7%)     (0.3%)     1.2%      (1.4%)     7.1%   

Return on average shareholders’ equityb

   (0.6%)     (0.2%)     1.0%      (1.2%)     5.9%  

Adjusted profit before tax

   5,403      5,502      5,081      7,599      5,482   

Adjusted taxation

   (1,690)     (1,704)     (2,029)     (2,159)     (1,299)  

Adjusted profit after tax

   3,713      3,798      3,052      5,440      4,183   

Adjusted profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   2,696      2,779      2,295      4,635      3,239   

Adjusted profit attributable to non-controlling interests

   672      769      757      805      944   

Adjusted profit attributable to other equity interestsb

   345      250      –      –      –   
    3,713      3,798      3,052      5,440      4,183   

Selected adjusted financial statistics

                         

Basic earnings per share

   16.6p      17.3p      16.0p      35.5p      25.3p   

Dividend payout ratio

   39%      38%      41%      18%      24%   

Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityb

   5.8%      5.9%      5.1%      10.6%      8.1%   

Return on average shareholders’ equityb

   4.9%      5.1%      4.3%      9.0%      6.7%   

For the year ended 31 December  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

  

2014

£m

  

2013

£m

 
Continuing operations      
Net interest income   9,845   10,537   10,608   10,086   9,457 
Net fee, commission and other income   11,231   10,914   11,432   11,677   14,587 
Total income   21,076   21,451   22,040   21,763   24,044 
                      
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (2,336  (2,373  (1,762  (1,821  (2,601
                      
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (13,884  (14,565  (13,723  (14,959  (16,628
UK bank levy   (365  (410  (426  (418  (462
Litigation and conduct   (1,207  (1,363  (4,387  (2,807  (2,442
Operating expenses   (15,456  (16,338  (18,536  (18,184  (19,532
                      
Other net income/(expenses)   257   490   (596  (445  (32
                      
Profit before tax   3,541   3,230   1,146   1,313   1,879 
Tax charge   (2,240  (993  (1,149  (1,121  (1,251
Profit/(loss) after tax in respect of continuing operations   1,301   2,237   (3  192   628 
(Loss)/profit after tax in respect of discontinued operation   (2,195  591   626   653   669 
Non-controlling interests in respect of continuing operations   (249  (346  (348  (449  (414
Non-controlling interests in respect of discontinued operation   (140  (402  (324  (320  (343
Other equity instrument holdersa   (639  (457  (345  (250   
Attributable (loss)/profit   (1,922  1,623   (394  (174  540 
Selected financial statistics                     
Basic (loss)/earnings per sharea   (10.3p  10.4p   (1.9p  (0.7p  3.8p 
Diluted (loss)/earnings per sharea   (10.1p  10.3p   (1.9p  (0.7p  3.7p 
Dividends per ordinary share   3.0p   4.5p   6.5p   6.5p   6.5p 
Return on equity   (3.1%  3.0%   (0.6%  (0.2%  1.0% 
Return on average tangible shareholders’ equitya   (3.6%  3.6%   (0.7%  (0.3%  1.2% 

Note

aThe profit after tax attributable to other equity instrument holders of £639m (2016: £457m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £174m (2016: £128m). The net amount of £465m (2016: £329m), along withnon-controlling interests is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share and return on average tangible shareholders’ equity.

The financial information above is extracted from the published accounts. This information should be read together with the information included in the accompanying consolidated financial statements.

Notes

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
bThe profit after tax attributable to other equity holders of £345m (2014: £250m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £70m (2014: £54m). The net amount of £275m (2014: £196m), along with non-controlling interests (NCI) is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share, return on average tangible shareholders’ equity and return on average shareholders’ equity.

 

186  |  166    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Financial review

Income statement commentary

    

    

 

20152017 compared to 20142016

Profit before tax increased 10% to £3,541m driven by a 5% reduction in operating expenses, partially offset by a 2% reduction in income and lower other net income. Results were impacted by the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP of 5% and 7% respectively, compared to 2016, which positively impacted income and adversely affected impairment and operating expenses.

Following the closure of BarclaysNon-Core on 1 July 2017, Group results for 2017 included a BarclaysNon-Core loss before tax for the six months ended 30 June 2017 of £647m, compared to a loss before tax of £2,786m for the full year in 2016. From 1 July 2017, residual BarclaysNon-Core assets and liabilities were reintegrated into, and associated financial performance subsequently reported in, Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office.

StatutoryTotal income decreased to £21,076m (2016: £21,451m) reflecting a £613m decrease in Barclays International and a £262m reduction in Head Office, partially offset by a reduction in losses related toNon-Core.

Credit impairment charges were broadly stable at £2,336m (2016: £2,373m) and reflected a charge of £168m in 2017 relating to deferred consideration from an asset sale in US Cards, and thenon-recurrence of a £320m charge in 2016 following the management review of the UK and US cards portfolio impairment modelling. Impairment increased in Barclays International driven by an increase in underlying delinquency trends and business growth in US Cards. The Group loan loss rate increased 4bps to 57bps.

Operating expenses reduced 5% to £15,456m driven primarily by lowerNon-Core related operating expenses. Excluding litigation and conduct charges, Group operating expenses were £14.2bn, in line with 2017 guidance.

Other net income of £257m (2016: £490m) primarily reflected a gain of £109m on the sale of Barclays’ share in VocaLink to MasterCard and a gain of £76m on the sale of a joint venture in Japan.

The effective tax rate on profit before tax decreasedincreased to £2,073m (2014: £2,256m), adjusted profit63.3% (2016: 30.7%) principally due to aone-off tax charge of £1,177m due to there-measurement of US DTAs as a result of the US Tax Cuts and Jobs Act, partially offset by an unrelated £276m increase in US DTAs due to are-measurement of Barclays Bank PLC’s US branch DTAs.

Loss after tax in respect of the Africa Banking discontinued operation of £2,195m included a £1,090m impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL and a £1,435m loss on the sale of 33.7% of BAGL’s issued share capital, primarily due to recycling of currency translation reserve losses to the income statement on accounting deconsolidation.

RoE was negative 3.1% (2016: positive 3.0%). RoTE was negative 3.6% (2016: positive 3.6%) and basic loss per share was 10.3p (2016: earnings per share of 10.4p). Excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to the sell down of BAGL and theone-off net charge due to the re-measurement of US DTAs, RoTE was 5.6% and earnings per share was 16.2p.

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax decreased 2%increased to £5,403m.£3,230m (2015: £1,146m). The Group performance reflected good operational performance in Barclays UK and Barclays International while being impacted by theNon-Core loss before tax of £2,786m (2015: £2,603m) driven by the accelerated rundown ofNon-Core and provisions for UK customer redress of £1,000m (2015: £2,772m). The appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP positively impacted income and adversely affected impairment and operating expenses.

Statutory totalTotal income net of insurance claims increased 1%decreased 3% to £25,454m, including adjusting items for a £496m (2014: £461m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets and an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m). 2014 statutory total£21,451m asNon-Core income net of insurance claims included a loss of £935m (2015: nil) relating to a revision to the ESHLA valuation methodology.

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims decreased 5% to £24,528m, as Non-Core income reduced £1,776m to a net expense of £164m following assets and securities rundown, business sales, including the impact of the sales of the Spanish and UAE retail businesses, and fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio of £359m (2014: £156m). Core income remained in line at £24,692m (2014: £24,678m) reflecting: a 13% increase to £4,927m in Barclaycard, primarily reflecting growth in US cards; Investment Bank income remaining broadly in line at £7,572m (2014: £7,588m); a 1% reduction in PCB£1,164m due to the impactacceleration of customer redresstheNon-Core rundown, while Barclays International income increased 9% to £14,995m, with growth in both CIB and Consumer, Cards and Payments, and Barclays UK income increased 2% to £7,517m.

Total income included a £615m (2015: £nil) gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited and an own credit loss of £35m (2015: gain of £430m).

Credit impairment charges increased £611m to £2,373m including a £320m charge in Q316 following the salemanagement review of the UK and US Wealth business;cards portfolio impairment modelling and a 2% reduction in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. On a constant currency basisa income in Africa Banking increased 7% reflecting goodbalance growth in Retailprimarily within Consumer, Cards and Business Banking and corporate banking in South Africa, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI).

Net interest income increased 4% to £12,558m, with higher net interest income in PCB, Barclaycard and Non-Core,Payments. This was partially offset by reductionsa reduction in Africa Banking, the Investment Bank and Head Office. Net interest income for PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking increased 5%credit impairment charges of 9% to £12,024m£122m inNon-Core due to lower impairment charges in European businesses. This resulted in an 11bps increase in average customer assets to £287.7bn (2014: £280.0bn) with growth in PCB and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. Net interest margin increased 10bps to 4.18% primarily due to growth in interest earning lending within Barclaycard.

Credit impairment charges improved 2% to £2,114m, with a loan loss rate of 47bps (2014: 46bps). This reflected higher recoveries in Europeto 53bps.

Operating expenses reduced 12% to £16,338m reflecting lower litigation and the sale of the Spanish business in Non-Core, and lower impairments in PCB due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates andconduct charges. This was partially offset by a numberthenon-recurrence of single name exposures in the Investment Bank, and increased impairment in Barclaycard reflecting asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies.

Statutory operating expenses increased 1% to £20,677m. This included adjusting items for additional UK customer redress provisionsprior year gain of £2,772m (2014: £1,110m), £1,237m (2014: £1,250m) of additional provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, a £429m (2014: nil) gain on the valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability £96m (2014: nil) of impairment of goodwill and other assetsincreased structural reform implementation costs. Operating expenses also included a £395m additional charge in Q416 relating to businesses being disposed,2016 compensation awards reflecting a decision to more closely align income statement recognition with performance awards and £3m (2014: nil)to harmonise deferral structures across the Group.

Operating expenses included provisions for UK customer redress of losses£1,000m (2015: £2,772m).

The cost: income ratio improved to 76% (2015: 84%).

Other net income of £490m (2015: expense of £596m) included gains on the sale of Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions, the Asia wealth and investment management business and the Southern European cards business, partly offset by the loss on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses.

Adjusted operating expenses decreased 6% to £16,998m as a result of savings from strategic cost programmes, particularly in the Investment Bank and PCB, in addition to the continued rundown of Non-Core. Total compensation costs decreased 6% to £8,339m, with the Investment Bank reducing 5% to £3,423m, reflecting lower deferred and current year bonus charges and reduced headcount. Reductions in costs to achieve of 32% to £793m, and in litigation and conduct charges of 16% to £378m, were partially offset by costs associated with the implementation of the structural reform programme and a 3% increase in the UK bank levy to £476m.French retail business of £455m.

The statutory cost:income ratio remained in line at 81% (2014: 81%). The adjusted cost:income ratio decreased to 69% (2014: 70%).

Statutory other net expenses increased to £590m (2014: £435m) and included an adjusting item for losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses of £577m (2014: £446m).

The tax charge of £1,450m (2014: £1,411m) on statutory profit before tax of £2,073m (2014: £2,256m) represents an effective tax rate of 69.9% (2014: 62.5%). The effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax decreased to 30.7% (2015: 100.3%) principally as a result of 31.3% (2014: 31.0%a reduction innon-deductible charges.

Profit after tax in respect of continuing operations increased to £2,237m (2015: loss of £3m). Profit after tax in relation to the Africa Banking discontinued operation decreased 6% to £591m as increased credit impairment charges and operating expenses were partially offset by income growth.

RoE was positive 3.0% (2015: negative 0.6%). RoTE was positive 3.6% (2015: negative 0.7%) is less than the effective tax rate on statutory profit before tax mainly because it excludes the impactand basic earnings per share was 10.4p (2015: loss per share of adjusting items such as non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and provisions for UK customer redress. The adjusted measure of profit before tax is considered to provide a more consistent basis for comparing business performance between periods as it is more representative of the underlying, ongoing performance. Consistent with this, the effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax is considered a more representative measure of the Group’s underlying, ongoing tax charge.1.9p).

 

Note

aConstant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average exchange rate for 2015.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  187    167


Financial review

Income statement commentaryConsolidated summary balance sheet

    

    

 

2014 compared to 2013

As at 31 December  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

   

2014

£m

   

2013

£m

 
Assets          
Cash and balances at central banks   171,082    102,353    49,711    39,695    45,687 
Items in the course of collection from other banks   2,153    1,467    1,011    1,210    1,282 
Trading portfolio assets   113,760    80,240    77,348    114,717    133,069 
Financial assets designated at fair value   116,281    78,608    76,830    38,300    38,968 
Derivative financial instruments   237,669    346,626    327,709    439,909    350,300 
Financial investments   58,916    63,317    90,267    86,066    91,756 
Loans and advances to banks   35,663    43,251    41,349    42,111    39,422 
Loans and advances to customers   365,552    392,784    399,217    427,767    434,237 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   12,546    13,454    28,187    131,753    186,779 
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale   1,193    71,454    7,364         
Other assets   18,433    19,572    21,019    36,378    22,128 
Total assets   1,133,248    1,213,126    1,120,012    1,357,906    1,343,628 
Liabilities          
Deposits from banks   37,723    48,214    47,080    58,390    55,615 
Items in the course of collection due to other banks   446    636    1,013    1,177    1,359 
Customer accounts   429,121    423,178    418,242    427,704    431,998 
Trading portfolio liabilities   37,351    34,687    33,967    45,124    53,464 
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   173,718    96,031    91,745    56,972    64,796 
Derivative financial instruments   238,345    340,487    324,252    439,320    347,118 
Debt securities in issuea   73,314    75,932    69,150    86,099    86,693 
Subordinated liabilities   23,826    23,383    21,467    21,153    21,695 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings   40,338    19,760    25,035    124,479    196,748 
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale       65,292    5,997         
Other liabilities   13,050    14,161    16,200    31,530    20,193 
Total liabilities   1,067,232    1,141,761    1,054,148    1,291,948    1,279,679 
Equity          
Called up share capital and share premium   22,045    21,842    21,586    20,809    19,887 
Other equity instruments   8,941    6,449    5,305    4,322    2,063 
Other reserves   5,383    6,051    1,898    2,724    249 
Retained earnings   27,536    30,531    31,021    31,712    33,186 
Total equity excludingnon-controlling interests   63,905    64,873    59,810    59,567    55,385 
Non-controlling interests   2,111    6,492    6,054    6,391    8,564 
Total equity   66,016    71,365    65,864    65,958    63,949 
Total liabilities and equity   1,133,248    1,213,126    1,120,012    1,357,906    1,343,628 
                          
Net asset value per ordinary share   322p    344p    324p    335p    331p 
Tangible net asset value per share   276p    290p    275p    285p    283p 
Number of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC (in millions)   17,060    16,963    16,805    16,498    16,113 
                          
Year-end US dollar exchange rate   1.35    1.23    1.48    1.56    1.65 
Year-end Euro exchange rate   1.13    1.17    1.36    1.28    1.20 

Statutory profit before tax decreased to £2,256m (2013: £2,868m), adjusted profit before tax increased 8% to £5,502m.Note

Statutory total income net of insurance claims decreased 9% to £25,288m including adjusting items for an own credit gain of £34m (2013: loss of £220m), a £461m (2013: £259m) gain on the US Lehman acquisition assets and a valuation revision of £935m (2013: nil) relating to changes in discount rates applied in the valuation methodology of the ESHLA loan portfolio held at fair value.

Adjusted total income net of insurance claims decreased 8% to £25,728m, reflecting a 54% reduction in Non-Core following assets and securities rundown and business disposals, a 12% reduction in the Investment Bank, driven by a decrease in the Markets business, particularly Macro, and a 9% reduction in Africa Banking, due to adverse currency movements, partially offset by growth in Barclaycard and PCB.

Net interest income increased 4% to £12,080m, with higher net interest income in PCB, the Investment Bank and Barclaycard, partially offset by reductions in Africa Banking, Head Office and Non-Core. Net interest income for PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking increased 4% to £11,435m driven by strong savings income growth in PCB, and volume growth in Barclaycard, partially offset by a reduction in Africa Banking due to currency movements. This resulted in a net interest margin of 4.08% (2013: 4.02%).

Credit impairment charges improved 29% to £2,168m, with a loan loss rate of 46bps (2013: 64bps). This reflected the non-recurrence of impairments on single name exposures, impairment releases on the wholesale portfolio, and improved performance in Europe withinNon-Core. Within the Core business there were lower impairments in PCB due to the improving UK economic environment, particularly impacting Corporate Banking which benefited from one-off releases and lower defaults from large UK corporate clients, and reduced impairments in the Africa Banking South Africa mortgages portfolio.

As a result, statutory net operating income for the Group decreased 7% to £23,120m. Net adjusted operating income excluding movements in own credit, the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets and the revision of the ESHLA valuation methodology decreased 5% to £23,560m.

Statutory operating expenses reduced 7% to £20,429m. This included adjusting items for an additional PPI redress provision of £1,270m, resulting in a full year net charge of £1,110m (2013: £2,000m) in relation to UK customer redress, £1,250m (2013: £173m) of provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and goodwill impairment of nil (2013: £79m). Adjusted operating expenses decreased 8% to £18,069m, driven by savings from strategic cost programmes, including a 5% reduction in headcount and currency movements. Total compensation costs decreased 8% to £8,891m, with the Investment Bank reducing 9% to £3,620m, reflecting reduced headcount, and lower deferred and current year bonus charges. Costs to achieve were £1,165m (2013: £1,209m) and the UK bank levy was £462m (2013: £504m).

The statutory cost:income ratio increased to 81% (2013: 79%). The adjusted cost:income ratio excluding movements in own credit, the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for UK customer redress, the provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, the revision of the ESHLA valuation methodology and goodwill impairment decreased to 70% (2013: 71%).

Statutory other net expense increased to £435m (2013: £24m) including an adjusting item for a loss on the sale of the Spanish business of £446m, which completed on 2 January 2015. In addition, accumulated currency translation reserve losses of approximately £100m were recognised on completion in Q115.

The tax charge was £1,411m (2013: £1,571m) on statutory profit before tax of £2,256m (2013: £2,868m), representing an effective tax rate of 62.5% (2013: 54.8%). The effective tax rate on adjusted profit before tax decreased to 31.0% (2013: 39.9%). 2013 included a charge of £440m relating to the write-down of deferred tax assets in Spain.

aDebt securities in issue include covered bonds of £8.5bn (2016: £12.4bn).

 

188  |  168    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Financial review

Consolidated summary balance sheet

As at 31 December

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

   

 

2012

£m

  

  

   

 

2011

£m

  

  

Assets

          

Cash and balances at central banks

   49,711     39,695     45,687     86,191     106,894  

Items in the course of collection from other banks

   1,011     1,210     1,282     1,473     1,812  

Trading portfolio assets

   77,348     114,717     133,069     146,352     152,183  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   76,830     38,300     38,968     46,629     36,949  

Derivative financial instruments

   327,709     439,909     350,300     485,140     559,010  

Available for sale investments

   90,267     86,066     91,756     75,109     68,491  

Loans and advances to banks

   41,349     42,111     39,422     41,799     48,576  

Loans and advances to customers

   399,217     427,767     434,237     430,601     437,355  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   28,187     131,753     186,779     176,522     153,665  

Other assets

   28,383     36,378     22,128     22,535     23,745  

Total assets

   1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628     1,512,351     1,588,680  

Liabilities

          

Deposits from banks

   47,080     58,390     55,615     77,345     90,905  

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

   1,013     1,177     1,359     1,587     969  

Customer accounts

   418,242     427,704     431,998     390,828     371,806  

Trading portfolio liabilities

   33,967     45,124     53,464     44,794     45,887  

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   91,745     56,972     64,796     78,561     87,997  

Derivative financial instruments

   324,252     439,320     347,118     480,987     548,944  

Debt securities in issue

   69,150     86,099     86,693     119,525     129,736  

Subordinated liabilities

   21,467     21,153     21,695     24,018     24,870  

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings

   25,035     124,479     196,748     217,178     207,292  

Other liabilities

   22,197     31,530     20,193     17,542     16,315  

Total liabilities

   1,054,148     1,291,948     1,279,679     1,452,365     1,524,721  

Equity

          

Called up share capital and share premium

   21,586     20,809     19,887     12,477     12,380  

Other equity instruments

   5,305     4,322     2,063            

Other reserves

   1,898     2,724     249     3,674     3,837  

Retained earnings

   31,021     31,712     33,186     34,464     38,135  

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

   59,810     59,567     55,385     50,615     54,352  

Non-controlling interests

   6,054     6,391     8,564     9,371     9,607  

Total equity

   65,864     65,958     63,949     59,986     63,959  

Total liabilities and equity

   1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628     1,512,351     1,588,680  
                          

Net tangible asset value per share

   275p     285p     283p     349p     381p  

Net asset value per ordinary share

   324p     335p     331p     414p     446p  

Number of ordinary shares of Barclays PLC (in millions)

   16,805     16,498     16,113     12,243     12,199  
                          

Year-end US Dollar exchange rate

   1.48     1.56     1.65     1.62     1.54  

Year-end Euro exchange rate

   1.36     1.28     1.20     1.23     1.19  

Year-end South African Rand exchange rate

   23.14     18.03     17.37     13.74     12.52  

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  189


Financial review

Balance sheet commentary

    

    

 

2015 compared to 2014

Total assets

Total assets decreased £238bn£80bn to £1,120bn.£1,133bn.

Cash and balances at central banks and items in the course of collection from other banks increased £10bn£69bn to £51bn,£173bn, as the cash contribution to the Group liquidity pool was increased.

Trading portfolio assets decreased £37bnincreased £34bn to £77bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging resulting in lower securities positions, consistent with client demand in the Investment Bank, and exiting of positions in Non-Core.£114bn due to increased activity.

Financial assets designated at fair value increased £38bn to £116bn primarily due to increased reverse repurchase agreements to fund trading activity.

Derivative financial instrument assets decreased £109bn to £238bn which is consistent with the movement in derivative financial instrument liabilities. The decrease reflects the portfolio rundown of Barclays Non-Core, the adoption of daily settlements under the Chicago Mercantile Exchange (CME), an increase in major interest rate forward curves and the depreciation of period end USD against GBP.

Financial investments decreased £4bn to £59bn due to a decrease in government bonds held in the liquidity pool.

Total loans and advances decreased £35bn to £401bn which comprised of a lending reduction of £22bn and a net decrease of £13bn in settlement and cash collateral balances.

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale decreased £70bn to £1bn driven by £39bnthe disposal of BAGL and the French retail business.

Total liabilities

Total liabilities decreased £75bn to £77bn.£1,067bn.

Deposits from banks decreased £10bn to £38bn driven by a £7bn decrease due to lower cash collateral and a decrease in central bank funding.

Customer accounts increased £6bn to £429bn driven by a £5bn increase due to increased funding requirements to fund the liquidity pool assets and a £14bn increase in deposits. These were partially offset by a £5bn reduction in cash collateral balances and a £7bn reduction in prime brokerage balances.

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing increased £21bn to £40bn. This was primarily due to £10bn of new USD trades and other similar secured lending.

Derivative financial instruments decreased £102bn to £238bn in line with the decrease in derivative financial instrument assets.

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale decreased £65bn to £nil driven by the disposal of BAGL and the French retail business.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value increased £78bn to £174bn. During the period, repurchase agreements designated at fair value have increased £71bn and debt securities by £7bn.

Total shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity decreased £5.3bn to £66.0bn.

Share capital and share premium increased £0.2bn to £22.0bn due to the issuance of shares under employee share schemes and the Barclays PLC scrip dividend programme.

Other equity instruments increased £2.5bn to £8.9bn primarily due to the issuance of equity accounted AT1 securities.

The available for sale reserve increased £0.4bn to £0.3bn. The reserve movement is driven by fair value movements on available for sale investments.

Cash flow hedging reserve has decreased £0.9bn to £1.2bn driven by a £0.6bn decrease in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as forward interest rates increased and £0.6bn due to gains recycled to the income statement, offset by a £0.3bn tax charge.

The currency translation reserve remained flat at £3.1bn which principally reflected the depreciation of period end USD against GBP, offset by a £1.6bn net loss from recycling of the currency translation reserve to the income statement. This included a £1.4bn recycling of the currency translation reserve associated with the disposal of BAGL.

Non-controlling interests decreased £4.4bn to £2.1bn, driven by a £3.4bn reduction due to the disposal of BAGL and £0.9bn relating to the redemption of preference shares.

Net asset value per share decreased to 322p (2016: 344p). Tangible net asset value per share decreased to 276p (2016: 290p) as profit before tax was more than offset by the net impact of there-measurement of US DTAs in Q417 and adverse movements across reserves.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    169


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Barclays UK
    2017
£m
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Income statement information    
Net interest income   6,086   6,048   5,973 
Net fee, commission and other income   1,297   1,469   1,370 
Total income   7,383   7,517   7,343 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (783  (896  (706
Net operating income   6,600   6,621   6,637 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (4,030  (3,792  (3,464
UK bank levy   (59  (48  (77
Litigation and conduct   (759  (1,042  (2,511
Operating expenses   (4,848  (4,882  (6,052
Other net expenses   (5  (1   
Profit before tax   1,747   1,738   585 
Attributable profit/(loss)   853   828   (47
Balance sheet information             
Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost   £183.8bn   £166.4bn   £166.1bn 
Total assets   £237.4bn   £209.6bn   £202.5bn 
Customer deposits   £193.4bn   £189.0bn   £176.8bn 
Loan: deposit ratio   95%   88%   94% 
Risk weighted assets   £70.9bn   £67.5bn   £69.5bn 
Key facts             
Average LTV of mortgage portfolioa   48%   48%   49% 
Average LTV of new mortgage lendinga   64%   63%   64% 
Number of branches   1,208   1,305   1,362 
Mobile banking active customers   6.4m   5.4m   4.5m 
30 day arrears rate – Barclaycard Consumer UK   1.8%   1.9%   2.3% 
Number of employees (full time equivalent)b   22,800   36,000   38,800 
Performance measures             
Return on equity   6.6%   6.4%   (0.2%
Average allocated equity   £13.6bn   £13.4bn   £13.7bn 
Return on average allocated tangible equity   9.8%   9.6%   (0.3%
Average allocated tangible equity   £9.1bn   £8.9bn   £9.3bn 
Cost: income ratio   66%   65%   82% 
Loan loss rate (bps)   42   52   42 
Net interest margin   3.49%   3.62%   3.56% 

Notes

aAverage LTV of mortgage portfolio and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.
bAs a result of the establishment of the Group Service Company in September 2017, employees who are now employed by the Group Service Company and who were previously allocated to, or were within, Barclays UK and Barclays International are now reported in Head Office.

170    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Analysis of Barclays UK             
    2017
£m
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Analysis of total income             
Personal Banking   3,823   3,891   3,714 
Barclaycard Consumer UK   1,977   2,022   2,065 
Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking   1,583   1,604   1,564 
Total income   7,383   7,517   7,343 
Analysis of credit impairment charges and other provisions             
Personal Banking   (222  (183  (194
Barclaycard Consumer UK   (541  (683  (488
Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking   (20  (30  (24
Total credit impairment charges and other provisions   (783  (896  (706
Analysis of loans and advances to customers at amortised cost             
Personal Banking   £139.8bn   £135.0bn   £134.0bn 
Barclaycard Consumer UK   £16.4bn   £16.5bn   £16.2bn 
Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Bankinga   £27.6bn   £14.9bn   £15.9bn 
Total loans and advances to customers at amortised cost   £183.8bn   £166.4bn   £166.1bn 
Analysis of customer deposits             
Personal Banking   £141.1bn   £139.3bn   £131.0bn 
Barclaycard Consumer UK          
Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking   £52.3bn   £49.7bn   £45.8bn 
Total customer deposits   £193.4bn   £189.0bn   £176.8bn 

Note

aIncludes the integration of the ESHLA portfolio at amortised cost from BarclaysNon-Core.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    171


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax increased 1% to £1,747m as lower PPI charges of £700m (2016: £1,000m) and a reduction in credit impairment charges were partially offset by thenon-recurrence of the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited in 2016, higher costs of setting up the ring-fenced bank and increased investment, primarily in cyber resilience, digital and technology.

Total income decreased 2% to £7,383m, of which £151m reflected thenon-recurrence of the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited in 2016.

Personal Banking income decreased 2% to £3,823m driven by thenon-recurrence of the Visa gain and the impact of the UK base rate reduction in 2016, partially offset by deposit pricing initiatives, growth in balances and an update to EIR modelling. Barclaycard Consumer UK income decreased 2% to £1,977m reflecting a provision for remediation in H217. Wealth, Entrepreneurs & Business Banking (WEBB) income decreased 1% to £1,583m driven by thenon-recurrence of the Visa gain, partially offset by growth in balances.

Net interest income increased 1% to £6,086m due to deposit pricing initiatives and growth in loans and advances to customers and deposits, partially offset by the impact of the UK base rate reduction in 2016. Net interest margin decreased 13bps to 3.49% reflecting the integration of the Education, Social Housing and Local Authority (ESHLA) portfolio fromNon-Core on 1 July 2017. Net fee, commission and other income decreased 12% to £1,297m driven by thenon-recurrence of the Visa gain.

Credit impairment charges decreased 13% to £783m principally reflecting thenon-recurrence of a £200m charge in 2016 following the management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling, partially offset by higher charges in Barclaycard Consumer UK and Personal Banking.

Operating expenses decreased 1% to £4,848m due to lower charges for PPI of £700m (2016: £1,000m), partially offset by the costs of setting up the ring-fenced bank and increased investment, primarily in cyber resilience, digital and technology. The cost: income ratio was 66% (2016: 65%).

Loans and advances to customers increased 10% to £183.8bn and total assets increased 13% to £237.4bn, reflecting the integration of the ESHLA portfolio fromNon-Core into WEBB on 1 July 2017 and mortgage growth in Personal Banking in H217.

Customer deposits increased 2% to £193.4bn due to deposit growth, partially offset by the realignment of clients between Barclays UK and Barclays International in preparation for structural reform.

RWAs increased to £70.9bn (December 2016: £67.5bn) reflecting the integration of the ESHLA portfolio.

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax increased £1,153m to £1,738m reflecting lower provisions for UK customer redress and a reduction in operating expenses. This was partially offset by an increase in credit impairment charges following the management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling.

Total income, including a gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited recognised in Personal Banking and WEBB, increased 2% to £7,517m.

Personal Banking income increased 5% to £3,891m driven by the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, improved deposit margins and balance growth, partially offset by lower mortgage margins. Barclaycard Consumer UK income decreased 2% to £2,022m primarily as a result of the European Interchange Fee Regulation, which came into full effect from December 2015, offset by balance growth and gains from debt sales. WEBB income increased 3% to £1,604m reflecting the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, improved margins and deposit growth, partially offset by reduced transactional fee income.

Net interest income increased 1% to £6,048m due to balance growth and deposit pricing initiatives, partially offset by lower mortgage margins. Net interest margin increased 6bps to 3.62% reflecting higher margins on deposits, partially offset by lower mortgage margins. Net fee, commission and other income increased 7% to £1,469m due to the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, partially offset by the impact of the European Interchange Fee Regulation in Barclaycard Consumer UK, which came into full effect from December 2015, and reduced fee and commission income in WEBB.

Credit impairment charges increased 27% to £896m due to a £200m charge in Q316 following the management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling. The 30 day and 90 day arrears rates on the cards portfolio improved year on year to 1.9% (2015: 2.3%) and 0.9% (2015: 1.2%) respectively.

Operating expenses reduced 19% to £4,882m reflecting lower provisions for UK customer redress, savings realised from strategic cost programmes, relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements, partially offset by structural reform programme implementation costs.

The cost: income ratio was 65% (2015: 82%), RoE was 6.4% (2015: negative 0.2%) and RoTE was 9.6% (2015: (0.3%)).

Loans and advances to customers were stable at £166.4bn (December 2015: £166.1bn).

Total assets increased £7.1bn to £209.6bn primarily reflecting an increase in the allocated liquidity pool.

Customer deposits increased 7% to £189.0bn primarily driven by higher balances in Personal Banking and WEBB.

RWAs reduced £2.0bn to £67.5bn primarily driven by changes in the mortgages credit risk model.

172    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays International
    2017
£m
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Income statement information    
Net interest income   4,307   4,512   4,324 
Net trading income   3,971   4,580   3,782 
Net fee, commission and other income   6,104   5,903   5,641 
Total income   14,382   14,995   13,747 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (1,506  (1,355  (922
Net operating income   12,876   13,640   12,825 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (9,321  (9,129  (8,029
UK bank levy   (265  (284  (253
Litigation and conduct   (269  (48  (1,310
Operating expenses   (9,855  (9,461  (9,592
Other net income   254   32   45 
Profit before tax   3,275   4,211   3,278 
Attributable profit   847   2,412   1,758 
Balance sheet information             
Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costa   £198.7bn   £211.3bn   £184.1bn 
Trading portfolio assets   £113.0bn   £73.2bn   £61.9bn 
Derivative financial instrument assets   £236.2bn   £156.2bn   £111.5bn 
Derivative financial instrument liabilities   £237.8bn   £160.6bn   £119.0bn 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   £12.4bn   £13.4bn   £24.7bn 
Financial assets designated at fair value   £104.1bn   £62.3bn   £46.8bn 
Total assets   £856.1bn   £648.5bn   £532.2bn 
Customer depositsb   £225.1bn   £216.2bn   £185.6bn 
Loan: deposit ratioc   62%   78%   80% 
Risk weighted assets   £210.3bn   £212.7bn   £194.8bn 
Key facts             
Number of employees (full time equivalent)d   11,500   36,900   39,100 
Performance measures             
Return on equity   3.2%   8.8%   6.6% 
Average allocated equity   £30.5bn   £28.2bn   £27.1bn 
Return on average allocated tangible equity   3.4%   9.8%   7.2% 
Average allocated tangible equity   £28.1bn   £25.5bn   £24.9bn 
Cost: income ratio   69%   63%   70% 
Loan loss rate (bps)   75   63   49 
Net interest margin   4.16%   3.98%   3.80% 

Notes

aAs at 31 December 2017 loans and advances included £170.4bn (December 2016: £185.9bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £15.7bn (December 2016: £19.5bn) and cash collateral of £35.9bn (December 2016: £30.1bn)), and £28.3bn (December 2016: £25.4bn) of loans and advances to banks (including settlement balances of £2.3bn (December 2016: £1.7bn) and cash collateral of £18.0bn (December 2016: £6.3bn)). Loans and advances to banks and customers in respect of Consumer, Cards and Payments were £38.6bn (December 2016: £39.7bn).
bAs at 31 December 2017 customer deposits included settlement balances of £15.2bn (December 2016: £16.6bn) and cash collateral of £27.3bn (December 2016: £20.8bn).
cLoan: deposit ratio excludes investment banking balances other than interest earning lending. Comparatives have been restated to include interest earning lending balances within the investment banking business.
dAs a result of the establishment of the Group Service Company in September 2017, employees who are now employed by the Group Service Company and who were previously allocated to, or were within, Barclays UK and Barclays International are now reported in Head Office.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    173


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Analysis of Barclays International             
Corporate and Investment Bank  2017
£m
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
Income statement information             
Macro   1,634   2,304   2,108 
Credit   1,241   1,185   824 
Equities   1,629   1,790   1,912 
Markets   4,504   5,279   4,844 
Banking fees   2,612   2,397   2,087 
Corporate lending   1,093   1,195   1,361 
Transaction banking   1,629   1,657   1,663 
Banking   5,334   5,249   5,111 
Other   40   5   495 
Total income   9,878   10,533   10,450 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (213  (260  (199
Operating expenses   (7,742  (7,624  (7,929
Other net income   133   1    
Profit before tax   2,056   2,650   2,322 
Balance sheet information             
Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost   £160.1bn   £171.6bn   £152.0bn 
Customer deposits   £165.9bn   £166.2bn   £143.8bn 
Risk weighted assets   £176.2bn   £178.6bn   £167.3bn 
Performance measures             
Return on equty   1.1%   5.8%   5.1% 
Average allocated equity   £24.9bn   £23.2bn   £23.1bn 
Return on average allocated tangible equity   1.1%   6.1%   5.4% 
Average allocated tangible equity   £24.0bn   £21.9bn   £21.9bn 
Consumer, Cards and Payments             
Income statement information             
Total income   4,504   4,462   3,297 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (1,293  (1,095  (723
Operating expenses   (2,113  (1,837  (1,663
Other net income   121   31   45 
Profit before tax   1,219   1,561   956 
Balance sheet information             
Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost   £38.6bn   £39.7bn   £32.1bn 
Customer deposits   £59.2bn   £50.0bn   £41.8bn 
Risk weighted assets   £34.1bn   £34.1bn   £27.5bn 
Key facts             
30 day arrears rate – Barclaycard US   2.6%   2.6%   2.2% 
Total number of Barclaycard business clients   366,000   355,000   341,000 
Value of payments processed   £322bn   £296bn   £271bn 
Performance measures             
Return on equity   12.5%   23.1%   15.3% 
Average allocated equity   £5.6bn   £5.0bn   £4.0bn 
Return on average allocated tangible equity   16.7%   31.4%   20.2% 
Average allocated tangible equity   £4.2bn   £3.6bn   £3.0bn 

174    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax decreased 22% to £3,275 driven by a 4% decrease in total income, an 11% increase in credit impairment charges and a 4% increase in operating expenses.

Total income decreased 4% to £14,382m, including the 5% appreciation of average USD and the 7% appreciation of average EUR against GBP, as CIB income decreased 6% to £9,878m, partially offset by a 1% increase in Consumer, Cards and Payments income to £4,504m.

Markets income decreased 15% to £4,504m. Macro income decreased 29% to £1,634m driven by lower market volatility in rates, the exit of the energy-related commodities business and the integration ofNon-Core assets on 1 July 2017. Credit income increased 5% to £1,241m due to improved performance in municipals. Equities income decreased 9% to £1,629m driven by US equity derivatives as a result of lower market volatility, partially offset by improved performance in equity financing.

Banking income increased 2% to £5,334m. Banking fee income increased 9% to £2,612m due to higher debt and equity underwriting fees, with fee share gains in banking overall and debt underwriting. Corporate lending declined 9% to £1,093m driven by lower lending balances due to the realignment of certain clients between Barclays UK and Barclays International in preparation for structural reform and the reallocation of RWAs within CIB, as well as thenon-recurrence of prior year treasury gains and lowerwork-out gains. Transaction banking declined 2% to £1,629m driven by lower trade balances and thenon-recurrence of prior year treasury gains, partially offset by higher average deposit balances.

Consumer, Cards and Payments income increased 1% to £4,504m driven by continued business growth, a gain of £192m relating to the Q117 asset sale in US Cards and a valuation gain on Barclays’ preference shares in Visa Inc. of £74m, partially offset by thenon-recurrence of the £464m gain on the disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited in 2016.

Credit impairment charges increased 11% to £1,506m, including the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP. CIB credit impairment charges decreased 18% to £213m primarily due to thenon-recurrence of oil and gas single name charges in 2016, offset by a single name charge in 2017. Consumer, Cards and Payments credit impairment charges increased 18% to £1,293m primarily due to a £168m charge in Q317 relating to deferred consideration from the Q117 asset sale in US Cards, an increase in underlying delinquency trends and business growth in US Cards. This was partially offset by thenon-recurrence of a £120m charge in 2016 following the management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling. The 30 and 90 day arrears rates within US Cards were stable at 2.6% (December 2016: 2.6%) and 1.3% (December 2016: 1.3%) respectively, including a benefit from the Q117 asset sale in US Cards.

Operating expenses increased 4% to £9,855m, including the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP. CIB operating expenses increased 2% to £7,742m reflecting a provision of £240m in respect of Foreign Exchange matters recognised in Q417, continued investment in technology, partially offset by lower restructuring charges and the reduced impact of the change in compensation awards introduced in Q416. Consumer, Cards and Payments increased 15% to £2,113m including continued growth and investment, primarily within the US Cards and merchant acquiring businesses.

Other net income increased to £254m (2016: £32m) due to a gain of £109m on the sale of Barclays’ share in VocaLink to MasterCard and a gain of £76m on the sale of a joint venture in Japan.

Attributable profit reduced to £847m (2016: £2,412m) including the net tax charge due to there-measurement of US DTAs in Q417.

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost decreased £12.6bn to £198.7bn with CIB decreasing £11.5bn to £160.1bn due to a reduction in lending. Consumer, Cards and Payments decreased £1.1bn to £38.6bn due to the depreciation of period end USD against GBP, partially offset by the realignment of certain clients from Barclays UK to Barclays International in preparation for structural reform.

Trading portfolio assets increased £39.8bn to £113.0bn due to increased activity.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased £80.0bn to £236.2bn and £77.2bn to £237.8bn respectively, reflecting the integration of balances fromNon-Core on 1 July 2017, partially offset by adoption of daily settlements under the CME, an increase in major interest rate forward curves and the depreciation of period end USD against GBP.

Financial assets designated at fair value increased £41.8bn to £104.1bn primarily due to increased reverse repurchase agreements activity.

Customer deposits increased £8.9bn to £225.1bn, with Consumer, Cards and Payments increasing £9.2bn to £59.2bn driven by the realignment of certain clients from Barclays UK to Barclays International in preparation for structural reform.

RWAs decreased £2.4bn to £210.3bn due to the net impact of there-measurement of US DTAs and the depreciation of period end USD against GBP, partially offset by increased trading portfolio and securities financing transaction volumes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    175


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax increased 28% to £4,211m due to the gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited and a 1% decrease in total operating expenses, partially offset by a 47% increase in impairment.

Total income increased 9% to £14,995m, including the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP, with Consumer, Cards and Payments income increasing 35% to £4,462m and CIB income increasing 1% to £10,533m.

Markets income increased 9% to £5,279m. Credit income increased 44% to £1,185m driven by strong performance in fixed income flow credit which benefited from increased market volatility and client demand. Equities income decreased 6% to £1,790m with lower client activity in Asia and the simplification of the EMEA business, partially offset by improved performance in cash, derivatives and financing in H216. Macro income increased 9% to £2,304m driven by increased activity post the EU referendum decision and US elections.

Banking income increased 3% to £5,249m. Banking fees income increased 15% to £2,397m driven by higher debt underwriting and advisory fees, partially offset by lower equity underwriting fees. Corporate lending reduced 12% to £1,195m due to losses on fair value hedges and thenon-recurrence ofone-offwork-out gains recognised in Q215. Transaction banking was broadly flat at £1,657m (2015: £1,663m) as income from higher deposit balances was offset by margin compression.

Consumer, Cards and Payments income increased 35% to £4,462m driven by the £464m gain on disposal of Barclays’ share of Visa Europe Limited, growth across all key businesses and the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP.

Credit impairment charges increased 47% to £1,355m including the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP. CIB credit impairment charges increased 31% to £260m driven by the impairment of a number of single name exposures. Consumer, Cards and Payments credit impairment charges increased 51% to £1,095m primarily driven by balance growth, a change in portfolio mix and a £120m charge in Q316 following a management review of the cards portfolio impairment modelling.

Operating expenses decreased 1% to £9,461m. CIB decreased 4% to £7,624m reflecting lower litigation and conduct costs. This was partially offset by the appreciation of average USD against GBP, an additional charge in Q416 relating to the 2016 compensation awards, higher restructuring costs, £150m of which related to reducing the real estate footprint in Q316, and higher structural reform programme implementation costs including those relating to the incorporation of the US IHC on 1 July 2016. Consumer, Cards and Payments increased 10% to £1,837m due to continued business growth and the appreciation of average USD and EUR against GBP, partially offset by lower restructuring costs.

The cost: income ratio was 63% (2015: 70%), RoE was 8.8% (2015: 6.6%) and RoTE was 9.8% (2015: 7.2%).

Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost increased £27.2bn to £211.3bn with CIB increasing £19.6bn to £171.6bn due to increased lending and cash collateral and the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP. Consumer, Cards and Payments increased £7.6bn to £39.7bn driven by appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP and growth in Barclaycard US, including the acquisition of the JetBlue credit card portfolio.

Trading portfolio assets increased £11.3bn to £73.2bn due to an increase in client activity and appreciation of major currencies against GBP.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased £44.7bn to £156.2bn and £41.6bn to £160.6bn respectively, due to the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP and decreases in forward interest rates.

Financial assets designated at fair value increased £15.5bn to £62.3bn and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending decreased £11.3bn to £13.4bn. Since 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. This has resulted in an increase of £44bn in this account line. Across fair value and amortised cost classifications, total reverse repurchase agreements have decreased £59bn due to a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging. Additionally, within financial assets designated at fair value, there was a partial offset by decreases in loans and advances and debt securities.

Derivative financial instrument assets decreased £112bn to £328bn, consistent with the decrease in derivative financial instrument liabilities. This included a £79bn decrease in interest rate derivatives due to net trade reductions and increases in major forward interest rates and a £19bn decrease in foreign exchange derivatives reflecting trade reductions.

Available for sale investments increased £4bn to £90bn due to an increase in government bonds held in the liquidity pool.

Total loans and advances decreased by £29bn to £441bn driven byOn a net £20bn decrease in settlement and cash collateral balances, a £6bn reclassification of loans to other assets, relating to the Portuguese retail business and Italian retail banking branch network which are now held for sale and a £5bn decrease in Africa reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offsetbasis reverse repos have increased by lending growth of £5bn in Barclaycard.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending decreased £104bn to £28bn reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging and£4.2bn as a result of the designationincreased matched book trading.

Customer deposits increased £30.6bn to fair value described in the financial assets designated at fair value comment above.

Total liabilities

Total liabilities decreased £238bn£216.2bn, with CIB increasing £22.4bn to £1,054bn.

Deposits from banks decreased £11bn to £47bn£166.2bn primarily driven by a £9bn decreaseincreases in deposits cash collateral dueand the appreciation of USD and EUR against GBP. Consumer, Cards and Payments increased £8.2bn to lower derivative mark to market.

Customer accounts decreased £10bn to £418bn as a result of reclassification of £4bn to other liabilities relating to the Portuguese retail business and Italian retail banking branch network which are now held for sale, a £7bn reduction in settlement balances, a £3bn decrease in cash collateral due to lower derivative mark to market and a £7bn decrease due to depreciation of ZAR. This is partially offset by £13bn growth within PCB, Barclaycard and Africa.

Trading portfolio liabilities decreased £11bn to £34bn primarily£50.0bn driven by balance sheet deleveraging resultinggrowth in lower securities positions, consistent with client demand in the Investment Bank,Barclaycard US and exiting of positions in Non-Core.

Financial liabilities designated at fair value increased by £35bn to £92bn. In line with financial assets designated at fair value, the designation of repurchase agreements to fair value resulted in an increase of £45bn during the year. Across fair value and amortised cost classifications, total repurchase agreements have decreased £54bn due to a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging. Additionally, within financial liabilities designated at fair value, there was a partial offset in debt securities due to reduced funding requirements.

Derivative financial instrument liabilities decreased £115bn to £324bn in line with the decrease in derivative financial assets.

Debt Securities in issue decreased by £17bn to £69bn primarily driven by a decrease in Certificate of Deposits and Bonds and MTNs due to reduced funding requirements.

Subordinated liabilities increased £0.3bn to £21.5bn due to issuances of dated subordinated notes, partially offset by the redemptions of dated and undated subordinated notes, and fair value hedge movements.

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowings decreased £99bn to £25bn reflecting a reduction in matched book trading and general firm financing due to balance sheet deleveraging and as a result of the designation to fair value described in the financial assets designated at fair value comment above.

Shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity remained flat at £66bn.

Share capital and share premium increased by £0.8bn to £22bn due to the issuance of shares under employee share schemesPrivate Banking, and the Barclays PLC scrip dividend programme. Other equity instrumentsappreciation of USD and EUR against GBP.

RWAs increased by £1.0bn£17.9bn to £5.3bn£212.7bn, due to issuance of equity accounted AT1 securities to investors.

The available for sale reserve decreased £0.2bn to £0.3bn driven by £0.4bn of losses from changes in the fair value of government bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool, £0.1bn of losses from related hedging, £0.4bn of net gains transferred to net profit, partially offset by £0.4bn gains from changes in fair value of equity investments in Visa Europe and an £0.1bn change in insurance liabilities. A tax credit of £0.1bn was recognised in the period relating to these items.

The cash flow hedging reserve decreased £0.6bn to £1.3bn driven by a £0.4bn decrease in the fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increased, and £0.2bn of gains recycled to the income statement in line with when the hedged item affects profit or loss, partially offset by a tax credit of £0.1bn.

The currency translation reserve remained stable as the effect of ZAR depreciating against GBP was offset by the appreciation of USD against GBP.

Net tangible asset value per share decreased to 275p (2014: 285p). The decrease was primarily attributable to dividends paidGBP, and a decreasebusiness growth, including the acquisition of the JetBlue credit card portfolio in the cash flow hedging reserve as explained.

CapitalConsumer, Cards and indebtedness

The capital and indebtedness tables with respect to Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC that are exhibited to this Annual Report on Form 20-F as Exhibits 99.1 and 99.2, respectively, are incorporated by reference into thisForm 20-F.Payments.

 

 

190  |  176    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Segmental analysis (audited)

Analysis of adjusted results by business

                                        
    
 
 
 
 
Personal 
and 
Corporate 
Banking 
£m 
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
Barclaycard 
£m 
  
  
   
 
 
Africa 
Banking 
£m 
  
  
  
   
 

 

Investment 
Bank 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 
 
Head 
Office 
£m 
  
  
  
   
 

 

Barclays 
Core 

£m 

  
  

  

   
 
 
Barclays 
Non-Core 
£m 
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Group 
adjusted 
results 
£m 
  
  
  
  

For the year ended 31 December 2015

                

Total income net of insurance claims

   8,726      4,927      3,574      7,572      (107)     24,692      (164)     24,528   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (378)     (1,251)     (352)     (55)     –      (2,036)     (78)     (2,114)  

Net operating income

   8,348      3,676      3,222      7,517      (107)     22,656      (242)     22,414   

Operating expenses

   (4,774)     (1,927)     (2,169)     (5,362)     (246)     (14,478)     (873)     (15,351)  

UK bank levy

   (93)     (42)     (52)     (203)     (8)     (398)     (78)     (476)  

Litigation and conduct

   (109)     –      –      (107)     (14)     (230)     (148)     (378)  

Costs to achieve

   (292)     (106)     (29)     (234)     (32)     (693)     (100)     (793)  

Other (losses)/incomea

   (40)     33           –                (18)     (13)  

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   3,040      1,634      979      1,611      (402)     6,862      (1,459)     5,403   

Total assets (£bn)

   287.2      47.4      49.9      375.9      56.4      816.9      303.1      1,120.0   
                                         

For the year ended 31 December 2014

                

Total income net of insurance claims

   8,828      4,356      3,664      7,588      242      24,678      1,050      25,728   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (482)     (1,183)     (349)     14      –      (2,000)     (168)     (2,168)  

Net operating income

   8,346      3,173      3,315      7,602      242      22,678      882      23,560   

Operating expenses

   (4,951)     (1,727)     (2,244)     (5,504)     (57)     (14,483)     (1,510)     (15,993)  

UK bank levy

   (70)     (29)     (45)     (218)     (9)     (371)     (91)     (462)  

Litigation and conduct

   (54)     –      (2)     (129)     (66)     (251)     (198)     (449)  

Costs to achieve

   (400)     (118)     (51)     (374)     (10)     (953)     (212)     (1,165)  

Other income/(losses)a

   14      40      11      –      (3)     62      (51)     11   

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   2,885      1,339      984      1,377      97      6,682      (1,180)     5,502   

Total assets (£bn)

   285.0      41.3      55.5      455.7      49.1      886.5      471.5      1,357.9   
                                         

For the year ended 31 December 2013b

                

Total income net of insurance claims

   8,723      4,103      4,039      8,596      142      25,603      2,293      27,896   

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (621)     (1,096)     (479)     22           (2,171)     (900)     (3,071)  

Net operating income

   8,102      3,007      3,560      8,618      145      23,432      1,393      24,825   

Operating expenses

   (5,362)     (1,752)     (2,451)     (6,141)     (103)     (15,809)     (1,929)     (17,738)  

UK bank levy

   (66)     (22)     (42)     (236)     (29)     (395)     (109)     (504)  

Litigation and conduct

   (98)     (34)     –      (31)     (10)     (173)     (96)     (269)  

Costs to achieve

   (384)     (49)     (26)     (190)     (22)     (671)     (538)     (1,209)  

Other income/(losses)a

   41      33           –           86      (110)     (24)  

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   2,233      1,183      1,049      2,020      (15)     6,470      (1,389)     5,081   

Total assets (£bn)

   278.5      34.4      54.9      438.0      26.6      832.4      511.2      1,343.6   

    

    

    

Head Office

    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 
Income statement information             
Net interest income   (435  (183  (305
Net fee, commission and other incomea   276   286   643 
Total income   (159  103   338 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (17      
Net operating (expenses)/income   (176  103   338 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (277  (135  (272
UK bank levy   (41  (2  (8
Litigation and conduct   (151  (27  (66
Operating expenses   (469  (164  (346
Other net (expenses)/income   (189  128   (106
(Loss)/profit before tax   (834  67   (114
Attributable (loss)/profit   (868  110   11 
Balance sheet information             
Total assets   £39.7bn   £75.2bn   £59.4bn 
Risk weighted assetsb   £31.8bn   £53.3bn   £39.7bn 
Key facts             
Number of employees (full time equivalent)c   45,600   100   100 
Performance measures             
Average allocated equity   £10.6bn   £8.0bn   £3.9bn 
Average allocated tangible equity (£bn)   £9.3bn   £6.5bn   £2.6bn 

Notes

aOther (losses)/Following the early adoption of the own credit provisions of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2017, own credit, which was previously reported in net fee, commission and other income, represents the share of post-tax results of associatesis now recognised in other comprehensive income. The comparative figures for net fee, commission and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.other income include own credit.
b2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassificationIncludes Africa Banking RWAs of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.£6.4bn (December 2016: £42.3bn).
cAs a result of the establishment of the Group Service Company in September 2017, employees who are now employed by the Group Service Company and who were previously allocated to, or were within, Barclays UK and Barclays International are now reported in Head Office.

2017 compared to 2016

Loss before tax was £834m (2016: profit of £67m).

Total income reduced to an expense of £159m (2016: income of £103m) primarily due to lower net income from treasury operations.

Operating expenses increased to £469m (2016: £164m) due to costs associated withNon-Core assets and businesses, which were integrated on 1 July 2017, and increased litigation and conduct costs, including a settlement to resolve the civil action brought by the US Federal Energy Regulatory Commission’s Office of Enforcement and provisions for other legacy redress.

Other net expenses were £189m (2016: income of £128m) driven by an expense of £180m on the recycling of the currency translation reserve to the income statement on the sale of Barclays Bank Egypt. 2016 included a gain due to recycling of the currency translation reserve on disposal of the Southern European cards business.

Total assets decreased to £39.7bn (December 2016: £75.2bn) primarily due to the accounting deconsolidation of BAGL, which accounted for £65bn of total assets on deconsolidation from the Barclays Group. This was partially offset by the integration ofNon-Core assets on 1 July 2017, of which c.£9bn related to Italian mortgages.

RWAs decreased to £31.8bn (December 2016: £53.3bn) reflecting a £31.1bn reduction as a result of the proportional consolidation of BAGL, partially offset by the integration ofNon-Core assets.

2016 compared to 2015

Profit before tax was £67m (2015: loss of £114m).

Net operating income decreased 70% to £103m due to an own credit charge of £35m (2015: gain of £430m), partially offset by changes in net income from treasury operations.

Operating expenses reduced 53% to £164m primarily due to a reduction in structural reform implementation costs now allocated to the businesses and a reduction in litigation and conduct costs.

Other net income increased to £128m (2015: expense of £106m) primarily due to recycling of the currency translation reserve on the disposal of the Southern European cards business. The 2015 expense included losses on sale relating to legacy businesses.

Total assets increased £15.8bn to £75.2bn primarily driven by the appreciation of ZAR against GBP.

RWAs increased £13.6bn to £53.3bn primarily driven by the appreciation of ZAR against GBP and the reallocation of operational risk RWAs fromNon-Core associated with exited businesses and assets.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  191    177


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

All disclosures in this section are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

 

 

Adjusted results reconciliation

  

        2015              2014               2013a       

For the year ended 31 December

   
 
 

 

Group
adjusted
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Adjusting
items

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
statutory
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
adjusted
results

£m

  
  
  

  

  
 

 

Adjusting
items

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
statutory
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
adjusted
results

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Adjusting
items

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Group
statutory
results

£m

  
  
  

  

Total income net of insurance claims

   24,528     926     25,454     25,728    (440   25,288     27,896     39     27,935  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,114        (2,114   (2,168       (2,168   (3,071        (3,071

Net operating income

   22,414     926     23,340     23,560    (440   23,120     24,825     39     24,864  

Operating expenses

   (15,351   330     (15,021   (15,993       (15,993   (17,738   (79   (17,817

UK bank levy

   (476        (476   (462       (462   (504        (504

Litigation and conduct

   (378   (4,009   (4,387   (449  (2,360   (2,809   (269   (2,173   (2,442

Costs to achieve

   (793        (793   (1,165       (1,165   (1,209        (1,209

Other (losses)/incomeb

   (13   (577   (590   11    (446   (435   (24        (24

Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations

   5,403     (3,330   2,073     5,502    (3,246   2,256     5,081     (2,213   2,868  

    

                 

Adjusted profit reconciliation

                                            

For the year ended 31 December

                                

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

a 

  

Adjusted profit before tax

  

     5,403       5,502       5,081  

Provisions for UK customer redress

  

   (2,772   (1,110   (2,000

Provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

  

   (1,237   (1,250   (173

Losses on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses

  

   (580   (446     

Gain on US Lehman acquisition assets

  

   496     461     259  

Own credit

  

   430     34     (220

Gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability

  

   429            

Impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed

  

   (96        (79

Revision of ESHLA valuation methodology

  

        (935     

Statutory profit before tax

  

            2,073     2,256     2,868  

    

                 

Income by geographic region (audited)

                                            
             Adjusted               Statutory       
                   

 

2015

£m

  

  

  

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

                 

UKc

         11,730    12,357     11,681     12,160     11,456     11,461  

Europe

         2,245    2,896     4,019     2,245     2,896     4,019  

Americasd

         6,114    5,547     6,775     6,610     6,008     7,034  

Africa and Middle East

         3,801    4,152     4,137     3,801     4,152     4,137  

Asia

         638    776     1,284     638     776     1,284  

Total

                  24,528    25,728     27,896     25,454     25,288     27,935  

    

                 

Statutory income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total income (audited)e

  

               
                                 

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

                 

UK

              12,160     11,456     11,461  

US

              6,228     5,866     6,760  

South Africa

                                2,727     2,915     2,884  

 

NotesBarclaysNon-Core

    

        2017a

£m 

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 
Income statement information    
Net interest income   (112  160   615 
Net trading income   (488  (1,703  (706
Net fee, commission and other income   70   379   703 
Total income   (530  (1,164  612 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (30  (122  (134
Net operating (expenses)/income   (560  (1,286  478 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (256  (1,509  (1,958
UK bank levy      (76  (88
Litigation and conduct   (28  (246  (500
Operating expenses   (284  (1,831  (2,546
Other net income/(expenses)   197   331   (535
Loss before tax   (647  (2,786  (2,603
Attributable loss   (419  (1,916  (2,418
Balance sheet information             
Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised cost      £51.1bn   £51.8bn 
Derivative financial instrument assets      £188.7bn   £213.7bn 
Derivative financial instrument liabilities      £178.6bn   £202.1bn 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending      £0.1bn   £3.1bn 
Financial assets designated at fair value      £14.5bn   £21.4bn 
Total assets      £279.7bn   £325.8bn 
Customer deposits      £12.5bn   £20.9bn 
Risk weighted assets      £32.1bn   £54.3bn 
Key facts             
Number of employees (full time equivalent)      5,500   9,900 

Note

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to accountRepresents financial results for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.six months ended 30 June 2017.
bOther (losses)/income represents the share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
cUK adjusted income excludes the impact of an own credit gain of £430m (2014: £34m gain) and ESHLA valuation revision of nil (2014: £935m).
dAmericas adjusted income excludes the gains on US Lehman acquisition assets of £496m (2014: £461m).
eTotal income net of insurance claims based on counterparty location. Income from any single external customer does not amount to 10% or greater of the Group’s total income net of insurance claims.

TheNon-Core segment was closed on 1 July 2017 with the residual assets and liabilities reintegrated into, and associated financial performance subsequently reported in, Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office.

Financial results up until 30 June 2017 are reflected in theNon-Core segment within the Group’s results for the year ended

31 December 2017.

 

192  |  178    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

Discontinued Operation: Africa Banking

    

        2017a

£m 

  

        2016

£m

  

        2015

£m

 
Income statement information    
Net interest income   1,024   2,169   1,950 
Net fee, commission and other income   762   1,577   1,464 
Total income   1,786   3,746   3,414 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (177  (445  (353
Net operating income   1,609   3,301   3,061 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL   (1,130  (2,345  (2,091
UK bank levy      (65  (50
Other net income excluding loss on sale of BAGL   5   6   7 
Profit before tax excluding impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL and loss on sale of BAGL   484   897   927 
Impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL   (1,090      
Loss on sale of BAGL   (1,435      
(Loss)/profit before tax   (2,041  897   927 
Tax charge   (154  (306  (301
(Loss)/profit after tax   (2,195  591   626 
Attributable (loss)/profit   (2,335  189   302 
Balance sheet information             
Total assets     £65.1bn  £47.9bn 
Risk weighted assets     £42.3bn  £31.7bn 
Key facts             
Number of employees (full time equivalent)      40,800   41,500 

Note

a

Barclays Core                    

The Africa Banking income statement represents five months of results as a discontinued operation to 31 May 2017.

 

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Income statement information

      

Total income net of insurance claims

   24,692     24,678     25,603  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (2,036   (2,000   (2,171

Net operating income

   22,656     22,678     23,432  

Operating expenses

   (14,478   (14,483   (15,809

UK bank levy

   (398   (371   (395

Litigation and conduct

   (230   (251   (173

Costs to achieve

   (693   (953   (671

Total operating expenses

   (15,799   (16,058   (17,048

Other net income

   5     62     86  

Profit before tax

   6,862     6,682     6,470  

Tax charge

   (1,749   (1,976   (1,754

Profit after tax

   5,113     4,706     4,716  

Non-controlling interests

   (610   (648   (638

Other equity interests

   (284   (194     

Attributable profit

   4,219     3,864     4,078  

Balance sheet information

               

Total assets

   £816.9bn     £886.5bn     £832.4bn  

Risk weighted assets

   £311.8bn     £326.6bn     £332.6bn  

Leverage exposure

   £906.5bn     £955.9bn     n/a  

Key facts

      

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   123,800     123,400     129,700  

Performance measures

               

Return on average tangible equity

   10.9%     11.3%     14.4%  

Average allocated tangible equity

   £39.2bn     £34.6bn     £28.4bn  

Return on average equity

   9.0%     9.2%     11.3%  

Average allocated equity

   £47.3bn     £42.3bn     £35.9bn  

Period end allocated equity

   £47.6bn     £44.9bn     £39.0bn  

Cost:income ratio

   64%     65%     67%  

Loan loss rate (bps)

   51     49     55  

On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its intention to reduce the Group’s 62.3% interest in BAGL to a level which would permit Barclays to deconsolidate BAGL from a regulatory perspective and, prior to that, from an accounting perspective. From this date, BAGL was treated as a discontinued operation. On 5 May 2016, Barclays sold 12.2% of the Group’s interest in BAGL and on 1 June 2017 Barclays sold a further 33.7% of BAGL’s issued share capital, resulting in the accounting deconsolidation of BAGL from the Barclays Group. At this time, Barclays’ holding in BAGL technically met the requirements to be treated as an Associate. However, following a revision of its governance rights in July 2017 and the difference being immaterial, the holding was treated as an AFS asset from the transaction date.

In Q317 Barclays contributed 1.5% of BAGL’s ordinary shares to a Black Economic Empowerment scheme, resulting in Barclays accounting for 126 million ordinary shares in BAGL, representing 14.9% of BAGL’s issued share capital. The retained investment is reported as an AFS asset in the Head Office segment, with Barclays’ share of BAGL’s dividend recognised in the Head Office income statement.

For regulatory reporting purposes, BAGL is treated on a proportional consolidated basis based on a holding of 14.9% as at Q417. Subject to regulatory approval, Barclays expects to fully deconsolidate BAGL from a regulatory perspective by the end of 2018.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  193    179


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

    

    

Personal and

Corporate Banking

£8,726m total income

£3,040m profit before tax

 

 

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax improved 5% to £3,040m driven by the continued reduction in operating expenses and lower impairment due to the benign economic environment in the UK. The reduction in operating expenses was delivered through strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation. Corporate performed strongly with income increasing 5% through growth in both lending and cash management.

PCB results were significantly impacted by customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business. Excluding the US Wealth business profit before tax improved 12% to £3,277m.Margins analysis

Total income reduced 1% to £8,726m. Excluding the US Wealth business income remained flat. Personal income decreased 3% to £4,054m driven by a reduction in fee income and mortgage margin pressure, partially offset by improved deposit margins and balance growth. Corporate income increased 5% to £3,754m due to balance growth in both lending and deposits and improved deposit margins, partially offset by reduced margins in the lending business. Wealth income reduced 15% to £918m primarily as a result of the impact of customer redress in, and the sale of, the US Wealth business. Excluding the US Wealth business income decreased 2%.

Net interest income increased 2% to £6,438m driven by growth in Corporate balances and the change in the overdraft proposition in June 2014. Net interest margin remained broadly in line at 2.99% (2014: 3.00%) as mortgage margin pressure and lower Corporate lending margins were partially offset by increased margins on Corporate and Personal deposits, and the benefit of the change in the overdraft proposition.

Net fee, commission and other income reduced 10% to £2,288m driven primarily by the impact of the change in the overdraft proposition and customer redress in the US.

Credit impairment charges improved 22% to £378m due to the benign economic environment in the UK resulting in lower default rates and charges across all businesses. The loan loss rate reduced 4bps to 17bps.

Total operating expenses reduced 4% to £5,268m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements, and lower costs to achieve, partially offset by increased litigation and conduct charges.

Loans and advances to customers increased 1% to £218.4bn due to increased Corporate lending.

Total assets increased 1% to £287.2bn driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 2% to £305.4bn primarily driven by the Personal and Corporate businesses.

RWAs were broadly flat at £120.4bn (2014: £120.2bn).

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax increased 29% to £2,885m driven by 3% growth in Personal income, lower impairment due to the improving economic environment in theBarclays UK and the continued reduction in operating expenses delivered through strategic cost programmes. This resulted in a 2.2% increase in return on average equity to 11.9%. In Personal, income increased £119m alongside significant cost reductions, with theBarclays International net closure of 72 branches as part of ongoing branch network optimisation, as well as investment in the customer experience across multiple channels. Corporate increased both loans and deposits, and Wealth undertook a substantial reorganisation to reduce the number of target markets while simplifying operations.

Totalinterest income increased 1% to £8,828m. Personal income increased 3% to £4,159m due to balance growth and improved savings margins, partially offset by lower fee income. Corporate income was broadly in line at £3,592m (2013: £3,620m), with balance growth in both lending and deposits, offset by margin compression. Wealth income was broadly in line at £1,077m (2013: £1,063m) driven by growth in the UK business, offset by client and market exits as part of the reorganisations in the US and EU businesses, and lower fee income.

Net interest income increased 7% to £6,298m driven by lending and deposit growth and margin improvement. Net interest margin improved 9bps to 3.00% primarily due to the launch of a revised overdraft proposition, which recognises the majority of overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income, and higher savings margins within Personal and Wealth. These factors were partially offset by lower Corporate deposit margins.

Net fee, commission and other income reduced 11% to £2,530m due to the launch of the revised overdraft proposition and lower transactional income in Wealth.

Credit impairment charges improved 22% to £482m and the loan loss rate reduced 7bps to 21bps due to the improving economic environment in the UK, particularly impacting Corporate which benefited from one-off releases and lower defaults from large UK Corporate clients.

Total operating expenses reduced 7% to £5,475m reflecting savings realised from strategic cost programmes relating to restructuring of the branch network and technology improvements to increase automation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 2% to £217.0bn due to mortgage growth and Corporate loan growth.

Total assets increased 2% to £285.0bn driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased to £299.2bn (2013: £295.9bn).

RWAs increased 2% to £120.2bn primarily driven by growth in mortgage and Corporate lending.

194  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

  

2013 

£m 

Income statement information

      

Net interest income

   6,438      6,298     5,893 

Net fee, commission and other income

   2,288      2,530     2,830 

Total income

   8,726      8,828     8,723 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   (378)     (482)    (621)

Net operating income

   8,348      8,346     8,102 

Operating expenses

   (4,774)     (4,951)    (5,362)

UK bank levy

   (93)     (70)    (66)

Litigation and conduct

   (109)     (54)    (98)

Costs to achieve

   (292)     (400)    (384)

Total operating expenses

   (5,268)     (5,475)    (5,910)

Other net (expenses)/income

   (40)     14     41 

Profit before tax

   3,040      2,885     2,233 

Attributable profit

   2,179      2,058     1,681 

Balance sheet information

             

Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

   £218.4bn      £217.0bn     £212.2bn 

Total assets

   £287.2bn      £285.0bn     £278.5bn 

Customer deposits

   £305.4bn      £299.2bn     £295.9bn 

Risk weighted assets

   £120.4bn      £120.2bn     £118.3bn 

Key facts

             

Average LTV of mortgage lendinga

   49%      52%     56% 

Average LTV of new mortgage lendinga

   64%      65%     64% 

Client assetsb

   £112.2bn      £148.6bn     £155.3bn 

Number of branches

   1,362      1,488     1,560 

Number of employees (full time equivalent)

   45,700      45,600     50,100 

Performance measures

             

Return on average tangible equity

   16.2%      15.8%     12.7% 

Average allocated tangible equity

   £13.6bn      £13.1bn     £13.2bn 

Return on average equity

   12.1%      11.9%     9.7% 

Average allocated equity

   £18.2bn      £17.5bn     £17.3bn 

Cost:income ratio

   60%      62%     68% 

Loan loss rate (bps)

   17      21     28 

Net interest margin

   2.99%      3.00%     2.91% 

Analysis of total income

   £m      £m     £m 

Personal

   4,054      4,159     4,040 

Corporate

   3,754      3,592     3,620 

Wealth

   918      1,077     1,063 

Total income

   8,726      8,828     8,723 

Analysis of loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

             

Personal

   £137.0bn      £136.8bn     £133.8bn 

Corporate

   £67.9bn      £65.1bn     £62.5bn 

Wealth

   £13.5bn      £15.1bn     £15.9bn 

Total loans and advances to customers at amortised cost

   £218.4bn      £217.0bn     £212.2bn 

Analysis of customer deposits

             

Personal

   £151.3bn      £145.8bn     £140.5bn 

Corporate

   £124.4bn      £122.2bn     £118.5bn 

Wealth

   £29.7bn      £31.2bn     £36.9bn 

Total customer deposits

   £305.4bn      £299.2bn     £295.9bn 

Notes

aAverage LTV of mortgage lending and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.
bIncludes assets managed or administered by Barclays on behalf of clients including Assets Under Management (AUM), custody assets, assets under administration, and Wealth client deposits and client lending.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  195


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Barclaycard

£4,927m total income

£1,634m profit before tax

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax increased 22% to £1,634m. Strong growth was delivered through the diversified consumer and merchant business model with asset growth across all geographies. The cost to income ratio improved to 42% (2014: 43%) whilst investment in business growth continued. The business focus on risk management was reflected in stable 30 day delinquency rates and improved loan loss rates.

Total income increased 13% to £4,927m driven primarily by business growth in US cards and the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Net interest income increased 16% to £3,520m driven by business growth. Net interest margin also improved to 9.13% (2014: 8.75%) reflecting growth in interest earning lending.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 7% to £1,407m due to growth in payment volumes, partially offset by the impact of rate capping from European Interchange Fee Regulation.

Credit impairment charges increased 6% to £1,251m primarily reflecting asset growth and updates to impairment model methodologies, partially offset by improved performance in UK Cards. Delinquency rates remained broadly stable and the loan loss rate reduced 19bps to 289bps.

Total operating expenses increased 11% to £2,075m due to continued investment in business growth, the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP and the impact of one-off items, including a write-off of intangible assets of £55m relating to the withdrawal of the Bespoke product.

Loans and advances to customers increased 9% to £39.8bn reflecting growth across all geographies.

Total assets increased 15% to £47.4bn primarily due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 40% to £10.2bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

RWAs increased 4% to £41.3bn primarily driven by the growth in the US cards business.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax increased 13% to £1,339m. Strong growth in 2014 was delivered through a diversified consumer and merchant business model, with customer numbers increasing to 29m (2013: 26m) and asset growth across all geographies generating a 6% increase in income. Growth has been managed on a well-controlled cost base, with the business focusing on scale through insourcing of services, consolidation of sites and digitalisation, resulting in an improvement in the cost to income ratio to 43% (2013: 45%). The business focus on risk management is reflected in stable 30 day delinquency rates and falling loan loss rates. The diversified and scaled business model has allowed the business to deliver a strong return on average equity of 16.0% (2013: 15.5%).

Total income increased 6% to £4,356m reflecting growth in the UK consumer and merchant, Germany and US businesses, partially offset by depreciation of average USD against GBP.

Net interest income increased 8% to £3,044m driven by volume growth. Net interest margin decreased to 8.75% (2013: 8.99%) due to a change in product mix and the impact of promotional offers, particularly in the US, partially offset by lower funding costs.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 3% to £1,312m due to growth in payment volumes.

Credit impairment charges increased 8% to £1,183m due to asset growth and enhanced coverage for forbearance. Delinquency rates remained broadly stable and the loan loss rate reduced 24bps to 308bps.

Total operating expenses increased 1% to £1,874m driven by higher costs to achieve of £118m (2013: £49m), partially offset by depreciation of average USD against GBP, VAT refunds, and savings from strategic cost programmes, including insourcing of services, consolidation of sites and digitalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 16% to £36.6bn reflecting growth across all geographies, including the impact of promotional offers and the acquisition of portfolios in the US.

Total assets increased 20% to £41.3bn due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 43% to £7.3bn driven by the deposits funding strategy in the US.

RWAs increased 12% to £39.9bn primarily driven by the growth in loans and advances to customers.

196  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


      

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

  

2013 

£m 

  
 Income statement information       
 Net interest income   3,520      3,044     2,829  
  Net fee, commission and other income   1,407      1,312     1,274   
 Total income   4,927      4,356     4,103  
  Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (1,251)     (1,183)    (1,096)  
  Net operating income   3,676      3,173     3,007   
 Operating expenses   (1,927)     (1,727)    (1,752) 
 UK bank levy   (42)     (29)    (22) 
 Litigation and conduct   –      –     (34) 
  Costs to achieve   (106)     (118)    (49)  
 Total operating expenses   (2,075)     (1,874)    (1,857) 
  Other net income   33      40     33   
 Profit before tax   1,634      1,339     1,183  
 Attributable profit   1,106      938     822  
  Balance sheet information               
 Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost   £39.8bn      £36.6bn     £31.5bn  
 Total assets   £47.4bn      £41.3bn     £34.4bn  
 Customer deposits   £10.2bn      £7.3bn     £5.1bn  
  Risk weighted assets   £41.3bn      £39.9bn     £35.7bn   
  Key facts               
 30 days arrears rates – UK cards   2.3%      2.5%     2.4%  
 30 days arrears rates – US cards   2.2%      2.1%     2.1%  
 Total number of Barclaycard consumer customers   28.2m      29.1m     26.3m  
 Total number of Barclaycard business clients   341,000      340,000     350,000  
 Value of payments processed   £293bn      £257bn     £236bn  
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)   13,100      12,200     11,000   
  Performance measures               
 Return on average tangible equity   22.3%      19.9%     19.9%  
 Average allocated tangible equity   £5.0bn      £4.7bn     £4.1bn  
 Return on average equity   17.7%      16.0%     15.5%  
 Average allocated equity   £6.3bn      £5.9bn     £5.3bn  
 Cost:income ratio   42%      43%     45%  
 Loan loss rate (bps)   289      308     332  
  Net interest margin   9.13%      8.75%     8.99%   

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  197


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Africa Banking

£3,574m total income net

of insurance claims

£979m profit before tax

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax decreased 1% to £979m and total income net of insurance claims decreased 2% to £3,574m. The ZAR depreciated against GBP by 10% based on average rates and by 28% based on the closing exchange rate in 2015. The deterioration was a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking and therefore the discussion of business performance below is based on results on a constant currency basis.

Results on a constant currency basis

Profit before tax increased 11% to £979m reflecting an increase of 18% in operations outside South Africa and an increase of 9% in South Africa despite the challenging macroeconomic environment. Good growth was delivered in the focus areas of Retail and Business Banking (RBB) and corporate banking in South Africa, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI), whilst performance in the corporate business outside South Africa was impacted by higher impairment.

Total income net of insurance claims increased 7% to £3,574m.

Net interest income increased 8% to £2,066m driven by higher average customer advances in Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB) and strong growth in customer deposits in RBB. Net interest margin increased 11bps to 6.06% primarily due to improved asset margins in retail in South Africa.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 5% to £1,668m reflecting increased transactional income in RBB, partially offset by lower investment banking income in South Africa.

Credit impairment charges increased 11% to £352m driven by an increase in single name exposures and additional coverage on performing loans. The loan loss rate increased 16bps to 109bps.

Total operating expenses increased 5% to £2,250m reflecting inflationary impacts, partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes including the restructure of the branch network, technology improvements and property rationalisation.

Loans and advances to customers increased 8% to £29.9bn driven by strong CIB growth.

Total assets increased 14% to £49.9bn primarily due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 11% to £30.6bn reflecting strong growth in the RBB business.

RWAs increased 8% to £33.9bn primarily due to an increase in corporate lending.

2014 compared to 2013

On a reported basis, total income net of insurance claims decreased 9% to £3,664m and profit before tax decreased 6% to £984m. Based on average rates, the ZAR depreciated against GBP by 18% in 2014. The deterioration was a significant contributor to the movement in the reported results of Africa Banking. The discussion of business performance below is based on results on a constant currency basis unless otherwise stated.

Results on a constant currency basis

Profit before tax increased 13% to £984m, reflecting good growth in Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB) and Retail and Business Banking (RBB). CIB experienced strong income growth, driven by the corporate banking business outside South Africa and improved investment banking trading performance across Africa. Continued progress was made on the RBB South Africa turnaround strategy, with increased net fee and commission income growth in the second half of the year, and Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI) delivered strong growth outside South Africa due to expansion initiatives.

Total income net of insurance claims increased 7% to £3,664m.

Net interest income increased 9% to £2,093m, primarily driven by higher average loans and advances to customers in CIB and growth in customer deposits in RBB in South Africa. Net interest margin on a reported basis increased 14bps to 5.95% following the rise in the South African benchmark interest rate and the favourable impact of higher deposit margins, partially offset by lower rates outside South Africa.

Net fee, commission and other income increased 4% to £1,741m mainly reflecting increased RBB transactions in South Africa.

Credit impairment charges decreased 14% to £349m and on a reported basis the loan loss rate improved 35bps to 93bps, driven by reduced impairments in the South Africa mortgages portfolio and business banking, partially offset by increased impairments in the card portfolio.

Total operating expenses increased 8% to £2,342m largely reflecting inflationary increases, resulting in higher staff costs and increased investment spend on key initiatives, including higher costs to achieve of £51m (2013: £23m), partially offset by savings from strategic cost programmes.

Loans and advances to customers increased 5% to £35.2bn primarily driven by strong corporate banking growth across Africa in CIB and limited growth in RBB, mainly due to a modest reduction in the South Africa mortgages portfolio.

Total assets increased 5% to £55.5bn due to the increase in loans and advances to customers.

Customer deposits increased 5% to £35.0bn reflecting strong growth in the South African RBB business.

RWAs increased 1% to £38.5bn on a reported basis, primarily driven by growth in loans and advances to customers, partially offset by the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

198  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


                          Constant currencya   
        

 

2015 

£m 

  

  

   

 

2014 

£m 

  

  

    

2013 

£m 

      

2015 

£m 

    

2014 

£m 

  
 Income statement information                    
 Net interest income     2,066      2,093       2,245      2,066     1,908  
  Net fee, commission and other income     1,668      1,741       1,979       1,668     1,583   
 Total income     3,734      3,834       4,224      3,734     3,491  
  Net claims and benefits incurred under insurance contracts     (160)     (170)      (185)      (160)    (155)  
 Total income net of insurance claims     3,574      3,664       4,039      3,574     3,336  
  Credit impairment charges and other provisions     (352)     (349)      (479)      (352)    (317)  
  Net operating income     3,222      3,315       3,560       3,222     3,019   
 Operating expenses     (2,169)     (2,244)      (2,451)     (2,169)    (2,051) 
 UK bank levy     (52)     (45)      (42)     (52)    (45) 
 Litigation and conduct     –      (2)      –      –     (2) 
  Costs to achieve     (29)     (51)      (26)      (29)    (46)  
 Total operating expenses     (2,250)     (2,342)      (2,519)     (2,250)    (2,144) 
  Other net income          11                 10   
 Profit before tax     979      984       1,049      979     885  
 Attributable profit     332      360       356      332     320  
  Balance sheet information                               
 Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost     £29.9bn      £35.2bn       £34.9bn      £29.9bn     £27.6bn  
 Total assets     £49.9bn      £55.5bn       £54.9bn      £49.9bn     £43.8bn  
 Customer deposits     £30.6bn      £35.0bn       £34.6bn      £30.6bn     £27.6bn  
  Risk weighted assets     £33.9bn      £38.5bn       £38.0bn       £33.9bn     £31.3bn   
  Key facts                               
 Average LTV of mortgage portfoliob     58.4%      59.9%       62.3%           
 Average LTV of new mortgage lendingb     74.7%      74.8%       74.9%           
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)     44,400      45,000       45,900               
  Performance measures                               
 Return on average tangible equity     11.7%      12.9%       11.3%           
 Average allocated tangible equity     £2.8bn      £2.8bn       £3.2bn           
 Return on average equity     8.7%      9.3%       8.1%           
 Average allocated equity     £3.8bn      £3.9bn       £4.4bn           
 Cost:income ratio     63%      64%       62%           
 Loan loss rate (bps)     109      93       128           
  Net interest margin     6.06%      5.95%       5.81%               

Notes

aConstant currency results are calculated by converting ZAR results into GBP using the average 2015 exchange rate for the income statement and the closing 2015 exchange rate for the balance sheet to eliminate the impact of movement in exchange rates between the two periods.
bAverage LTV of mortgage portfolio and new mortgage lending calculated on the balance weighted basis.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  199


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Investment Bank

£7,572m total income

£1,611m profit before tax

2015 compared to 2014

Profit before tax increased 17% to £1,611m. Income remained flat despite reductions in RWAs. Focusing on its home markets of the UK and US, the business continued to build on existing strengths in the face of challenging market conditions. Costs decreased as a result of improved cost efficiency and a reduction in costs to achieve.

Total income was broadly flat at £7,572m (2014: £7,588m), including the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Banking income was flat at £2,529m (2014: £2,528m). Investment Banking fee income reduced 1% to £2,093m driven by lower equity underwriting fees, partially offset by higher financial advisory and debt underwriting fees. Lending income increased to £436m (2014: £417m) due to lower losses on fair value hedges.

Markets income was broadly flat at £5,030m (2014: £5,040m). Credit income decreased 5% to £995m driven by lower income in securitised products as a result of the accelerated strategic repositioning in this asset class and lower income from distressed credit. This was partially offset by higher income as a result of client driven credit flow trading. Equities income decreased 2% to £2,001m driven by lower client activity in EMEA in equity derivatives, partially offset by higher performance in cash equities. Macro income increased 4% to £2,034m due to higher income in rates and currency products reflecting increased market volatility and client activity.

Credit impairment charges of £55m (2014: release of £14m) arose from a number of single name exposures.

Total operating expenses decreased 5% to £5,906m reflecting a 5% reduction in compensation costs to £3,423m and lower costs to achieve. Further cost savings were achieved from strategic cost programmes, including business restructuring, operational streamlining and real estate rationalisation, partially offset by the appreciation of the average USD rate against GBP.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities decreased 25% to £114.3bn and 24% to £122.2bn respectively, due to net trade reduction and increases in major interest rate forward curves.

Trading portfolio assets decreased 31% to £65.1bn primarily driven by balance sheet deleveraging, resulting in lower securities positions.

Total assets decreased 18% to £375.9bn due to a decrease in derivative financial instrument assets, trading portfolio assets, and settlement and cash collateral balances within loans and advances to banks and customers.

RWAs decreased 12% to £108.3bn mainly due to a reduction in securities and derivatives, and improved RWA efficiency.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax decreased 32% to £1,377m. The Investment Bank continues to make progress on its origination-led strategy, building on leading positions in its home markets of the UK and US, while driving cost savings and RWA efficiencies. The business is focused on a simpler product set in Markets, which will enable it to build on existing strengths and adapt to regulatory developments. The business continued to execute this strategy despite difficult market-making conditions and continued low levels of activity. This has particularly impacted credit and interest rate products, resulting in an income decline across the Markets businesses. This decline was partially offset by improved banking performance and significant cost reductions as a result of savings from strategic cost programmes.

Total income decreased 12% to £7,588m, including the impact of depreciation of average USD against GBP. Banking income increased 2% to £2,528m. Investment Banking fee income decreased 2% to £2,111m driven by lower debt underwriting fees, partially offset by higher financial advisory and equity underwriting fees. Lending income increased to £417m (2013: £325m) due to lower fair value losses on hedges and higher net interest and fee income.

Markets income decreased 18% to £5,040m. Credit decreased 17% to £1,044m driven by reduced volatility and client activity, with lower income in distressed credit, US high yield and US high grade products. Equities decreased 11% to £2,046m due to declines in cash equities and equity derivatives, reflecting lower client volumes, partially offset by higher income in equity financing. Macro decreased 24% to £1,950m reflecting subdued client activity in rates and lower volatility in currency markets in the first half of the year.

Net credit impairment release of £14m (2013: £22m) arose from a number of single name exposures.

Total operating expenses decreased 6% to £6,225m reflecting a 9% reduction in compensation costs to £3,620m, savings from strategic cost programmes, including business restructuring, continued rationalisation of the technology platform and real estate infrastructure, and depreciation of average USD against GBP. This was partially offset by increased costs to achieve of £374m (2013: £190m) and litigation and conduct charges.

Loans and advances to customers and banks increased 2% to £106.3bn driven by an increase in cash collateral and lending, partially offset by a reduction in settlement balances due to reduced activity.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased 40% to £152.6bn and 38% to £160.6bn respectively, driven by decreases in predominantly GBP, USD and EUR forward interest rates, and strengthening of USD against major currencies.

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending decreased 18% to £64.3bn due to decreased match book trading and funding requirements.

Total assets increased 4% to £455.7bn due to an increase in derivative financial instrument assets, partially offset by a decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and financial assets at fair value.

RWAs decreased 2% to £122.4bn primarily driven by risk reductions in the trading book, partially offset by the implementation of a revised credit risk model for assessing counterparty probability of default.

200  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

  Income statement information      
  Net interest income   588     647     393  
  Net trading income   3,859     3,735     4,969  
  Net fee, commission and other income   3,125     3,206     3,234  
  Total income   7,572     7,588     8,596  
  Credit impairment (charges)/releases and other provisions   (55   14     22  
  Net operating income   7,517     7,602     8,618  
  Operating expenses   (5,362   (5,504   (6,141
  UK bank levy   (203   (218   (236
  Litigation and conduct   (107   (129)     (31
  Costs to achieve   (234   (374   (190
  Total operating expenses   (5,906   (6,225   (6,598
  Profit before tax   1,611     1,377     2,020  
  Attributable profit   804     397     1,308  
  Balance sheet information               
  Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costa   £92.2bn     £106.3bn     £104.5bn  
  Trading portfolio assets   £65.1bn     £94.8bn     £96.6bn  
  Derivative financial instrument assets   £114.3bn     £152.6bn     £108.7bn  
  Derivative financial instrument liabilities   £122.2bn     £160.6bn     £116.6bn  
  Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingb   £25.5bn     £64.3bn     £78.2bn  
  Financial assets designated at fair valueb   £48.1bn     £8.9bn     £16.5bn  
  Total assets   £375.9bn     £455.7bn     £438.0bn  
  Risk weighted assets   £108.3bn     £122.4bn     £124.4bn  
    
  Key facts      
  Number of employees (full time equivalent)   19,800     20,500     22,600  
  Performance measures               
  Return on average tangible equity   6.0%     2.8%     8.5%  
  Average allocated tangible equity   £13.9bn     £14.6bn     £15.3bn  
  Return on average equity   5.6%     2.7%     8.2%  
  Average allocated equity   £14.8bn     £15.4bn     £15.9bn  
  Cost:income ratio   78%     82%     77%  
    
  Analysis of total income               
  Investment banking fees   2,093     2,111     2,160  
  Lending   436     417     325  
  Banking   2,529     2,528     2,485  
  Credit   995     1,044     1,257  
  Equities   2,001     2,046     2,297  
  Macro   2,034     1,950     2,580  
  Markets   5,030     5,040     6,134  
  Banking & Markets   7,559     7,568     8,619  
  Other   13     20     (23
  Total income   7,572     7,588     8,596  

Notes

aAs at 31 December 2015 loans and advances included £74.8bn (2014: £86.4bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £18.6bn (2014: £25.8bn) and cash collateral of £24.8bn (2014: £32.2bn)) and loans and advances to banks of £17.4bn (2014: £19.9bn) (including settlement balances of £1.6bn (2014: £2.7bn) and cash collateral of £5.7bn (2014: £6.9bn)).
bDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £42.5bn (2014: £3.4bn).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  201


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Head Office

2015 compared to 2014

The loss before tax of £402m (2014: profit of £97m) was primarily due to the net expense from Treasury operations and costs relating to the implementation of the structural reform programme.

Net operating income decreased to an expense of £107m (2014: income of £242m) primarily reflecting the net expense from Treasury operations and the non-recurrence of gains in 2014, including net gains from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.

Total operating expenses increased £158m to £300m primarily due to costs relating to the implementation of the structural reform programme and an increase in costs to achieve, partially offset by reduced litigation and conduct charges.

Total assets increased £7.3bn to £56.4bn due to an increase in the element of the liquidity buffer held centrally.

2014 compared to 2013

Profit before tax of £97m improved from a loss of £15m in 2013.

Net operating income increased to £242m (2013: £145m) predominantly due to net gains of £88m from foreign exchange recycling arising from the restructure of Group subsidiaries.

Total operating expenses decreased £22m to £142m mainly due to a reduction in UK bank levy to £9m (2013: £29m), the non-recurrence of costs associated with the Salz Review and the establishment of the strategic cost programme in the prior year, partially offset by increased litigation and conduct charges.

Total assets increased £22.5bn to £49.1bn reflecting an increase in the Group liquidity pool assets.

RWAs decreased £10.6bn to £5.6bn, including receipt of certain US Lehman acquisition assets and a £6.9bn revision to 2013 RWAs following full implementation of CRD IV reporting, as disclosed in the 30 June 2014 Results Announcement.

Negative average allocated equity reduced to £0.4bn (2013: £7.0bn) as the Group moved towards the allocation rate of 10.5% fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio during the year, resulting in a reduction in excess equity allocated to businesses.

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Income statement information      
 Total income   (107   242     142  
 Credit impairment releases and other provisions             3  
 Net operating (expense)/income   (107   242     145  
 Operating expenses   (246   (57   (103
 UK bank levy   (8   (9   (29
 Litigation and conduct   (14   (66   (10
 Cost to achieve   (32   (10   (22
 Total operating expenses   (300   (142   (164
 Other net income/(expense)   5     (3   4  
 (Loss)/profit before tax   (402   97     (15
 Attributable (loss)/profit   (202   112     (89
 Balance sheet information               
 Total assets   £56.4bn     £49.1bn     £26.6bn  
 Risk weighted assets   £7.7bn     £5.6bn     £16.2bn  
 Key facts               
 Number of employees (full time equivalent)   800     100     100  

202  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Non-Core

(£164m) total income net of

insurance claims

£1,459m loss before tax

2015 compared to 2014

Loss before tax increased 24% to £1,459m driven by continued progress in the exit of Businesses, Securities and loans, and Derivative assets. RWAs reduced £29bn to £47bn including a £10bn reduction in Derivatives, £9bn reduction in Securities and loans, and Business reductions from the completion of the sales of the Spanish and UK Secured Lending businesses. The announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian retail businesses, which are due to be completed in H116, are expected to result in a further £2.5bn reduction in RWAs.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced to an expense of £164m (2014: income of £1,050m). Businesses income reduced 44% to £613m due to the impact of the sale of the Spanish business and the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets. Securities and loans income reduced to an expense of £481m (2014: income of £117m) primarily driven by fair value losses and funding costs on the ESHLA portfolio, the active rundown of securities, exit of historical investment bank businesses and the non-recurring gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio in 2014. Fair value losses on the ESHLA portfolio were £359m (2014: £156m), of which £156m was in Q415, as gilt swap spreads widened. Derivatives income reduced 76% to an expense of £296m reflecting the active rundown of the portfolios and funding costs.

Credit impairment charges improved 54% to £78m due to higher recoveries in Europe and the sale of the Spanish business.

Total operating expenses improved 40% to £1,199m reflecting savings from the sales of the Spanish, UAE retail, commodities, and several principal investment businesses, as well as a reduction in costs to achieve, and conduct and litigation charges.

Loans and advances to banks and customers reduced 28% to £45.9bn due to the reclassification of £5.5bn of loans relating to the announced sales of the Portuguese and Italian businesses to assets held for sale, and the rundown and exit of historical investment bank assets.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities decreased 26% to £210.3bn and 28% to £198.7bn respectively, largely as a result of trade reduction.

Total assets decreased 36% to £303.1bn due to reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and lower derivative financial instrument assets.

Leverage exposure reduced £156.2bn to £121.3bn primarily in reverse repurchase agreements, potential future exposure on derivatives and trading portfolio assets.

RWAs decreased £28.7bn to £46.6bn and period end equity decreased £3.8bn to £7.2bn primarily driven by the sale of the Spanish business, the active rundown of legacy structured and credit products, and derivative trade unwinds.

2014 compared to 2013

Loss before tax reduced 15% to £1,180m as Non-Core made good progress in exiting and running down certain businesses and securities during 2014. This drove a £34.6bn reduction in RWAs, making substantial progress towards the Non-Core target reductions as outlined in the Group Strategy Update on 8 May 2014.

Total income net of insurance claims reduced 54% to £1,050m. Businesses income reduced 27% to £1,101m due to the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets and the rationalisation of product offerings within the European retail business. Securities and loans income reduced 82% to £117m primarily driven by the active rundown of securities, fair value losses on wholesale loan portfolios and the non-recurrence of prior year favourable market movements on certain securitised products, partially offset by a £119m gain on the sale of the UAE retail banking portfolio. Derivatives income reduced £321m to an expense of £168m reflecting the funding costs of the traded legacy derivatives portfolio and the non-recurrence of fair value gains in the prior year.

Credit impairment charges improved 81% to £168m due to the non-recurrence of impairments on single name exposures, impairment releases on the wholesale portfolio as a result of confirmation on Spanish government subsidies in the renewable energy sector and improved performance in Europe, primarily due to improved recoveries and delinquencies in the mortgages portfolio.

Total operating expenses improved 25% to £2,011m reflecting savings from strategic cost programmes, including lower headcount and the results of the previously announced European retail restructuring. In addition, costs to achieve reduced 61% to £212m.

Loans and advances to banks and customers reduced 22% to £63.9bn due to a £12.9bn reclassification of loans relating to the Spanish business, which was held for sale, and a reduction in Europe retail driven by a run-off of assets.

Trading portfolio assets reduced 48% to £15.9bn due to the sale and rundown of legacy portfolio assets.

Derivative financial instrument assets and liabilities increased 19% to £285.4bn and 21% to £277.1bn respectively, driven by decreases in major forward interest rates.

Total assets decreased 8% to £471.5bn with reduced reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending, and trading portfolio assets, due to the rundown of legacy portfolio assets, offset by an increase in derivative financial instrument assets. BCBS 270 leverage exposure reduced to £277bn.

RWAs decreased £34.6bn to £75.3bn and average allocated equity decreased £3.7bn to £13.4bn, reflecting the disposal of businesses, rundown and exit of securities and loans, and derivative risk reductions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  203


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Barclays Non-Core – continued

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Income statement information      
 Net interest income   249     214     307  
 Net trading income   (805   120     1,327  
 Net fee, commission and other income   765     1,026     983  
 Total income   209     1,360     2,617  
 Net claims and benefits incurred under insurance contracts   (373   (310   (324
 Total income net of insurance claims   (164   1,050     2,293  
 Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (78   (168   (900
 Net operating (expense)/income   (242   882     1,393  
 Operating expenses   (873   (1,510   (1,929
 UK bank levy   (78   (91   (109
 Litigation and conduct   (148   (198   (96
 Costs to achieve   (100   (212   (538
 Total operating expenses   (1,199   (2,011   (2,672
 Other net expenses   (18   (51   (110
 Loss before tax   (1,459   (1,180   (1,389
 Attributable loss   (1,523   (1,085   (1,783
 Balance sheet information               
 Loans and advances to banks and customers at amortised costb   £45.9bn     £63.9bn     £81.9bn  
 Derivative financial instrument assets   £210.3bn     £285.4bn     £239.3bn  
 Derivative financial instrument liabilities   £198.7bn     £277.1bn     £228.3bn  
 Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendingc   £2.4bn     £49.3bn     £104.7bn  
 Financial assets designated at fair valuec   £20.1bn     £22.2bn     £19.5bn  
 Total assets   £303.1bn     £471.5bn     £511.2bn  
 Customer deposits   £14.9bn     £21.6bn     £29.3bn  
 Risk weighted assets   £46.6bn     £75.3bn     £109.9bn  
 Leverage exposure   £121.3bn     £277.5bn     n/a  
 Key facts               
 Number of employees (full time equivalent)   5,600     8,900     9,900  
 Performance measures               
 Return on average tangible equityd   (5.1%   (5.4%   (9.3%
 Average allocated tangible equity   £8.9bn     £13.2bn     £16.8bn  
 Return on average equityd   (4.1%   (4.1%   (7.0%
 Average allocated equity   £9.0bn     £13.4bn     £17.1bn  
 Period end allocated equity   £7.2bn     £11.0bn     £15.1bn  
 Analysis of total income net of insurance claims   £m     £m     £m  
 Businesses   613     1,101     1,498  
 Securities and loans   (481   117     642  
 Derivatives   (296   (168   153  
 Total income net of insurance claims   (164   1,050     2,293  

Notes

a2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for onging investigations and litigations including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
bAs at 31 December 2015 loans and advances included £35.2bn (2014: £51.6bn) of loans and advances to customers (including settlement balances of £0.2bn (2014: £1.6bn) and cash collateral of £19.0bn (2014: £22.1bn)) and loans and advances to banks of £10.6bn (2014: £12.3bn) (including settlement balances of nil (2014: £0.3bn) and cash collateral of £10.1bn (2014: £11.3bn)).
cDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance. Included within financial assets designated at fair value are reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value of £1.4bn (2014: £1.0bn).
dReturn on average equity and average tangible equity for Barclays Non-Core represents its impact on the Group. This does not represent the return on average tangible equity of the Non-Core business.

204  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Returns and equity

by business

Returns on average equity and average tangible equity are calculated as profit for the year attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent (adjusted for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of coupons on other equity instruments) divided by average allocated equity or average allocated tangible equity for the period as appropriate, excluding non-controlling and other equity interests for businesses, apart from Africa Banking (see below). Allocated equity has been calculated as 10.5% of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, including goodwill

and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. The excess of allocated Group equity, caused by the fully loaded CRD IV CET1 ratio being below 10.5% on average in the period, is allocated as negative equity to Head Office. Allocated tangible equity is calculated using the same method, but excludes goodwill and intangible assets.

For Africa Banking, the equity used for return on average equity is Barclays’ share of the statutory equity of the BAGL entity (together with that of the Barclays Egypt and Zimbabwe businesses which remain outside the BAGL corporate entity), as well as Barclays’ goodwill on acquisition of these businesses. The tangible equity for return on tangible equity uses the same basis, but excludes both the Barclays’ goodwill on acquisition and the goodwill and intangibles held within the BAGL statutory equity.

 Return on average tangible equity               
    

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2013

%

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   16.2     15.8     12.7  
 Barclaycard   22.3     19.9     19.9  
 Africa Banking   11.7     12.9     11.3  
 Investment Bank   6.0     2.8     8.5  
 Barclays Core operating businesses   12.7     10.8     11.6  
 Head Office impacta   (1.8   0.5     2.8  
 Barclays Core   10.9     11.3     14.4  
 Barclays Non-Core impacta   (5.1   (5.4   (9.3
 Barclays Group adjusted totald   5.8     5.9     5.1  
 Barclays Group statutory total   (0.7   (0.3   1.2  
                
 Return on average equity               
    

 

2015

%

  

  

   

 

2014

%

  

  

   

 

2013

%

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   12.1     11.9     9.7  
 Barclaycard   17.7     16.0     15.5  
 Africa Banking   8.7     9.3     8.1  
 Investment Bank   5.6     2.7     8.2  
 Barclays Core operating businesses   10.4     8.9     9.7  
 Head Office impacta   (1.4   0.3     1.6  
 Barclays Core   9.0     9.2     11.3  
 Barclays Non-Core impacta   (4.1   (4.1   (7.0
 Barclays Group adjusted totald   4.9     5.1     4.3  
 Barclays Group statutory total   (0.6   (0.2   1.0  
                
 Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parentb               
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

c 

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   2,203     2,075     1,681  
 Barclaycard   1,114     943     822  
 Africa Banking   332     360     356  
 Investment Bank   829     415     1,308  
 Head Office   (202   112     (89
 Barclays Core   4,276     3,905     4,078  
 Barclays Non-Core   (1,510   (1,072   (1,783
 Barclays Group adjusted totald   2,766     2,833     2,295  
 Barclays Group statutory total   (394   (174   540  

Notes

aReturn on average equity and average tangible equity for Head Office and Barclays Non-Core represents their impact on Barclays Core and the Group respectively. This does not represent the return on average equity and average tangible equity of Head Office or the Non-Core business.
bProfit for the period attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent includes the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments.
c2013 adjusted total operating expenses and profit before tax have been revised to account for the reclassification of £173m of charges, relating to a US residential mortgage-related business settlement with the Federal Housing Finance Agency, to provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange to aid comparability.
dAdjusted Barclays Group profit excludes the impact of own credit of £430m gain (2014: £34m gain), impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed of £96m (2014: nil), provisions for UK customer redress of £2,772m (2014: £1,110m), gain on US Lehman acquisition assets of £496m (2014:£461m), provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange of £1,237m (2014: £1,250m), loss on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses of £580m (2014: £446m), Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology of nil (2014: £935m), and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability £429m gain (2014: nil).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  205


Financial review

Analysis of results by business

Returns and equity by business – continued

 Average allocated tangible equity             
   

        2015  

£bn  

   

 

        2014

£bn

  

  

   

 

        2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking  13.6     13.1     13.2  
 Barclaycard  5.0     4.7     4.1  
 Africa Banking  2.8     2.8     3.2  
 Investment Bank  13.9     14.6     15.3  
 Head Officea  3.9     (0.6   (7.4
 Barclays Core  39.2     34.6     28.4  
 Barclays Non-Core  8.9     13.2     16.8  
 Barclays Group adjusted total  48.1     47.8     45.2  
 Barclays Group statutory total  47.7     47.0     44.3  
              
 Average allocated equity             
   

2015  

£bn  

   

 

2014

£bn

  

  

   

 

2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking  18.2     17.5     17.3  
 Barclaycard  6.3     5.9     5.3  
 Africa Banking  3.8     3.9     4.4  
 Investment Bank  14.8     15.4     15.9  
 Head Officea  4.2     (0.4   (7.0
 Barclays Core  47.3     42.3     35.9  
 Barclays Non-Core  9.0     13.4     17.1  
 Barclays Group adjusted total  56.3     55.7     53.0  
 Barclays Group statutory total  55.9     54.9     52.2  
              
 Period end allocated equity             
   

2015  

£bn  

   

 

2014

£bn

  

  

   

 

2013

£bn

  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking  18.3     17.9     17.3  
 Barclaycard  6.3     6.2     5.4  
 Africa Banking  3.4     4.0     3.8  
 Investment Bank  13.0     14.7     14.6  
 Head Officea  6.6     2.1     (2.1
 Barclays Core  47.6     44.9     39.0  
 Barclays Non-Core  7.2     11.0     15.1  
 Barclays Group adjusted total  54.8     55.9     54.1  
 Barclays Group statutory total  54.5     55.2     53.3  
              

Note

aBased on risk weighted assets and capital deductions in Head Office plus the residual balance of average ordinary shareholders’ equity and tangible ordinary shareholders’ equity.

206  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 Margins analysis

Total PCB, Barclaycard and Africa Banking net interest income increased 5% to £12.0bn£10.4bn due to an increase in average customer assets to £287.7bn (2014: £280.0bn)£278.5bn (2016: £274.6bn) with growth in PCB and Barclaycard,Barclays UK, partially offset by reductionsa reduction in Africa Banking as the ZAR depreciated against GBP. Barclays International.

Net interest margin increased 10bpsdecreased 2bps to 4.18%3.74% primarily due to growthreflecting the integration of ESHLA loans fromNon-Core on 1 July 2017 into Barclays UK, partially offset by broadly stable net interest income in interest earning lending within Barclaycard.

Barclays International, despite reducing average customer assets. Group net interest income increaseddecreased to £12.6bn (2014: £12.1bn)

£9.8bn (2016: £10.5bn) including net structural hedge contributions of £1.5bn (2014: £1.6bn)£1.3bn (2016: £1.5bn). Equity structural hedge income decreased driven by the maintenance of the hedge in a continuing low rate environment.

Net interest margin by business reflects movements in the Group’s internal funding rates which are based on the cost to the Group of alternative funding in wholesale markets. The internal funding rate prices intra-group funding and liquidity to appropriately give appropriate credit to businesses with net surplus liquidity and to charge those businesses in need of alternative funding at a rate that is driven by prevailing market rates and includes a term premium.

 

 

    Year ended 31 December 2017   Year ended 31 December 2016 
    

Net
        interest
income

£m

  

Average
        customer
assets

£m

   

Net
        interest
margin

%

   

Net
        interest
income

£m

   

Average
        customer
assets

£m

   

Net
        interest
margin

%

 
Barclays UK   6,086   174,484    3.49    6,048    167,233    3.62 
Barclays Internationala   4,326   104,039    4.16    4,275    107,333    3.98 
Total Barclays UK and Barclays International   10,412   278,523    3.74    10,323    274,566    3.76 
Otherb   (567            214           
Total net interest income   9,845             10,537           

Notes

aBarclays International margins include interest earning lending balances within the investment banking business.
bOther includes Head Office andnon-lending related investment banking balances. BarclaysNon-Core is included for the full comparative period and the first six months of the current period.

 

    Year ended 31 December 2015     Year ended 31 December 2014  
    
 

 

Net interest
income

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 
 
Average
customer
assets
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 

Net interest
margin

%

  
  

  

   
 

 

Net interest
income

£m

  
  

  

   
 
 

 

Average
customer
assets

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 

 

Net interest
margin

%

  
  

  

 Personal and Corporate Banking   6,438     214,989     2.99     6,298     210,026     3.00  
 Barclaycard   3,520     38,560     9.13     3,044     34,776     8.75  
 Africa Banking   2,066     34,116     6.06     2,093     35,153     5.95  
 Total Personal and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard
 and Africa Banking
   12,024     287,665     4.18     11,435     279,955     4.08  
 Investment Bank   588         647      
 Head Office   (303             (216          
 Barclays Core   12,309         11,866      
 Barclays Non-Core   249               214            
 Group net interest income   12,558               12,080            
180    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial review

Non-IFRS performance measures

Barclays’ management believes that thenon-IFRS performance measures included in this document provide valuable information to the readers of the financial statements as they enable the reader to identify a more consistent basis for comparing the business’ performance between financial periods, and provide more detail concerning the elements of performance which the managers of these businesses are most directly able to influence or are relevant for an assessment of Barclays

PLC and its subsidiaries (the Group). They also reflect an important aspect of the way in which operating targets are defined and performance is monitored by Barclays’ management.

Anynon-IFRS performance measures in this document are not a substitute for IFRS measures and readers should consider the IFRS measures as well.

Non-IFRS performance measures glossary

MeasureDefinition
Loan: deposit ratioLoans and advances divided by customer accounts calculated for Barclays UK and Barclays International, excluding investment banking balances other than interest earning lending. This excludes particular liabilities issued by the retail businesses that have characteristics comparable to retail deposits (for example structured Certificates of Deposit and retail bonds), which are included within debt securities in issue.
Period end allocated tangible equityAllocated tangible equity is calculated as 12.0% (2016: 11.5%) of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office allocated tangible equity represents the difference between the Group’s tangible shareholders’ equity and the amounts allocated to businesses.
Average tangible shareholders’ equityCalculated as the average of the previous month’s period end tangible equity and the current month’s period end tangible equity. The average tangible shareholders’ equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period.
Average allocated tangible equityCalculated as the average of the previous month’s period end allocated tangible equity and the current month’s period end allocated tangible equity. The average allocated tangible equity for the period is the average of the monthly averages within that period.
Return on average tangible shareholders’ equityStatutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill. The components of the calculation have been included on page 182.
Return on average allocated tangible equityStatutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average allocated tangible equity. The components of the calculation have been included on page 182.
Cost: income ratioOperating expenses divided by total income.
Operating expenses excluding litigation and conductOperating expenses excluding charges for litigation and conduct. The components of the calculation have been included on page 183.
Loan loss rateQuoted in basis points and represents total loan impairment divided by gross loans and advances to banks and customers held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date. The components of the calculation have been included on page 105.
Net interest marginNet interest income divided by the sum of average customer assets. The components of the calculation have been included on page 180.
Tangible net asset value per shareCalculated by dividing shareholders’ equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares. The components of the calculation have been included on page 183.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  207    181


Financial statementsreview

ContentsNon-IFRS performance measures

 

 

Returns

Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently audited and providing in-depth disclosureReturn on average tangible equity is calculated as profit for the financial performanceperiod attributable to ordinary equity holders of the Group.parent (adjusted for the tax credit recorded in reserves in respect of interest payments on other equity instruments) divided by average tangible equity for the period, excludingnon-controlling and other equity interests for businesses.

 

Allocated tangible equity has been calculated as 12.0% (2016: 11.5%) of CRD IV fully loaded RWAs for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and intangible assets, reflecting the assumptions the Group uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office average allocated tangible equity represents the difference between the Group’s average tangible shareholders’ equity and the amounts allocated to businesses.

    

        Page       Note  
Consolidated financial statements            
 

§

 Presentation of information   209       n/a  
 

§

 Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report   210       n/a  
 

§

 Consolidated income statement   211       n/a  
 

§

 Consolidated statement of comprehensive income   212       n/a  
 

§

 Consolidated balance sheet   213       n/a  
 

§

 Consolidated statement of changes in equity   214       n/a  
 

§

 Consolidated cash flow statement   215       n/a  
 

§

 Parent Company accounts   216       n/a  
 

§

 Notes to the financial statements   218       n/a  
  

§

 

Significant accounting policies

 

   218       1  
Notes to the financial statements            
Performance/return 

§

 Segmental reporting   221       2  
 

§

 Net interest income   221       3  
 

§

 Net fee and commission income   222       4  
 

§

 Net trading income   222       5  
 

§

 Net investment income   223       6  
 

§

 Credit impairment charges and other provisions   223       7  
 

§

 Operating expenses   225       8  
 

§

 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   225       9  
 

§

 Tax   226       10  
 

§

 Earnings per share   229       11  
  

§

 

Dividends on ordinary shares

 

   229       12  
Assets and liabilities held at fair value 

§

 Trading portfolio   230       13  
 

§

 Financial assets designated at fair value   230       14  
 

§

 Derivative financial instruments   231       15  
 

§

 Available for sale financial assets   234       16  
 

§

 Financial liabilities designated at fair value   234       17  
 

§

 Fair value of assets and liabilities   235       18  
  

§

 

Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

 

   251       19  
Financial instruments held 

§

 Loans and advances to banks and customers   253       20  
at amortised cost 

§

 Finance leases   253       21  
  

§

 

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other
similar secured lending and borrowing

 

   254       22  
Non-current assets and other investments 

§

 Property, plant and equipment   255       23  
 

§

 Goodwill and intangible assets   256       24  
  

§

 

Operating leases

 

   258       25  
Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities 

§

 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   259       26  
and legal proceedings 

§

 Provisions   259       27  
 

§

 Contingent liabilities and commitments   261       28  
  

§

 

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

 

   261       29  
Capital instruments, equity and reserves 

§

 Subordinated liabilities   272       30  
 

§

 Ordinary shares, share premium and other equity   276       31  
 

§

 Reserves   277       32  
  

§

 

Non-controlling interests

 

   277       33  
Employee benefits 

§

 Share based payments   279       34  
  

§

 

Pensions and post retirement benefits

 

   281       35  
Scope of consolidation 

§

 Principal subsidiaries   285       36  
 

§

 Structured entities   286       37  
 

§

 Investments in associates and joint ventures   291       38  
 

§

 Securitisations   291       39  
  

§

 

Assets pledged

 

   293       40  
Other disclosure matters 

§

 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration   294       41  
 

§

 Auditors’ remuneration   296       42  
 

§

 Financial risks, liquidity and capital management   297       43  
 

§

 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities   297       44  
 

§

 Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)   298       45  
  

§

 

Related undertakings

 

   299       46  

    

Attributable
profit/(loss)

£m

  

Tax credit

in respect

of interest

payments on

other equity

instruments

£m

  

Profit/(loss)

attributable

to ordinary

equity

holders of

the parent

£m

  

Average
tangible
equity

£bn

   

Return on
average
tangible
equity

%

 
For the year ended 31 December 2017       
Barclays UK   853   40   893   9.1    9.8 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   167   102   269   24.0    1.1 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   680   18   698   4.2    16.7 
Barclays International   847   120   967   28.1    3.4 
Head Officea   (868  4   (864  9.3    n/m 
BarclaysNon-Core   (419  10   (409  2.4    n/m 
Africa Banking discontinued operationa   (2,335     (2,335  n/m    n/m 
Barclays Group   (1,922  174   (1,748  48.9    (3.6
                       
For the year ended 31 December 2016       
Barclays UK   828   29   857   8.9    9.6 

Corporate and Investment Bank

   1,270   72   1,342   21.9    6.1 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   1,142   11   1,153   3.6    31.4 
Barclays International   2,412   83   2,495   25.5    9.8 
Head Officea   110   (1  109   6.5    n/m 
BarclaysNon-Core   (1,916  17   (1,899  7.8    n/m 
Africa Banking discontinued operationa   189      189   n/m    n/m 
Barclays Group   1,623   128   1,751   48.7    3.6 
                       
For the year ended 31 December 2015       
Barclays UK   (47  14   (33  9.3    (0.3

Corporate and Investment Bank

   1,146   34   1,180   21.9    5.4 

Consumer, Cards and Payments

   612   8   620   3.0    20.2 
Barclays International   1,758   42   1,800   24.9    7.2 
Head Officea   11      11   2.6    n/m 
BarclaysNon-Core   (2,418  14   (2,405  10.9    n/m 
Africa Banking discontinued operationa   302      302   n/m    n/m 
Barclays Group   (394  70   (324  47.7    (0.7

Note

aAverage allocated tangible equity for Africa Banking is included within Head Office.

 

208  |  182    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Performance measures excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and there-measurement of US DTAs

            

2017

£m

 
Barclays Group profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parenta    
Barclays Group profit attributable to ordinary equity holders     (1,748
Impact of litigation and conduct     1,150 
Impact of impairment of Barclays’ holding in BAGL     1,008 
Impact of loss on the sale of BAGL     1,435 
Net impact of there-measurement of US DTAs           901 
Barclays Group profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and there-measurement of US DTAs   2,746 
Barclays Group return on average shareholders’ equity             
Barclays Group average tangible shareholders’ equity           £48.9bn 
              
Barclays Group return on average tangible shareholders’ equity excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and there-measurement of US DTAs   5.6% 
              
Barclays Group average tangible shareholders’ equity based on a CET1 ratio of 13%           £50.3bn 
              
Barclays Group return on average tangible shareholders’ equity excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and there-measurement of US DTAs based on a CET1 ratio of 13%   5.5% 
Barclays Group basic earnings per ordinary share             
Basic weighted average number of shares           16,996m 
              
Barclays Group basic earnings per ordinary share excluding litigation and conduct, losses related to Barclays’ sell down of BAGL and there-measurement of US DTAs   16.2p 
Operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct    
    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 
Barclays Group operating expenses   (15,456  (16,338  (18,536
Impact of litigation and conduct   1,207   1,363   4,387 
Barclays Group operating expenses excluding litigation and conduct   (14,249  (14,975  (14,149
Tangible net asset value    
    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 
Total equity excludingnon-controlling interests   63,905   64,873   59,810 
Other equity instruments   (8,941  (6,449  (5,305
Shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent   54,964   58,424   54,505 
Goodwill and intangiblesb   (7,849  (9,245  (8,222
Tangible shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests attributable to ordinary shareholders of the parent   47,115   49,179   46,283 
              
Shares in issue   17,060m   16,963m   16,805m 
              
Net asset value per share   322p   344p   324p 
Tangible net asset value per share   276p   290p   275p 

Notes

aThe profit after tax attributable to other equity instrument holders of £639m (2016: £457m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £174m (2016: £128m). The net amount of £465m (2016: £329m), along withnon-controlling interests is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share and return on average tangible shareholders’ equity.
bComparative figures for 2016 and 2015 included goodwill and intangibles in relation to Africa Banking.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    183


Presentation of information

 

 

Barclays’Barclays approach to disclosures

The GroupBarclays aims to continually enhance its disclosures and their usefulness to the readers of the financial statements in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. Consequently Barclays’ disclosures go beyond the minimum standards required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

Barclays continues to support the recommendations and guidance made by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce (EDTF). The EDTF was formed by the Financial Stability Board withand its various task forces which continue to promote a remit to broaden and deepen the riskbroadening of disclosures ofby global banks in a number of areas, including liquidity and funding, credit risk and market risk. Barclays has fully adopted the recommendations across the Annual Report and Pillar 3 Report.

In line with the Financial Reporting Council’s guidance on ‘ClearClear and Concise’Concise reporting, for 2015, Barclays has focused reporting on material items and sought to reorganisepresent information in order to aid users understanding.users’ understanding such as including detail on relevant accounting policies within each note.

British Bankers’ Association (BBA) Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure as adopted by UK Finance in 2017

Barclays has adopted the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and has prepared the 2017 Annual Report and Accounts in compliance with the Code.

It is Barclays’ view that best in class disclosures will continue to evolve in light of ongoing market and stakeholder engagement withwithin the banking sector. Barclays is committed to engaging with a publishedcontinuously reflect the objectives of reporting set out in the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure (the Code). The CodeDisclosure. This code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance which states that UK banks will:

 

§ provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures

 

§ review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest

 

§ assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures acknowledging the importance of such guidance

 

§ seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector and

 

§ clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.

British Bankers’ Association (BBA) Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Barclays has adopted the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and has prepared the 2015 Annual Report andStatutory Accounts in compliance with the Code.

Statutory accounts

The consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries are set(set out on pages 211188 to 215192 along with the accounts of Barclays PLC itself on pages 216193 to 194) have been prepared in accordance with the International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and 217.interpretations (IFRICs) issued by the interpretations committee, as published by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). They are also in accordance with IFRS and IFRIC interpretations endorsed by the European Union. The accounting policies on pages 218195 to 220200 and the Notesnotes commencing on page 221201 apply equally to both sets of accounts unless otherwise stated.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, in accordance with The Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using IFRS.Capital RequirementsCountry-by Country Reporting

Capital Requirements Country by Country Reporting

HM Treasury has transposed the requirements set out under CRD IV and issued the Capital Requirements Country by CountryCountry-by-Country Reporting Regulations 2013. The legislation requires Barclays PLC to publish additional information in respect of the year ended 31 December 2015.2017. This information is available on the Barclays’Barclays website: home.barclays/ barclays.com/citizenship/reports-and-publications/reports-and- publications/country-snapshot.html

 

184    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Financial statements

Detailed analysis of our statutory accounts, independently

audited and providingin-depth disclosure on the financial

performance of the Group.

Consolidated financial statements  Page              Note 
  Consolidated income statement  188   n/a 
  Consolidated statement of comprehensive income  189   n/a 
  Consolidated balance sheet  190   n/a 
  Consolidated statement of changes in equity  191   n/a 
  Consolidated cash flow statement  192   n/a 
   Parent company accounts  193   n/a 
Notes to the financial statements         
   Significant accounting policies  195   1 
Performance/return  Segmental reporting  201   2 
  Net interest income  203   3 
  Net fee and commission income  203   4 
  Net trading income  204   5 
  Net investment income  204   6 
  Credit impairment charges and other provisions  204   7 
  Operating expenses  206   8 
  Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures  206   9 
  Tax  207   10 
  Earnings per share  211   11 
   Dividends on ordinary shares  211   12 
Assets and liabilities held at fair value  Trading portfolio  212   13 
  Financial assets designated at fair value  212   14 
  Derivative financial instruments  213   15 
  Financial investments  216   16 
  Financial liabilities designated at fair value  216   17 
  Fair value of financial instruments  216   18 
   Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities  229   19 
Financial instruments held at amortised cost  Loans and advances to banks and customers  231   20 
  Finance leases  231   21 
   Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing  232   22 
Non-current assets and other investments  Property, plant and equipment  233   23 
  Goodwill and intangible assets  234   24 
   Operating leases  236   25 
Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities  Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities  237   26 
and legal proceedings  Provisions  237   27 
  Contingent liabilities and commitments  239   28 
   Legal, competition and regulatory matters  239   29 
Capital instruments, equity and reserves  Subordinated liabilities  248   30 
  Ordinary shares, share premium and other equity  251   31 
  Reserves  251   32 
   Non-controlling interests  252   33 
Employee benefits  Share-based payments  253   34 
   Pensions and post-retirement benefits  255   35 
Scope of consolidation  Principal subsidiaries  260   36 
  Structured entities  261   37 
  Investments in associates and joint ventures  264   38 
  Securitisations  265   39 
   Assets pledged  266   40 
Other disclosure matters  Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration  267   41 
  Auditors’ remuneration  269   42 
  Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilities  269   43 
  Barclays PLC (the Parent company)  271   44 
   Related undertakings  295   45 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  209    185


Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s report

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the shareholders and board of directors

Barclays PLC:

Opinions on the Consolidated Financial Statements and Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

To The Board of Directors and Shareholders of Barclays PLC

In our opinion,We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheetssheet of Barclays PLC and subsidiaries (the “Group”) as of 31 December 2017, the related consolidated income statements,statement, consolidated statementsstatement of comprehensive income, consolidated statementsstatement of changes in equity, and consolidated cash flow statement for the year then ended, and the related notes and specific disclosures described in Note 1 to the financial statements as being part of the consolidated financial statements (collectively, the “consolidated financial statements”). We also have audited the Group’s internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2017, based on criteria established inInternal Control – Integrated Framework (2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission.

In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements referred to above present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries atthe Group as of 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2014,2017, and the results of theirits operations and theirits cash flows for each of the three years in the periodyear then ended, 31 December 2015 in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. Also in our opinion, the CompanyGroup maintained, in all material respects, effective internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2015,2017, based on criteria established inInternal Control - Integrated Framework 2013(2013) issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO). Commission.

Basis for Opinion

The Company’sGroup’s management is responsible for these consolidated financial statements, for maintaining effective internal control over financial reporting, and for its assessment of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting, included in management’sthe accompanyingManagement’s report on internal control over financial reporting included in the Directors’ Report appearing on page 40 of the Annual Report to Shareholders.reporting. Our responsibility is to express opinionsan opinion on thesethe Group’s consolidated financial statements and an opinion on the Company’sGroup’s internal control over financial reporting based on our integrated audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (“PCAOB”) and are required to be independent with respect to the Group in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (US).PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audits to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud, and whether effective internal control over financial reporting was maintained in all material respects.

Our audits of the consolidated financial statements included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence supportingregarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements, assessingstatements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, andas well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statement presentation.statements. Our audit of internal control over financial reporting

included obtaining an understanding of internal control over financial reporting, assessing the risk that a material weakness exists, and testing and evaluating the design and operating effectiveness of internal control based on the assessed risk. Our audits also included performing such other procedures as we considered necessary in the circumstances. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinions.

Definition and Limitations of Internal Control Over Financial Reporting

A company’s internal control over financial reporting is a process designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting and the preparation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles. A company’s internal control over financial reporting includes those policies and procedures that (i)(1) pertain to the maintenance of records that, in reasonable detail, accurately and fairly reflect the transactions and dispositions of the assets of the company; (ii)(2) provide reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit preparation of financial statements in accordance with generally accepted accounting principles, and that receipts and expenditures of the company are being made only in accordance with authorisations of management and directors of the company; and (iii)(3) provide reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use, or disposition of the company’s assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. Also, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or that the degree of compliance with the policies or procedures may deteriorate.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopersKPMG LLP

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLPWe have served as the Group’s auditor since 2017.

London, UKUnited Kingdom

2921 February 2016

2018

 

210  |  186    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Barclays PLC

In our opinion, the consolidated balance sheet as of December 31, 2016 and the related consolidated statements of income, comprehensive income, changes in equity and cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended December 31, 2016 present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays PLC (the “Company”) and its subsidiaries at December 31, 2016, and the results of their operations, and their cash flows for each of the two years in the period ended December 31, 2016, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these financial statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom

22 February 2017

Note that the report set out above is included for the purposes of Barclays PLC’s Annual Report on Form20-F for 2017 only and does not form part of Barclays PLC’s Annual Report and Accounts for 2017.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    187


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated income statement

    

    

For the year ended 31 December

   Notes     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations

        

Interest income

   3     17,201     17,363     18,315  

Interest expense

   3     (4,643   (5,283   (6,715

Net interest income

        12,558     12,080     11,600  

Fee and commission income

   4     9,655     9,836     10,479  

Fee and commission expense

   4     (1,763   (1,662   (1,748

Net fee and commission income

        7,892     8,174     8,731  

Net trading income

   5     3,623     3,331     6,553  

Net investment income

   6     1,138     1,328     680  

Net premiums from insurance contracts

     709     669     732  

Other income

        67     186     148  

Total income

     25,987     25,768     28,444  

Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts

        (533   (480   (509

Total income net of insurance claims

     25,454     25,288     27,935  

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

   7     (2,114   (2,168   (3,071

Net operating income

        23,340     23,120     24,864  

Staff costs

   8     (9,960   (11,005   (12,155

Infrastructure costs

   8     (3,180   (3,443   (3,531

Administration and general expenses

   8     (3,528   (3,621   (4,113

Provision for UK customer redress

   27     (2,772   (1,110   (2,000

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

   27     (1,237   (1,250   (173

Operating expenses

   8     (20,677   (20,429   (21,972

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

     47     36     (56

(Loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   9     (637   (471   6  

Gain on acquisitions

                  26  

Profit before tax

     2,073     2,256     2,868  

Taxation

   10     (1,450   (1,411   (1,571

Profit after tax

        623     845     1,297  

Attributable to:

                    

Equity holders of the parent

     (394   (174   540  

Other equity holdersa

        345     250       

Total equity holders

     (49   76     540  

Non-controlling interests

   33     672     769     757  

Profit after tax

        623     845     1,297  
         p     p     p  

Earnings per share

        

Basic (loss)/earnings per share

   11     (1.9   (0.7   3.8  

Diluted (loss)/earnings per share

   11     (1.9   (0.7   3.7  

 

For the year ended 31 December  Notes   

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 
Continuing operations      
Interest income   3    13,631   14,541   13,953 
Interest expense   3    (3,786  (4,004  (3,345
Net interest income        9,845   10,537   10,608 
Fee and commission income   4    8,751   8,570   8,470 
Fee and commission expense   4    (1,937  (1,802  (1,611
Net fee and commission income        6,814   6,768   6,859 
Net trading income   5    3,500   2,768   3,426 
Net investment income   6    861   1,324   1,097 
Other income        56   54   50 
Total income     21,076   21,451   22,040 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   7    (2,336  (2,373  (1,762
Net operating income        18,740   19,078   20,278 
Staff costs   8    (8,560  (9,423  (8,853
Infrastructure costs   8    (2,949  (2,998  (2,691
Administration and general expenses   8    (3,247  (2,917  (2,983
Provision for UK customer redress     (700  (1,000  (2,772
Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation relating to Foreign Exchange              (1,237
Operating expenses   8    (15,456  (16,338  (18,536
Share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures     70   70   41 
Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   9    187   420   (637
Profit before tax     3,541   3,230   1,146 
Taxation   10    (2,240  (993  (1,149
Profit/(loss) after tax in respect of continuing operations     1,301   2,237   (3
(Loss)/profit after tax in respect of discontinued operation        (2,195  591   626 
(Loss)/profit after tax        (894  2,828   623 
Attributable to:                  
Equity holders of the parent     (1,922  1,623   (394
Other equity instrument holdersa        639   457   345 
Total equity holders of the parent     (1,283  2,080   (49
Non-controlling interests in respect of continuing operations   33    249   346   348 
Non-controlling interests in respect of discontinued operation   33    140   402   324 
(Loss)/profit after tax        (894  2,828   623 
Earnings per share      
Basic (loss)/earnings per ordinary share   11    (10.3  10.4   (1.9
Basic earnings/(loss) per ordinary share in respect of continuing operations   11    3.5   9.3   (3.7
Basic (loss)/earnings per ordinary share in respect of discontinued operation   11    (13.8  1.1   1.8 
Diluted (loss)/earnings per share   11    (10.1  10.3   (1.9
Diluted earnings/(loss) per ordinary share in respect of continuing operations   11    3.4   9.2   (3.7
Diluted (loss)/earnings per ordinary share in respect of discontinued operation   11    (13.5  1.1   1.8 

Note

aThe profit after tax attributable to other equity instrument holders of £345m (2014: £250m)£639m (2016: £457m) is offset by a tax credit recorded in reserves of £70m (2014: £54m)£174m (2016: £128m). The net amount of £275m (2014: £196m)£465m (2016: £329m), along with NCI,non-controlling interests (NCI) is deducted from profit after tax in order to calculate earnings per share.share and return on average shareholders’ equity.

188    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

For the year ended 31 December  2017
£m
  2016
£m
  2015
£m
 
(Loss)/profit after tax   (894  2,828   623 
Profit/(loss) after tax in respect of continuing operations   1,301   2,237   (3
(Loss)/profit after tax in respect of discontinued operation   (2,195  591   626 
Other comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations:    
Currency translation reserve    
Currency translation differencesa   (1,337  3,024   748 
Available for sale reserve    
Net gains from changes in fair value   473   2,147   64 
Net gains transferred to net profit on disposal   (294  (912  (374
Net losses transferred to net profit due to impairment   3   20   17 
Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging   283   (1,677  (148
Changes in insurance liabilities and other movements   11   53   86 
Tax   (27  (18  126 
Cash flow hedging reserve    
Net (losses)/gains from changes in fair value   (626  1,455   (312
Net gains transferred to net profit   (643  (365  (238
Tax   321   (292  57 
Other   (5  13   20 
Other comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations:   (1,841  3,448   46 
Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations:             
Retirement benefit remeasurements   115   (1,309  1,176 
Own credit   (7      
Tax   (66  329   (260
Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations   42   (980  916 
              
Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the year from continuing operations   (1,799  2,468   962 
              
Other comprehensive income/(loss) for the year from discontinued operation   1,301   1,520   (1,348
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year             
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year, net of tax from continuing operations   (498  4,705   959 
              
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year, net of tax from discontinued operation   (894  2,111   (722
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year   (1,392  6,816   237 
Attributable to:    
Equity holders of the parent   (1,749  5,233   45 
Non-controlling interests   357   1,583   192 
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year   (1,392  6,816   237 

Note

aIncludes £189m loss (2016: £101m gain) on recycling of currency translation differences.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  211    189


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

For the year ended 31 December

     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  

Profit after tax

     623       845       1,297  

Other comprehensive (loss)/income from continuing operations:

            

Currency translation reserve

            

Currency translation differences

     (476     486       (1,767

Available for sale reserve

            

Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value

     33       5,333       (2,734

Net gains transferred to net profit on disposal

     (373     (619     (145

Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to impairment

     17       (31     (7

Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging

     (148     (4,074     2,376  

Changes in insurance liabilities

     86       (94     28  

Tax

     134       (102     100  

Cash flow hedging reserve

            

Net (losses)/gains from changes in fair value

     (407     2,687       (1,914

Net gains transferred to net profit

     (268     (767     (547

Tax

     81       (380     571  

Other

     21       (42     (37

Total comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit or loss

     (1,300     2,397       (4,076

Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss:

            

Retirement benefit remeasurements

     1,174       268       (512

Tax

     (260     (63     (3

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the period

 

     

 

(386

 

 

     

 

2,602

 

  

 

     

 

(4,591

 

 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

     237       3,447       (3,294

Attributable to:

            

Equity holders of the parent

     45       2,756       (3,406

Non-controlling interests

     192       691       112  
      237       3,447       (3,294

212  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated balance sheet

    

    

 

As at 31 December

   Notes     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

  Notes   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 

Assets

                

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711     39,695     45,687       171,082    102,353    49,711 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011     1,210     1,282       2,153    1,467    1,011 

Trading portfolio assets

   13     77,348     114,717     133,069     13    113,760    80,240    77,348 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   14     76,830     38,300     38,968     14    116,281    78,608    76,830 

Derivative financial instruments

   15     327,709     439,909     350,300     15    237,669    346,626    327,709 

Available for sale investments

   16     90,267     86,066     91,756  
Financial investments   16    58,916    63,317    90,267 

Loans and advances to banks

   20     41,349     42,111     39,422     20    35,663    43,251    41,349 

Loans and advances to customers

   20     399,217     427,767     434,237     20    365,552    392,784    399,217 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   22     28,187     131,753     186,779     22    12,546    13,454    28,187 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,010     3,607     3,920       2,389    2,893    3,010 

Investments in associates and joint ventures

   38     573     711     653     38    718    684    573 

Property, plant and equipment

   23     3,468     3,786     4,216     23    2,572    2,825    3,468 

Goodwill and intangible assets

   24     8,222     8,180     7,685     24    7,849    7,726    8,222 

Current tax assets

   10     415     334     219     10    482    561    415 

Deferred tax assets

   10     4,495     4,130     4,807     10    3,457    4,869    4,495 

Retirement benefit assets

   35     836     56     133     35    966    14    836 

Non current assets classified as held for sale

   44     7,364     15,574     495  
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale   43    1,193    71,454    7,364 

Total assets

      1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628        1,133,248    1,213,126    1,120,012 

Liabilities

                

Deposits from banks

     47,080     58,390     55,615       37,723    48,214    47,080 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     1,013     1,177     1,359       446    636    1,013 

Customer accounts

     418,242     427,704     431,998       429,121    423,178    418,242 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   22     25,035     124,479     196,748     22    40,338    19,760    25,035 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   13     33,967     45,124     53,464     13    37,351    34,687    33,967 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   17     91,745     56,972     64,796     17    173,718    96,031    91,745 

Derivative financial instruments

   15     324,252     439,320     347,118     15    238,345    340,487    324,252 

Debt securities in issue

     69,150     86,099     86,693       73,314    75,932    69,150 

Subordinated liabilities

   30     21,467     21,153     21,695     30    23,826    23,383    21,467 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

   26     10,610     11,423     12,934     26    8,565    8,871    10,610 

Provisions

   27     4,142     4,135     3,886     27    3,543    4,134    4,142 

Current tax liabilities

   10     903     1,021     1,042     10    586    737    903 

Deferred tax liabilities

   10     122     262     373     10    44    29    122 

Retirement benefit liabilities

   35     423     1,574     1,958     35    312    390    423 

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   44     5,997     13,115          43        65,292    5,997 

Total liabilities

      1,054,148     1,291,948     1,279,679        1,067,232    1,141,761    1,054,148 

Total equity

        
Equity        

Called up share capital and share premium

   31     21,586     20,809     19,887     31    22,045    21,842    21,586 

Other equity instruments

   31     5,305     4,322     2,063     31    8,941    6,449    5,305 

Other reserves

   32     1,898     2,724     249     32    5,383    6,051    1,898 

Retained earnings

      31,021     31,712     33,186        27,536    30,531    31,021 

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     59,810     59,567     55,385       63,905    64,873    59,810 

Non-controlling interests

   33     6,054     6,391     8,564     33    2,111    6,492    6,054 

Total equity

      65,864     65,958     63,949        66,016    71,365    65,864 

Total liabilities and equity

      1,120,012     1,357,906     1,343,628        1,133,248    1,213,126    1,120,012 

The Board of Directors approved the financial statements on pages 211188 to 305271 on 2921 February 2016.2018.

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

JesJames E Staley

Group Chief Executive

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

190    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  213


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

    

    

   

 

 

 

 

 

Called up

share

capital

and share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  
 

 

 

Other
equity

instruments

£m

  
  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Available

for sale

reserve

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserve

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Currency

translation

reserve

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Other

reserves

and

treasury

shares

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

Retained

earnings

£m

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

equity

excluding

non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

Total

equity

£m

  

  

  

Balance as at 1 January 2015

  20,809    4,322    562    1,817    (582  927    31,712    59,567    6,391    65,958  

Profit after tax

      345                    (394  (49  672    623  

Currency translation movements

                  (41          (41  (435  (476

Available for sale investments

          (245                  (245  (6  (251

Cash flow hedges

              (556              (556  (38  (594

Pension remeasurement

                          916    916    (2  914  

Other

                          20    20    1    21  

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

      345    (245  (556  (41      542    45    192    237  

Issue of new ordinary shares

  137                            137        137  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  640                        571    1,211        1,211  

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

      995                        995        995  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

      (345                  70    (275      (275

Redemption of preference shares

                                        

Increase in treasury shares

                      (602      (602      (602

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                      618    (755  (137      (137

Dividends paid

                          (1,081  (1,081  (552  (1,633

Other reserve movements

      (12                  (38  (50  23    (27

Balance as at 31 December 2015

  21,586    5,305    317    1,261    (623  943    31,021    59,810    6,054    65,864  

        

                                        

Balance as at 1 January 2014

  19,887    2,063    148    273    (1,142  970    33,186    55,385    8,564    63,949  

Profit after tax

      250                    (174  76    769    845  

Currency translation movements

                  560            560    (74  486  

Available for sale investments

          414                    414    (1  413  

Cash flow hedges

              1,544                1,544    (4  1,540  

Pension remeasurement

                          205    205        205  

Other

                          (43  (43  1    (42

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

      250    414    1,544    560        (12  2,756    691    3,447  

Issue of new ordinary shares

  150                            150        150  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  772                        693    1,465        1,465  

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

      2,263                    (155  2,108    (1,527  581  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

      (250                  54    (196      (196

Redemption of preference shares

                          (104  (104  (687  (791

Increase in treasury shares

                      (909      (909      (909

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                      866    (866            

Dividends paid

                          (1,057  (1,057  (631  (1,688

Other reserve movements

      (4                  (27  (31  (19  (50

Balance as at 31 December 2014

  20,809    4,322    562    1,817    (582  927    31,712    59,567    6,391    65,958  
                                         

Balance as at 1 January 2013

  12,477        527    2,099    59    989    34,464    50,615    9,371    59,986  

Profit after tax

                          540    540    757    1,297  

Currency translation movements

                  (1,201          (1,201  (566  (1,767

Available for sale investments

          (379                  (379  (3  (382

Cash flow hedges

              (1,826              (1,826  (64  (1,890

Pension remeasurement

                          (503  (503  (12  (515

Other

                          (37  (37      (37

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

          (379  (1,826  (1,201          (3,406  112    (3,294

Issue of new ordinary shares

  6,620                            6,620        6,620  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

  790                        689    1,479        1,479  

Issue and exchange of other equity instruments

      2,063                        2,063        2,063  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

                                        

Redemption of preference shares

                                        

Increase in treasury shares

                      (1,066      (1,066      (1,066

Vesting of shares under employee share schemes

                      1,047    (1,047            

Dividends paid

                          (859  (859  (813  (1,672

Other reserve movements

                          (61  (61  (106  (167

Balance as at 31 December 2013

  19,887    2,063    148    273    (1,142  970    33,186    55,385    8,564    63,949  

 

   

Called up 

share 

capital 

and share 

premiuma

£m 

  

Other 

equity 

instru- 

mentsa

£m 

  

Available 

for sale 

reserveb

£m 

  

Cash 

flow 

hedging 

reserveb

£m 

  

Currency 

translation 

reserveb

£m 

  

Own 

credit 

reserveb

£m 

  

Other 

reserves 

and 

treasury 

sharesb

£m 

  

Retained

earnings
£m

  

Total

equity

excluding

non-

controlling

interests

£m

  

Non-

controlling

interests
£m

  

Total

equity
£m

 
Balance as at 31 December 2016  21,842   6,449   (74  2,105   3,051      969   30,531   64,873   6,492   71,365 
Effects of changes in accounting policiesc                 (175     175          
Balance as at 1 January 2017  21,842   6,449   (74  2,105   3,051   (175  969   30,706   64,873   6,492   71,365 
Profit after tax     639                  413   1,052   249   1,301 
Currency translation movements              (1,336           (1,336  (1  (1,337
Available for sale investments        449                  449      449 
Cash flow hedges           (948              (948     (948
Pension remeasurement                       53   53      53 
Own credit reserve                 (11        (11     (11
Other                       (5  (5     (5
Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations     639   449   (948  (1,336  (11     461   (746  248   (498
Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operation        (11  4   1,339         (2,335  (1,003  109   (894
Total comprehensive income for the year     639   438   (944  3   (11     (1,874  (1,749  357   (1,392
Issue of new ordinary shares  117                        117      117 
Issue of shares under employee share schemes  86                     505   591      591 
Issue and exchange of other equity instruments     2,490                     2,490      2,490 
Other equity instruments coupons paid     (639                 174   (465     (465
Redemption of preference shares                       (479  (479  (860  (1,339
Increase in treasury shares                    (315     (315     (315
Vesting of shares under employee share schemes                    329   (636  (307     (307
Dividends paid                       (509  (509  (415  (924
Net equity impact of BAGL disposal                       (359  (359  (3,462  (3,821
Other reserve movements     2            7      8   17   (1  16 
Balance as at 31 December 2017  22,045   8,941   364   1,161   3,054   (179  983   27,536   63,905   2,111   66,016 
                                             
Balance as at 1 January 2016  21,586   5,305   317   1,261   (623     943   31,021   59,810   6,054   65,864 
Profit after tax     457                  1,434   1,891   346   2,237 
Currency translation movements              3,022            3,022   2   3,024 
Available for sale investments        (387                 (387     (387
Cash flow hedges           798               798      798 
Pension remeasurement                       (980  (980     (980
Other                       12   12   1   13 
Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations     457   (387  798   3,022         466   4,356   349   4,705 
Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operation        (4  46   652         183   877   1,234   2,111 
Total comprehensive income for the year     457   (391  844   3,674         649   5,233   1,583   6,816 
Issue of new ordinary shares  68                        68      68 
Issue of shares under employee share schemes  188                     668   856      856 
Issue and exchange of other equity instruments     1,132                     1,132      1,132 
Other equity instruments coupons paid     (457                 128   (329     (329
Redemption of preference shares                       (417  (417  (1,170  (1,587
Increase in treasury shares                    (140     (140     (140
Vesting of shares under employee share schemes                    166   (415  (249     (249
Dividends paid                       (757  (757  (575  (1,332
Net equity impact of partial BAGL disposal                       (349  (349  601   252 
Other reserve movements     12                  3   15   (1  14 
Balance as at 31 December 2016  21,842   6,449   (74  2,105   3,051      969   30,531   64,873   6,492   71,365 
           
                                             
Balance as at 1 January 2015  20,809   4,322   562   1,817   (582     927   31,712   59,567   6,391   65,958 
Profit after tax     345                  (696  (351  348   (3
Currency translation movements              747            747   1   748 
Available for sale investments        (229                 (229     (229
Cash flow hedges           (493              (493     (493
Pension remeasurement                       916   916      916 
Other                       20   20      20 
Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations     345   (229  (493  747         240   610   349   959 
Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operation        (16  (63  (788        302   (565  (157  (722
Total comprehensive income for the year     345   (245  (556  (41        542   45   192   237 
Issue of new ordinary shares  137                        137      137 
Issue of shares under employee share schemes  640                     571   1,211      1,211 
Issue and exchange of other equity instruments     995                     995      995 
Other equity instruments coupons paid     (345                 70   (275     (275
Increase in treasury shares                    (602     (602     (602
Vesting of shares under employee share schemes                    618   (755  (137     (137
Dividends paid                       (1,081  (1,081  (552  (1,633
Other reserve movements     (12                 (38  (50  23   (27
Balance as at 31 December 2015  21,586   5,305   317   1,261   (623     943   31,021   59,810   6,054   65,864 

Notes

aFor further details refer to Note 31.
bFor further details refer to Note 32.
cAs a result of the early adoption of the own credit provisions of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2017, own credit which was previously recorded in the income statement is now recognised within other comprehensive income. The cumulative unrealised own credit net loss of £175m has therefore been reclassified from retained earnings to a separate own credit reserve, within other reserves. During 2017 a £4m loss (net of tax) on own credit has been booked in the reserve.

 

214  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    191


 


Consolidated financial statements

Consolidated cash flow statement

    

    

 

For the year ended 31 December

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

  Notes   

2017

£m

 

2016

£m

 

2015

£m

 

Continuing operations

            

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

            

Profit before tax

   2,073     2,256     2,868       3,541   3,230   1,146 

Adjustment for non-cash items:

            

Allowance for impairment

   2,105     2,168     3,071       2,336   2,357   1,752 

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles

   1,324     1,279     1,274       1,241   1,261   1,215 

Other provisions, including pensions

   4,333     3,600     3,674       1,875   1,964   4,241 

Net loss on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment

   (374   (619   (145

Other non-cash movements

   (635   (808   (1,293
Net profit on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment     (325  (912  (374
Othernon-cash movements including exchange rate movements     1,031   (20,025  226 

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

            

Net decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks and customers

   27,565     3,684     (3,915     27,361   (25,385  22,641 

Net decrease/(increase) in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   103,566     55,021     (10,264

Net (decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue

   (37,721   (2,113   (13,392

Net (decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   (99,444   (72,269   (20,430

Net (increase)/decrease in derivative financial instruments

   (2,868   2,593     971  

Net decrease in trading assets

   37,342     18,368     13,443  

Net (decrease)/increase in trading liabilities

   (11,157   (8,340   8,670  

Net (increase) in financial investments

   (3,757   (7,156   (6,114

Net (increase)/decrease in other assets

   (2,324   (14,694   128  

Net (decrease)/increase in other liabilities

   (2,230   8,141     (1,930
Net decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending     908   14,733   103,471 
Net (decrease)/increase in deposits and debt securities in issue     (7,166  49,064   (33,120
Net increase/(decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing     20,578   (4,852  (99,602
Net decrease/(increase) in derivative financial instruments     6,815   (2,318  (3,315
Net (increase)/decrease in trading assets     (33,492  (5,577  37,091 
Net increase/(decrease) in trading liabilities     2,664   880   (10,877
Net decrease/(increase) in financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value     40,014   807   (3,064
Net (increase) in other assets     (3,775  (2,629  (2,661
Net (decrease) in other liabilities     (2,187  (532  (1,766

Corporate income tax paid

   (1,670   (1,552   (1,558   10    (708  (780  (1,670

Net cash from operating activities

   16,128     (10,441   (24,942      60,711   11,286   15,334 

Purchase of available for sale investments

   (120,251   (108,645   (92,015     (83,127  (65,086  (120,061

Proceeds from sale or redemption of available for sale investments

   113,048     120,843     69,473       88,298   102,515   114,529 

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

   (852   (657   (736
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangibles     (1,456  (1,707  (1,928
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangibles     283   358   393 
Disposal of discontinued operation, net of cash disposed     (1,060      
Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed     358   595    

Other cash flows associated with investing activities

   (379   (886   633        206   32   516 

Net cash from investing activities

   (8,434   10,655     (22,645      3,502   36,707   (6,551

Dividends paid

   (1,496   (1,688   (1,672

Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt

   1,138     826     700  

Repayments of borrowings and redemption of subordinated debt

   (682   (1,100   (1,425
Dividends paid and other coupon payments on equity instruments     (1,273  (1,304  (1,496
Issuance of subordinated debt   30    3,041   1,457   879 
Redemption of subordinated debt   30    (1,378  (1,143  (556

Net issue of shares and other equity instruments

   1,278     559     9,473       2,490   1,400   1,278 
Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments     (1,339  (1,587   

Net purchase of treasury shares

   (679   (909   (1,066      (580  (140  (679

Net redemption of shares issued to non-controlling interests

        (746   (100

Net cash from financing activities

   (441   (3,058   5,910        961   (1,317  (574

Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents

   824     (431   198        (4,773  10,473   1,689 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

   8,077     (3,275   (41,479
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents from continuing operations      60,401   57,149   9,898 
Net cash from discontinued operation   43    101   405   (1,821
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents      60,502   57,554   8,077 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

   78,479     81,754     123,233        144,110   86,556   78,479 

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

   86,556     78,479     81,754        204,612   144,110   86,556 

Cash and cash equivalents comprise:

            

Cash and balances at central banks

   49,711     39,695     45,687       171,082   102,353   49,711 

Loans and advances to banks with original maturity less than three months

   35,876     36,282     35,259       32,820   38,252   35,876 

Available for sale treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity less than three months

   816     2,322     644       682   356   816 

Trading portfolio assets with original maturity less than three months

   153     180     164       28      153 
Cash and cash equivalents held for sale         3,149    
   86,556     78,479     81,754        204,612   144,110   86,556 

Interest received was £20,376m (2014: £21,372m, 2013: £23,387m)£21,784m (2016: £22,099m; 2015: £20,376m) and interest paid was £7,534m (2014: £8,566m, 2013: £10,709m)£10,310m (2016: £8,850m; 2015: £7,534m).

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these amounted to £4,369m (2014: £4,448m, 2013: £4,722m)£3,360m (2016: £4,254m; 2015: £4,369m).

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents.

 

192    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  215


Financial statements of Barclays PLC

Parent company accounts

    

    

Income statement

                          

For the year ended 31 December

   Notes       
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  

Dividends received from subsidiary

       876       821       734  

Net interest expense

       (7     (6     (6

Other income/(expense)

   45       227       275       (137

Management charge from subsidiary

          (6     (6     (6

Profit before tax

       1,090       1,084       585  

Tax

          (43     (57     35  

Profit after tax

          1,047       1,027       620  

Attributable to

                          

Ordinary equity holders

       702       777       620  

Other equity holders

          345       250         

Profit

Statement of comprehensive income                 
For the year ended 31 December  Notes    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 
Dividends received from subsidiary     674   621   876 
Net interest (expense)/income     (10  5   (7
Other income  44     690   334   227 
Operating expenses      (96  (26  (6
Profit before tax     1,258   934   1,090 
Tax      (111  (60  (43
Profit after tax     1,147   874   1,047 
Other comprehensive income      60   26    
Total comprehensive income      1,207   900   1,047 
Profit after tax attributable to:                
Ordinary equity holders     508   417   702 
Other equity instrument holders      639   457   345 
Profit after tax     1,147   874   1,047 
Total comprehensive income attributable to:                
Ordinary equity holders     568   443   702 
Other equity instrument holders      639   457   345 
Total comprehensive income      1,207   900   1,047 

For the year ended 31 December 2017, profit after tax was £1,147m (2016: £874m) and total comprehensive income for the year was £1,047m (2014: £1,027m)£1,207m (2016: £900m). There were no other components of total

Other comprehensive income other thanof £60m (2016: £26m) relates to the profit after tax.

gain on AFS instruments. The Company had nohas 90 members of staff during the year (2014: nil, 2013: nil)(2016:

7).

 

Balance sheet

                            

As at 31 December

   Notes       

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

  Notes   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 

Assets

                  

Investment in subsidiary

   45       35,303       33,743  

Loans and advances to subsidiary

   45       7,990       2,866  

Derivative financial instrument

   45       210       313  
Investment in subsidiaries     44    39,354    36,553 
Loans and advances to subsidiaries     44    23,970    19,421 
Financial investments     44    4,782    1,218 
Derivative financial instruments     44    161    268 

Other assets

        133       174           202    105 

Total assets

        43,636       37,096           68,469    57,565 

Liabilities

                  

Deposits from banks

       494       528         500    547 

Subordinated liabilities

   45       1,766       810       44    6,501    3,789 

Debt securities in issue

   45       6,224       2,056       44    22,110    16,893 

Other liabilities

               10           153    14 

Total liabilities

        8,484       3,404           29,264    21,243 

Shareholders’ equity

          

Called up share capital

   31       4,201       4,125       31    4,265    4,241 

Share premium account

   31       17,385       16,684       31    17,780    17,601 

Other equity instruments

   31       5,321       4,326       31    8,943    6,453 

Capital redemption reserve

       394       394  
Other reserves       480    420 

Retained earnings

        7,851       8,163           7,737    7,607 

Total shareholders’ equity

        35,152       33,692  

Total liabilities and shareholders’ equity

        43,636       37,096  
Total equity         39,205    36,322 
Total liabilities and equity         68,469    57,565 

The financial statements on pages 216 and 217193 to 194 and the accompanying note on page 298271 were approved by the Board of Directors on 2921 February 20162018 and signed on its behalf by:

John McFarlane

Group Chairman

JesJames E Staley

Group Chief Executive

Tushar Morzaria

Group Finance Director

 

216  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    193


 


Financial statements of Barclays PLC

Parent company accounts

    

    

 

Statement of changes in equity

                                               
       Notes     
 

 

 

    Called up share
capital and

share premium

£m

  
  

  

  

   
 

 

    Other equity
instruments

£m

  
  

  

   

 

 
 

Capital

    reserves and

other equity
£m

  

  

  
  

   

 
 

    Retained

earnings
£m

  

  
  

   
 
    Total equity
£m
  
  
  Notes   

Called up
share capital
and share
premium

£m

   Other equity
instruments
£m
 

Capital
redemption
reserve

£m

   

Available for

sale reserve
£m

 Retained
earnings
£m
 

Total
equity

£m

 
Balance as at 1 January 2017     21,842    6,453  394    26  7,607  36,322 
Profit after tax and other comprehensive income         639       60  508  1,207 
Issue of new ordinary shares     117                117 
Issue of shares under employee share schemes     86             27  113 
Issue of other equity instruments         2,490            2,490 
Vesting of employee share schemes                  (11 (11
Dividends   12                 (509 (509
Other equity instruments coupons paid         (639        123  (516
Other                   (8 (8
Balance as at 31 December 2017      22,045    8,943  394    86  7,737  39,205 
            
Balance as at 1 January 2016     21,586    5,321   394       7,851   35,152 
Profit after tax and other comprehensive income         457       26   417   900 
Issue of new ordinary shares     68                 68 
Issue of shares under employee share schemes     188                 188 
Issue of other equity instruments         1,132             1,132 
Dividends   12                  (757  (757
Other equity instruments coupons paid         (457         91   (366
Other                    5   5 
Balance as at 31 December 2016      21,842    6,453   394    26   7,607   36,322 
            

Balance as at 1 January 2015

     20,809     4,326     394     8,163     33,692       20,809    4,326   394       8,163   33,692 

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

          345          702     1,047  
Profit after tax and other comprehensive income         345          702   1,047 

Issue of new ordinary shares

     137                    137       137                 137 

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     640                    640       640                 640 

Issue of other equity instruments

          995               995           995             995 

Dividends

   12                    (1,081   (1,081   12                  (1,081  (1,081

Other equity instruments coupons paid

          (345        70     (275         (345         70   (275

Other

                     (3   (3                    (3  (3

Balance as at 31 December 2015

      21,586     5,321     394     7,851     35,152        21,586    5,321   394       7,851   35,152 

Balance as at 1 January 2014

     19,887     2,063     394     8,398     30,742  

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

          250          777     1,027  

Issue of new ordinary shares

     150                    150  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     772                    772  

Issue of other equity instruments

          2,263               2,263  

Dividends

   12                    (1,057   (1,057

Other equity instruments coupons paid

          (250        54     (196

Other

                     (9   (9

Balance as at 31 December 2014

      20,809     4,326     394     8,163     33,692  

Balance as at 1 January 2013

     12,477          394     8,654     21,525  

Profit after tax and total comprehensive income

                    620     620  

Issue of new ordinary shares

     6,620                    6,620  

Issue of shares under employee share schemes

     790                    790  

Issue of other equity instruments

          2,063               2,063  

Dividends

   12                    (859   (859

Other

                   (17   (17

Balance as at 31 December 2013

      19,887     2,063     394     8,398     30,742  
                       

Cash flow statement

                                               

For the year ended 31 December

            

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

                    

2017

£m

 

2016

£m

 

2015

£m

 

Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:

            Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:        

Profit before tax

         1,090     1,084     585            1,258   934   1,090 

Changes in operating assets and liabilities

         100     734     (546          102   37   100 

Other non-cash movements

         52     (43   (20          76   62   52 

Corporate income tax (paid)/received

            (27   38     (3                    (27

Net cash from operating activities

            1,215     1,813     16  
Net cash generated from operating activities              1,436   1,033   1,215 

Capital contribution to subsidiary

            (1,560   (3,684   (8,630              (2,801  (1,250  (1,560

Net cash used in investing activities

            (1,560   (3,684   (8,630              (2,801  (1,250  (1,560

Issue of shares and other equity instruments

         1,771     3,185     9,473            2,581   1,388   1,771 

Net (increase) in loans and advances to bank subsidiaries of the Parent

         (4,973   (2,866     

Net increase in deposits and debt securities in issue

         4,052     2,056       
Net increase in loans and advances to subsidiaries of the Parent          (9,707  (10,942  (4,973
Net increase in debt securities in issue          6,503   9,314   4,052 

Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt

         921     803     (859          3,019   1,671   921 

Dividends paid

         (1,081   (1,057               (392  (757  (1,081

Coupons paid

            (345   (250     

Net cash from financing activities

            345     1,871     8,614  
Coupons paid on AT1 instruments              (639  (457  (345
Net cash generated from financing activities              1,365   217   345 

Net increase/(decrease) in cash and cash equivalents

                                             

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year

                                             

Cash and cash equivalents at end of year

                                             

Net cash from operating activities includes:

            
Net cash generated from operating activities includes:           

Dividends received

         876     821     734            674   621   876 

Interest paid

            (7   (6   (6
Interest (paid)/received              (10  5   (7

The Parent Company’scompany’s principal activity is to hold the investment in its wholly-owned subsidiary,subsidiaries, Barclays Bank PLC.PLC and Barclays Services Limited. Dividends received are treated as operating income.

The Company was not exposed at 31 December 20152017 or 20142016 to significant risks arising from the financial instruments it holds, which comprised loans and advances and other assets which had no marketMarket risk or material creditCredit risk.

 

194    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  217


Notes to the financial statements

Forfor the year ended 31 December 20152017

    

 

 

This section describes Barclays’ significant accounting policies and critical accounting estimates that

relate to the financial statements and notes as a whole. If an accounting policy or a critical

accounting estimate relates to a specificparticular note, the applicable accounting policy and/or critical

accounting estimate is contained withinwith the relevant note.

 

1 Significant accounting policies

 

1. Reporting entity

These financial statements are prepared for Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries (the Barclays PLC Group or the Group) under Section 399 of the Companies Act 2006. The Group is a major global financial services provider engaged in retail banking, credit cards, wholesale banking, investment banking, wealth management and investment management services. In addition, individual financial statements have been presented for the holding company.

2. Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards

The consolidated financial statements of the Group, and the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and interpretations (IFRICs) issued by the Interpretations Committee, as published by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). They are also in accordance with IFRS and IFRIC interpretations endorsed by the EU. The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated and individual financial statements are set out below, and in the relevant notes to the financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied.

3. Basis of preparation

The consolidated and individual financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention modified to include the fair valuation of investment property, and particular financial instruments, to the extent required or permitted under IFRS as set out in the relevant accounting policies. They are stated in millions of pounds Sterling (£m), the functional currency of Barclays PLC.

4. Accounting policies

Barclays prepares financial statements in accordance with IFRS. The Group’s significant accounting policies relating to specific financial statement items, together with a description of the accounting estimates and judgements that were critical to preparing them, are set out under the relevant notes. Accounting policies that affect the financial statements as a whole are set out below.

(i) Consolidation

Barclays applies IFRS 10Consolidated Financial Statements.

The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which Barclays PLC has control. The Group has control over another entity when the Group has all of the following:

1) power over the relevant activities of the investee, for example through voting or other rights

2) exposure to, or rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee, and

3) the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

The assessment of control is based on the consideration of all facts and circumstances. The Group reassesses whether it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation and consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation.

Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has already been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

As the consolidated financial statements include partnerships where the Group member is a partner, advantage has been taken of the exemption under Regulation 7 of the Partnership (Accounts) Regulations 2008 with regard to preparing and filing of individual partnership financial statements.

Details of the principal subsidiaries are given in Note 36, and a complete list of all subsidiaries is presented in Note 46.

(ii) Foreign currency translation

The Group applies IAS 21The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates. Transactions and balances in foreign currencies are translated into Sterling at the rate ruling on the date of the transaction. Foreign currency balances are translated into Sterling at the period end exchange rates. Exchange rate gains and losses on such balances are taken to the income statement.

The Group’s foreign operations (including subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and branches) based mainly outside the UK may have different functional currencies. The functional currency of an operation is the currency of the main economy to which it is exposed.

Prior to consolidation (or equity accounting) the assets and liabilities of non-Sterling operations are translated at the closing rate and items of income, expense and other comprehensive income are translated into Sterling at the rate on the date of the transactions. Exchange rate differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are included in currency translation reserves within equity. These are transferred to the income statement when the Group loses control, joint control or significant influence over the foreign operation or on partial disposal of the operation.

(iii) Financial assets and liabilities

The Group applies IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement to the recognition, classification and measurement, and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities, the impairment of financial assets, and hedge accounting.

Recognition

The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities when it becomes a party to the terms of the contract, which is the trade date or the settlement date.

These financial statements are prepared for Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries (the Barclays PLC Group or the Group) under Section 399 of the Companies Act 2006. The Group is a major global financial services provider engaged in retail banking, credit cards, wholesale banking, investment banking, wealth management and investment management services. In addition, individual financial statements have been presented for the holding company.

2. Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards

The consolidated financial statements of the Group, and the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) and interpretations (IFRICs) issued by the Interpretations Committee, as published by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB). They are also in accordance with IFRS and IFRIC interpretations endorsed by the European Union. The principal accounting policies applied in the preparation of the consolidated and individual financial statements are set out below, and in the relevant notes to the financial statements. These policies have been consistently applied.

3. Basis of preparation

The consolidated and individual financial statements have been prepared under the historical cost convention modified to include the fair valuation of investment property, and particular financial instruments, to the extent required or permitted under IFRS as set out in the relevant accounting policies. They are stated in millions of pounds Sterling (£m), the functional currency of Barclays PLC.

The financial statements have been prepared on a going concern basis, in accordance with The Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using IFRS.

4. Accounting policies

Barclays prepares financial statements in accordance with IFRS. The Group’s significant accounting policies relating to specific financial statement items, together with a description of the accounting estimates and judgements that were critical to preparing them, are set out under the relevant notes. Accounting policies that affect the financial statements as a whole are set out below.

(i) Consolidation

Barclays applies IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements.

The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which Barclays PLC has control. The Group has control over another entity when the Group has all of the following:

1) power over the relevant activities of the investee, for example through voting or other rights;

2) exposure to, or rights to, variable returns from its involvement with the investee; and

3) the ability to affect those returns through its power over the investee.

The assessment of control is based on the consideration of all facts and circumstances. The Group reassesses whether it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation. Consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation.

Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has already been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

As the consolidated financial statements include partnerships where the Group member is a partner, advantage has been taken of the exemption under Regulation 7 of the Partnership (Accounts) Regulations 2008 with regard to preparing and filing of individual partnership financial statements.

Details of the principal subsidiaries are given in Note 36, and a complete list of all subsidiaries is presented in Note 45.

(ii) Foreign currency translation

The Group applies IAS 21The Effects of Changes in Foreign Exchange Rates. Transactions and balances in foreign currencies are translated into Sterling at the rate ruling on the date of the transaction. Foreign currency balances are translated into Sterling at the period end exchange rates. Exchange gains and losses on such balances are taken to the income statement.

The Group’s foreign operations (including subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and branches) based mainly outside the UK may have different functional currencies. The functional currency of an operation is the currency of the main economy to which it is exposed.

Prior to consolidation (or equity accounting) the assets and liabilities ofnon-Sterling operations are translated at the closing rate and items of income, expense and other comprehensive income are translated into Sterling at the rate on the date of the transactions. Exchange differences arising on the translation of foreign operations are included in currency translation reserves within equity. These are transferred to the income statement when the Group disposes of the entire interest in a foreign operation, when partial disposal results in the loss of control of an interest in a subsidiary, when an investment previously accounted for using the equity method is accounted for as a financial asset, or on the disposal of an autonomous foreign operation within a branch.

 

218  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    195


 


Notes to the financial statements

for the year ended 31 December 2017

    

    

 

1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

 

(iii) Financial assets and liabilities

The Group applies IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement to the recognition, classification and measurement, and derecognition of financial assets and financial liabilities, the impairment of financial assets, and hedge accounting.

Recognition

The Group recognises financial assets and liabilities when it becomes a party to the terms of the contract. Trade date or settlement date accounting is applied depending on the classification of the financial asset.

Classification and measurement

Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised at fair value and may be held at fair value or amortised cost depending on the Group’s intention toward the assets and the nature of the assets and liabilities, mainly determined by their contractual terms.

The accounting policy for each type of financial asset or liability is included within the relevant note for the item. The Group’s policies for determining the fair values of the assets and liabilities are set out in Note 18.

Derecognition

The Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a financial asset, from its balance sheet where the contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or have been transferred, usually by sale, and with them either substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset or significant risks and rewards, along with the unconditional ability to sell or pledge the asset.

Financial liabilities arede-recognised when the liability has been settled, has expired or has been extinguished. An exchange of an existing financial liability for a new liability with the same lender on substantially different terms – generally a difference of 10% in the present value of the cash flows or a substantive qualitative amendment – is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.

Transactions in which the Group transfers assets and liabilities, portions of them, or financial risks associated with them can be complex and it may not be obvious whether substantially all of the risks and rewards have been transferred. It is often necessary to perform a quantitative analysis. Such an analysis compares the Group’s exposure to variability in asset cash flows before the transfer with its retained exposure after the transfer.

A cash flow analysis of this nature may require judgement. In particular, it is necessary to estimate the asset’s expected future cash flows as well as potential variability around this expectation. The method of estimating expected future cash flows depends on the nature of the asset, with market and market-implied data used to the greatest extent possible. The potential variability around this expectation is typically determined by stressing underlying parameters to create reasonable alternative upside and downside scenarios. Probabilities are then assigned to each scenario. Stressed parameters may include default rates, loss severity, or prepayment rates.

(iv) Issued debt and equity instruments

The Group applies IAS 32,Financial Instruments: Presentation, to determine whether funding is either a financial liability (debt) or equity.

Issued financial instruments or their components are classified as liabilities if the contractual arrangement results in the Group having an obligation to either deliver cash or another financial asset, or a variable number of equity shares, to the holder of the instrument. If this is not the case, the instrument is generally an equity instrument and the proceeds included in equity, net of transaction costs. Dividends and other returns to equity holders are recognised when paid or declared by the members at the AGM and treated as a deduction from equity.

Where issued financial instruments contain both liability and equity components, these are accounted for separately. The fair value of the debt is estimated first and the balance of the proceeds is included within equity.

5. New and amended standards and interpretations

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year, with the exception of the accounting treatment of own credit on financial liabilities designated at fair value though profit or loss under the fair value option. Barclays has elected to early adopt the presentation of Barclays own credit gains and losses in other comprehensive income as allowed by IFRS 9Financial Instruments, from 1 January 2017. This will have no effect on net assets, and any changes due to own credit in prior periods have not been restated. The cumulative own credit amount has been reclassified from retained earnings to a separate reserve. Any realised and unrealised amounts recognised in other comprehensive income will not be reclassified to the income statement in future periods; refer to Note 32 for further details.

There were no other material or amended standards or interpretations that resulted in a change in accounting policy.    

Future accounting developments

There have been and are expected to be a number of significant changes to the Group’s financial reporting after 2017 as a result of amended or new accounting standards that have been or will be issued by the IASB. The most significant of these are as follows:

IFRS 9 – Financial instruments

IFRS 9Financial Instruments which replaces IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement is effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018 and was endorsed by the EU in November 2016. IFRS 9, in particular the impairment requirements, will lead to significant changes in the accounting for financial instruments.

Classification196    Barclays PLC and measurement

Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised at fair value and may be held at fair value or amortised cost dependingBarclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on the Group’s intention towards the assets and the nature of the assets and liabilities, mainly determined by their contractual terms.Form 20-F


1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

i) Impairment

IFRS 9 introduces a revised impairment model which will require entities to recognise expected credit losses based on unbiased forward-looking information. This replaces the existing IAS 39 incurred loss model which only recognises impairment if there is objective evidence that a loss has already been incurred and would measure the loss at the most probable outcome. The IFRS 9 impairment model will be applicable to all financial assets at amortised cost, lease receivables, debt financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income, loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. This contrasts to the IAS 39 impairment model which is not applicable to loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts, which were covered by IAS 37. In addition, IAS 39 required the impairment of available for sale debt to be based on the fair value loss rather than estimated future cash flows as for amortised cost assets. Intercompany exposures, including loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts, are also in scope under IFRS 9 in the standalone reporting entity accounts.

The measurement of expected credit loss will involve increased complexity and judgement including estimation of probabilities of default, loss given default, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives and estimation of exposures at default and assessing significant increases in credit risk. It is expected to have a material financial impact and impairment charges will tend to be more volatile. Impairment will also be recognised earlier and the amounts will be higher. Unsecured products with longer expected lives, such as revolving credit cards, are expected to be most impacted.

The expected increase in the accounting impairment provision reduces CET1 capital, but the impact is partially mitigated by releasing the ‘excess of expected loss over impairment’ deduction from CET1 capital. In addition, the European Union will be adopting transitional arrangements to mitigate or spread the capital impacts of IFRS 9 adoption over a5-year period from 1 January 2018 which Barclays will apply. Separately, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision is considering the need for permanent changes to the regulatory capital framework in order to take account of expected credit loss provisioning.

Key concepts and management judgements

The impairment requirements are complex and require management judgements, estimates and assumptions. Key concepts and management judgements include:

 

The accounting policy for each type of financial asset or liability is included within the relevant note for the item. The Group’s policies for determining the fair values of the assets and liabilities are set out
Determining a significant increase in Note 18.

Derecognition

The Group derecognises a financial asset, or a portion of a financial asset, from its balance sheet where the contractual rights to cash flows from the asset have expired, or have been transferred, usually by sale, and with them either substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset or significant risks and rewards, along with the unconditional ability to sell or pledge the asset.

Financial liabilities are derecognised when the liability has been settled, has expired or has been extinguished. An exchange of an existing financial liability for a new liability with the same lender on substantially different terms – generally a difference of 10% in the present value of the cash flows or a substantive qualitative amendment – is accounted for as an extinguishment of the original financial liability and the recognition of a new financial liability.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Transactions in which the Group transfers assets and liabilities, portions of them, or financial risks associated with them can be complex and it may not be obvious whether substantially all of the risks and rewards have been transferred. It is often necessary to perform a quantitative analysis. Such an analysis compares the Group’s exposure to variability in asset cash flows before the transfer with its retained exposure after the transfer.

A cash flow analysis of this nature may require judgement. In particular, it is necessary to estimate the asset’s expected future cash flows as well as potential variability around this expectation. The method of estimating expected future cash flows depends on the nature of the asset, with market and market-implied data used to the greatest extent possible. The potential variability around this expectation is typically determined by stressing underlying parameters to create reasonable alternative upside and downside scenarios. Probabilities are then assigned to each scenario. Stressed parameters may include default rates, loss severity, or prepayment rates.

(iv) Issued debt and equity instruments

The Group applies IAS 32,Financial Instruments: Presentation, to determine whether funding is either a financial liability (debt) or equity.

Issued financial instruments or their components are classified as liabilities if the contractual arrangement results in the Group having a present obligation to either deliver cash or another financial asset, or a variable number of equity shares, to the holder of the instrument. If this is not the case, the instrument is generally an equity instrument and the proceeds included in equity, net of transaction costs. Dividends and other returns to equity holders are recognised when paid or declared by the members at the AGM and treated as a deduction from equity.

Where issued financial instruments contain both liability and equity components, these are accounted for separately. The fair value of the debt is estimated first and the balance of the proceeds is included within equity.

New and amended standards and interpretations

The accounting policies adopted are consistent with those of the previous financial year. There were no new or amended standards or interpretations that resulted in a change in accounting policy.

Future accounting developments

There have been, and are expected to be, a number of significant changes to the Group’s financial reporting after 2015 as a result of amended or new accounting standards that have been or will be issued by the IASB. The most significant of these are as follows:

IFRS 9 – Financial instruments

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments which will replace IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement is effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2018 and is currently expected to be endorsed by the EU in 2016. IFRS 9, in particular the impairment requirements, will lead to significant changes in the accounting for financial instruments.

Impairment

IFRS 9 introduces a revised impairment model which will require entities to recognise expected credit losses based on unbiased forward-looking information, replacing the existing incurred loss model which only recognises impairment if there is objective evidence that a loss is already incurred.

The IFRS 9 impairment model will be applicable to all financial assets at amortised cost, lease receivables, debt financial assets at fair value through OCI, loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts. This contrasts to the IAS 39 impairment model which is not applicable to loan commitments and financial guarantee contracts (these were covered by IAS 37). In addition, the IAS 39 Available for Sale assets model is not fully aligned to the model for amortised cost assets.

IFRS 9 requires the recognition of lifetime expected credit losses for financial instruments for which the credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition. If the credit risk has not increased significantly since initial recognition 12 month expected credit losses are recognised, being the expected credit losses from default events that are possible within 12 months after the reporting date.

IFRS 9 requires the recognition of 12 month expected credit losses (the portion of lifetime expected credit losses from default events that are expected within 12 months of the reporting date) if credit risk has not significantly increased since initial recognition (stage 1), and lifetime expected credit losses for financial instruments for which the credit risk has increased significantly since initial recognition (stage 2) or which are credit impaired (stage 3). Barclays will assess when a significant increase in credit risk has occurred based on quantitative and qualitative assessments. Exposures are considered to have resulted in a significant increase in credit risk and are moved to stage 2 when:

– Quantitative Test

The annualised cumulative weighted average lifetime probability of default (PD) has increased by more than the agreed threshold relative to the equivalent at origination. The relative thresholds are defined as percentage increases and set at an origination score band and segment level.

– Qualitative Test

Accounts that meet the portfolio’s ‘high risk’ criteria and are subject to closer credit monitoring.

– Backstop Criteria

Accounts that are 30 calendar days or more past due. The 30 days past due criteria is a backstop rather than a primary driver of moving exposures into stage 2.

Exposures will move back to stage 1 once they no longer meet the criteria for a significant increase in credit risk and when any cure criteria used for credit risk management are met. This is subject to all payments being up to date and the customer evidencing ability and willingness to maintain future payments.

Barclays will not rely on the low credit risk exemption which would assume facilities of investment grade are not significantly deteriorated.

Determining the probability of default at initial recognition is expected to require management estimates, in particular for exposures issued before the effective date of IFRS 9. For certain revolving facilities such as credit cards and overdrafts, this is expected to be when the facility was first entered into which could be a long time in the past.

Management overlays and other exceptions to model outputs are applied only if consistent with the objective of identifying significant increases in credit risk.

 

Expected credit losses are the unbiased probability of default weighted average credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and forecast future economic conditions. Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial instrument, discounted at the effective interest rate.

Under IFRS 9, impairment will be recognised earlier than is the case under IAS 39 because it requires expected losses to be recognised before the loss event arises. Measurement will involve increased complexity and judgement including estimation of probabilities of defaults, loss given default, a range of unbiased future economic scenarios, estimation of expected lives, estimation of exposures at default and assessing increases in credit risk. It is expected to have a material financial impact, but it will not be practical to disclose reliable financial impact estimates until the implementation programme is further advanced.

Forward-looking information

Credit losses are the expected cash shortfalls from what is contractually due over the expected life of the financial instrument, discounted at the original effective interest rate. Expected credit losses are the unbiased probability-weighted credit losses determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes and considering future economic conditions. When there is anon-linear relationship between forward looking economic scenarios and their associated credit losses, a range of forward looking economic scenarios, currently expected to be a minimum of five, will be considered to ensure a sufficient unbiased representative sample of the complete distribution is included in determining the expected loss. Stress testing methodologies will be leveraged within forecasting economic scenarios for IFRS 9 purposes.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  219    197


Notes to the financial statements

Forfor the year ended 31 December 20152017

    

    

 

1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

 

 

Based on the current requirements of CRD IV, the expected increase in the accounting impairment provision would reduce CET1 capital but the impact would be partially mitigated by the ‘excess of expected losses over impairment’ included in the CET1 calculation as discussed on page 150).

 

Classification and measurement

IFRS 9 will require financial assets to be classified on the basis of two criteria:

 

1) the business model within which financial assets are managed, and

 

2) their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and interest’).

 

Financial assets will be measured at amortised cost if they are held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

 

Financial assets will be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if they are held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

 

Other financial assets are measured at fair value through profit and loss. There is an option to make an irrevocable election for non-traded equity investments to be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income.

 

The accounting for financial liabilities is largely unchanged, except for financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss. Gains and losses on such financial liabilities arising from changes in Barclays’ own credit risk will be presented in other comprehensive income rather than in profit and loss.

 

Hedge accounting

IFRS 9 contains revised requirements on hedge accounting, which are more closely aligned with an entity’s risk management strategies and risk management objectives. The new rules would replace the current quantitative effectiveness test with a simpler version, and requires that an economic relationship exist between the hedged item and the hedging instrument. Under the new rules, voluntary hedge de-designations would not be allowed.

 

Adoption of the IFRS 9 hedge accounting requirements is optional, and certain aspects of IAS 39, being the portfolio fair value hedge for interest rate risk, would continue to be available for entities (while applying IFRS 9 to the remainder of the entity’s hedge accounting relationships) until the IASB completes its accounting for dynamic risk management project. Barclays is considering the most appropriate approach to adopt in this area.

 

IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In 2014, the IASB issued IFRS 15Revenue from Contracts with Customerswhich will replace IAS 18Revenue and IAS 11Construction Contracts. It applies to all contracts with customers except leases, financial instruments and insurance contracts. The standard will establish a more systematic approach for revenue measurement and recognition. During July 2015, the IASB confirmed the deferral of the effective date by one year to 1 January 2018. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU. Adoption of the standard is not expected to have a significant impact.

 

IFRS 16 – Leases

In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16Leases, which will replace IAS 17Leases. Under the new requirements, lessees would be required to recognise assets and liabilities arising from both operating and finance leases on the balance sheet. The expected effective date is 1 January 2019. The standard has not yet been endorsed by the EU.

 

Insurance contracts

The IASB also plans to issue a new standard on insurance contracts.

 

The Group is in the process of considering the financial impacts of the new standards.

 

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Critical accounting estimates and judgements are disclosed in:

 

  Page

 

    Page  

 

Credit impairment charges and other provisions

 

  223

 

  

Fair value of financial instruments

 

  234  

 

Income taxes

 

  226

 

  

Provisions

 

  259  

 

Available for sale assets

  234  

Retirement benefit obligations

  281  

 

Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk management section as follows:

 

§   Segmental reporting on pages 191 to 221

 

§   Credit risk management, on pages 99 and 100, including exposures to selected countries

 

§   Market risk, on pages 101 and 102

 

§   Funding risk – capital, on pages 103 and 104 and

 

§   Funding risk – liquidity, on page 105.

 

These are covered by the Audit opinion included on page 210.

 

Definition of default, credit impaired assets, write-offs, and interest income recognition

The definition of default for the purpose of determining expected credit losses has been aligned to the Regulatory Capital CRR Article 178 definition of default, which considers indicators that the debtor is unlikely to pay, includes exposures in forbearance and is no later than when the exposure is more than 90 days past due or 180 days past due in the case of UK mortgages. When exposures are identified as credit impaired or purchased or originated as such, IFRS 9 requires separate disclosure and interest income is required to be calculated on the carrying value net of the impairment allowance.

Credit impaired is expected to be when the exposure has defaulted which is also anticipated to align to when an exposure is identified as individually impaired under the incurred loss model of IAS 39.Write-off polices are not expected to change from IAS 39.

Expected life

Lifetime expected credit losses must be measured over the expected life. This is restricted to the maximum contractual life and takes into account expected prepayment, extension, call and similar options. The exceptions are certain revolver financial instruments, such as credit cards and bank overdrafts, that include both a drawn and an undrawn component where the entity’s contractual ability to demand repayment and cancel the undrawn commitment does not limit the entity’s exposure to credit losses to the contractual notice period. The expected life for these revolver facilities is expected to be behavioural life. Where data is insufficient or analysis inconclusive, an additional ‘maturity factor’ may be incorporated to reflect the full estimated life of the exposures, based upon experienced judgement and/or peer analysis. Potential future modifications of contracts are not taken into account when determining the expected life or exposure at default until they occur.

Discounting

Expected credit losses are discounted at the effective interest rate (EIR) at initial recognition or an approximation thereof and consistent with income recognition. For loan commitments the EIR is that rate that is expected to apply when the loan is drawn down and a financial asset is recognised. Issued financial guarantee contracts are discounted at the risk free rate. Lease receivables are discounted at the rate implicit in the lease as prescribed in IAS 17. For variable/floating rate financial assets, the spot rate at the reporting date is used and projections of changes in the variable rate over the expected life are not made to estimate future interest cash flows or for discounting.

Modelling techniques

Expected credit losses (ECL) are calculated by multiplying three main components, being the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and the exposure at default (EAD), discounted at the original effective interest rate. The regulatory Basel Committee of Banking Supervisors (BCBS) ECL calculations are leveraged for IFRS 9 modelling but adjusted for key differences which include:

BCBS requires 12 month through the economic cycle losses whereas IFRS 9 requires 12 months or lifetime point in time losses based on conditions at the reporting date and multiple forecasts of the future economic conditions over the expected lives; and

IFRS 9 models do not include certain conservative BCBS model floors and downturn assessments and require discounting to the reporting date at the original effective interest rate rather than using the cost of capital to the date of default.

Management adjustments will be made to modelled output to account for situations where known or expected risk factors and information have not been considered in the modelling process, for example forecast economic scenarios for uncertain political events.

ECL is measured at the individual financial instrument level, however a collective approach where financial instruments with similar risk characteristics are grouped together, with apportionment to individual financial instruments, is used where effects can only be seen at a collective level, for example for forward looking information.

For the IFRS 9 impairment assessment, Barclays Risk Models are used to determine the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and exposure at default (EAD). For stage 2 and 3, Barclays applies lifetime PDs but uses 12 month PDs for stage 1. The ECL drivers of PD, EAD and LGD are modelled at an account level which considers vintage, among other credit factors. Also, the assessment of significant increase in credit risk is based on the initial lifetime PD curve, which accounts for the different credit risk underwritten over time.

ii) Forbearance

Both performing andnon-performing forbearance assets are classified as stage 3 except where it is established that the concession granted has not resulted in diminished financial obligation and that no other regulatory definitions of default criteria has been triggered, in which case the asset is classified as stage 2. The minimum probationary period fornon-performing forbearance is 12 months and for performing forbearance, 24 months. Hence, a minimum of 36 months is required fornon-performing forbearance to move out of a forborne state.

iii) Project governance and credit risk management

Barclays has a jointly accountable Risk and Finance implementation and governance programme with representation from all impacted departments. The current impairment Committee structures were initiated and tested from H1 2017, providing oversight for both IAS 39 and IFRS 9 impairment results.

The impairment reporting process commences with the production of economic scenarios. The Senior Scenario Review Committee (SSRC) reviews and approves the scenario narratives, the core set of macroeconomic variables, probability weightings, and any scenario specific management overlays which are used in all ECL models. The SSRC attests that the scenarios adequately account for thenon-linearity and asymmetry of the loss distribution.

The Group Impairment Committee, formed of members from both Finance and Risk and attended by both the Group Finance Director and the CRO, is responsible for overseeing impairment policy and practice across Barclays Group and will approve impairment results.

Reported results and key messages are communicated to the Board Audit Committee, which has an oversight role and provides challenge of key assumptions, including the basis of the scenarios adopted.

198    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

iv) Classification and measurement

IFRS 9 requires financial assets to be classified on the basis of two criteria:

1) the business model within which financial assets are managed, and

2) their contractual cash flow characteristics (whether the cash flows represent ‘solely payments of principal and interest’).

Financial assets will be measured at amortised cost if they are held within a business model whose objective is to hold financial assets in order to collect contractual cash flows, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

Financial assets will be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income if they are held within a business model whose objective is achieved by both collecting contractual cash flows and selling financial assets, and their contractual cash flows represent solely payments of principal and interest.

Business models are determined on initial application and this may differ from the model before 1 January 2018 for certain portfolios. Barclays assesses the business model at a portfolio level. Information that is considered in determining the business model includes (i) policies and objectives for the relevant portfolio, (ii) how the performance and risks of the portfolio are managed, evaluated and reported to management, and (iii) the frequency, volume and timing of sales in prior periods, sales expectation for future periods, and the reasons for such sales. Financial assets managed on a fair value basis and those that are held for trading are held at fair value through profit and loss.

In assessing whether contractual cash flows are solely payments of principal and interest, terms that could change the contractual cash flows so that it would not meet the condition for solely payments of principal and interest are considered, including: (i) contingent and leverage features,(ii) non-recourse arrangements and (iii) features that could modify the time value of money.

Other financial assets are measured at fair value through profit and loss. There is an option to make an irrevocable election for non traded equity investments to be measured at fair value through other comprehensive income, in which case dividends are recognised in profit or loss, but gains or losses are not reclassified to profit or loss upon derecognition, and impairment is not recognised in the income statement.

On 12 October 2017, the IASB published an amendment to IFRS 9, relating to prepayment features with negative compensation; this amendment is effective from 1 January 2019 with early application permitted, however has yet to be endorsed by the EU. This amendment allows financial assets with such features to be measured at amortised cost or fair value through other comprehensive income provided the SPPI (solely payments of principal and interest) criteria in IFRS 9 are otherwise met. In addition the amendment to IFRS 9 clarifies that a financial asset passes the SPPI criterion regardless of the event or circumstance that cause the early termination of the contract, and irrespective of which party pays or receives reasonable compensation for the early termination of the contract. Such prepayment features are present in some fixed rate corporate and investment bank loans, and are considered to meet the criteria for amortised cost under IFRS 9. Prepayment features are consistent with the solely payments of principal and interest criteria if the prepayment feature substantially represents unpaid amounts of principal and interest and reasonable compensation for early termination of the contract.

While there are some classification changes these are not significant from a Group perspective.

v) Hedge accounting

IFRS 9 contains revised requirements on hedge accounting, adoption of which is optional. In addition certain aspects of IAS 39, being the portfolio fair value hedge for interest rate risk, continues to be available for entities (while applying IFRS 9 to the remainder of the entity’s hedge accounting relationships) until the IASB completes its accounting for dynamic risk management project.

Based on analysis performed, Barclays will continue applying IAS 39 hedge accounting, although it will implement the amended IFRS 7 hedge accounting disclosure requirements.

vi) Own credit

Barclays has applied the option in IFRS 9 to recognise changes in own credit for financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss under the fair value option in other comprehensive income from 1 January 2017.

vii) Expected impact

IFRS 9 will be applied retrospectively on adoption on 1 January 2018. Opening shareholders’ equity is expected to decrease by approximately

£2.2bn post tax. This impact assessment has been estimated under an interim control environment with models that continue to undergo validation. The implementation of the comprehensive end state control environment will continue as Barclays introduces business as usual controls throughout 2018. Barclays will not restate comparatives on initial application of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018.

IFRS 15 – Revenue from Contracts with Customers

In 2014, the IASB issued IFRS 15 Revenue from Contracts with Customers which will replace IAS 18 Revenue and IAS 11 Construction Contracts. It applies to all contracts with customers except leases, financial instruments and insurance contracts. The standard establishes a more systematic approach for revenue measurement and recognition by introducing a five-step model governing revenue recognition. The five-step model includes 1) identifying the contract with the customer, 2) identifying each of the performance obligations included in the contract, 3) determining the amount of consideration in the contract, 4) allocating the consideration to each of the identified performance obligations and 5) recognising revenue as each performance obligation is satisfied. In April 2016, the IASB issued clarifying amendments to IFRS 15 which provide additional application guidance but did not change the underlying principles of the standard. The standard was endorsed by the EU in September 2016.

Barclays will implement this standard on 1 January 2018. Barclays has elected the cumulative effect transition method with a transition adjustment calculated as of 1 January 2018 and recognised in retained earnings without restating comparative periods. There are no significant impacts from the adoption of IFRS 15 in relation to the timing of when Barclays recognises revenues or when revenue should be recognised gross as a principal or net as an agent.

 

220  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    199


 


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/returnfor the year ended 31 December 2017

    

1 Significant accounting policiescontinued

IFRS 16 – Leases

In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16 Leases, which will replace IAS 17 Leases. IFRS 16 will apply to all leases with the exception of licenses of intellectual property, rights held by licensing agreement within the scope of IAS 38 Intangible Assets, service concession arrangements, leases of biological assets within the scope of IAS 41 Agriculture, and leases of minerals, oil, natural gas and similarnon-regenerative resources. IFRS 16 will not result in a significant change to lessor accounting; however for lessee accounting there will no longer be a distinction between operating and finance leases. Instead lessees will be required to recognise both a right of use asset and lease liability on balance sheet for all leases. As a result Barclays will observe an increase in both assets and liabilities for transactions currently accounted for as operating leases as at 1 January 2019 (the effective date of IFRS 16). A scope exemption will apply to short term and low value leases. Current project implementation efforts are focused on preparing and sourcing information. The standard was endorsed by the EU in November 2017. Barclays will implement this standard on 1 January 2019. Barclays is currently assessing the expected impact of adopting this standard.

IFRS 17 – Insurance contracts

In May 2017, the IASB issued IFRS 17 Insurance Contracts, a comprehensive new accounting standard for insurance contracts covering recognition and measurement, presentation and disclosure. Once effective, IFRS 17 will replace IFRS 4 Insurance Contracts that was issued in 2005.

IFRS 17 applies to all types of insurance contracts (i.e. life,non-life, direct insurance andre-insurance), regardless of the type of entities that issue them, as well as to certain guarantees and financial instruments with discretionary participation features. A few scope exceptions will apply. The standard is effective from 1 January 2021 and has not yet been endorsed by the EU. Barclays is currently assessing the expected impact of adopting this standard.

IFRS 2 Classification and Measurement of Share-based Payment Transactions – Amendments to IFRS 2

The IASB issued amendments to IFRS 2 Share-based Payment that address three main areas: the effects of vesting conditions on the measurement of a cash-settled share-based payment transaction; the classification of a share-based payment transaction with net settlement features for withholding tax obligations; and accounting where a modification to the terms and conditions of a share-based payment transaction changes its classification from cash settled to equity settled. The amendments are effective for annual periods beginning on or after1 January 2018. Adoption of the amendments will not have a significant impact on Barclays.

IFRIC Interpretation 23 Uncertainty over Income Tax Treatment

IFRIC 23 clarifies the application of IAS 12 to accounting for income tax treatments that have yet to be accepted by tax authorities, in scenarios where it may be unclear how tax law applies to a particular transaction or circumstance, or whether a taxation authority will accept an entity’s tax treatment. The effective date is 1 January 2019. Barclays is currently assessing the impact of IFRIC 23.

6. Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS requires the use of estimates. It also requires management to exercise judgement in applying the accounting policies. The key areas involving a higher degree of judgement or complexity, or areas where assumptions are significant to the consolidated and individual financial statements are highlighted under the relevant note. Critical accounting estimates and judgements are disclosed in:

Credit impairment charges on page 204;

Taxes on page 207;

Fair value of financial instruments on page 216;

Pensions and post retirement benefits - obligations on page 255; and

Provisions including conduct and legal, competition and regulatory matters on page 237.

7. Other disclosures

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, certain disclosures required under IFRS have been included within the Risk review section as follows:

Credit risk on page 85 and tables on pages 96 to 116;

Market risk on page 87 and the tables on pages 117 to 121;

Treasury and capital risk – capital on pages 137 to 145; and

Treasury and capital risk – liquidity on pages 124 to 136.

These disclosures are covered by the Audit opinions (included on pages 186 and 187) where referenced as audited.

8. Parent company accounts

The Parent company’s financial statements on pages 193 to 194 also form part of the notes to the consolidated financial statements.

200    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the results and performance of the Group.

Information on the income generated, expenditure incurred, segmental performance, tax,

earnings per share and dividends are included here. For further detail on performance, please

see income statement commentary within Financial review (unaudited) on page 167.

2 Segmental reporting

 

Presentation of segmental reporting

The Group’s segmental reporting is in accordance with IFRS 8Operating Segments. Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive Committee, which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, and has been identified as the chief operating decision maker. All transactions between business segments are conducted on an arm’s length basis, with intra-segment revenue and costs being eliminated in Head Office. Income and expenses directly associated with each segment are included in determining business segment performance.

Barclays PLC is a transatlantic consumer and wholesale bank and for segmental reporting purposes defines its divisions as follows:

Barclays UK which offers everyday products and services to retail customers and small to medium sized enterprises based in the UK. The division includes the UK Personal business; the small UK Corporate and UK Wealth businesses; and the Barclaycard UK consumer credit cards business.

Barclays Internationalwhich delivers products and services designed for our larger corporate, wholesale and international banking clients. The division includes the large UK Corporate business; the international Corporate and Wealth businesses; the Investment Bank; the international Barclaycard business; and Barclaycard Business Solutions.

Head Office which comprises head office and central support functions (including treasury) and businesses in transition.

2 Segmental reportingTheNon-Core segment was closed on 1 July 2017 with the residual assets and liabilities reintegrated into, and associated financial performance subsequently reported in, Barclays UK, Barclays International and Head Office. Financial results up until 30 June 2017 are reflected in theNon-Core segment within the Group’s results for the year ended 31 December 2017. Comparative results have not been restated.

Analysis of results by business                     
    

Barclays UK

£m

  Barclays
International
£m
  

Head 

Officea

£m 

  

Barclays 

Non-Coreb

£m 

  Group results
£m
 
For the year ended 31 December 2017      
Total income   7,383   14,382   (159  (530  21,076 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (783  (1,506  (17  (30  (2,336
Net operating income/(expenses)   6,600   12,876   (176  (560  18,740 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (4,030  (9,321  (277  (256  (13,884
UK bank levy   (59  (265  (41     (365
Litigation and conduct   (759  (269  (151  (28  (1,207
Operating expenses   (4,848  (9,855  (469  (284  (15,456
Other net (expenses)/incomec   (5  254   (189  197   257 
Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations   1,747   3,275   (834  (647  3,541 
Total assets (£bn)   237.4   856.1   39.7      1,133.2 
Number of employees (full time equivalent)d   22,800   11,500   45,600      79,900 
                      
For the year ended 31 December 2016      
Total income   7,517   14,995   103   (1,164  21,451 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (896  (1,355     (122  (2,373
Net operating income/(expenses)   6,621   13,640   103   (1,286  19,078 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (3,792  (9,129  (135  (1,509  (14,565
UK bank levy   (48  (284  (2  (76  (410
Litigation and conduct   (1,042  (48  (27  (246  (1,363
Operating expenses   (4,882  (9,461  (164  (1,831  (16,338
Other net (expenses)/income   (1  32   128   331   490 
Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations   1,738   4,211   67   (2,786  3,230 
Total assets (£bn)e   209.6   648.5   75.2   279.7   1,213 
Number of employees (full time equivalent)f   36,000   36,900   100   5,500   119,300 

Notes

aThe reintegration ofNon-Core assets on 1 July 2017 resulted in the transfer of c.£9bn of assets into Head Office relating to a portfolio of Italian mortgages. The portfolio generated a loss before tax of £37m in the second half of the year and included assets of £9bn as at 31 December 2017.
bTheNon-Core segment was closed on 1 July 2017. Financial results up until 30 June 2017 are reflected in theNon-Core segment for 2017.
cOther net (expenses)/income represents the share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
dAs a result of the establishment of the Group Service Company in September 2017, employees who are now employed by the Group Service Company and who were previously allocated to, or were within, Barclays UK and Barclays International are now reported in Head Office.
eAfrica Banking assets held for sale were reported in Head Office for 2016.
fNumber of employees included 40,800 in relation to Africa Banking for 2016.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    201


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

2 Segmental reportingcontinued

Analysis of results by business                     
    

Barclays
UK

£m

  Barclays
International
£m
  Head
Office
£m
  Barclays
Non-Core
£m
  

Group
results

£m

 
For the year ended 31 December 2015      
Total income   7,343   13,747   338   612   22,040 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (706  (922     (134  (1,762
Net operating income   6,637   12,825   338   478   20,278 
Operating expenses excluding UK bank levy and litigation and conduct   (3,464  (8,029  (272  (1,958  (13,723
UK bank levy   (77  (253  (8  (88  (426
Litigation and conduct   (2,511  (1,310  (66  (500  (4,387
Operating expenses   (6,052  (9,592  (346  (2,546  (18,536
Other net income/(expenses)a      45   (106  (535  (596
Profit/(loss) before tax from continuing operations   585   3,278   (114  (2,603  1,146 
Total assets (£bn)b   202.5   532.2   59.4   325.8   1,120.0 
Number of employees (full time equivalent)c   38,800   39,100   100   9,900   129,400 

Notes

aOther net income/(expenses) represents the share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures, profit (or loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and gains on acquisitions.
bAfrica Banking assets held for sale were reported in Head Office for 2015.
cNumber of employees included 41,500 in relation to Africa Banking for 2015.

Income by geographic region               
For the year ended 31 December  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 
Continuing operations      
UK   11,190    11,096    12,160 
Europe   1,663    2,087    2,245 
Americas   7,443    7,278    6,610 
Africa and Middle East   251    419    387 
Asia   529    571    638 
Total   21,076    21,451    22,040 
                
Income from individual countries which represent more than 5% of total incomea               
For the year ended 31 December  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 
Continuing operations      
UK   11,190    11,096    12,160 
United States   6,871    6,876    6,228 

Note

aTotal income based on counterparty location. Income from each single external customer does not amount to 10% or greater of the Group’s total income.    

202    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 

Presentation of segmental reporting

The Group’s segmental reporting is in accordance with IFRS 8Operating Segments. Operating segments are reported in a manner consistent with the internal reporting provided to the Executive Committee, which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the operating segments, and has been identified as the chief operating decision maker. All transactions between business segments are conducted on an arm’s-length basis, with intra-segment revenue and costs being eliminated in Head Office. Income and expenses directly associated with each segment are included in determining business segment performance.

An analysis of the Group’s performance by business segment and income by geographic segment is included on pages 191 and 192. Further details on each of the segments are provided on pages 193 to 221.

3 Net interest income

 

Accounting for interest income and expense

The Group applies IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. Interest income on loans and advances at amortised cost, available for sale debt investments, and interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost, are calculated using the effective interest method which allocates interest, and direct and incremental fees and costs, over the expected lives of the assets and liabilities.

The effective interest method requires the Group to estimate future cash flows, in some cases based on its experience of customers’ behaviour, considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument, as well as the expected lives of the assets and liabilities. Due to the large number of product types (both assets and liabilities), in the normal course of business there are no individual estimates that are material to the results or financial position.

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Cash and balances with central banks     158       193       219  
 Available for sale investments     1,387       1,615       1,804  
 Loans and advances to banks     541       446       468  
 Loans and advances to customers     14,732       14,677       15,613  
 Other     383       432       211  
 Interest income     17,201       17,363       18,315  
 Deposits from banks     (177     (199     (201
 Customer accounts     (930     (1,473     (2,656
 Debt securities in issue     (1,722     (1,922     (2,176
 Subordinated liabilities     (1,644     (1,622     (1,572
 Other     (170     (67     (110
 Interest expense     (4,643     (5,283     (6,715
 Net interest income     12,558       12,080       11,600  

Accounting for interest income and expenses

The Group applies IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. Interest income on loans and advances at amortised cost, financial investments debt securities, and interest expense on financial liabilities held at amortised cost, are calculated using the effective interest method which allocates interest, and direct and incremental fees and costs, over the expected lives of the assets and liabilities.

The effective interest method requires the Group to estimate future cash flows, in some cases based on its experience of customers’ behaviour, considering all contractual terms of the financial instrument, as well as the expected lives of the assets and liabilities.

Barclays incurs certain costs to originate credit card balances with the most significant beingco-brand partner fees. To the extent these costs are attributed to revolving customer balances they are capitalised and subsequently included within the calculation of the effective interest rate. They are amortised to interest income over the period of expected repayment of the originated balance. Costs attributed to transacting customer balances are recorded within fee and commission expense when incurred. There are no other individual estimates involved in the calculation of effective interest rates that are material to the results or financial position.

    

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

  

            2015

£m

 
Cash and balances with central banks   583   186   157 
Financial investments   754   740   698 
Loans and advances to banks   286   600   487 
Loans and advances to customers   11,783   12,958   12,512 
Other   225   57   99 
Interest income   13,631   14,541   13,953 
Deposits from banks   (370  (265  (128
Customer accounts   (1,123  (1,514  (1,406
Debt securities in issue   (915  (990  (553
Subordinated liabilities   (1,223  (1,104  (1,015
Other   (155  (131  (243
Interest expense   (3,786  (4,004  (3,345
Net interest income   9,845   10,537   10,608 

Costs to originate credit card balances of £497m (2016: £480m; 2015: £368m) have been amortised to interest income during the period.

Interest income includes £149m (2014: £153m)£48m (2016: £75m; 2015: £91m) accrued on impaired loans.

Other interest income principally includes interest income relating to reverse repurchase agreements and hedging activity. Similarly, other interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to repurchase agreements and hedging activity.

Included in net interest income is hedge ineffectiveness as detailed on page 233.in Note 15 amounting to £(43)m in 2017 (2016: £71m; 2015: £81m).

20154 Net fee and commission income

Net interest income increased by 4% to £12,558m, driven by margin improvement in Barclaycard and Africa Banking, and volume growth in both PCB and Barclaycard. This was partially offset by a decrease in Head Office due to a reduction in interest income on AFS investments. Interest income decreased by 1% to £17,201m, driven by a decline in income on AFS investments which fell 14% to £1,387m. Interest expense decreased 12% to £4,643m, driven by reduced interest expense on customer accounts falling by 37% to £930m.

2014Accounting for net fee and commission income

Net interest income increasedThe Group applies IAS 18Revenue. Fees and commissions charged for services provided or received by 4% to £12,080m, driven by improvements in PCB savings margins and volume growth in Barclaycard, partially offset by a reduction in Africa Banking due to currency movements and the sale and rundownGroup are recognised as the services are provided, for example on completion of assets in Non-Core. Interest income decreased by 5% to £17,363m, driven by a reduction in income from loans and advances to customers which fell 6% to £14,677m. Interest expense reduced 21% to £5,283m, driven by a reduction in interest on customer accounts of £1,183m to £1,473m.the underlying transaction.

    

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

  

            2015

£m

 
Fee and commission income    
Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions   8,622   8,452   8,340 
Foreign exchange commission   129   118   130 
Fee and commission income   8,751   8,570   8,470 
Fee and commission expense   (1,937  (1,802  (1,611
Net fee and commission income   6,814   6,768   6,859 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  221    203


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

    

 

45 Net fee and commissiontrading income

 

Accounting for net fee and commission income

The Group applies IAS 18Revenue. Fees and commissions charged for services provided or received by the Group are recognised as the services are provided, for example on completion of the underlying transaction.

 

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
 Fee and commission income            
 Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions     9,497       9,681       10,311  
 Foreign exchange commission     158       155       168  
 Fee and commission income     9,655       9,836       10,479  
 Fee and commission expense     (1,763     (1,662     (1,748
 Net fee and commission income     7,892       8,174       8,731  

2015Accounting for net trading income

Net feeIn accordance with IAS 39, trading positions are held at fair value, and commissionthe resulting gains and losses are included in the income decreased £282mstatement, together with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to £7,892m. This was primarily driven by lower income due totrading activities.

Income arises from both the sale and purchase of the US Wealthtrading positions, margins which are achieved through market-making and Spanish retail businessescustomer business and launch of the revised PCB overdraft propositionfrom changes in mid 2014, which recognises the majority of the overdraft income as netfair value caused by movements in interest income as opposed to fee income. Investment Bank income decreased, driven by lowerand exchange rates, equity underwriting fees partially offset by higher financial advisoryprices and debt underwriting fees. Growth in Africa Banking was offset by adverse currency movements. These movements were partly offset by increases in Barclaycard, driven by growth in payment volumes.other market variables.

2014Own credit gains/(losses)

Net fee and commission income decreased £557m to £8,174m. This was driven by lower fees asAs a result of decreased debt underwriting feesthe early adoption of the own credit provisions of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2017, own credit on financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and declines in cash commissions, reflecting lower volumesloss which was previously recorded in the Investment Bank. Further decreases were caused by the launch of the revised PCB overdraft proposition, which recognises the majority of the overdraft income as net interest income as opposed to fee income, and adverse currency movements in Africa Banking. These movements were partly offset by increases in Barclaycard, driven by growth in payment volumes.statement is now recognised within other comprehensive income.

5 Net trading income

 

Accounting for net trading income

In accordance with IAS 39Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement, trading positions are held at fair value, and the resulting gains and losses are included in the income statement, together with interest and dividends arising from long and short positions and funding costs relating to trading activities.

Income arises from both the sale and purchase of trading positions, margins which are achieved through market making and customer business and from changes in fair value caused by movements in interest and exchange rates, equity prices and other market variables.

Own credit gains/losses arise from the fair valuation of financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss. See Note 17 Financial liabilities designated at fair value.

                                                               
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
  

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

 

            2015

£m

 
Trading income     3,193       3,297       6,773     3,500    2,803   2,996 
Own credit gains/(losses)     430       34       (220
Own credit (losses)/gains       (35  430 
Net trading income     3,623       3,331       6,553     3,500    2,768   3,426 

Included within net trading income were gains of £640m (2016: £31m gain; 2015: £992m (2014: £1,051m loss, 2013: £914m gain) on financial assets designated at fair value and lossesgains of £472m (2016: £346m gain; 2015: £187m (2014: £65m loss, 2013: £684m loss) on financial liabilities designated at fair value.

2015

Net trading income increased 9% to £3,623m, primarily reflecting a £396m favourable variance in own credit due to widening of credit spreads on Barclays’ issued debt. Trading income decreased by £104m, mainly driven by the continued disposal and running down of certain businesses and fair value movements on the ESHLA portfolio within Non-Core, and depreciation of ZAR against GBP. This was partially offset by increases in various Investment Bank businesses driven by higher volatility and trading activity during the year.

2014

Net trading income decreased 49% to £3,331m, primarily reflecting a £2,541m decrease in trading income, as lower volatility and subdued trading activity combined with tighter spreads reduced income across a number of businesses. Disposals and running down of certain Non-Core businesses and the £935m fair value reduction on the ESHLA portfolio (see Note 18 for further details) also contributed to the lower income. This was partially offset by a £254m favourable variance in own credit gains/losses.

222  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


6 Net investment income

 

 

Accounting for net investment income

Dividends are recognised when the right to receive the dividend has been established. Other accounting policies relating to net investment income are set out in Note 16 Available for sale financial assets and Note 14 Financial assets designated at fair value.

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
 Net gain from disposal of available for sale investments     374       620       145  
 Dividend income     8       9       14  
 Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value     238       233       203  
 Other investment income     518       466       318  
 Net investment income     1,138       1,328       680  

2015

Net investment income decreased by £190m to £1,138m. This was largely driven by lower gainsare set out in Note 14 and fewer disposals of available for sale investments due to unfavourable market conditions. During the year, a gain of £496m (2014: £461m) was recognised in other investment income due to the final and full legal settlement in respect of US Lehman acquisition assets.Note 16.

                                                               
    

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

   

                2015

£m

 
Net gain from disposal of available for sale investments   298    912    385 
Dividend income   48    8    8 
Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value   338    158    193 
Other investment income   177    246    511 
Net investment income   861    1,324    1,097 

2014

Net investment income increased by £648m to £1,328m. This was largely driven by an increase in disposals of available for sale investments due to favourable market conditions and increases in other investment income as a result of greater certainty regarding the recoverability of certain assets not yet received from the 2008 US Lehman acquisition (2014: £461m gain; 2013: £259m gain).

7 Credit impairment charges and other provisions

 

Accounting for the impairment of financial assets

 

Accounting for the impairment of financial assets    

Loans and other assets held at amortised cost

In accordance with IAS 39, the Group assesses at each balance sheet date whether there is objective evidence that loan assets or available for sale financial investments (debt or equity) will not be recovered in full and, wherever necessary, recognises an impairment loss in the income statement.

An impairment loss is recognised if there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of events that have occurred and these have adversely impacted the estimated future cash flows from the assets. These events include:

 

§
becoming aware of significant financial difficulty of the issuer or obligor

obligor;

 

§
a breach of contract, such as a default or delinquency in interest or principal payments

payments;

 

§
the Group, for economic or legal reasons relating to the borrower’s financial difficulty, grants a concession that it would not otherwise consider

consider;

 

§
it becomes probable that the borrower will enter bankruptcy or other financial reorganisation

reorganisation;

 

§
the disappearance of an active market for that financial asset because of financial difficulties

difficulties; and

 

§
observable data at a portfolio level indicating that there is a measurable decrease in the estimated future cash flows, although the decrease cannot yet be ascribed to individual financial assets in the portfolio – such as adverse changes in the payment status of borrowers in the portfolio or national or local economic conditions that correlate with defaults on the assets in the portfolio.

Impairment assessments are conducted individually for significant assets, which comprise all wholesale customer loans and larger retail business loans and collectively for smaller loans and for portfolio level risks, such as country or sectoral risks. For the purposes of the assessment, loans with similar credit risk characteristics are grouped together – generally on the basis of their product type, industry, geographical location, collateral type, past due status and other factors relevant to the evaluation of expected future cash flows.

The impairment assessment includes estimating the expected future cash flows from the asset or the group of assets, which are then discounted using the original effective interest rate calculated for the asset. If this is lower than the carrying value of the asset or the portfolio, an impairment allowance is raised.

If, in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases, and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed by adjusting the allowance account. The amount of the reversal is recognised in the income statement.

Following impairment, interest income continues to be recognised at the original effective interest rate on the restated carrying amount, representing the unwind of the discount of the expected cash flows, including the principal due on non-accrual loans.

Uncollectable loans are written off against the related allowance for loan impairment on completion of the Group’s internal processes and all recoverable amounts have been collected. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to the income statement.

Impairment assessments are conducted individually for significant assets, which comprise all wholesale customer loans and larger retail business loans, and collectively for smaller loans and for portfolio level risks, such as country or sectoral risks. For the purposes of the assessment, loans with similar credit risk characteristics are grouped together – generally on the basis of their product type, industry, geographical location, collateral type, past due status and other factors relevant to the evaluation of expected future cash flows.

The impairment assessment includes estimating the expected future cash flows from the asset or the group of assets, which are then discounted using the original effective interest rate calculated for the asset. If this is lower than the carrying value of the asset or the portfolio, an impairment allowance is raised.

If, in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases, and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised, the previously recognised impairment loss is reversed by adjusting the allowance account. The amount of the reversal is recognised in the income statement.

Following impairment, interest income continues to be recognised at the original effective interest rate on the restated carrying amount, representing the unwind of the discount of the expected cash flows, including the principal due onnon-accrual loans.

Uncollectable loans are written off against the related allowance for loan impairment on completion of the Group’s internal processes when all reasonably expected recoverable amounts have been collected. Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are credited to the income statement.

 

204    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  223


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

    

 

7 Credit impairment charges and other provisionscontinued

 

 

Available for sale (AFS) financial assets

Impairment of available for sale debt instruments

Debt instruments are assessed for impairment in the same way as loans. If impairment is deemed to have occurred, the cumulative decline in the fair value of the instrument that has previously been recognised in the AFS reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement. This may be reversed if there is evidence that the circumstances of the issuer have improved.

Impairment of available for sale equity instruments

Where there has been a prolonged or significant decline in the fair value of an equity instrument below its acquisition cost, it is deemed to be impaired. The cumulative net loss that has been previously recognised directly in the AFS reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement.

Increases in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised directly in other comprehensive income. Further declines in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised in the income statement.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The calculation of impairment involves the use of judgement, based on the Group’s experience of managing credit risk.

Within the retail and small businesses portfolios, which comprise large numbers of small homogenous assets with similar risk characteristics where credit scoring techniques are generally used, statistical techniques are used to calculate impairment allowances on a portfolio basis, based on historical recovery rates and assumed emergence periods. These statistical analyses use as primary inputs the extent to which accounts in the portfolio are in arrears and historical information on the eventual losses encountered from such delinquent portfolios. There are many such models in use, each tailored to a product, line of business or customer category. Judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to use when the models are developed or revised. The impairment allowance reflected in the financial statements for these portfolios is therefore considered to be reasonable and supportable. The impairment charge reflected in the income statement for retail portfolios is £1,808m (2014: £1,844m, 2013: £2,161m) and amounts to 86% (2014: 84%, 2013: 71%) of the total impairment charge on loans and advances.

For individually significant assets, impairment allowances are calculated on an individual basis and all relevant considerations that have a bearing on the expected future cash flows are taken into account (for example, the business prospects for the customer, the realisable value of collateral, the Group’s position relative to other claimants, the reliability of customer information and the likely cost and duration of the work-out process). The level of the impairment allowance is the difference between the value of the discounted expected future cash flows (discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate), and its carrying amount. Subjective judgements are made in the calculation of future cash flows. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or as work-out strategies evolve, resulting in frequent revisions to the impairment allowance as individual decisions are taken. Changes in these estimates would result in a change in the allowances and have a direct impact on the impairment charge. The impairment charge reflected in the financial statements in relation to wholesale portfolios is £289m (2014: £360m, 2013: £901m) and amounts to 14% (2014: 16%, 2013: 29%) of the total impairment charge on loans and advances. Further information on impairment allowances and related credit information is set out within the Risk review.

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
 New and increased impairment allowances     3,056       3,230       3,929  
 Releases     (547     (809     (683
 Recoveries     (400     (221     (201
 Impairment charges on loans and advances     2,109       2,200       3,045  
 Provision (releases)/charges for undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provided     (12     4       17  
 Loan impairment     2,097       2,204       3,062  
 Available for sale investment     17       (31     1  
 Reverse repurchase agreements            (5     8  
 Credit impairment charges and other provisions     2,114       2,168       3,071  

2015

Loan impairment fell 5% to £2,097m, reflecting lower impairment in PCB and Non-Core, partially offset by higher chargesthe same way as loans. If impairment is deemed to have occurred, the cumulative decline in the Investment Bankfair value of the instrument that has previously been recognised in the AFS reserve is removed from reserves and Barclaycard.recognised in the income statement. This may be reversed if there is evidence that the circumstances of the issuer have improved.

2014Impairment of available for sale equity instruments

LoanWhere there has been a prolonged or significant decline in the fair value of an equity instrument below its acquisition cost, it is deemed to be impaired. The cumulative net loss that has been previously recognised directly in the AFS reserve is removed from reserves and recognised in the income statement.

Increases in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment fell 28%are recognised directly in other comprehensive income. Further declines in the fair value of equity instruments after impairment are recognised in the income statement.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The calculation of impairment involves the use of judgement based on the Group’s experience of managing credit risk.

Within the retail and small businesses portfolios, which comprise large numbers of small homogeneous assets with similar risk characteristics where credit scoring techniques are generally used, statistical techniques are used to £2,204m, reflecting lowercalculate impairment allowances on a portfolio basis, based on historical recovery rates and assumed emergence periods. These statistical analyses employ as primary inputs, the extent to which accounts in Non-Core, PCB,the portfolio are in arrears, and Africa Banking partially offset by higher charges in Barclaycard.

224  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


8 Operating expenses

Accounting for staff costs

The Group applies IAS 19Employee benefits in its accounting for most of the components of staff costs.

Short-term employee benefits – salaries, accrued performance costs and social security are recognised over the period in which the employees provide the services to which the payments relate.

Performance costs – recognised to the extent that the Group has a present obligation to its employees that can be measured reliably and are recognised over the period of service that employees are required to work to qualify for the services.

Deferred cash bonus awards and deferred share bonus awards are made to employees to incentivise performance over the vesting period. To receive payment under an award, employees must provide service over the vesting period, typically three years from the grant date. The period over which the expense for deferred cash and share bonus awards is recognised is based upon the common understanding between the employee and the Group and the terms and conditions of the award. The Group considers that it is appropriate to recognise the awards over the period from the date of grant to the date that the awards vest as this is the period over which the employees understand that they must provide service in order to receive awards. The table on page 91 details the relevant award dates, payment dates and the period in which the income statement charge arises for bonuses. No expense has been recognised in 2015 for the deferred bonuses that will be granted in March 2016, as they are dependent upon future performance rather than performance during 2015.

The accounting policies for share based payments, and pensions and other post retirement benefits are included in Note 34 and Note 35 respectively.

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Infrastructure costs            
 Property and equipment     1,353       1,570       1,610  
 Depreciation of property, plant and equipment     554       585       647  
 Operating lease rentals     500       594       645  
 Amortisation of intangible assets     617       522       480  
 Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets     153       172       149  
 Gain on property disposals     3                
 Total infrastructure costs     3,180       3,443       3,531  
 Administration and general costs            
 Consultancy, legal and professional fees     1,191       1,104       1,253  
 Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications     760       842       869  
 Marketing, advertising and sponsorship     536       558       583  
 Travel and accommodation     218       213       307  
 UK bank levy     476       462       504  
 Goodwill impairment     102              79  
 Other administration and general expenses     245       442       518  
 Total administration and general costs     3,528       3,621       4,113  
 Recurring staff cost     10,389       11,005       12,155  
 Gains on retirement benefits     (429              
 Staff costs     9,960       11,005       12,155  
 Provision for UK customer redress     2,772       1,110       2,000  
 Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange     1,237       1,250       173  
 Operating expenses     20,677       20,429       21,972  

Forhistorical information on staff costs, referthe eventual losses encountered from such delinquent portfolios. There are many such models in use, each tailored to pages 57a product, line of business or customer category. Judgement and knowledge is needed in selecting the statistical methods to 58use when the models are developed or revised. The impairment allowance reflected in the financial statements for these portfolios is therefore considered to be reasonable and supportable. The impairment charge reflected in the income statement for retail portfolios is £2,095m (2016: £2,053m; 2015: £1,535m) and amounts to 90% (2016: 87%; 2015: 88%) of the Remuneration Report.total impairment charge on loans and advances.

2015

Operating expensesFor individually significant assets, impairment allowances are calculated on an individual basis and all relevant considerations that have increased by 1%a bearing on the expected future cash flows are taken into account (for example, the business prospects for the customer, the realisable value of collateral, the Group’s position relative to £20,677m (2014: £20,429m) attributable to an increaseother claimants, the reliability of customer information and the likely cost and duration of thework-out process). The level of the impairment allowance is the difference between the value of the discounted expected future cash flows (discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate), and its carrying amount. Subjective judgements are made in provisions for UK customer redress including PPI and an increasethe calculation of future cash flows. Furthermore, judgements change with time as new information becomes available or aswork-out strategies evolve, resulting in impairment of goodwill partially offset by a decrease in staff costs (includes a gain on Retirement benefits, refer to Note 35 of £429m) and infrastructure costs reflecting savings from strategic cost programmes.

2014

Operating expenses have reduced by 7% to £20,429m, primarily driven by savings from strategic cost programmes, including a 5% reduction in headcount and currency movements, lower provisions for UK customer redress including PPI, reduced IT and infrastructure spend and non-occurrence of various provisions raised last year. This was partially offset by the charge of £1,250m (2013: £173m) for ongoing investigations and litigation relating to Foreign Exchange.

The impact of strategic cost programmes have driven savings across infrastructure and administration costs. Staff costs have decreased by 9% to £11,005m, reflecting a 5% net reduction in headcount and reductions in incentive awards granted.

9 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

During the year, the loss on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures was £637m (2014: loss of £471m, 2013: gain of £6m), principally relatingfrequent revisions to the saleimpairment allowance as individual decisions are taken. Changes in these estimates would result in a change in the allowances and have a direct impact on the impairment charge. The impairment charge reflected in the financial statements in relation to wholesale portfolios is £238m (2016: £299m; 2015: £209m) and amounts to 10% (2016: 13%; 2015: 12%) of Spanish, Portuguesethe total impairment charge on loans and Italian businesses. Please refer to Note 44 Non-current assets held for saleadvances. Further information on impairment allowances and associated liabilities.related credit information is set out within the Risk review on page 114.

    

        2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

  

            2015

£m

 
New and increased impairment allowances   3,187   3,259   2,641 
Releases   (533  (551  (535
Recoveries   (334  (365  (350
Impairment charges on loans and advances   2,320   2,343   1,756 
Provision charges/(releases) for undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees provided   13   9   (12
Loan impairment   2,333   2,352   1,744 
Available for sale investment   3   21   18 
Reverse repurchase agreements          
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   2,336   2,373   1,762 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  225    205


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

    

    

10 Tax8 Operating expenses

Accounting for staff costs

The Group applies IAS 19Employee benefits in its accounting for most of the components of staff costs.

Short-term employee benefits – salaries, accrued performance costs and social security are recognised over the period in which the employees provide the services to which the payments relate.

Performance costs – recognised to the extent that the Group has a present obligation to its employees that can be measured reliably and are recognised over the period of service that employees are required to work to qualify for the payments.

Deferred cash and share awards are made to employees to incentivise performance over the period employees provide services. To receive payment under an award, employees must provide service over the vesting period. The period over which the expense for deferred cash and share awards is recognised is based upon the period employees consider their services contribute to the awards. For past awards, the Group considers that it is appropriate to recognise the awards over the period from the date of grant to the date that the awards vest. In relation to awards granted from 2017, the Group, taking into account the changing employee understanding surrounding those awards, considered it appropriate for expense to be recognised over the vesting period including the financial year prior to the grant date.

The accounting policies for share-based payments, and pensions and other post-retirement benefits are included in Note 34 and Note 35 respectively.

    

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

   

            2015

£m

 
Infrastructure costs      
Property and equipment   1,363    1,180    1,082 
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment   446    492    475 
Operating lease rentals   342    561    411 
Amortisation of intangible assets   715    670    570 
Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets   80    95    150 
(Gain)/loss on property disposals   3        3 
Total infrastructure costs   2,949    2,998    2,691 
Administration and general costs      
Consultancy, legal and professional fees   1,127    1,105    1,078 
Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications   630    644    678 
Marketing, advertising and sponsorship   433    435    451 
Travel and accommodation   150    136    188 
UK bank levy   365    410    425 
Goodwill impairment           102 
Other administration and general expenses   542    187    61 
Total administration and general costs   3,247    2,917    2,983 
Staff costs   8,560    9,423    8,853 
Provision for UK customer redress   700    1,000    2,772 
Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange           1,237 
Operating expenses   15,456    16,338    18,536 

9 Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

During the year, the profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures was £187m (2016: profit of £420m; 2015: loss of £637m), principally relating to the sale of VocaLink and Barclays Wealth Services Japan. Please refer to Note 43 for further detail.

 

Accounting for income taxes

206    Barclays applies IAS 12Income Taxes in accounting for taxesPLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on income. Income tax payable on taxable profits (Current Tax) is recognised as an expense in the period in which the profits arise. Withholding taxes are also treated as income taxes. Income tax recoverable on tax allowable losses is recognised as a current tax asset only to the extent that it is regarded as recoverable by offset against taxable profits arising in the current or prior period. Current tax is measured using tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.Form 20-F

Deferred tax is provided in full, using the liability method, on temporary differences arising from the differences between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the consolidated financial statements. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and legislation enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date which are expected to apply when the deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset when there is both a legal right to set-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.


    

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

 Current tax charge          
 Current year     1,901     1,421       1,997  
 Adjustment for prior years     (183   (19     156  
      1,718     1,402       2,153  
 Deferred tax charge/(credit)          
 Current year     (346   75       (68
 Adjustment for prior years     78     (66     (514
      (268   9       (582
 Tax charge     1,450     1,411       1,571  

10 Tax

Accounting for income taxes

Barclays applies IAS 12Income Taxes in accounting for taxes on income. Income tax payable on taxable profits (Current tax) is recognised as an expense in the periods in which the profits arise. Withholding taxes are also treated as income taxes. Income tax recoverable on tax allowable losses is recognised as a current tax asset only to the extent that it is regarded as recoverable by offset against taxable profits arising in the current or prior periods. Current tax is measured using tax rates and tax laws that have been enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date.

Deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profit will be available against which the deductible temporary differences, and the carry forward of unused tax credits and unused tax losses can be utilised, except in certain circumstances where the deferred tax asset relating to each componentthe deductible temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of other comprehensive income can be foundan asset or liability in a transaction that is not a business combination and, at the time of the transaction, affects neither the accounting profit nor taxable profit or loss. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates and legislation enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date which are expected to apply when the deferred tax asset is realised or the deferred tax liability is settled. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are only offset when there is both a legal right toset-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

The Group considers an uncertain tax position to exist when it considers that ultimately, in the consolidated statementfuture, the amount of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Otherprofit subject to tax may be greater than the amount initially reflected in the Group’s tax returns. The Group accounts for provisions in respect of uncertain tax positions in two different ways.

A current tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax creditauthority of £21m (2014: £42m charge) principally relatingan uncertain tax position will alter the amount of cash tax due to, shareor from, a tax authority in the future. From recognition, the current tax provision is then measured at the amount the Group ultimately expects to pay the tax authority to resolve the position.

Deferred tax provisions are adjustments made to the carrying value of deferred tax assets in respect of uncertain tax positions. A deferred tax provision is recognised when it is considered probable that the outcome of a review by a tax authority of an uncertain tax position will result in a reduction in the carrying value of the deferred tax asset. From recognition of a provision, measurement of the underlying deferred tax asset is adjusted to take into account the expected impact of resolving the uncertain tax position on the loss or temporary difference giving rise to the deferred tax asset.

The approach taken to measurement takes account of whether the uncertain tax position is a discrete position that will be reviewed by the tax authority in isolation from any other position, or one of a number of issues which are expected to be reviewed together concurrently and resolved simultaneously with a tax authority. Barclays’ measurement of provisions is based payments.upon its best estimate of the additional profit that will become subject to tax. For a discrete position, consideration is given only to the merits of that position. Where a number of issues are expected to be reviewed and resolved together, Barclays will take into account not only the merits of its position in respect of each particular issue but also the overall level of provision relative to the aggregate of the uncertain tax positions across all the issues that are expected to be resolved at the same time. In addition, in assessing provision levels, it is assumed that tax authorities will review uncertain tax positions and that all facts will be fully and transparently disclosed.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

There are two key areas of judgement that impact the reported tax position. Firstly, the level of provisioning for uncertain tax positions; and secondly, the recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets.

The Group does not consider there to be a significant risk of a material adjustment to the carrying amount of current and deferred tax balances, including provisions for uncertain tax positions in the next financial year. The provisions for uncertain tax positions cover a diverse range of issues and reflect advice from external counsel where relevant. It should be noted that only a proportion of the total uncertain tax positions will be under audit at any point in time, and could therefore be subject to challenge by a tax authority over the next year.

Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on business profit forecasts. Detail on the recognition of deferred tax assets is provided in this note.

    

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

  

            2015

£m

 

Current tax charge/(credit)

    

Current year

   768   896   1,605 

Adjustments in respect of prior years

   55   (361  (188
    823   535   1,417 

Deferred tax charge/(credit)

    

Current year

   1,507   393   (346

Adjustments in respect of prior years

   (90  65   78 
    1,417   458   (268

Tax charge

   2,240   993   1,149 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    207


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

10 Taxcontinued

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to the Group’s profit before tax.

 

                                                      
      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2015

%

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

%

  

  

     

 

2013

£m

  

  

     

 

2013

%

  

  

Profit before tax from continuing operations

     2,073              2,256              2,868         

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25%

(2014: 21.50%, 2013: 23.25%)

     420       20.25       485       21.50       667       23.25  

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

     309       14.9       329       14.6       559       19.5  

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

     283       13.6                              

Non-UK profits at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     274       13.2       253       11.2       328       11.4  

Non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     261       12.6       387       17.2                

Non-deductible expenses including UK bank levy

     207       10.0       285       12.6       296       10.3  

Impact of change in tax rates

     158       7.6       9       0.4       (159     (5.5

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

     30       1.4       21       0.9       (13     (0.5

Non-deductible impairments and losses on disposal

     26       1.3       234       10.4                

Non-taxable gains and income

     (241     (11.6     (282     (12.5     (234     (8.2

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (105     (5.1     (85     (3.8     (358     (12.5

Changes in recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets

     (77     (3.7     (183     (8.1     409       14.3  

Other items

     (52     (2.5     40       1.8       137       4.8  

Non-UK losses at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     (43     (2.1     (82     (3.6     (61     (2.1

Tax charge

     1,450       69.9       1,411       62.5       1,571       54.8  
            2017
£m
  

        2017

%

          2016
£m
  

        2016

%

  

        2015

£m

  

        2015

%

 
Profit before tax from continuing operations   3,541       3,230       1,146     
Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 19.25% (2016: 20%; 2015: 20.25%)   682   19.3%   646   20.0%   232   20.3% 
Impact of profits/losses earned in territories with different statutory rates to the UK       
(weighted average tax rate is 29.4% (2016: 32.8%; 2015: 33.4%))   356   10.1%   415   12.8%   151   13.1% 
Recurring items:       
Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes   191   5.4%   277   8.6%   309   27.0% 
Non-deductible expenses   90   2.5%   114   3.5%   67   5.8% 
Impact of UK bank levy beingnon-deductible   70   2.0%   82   2.5%   96   8.4% 
Tax adjustments in respect of share-based payments   5   0.1%   34   1.1%   30   2.6% 
Non-taxable gains and income   (178  (5.0%  (199  (6.2%  (197  (17.2%
Changes in recognition of deferred tax and effect of unrecognised tax losses   (71  (2.0%  (178  (5.5%  (71  (6.2%
Impact of Barclays Bank PLC’s overseas branches being taxed both locally and in the       
UK   (61  (1.7%  (128  (4.0%  (35  (3.1%
Adjustments in respect of prior years   (35  (1.0%  (296  (9.2%  (110  (9.6%
Other items   128   3.6%   88   2.7%   144   12.6% 
Non-recurring items:       
Re-measurement of US deferred tax assets due to US tax rate reduction   1,177   33.2%             
Impact of the UK branch exemption election on US branch deferred tax assets   (276  (7.8%            
Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress   129   3.6%   203   6.3%   283   24.7% 
Non-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation   72   2.0%   48   1.5%   261   22.8% 
Non-taxable gains and income on divestments   (39  (1.1%  (180  (5.6%  (50  (4.4%
Non-deductible impairments and losses on divestments         67   2.1%   39   3.4% 
                          
Total tax charge   2,240   63.3%   993   30.7%   1,149   100.3% 

Factors driving the effective tax rate

The effective tax rate of 69.9% (2014: 62.5%63.3% is higher than the UK corporation tax rate of 19.25% primarily due to the impact of the Tax Cuts and Jobs Act (“US Tax Reform”) increased, enacted on 22 December 2017, which reduced the one-off US federal corporate income tax rate from 35% to 21%. As the previous year.rate reduction was enacted before the balance sheet date, this has resulted in a tax charge as a result of there-measurement of the Group’s US deferred tax assets in the 2017 period. This downwardre-measurement of the Group’s US deferred tax assets as a result of the rate reduction is mainly duepartially offset by the increase in the value of the US branch deferred tax assets as a result of Barclays Bank PLC making a tax election in the period to exclude the future profits and losses of its overseas branches from UK taxation.

In addition the effective tax rate is also affected by profits earned outside the UK being taxed at local statutory tax rates that are higher than the UK tax rate, provisions for UK customer redress, that were investigations and litigation beingnon-deductible in 2015 as a result of changes introduced by the for tax purposes,non-creditable taxes andnon-deductible expenses including UK summer Budget, and the impact of changes to tax rates. The changes to tax rates in the period that had an adverse impact on the 2015 tax charge were the reduction of the local New York tax rate and the increase of the UK tax rate, specifically through the introduction of the new corporation tax surcharge that applies to banks.bank levy. These tax rate changes resulted in the carrying value of US deferred tax assets being reduced and are further explained later in Note 10.

The effective tax rate of 69.9% on statutory profit before tax is significantly higher thanfactors, which have each increased the effective tax rate, on adjusted profit before tax. For further detailsare partially offset by the impact ofnon-taxable gains and income in the period.

The Group’s future tax charge will be sensitive to the geographic mix of profits earned and the tax rates in force in the jurisdictions that we operate in. In the UK, legislation to reduce the corporation tax rate to 17% from 1 April 2020 has been enacted.

The reduction of the US federal corporate income tax rate to 21% from 1 January 2018 is expected to have a positive impact on the adjusted effective tax rate, please referreturns generated by the Group’s US business. The ultimate impact however, is subject to page 187any effect of the financial review.Base Erosion Anti-abuse Tax (“BEAT”), which was introduced by US Tax Reform and presented as an anti-avoidance provision, but is capable of having broad application to companies making payments to foreign affiliates. The provisions introducing the BEAT are complex and there are currently uncertainties surrounding their practical and technical application. The Group is currently considering any future impact of the BEAT which may reduce the benefit of the reduction in the US federal corporate income tax rate.

Tax in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income

The tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax charge of £5m (2016: £21m credit) relating to share-based payments.

Tax in respect of discontinued operation

Tax relating to the discontinued operation can be found in the BAGL disposal group income statement (refer to Note 43). The tax charge of £154m (2016: £306m charge) relates entirely to the profit from the ordinary activities of the discontinued operation.

 

226  |  208    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

 

10 Taxcontinued

Current tax assets and liabilities

Movements on current tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

  

            2017

£m

 

            2016

£m

 

Assets

     334       219     561   415 

Liabilities

     (1,021     (1,042   (737  (903

As at 1 January

     (687     (823   (176  (488

Income statement

     (1,718     (1,402
Income statement from continuing operations   (823  (535

Other comprehensive income

     6       (26   93   23 

Corporate income tax paid

     1,670       1,552     708   780 

Other movements

     241       12     94   44 
     (488     (687   (104  (176

Assets

     415       334     482   561 

Liabilities

     (903     (1,021   (586  (737

As at 31 December

     (488     (687   (104  (176

Deferred tax assets and liabilities

        

Deferred tax assets and liabilities

 

 

The deferred tax amounts on the balance sheet were as follows:

        

The deferred tax amounts on the balance sheet were as follows:

 

 
     

 

2015

£m

  

  

     
 
2014
£m
  
  
  

2017

£m

 

2016

£m

 

Barclays Group US Inc (BGUS) – US tax group

     1,903       1,588  

Barclays Bank PLC (US Branch) – US tax group

     1,569       1,591  

Barclays PLC – UK tax group

     411       461  
Intermediate Holding Company (“IHC Tax Group”)   1,413   2,207 
Barclays Bank PLC (“US Branch Tax Group”)   1,234   1,766 
Barclays PLC - UK tax group   492   575 

Other

     612       490     318   321 

Deferred tax asset

     4,495       4,130     3,457   4,869 

Deferred tax liability

     (122     (262   (44  (29

Net deferred tax

     4,373       3,868     3,413   4,840 

US deferred tax assets in BGUSthe IHC and the US Branch Tax Groups

The deferred tax asset in BGUSthe IHC Tax Group of £1,903m (2014: £1,588m)£1,413m (2016: £2,207m) includes £449m (2014: £348m)£286m (2016: £321m) relating to tax losses and the deferred tax asset in the US Branch Tax Group of £1,569m (2014: £1,591m)£1,234m (2016: £1,766m) includes £244m (2014: £479m)£283m (2016: £142m) relating to tax losses. The deferred tax assets of the Group’s US business have beenre-measured due to the reduction in the US federal corporate income tax rate enacted in the year. No account has been taken of the impact of any potential future BEAT liabilities in measuring the US deferred tax assets and liabilities and any future BEAT liabilities would be accounted for in the period they arise. Under US tax rules, losses occurring prior to 1 January 2018 can be carried forward and offset against profits for a period of 20 years. The losses first arose in 2011 in BGUSthe IHC Tax Group and 2008 in the US Branch Tax Group and therefore any unused amounts may begin to expire in 2031 and 2028 respectively. The remaining US deferred tax assets relate primarily to temporary differences for which there is no time limit on recovery.

The valuation of the Group’s US deferred tax assets was adjusted downwards in 2015 as a result of bothfor the reduction in the local New York rate of tax, which affected the deferred tax asset in both BGUSIHC and the US Branch and the introduction of the new UK corporationTax Groups’ tax surcharge, which affected the deferred tax asset in the US Branch. The US Branch deferred tax asset is stated net of a measurement for UK tax because Barclays Bank PLC is subject to UK tax on the profits of its non-UK branches.

The deferred tax asset for the BGUS tax loss islosses are currently projected to be fully utilised in 2017 and the deferred tax asset forby 2019.

In prior periods the US Branch lossdeferred tax assets have been measured as the difference between the UK and US tax rates to take into account UK taxation expected to arise on the profits of the US Branch. During the period, Barclays Bank PLC made a UK tax election that causes the future profits or losses of the Company’s overseas branches to be fully utilisedexcluded from the charge to UK tax and therefore subject to tax only in 2018.the applicable overseas jurisdiction. The deferred tax assets held by the US Branch of Barclays Bank PLC have beenre-measured to the US tax rate as a result of this election.

UK tax group deferred tax asset

The deferred tax asset in the UK tax group of £411m (2014: £461m)£492m (2016: £575m) relates entirely to temporary differences (2014: £245m related to tax losses). Based on profit forecasts, it is probable that there will be sufficient future taxable profits available against which the temporary differences will be utilised.differences.

Other deferred tax assets

The deferred tax asset of £612m (2014: £490m)£318m (2016: £321m) in other entities within the Group includes £209m (2014: £243m)£27m (2016: £40m) relating to tax losses carried forward. These deferred tax assets relate to a number of different territories and their recognition is based on profit forecasts or local country lawslaw which indicate that it is probable that the losses and temporary differences will be utilised.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    209


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

10 Taxcontinued

Of the deferred tax asset of £612m (2014: £490m)£318m (2016: £321m), an amount of £106m (2014: £140m)£218m (2016: £267m) relates to entities which have suffered a loss in either the current or prior year. This has been taken into account in reaching the above conclusion that these deferred tax assets will be fully recovered in the future.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  227


Notes to the financial statements

Performance/return

10 Taxcontinued

The table below shows movements on deferred tax assets and liabilities during the year. The amounts are different from those disclosed on the balance sheet and in the preceding table as they are presented before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right toset-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

 

   
 
 
 
Fixed asset
timing
differences
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Available
for sale
investments
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Cash flow
hedges
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Retirement
benefit
obligations
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Loan
impairment
allowance
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Other
provisions
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Tax losses
carried
forward
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 

 
 
 

Share based
payments

and deferred
compensation
£m

  
  

  
  
  

   
 
Other
£m
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

  Fixed asset
timing
differences
£m
 

Available
for sale

investments
£m

 Cash flow
hedges
£m
 Retirement
benefit
obligations
£m
 Loan
impairment
allowance
£m
 Other
provisions
£m
 Tax losses
carried
forward
£m
 

Share-based
payments

and deferred
compensation
£m

 Other
£m
 

Total

£m

 

Assets

   1,542     18     5     321     176     233     1,315     729     951      5,290      1,801  183     91  151  251  503  732  2,013  5,725 

Liabilities

   (555   (35   (464                            (368)     (1,422)     (92 (141 (333                (319 (885

At 1 January 2015

   987     (17   (459   321     176     233     1,315     729     583      3,868   
At 1 January 2017   1,709  42  (333 91  151  251  503  732  1,694  4,840 

Income statement

   779     (13   1     (119   (14   21     (540   (126   279      268      (353       (322 (38 (69 131  (307 (459 (1,417

Other comprehensive income

        (14   221     (261             122     (10   (21)     37        (3 262  49           (22 22  308 

Other movements

   48     2     3     10     (5   7     5     30     100      200      (118    (4 16  (5 (25 (38 (19 (125 (318
   1,814     (42   (234   (49   157     261     902     623     941      4,373      1,238  39  (75 (166 108  157  596  384  1,132  3,413 

Assets

   2,008     28     5     95     157     261     902     623     1,511      5,590      1,266  200  1  52  108  157  596  384  1,362  4,126 

Liabilities

   (194   (70   (239   (144                       (570)     (1,217)     (28 (161 (76 (218             (230 (713

At 31 December 2015

   1,814     (42   (234   (49   157     261     902     623     941      4,373   
At 31 December 2017   1,238  39  (75 (166 108  157  596  384  1,132  3,413 
                                 

Assets

   1,525     53     5     490     376     360     1,235     762     1,078      5,884      2,008   28   5   95   157   261   902   623   1,511   5,590 

Liabilities

   (761   (61   (87   (9                       (532)     (1,450)     (194  (70  (239  (144              (570  (1,217

At 1 January 2014

   764     (8   (82   481     376     360     1,235     762     546      4,434   
At 1 January 2016   1,814   (42  (234  (49  157   261   902   623   941   4,373 

Income statement

   172     84     (1   (54   70     (87   4     (40   (157)     (9)     (358  9   (7  (8  52   17   (522  15   344   (458

Other comprehensive income

        (104   (380   (63                  (10   (5)     (562)        49   (61  132            20   (6  134 

Other movements

   51     11     4     (43   (270   (40   76     17     199           253   26   (31  16   (58  (27  123   74   415   791 
   987     (17   (459   321     176     233     1,315     729     583      3,868      1,709   42   (333  91   151   251   503   732   1,694   4,840 

Assets

   1,542     18     5     321     176     233     1,315     729     951      5,290      1,801   183      91   151   251   503   732   2,013   5,725 

Liabilities

   (555   (35   (464                            (368)     (1,422)     (92  (141  (333                 (319  (885

At 31 December 2014

   987     (17   (459   321     176     233     1,315     729     583      3,868   
At 31 December 2016   1,709   42   (333  91   151   251   503   732   1,694   4,840 

Other movements include the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates as well as deferred tax amounts relating to acquisitions, disposals and exchange gains and losses.transfers to held for sale.

The amount of deferred tax liability expected to be settled after more than 12 months is £675m (2014: £1,123m)£522m (2016: £273m). The amount of deferred tax assets expected to be recovered after more than 12 months is £4,838m (2014: £4,845m)£3,399m (2016: £5,066m). These amounts are before offsetting asset and liability balances where there is a legal right toset-off and an intention to settle on a net basis.

Unrecognised deferred tax

Tax losses and temporary differences

Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of gross deductible temporary differences of £51m (2014: £2,332m),£157m (2016: £64m) and gross tax losses of £13,456m (2014: £9,764m) which includes£17,919m (2016: £16,820m). The tax losses include capital losses of £3,838m (2014: £3,522m),£3,126m (2016: £3,138m) and unused tax credits of £452m (2014: £405m)£546m (2016: £514m). Of these tax losses, £389m (2014: £341m)£409m (2016: £394m) expire within five years, £13m (2014: £18m)£193m (2016: £57m) expire within six to ten years, £124m (2014: £812m)£2,016m (2016: £358m) expire within 11 to 20 years and £12,930m (2014: £8,593m)£15,301m (2016: £16,011m) can be carried forward indefinitely. Deferred tax assets have not been recognised in respect of these items because it is not probable that future taxable profits and gains will be available against which they can be utilised.

Group investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates

Deferred tax is not recognised in respect of the value of the Group’s investments in subsidiaries, branches and associates where the Group is able to control the timing of the reversal of the temporary differences and it is probable that such differences will not reverse in the foreseeable future. It is not practicable to determine theThe aggregate amount of income tax that would be payable were suchthese temporary differences for which deferred tax liabilities have not been recognised decreased in the period to reverse.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The Group is subject to corporate income taxes in numerous jurisdictions and£0.1bn (2016: £2bn) following the calculationreduction of the Group’s tax charge and worldwide provisions for corporate income taxes necessarily involves a degree of estimation and judgement. There are many transactions and calculations for which the ultimate tax treatment is uncertain and cannot be determined until resolution has been reached with the relevant tax authority. The Group has a number of open tax returns with various tax authorities with whom there is active dialogue. Liabilities relating to these open and judgemental matters are based on estimates of whether additional taxes will be due after taking into account external advice, where appropriate. Where the final tax outcome of these matters is different from the amounts provided, such differences will impact the tax chargeholding in a future period. There is no individual position currently subject to challenge by a tax authority that if resolved in an adverse manner would materially impact the Group’s financial position.

Deferred tax assets have been recognised based on business profit forecasts. Further detail on the recognition of deferred tax assets is provided in the deferred tax assets and liabilities section of this tax note.

BAGL during 2017.

 

228  |  210    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

 

11 Earnings per share

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent from continuing operations

  

   (394   (174   540  

Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity holders

  

   70     54       

Dilutive impact of convertible options

  

             1  

(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of parent from continuing operations including dilutive impact of convertible options

  

   (324   (120   541  
            
     

 

2015

million

  

  

   

 

2014

million

  

  

   

 

2013

million

  

  

Basic weighted average number of shares in issue

  

   16,687     16,329     14,308  

Number of potential ordinary shares

  

   367     296     360  

Diluted weighted average number of shares

  

   17,054     16,625     14,668  
            
    Basic earnings per share             Diluted earnings per sharea           
    

 

2015

p

  

  

   

 

2014

p

  

  

   

 

2013

p

  

  

   

 

2015

p

  

  

   

 

2014

p

  

  

   

 

2013

p

  

  

(Loss)/earnings per ordinary share from continuing operations

   (1.9)    (0.7   3.8     (1.9   (0.7   3.7  
11 Earnings per share                          
                 

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

  

                2015

£m

 
(Loss)/profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent in respect of continuing and discontinued operations   (1,922  1,623   (394
Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity instrument holders   174   128   70 
Total (loss)/profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent in respect of continuing and discontinued operations   (1,748  1,751   (324
Continuing operations    
Profit/(loss) attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent in respect of continuing operations   413   1,434   (696
Tax credit on profit after tax attributable to other equity instrument holders   174   128   70 
Profit/(loss) attributable to equity holders of the parent in respect of continuing operations   587   1,562   (626
Discontinued operation        
(Loss)/profit attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent in respect of discontinued operations   (2,335  189   302 
Dilutive impact of convertible options in respect of discontinued operations      (1   
(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of the parent in respect of discontinued operations including dilutive impact on convertible options   (2,335  188   302 
                          
(Loss)/profit attributable to equity holders of the parent in respect of continuing and discontinued operations including dilutive impact on convertible options   (1,748  1,750   (324
                            
                 2017
million
  2016
million
  

2015

million

 
Basic weighted average number of shares in issue     16,996   16,860   16,687 
Number of potential ordinary shares        288   184   367 
Diluted weighted average number of shares        17,284   17,044   17,054 
                            
   Basic earnings per share  Diluted earnings per share 
    

            2017

p

  

            2016

p

   

            2015

p

  

2017

p

  

2016

p

  

2015

p

 
(Loss)/earnings per ordinary share   (10.3  10.4    (1.9  (10.1  10.3   (1.9
Earnings/(loss) per ordinary share in respect of continuing operations   3.5   9.3    (3.7  3.4   9.2   (3.7
(Loss)/earnings per ordinary share in respect of discontinued operation   (13.8  1.1    1.8   (13.5  1.1   1.8 

The calculation of basic earnings per share is based on the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent and the basic weighted average number of shares excluding treasury shares held in employee benefit trusts or held for trading. When calculating the diluted earnings per share, the weighted average number of shares in issue is adjusted for the effects of all dilutive potential ordinary shares held in respect of Barclays PLC, totalling 367m (2014: 296m)288m (2016: 184m) shares. In addition, the profit attributable to equity holders of the parent is adjusted for the dilutive impact of the potential conversion of outstanding options held in respect of Barclays Africa Group Limited. The increase in the number of potential ordinary shares is mainly due to the widening of the spread between the average share price of £2.52 (2014: £2.39) being greater than£2.08 (2016: £1.74) and the average weighted strike price of £2.11 (2014: £2.15). During£1.41 (2016: £1.88) compared to the year, theprior year. The total number of share options grantedoutstanding, under employee share schemes considered to be potentially dilutive, was 553m (2014: 666m)534m (2016: 584m). The schemesThese options have strike prices ranging from £1.30£1.20 to £4.35.£2.28.

Of the total number of employee share options and share awards at 31 December 2015, 23m (2014: 24m)2017, 10m (2016: 93m) were anti-dilutive.

The 358m136m (2016: 173m) increase in the basic weighted average number of shares since 31 December 20142016 to 16,687m16,996m is primarily due to shares issued under employee share schemes and the Scrip Dividend Programme.

12 Dividends on ordinary shares

The Directors have approved a final dividend in respect of 20152017 of 3.5p2.0p per ordinary share of 25p each which will be paid on 505 April 20162018 to shareholders on the Share Register on 1102 March 2016. As at2018 resulting in a total dividend of 3.0p per share for the year. On 31 December 2015,2017, there were 16,805m17,060m ordinary shares in issue. The financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20152017 does not reflect this dividend, which will be accounted for in shareholders’ equity as an appropriation of retained profits in the year ending 31 December 2016.2018. The 20152017 financial statements include the 20152017 interim dividends of £503m (2014: £493m)£170m (2016: £169m) and final dividend declared in relation to 20142016 of £578m (2014: £564m)£339m (2016: £588m).

Note

aPotential ordinary shares shall be treated as dilutive when, and only when, their conversion to ordinary shares would increase loss per share.
Dividends are funded out of distributable reserves.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  229    211


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

    

The notes included in this section focus on assets and liabilities the Group holds and recognises at fair value. Fair value refers to the price that would be received to sell an asset or the price that would be paid to transfer a liability in an arm’s-length transaction with a willing counterparty, which may be an observable market price or, where there is no quoted price for the instrument, may be an estimate based on available market data. Detail regarding the Group’s approach to managing market risk can be found on pages 101 to 102.

 

13 Trading portfolio

 

 

Accounting for trading portfolioThe notes included in this section focus on assets and liabilities

In accordance with IAS 39, all assets the Group holds and liabilities held for trading purposes are heldrecognises at fair value. Fair value with gains and losses in the changes in fair value takenrefers to the income statementprice that would be received to sell an asset or the price that would be paid to transfer a liability in Net trading income (Note 5).anarm’s-length transaction with a willing counterparty, which may be an observable market price or, where there is no quoted price for the instrument, may be an estimate based on available market data. Detail regarding the Group’s approach to managing market risk can be found on pages 117 to 121.

 

13 Trading portfolio

              Trading portfolio assets     Trading portfolio liabilities  
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

  

   45,576     65,997     (24,985   (28,739

Equity securities

  

   29,055     44,576     (8,982   (16,022

Traded loans

  

   2,474     2,693            

Commodities

  

   243     1,451          (363

Trading portfolio assets/(liabilities)

  

   77,348     114,717     (33,967   (45,124

14 Financial assets designated at fair value

 

  

 

Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value

In accordance with IAS 39, financial assets may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement in Net trading income (Note 5) and Net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (Note 15 Derivative financial instruments).

 

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived for financial assets designated at fair value are described in Fair value of assets and liabilities (Note 18).

 

  

    

  

     

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Loans and advances

  

   17,913     20,198  

Debt securities

  

   1,383     4,448  

Equity securities

  

   6,197     6,306  

Reverse repurchase agreementsa

  

   49,513     5,236  

Customers’ assets held under investment contracts

  

   1,449     1,643  

Other financial assets

  

   375     469  

Financial assets designated at fair value

  

   76,830     38,300  

 

Credit risk of loans and advances designated at fair value and related credit derivatives

The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition together with the amount by which related credit derivatives mitigate this risk:

 

  

   

    
 
Maximum exposure as at
31 December
  
  
   
 
Changes in fair value
during the year ended
  
  
   
 
Cumulative changes in
fair value from inception
  
  
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Loans and advances designated at fair value, attributable to credit risk

   17,913     20,198     69     (112   (629   (828

Value mitigated by related credit derivatives

   417     359     26          42     18  

 

Accounting for trading portfolio assets and liabilities

In accordance with IAS 39, all assets and liabilities held for trading purposes are held at fair value with gains and losses in the changes in fair value taken to the income statement in net trading income (Note 5).

    Trading portfolio assets   Trading portfolio liabilities 
    

                2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

   

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

 
Debt securities and other eligible bills   51,200    38,789    (29,045  (26,842
Equity securities   59,338    38,329    (8,306  (7,831
Traded loans   3,140    2,975        
Commodities   82    147       (14
Trading portfolio assets/(liabilities)   113,760    80,240    (37,351  (34,687

14 Financial assets designated at fair value

Accounting for financial assets designated at fair value

In accordance with IAS 39, financial assets may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within net trading income (Note 5) and net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics described in Note 15.

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

The details on how the fair value amounts are derived for financial assets designated at fair value are described in Note 18.

    

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

 
Loans and advances   11,037    10,519 
Debt securities   15    70 
Equity securities   4,670    4,558 
Reverse repurchase agreements   100,040    63,162 
Customers’ assets held under investment contracts       37 
Other financial assets   519    262 
Financial assets designated at fair value   116,281    78,608 

Credit risk of loans and advances designated at fair value and related credit derivatives

The following table shows the maximum exposure to credit risk, the changes in fair value attributable to changes in credit risk, and the cumulative changes in fair value since initial recognition together with the amount by which related credit derivatives mitigate this risk:

    Maximum exposure as at
31 December
   Changes in fair value during
the year ended
  Cumulative changes in fair
value from inception
 
    

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

   

            2017

£m

   

            2016

£m

  

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

 
Loans and advances designated at fair value, attributable to credit risk   11,037    10,519    10    (42  2   (42
Value mitigated by related credit derivatives   256    339    1    (2  (12  (13

 

230  |  212    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

 

15 Derivative financial instruments

 

Accounting for derivatives

Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Group’s net interest income, net trading income, net fee and commission income and derivative assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet.

The Group applies IAS 39. All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or as liabilities when their fair value is negative. This includes terms included in a contract or other financial asset or liability (the host), which, had it been a stand-alone contract, would have met the definition of a derivative. These are separated from the host and accounted for in the same way as a derivative.

Hedge accounting

The Group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its interest and currency risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge interest rate, exchange rate, commodity, and equity exposures and exposures to certain indices such as house price indices and retail price indices related to non-trading positions. Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged.

 

Accounting for derivatives

Derivative instruments are contracts whose value is derived from one or more underlying financial instruments or indices defined in the contract. They include swaps, forward rate agreements, futures, options and combinations of these instruments and primarily affect the Group’s net interest income, net trading income and derivative assets and liabilities. Notional amounts of the contracts are not recorded on the balance sheet.

The Group applies IAS 39. All derivative instruments are held at fair value through profit or loss, except for derivatives that are in a designated cash flow or net investment hedge accounting relationship. Derivatives are classified as assets when their fair value is positive or as liabilities when their fair value is negative. This includes terms included in a contract or other financial asset or liability (the host), which, had it been a standalone contract, would have had met the definition of a derivative. If these are separated from the host i.e. when the economic characteristics of the embedded derivative are not closely related with those of the host contract and the combined instrument is not measured at fair value though profit or loss, then they are accounted for in the same way as derivatives.

Hedge accounting

The Group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its interest and currency risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge interest rate, exchange rate, commodity, and equity exposures and exposures to certain indices such as house price indices and retail price indices related tonon-trading positions. Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the Group applies fair value hedge accounting, cash flow hedge accounting, or hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation, as appropriate to the risks being hedged.

Fair value hedge accounting

Changes in fair value of derivatives that qualify and are designated as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. The fair value changes adjust the carrying value of the hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost.

If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the period to maturity of the previously designated hedge relationship using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the income statement.

Cash flow hedge accounting

For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement immediately.

When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Hedges of net investments

The Group’s net investments in foreign operations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of net investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Group’s investment in the operation.

Total derivatives

                              
   2015     2014  
  

 

 

 

Notional

 

  

      

 

 

 

Notional

 

  

    
   contract     Fair value     contract     Fair value  
   amount     Assets     Liabilities     amount     Assets     Liabilities  
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   29,437,102     326,772     (323,788   32,624,342     438,270     (438,623

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

   316,605     937     (464   268,448     1,639     (697

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

   29,753,707     327,709     (324,252   32,892,790     439,909     (439,320

The fair value changes adjust the carrying value of gross derivative assets decreased by 26% to £328bn, driven by decrease inthe hedged asset or liability held at amortised cost.

If hedge relationships no longer meet the criteria for hedge accounting, hedge accounting is discontinued. For fair value hedges of interest rate derivativesrisk, the fair value adjustment to the hedged item is amortised to the income statement over the period to maturity of £79bn due to net trade reduction and an increasethe previously designated hedge relationship using the effective interest method. If the hedged item is sold or repaid, the unamortised fair value adjustment is recognised immediately in the major interest rate forward curvesincome statement.

Cash flow hedge accounting

For qualifying cash flow hedges, the fair value gain or loss associated with the effective portion of the cash flow hedge is recognised initially in other comprehensive income, and then recycled to the income statement in the periods when the hedged item will affect profit or loss. Any ineffective portion of the gain or loss on the hedging instrument is recognised in the income statement immediately.

When a decreasehedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised when the hedged item is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was recognised in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement.

Hedges of net investments

The Group’s net investments in foreign exchangeoperations, including monetary items accounted for as part of the net investment, are hedged for foreign currency risks using both derivatives and foreign currency borrowings. Hedges of £19bn, materially reflecting trade maturities. Informationnet investments are accounted for similarly to cash flow hedges; the effective portion of the gain or loss on furtherthe hedging instrument is being recognised directly in other comprehensive income and the ineffective portion being recognised immediately in the income statement. The cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is recognised in the income statement on the disposal or partial disposal of the foreign operation, or other reductions in the Group’s investment in the operation.

Total derivatives  2017  2016 
   Notional          Notional         
   contract   Fair value  contract   Fair value 
   amount   Assets   Liabilities  amount   Assets   Liabilities 
    £m   £m   £m  £m   £m   £m 
Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading   35,686,673    237,504    (237,236  36,185,820    345,624    (339,646
Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management   231,348    165    (1,109  336,524    1,002    (841
Derivative assets/(liabilities)   35,918,021    237,669    (238,345  36,522,344    346,626    (340,487

Further information on netting arrangements of derivative financial instruments is includedcan be found within Note 19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities.19.

Trading derivatives are managed within the Group’s market risk management policies, which are outlined on pages 101 and 102.117 to 121.

The Group’s exposure to credit risk arising from derivative contracts are outlined in the Credit Riskrisk section on page 130.

pages 96 to 116.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  231    213


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

 

15 Derivative financial instrumentscontinued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for trading are set out in the following table:

 

Derivatives held for trading

                              
   2015     2014  
    

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

   Fair value     

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

     
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
     
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Foreign exchange derivatives

            

Forward foreign exchange

   1,277,863     17,613     (19,433   1,684,832     31,883     (34,611

Currency swaps

   1,006,640     30,703     (32,449   1,109,795     32,209     (33,919

OTC options bought and sold

   924,832     6,436     (6,771   895,226     10,267     (10,665

OTC derivatives

   3,209,335     54,752     (58,653   3,689,853     74,359     (79,195

Foreign exchange derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   9,308     33     (44   11,382     56     (70

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   6,071     13     (12   57,623     18     (16

Foreign exchange derivatives

   3,224,714     54,798     (58,709   3,758,858     74,433     (79,281

Interest rate derivatives

            

Interest rate swaps

   4,600,472     159,040     (148,475   5,779,015     209,962     (200,096

Forward rate agreements

   371,510     440     (390   467,812     794     (722

OTC options bought and sold

   2,634,527     48,995     (49,001   3,083,200     67,039     (67,575

OTC derivatives

   7,606,509     208,475     (197,866   9,330,027     277,795     (268,393

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   11,407,745     21,871     (22,603   15,030,090     30,166     (31,152

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   5,470,872     281     (263   2,210,602     382     (336

Interest rate derivatives

   24,485,126     230,627     (220,732   26,570,719     308,343     (299,881

Credit derivatives

            

OTC swaps

   671,389     14,087     (12,693   896,386     18,864     (17,825

Credit derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   277,257     4,094     (3,931   287,577     4,643     (4,542

Credit derivatives

   948,646     18,181     (16,624   1,183,963     23,507     (22,367

Equity and stock index derivatives

            

OTC options bought and sold

   53,645     5,507     (7,746   67,151     6,461     (9,517

Equity swaps and forwards

   98,264     1,794     (3,855   102,663     1,823     (3,532

OTC derivatives

   151,909     7,301     (11,601   169,814     8,284     (13,049

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   429,592     6,498     (6,851   490,960     6,560     (6,542

Equity and stock index derivatives

   581,501     13,799     (18,452   660,774     14,844     (19,591

Commodity derivatives

            

OTC options bought and sold

   21,959     1,402     (1,408   38,196     1,592     (1,227

Commodity swaps and forwards

   29,161     3,645     (3,397   61,639     7,985     (8,175)  

OTC derivatives

   51,120     5,047     (4,805   99,835     9,577     (9,402

Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold

   145,995     4,320     (4,466   350,193     7,566     (8,101

Commodity derivatives

   197,115     9,367     (9,271   450,028     17,143     (17,503

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   29,437,102     326,772     (323,788   32,624,342     438,270     (438,623

Total OTC derivatives held for trading

   11,690,262     289,662     (285,618   14,185,915     388,879     (387,864

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for trading

   11,694,310     25,998     (26,578   15,329,049     34,865     (35,764

Total exchange traded derivatives held for trading

   6,052,530     11,112     (11,592   3,109,378     14,526     (14,995

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   29,437,102     326,772     (323,788   32,624,342     438,270     (438,623

Derivatives held for trading  2017  2016 
   Notional          Notional         
   contract   Fair value  contract   Fair value 
   amount   Assets   Liabilities  amount   Assets   Liabilities 
    £m   £m   £m  £m   £m   £m 

Foreign exchange derivatives

           

Forward foreign exchange

   3,131,184    26,534    (26,177  2,308,922    32,442    (30,907

Currency swaps

   1,098,587    23,675    (22,003  1,086,552    40,083    (40,164
OTC options bought and sold   506,156    4,056    (4,665  772,031    6,338    (6,762

OTC derivatives

   4,735,927    54,265    (52,845  4,167,505    78,863    (77,833

Foreign exchange derivatives cleared by central counterparty

   59,618    607    (585  43,478    366    (388
Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold   24,266    30    (30  18,813    31    (27
Foreign exchange derivatives   4,819,811    54,902    (53,460  4,229,796    79,260    (78,248

Interest rate derivatives

           

Interest rate swaps

   5,680,977    121,560    (112,187  4,799,897    153,822    (143,059

Forward rate agreements

   268,277    87    (88  296,559    999    (968
OTC options bought and sold   2,384,453    27,235    (29,635  2,522,430    42,412    (43,373

OTC derivatives

   8,333,707    148,882    (141,910  7,618,886    197,233    (187,400

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterpartya

   13,215,545    3,675    (3,390  14,439,407    30,503    (31,528
Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold   7,644,560    362    (358  7,952,733    397    (370
Interest rate derivatives   29,193,812    152,919    (145,658  30,011,026    228,133    (219,298

Credit derivatives

           

OTC swaps

   411,160    7,595    (6,233  615,057    11,811    (10,513
Credit derivatives cleared by central counterparty   303,841    4,954    (5,319  332,743    4,462    (4,572
Credit derivatives   715,001    12,549    (11,552  947,800    16,273    (15,085

Equity and stock index derivatives

           

OTC options bought and sold

   58,456    5,262    (9,591  102,545    6,766    (8,837
Equity swaps and forwards   103,283    2,235    (5,478  105,120    2,253    (4,435

OTC derivatives

   161,739    7,497    (15,069  207,665    9,019    (13,272
Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold   632,662    7,201    (9,050  585,620    8,070    (8,600
Equity and stock index derivatives   794,401    14,698    (24,119  793,285    17,089    (21,872

Commodity derivatives

           

OTC options bought and sold

   4,465    32    (103  14,053    395    (461
Commodity swaps and forwards   12,755    662    (753  16,086    1,528    (1,821

OTC derivatives

   17,220    694    (856  30,139    1,923    (2,282
Exchange traded futures and options – bought and sold   146,428    1,742    (1,591  173,774    2,946    (2,861
Commodity derivatives   163,648    2,436    (2,447  203,913    4,869    (5,143
Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading   35,686,673    237,504    (237,236  36,185,820    345,624    (339,646

Total OTC derivatives held for trading

   13,659,753    218,933    (216,913  12,639,252    298,849    (291,300

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for trading

   13,579,004    9,236    (9,294  14,815,628    35,331    (36,488
Total exchange traded derivatives held for trading   8,447,916    9,335    (11,029  8,730,940    11,444    (11,858
Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading   35,686,673    237,504    (237,236  36,185,820    345,624    (339,646

 

232  |  214    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

 

15 Derivative financial instrumentscontinued

The fair values and notional amounts of derivative instruments held for risk management are set out in the following table:

 

Derivatives held for risk management

                       2017 2016 
  Notional         Notional         
     2015   2014    contract   Fair value  contract   Fair value 
      

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

   Fair value     

 
 

 

Notional

contract
amount

£m

  

  
  

  

  

 

 

 

Fair value

 

  

  amount   Assets   Liabilities amount   Assets   Liabilities 
   
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
   
 
Assets
£m
  
  
   
 
Liabilities
£m
  
  
  £m   £m   £m £m   £m   £m 

Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges

                         

Currency swaps

     1,357     133                                    1,357    453     

Interest rate swaps

     14,198     162     (115   19,218     223     (60   1,482    7    (3  5,965    154    (6

Forward foreign exchange

     759     5          930     17       

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

      147,072               82,550               122,103           181,541    62    (27

Derivatives designated as cash flow hedges

      163,386     300     (115   102,698     240     (60   123,585    7    (3  188,863    669    (33

Derivatives designated as fair value hedges

                         

Interest rate swaps

     13,798     637     (264   27,345     1,379     (590   7,345    117    (1,096  10,733    301    (744

Forward foreign exchange

     2,527          (32               

Interest rate derivatives cleared by central counterparty

      134,939               135,553               97,436           130,842         

Derivatives designated as fair value hedges

      151,264     637     (296   162,898     1,379     (590   104,781    117    (1,096  141,575    301    (744

Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments

                         

Forward foreign exchange

      1,955          (53   2,852     20     (47   2,982    41    (10  6,086    32    (64

Derivatives designated as hedges of net investments

      1,955          (53   2,852     20     (47   2,982    41    (10  6,086    32    (64

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

      316,605     937     (464   268,448     1,639     (697   231,348    165    (1,109  336,524    1,002    (841

Total OTC derivatives held for risk management

     34,594     937     (464   50,345     1,639     (697   11,809    165    (1,109  24,141    940    (814

Total derivatives cleared by central counterparty held for risk management

      282,011               218,103               219,539           312,383    62    (27

Derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

      316,605     937     (464   268,448     1,639     (697   231,348    165    (1,109  336,524    1,002    (841

The Group has hedged the following forecast cash flows, which primarily vary with interest rates. These cash flows are expected to impact the income statement in the following periods, excluding any hedge adjustments that may be applied:

  

      Up to     One to     Two to     Three to     Four to     More than  
  Total   one year     two years     three years     four years     five years     five years  
  £m   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

2015

              

Forecast receivable cash flows

       4,952   555     816     875     813     633     1,260  

Forecast payable cash flows

  872   769     35     31     22     11     4  

2014

              

Forecast receivable cash flows

  4,277   308     491     695     729     651     1,403  

Forecast payable cash flows

  972   178     770     10     7     4     3  
                     

Amounts recognised in net interest income

                     
             2015     2014  
                  £m     £m  

Gains/(losses) on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk

           552     2,610  

(Losses)/gains on the hedging instruments

                  (485   (2,797

Fair value ineffectiveness

             67     (187

Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness

             16     41  

Net investment hedging ineffectiveness

                  (2     

The Group has hedged the following forecast cash flows, which primarily vary with interest rates. These cash flows are expected to impact the income statement in the following periods, excluding any hedge adjustments that may be applied:

         

Up to

   One to   Two to   Three to   Four to   More than 
   Total   one year   two years   three years   four years   five years   five years 
    £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
2017              
Forecast receivable cash flows   2,671    484    584    561    416    305    321 
Forecast payable cash flows                            
2016              
Forecast receivable cash flows   2,616    455    531    511    411    327    381 
Forecast payable cash flows   52    15    16    7    6    5    3 

The maximum length of time over which the Group hedges exposure to the variability in future cash flows for forecast transactions, excluding those forecast transactions related to the payment of variable interest on existing financial instruments is 10 years (2016: 10 years).

Amounts recognised in net interest income               2017
£m
  

            2016

£m

 
Gains on the hedged items attributable to the hedged risk   550   1,787 
Losses on the hedging instruments   (460  (1,741
Fair value ineffectiveness   90   46 
Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness   (135  28 
Net investment hedging ineffectiveness   2   (3

Gains and losses transferred from the cash flow hedging reserve to the income statement included a £36m gain (2014: £52m£nil (2016: £17m gain) transferred to interest income; a £267m£632m gain (2014: £778m(2016: £491m gain) to interest expense; a £4m loss (2014: £15m loss) to net trading income; a£nil (2016: £17m gain (2014: nil)gain) to administration and general expenses; and a £69m loss (2014: £78m£nil (2016: £75m loss) to taxation.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  233    215


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

    

 

16 Financial investments

Accounting for financial investments

Available for sale financial assets are held at fair value with gains and losses being included in other comprehensive income. The Group uses this classification for assets that are not derivatives and are not held for trading purposes or otherwise designated at fair value through profit or loss, or at amortised cost. Dividends and interest (calculated using the effective interest method) are recognised in the income statement in net interest income (Note 3) or, net investment income (Note 6). On disposal, the cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is also included in net investment income.

Held to maturity assets are held at amortised cost. The Group uses this classification when there is an intent and ability to hold the asset to maturity. Interest on the investments are recognised in the income statement within net interest income (Note 3).

 

    2017
£m
   2016
£m
 
Available for sale debt securities and other eligible bills   52,020    57,703 
Available for sale equity securities   1,787    438 
Held to maturity debt securities   5,109    5,176 
Financial investments   58,916    63,317 

Accounting for available for sale financial assets

Available for sale financial assets are held at fair value with gains and losses being included in other comprehensive income. The Group uses this classification for assets that are not derivatives and are not held for trading purposes or otherwise designated at fair value through profit or loss, or at amortised cost. Dividends and interest (calculated using the effective interest method) are recognised in the income statement in Note 3 Net interest income or Note 6 Net investment income. On disposal, the cumulative gain or loss recognised in other comprehensive income is also included in net investment income.

    2015     2014  
    £m     £m  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

   89,278     85,539  

Equity securities

   989     527  

Available for sale investments

    90,267     86,066  

17 Financial liabilities designated at fair value

 

Accounting for liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss

In accordance with IAS 39, financial liabilities may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within Net trading income (Note 5) and Net investment income (Note 6). The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (see Note 15 Derivative financial instruments).

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived for financial liabilities designated at fair value are described in Fair value of assets and liabilities (Note 18).

Accounting for liabilities designated at fair value through profit and loss

In accordance with IAS 39, financial liabilities may be designated at fair value, with gains and losses taken to the income statement within net trading income (Note 5) and net investment income (Note 6). Movements in own credit are reported through other comprehensive income from January 2017 upon early adoption of IFRS 9. The Group has the ability to make the fair value designation when holding the instruments at fair value reduces an accounting mismatch (caused by an offsetting liability or asset being held at fair value), or is managed by the Group on the basis of its fair value, or includes terms that have substantive derivative characteristics (Note 15).

The details on how the fair value amounts are arrived for financial liabilities designated at fair value are described in Note 18.

 

   2015   2014  
     Contractual       Contractual  
     amount due       amount due  
   Fair value     on maturity     Fair value     on maturity    2017   2016 
   £m     £m     £m     £m        Fair value
£m
   Contractual
amount due
on maturity
£m
       Fair value
£m
   Contractual
amount due
on maturity
£m
 

Debt securities

   33,177     36,097     42,395     44,910     42,563    46,920    34,985    37,034 

Deposits

   6,029     6,324     7,206     7,301     4,448    4,414    5,269    5,303 

Liabilities to customers under investment contracts

   1,633          1,823                  37     

Repurchase agreementsa

   50,838     50,873     5,423     5,433  
Repurchase agreements   126,691    126,822    55,710    55,760 

Other financial liabilities

   68     68     125     125     16    16    30    30 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   91,745     93,362     56,972     57,769     173,718    178,172    96,031    98,127 

The cumulative own credit net loss recognised is £226m (2014: £716m)£179m (2016: £239m loss).

18 Fair value of financial instruments

 

Accounting for financial assets and liabilities – fair values

The Group applies IAS 39. All financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date of initial recognition (including transaction costs, other than financial instruments held at fair value through profit or loss) and, depending on the classification of the asset or liability, may continue to be held at fair value either through profit or loss or other comprehensive income. The fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

Wherever possible, fair value is determined by reference to a quoted market price for that instrument. For many of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, especially derivatives, quoted prices are not available and valuation models are used to estimate fair value. The models calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourced market inputs including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and currency rates.

For financial liabilities measured at fair value, the carrying amount reflects the effect on fair value of changes in own credit spreads derived from observable market data such as in primary issuance and redemption activity for structured notes.

NoteOn initial recognition, it is presumed that the transaction price is the fair value unless there is observable information available in an active market to the contrary. The best evidence of an instrument’s fair value on initial recognition is typically the transaction price. However, if fair value can be evidenced by comparison with other observable current market transactions in the same instrument, or is based on a valuation technique whose inputs include only data from observable markets, then the instrument should be recognised at the fair value derived from such observable market data.

aDuring 2015, new repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

For valuations that have made use of unobservable inputs, the difference between the model valuation and the initial transaction price (‘Day One profit’) is recognised in profit or loss either: on a straight-line basis over the term of the transaction; or over the period until all model inputs will become observable where appropriate; or released in full when previously unobservable inputs become observable.

 

234  |  216    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

 

Accounting for financial assets and liabilities – fair values

The Group applies IAS 39. All financial instruments are initially recognised at fair value on the date of initial recognition and, depending on the classification of the asset or liability, may continue to be held at fair value either through profit or loss or other comprehensive income. The fair value of a financial instrument is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date.

Wherever possible, fair value is determined by reference to a quoted market price for that instrument. For many of the Group’s financial assets and liabilities, especially derivatives, quoted prices are not available, and valuation models are used to estimate fair value. The models calculate the expected cash flows under the terms of each specific contract, and then discount these values back to a present value. These models use as their basis independently sourced market parameters including, for example, interest rate yield curves, equities and commodities prices, option volatilities and currency rates.

For financial liabilities measured at fair value, the carrying amount reflects the effect on fair value of changes in own credit spreads derived from observable market data, such as spreads on Barclays issued bonds or credit default swaps (CDS). Most market parameters are either directly observable or are implied from instrument prices. The model may perform numerical procedures in the pricing such as interpolation when input values do not directly correspond to the most actively traded market trade parameters.

On initial recognition, it is presumed that the transaction price is the fair value unless there is observable information available in an active market to the contrary. The best evidence of an instrument’s fair value on initial recognition is typically the transaction price. However, if fair value can be evidenced by comparison with other observable current market transactions in the same instrument, or is based on a valuation technique whose inputs include only data from observable markets, then the instrument should be recognised at the fair value derived from such observable market data.

For valuations that have made use of unobservable inputs, the difference between the model valuation and the initial transaction price (‘Day One profit’) is recognised in profit or loss either: on a straight-line basis over the term of the transaction; or over the period until all model inputs will become observable where appropriate; or released in full when previously unobservable inputs become observable.

Various factors influence the availability of observable inputs and these may vary from product to product and change over time. Factors include the depth of activity in the relevant market, the type of product, whether the product is new and not widely traded in the marketplace, the maturity of market modelling and the nature of the transaction (bespoke or generic). To the extent that valuation is based on models or inputs that are not observable in the market, the determination of fair value can be more subjective, dependent on the significance of the unobservable input to the overall valuation. Unobservable inputs are determined based on the best information available, for example by reference to similar assets, similar maturities or other analytical techniques.

The sensitivity of valuations used in the financial statements to possible changes in significant unobservable inputs is shown on page 244.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The valuation of financial instruments often involves a significant degree of judgement and complexity, in particular where valuation models make use of unobservable inputs (‘Level 3’ assets and liabilities). This note provides information on these instruments, including the related unrealised gains and losses recognised in the period, a description of significant valuation techniques and unobservable inputs, and a sensitivity analysis.

Various factors influence the availability of observable inputs and these may vary from product to product and change over time. Factors include the depth of activity in the relevant market, the type of product, whether the product is new and not widely traded in the marketplace, the maturity of market modelling and the nature of the transaction (bespoke or generic). To the extent that valuation is based on models or inputs that are not observable in the market, the determination of fair value can be more subjective, dependent on the significance of the unobservable input to the overall valuation. Unobservable inputs are determined based on the best information available, for example by reference to similar assets, similar maturities or other analytical techniques.

The sensitivity of valuations used in the financial statements to possible changes in significant unobservable inputs is shown on page 224.

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

The valuation of financial instruments often involves a significant degree of judgement and complexity, in particular where valuation models make use of unobservable inputs (‘Level 3’ assets and liabilities). This note provides information on these instruments, including the related unrealised gains and losses recognised in the period, a description of significant valuation techniques and unobservable inputs, and a sensitivity analysis.

Valuation

IFRS 13Fair Value Measurement requires an entity to classify its assets and liabilities according to a hierarchy that reflects the observability of significant market inputs. The three levels of the fair value hierarchy are defined below.

Quoted market prices – Level 1

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 1 if their value is observable in an active market. Such instruments are valued by reference to unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in active markets where the quoted price is readily available, and the price represents actual and regularly occurring market transactions. An active market is one in which transactions occur with sufficient volume and frequency to provide pricing information on an ongoing basis.

Valuation technique using observable inputs – Level 2

Assets and liabilities classified as Level 2 have been valued using models whose inputs are observable in an active market.either directly or indirectly. Valuations based on observable inputs include assets and liabilities such as swaps and forwards which are valued using market standard pricing techniques, and options that are commonly traded in markets where all the inputs to the market standard pricing models are observable.

Valuation technique using significant unobservable inputs – Level 3

Assets and liabilities are classified as Level 3 if their valuation incorporates significant inputs that are not based on observable market data (unobservable inputs). A valuation input is considered observable if it can be directly observed from transactions in an active market, or if there is compelling external evidence demonstrating an executable exit price. Unobservable input levels are generally determined via reference to observable inputs, historical observations or using other analytical techniques.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  235


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

The following table shows the Group’s assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and balance sheet classification:

 

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

                                      
   Valuation technique using      

2017

 2016 
   

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

  Valuation technique using Valuation technique using 

As at 31 December 2015

        

Trading portfolio assets

   36,676     35,725     4,947     77,348  

Financial assets designated at fair valuea

   6,163     52,909     17,758     76,830  

Derivative financial assets

   6,342     315,949     5,418     327,709  

Available for sale investments

   42,552     46,693     1,022     90,267  

Otherb

   26     8     7,470     7,504  

Total assets

   91,759     451,284     36,615     579,658  
  

        Level 1

£m

 

        Level 2

£m

 

        Level 3

£m

 

        Total

£m

 

        Level 1

£m

 

        Level 2

£m

 

        Level 3

£m

 

            Total

£m

 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (23,978   (9,989        (33,967

Financial liabilities designated at fair valuea

   (240   (90,203   (1,302   (91,745

Derivative financial liabilities

   (5,450   (314,033   (4,769   (324,252

Otherb

   (1,024   (802   (4,171   (5,997

Total liabilities

   (30,692   (415,027   (10,242   (455,961

As at 31 December 2014

        

Trading portfolio assets

   48,962     59,428     6,327     114,717     63,925  47,858  1,977  113,760   41,550   36,625   2,065   80,240 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   9,934     8,461     19,905     38,300     4,347  104,187  7,747  116,281   4,031   64,630   9,947   78,608 

Derivative financial assets

   9,863     425,301     4,745     439,909     3,786  228,549  5,334  237,669   5,261   332,819   8,546   346,626 

Available for sale investments

   44,234     40,519     1,313     86,066     22,841  30,571  395  53,807   21,218   36,551   372   58,141 

Otherb

   33     198     15,550     15,781  
Investment property        116  116         81   81 
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for salea        29  29   6,754   8,511   6,009   21,274 

Total assets

   113,026     533,907     47,840     694,773     94,899  411,165  15,598  521,662   78,814   479,136   27,020   584,970 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   (26,840   (17,935   (349   (45,124   (20,905 (16,442 (4 (37,351  (20,205  (14,475  (7  (34,687

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   (15   (55,141   (1,816   (56,972     (173,238 (480 (173,718  (70  (95,121  (840  (96,031

Derivative financial liabilities

   (10,313   (424,687   (4,320   (439,320   (3,631 (229,517 (5,197 (238,345  (5,051  (328,265  (7,171  (340,487

Otherb

             (13,115   (13,115
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for salea               (397  (5,224  (6,201  (11,822

Total liabilities

   (37,168   (497,763   (19,600   (554,531   (24,536 (419,197 (5,681 (449,414  (25,723  (443,085  (14,219  (483,027

NotesNote    

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bOther includes assets and liabilitiesDisposal groups held for sale of £7,364m (2014: £15,574m) and £5,997m (2014: £13,115m) respectively, which are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis. Referless cost to Note 44 for more information on non-current assets and liabilities held for sale. Other also includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m).sell are included in the fair value table.

 

236  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    217


 


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

The following table shows the Group’s assets and liabilities that are held at fair value disaggregated by valuation technique (fair value hierarchy) and product type:type.

 

Assets and liabilities held at fair value by product type

                                            
     Assets         Liabilities      

Assets

Valuation technique using

   

Liabilities

Valuation technique using

 
   Valuation technique using   Valuation technique using    Level 1
£m
   Level 2
£m
   Level 3
£m
   Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 
   

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Significant

unobservable

inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Quoted

market

prices

(Level 1)

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Observable

inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  

  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Significant
unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

            
As at 31 December 2017          

Interest rate derivatives

        228,751     2,675          (218,864   (2,247       150,325    2,718      (143,890 (2,867

Foreign exchange derivatives

   2     54,839     95     (4   (58,594   (196       54,783    160      (53,346 (124

Credit derivativesa

        16,279     1,902          (16,405   (219

Equity derivatives

   3,830     9,279     690     (2,870   (14,037   (1,545

Commodity derivatives

   2,510     6,801     56     (2,576   (6,133   (562

Government and government sponsored debt

   55,150     52,967     419     (15,036   (5,474   (1

Corporate debt

   352     11,598     2,895     (234   (4,558   (15

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   82     503          (5   (6,955   (382

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreementsb

        49,513               (50,838     

Non-asset backed loans

        1,931     16,828                 

Asset backed securities

        12,009     770          (384   (37

Commercial real estate loans

             551                 

Issued debt

                       (29,695   (546

Equity cash products

   29,704     4,038     171     (8,943   (221     

Funds and fund linked products

        1,649     378          (1,601   (148

Physical commodities

   87     156                      

Otherc

   42     971     9,185     (1,024   (1,268   (4,344

Total

   91,759     451,284     36,615     (30,692   (415,027   (10,242

As at 31 December 2014

            

Interest rate derivatives

        308,706     1,239     (5   (299,181   (1,344

Foreign exchange derivatives

   4     74,358     108     (3   (79,188   (138)  

Credit derivativesa

        21,541     1,966          (21,958   (409
Credit derivatives       11,163    1,386      (11,312 (240

Equity derivatives

   3,847     9,750     1,247     (3,719   (13,780   (2,092   3,786    9,848    1,064    (3,631 (18,527 (1,961

Commodity derivatives

   6,012     10,946     185     (6,586   (10,580   (337       2,430    6      (2,442 (5

Government and government sponsored debt

   62,577     48,296     1,014     (11,563   (14,002   (346   34,783    49,853    49    (13,079 (13,116   

Corporate debt

   151     22,036     3,061          (3,572   (13       15,098    871      (3,580 (4

Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments

   78     921          (4   (6,276   (665       1,491          (7,377 (250

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

        5,236               (5,423            100,038          (126,691   

Non-asset backed loans

   1     2,462     17,744                        5,710    6,657           

Asset backed securities

   30     16,211     1,631          (67            1,837    626      (221   

Commercial real estate loans

             1,180                 

Issued debt

                  (10   (40,592   (749                 (38,176 (214

Equity cash products

   40,252     7,823     171     (15,276   (699        56,322    7,690    112    (7,826 (388   

Funds and fund linked products

        2,644     631          (2,060   (210

Physical commodities

   4     1,447               (363     

Otherc

   70     1,530     17,663     (2   (22   (13,297
Private equity investments   8    1    817         (16
Assets and liabilities held for sale           29           
Othera       898    1,103      (131   

Total

   113,026     533,907     47,840     (37,168   (497,763   (19,600   94,899    411,165    15,598    (24,536 (419,197 (5,681
As at 31 December 2016          
Interest rate derivatives       222,892    5,759       (215,213  (4,860
Foreign exchange derivatives       79,612    132       (78,263  (51
Credit derivatives       14,662    1,611       (14,844  (241
Equity derivatives   4,210    11,842    1,037    (4,058  (15,808  (2,007
Commodity derivatives   1,052    3,809    8    (991  (4,138  (13
Government and government sponsored debt   31,203    49,834    3    (12,761  (11,454   
Corporate debt   46    11,921    969    (27  (1,907  (5
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments       994           (6,936  (319
Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements       63,162           (55,710   
Non-asset backed loans       2,888    8,767           
Asset backed securities       1,956    515       (256   
Issued debt                  (31,973  (298
Equity cash products   35,399    6,478    150    (7,416  (934  (2
Private equity investments   23    110    856       (18  (12
Assets and liabilities held for sale   6,754    8,511    6,009    (397  (5,224  (6,201
Othera   127    465    1,204    (73  (407  (210
Total   78,814    479,136    27,020    (25,723  (443,085  (14,219

Assets and liabilities reclassified between Level 1 and Level 2

There were transfers of £537m assets and £801m liabilities (2014: nil) of equity and foreign exchange derivatives from Level 1 to Level 2 to reflect the market observability of these product types.

Notes

aCredit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
bDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
cOther includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale, private equity investments, asset backed loans and investment property.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  237


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Level 3 movement analysis

The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balance during the year. The table shows gains and losses and includes amounts for all assets and liabilities transferred to and from Level 3 during the year. Transfers have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities                                          
             Total gains and losses          
             in the period     Total        
             recognised in the     gains        
   As at             income statement     or losses     Transfers     As at 31  
   1 January             Trading     Other     recognised         December  
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

   
 
Purchases
£m
  
  
   
 
Sales
£m
  
  
   
 
Issues
£m
  
  
   
 
Settlements
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   

 

in OCI

£m

  

  

   
 
In
£m
  
  
   
 
Out
£m
  
  
   

 

2015

£m

  

  

Government and government sponsored debt   685     27     (119        (109   (6             2     (160   320  
Corporate debt   3,026     62     (64        (20   (47             5     (80   2,882  
Asset backed securities   1,610     1,365     (1,565        (711   58               5     (19   743  
Non-asset backed loans   273     520     (251        (3   (42             11     (1   507  
Funds and fund linked products   589          (174        (56   (27             12     (4   340  
Other   144     23     (19        (9   (14             53     (23   155  
Trading portfolio assets   6,327     1,997     (2,192        (908   (78             88     (287   4,947  
Commercial real estate loans   1,179     3,540     (3,878        (342   49     1                    549  
Non-asset backed loansc   17,471     192     (114        (756   (531   (6                  16,256  
Asset backed loans   393     1,098     (1,260        2     8               15          256  
Private equity investments   701     94     (200        (3   8     38          4     (132   510  
Other   161     66     (31        (3   (11   5          26     (26   187  
Financial assets designated at fair value   19,905     4,990     (5,483        (1,102   (477   38          45     (158   17,758  
Asset backed securities   1                                             (1     
Government and government sponsored debt   327     14     (36                       1          (212   94  
Other   985     65     (91        (1,026        549     419     27          928  
Available for sale investments   1,313     79     (127        (1,026        549     420     27     (213   1,022  
                                                        
Othera   207     27     (89                  (5                  140  
                                                        
Trading portfolio liabilities   (349                                           349       
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments   (666             (216   261          17               221     (383
Issued debt   (748             (16   245     (4   (8        (38   4     (565
Other   (402                  (19   (18   75               10     (354
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (1,816             (232   487     (22   84          (38   235     (1,302
Interest rate derivatives   (105   1     218          (247   203               243     117     430  
Credit derivatives   1,557     273     (12        (6   (123             (11   7     1,685  
Equity derivatives   (845   111     (2   (290   103     34               (21   52     (858
Commodity derivatives   (152                  (66   (6             (388   106     (506
Foreign exchange derivatives   (30   14     (1   (7   9     (14             (73        (102
Net derivative financial instrumentsb   425     399     203     (297   (207   94               (250   282     649  
                                                           
Total   26,012     7,492     (7,688   (529   (2,756   (483   666     420     (128   208     23,214  

NotesNote

aOther includes commercial real estate loans, funds and fund-linked products, asset backed loans, physical commodities and investment property of £140m (2014: £207m). Non-current assets held for sale of £7,330m (2014: £15,574m) and liabilities in a disposal group classified as held for sale of £4,171m (2014: £13,115m) are not included as these are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.property.
bThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,418m (2014: £4,745m) and derivative financial liabilities are £4,769m (2014: £4,320m).
cA partially offsetting market gain of £172m (2014: £2,921m loss) has been recognised on the Level 2 derivative instruments that hedge the ESHLA loan portfolio interest rate risk.

238  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities  
             Total gains and losses in     Total        
             the period recognised in     gains        
   As at             the income statement     or losses     Transfers     As at 31  
   1 January             Trading     Other     recognised         December  
    

 

2014

£m

  

  

   
 
Purchases
£m
  
  
   
 
Sales
£m
  
  
   
 
Issues
£m
  
  
   
 
Settlements
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   

 

in OCI

£m

  

  

   
 
In
£m
  
  
   
 
Out
£m
  
  
   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Government and government sponsored debt   161     96     (198        (46   5               676     (9   685  
Corporate debt   3,039     177     (332        (370   484               39     (11   3,026  
Asset backed securities   2,111     1,037     (1,552        (141   178               8     (31   1,610  
Non-asset backed loans   176     250     (30        (49   2               13     (89   273  
Funds and fund linked products   494          (92             (17             204          589  
Other   440     8     (369        54     22                    (11   144  
Trading portfolio assets   6,421     1,568     (2,573        (552   674               940     (151   6,327  
Commercial real estate loans   1,198     2,919     (2,678        (334   76     (2                  1,179  
Non-asset backed loansc   15,956     2     (177        (81   1,830     9               (68   17,471  
Asset backed loans   375     855     (777        (4   19               1     (76   393  
Private equity investments   1,168     173     (500        (11   4     82               (215   701  
Other   73     75     (1        (35   9     32          2     6     161  
Financial assets designated at fair value   18,770     4,024     (4,133        (465   1,938     121          3     (353   19,905  
Asset backed securities   1                                                  1  
Government and government sponsored debt   59     281     (12        (1                            327  
Other   2,085     37     (78        (1,694   1     586     74     4     (30   985  
Available for sale investments   2,145     318     (90        (1,695   1     586     74     4     (30   1,313  
                                                        
Othera   451     47     (238                  5               (58   207  
                                                        
Trading portfolio liabilities                            (3             (346        (349
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments   (409             (254   12     2     88          (108   3     (666
Issued debt   (1,164             (16   293     88               (48   99     (748
Other   (67             (341   10     6     30          (40        (402
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (1,640             (611   315     96     118          (196   102     (1,816
Interest rate derivatives   (15   5     45     (5   7     (358             103     113     (105
Credit derivatives   1,420     11               42     121               (81   44     1,557  
Equity derivatives   (601   86     (12   (305   113     (278             (14   166     (845
Commodity derivatives   (141             (3   (10   4               (11   9     (152
Foreign exchange derivatives   31          (12   (4   (71   (6             29     3     (30
Net derivative financial instrumentsb   694     102     21     (317   81     (517             26     335     425  
                                                        
Total   26,841     6,059     (7,013   (928   (2,316   2,189     830     74     431     (155   26,012  

Notes

aOther includes investment property of £140m (2014: £207m). Non-current assets held for sale of £7,330m (2014: £15,574m) and liabilities in a disposal group classified as held for sale of £4,171m (2014: £13,115m) are not included as these are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis.
bThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,418m (2014: £4,745m) and derivative financial liabilities are £4,769m (2014: £4,320m).
cA partially offsetting market gain of £172m (2014: £2,921m loss) has been recognised on the Level 2 derivative instruments that hedge the ESHLA loan portfolio interest rate risk.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  239


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Assets and liabilities move between Level 2 and Level 3 primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market activity related to an input, or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant.

Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities

The following table discloses the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year arising on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities held at year end.

Unrealised gains and losses recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at period end  
   2015     2014  
       Other           Other    
   Income statement     compre-       Income statement     compre-    
   Trading     Other     hensive       Trading     Other     hensive    
As at 31 December   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
income
£m
  
  
   
 
Total
£m
  
  
Trading portfolio assets   (125             (125   466               466  
Financial assets designated at fair value   (562   (17        (579   1,849     (9        1,840  
Available for sale assets        (20   488     468          572     80     652  
Trading portfolio liabilities   (1             (1   (3             (3
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (24   76          52     98     118          216  
Othera        (22        (22        5          5  
Net derivative financial instruments   123               123     (238             (238
Total   (589   17     488     (84   2,172     686     80     2,938  

The trading losses of £562m (2014: trading gains of £1,849m) within Level 3 financial assets designated at fair value was primarily due to fair value losses on the ESHLA loan portfolio of £531m.

Valuation techniques and sensitivity analysis

Sensitivity analysis is performed on products with significant unobservable inputs (Level 3) to generate a range of reasonably possible alternative valuations. The sensitivity methodologies applied take account of the nature of the valuation techniques used, as well as the availability and reliability of observable proxy and historical data and the impact of using alternative models.

Sensitivities are dynamically calculated on a monthly basis. The calculation is based on range or spread data of a reliable reference source or a scenario based on relevant market analysis alongside the impact of using alternative models. Sensitivities are calculated without reflecting the impact of any diversification in the portfolio.

The valuation techniques used for the material products within Levels 2 and 3, and observability and sensitivity analysis for products within Level 3, are described below.

Interest rate derivatives

Description: These are derivativesDerivatives linked to interest rates or inflation indices. ThisThe category includes futures, interest rate and inflation swaps, swaptions, caps, floors, inflation options, balance guaranteed swaps and other exotic interest rate derivatives.

Valuation:Interest rate derivative cash flowsand inflation derivatives are generally valued using interest rate yield curves whereby observableof forward rates constructed from market data is used to construct the term structure of forward rates. This is then used to project and discount the expected future cash flows based on the parameters of the trade.trades. Instruments with optionality are valued using volatilities implied from market observable inputs. Exotic interest rate derivatives are valued usinginputs, and use industry standard andor bespoke models baseddepending on observable and unobservable market parameter inputs. Input parameters include interest rates, volatilities, correlations and others as appropriate. Inflation forward curves and interest rate yield curves may be extrapolated beyond observable tenors. Balance guaranteed swaps are valued using cash flow models that calculate fairthe product type.

218    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value based on loss projections, prepayment, recovery and discount rates. These parameters are determined by reference to underlying asset performance.of financial instrumentscontinued

Observability: In general, input parametersinputs are deemedconsidered observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each parameterinput and underlying. Certain correlation, convexity, long datedUnobservable inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity to unobservable valuation inputs is based on the dispersion of consensus data services where available, or alternatively it is based on stress scenarios or historic data.

Foreign exchange derivatives

Description: Derivatives linked to the foreign exchange (FX) market. The category includes FX forward contracts, FX swaps and FX options. The majority are traded as over the counter (OTC) derivatives.

Valuation: FX derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models depending on the product type. Valuation inputs include FX rates, interest rates, FX volatilities, interest rate volatilities, FX interest rate correlations and others as appropriate.

Observability: FX correlations, forwards and volatility exposuresvolatilities are unobservable beyondgenerally observable up to liquid maturities.maturities which are determined separately for each input and underlying. Unobservable market data and model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques, or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is based on the dispersion of consensus data services where available, otherwise stress scenarios or historic data are used.

Notes

aOther consists of investment properties.

240  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Foreign exchange derivatives

Description:These are derivatives linked to the foreign exchange (FX) market. This category includes FX forward contracts, FX swaps and FX options. The vast majority are traded as OTC derivatives.

Valuation: Exotic and non-exotic derivatives are valued using industry standard and bespoke models. Input parameters include FX rates, interest rates, FX volatilities, interest rate volatilities, FX interest rate correlations and others as appropriate. Unobservable model inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques to match the appropriate risk profile.

Observability:Certain correlations, long dated forwards and volatilities are unobservable beyond liquid maturities.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is primarily based on the dispersion of consensus data services.

Credit derivatives

Description: These are derivativesDerivatives linked to the credit spread of a referenced entity, index or basket of referenced entities or a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. This(e.g. a securitised product). The category includes single name and index CDS,credit default swaps (CDS), asset backed CDS and synthetic CDOs, and Nth-to-default basket swaps.collateralised debt obligations (CDOs).

Valuation:CDS are valued on industry standard models using a market standard model that incorporatescurves of credit spreads as the credit curve as its principal input. Credit spreads are observed directly from broker data, third partythird-party vendors or priced to proxies. Where credit spreads are unobservable, they are determined with reference to recent transactions or proxied from bond spreads on observable trades of the same issuer or other similar entities. Synthetic CDOs are valued using a model that calculates fair value based onincorporates credit spreads, recovery rates, correlations and interest rates, and is calibrated to the index tranche market.

Observability:CDS contracts referencing entities that are not actively traded are generally considered unobservable. The correlation inputobservable. Other valuation inputs are considered observable if products with significant sensitivity to synthetic CDOthe inputs are actively traded in a liquid market. Unobservable valuation is considered unobservable as it is proxiedinputs are generally determined with reference to recent transactions or inferred from observable trades of the observable index tranche market. Where an asset backed credit derivative does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined using a model, the instrument is considered unobservable.same issuer or similar entities.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity of valuations of the illiquidSensitivity to unobservable CDS portfoliocontracts is determined by applying a shift to eachcredit spread curve. The shift iscurves based on the average range of pricing observed in the market for similar CDS. Synthetic CDO sensitivitySensitivity to unobservable synthetic CDOs is calculated using correlation levels derived from the range of contributors to a consensus bespoke service.

Derivative exposure to monoline insurers

Description:These products are derivatives through which credit protection has been purchased on structured debt instruments (primarily CLOs) from monoline insurers.

Valuation:Given the bespoke nature of the CDS, the primary valuation input is the price of the cash instrument it protects.

Observability: While the market value of the cash instrument underlying the CDS contract may be observable, its use in the valuation of CDS is considered unobservable due to the bespoke nature of the monoline CDS contracts.

Level 3 sensitivity:Due to the high degree of uncertainty, the sensitivity reflects the impact of writing down the credit protection element of fair value to zero.

Equity derivatives

Description:These are Exchange traded or OTC derivatives linked to equity indices and single names. ThisThe category includes exchange traded and OTC equity derivatives including vanilla and exotic options.equity products.

Valuation: The valuations of OTC equityEquity derivatives are determinedvalued using industry standard models. Input parametersValuation inputs include stock prices, dividends, volatilities, inte restinterest rates, equity reporepurchase curves and, for multi-asset products, correlations. Unobservable model inputs are determined by reference to liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques to match the appropriate risk profile.

Observability: In general, input parametersvaluation inputs are deemed observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each parameterinput and underlying. Unobservable inputs are set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques, or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity is generally estimated based onusing the dispersion of consensus data services either directly or through proxies.services.

Commodity derivatives

Description:These products are exchange Exchange traded and OTC derivatives based on underlying commodities such as metals, crude oil and refined products, agricultural, power and natural gas.

Valuation:The valuations of commodity Commodity swaps and options are determinedvalued using models incorporating discounting of cash flows and other industry standard modelling techniques. Valuation inputs include forward curves, volatilities implied from market observable inputs and correlations.

Observability: Commodity correlations, forwards and volatilities are generally observable up to liquid maturities which are determined separately for each input and underlying. Unobservable inputs are set with reference to similar observable products, or by applying extrapolation techniques from theto observable market.

Observability: Certain correlations, forward curves and volatilities for longer dated exposures are unobservable.inputs.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity is determined primarily by measuring historical variability over twoa period of years. Where historical data is unavailable or uncertainty is due to volumetric risk, sensitivity is measured by applying appropriate stress scenarios or using proxybid-offer spread levels.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  241


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Complex derivative instruments

Valuation estimates made by counterparties with respect to complex derivative instruments, for the purpose of determining the amount of collateral to be posted, often differ, sometimes significantly, from Barclays’ own estimates. In almost all cases, Barclays has been able to successfully resolve such differences or otherwise reach an accommodation with respect to collateral posting levels, including in certain cases by entering into compromise collateral arrangements. Due to the ongoing nature of collateral calls, Barclays will often be engaged in discussion with one or more counterparties in respect of such differences at any given time. Valuation estimates made by counterparties for collateral purposes are considered, like any other third partythird-party valuation, considered when determining Barclays’ fair value estimates.

Government and government sponsored debt

Description:These are government Government bonds, supra sovereign bonds and agency bonds.

Valuation:Liquid government bonds that are actively traded through an exchange or clearing house are marked to the closing levels observed in these markets. Less liquidOther actively traded bonds are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where theresources.

Observability: prices for actively traded bonds are no observable marketconsidered observable. Unobservable bonds prices fair value isare generally determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads ofbond yields for actively traded bonds from the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts.

Observability:Where an observable market price is not available, the bond is considered Level 3.(or a similar) issuer.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity is calculatedgenerally determined by using thea range of observable proxyalternative prices.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    219


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Corporate debt

Description:This primarily contains Primarily corporate bonds.

Valuation:Corporate bonds are valued using observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services. Where theresources.

Observability: Prices for actively traded bonds are no observable marketconsidered observable. Unobservable bonds prices fair value isare generally determined by reference to either issuances or CDS spreads of the same issuer as proxy inputs to obtain discounted cash flow amounts. In the absence of observable bond yields or CDS spreads for actively traded instruments issued by or referencing the respective issuer, similar reference assets or sector averages are applied assame (or a proxy (the appropriateness of proxies being assessed based on issuer, coupon, maturity and industry).

Observability:Where an observable market price is not available, the security is considered Level 3.similar) issuer.

Level 3 sensitivity:The sensitivity for the corporate bonds portfolio Sensitivity is generally determined by applying a shift to each underlying position driven bybond yields using the average ranges of external levels observed in the market for similar bonds.

Certificates of Deposit, Commercial Paper and other money market instruments

Description: Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments.

Valuation: Instruments are valued using observable market prices sourced from broker quotes, inter-dealer prices or other reliable pricing services.

Observability: Prices for actively traded instruments are considered observable. Unobservable instrument prices are generally determined by reference to bond yields or CDS spreads for actively traded instruments issued by or referencing the same (or a similar) issuer.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity is generally calculated by using a range of observable alternative prices.

Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements

Description: These includeIncludes securities purchased under resale agreements, securities sold under repurchase agreements, and other similar secured lending agreements. The agreements are primarily short-term in nature.

Valuation:Reverse repurchase Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are generally valued by discounting the expected future cash flows. The inputs to the valuation includeflows using industry standard models that incorporate market interest rates and reporepurchase rates, which are determined based on the specific parametersdetails of the transaction.

Observability:In general, input parameters Inputs are deemed observable up to liquid maturities, asand are determined based on the specific parametersfeatures of the transaction. Unobservable market data and model inputs are generally set by referencing liquid market instruments and applying extrapolation techniques, or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity:Sensitivity relating to unobservable valuation inputs is based ongenerally estimated using the dispersion of consensus data services, where available, otherwise stress scenarios or historic data are used.data. In general, the sensitivity of unobservable inputs is insignificantnot significant to the overall balance sheet valuation given the predominantly short termshort-term nature of the agreements.

Non-asset backed loans

Description:This category is largely Largely made up of fixed rate loans, such as the ESHLA portfolio, which are valued using models that discount expected future cash flows.loans.

Valuation: Fixed rate loans are valued using models that calculate fair valuediscount expected future cash flows based on observable interest rates and unobservable loan spreads.

Observability: Within this loan population, the loan spread is generally unobservable. Unobservable loan spreads incorporateare determined by incorporating funding costs, the level of comparable assets such as gilts, issuer credit quality and other factors.

Observability:LevelWithin this population, the unobservable input is the loan spread.

Level 3 sensitivity:The sensitivity forof fixed rate loans is calculated by applying a shift to loan spreads.

Asset backed securities

Description:These are securities Securities that are linked to the cash flows of a pool of referenced assets via securitisation. ThisThe category includes residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities, CDOs, CLOscollateralised loan obligations (CLOs) and other asset backed securities.

Valuation:Where available, valuations are based on observable market prices which are sourced from broker quotes and inter-dealer prices. Otherwise, valuations are determined using industry standard discounted cash flow analysis that calculates the fair value based on valuation inputs such as constant default rate, conditional prepayment rate, loss given default and yield. These inputs are determined by reference to a number of sources including proxying to observed transactions, market indices or market research, and by assessing underlying collateral performance.

Proxying to observed transactions, indices or research requires an assessment and comparison of the relevant securities’ underlying attributes including collateral, tranche, vintage, underlying asset composition (historical losses, borrower characteristics and loan attributes such as loan to valueloan-to-value ratio and geographic concentration) and credit ratings (original and current).

Observability: Where an asset backed product does not have an observable market price and the valuation is determined using a discounted cash flow analysis, anthe instrument is considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: The sensitivity analysis for asset backed products is based on externally sourced pricing dispersion or by stressing the inputs of discounteddiscount cash flow analysis.

242  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Commercial real estate loans

Description:This portfolio includes loans that are secured by a range of commercial property types including retail, hotel, office, multi-family and industrial properties.

Valuation:Performing loans are valued using discounted cash flow analysis which considers the characteristics of the loan such as property type, geographic location, credit quality and property performance reviews in order to determine an appropriate credit spread. Where there is significant uncertainty regarding loan performance, valuation is based on independent third party appraisals or bids for the underlying properties. Independent third party appraisals are determined by discounted cash flow analysis, and key valuation inputs are yield and loss given default.

Observability: Since each commercial real estate loan is unique in nature, and the secondary loan market is relatively illiquid, valuation inputs are generally considered unobservable.

Level 3 sensitivity: For performing loans, sensitivity is determined by stressing the credit spread for each loan. For loans which have significant uncertainty regarding loan performance, sensitivity is determined by either a range of bids or by stressing the inputs to independent third party appraisals.

Issued debt

Description:This category contains Barclays Debt notes issued notes.by Barclays.

Valuation:Fair valued Barclays issued notes are Issued debt is valued using discounted cash flow techniques and industry standard models incorporating various observable input parameters depending on the terms of theinputs observed for each instrument.

Observability:Barclays issued notes are generally observable. Structured notes are debt instruments containing embedded derivatives. Where either an input to the embedded derivative or the debt instrument is deemed unobservable and significant to the overall valuation of the note, the structured note is classified as Level 3.

Level 3 sensitivity: Sensitivity to the unobservable input in the embedded derivative is calculated in line with the method used for the type of derivative instrument concerned.

220    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Other18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Description:Other includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale and private equity investments. See below for more detail. Other also includes investment properties.

Non-current assets held for saleEquity cash products

Description: Non-current assets held for sale materially consists of the Portuguese Retail Banking, WealthIncludes listed equities, Exchange Traded Funds (ETF) and Investment Management businesses and part of the Portuguese Corporate banking business, Barclays Vida y Pensiones (BVP), a company offering life insurance, pension products and services in Spain, Portugal and Italy, and the Italian Retail business. These sales are part of the divestment of the Barclays Non-Core segment of the Group.preference shares.

Valuation:Non-current assets held for sale are valued at the lower Valuation of carrying value and fair value less cost to sell.equity cash products is primarily determined through market observable prices.

Observability: The itemsPrices for actively traded equity cash products are considered observable. Unobservable equity prices are generally determined by reference to actively traded instruments that are similar in Level 2 and Level 3 include customer cash, nostro accounts with other banks and other time deposits.nature, or inferred via another reasonable method.

Level 3 sensitivity:The businesses held for sale are valued at Sensitivity is generally calculated based on applying a shift to the agreed price less costs to sell and are not expected to display significant sensitivity.valuation of the underlying asset.

Private equity investments

Description:This category includes Includes private equity holdings and principal investments.

Valuation:Private equity investments are valued in accordance with the ‘International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines’. This requires which require the use of a number of individual pricing benchmarks such as the prices of recent transactions in the same or similar entities, discounted cash flow analysis and comparison with the earnings multiples of listed comparative companies. Full valuations are generally performed at least biannually, withWhile the positions reviewed periodically for material events that might impact upon fair value. The valuation of unquoted equity instruments is subjective by nature. However,nature, the relevant methodologies are commonly applied by other market participants and have been consistently applied over time. Private equity investments include Barclays’ equity interest in Visa Europe, an available for sale asset, which has been valued by reference to consideration, some of which is contingent upon future events, that will be receivable upon completion of the announced sale of Visa Europe to Visa Inc. The elements of consideration that are contingent on future events have been deemed unobservable and no value has been attributed to such elements in the year-end valuation.

Observability: Inputs are considered observable if there is active trading in a liquid market of products with significant sensitivity to the inputs. Unobservable inputs include earnings estimates, multiples of comparative companies, marketability discounts and discount rates.

Level 3 sensitivity:The relevant Private equity valuation models are each sensitive to a number of key assumptions, such as projected future earnings, comparator multiples, marketability discounts and discount rates. Valuation sensitivity is generally estimated by flexing suchshifting assumptions to reasonable alternative levelslevels.

Assets and determiningliabilities held for sale

Description:Assets and liabilities held for sale consist of disposal groups Barclays intend to sell.

Valuation:Assets and liabilities held for sale are valued at the impactlower of carrying value and fair value less costs to sell.

Level 3 sensitivity:The disposal groups that are measured at fair value less cost to sell are valued at the agreed price less costs to sell and are not expected to display significant sensitivity. The sensitivity of the assets and liabilities measured at carrying value is explained within the relevant product descriptions.

Other

Description: Other includes commercial real estate loans, funds and fund-linked products, asset-backed loans, physical commodities and investment property.

Assets and liabilities reclassified between Level 1 and Level 2

During the period, there were transfers of £3,807m of government bond assets and £1,023m/£(950)m of commodity derivative assets and liabilities from Level 1 to Level 2 (2016: £2,340m of government bond assets transferred from Level 2 to Level 1) to reflect the market observability of these product types. These transfers are reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

Level 3 movement analysis

The following table summarises the movements in the Level 3 balances during the period. Transfers have been reflected as if they had taken place at the beginning of the year.

Assets and liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and measured at fair value less cost to sell are not included as these are measured at fair value on the resulting valuation.anon-recurring basis.

Asset and liability transfers between Level 2 and Level 3 are primarily due to i) an increase or decrease in observable market activity related to an input or ii) a change in the significance of the unobservable input, with assets and liabilities classified as Level 3 if an unobservable input is deemed significant.

During the year:

£721m of net interest rate derivatives were transferred from Level 3 to Level 2 to reflect the market observability of the products;

 

£2,284m ofnon-asset backed loans were derecognised due to a substantial modification of terms on the ESHLA loans. The restructured loans are measured on an amortised cost basis.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  243    221


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

 

Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs                  
Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilitiesAnalysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities               
   Fair value     Favourable changes     Unfavourable changes    As at            Total gains and losses
in the period
recognised in the
income statement
  Total
gains
or losses
recog-
   Transfers  As at 31 
   
 
 
Total
assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total
liabilities
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Income
statement
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Equity
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Income
statement
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Equity
£m
  
  
  1 January
2017
£m
 Purchases
£m
 Sales
£m
 Issues
£m
   Settle-
ments
£m
 Trading
income
£m
 Other
income
£m
 nised
in OCI
£m
   In
£m
 Out
£m
 

December

2017

£m

 
As at 31 December 2015            
Government and government
sponsored debt
   3  46                            49 
Corporate debt   969  73  (47      (98 21          6  (53 871 
Non-asset backed loans   151  435  (187      (221 (8         1  (5 166 
Asset backed securities   515  195  (78      (9 9            (5 627 
Equity cash products   77  24  (11        (19           (3 68 
Other   350  2  (77      (97 25  (1      3  (9 196 
Trading portfolio assets   2,065  775  (400      (425 28  (1      10  (75 1,977 
Non-asset backed loans   8,616             (2,284 159               6,491 
Asset backed loans   201  27  (25      (3 (17 (3      6  (31 155 
Private equity investments   562  26  (127      (1 (1 29       21  (11 498 
Equity cash products                (1 (7         16     8 
Other   568  4,675  (4,646      (247 41  197       16  (9 595 
Financial assets designated at fair value   9,947  4,728  (4,798      (2,536 175  223       59  (51 7,747 
Equity cash products   73                  1  2    5  (45 36 
Private equity investments   294  15  (78           (5 37    60  (4 319 
Other   5  36          (2       1         40 
Available for sale investments   372  51  (78      (2    (4 40    65  (49 395 
         
Investment property   81  114  (69           (10           116 
         
Trading portfolio liabilities   (7 (4 1         2          (1 5  (4
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments   (319    69            9       (104 95  (250
Issued debt   (298    84                         (214
Other   (223            204     (6        9  (16
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (840    153       204     3       (104 104  (480
Interest rate derivatives   2,675     (2,247   93          (103        899  58  (1      (208 (166         (11 (721 (150
Foreign exchange derivatives   95     (196   17          (17        81             (12 27          (13 (46 37 
Credit derivativesa   1,902     (219   66          (96     
Credit derivatives   1,370  5  (2      (29 (128         (69 (1 1,146 
Equity derivatives   690     (1,545   167          (185        (970 (220 (14      374  (43         (16 (7 (896
Commodity derivatives   56     (562   13          (13        (5              4          1       
Government and government sponsored debt   419     (1   4          (4     
Corporate debt   2,895     (15   10     1     (5   (1
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments        (382                    
Non-asset backed loans   16,828          1,581          (1,564     
Asset backed securities   770     (37   1          (1     
Commercial real estate loans   551          24          (1     
Issued debt        (546                    
Equity cash products   171               17          (17
Funds and fund linked products   378     (148   1          (1     
Otherb   9,185     (4,344   154     318     (172   (53
Net derivative financial instrumentsa   1,375  (157 (17      125  (306         (108 (775 137 
Assets and liabilities held for sale   574     (574                          
Total   36,615     (10,242   2,131     336     (2,162   (71   13,567  5,507  (5,782      (2,634 (101 211  40    (79 (841 9,888 
         
As at 31 December 2014            
Interest rate derivatives   1,239     (1,344   70          (71     
Foreign exchange derivatives   108     (138   36          (36     
Credit derivativesa   1,966     (409   81          (229     
Equity derivatives   1,247     (2,092   220          (220     
Commodity derivatives   185     (337   46          (46     
Government and government sponsored debt   1,014     (346             (2     
Corporate debt   3,061     (13   26     (1   (9   (4
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments        (665   3          3       
Non-asset backed loans   17,744          1,164          (820     
Asset backed securities   1,631          46     1     (72   (1
Commercial real estate loans   1,180          20          (19     
Issued debt        (749                    
Equity cash products   171               11          (11
Funds and fund linked products   631     (210   14          (14     
Otherb   17,663     (13,297   180     82     (156   (55
Net assets held for sale measured at fair value onnon-recurring basis                        29 
Total   47,840     (19,600   1,906     93     (1,691   (71   13,567  5,507  (5,782      (2,634 (101 211  40    (79 (841 9,917 

Note

aThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,334m (2016: £8,546m) and derivative financial liabilities are £5,197m (2016: £7,171m).

222    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Analysis of movements in Level 3 assets and liabilities                  
   As at               

Total gains and losses

in the period recognised

in the income

statement

  

Total

gains

or losses

recog-

   Transfers  As at 31 
    

1 January

2016
£m

  

Purchases

£m

   

Sales

£m

  

Issues

£m

  

Settle-

ments

£m

  

Trading

income

£m

  

Other

income

£m

  

nised

in OCI

£m

   

In

£m

  

Out

£m

  

December

2016

£m

 
Government and government
sponsored debt
   320       (317                        3 
Corporate debt   2,843   38    (48     (5  206          32   (2,097  969 
Non-asset backed loans   507   173    (498     (4  (38         18   (7  151 
Asset backed securities   743   129    (295     (171  111          1   (3  515 
Equity cash products   121   4    (4        (15            (29  77 
Other   374   55    (89     (1  30          1   (20  350 
Trading portfolio assets   4,908   399    (1,251     (181  294          52   (2,156  2,065 
Non-asset backed loans   15,963             (8,602  1,155   100             8,616 
Asset backed loans   256   48    (225     (20  30          112      201 
Private equity investments   457   38    (51     (3  16   120       6   (21  562 
Equity cash products   26       (26                         
Other   595   2,658    (2,729     (33  37   85       41   (86  568 
Financial assets designated at fair value   17,297   2,744    (3,031     (8,658  1,238   305       159   (107  9,947 
Equity cash products   24   52    (7           3   2       (1  73 
Private equity investments   877   15    (254     (407        63          294 
Other   20   1    (7     (16     1   5    1      5 
Available for sale investments   921   68    (268     (423     4   70    1   (1  372 
                                                
Investment property   82       (3           2             81 
                                                
Trading portfolio liabilities          (9        (1            3   (7
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments   (272         (19  48   2   (7      (301  230   (319
Issued debt   (538            231      9             (298
Other   (244            83   (48  (2      (50  38   (223
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   (1,054         (19  362   (46         (351  268   (840
Interest rate derivatives   418   45    3      (6  228          294   (83  899 
Foreign exchange derivatives   (104      30   2   40   6          55   52   81 
Credit derivatives   1,685   2    (306     (119  111          3   (6  1,370 
Equity derivatives   (857  196    7   (83  (34  (98         (15  (86  (970
Commodity derivatives   (506            91   (3            413   (5
Net derivative financial instrumentsa   636   243    (266  (81  (28  244          337   290   1,375 
Assets and liabilities held for sale   424   126    (166  (116  85      172          49   574 
Total   23,214   3,580    (4,994  (216  (8,843  1,729   483   70    198   (1,654  13,567 
                                                
Net liabilities held for sale measured at fair value onnon-recurring basis                                             (766
Total   23,214   3,580    (4,994  (216  (8,843  1,729   483   70    198   (1,654  12,801 

Note

aThe derivative financial instruments are represented on a net basis. On a gross basis, derivative financial assets are £5,334m (2016: £8,546m) and derivative financial liabilities are £5,197m (2016: £7,171m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    223


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Unrealised gains and losses on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities

The following table discloses the unrealised gains and losses recognised in the year arising on Level 3 financial assets and liabilities held at year end.

Unrealised gains and losses recognised during the period on Level 3 assets and liabilities held at year end 
   2017  2016 
   Income statement  Other     Income statement  Other    
As at 31 December   

      Trading

income

£m

 

 

 

  

Other

      income

£m

 

 

 

  

    compre-

hensive

income

£m

 

 

 

 

  

          Total

£m

 

 

  

      Trading

income

£m

 

 

 

  

Other

      income

£m

 

 

 

  

    compre-

hensive

income

£m

 

 

 

 

  

           Total

£m

a 

 

Trading portfolio assets   (34        (34  243         243 
Financial assets designated at fair value   147   200      347   227   271      498 
Available for sale investments      (4  29   25      6   70   76 
Investment property      (10     (10     2      2 
Trading portfolio liabilities   3         3   (1        (1
Financial liabilities designated at fair value   58   10      68   96   (6     90 
Net derivative financial instruments   (301        (301  175         175 
Assets and liabilities held for sale                  128      128 
Total   (127  196   29   98   740   401   70   1,211 

 

Note

a  The unrealised gain of £1,211m on Level 3 assets in 2016 is largely offset by losses on related Level 2 and Level 1 portfolio hedges.

 

 

   

 
Sensitivity analysis of valuations using unobservable inputs 
   2017  2016 
   Favourable changes  Unfavourable changes  Favourable changes  Unfavourable changes 
    

Income
statement
£m
 
 
 
  

Equity

£m

 

 

  

Income
statement
£m
 
 
 
  

Equity

£m

 

 

  

Income
statement
£m
 
 
 
  

Equity

£m

 

 

  

Income
statement
£m
 
 
 
  

Equity

£m

 

 

Interest rate derivatives   114      (138     209      (249   
Foreign exchange derivatives   6      (6     15      (15   
Credit derivatives   106      (79     127      (133   
Equity derivatives   99      (99     163      (164   
Commodity derivatives   3      (3     5      (5   
Corporate debt   4      (3     7      (2   
Certificates of deposit, commercial paper and other money market instruments                     (1   
Non asset backed loans   243      (468     462      (597   
Asset backed securities   1            1      (1   
Issued debt                         
Equity cash products   12   24   (8  (24  12   26   (11  (26
Private equity investments   133   13   (138  (13  104   18   (104  (21
Assets and liabilities held for sale               3      (3   
Othera   5      (5     155      (113   
Total   726   37   (947  (37  1,263   44   (1,398  (47

Note

aOther includes commercial real estate loans, funds and fund linked products, asset backed loans, physical commodities and investment property.

The effect of stressing unobservable inputs to a range of reasonably possible alternatives, alongside considering the impact of using alternative models, would be to increase fair values by up to £2.1bn (2014: £1.9bn)£763m (2016: £1,307m) or to decrease fair values by up to £2.2bn (2014: £1.7bn)£984m (2016: £1,445m) with substantially all the potential effect impacting profit and loss rather than reserves.

 

Notes

aCredit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
bOther includes non-current assets and liabilities held for sale, which are measured at fair value on a non-recurring basis, investment property, private equity investments and asset backed loans.

244  |  224    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

Significant unobservable inputs

The following table discloses the valuation techniques and significant unobservable inputs for assets and liabilities recognised at fair value and classified as Level 3 along with the range of values used for those significant unobservable inputs:

 

    
 
 
Total
assets
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Total
liabilities
£m
  
  
  
  

Valuation

technique(s)

  

Significant

unobservable

inputs

     

 

     2015

    Range

  

  

   

 

     2014

    Range

  

  

   Unitsa  
             Min     Max     Min     Max    

Derivative financial

instrumentsb

                   
Interest rate   2,675     (2,247  Discounted cash flows  Inflation forwards    0.3     8     (0.5   11     %  
derivatives      Option model  Inflation volatility    36     197     40     300     bp vol  
        IR – IR correlation    (55   100     (88   100     %  
        FX – IR correlation    (20   30     14     90     %  
                Interest rate volatility     5     249     6     437     bp vol  
Credit derivativesc   1,902     (219  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread    140     413     116     240     bps  
      Correlation model  Credit correlation    26     41     36     90     %  
        Credit spread    10     9,923     6     5,898     bps  
             Comparable pricing  Price     80     102     64     100     points  
Equity derivatives   690     (1,545    Equity volatility         318     1     97     %  
        Equity – equity correlation    (54   100     (55   99     %  
                Equity – FX correlation     (100   40     (80   55     %  

Non-derivative

financial

instruments

                   
Corporate debt   2,895     (15  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread    120     529     140     900     bps  
             Comparable pricing  Price     1     114          104     points  
Asset backed   770     (37  Discounted cash flows  Conditional prepayment rate         25          5     %  
securities        Constant default rate         2          9     %  
        Loss given default    30     100     45     100     %  
        Yield    5     58     3     11     %  
        Credit spread    157     1,416     74     2,688     bps  
             Comparable pricing  Price     1     114          100     points  
Commercial real   551         Discounted cash flows  Loss given default    0     100          100     %  
estate loans        Yield              4     8     %  
                Credit spread     230     801     124     675     bps  

Non-asset backed

loans

   16,828         Discounted cash flows  Loan spread     3     994     39     1,000     bps  
Otherd   1,855     (173  Discounted cash flows  

Loss given default

         94               %  
        Yield    7     12     8     9     %  
      Comparable pricing  Price         103          133     points  
             Net asset valuee  Net asset value                           

    Valuation technique(s)  Significant unobservable inputs  

2017

Range

   

2016

Range

      
                      Min               Max                  Min                 Max                  Unitsa 
Derivative financial instrumentsb            
Interest rate  Discounted cash flows  Inflation forwards     1   3    (1  8    % 
derivatives    Credit spread     45   1,320    25   1,669    bps 
  Comparable pricing  Price     -   100    -   100    points 
  Option model  Inflation volatility     35   201    35   207    bp vol 
    IR – IR correlation     (24  99    (26  98    % 
    FX – IR correlation     (30  24    (15  81    % 
      Interest rate volatility     5   353    9   295    bp vol 
Credit derivatives  Discounted cash flows  Credit spread     122   190    133   274    bps 
Equity derivatives  Option model  Equity volatility     3   92    1   150    % 
    Equity – equity correlation     (100  100    (90  100    % 
    Equity – FX correlation     (100  45    (80  25    % 
   Discounted cash flow  Discounted margin     (105  301    (130  331    bps 
Non-derivative financial instruments            
Non-asset backed loans  Discounted cash flows  Loan spread     30   596    30   1,495    bps 
    Price        50       99    points 
   Comparable pricing  Price        100       100    points 
Corporate debt  Comparable pricing  Price        100       121    points 
   Discounted cash flows  Credit spread     140   190    145   190    bps 
Asset backed securities  Comparable pricing  Price        99       270    points 
Private equity investments  EBITDA multiple  EBITDA multiple     8   13    5   17    multiple 

Notes

aThe units used to disclose ranges for significant unobservable inputs are percentages, points basis point volatility and basis points. Basis point volatility is a measure of implied volatility in terms of annual absolute basis point change in the underlying rate. Points are a percentage of par; for example, 100 points equals 100% of par. A basis point equals 1/100th of 1%; for example, 150 basis points equals 1.5%.
bCertain derivative instruments are classified as Level 3 due to a significant unobservable credit spread input into the calculation of the Credit Valuation Adjustment for the instruments. The range of significant unobservable credit spreads is between 69-1,175bps.31-596 bps (2016:65-874bps).
cCredit derivatives includes derivative exposure to monoline insurers.
dOther includes private equity investments, asset backed loans and investment property.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  245


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

The following section describes the significant unobservable inputs identified in the table above, and the sensitivity of fair value measurement of the instruments categorised as Level 3 assets or liabilities to increases in significant unobservable inputs. Where sensitivities are described, the inverse relationship will also generally apply.

Where reliable interrelationships can be identified between significant unobservable inputs used in fair value measurement, ameasurement. A description of those interrelationships is included below.

Comparable priceForwards

Comparable instrument prices are used in valuation by calculating an implied yield (or spread overA price or rate that is applicable to a liquid benchmark) from the price of a comparable observable bond, then adjustingfinancial transaction that yield (or spread) to derive a value for the unobservable bond. The adjustment to yield (or spread) should account for relevant differenceswill take place in the bonds such as maturity or credit quality. Alternatively, a price-to-price basis can be assumed between the comparable instrument and bond being valued in order to establish the value of the bond.future.

In general, a significant increase in comparable pricea forward in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourableincrease for the holder of a cash instrument.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in an input derived from a comparable price in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific termscontracted receiver of the instrument.

Conditional prepayment rate

Conditional prepayment rateunderlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc.), but the sensitivity is the proportion of voluntary, unscheduled repayments of loan principal by a borrower. Prepayment rates affect the weighted average life of securities by altering the timing of future projected cash flows.

A significant increase in a conditional prepayment rate in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Conditional prepayment rates are typically inversely correlated to credit spread, i.e. securities with high borrower credit spread typically experience lower prepayment rates, and also tend to experience higher default rates.

Constant default rate

The constant default rate represents an annualised rate of default of the loan principal by the borrower.

A significant increase in a constant default rate in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Constant default rate and conditional prepayment rates are typically inversely correlated: fewer defaults on loans typically will mean higher credit quality and therefore more prepayments.

Correlation

Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables (i.e. how the change in one variable influences a change in the other variable). Correlation is a key input into valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. For example, where an option contract is written on a basket of underlying names, the volatility of the basket, and hence the fair value of the option, will depend on the correlation between the basket components. Credit correlation generally refers to the correlation between default processes for the separate names that make up the reference pool of a CDO structure.

A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a movement in fair value that is favourable or unfavourable dependingdependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

Credit spread

Credit spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Credit spreads reflect the additional yield that a market participant would demanddemands for taking on exposure to the credit risk of an instrument and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

In general, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation will result in a movement in a fair value that is unfavourabledecrease for the holder of a cash asset.

For a derivative instrument, a significant increase in credit spread in isolation can result in a movement in fair value increase or decrease depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Volatility

Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in return for a given derivative underlying. It is an estimate of how much a particular underlying instrument input or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities are implied from observed option prices. For unobservable options the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature of the underlying risk, and the strike/maturity profile of a specific contract.

In general a significant increase in volatility in isolation will result in a fair value increase for the holder of a simple option, but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

There may be interrelationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs (e.g. when equity prices fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise) but these are generally specific to individual markets and may vary over time.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    225


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Correlation

Correlation is a measure of the relationship between the movements of two variables. Correlation can be a significant input into valuation of derivative contracts with more than one underlying instrument. Credit correlation generally refers to the correlation between default processes for the separate names that is favourablemake up the reference pool of a CDO structure.

A significant increase in correlation in isolation can result in a fair value increase or unfavourabledecrease depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Comparable price

Comparable instrument prices are used in valuation by calculating an implied yield (or spread over a liquid benchmark) from the price of a comparable observable instrument, then adjusting that yield (or spread) to account for relevant differences such as maturity or credit quality. Alternatively, aprice-to-price basis can be assumed between the comparable and unobservable instruments in order to establish a value.

In general, a significant increase in comparable price in isolation will result in an increase in the price of the unobservable instrument. For derivatives, a change in the comparable price in isolation can result in a fair value increase or decrease depending on the specific terms of the instrument.

Loan spread

Loan spreads typically represent the difference in yield between an instrument and a benchmark security or reference rate. Loan spreads typically reflect funding costs, credit quality, the level of comparable assets such as gilts and other factors, and form part of the yield used in a discounted cash flow calculation.

The ESHLA portfolio primarily consists of long dated fixed rate loans extended to counterparties in the UK Education, Social Housing and Local Authority sectors. The loans are categorised as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy due to their illiquid nature and the significance of unobservable loan spreads to the valuation. Valuation uncertainty arises from the long dated nature of the portfolio, the lack of secondary market in the loans and the lack of observable loan spreads. The majority of ESHLA loans are to borrowers in heavily regulated sectors that are considered extremely low credit risk, and have a history of zero defaults since inception. While the overall creditloan spread range is 991bps (2014: 961bps)from 30bps to 596bps (2016: 30bps to 1,495bps), the vast majority of spreads are concentrated towards the bottom end of this range, with 99% of the loan notional being valued with spreads less than 200bps consistently for both years.

In general, a significant increase in loan spreads in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a loan.

Forwards

A price or rate that is applicable to a financial transaction that will take place in the future. A forward is generally based on the spot price or rate, adjusted for the cost of carry, and defines the price or rate that will be used to deliver a currency, bond, commodity or some other underlying instrument at a point in the future. A forward may also refer to the rate fixeddecrease for a future financial obligation, such as the interest rate on a loan payment. In general, a significant increase in a forward in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is favourable for the contracted receiver of the underlying (currency, bond, commodity, etc), but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

246  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinuedloan.

Loss given default (LGD)

LGDLoss given default represents the expected loss upon liquidation of the collateral as a percentage of the balance outstanding.

In general, a significant increase in the LGD in isolation will translate to lower recovery and lower projected cash flows to pay to the securitisation, resulting in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of the securitised product.

VolatilityEBITDA Multiple

VolatilityEBITDA multiple is a key input inthe ratio of the valuation of derivative products containing optionality. Volatility is a measure of the variability or uncertainty in returns for a given derivative underlying. It represents an estimate of how much a particular underlying instrument, parameter or index will change in value over time. In general, volatilities will be implied from observed option prices. For unobservable optionsinvestment to the implied volatility may reflect additional assumptions about the nature of the underlying risk, as well as reflecting the given strike/maturity profile of a specific option contract.

Earnings before interest, taxes, depreciation and amortization. In general a significant increase in volatility in isolationthe multiple will result in a movement in fair value that is favourableincrease for the holder of a simple option, but the sensitivity is dependent on the specific terms of the instrument.

There may be inter-relationships between unobservable volatilities and other unobservable inputs that can be implied from observation (e.g. when equity prices fall, implied equity volatilities generally rise) but these are specific to individual markets and may vary over time.

Yield

The rate used to discount projected cash flows in a discounted future cash flow analysis.

In general, a significant increase in yield in isolation will result in a movement in fair value that is unfavourable for the holder of a cash instrument.an investment.

Fair value adjustments

Key balance sheet valuation adjustments are quantified below:

 

      
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
Bid-offer valuation adjustments     (360     (396
Other exit adjustments     (149     (169
Uncollateralised derivative funding     (72     (100
Derivative credit valuation adjustments:        
– Monolines     (9     (24
– Other derivative credit valuation adjustments     (318     (394
Derivative debit valuation adjustments     189       177  
    

            2017

£m

  

            2016

£m

 
Exit price adjustments derived from marketbid-offer spreads   (391  (475
Uncollateralised derivative funding   (45  (82
Derivative credit valuation adjustments   (103  (237
Derivative debit valuation adjustments   131   242 

Bid-offer valuationExit price adjustments derived from marketbid-offer spreads

The Group uses mid marketmid-market pricing where it is a market maker and has the ability to transact at, or better than, mid price (which is the case for certain equity, bond and vanilla derivative markets). For other financial assets and liabilities,bid-offer adjustments are recorded to reflect the priceexit level for the expected close out strategy. The methodology for determining thebid-offer adjustment for a derivative portfolio involves calculating the net risk exposure by offsetting long and short positions by strike and term in accordance with the risk management and hedging strategy.

Bid-offer levels are generally derived from market sources,quotes such as broker data.

Other exit adjustments

Market data input for exotic derivatives Less liquid instruments may not have a directly observablebid-offer spread. level. In such instances, an exit adjustment is applied as a proxy for the bid-offer adjustment. An example of this is correlation risk where an adjustment is applied to reflect the possible range of values that market participants apply. The exitprice adjustment may be derived from an observablebid-offer level for a comparable liquid instrument, or determined by calibrating to derivative prices, or by scenario analysis or historical analysis. Other exit

Exit price adjustments derived from marketbid-offer spreads have reduced by £20m£84m to £149m respectively£391m as a result of movements in market bid-offer spreads.risk reduction and spread tightening.

Discounting approaches for derivative instruments

Collateralised

In line with market practice, the methodology for discounting collateralised derivatives takes into account the nature and currency of the collateral that can be posted within the relevant CSA. Thiscredit support annex (CSA). The CSA aware discounting approach recognises the ‘cheapest to deliver’ option that reflects the ability of the party posting collateral to change the currency of the collateral.

226    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Uncollateralised

A fair value adjustment of £72m£45m is applied to account for the impact of incorporating the cost of funding into the valuation of uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivative portfolios and collateralised derivatives where the terms of the agreement do not allow the rehypothecation of collateral received. This adjustment is referred to as the ‘Funding Fair Value Adjustment’ (FFVA). FFVA has decreased by £28m£37m to £72m£45m mainly as a result of material trade unwinds and the reduction in the average maturity date of the portfolio as trades tend to maturity.unwinds.

FFVA is determined by calculating the net expected exposure at a counterparty level and applying a funding rate to these exposuresthe exposure that reflects the market cost of funding. Barclays’ internal Treasury rates are used as an input to the calculation. The approach takes into account the probability of default of each counterparty, as well as any mandatory break clauses.

FFVA incorporates a scaling factor which is an estimate of the extent to which the cost of funding is incorporated into observed traded levels. On calibrating the scaling factor, it is with the assumption that Credit Valuation Adjustments (CVA) and Debit Valuation Adjustments (DVA) are retained as valuation components incorporated into such levels. The effect of incorporating this scaling factor at 31 December 20152017 was to reduce FFVA by £216m (2014: £300m)£138m (2016: £246m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  247


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Uncollateralised derivative trading activity is used to determine this scaling factor. The trading history analysed includes new trades, terminations, trade restructures and novations. The FFVA balance and movement is driven by the Barclays’ own cost of funding spread over LIBOR, counterparty default probabilities and recovery rates, as well as the market value of the underlying derivatives. Movementsapproach outlined above has been in the market value of the portfolio in scope for FFVA are mainly driven by interest rates, inflation rates and foreign exchange levels.use since 2012 with no significant changes.

Barclays continues to monitor market practices and activity to ensure the approach to uncollateralised derivative valuation remains appropriate. The above approach has been in use since 2012 with no significant changes.

Derivative credit and debit valuation adjustments

Credit valuation adjustments (CVA)CVA and debit valuation adjustments (DVA)DVA are incorporated into derivative valuations to reflect the impact on fair value of counterparty credit risk and Barclays’ own credit quality respectively. These adjustments are calculated for uncollateralised and partially collateralised derivatives across all asset classes. CVA and DVA are calculated using estimates of exposure at default, probability of default and recovery rates, at a counterparty level. Counterparties include but(but are not limited to,to) corporates, monolines, sovereigns and sovereign agencies supranationals and special purpose vehicles.supranationals.

Exposure at default is generally based on expected exposure, estimated through the simulation of underlying risk factors. For some complex products, where this approach is not feasible, simplifying assumptions are made, eitherfactors through approximating with a more vanilla structure, or by using current or scenario basedscenario-based mark to market as an estimate of future exposure. Where a strong CSA exists to mitigate counterparty credit risk, the exposure at default is set to zero.

Probability of default and recovery rate information is generally sourced from the CDS markets. For counterparties whereWhere this information is not available, or considered unreliable, due to the nature of the exposure, alternative approaches are taken based on mapping internal counterparty ratings onto historical or market basedmarket-based default and recovery information. In particular, this applies to sovereign related names where the effect of using the recovery assumptions implied in CDS levels would imply a £56m (2014: £120m)£50m (2016: £95m) increase in CVA.

Correlation between counterparty credit and underlying derivative risk factors, may lead to a systematic bias in the valuation of counterparty credittermed‘wrong-way,’ or‘right-way’ risk, termed ‘wrong way’ or ‘right way’ risk. This is not systematically incorporated into the CVA calculation but risk of ‘wrong way’is adjusted where the underlying exposure is controlled atdirectly related to the trade origination stage.counterparty.

CVA decreased by £91m£134m to £327m,£103m, primarily due to reductionreductions in the average maturity date of the portfolio as trades tend to maturity. In addition, there was a reduction in monoline CVA of £15m due todriven by trade unwinds. DVA increasedreduced by £12m£111m to £189m,£131m, primarily as a result of Barclays’ credit spreads deteriorating.tightening and trade unwinds.

Portfolio exemptions

The Group uses the portfolio exemption in IFRS 13Fair Value Measurement to measure the fair value of groups of financial assets and liabilities. Instruments are measured using the price that would be received to sell a net long position i.e.(i.e. an asset,asset) for a particular risk exposure or to transfer a net short position i.e.(i.e. a liability,liability) for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction between market participants at the balance sheet date under current market conditions. Accordingly, the Group measures the fair value of the group of financial assets and liabilities consistently with how market participants would price the net risk exposure at the measurement date.

Unrecognised gains as a result of the use of valuation models using unobservable inputs

The amount that has yetFor instruments where fair value cannot be evidenced by reference to be recognised in income that relates toobservable market data, initial recognition occurs at the transaction price. This is achieved by recognising a reserve for the difference between the transaction price, i.e. theunobservable fair value and transaction price.

For financial instruments measured at initial recognition, andfair value on an ongoing basis the amount that would have arisen had valuation models using unobservable inputs been used on initial recognition, less amounts subsequently recognised, is £101m (2014: £96m)reserve was £109m (2016: £179m). There areDuring 2017 there were additions of £35m (2014: nil)£34m (2016: £29m) and £31m (2014: £41m) of amortisation and releases.

The reserve held for unrecognised gains is predominantly related to derivative financial instruments.releases of £104m (2016: £37m).

Third party credit enhancements

Structured and brokered certificates of deposit issued by Barclays Group are insured up to $250,000 per depositor by the Federal Deposit Insurance Corporation (FDIC) in the US. The FDIC is funded by premiums that Barclays and other banks pay for deposit insurance coverage. The carrying value of these issued certificates of deposit that are designated under the IAS 39 fair value option includes this third party credit enhancement. Theon-balance sheet value of these brokered certificates of deposit amounted to £3,729m (2014: £3,650m)£4,070m (2016: £3,905m).

Valuation control framework

The valuation control framework covers fair value positions and is a key control in ensuring the material accuracy of valuations.

The valuation control function within Finance is responsible for independent price verification, oversight of prudent and fair value adjustments and escalation of valuation issues.

Governance over the valuation process is the responsibility of the Valuation Committee, and this is the governance forum to which valuation issues are escalated.

The Valuation Committee meets on a monthly basis and is responsible for overseeing valuation policy and practice within the Group. It provides reports to the Board Audit Committee, which examines the judgements taken on valuation and related disclosures.

Price verification uses independently sourced data that is deemed most representative of the market. The characteristics against which the data source is assessed are independence, reliability, consistency with other sources and evidence that the data represents an executable price. The most current data available at the balance sheet date is used. Where significant variances are noted in the independent price verification process, an adjustment is made to fair value. Additional fair value adjustments may be made to reflect such factors as bid-offer spreads, market data uncertainty, model limitations and counterparty risk. Further detail on these fair value adjustments is disclosed on page 247.

 

248  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    227


 


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

    

 

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiesfinancial instrumentscontinued

Comparison of carrying amounts and fair values for assets and liabilities not held at fair value

The following table summarises the fair value of financial assets and liabilities measured at amortised cost on the Group’s balance sheet:

 

As at 31 December 2015     
 

 

Carrying
amount

£m

  
  

  

   

 

 

Fair

value

£m

  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Quoted
market
prices

(Level 1)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

   
 

 

 

Observable
inputs

(Level 2)

£m

  
  

  

  

   
 
 

 

 

Significant
unobservable
inputs

(Level 3)

£m

  
  
  

  

  

    2017 2016 
    

Carrying

amount

£m

 

Fair value

£m

 

Level 1

£m

 

Level 2

£m

 

Level 3

£m

 

Carrying

amount

£m

 

Fair value

£m

 

Level 1

£m

 

Level 2

£m

 

Level 3

£m

 
Financial assets                       
Held to maturity  5,109  5,285  5,285         5,176   5,347   5,347       
Loans and advances to banks     41,349     41,301     5,933     34,125     1,243    35,663  35,660  3,701  31,959      43,251   43,228   7,256   34,987   985 
Loans and advances to customers:                       
– Home loans     155,863     151,431               151,431    147,002  145,262        145,262   144,765   141,155         141,155 
– Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending     67,840     67,805     1,148     284     66,373    55,767  55,106  655     54,451   57,808   57,699   737   42   56,920 
– Finance lease receivables     4,776     4,730        
– Corporate loans     170,738     169,697     585     129,847     39,265  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga     28,187     28,187          28,187       
Financial liabilities            
Deposits from banks     (47,080   (47,080   (4,428   (42,652     
Customer accounts:            
– Current and demand accounts     (147,122   (147,121   (130,439   (16,537   (145
– Savings accounts     (135,567   (135,600   (122,029   (13,537   (34
– Other time deposits     (135,553   (135,796   (43,025   (84,868   (7,903
Debt securities in issue     (69,150   (69,863   (190   (69,122   (551
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga     (25,035   (25,035        (25,035     
Subordinated liabilities     (21,467   (22,907        (22,907     
As at 31 December 2014            
Financial assets            
Loans and advances to banks     42,111     42,088     2,693     38,756     639  
Loans and advances to customers:            
– Home loans     166,974     159,602               159,602  
– Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending     63,583     63,759     1,214     488     62,057  
– Finance lease receivables     5,439     5,340        

– Finance lease receivablesa

  2,854  2,964            1,602   1,598    
– Corporate loans     191,771     188,805     233     143,231     45,341    159,929  157,890     109,140  48,750   188,609   186,715    126,979   59,736 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending     131,753     131,753     2     131,751         12,546  12,546     12,546      13,454   13,454      13,454    
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for saleb  1,164  1,195        1,195   43,593   44,838   1,070   4,614   39,154 
Financial liabilities                       
Deposits from banks     (58,390   (58,388   (4,257   (54,117   (14  (37,723 (37,729 (4,375 (33,354     (48,214  (48,212  (5,256  (42,895  (61
Customer accounts:                       
– Current and demand accounts     (143,057   (143,085   (126,732   (16,183   (170  (145,950 (145,927 (145,927        (138,204  (138,197  (127,258  (10,921  (18
– Savings accounts     (131,163   (131,287   (116,172   (15,086   (29  (134,339 (134,369 (134,369        (133,344  (133,370  (120,471  (12,891  (8
– Other time deposits     (153,484   (153,591   (43,654   (101,736   (8,201  (148,832 (148,897 (62,750 (80,296 (5,851  (151,630  (151,632  (48,853  (96,240  (6,539
Debt securities in issue     (86,099   (87,522   (188   (87,334       (73,314 (74,752    (72,431 (2,321  (75,932  (76,971  (196  (74,712  (2,063
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing     (124,479   (124,479   (423   (124,056       (40,338 (40,338    (40,338     (19,760  (19,760     (19,760   
Subordinated liabilities     (21,153   (22,718        (22,701   (17  (23,826 (25,084    (25,084     (23,383  (24,547     (24,547   
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for saleb                   (51,775  (51,788  (22,264  (28,998  (526

FairNotes

aThe fair value hierarchy for finance lease receivables is not required as part of the standard.
bDisposal groups held for sale and measured at fair value less cost to sell are included in the fair value table.

The fair value is an estimate of the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. As a wide range of valuation techniques are often available, it may not be appropriate to directly compare this fair value information to independent market sources or other financial institutions. Different valuation methodologies and assumptions can have a significant impact on fair values which are based on unobservable inputs.

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  249


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

18 Fair value of assets and liabilitiescontinued

Financial assets

The carrying value of financial assets held at amortised cost (including loans and advances to banks and customers, and other lending such as reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed) is determined in accordance with the relevant accounting policy noted on pages 253 and 254.in Note 20.

Loans and advances to banks

The fair value of loans and advances, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price for lending to issuers of similar credit quality. Where market data or credit information on the underlying borrowers is unavailable, a number of proxy/extrapolation techniques are employed to determine the appropriate discount rates.

There is minimal difference between the fair value and carrying amount due to the short termshort-term nature of the lending, (i.e.i.e. predominantly overnight deposits)deposit, and the high credit quality of counterparties.

Loans and advances to customers

The fair value of loans and advances to customers, for the purpose of this disclosure, is derived from discounting expected cash flows in a way that reflects the current market price for lending to issuers of similar credit quality.

For retail lending, (i.e.i.e. home loans and credit cards)cards, tailored discounted cash flow models are predominantly used to estimate the fair value of different product types. For example, for home loans different models are used to estimate fair values of tracker, offset and fixed rate mortgage products.

Key inputs to these models are the differentials between historic and current product margins and estimated prepayment rates.

The discount of fair value to carrying amount for home loans has reduced to 2.8% (2014: 4.4%1.2% (2016: 2.5%) due to changes in product mix across the loan portfolio and movements in product margins.

The fair value of corporate loans is calculated by the use of discounted cash flow techniques where the gross loan values are discounted at a rate of difference between contractual margins and hurdle rates or spreads where Barclays charges a margin over LIBOR depending on credit quality and loss given default and years to maturity. The discount between the carrying and fair value has decreasedincreased to 0.6% (2014: 1.5%1.3% (2016: 1.0%).

228    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


18 Fair value of financial instrumentscontinued

Reverse repurchase agreements

The fair value of reverse repurchase agreements approximates carrying amount as these balances are generally short dated and fully collateralised.

Financial liabilities

The carrying value of financial liabilities held at amortised cost (including customer accounts, other deposits, repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent, debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities) is determined in accordance with the accounting policy noted on pages 254 and 272.in Note 22.

Deposits from banks and customer accounts

In many cases, the fair value disclosed approximates carrying value because the instruments are short term in nature or have interest rates that reprice frequently, such as customer accounts and other deposits and short termshort-term debt securities.

The fair value for deposits with longer term maturities such asmainly time deposits, are estimated using discounted cash flows applying either market rates or current rates for deposits of similar remaining maturities. Consequently the fair value discount is minimal. There were transfers of £34,163m of deposits from banks and customers from Level 2 to Level 1 to reflect the market observability of these product types.

Debt securities in issue

Fair values of other debt securities in issue are based on quoted prices where available, or where the instruments are short dated, carrying amount approximates fair value. The fair value difference has decreasedincreased to 1.0% (2014: 1.7%2.0% (2016: 1.4%).

Repurchase agreements

The fair value of repurchase agreements approximates carrying amounts as these balances are generally short dated.

Subordinated liabilities

Fair values for dated and undated convertible andnon-convertible loan capital are based on quoted market rates for the issueissuer concerned or issuesissuers with similar terms and conditions.

250  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilities

In accordance with IAS 32Financial Instruments:Instruments: Presentation, the Group reports financial assets and financial liabilities on a net basis on the balance sheet only if there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is intention to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on:

 

§ all financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet

 

§ all derivative financial instruments and reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting arrangements or similar agreements, but do not qualify for balance sheet netting.

The table identifies the amounts that have been offset in the balance sheet and also those amounts that are covered by enforceable netting arrangements (offsetting arrangements and financial collateral) but do not qualify for netting under the requirements of IAS 32 described above.

The ‘Net amounts’ presented belowon the next page are not intended to represent the Group’s actual exposure to credit risk, as a variety of credit mitigation strategies are employed in addition to netting and collateral arrangements.

 

    Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements            
   Effects of offsetting on-balance sheet     Related amounts not offseta     Amounts not    
    
 
 
Gross
amounts
£m
  
  
  
   

 

 

Amounts

offset

£m

  

b 

  

   
 
 
 

 

Net amounts
reported on
the balance
sheet

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Financial
instruments
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 
Financial
collateral
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Net amount
£m
  
  
   

 

 

 

 

subject to

enforceable

netting

arrangements

£m

  

  

  

c 

  

   

 

 

Balance sheet

total

£m

  

d 

  

As at 31 December 2015                
Derivative financial assetse   328,692     (7,685   321,007     (259,582   (42,402   19,023     6,702     327,709  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   33,805     (11,220   22,585          (22,299   286     5,602     28,187  
Reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair valuef   135,792     (91,668   44,124          (44,101   23     5,389     49,513  
Total assets   498,289     (110,573   387,716     (259,582   (108,802   19,332     17,693     405,409  
Derivative financial liabilitiese   (325,984   7,645     (318,339   259,582     40,124     (18,633   (5,913   (324,252
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   (30,525   10,687     (19,838        19,838          (5,197   (25,035
Repurchase agreements designated at fair valuef   (141,126   92,201     (48,925        48,364     (561   (1,913   (50,838
Total liabilities   (497,635   110,533     (387,102   259,582     108,326     (19,194   (13,023   (400,125
As at 31 December 2014                
Derivative financial assets   617,981     (182,274   435,707     (353,631   (52,278   29,798     4,202     439,909  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   204,895     (97,254   107,641          (106,436   1,205     24,112     131,753  
Reverse repurchase agreements designated at fair value   4,119          4,119          (3,918   201     1,117     5,236  
Total assets   826,995     (279,528   547,467     (353,631   (162,632   31,204     29,431     576,898  
Derivative financial liabilities   (617,161   184,496     (432,665   353,631     54,311     (24,723   (6,655   (439,320
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing   (202,218   97,254     (104,964        104,023     (941   (19,515   (124,479
Repurchase agreements designated at fair value   (4,256        (4,256        3,942     (314   (1,167   (5,423
Total liabilities   (823,635   281,750     (541,885   353,631     162,276     (25,978   (27,337   (569,222
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    229


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

    

    

19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilitiescontinued

    Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements         
    Effects of offsetting on-balance  sheet  Related amounts not offseta       
As at 31 December 2017   

Gross

amounts

£m

 

 

 

  

Amounts

offset

£m

 

b 

 

  

Net amounts

reported on

the balance

sheet

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

Financial

instruments

£m

 

 

 

  

Financial

collateral

£m

 

 

 

  

Net

amount

£m

 

 

 

  

Amounts not

subject to

enforceable

netting

arrange-

ments

£m

 

 

 

 

 

c 

 

  

Balance

sheet total

£m

 

d 

 

Derivative financial assets   256,881   (21,638  235,243   (184,265  (39,262  11,716   2,426   237,669 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinge   326,340   (223,495  102,845      (102,380  465   9,741   112,586 
Total assets   583,221   (245,133  338,088   (184,265  (141,642  12,181   12,167   350,255 
Derivative financial liabilities   (253,030  21,065   (231,965  184,265   36,444   (11,256  (6,380  (238,345
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinge   (374,616  223,495   (151,121     151,073   (48  (15,908  (167,029
Total liabilities   (627,646  244,560   (383,086  184,265   187,517   (11,304  (22,288  (405,374
As at 31 December 2016         
Derivative financial assets   353,078   (11,934  341,144   (273,602  (49,923  17,619   5,482   346,626 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   257,430   (187,262  70,168      (69,932  236   6,448   76,616 
Total assets   610,508   (199,196  411,312   (273,602  (119,855  17,855   11,930   423,242 
Derivative financial liabilities   (345,752  10,962   (334,790  273,602   47,383   (13,805  (5,697  (340,487
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinge   (257,854  187,262   (70,592     68,897   (1,695  (4,878  (75,470
Total liabilities   (603,606  198,224   (405,382  273,602   116,280   (15,500  (10,575  (415,957

Notes

aFinancial collateral of £42,402m (2014: £52,278m)£39,262m (2016: £49,923m) was received in respect of derivative assets, including £34,918m (2014: £44,047m)£33,092m (2016: £41,641m) of cash collateral and £7,484m (2014: £8,231m)£6,170m (2016: £8,282m) ofnon-cash collateral. Financial collateral of £40,124m (2014: £54,311m)£36,444m (2016: £47,383m) was placed in respect of derivative liabilities, including £35,464m (2014: £43,768m)£32,575m (2016: £43,763m) of cash collateral and £4,660m (2014: £10,543m)£3,869m (2016: £3,620m) ofnon-cash collateral. The collateral amounts are limited to net balance sheet exposure so as to not include over-collateralisation. Of the £34,918m, (2014: £44,047m)£33,092m (2016: £41,641m) cash collateral held, £27,732m, (2014: £33,769m)£19,351m (2016: £26,834m) was included in deposits from banks and £7,186m (2014: £10,278m)£13,741m (2016: £14,807m), was included in customer accounts. Of the £35,464m, (2014: £43,768m)£32,575m (2016: £43,763m) cash collateral placed, £13,238m (2014: £16,815m)£14,493m (2016: £17,587m) was included in loans and advances to banks and £22,226m (2014: £26,953m)£18,082m (2016: £26,176m) was included in loans and advances to customers.
bAmounts offset for Derivative financial assets include cash collateral netted of £572m (2014: £1,052m)£2,393m (2016: £972m). Amounts offset for Derivative financial liabilities include cash collateral netted of £532m (2014: £3,274m)£1,820m (2016: £nil). Settlements assets and liabilities have been offset amounting to £8,886m (2014: £13,258m)£13,241m (2016: £10,486m). No other significant recognised financial assets and liabilities were offset in the balance sheet. Therefore, the only balance sheet categories necessary for inclusion in the table are those shown above.
cThis column includes contractual rights of set offset-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.
dThe balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.
eThe decrease in amounts offset is due to the conversion of Barclays daily collateralised interest rate swaps with LCH Clearnet Ltd, for which the collateral was offset against the derivative exposure, into daily settled interest rate swaps in December 2015. This led to a reduction in gross balances available to be offset. The derivative notional disclosure in Note 15 includes the notional of the daily settled interest rate swaps.
fDuring 2015, new reverse repurchaseRepurchase and Reverse Repurchase agreements include instruments at amortised cost and repurchaseinstruments designated at fair value through profit and loss. Reverse Repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated atof £112,586m (2016: £76,616m) is split by fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk£100,040m (2016: £63,162m) and performance.amortised cost £12,546m (2016: £13,454m). Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing of £167,029m (2016: £75,470m) is split by fair value £126,691m (2016: £55,710m) and amortised cost £40,338m (2016: £19,760m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  251


Notes to the financial statements

Assets and liabilities held at fair value

19 Offsetting financial assets and financial liabilitiescontinued

Derivative assets and liabilities

The ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set offset-off under netting agreements, such as the ISDA Master Agreement or derivative exchange or clearing counterparty agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset andclose-out netting applied across all outstanding transactiontransactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.

Financial collateral refers to cash andnon-cash collateral obtained, typically daily or weekly, to cover the net exposure between counterparties by enabling the collateral to be realised in an event of default or if other predetermined events occur.

Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing

The ‘Amounts offset’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as global master repurchase agreementsGlobal Master Repurchase Agreements and global master securities lending agreements,Global Master Securities Lending Agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset andclose-out netting applied across all outstanding transactiontransactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur.

Financial collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which are legally transferred and can be liquidated in the event of counterparty default.

These offsetting and collateral arrangements and other credit risk mitigation strategies used by the Group are further explained in the Credit risk mitigation section on page 100.

86.

 

252  |  230    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Notes to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

    

    

 

The notes included in this section focus on assets that are held at amortised cost arising from the Group’s retail and wholesale lending including loans and advances, finance leases, repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and similar secured lending. Detail regarding the Group’s capitalliquidity and liquiditycapital position can be found on pages 154124 to 171.

145.

20 Loans and advances to banks and customers

 

 

Accounting for financial instruments held at amortised cost

Loans and advances to customers and banks, customer accounts, debt securities and most financial liabilities are held at amortised cost. That is, the initial fair value (which is normally the amount advanced or borrowed) is adjusted for repayments and the amortisation of coupon, fees and expenses to represent the effective interest rate of the asset or liability.

In accordance with IAS 39, where the Group no longer intends to trade in financial assets, it may transfer them out of the held for trading classification and measure them at amortised cost if they meet the definition of a loan. The initial value used for the purposes of establishing amortised cost is fair value on the date of the transfer.

As at 31 December   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Gross loans and advances to banks   41,349     42,111  
Less: allowance for impairment          
Loans and advances to banks   41,349     42,111  
Gross loans and advances to customers   404,138     433,222  
Less: allowance for impairment   (4,921   (5,455
Loans and advances to customers   399,217     427,767  

Further information on the Group’s loans and advances to banks and customers and impairment allowancesbanks, customer accounts, debt securities and most financial liabilities, are held at amortised cost. That is, includedthe initial fair value (which is normally the amount advanced or borrowed) is adjusted for repayments and the amortisation of coupon, fees and expenses to represent the effective interest rate of the asset or liability. Balances deferred on pages 117balance sheet as EIR adjustments are amortised to 118.interest income over the life of the financial instrument to which they relate.

Prior to 2010,In accordance with IAS 39, where the Group reclassified certainno longer intends to trade in financial assets originally classified asit may transfer them out of the held for trading that were deemed to beclassification and measure them at amortised cost if they meet the definition of a loan. The initial value used for the purposes of establishing amortised cost is fair value on the date of the transfer.

As at 31 December  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Gross loans and advances to banks   35,663   43,251 
Less: allowance for impairment       
Loans and advances to banks   35,663   43,251 
Gross loans and advances to customers       370,204       397,404 
Less: allowance for impairment   (4,652  (4,620
Loans and advances to customers   365,552   392,784 

21 Finance leases

Accounting for finance leases

The Group applies IAS 17Leases in accounting for finance leases, both where it is the lessor or the lessee. A finance lease is a lease which confers substantially all the risks and rewards of the leased assets on the lessee. Where the Group is the lessor, the leased asset is not held for trading purposes to loans and advances. The carrying value and fair value of securities reclassified into loans and advances is £975m (2014: £1,862m) and £958m (2014: £1,834m) respectively.

If the reclassifications had not been made, the Group’s income statement for 2015 would have included a net gain on the reclassified trading assetsbalance sheet; instead a finance lease receivable is recognised representing the minimum lease payments receivable under the terms of £12m (2014: gainthe lease, discounted at the rate of £57m).

21 Finance leasesinterest implicit in the lease. Where the Group is the lessee, the leased asset is recognised in property, plant and equipment and a finance lease liability is recognised, representing the minimum lease payments payable under the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease.

Interest income or expense is recognised in interest receivable or payable, allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic rate of return.

Accounting for finance leases

The Group applies IAS 17Leases in accounting for finance leases, both where it is the lessor or the lessee. A finance lease is a lease which confers substantially all the risks and rewards of the leased assets on the lessee. Where the Group is the lessor, the leased asset is not held on the balance sheet; instead a finance lease receivable is recognised representing the minimum lease payments receivable under the terms of the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease. Where the Group is the lessee, the leased asset is recognised in property, plant and equipment and a finance lease liability is recognised, representing the minimum lease payments payable under the lease, discounted at the rate of interest implicit in the lease.

Interest income or expense is recognised in interest receivable or payable, allocated to accounting periods to reflect a constant periodic rate of return.

Finance lease receivables

Finance lease receivables are included within loans and advances to customers. The Group engagesspecialises in asset-based lendingthe provision of leasing and works withother asset finance facilities across a broad range of international technology, industrial equipment and commercial companiesasset types to provide customised finance programmes to assist manufacturers, dealers and distributors of assets.business customers.

 

   2015   2014  
       Present           Present    
   Gross       value of       Gross       value of    
   investment       minimum     Un-     investment       minimum     Un-  
   in finance     Future     lease     guaranteed     in finance     Future     lease     guaranteed  
   lease     finance     payments     residual     lease     finance     payments     residual  
   receivables     income     receivable     values     receivables     income     receivable     values    2017   2016 
   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    

Gross

investment

in finance

lease

  receivables

£m

   

Future

finance

    income

£m

 

Present

value of

minimum

lease

payments

  receivable

£m

   

Un-

  guaranteed

residual

values

£m

   

Gross

investment

in finance

lease

  receivables

£m

   

Future

finance

    income

£m

 

Present

value of

minimum

lease

payments

  receivable

£m

   

Un-

  guaranteed

residual

values

£m

 
Not more than one year   1,826     (230   1,596     117     2,139     (304   1,835     125     1,130    (91 1,039    69    646    (37  609    60 
Over one year but not more than five years   3,569     (555   3,014     275     4,159     (682   3,477     293     1,750    (135 1,615    156    986    (57  929    132 
Over five years   224     (32   192     21     213     (40   173     17     284    (32 252    21    73    (4  69    19 
Total   5,619     (817   4,802     413     6,511     (1,026   5,485     435     3,164    (258 2,906    246    1,705    (98  1,607    211 

Following a review in 2017, a portfolio of assets within loans and advances to customers has been identified as finance leases. This has resulted in an increase in the finance lease receivables balance of £1,537m in 2017 as reflected in the table above.

The impairment allowance for uncollectable finance lease receivables is £56m (2014: £82m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  253


Notesamounted to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

21 Finance leasescontinued£57m (2016: £6m).

Finance lease liabilities

The Group leases items of property, plant and equipment on terms that meet the definition of finance leases. Finance lease liabilities are included within Note 26 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities.26.

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the total future minimum payments under finance leases were nil (2014: £14m)£20m (2016: £15m). The carrying amount of assets held under finance leases was nil (2014: £31m)£9m (2016: £15m).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    231


Notes to the financial statements

Financial instruments held at amortised cost

22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

Reverse repurchase agreements (and stock borrowing or similar transaction) are a form of secured lending whereby the Group provides a loan or cash collateral in exchange for the transfer of collateral, generally in the form of marketable securities subject to an agreement to transfer the securities back at a fixed price in the future. Repurchase agreements are where the Group obtains such loans or cash collateral, in exchange for the transfer of collateral.

 

Accounting for reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

The Group purchases (a reverse repurchase agreement) or borrows securities subject to a commitment to resell or return them. The securities are not included in the balance sheet as the Group does not acquire the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration paid (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a loan asset at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

The Group may also sell (a repurchase agreement) or lend securities subject to a commitment to repurchase or redeem them. The securities are retained on the balance sheet as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration received (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a financial liability at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Assets        
Banks     8,954       39,528  
Customers     19,233       92,225  
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lendinga     28,187       131,753  
Liabilities        
Banks     13,951       49,940  
Customers     11,084       74,539  
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowinga     25,035       124,479  

 

Accounting for reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing

The Group purchases (a reverse repurchase agreement) or borrows securities subject to a commitment to resell or return them. The securities are not included in the balance sheet as the Group does not acquire the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration paid (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a loan asset at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

The Group may also sell (a repurchase agreement) or lend securities subject to a commitment to repurchase or redeem them. The securities are retained on the balance sheet as the Group retains substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership. Consideration received (or cash collateral provided) is accounted for as a financial liability at amortised cost, unless it is designated at fair value through profit and loss.

 

Note

aDuring 2015, new reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance (see Notes 14 and 17 for further detail).

As at 31 December  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 
Assets    
Banks   7,374    2,769 
Customers   5,172    10,685 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending at amortised cost   12,546    13,454 
Liabilities    
Banks   30,105    12,820 
Customers   10,233    6,940 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing at amortised cost       40,338        19,760 

 

254  |  232    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

    

 

 

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’snon-current tangible and intangible

assets and property, plant and equipment, which provide long-term future economic benefits.

 

23 Property, plant and equipment

 

Accounting for property, plant and equipment

The Group applies IAS 16Property, Plant and Equipment and IAS 40Investment Properties.

Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, which includes direct and incremental acquisition costs less accumulated depreciation and provisions for impairment, if required. Subsequent costs are capitalised if these result in an

Accounting for property, plant and equipment

The Group applies IAS 16Property Plant and Equipment and IAS 40Investment Properties.

Property, plant and equipment is stated at cost, which includes direct and incremental acquisition costs less accumulated depreciation and provisions for impairment, if required. Subsequent costs are capitalised if these result in the enhancement to the asset.

Depreciation is provided on the depreciable amount of items of property, plant and equipment on a straight-line basis over their estimated useful economic lives. Depreciation rates, methods and the residual values underlying the calculation of depreciation of items of property, plant and equipment are kept under review to take account of any change in circumstances. The Group uses the following annual rates in calculating depreciation:

 

Annual rates in calculating depreciation  Depreciation rate
Freehold land  Not depreciated
Freehold buildings and long-leasehold property (more than 50 years to run)  2-3.3%
Leasehold property over the remaining life of the lease (less than 50 years to run)  Over the remaining life of the lease
Costs of adaptation of freehold and leasehold property  6-10%
Equipment installed in freehold and leasehold property  6-10%
Computers and similar equipment  17-33%
Fixtures and fittings and other equipment  9-20%

Where leasehold property has a remaining useful life of less than 17 years, costs of adaptation and installed equipment are depreciated over the remaining life of the lease.

Investment property

The Group initially recognises investment property at cost, and subsequently at fair value at each balance sheet date, reflecting market conditions at the reporting date. Gains and losses on remeasurement are included in the income statement.

 

    

Investment
property

£m

  

  Property

£m

  

  Equipment

£m

  

Leased
assets

£m

  

Total

£m

 
Cost      
As at 1 January 2017   81   3,429   3,840   10   7,360 
Additions   114   220   299      633 
Disposals   (69  (18  (1.082  (1  (1,170
Change in fair value of investment properties   (5           (5
Exchange and other movements   (5  (138  (309     (452
As at 31 December 2017   116   3,493   2,748   9   6,366 
Accumulated depreciation and impairment        
As at 1 January 2017      (1,483  (3,043  (9  (4,535
Depreciation charge      (171  (275     (446
Impairment    (28        (28
Disposals         972      972 
Exchange and other movements      14   229      243 
As at 31 December 2017      (1,668  (2,117  (9  (3,794
Net book value   116   1,825   631      2,572 
Cost      
As at 1 January 2016   140   3,919   4,259   62   8,380 
Additions      167   370      537 
Disposals   (6  (761  (631     (1,398
Change in fair value of investment properties                
Exchange and other movementsa   (53  104   (158  (52  (159
As at 31 December 2016   81   3,429   3,840   10   7,360 
Accumulated depreciation and impairment        
As at 1 January 2016      (1,697  (3,177  (38  (4,912
Depreciation charge      (186  (327     (513
Disposals      635   405      1,040 
Exchange and other movementsa      (235  56   29   (150
As at 31 December 2016      (1,483  (3,043  (9  (4,535
Net book value   81   1,946   797   1   2,825 

Notes

aIncludes property, plant and equipment relating to BAGL of £627m (cost of £1,066m less accumulated depreciation of £439m) which was reclassified to held for sale.

 

    
 

 

Investment
property

£m

  
  

  

   

 

Property

£m

  

  

   

 

Equipment

£m

  

  

   
 
 
Leased
assets
£m
  
  
  
   

 

Total

£m

  

  

Cost          
As at 1 January 2015   207     4,054     4,350     10     8,621  
Additions and disposals   (71   22     173     49     173  
Change in fair value of investment properties   10                    10  
Exchange and other movements   (6   (157   (264   3     (424
As at 31 December 2015   140     3,919     4,259     62     8,380  
Accumulated depreciation and impairment          
As at 1 January 2015        (1,669   (3,157   (9   (4,835
Depreciation charge        (181   (373        (554
Disposals        144     159          303  
Exchange and other movements        9     194     (29   174  
As at 31 December 2015        (1,697   (3,177   (38   (4,912
Net book value   140     2,222     1,082     24     3,468  
Cost          
As at 1 January 2014   451     3,924     4,552     10     8,937  
Additions and disposals   (160   174     7          21  
Change in fair value of investment properties   (1                  (1
Exchange and other movements   (83   (44   (209        (336
As at 31 December 2014   207     4,054     4,350     10     8,621  
Accumulated depreciation and impairment          
As at 1 January 2014        (1,513   (3,201   (7   (4,721
Depreciation charge        (184   (399   (2   (585
Disposals        34     271          305  
Exchange and other movements        (6   172          166  
As at 31 December 2014        (1,669   (3,157   (9   (4,835
Net book value   207     2,385     1,193     1     3,786  
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    233


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

23 Property, plant and equipmentcontinued

Property rentals of £9m (2014: £5m)£2m (2016: £7m) and £9m (2014: £14m)£8m (2016: £6m) have been included in net investment income and other income respectively. Impairment of £38m (2014: £61m) was charged in the period.

The fair value of investment property is determined by reference to current market prices for similar properties, adjusted as necessary for condition and location, or by reference to recent transactions updated to reflect current economic conditions. Discounted cash flow techniques may be employed to calculate fair value where there have been no recent transactions, using current external market inputs such as market rents and interest rates. Valuations are carried out by management with the support of appropriately qualified independent valuers. Refer to Note 18 Fair value of assets and liabilities for further details.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  255


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

24 Goodwill and intangible assets

 

Accounting for goodwill and intangible assets

Goodwill

The carrying value of goodwill is determined in accordance with IFRS 3 Business Combinations and other intangible assets

Goodwill

The carrying value of goodwill is determined in accordance with IFRS 3Business Combinations andIAS 36 Impairment of Assets.

Goodwill arising on the acquisition of subsidiaries represents the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over the fair value of the

Group’s share of the assets acquired and the liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed on the date of the acquisition.

Goodwill is reviewed annually for impairment, or more frequently when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. The test involves comparing the carrying value of goodwill with the present value of the pre tax cash flows, discounted at a rate of interest that reflects the inherent risks, of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the goodwill relates, or the CGU’s fair value if this is higher.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets other than goodwill are accounted for in accordance with IAS 38 Intangible Assets.

Goodwill arises on the acquisition of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures, and represents the excess of the fair value of the purchase consideration over the fair value of the Group’s share of the assets acquired and the liabilities and contingent liabilities assumed on the date of the acquisition.

Goodwill is reviewed annually for impairment, or more frequently when there are indications that impairment may have occurred. The test involves comparing the carrying value of goodwill with the present value of the pre-tax cash flows, discounted at a rate of interest that reflects the inherent risks of the cash generating unit (CGU) to which the goodwill relates, or the CGU’s fair value if this is higher.

Intangible assets

Intangible assets other than goodwill are accounted for in accordance with IAS 38Intangible Assets and IAS 36Impairment of Assets.

Intangible assets include brands, customer lists, internally generated software, other software, licences and other contracts and core deposit intangibles. They are initially recognised when they are separable or arise from contractual or other legal rights, the cost can be measured reliably and, in the case of intangible assets not acquired in a business combination, where it is probable that future economic benefits attributable to the assets will flow from their use.

Intangible assets are stated at cost (which is, in the case of assets acquired in a business combination, the acquisition date fair value) less accumulated amortisation and provisions for impairment, if any, and are amortised over their useful lives in a manner that reflects the pattern to which they contribute to future cash flows, generally using the amortisation periods set out below:

 

Annual rates in calculating amortisation  Amortisation period
Goodwill  Not amortised
Internally generated softwarea  12 months to 6 years
Other software  12 months to 6 years
  Core deposits intangibles12 months to 25 years
  Brands12 months to 25 years
Customer lists  12 months to 25 years
Licences and other  12 months to 25 years

Intangible assets are reviewed for impairment when there are indications that impairment may have occurred.

Note

Intangible assets

aExceptions to the above rate relate to useful lives of certain core banking platforms that are reviewed for impairment when there are indications that impairment may have occurred.

assessed individually and, if appropriate, amortised over longer periods ranging from 10 to 15 years.

         Internally          Core                      
     generated     Other     deposit       Customer     Licences    
   Goodwill     software     software     intangibles     Brands     lists     and other     Total  
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
2015                
Cost                
As at 1 January 2015   6,329     3,240     482     186     112     1,721     447     12,517  
Additions and disposals   (515   998     75                    18     576  
Exchange and other movements   (211   (126   (15   (40   (26   (56   6     (468
As at 31 December 2015   5,603     4,112     542     146     86     1,665     471     12,625  
Accumulated amortisation and impairment                
As at 1 January 2015   (1,442   (1,257   (194   (88   (111   (962   (283   (4,337
Disposals   518     128     2                    3     651  
Amortisation charge        (421   (17   (6        (143   (30   (617
Impairment charge   (102   (101   (1   (1        (12        (217
Exchange and other movements   28     17     (2   20     25     36     (7   117  
As at 31 December 2015   (998   (1,634   (212   (75   (86   (1,081   (317   (4,403
Net book value   4,605     2,478     330     71          584     154     8,222  
2014                
Cost                
As at 1 January 2014   6,346     2,411     556     194     116     1,543     437     11,603  
Additions and disposals   36     702     176               123     7     1,044  
Exchange and other movements   (53   127     (250   (8   (4   55     3     (130
As at 31 December 2014   6,329     3,240     482     186     112     1,721     447     12,517  
Accumulated amortisation and impairment                
As at 1 January 2014   (1,468   (999   (217   (85   (97   (799   (253   (3,918
Disposals        98     21               14     2     135  
Amortisation charge        (306   (19   (7   (18   (142   (30   (522
Impairment charge        (74   (21             (5        (100
Exchange and other movements   26     24     42     4     4     (30   (2   68  
As at 31 December 2014   (1,442   (1,257   (194   (88   (111   (962   (283   (4,337
Net book value   4,887     1,983     288     98     1     759     164     8,180  

 

256  |  234    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

 

24 Goodwill and intangible assetscontinued

    

Goodwill

£m

  

Internally
  generated
software

£m

  

Other

  software
£m

  

  Customer
lists

£m

  

Licences

and other

£m

  

Total

£m

 
2017       
Cost       
As at 1 January 2017   4,847   4,927   204   1,708   551      12,237 
Additions and disposals      662   16   (15  13   676 
Exchange and other movements   (88  (88  207   (146  (45  (160
As at 31 December 2017   4,759   5,501   427   1,547   519   12,753 
Accumulated amortisation and impairment       
As at 1 January 2017   (930  (1,864  (143  (1,231  (343  (4,511
Disposals      207   10   15   24   256 
Amortisation charge      (546  (32  (101  (36  (715
Impairment charge      (52           (52
Exchange and other movements   70   60   (148  108   28   118 
As at 31 December 2017   (860  (2,195  (313  (1,209  (327  (4,904
Net book value   3,899   3,306   114   338   192   7,849 
2016       
Cost       
As at 1 January 2016   5,603   4,112   542   1,665   703   12,625 
Additions and disposals   (77  955   2   59   78   1,017 
Exchange and other movements   (679  (140  (340  (16  (230  (1,405
As at 31 December 2016   4,847   4,927   204   1,708   551   12,237 
Accumulated amortisation and impairment       
As at 1 January 2016   (998  (1,634  (212  (1,081  (478  (4,403
Disposals   77   46   1   14   12   150 
Amortisation charge      (476  (36  (129  (29  (670
Impairment charge      (72  (1     (1  (74
Exchange and other movements   (9  272   105   (35  153   486 
As at 31 December 2016   (930  (1,864  (143  (1,231  (343  (4,511
Net book value   3,917   3,063   61   477   208   7,726 

Goodwill

Goodwill is allocated to business operations according to business segments as follows:

 

      

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Personal and Corporate Banking

     3,472       3,471  

Africa Banking

     725       915  

Barclaycard

     408       427  

Barclays Non-Core

            74  

Total net book value of goodwill

         4,605           4,887  
    

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 
Barclays UK   3,574    3,556 
Barclays International   325    361 
Total net book value of goodwill     3,899        3,917 

Goodwill

Testing goodwill for impairment involves a significant amount of judgement. This includes the identification of independent CGUs and the allocation of goodwill to these units based on which units are expected to benefit from the acquisition. The allocation is reviewed following business reorganisation.reorganisations. Cash flow projections necessarily take into account changes in the market in which a business operates including the level of growth, competitive activity, and the impacts of regulatory change. Determining both the expectedpre-tax cash flows and the risk adjusted interest rate appropriate to the operating unit requires the exercise of judgement. The estimation ofpre-tax cash flows is sensitive to the periods for which detailed forecasts are available and to assumptions regarding long-term sustainable cash flows.

Other intangible assets

Determining the estimated useful lives of intangible assets (such as those arising from contractual relationships) requires an analysis of circumstances. The assessment of whether an asset is exhibiting indicators of impairment as well as the calculation of impairment, which requires the estimationestimate of future cash flows and fair values less costs to sell, also requires the preparation of cash flow forecasts and fair values for assets that may not be regularly bought and sold.

Impairment testing of goodwill

During 2015,2017, the Group recognised an impairment charge of £102m (2014: nil) primarily attributable to Non-Core and the withdrawal of the Bespoke product in Barclaycard. This is as a result of the carrying amount of the goodwill relating to these businesses not being supported based on the value in use calculations.£nil (2016: £nil).

Key assumptions

The key assumptions used for impairment testing are set out below for each significant goodwill balance. Other goodwill of £881m (2014: £1,031m)£769m (2016: £787m) was allocated to multiple CGUs which are not considered individually significant.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    235


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

24 Goodwill and intangible assetscontinued

Personal and Corporate Banking (PCB)Barclays UK

Goodwill relating to Woolwich in Personal Banking and Business Banking was £3,225m (2014: £3,225m)£3,130m (2016: £3,130m) of the total PCBBarclays UK balance. The carrying value of the CGU ishas been determined by using an allocation of total Group shareholder funds excluding goodwill based on the CGU’s share of risk weighted assets before goodwill balances are added back.net asset value. The recoverable amount of the CGU, calculated as value in use, has been determined using cash flow predictions based on financial budgets approved by management and covering a three-yearfive-year period, with a terminal growth rate of 2.4% (2014: 2.4%2.0% (2016: 2.0%) applied thereafter. The forecast cash flows have been discounted at apre-tax rate of 11.4% (2014: 11.0%13.9% (2016: 14.6%). Based on these assumptions, the recoverable amount exceeded the carrying amount including goodwill by £24,811m (2014: £17,260m)£5,262m (2016: £4,130m). A one percentage point change in the discount rate or terminal growth rate would increase or decrease the recoverable amount by £4,860m (2014: £2,888m)£1,128m (2016: £988m) and £3,422m (2014: £2,070m)£734m (2016: £615m) respectively. A reduction in the forecast cash flows of 10% per annum would reduce the recoverable amount by £4,835m (2014: £2,697m)£1,409m (2016: £1,293m).

The increase in headroom in 2017 reflects changes in discount rate and future cash flow projections.

Africa25 Operating leases

Goodwill relating to the Absa Retail Bank CGU was £499m (2014: £631m)

Accounting for operating leases

The Group applies IAS 17Leases, for operating leases. An operating lease is a lease where substantially all of the total Africa Banking balance. The carrying valuerisks and rewards of the CGU has been determined by using net asset value.leased assets remain with the lessor. Where the Group is the lessor, lease income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease unless another systematic basis is more appropriate. The recoverable amount of Absa Retail Bank has been determined using cash flow predictions basedGroup holds the leased assets on financial budgets approved by managementbalance sheet within property, plant and covering a three year period, with a terminal growth rate of 6% (2014: 6%) applied thereafter. The forecast cash flows have been discounted at a pre-tax rate of 18.5% (2014: 18.7%). The recoverable amount calculated based on value in use exceededequipment.

Where the carrying amount including goodwill by £2,946m (2014: £1,623m). A one percentage point changeGroup is the lessee, rentals payable are recognised as an expense in the discount rate orincome statement on a straight-line basis over the terminal growth rate would increase or decrease the recoverable amount by £349m (2014: £329m) and £221m (2014: £206m) respectively. A reduction in the forecast cash flows of 10% per annum would reduce the recoverable amount by £469m (2014: £440m).lease term unless another systematic basis is more appropriate.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  257


Notes to the financial statements

Non-current assets and other investments

25 Operating leases

Accounting for operating leases

The Group applies IAS 17Leases, for operating leases. An operating lease is a lease where substantially all of the risks and rewards of the leased assets remain with the lessor. Where the Group is the lessor, lease income is recognised on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease unless another systematic basis is more appropriate. The Group holds the leased assets on-balance sheet within property, plant and equipment.

Where the Group is the lessee, rentals payable are recognised as an expense in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease term unless another systematic basis is more appropriate.

Operating lease receivables

The Group acts as lessor, whereby items of plant and equipment are purchased and then leased to third parties under arrangements qualifying as operating leases. The future minimum lease payments expected to be received undernon-cancellable operating leases was £1m (2014: £1m)£nil (2016: £nil).

Operating lease commitments

The Group leases various offices, branches and other premises undernon-cancellable operating lease arrangements. With such operating lease arrangements, the asset is kept on the lessor’s balance sheet and the Group reports the future minimum lease payments as an expense over the lease term. The leases have various terms, escalation and renewal rights. There are no contingent rents payable.

Operating lease rentals of £500m (2014: £594m)£342m (2016: £560m) have been included in administration and general expenses.

The future minimum lease payments by the Group undernon-cancellable operating leases are as follows:

 

   2015   2014    2017   2016 
   
 
Property
£m
  
  
   
 
Equipment
£m
  
  
   
 
Property
£m
  
  
   
 
Equipment
£m
  
  
  

Property

£m

   

  Equipment

£m

   

  Property

£m

   

  Equipment

£m

 

Not more than one year

   376     1     403     41     332    2    364     

Over one year but not more than five years

   1,127     11     1,147     106     844    21    974    23 

Over five years

   1,874          2,036          1,337        1,520     

Total

   3,377     12         3,586     147         2,513    23    2,858    23 

Total future minimum sublease payments to be received undernon-cancellable subleases were £1m (2014: £99m)was £53m (2016: £2m).

 

258  |  236    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

    

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s accruals, provisions and contingent liabilities. Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is probable that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated. Contingent liabilities reflect potential liabilities that are not recognised on the balance sheet.

26 Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

 

Accounting for insurance contracts
    

                2017

£m

   

                2016

£m

 
Accruals and deferred income   3,951      4,422 
Other creditors   4,563    4,382 
Obligations under finance leases (refer to Note 21)   20    15 
Insurance contract liabilities, including unit-linked liabilities   31    52 
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities   8,565    8,871 

27 Provisions

The Group applies IFRS 4Insurance Contracts to its insurance contracts. An insurance contract is a contract that compensates a third party against a loss from non-financial risk. Some wealth management and other products, such as life assurance contracts, combine investment and insurance features; these are treated as insurance contracts when they pay benefits that are at least 5% more than they would pay if the insured event does not occur.

Insurance liabilities include current best estimates of future contractual cash flows, claims handling, and administration costs in respect of claims. Liability adequacy tests are performed at each balance sheet date to ensure the adequacy of contract liabilities. Where a deficiency is highlighted by the tests, insurance liabilities are increased with any deficiency being recognised in the income statement.

Insurance premium revenue is recognised in the income statement in the period earned, net of reinsurance premiums payable, in net premiums from insurance contracts. Increases and decreases in insurance liabilities are recognised in the income statement in net claims and benefits on insurance contracts.

 

    

 

2015

£m

  

  

  

2014   

£m   

Accruals and deferred income

   4,271    4,770  

Other creditors

   3,770    3,851  

Obligations under finance leases (see Note 21)

       36  

Insurance contract liabilities, including unit-linked liabilities

   2,569    2,766  

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

       10,610        11,423  

AccrualsAccounting for provisions

The Group applies IAS 37Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and deferred income decreasedContingent Assets in accounting fornon-financial liabilities.

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, which can be reliably estimated. Provision is made for the anticipated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs when an obligation exists; for example, when the Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid expectations in those affected by 10%the restructuring by announcing its main features or starting to £4.3bn mainly driven by lower staff costsimplement the plan. Provision is made for undrawn loan commitments if it is probable that the facility will be drawn and administrativeresult in the recognition of an asset at an amount less than the amount advanced.

Critical accounting estimates and general costs accruedjudgements

The financial reporting of provisions involves a significant degree of judgement and is complex. Identifying whether a present obligation exists and estimating the probability, timing, nature and quantum of the outflows that may arise from past events requires judgements to be made based on the specific facts and circumstances relating to individual events and often requires specialist professional advice. When matters are at an early stage, accounting judgements and estimates can be difficult because of the high degree of uncertainty involved. Management continues to monitor matters as they develop tore-evaluate on an ongoing basis whether provisions should be recognised, however there can remain a wide range of possible outcomes and uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal, competition and regulatory matters, and as a result it is often not practicable to make meaningful estimates even when matters are at 31 December 2015.a more advanced stage.

Insurance liabilities relate principallyThe complexity of such matters often requires the input of specialist professional advice in making assessments to produce estimates. Customer redress and legal, competition and regulatory matters are areas where a higher degree of professional judgement is required. The amount that is recognised as a provision can also be very sensitive to the Group’s long-term business. Insurance contract liabilities associated with the Group’s short term non-life business are £115m (2014: £157m). The maximum amounts payable under allassumptions made in calculating it. This gives rise to a large range of the Group’s insurance products, ignoring the probabilitypotential outcomes which require judgement in determining an appropriate provision level. See below for information on payment protection redress and Note 29 for more detail of insured events occurringlegal, competition and the contribution from investments backing the insurance policies, were £65bn (2014: £82bn) or £49bn (2014: £74bn) after reinsurance. Of this insured risk, £55bn (2014: £69bn) or £43bn (2014: £66bn) after reinsurances was concentrated in short-term insurance contracts in Africa.regulatory matters.

The impact to the income statement and equity under a reasonably possible change in the assumptions used to calculate the insurance liabilities would be £5m (2014: £8m).

27 Provisions

 

Accounting for provisions

The Group applies IAS 37Provisions, Contingent Liabilities and Contingent Assets in accounting for non-financial liabilities.

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefit will be necessary to settle the obligation, which can be reliably estimated. Provision is made for the anticipated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs when an obligation exists. This is the case when the Group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business and has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring by announcing its main features or starting to implement the plan. A provision is made for undrawn loan commitments if it is probable that the facility will be drawn and results in the recognition of an asset at an amount less than the amount advanced.

      Undrawn          Legal,          Onerous
contracts
£m
  

Redundancy
and

restructuring

£m

  

Undrawn
contractually
committed
facilities and
guarantees

£m

  

 

Customer redress

  

Legal,
competition
and
regulatory
matters

£m

  

Sundry
provisions

£m

  

Total

£m

 
    contractually    Customer redress     competition         

Payment
  Protection
Insurance

£m

 

Other
  customer
redress

£m

  
   

 

 

Onerous

contracts

£m

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

Redundancy

and

restructuring

£m

  

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

committed

facilities and

guarantees

£m

  

  

  

  

  
 
 
 
Payment
Protection
Insurance
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
Other
customer
redress
£m
  
  
  
  
   

 

 

 

and

regulatory

matters

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Sundry

provisions

£m

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 1 January 2015   205   291   94   1,059     586     1,690     210     4,135  
As at 1 January 2017   385  206  67  1,979  712  455  330  4,134 
Additions   120   190   25   2,200     821     1,559     177     5,092     81  163  73  709  369  398  182  1,975 
Amounts utilised   (42 (136 (2 (1,171   (440   (2,616   (49   (4,456   (210 (124 (1 (1,094 (345 (341 (99 (2,214
Unused amounts reversed   (149 (140 (37       (32   (136   (86   (580   (33 (85 (60    (83 (55 (30 (346
Exchange and other movements   7   (19 (20 18     (39   (8   12     (49   2  (1    12  (14 (22 17  (6
As at 31 December 2015   141   186   60   2,106     896     489     264     4,142  
As at 31 December 2017   225  159  79  1,606  639  435  400      3,543 

Provisions expected to be recovered or settled within no more than 12 months after 31 December 20152017 were £2,113m (2014: £3,464m)£2,394m (2016: £2,045m).

Onerous contracts

Onerous contract provisions comprise an estimate of the costs involved with fulfilling the terms and conditions of contracts where the liability is higher than the amountnet of economic benefitany expected benefits to be received.

Redundancy and restructuring

These provisions comprise the estimated cost of restructuring, including redundancy costs where an obligation exists. Additions made during the year relate to formal restructuring plans and have either been utilised, or reversed, where total costs are now expected to be lower than the original provision amount.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  259


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

27 Provisionscontinued

Undrawn contractually committed facilities and guarantees

Provisions are made if it is probable that a facility will be drawn and the resulting asset is expected to have a realisable value that is less than the amount advanced.

Customer redress

Customer redress provisions comprise the estimated cost of making redress payments to customers, clients and counterparties for losses or damages associated with inappropriate judgement in the execution of ourBarclays’ business activities. Provisions for other customer redress include £282m (2014: nil) in respect of Packaged Bank Accounts and £290m (2014: nil)£211m (2016: £264m) in respect of historic pricing practices associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions for certain customers between 2005 and 2012 and smaller provisions across the retail and corporate businesses which are likely to be utilised withinin the next 12 months.

Sundry Included within provisions

This category includes provisions that do not fit into any for UK customer redress on the face of the other categories, such as fraud lossesconsolidated income statement is PPI and dilapidation provisions.material additions in respect of historic pricing practices associated with Foreign Exchange transactions for certain customers between 2005 and 2012 and Packaged Bank Accounts.

Legal, competition and regulatory matters

The Group is engaged in various legal proceedings, both in the UK and a number of other overseas jurisdictions, including the US. For further information in relation to legal proceedings and discussion of the associated uncertainties, please see Note 29 Legal, competition29.

Sundry provisions

This category includes provisions that do not fit into any of the other categories, such as fraud losses and regulatory matters.dilapidation provisions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    237


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

Critical accounting estimates and judgements27 Provisionscontinued

Payment Protection Insurance redressRedress

As at 31 December 2015,2017, Barclays had recognised cumulative provisions totalling £7.4bn (2014: £5.2bn)£9.2bn (2016: £8.4bn) against the cost of Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress and associated processing costs with utilisation of £5.3bn (2014: £4.2bn)£7.6bn (2016: £6.4bn), leaving a residual provision of £2.1bn (2014: £1.1bn)£1.6bn (2016: £2.0bn).

Through to 31 December 2015, 1.6m (2014: 1.3m)2017, 2.1m (2016: 1.8m) customer initiated claimsaclaimsa had been received and processed. The volume of claims received during 2015 decreased 9%b2017 increased 16% from 2014.2016. This rateincrease may have been impacted by a FCA advertising campaign launched in H2 2017.

The current provision reflects the estimated costs of decline however was slower than previously expected, duePPI redress primarily relating to steady levels of claims from Claims Management Companies (CMC) in particular.

During 2015 claims volumes continued to decline, but at a slower rate than had been projected at the start of the yearcustomer initiated complaints and ongoing remediation programmes, based on historic experience. information at year end. This also includes liabilities managed by third parties arising from portfolios previously sold where Barclays remains liable, based on information at year end.

As a result, management has revised upwards itsat 31 December 2017, the provision of £1.6bn represents Barclays’ best estimate of future volumes and recognised additional provisions totalling £2.2bn duringexpected PPI redress reflecting the year. The provision estimate reflects an assessment of the proposals contained in a consultation publishedcomplaints deadline implemented by the FCA on 26 November 2015 which, if enacted, would impact onof 29 August 2019. However, it is possible the timing and volumeeventual outcome may differ from the current estimate. We will continue to review the adequacy of future claims flow. This includes estimating the impact of a proposed 2018 complaint deadline and guidance on the impact of a 2014 UK Supreme Court judgment (Plevin vs Paragon Personal Finance Limited). The potential impact of these proposals is difficult to estimate and the outcomeprovision level in respect of the consultation is not yet known.future impacts.

The PPI provision is calculated using a number of key assumptions which continue to involve significant modelling and management judgement and modelling:judgement:

 

§ customerCustomer initiated claim volumes – claims received but not yet processed plus an estimate of future claims initiated by customers, where the volume is anticipated to decline over timecease after the PPI deadline.

 

§ proactive response rate – volume of claims in response to proactive mailing

§uphold rate – the percentage of claims that are upheld as being valid upon review

§averageAverage claim redress – the expected average payment to customers for upheld claims based on the type and age of the policy/policiespolicies.

 

§ processingProcessing cost per claim – the cost to Barclays of assessing and processing each valid claim.

These assumptions remain subjective, in particularmainly due to the uncertainty associated with future claims levels, which include complaints driven by CMC activity.

The current provision represents Barclays’ revised best estimate of all future expected costs of PPI redress, however, it is possibleactivity and the eventual outcome may differ from the current estimate. If this were to be material, the provision will be increased or decreased accordingly.FCA advertising campaign.

The following table details by key assumption, actual data through to 31 December 2015,2017, key forecast assumptions used in the provision calculation and a sensitivity analysis illustrating the impact on the provision if the future expected assumptions prove too high or too low.

 

    Cumulative            Sensitivity analysis     Cumulative  
   actual to       Future       increase/decrease     actual to  

Assumption

   31.12.15         expected       in provision     31.12.14  

Customer initiated claims received and processeda

   1,570k     730kc     50k = £103m     1,300k  

Proactive mailing

   680k       150k       50k = £16m     680k  

Response rate to proactive mailing

   28%       26%       1% = £2m     28%  

Average uphold rate per claimc

   86%d     88%       1% = £18m     79%  

Average redress per valid claime

   £1,808       £1,810       £100 = £87m     £1,740  

Processing cost per claimf

   £300       £295       50k = £15m     £294  
Assumption  

Cumulative
actual to

31.12.17

   

Future        

    expected        

   Sensitivity
analysis
increase/
decrease  in
provision
 
Customer initiated claims received and processed (thousands)a   2,130    570          50k=£104m 
Average uphold rate per claim (%)b   87    87          1%=£11m 
Average redress per valid claim (£)c   2,036    1,989          £100=£50m 

Notes

aTotal claims received directly by Barclays to date, including those received via CMCsclaims management companies but excluding those for which no PPI policy exists and excluding responses to proactive mailing. The sensitivity analysis has been calculated to show the impact a 50,000 increase or decrease in the number of customer initiated claims would have on the provision level.
bGross volumes received.
cAverage uphold rate per claim excludescustomer initiated claims received directly by Barclays and proactive mailings, excluding those for which no PPI policy exists. The sensitivity analysis has been calculated to show the impact in a 1% change in the average uphold rate per claim would have on the provision level.
dcAverage uphold rate adjustedredress stated on a per policy basis for future customer initiated complaints received directly by Barclays. The sensitivity analysis has been calculated to include full remediation.
eChangeshow the impact a £100 increase or decrease in the average uphold rate mainly due to increased remediation in 2015.
fProcessing costredress per claim would have on an upheld complaints basis, includes direct staff costs and associated overheads.the provision level.

 

260  |  238    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

28 Contingent liabilities and commitments

 

Accounting for contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events, and present obligations where the transfer of economic resources is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised on the balance sheet but are disclosed unless the outflow of economic resources is remote.

Accounting for contingent liabilities

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by uncertain future events, and present obligations where the transfer of economic resources is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised on the balance sheet but are disclosed unless the outflow of economic resources is remote.

The following table summarises the nominal principal amount of contingent liabilities and commitments which are not classified as on-balancerecorded on balance sheet:

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   16,065     14,547     14,275    15,303 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   4,556     6,777     4,737    4,636 

Contingent liabilities

   20,621     21,324  
Total contingent liabilities   19,012    19,939 
      

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   845     1,091     812    1,005 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreementsa

   93     13,856  

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   281,369       276,315     314,761    302,681 
Total commitments   315,573        303,686 

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme

The Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the FSCS) is the UKUK’s government-backed compensation scheme for customers of authorised institutions that are unable to pay claims. It providesThe compensation to depositors in the event that UK licensed deposit-taking institutions are unable to meet their claims. The FSCS raises levies on UK licensed deposit-taking institutions to meet such claims based on their share of UK deposits on 31 December of the specified years preceding the scheme year (which runs from 1 April to 31 March).

Compensation has previously been paid out by the FSCS,to customers is funded bythrough loan facilities totalling approximately £18bn provided by HM Treasury to the FSCS in supportwhich at 31 December 2017 stood at approximately £4.7bn (2016: £15.7bn). During 2017, the HM Treasury loan facility has reduced by the Bradford and Bingley repayment of FSCS’s obligations£10.9bn, following the sale from UK Asset Resolution.

Barclays’ liability is restricted to the depositors of banks declared in default. The interest rate chargeable onproportionate outstanding amount that the loan and leviedFSCS is unable to the industry is subjectrepay to a floor equal to the higher of HM Treasury’s own cost of borrowing (typically 2024 UK Gilt yield), and GBP LIBOR with 12-month maturity plus a spread.Treasury. The FSCS recovered £1bn capital shortfalllevy on UK licensed deposit taking institutions has been recognised in respect of the legacy facility from industry in three instalments across 2013, 2014 and 2015. A separate shortfall in respect of Dunfermline Building Society was levied on the industry in both 2014 and 2015. The FSCS liability for the interest and capital levy for 2015-2016 was recognised and paid in 2015.2017. Barclays has included an accrual of £56m£2.7m in other liabilities as at 31 December 2015 (2014: £88m)2017 (2016: £55m) in respect of the Barclays’Barclays portion of the Interest Levy. Capital Levies for 2015/16 were recognised in 2015 and settled in the same year.

Further details on contingent liabilities relating to legal and competition and regulatory matters can be found in Note 29.

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matters

Barclays PLC, (BPLC), Barclays Bank PLC (BBPLC) and the Group face legal, competition and regulatory challenges, many of which are beyond our control. The extent of the impact on BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and the Group of these matters cannot always be predicted but may materially impact our operations, financial results, condition and prospects. Matters arising from a set of similar circumstances can give rise to either a contingent liability or a provision, or both, depending on the relevant facts and circumstances. The recognition of provisions in relation to such matters involves critical accounting estimates and judgments in accordance with the relevant accounting policies as described in Note 27. The Group has not disclosed an estimate of the potential financial effect on the Group of contingent liabilities where it is not currently practicable to do so.

Investigations into certain agreements and Civil Action

The Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) has alleged that BPLC and BBPLC breached their disclosure obligations in connection with two advisory services agreements entered into by BBPLC. The FCA has imposed a £50m fine. BPLC and BBPLC are contesting the findings. other matters and civil action

The UK Serious Fraud Office (SFO), the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA), the US Department of Justice (DOJ) and the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) are also investigating these agreements.

Background Information

The FCA has investigatedhave been conducting investigations into certain agreements, including two advisory services agreements entered into by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC.

Background Information

Barclays Bank PLC entered into two advisory services agreements with Qatar Holding LLC (Qatar Holding) in June and October 2008 respectively, and(the Agreements). The FCA commenced an investigation into whether thesethe Agreements may have related to BPLC’sBarclays PLC’s capital raisings in June and November 2008. The FCA issued warning notices (Warning Notices) against BPLC and BBPLC in September 2013.

2008 (the Capital Raisings). The existence of the June 2008 advisory services agreement entered into in June 2008 was disclosed, but the entry into the advisory services agreement in October 2008 and the fees payable under both agreements,the Agreements, which amountamounted to a total of £322m payable over a period of five years, were not disclosed in the announcements or public documents relating to the capital raisingsCapital Raisings. The SFO also commenced an investigation into the Agreements and into a $3bn loan (the Loan) provided by Barclays Bank PLC in November 2008 to the State of Qatar.

SFO Proceedings

In June 2017, the SFO charged Barclays PLC with two offences of conspiring with certain former senior officers and November 2008. Whileemployees of Barclays to commit fraud by false representations relating to the Warning Notices considerAgreements and one offence of unlawful financial assistance contrary to section 151 of the Companies Act 1985 in relation to the Loan. In February 2018, the SFO also charged Barclays Bank PLC with the same offence in respect of the Loan. Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC intend to defend the respective charges brought against them (the Charges). The trial of the Charges has been scheduled to begin in January 2019.

FCA Proceedings and other investigations

In September 2013, the FCA issued warning notices (the Notices) finding that, BPLCwhile Barclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC believed at the time of the execution of the Agreements that there should be at least some unspecified and undetermined value to be derived from the agreements, they state thatthem, the primary purpose of the agreementsAgreements was not to obtain advisory services but to make additional payments, which would not be disclosed, for the Qatari participation in the capital raisings.

Capital Raisings. The Warning Notices concludeconcluded that BPLCBarclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC were in breach of certain disclosure-related listing rules and BPLCBarclays PLC was also in breach of Listing Principle 3 (the requirement to act with integrity towards holders and potential holders of the Company’s shares). In this regard, the FCA considers that BPLCBarclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC acted recklessly. The financial penalty provided in the Warning Notices against the Group is £50m. BPLCBarclays PLC and BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC continue to contest the findings. The FCA action has been stayed due to the SFO proceedings.

Note

aForward starting reserve repurchase agreements were previously disclosed as loan commitments. Following the business designation of reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements at fair value through profit and loss new forward starting reverse repurchase agreements are within the scope of IAS 39 and are recognised as derivatives on the balance sheet.
In addition, the DOJ and the SEC have been conducting investigations relating to the Agreements.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  261    239


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

    

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Recent DevelopmentsCivil Action

The FCA has agreed that the FCA enforcement process be stayed pending progress in the SFO’s investigation into the agreements referred to above, in respect of which the Group has received and has continued to respond to requests for further information.

In January 2016, PCP Capital Partners LLP and PCP International Finance Limited (PCP) served a claim on BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC seeking damages of £721.4m plus interest and costs for fraudulent misrepresentation and deceit, arising from alleged statements made by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC to PCP in relation to the terms on which securities were to be issued to potential investors, allegedly including PCP, in the November 2008 capital raising. BBPLCFollowing amendment of their claim in November 2017, PCP now seeks damages of up to £1,477m (plus interest from November 2017) and costs. Barclays Bank PLC is defending the claim.claim and trial is scheduled to commence in October 2019.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period. PCP has made a claim against BBPLC totalling £721.4mBarclays Bank PLC for damages of up to £1,477m plus interest and costs. This amount does not necessarily reflect BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it.it in that matter.

Investigations into certain business relationships

TheIn 2012, the DOJ and SEC are undertaking an investigation intocommenced investigations in relation to whether the Group’scertain relationships with third parties who assist BPLCBarclays PLC to win or retain business are compliant with the US Foreign Corrupt Practices Act. CertainVarious regulators in other jurisdictions haveare also beenbeing briefed on the investigations. Separately, the Group is cooperating with the DOJ and SEC in relation to an investigation into certain of its hiring practices in Asia and elsewhere and is keeping certain regulators in other jurisdictions informed.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Alternative Trading SystemsInvestigations relating to whistleblowing systems and High-Frequency Tradingcontrols

The SEC, the New York State Attorney General (NYAG), the FCA and regulatorsPrudential Regulation Authority (PRA) are conducting investigations in certain other jurisdictions have been investigating a range of issues associated with alternative trading systems (ATSs), including dark pools, andrelation to the activities of high-frequency traders. Various parties, including the NYAG, have filed complaints against BPLCGroup Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) and certain of the Group’s current and former officersBank PLC in connection with ATS related activities. BPLC and BCI have settled with the NYAG and the SEC, and BCI continues to provide information to other relevant regulatory authorities in response to their enquiries. BPLC and BCI continue to defend against the class actions described below.certain whistleblowing issues.

Background Information

Civil complaints have been filedIn April 2017, the FCA and PRA commenced investigations into the CEO as to his individual conduct and senior manager responsibilities relating to Barclays’ whistleblowing programme and to his attempt in 2016 to identify the New York Federal Court on behalfauthor of a putative class of plaintiffs against BPLC and BCI and others generally allegingletter that the defendants violated the federal securities lawswas treated by participating inBarclays Bank PLC as a scheme in which high-frequency trading firms were given informational and other advantages so that they could manipulate the US securities market to the plaintiffs’ detriment. These complaints were consolidated (Trader Class Action)whistleblow; and Barclays filed a motionBank PLC, as to dismiss this action.

In June 2014, the NYAG filed a complaint (NYAG Complaint) against BPLC and BCI in the Supreme Court of the State of New York (NY Supreme Court) alleging, amongst other things, that BPLC and BCI engaged in fraud and deceptive practices in connection with LX, the Group’s SEC-registered ATS.

BPLC and BCI have also been named in a class action by an institutional investor client under California law based on allegations similar to those in the NYAG Complaint. This California class action has been consolidated with the Trader Class Action.

Also, following the filing of the NYAG Complaint, BPLC and BCI were named in a shareholder securities class action along with certain of its former CEOs, and its current and a former CFO and an employee in Equities Electronic Trading on the basis that investors suffered damages when their investments in Barclays American Depository Receipts declined in value as a result of the allegations in the NYAG Complaint. BPLC and BCI filed a motion to dismiss the complaint, which the court granted in part and denied in part. In February 2016, the court granted plaintiffs’ motion to conduct the litigation as a class action.

Recent Developments

In August 2015, the Court granted Barclays’ motion to dismiss the Trader Class Action, and the plaintiffs have chosen not to appeal. Also in August 2015, the Court granted Barclays’ motion to dismiss the California class action, and later transferred that action to the Central District of California. The California class action plaintiffs have filed an amended complaint, which Barclays has filed a motion to dismiss.

On 1 February 2016, Barclays reached separate settlement agreements with each of the SEC and the NYAG to resolve those agencies’ claims against BPLC and BCIresponsibilities relating to the operationattempt by the CEO to identify the author of LX for $35m each.the letter, as well as Barclays’ systems and controls and culture relating to whistleblowing.

The attempt to identify the author of the letter first came to the attention of the Barclays PLC Board (Board) early in 2017. The Board instructed an external law firm to conduct a focussed investigation into the matter and also notified the FCA and PRA and other relevant authorities. The investigation found, and the Board concluded, that the CEO honestly, but mistakenly, believed that it was permissible to identify the author. However, the Board concluded that the CEO made an error in becoming involved with, and not applying appropriate governance around the matter, and in taking action to attempt to identify the author of the letter.

Barclays and the CEO are cooperating fully with the FCA and PRA investigations. Barclays is also providing information to, and cooperating with, authorities in the US with respect to these matters.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The remaining complaints seek unspecified monetary damages and injunctive relief. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the matters in this section or what effect that these matters might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

262  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

FERC

The US Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) has filed a civil action against BBPLC and certain of its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect on an order assessing a $435m civil penalty and the disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest, in connection with allegations that BBPLC manipulated the electricity markets in and around California. The US Attorney’s Office in the Southern District of New York (SDNY) has informed BBPLC that it is looking into the same conduct at issue in the FERC matter, and a civil class action complaint was filed in the US District Court for the SDNY against BBPLC asserting antitrust allegations that mirror those raised in the civil suit filed by FERC.

Background Information

In October 2012, FERC issued an Order to Show Cause and Notice of Proposed Penalties (Order and Notice) against BBPLC and four of its former traders in relation to their power trading in the western US. In the Order and Notice, FERC asserted that BBPLC and its former traders violated FERC’s Anti-Manipulation Rule by manipulating the electricity markets in and around California from November 2006 to December 2008, and proposed civil penalties and profit disgorgement to be paid by BBPLC.

In October 2013, FERC filed a civil action against BBPLC and its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect the $435m civil penalty and disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest.

In September 2013, the criminal division of the US Attorney’s Office in SDNY advised BBPLC that it is looking at the same conduct at issue in the FERC matter.

In June 2015, a civil class action complaint was filed in the US District Court for the SDNY against BBPLC by Merced Irrigation District, a California utility company, asserting antitrust allegations in connection with BBPLC’s purported manipulation of the electricity markets in and around California. The allegations mirror those raised in the civil suit filed by FERC against BBPLC currently pending in the US District Court in California.

Recent Developments

In October 2015, the US District Court in California ordered that it would bifurcate its assessment of liabilities and penalties from its assessment of disgorgement. FERC has filed and BBPLC is opposing a brief seeking summary affirmance of the penalty assessment. The court has indicated that it will either affirm the penalty assessment or require further evidence to determine this issue.

BBPLC has appealed the bifurcation order to the US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit and has also filed a motion with the US District Court in California to stay the proceedings pending the outcome of the appeal.

In December 2015, BBPLC filed a motion to dismiss the civil class action for failure to state a claim.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

FERC has made claims against BBPLC and certain of its former traders totalling $469.9m, plus interest, for civil penalties and profit disgorgement. The civil class action complaint refers to damages of $139.3m. These amounts do not necessarily reflect BBPLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it in either action.

Investigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks

Regulators and law enforcement agencies from a number of governments have been conducting investigations relating to BBPLC’s involvement in manipulating certain financial benchmarks, such as LIBOR and EURIBOR. BBPLC, BPLC and BCI have reached settlements with the relevant law enforcement agency or regulator in certain of the investigations, but others, including the investigations by the US State Attorneys General, the SFO and the prosecutors’ office in Trani, Italy remain pending.

Background Information

In June 2012, BBPLC announced that it had reached settlements with the Financial Services Authority (FSA) (as predecessor to the FCA), the US Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) and the DOJ Fraud Section (DOJ-FS) in relation to their investigations concerning certain benchmark interest rate submissions, and BBPLC agreed to pay total penalties of £290m. The settlement with the DOJ-FS was made by entry into a Non-Prosecution Agreement (LIBOR NPA) which has now expired. In addition, BBPLC was granted conditional leniency from the DOJ Antitrust Division (DOJ-AD) in connection with potential US antitrust law violations with respect to financial instruments that reference EURIBOR.

Investigations by the US State Attorneys General

Following the settlements announced in June 2012, a group of 31 US State Attorneys General (SAGs) commenced its own investigation into LIBOR, EURIBOR and the Tokyo Interbank Offered Rate. The Group has cooperated with the investigation throughout and is in advanced discussions with the SAGs about potential resolution.

Investigation by the SFO

In July 2012, the SFO announced that it had decided to investigate the LIBOR matter, in respect of which BBPLC has received and continues to respond to requests for information.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘LIBOR and other Benchmarks Civil Actions’.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Investigations relating to retail structured deposits and capital protected structured notes

The FCA is conducting enforcement investigations in relation to certain structured deposits and notes provided by Barclays in the past.

Background Information

In 2015, the FCA commenced an enforcement investigation relating to the design, manufacture and sale of structured deposits by Barclays from November 2009. The investigation is at an advanced stage. In January 2018, the FCA also commenced an enforcement investigation relating to the design, manufacture and sale of capital protected structured notes by Barclays from June 2008 to July 2014.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Investigation into collections and recoveries relating to unsecured lending

In February 2018, the FCA commenced an enforcement investigation in relation to whether or not Barclays Bank PLC, from July 2015, implemented effective systems and controls with respect to collections and recoveries and whether or not it paid due consideration to the interests of customers in default and arrears.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the investigation on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Investigation into Americas Wealth & Investment Management advisory business

The SEC has carried out an investigation into certain practices in Barclays’ former Wealth Americas investment advisory business relating to certain due diligence failures, fee and billing practices and mutual fund fee waivers and related disclosures. In May 2017, the SEC announced a settlement pursuant to which Barclays Capital Inc. (BCI) agreed to resolve this matter for USD97m, consisting of a penalty of USD30m paid to the SEC and USD67m paid to the clients, in remediation and disgorgement.

Investigation into suspected money laundering related to foreign exchange transactions in South African operation

Absa Bank Limited, a subsidiary of Barclays Africa Group Limited, which was a subsidiary of Barclays at the relevant time, identified potentially fraudulent activity by certain of its customers using advance payments for imports in 2014 and 2015 to effect foreign exchange transfers from South Africa to beneficiary accounts located in East Asia, UK, Europe and the US. As a result, the Group conducted a review of relevant activity, processes, systems and controls. The Group is continuing to provide information to relevant authorities as part of the Group’s ongoing cooperation.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

 

240    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  263


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

    

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

LIBOR and other Benchmark Civil Actions

Following the settlements of the investigations referred to above in ‘InvestigationsInvestigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks’,benchmarks

Regulators and law enforcement agencies, including certain competition authorities, from a number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group in relation to LIBOR and/or other benchmarks. While several of such casesgovernments have been dismissedconducting investigations relating to Barclays Bank PLC’s involvement in manipulating certain financial benchmarks, such as LIBOR and certain have settled subject to approval from the court, other actions remain pending and their ultimate impact is unclear.EURIBOR.

Background Information

In 2012, Barclays Bank PLC announced that it had reached settlements with the Financial Services Authority (FSA) (as predecessor to the FCA), the US Commodity Futures Trading Commission (CFTC) and the DOJ in relation to their investigations concerning certain benchmark interest rate submissions, and Barclays Bank PLC paid total penalties of £290m. The settlement with the DOJ was made by entry into aNon-Prosecution Agreement (NPA) which has now expired. Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI have reached settlements with certain other regulators and law enforcement agencies. Barclays Bank PLC continues to respond to requests for information from the SFO in relation to its ongoing LIBOR investigation, including in respect of Barclays Bank PLC. The investigation by the prosecutor’s office in Trani, Italy also remains pending.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

LIBOR and other benchmark civil actions

A number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to manipulation of LIBOR and/or other benchmark rates.benchmarks.

Background Information

Following settlement of the investigations referred to above in ‘Investigations into LIBOR and other Benchmarks’ various individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group. While certain cases have been dismissed or settled subject to approval from the court (and in the case of class actions, the right of class members to opt out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims), other actions remain pending and their ultimate impact is unclear.

USD LIBOR Cases in MDL Court

The majority of the USD LIBOR cases, which have been filed in various US jurisdictions, have been consolidated forpre-trial purposes before a single judge in the SDNYUS District Court in the Southern District of New York (SDNY) (MDL Court).

The complaints are substantially similar and allege, amongst other things, that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and the other banks individually and collectively violated provisions of the US Sherman Antitrust Act (Antitrust Act), the US Commodity Exchange Act (CEA), the US Racketeer Influenced and Corrupt Organizations Act (RICO) and various state laws by manipulating USD LIBOR rates.

The proposed class actions purported to be brought on behalf of (amongst others) plaintiffs that (i) engaged in USD LIBOR-linkedover-the-counter transactions (OTC Class); (ii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked financial instruments on an exchange (Exchange-Based Class); (iii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked debt securities (Debt Securities Class); (iv) purchased adjustable-rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR (Homeowner Class); or (v) issued loans linked to USD LIBOR (Lender Class).

The lawsuits seek unspecified damages with the exception of five lawsuits, in which the plaintiffs are seeking a combined total in excess of $1.25bn in actual damages against all defendants, including BBPLC,Barclays Bank PLC, plus punitive damages. Some of the lawsuits also seek trebling of damages under the US Sherman Antitrust Act and RICO.

The proposed class actions purport to be brought on behalf of (amongst others) plaintiffs that (i) engaged in USD LIBOR-linked over-the-counter transactions (OTC Class); (ii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked financial instruments on an exchange (Exchange-Based Class); (iii) purchased USD LIBOR-linked debt securities (Debt Securities Class); (iv) purchased adjustable rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR (Homeowner Class); or (v) issued loans linked to USD LIBOR (Lender Class).

In August 2012 the MDL Court stayed all newly filed proposed class actions and individual actions (Stayed Actions), so that the MDL Court could address the motions pending in three lead proposed class actions (Lead Class Actions) and three lead individual actions (Lead Individual Actions).

In March 2013, AugustBetween 2013 and June 2014,2016, the MDL Court issued a series of decisions effectively dismissing the majority of claims, including antitrust claims, against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other panel bankforeign defendants in both class actions and individual actions. In May 2016, the Lead Class Actionsappeal court reversed the MDL Court’s decision and Lead Individual Actions.

As a result, the:

§Debt Securities Class was dismissed entirely

§remanded the antitrust claims of the Exchange-Based Class were limited to claims under the CEA

§claims of the OTC Class were limited to claims for unjust enrichment and breach of the implied covenant of good faith and fair dealing.

The Debt Securities Class has appealed the dismissal of their action to the US Court of Appeals for the Second Circuit (Second Circuit). Multiple other plaintiffs in the litigation before the MDL Court also joined the appeal, which has been briefed and argued. A decision is pending.

Additionally, the MDL Court has begun to address the claims in the Stayed Actions, many of which, including state law fraud and tortious interference claims, were not asserted in the Lead Class Actions. As a result, in October 2014, the direct action plaintiffs (those who have brought suits individually rather than as part of a class action) filed their amended complaints and in November 2014, the defendants filed their motions to dismiss. In August 2015, the MDL Court granted in part and denied in part the motion to dismiss the direct action plaintiffs’ claims. Althoughfor further consideration. Following further consideration, the MDL Court dismissed the majority of antitrust claims against foreign defendants, including Barclays Bank PLC, for lack of personal jurisdiction. Plaintiffs in a number of claims on various grounds, a number of state law claims will proceed to discovery.

In November 2014, the plaintiffs in the Lender Classindividual actions and Homeowner Classclass actions filed their amended complaints. In January 2015, the defendants filed their motions to dismiss. In November 2015, the MDL Court granted in part and denied in part the motions to dismiss these actions, dismissing all claims against BBPLC brought by the Homeowner Class and reserving judgment with respect to the claims asserted by the Lender Class. In December 2015, the MDL Court approved a schedule for litigation of class certification issues, with the associated discovery beginning in 2016 and extending through 2017.

Until there are further decisions, the ultimate impact ofappealing the MDL Court’s decisions will be unclear, although it is possible that the decisions will be interpreted by the courts to affect other litigation, including the actions described further below, some of which concern different benchmark interest rates.personal jurisdiction ruling.

In December 2014, the MDL Court granted preliminary approval for the settlement of the remaining Exchange-Based Class claims for $20m. Final$20m, of which $5m was paid in

October 2014 and the remaining $15m in September 2017. The settlement remains subject to court approval and the right of class members to opt out of the settlement is awaiting plaintiff’s submission of a plan for allocation of the settlement proceeds acceptableand to the MDL Court.seek to file their own claims.

In November 2015, the outstanding OTC Class claims were settled for $120m.$120m which was paid in 2017. The settlement isremains subject to approval by the MDL Court.

264  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

EURIBOR Casesfinal approval.

In February 2013, a EURIBOR-related class actionNovember 2016, $7.1m was filed against BPLC, BBPLC, BCI and other EURIBOR panel banks. The plaintiffs assert antitrust, CEA, RICO, and unjust enrichmentpaid in settlement of the Debt Securities Class claims. In particular, BBPLC is alleged to have conspired with other EURIBOR panel banks to manipulate EURIBOR. The lawsuit is brought on behalf of purchasers and sellers of NYSE LIFFE EURIBOR futures contracts, purchasers of Euro currency-related futures contracts and purchasers of other derivative contracts (such as interest rate swaps and forward rate agreements that are linked to EURIBOR) during the period 1 June 2005 through 31 March 2011. In October 2015, the class action was settled for $94m subject to court approval. The settlement has been preliminarily approved by the court but remains subject to final approval.approval and the right of class members to opt out of the settlement and seek to file their own claims.

Securities FraudEURIBOR Case in the SDNY

BPLC, BBPLC and BCI were also named as defendants along with four former officers and directorsIn 2015, $94m was paid in settlement of BBPLC in a securitiesEURIBOR-related class action in the SDNY in connection with BBPLC’s role as a contributor panel bank to LIBOR. The complaint principally alleged that BBPLC’s Annual Reports for the years 2006 to 2011 contained misstatements and omissions and that BBPLC’s daily USD LIBOR submissions constituted false statements in violation of US securities law. In November 2015, the class action was settled for $14m.action. The settlement has been preliminarily approved by the court but remains subject to final approval.approval and the right of class members to opt out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

Additional USD LIBOR Case in the SDNY

An additionalIn 2015, an individual action was commenced in February 2013 in the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other panel bank defendants.defendants was dismissed by the SDNY. The plaintiff alleged that the panel bank defendants conspired to increase USD LIBOR, which caused the value of bonds pledged as collateral for a loan to decrease, ultimately resulting in the sale of the bonds at a low point in the market. The panel bank defendants moved to dismiss the action, and theplaintiff’s motion was granted in April 2015. In June 2015, the plaintiff sought leave to file a further amended complaint; that motioncomplaint is pending.

Sterling LIBOR CasesCase in SDNY

In May 2015, a putative class action was commencedfiled in the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other Sterling LIBOR panel banks by a plaintiff involved in exchange-traded andover-the-counter derivatives that were linked to Sterling LIBOR. The complaint alleges, among other things, that BBPLC and other panel banksdefendants manipulated the Sterling LIBOR rate between 2005 and 2010 and, in so doing, committed CEA, antitrust,Antitrust Act, and RICO violations. Proceedings are ongoing.

In Januaryearly 2016, this class action was consolidated with an additional putative class action concerning Sterling LIBOR was commenced in the SDNYmaking similar allegations against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and BCI as well asand other Sterling LIBOR panel banks. This additional class action similarly alleges manipulation of the Sterling LIBOR rate between 2005 and 2010, and asserts claims for violations of the CEA, antitrust, and RICO statutes, as well as common law violations. Proceedings are ongoing.

Complaint in the US District Court for the Central District of CaliforniaDefendants have filed a motion to dismiss.

In July 2012, a purported class action complaint in the US District Court for the Central District of California was amended to include allegations related to USD LIBOR and names BBPLC as a defendant. The amended complaint was filed on behalf of a purported class that includes holders of adjustable rate mortgages linked to USD LIBOR. In January 2015, the court granted BBPLC’s motion for summary judgment and dismissed all of the remaining claims against BBPLC. The plaintiff has appealed the court’s decision

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    241


Notes to the US Court of Appeals for the Ninth Circuit.financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Japanese Yen LIBOR CaseCases in SDNY

AIn 2012, a putative class action was commenced in April 2012filed in the SDNY against BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other Japanese Yen LIBOR panel banks by a plaintiff involved in exchange-traded derivatives. The complaint also names members of the Japanese Bankers Association’s Euroyen Tokyo Interbank Offered Rate (Euroyen TIBOR) panel, of which BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC is not a member. The complaint alleges, amongst other things, manipulation of the Euroyen TIBOR and Yen LIBOR rates and breaches of the CEA and US Sherman Antitrust Act between 2006 and 2010. In March 2014, the court dismissed the plaintiff’s antitrust claims in full, but sustained the plaintiff’s CEA claims. The plaintiff moved for leave to file a third amended complaint adding additional claims including a RICO claim, which was denied in March 2015. The Plaintiff has sought an immediate appeal of that decision, and that request isremain pending. Discovery is continuing.ongoing.

In July 2015,March 2017, a second putative class action concerning Yen LIBOR was filed in the SDNY against BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI.BCI was dismissed in full. The complaint names membersmakes similar allegations to the 2012 class action. Plaintiffs have appealed the dismissal.

SIBOR/SOR Case in the SDNY

A putative class action filed in the SDNY against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI, and other defendants, alleging manipulation of the Yen LIBOR panel,Singapore Interbank Offered Rate (SIBOR) and Singapore Swap Offer Rate (SOR) was dismissed by the Euroyen TIBOR panel,court in relation to claims against Barclays for failure to state a claim. Plaintiffs amended their complaint in September 2017, and certain of their affiliates and brokers. The complaint alleges breaches of the US Sherman Antitrust Act and RICO between 2006 and 2010 based on factual allegations that are substantially similardefendants have filed a motion to those in the April 2012 class action.dismiss.

Non-US Benchmarks Cases

In addition to US actions, legal proceedings have been brought or threatened against the Group in connection with alleged manipulation of LIBOR and EURIBOR and other benchmarks in a number of jurisdictions. The number of suchjurisdictions in Europe and Argentina. Additional proceedings innon-US jurisdictions the benchmarks to which they relate, and the jurisdictions in which they may be brought have increased over time.in the future.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of theany further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have onupon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  265


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Foreign Exchange Investigationsinvestigations

Various regulatory and enforcement authorities across multiple jurisdictions have been investigating a range of issues associated with Foreign Exchange sales and trading, including electronic trading. Certain of these investigations involve multiple market participants in various countries. The

Background Information

In 2015 the Group has reached settlements with the CFTC, the DOJ, the New York State Department of Financial Services (NYDFS), the Board of Governors of the Federal Reserve System (Federal Reserve) and the FCA (together, the 2015 Resolving Authorities) with respect to certain of these investigations as further described below. Investigations by the European Commission (Commission), the Administrative Council for Economic Defence in Brazil and the South African Competition Commission, amongst others, remain pending.

Background Information

In May 2015, the Group announced that it had reached settlements with the Resolving Authorities in relation to investigations into certain sales and trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market, that it had agreed to paymarket. In connection with these settlements, the Group paid total penalties of approximately $2.38bn including a $60m penalty imposed by the DOJ as a consequence of certain practices continuing after entry into the LIBOR NPA, and that BPLC had agreed to plead guilty to a violation of US anti-trust law.undertake certain remedial actions.

Under the plea agreement with the DOJ, BPLC agreedin addition to pay a criminal fine, of $650m andBarclays PLC agreed to a term of probation of three years from the date of the final judgment in respect of the plea agreement during which BPLCBarclays PLC must, amongst other things, (i) commit no crime whatsoever in violation of the federal laws of the United States,US, (ii) implement and continue to implement a compliance program designed to prevent and detect the conduct that gave rise to the plea agreement, (iii) report credible evidence of criminal violations of US antitrust or fraud laws to the relevant US authority, and (iii)(iv) strengthen its compliance and internal controls as required by relevant regulatory or enforcement agencies.

Pursuant to In January 2017, the settlementUS District Court for the District of Connecticut accepted the plea agreement and in accordance with the CFTC, BBPLC consentedagreement sentenced Barclays PLC to among other things, pay $650m as a civil monetary penaltyfine and $60m for violating the NPA (which amounts are part of $400m.

Pursuantthe $2.38bn referred to its settlement withabove) and to serve three years of probation from the Federal Reserve, BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch consenteddate of the sentencing order. The Group also continues to an order imposing a civil monetary penaltyprovide relevant information to certain of $342m and ordering BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch to submit in writing to the Federal Reserve Bank of New York for its approval certain programs to enhance internal controls and compliance. Under the Federal Reserve order, BBPLC and its institution-affiliated parties must not in the future directly or indirectly retain certain individuals who participated in the misconduct underlying the order.

Pursuant to the settlement with the NYDFS, BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch consented to an order imposing a civil monetary penalty of $485m and requiring BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch to take all steps necessary to terminate four identified employees. BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch must also continue to engage the independent monitor previously selected by the NYDFS to conduct a comprehensive review of certain compliance programs, policies, and procedures.

The FCA issued a Final Notice and imposed a financial penalty of £284m on BBPLC.2015 Resolving Authorities.

The full text of the DOJ plea agreement, the orders of the CFTC, NYDFS and Federal Reserve, orders, and the FCA Final Notice issued by the FCA related to the settlements referred to above are publicly available on the 2015 Resolving Authorities’ respective websites.

The settlements reached in May 2015 did not encompass ongoing investigationsEuropean Commission is one of electronicseveral authorities conducting an investigation into certain trading practices in the Foreign Exchange market. The Group is cooperating with certain authorities which continue to investigate sales and trading practices of various sales and trading personnel, including Foreign Exchange personnel, among multiple market participants, including BBPLC, in various countries.

The FCADOJ is also investigating historic pricing practices by BBPLC associated withconducting an investigation into conduct relating to certain Foreign Exchange transactions for certain customers between 2005 and 2012. BBPLC is cooperating with the FCA regarding the proposed terms and timing for appropriate customer redress.

For a discussion of civil litigation arisingtrading activities in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actionscertain transactions during 2011 and 2012. Barclays is providing information to the DOJ and other relevant authorities reviewing this conduct. In January 2018, a Barclays employee currently under suspension was indicted in Respect of Foreign Exchange Trading’ below.

Recent DevelopmentsUS federal court in connection with this matter.

In November 2015, BBPLC announced that it had reachedFebruary 2017 the South African Competition Commission (SACC) referred Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and Absa Bank Limited, a settlement withsubsidiary of Barclays Africa Group Limited, which at the NYDFS in respectrelevant time was a subsidiary of its investigation into BBPLC and BBPLC’s New York branch electronic tradingBarclays Bank PLC, among other banks, to the Competition Tribunal to be prosecuted for breaches of Foreign Exchange andSouth African antitrust law related to Foreign Exchange trading systems inof South African Rand. Barclays was the period between 2009first to 2014. Pursuantbring the conduct to the settlement the NYDFS imposed a civil monetary penalty of $150m, primarily for certain internal systems and controls failures. The Group continues to cooperate with other ongoing investigations.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The fines in connection with the May 2015 settlements with the Resolving Authorities were covered by the Group’s provisions of £2.05bn.

A provision of £290m in redress costs for certain customers was recognised in Q3 2015 in relation to the FCA investigation into historic pricing practices by BBPLC associated with certain Foreign Exchange transactions referred to above. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of any further financial impactattention of the actions describedSACC under its leniency programme. The SACC is therefore not seeking an order from the Tribunal to impose any fine on the GroupBarclays Bank PLC, BCI or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

266  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Civil Actions in respect of Foreign Exchange

Since November 2013, a number of civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of Foreign Exchange markets under the US Sherman Antitrust Act and New York state law and naming several international banks as defendants, including BBPLC. In February 2014, the SDNY combined all then-pending actions alleging a class of US persons in a single consolidated action. Settlements have been agreed with certain proposed classes of plaintiffs in the consolidated class action subject to court approval. The remaining proceedings are ongoing.

Since February 2015, several additional civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging injuries related to Barclays’ alleged manipulation of Foreign Exchange rates and naming several international banks as defendants, including BPLC, BBPLC and BCI. One of the newly filed actions asserts claims under the US Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) statute and includes allegations that are duplicative of allegations in the other cases, as well as additional allegations about Foreign Exchange sales practices and ERISA plans. Another action was filed in the Northern District of California on behalf of a putative class of individuals that exchanged currencies on a retail basis at bank branches.

Recent Developments

In September 2015, BBPLC and BCI settled with certain proposed classes of plaintiffs in the consolidated action for $384m subject to court approval.

In addition, in November 2015 and December 2015, two additional civil actions were filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plantiffs alleging injuries based on Barclays’ purported improper rejection of customer trades through Barclays’ Last Look system. In February 2016, BBPLC and BCI agreed a settlement with plaintiffs in one of the actions on a class-wide basis subject to court approval. The amount of the proposed settlement is $50m. In February 2016, the plaintiffs in the second action voluntarily dismissed their claims.Absa Bank Limited.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlements discussed above, the financial impactand a provision of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position£240m recognised in any particular period is currently uncertain.

ISDAFIX Investigation

Regulators and law enforcement agencies, including the CFTC, have conducted separate investigations into historical practices with respect to ISDAFIX, amongst other benchmarks.

In May 2015, the CFTC entered into a settlement order with BPLC, BBPLC and BCI pursuant to which BPLC, BBPLC and BCI agreed to pay a civil monetary penalty of $115m in connection with the CFTC’s industry-wide investigation into the setting of the US Dollar ISDAFIX benchmark. In addition, the CFTC order requires BPLC, BBPLC and BCI to cease and desist from violating provisions of the CEA, fully cooperate with the CFTC in related investigations and litigation and undertake certain remediation efforts to the extent not already undertaken.

Investigations by other regulators and law enforcement agencies remain pending. For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respect of ISDAFIX’ below.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The fine in connection with the May 2015 settlement with the CFTC was covered by the Group’s provisions of £2.05bn.

ItQ4 2017, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of any further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have on the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Civil Actionsactions in respect of ISDAFIXForeign Exchange

Since SeptemberA number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to Foreign Exchange.

Background Information

Following settlement of certain investigations referred to above in ‘Foreign Exchange Investigations’ a number of individuals and corporates in a range of jurisdictions have threatened or brought civil actions against the Group and other banks in relation to Foreign Exchange or may do so in future. Certain of these cases have been dismissed or have been settled subject to final approval from the relevant court (and in the case of class actions, the right of class members to opt out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims).

242    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Consolidated FX Action

In 2014, a number of ISDAFIX relatedcivil actions filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of Foreign Exchange markets under the Antitrust Act and New York state law and naming several international banks as defendants, including Barclays Bank PLC, were combined into a single consolidated action (Consolidated FX Action). In 2015, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI settled the Consolidated FX Action and paid $384m. Certain class members have opted out of the settlement to seek to file their own claims. The settlement is also subject to final court approval.

ERISA FX Action

Since 2015, several civil actions have been filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs purporting to allege different legal theories of injury (other than those alleged in the Consolidated FX Action) related to alleged manipulation of Foreign Exchange rates, including claims under the US Employee Retirement Income Security Act (ERISA) statute (ERISA Claims), and naming several international banks as defendants, including Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI. The Court has dismissed the ERISA Claims, and the plaintiffs have appealed this decision.

Retail Basis Action

A putative action was filed in the Northern District of California (and subsequently transferred to the SDNY) against several international banks, including Barclays PLC and BCI, on behalf of a putative class of individuals that exchanged currencies on a retail basis at bank branches (Retail Basis Claims). The Court has ruled that the Retail Basis Claims are not covered by the settlement agreement in the Consolidated FX Action. The Court subsequently dismissed all Retail Basis Claims against Barclays and all other defendants. Plaintiffs amended their complaint and defendants (including Barclays) have moved to dismiss the amended complaint.

Last Look Actions

In 2015, two putative class actions were filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging injuries based on Barclays’ purported improper rejection of customer trades through Barclays Last Look functionality in Barclays’ FXe-trading platforms In 2016, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI paid $50m and settled one of the actions on a class-wide basis. (The other action was voluntarily dismissed.) The deadline for opting out of the class has expired (a small number of class members have opted out), and the Court has granted final approval of the settlement.

State Law FX Action

In 2016, a putative class action was filed in the SDNY under federal, New York and California law on behalf of proposed classes of stockholders of Exchange Traded Funds and others who supposedly were indirect investors in FX Instruments. The defendants (including Barclays) moved to dismiss the action. Plaintiffs’ counsel then amended the complaint to bring claims on behalf of a proposed class of plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLC, a number of other banksinvestors under federal and one broker, violated the US Sherman Antitrust Act and severalvarious state laws by engaging inwho traded FX Instruments through FX dealers or brokers not alleged to have manipulated Foreign Exchange Rates. A different group of plaintiffs subsequently filed another action based on the same theories and asserted substantively similar claims. These two actions have been consolidated and a conspiracy to manipulate the USD ISDAFIX. A consolidated amended complaint was filed in February 2015.June 2017. Defendants (including Barclays) have moved to dismiss the action.

Canadian FX Action

Civil actions similar to the Consolidated FX Action have been filed in Canadian courts on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs containing similar factual allegations of manipulation of Foreign Exchange rates and of damages resulting from such manipulation, in violation of Canadian law. The parties’ settlement for $14.8m has been approved by the court.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

ItAside from the settlements discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of theany further financial impact of the actions described above on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Precious Metals InvestigationCivil actions in respect of ISDAFIX

BBPLCIn 2014, a number of ISDAFIX related civil actions were filed in the SDNY on behalf of proposed class of plaintiffs, alleging that Barclays Bank PLC, a number of other banks and one broker violated the Antitrust Act and several state laws by engaging in a conspiracy to manipulate the USD ISDAFIX. In 2016, Barclays Bank PLC and BCI entered into a settlement agreement with plaintiffs to resolve the consolidated action and paid $30m, fully resolving all ISDAFIX-related claims that were or could have been brought by the class. The court has been providingpreliminarily approved the settlement, which remains subject to final approval and to the right of class members to opt out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The principal financial impact of the actions described on the Group is reflected in the settlement described above.

Metals investigations

Barclays Bank PLC has provided information to the DOJ, the CFTC and other authorities in connection with investigations into precious metals and precious metals-based financial instruments.

For a discussion of civil litigation arising in connection with these investigations see ‘Civil Actions in Respect of the Gold Fix’ below.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Civil Actionsactions in respect of the Gold Fixgold and silver fix

Since March 2014, aVarious civil actions have been filed against Barclays Bank PLC and others alleging manipulation of the prices of gold and silver.

Background Information

A number of civil complaints, have been filed in US Federal Courts, each on behalf of a proposed class of plaintiffs, alleginghave been consolidated and transferred to the SDNY. The complaints allege that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and other members of The London Gold Market Fixing Ltd. manipulated the prices of gold and gold derivative contracts in violation of the CEA, the US Sherman Antitrust Act, and state antitrust and consumer protection laws. AllAlso in the US, a proposed class of plaintiffs has filed a complaint against a number of banks, including Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and Barclays Capital Services Ltd., alleging manipulation of the complaintsprice of silver in violation of the CEA and antitrust laws. Defendants have been transferredmoved to dismiss these actions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    243


Notes to the SDNYfinancial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and consolidated for pre-trial purposes. In April 2015, defendantslegal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Civil actions have also been filed a motion to dismiss the claims. Proceedings are ongoing.in Canadian courts against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays Capital Canada Inc., BCI and Barclays Capital PLC on behalf of proposed classes of plaintiffs alleging manipulation of gold and silver prices in violation of Canadian law.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  267


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

US Residentialresidential and Commercial Mortgage-related Activitycommercial mortgage-related activity and Litigationlitigation

There have been various investigations and civil litigation relating to secondary market trading of US residential mortgage-backed securities (RMBS) and US commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS).

Background Information

The Group’s activities within the US residential mortgage sector during the period from 2005 through 2008 included:

 

§ sponsoring and underwriting of approximately $39bn of private-label securitisationssecuritisations;

 

§ economic underwriting exposure of approximately $34bn for other private-label securitisationssecuritisations;

 

§ sales of approximately $0.2bn of loans to government sponsored enterprises (GSEs);

 

§ sales of approximately $3bn of loans to othersothers; and

 

§ sales of approximately $19.4bn of loans (net of approximately $500m of loans sold during this period and subsequently repurchased) that were originated and sold to third parties by mortgage originator affiliates of an entity that the Group acquired in 2007 (Acquired Subsidiary).

Throughout this time period affiliates of the Group engaged in secondary market trading of US residential mortgaged-backed securities (RMBS) and US commercial mortgage-backed securities (CMBS), and such trading activity continues today.DOJ Civil Action

In connection with its loan sales and certain private-label securitisations, on 31 December 2015, the Group had unresolved repurchase requests relating to loans with a principal balance of approximately $2.3bn at the time they were sold, and civil actions have been commenced by various parties alleging that the Group must repurchase a substantial number of such loans.

In addition, the Group is party to a number of lawsuits filed by purchasers of RMBS asserting statutory and/or common law claims. The current outstanding face amount of RMBS related to these pending claims against the Group as of 31 December 2015 was approximately $0.4bn.

Regulatory and governmental authorities, including amongst others,2016, the DOJ SEC, Special Inspector General forfiled a civil complaint against Barclays Bank PLC, Barclays PLC, BCI, Barclays Group US Inc., Barclays US LLC, BCAP LLC, Securitized Asset Backed Receivables LLC and Sutton Funding LLC, as well as two former employees, in the US Troubled Asset Relief Program, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the US Attorney’s Office forCourt in the Eastern District of New York have initiated wide-ranging investigations into market practices involving(EDNY) containing a number of allegations, including mail and wire fraud, relating to mortgage-backed securities sold between 2005 and 2007. The DOJ complaint seeks, amongst other relief, unspecified monetary penalties. Barclays is defending the Group is cooperating with several of those investigations.complaint and has filed a motion to dismiss.

RMBS Repurchase Requests

Background

The Group was the sole provider of various loan-level representations and warranties (R&Ws) with respect to:

 

§ approximately $5bn of Group sponsored securitisationssecuritisations;

 

§ approximately $0.2bn of sales of loans to GSEsGSEs; and

 

§ approximately $3bn of loans sold to others.

In addition, the Acquired Subsidiary provided R&Ws on all of the $19.4bn of loans it sold to third parties.

R&Ws on the remaining Group sponsored securitisations were primarily provided by third-party originators directly to the securitisation trusts with a Group subsidiary, such as the depositor for the securitisation, providing more limited R&Ws. There are no stated expiration provisions applicable to most R&Ws made by the Group, the Acquired Subsidiary or these third parties.

Under certain circumstances, the Group and/or the Acquired Subsidiary may be required to repurchase the related loans or make other payments related to such loans if the R&Ws are breached.

The unresolved repurchase requests received on or before 31 December 20152017 associated with all R&Ws made by the Group or the Acquired Subsidiary on loans sold to GSEs and others and private-label activities had an original unpaid principal balance of approximately $2.3bn$2.1bn at the time of such sale.

A substantial number (approximately $2.2bn) of theThe unresolved repurchase requests discussed above relate to civil actions that have been commenced by the trustees for certain RMBS securitisations in which the trustees allege that the Group and/or the Acquired Subsidiary must repurchase loans that violated the operative R&Ws. Such trustees and other parties making repurchase requests have also alleged that the operative R&Ws may have been violated with respect to a greater (but unspecified) amount of loans than the amount of loans previously stated in specific repurchase requests made by such trustees. All ofCumulative realised losses reported at 31 December 2017 on loans covered by R&Ws made by the Group or the Acquired Subsidiary are approximately $1.3bn. This litigation involving repurchase requests remain at early stages.is ongoing.

In addition, the Acquired Subsidiary is subject to a more advanced civil action seeking, among other things, indemnification for losses allegedly suffered by a loan purchaser as a result of alleged breaches of R&Ws provided by the Acquired Subsidiary in connection with loan sales to the purchaser during the period 1997 to 2007. This litigation is ongoing.

RMBS Securities Claims

As a result of some of the RMBS activities described above, the Group has been party to a number of lawsuits filed by purchasers of RMBS sponsored and/or underwritten by the Group between 2005 and 2008. As a general matter, these lawsuits alleged, among other things, that the RMBS offering materials allegedly relied on by such purchasers contained materially false and misleading statements and/or omissions and generally demanded rescission and recovery of the consideration paid for the RMBS and recovery of monetary losses arising out of their ownership. The Group has resolved the majority of these claims, and only one action currently remains pending.

Approximately $0.1bn of the original face amount of RMBS related to the remaining pending action was outstanding as at 31 December 2017. There were virtually no cumulative realised losses reported on these RMBS as at 31 December 2017. The Group does not expect that, if it were to lose the remaining pending action, any such loss to be material.

Secondary Trading Investigation

The Group has received requests for information and subpoenas from the SEC, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the Special Inspector General for the US Troubled Asset Relief Program related to trading practices in the secondary market for both RMBS and CMBS. A settlement was announced in May 2017 pursuant to which BCI agreed to resolve this matter for $16.56m.

244    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

ItSave for the remaining pending action described under ‘RMBS Securities Claims’ and the May 2017 settlement above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of theany further financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period. The cost of resolving these actions could individually or in aggregate prove to be substantial.

Alternative trading systems and high-frequency trading

The SEC, the New York State Attorney General (NYAG) and regulators in certain other jurisdictions have been investigating a range of issues associated with alternative trading systems (ATSs), including dark pools, and the activities of high-frequency traders.

Background Information

In 2014, the NYAG filed a complaint (NYAG Complaint) against Barclays PLC and BCI in the Supreme Court of the State of New York alleging, amongst other things, that Barclays PLC and BCI engaged in fraud and deceptive practices in connection with LX, the Group’sSEC-registered ATS. In February 2016, Barclays reached separate settlement agreements with the SEC and the NYAG to resolve those agencies’ claims against Barclays PLC and BCI relating to the operation of LX and paid $35m to each.

Barclays PLC and BCI have been named in a purported class action by an institutional financial services firm under California law based on allegations similar to those in the NYAG Complaint. In October 2016, the federal court in California granted the motion of Barclays PLC and BCI to dismiss the entire complaint and plaintiffs have appealed the court’s decision.

Following the filing of the NYAG Complaint, Barclays PLC and BCI were also named in a putative shareholder securities class action along with certain of its former CEOs, and its current and a former CFO, as well as an employee (Shareholder Class Action). The plaintiffs claim that holders of Barclays American Depository Receipts (ADRs) suffered damages when the ADRs declined in value as a result of the allegations in the NYAG Complaint. A motion to dismiss the complaint filed by the defendants (including Barclays PLC and BCI), was granted in part and denied in part by the court. In February 2016, the court certified the action as a class action. In November 2017, the appellate court affirmed the class certification. Barclays has petitioned the appellate court to stay the action pending review by the US Supreme Court of the class certification.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The class actions seek unspecified monetary damages and injunctive relief. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

FERC and other civil actions

The US Federal Energy Regulatory Commission (FERC) filed a civil action against Barclays Bank PLC and certain of its former traders in connection with allegations that Barclays Bank PLC manipulated the electricity markets in the Western US.

Background Information

In 2012, FERC issued an Order to Show Cause and Notice of Proposed Penalties (Order and Notice) against Barclays Bank PLC and four of its former traders asserting that Barclays Bank PLC and its former traders violated FERC’s Anti-Manipulation Rule by manipulating the electricity markets in and around California from 2006 to 2008, and proposed civil penalties and profit disgorgement to be paid by Barclays Bank PLC.

In 2013, FERC filed a civil action against Barclays Bank PLC and its former traders in the US District Court in California seeking to collect a $435m civil penalty and disgorgement of $34.9m of profits, plus interest. The action was settled for $105m ($70m penalty and $35m disgorgement) which was paid in 2017.

In 2015, a civil class action complaint seeking damages of $139.3m was filed in the US District Court for the SDNY against Barclays Bank PLC by Merced Irrigation District, a California utility company, asserting antitrust allegations in connection with Barclays Bank PLC’s purported manipulation of the electricity markets in and around California. The action has been settled in principle for $29m (subject to court approval and to the right of class members to opt out of the settlement and to seek to file their own claims).

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Apart from the settlement amounts referred to above, Barclays does not expect the financial impact of the actions described above to be material to the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position.

Treasury auction securities civil actions and related matters

Various civil actions have been filed against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other financial institutions alleging violations of anti-trust and other laws relating to the markets for US Treasury securities and Supranational, Sovereign and Agency securities. Certain governmental authorities are also conducting investigations relating to trading of certain government securities in various markets.

Background information

Numerous putative class action complaints have been filed in US Federal Court against Barclays Bank PLC, BCI and other financial institutions that have served as primary dealers in US Treasury securities. Those actions have been consolidated and in November 2017, plaintiffs in the putative class action filed a consolidated amended complaint in the US Federal Court in New York against the defendants as well as certain corporations that operate electronic trading platforms on which US Treasury securities are traded. The complaint purports to assert claims under US federal antitrust laws and state common law based on allegations that defendants (i) conspired to manipulate the US Treasury securities market and/or (ii) conspired to prevent the creation of certain platforms by boycotting or threatening to boycott such trading platforms. Defendants intend to move to dismiss the action.

In addition, certain plaintiffs have filed a related, direct action against BCI and certain other financial institutions that have served as primary dealers in US Treasury securities. This complaint alleges that defendants conspired to fix and manipulate the US Treasury securities market in violation of US federal antitrust laws, the CEA and state common law.

 

268  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    245


 


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

    

    

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

RMBSIn 2017, Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, BCI, Barclays Services Limited, Barclays Capital Securities Claims

Background

AsLimited and certain other financial institutions were named as defendants in a result of some of the RMBS activities described above, the Group is party to a number of lawsuits filed by purchasers of RMBS sponsored and/or underwritten by the Group between 2005 and 2008. As a general matter, these lawsuits allege, among other things,civil anti-trust complaint that alleges that the RMBS offering materials allegedly relied on by such purchasers contained materially falsedefendants engaged in a conspiracy to fix prices and misleading statements and/or omissions and generally demand rescission and recovery of the consideration paid for the RMBS and recovery of monetary losses arising out of their ownership.

Recent Developments

The Group has settled a number of these claims, includingrestrain competition in October 2015 a settlement with the National Credit Union Administration to resolve two outstanding civil lawsuits for $325m.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

If the Group were to lose the pending actions the Group believes it could incur a loss of up to the outstanding amount of the RMBS at the time of judgment, plus any cumulative losses on the RMBS at such time and any interest, fees and costs, less the market value offor US dollar-denominated Supranational, Sovereign and Agency bonds from 2005 through 2015. Defendants have moved to dismiss the RMBS at such time and less any provisions taken to date.action.

The original face amount of RMBS related to the pending civil actions against the Group total approximately $1.3bn, of which approximately $0.4bn was outstanding as at 31 December 2015. Cumulative realised losses reported on these RMBS as at 31 December 2015 were approximately $0.1bn.

Although the purchasers in the remaining securities actions have generally not identified a specific amount of alleged damages, the Group has estimated the total market value of these RMBS as at 31 December 2015 to be approximately $0.3bn. The Group may be entitled to indemnification for a portion of such losses.

Mortgage-related Investigations

In addition to the RMBS Repurchase Requests and RMBS Securities Claims, numerous regulatory andCertain governmental authorities amongst them the DOJ, SEC, Special Inspector General for the US Troubled Asset Relief Program, the US Attorney’s Office for the District of Connecticut and the US Attorney’s Office for the Eastern District of New York have been investigating various aspects of the mortgage-related business, including issuance and underwriting practices in primary offerings of RMBS and trading practices in the secondary market for both RMBS and CMBS. The Group continues to respond to requestsare conducting investigations into activities relating to the RMBS Working Grouptrading of the Financial Fraud Enforcement Task Force (RMBS Working Group), which was formedcertain government securities in various markets and Barclays has been providing information to investigate pre-financial crisis mortgage-related misconduct. In connection with several of the investigations by members of the RMBS Working Group, a number of financial institutions have entered into settlements involving substantial monetary payments.various authorities on an ongoing basis.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period, but the cost of resolving these investigations could individually or in aggregate prove to be substantial.period.

American Depositary Shares

BPLC, BBPLCBarclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and various former members of BPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s Board of Directors have been named as defendants in a securities class action consolidated in the SDNY allegingSDNY.

Background Information

The securities class action against Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC and various former members of Barclays Bank PLC’s Board of Directors alleges misstatements and omissions in offering documents for certain American Depositary Shares issued by BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC in April 2008 with an original face amount of approximately $2.5 billion$2.5bn (the April 2008 Offering).

Background Information

The plaintiffs have assertedassert claims under the Securities Act of 1933, alleging that the offering documents for the April 2008 Offering contained misstatements and omissions concerning (amongst other things) BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s portfolio of mortgage-related (including US subprime-related) securities, BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s exposure to mortgage and credit market risk, and BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s financial condition. The plaintiffs have not specifically alleged the amount of their damages.

In June 2014,2016, the SDNY deniedcertified the action as a class action. In September 2017, the SDNY granted the defendants’ motion to dismiss the claims. The case is in discovery.for summary judgment. Plaintiffs are appealing this decision.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the action described on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

BDC Finance L.L.C.

BDC Finance L.L.C. (BDC) has filed a complaint against BBPLC in the NY Supreme CourtBarclays Bank PLC alleging breach of contract in connection with a portfolio of total return swaps governed by an ISDA Master Agreement (collectively, the Agreement). Parties related to BDC have also sued BBPLC and BCI in Connecticut State Court in connection with BBPLC’s conduct relating to the Agreement.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  269


Notes to the financial statements

Accruals, provisions, contingent liabilities and legal proceedings

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Background Information

In October 2008, BDC filed a complaint in the NY Supreme Court alleging that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC breached the Agreement when it failed to transfer approximately $40m of alleged excess collateral in response to BDC’s October 2008 demand (Demand).

BDC asserts that under the Agreement BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC was not entitled to dispute the Demand before transferring the alleged excess collateral and that even if the Agreement entitled BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC to dispute the Demand before making the transfer, BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC failed to dispute the Demand. BDC demands damages totalling $298m plus attorneys’ fees, expenses, and prejudgementpre-judgement interest. Proceedings are currently pending beforeA trial on liability issues concluded in April 2017 and the NY Supreme Court.court’s decision is pending.

In September 2011, BDC’s investment advisor, BDCM Fund Adviser, L.L.C. and its parent company, Black Diamond Capital Holdings, L.L.C. also sued BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and BCI in Connecticut State Court for unspecified damages allegedly resulting from BBPLC’sBarclays Bank PLC’s conduct relating to the Agreement, asserting claims for violation of the Connecticut Unfair Trade Practices Act and tortious interference with business and prospective business relations. The parties have agreed to a stay of thatthis case.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period. BDC has made claims against the Group totalling $298m plus attorneys’ fees, expenses, and pre-judgement interest. This amount does not necessarily reflect the Group’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it.

Civil Actionsactions in respect of the US Anti-Terrorism Act

Civil complaints against Barclays Bank PLC and other banks allege engagement in a conspiracy and violation of the US Anti-Terrorism Act (ATA).

Background Information

In April 2015, an amended civil complaint was filed in the US Federal Court in the Eastern District of New YorkEDNY by a group of approximately 250 plaintiffs, alleging that BBPLCBarclays Bank PLC and a number of other banks engaged in a conspiracy and violated the US Anti-Terrorism Act (ATA)ATA by facilitating US dollar denominateddollar-denominated transactions for the Government of Iran and various Iranian banks, which in turn funded Hezbollah and other attacks that injured or killed the plaintiffs’ family members. Plaintiffs seek to recover for pain, suffering and mental anguish pursuant to the provisions of the ATA, which allows for the tripling of any proven damages. BBPLC hasdamages and attorneys’ fees. Plaintiffs filed a motionsecond amended complaint in July 2016 (the Second Amended Complaint), which, among other things, added various plaintiffs, bringing the total number of plaintiffs to approximately 350. Defendants have moved to dismiss the action which is fully briefed.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the matters in this section or what effect that these matters might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Interest Rate Swap US Civil Action

Second Amended Complaint. In November 2015, an antitrust class action2017, a separate civil complaint was filed against BPLC, BBPLC, BCI and other financial institutionsin the US Federal Court in the SDNY by a US retirementgroup of approximately 160 plaintiffs, alleging claims under the ATA against Barclays Bank PLC and pension fund. The complaint alleges that the defendants that act as market makers for certain typesa number of derivatives and Tradeweb conspiredother banks substantially similar to prevent the development of exchanges for interest rate swaps (IRS) and demands unspecified money damages, treble damages and legal fees. The plaintiff claims to represent a class of buy-side investors that transacted in fixed-for-floating IRS with defendantsthose in the US from 1 January 2008Second Amended Complaint. Defendants intend to move to dismiss this complaint.

In November 2016, a civil complaint was filed alleging claims under the present, includingATA against Barclays Bank PLC (and a number of other retirement funds, university endowments, municipalities, corporations and insurance companies.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicablebanks) substantially similar to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the action described on the Group or what effect it has upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Treasury Auction Securities Civil Actions

Numerous putative class action complaints have been filed in US Federal Courts against BCI and other financial institutions that have served as primary dealers in US Treasury securities. The complaints have been or arethose in the process of being consolidated inSecond Amended Complaint. In October 2017, plaintiffs voluntarily dismissed the Federal Court in New York. The complaints generally allege that defendants conspired to manipulate the US Treasury securities market in violation of US federal antitrust laws, the CEA and state common law. Some complaints also allege that defendants engaged in illegal “spoofing” of the US Treasury market. The Group is considering the allegations in the complaints and is keeping all relevant agencies informed.case, without prejudice.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Investigation into Americas Wealth & Investment Management Advisory Business

The SEC is investigating the non-performance of certain due diligence on third-party managers by the Manager Research division of Barclays’ Wealth & Investment Management, Americas investment advisory business and the Group is responding to requests for information.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the investigation on the Group or what effect that it might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Retail Structured Products Investigation

The Group is cooperating with an enforcement investigation commenced by the FCA in connection with structured deposit products provided to UK customers from June 2008 to the present.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of these matters or what effect that they may have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

 

270  |  246    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

 

29 Legal, competition and regulatory matterscontinued

Investigation into suspectedInterest rate swap and credit default swap US civil actions

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, and BCI, together with other financial institutions are defendants in interest rate swap and credit default swap antitrust civil actions in the SDNY.

Background Information

Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, and BCI, together with other financial institutions that act as market makers for interest rate swaps (IRS), Trade Web, and ICAP, are named as defendants in several antitrust class actions which were consolidated in the SDNY in 2016. The complaints allege defendants conspired to prevent the development of exchanges for IRS and demand unspecified money laundering relateddamages, treble damages and legal fees. Plaintiffs include certain swap execution facilities, as well asbuy-side investors. Thebuy-side investors claim to foreign exchange transactionsrepresent a class that transacted in South African operationfixed-for-floating

Absa Bank Limited, a subsidiary of Barclays Africa Group Limited, has identified potentially fraudulent activity by certain of its customers using import advance payments to effect foreign exchange transfers IRS with defendants in the US from South Africa to beneficiary accounts located in Asia, UK, Europe and the US. As a result, the Group is conducting a review of relevant activity, processes, systems and controls. The Group is keeping relevant agencies and regulators informed as2008 to the ongoing status ofpresent, including, for example, US retirement and pension funds, municipalities, university endowments, corporations, insurance companies and investment funds. The case is in discovery. In June 2017, a separate suit was filed in the US District Court in the SDNY against the same financial institution defendants in the IRS cases, including Barclays PLC, Barclays Bank PLC, and BCI, claiming that certain conduct alleged in the IRS cases also caused plaintiff to suffer harm with respect to the Credit Default Swaps market. Defendants have moved to dismiss this matter.

It is too early to assess reliably the outcome.action.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

CCUK Finance Limited and CIAC Corporation

In May 2017, Barclays Bank PLC was served with a civil claim by CCUK Finance Limited and CIAC Corporation issued in the English High Court alleging breach of a contractual indemnity, fraudulent misrepresentation and breach of warranty arising out of the sale of a portfolio of credit cards in 2007. Barclays Bank PLC has filed a defence and counterclaim.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

The claim seeks damages of not less than £1bn plus interest and costs. The damages claimed do not necessarily reflect Barclays Bank PLC’s potential financial exposure if a ruling were to be made against it. It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the action described or what effect it might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Portuguese Competition Authority Investigationinvestigation

The Portuguese Competition Authority is investigating whether competition law was infringed by the exchange of information about retail credit products amongst 15 banks in Portugal, including the Group, over a period of 11 years with particular reference to mortgages, consumer lending and lending to small and medium enterprises. The Group is cooperating with the investigation.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

It is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of these mattersthe action described or what effect that they mayit might have upon operating results, cash flows or the Group’s financial position in any particular period.

Credit Default Swap (CDS) Antitrust Investigations and Civil Actions

The Commission and the DOJ-AD commenced investigations into the CDS market, in 2011 and 2009, respectively. In December 2015 the Commission announced its decision to close its investigations in respect of BBPLC and 12 other banks. The Commission continues to pursue its case in respect of Markit Ltd. and ISDA, which could indirectly expose BBPLC to financial loss. The case relates to concerns about actions to delay and prevent the emergence of exchange traded credit derivative products.

The DOJ-AD’s investigation is a civil investigation and relates to similar issues.

In September 2015, BBPLC settled a proposed, consolidated class action that had been filed in the US alleging similar issues for $178m subject to court approval.

Claimed Amounts/Financial Impact

Aside from the settlement discussed above, it is not currently practicable to provide an estimate of the financial impact of the actions described on the Group or what effect that they might have upon the Group’s operating results, cash flows or financial position in any particular period.

Lehman Brothers

Since September 2009, BCI and BBPLC have been engaged in litigation with various entities that have sought to challenge certain aspects of the transaction pursuant to which BCI, BBPLC and other companies in the Group acquired most of the assets of Lehman Brothers Inc. in September 2008, as well as the court order (Order) approving the sale (Sale). All of the claims challenging the Sale were ultimately resolved in favour of BCI. In May 2015, BCI and BBPLC reached a settlement with the SIPA Trustee for Lehman Brothers Inc. (Trustee) to resolve the remaining outstanding litigation between them relating to the Sale. Pursuant to the settlement, BBPLC has received all of the assets that BBPLC asserted it was entitled to receive with the exception of $80m of assets that the Trustee is entitled to retain and approximately $0.3bn of margin for exchange-traded derivatives still owed to BBPLC but expected to be received from third parties. The settlement was approved by the United States Bankruptcy Court for the SDNY on 29 June 2015, thereby bringing the litigation relating to the Sale to an end.

General

The Group is engaged in various other legal, competition and regulatory matters both in the UK and US and a number of other overseas jurisdictions. It is subject to legal proceedings by and against the Group which arise in the ordinary course of business from time to time, including (but not limited to) disputes in relation to contracts, securities, debt collection, consumer credit, fraud, trusts, client assets, competition, data protection, money laundering, financial crime, employment, environmental and other statutory and common law issues.

The Group is also subject to enquiries and examinations, requests for information, audits, investigations and legal and other proceedings by regulators, governmental and other public bodies in connection with (but not limited to) consumer protection measures, compliance with legislation and regulation, wholesale trading activity and other areas of banking and business activities in which the Group is or has been engaged.

The Group is cooperating with the relevant authorities and keeping all relevant agencies briefed as appropriate in relation to these matters and others described in this note on an ongoing basis.

At the present time, the Group does not expect the ultimate resolution of any of these other matters to have a material adverse effect on its financial position. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such matters and the matters specifically described in this note, there can be no assurance that the outcome of a particular matter or matters will not be material to the Group’s operating results of operations or cash flowsflow for a particular period, depending on, amongamongst other things, the amount of the loss resulting from the matter(s) and the amount of income otherwise reported for the reporting period.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  271    247


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

    

    

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s loan capital and shareholders’ equity including issued share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities(non-controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Group maintains sufficient capital to meet our regulatory requirementsrefer to pages 137 to 145.

The notes included in this section focus on the Group’s loan capital and shareholders’ equity including issued share capital, retained earnings, other equity balances and interests of minority shareholders in our subsidiary entities (non-controlling interests). For more information on capital management and how the Group maintains sufficient capital to meet our regulatory requirements see pages 103 to 104.

30 Subordinated liabilities

 

 

Accounting for subordinated debt

Subordinated debt is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method under IAS 39.

    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Opening balance as at 1 January       23,383       21,467 
Issuances   3,041   1,457 
Redemptions   (1,378  (1,143
Other   (1,220  1,602 
Total subordinated liabilities   23,826   23,383 

Issuances totalling £3,041m made up of $2,000m 4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (£1,547m),1,500m 2% Fixed Rate

Subordinated Callable Notes (£1,384m) and SGD 200m 3.75% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (£110m). Redemptions totalling £1,378m include £133m 6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes, $1,556m 6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (£1,151m), $117m 7.434%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (£87m) and instruments issued by other subsidiaries (£7m). Other movements include a decrease of £1,220m largely due to the depreciation of period end USD against GBP.

Subordinated debt is measured at amortised cost using the effective interest method under IAS 39.

Subordinated liabilities include accrued interest and comprise undated and dated loan capital as follows:

 

         

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Undated subordinated liabilities

     5,248     5,640  

Dated subordinated liabilities

        16,219     15,513  

Total subordinated liabilities

        21,467     21,153  

 

None of the Group’s loan capital is secured.

 

      

Undated subordinated liabilities

               
       

Subordinated liabilities per

balance sheet

 
    Initial call date     
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  

Barclays Bank PLC issued

      

Tier One Notes (TONs)

      

6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes

   2032     16     16  

6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (USD 569m)

   2032     626     604  

Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)

      

5.926% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 159m)

   2016     113     112  

7.434% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 117m)

   2017     85     85  

6.3688% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   2019     38     39  

14% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   2019     3,062     3,065  

5.3304% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   2036     51     52  

Undated Notes

      

6.875% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2015          140  

6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2017     143     146  

7.7% Undated Subordinated Notes (USD 99m)

   2018     69     69  

8.25% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2018     149     152  

7.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2020     195     202  

6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes

   2027     245     249  

Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (USD 109m)

   Any interest payment date     74     70  

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 3

   Any interest payment date     145     145  

Bonds

      

9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich PLC)

   2021     91     94  

9% Permanent Interest Bearing Capital Bonds

   At any time     45     46  

Loans

      

5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)

   2028     42     39  

5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)

   2028     59     54  

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V. guaranteed by the Bank

      

6.14% Fixed Rate Guaranteed Perpetual Subordinated Notes

   2015          261  

Total undated subordinated liabilities

        5,248     5,640  
    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Undated subordinated liabilities   4,191   4,495 
Dated subordinated liabilities   19,635    18,888  
Total subordinated liabilities       23,826       23,383 

None of the Group’s loan capital is secured.

Undated subordinated liabilities               
       

Subordinated liabilities per

balance sheet

 
    Initial call date   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 
Barclays Bank PLC issued      
Tier One Notes (TONs)      
6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes   2032    16    17 
6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes (USD 179m)   2032    197    232 
Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)      
7.434%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments (USD 117m)   2017        100 
6.3688%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2019    36    37 
14%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2019          3,142          3,124 
5.3304%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments   2036    52    54 
Undated Notes      
6.375% Undated Subordinated Notes   2017        140 
7.7% Undated Subordinated Notes (USD 99m)   2018    74    84 
8.25% Undated Subordinated Notes   2018    144    148 
7.125% Undated Subordinated Notes   2020    182    193 
6.125% Undated Subordinated Notes   2027    43    45 
Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes (USD 38m)   Any interest payment date    28    31 
Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 3   Any interest payment date    21    21 
Bonds      
9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds(ex-Woolwich Plc)   2021    87    91 
9% Permanent Interest Bearing Capital Bonds   At any time    45    47 
Loans      
5.03% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 8,000m)   2028    51    54 
5% Reverse Dual Currency Undated Subordinated Loan (JPY 12,000m)   2028    73    77 
Total undated subordinated liabilities        4,191    4,495 

 

272  |  248    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

 

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

Undated loan capital

Undated loan capital is issued by the Bank and its subsidiaries for the development and expansion of the business and to strengthen the capital bases. The principal terms of the undated loan capital are described below.below:

Subordination

All undated loan capital ranks behind the claims against the bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors and holders of dated loan capital in the following order: Junior Undated Floating Rate Notes; other issues of Undated Notes, Bonds and Loans ranking pari passu with each other; followed by TONs and RCIs ranking pari passu with each other.

Interest

All undated loan capital bears a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date, with the exception of the 9% Bonds which are fixed for the life of the issue, and the Junior and Series 3 Undated Notes which are floating rate.

After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the 6.375%, 7.125%, 6.125% Undated Notes and the 9.25% Bonds will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market rates. All other undated loan capital except the two floating rate Undated Notes will bear interest, and the two floating rate Undated Notes currently bear interest, at rates fixed periodically in advance based on London interbank rates.

Payment of interest

The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its Undated Notes, Bonds and Loans excluding the 7.7% Undated Notes, 8.25% Undated Notes and 9.25% Bonds if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC or, in certain cases, any class of preference shares of the Bank. The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its 9.25% Perpetual Subordinated Bonds if, in the immediately preceding 12 months’ interest period, a dividend has not been paid on any class of its share capital. Interest not so paid becomes payable in each case if such a dividend is subsequently paid or in certain other circumstances. During the year, the Bank declared and paid dividends on its ordinary shares and on all classes of preference shares.

No payment of principal or any interest may be made unless the Bank satisfies a specified solvency test.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the 7.7% Undated Notes and 8.25% Undated Notes. Until such time as any deferred interest has been paid in full, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares, preference shares, or other share capital or satisfy any payments of interest or coupons on certain other junior obligations.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the RCIs. Any such deferred payment of interest must be paid on the earlier of: (i) the date of redemption of the RCIs, (ii) the coupon payment date falling on or nearest to the tenth anniversary of the date of deferral of such payment, and (iii) in respect of the 14% RCIs only, substitution. While such deferral is continuing, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of its ordinary shares or preference shares.

The Bank may elect to defer any payment of interest on the TONs if it determines that it is, or such payment would result in it being, innon-compliance with capital adequacy requirements and policies of the PRA. Any such deferred payment of interest will only be payable on a redemption of the TONs. Until such time as the Bank next makes a payment of interest on the TONs, neither the Bank nor Barclays PLC may (i) declare or pay a dividend, subject to certain exceptions, on any of their respective ordinary shares or Preference Shares, or make payments of interest in respect of the Bank’s Reserve Capital Instruments and (ii) certain restrictions on the redemption, purchase or reduction of their respective share capital and certain other securities also apply.

Repayment

All undated loan capital is repayable at the option of the Bank, generally in whole, at the initial call date and on any subsequent coupon or interest payment date or in the case of the 6.375%, 7.125%, 6.125% Undated Notes and the 9.25% Bonds on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, each issue of undated loan capital is repayable, at the option of the Bank in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax treatment of the notes, either at any time, or on an interest payment date. There are no events of default exceptnon-payment of principal or mandatory interest. Any repayments require the prior approval of the PRA.

Other

All issues of undated subordinated liabilities arenon-convertible.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  273    249


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

    

    

 

30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

 

Dated subordinated liabilities

                            
             Subordinated liabilities  
             per balance sheet  
     Initial       Maturity       2015       2014  
      call date       date       £m       £m  

Barclays PLC issued

                

2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m)

     2020       2025       918         

4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,250m)

         2024       883       810  

Barclays Bank PLC issued

                

4.38% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 75m)

         2015              49  

4.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 150m)

         2015              98  

6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,556m)

         2017       1,124       1,102  

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 40m)

         2018       29       31  

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,750m)

         2018       1,377       1,462  

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 100m)

         2018       77       82  

CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 135m)

         2018       103       109  

Fixed/Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes

     2018       2023       555       565  

7.75% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 1,000m)

     2018       2023       679       640  

Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 50m)

         2019       36       38  

5.14% Lower Tier 2 Notes (USD 1,094m)

         2020       808       767  

6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,500m)

         2021       1,252       1,338  

9.5% Subordinated Bonds (ex-Woolwich PLC)

         2021       293       306  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

         2021       73       77  

10% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

         2021       2,317       2,363  

10.179% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,521m)

         2021       1,083       1,062  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

         2022       37       39  

6.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,000m)

         2022       891       947  

7.625% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 3,000m)

         2022       1,984       1,856  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)

         2023       37       39  

5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes

         2026       802       828  

5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m)

         2027       80       74  

6.33% Subordinated Notes

         2032       60       62  

Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)

         2040       74       78  

Absa Bank Limited issued

                

8.1% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,000m)

     2015       2020              114  

10.28% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 600m)

     2017       2022       26       34  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 400m)

     2017       2022       18       22  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,805m)

     2017       2022       79       101  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 2,007m)

     2018       2023       88       112  

8.295% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,188m)

     2018       2023       42       64  

5.50% CPI-linked Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,500m)

     2023       2028       86       109  

Barclays Africa Group Limited Issued

                

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 370m)

     2019       2024       16       21  

10.835% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 130m)

     2019       2024       6       7  

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 1,693m)

     2020       2025       74         

10.05% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 807m)

     2020       2025       36         

11.4% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 288m)

     2020       2025       13         

11.365% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 508m)

     2020       2025       23         

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 437m)

     2020       2025       19         

11.81% Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 737m)

     2022       2027       33         

Subordinated Callable Notes (ZAR 30m)

     2022       2027       1         

Other capital issued by Barclays Africa and Japan

            2016–2019       87       107  

Total dated subordinated liabilities

                   16,219       15,513  

274  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

Dated subordinated liabilities                    
           

Subordinated liabilities per

balance sheet

 
    

Initial

call date

   

Maturity

date

   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 
Barclays PLC issued        
2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,250m)   2020    2025    1,119    1,084 
2% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (EUR 1,500m)   2023    2028    1,325     
4.375% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,250m)     2024    947    1,054 
3.75% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes (SGD 200m)   2025    2030    111     
5.20% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 2,050m)     2026    1,439    1,590 
4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes (USD 2,000m)   2027    2028    1,471     
Barclays Bank PLC issued        
6.05% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,556m)     2017        1,316 
Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 40m)     2018    36    34 
6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,750m)     2018    1,643    1,590 
CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 100m)     2018    93    90 
CMS-Linked Subordinated Notes (EUR 135m)     2018    124    120 
Fixed/Floating Rate Subordinated Callable Notes   2018    2023    533    548 
7.75% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 1,000m)   2018    2023    747    822 
Floating Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 50m)     2019    44    42 
5.14% Lower Tier 2 Notes (USD 1,094m)     2020    841    956 
6% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,500m)     2021    1,484    1,444 
9.5% Subordinated Bonds(ex-Woolwich Plc)     2021    273    286 
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 100m)     2021    88    85 
10% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes     2021    2,261    2,345 
10.179% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (USD 1,521m)     2021    1,118    1,285 
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)     2022    44    43 
6.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes (EUR 1,000m)     2022    1,043    1,042 
7.625% Contingent Capital Notes (USD 3,000m)     2022    2,163    2,390 
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 50m)     2023    44    43 
5.75% Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes     2026    366    384 
5.4% Reverse Dual Currency Subordinated Loan (JPY 15,000m)     2027    97    103 
6.33% Subordinated Notes     2032    62    64 
Subordinated Floating Rate Notes (EUR 68m)     2040    60    58 
Issuances by other subsidiaries        2018–2019    59    70 
Total dated subordinated liabilities                 19,635        18,888 

Dated loan capital

Dated loan capital is issued by the Company, the Bank and respective subsidiaries for the development and expansion of their business and to strengthen their respective capital bases. The principal terms of the dated loan capital are described below:

Subordination

Dated loan capital issued by the Company ranks behind the claims against the Company of unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the holders of its equity.

All dated loan capital issued by the Bank ranks behind the claims against the Bank of depositors and other unsecured unsubordinated creditors but before the claims of the undated loan capital and the holders of its equity. The dated loan capital issued by other subsidiaries is similarly subordinated.

Interest

Interest on the Floating Rate Notes is fixed periodically in advance, based on the related interbank or local central bank rates.

Interest on the 7.75% Contingent Capital Notes, and the 2.625% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes, 4.836% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes,

2% Fixed Rate Subordinated Callable Notes and the 3.75% Fixed Rate Resetting Subordinated Callable Notes are fixed until the call date. After the respective call dates, in the event that they are not redeemed, the interest rates will be resetre-set and fixed until maturity based on a market rate.

Repayment

Those Notes with a call date are repayable at the option of the issuer, on conditions governing the respective debt obligations, some in whole or in part, and some only in whole. The remaining dated loan capital outstanding at 31 December 20152017 is redeemable only on maturity, subject in particular cases to provisions allowing an early redemption in the event of certain changes in tax law, or to certain changes in legislation or regulations.

Any repayments prior to maturity require, in the case of the Company and the Bank, the prior approval of the PRA, or in the case of the overseas issues, the approval of the local regulator for that jurisdiction and of the PRA in certain circumstances.

There are no committed facilities in existence at the balance sheet date which permit the refinancing of debt beyond the date of maturity.

250    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


30 Subordinated liabilitiescontinued

Other

The 7.625% Contingent Capital Notes will be automatically transferred from investors to Barclays PLC (or another entity within the Group) for nil consideration in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7.0%.

The 7.75% Contingent Capital Notes will be automatically written-down and investors will lose their entire investment in the notes in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7.0%.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  275


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

31 Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equity

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid                         
    

 

 

Number of

shares

m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Ordinary

shares

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Share

premium

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Other

equity

instruments

£m

  

  

  

  

 As at 1 January 2015   16,498     4,125     16,684     20,809     4,322  
 Issued to staff under share incentive plans   253     63     577     640       
 Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme   54     13     124     137       
 AT1 securities issuance                       995  
 Other movements                       (12
 As at 31 December 2015   16,805     4,201     17,385     21,586     5,305  
 As at 1 January 2014   16,113     4,028     15,859     19,887     2,063  
 Issued to staff under share incentive plans   320     81     691     772       
 Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme   65     16     134     150       
 AT1 securities issuance                       2,263  
 Other movements                       (4
 As at 31 December 2014   16,498     4,125     16,684     20,809     4,322  

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid                         
    

  Number of

shares

m

   

    Ordinary

shares

£m

   

Share

  premium

£m

   

  Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

   

Other

equity

  instruments

£m

 
As at 1 January 2017   16,963    4,241    17,601    21,842    6,449 
Issued to staff under share incentive plans   46    12    74    86     
Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme   51    12    105    117     
AT1 securities issuance                   2,490 
Other movements                   2 
As at 31 December 2017   17,060    4,265    17,780    22,045    8,941 
As at 1 January 2016   16,805    4,201    17,385    21,586    5,305 
Issued to staff under share incentive plans   116    30    158    188     
Issuances relating to Scrip Dividend Programme   42    10    58    68     
AT1 securities issuance                   1,132 
Other movements                   12 
As at 31 December 2016   16,963    4,241    17,601    21,842    6,449 

Called up share capital

Called up share capital comprises 16,805m (2014: 16,498m)17,060m (2016: 16,963m) ordinary shares of 25p each. The increase was due to the issuance of 253m (2014:320m) shares under employee share schemes and a further 54m (2014: 65m) issued as part of the Barclays PLC Scrip Dividend Programme.

Share repurchase

At the 20152017 AGM on 23 April 2015,10 May 2017, Barclays PLC was authorised to repurchase 1,650mup to an aggregate of 1,696m of its ordinary shares of 25p. The authorisation is effective until the AGM in 20162018 or the close of business on 30 June 2016,2018, whichever is the earlier. No share repurchases were made during either 20152017 or 2014.2016.

Other equity instruments

Other equity instruments of £5,305m (2014: £4,322m)£8,941m (2016: £6,449m) include AT1 securities issued by Barclays PLC. In 2015, there was one issuance of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with a principal amount of £1.0bn. In 2014,2017, there were threetwo issuances of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities (2016: one issuance), with principal amounts of $1.2bn,1.1bn and £0.7bn.totalling £2.5bn (2016: £1.1bn).

The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under CRD IV.

The principal terms of the AT1 securities are described below:

 

§ AT1 securities rank behind the claims against Barclays PLC of (i) unsubordinated creditors; (ii) claims which are expressed to be subordinated to the claims of unsubordinated creditors of Barclays PLC but not further or otherwise; or (iii) claims which are, or are expressed to be, junior to the claims of other creditors of Barclays PLC, whether subordinated or unsubordinated, other than claims which rank, or are expressed to rank, pari passu with, or junior to, the claims of holders of the AT1 securitiessecurities.

 

§ AT1 securities bear a fixed rate of interest until the initial call date. After the initial call date, in the event that they are not redeemed, the AT1 securities will bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance for five-year periods based on market ratesrates.

 

§ interestInterest on the AT1 securities will be due and payable only at the sole discretion of Barclays PLC, and Barclays PLC has sole and absolute discretion at all times and for any reason to cancel (in whole or in part) any interest payment that would otherwise be payable on any interest payment date anddate.

 

§ AT1 securities are undated and are repayable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole at the initial call date, or on any fifth anniversary after the initial call date. In addition, the AT1 securities are repayable, at the option of Barclays PLC, in whole in the event of certain changes in the tax or regulatory treatment of the securities. Any repayments require the prior consent of the PRA.

All AT1 securities will be converted into ordinary shares of Barclays PLC, at apre-determined price, should the fully loaded CET1 ratio of the Barclays PLC Group fall below 7.0%.

276  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


32 Reserves

Currency translation reserve

The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging.

As at 31 December 2015, there was a debit balance of £623m (2014: £582m debit) in the currency translation reserve. The increase in the debit balance of £41m (2014: £560m decrease to a debit balance) principally reflected the depreciation of ZAR and EUR against GBP, offset by the appreciation of USD against GBP. The currency translation reserve movement associated with non-controlling interests was a £435m debit (2014: £74m debit) reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

During the year, a £65m net loss (2014: £91m net gain) from recycling of the currency translation reserve was recognised in the income statement.

Available for sale reserve

The available for sale reserve represents the unrealised change in the fair value of available for sale investments since initial recognition.

As at 31 December 2015 there was a credit balance of £317m (2014: £562m credit) in the available for sale reserve. The decrease of £245m (2014: £414m increase) principally reflected a £350m loss from changes in fair value on government bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool, £148m of losses from related hedging, £378m of net gains transferred to the income statement, partially offset by a £396m gain from changes in fair value of equity investments in Visa Europe and an £86m change in insurance liabilities. A tax credit of £132m was recognised in the period relating to these items. The tax credit on AFS movements represented an effective rate of tax of 35.0% (2014: 19.9%). This is significantly higher than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to AFS movements including the Visa Europe gain that will be offset by existing UK capital losses for which a deferred tax asset has not been recognised.

Cash flow hedging reserve

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be recycled to the income statement when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    251


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

32 Reservescontinued

Own credit reserve

As at 31 December 2015, there was a result of the early adoption of the own credit balanceprovisions of £1,261m (2014: £1,817m credit) in the cash flow hedging reserve. The decrease of £556m (2014: £1,544m increase) principally reflected a £378m decrease in theIFRS 9 on 1 January 2017, own credit on financial liabilities designated at fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increasedthrough profit and £247m gains recycled toloss which was previously recorded in the income statement is now recognised within other comprehensive income. Amounts in line with when the hedged item affectsown credit reserve is not recycled to profit or loss partially offset by a tax credit of £66m. The tax credit on cash flow hedging reserve movements represented an effective rate of tax of 10.6% (2014: 19.8%). This is significantly lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to the tax rate changes introduced by the UK Summer Budget increasing associated deferred tax liabilities.in future periods.

Other reserves and treasury shares

As at 31 December 2015, there was a credit balance of £1,011m (2014: £1,011m credit) in otherOther reserves relatingrelate to the excess repurchase price paid over nominal of redeemed ordinary and preference shares issuesissued by the Group.

The treasuryTreasury shares relate to Barclays PLC shares held in relation to the Group’s various share schemes. These schemes are described in Note 34 Share based payments.

34. Treasury shares are deducted from shareholders’ equity within other reserves. A transfer is made to retained earnings in line with the vesting of treasury shares held for the purposes of share basedshare-based payments.

As at 31 December 2015, there was a debit balance of £68m (2014: £84m debit) in other reserves relating to treasury shares. The increase principally reflected £602m (2014: £909m) of net purchases of treasury shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes, partially offset by £618m (2014: £866m) transferred to retained earnings reflecting the vesting of deferred share based payments.

    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Currency translation reserve       3,054       3,051 
Available for sale reserve   364   (74
Cash flow hedging reserve   1,161   2,105 
Own credit reservea   (179   
Other reserves and treasury shares   983   969 
Total   5,383   6,051 

Note

aAs at 31 December 2017, the amount of own credit recognised in the Group’s other comprehensive income was a debit balance of £179m. Upon adoption of IFRS 9, an opening debit balance of £175m was recognised, with a further £4m loss (net of tax) recorded during 2017.

33Non-controlling interests

 

    
 
Profit attributable to
non-controlling interest
  
  
   
 
Equity attributable to
non-controlling interest
  
  
   
 
Dividends paid to
non-controlling interest
  
  
    
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
   
 
2015
£m
  
  
   
 
2014
£m
  
  
 Barclays Bank PLC issued:            
 – Preference shares   343     441     3,654     3,654     343     441  
 – Upper Tier 2 instruments   2     2     486     486            
 Barclays Africa Group Limited   325     320     1,902     2,247     209     189  
 Other non-controlling interests   2     6     12     4          1  
 Total   672     769     6,054     6,391     552     631  

Subsidiaries of the Group that give rise to significant non-controlling interests are Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Africa Group Limited.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  277


Notes to the financial statements

Capital instruments, equity and reserves

33 Non-controlling interestscontinued

    

Profit attributable to

non-controlling interest

  

Equity attributable to

non-controlling interest

  

Dividends paid to non-

controlling interest

 
    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Barclays Bank PLC issued:       
– Preference shares   242   340   1,838   2,698   242   340 
– Upper Tier 2 instruments   3   3   272   272       
Barclays Africa Group Limited   140   402      3,507   173   235 
Othernon-controlling interests   4   3   1   15       
Total ��        389           748        2,111        6,492           415           575  

Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays PLC holds 100% of the voting rights of Barclays Bank PLC. As at 31 December 2015,2017, Barclays Bank PLC has in issue preference shares and Upper Tier 2 instruments, representing 11% (2014:(2016: 11%) of its equity. Preference share dividends and redemption are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC. The payment of Upper Tier 2 instrument coupons and principal are typically at the discretion of Barclays Bank PLC, except for coupon payments that become compulsory where Barclays PLC has declared or paid a dividend on ordinary shares in the preceding six monthsix-month period. Preference share and Upper Tier 2 instrument holders typically only have rights to redeem in the event of insolvency.

 

Instrument

            
    

 

2015

£m

  

  

     

 

2014

£m

  

  

Preference Shares:

      

6.00% non cumulative callable preference shares

   203       203  

6.278% non cumulative callable preference shares

   318       318  

4.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

   211       211  

6.625% non cumulative callable preference shares

   406       406  

7.1% non cumulative callable preference shares

   657       657  

7.75% non cumulative callable preference shares

   550       550  

8.125% non cumulative callable preference shares

   1,309       1,309  

Total Barclays Bank PLC Preference Shares

   3,654       3,654  

Barclays Africa Group Limited

   201       258  

Total

   3,855       3,912  

Upper Tier 2 Instruments:

      

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 1

   222       222  

Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 2

   264       264  

Total Upper Tier 2 Instruments

   486       486  

 

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited

 

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited, before intercompany eliminations, is set out below:

 

      
    
 
 

 

 

Barclays
Africa Group
Limited

2015

£m

  
  
  

  

  

     
 
 

 

 

Barclays
Africa Group
Limited

2014

£m

  
  
  

  

  

Income statement information

      

Total income net of insurance claims

   3,418       3,530  

Profit after tax

   781       765  

Total other comprehensive income for the year, after tax

   26       (7

Total comprehensive income for the year

   807       758  

Statement of cash flows information

      

Net cash inflows

   923       43  

Balance sheet information

      

Total assets

   49,471       55,378  

Total liabilities

   45,200       50,150  

Shareholder equity

   4,271       5,228  

Full financial statements for Barclays Africa Group Limited can be obtained at barclaysafrica.com/barclaysafrica/Investor-Relations.

Instrument  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Preference Shares:   
6.00% non cumulative callable preference shares      203 
6.278% non cumulative callable preference shares   318   318 
4.75% non cumulative callable preference shares   211   211 
7.1% non cumulative callable preference shares      657 
8.125% non cumulative callable preference shares   1,309   1,309 
Total Barclays Bank PLC Preference Shares   1,838   2,698 
Barclays Africa Group Limited      277 
Total       1,838        2,975  
Upper Tier 2 Instruments:   
Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 1   93   93 
Undated Floating Rate Primary Capital Notes Series 2   179   179 
Total Upper Tier 2 Instruments   272   272 

Protective rights ofnon-controlling interests

Barclays Africa Group Limited

Barclays owns 62.5% (62.3% including treasury shares)shareholding in BAGL has reduced from 50.1% in 2016 to 14.9% in 2017. Following the disposal BAGL is not considered as a subsidiary of the share capital of Barclays Africa Group Limited. Barclays PLC’s rights to access the assets of Barclays Africa and its group companies are restricted by virtue of the South African Companies Act which requires 75% shareholder approval to dispose of all or the greater part of Barclays Africa Group Limited’s assets or to complete the voluntary winding up of the entity.has been deconsolidated for accounting purposes and is accounted for as an Available For Sale asset.

Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays Bank PLC also has in issue preference shares which arenon-controlling interests to the Group. Under the terms of these instruments, Barclays PLC may not pay dividends on ordinary shares until a dividend is next paid on these instruments or the instruments are redeemed or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC. There are no restrictions on Barclays Bank PLC’s ability to remit capital to the Parent as a result of these issued instruments.

 

278  |  252    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

    

    

 

The notes included in this section focus on the costs and commitments associated with employing our staff.

 

34 Share basedShare-based payments

 

Accounting for share based payments

The Group applies IFRS 2Share Based Payments in accounting for employee remuneration in the form of shares.

Employee incentives include awards in the form of shares and share options, as well as offering employees the opportunity to purchase shares on favourable terms. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options granted is recognised in the income statement over the period that employees provide services, generally the period in which the award is granted or notified and the vesting date of the shares or options. The overall cost of the award is calculated using the number of shares and options expected to vest and the fair value of the shares or options at the date of grant.

The number of shares and options expected to vest takes into account the likelihood that performance and service conditions included in the terms of the awards will be met. Failure to meet the non-vesting condition is treated as a cancellation, resulting in an acceleration of recognition of the cost of the employee services.

The fair value of shares is the market price ruling on the grant date, in some cases adjusted to reflect restrictions on transferability. The fair value of options granted is determined using option pricing models to estimate the numbers of shares likely to vest. These take into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the share price over the life of the option and other relevant factors. Market conditions that must be met in order for the award to vest are also reflected in the fair value of the award, as are any other non-vesting conditions – such as continuing to make payments into a share based savings scheme.

Accounting for share-based payments

The Group applies IFRS 2Share-based Payments in accounting for employee remuneration in the form of shares.

Employee incentives include awards in the form of shares and share options, as well as offering employees the opportunity to purchase shares on favourable terms. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options granted is recognised in the income statement over the period that employees provide services. The overall cost of the award is calculated using the number of shares and options expected to vest and the fair value of the shares or options at the date of grant.

The number of shares and options expected to vest takes into account the likelihood that performance and service conditions included in the terms of the awards will be met. Failure to meet thenon-vesting condition is treated as a cancellation, resulting in an acceleration of recognition of the cost of the employee services.

The fair value of shares is the market price ruling on the grant date, in some cases adjusted to reflect restrictions on transferability. The fair value of options granted is determined using option pricing models to estimate the numbers of shares likely to vest. These take into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk-free interest rate, the expected volatility of the share price over the life of the option and other relevant factors. Market conditions that must be met in order for the award to vest are also reflected in the fair value of the award, as are any othernon-vesting conditions – such as continuing to make payments into a share-based savings scheme.

The charge for the year arising from share basedshare-based payment schemes was as follows:

 

     Charge for the year    Charge for the year 
     
 
2015
£m
  
  
     
 
2014
£m
  
  
     
 
2013
£m
  
  
  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 

Share Value Plan

     442       575       576     153    473    442 
Deferred Share Value Plan   166         

Others

     100       84       126     186    192    86 

Total equity settled

     542       659       702     505    665    528 

Cash settled

     24       43       25     3    1    4 

Total share based payments

     566       702       727             508            666            532 

The terms of the main current plans are as follows:

Share Value Plan (SVP)

The SVP was introduced in March 2010 and approved by shareholders (for Executiveexecutive Director participation and use of new issue shares) at the AGM in April 2011. SVP awards are granted to participants in the form of a conditional right to receive Barclays PLC shares or provisional allocations of Barclays PLC shares which vest or are considered for release over a period of three, years in equal annual tranches.five or seven years. Participants do not pay to receive an award or to receive a release of shares. The grantor may also make a dividend equivalent payment to participants on release of a SVP award. SVP awards are also made to eligible employees for recruitment purposes. All awards are subject to potential forfeiture in certain leaver scenarios.

Deferred Share Value Plan (DSVP)

The DSVP was introduced in February 2017. The terms of the DSVP are materially the same as the terms of the SVP as described above, save that executive Directors are not eligible to participate in the DSVP and the DSVP operates over market purchase shares only. The accounting policies for employee benefits are included in Note 8.

Other schemes

In addition to the SVP and DSVP, the Group operates a number of other schemes including schemes operated by, and settled in, the shares of subsidiary undertakings, none of which areis individually or in aggregate material in relation to the charge for the year or the dilutive effect of outstanding share options. Included within other schemes are Sharesave (both UK and overseas), Sharepurchase (both UK and overseas), the Barclays’ Long Term Incentive Plan, the Share Incentive Award and the Executive Share Award Scheme.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  279


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

34 Share based paymentscontinued

Share option and award plans

The weighted average fair value per award granted, and weighted average share price at the date of exercise/release of shares during the year, was:weighted average contractual remaining life and number of options and awards outstanding (including those exercisable) at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 

              
 
Weighted average fair value
per award granted in year
  
  
   

 

 

Weighted average share

price at exercise/release

during year

  

  

  

              

 

2015

£

  

  

   

 

2014

£

  

  

   

 

2015

£

  

  

   

 

2014

£

  

  

SVPa

       2.54     2.33     2.53     2.31  

Othersa

             0.49-2.54     0.52-2.39     2.37-2.67     2.23-2.56  

 

SVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of grant. Consequently the fair value of these awards is based on the market value at that date.

 

Movements in options and awards

 

The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of options was:

 

  

  

  

    SVPa,b     Othersa,c  
   Number (000s)     Number (000s)     

 

Weighted average

ex. price (£)

  

  

    2015     2014     2015     2014     2015     2014  

Outstanding at beginning of year/acquisition date

   480,042     524,260     185,599     231,989     1.61     1.55  

Granted in the year

   186,397     275,152     55,982     64,326     2.27     1.78  

Exercised/released in the year

   (252,031   (287,319   (50,538   (71,594   1.41     1.44  

Less: forfeited in the year

   (27,938   (32,051   (20,811   (32,784   1.76     1.66  

Less: expired in the year

             (3,257   (6,338   2.39     2.24  

Outstanding at end of year

   386,470     480,042     166,975     185,599     1.75     1.61  

Of which exercisable:

   30     44     26,058     20,025     1.48     1.88  

 

Certain of the Group’s share option plans enable certain Directors and employees to subscribe for new ordinary shares of Barclays PLC. For accounting for treasury shares see Note 32 Reserves.

 

The weighted average contractual remaining life and number of options and awards outstanding (including those exercisable) at the balance sheet date are as follows:

 

  

  

              2015     2014  
              
 
 
 
 
Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s)
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Weighted
average
remaining
contractual
life in years
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 
 
Number of
options/
awards
outstanding
(000s)
  
  
  
  
  

SVPa,b

       1     386,470     1     480,042  

Othersa

             0-2     166,975     0-3     185,599  
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    253

There were no significant modifications


Notes to the share based payments arrangements in 2015 and 2014.financial statements

As at 31 December 2015, the total liability arising from cash-settled share based payments transactions was £13m (2014: £45m).Employee benefits

Holdings34 Share-based paymentscontinued

                                                                                                                                                
    2017   2016 
    

Weighted

average fair

value per

award

granted

in year

£

   

Weighted

average

share price

at exercise/

release

during year

£

   

Weighted

average

remaining

contractual

life in years

    

   

Number of

options/

awards

outstanding

(000s)

   

Weighted

average fair

value per

award

granted

in year

£

   

Weighted

average

share price

at exercise/

release

during year

£

   

Weighted

average

remaining

contractual

life in years

    

   

Number of

options/

awards

outstanding

(000s)

 
SVPa,b   2.30    2.29    1    191,610    1.66    1.66    1    406,016 
DSVPa,b   2.26    2.06    1    125,399                 
Othersa   0.41-2.30    1.99-2.30    0–3    210,160    0.61-1.67    1.65-1.88    0–3    205,129 

SVP and DSVP are nil cost awards on which the performance conditions are substantially completed at the date of Barclays PLC shares

Various employee benefit trusts established bygrant. Consequently, the Group hold shares in Barclays PLC to meet obligations under the Barclays share based payment schemes. The total number of Barclays shares held in these employee benefit trusts at 31 December 2015 was 5.1 million (2014: 5.2 million). Dividend rights have been waived on all these shares. The total marketfair value of the shares held in trustthese awards is based on the year end sharemarket value at that date.

Movements in options and awards

The movement in the number of options and awards for the major schemes and the weighted average exercise price of £2.19 (2014: £2.43) was £11.2m (2014: £12.6m).options was:

 

                                                                                                
    SVPa,b  DSVPa,b   Othersa,c 
   Number (000s)  Number (000s)   Number (000s)  

Weighted average

ex. price (£)

 
    2017  2016  2017  2016   2017  2016  2017   2016 

Outstanding at beginning of

year/acquisition date

   406,016   386,470                –       205,129          166,975             1.38          1.75 
Granted in the year   943   229,371       132,316       118,222   154,069   1.66    1.20 
Exercised/released in the year     (200,350    (191,623  (2,275      (90,324  (60,912  1.52    1.39 
Less: forfeited in the year   (14,999  (18,202  (4,642      (17,733  (47,342  1.42    1.95 
Less: expired in the year                (5,134  (7,661  2.03    1.83 
Outstanding at end of year   191,610   406,016   125,399       210,160   205,129   1.41    1.38 
Of which exercisable:   18             24,569   24,435   1.59    1.78 

Notes

aOptions/awardsaward granted over Barclays PLC shares.
bNil cost award and therefore the weighted average exercise price was nil.
cThe number of awards within Others at the end of the year principally relates to Sharesave (number of awards exercisable at end of year was 12,479,264)10,121,109). The weighted average exercise price relates to Sharesave.

Certain of the Group’s share option plans enable certain Directors and employees to subscribe for new ordinary shares of Barclays PLC. For accounting for treasury shares refer to Note 32.

There were no significant modifications to the share based payments arrangements in 2017 and 2016.

As at 31 December 2017, the total liability arising from cash-settled share based payments transactions was £2m (2016: £nil).

Holdings of Barclays PLC shares

Various employee benefit trusts established by the Group hold shares in Barclays PLC to meet obligations under the Barclays share based payment schemes. The total number of Barclays shares held in these employee benefit trusts at 31 December 2017 was 9.9 million (2016: 6.6 million).

Dividend rights have been waived on all these shares. The total market value of the shares held in trust based on the year end share price of £2.03 (2016: £2.23) was £20.1m (2016: £14.7m).

 

280  |  254    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


    

    

    

    

 

35 Pensions and post retirementpost-retirement benefits

 

Accounting for pensions and post retirement benefits

The Group operates a number of pension schemes (including defined contribution and defined benefit) and post-employment benefit schemes.

Defined contribution schemes – the Group recognises contributions due in respect of the accounting period in the income statement. Any contributions unpaid at the balance sheet date are included as a liability.

Defined benefit schemes – the Group recognises its obligations to members of theeach scheme at the period end, less the fair value of the scheme assets after applying the asset ceiling test. The clarifications contained inGroup will keep the developments on the proposed amendments to IFRIC 14 as to when an entity has an unconditional right to benefit from a scheme surplus are not expected to have a material impact on the Group.IFRIC14 under review.

Each scheme’s obligations are calculated using the projected unit credit method on the assumptions set out in the note below.method. Scheme assets are stated at fair value as at the period end.

Changes in pension scheme liabilities or assets (remeasurements) that do not arise from regular pension cost, net interest on net defined benefit liabilities or assets, past service costs, settlements or contributions to the scheme, are recognised in other comprehensive income.

Remeasurements comprise experience adjustments (differences between previous actuarial assumptions and what has actually occurred), the effects of changes in actuarial assumptions, return on scheme assets (excluding amounts included in the interest on the assets) and any changes in the effect of the asset ceiling restriction (excluding amounts included in the interest on the restriction).

Post-employment benefitsbenefit schemes – the cost of providing health care benefits to retired employees is accrued as a liability in the financial statements over the period that the employees provide services to the Group, using a methodology similar to that for defined benefit pension schemes.

Pension schemes

UK Retirement Fund (UKRF)

The UKRF is the Group’s main scheme, representing 92%96% of the Group’s total retirement benefit obligations. The UKRF was closed to new entrants on 1 October 2012, and comprises 10 sections, the two most significant of which are:

 

§ Afterwork, which comprises a contributory cash balance defined benefit element, and a voluntary defined contribution element. The cash balance element is accrued each year and revalued until Normal Retirement Age in line with the increase in Retail Price Index (RPI) (up to a maximum of 5% p.a.). An investment related increase of up to 2% a year may also be added at Barclays’ discretion. Between 1 October 2003 and 1 October 2012 the majority of new UK employees outside(except for the employees of the Investment Bankinvestment banking business within Barclays International) were eligible to join this section. The costs ofill-health retirements and death in service benefits for Afterwork members are borne by the UKRF. The main risks that Barclays runs in relation to Afterwork are limited to needing to makealthough additional contributions are required ifpre-retirement investment returns are not sufficient to provide for the benefits.

 

§ theThe 1964 Pension Scheme. Most employees recruited before July 1997 built up benefits in thisnon-contributory defined benefit scheme in respect of service up to 31 March 2010. Pensions were calculated by reference to service and pensionable salary. From 1 April 2010, members became eligible to accrue future service benefits in either Afterwork or the Pension Investment Plan (PIP), a historic defined contribution section which is now closed to future contributions. The risks that Barclays runs in relation to the 1964 section are typical of final salary pension schemes, principally that investment returns fall short of expectations, that inflation exceeds expectations, and that retirees live longer than expected.

Barclays Pension Savings Plan (BPSP)

§From 1 October 2012, a new UK pension scheme, the BPSP, was established to satisfy Auto Enrolment legislation. The BPSP is a defined contribution scheme (Group Personal Pension) providing benefits for all new Barclays UK hires from 1 October 2012, Investment Bank UK employees who were in PIP as at 1 October 2012, and also all UK employees who were not members of a pension scheme at that date. As a defined contribution scheme, BPSP is not subject to the same investment return, inflation or longevity risks for Barclays that defined benefit schemes are. Members’ benefits reflect contributions paid and the level of investment returns achieved.

From 1 October 2012, a new UK pension scheme, the BPSP, was established to satisfy Auto Enrolment legislation. The BPSP is a defined contribution scheme (Group Personal Pension) providing benefits for all new Barclays UK hires from 1 October 2012, employees of the investment banking business within Barclays International who were in PIP as at 1 October 2012, and also all UK employees who were not members of a pension scheme at that date. As a defined contribution scheme, BPSP is not subject to the same investment return, inflation or life expectancy risks for Barclays that defined benefit schemes are. Members’ benefits reflect contributions paid and the level of investment returns achieved.

Other

Apart from the UKRF and the BPSP, Barclays operates a number of smaller pension and long-term employee benefits and post-retirement health care plans globally, the largest of which are the US and South African defined benefit schemes. Many of the schemes are funded, with assets backing the obligations held in separate legal vehicles such as trusts. Others are operated on an unfunded basis. The benefits provided, the approach to funding, and the legal basis of the schemes, reflect their local environments.

Governance

The UKRF operates under trust law and is managed and administered on behalf of the members in accordance with the terms of the Trust Deed and Rules and all relevant legislation. The Corporate Trustee is Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited, a private limited company and a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays Bank PLC. The Trustee is the legal owner of the assets of the UKRF which are held separately from the assets of the Group.

The Trustee Board comprises six Management Directors selected by Barclays, of whom three are independent Directors with no relationship with

Barclays or(and who are not members of the UKRF,UKRF), plus three Member Nominated Directors selected from eligible active staff and pensioner members who apply for the role.

The BPSP is a Group Personal Pension arrangement which operates as a collection of personal pension plans. Each personal pension plan is a direct contract between the employee and the BPSP provider (Legal & General Assurance Society Limited), and is regulated by the FCA.

Similar principles of pension governance apply to the Group’s other pension schemes, although different legislation covers overseas schemes where, in most cases,depending on local legislation.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    255


Notes to the Group has the power to determine the funding rate.financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post-retirement benefitscontinued

Amounts recognised

The following tables include amounts recognised in the income statement and an analysis of benefit obligations and scheme assets for all Group defined benefit schemes. The net position is reconciled to the assets and liabilities recognised on the balance sheet. The tables include funded and unfunded post-retirement benefits.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  281


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Income statement charge

                    
             2015               2014               2013  
   £m     £m     £m    

2017

£m

         2016
£m
         2015
£m
 

Current service cost

   303     324     371     265   243   255 

Net finance cost

   42     78     55     (12  (32  41 

Past service cost

   (434   (5   4     (3     (432

Settlements

   1     (15   (3
Other movements      2   1 

Total

   (88   382     427             250   213   (135

Past Serviceservice costs includes a £429m (2014: nil; 2013: nil)£3m (2016: £nil; 2015: £429m) gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

 

Balance sheet reconciliation

   2015   2014    2017 2016 
     Of which       Of which  
     relates to       relates to  
   Total     UKRF     Total     UKRF  
   £m     £m     £m     £m    

Total

£m

 

Of which

relates to

UKRF

£m

 

Total

£m

 

Of which

relates to

UKRF

£m

 

Benefit obligation at beginning of the year

   (30,392   (27,931   (27,568   (25,093   (33,033 (31,847  (28,279  (26,027

Current service cost

   (303   (234   (324   (258   (265 (245  (243  (220

Interest costs on scheme liabilities

   (1,147   (1,010   (1,261   (1,101   (843 (810  (1,016  (980

Past service cost

   434     429     5     2     3          

Settlements

             83       

Remeasurement gain/(loss) – financial

   1,161     1,121     (2,493   (2,382

Remeasurement loss – demographic

   (159   (160   (370   (340

Remeasurement gain – experience

   609     611     407     418  
Remeasurement loss – financial   (387 (330  (7,214  (7,170
Remeasurement (loss)/gain – demographic   (228 (240  413   390 
Remeasurement (loss)/gain – experience   (612 (614  525   490 

Employee contributions

   (36   (2   (35   (2   (5 (1  (4  (1

Benefits paid

   1,172     1,021     999     825     4,970  4,927   1,852   1,800 

Exchange and other movements

   382     128     165          132      933   (129

Benefit obligation at end of the year

   (28,279   (26,027   (30,392   (27,931   (30,268 (29,160  (33,033  (31,847

Fair value of scheme assets at beginning of the year

       28,874         26,827         25,743         23,661          32,657  31,820   28,752   26,829 

Interest income on scheme assets

   1,105     979     1,183     1,042     855  831   1,048   1,023 

Employer contribution

   689     586     347     241     1,152  1,124   720   634 

Settlements

             (68     

Remeasurement – return on scheme assets greater than discount rate

   (476   (446   2,736     2,705     1,333  1,263   5,009   5,002 

Employee contributions

   36     2     35     2     5  1   4   1 

Benefits paid

   (1,172   (1,021   (999   (825   (4,970 (4,927  (1,852  (1,800

Exchange and other movements

   (304   (98   (103   1     (110     (1,024  131 

Fair value of scheme assets at the end of the year

   28,752     26,829     28,874     26,827     30,922  30,112   32,657   31,820 

Net surplus/(deficit)

   473     802     (1,518   (1,104   654  952   (376  (27

Irrecoverable surplus (effect of asset ceiling)

   (60               

Net recognised assets/(liabilities)

   413     802     (1,518   (1,104

Retirement benefit assets

   836     802     56          966  952   14    

Retirement benefit liabilities

   (423        (1,574   (1,104   (312     (390  (27

Net retirement benefit liabilities

   413     802     (1,518   (1,104
Net retirement benefit assets/(liabilities)   654  952   (376  (27

Included within the benefit obligation was £2,050m (2014: £2,272m)£895m (2016: £979m) relating to overseas pensions and £202m (2014: £189m)£213m (2016: £207m) relating to other post-employment benefits. Of the total benefit obligation of £28,279m (2014: £30,392m), £245m (2014: £286m) was wholly unfunded.

As at 31 December 2015,2017, the UKRFUKRF’s scheme assets were in surplus versus IAS 19R19 obligations by £802m (2014:£952m (2016: deficit of £1,104m)£27m). The movement for the UKRF is mainly due to payment of deficit contributions, higher than assumed asset returns, updated mortality assumptions, and lower expected future price inflation, offset by a £1.9bn decrease in the defined benefit obligation. The decrease in defined benefit obligation can be linked to an increase in discount rate, membership experience,transfers out of the scheme, and the introduction of an assumption for future transfers out. Of the £4,927m (2016: £1,800m) UKRF benefits paid out, £4,151m (2016: £1,029m) related to transfers out of the fund.

Where a changescheme’s assets exceed its obligation, an asset is recognised to the calculationextent that it does not exceed the present value of statutory underpin forfuture contribution holidays or refunds of contributions (the “asset ceiling”). In the case of the UKRF the asset ceiling is not applied as, in certain benefits.specified circumstances such aswind-up, Barclays expects to be able to recover any surplus. The Trustee does not have a substantive right to augment benefits, nor do they have the right to wind up the plan except in the dissolution of the Group or termination of contributions by the Group. The application of the asset ceiling to other plans is considered on an individual plan basis.

256    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


35 Pensions and post-retirement benefitscontinued

Critical accounting estimates and judgements

Actuarial valuation of the schemes’ obligation is dependent upon a series of assumptions, belowassumptions. Below is a summary of the main financial and demographic assumptions adopted for the UKRF.

 

UKRF financial assumptions

          
           2015             2014  
    % p.a     % p.a  

Discount rate

   3.82     3.67  

Inflation rate

   3.05     3.05  

Rate of increase in salaries

   2.55     2.55  

Rate of increase for pensions in payment

   2.87     2.98  

Rate of increase for pensions in deferment

   2.87     2.98  

Afterwork revaluation rate

   3.27     3.35  
Key UKRF financial assumptions  2017
       % p.a.
   2016
      % p.a.
 
Discount rate   2.46    2.62 
Inflation rate (RPI)   3.22    3.35 

The UKRF discount rate assumption for 20152017 was based on a variant of the standard Willis Towers Watson RATE Link model. This variant includes all bonds rated AA by at least one of the four major ratings agencies, and assumes that yields after year 30 are flat. For 2014,The RPI inflation assumption for 2017 was set by reference to the Bank of England’s implied inflation spot curve, assuming the spot curve remains flat after 30 years. The inflation assumption incorporates a deduction of 20 basis points as an allowance for an inflation risk premium. The methodology used to derive the discount rate assumptionand price inflation assumptions is consistent with that used at the prior year end, except the inflation spot curve was based on the single equivalent discount rate implied by the standard Willis Towers Watson RATE Link model.

282  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinuedheld flat after 25 years at 2016.

The UKRF’s post-retirement mortality assumptions are based on a best estimate assumption derived from an analysis in 20142016 of Barclays’Barclays own post-retirement mortality experience, and taking account of the recent evidence from published mortality surveys. An allowance has been made for future mortality improvements based on the 20132016 core projection model published by the Continuous Mortality Investigation Bureau subject to a long-term trend of 1.25% p.a.pa in future improvements. The methodology used is consistent with the prior year end, except that the 2015 core projection model was used at 2016. The table below shows how the assumed life expectancy at 60, for members of the UKRF, has varied over the past three years:

 

Assumed life expectancy

           2017         2016             2015 
           2015             2014             2013  
   £m     £m     £m  

Life expectancy at 60 for current pensioners (years)

            

– Males

   28.4     28.3     27.9     27.8    27.9    28.4 

– Females

   30.0     29.9     29.0     29.4    29.7    30.0 

Life expectancy at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40 (years)

            

– Males

   30.2     30.1     29.3           29.3    29.7    30.2 

– Females

   32.0     31.9     30.6     31.0    31.7    32.0 

An assumption for future transfers out has been introduced at 2017, increasing the benefit obligation by about 2%, as numbers of deferred members transferring out were at higher levels in 2017 than previously experienced. The assumption introduced is that 20% of the benefit obligations in respect of deferred members will transfer out during 2018, 15% in 2019, 10% in 2020, 5% in 2021, tapering down to 0% from 2022 onwards. The assumption used at 2016 was nil transfers out.

Sensitivity analysis on actuarial assumptions

The sensitivity analysis has been calculated by valuing the UKRF liabilities using the amended assumptions shown in the table below and keeping the remaining assumptions the same as disclosed in the table above, except in the case of the inflation sensitivity where other assumptions that depend on assumed inflation have also been amended correspondingly. The difference between the recalculated liability figure and that stated in the balance sheet reconciliation table above is the figure shown. The selection of these movements to illustrate the sensitivity of the defined benefit obligation to key assumptions should not be interpreted as Barclays expressing any specific view of the probability of such movements happening.

 

Change in key assumptions

          
   2015     2014  
   Impact on UKRF defined     Impact on UKRF defined  
   benefit obligation     benefit obligation  
   (Decrease)/     (Decrease)/     (Decrease)/     (Decrease)/  
   Increase     Increase     Increase     Increase  
    %     £bn     %     £bn  

0.5% increase in discount rate

   (8.2   (2.1   (9.0   (2.5

0.5% increase in assumed price inflation

   5.4     1.4     7.3     2.0  

One year increase to life expectancy at 60

   3.5     0.9     3.5     1.0  
Change in key assumptions         
   2017  2016 
    (Decrease)/
Increase in
UKRF
defined
benefit
obligation
£bn
  (Decrease)/
Increase in
UKRF
defined
benefit
obligation
£bn
 
Discount rate   
0.5% p.a. increase   (2.4  (2.8
0.25% p.a. increase   (1.2  (1.4
0.25% p.a. decrease   1.3   1.5 
0.5% p.a. decrease   2.8   3.2 
Assumed RPI   
0.5% p.a. increase   1.6   1.9 
0.25% p.a. increase   0.8   0.9 
0.25% p.a. decrease   (0.7  (0.9
0.5% p.a. decrease   (1.5  (2.0
Life expectancy at 60   
One year increase   1.0   1.1 
One year decrease   (1.0  (1.1

The weighted average duration of the benefit payments reflected in the defined benefit obligation for the UKRF is 1820 years.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    257


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post-retirement benefitscontinued

Assets

A long termlong-term investment strategy has been set for the UKRF, with its asset allocation comprising a mixture of equities, bonds, property and other appropriate assets. This recognises that different asset classes are likely to produce different long termlong-term returns and some asset classes may be more volatile than others. The long termlong-term investment strategy ensures, among other aims, that investments are adequately diversified. Asset managers are permitted some flexibility to vary the asset allocation from the long termlong-term investment strategy within control ranges agreed with the

Trustee from time to time.

The UKRF also employs derivative instruments, where appropriate, to achieve a desired exposure or return, or to match assets more closely to liabilities. The value of assets shown reflects the assets held by the scheme, with any derivative holdings reflected on a fair value basis.

The value of the assets of the schemes and their percentage in relation to total scheme assets were as follows:

 

Analysis of scheme assets

                               
   Total   
 
Of which relates to
UKRF
  
  
  Total        Of which relates to UKRF 
     % of total     % of total    

Value

£m

   

% of total
fair value of
scheme
assets

%

   

Value

£m

   

% of total

fair value of

scheme

assets

%

 
     fair value of     fair value of  
     scheme     scheme  
   Value     assets     Value   assets  
   £m     %     £m   %  

As at 31 December 2015

       
As at 31 December 2017        

Equities – quoted

   7,764     27.0     6,947   25.9     4,377    14.1    4,151    13.8 

Equities – non quoted

   1,757     6.1     1,750   6.5  
Equities –non-quoted   2,001    6.5    2,001    6.6 

Bonds – fixed governmenta

   1,105     3.8     577   2.2     2,433    7.9    2,184    7.3 

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

   9,677     33.7     9,670   36.0     13,089    42.3    13,078    43.4 

Bonds – corporate and othera

   5,856     20.4     5,680   21.2     5,195    16.8    4,999    16.6 

Property – commercialb

   1,602     5.6     1,581   5.9     1,911    6.2    1,902    6.3 

Derivativesb

   183     0.6     183   0.7     816    2.6    816    2.7 

Cash

   67     0.2     47   0.2  

Otherb

   741     2.6     394   1.4  
Otherc   1,100    3.6    981    3.3 

Fair value of scheme assets

   28,752     100.0     26,829   100.0         30,922    100.0    30,112    100.0 
As at 31 December 2016        
Equities – quoted   8,123    24.9    7,840    24.6 
Equities –non-quoted   2,043    6.3    2,042    6.4 
Bonds – fixed governmenta   1,330    4.1    1,072    3.4 
Bonds – index-linked governmenta   13,173    40.3    13,165    41.4 
Bonds – corporate and othera   5,222    16.0    5,054    15.9 
Property – commercialb   1,630    5.0    1,622    5.1 
Derivativesb   870    2.7    870    2.7 
Otherc   266    0.7    155    0.5 
Fair value of scheme assets   32,657    100.0    31,820    100.0 

Notes

aAssets held are predominantlypredominately quoted.
bAssets held are predominantlynon-quoted.
cAssets held are predominantly non-quoted.in Infrastructure Funds.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  283


Notes to the financial statements

Employee benefits

35 Pensions and post retirement benefitscontinued

Analysis of scheme assets

                    
   Total     Of which relates to UKRF  
     % of total       % of total  
         fair value of           fair value of  
     scheme       scheme  
   Value     assets     Value     assets  
    £m     %     £m     %  

As at 31 December 2014

        

Equities – quoted

   6,813     23.6     5,808     21.6  

Equities – non-quoted

   1,549     5.4     1,537     5.7  

Bonds – fixed governmenta

   934     3.2     609     2.3  

Bonds – index-linked governmenta

   7,114     24.6     7,114     26.5  

Bonds – corporate and othera

   5,599     19.4     5,317     19.8  

Property – commercialb

   2,023     7.0     1,945     7.3  

Derivativesb

   1,472     5.1     1,472     5.5  

Cash

   2,897     10.0     2,644     9.9  

Pooled fundsc

   284     1.0     284     1.1  

Otherb

   189     0.7     97     0.3  

Fair value of scheme assets

   28,874     100.0         26,827     100.0  

Included within the fair value of scheme assets were: £5m (2014: £3m)£0.1m (2016: £0.2m) relating to shares in Barclays PLC £23m (2014: £39m)and £0.6m (2016: £0.1m) relating to bonds issued by the Barclays Group, £6m (2014: £6m) relating to property occupied by Group companies, and £7m (2014: £14m) relating to other investments.PLC. The UKRF also invests in pooled investment vehicles which may hold shares or debt issued by the Barclays Group.PLC.

The UKRF scheme assets also include £36m (2014: £36m)£15m (2016: £32m) relating to UK private equity investments and £1,714m (2014: £1,502m)£1,986m (2016: £2,009m) relating to overseas private equity investments. These are disclosed above within Equities –non-quoted.

Approximately a third48% of the UKRF assets are invested in liability-driven investment strategies; primarily UK gilts as well as interest rate and inflation swaps. These are used to better match the assets to its liabilities. The swaps are used to reduce the scheme’s inflation and duration risks against its liabilities.

Funding

The latest triennial funding valuation of the UKRF was carried out with an effective date of 30 September 2013. This was completed in 2014 and showed a deficit of £3.6bn and a funding level of 87.4%. The next funding valuation of the UKRF is due to be completed in 2017 with an effective date of 30 September 2016. In non-valuation years, the Scheme Actuary prepares an annual update of the UKRF funding position.position in addition to the full triennial actuarial valuation. The latest annual update was carried out as at 30 September 20152017 and showed a deficit of £6.0bn£4.8bn and a funding level of 82.7%86.8%.

The increaselast triennial actuarial valuation of the UKRF had an effective date of 30 September 2016 and was completed in July 2017. This valuation showed a funding deficit of £7.9bn and a funding level of 81.5%, versus £6.0bn funding deficit at the 30 September 2015 update.

The improvement in funding deficit over the year toposition between 30 September can be mainly attributed2016 and 30 September 2017 was largely due to payment of deficit contributions, higher than assumed asset returns, higher Government bond yields, and transfers out of the fall in real gilt yields overscheme.

258    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


35 Pensions and post-retirement benefitscontinued

At the year.

The Bank2016 triennial actuarial valuation the Group and UKRF Trustee agreed a scheme specificrevised scheme-specific funding target, statement of funding principles, a schedule of contributions, and a recovery plan to seek to eliminate the deficit inrelative to the Fund. funding target and some additional support measures. The agreement with the UKRF Trustee also takes into account the changes to the Group structure that will be implemented as a result of ring-fencinga. Barclays Bank PLC will remain as the principal employer of the UKRF.

The main differences between the funding and IAS 19 assumptions are a more prudent longevity assumption for funding andwere a different approach to setting the discount rate.rate and a more conservative longevity assumption for funding.

The deficit reduction contributions agreed with the UKRF Trustee as part of the 30 September 2016 valuation recovery plan to eliminateare shown alongside the deficit will resultrecovery contributions agreed in 2014 for the Bank payingprior 30 September 2013 valuation.

Year  

Deficit

contributions

30 September 2016

valuation

£m

   

Deficit

contributions

          30 September 2013

valuation

£m

 
2017   740    1,240 
2018   500    740 
2019   500    740 
2020   500    740 
2021   1,000    240b 
2022 to 2026   1,000 each year     

Note

aRefer to page 162 of the Annual Report for further information on structural reform.
bThe 2017 deficit contributions from the 30 September 2013 valuation included up to £500m payable if the deficit in 2017 exceeded a certain level. Of this £500m, £250m was paid during the first half of 2017. Following the agreement of the 30 September 2016 valuation recovery plan, in July 2017, the remaining payments were no longer required.

The deficit contributions to the Fund until 2021. Deficit contributions of £300m were paid in 2015, and also are payable in 2016. Further deficit contributions of £740m per annum are payable during 2017 to 2021. Up to £500m of the 2021 deficit contribution is payable in 2017 depending on the deficit level at that time. These deficitreduction contributions are in addition to the regular contributions to meet the Group’s share of the cost of benefits accruing over each year.

In non-valuation years, the Scheme Actuary prepares an annual update The next funding valuation of the funding position. The latest annual update was carried out as atUKRF is due to be completed in 2020 with an effective date of 30 September 20152019.

Other support measures agreed at the same time as the valuation

Collateral – The UKRF Trustee and showedBarclays Bank PLC have entered into an arrangement whereby a collateral pool has been put in place to provide security for the UKRF funding deficit as it increases or decreases over time, and associated deficit recovery contributions. The collateral pool is currently made up of government securities and high quality securitisations of credit cards, mortgages and corporate loans. Agreement has been made with the Trustee to increase the proportion of the deficit covered from 88.5% to 100% effective from 26 March 2018 with an overall cap remaining of £9.0bn, at which date the collateral pool will consist of government securities only (the Trustees and Barclays Bank PLC may agree alternative eligible collateral in the future). The arrangement provides the UKRF Trustee with dedicated access to the pool of assets in the event of Barclays Bank PLC not paying a deficit reduction contribution to the UKRF or in the event of £6.0bn andBarclays Bank PLC’s insolvency. These assets are included within Note 40.

Support from Barclays PLC – In the event of Barclays Bank PLC not paying a funding leveldeficit reduction contribution payment required under the 2016 valuation recovery plan by a specifiedpre-payment date, Barclays PLC has entered into an arrangement whereby it will be required to use, in first priority, dividends received from Barclays Bank UK PLC (if any) to invest the proceeds in Barclays Bank PLC (up to the maximum amount of 82.7%the deficit reduction contribution unpaid by Barclays Bank PLC). The increaseproceeds of the investment will be used to discharge Barclays Bank PLC’s unpaid deficit reduction contribution.

Participation – As permitted under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Banking Reform) (Pensions) Regulations 2015, Barclays Bank UK PLC is a participating employer in funding deficit over the yearUKRF and will remain so during a transitional phase until September 2025 as set out in a deed of participation. Barclays Bank UK PLC will make contributions for the future service of its employees who are currently Afterwork members and, in the event of Barclays Bank PLC’s insolvency during this period provision has been made to 30 September 2015 canrequire Barclays Bank UK PLC to become the principal employer of the UKRF. Barclays Bank PLC’s Section 75 debt would be mainly attributedtriggered by the insolvency (the debt would be calculated after allowing for the payment to the fall in real gilt yields overUKRF of the year.collateral above).

Defined benefit contributions paid with respect to the UKRF were as follows:

 

Contributions paid

        
   £m    £m 
2017      1,124 
2016   634 

2015

           586     586 

2014

   241  

2013

   238  

Included within the Group’s contributions paid were £153m (2016: £112m; 2015: £nil) Section 75 contributions.

The Group’s expected contribution to the UKRF in respect of defined benefits in 20162018 is £632m (2015: £586m)£716m (2017: £1,585m). In addition, the expected contributions to UK defined contribution schemes in 20162018 is £49m (2015: £52m)£35m (2017: £36m) to the UKRF and £140m (2015: £126m)£146m (2017: £124m) to the BPSP. For the material non-UK defined benefit schemes, the expected contributions in 2016 are £78m (2015: £107m).

Notes

aAssets held are predominantly quoted.
bAssets held are predominantly non-quoted.
cPooled funds relate to a variety of investments which are predominantly non-quoted.

 

284  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    259


 


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

    

 

This

The section presents information on the Group’s investments in subsidiaries, joint ventures

and associates and its interests in structured entities. Detail is also given on securitisation

transactions the Group has entered into and arrangements that are heldoff-balance sheet.

    

36 Principal subsidiaries

 

Barclays applies IFRS 10Consolidated Financial Statements. The consolidated financial statements combine the financial statements of Barclays PLC and all its subsidiaries. Subsidiaries are entities over which the Group has control. Under IFRS 10, this is when the Group is exposed or has rights to variable returns from its involvement in the entity and has the ability to affect those returns through its power over the entity.

The Group reassesses whether it controls an entity if facts and circumstances indicate that there have been changes to its power, its rights to variable returns or its ability to use its power to affect the amount of its returns.

Intra-group transactions and balances are eliminated on consolidation and consistent accounting policies are used throughout the Group for the purposes of the consolidation. Changes in ownership interests in subsidiaries are accounted for as equity transactions if they occur after control has been obtained and they do not result in loss of control.

The significant judgements used in applying this policy are set out below.

Accounting for investment in subsidiaries

In the individual financial statements of Barclays PLC, investments in subsidiaries are stated at cost less impairment.

Principal subsidiaries for the Group are set out below. This includes those subsidiaries that are most significant in the context of the Group’s business, results or financial position.

 

          Non-     Non-  
       controlling     controlling  
       interests –     interests –  
     Percentage     proportion of     proportion of  
     of voting     ownership     voting  
 Principal place of business or    rights held     interests     interests  

Company name

 incorporation Nature of business   %     %     %  
Company Name  

Principal place of business

or incorporation

    Nature of business  

Percentage of

voting rights held

%

   

  Non-controlling

interests –

proportion of

ownership

interests

%

   

  Non-controlling

interests -

proportion of

voting interests

%

 

Barclays Bank PLC

 England Banking, holding company   100     11         England    Banking, holding Company           100    11     

Barclays Capital Securities Limited

 England Securities dealing   100              England    Securities dealing   100         

Barclays Private Clients International Limited

 Isle of Man Banking   100          

Barclays Securities Japan Limited

 Japan Securities dealing   100              Japan    Securities dealing   100         

Barclays Africa Group Limited

 South Africa Banking   62     38     38  

Barclays Capital Inc

 United States Securities dealing   100              United States    Securities dealing   100         
Barclays Services Limited  England    Service Company   100         

Barclays Bank Delaware

 United States Credit card issuer   100              United States    Credit card issuer   100         

The country of registration or incorporation is also the principal area of operation of each of the above subsidiaries. Investments in subsidiaries held directly by Barclays Bank PLC are marked *. See Note 46 Related undertakings for further information on the Group’s undertakings.

Ownership interests are in some cases different to voting interests due to the existence ofnon-voting equity interests, such as preference shares. SeeRefer to Note 33 Non-controlling interests for more information.

Barclays Bank SAUAfrica Group Limited was considered a principal subsidiary in 2014.2016. During 2017 Barclays Bank SAU andreduced its subsidiaries, comprising all its associated assets and liabilities, was sold to a third party, Caixabank, SA on 2 January 2015.

Significant judgements and assumptions used to determineshareholding in BAGL. This resulted in the scopedeconsolidation of BAGL from the consolidationGroup as of 1 June 2017, with the residual holding recognised as an available for sale investment.

Determining whether the Group has control of an entity is generally straightforward based on ownership of the majority of the voting capital. However, in certain instances, this determination will involve significant judgement, particularly in the case of structured entities where voting rights are often not the determining factor in decisions over the relevant activities. This judgement may involve assessing the purpose and design of the entity. It will also often be necessary to consider whether the Group, or another involved party with power over the relevant activities, is acting as a principal in its own right or as an agent on behalf of others.

There is also often considerable judgement involved in the ongoing assessment of control over structured entities. In this regard, where market conditions have deteriorated such that the other investors’ exposures to the structure’s variable returns have been substantively eliminated, the Group may conclude that the managers of the structured entity are acting as its agent and therefore will consolidate the structured entity.

An interest in equity voting rights exceeding 50% would typically indicate that the Group has control of an entity. However, certain entities, asthe entity set out below areis excluded from consolidation because the Group does not have exposure to theirits variable returns.

Country of registration or incorporation Company name     

Percentage of

    voting rights held

(%)

   

Equity

shareholders’

funds

(£m)

   

    Retained profit

for the year

(£m)

 
Cayman Islands Palomino Limited                                             100    9    7 

 

260    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  285


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

    

    

 

36 Principal subsidiariescontinued

  Country of registration or incorporation  Company name  

Percentage of voting

rights held (%)

  

Equity shareholder’s

funds (£m)

  

Retained profit for   

the year (£m)   

  UK  Fitzroy Finance Limited  100    –  
  Cayman Islands  Palomino Limited  100  2  –  

These entities areThis entity is managed by an external counterpartiescounterparty and consequently areis not controlled by the Group. Where appropriate, interestsInterests relating to these entitiesthis entity are included in Note 37 Structured entities.37.

Significant restrictions

As is typical for a Group of its size and international scope, there are restrictions on the ability of Barclays PLC to obtain distributions of capital, access the assets or repay the liabilities of members of its Group due to the statutory, regulatory and contractual requirements of its subsidiaries and due to the protective rights ofnon-controlling interests. These are considered below.

Regulatory requirements

Barclays’ principal subsidiary companies have assets and liabilities before intercompany eliminations of £1,468bn (2014: £1,757bn)£1,407bn (2016: £1,553bn) and £1,398bn (2014: £1,683bn)£1,341bn (2016: £1,480bn) respectively. The assets and liabilities are subject to prudential regulation and regulatory capital requirements in the countries in which they are regulated. These require entities to maintain minimum capital levels which cannot be returned to the parentParent company, Barclays PLC on a going concern basis.

In order to meet capital requirements, subsidiaries may hold certain equity-accounted and debt-accounted issued financial instruments andnon-equity instruments such as Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments and other forms of subordinated liabilities. SeeRefer to Note 33 Non-controlling interests and Note 30 Subordinated liabilities for particulars of these instruments. These instruments may be subject to cancellation clauses or preference share restrictions that would limit the ability of the entity to repatriate the capital on a timely basis.

Liquidity requirements

Regulated subsidiaries of the Group are required to maintain liquidity pools to meet PRA and local regulatory requirements. The mainrequirements pertaining to liquidity. Some of the subsidiaries affected are Barclays Bank PLC Barclays Africa Group Limited and Barclays Capital Inc which must maintain daily compliance with the regulatory minimum. See page 105pages 124 to 136 for further details of liquidity requirements, including those of our significant subsidiaries.

Statutory requirements

The Group’s subsidiaries are subject to statutory requirements not to make distributions of capital and unrealised profits and generally to maintain solvency. These requirements restrict the ability of subsidiaries to make remittances of dividends to Barclays PLC, the ultimate parent, except in the event of a legal capital reduction or liquidation. In most cases, the regulatory restrictions referred to above exceed the statutory restrictions.

Contractual requirements

Asset encumbrance

The Group uses its financial assets to raise finance in the form of securitisations and through the liquidity schemes of central banks. Once encumbered, the assets are not available for transfer around the Group. The assets typically affected are disclosed in Note 40 Assets pledged.40.

Assets held by consolidated structured entities

£80m (2014: £379m)None of the assets (2016: £99m) included in the Group’s balance sheet relate to consolidated investment funds, and are held to pay return and principal to the holders of units in the funds. TheAny assets held in these funds cannot be transferred to other members of the Group. The decrease since 2016 is materially driven bydue to the sale of the Spanish business in January 2015, which included certain European wealth funds, and the disposal of a French wealth fund during the year.Funds Business.

Other restrictions

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities, and these amounted to £4,369m (2014: £4,448m)£3,360m (2016: £4,254m).

Barclays Africa Group Limited assets are subject to exchange control regulation determined by the South African Reserve Bank (SARB). Special dividends and loans in lieu of dividends cannot be transferred without SARB approval.

37 Structured entities

A structured entity is an entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities are generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

Depending on the Group’s power over the activities of the entity and its exposure to and ability to influence its own returns, it may consolidate the entity. In other cases, it may sponsor or have exposure to such an entity but not consolidate it.

Consolidated structured entities

The Group has contractual arrangements which may require it to provide financial support to the following types of consolidated structured entities:

Securitisation vehicles

The Group uses securitisation as a source of financing and a means of risk transfer. Refer to Note 39 Securitisations for further detail.

The Group, providesin previous periods, has provided liquidity facilities to certain securitisation vehicles. At 31 December 2015,2017, there were no outstanding loan commitments to these entities totalling £135m (2014: £201m)(2016: £152m).

286  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


37 Structured entitiescontinued

Commercial paper (CP) and medium-term note conduits

The Group provided £8.5bn (2014: £9.1bn)£10.2bn (2016: £9bn) in undrawn contractual backstop liquidity facilities to CP conduits.

Fund management entities

In previous periods, Barclays hashad contractually guaranteed the performance of certain cash investments in a number of managed investment funds which have resulted in their consolidation. As at 31 December 2015,2017, the notional value of the guarantee was £257m (2014: £585m). The decrease is primarily dueguarantees were £nil (2016: £99m) as the European Wealth Funds associated with these guarantees were either closed or ownership has been transferred outside the Group and they are no longer consolidated.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    261


Notes to the closurefinancial statements

Scope of a number of European wealth funds during the year.consolidation

37 Structured entitiescontinued

Employee benefit and other trusts

The Group provides capital contributions to employee share trusts to enable them to meet their obligations to employees under share-based payment plans. During 2015,2017, the Group provided undrawn liquidity facilities of £784m (2014: £332m)£1.8bn (2016: £0.4bn) to certain trusts.

Unconsolidated Structured Entitiesstructured entities in which the Group has an interest

An interest in a structured entity is any form of contractual ornon-contractual involvement which creates variability in returns arising from the performance of the entity for the Group. Such interests include holdings of debt or equity securities, derivatives that transfer financial risks from the entity to the Group, lending, loan commitments, financial guarantees and investment management agreements.

Interest rate swaps, foreign exchange derivatives that are not complex and which expose the Group to insignificant credit risk by being senior in the payment waterfall of a securitisation and derivatives that are determined to introduce risk or variability to a structured entity are not considered to be an interest in an entity and have been excluded from the disclosures below.

The nature and extent of the Group’s interests in structured entities is summarised below:

 

Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities

                         
    

 

 

Secured

financing

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

    Short-term

traded

interests

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Traded

    derivatives

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Other

    interests

£m

  

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at December 2015

          

Assets

          

Trading portfolio assets

        8,949          1,648     10,597  

Financial assets designated at fair value

   12,382               353     12,735  

Derivative financial instruments

             4,427     1,926     6,353  

Available for sale investments

                  1,060     1,060  

Loans and advances to banks

                  4,067     4,067  

Loans and advances to customers

                  27,700     27,700  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   7,117                    7,117  

Other assets

                  31     31  

Total assets

   19,499     8,949     4,427     36,785     69,660  

Liabilities

          

Derivative financial instruments

             2,761     1,926     4,687  

As at December 2014

          

Assets

          

Trading portfolio assets

        14,538          3,668     18,206  

Financial assets designated at fair value

                  963     963  

Derivative financial instruments

             5,207     1,594     6,801  

Available for sale investments

                  1,216     1,216  

Loans and advances to banks

                  4,277     4,277  

Loans and advances to customers

                  30,067     30,067  

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   37,139                    37,139  

Other assets

                  38     38  

Total assets

   37,139     14,538     5,207         41,823         98,707  

Liabilities

          

Derivative financial instruments

             5,222     1,514     6,736  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  287


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

37 Structured entitiescontinued

Summary of interests in unconsolidated structured entities                         
    Secured
financing
£m
   

    Short-term

traded

interests

£m

   Traded
    derivatives
£m
   Other
    interests
£m
   

Total

£m

 
As at 31 December 2017          
Assets          
Trading portfolio assets       10,788        699    11,487 
Financial assets designated at fair value   31,520            2,721    34,241 
Derivative financial instruments           4,380        4,380 
Loans and advances to banks                    
Loans and advances to customers   5,481            17,386    22,867 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   753                753 
Other assets               509    509 
Total assets   37,754    10,788    4,380    21,315    74,237 
Liabilities          
Derivative financial instruments           5,193    3,356    8,549 
As at 31 December 2016          
Assets          
Trading portfolio assets       8,436        516    8,952 
Financial assets designated at fair value   22,706            367    23,073 
Derivative financial instruments           4,731    2,130    6,861 
Loans and advances to banks               4,915    4,915 
Loans and advances to customers               24,142    24,142 
Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending   6,338                6,338 
Other assets               919    919 
Total assets   29,044    8,436    4,731    32,989        75,200 
Liabilities          
Derivative financial instruments           3,567    2,130    5,697 

Secured financing arrangements, short termshort-term traded interests and traded derivatives are typically managed under market risk management policies described on pages 101 and 102page 118 which includes an indication of the change of risk measures compared to last year. For this reason, the total assets of these entities are not considered meaningful for the purposes of understanding the related risks and so have not been presented. Other interests include a Non-Core portfolio which is being managed down, conduits and corporate lending where the interest is driven by normal customer demand.

Secured financing

The Group routinely enters into reverse repurchase contracts, stock borrowing and similar arrangements on normal commercial terms where the counterparty to the arrangement is a structured entity. Due to the nature of these arrangements, especially the transfer of collateral and ongoing margining, the Group has minimal exposure to the performance of the structured entity counterparty. This includes margin lending which is presented under Loans and advances to customers in 2017 to align to the balance sheet presentation. In 2016 margin lending was presented in Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending within Note 37. A description of these transactions is included in Note 22 Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar secured lending and borrowing.22.

Short-term traded interests

The Group buys and sells interests in structured entities as part of its trading activities, for example, retail mortgage backed securities, CDOscollateralised debt obligations and similar interests. Such interests are typically held individually or as part of a larger portfolio for no more than 90 days. In such cases, the Group typically has no other involvement with the structured entity other than the securities it holds as part of trading activities and its maximum exposure to loss is restricted to the carrying value of the asset.

As at 31 December 2015, £8,576m (2014: £12,058m)2017, £9,645m (2016: £6,568m) of the Group’s £8,949m (2014: £14,538m)£10,788m (2016: £8,436m) short-term traded interests were comprised of debt securities issued by asset securitisation vehicles.

262    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


37 Structured entitiescontinued

Traded derivatives

The Group enters into a variety of derivative contracts with structured entities which reference market risk variables such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates and credit indices among other things. The main derivative types which are considered interests in structured entities include index basedindex-based and entity specific credit default swaps, balance guaranteed swaps, total return swaps, commodities swaps, and equity swaps. A description of the types of derivatives and the risk management practices are detailed in Note 15 Derivative financial instruments.15. The risk of loss may be mitigated through ongoing margining requirements as well as a right to cash flows from the structured entity which are senior in the payment waterfall. Such margining requirements are consistent with market practice for many derivative arrangements and in line with the Group’s normal credit policies.

Derivative transactions require the counterparty to provide cash or other collateral under margining agreements to mitigate counterparty credit risk. Included in the traded derivatives total are £409m (2014: £445m) of derivative assets which are ‘cleared derivative’ type arrangements. These are transactions where the Group enters into a contract with an exchange on behalf of a structured entity client and holds an opposite position with it. The Group is mainly exposed to settlement risk only on these derivatives which is mitigated through daily margining. Total notionals amounted to £117,642m (2014: £176,584m)£1,680,615m (2016: £1,183,215m).

Except for CDScredit default swaps where the maximum exposure to loss is the swap notional amount, it is not possible to estimate the maximum exposure to loss in respect of derivative positions as the fair value of derivatives is subject to changes in market rates of interest, exchange rates and credit indices which by their nature are uncertain. In addition, the Group’s losses would be subject to mitigating action under its traded market risk and credit risk policies that require the counterparty to provide collateral in cash or other assets on a daily basis in most cases.

Other interests in unconsolidated structured entities

The Group’s interests in structured entities not held for the purposes of short-term trading activities are set out below, summarised by the purpose of the entities and limited to significant categories, based on maximum exposure to loss.

 

288  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


37 Structured entitiescontinued    

Nature of interest

                                              
   

 

 

 

Structured

credit

portfolio

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Multi-seller

conduit

programmes

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

Lending

£m

  

  

   
 

 

 

Mortgage-
backed

securities

£m

  
  

  

  

   

 

 

 

Investment

funds and

trusts

£m

  

  

  

  

   

 

Others

£m

  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

  

Multi-seller

conduit

programmes

£m

   

Lending

£m

   

Investment

funds and

trusts

£m

   

Others

£m

   

Total

£m

 

As at December 2015

              

As at 31 December 2017

          

Trading portfolio assets

          
– Debt securities               699    699 

Financial assets designated at fair value

          
– Loans and advances               2,721    2,721 
Loans and advances to banks                    
Loans and advances to customers   5,424    11,497        465    17,386 
Other assets   468    11    8    22    509 
Total on balance sheet exposures   5,892    11,508    8    3,907    21,315 
Total off balance sheet notional amounts   6,270    6,337        446    13,053 
Maximum exposure to loss   12,162    17,845    8    4,353    34,368 
Total assets of the entity   103,057    179,994      11,137      22,669      316,857 

As at 31 December 2016

          

Trading portfolio assets

                        

– Debt securities

   1,545                         40     1,585                 441    441 

– Equity securities

                            63     63                 75    75 

Financial assets designated at fair value

                                             

– Loans and advances to customers

             247               6     253  

– Loans and advances

       260        4    264 

– Debt securities

             41               57     98         50        48    98 

– Equity securities

                            2     2                 5    5 

Derivative financial instruments

                            1,926     1,926                 2,130    2,130 

Available for sale investments

                                   

– Debt securities

   537               515          8     1,060  

Loans and advances to banks

       4,890        25    4,915 

Loans and advances to customers

   1,599     5,029     20,571               501     27,700     6,016    16,754        1,372    24,142 

Loans and advances to banks

             4,051               16     4,067  

Other assets

        4     7          20          31     5    7    13    894    919 

Total on-balance sheet exposures

   3,681     5,033     24,917     515     20     2,619     36,785  

Total off-balance sheet notional amounts

   708     3,042     10,225               1,409     15,384  
Total on balance sheet exposures   6,021    21,961    13    4,994    32,989 
Total off balance sheet notional amounts   2,734    9,873        1,739    14,346 

Maximum exposure to loss

   4,389     8,075     35,142     515     20     4,028     52,169     8,755    31,834    13    6,733    47,335 

Total assets of the entity

   36,290     81,355     376,296     115,351     21,766     5,084     636,142     75,535      492,950    18,550    39,342    626,377 

As at December 2014

              

Trading portfolio assets

              

– Debt securities

   3,590                         51     3,641  

– Equity securities

                            27     27  

Financial assets designated at fair value

              

– Loans and advances to customers

             881               11     892  

– Debt securities

                            35     35  

– Equity securities

                            36     36  

Derivative financial instruments

             80               1,514     1,594  

Available for sale investments

              

– Debt securities

   1     575          626          14     1,216  

Loans and advances to customers

   3,390     8,236     17,780               661     30,067  

Loans and advances to banks

             4,277                    4,277  

Other assets

        5     9          21     3     38  

Total on-balance sheet exposures

   6,981     8,816     23,027     626     21     2,352     41,823  

Total off-balance sheet notional amounts

   1,078     8,075     6,359               2,104     17,616  

Maximum exposure to loss

   8,059     16,891     29,386     626     21     4,456     59,439  

Total assets of the entity

   50,279     97,298         390,522     147,422     25,556         5,816         716,893  

Maximum exposure to loss

Unless specified otherwise below, the Group’s maximum exposure to loss is the total of itson-balance sheet positions and itsoff-balance sheet arrangements, being loan commitments and financial guarantees. Exposure to loss is mitigated through collateral, financial guarantees, the availability of netting and credit protection held.

Structured Credit Portfolio

This comprises interests in debt securities issued by securitisation vehicles, mainly CLOs, CDOs, Residential and Commercial Mortgage-Backed Securitisation structures (RMBSs and CMBSs), and drawn and undrawn loan facilities to these entities. In some cases, the securities are ‘wrapped’ with credit protection from a monoline insurer, which transfers the credit risk to the monoline. The entities are wholly debt financed through the issuance of tranches of debt securities or through direct funding, such as the loan facilities provided by the Group. As the underlying assets of the entities amortise and pay down, the debt securities issued by the entities are repaid in order of seniority. Where the entities experience significant credit deterioration, debt securities may be written off or cancelled in reverse order of seniority.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  289


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

37 Structured entitiescontinued

As at 31 December 2015 the Group’s funded exposures comprised £1,545m (2014: £3,591m) debt securities at fair value and £1,599m (2014: £3,390m) amortised cost loans and advances. Of the £3,681m (2014: £6,981m), £2,783m (2014: £4,822m) is investment grade, with the remainder either non-investment grade or not rated. The Group also had £708m (2014: £1,078m) of unfunded exposures in the form of undrawn liquidity commitments. Of the £4,389m (2014: £8,059m) of funded and unfunded exposures, £4,387m (2014: £7,897m) is senior in the capital structure of the entity.

Though the Group’s funded exposures are primarily investment grade and senior in the capital structure, there are cases where the interests that are subordinate to the Group’s senior and mezzanine interests have minimal or no value, due to decreases in the fair value of the underlying collateral held by the entity.

The Group’s income from these entities comprises trading income (largely gains and losses on changes in the fair value and interest earned on bonds) on items classified as held for trading and interest income on interests classified as loans and receivables.

During 2015, the Group recorded a fair value loss of £4m (2014: £91m loss) on debt securities. Impairment losses recorded on loans and advances were immaterial in both the current and prior year.

The fair value of the Group’s interests in certain CLOs and CDOs is influenced by the protection directly provided to the structured entities by monoline insurers in addition to the value of the collateral held by the entities. The protection provided to the entities by the monoline insurers is in the form of a CDS. However, the ability of the monolines to make payments is uncertain, which is reflected in the valuation of the Group’s interests in the monoline wrapped CLOs and CDOs.

Multi-seller conduit programmesprogramme

The conduits engagemulti-seller conduit engages in providing financing to various clients and holdholds whole or partial interests in pools of receivables or similar obligations. These instruments are protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduits.conduit. The Group’s off balanceoff-balance sheet exposure included in the table above represents liquidity facilities that are provided to the conduitsconduit for the benefit of the holders of the commercial paper issued by the conduitsconduit and will only be drawn where the conduits areconduit is unable to access the commercial paper market. If these liquidity facilities are drawn, the Group is protected from loss through over-collateralisation, seller guarantees, or other credit enhancements provided to the conduits. The Group earns income from fees received on the liquidity facility and the letter of credit providedconduit.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    263


Notes to the conduits. There were no impairment losses on this lending in eitherfinancial statements

Scope of the current year or the prior year.consolidation

37 Structured entitiescontinued

Lending

The portfolio includes lending provided by the Group to unconsolidated structured entities in the normal course of its lending business to earn income in the form of interest and lending fees and includes loans to structured entities that are generally collateralised by property, equipment or other assets. All loans are subject to the Group’s credit sanctioning process. Collateral arrangements are specific to the circumstances of each loan with additional guarantees and collateral sought from the sponsor of the structured entity for certain arrangements. During the period the Group incurred an impairment of £35m (2014: £31m)£11m (2016: £24m) against such facilities. The main types of lending are £3bn (2014: £4bn) of funding loans to bankruptcy remote structured entities to either invest or develop properties, £4bn (2014: £5bn) of loans to structured entities which have been created by an individual to hold one or more assets, £2bn (2014: £2bn) to entities whose operations are limited to financing or funding the acquisition of specific assets such as schools, hospitals, roads and renewable energy projects under the Private Finance Initiative (PFI), and £1bn (2014: £1bn) of funding loans to bankruptcy remote structured entities to enable them to purchase capital equipment for parent companies and are supported by government export guarantees.

Mortgage-backed securities

This represents a portfolio of floating rate notes, mainly mortgage-backed security positions, used as an accounting hedge of interest rate risk under the Group’s structural hedging programme. All notes are investment grade. The portfolio has decreased owing to a reduced requirement for hedge accounting capacity in sterling.

Investment funds and trusts

In the course of its fund management activities, the Group establishes pooled investment funds that comprise investments of various kinds, tailored to meet certain investors’ requirements. The Group’s interest in funds is generally restricted to a fund management fee, the value of which is typically based on the performance of the fund.

The Group acts as trustee to a number of trusts established by or on behalf of its clients. The purpose of the trusts, which meet the definition of structured entities, is to hold assets on behalf of beneficiaries. The Group’s interest in trusts is generally restricted to unpaid fees which, depending on the trust, may be fixed or based on the value of the trust assets. Barclays has no other risk exposure to the trusts.

Other

This includes £1,926m (2014: £1,514m) of derivative transactionsfair value loans with structured entities where the market risk is materially hedged with corresponding derivative contracts.contracts, interests in debt securities issued by securitisation vehicles and drawn and undrawn loan facilities to these entities.

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities

Assets transferred to sponsored unconsolidated structured entities were immaterial.

290  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


38 Investments in associates and joint ventures

 

Accounting for associates and joint ventures

Barclays applies IAS 28Investments in Associates and IFRS 11Joint Arrangements. Associates are entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the operating and financial policies. Generally the Group holds more than 20%, but less than 50%, of their voting shares. Joint ventures are arrangements where the Group has joint control and rights to the net assets of the entity.

The Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures are initially recorded at cost and increased (or decreased) each year by the Group’s share of the post acquisition profit/(loss). The Group ceases to recognise its share of the losses of equity accounted associates when its share of the net assets and amounts due from the entity have been written off in full, unless it has a contractual or constructive obligation to make good its share of the losses. In some cases, investments in these entities may be held at fair value through profit or loss, for example, those held by private equity businesses.

Accounting for associates and joint ventures

Barclays applies IAS 28Investments in Associates and IFRS 11Joint Arrangements. Associates are entities in which the Group has significant influence, but not control, over the operating and financial policies. Generally the Group holds more than 20%, but less than 50%, of their voting shares. Joint ventures are arrangements where the Group has joint control and rights to the net assets of the entity.

The Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures are initially recorded at cost and increased (or decreased) each year by the Group’s share of the post acquisition profit/(loss). The Group ceases to recognise its share of the losses of equity accounted associates when its share of the net assets and amounts due from the entity have been written off in full, unless it has a contractual or constructive obligation to make good its share of the losses. In some cases, investments in these entities may be held at fair value through profit or loss, for example, those held by private equity businesses.

There are no individually significant investments in joint ventures or associates held by Barclays.

 

    2015     2014  
   Associates     Joint ventures       Total     Associates     Joint ventures       Total  
    £m     £m       £m     £m     £m       £m  
  Equity accounted   217     356       573     303     408       711  
  Held at fair value through profit or loss   77     475       552     307     366       673  
  Total   294     831       1,125     610     774       1,384  

 

Summarised financial information for the Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out below. The amounts shown are the net income of the investees, not just the Group’s share for the year ended 31 December 2015, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.

 

   

                Associates     Joint ventures  
             2015         2014         2015           2014  
                £m     £m     £m       £m  
  Profit/(loss) from continuing operations         6     (9   86       146  
  Other comprehensive income                    13     (24     (5
  Total comprehensive income               6     4     62       141  
         2017             2016     
    Associates
£m
   Joint ventures
£m
           Total
£m
   Associates
£m
   Joint ventures
£m
          Total
£m
 
Equity accounted   402    316    718    321    363   684 
Held at fair value through profit or loss       447    447        484   484 
Total   402    763    1,165    321    847   1,168 

 

Summarised financial information for the Group’s equity accounted associates and joint ventures is set out below. The amounts shown are the net income of the investees, not just the Group’s share for the year ended 31 December 2017, with the exception of certain undertakings for which the amounts are based on accounts made up to dates not earlier than three months before the balance sheet date.

 

 

              Associates   Joint ventures 
              

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Profit from continuing operations       117    33    77   64 
Other comprehensive expense                     (15  19 
Total comprehensive income from continuing operations             117    33    62   83 

Unrecognised shares of the losses of individually immaterial associates and joint ventures were nil (2014: nil)£nil (2016: £nil).

The Group’s associates and joint ventures are subject to statutory or contractual requirements such that they cannot make remittances of dividends or make loan repayments to Barclays PLC without agreement from the external parties.

The Group’s share of commitments and contingencies of its associates and joint ventures comprised unutilised credit facilities provided to customers of £1,450m (2014: £1,566m)£1,712m (2016: £1,755m). In addition, the Group has made commitments to finance or otherwise provide resources to its joint ventures and associates of £177m (2014: £183m)£246m (2016: £263m).

39 Securitisations

 

Accounting for securitisations

The Group uses securitisations as a source of finance264    Barclays PLC and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities.

Securitisations may, dependingBarclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets or to derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk.

Form 20-F


39 Securitisations

Accounting for securitisations

The Group uses securitisations as a source of finance and a means of risk transfer. Such transactions generally result in the transfer of contractual cash flows from portfolios of financial assets to holders of issued debt securities.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction; lead to partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets or to derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer. Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets, or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment, and also transfers substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk.

In the course of its normal banking activities, the Group makes transfers of financial assets, either legally (wherewhere legal rights to the cash flows from the asset are passed to the counterparty)counterparty or beneficial (wherebeneficially, where the Group retains the rights to the cash flows but assumes a responsibility to transfer them to the counterparty).counterparty. Depending on the nature of the transaction, this may result in derecognition of the assets in their entirety, partial derecognition or no derecognition of the assets subject to the transfer.

Full derecognition only occurs when the Group transfers both its contractual right to receive cash flows from the financial assets (or retains the contractual rights to receive the cash flows, but assumes a contractual obligation to pay the cash flows to another party without material delay or reinvestment) and substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership, including credit risk, prepayment risk and interest rate risk. When an asset is transferred, in some circumstances, the Group may retain an interest in it (continuing involvement) requiring the Group to repurchase it in certain circumstances for other than its fair value on that date.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  291


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

39 Securitisationscontinued

A summary of the main transactions, and the assets and liabilities and the financial risks arising from these transactions, is set out below:

Transfers of financial assets that do not result in derecognition

Securitisations

The Group was party to securitisation transactions involving its residential mortgage loans, business loans and credit card balances.

In these transactions, the assets, interests in the assets, or beneficial interests in the cash flows arising from the assets, are transferred to a special purpose entity, which then issues interest bearing debt securities to third party investors.

Securitisations may, depending on the individual arrangement, result in continued recognition of the securitised assets and the recognition of the debt securities issued in the transaction. Partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets can also occur or derecognition of the assets and the separate recognition, as assets or liabilities, of any rights and obligations created or retained in the transfer.

The following table shows the carrying amount of securitised assets that have not resulted in full derecognition, together with the associated liabilities, for each category of asset on the balance sheet:

 

   2015   2014    2017 2016 
   Assets   Liabilities   Assets       Liabilities    Assets   Liabilities Assets   Liabilities 
   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
     
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
  Carrying
amount
£m
     Fair value
£m
     Carrying
amount
£m
   Fair value
£m
   Carrying
amount
£m
     Fair value
£m
     Carrying
amount
£m
   Fair value
£m
 

Loans and advances to customers

                               

Residential mortgage loans

   376     362     (168   (170   2,830     2,619       (2,352   (2,360                 125    120    (107  (107

Credit cards, unsecured and other retail lending

   5,433     5,472     (4,604   (4,606   7,060     7,162       (5,160   (5,178   3,772    3,757    (3,635 (3,626  5,094    5,084    (4,926  (4,931

Corporate loans

   8     8     (8   (8   157     154       (135   (146

Total

   5,817     5,842     (4,780   (4,784   10,047     9,935       (7,647   (7,684   3,772    3,757    (3,635 (3,626  5,219    5,204    (5,033  (5,038

Loans and advances to customers

                  

Retained interests in residential mortgage loans

                       66     n/a            n/a  

Retained interests in corporate loans

   42     42     n/a     n/a                        

Balances included within loans and advances to customers represent securitisations where substantially all the risks and rewards of the asset have been retained by the Group.

The relationship between the transferred assets and the associated liabilities is that holders of notes may only look to cash flows from the securitised assets for payments of principal and interest due to them under the terms of their notes, although the contractual terms of their notes may be different to the maturity and interest of the transferred assets.

Retained interests in transfers of financial assets that resulted in partial derecognition are securities which represent a continuing exposure to the prepayment and credit risk in the underlying securitised assets. The carrying amount of the loans before transfer was £78m (2014: £120m). The retained interest is initially recorded as an allocation of the original carrying amount based on the relative fair values of the portion derecognised and the portion retained.

For transfers of assets in relation to repurchase agreements, seerefer to Note 22 Reverse repurchase agreements including other similar and secured lending and borrowing and Note 40 Assets pledged.40.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    265


Notes to the financial statements

Scope of consolidation

39 Securitisationscontinued

Continuing involvement in financial assets that have been derecognised

In some cases, the Group may have transferred a financial asset in its entirety but may have continuing involvement in it. This arises in asset securitisations where loans and asset backed securities were derecognised as a result of the Group’s involvement, mainly with CLOs CDOs, RMBS and CMBS. Continuing involvement largely arises from providing financing into these structures in the form of retained notes, which do not bear first losses.

The table below shows the potential financial implications of such continuing involvement:

 

   

 

Continuing involvement as at

31 December 2015

  

  

   
 
Gain/(loss) from
continuing involvement
  
  
  Continuing involvementa   

Gain/(loss) from continuing

involvement

 

Type of transfer

   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 
 
Maximum
exposure
to loss
£m
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
 

 

For the year
ended 31
December
2015

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Cumulative
to 31
December
2015

£m

  
  
  
  

  

  Carrying
amount
£m
   Fair value
£m
   

Maximum
exposure to
loss

£m

   For the
year ended
£m
   Cumulative to
31 December
£m
 
2017          

CLO and other assets

   686     684     686     7     (36                    

US sub-prime and Alt-A

   38     37     38          (426

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                            94    94    94    1    1 

Total

   724     721     724     7     (462   94    94    94    1    1 
2016          
CLO and other assets   10    10    10        (3
Commercial mortgage backed securities                    
Total   10    10    10        (3

Note

292  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


a Assets which represent the Group’s continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in Loans and advances and Trading portfolio assets.

+39 Securitisationscontinued

    

 

            Continuing involvement  as at            

31 December 2014

  

  

   
 
Gain/(loss) from
continuing involvement
  
  

Type of transfer

   
 
 
Carrying
amount
£m
  
  
  
   
 
Fair value
£m
  
  
   
 
 

 

Maximum
exposure
to loss

£m

  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

For the year
ended 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Cumulative
to 31
December
2014

£m

  
  
  
  

  

CLO and other assets

   1,370     1,354     1,370     14     (720

US sub-prime and Alt-A

   208     195     208          (1,365

Commercial mortgage backed securities

   200     200     200     15     (8

Total

   1,778     1,749     1,778     29     (2,093

Assets which represent the Group’s continuing involvement in derecognised assets are recorded in the following line items:

 

  

Type of transfer

             
 
 
Loans and
advances
£m
  
  
  
   
 
 

 

Trading
portfolio
assets

£m

  
  
  

  

   

 

Total

£m

  

  

As at 31 December 2015

          

CLO and other assets

       327     359     686  

US sub-prime and Alt-A

       38          38  

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                         

Total

             365     359     724  

As at 31 December 2014

          

CLO and other assets

       829     541     1,370  

US sub-prime and Alt-A

       200     8     208  

Commercial mortgage backed securities

                  200     200  

Total

             1,029     749     1,778  

40 Assets pledged

Assets are pledged as collateral to secure liabilities under repurchase agreements, securitisations and stock lending agreements or as collateral posted against derivative margin requirements.security deposits relating to derivatives. Assets pledged as collateral include all assets categorised as encumbered in the disclosure on pages 162 to 164,page 129 (unaudited), other than those held in commercial paper conduits. In these transactions, Barclays will be required to step in to provide financing itself under a liquidity facility if the vehicle cannot access the commercial paper market. The following table summarises the nature and carrying amount of the assets pledged as security against these liabilities:

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

a 

  

  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 

Trading portfolio assets

   49,308     50,782     73,899    51,241 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   2,534     2,324  
Financial assets at fair value   4,798    3,195 

Loans and advances to customers

   51,038     62,459     41,772    30,414 

Cash collateral

   62,599     72,562     56,351    68,797 

Available for sale financial investments

   11,666     8,732  
Financial investments   15,058    13,053 

Non current assets held for sale

   1,930     4,693         117 

Assets pledged

   179,075     201,552     191,878      166,817 

Barclays has an additional £13bn (2014: £9bn)£9bn (2016: £14bn) of loans and advances within its asset backed funding programmes that can readily be used to raise additional secured funding and are available to support future issuance.

Total assets pledged includes a collateral pool put in place to provide security for the UKRF funding deficit. Refer to Note 35 for further details.

Collateral held as security for assets

Under certain transactions, including reverse repurchase agreements and stock borrowing transactions, the Group is allowed to resell orre-pledge the collateral held. The fair value at the balance sheet date of collateral accepted andre-pledged to others was as follows:

 

   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

  

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 

Fair value of securities accepted as collateral

   308,162     396,480     608,412    466,975 

Of which fair value of securities re-pledged/transferred to others

   266,015     313,354     547,637      405,582 

The fullAdditional disclosure as per IFRS 7 has been included in collateral and other credit enhancements (see pages 11389 to 114)99).

Note

a 2014 has been revised to align balance sheet categories to the asset encumbrance table on page 163.

 

266    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  293


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

    

    

The notes included in this section focus on related party transactions, auditors’ remuneration and Directors’ remuneration. Related parties include any subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures, entities under common directorships and Key Management Personnel.

 

 

The notes included in this section focuses on related party transactions, Auditors’ remuneration and directors’ remuneration. Related parties include any subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures, entities under common directorships and Key Management Personnel.

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remuneration

Related party transactions

Parties are considered to be related if one party has the ability to control the other party or exercise significant influence over the other party in making financial or operational decisions, or one other party controls both. The definition includes subsidiaries, associates, joint ventures and the Group’s pension schemes.

Subsidiaries

Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries also meet the definition of related party transactions. Where these are eliminated on consolidation, they are not disclosed in the Group Financial Statements. Transactions between Barclays PLC and its subsidiary, Barclays Bank PLC, are fully disclosed in Barclays PLC’s balance sheet and income statement. A list of the Group’s principal subsidiaries is shown in Note 36.

Associates, joint ventures and other entities

The Group provides banking services to its associates, joint ventures, the Group pension funds (principally the UK Retirement Fund) and to entities under common directorships, providing loans, overdrafts, interest andnon-interest bearing deposits and current accounts to these entities as well as other services. Group companies also provide investment management and custodian services to the Group pension schemes. The Group also provides banking services for unit trusts and investment funds managed by Group companies, which are not individually material. All of these transactions are conducted on the same terms as third party transactions. Summarised financial information for the Group’s investments in associates and joint ventures is set out in Note 38.

Amounts included in the Group’s financial statements, in aggregate, by category of related party entity are as follows:

 

                  Pension  
           Entities    funds, unit  
           under    trusts and  
       Joint    common    investment  
   Associates    ventures    directorships    funds  
    £m      £m      £m     £m  

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2015

        

Income

   (19)     40      (4)    4  

Impairment

   (4)     (2)     –     –  

Total assets

   36      1,578      116     –  

Total liabilities

   158      133          184  

 

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2014

        

Income

   (5)          51     4  

Impairment

   –      (1)     –     –  

Total assets

   130      1,558      219     –  

Total liabilities

   264      188      36     149  

 

For the year ended and as at 31 December 2013

        

Income

   (10)     24          3  

Impairment

   (3)     (4)     –     –  

Total assets

   116      1,521      33     5  

Total liabilities

   278      185      73     207  
        Associates
£m
  Joint ventures
£m
  

Pension funds,
unit trusts and
investment
funds

£m

 
For the year ended and as at 31 December 2017    
Income/(expense)   (20  38   4 
Impairment releases   2       
Total assets   2   1,048   2 
Total liabilities   75   2   162 
For the year ended and as at 31 December 2016    
Income/(expense)   (20  7   4 
Impairment charges   (13      
Total assets   72   2,244    
Total liabilities   94   95   260 
For the year ended and as at 31 December 2015    
Income/(expense)   (19  40   4 
Impairment charges   (4  (2   
Total assets   36   1,578    
Total liabilities   158   133   184 

Guarantees, pledges or commitments given in respect of these transactions in the year were £881m (2014: £911m)£27m (2016: £940m) predominantly relating to joint ventures. No guarantees, pledges or commitments were received in the year. Derivatives transacted on behalf of the pensionpensions funds, unit trusts and investment funds were £13m (2014: £587m)£3m (2016: £3m).

Key Management Personnel

The Group’s Key Management Personnel, and persons connected with them, are also considered to be related parties for disclosure purposes. Key Management Personnel are defined as those persons having authority and responsibility for planning, directing and controlling the activities of Barclays PLC (directly or indirectly) and comprise the Directors of Barclays PLC and the Officers of the Group, certain direct reports of the Group Chief Executive and the heads of major business units and functions.

There were no material related party transactions with entities under common directorship where a Director or other member of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person) is also a Director or other member of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person) of Barclays.

294  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remunerationcontinued

The Group provides banking services to Directors and other Key Management Personnel and persons connected to them. Transactions during the year and the balances outstanding were as follows:

 

Loans outstanding         
          2017
£m
              2016
£m
 
As at 1 January   9.2   9.8 
Loans issued during the year   0.5   0.6 
Loan repayments during the year/change of key management personnel   (4.9  (1.2
As at 31 December   4.8   9.2 

 

  Loans outstanding          
     2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  As at 1 January     11.4     13.4  
  Loans issued during the year     1.1     1.3  
  Loan repayments during the year     (2.7)    (3.3) 
  As at 31 December     9.8     11.4  
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    267


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remunerationcontinued

No allowances for impairment were recognised in respect of loans to Directors or other members of Key Management Personnel (or any connected person).

 

Deposits outstanding                
     2015     2014    

            2017

£m

 

            2016

£m

 
     £m     £m  
As at 1 January     103.0     100.2     7.3   116.5 
Deposits received during the year     44.8     25.7     25.7   18.9 
Deposits repaid during the year     (31.3)    (22.9) 
Deposits repaid during the year/change of key management personnel   (26.1  (128.1
As at 31 December     116.5     103.0     6.9   7.3 

Total commitments outstanding

Total commitments outstanding refers to the total of any undrawn amounts on credit cards and/or overdraft facilities provided to Key Management Personnel. Total commitments outstanding as at 31 December 20152017 were £0.5m (2014: £1.3m)£0.3m (2016: £0.2m).

All loans to Directors and other Key Management Personnel (and persons connected to them), (a) were made in the ordinary course of business, (b) were made on substantially the same terms, including interest rates and collateral, as those prevailing at the same time for comparable transactions with other persons and (c) did not involve more than a normal risk of collectability or present other unfavourable features.

Remuneration of Directors and other Key Management Personnel

Total remuneration awarded to Directors and other Key Management Personnel below represents the awards made to individuals that have been approved by the Board Remuneration Committee as part of the latest remuneration decisions, and is consistent with the approach adopted for disclosures set out on pages 50 to 83. Costs recognised in the income statement reflect the accounting charge for the year and are included within operating expenses. The difference between the values awarded and the recognised income statement charge principally relates to the recognition of deferred costs for prior year awards. Figures are provided for the period that individuals met the definition of Directors and other Key Management Personnel.

      2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  Salaries and other short-term benefits     31.3     28.3  
  Pension costs     0.3     0.3  
  Other long-term benefits     4.7     8.1  
  Share-based payments     11.0     15.0  
  Employer social security charges on emoluments     5.2     5.8  
  Costs recognised for accounting purposes     52.5     57.5  
  Employer social security charges on emoluments     (5.2)    (5.8) 
  Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised     2.5     (4.3) 
  Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised     (2.3)    (8.4) 
  Total remuneration awarded     47.5     39.0  

Disclosure required by the Companies Act 2006

The following information regarding Directors is presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006:

      2015     2014  
      £m     £m  
  Aggregate emolumentsa     7.0     7.8  
  Amounts paid under LTIPsb     2.2     –  
      9.2     7.8  

There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2014: nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes.

As at 31 December 2015, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2014: nil).

                 2017
£m
  

            2016

£m

 
Salaries and other short-term benefits   33.9   31.9 
Pension costs   0.1   0.2 
Other long-term benefits   18.4   11.0 
Share-based payments   26.8   21.9 
Employer social security charges on emoluments   9.6   6.2 
Costs recognised for accounting purposes   88.8   71.2 
Employer social security charges on emoluments   (9.6  (6.2
Other long-term benefits – difference between awards granted and costs recognised   (9.8  (2.5
Share-based payments – difference between awards granted and costs recognised   (11.7  (8.9
Total remuneration awarded   57.7   53.6 

 

Disclosure required by the Companies Act 2006

The following information regarding Directors is presented in accordance with the Companies Act 2006:

 

 

 

    

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Aggregate emolumentsa   8.5   8.1 
Amounts paid under LTIPsb   1.1    
    9.6   8.1 

Notes

aThe aggregate emoluments include amounts paid for the 20152017 year. In addition, deferred share awards for 20152017 will be made to Antony JenkinsJames E Staley and Tushar Morzaria which will only vest subject to meeting certain conditions. The total of the deferred share awards is £0.7m (£1.2m for 2014)£1m (2016: £1.4m).
bThe figure shownabove for 2015 in ‘Amounts“Amounts paid under long-term incentive schemes’ is the amountLTIPs” relates to an LTIP award that was released to Tushar Morzaria in 2015 in respect of2017. Dividend shares released on the 2012-2014 Barclays Long Term Incentive Plan (‘LTIP’) cycle.award are excluded. The LTIP amountfigure in the single total figure table for executive Directors’ 20152017 remuneration in the Directors’ Remuneration report relates to the award that is scheduled to be released in 20162018 in respect of the 2013-20152015-2017 LTIP cycle.

There were no pension contributions paid to defined contribution schemes on behalf of Directors (2016: £nil). There were no notional pension contributions to defined contribution schemes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  295


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

41 Related party transactions and Directors’ remunerationcontinuedAs at 31 December 2017, there were no Directors accruing benefits under a defined benefit scheme (2016: nil).

Directors’ and Officers’ shareholdings and options

The beneficial ownership of ordinary share capital of Barclays PLC by all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC (involving 2622 persons) at

31 December 20152017 amounted to 10,586,812 (2014: 9,078,157)12,460,877 (2016: 11,464,580) ordinary shares of 25p each (0.06%(0.07% of the ordinary share capital outstanding).

At 31 December 2015,2017, executive Directors and officersOfficers of Barclays PLC (involving 3211 persons) held options to purchase a total of 17,206 (2014: 30,398)6,000 (2016:

22,527) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 133.01p to 178pa price of 120p under Sharesave.

Advances and credit to Directors and guarantees on behalf of Directors

In accordance with Section 413 of the Companies Act 2006, the total amount of advances and credits made available in 20152017 to persons who served as Directors during the year was £0.3m (2014: £0.4m)£0.2m (2016: £0.2m). The total value of guarantees entered into on behalf of Directors during 20152017 was nil (2014: nil)£nil (2016: £nil).

268    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


42 Auditors’ remuneration

Auditors’ remuneration is included within consultancy, legal and professional fees in administration and general expenses and comprises:

 

          

 

 

 

Audit

 

  

  

 

 

 

Taxation

 

  

  

 

 

 

Other

 

  

   
     Audit   related   services   services   Total  
      £m     £m     £m     £m    £m  
  2015            
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts     13                   13  
  Other services:            
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa     21                   21  
  Other services suppliedb          3              3  
  Other services relating to taxation            
  – compliance services               1         1  
  – advisory servicesc                        –  
  Other          4          1    5  
  Total auditors’ remuneration     34     7     1     1    43  
  2014            
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts     11                   11  
  Other services:            
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa     24                   24  
  Other services suppliedb          4              4  
  Other services relating to taxation            
  – compliance services               1         1  
  – advisory servicesc                        –  
  Other          3          1    4  
  Total auditors’ remuneration     35     7     1     1    44  
  2013            
  Audit of the Group’s annual accounts     10                   10  
  Other services:            
  Fees payable for the Company’s associatesa     25                   25  
  Other services suppliedb          3              3  
  Other services relating to taxation            
  – compliance services               2         2  
  – advisory servicesc                        –  
  Other          3          2    5  
  Total auditors’ remuneration     35     6     2     2    45  

The figures shown in the above table relate to fees paid to PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP and its associates for continuing operations of business. Fees paid to other auditors not associated with PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP in respect of the audit of the Company’s subsidiaries were £4m (2014: £4m, 2013: £5m).

                 2017
£m
                2016
£m
                2015
£m
 
Audit of the Group’s annual accounts   11    14    13 
Other services:      
Audit of the Company’s subsidiariesa   27    27    21 
Other audit related feesb   8    4    7 
Other servicesc   2    4    2 
Total Auditors’ remuneration   48    49    43 

Notes

aComprises the fees for the statutory audit of the subsidiaries and associated pension schemes both inside and outside Great Britainthe UK and fees for the work performed by associates of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLPKPMG or PwC in respect of the consolidated financial statements of the Company. Fees relating to the audit of the associated pension schemes were nil (2014: £0.2m).
bComprises services in relation to statutory and regulatory filings. These include audit services for the review of the interim financial information under the Listing Rules of the UK listing authority.
cIncludes consultation on tax matters, tax advice relating to transactions and other tax planning and advice.

KPMG became the Group’s principal auditor in 2017. PwC was the principal auditor. In addition, and 2015.

The figures shown in the above table relate to fees paid to KPMG or PwC as principal auditor. In addition, fees paid to KPMG in relation to discontinued operations were £4m (PwC 2016: £12m, PwC 2015: £10m).

43 Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilities

 

296  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


 

43 Financial risks, liquidity and capital managementAccounting fornon-current

To improve transparency and ease of reference, by concentrating related information in one place, and to reduce duplication, disclosures required under IFRS relating to financial risks and capital resources have been included within the Risk management and governance section as follows:

§Credit risk, on pages 111 to 137

§Market risk, on pages 138 to 147

§Capital risk, on pages 148 to 153

§Liquidity risk, on pages 154 to 171.

44 Non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

The group applies IFRS 5Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations.

Accounting for non-current assets held for sale and associated liabilities

Non-current

The Group applies IFRS 5Non-current Assets Held for Sale and Discontinued Operations.

Non-current assets (or disposal groups) are classified as held for sale when their carrying amount is to be recovered principally through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate sale in its present condition subject only to terms that are usual and customary and the sale must be highly probable. Non-current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to sell.

Assets classified as held for sale

                                          
      
 

 

Portugal
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

BVP

2015

£m

  

  

  

     

 

 

Italy

2015

£m

  

  

  

     
 
 
Other
2015
£m
  
  
  
     
 

 

Total
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

Total

2014

£m

  

  

  

Available for sale financial investments

     7       1,220              3       1,230       162  

Loans and advances to customers

     3,407              2,091       15       5,513       14,943  

Property, plant and equipment

     42                     86       128       92  

Deferred tax assets

            22                     22       291  

Other assets

     28       756       27       104       915       557  

Total

     3,484       1,998       2,118       208       7,808       16,045  

Balance of impairment unallocated under IFRS 5

     (180     (22     (242            (444     (471

Total agreed to consolidated balance sheet

     3,304       1,976       1,876       208       7,364       15,574  
                                           

Liabilities classified as held for sale

                                          
      
 

 

Portugal
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

BVP

2015

£m

  

  

  

     

 

 

Italy

2015

£m

  

  

  

     
 
 
Other
2015
£m
  
  
  
     
 

 

Total
2015

£m

  
  

  

     

 

 

Total

2014

£m

  

  

  

Deposits from banks

                                        (4,313

Customer accounts

     (1,826            (2,174            (4,000     (6,827

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

                                        (77

Other liabilities

     (37     (1,858     (66     (36     (1,997     (1,898

Total

     (1,863     (1,858     (2,240     (36     (5,997     (13,115

Sale of the Portuguese business

The disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of the Portuguese Retail Banking, Wealth and Investment Management businesses and part of the Portuguese Corporate banking business. This sale is part of the divestment of the Non-Core segment of the Group.

The Portuguese disposal was announced on 2 September 2015 and the sale is due to complete in Q116. A loss of £180m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.

Sale of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones

The disposal group includes all assets and liabilities of Barclays Vida Y Pensiones (BVP), a company offering life insurance, pension products and services in Spain, Portugal and Italy. BVP was classified as held for sale in the first half of 2015 andwhen their carrying amount is expected to be soldrecovered principally through a sale transaction rather than continuing use. In order to be classified as held for sale, the asset must be available for immediate sale in the first half of 2016. A loss of £22m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associatesits present condition subject only to terms that are usual and joint ventures.

Sale of the Italian business

The disposal group includes the assets and liabilities of the Italian Retail Banking business including mortgages. This sale is part of the divestment of the Non-Core segment of the Group.

The Italian disposal was announced on 3 December 2015customary and the sale is expectedmust be highly probable.Non-current assets (or disposal groups) held for sale are measured at the lower of carrying amount and fair value less cost to complete in the first half of 2016. A loss of £258m has been recognised in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures.sell.

Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale          
    

Total

            2017

£m

   

Total

            2016

£m

 
Cash and balances at central banks       2,930 
Items in the course of collection from other banks       570 
Trading portfolio assets       3,084 
Financial assets designated at fair value   3    6,984 
Derivative financial instruments       1,992 
Financial investments       7,737 
Loans and advances to banks       1,666 
Loans and advances to customers   1,164    43,504 
Prepayments, accrued income and other assets       696 
Investments in associates and joint ventures       87 
Property, plant and equipment   26    954 
Goodwill       997 
Intangible assets       570 
Current and deferred tax assets       149 
Retirement benefit assets       33 
Total   1,193    71,953 
Balance of impairment unallocated under IFRS 5       (499
Total assets classified as held for sale   1,193    71,454 
    
Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale          
    Total
             2017
£m
   

Total

2016

£m

 
Deposits from banks       2,149 
Items in the course of collection due to banks       373 
Customer accounts       42,431 
Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing       597 
Trading portfolio liabilities       388 
Financial liabilities designated at fair value       7,325 
Derivative financial instruments       1,611 
Debt securities in issue       7,997 
Subordinated liabilities       934 
Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities       1,180 
Provisions       103 
Current and deferred tax liabilities       162 
Retirement benefit liabilities       42 
Total liabilities classified as held for sale         65,292 
           
Net assets classified as held for sale   1,193    6,162 
Expected contribution to BAGL       866 
Disposal group post contribution   1,193    7,028 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  297    269


Notes to the financial statements

Other disclosure matters

    

    

 

44 Non-current assets43 Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilitiescontinued

Other held for sale assets

Other assets includes the Barclays Risk Analysis Index Solutions business. A pre-tax gain of approximately £480m is expected to be recognised on completion during 2016.

During the year, a number of disposal groups classified as held for sale assets have been disposed of. The sale£70bn decrease in assets is driven by the disposals of BAGL (£65bn), the French retail business (£4bn), the Egypt business (£1bn), Barclays Vida Pensiones (£0.7bn) and the Zimbabwe business (£0.4bn). The associated liabilities of the Spanish business (Barclays Bank SAU) took placeabove disposal groups have also been sold in January 2015. Lossesthe year.

Discontinued Operations

On 1 March 2016, Barclays announced its intention to reduce the Group’s 62.3% interest in BAGL to a level which would permit Barclays to deconsolidate BAGL from a regulatory perspective and, prior to that, from an accounting perspective. From this date, BAGL was treated as a discontinued operation. On 5 May 2016, Barclays sold 12.2% of £446mthe Group’s interest in 2014BAGL and £117mon 1 June 2017 Barclays sold a further 33.7% of BAGL’s issued share capital, resulting in 2015the accounting deconsolidation of BAGL from the Barclays Group. As a result, as of 1 June 2017 BAGL was consequently no longer reported as a discontinued operation. At this time, Barclays’ holding in BAGL technically met the requirements to be treated as an Associate. However, following a revision of its governance rights in July 2017 and the difference being immaterial, the holding was treated as an Available for Sale (AFS) asset from the transaction date. In Q317 Barclays contributed 1.5% of BAGL’s ordinary shares to a Black Economic Empowerment scheme, resulting in Barclays accounting for 126 million ordinary shares in BAGL, representing 14.9% of BAGL’s issued share capital. The retained investment is reported as an Available for Sale (AFS) asset, in the Head Office segment, with Barclays’ share of BAGL’s dividend recognised in the Head Office income statement.

Prior to the disposal of shares on 1 June 2017, BAGL met the requirements for presentation as a discontinued operation. As such, the results, which have been recognisedpresented as the profit after tax andnon-controlling interest in respect of the discontinued operation on the face of the Group income statement, are analysed in the income statement within (loss)/profit on disposalbelow. The income statement, statement of subsidiaries, associatesother comprehensive income and joint ventures. Ofcash flow statement below represent five months of results as a discontinued operation to 31 May 2017, compared to the 2015 loss, £97m relates to recycling of the related currency translation reserve with the remainder due to revision of the estimated closing net asset value of the disposal group on completion. The sale of the Pakistan business took place in June 2015, and UKSL in September 2015 with gains of £14m and £7m respectively recognised in other income.full year ended 31 December 2016.

Barclays Africa disposal group income statement         
For the year ended 31 December  

            2017

£m

  

        2016

£m

 
Net interest income   1,024   2,169 
Net fee and commission income   522   1,072 
Net trading income   149   281 
Net investment income   30   45 
Net premiums from insurance contracts   161   362 
Other income   (16  8 
Total income   1,870   3,937 
Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts   (84  (191
Total income net of insurance claims   1,786   3,746 
Credit impairment charges and other provisions   (177  (445
Net operating income   1,609   3,301 
Staff costs   (586  (1,186
Administration and general expensesa   (1,634  (1,224
Operating expenses   (2,220  (2,410
Share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures   5   6 
(Loss)/profit before tax   (606  897 
Taxation   (154  (306
(Loss)/profit after taxb   (760  591 
Attributable to:         
Equity holders of the parent   (900  189 
Non-controlling interests   140   402 
(Loss)/profit after taxb   (760  591 

Notes

aIncludes impairment of £1,090m (2016: £nil).
bTotal loss in respect of the discontinued operation was £2,195m which included the £60m loss on sale and £1,375m loss on recycling of other comprehensive loss on reserves.

270    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


4543 Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale and associated liabilitiescontinued

Other comprehensive income relating to discontinued operations is as follows:

For the year ended 31 December               2017
£m
  

            2016

£m

 
Available for sale assets   (3  (9
Currency translation reserves   (38  1,451 
Cash flow hedge reserves   19   89 
Other comprehensive (loss)/income, net of tax from discontinued operations   (22  1,531 

 

The cash flows attributed to the discontinued operation are as follows:

 

   
For the year ended 31 December  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

 
Net cash flows from operating activities   540   1,164 
Net cash flows from investing activities   (245  (691
Net cash flows from financing activities   (165  (105
Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents   (29  37 
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents   101   405 

44 Barclays PLC (the Parent Company)company)

Other income/(expense)income

Other income of £227m (2014: £275m)£690m (2016: £334m) includes £345m (2014: £250m)£639m (2016: £457m) of income received from gross coupon payments on Barclays Bank PLC issued AT1 securities partially offset by a £114m fair value loss (2014: £27m gain) on derivative financial instruments.securities.

Non-current assetsNon-Current Assets and liabilitiesLiabilities

Investment in subsidiarysubsidiaries

The investment in subsidiarysubsidiaries of £35,303m (2014: £33,743m)£39,354m (2016: £36,553m) predominantly represents investments made into Barclays Bank PLC, including £5,350m (2014: £4,350m)£8,986m (2016: £6,486m) of AT1 securities. The increase of £1,560m£2,801m during the year was duedriven by AT1 issuances of £2,500m during the period, as well as a £300m investment in Barclays Services Limited (the “Group Service Company”).

The Group Service Company was established in September 2017 as a direct subsidiary of Barclays PLC to a £1,000m increased holding indeliver operational continuity and to drive operational efficiencies across the Group. In September 2017, Barclays transferred c.£3.8bn of assets and liabilities from Barclays Bank PLC issued securities and a further cash contribution of £560m.its subsidiaries to the Group Service Company.

Loans and advances to subsidiary,subsidiaries, subordinated liabilities and debt securities in issue

During the period, Barclays PLC issued $2bn of Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes,1.25bn equivalent1.5bn of Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes and SGD 0.2bn Fixed Rate Subordinated Notes included within the subordinated liabilities balance of £1,766m (2014: £810m)£6,501m (2016: £3,789m), $5.5bn$5bn of Fixed and Floating Rate Senior Notes, £1.95bn of Fixed Rate Senior Notes Yen 60bn of Fixed and Floating Rate Notes and100m of private MTN0.5bn Fixed Rate Senior Notes included within the debt securities in issue balance of £6,224m (2014: £2,056m)£22,110m (2016: £16,893m). The proceeds raised through these transactions were used to invest in Barclays Bank PLC Notes in each case with a ranking corresponding to the notes issued by Barclays PLC and included within the loans and advances to subsidiarysubsidiaries balance of £7,990m (2014: £2,866m)£23,970m (2016: £19,421m).

Financial investments

The financial investment assets relate to loans made to subsidiaries of the Group accounted for as AFS instruments. These include a feature that allows for the loan to be written down in whole or in part by the borrower only in the event that the liabilities of the subsidiary would otherwise exceed its assets.

Derivative financial instrument

The derivative financial instrument of £210m (2014: £313m)£161m (2016: £268m) held by the Parent Company represents Barclays PLC’s right to receive a Capital Note with a face value of $3bn for no additional consideration, in the event the Barclays PLC consolidated CRD IV CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) falls below 7% at which point the notes are automatically assigned by the holders to Barclays PLC.

Shareholders’Management of internal investments, loans and advances

Barclays PLC retains the discretion to manage the nature of its internal investments in subsidiaries according to their regulatory and business needs. As we implement our structural reform programme, Barclays PLC expects to invest capital and funding in Barclays Bank PLC and other Group subsidiaries such as the Group Service Company, the US IHC and the UK ring-fenced bank. In October 2017, the Bank of England published a consultation on “Internal MREL” and following that consultation a final statement of policy is expected to be published in H1 2018. Accordingly, during the course of 2018 Barclays expects to restructure certain of its investments in subsidiaries, including to subordinate internal MREL beneath operating liabilities, to the extent required to achieve compliance with internal MREL requirements which are expected to be in effect from 1 January 2019.

Total equity

Called up share capital and share premium of Barclays PLC was £21,586m (2014: £20,809m)£22,045m (2016: £21,842m). Other equity instruments of £5,321m (2014: £4,326m)£8,943m (2016: £6,453m) comprises of AT1 securities. For further details please refer to Note 31.

298  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingsStructural Reform

Barclays’ plans for UK ring-fencing remain on track. The Group’s corporate structure consists of a number of related undertakings, comprising subsidiaries, joint ventures, associatesrelevant court processes began in November 2017 with the Sanction hearing to be held on 26 and significant other interests. A full list of these undertakings,27 February 2018 at which the country of incorporationCourt will be requested to sanction Barclays’ ring-fencing transfer scheme. We intend to complete the reorganisation and establish the ownership of each share class is set out below. The information is provided as at 31 December 2015.

The entities are grouped by the countriesUK ring-fenced bank in which they are incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of incorporation. Barclays’ 2015 Country Snapshot provides details of where the Group carries on its business, where its profits are subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in.

Wholly owned subsidiaries

Unless otherwise stated the undertakings below are wholly owned and consolidated by Barclays and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by Group subsidiaries. Where multiple share classes are held the proportionApril 2018, ahead of the nominal value of each class of shares held is 100% unless otherwise stated.

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

United Kingdom

54 Lombard Street InvestmentsF, I
Aequor Investments Limited
Alynore Investments Limited PartnershipB
Ardencroft Investments LimitedF, I
Astraea Investment FundsJ, K
Axis PartnersB
B D & B Investments Limited
B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited
Barafor Limited
Barclay Leasing Limited
Barclaycard Funding PLC
Barclays (Security Realisation) Limited
Barclays Africa Group Holdings LimitedJ, K
Barclays Aldersgate Investments Limited
Barclays Asset Management Limited
Barclays Bank PLCA, F, I
Barclays Bank Trust Company LimitedI, P
Barclays Bayard Investments TrustD
Barclays BCL FI TrustD
Barclays Bedivere TrustD
Barclays BR Holdings TrustD
Barclays BR Investments TrustD
Barclays Cantal Investments TrustD
Barclays Capital Asia Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Finance Limited
Barclays Capital Japan Securities Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l. TrustD
Barclays Capital Margin Financing Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.2) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.3) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees Limited
Barclays Capital Principal Investments Limited
Barclays Capital Securities Client Nominee Limited
Barclays Capital Securities LimitedF, I
Barclays Capital Services Limited
Barclays Capital Strategic Advisers Limited
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg TrustD
Barclays CCP Funding LLPB
Barclays Claudas Investments PartnershipB
Barclays Converted Investments (No.2) Limited
Barclays Converted Investments Limited
Barclays Darnay Euro Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Direct Investing Nominees Limited
Barclays Directors Limited
Barclays Equity Index Investments Bare TrustD
Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited
Barclays Export and Finance Company Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Fiduciary Services (UK) Limited
Barclays Financial Planning
Barclays Financial Planning Nominee Company Limited
Barclays Funds Investments Limited
Barclays Global Investors Finance Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Global Investors UK Holdings Limited (in Liquidation)J, K
Barclays Global Shareplans Nominee Limited
Barclays Group Holdings Limited
Barclays Group Operations Limited
Barclays Industrial Development Limited
Barclays Industrial Investments Limited
Barclays Insurance Services Company Limited
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Investment Management Limited
Barclays Lamorak TrustD
Barclays Leasing (No.9) Limited
Barclays Long Island Limited
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg Finance Index TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings TrustD
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings TrustD
Barclays Marlist Limited
Barclays Mercantile Business Finance Limited
Barclays Mercantile Highland Finance Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Mercantile Limited
Barclays Metals Limited
Barclays Nominees (Branches) Limited
Barclays Nominees (George Yard) Limited
Barclays Nominees (K.W.S.) Limited
Barclays Nominees (Monument) Limited
Barclays Nominees (Provincial) Limited
Barclays Nominees (United Nations For UNJSPF) Limited
Barclays Operational Services Limited
Barclays Pelleas Investments Limited PartnershipB
Barclays Pelleas TrustD
Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited
Barclays Physical Trading Limited
Barclays Private Bank
Barclays Private Banking Services Limited
Barclays Private Trust
Barclays Risk Analytics and Index Solutions Limited
Barclays SAMS Limited
Barclays Services (Japan) Limited
Barclays Sharedealing
Barclays Shea Limited
Barclays Singapore Global Shareplans Nominee Limited
Barclays SLCSM (No.1) Limited
Barclays Stockbrokers (Holdings) Limited
Barclays Stockbrokers Limited
Barclays UK and Europe PLC
Barclays Unquoted Investments Limited
Barclays Unquoted Property Investments Limited
Barclays USD Funding LLPB
Barclays Wealth Nominees Limited
Barclayshare Nominees Limited
Barcosec Limited
Barley Investments LimitedI, J, K
Barometers Limited
Barsec Nominees Limited
BB Client Nominees Limited
BBUK Private Credit Partners Limited (In Liquidation)
BCLI GP TrustD
Blossom Finance General PartnershipB
BMBF (Bluewater Investments) Limited
BMBF (No.12) Limited
BMBF (No.18) Limited (Dissolved 20/01/2016)
BMBF (No.21) Limited
BMBF (No.24) Limited
BMBF (No.3) Limited
BMBF (No.6) Limited
BMBF (No.9) Limited
BMBF USD NO 1 Limited
BMI (No.6) Limited (Dissolved 16/01/2016)
1 January 2019 legislative deadline for implementation.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  299    271


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
BMI (No.9) Limited
BNRI ENG 2013 Limited PartnershipB
BNRI ENG 2014 Limited PartnershipB
BNRI ENG GP LLPB
BNRI England 2010 Limited PartnershipB
BNRI England 2011 Limited PartnershipB
BNRI England 2012 Limited PartnershipB
BNRI PIA Scot GP Limited
BNRI Scots GP, LLPB
Boudeuse Limited
Capel Cure Sharp Limited
Carnegie Holdings LimitedI, J, K
Chapelcrest Investments Limited
Clearlybusiness.com Limited (In Liquidation)
Clydesdale Financial Services Limited
Cobalt Investments Limited
Condor No.1 Limited PartnershipB
Condor No.2 Limited PartnershipB
CP Flower Guaranteeco (UK) LimitedE
CP Propco 1 Limited
CP Propco 2 Limited
CP Topco LimitedJ, K
CPIA England 2008 Limited PartnershipB
CPIA England 2009 Limited PartnershipB
CPIA England No.2 Limited PartnershipB
Denham Investments Limited
DMW Realty Limited
Durlacher Nominees Limited
Eagle Financial and Leasing Services (UK) Limited
Ebbgate Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Eldfell Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
EM Investments No.1 Limited (In Liquidation)
Equity Value Investments Limited Liability PartnershipB
Equity Value Investments No.1 Limited
Equity Value Investments No.2 LimitedF, I
Exshelfco (DZBC)
Fair and Square Limited (In Liquidation)
Finpart Nominees Limited
FIRSTPLUS Financial Group PLC
Fitzroy Finance LimitedZ
Foltus Investments Limited
Gerrard (OMH) Limited
Gerrard Financial Planning Limited
Gerrard Investment Management Limited
Gerrard Management Services Limited
Gerrard Nominees Limited
Global Dynasty Natural Resource Private Equity Limited PartnershipB
Globe Nominees Limited
GM Computers Limited
Greig Middleton Holdings Limited
Greig Middleton Nominees Limited
Hawkins Funding Limited
Heraldglen LimitedG, H, I
Hoardburst Limited (In Liquidation)
Investors In Infrastructure Limited
J.V. Estates Limited
Keepier Investments
Kirsche Investments Limited
Laser Investment Company 1 Limited (In Liquidation)
Laser Investment Company 2 Limited (In Liquidation)
Leonis Investments LLPB
Lindley Developments LimitedU
Lombard Street Nominees Limited
Long Island Assets Limited
Luscinia Investments Funds
Maloney Investments Limited
MCC Leasing (No. 6) Limited (In Liquidation)
MCC Leasing (No.24) Limited (Dissolved 04/02/2016)
Menlo Investments Limited
Mercantile Credit Company Limited
Mercantile Industrial Leasing Limited (In Liquidation)
Mercantile Leasing Company (No.132) Limited
Mercers Debt Collections Limited
MK Opportunities LPB
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Muleta Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Murray House Investment Management Limited
Naxos Investments Limited
North Colonnade Investments Limited
Northwharf Investments LimitedI, X
Northwharf Nominees Limited
Odysseus (Martins) Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Pecan Aggregator LPB
Pendle Shipping Limited
PIA England No.2 Limited PartnershipB
Preferred Liquidity Limited PartnershipB
R.C. Greig Nominees Limited
Real Estate Participation Management Limited
Real Estate Participation Services Limited
Reflex Nominees Limited
Relative Value Investments UK Limited Liability PartnershipB
Relative Value Trading Limited
Roder Investments No. 1 LimitedI, Y
Roder Investments No. 2 LimitedI, Y
Ruthenium Investments Limited
RVT CLO Investments LLPB
Scotlife Home Loans (No.3) Limited
Sharelink Nominees Limited
Solution Personal Finance LimitedJ, K, L
Stellans Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Surety Trust Limited
Swan Lane Investments LimitedF, I
The Logic Group Enterprises Limited
The Logic Group Holdings LimitedJ
US Real Estate Holdings No.3 Limited
W.D. Pension Fund Limited
Wedd Jefferson (Nominees) Limited
Westferry Investments Limited
Woolwich Assured Homes Limited
Woolwich Homes (1987) LimitedE
Woolwich Homes Limited
Woolwich Limited
Woolwich Plan Managers Limited
Woolwich Qualifying Employee Share Ownership Trustee Limited
Woolwich Surveying Services Limited
Wysteria Euro Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Zeban Nominees Limited

Argentina

Compañia regional del Sur S.A.
Compañía Sudamerica S.A.

Belgium

Belgian Turbine Lease Corporation NV

Brazil

Banco Barclays S.A.
Barclays Corretora de Titulos e Valores Mobiliarios S.A.

Canada

Barclays Canadian Commodities Limited
Barclays Capital Canada Inc
Barclays Corporation Limited
CPIA Canada HoldingsB

Cayman Islands

Alymere Investments LimitedG, H, I
Alymere Investments Two Limited (In Liquidation)
Analytical Trade UK Limited
Aquitaine Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Aubisque UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Capital (Cayman) Limited
Barclays Trust Company (Cayman) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Beille Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Bigorre UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Blaytell Limited
Braven Investments No.1 Limited
Brule 1 Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Calthorpe Investments Limited
Capton Investments Limited
Claudas Investments LimitedG, H, I
Claudas Investments Two Limited
Colombiere UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation) 

300  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Coskwo Limited
CPIA Investments No.1 LimitedV
CPIA Investments No.2 LimitedF, I
Cureton Investments No. 1 Limited (In Liquidation)
Cuth Investments LimitedF, I, T
Eagle Holdings Ltd (Sold 14/01/2016)
Eagle Management Services Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Feste Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Furbridge Investments Limited
Gallen Investments LimitedH, I
Gironde Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Godler Limited
Golden Eagle Holdings Ltd (Sold 14/01/2016)
Hamar Investments Limited
Harflane Limited
Hauteville UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Hentock Limited
Hollygrice Limited
Hurley Investments No.1 LimitedI, W
Hurley Investments No.2 Limited (In Liquidation)
HYMF (Cayman) Limited
Iris Investments 1 LimitedG, H, I
JV Assets Limited
Mintaka Investments No. 4 Limited
Moselle No 3 UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
OGP Leasing Limited
Palomino LimitedZ
Pelleas Investments Limited
Pelleas Investments Two Limited
Pilkbull Limited
Pippin Island Investments Limited
Raglan Investments Limited
Razzoli Investments LimitedF, I
RVH LimitedF, I
Spargi Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Spatial Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Spoonhill Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Strickyard Limited
Tourmalet UK Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Ventotene Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Wessex Investments Limited
Winhall Limited
Zane Investments Limited
Zanonne Investments Limited (In Liquidation)
Zinc Holdings Limited (In Liquidation)
Zumboorok Investments LimitedF, I, T

China

Barclays Technology Centre (Shanghai) Company Limited

Egypt

Barclays Bank Egypt SAE

France

Barclays Courtage SAS
Barclays Diversification
Barclays France SA
Barclays Patrimoine S.C.S.
Barclays Vie SA
Barclays Wealth Managers France SA
BBAIL SAS

Germany

Barclaycard Bank AG
Barclays Capital Effekten GmbH
Baubecon Holding 1 GmbH (In Liquidation)
Opal 110. GmbH (In Liquidation)
Sulm Investments GmbH

Gibraltar

Barclays Gibraltar Nominees Company Limited
Frankland Properties Limited
Norfolk LPB
Ringmer Properties Limited
Saveway Properties Limited
Stowmarket Investments Limited
Townmead Properties Limited
Trefield Holdings Limited
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

Guernsey

Barclays Insurance Guernsey PCC LimitedQ
Barclays Nominees (Guernsey) Limited
Barclays Wealth Advisory Holdings (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Services (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Directors (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Fund Managers (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Nominees (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Guernsey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Bormio Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Lindmar Trust Company Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Regency Secretaries Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Hong Kong

Barclays Asia Limited
Barclays Bank (Hong Kong Nominees) Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Capital Asia Limited
Barclays Capital Asia Nominees Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Wealth Nominees (Hong Kong) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

India

Barclays Holdings India Private Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Investments & Loans (India) LimitedF, I
Barclays Securities (India) Private Limited
Barclays Shared Services Private Limited
Barclays Technology Centre India Private Limited
Barclays Wealth Trustees (India) Private Limited

Indonesia

PT Bank Barclays Indonesia (In Liquidation)
PT Bhadra Buana Persada (In Liquidation)
Ireland
Barclaycard International Payments Limited
Barclays Assurance (Dublin) Limited
Barclays Bank Ireland Public Limited Company
Barclays Equities Trading (Ireland) Limited (In Liquidation)
Barclays Insurance (Dublin) Limited
Barclays Ireland Nominees Limited

Isle of Man

Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man) Limited
Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited
Barclays Portfolio (IoM GP) No.2 Limited
Barclays Private Clients International LimitedJ, K
Barclays Trust Company (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Services (IOM) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Directors (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Nominees (IOM) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust (Nominees) Isle of Man Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust International Nominees (Isle of Man) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Island Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Stowell Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) 2006 Nominees (No. 1) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 23) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 3) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 4) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 5) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook (IOM) Nominees (No. 6) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Italy

Barclays Private Equity S.p.A. (In Liquidation)
Barclays Services Italia S.p.A. (In Liquidation)

Japan

Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan Limited
Barclays Securities Japan Limited
Barclays Wealth Services Limited

Jersey

Barbridge Limited
Barclays Nominees (Jersey) Limited
Barclays Services Jersey Limited
Barclays Trust Company (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Corporate Officers (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Directors (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Fund Managers (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclays Wealth Management Jersey Limited
Barclays Wealth Signatories Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  301


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust Channel Islands Limited
Barclaytrust International (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Barclaytrust Jersey Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
BIFML PTC Limited
CP Newco 1 Limited
CP Newco2 LimitedJ, K
CP Newco3 Limited
Karami Holdings Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
MK Opportunities GP Ltd
Sandringham Nominees Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Tiara Trustees (Jersey) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook Executors Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)
Walbrook Properties Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Korea, Republic of

Barclays Korea GP Limited

Luxembourg

Adler Toy Holding Sarl
Barclays Aegis Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Alzin Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Bayard Investments S.à r.l.J, K
Barclays BCL Fixed Income S.à r.l.
Barclays BCLI no.1 S.à r.l.
Barclays BCLI no.2 S.à r.l.
Barclays Bedivere Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Bordang Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays BR Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays BR Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Cantal Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l.I, N
Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg S.à r.l.
Barclays Equity Index Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Lamorak Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Leto Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings S.à r.l
Barclays Luxembourg Finance S.à r.l.I, K
Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Luxembourg Holdings SSCB
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings S.à r.l.
Barclays Pelleas Investments S.à r.l.G, I
Barclays US Investments S.à r.l.J, K

Malaysia

Barclays Capital Markets Malaysia Sdn Bhd.F, I

Mauritius

Barclays (H&B) Mauritius Limited
Barclays Capital Mauritius Limited
Barclays Capital Securities Mauritius Limited
Barclays Mauritius Overseas Holdings Limited

Mexico

Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A.K, M
Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Grupo Financiero Barclays Mexico, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Servicios Barclays, S.A. de C.V.

Monaco

Barclays Wealth Asset Management (Monaco) S.A.M.

Netherlands

Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V.
Chewdef BidCo BV. (In Liquidation)

Nigeria

Barclays Group Representative Office (NIG) Limited

Philippines

Meridian (SPV-AMC) Corporation

Portugal

Barclays Wealth Managers Portugal – SGFIM, S.A.

Russian Federation

Limited Liability Company Barclays Capital

Saudi Arabia

Barclays Saudi Arabia (In Liquidation)

Singapore

Barclays Bank (Singapore Nominees) Pte Ltd.
Barclays Bank (South East Asia) Nominees Private Limited
Barclays Capital Futures (Singapore) Private Limited
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Capital Holdings (Singapore) Private Limited
Barclays Merchant Bank (Singapore) Ltd.
Barclays Wealth Trustees (Singapore) Limited (Sold 14/01/2016)

Spain

Barclays Mediador, Operador de Banca Seguros Vinculado, S.A.
Barclays Tenedora De Immuebles SL.
Barclays Vida Y Pensiones, Compañía De Seguros, S.A.
Iberalbion A.I.E.
The Logic Group Enterprises S.L

Switzerland

Barclays Bank (Suisse) S.A.
Barclaytrust (Suisse) SA (Sold 14/01/2016)
BPB Holdings SA

Taiwan

Barclays Capital Securities Taiwan Limited

Thailand

Barclays Capital Securities (Thailand) Ltd.

Uganda

Barclays Bank of Uganda Limited

Ukraine

Barclays Capital Services (Ukraine) LLC (In Liquidation)C

United States

475 Fifth 09 LLCC
Analog Analytics Inc
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Cell IF, I
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Cell II
Analytical FX Trading Strategy Series LLCC
Analytical Trade Holdings LLC
Analytical Trade Investments LLCH
Archstone Equity Holdings Inc
Barclays Bank DelawareF, I
Barclays BWA, Inc.
Barclays Capital Commodities Corporation
Barclays Capital Derivatives Funding LLCC
Barclays Capital Energy Inc.
Barclays Capital Equities Trading GPB
Barclays Capital Holdings Inc.G, I
Barclays Capital Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Finance Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Holdings Inc.
Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc.
Barclays Capital Services Inc.
Barclays Commercial Mortgage Securities LLCC
Barclays Delaware Holdings LLCF, I
Barclays Dryrock Funding LLCC
Barclays Electronic Commerce Holdings Inc.
Barclays Financial LLCC
Barclays Group US Inc.
Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc.
Barclays Investment Holdings Inc.
Barclays Oversight Management Inc.
Barclays Receivables LLCC
Barclays Services Corporation
Barclays Services LLCC
Barclays US CCP Funding LLCC
Barclays US Funding LLCC
Barclays US GPF Inc.
Barclays US LPB
Barclays US Management, LLCC
BCAP LLCC
BNRI Acquisition No.4 LLCC
BNRI Acquisition No.5, LPB
BTXS Inc.
Centergate at Gratigny LLCC
CPIA Acquisition No.1 LLCC
CPIA Acquisition No.2 LLCC
CPIA Acquisition No.3 LLCC
CPIA Equity No. 1 Inc.
CPIA Finance No.1, LLCC
CPIA FX Investments Inc.
CPIA Holdings No.1, LLCC
Crescent Real Estate Member LLCC
Curve Investments GPB

302  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Equifirst Corporation (In Liquidation)
Gracechurch Services Corporation
HYMF, Inc.
La Torretta Beverages LLCC
La Torretta Hospitality LLCC
La Torretta Operations LLCC
Lagalla Investments LLCC
Long Island Holding A LLCC
Long Island Holding B LLCC
LTDL Holdings LLCC
Marbury Holdings LLC
Persica Holdings LLCC
Persica Lease LLCC
Persica LL LLCC
Persica Property LLCC
Preferred Liquidity, LLC
Procella Investments LLCC
Procella Investments No.1 LLCC
Procella Investments No.2 LLCC
Procella Investments No.3 LLCC
Procella Swaps LLCC
Protium Finance I LLCC
Protium Master Grantor TrustD
Protium Master Mortgage LPB
Protium REO I LPB
RB Special Assets, L.L.C.C
Relative Value Holdings, LLC
Rhode Investments LLCC
Securitized Asset Backed Receivables LLCC
Sutton Funding LLCC
TPLL LLCC
TPProperty LLCC
TPWorks LLCC
US Secured Investments LLCC
Vail 09 LLCC
Vail Development 09 LLCC
Vail Hotel 09 LLCC
Vail Hotel A LLCC
Vail Hotel B LLCC
Vail Residential 09 LLCC
Vail SC LLCC
Vanoise IncH, I
Verain Investments LLCI, J, K
Wilmington Riverfront Receivables LLCJ, K

Zambia

Barclays Bank Zambia Plc
Kafue House Limited

Zimbabwe

Afcarme Zimbabwe Holdings (Pvt) Limited
Branchcall Computers (Pvt) Limited

Other related undertakings

Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are consolidated and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary or common shares which are held by subsidiaries of the Group. The ownership percentage is provided for each undertaking. Where multiple share classes are held the proportion of the nominal value of each class of shares held is the same as the ownership unless otherwise stated.

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note

United Kingdom

Barclays Africa Limited62.32%
Barclays Alma Mater Management Limited
Partnership30.00%B, Z
Barclays Covered Bond Funding LLP50.00%B
Barclays Infrastructure Investors Management LP38.00%B, Z
BEIF Management Limited Partnership30.00%B, Z
BMC (UK) Limited40.13%Z
Business Growth Fund PLC23.96%Z
Camperdown UK Limited50.00%J, Z
Claas Finance Limited51.00%K
Equistone Founder Partner II L.P.20.00%B, Z
Equistone Founder Partner III L.P.35.00%B, Z
Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note
Equity Estates Basingstoke Limited31.16%J, Z
GN Tower Limited50.00%Z
Gresham Leasing March (3) Limited30.00%Z
GW City Ventures Limited50.00%K, Z
Igloo Regeneration (General Partner) Limited25.00%L, Z
Imalivest LP66.28%B, Z
Intelligent Processing Solutions Limited19.50%Z
PetroGranada Limited65.25%Z
PSA Credit Company Limited (in liquidation)50.00%J, L
Vocalink Holdings Limited15.00%Z
Woolwich Countryside Limited50.00%O, Z

Australia

Hydra Energy Holdings Pty Ltd59.26%Z

Botswana

Barclays Bank of Botswana Limited42.27%
Barclays Insurance Services (Pty) Limited42.27%
Barclays Life Botswana Proprietary Limited62.32%

Canada

Clearbrook Resources Inc20.71%Z

Cayman Islands

Chrysaor Holdings Limited37.98%Z
Cupric Canyon Capital GP Limited49.90%Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LP38.10%B, Z
Southern Peaks Mining LP54.67%B, Z
SPM GP Limited49.61%Z
Third Energy Holdings Limited74.76%Z

France

Financière DSBG SAS31.51%Z
Sogetrel27.31%Z

Germany

Eschenbach Holding GmbH23.25%Z

Ghana

Barclays Bank of Ghana Limited62.32%

Hong Kong

CR SpaClub at Sea (HK) Limited53.86%Z

Indonesia

PT Barclays Capital Securities Indonesia99.00%

Isle of Man

Absa Manx Holdings Limited62.32%
Absa Manx Insurance Company Limited62.32%

Italy

Eudea SpA22.03%Z

Jersey

Barclays Index Finance Trust32.69%S

Kenya

Barclays (Kenya) Nominees Limited42.69%
Barclays Bank Insurance Agency Limited42.69%
Barclays Bank of Kenya Limited42.69%
Barclays Deposit-Taking Microfinance Limited42.69%
Barclays Financial Services Limited42.69%
Barclays Life Assurance Kenya Limited39.45%
Barclays Pension Services Limited38.81%
First Assurance Company Limited39.45%
First Assurance Holdings Limited62.31%

Korea, Republic of

Woori BC Pegasus Securitization Specialty Co., Limited70.00%

Luxembourg

BNRI Limehouse No.1 Sarl96.30%R
Partnership Investments S.à r.l.33.40%
Preferred Funding S.à r.l.33.33%H
Preferred Investments S.à r.l.33.33%H, I

Malta

RS2 Software PLC18.25%Z

Mauritius

Barclays Bank Mauritius Limited62.32%G, H, J, K

Monaco

Société Civile Immobilière 31 Avenue de la Costa75.00%

Mozambique

Barclays Bank Moçambique SA61.58%
Global Alliance Seguros, S.A.62.32%

Namibia

Absa Namibia Proprietary Limited62.32%
EFS Namibia Proprietary Limited62.32%

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  303


Notes to the financial statements

46 Related undertakingscontinued

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    

Netherlands

Tulip Oil Holding BV30.43%Z

Nigeria

Absa Capital Representative Office Nigeria Limited62.32%

Norway

EnterCard Norge AS40.00%Z
Origo Exploration Holding AS23.08%Z

Seychelles

Barclays Bank (Seychelles) Limited62.18%

South Africa

1900 Summerstrand Share Block Limited62.32%
Absa Alternative Asset Management Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Asset Management Proprietary Limited62.26%
Absa Bank Limited62.32%I, J
Absa Capital Securities Proprietary Limited62.32%F, I
Absa Consultants and Actuaries Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Development Company Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%F, I
Absa Estate Agency Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Financial Services Africa Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Financial Services Limited62.32%
Absa Fleet Services Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Fund Managers Limited62.32%
Absa idirect Limited62.32%
Absa Insurance and Financial Advisers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Insurance Company Limited62.32%
Absa Insurance Risk Management Services Limited62.32%
Absa Investment Management Services Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Life Limited62.32%F, I
Absa Mortgage Fund Managers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Ontwikkelingsmaatskappy Eiendoms Beperk62.32%
Absa Outsource Competency Centre Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Portfolio Managers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Property Development Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Secretarial Services Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Stockbrokers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Technology Finance Solutions Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Holdings62.32%
Proprietary Limited
Absa Trading and Investment Solutions Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Trust (Natal) Limited62.32%
Absa Trust Limited62.32%I, J
Absa Vehicle Management Proprietary Limited62.32%
Absa Vehicle Management Solutions Proprietary Limited62.32%
ABSAN Proprietary Limited62.32%
Account on Us Proprietary Limited31.16%
ACMB Specialised Finance Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
(In Liquidation)
ACS Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
African Spirit Trading 309 Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
AIMS Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited62.32%
Alberton Industrial Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allied Development Company Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allied Grinaker Properties Proprietary Limited31.78%
Allpay Consolidated Investment Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allpay Eastern Cape Proprietary Limited – (In Liquidation)41.13%
Allpay Free State Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)37.39%
Allpay Gauteng Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)37.39%
Allpay Limpopo Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Mpumalanga Proprietary Limited62.32%
Allpay Northern Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Northwest Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Payment Solutions Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Allpay Western Cape Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)41.13%
Bankorptrust Limited62.32%
Barclays Africa Group Limited62.32%
Barclays Africa Regional Office Proprietary Limited62.32%
Barrie Island Property Investments Proprietary Limited62.32%
Blue Age Properties 60 Proprietary Limited62.32%
Campus on Rigel Proprietary Limited20.77%Z
Cedar Lakes Country Estates Proprietary Limited62.32%
Combined Mortgage Nominees Proprietary Limited62.32%
Compro Holdings Proprietary Limited62.32%
Culemborg Investment Properties Proprietary Limited35.67%J, K
Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
Diluculo Investments Proprietary Limited62.32%
Diluculo Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Diluculo Property Trading Proprietary Limited62.32%
Draaikloof Properties Proprietary Limited49.86%
FFS Finance South Africa (RF) Proprietary Limited31.16%
Fradey Nominees (RF) Proprietary Limited62.32%
Goldreef Village Share Block Limited61.88%
Guaret Investments No 1 Proprietary Limited62.32%H, I
Integrated Processing Solutions Proprietary Limited31.16%
iSentials Proprietary Limited31.16%
Kangrove Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Kempwest Proprietary Limited31.16%
Lekkerleef Eiendoms Beperk62.32%
Lodel Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
MAN Financial Services (SA) (RF) Proprietary Limited31.16%
Marmanet Retirement Village Proprietary Limited62.32%
MB Acquired Operations Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Meeg Asset Finance Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Merfin Proprietary Limited62.32%
Nation-Wide Recovery Services Proprietary Limited31.16%
NewFunds (RF) Proprietary Limited62.32%
Newgold Issuer (RF) Limited62.32%
Newgold Managers Proprietary Limited30.54%
Ngwenya River Estate Proprietary Limited62.32%
Nkwe Rosslyn Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Northern Lights Trading 197 Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
Olieven Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
Ottawa Development Trust Proprietary Limited62.32%
Pacific Heights Investments 196 Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
Palmietfontein Investments Proprietary Limited62.32%
Pienaarsrivier Properties Proprietary Limited62.32%
RainFin (RF) Proprietary Limited30.54%Z
Roodekop Townships Proprietary Limited62.32%
Somerset West Autopark Proprietary Limited20.77%Z
T E AND M J Proprietary Limited (In Liquidation)62.32%
Tembisa Mall Proprietary Limited31.16%Z
The Ballito Junction Development Proprietary Limited62.32%F, I
(in Liquidation)
Thebes Landgoed Eiendoms Beperk62.32%
UBS Trust Limited62.32%
United Development Corporation Proprietary Limited62.32%
United Towers Proprietary Limited62.32%
Up-Front Investments 132 Proprietary Limited31.16%
Volkskas Eiendomsdienste Eiendoms Beperk62.32%I, J
Volkskastrust Beperk62.32%I, J
Woodbook Finance Proprietary Limited62.32%

Woolworths Financial Services Proprietary Limited

31.16%

Sweden

EnterCard Holding AB40.00%K, Z
EnterCard Sverige AB40.00%Z

Tanzania, United Republic of

Barclays Bank Tanzania Limited62.32%
First Assurance Company Limited (Tanzania)34.43%
National Bank of Commerce Limited41.06%

Turkey

CRKK RESORT OTEL ISLETMECILGI LIMITED SIRKETI54.40%Z

United States

Blue River Land Company, LLC39.55%C, Z
Canyon Ranch Enterprises, LLC54.40%C, Z
Central Platte Valley Management, LLC51.78%C, Z
Continental Intermodal Group GP LLC50.00%C, Z
Continental Intermodal Group LP37.29%B, Z
CR Bodrum Management, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Employment, Inc.54.40%Z
CR Las Vegas, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Lenox Residences, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR License, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Management, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Miami Employment, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Miami, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Operating, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Orlando, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Products, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR Resorts, LLC54.40%C, Z

304  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


46 Related undertakingscontinued

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
CR SpaClub at Sea, LLC54.40%C, Z
CR SPE1, LLC54.40%C, Z
CRE Diversified Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent CR Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Greenway Plaza SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Land Holding SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Fresh Series B Hold Co.80.00%Z
Crescent McKinney Olive Holdings GP LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Hotel Owner, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential LP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Restaurant GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Property Services LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities Limited Partnership80.00%B, Z
Crescent Real Estate Equities, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Real Estate Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Resort Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent TRS Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent-Fearing, L.P.40.00%B, Z
CREW Tahoe Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
CREW Tahoe LLC60.80%C, Z
Cupric Canyon Capital LLC26.04%C, Z
DBL Texas Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Properties Limited Partnership74.40%B, Z
DG Solar Lessee II, LLC50.00%C, Z
DG Solar Lessee, LLC50.00%C, Z
East West Resort Development IV, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11%B, Z
East West Resort Development V, L.P., L.L.L.P.74.75%B, Z
East West Resort Development VI, L.P., L.L.L.P.35.86%B, Z
East West Resort Development VII LLC80.00%C, Z
East West Resort Development VIII, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11%B, Z
East West Resort Development XIV, L.P., L.L.L.P.33.52%B, Z
EW Deer Valley, LLC29.28%C, Z
EWRD Perry Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.67.61%B, Z
EWRD Perry-Riverbend, LLC54.31%C, Z
EWRD Summit Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.79.57%B, Z
EWRD Summit, LLC79.10%C, Z
Gray’s Station, LLC56.96%C, Z
Home Run Tahoe, LLC60.82%C, Z
Mira Vista Development LLC78.40%C, Z
Mira Vista Golf Club, L.C.76.83%Z
Moon Acquisition Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Moon Acquisition LLC80.00%C, Z
Mountainside Partners LLC80.00%C, Z
MV Penthouses, LLC51.20%C, Z
MVWP Development LLC30.40%C, Z
MVWP Investors LLC60.80%C, Z
Northstar Mountain Properties, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Trailside Townhomes, LLC60.82%C, Z
Northstar Village Townhomes, LLC56.93%C, Z
Old Greenwood Realty, Inc.60.80%Z
Old Greenwood, LLC60.80%C, Z
Overlook at Sugarloaf Inc62.32%
Parkside Townhomes, LLC47.63%C, Z
Sonoma Golf Club, LLC64.00%C, Z
Sonoma Golf, LLC64.00%C, Z
Sonoma National, LLC80.00%C, Z
Spa Project Advisors, LLC54.40%C, Z
St. Charles Place, LLC47.63%C, Z
Stellar Residences, LLC60.82%C, Z
Stellar Townhomes, LLC60.82%C, Z
Tahoe Club Company, LLC60.80%C, Z
Tahoe Club Employee Company60.80%Z
Tahoe Mountain Resorts, LLC60.82%C, Z
The Glades Tahoe, LLC60.82%C, Z
The Park at One Riverfront, LLC47.63%C, Z
Truckee Land, LLC74.75%C, Z
Tucson/Lenox Special Manager, Inc.54.40%Z
Tucson/Lenox, LLC54.40%C, Z

Other related undertakingsPercentage    Note    
Union Center LLC51.78%C, Z
Vendue/Prioleau Associates LLC49.60%C, Z
Village Walk, LLC46.08%C, Z
VS BC Solar Lessee I LLC50.00%C, Z
Water House on Main Street LLC35.26%C, Z

Zambia

Barclays Life Zambia Limited62.32%

Zimbabwe

Barclays Bank of Zimbabwe Limited67.68%
Barclays Merchant Bank of Zimbabwe Limited (In Liquidation)67.68%
Barclays Zimbabwe Nominees (Pvt) Limited67.68%
BRAINS Computer Processing (Pvt) Limited (In Liquidation)67.68%F, I
Fincor Finance Corporation Limited67.68%

Subsidiaries by virtue of control

The related undertakings below are subsidiaries in accordance with s.1162 Companies Act 2006 as Barclays can exercise dominant influence or control over them. The entities are all owned by the Barclays Bank UK Retirement Fund.

Subsidiaries by virtue of controlPercentage    Note    

United Kingdom

Oak Pension Asset Management Limited0.00%Z
Water Street Investments Limited0.00%Z

Cayman Islands

Hornbeam Limited0.00%Z

Joint Ventures

The related undertakings below are Joint Ventures in accordance with s. 18, Schedule 4, The Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and are proportionally consolidated.

Joint VenturesPercentage    Joint management factors

United Kingdom

Vaultex UK Limited

21 Garlick Hill, London EC4V 2AU

50.00%The Joint Venture Board comprises two Barclays representative directors, two JV partner directors and three non-JV partner directors. The Board are responsible for setting the company strategy and budgets.

Notes

ADirectly held by Barclays PLC
BPartnership Interest
CMembership Interest
DTrust Interest
EGuarantor
FPreference Shares
GA Preference Shares
HB Preference Shares
IOrdinary/Common Shares in addition to other shares
JA Ordinary Shares
KB Ordinary Shares
LC Ordinary Shares
MF Ordinary Shares
NO Ordinary Shares
OW Ordinary Shares
PRedeemable Ordinary Shares
QCore Shares and Insurance (Classified) Shares
RB, C, D, E (94.36%), F (94.36%), G (94.36%), H (94.36%), I (94.36%), J (95.23%) and K Class Shares
SA and B Unit Shares
TClass A Residual Shares, Class B Residual Shares
UA Voting Shares and B Non-Voting Shares
VClass A Ordinary Shares, Class A Preference Shares (48.50%), Class B Ordinary Shares, Class C Ordinary Shares, Class C Preference Shares (92.53%), Class D Ordinary Shares, Class D Preference Shares, Class E Ordinary Shares, Class E Preference Shares, Class F Ordinary Shares, Class F Preference Shares, Class H 2012 Ordinary Shares, Class H 2012 Preference Shares, Class H Ordinary Shares, Class H Preference Shares (79.84%), Class I Preference Shares (50.00%), Class J Ordinary Shares, Class J Preference Shares
WClass A1, A2, A3, A4, A6, A8, A9, A10, A11, A12, A13, A14, A15, A16 and Class B
XPEF Carry Shares
YEUR Tracker Shares, GBP Tracker Shares and USD Tracker Shares
ZNot Consolidated (see Note 37 for scope of consolidation)

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  305


Notes to the financial statements

Page left blank for pagination purposes

306  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

    

    

    

 

 

Shareholder information

Additional shareholder information

Articles of Association

Barclays PLC (the “Company”) is a public limited company registered in England and Wales under company number 48839. The Company,Barclays, originally named Barclay & Company Limited, was incorporated in England and Wales on 20 July 1896 under the Companies Acts 1862 to 1890 as a company limited by shares. The company name was changed to Barclays Bank Limited on 17 February 1917 and it was registered on 15 February 1982 as a public limited company under the Companies Acts 1948 to 1980. On 1 January 1985, the Companycompany changed its name to Barclays PLC.

Under the Companies Act 2006 a company’s Memorandum of Association now need only contain the names of the subscribers and the number of shares each subscriber has agreed to take. For companies in existence as of 1 October 2009, all other provisions which were contained in the company’s Memorandum of Association, including the company’s objects, are now deemed to be contained in the company’s articles. The Companies Act 2006 also states that a company’s objects are unrestricted unless the company’s articles provide otherwise.

The Articles of Association were adopted at the Company’s Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) on 30 April 2010 and amended at the AGM by special resolution of the Company on 25 April 2013.

The following is a summary and explanation of the current Articles of Association, which are available for inspection.

Directors

(i) The minimum number of Directors (excluding alternate Directors) is five. There is no maximum limit. There is no age limit for Directors.

(ii) Excluding executive remuneration and any other entitlement to remuneration for extra services (including service on board committees) under the Articles, a Director is entitled to a fee at a rate determined by the Board but the aggregate fees paid to all Directors shall not exceed £2,000,000 per annum or such higher amount as may be approved by an ordinary resolution of the Company. Each Director is entitled to reimbursement for all

reasonable travelling, hotel and other expenses properly incurred by him/her in or about the performance of his/her duties.

(iii) No Director may act (either himself/herself or through his/her firm) as an auditor of the Company. A Director may hold any other office of the Company on such terms as the Board shall determine.

(iv) At each AGM of the Company, one third of the Directors (rounded down) are required under the Articles of Association to retire from office by rotation and may offer themselves forre-election. The Directors so retiring are first, those who wish to retire and not offer themselves forre-election, and, second those who have been longest in office (and in the case of equality of service length are selected by lot). Other than a retiring Director, no person shall (unless recommended by the Board) be eligible for election unless a member notifies the Company Secretary in advance of his/her intention to propose a person for election. It is Barclays’ practice that all Directors offer themselves forre-election annually in accordance with the UK Corporate Governance Code.

(v) The Board has the power to appoint additional Directors or to fill a casual vacancy amongst the Directors. Any Director so appointed holds office until the next AGM, when he/she may offer himself/herself for reappointment. He/she is not taken into account in determining the number of Directors retiring by rotation.

(vi) The Board may appoint any Director to any executive position or employment in the Company on such terms as they determine.

(vii) The Company may by ordinary resolution remove a Director before the expiry of his/her period of office (without prejudice to a claim for

damages for breach of contract or otherwise) and may by ordinary resolution appoint another person who is willing to act to be a Director in his/her place.

(viii) A Director may appoint either another Director or some other person approved by the Board to act as his/her alternate with power to attend Board meetings and generally to exercise the functions of the appointing Director in his/her absence (other than the power to appoint an alternate).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  307


Additional shareholder information

(ix) The Board may authorise any matter in relation to which a Director has, or can have, a direct interest that conflicts, or possibly may conflict with, the Company’s interests. Only Directors who have no interest in the matter being considered will be able to authorise the relevant matter and they may impose limits or conditions when giving authorisation if they think this is appropriate.

(x) A Director may hold positions with or be interested in other companies and, subject to legislation applicable to the Company and the FCA’s requirements, may contract with the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested. A Director may not vote or count towards the quorum on any resolution concerning any proposal in which he/she (or any person connected with him/her) has a material interest (other than by virtue of his/her interest in securities of the Company) or if he/she has a duty which conflicts or may conflict with the interests of the Company, unless the resolution relates to any proposal:

(a) to indemnify a Director or provide him/her with a guarantee or security in respect of money lent by him/her to, or any obligation incurred by him/her or any other person for the benefit of (or at the request of), the Company (or any other member of the Group);

(b) to indemnify or give security or a guarantee to a third party in respect of a debt or obligation of the Company (or any other member of the Group) for which the Director has personally assumed responsibility;

(c) to obtain insurance for the benefit of Directors;

(d) involving the acquisition by a Director of any securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group) pursuant to an offer to existing holders of securities or to the public;

(e) that the Director underwrite any issue of securities of the Company (or any other member of the Group);

(f) concerning any other company in which the Director is interested as an officer or creditor or Shareholder but, broadly, only if he/she (together with his/her connected persons) is directly or indirectly interested in less than 1% of either any

class of the issued equity share capital or of the voting rights of that company; and

(g) concerning any other arrangement for the benefit of employees of the Company (or any other member of the Group) under which the Director benefits or stands to benefit in a similar manner to the employees concerned and which does not give the Director any advantage which the employees to whom the arrangement relates would not receive.

(xi) A Director may not vote or be counted in the quorum on any resolution which concerns his/her own employment or appointment to any office of the Company or any other company in which the Company is interested.

(xii) Subject to applicable legislation, the provisions described insub-paragraphs (x) and (xi) may be relaxed or suspended by an ordinary resolution of the members of the Company or any applicable governmental or other regulatory body.

(xiii) A Director is required to hold an interest in ordinary shares having a nominal value of at least £500, which currently equates to 2,000 Ordinary Shares unless restricted from acquiring or holding such interest by any applicable law or regulation or any applicable governmental or other regulatory body. A Director may act before acquiring those shares but must acquire the qualification shares within two months from his/her appointment. Where a Director is unable to

272    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

acquire the requisite number of shares within that time owing to law, regulation or requirement of any governmental or other relevant authority, he/she must acquire the shares as soon as reasonably practicable once the restriction(s) end.

(xiv) The Board may exercise all of the powers of the Company to borrow money, to mortgage or charge its undertaking, property and uncalled capital and to issue debentures and other securities.

Classes of Shares

The Company only has Ordinary Shares in issue. The Articles of Association also provide for pound sterling preference shares of £100 each, US dollar preference shares of US$100 each, US dollar preference shares of $0.25 each, euro preference shares of100 each and yen preference shares of ¥10,000 each (together, the “Preference Shares”). In accordance with the

308  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

authority granted at the AGM on 25 April 2013, Preference Shares may be issued by the Board from time to time in one or more series with such rights and subject to such restrictions and limitations as the Board may determine. No Preference Shares have been issued to date.

Dividends

Subject to the provisions of the Articles and applicable legislation, the Company in general meeting may declare dividends on the Ordinary Shares by ordinary resolution, but any such dividend may not exceed the amount recommended by the Board. The Board may also pay interim or final dividends if it appears they are justified by the Company’s financial position.

Each Preference Share confers the right to a preferential dividend (“Preference Dividend”) payable in such currency at such rates (whether fixed or calculated by reference to or in accordance with a specified procedure or mechanism), on such dates and on such other terms as may be determined by the Board prior to allotment thereof.

The Preference Shares rank in regard to payment of dividends in priority to the holders of Ordinary Shares and any other class of shares in the Company ranking junior to the Preference Shares.

Dividends may be paid on the Preference Shares if, in the opinion of the Board, the Company has sufficient distributable profits, after payment in full or the setting aside of a sum to provide for all dividends payable on (or in the case of shares carrying a cumulative right to dividends, before) the relevant dividend payment date on any class of shares in the Company ranking pari passu with or in priority to the relevant series of Preference Shares as regards participation in the profits of the Company.

If the Board considers that the distributable profits of the Company available for distribution are insufficient to cover the payment in full of Preference Dividends, Preference Dividends shall be paid to the extent of the distributable profits on a pro rata basis.

Notwithstanding the above, the Board may, at its absolute discretion, determine that any Preference Dividend which would

otherwise be payable may either not be payable at all or only payable in part.

If any Preference Dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid, or is only paid in part, for the reasons described above, holders of Preference Shares will not have a claim in respect of suchnon-payment.

If any dividend on a series of Preference Shares is not paid in full on the relevant dividend payment date, a dividend restriction shall apply. The dividend restriction means that, subject to certain exceptions, neither the Company nor Barclays Bank may (a) pay a dividend on, or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire, any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference shares or other share capital ranking equal or junior to the relevant series of Preference Shares until the earlier of such time as the Company next pays in full a dividend on the relevant series of Preference Shares or the date on which all of the relevant series of Preference Shares are redeemed.

All unclaimed dividends payable in respect of any share may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Board for the benefit of the Company until claimed. If a dividend is not claimed after 12 years of it becoming payable, it is forfeited and reverts to the Company.

The Board may, with the approval of an ordinary resolution of the Company, offer Shareholders the right to choose to receive an allotment of additional fully paid Ordinary Shares instead of cash in respect of all or part of any dividend. The Company currently provides a scrip dividend programme pursuant to an authority granted at the AGM held on 25 April 2013.

Redemption and Purchase

Subject to applicable legislation and the rights of the other shareholders, any share may be issued on terms that it is, at the option of the Company or the holder of such share, redeemable. The Directors are authorised to determine the terms, conditions and manner of redemption of any such shares under the Articles of Association.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  309


Additional shareholder information

Calls on capital

The Directors may make calls upon the members in respect of any monies unpaid on their shares. A person upon whom a call is made remains liable even if the shares in respect of which the call is made have been transferred. Interest will be chargeable on any unpaid amount called at a rate determined by the Board (of not more than 20% per annum).

If a member fails to pay any call in full (following notice from the Board that such failure will result in forfeiture of the relevant shares), such shares (including any dividends declared but not paid) may be forfeited by a resolution of the Board, and will become the property of the Company. Forfeiture shall not absolve a previous member for amounts payable by him/her (which may continue to accrue interest).

The Company also has a lien over all partly paid shares of the Company for all monies payable or called on that share and over the debts and liabilities of a member to the Company. If any monies which are the subject of the lien remain unpaid after a notice from the Board demanding payment, the Company may sell such shares.

Annual and other general meetings

The Company is required to hold an AGM in addition to such other general meetings as the Directors think fit. The type of the meeting will be specified in the notice calling it. Under the Companies Act 2006, the AGM must be held within six months of the financial year end. A general meeting may be convened by the Board on requisition in accordance with the applicable legislation.

In the case of an AGM, a minimum of 21 clear days’ notice is required. The notice must be in writing and must specify the place, the day and the hour of the meeting, and the general nature of the business to be transacted. A notice convening a meeting to pass a special resolution shall specify the intention to propose the resolution as such. The accidental failure to give notice of a general meeting or thenon-receipt of such notice will not invalidate the proceedings at such meeting.

Subject as noted above, all Shareholders are entitled to attend and vote at general meetings. The Articles do, however, provide that arrangements may be made for simultaneous attendance at a satellite meeting place or, if the meeting place is inadequate to accommodate all members and proxies entitled to attend,

another meeting place may be arranged to accommodate such persons other than that specified in the notice of meeting, in which case Shareholders may be excluded from the principal place.

Holders of Preference Shares have no right to receive notice of, attend or vote at, any general meetings of the Company as a result of holding Preference Shares.

Notices

A document or information may be sent by the Company in hard copy form, electronic form, by being made available on a website, or by another means agreed with the recipient, in accordance with the provisions set out in the Companies Act 2006. Accordingly, a document or information may only be sent in electronic form to a person who has agreed to receive it in that form or, in the case of a company, who has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable legislation. A document or information may only be sent by being made available on a website if the recipient has agreed to receive it in that form or has been deemed to have so agreed pursuant to applicable legislation, and has not revoked that agreement.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    273


Additional shareholder information

In respect of joint holdings, documents or information shall be sent to the joint holder whose name stands first in the register.

A member who (having no registered address within the UK) has not supplied an address in the UK at which documents or information may be sent in hard copy form, or an address to which notices, documents or information may be sent or supplied by electronic means, is not entitled to have documents or information sent to him/her.

In addition, the Company may cease to send notices to any member who has been sent documents on two consecutive occasions over a period of at least 12 months and when each of those documents is returned undelivered or notification is received that they have not been delivered.

Capitalisation of profits

The Company may, by ordinary resolution, upon the recommendation of the Board capitalise all or any part of an amount standing to the credit of a reserve or fund to be set free for distribution provided that amounts from the share premium account, capital redemption reserve or any profits not

310  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

available for distribution should be applied only in paying up unissued shares to be allotted to members credited as fully paid and no unrealised profits shall be applied in paying up debentures of the Company or any amount unpaid on any share in the capital of the Company.

Indemnity

Subject to applicable legislation, every current and former Director or other officer of the Company (other than any person engaged by the company as auditor) shall be indemnified by the Company against any liability in relation to the Company, other than (broadly) any liability to the Company or a member of the Group, or any criminal or regulatory fine.

fine

    Officers of the Group Date of appointmentAppointment as Officer

Lawrence DickinsonAshok Vaswani

  

Company SecretaryChief Executive Officer, Barclays UK

 

20022012 

Robert Le Blanc

  

Chief Risk Officer

 

2004

Maria RamosBob Hoyt

  

Chief Executive, Barclays Africa Group

2009

Ashok Vaswani

Chief Executive, Personal and Corporate Banking

2012

Bob Hoyt

Group General Counsel

 

2013

Thomas King

  

Chief Executive, Investment Bank

 

2013

Tushar Morzaria

  

Group Finance Director

 

2013

Michael Roemer

  

Group Head of Compliance

 

2014

Michael HarteJames E Staley

  

Group Chief Operations and TechnologyExecutive Officer

 

20142015 

Jonathan Moulds

  

Tristram RobertsGroup Human Resources Director2015 
Paul ComptonGroup Chief Operating Officer2016 
C S Venkatakrishnan  Chief Risk Officer2016 
Tim Throsby

President, Barclays International

 

Chief Executive Officer, Corporate and Investment Bank

 

20152017 

James E Staley

  

Group Chief Executive Officer

 

2015

Tristram RobertsStephen Shapiro

  

Group Human Resources DirectorCompany Secretary

 

20152017 

Amer Sajed

  

Interim Chief Executive, Barclaycard

 

2015Laura Padovani

Interim Group Chief Compliance Officer2017 
 

 

274    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  311


Additional shareholder information

    

    

    

 

 

 

Dividends on the ordinary shares of Barclays PLC

Barclays PLC has paid dividends on its ordinary shares every year since its incorporation in 1896.

Since December 2009 Barclays has declared and paid dividends on a quarterly basis. A final dividend for the full year ended 31 December 20142016 of 3.5p2.0p was paid inon 5 April 2015 and there were three equal payments in June, September and December 20152017. In respect of 1p per ordinary share. A final dividend for the full year ended 31 December 20152017, one interim dividend of 3.5p will be1p was paid on 18 September 2017 and a final dividend of 2p was announced on 1 March 201622 February 2018 for payment on 5 April 2016.2018.

The dividends declared for each of the last five years were:

 

                                                                      

Pence per 25p ordinary share

Pence per 25p ordinary share

  

Pence per 25p ordinary share

 

   

 

2015

 

  

 

   

 

2014

 

  

 

   

 

2013

 

  

 

   

 

2012

 

  

 

   

 

2011

 

  

 

  2017   2016  2015  2014  2013

Interim

   3.00     3.00     3.00     3.00     3.00    1.00   1.00  3.00  3.00  3.00

Final

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.50

 

  

 

   

 

3.00

 

  

 

  2.00   2.00   3.50  3.50  3.50

Total

   

 

6.50

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.50

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.50

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.50

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

6.00

 

 

  

 

 3.00  3.00  6.50 6.50 6.50 
                  

US Dollars per 25p ordinary share

US Dollars per 25p ordinary share

  

US Dollars per 25p ordinary share

 

   

 

2015

 

  

 

   

 

2014

 

  

 

   

 

2013

 

  

 

   

 

2012

 

  

 

   

 

2011

 

  

 

Interim

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

Final

   

 

0.05

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.05

 

 

  

 

Total

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.10

 

 

  

 

The gross dividends applicable to an American Depositary Share (ADS) representing four ordinary shares, before deduction of withholding tax, are as follows:

   

US Dollars per American Depositary Share

  

  2017   2016  2015  2014   2013
   

 

2015

 

  

 

   

 

2014

 

  

 

   

 

2013

 

  

 

   

 

2012

 

  

 

   

 

2011

 

  

 

Interim

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.18

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

  

 

  0.01   0.01   0.05  0.05  0.05

Final

  

 

 

 

 

0.20

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.22

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.23

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.22

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

0.19

 

 

  

 

  0.02   0.02   0.05  0.05  0.05

Total

  

 

 

 

 

0.38

 

 

  

 

   

 

0.40

 

  

 

   

 

0.41

 

  

 

   

 

0.41

 

  

 

   

 

0.38

 

  

 

 0.03  0.03  0.10 0.10 0.10

The gross dividends applicable to an American Depositary Share (ADS) representing four ordinary shares, before deduction of withholding tax, are as follows:

                                                                      

 

US Dollars per American Depositary Share

 

   2017   2016  2015   2014  2013

Interim   

  0.05   0.05   0.18  0.18   0.18

Final

  0.10   0.10   0.20   0.22  0.23

Total

  0.15   0.15   0.38   0.40  0.41

The final dividends shown above are expressed in Dollars translated at the closing spot rate for Pounds Sterling as determined by Bloomberg at 5pm in New York City (the ‘Closing Spot Rate’) on the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report. No representation is made that Pounds Sterling amounts

have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into Dollars at these rates.

Trading market for ordinary shares of Barclays PLC

The principal trading market for Barclays PLC ordinary shares is the London Stock Exchange. At the close of business on 31 December 2015, 16,804,603,9492017, 17,060,397,944 ordinary shares were in issue.

Ordinary share listings were also obtained on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) with effect from 9 September 1986. Trading on the NYSE is in the form of ADSs under the symbol ‘BCS’. Each ADS represents four ordinary shares and is evidenced by an American Depositary Receipt (ADR). The ADR depositary is J PJP Morgan Chase Bank, N.A. Details of trading activity are published in the stock tables of leading daily newspapers in the US.

There were 523492 ADR holders and 1,6751,654 recorded holders of ordinary shares with US addresses at 31 December 2015,2017, whose shareholdings represented approximately 0.02%4.59% of total outstanding ordinary shares on that date. Since a certain number of the ordinary shares and ADRs were held by brokers or other nominees, the number of recorded holders in the US may not be representative of the number of beneficial holders or of their country of residence.

The following table shows the high and low sales price for the ordinary shares during the periods indicated, based onmid-market prices at close of business on the London Stock Exchange and the high and low sale price for ADSs as reported on the NYSE composite tape.

 

Sale prices for ordinary shares

  

   25p ordinary shares     

 

 

American

 

Depositary Shares

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

High

 

  

  

 

 

 

Low

 

  

  

 

 

 

High

 

  

  

 

 

 

Low

 

  

   

 

 

 

p

 

  

  

 

 

 

p

 

  

  

 

 

 

US$

 

  

  

 

 

 

US$

 

  

2016

 

 

        

By month:

 

        

February

 

   

 

182.8

 

  

 

   

 

147.9

 

  

 

   

 

10.66

 

  

 

   

 

8.63

 

  

 

January

 

  

 

 

 

 

218.9

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

178.4

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

12.96

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

10.37

 

 

  

 

312  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

                                                                                

Sale prices for ordinary shares

Sale prices for ordinary shares

 
  25p ordinary shares   American Depositary
Shares
 
  High   Low   High   Low 
  p   p   US$   US$ 

2018

        

By month:

        

February1

   201.00    189.06    11.36    10.52 

January

   210.30    194.50    11.91    10.68 

1As at 19 February 2018

1As at 19 February 2018

 

      

2017

        

By month:

        
        

August

   210.35    190.35    10.96    9.83 

September

   193.35    184.00    10.36    9.62 

October

   198.00    182.40    10.44    9.45 

November

   194.25    178.90    10.35    9.36 

December

   204.55    189.40    10.93    10.14 
        

By Quarter:

        

First quarter

   239.25    219.45    11.89    11.02 

Second quarter

   224.65    196.00    11.51    9.92 

Third quarter

   211.30    184.00    11.04    9.62 

Fourth quarter

   204.55    178.90    10.93    9.36 

2016

        

First quarter

   215.25    147.85    12.85    8.62 

Second quarter

   186.95    127.20    11.18    7.03 

Third quarter

   174.75    131.65    9.31    7.06 

Fourth quarter

   239.00    166.50    11.99    8.16 
        
        

2015

           288.95    209.10    17.98    12.80 

By month:

        
August   288.95     244.7     17.98     15.29  
September   262.5     239     16.28     14.58  
October   257     232     15.81     14.23  
November   236.05     220.05     14.61     13.27  
December   234.75     209.1     14.09     12.8  
By Quarter:        
First quarter   266     223.55     16.31     13.63  
Second quarter   274.45     248.9     17.15     14.94  
Third quarter   288.95     239     17.98     14.58  
Fourth quarter   257     209.1     15.81     12.8  
2014           296.50    207.90    19.58    13.50 
First quarter   296.5     230.95     19.58     15.41  
Second quarter   262.45     212.8     17.73     14.55  
Third quarter   234.55     207.9     15.53     14.26  
Fourth quarter   249.45     207.9     15.54     13.50  
2013   308.39     242.39     18.93     15.69     308.39    242.39    18.93    15.69 
2012   288.00     148.20     17.47     9.31     288.00    148.20    17.47    9.31 
2011   333.55     138.85     21.64     8.55     333.55    138.85    21.64    8.55 
2010   383.20     255.40     24.10     15.40     383.20    255.40    24.10    15.40 
2009   383.60     51.20     25.40     3.10  
2008   506.40     127.70     41.40     7.40  

This section incorporates information on the prices at which securities of Barclays PLC have traded. It is emphasised that past performance cannot be relied upon as a guide to future performance.

Shareholdings at 31

December 2015a

 Number of
shareholders
 Percentage
of holders
 Shares held Percentage
of

capital

Classification of shareholders    
Personal Holders 279,092 95.97% 470,007,048 2.80%
Banks and Nominees 3,129 1.08% 14,859,691,756 88.43%
Other Companies 8,578 2.95% 1,474,893,844 8.78%
Insurance Companies 2 0.00% 523 0.00%
Pension Funds 8 0.00% 10,778 0.00%
Total 290,809 100.00% 16,804,603,949 100.00%
Shareholding range
1 - 100 19,421 6.68% 711,520 0.00%
101 - 250 59,269 20.38% 12,073,995 0.07%
251 - 500 79,537 27.35% 27,783,774 0.17%
501 - 1,000 46,810 16.10% 33,197,807 0.20%
1,001 - 5,000 61,333 21.09% 135,514,901 0.81%
5,001 - 10,000 12,899 4.44% 90,575,688 0.54%
10,001 - 25,000 7,758 2.67% 117,540,890 0.70%
25,001 - 50,000 1,799 0.62% 61,645,616 0.37%
50,001 and over 1,983 0.68% 16,325,559,758 97.15%
Totals 290,809 100.00% 16,804,603,949 100.00%
United States Holdings 1,675 0.58% 4,150,392 0.02%

Note

 

aThese figures do not include
Barclays Sharestore members.PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    275


Additional shareholder information

Shareholdings at 31
December 2017a
 Number of
shareholders
 Percentage
of holders
 Shares held Percentage
of capital
 

Classification of shareholders

 

Personal Holders

 253,150 97.25% 434,310,677  2.55% 

Banks and Nominees

 2,657 1.02% 14,878,937,903  87.21% 

Other Companies

 4,488 1.72% 1,747,142,728  10.24% 

Insurance Companies

 1 0.00% 208  0.00% 

Pension Funds

 5 0.00% 6,428  0.00% 

Total

 260,301 100.00% 17,060,397,944  100.00% 

Shareholding range

 

1 - 100

 17,465 6.71% 649,598  0.00% 

101 - 250

 53,954 20.72% 10,973,320  0.06% 

251 - 500

 71,706 27.55% 25,016,335  0.15% 

501 - 1,000

 41,885 16.09% 29,607,409  0.17% 

1,001 - 5,000

 53,457 20.54% 118,080,074  0.70% 

5,001 - 10,000

 11,526 4.43% 80,923,119  0.47% 

10,001 - 25,000

 6,894 2.65% 104,303,115  0.62% 

25,001 - 50,000

 1,613 0.62% 54,990,046  0.32% 

50,001 and over

 1,801 0.69% 16,635,854,928  97.51% 

Totals

 260,301 100.00% 17,060,397,944  100.00% 

United States Holdings

 1,654 0.64% 17,462,910  0.10% 

Note

a. These figures do not include Barclays Sharestore members.

Currency of presentation

In this report, unless otherwise specified, all amounts are expressed in Pound Sterling. For the months of September 20132017 through to February 2014,2018, the highest and lowest closing spot rates as determined by Bloomberg at 5:00 p.m (New York time) (the ‘Closing Spot Rate’), expressed in USD per GBP were:

 

  

 

 

 

(US Dollars per Pound Sterling)

 

 

 (US Dollars per Pound Sterling)
  February   January   December   November   October   September 
 February January December November October September
  2018   2017 
 2016 2015
High 1.46 1.47 1.52 1.54 1.55 1.56  1.43   1.42   1.35   1.35   1.33   1.36 

Low

 

1.39

 

 

1.42

 

 

1.47

 

 

1.50

 

 

1.51

 

 

1.51

 

  1.38   1.35   1.33   1.31   1.31   1.29 

 

  
   (US Dollars per Pound Sterling)  
    2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
Average   1.53     1.65     1.56     1.59     1.61  
                                                                      
   

 

 

 

(US Dollars per Pound Sterling)

 

 

    2017    2016    2015    2014    2013 
Average   1.29       1.56       1.53       1.65       1.56    

On 2919 February 2016,2018, the Closing Spot Rate in Pound Sterling was $1.39.$1.40.

No representation is made that Pounds Sterling amounts have been, or could have been, or could be, converted into USD at any of the above rates. For the purpose of presenting financial information in this report, exchange rates other than those shown above may have been used.

 

276    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  313


Additional shareholder information

    

    

    

 

Taxation of UK holders

The following is a summary of certain UK tax issues which are likely to be material to the holding and disposal of Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC, Preference Shares of Barclays Bank PLC (the ‘Bank’), or ADSs representing such Ordinary Shares or Preference Shares (together the ‘Shares’).

It is based on current law and the practice of Her Majesty’s Revenue and Customs (‘HMRC’), which may be subject to change, possibly with retrospective effect. It is a general guide for information purposes and should be treated with appropriate caution. It is not intended as tax advice and it does not purport to describe all of the tax considerations that may be relevant to a prospective purchaser, holder or disposer of Shares. In particular, save where expressly stated to the contrary, this summary deals with shareholders who are resident and, in the case of individuals, domiciled in (and only in) the UK for UK tax purposes, who hold their Shares as investments (other than under an individual savings account) and who are the absolute beneficial owners of their Shares and any dividends paid on them.

The statements are not addressed to: (i) shareholders who own (or are deemed to own) 10 per cent. or more of the voting power of Barclays PLC or the Bank; (ii) shareholders who hold Shares as part of hedging transactions; (iii) investors who have (or are deemed to have) acquired their Shares by virtue of an office or employment; and (iv) shareholders who hold Shares in connection with a trade, profession or vocation carried on in the UK (whether through a branch or agency or, in the case of a corporate shareholder, through a permanent establishment, or otherwise). It does not discuss the tax treatment of classes of shareholder subject to special rules, such as dealers in securities.

Persons who are in any doubt as to their tax position should consult their professional advisers. Persons who may be liable to taxation in jurisdictions other than the United KingdomUK in respect of their acquisition, holding or disposal of Shares are particularly advised to consult their professional advisers as to whether they are so liable.

(i) Taxation of dividends

In accordance with UK law, Barclays PLC or the Bank (as the case may be) pays dividends on the Shares without any deduction or withholding tax in respect of any taxes imposed by the UK government or any UK taxing authority.

Under current UK law (but subjectDividends paid to the proposed changes in law discussed below),a UK resident individuals receivingindividual shareholder in a dividendtax year (the ‘Total Dividend Income’) will generally form part of that shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes. The Total Dividend Income will be entitled to a tax credit in respectregarded as the top slice of such dividend which maythe shareholder’s total income, and will be used by certain shareholders to set against any liability they may havesubject to UK income tax on that dividend. at the rates discussed below.

The valuerate of UK income tax applicable to the tax credit is currently equal to one-ninth ofTotal Dividend Income will depend on the amount of the cash dividend. The cash dividend received plusTotal Dividend Income and the relatedUK income tax credit (together,band(s) that the ‘gross dividend’) will beTotal Dividend Income falls within when included as part of the shareholder’s total income for UK income tax purposes. It will be regarded as

A nil rate of UK income tax applies to the top slicefirst £5,000 (reducing to £2,000 from 6 April 2018) of Total Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in a tax year (the ‘Nil Rate Amount’).

Where the shareholder’s income, andTotal Dividend Income received by an individual shareholder in a tax year exceeds the Nil Rate Amount, the excess amount (the ‘Remaining Dividend Income’) will be subject to UK income tax at a specialthe following rates:

(a) at the rate (discussed below).of 7.5% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the basic tax band;

(b) at the rate of 32.5% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the higher tax band; and

If(c) at the shareholder is a UK residentrate of 38.1% on any portion of the Remaining Dividend Income that falls within the additional tax band.

In determining the tax band the Remaining Dividend Income falls within, the individual liable toshareholder’s Dividend Income (along with any other dividends received that are included in the shareholder’s total income for UK income tax solely atpurposes) for the basic rate, then that shareholdertax year in question (including the portion comprising the Nil Rate Amount) will be liable to UK income tax of 10%treated as the top slice of the gross dividend. Since the tax credit will fully match this liability, there should be no further tax liability in respect of the dividend received. A UK resident individual shareholder that is a higher or additional rate taxpayer will be liable to UKshareholder’s total income tax on the gross dividend at special marginal rates (currently 32.5% or 37.5% respectively) against which the tax credit may be set. In that case, there will be a further liability to UK income tax for the shareholder as the tax credit will not fully match the tax liability.

On 9 December 2015 the UK Government published draft legislation which proposes to amend the taxation of dividends paid on or after 6 April 2016 to UK resident individuals. If enacted, that legislation will replace the tax credit described above with an annual tax-free dividend allowance of £5,000. It will also amend the rates of UK tax on dividends to 7.5 per cent. for a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax solely at the basic rate, 32.5 per cent. for a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax at the higher rate and 38.1 per cent for a UK resident individual liable to UK income tax at the additional rate.purposes.

314  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

Subject to special rules for small companies, UK resident shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax will be subject to UK corporation tax on the dividends paid on the Shares unless the dividend falls within an exempt class and certain conditions are met.

UK resident shareholders are not entitled to any repayment of the tax credits attaching to the dividends paid on the Shares. A non-UK resident shareholder will not generally be entitled to any payment from HMRC of a tax credit in respect of a UK dividend paid on the Shares. Some non-UK resident shareholders may be able to recover some of the tax credit under an applicable double tax treaty and should consult their own professional advisers as to whether they are so entitled and as to the process for making such a claim.

(ii) Taxation of shares under the Dividend Reinvestment Plan

Where a shareholder elects to purchase shares using their cash dividend as part of the Dividend Reinvestment Plan, such shareholders will generally be liable for UK income tax or corporation tax (as the case may be) on dividends reinvested in the Dividend Reinvestment Plan on the same basis as if they had received the cash and arranged the investment themselves. They should accordingly include the dividend received in their tax return in the normal way.

(iii) Taxation of capital gains

The disposal of Shares may, depending on the shareholder’s circumstances, give rise to a liability to tax on chargeable capital gains.

Where Shares are sold, a liability to tax may result if the proceeds from that sale exceed the sum of the base cost of the Shares sold and any other allowable deductions such as share dealing costs and, in certain circumstances, indexation relief. To arrive at the total base cost of any Barclays PLC shares held, in appropriate cases the amount subscribed for rights taken up in 1985, 1988 and 2013 must be added to the cost of all such shares held. For this purpose, current legislation permits the market valuation at 31 March 1982 to be substituted for the original cost of shares purchased before that date. Shareholders other than those within the charge to UK corporation tax should note that, following the Finance Act 2008, no indexation allowance will be available. Shareholders within the charge to UK corporation tax may be eligible for indexation allowance. However, the Finance (No. 2) Bill 2017-2019 contains provisions that would, if enacted, change the calculation of indexation allowance so that indexation on or after 1 January 2018 ceases to be taken into account.

Chargeable capital gains may also arise from the gifting of Shares to connected parties such as relatives (although not spouses or civil partners) and family trusts.

The calculations required to compute chargeable capital gains may be complex. Shareholders are advised to consult their personal financial adviser if further information regarding a possible tax liability in respect of their holdings of shares is required.

(iv) Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

Dealings in Shares will generally be subject to UK stamp duty or stamp duty reserve tax (although see the comments below as regards ADSs in the section ‘Taxation of US holders – Stamp Duty’(vi) UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax’). The transfer on sale of Ordinary Shares and Preference Shares will generally be liable to stamp duty at 0.5% of the consideration paid for that transfer. An unconditional agreement to transfer Ordinary Shares and Preference Shares, or any interest therein,

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    277


Additional shareholder information

will generally be subject to stamp duty reserve tax at 0.5% of the consideration given. Such liability to stamp duty reserve tax will be cancelled, or a right to a repayment (generally with interest) in respect of the stamp duty reserve tax liability will arise, if the agreement is completed by a duly stamped transfer within six years of the agreement having become unconditional. Both stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax are normally the liability of the transferee.

Paperless transfers of Ordinary Shares and Preference Shares within CREST are liable to stamp duty reserve tax rather than stamp duty.

Stamp duty reserve tax on transactions settled within the CREST system or reported through it for regulatory purposes will be collected by CREST.

Special rules apply to certain categories of person, including intermediaries, market makers, brokers, dealers and persons connected with depositary arrangements and clearance services.

(v) Inheritance tax

An individual may be liable to inheritance tax on the transfer of Shares. Where an individual is so liable, inheritance tax may be charged on the amount by which the value of his or her estate

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  315


Additional shareholder information

is reduced as a result of any transfer by way of gift or other gratuitous transaction made by them or treated as made by them.

Taxation of US holders

The following is a summary of the principal US federal income tax consequences and certain UK tax consequences for US holders (as defined below) of Ordinary Shares of Barclays PLC, Preference Shares of Barclays Bank PLC (the ‘Bank’), or ADSs representing such Ordinary Shares or Preference Shares, who own the shares or ADSs as capital assets for tax purposes. It is not, however, a comprehensive analysis of all the potential US or UK tax consequences for such holders and it does not discuss the tax consequences of members of special classes of holders subject to special rules, including (i) dealers in securities, (ii) traders in securities that elect to use amark-to-market method of accounting for securities holdings,(iii) tax-exempt organizations, organisations, (iv) life insurance companies, (v) holders liable for alternative minimum tax, (vi) holders that actually or constructively own 10 per cent or more of the combined voting power of the voting stock of Barclays PLC or the Bank or of the total value of the stock of Barclays PLC or the Bank, (vii) holders that hold shares or ADSs as part of a straddle or a hedging or conversion transaction, (viii) holders that purchase or sell shares or ADSs as part of a wash sale, (ix) holders whose functional currency is not the US dollar, or (x) holders who are resident, or (in the case of individuals) ordinarily resident, or who are carrying on a trade, in the UK. The summary also does not address any aspect of US federal taxation other than US federal income taxation (such as the estate and gift tax or the Medicare tax on net investment income). Investors are advised to consult their tax advisers regarding the tax implications of their particular holdings, including the consequences under applicable state and local law, and in particular whether they are eligible for the benefits of the Treaty, as defined below.

This section is also based on the Internal Revenue Code of 1986, as amended (the ‘Code’), its legislative history, existing and proposed regulations, published rulings and court decisions, (the ‘Code’), and on the Double Taxation Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force in March 2003 (the ‘Treaty’), and, in respect of UK tax, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention between the UK and the US as entered into force on 11 November 1979 (the ‘Estate and Gift Tax Convention’), the current UK tax law and the practice of HMRC, all of which are subject to change, possibly on a retroactive basis. This section is based in part upon the representations of the ADR Depositary and the assumption that each obligation of the Deposit Agreement and any related agreement will be performed in accordance with its terms.

A US holder“US holder” is a beneficial owner of shares or ADSs that is, for US federal income tax purposes, (i) a citizen or resident of the US, (ii) a US domestic corporation, (iii) an estate whose income is subject to US federal income tax regardless of its source, or (iv) a trust if a US court can exercise primary supervision over the trust’s administration and one or more US persons are authorised to control all substantial decisions of the trust. If a partnership holds the shares or ADSs, the US federal income tax treatment of a partner will generally depend on the status of the partner and the tax treatment of the partnership. A partner in a partnership holding the shares or ADSs should consult its tax adviser with regard to the US federal income tax treatment of an investment in the shares or ADSs.

For the purposes of the Treaty, the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, between the UK and the US, and the Code, the holders of ADRs evidencing ADSs will be treated as owners of the underlying Ordinary Shares or Preference Shares, as the case may be. Generally, exchanges of shares for ADRs and ADRs for shares will not be subject to US federal income tax or to UK capital gains tax.

(i) Taxation of dividends

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, a US holder is subject to US federal income taxation on the gross amount of any dividend paid by Barclays PLC or the Bank, as applicable, out of its current or accumulated earnings and profits (as determined for US federal income tax purposes).

Dividends paid by Barclays PLC or the Bank, as applicable, with respect to the Ordinary Shares, Preference Shares or ADSs will generally be qualified dividend income. Dividends paid to a noncorporate US holder that constitute qualified dividend income will be taxable to the holder at preferential rates, provided that the holder has a holding period of the shares or ADSs of more than 60 days during the121-day period beginning 60 days before theex-dividend date (or, in the case of Preference Shares or ADSs relating thereto, if the dividend is attributable to a period or periods aggregating over 366 days, provided that the holder holds the shares or ADSs for more than 90 days during the181-day period beginning 90 days before theex-dividend date) and meets certain other holding period requirements. A US holder will not be subject to UK withholding tax. Dividends must be included in income when the US holder, in the case of shares, or the Depositary, in the

316  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

case of ADSs, actually or constructively receives the dividend, and will not be eligible for the dividends-received deduction generally allowed to US corporations in respect of dividends received from other US corporations. For foreign tax credit purposes, dividends will generally be income from sources outside the US and will depending on a US holder’s circumstances,generally be either ‘passive’ or ‘general’ income for purposes of computing the foreign tax credit allowable to a US holder.

The amount of the dividend distribution includable in income will be the US Dollar value of the Pound Sterling payments made, determined at the spot Pound Sterling/US Dollar rate on the date the dividend distribution is includable in income, regardless of whether the payment is in fact converted into US Dollars. Generally, any gain or loss resulting from currency exchange fluctuations during the period from the date the dividend payment is includable in income to the date the payment is converted into US Dollars will be treated as ordinary income or loss and, for foreign tax credit limitation purposes, from sources within the US, and will not be eligible for the special tax rates applicable to qualified dividend income.

Distributions in excess of current or accumulated earnings and profits, as determined for US federal income tax purposes, will be treated as a return of capital to the extent of the US holder’s basis in the shares or ADSs and thereafter as capital gain. Because Barclays PLC and the Bank do not currently maintain calculations of earnings and profits for US

278    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional shareholder information

federal income tax purposes, it is expected that distributions with respect to the shares and ADSs will generally be reported to US holders as dividends.

(ii) Taxation of capital gains

Subject to the PFIC rules discussed below, generally, US holders will not be subject to UK tax, but will be subject to US tax on capital gains realised on the sale or other disposition of Ordinary Shares, Preference Shares or ADSs. Generally, a US holder will recognise capital gain or loss for US federal income tax purposes equal to the difference between the US Dollar value of the amount realised and a US holder’s tax basis, determined in US Dollars, in its shares or ADSs. Capital gain of a noncorporate US holder is generally taxed at preferential rates where the holder has a holding period of greater than one year.

The gain or loss will generally be income or loss from sources within the US for foreign tax credit limitation purposes.

(iii) Taxation of premium on redemption or purchase of shares

No refund of tax will be available under the Treaty in respect of any premium paid on a redemption of Preference Shares by the Bank or on a purchase of Ordinary Shares by Barclays PLC. For US tax purposes, redemption premium generally will be treated as an additional amount realised in the calculation of a US holder’s gain or loss.

(iv) Taxation of passive foreign investment companies (PFICs)

Barclays PLC and the Bank believe that their respective shares and ADSs should not be treated as stock of a PFIC for US federal income tax purposes, but this conclusion is a factual determination that is made annually and thus may be subject to change. If Barclays PLC or the Bank were to be treated as a PFIC, then the gain realised on the sale or other disposition of the shares or ADSs would in general not be treated as a capital gain. Instead, unless a US holder elects to be taxed annually on amark-to-market basis with respect to its shares or ADSs, such gain and certain ‘excess distributions’ would be treated as having been realised ratablyrateably over a US holder’s holding period for the shares or ADSs and generally would be taxed at the highest tax rate in effect for each such year to which the gain was allocated, together with an interest charge in respect of the tax attributable to each such year. With certain exceptions, a US holder’s shares or ADSs will be treated as stock in a PFIC if Barclays PLC or the Bank, as applicable, was a PFIC at any time during such holder’s holding period in its shares or ADSs. Dividends that a US holder receives will not be eligible for the special tax rates applicable to qualified dividend income if Barclays PLC or the Bank is treated as a PFIC with respect to such US holder either in the taxable year of the distribution or the preceding taxable year, but instead will be taxable at rates applicable to ordinary income.

(v) Certain Reporting Requirements

US holders should consult their tax advisers regarding any tax reporting or filing requirements that may apply to receiving payments on or with respect to, acquiring, owning, or disposing of the shares or ADSs. Failure to comply with certain reporting obligations could result in the imposition of substantial penalties.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  317


Additional shareholder information

(vi) StampUK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax

No obligation to pay UK stamp duty will arise on the transfer on sale of an ADS, provided that any instrument of transfer is not executed in, and remains at all times outside, the UK. No UK stamp duty reserve tax is payable in respect of an agreement to transfer an ADS. For the UK stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax implications of dealings in shares, see the section ‘Taxation of UK holders – (iv) Stamp duty and stamp duty reserve tax’ above.

(vii) EstateUK estate and gift tax

Under the Estate and Gift Tax Convention, between the UK and thea US a USdomiciled holder generally is not subject to UK inheritance tax.tax in respect of dispositions by that holder or their estate.

FATCA Risk Factor

In certain circumstances, shares or ADSs may be subject to US “passthru” withholding tax starting in 2019. The US has enacted rules, commonly referred to as ‘FATCA’, that generally impose a new reporting and withholding regime with respect to certain US source payments (including dividends and interest), gross proceeds from the disposition of property that can produce US source interest and dividends, and certain payments made by, and financial accounts held with, entities that are classified as financial institutions under FATCA. The US has entered into an intergovernmental agreement regarding the implementation of FATCA with the UK (the “UK IGA”). Under the UK IGA, as currently drafted, it is not expected that either Barclays PLC or the Bank will be required to withhold tax under FATCA on payments made with respect to the shares or ADSs. However, significant aspects of when and how FATCA will apply remain unclear, and no assurance can be given that withholding under FATCA will not become relevant with respect to payments made on or with respect to the shares or ADS in the future. Investors should consult their own tax advisers regarding the potential impact of FATCA.

The Barclays Group has registered with the Internal Revenue Service (‘IRS’) for FATCA. The Global Intermediary Identification Number (GIIN) for the Bank in the United Kingdom is E1QAZN.00001.ME.826 and it is a Reporting Model 1 FFI. The GIINs for other parts of the Barclays Group or Barclays branches outside of the UK may be obtained from your usual Barclays contact on request. The IRS list of registered Foreign Financial Institutions is publicly available at https://apps.irs.gov/app/fatcaFfilist/fatcaFfiList/flu.jsf.

Exchange controls and other limitations affecting security holders

Other than certain economic sanctions which may be in force from time to time, there are currently no UK laws, decrees or regulations which would affect the transfer of capital or remittance of dividends, interest and other payments to holders of Barclays securities who are not residents of the UK. There are also no restrictions under the Articles of Association of either Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC, or (subject to the effect of any such economic sanctions) under current UK laws, which relate only tonon-residents of the UK, and which limit the right of suchnon-residents to hold Barclays securities or, when entitled to vote, to do so.

Documents on display

It is possible to read and copy documents that have been filed by Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC with the US Securities and Exchange Commission at the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s office of Investor Education and Advocacy located at 100 F Street, NE Washington DC 20549. Please call the US Securities and Exchange Commission at1-800-SEC-0330 for further information on the public reference rooms and their copy charges. Filings with the US Securities and Exchange Commission are also available to the public from commercial document retrieval services, and from the website maintained by the US Securities and Exchange Commission at www.sec.gov.

 

 

318  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    279


 


Additional shareholder information

    

    

    

 

 

Fees and Charges Payable by a Holder of ADSs

The ADR depositary collects fees for delivery and surrender of ADSs directly from investors depositing ordinary shares or surrendering ADSs for the purpose of withdrawal or from intermediaries acting for them.

The charges of the ADR depositary payable by investors are as follows:

 

Type of Service      ADR Depositary Actions    Fee

ADR depositary or substituting the underlying shares

  

Issuance of ADSs against the deposit of ordinary shares, including deposits and issuances in respect of:

  

$5.00 or less per 100 ADSs (or portion thereof) evidenced by the new ADSs delivered

–  Share distributions, stock splits, rights issues, mergers

  

–  Exchange of securities or other transactions or event or other distribution affecting the ADSs or deposited securities

 

  

Receiving or distributing cash dividends

  

Distribution of cash dividends

  

$0.04 or less per ADS*

Selling or exercising rights

  

Distribution or sale of securities, the fee being in an amount equal to the fee for the execution and delivery of ADSs which would have been charged as a result of the deposit of such securities

 

  

$5.00 or less per each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof)

Withdrawing an underlying ordinary share

  

Acceptance of ADSs surrendered for withdrawal of deposited ordinary shares

 

  

$5.00 or less for each 100 ADSs (or portion thereof)

General depositary services, particularly those charged on an annual basis

  

Other services performed by the ADR depositary in administering the ADS program

  

No fee currently payable

Expenses of the ADR depositary

  

Expenses incurred on behalf of Holders in connection with:

–  Expenses of the ADR depositary in connection with the conversion of foreign currency into US dollars (which are paid out of such foreign currency)

  

Expenses payable at the sole discretion of the ADR depositary by billing Holders or by deducting charges from one or more cash dividends or other cash distributions

  

- Expenses of the ADR depositary in connection with the conversion of foreign currency into US dollars (which are paid out of such foreign currency)

–  Taxes and other governmental charges

  
  

–  Cable, telex and facsimile transmission/delivery

  

–  Transfer or registration fees, if applicable, for the registration of transfers or underlying ordinary shares

  
  

–  Any other charge payable by ADR depositary or its agents

   

* The fee in relation to the distribution of cash dividends was $0.00396 per ADS in respect of dividends paid in the year ended 31 December 2017

*The fee in relation to the distribution of cash dividends was $0.01 per ADS in respect of dividends paid in the year ended 31 December 2015.

 

280    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  319


Additional shareholder information

    

    

    

 

 

Fees and Payments made by the ADR depositary to Barclays

The ADR depositary has agreed to provide Barclays with an amount based on the cash dividend, feeissuance and cancellations fees charged on each ADS during each contract year running from August 11 of the relevant year to August 10 of the following year (a ‘Contract Year’)twelve-month period for expenses incurred by Barclays in connection with the ADS program (such amount being the ‘Contribution’program. Barclays is entitled to $1,014,629 for the relevant Contract Year). The Contributions are paid to Barclays in two instalments each Contract Year.

The table below sets out the Contribution for the 2014/2015 Contract Year and thus the total amount received in the year ended 31 December 2015:2017, though such amount has not yet been paid to Barclays by the ADR depositary.

Cash Dividend Fee Amount Collected during 2014/2015

Contract Year

Amount provided in Contributions from the ADR depositary

for the year ended 31 December 2015

US$0.01 per ADS

$1,500,000

Total

$1,500,000

Under certain circumstances, includingnon-routine corporate actions, removal of the ADR depositary or termination of the ADS program by Barclays, Barclays may be charged by the ADR depositary certain fees (including in connection with depositary services, certain expenses paid on behalf of Barclays, an administrative fee, fees fornon-routine services and corporate actions and any other reasonable fees/expenses incurred by the ADR depositary).

The ADR depositary has agreed to waive certain of its fees chargeable to Barclays with respect to standard costs associated with the administration of the ADS program.

 

320  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    281


 


Additional information

    

    

    

 

External auditor objectivity andindependence: Non-Audit Services

Our policy on the provision of services by the Group’s statutory Auditor (the ‘Policy’) sets out the circumstances in which the auditor may be permitted to undertakenon-audit work for the Group.

The Board Audit Committee oversees compliance with the Policy and considers and, if appropriate, approves requests to use the Auditor fornon-audit work. Allowable services arepre-approved up to but not including £100,000 or £25,000 in the case of certain taxation services. The Group Finance Director and the Company Secretary and their teams deal with day to day administration of the Policy, facilitating requests for approval.

Details of the services that are prohibited and allowed under the Policy are set out below:

Services that are prohibited include:

 

Bookkeeping;

design and implementation of financial information systems;

  design or implementation of internal controls or risk management services related to financial information
*appraisal or valuation services;

  fairness opinions orcontribution-in-kind reports;

  *actuarial services;

  internal audit;
internal audit outsourcing;

management and Human Resources functions;

broker or dealer, investment advisor or investment banking services; and

legal, expert and taxcertain *tax services involving advocacy or personal services to persons in a financial reporting role.role; and
transaction-related and restructuring services.

*these may be permissible subject to compliance with certain requirements

Allowable services that the Board Audit Committee considers for approval include:

 

  statutory audit and regulatory audit related services and regulatorynon-audit services;

other attest and assurance services;

  training, surveys and software;
accountancy advice and training;

risk management and controls advice;

transaction support;

taxation services;

business support and recoveries; and

translation services.

 

282    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  321


Additional information

    

    

    

 

 

NYSE Corporate Governance Statement

As our main listing is on the London Stock Exchange, we follow the UK Corporate Governance Code. However, as Barclays also has American Depositary Receipts listed on the New York Stock Exchange (NYSE), we are also subject to the NYSE’s Corporate Governance Rules (NYSE Rules). We are exempt from most of the NYSE Rules, which US domestic companies must follow, because we are anon-US company listed on the NYSE. However, we are required to provide an Annual Written Affirmation to the NYSE of our compliance with the applicable NYSE Rules and must also disclose any significant differences between our corporate governance practices and those followed by domestic US companies listed on the NYSE. Key differences between the Code and NYSE Rules are set out here:

Director Independence

NYSE Rules require the majority of the Board to be independent. The Code requires at least half of the Board (excluding the Chairman) to be independent. The NYSE Rules contain different tests from the Code for determining whether a Director is independent. We follow the Code’s recommendations as well as developing best practices among other UK public companies. The independence of ournon-executive Directors is reviewed by the Board on an annual basis and it takes into account the guidance in the Code and the criteria we have established for determining independence, which are described on page 37.39.

Board Committees

We have a Board Nominations Committee and a Board Remuneration Committee, both of which are broadly similar in purpose and constitution to the Committees required by the NYSE Rules and whose terms of reference comply with the Code’s requirements. The NYSE Rules state that both Committees must be composed entirely of independent Directors. As the Group Chairman was independent on appointment, the Code permits him to chair the Board Nominations Committee. Except for this appointment, both Committees are composed solely ofnon-executive Directors, whom the Board has determined to be independent. We comply with the NYSE Rules requirement that we have a Board Audit Committee comprised solely of independentnon-executive Directors. However, we follow the Code recommendations, rather than the NYSE Rules, regarding the responsibilities of the Board Audit Committee (except for applicable mandatory responsibilities under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act), although both are broadly comparable. Although the NYSE Rules state that the Board Audit Committee is to take responsibility for risk oversight, Barclays has additional Board Committees which address different areas of risk management. To enhance Board governance of risk, Barclays has two risk committees; the Board Risk Committee and the Board Reputation Committee. A full description of each Board Committee can be found on page 96.in the governance section.

Corporate Governance Guidelines

The NYSE Rules require domestic US companies to adopt and disclose corporate governance guidelines. There is no equivalent recommendation in the Code but the Board Nominations Committee has developed corporate governance guidelines, ‘Corporate Governance in Barclays’, which have been approved and adopted by the Board.

Code of Ethics

The NYSE Rules require that domestic US companies adopt and disclose a code of business conduct and ethics for Directors, officers and employees.The Barclays Way was introduced in 2013, this is a Code of Conduct which outlines the Values and Behaviours which govern our way of working across our business globally.The Barclays Way has been adopted on a Group wide basis by all Directors, Officers and employees.The Barclays Way is available to view on the Barclays website at home.barclays/about-barclays/barclays-values.

Shareholder Approval of Equity-compensation Plans

The NYSE listing standards require that shareholders must be given the opportunity to vote on all equity-compensation plans and material revisions to those plans. We comply with UK requirements, which are similar to the NYSE standards. However, the Board does not explicitly take into consideration the NYSE’s detailed definition of what are considered ‘material revisions’.

 

322  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    283


 


Additional information

    

    

    

 

Share Capital

Substantial shareholders

Major shareholders do not have different voting rights from those of other shareholders. Information provided to the Company by substantial shareholders pursuant to the FCA’s Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules are published via a Regulatory Information Service and is available on the Company’s website. As at 31 December 2017, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares.

2017                         
Holder  Number of
Barclays Shares
   % of total voting
rights attached to
issued share
capitala
        Number of
warrants
   % of total voting
rights attached
to issued share
capital
 

The Capital Group Companies Incb

   1,172,090,125    6.98            -    - 

Qatar Holding LLCc

   1,017,455,690    5.99      -    - 

BlackRock, Incd

   1,010,054,871    5.92      -    - 

Notes

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above was calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the Disclosure Guidance and Transparency Rules.

b The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. On 14 February 2018, CG disclosed by way of a Schedul;e 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,167,912,211 ordinary shares of the Company as of 29 December 2017, representing 6.8% of that class of shares.

c Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority. On 17 January 2018, Qatar Holding LLC disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 941,620,690 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2017, representing 5.52% of that class of shares.

d Total shown includes 2,009,814 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. Part of the holding is held as American Depositary Receipts. On 30 January 2018, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,145,415,782 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2017, representing 6.7% of that class of shares.

Between 31 December 2017 and 19 February 2018 (the latest practicable date for inclusion in this report), the Company was notified that BlackRock, Inc. now holds 990,743,261 Barclays shares, representing 5.80% of the total voting rights attached to issued share capital.

As at 20 February 2017 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

2016                         
Holder  Number of
Barclays Shares
   % of total voting
rights attached to
issued share
capitala
        Number of
warrants
   % of total voting
rights attached
to issued share
capital
 

The Capital Group Companies Incb

   1,172,090,125    6.98            -    - 

Qatar Holding LLCc

   1,017,455,690    5.99      -    
-
 
 

BlackRock, Incd

   922,509,972    5.45      -    
-
 
 

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b. The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts.

c. Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

d Total shown includes 3,860,531 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 19 January 2017, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,054,988,420 ordinary shares of the Company as of 31 December 2016, representing 6.2% of that class of shares.

On 23 January 2017 the Company was notified that Norges Bank now holds 508,175,594 Barclays shares, representing 2.996% of the total voting rights attached to the issued share capital. The relevant threshold for UK disclosure is 3%, so Norges Bank will make no further notifications to the Company unless they again exceed 3% of the total voting rights attached to the issued share capital.

284    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

As at 29 February 2016 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

 

2015

                                     

Holder

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

Barclays Shares

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

warrants

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  Number of
Barclays Shares
   % of total voting
rights attached to
issued share
capitala
        Number of
warrants
   % of total voting
rights attached to
issued share
capital
 
Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552     6.65     -     -     813,964,552    6.65            -    
-
 
 
BlackRock, Incc   822,938,075     5.02     -     -     822,938,075    5.02      -    - 
The Capital Group Companies Incd   1,172,090,125     6.98     -     -     1,172,090,125    6.98      -    - 
Norges Bank   506,870,056     3.02     -     -     506,870,056    3.02      -    - 

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 25 January 2016, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,109,026,156 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2015, representing 6.6% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

As at 27 February 2015 the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

  

  

   

  

  

2014

            

Holder

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

Barclays Shares

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

warrants

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552     6.65     -     -  
BlackRock, Incc   822,938,075     5.02     -     -  
The Capital Group Companies Incd   861,142,569     5.22     -     -  

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 12 January 2015 BlackRock, Inc disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,032,843,875 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2014, representing 6.3% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

As at 4 March 2014, the Company had been notified under Rule 5 of the Disclosure and Transparency Rules of the UKLA of the following holdings of voting rights in its shares:

  

  

   

  

  

2013

            

Holder

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

Barclays Shares

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

Number of

 

warrants

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

% of total

 

voting rights

 

attached to

 

issued share

 

capitala

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

Qatar Holding LLCb   813,964,552     6.65     -     -  
BlackRock, Incc   805,969,166     7.06     -     -  
The Capital Group Companies Incd   809,174,196     5.03     -     -  

a The percentage of voting rights detailed above were as calculated at the time of the relevant disclosures made in accordance with Rule 5 of the DTR.

b Qatar Holding LLC is wholly-owned by Qatar Investment Authority.

c Total shown includes 1,408,618 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 13 February 2014 Qatar Holding LLC25 January 2016, BlackRock, Inc. disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,017,455,6901,109,026,156 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2013,2015, representing 6.31% of that class of shares.

c Total shown includes 8,003,236 contracts for difference to which voting rights are attached. On 17 January 2014 BlackRock, Inc disclosed, by way of a Schedule 13G filed with the SEC, beneficial ownership of 1,040,177,738 ordinary shares of Barclays PLC as of 31 December 2014, representing 6.5%6.6% of that class of shares.

d The Capital Group Companies Inc (CG) holds its shares via CG Management companies and funds. Part of the CG holding is held as American Depositary Receipts (ADRs) with a ratio of 1 share to every 4 ADRs.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  323    285


Additional information

    

    

    

 

 

Disclosure controls and procedures

The Chief Executive, JesJames E Staley, and the Group Finance Director, Tushar Morzaria, conducted with Group Management an evaluation of the effectiveness of the design and operation of the Group’s disclosure controls and procedures of each of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC as at 31 December 2015,2017, which are defined as those controls and procedures designed to ensure that information required to be disclosed in reports filed or submitted under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s rules and forms. As of the date of the evaluation, the Chief Executive and Group Finance Director concluded that the design and operation of these disclosure controls and procedures were effective.

Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant

In 2015, in order to conform with the auditor rotation requirements of the final statutory audit services order published in October 2014 by the UK’s Competition and Markets Authority, which took effect in January 2015, the Board Audit Committee (through the Audit Tender Oversight Sub-Committee) conducted an external audit tender. Barclays did not request PwC to submit a tender proposal and PwC declined to stand for re-election as the Group’s auditor. Barclays identified KPMG as the preferred candidate for appointment as the new auditor and made a recommendation to the Board. The Board announced on 3 July 2015 that it had appointed KPMG as Auditor following the completion of the audit of the Barclay PLC and Barclays Bank PLC financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2016 and the audit of the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting as of 31 December 2016. Accordingly, the engagement of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP, Barclays’ current auditor, will not be renewed for 2017. The appointment of KPMG is subject to the approval of Barclays’ shareholders at the 2017 Annual General Meeting.

During the two years prior to 31 December 2015, (1) PwC has not issued any reports on the financial statements of Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC or on the effectiveness of internal control over financial reporting that contained an adverse opinion or a disclaimer of opinion, nor were the auditors’ reports of PwC qualified or modified as to uncertainty, audit scope, or accounting principles, and (2) there has not been any disagreement over any matter of accounting principles or practices, financial statement disclosure, or auditing scope or procedures, which disagreement if not resolved to PwC’s satisfaction would have caused it to make reference to the subject matter of the disagreement in connection with its auditors’ reports, or any “reportable event” as described in Item 16F(a)(1)(v) of Form 20-F.

Barclays has provided PwC with a copy of the foregoing disclosure and has requested that PwC furnish Barclays with a letter addressed to the SEC stating whether it agrees with such disclosure. A copy of the letter, dated 1 March 2015, is filed herewith as Exhibit 15.2.

Board of Directors

John McFarlane, Chairman

John is Chairman of Barclays. John joined the Board as a non-executive Director in January 2015Barclays PLC and became Chairman at the conclusion of the AGM in April 2015.Barclays Bank PLC. He is also a non-executive director of Westfield Corporationsenior figure in global banking and Old Oak Holdings. Hefinancial services circles having spent over 40 years in the sector. John brings extensive experience in banking including investment, corporate and retail banking, as well as expertise in insurance, strategy, risk business transformation and cultural change.

John is chairmancurrently Chairman of TheCityUK and a member of the Financial Services Trade and Investment Board and the European Financial Roundtable.Round Table. Other currentnon-executive directorships included Westfield Corporation, Old Oak Holdings Limited and The International Monetary Conference. John was formerly chairmanpreviously Chairman of Aviva plc where he oversaw a transformation of the company FirstGroup plc, and the board and management, making Aviva oneAustralian Bankers Association. He was also anon- executive director of The Royal Bank of Scotland, joining at the time of the UK’s best-performing financial institutions. For a brief periodUK government rescue. Prior to that he was also chairmanChief Executive Officer of FirstGroup plc. John has a strong track record as a CEOAustralia and subsequently as a chairmanNew Zealand Banking Group Limited for 10 years, Group Executive Director of Standard Chartered plc and brings to Barclays extensive experiencehead of investment, corporate and retail banking, as well as insurance, strategy, risk and cultural change. John is a senior figure in global banking and financial services circles and is in his 40th yearCitibank in the sector including 20 years as a board director, 10 years as CEOUK and more recently as chairman.Ireland. Other current external appointments include member of Cranfield School of Management Advisory Board, member of Institut International d’Etudes Bancaires and member of the President’s Committee Confederation of British Industry.

Jes Staley, Chief Executive, Executive Director

Jes Staley joined Barclays as Group Chief Executive on 1 December 2015. Jes has nearly four decades of extensive experience in banking and financial services. He worked for more than 30 years at JP Morgan, initially training as a commercial banker, and later advancing to the leadership of major businesses involving equities, private banking and asset management, and ultimately heading the company’s Global Investment Bank. Most recently, Jes is currently a member of the Institute of International Finance and formerly served as Managing Partner at BlueMountain Capital.

Sir Gerry Grimstone, Deputy Chairman,Non-executive Director

Sir Gerry Grimstone is Deputy Chairman and Senior Independent Director of Barclays and chairs the Board Reputation Committee. He is also chairman of Standard Life Aberdeen plc, one of the UK’s largest savings and investments businesses. He is an independentnon-executive board member of Deloitte NWE LLP where he represents the public interest.interest and a Board advisor to the Abu Dhabi Commercial Bank. Within the UK public sector, he is the leadnon-executive on the board of at the Ministry of Defence and is a member of HM Treasury’s Financial Services Trade and Investment Board. From 2012-2015, Gerry served as the chairman of TheCityUK, the representative body for the financial and professional services industry in the UK. Gerry has held a number of board appointments in the public and private sectors and has served as one of the UK’s Business Ambassadors. He was previously a senior investment banker at Schroders and ran businesses in London, New York and Asia Pacific. He specialised in mergers and acquisitions and capital-raising for major companies worldwide. Prior to that, he was an official in HM Treasury where he was responsible for privatisation and policy towards state-owned enterprises. Sir Gerry’s other current principal external appointments are the Financial Services Trade and Investment Board and The Shareholder Executive.

Mike Ashley,Non-executive Director

Mike joined the Board as anon-executive Director in September 2013. He was formerly head of quality and risk management for KPMG Europe LLP (ELLP), which forms part of the KPMG global network, where his responsibilities included the management of professional risks

324  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

and quality control. He was a member of the ELLP Board and was also KPMG UK’s designated Ethics Partner. Mike has over 20 years’ experience as an audit partner, during which he was the lead audit partner for several large financial services groups, most recently HSBC Holdings PLC and Standard Chartered PLC, and also for the Bank of England. Mike has an in depth understanding of auditing and the associated regulatory issues, with specific experience of large, global banks. Mike’s other current principal external appointments are Institute of Chartered Accountants in England and Wales’ Ethics Standards Committee (member), European Financial Reporting Advisory Group’s Technical Expert Group (vice chair), Charity Commission (board member), Government Internal Audit Agency (chairman) and International Ethics Standards Board for Accountants.Accountants (member).

Tim Breedon,Non-executive Director

Tim was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in November 2012. Tim held a number of roles at Legal & General Group plc (L&G) before joining its board as group directorGroup Director (Investments) and becoming group chief executive. He was later an adviserGroup Chief Executive, a position he held from January 2006 to L&G, primarily with responsibilities in connection with Solvency II.June 2012. Tim was a director of the Association of British Insurers (ABI), and also served as its chairman. He was also chairman of the UK Government’snon-bank lending taskforce, anindustry-led taskforce that looked at the structural and behavioural barriers to the development of alternative debt markets in the UK. Tim was a director of the Financial Reporting Council and was on the board of the Investment Management Association. Tim has over 25 years of experience in financial services and has extensive knowledge and experience of regulatory and government relationships. He brings to the Board the experience and knowledge of leading a financial services company, combined with an understanding of the UK and EU regulatory environment and risk management. His customer focus and understanding of investor issues, gained both at L&G and the ABI, is of particular relevance to Barclays. Tim’sBarclays.Tim’s other current principal external appointments are as chairman of Apax Global Alpha Limited (chairman) and Marie Curie Cancer Care (trustee).chairman of The Northview Group.

Mary Francis, CBE,Non-executive director

Mary Francis CBE was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in October 2016. Mary has extensive board-level experience across a range of industries and is currently serving on the boards of Swiss Re Group and Ensco plc. She has previously served as Senior Independent Director on the board of Centrica and as anon-executive director of Aviva, Cable & Wireless Communications, the Bank of England and Alliance & Leicester. In her executive career, Mary was a senior civil servant in HM Treasury for twelve years, before serving as Private Secretary to the Prime Minister, Deputy Private Secretary to the Queen and as Director General of the Association of British Insurers.

Crawford Gillies,Non-executive Director

Crawford joined the Board as anon-executive Director in May 2014. Crawford has over three decades of business and management experience, initially with Bain & Company, a firm of international management consultants, where he was managing director Europe from 2001 to 2005. While at Bain he worked with major companies in the UK, Continental Europe and North America across multiple sectors. Since 2007 he has beenFrom 2007-2016 Crawford was on the board of Standard Life plc, where he has chaired the remuneration committee. He was chairman of the law firm Hammonds, now Squire Sanders (2006 - 2009),

286    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

has chaired Control Risks Group Holdings LtdInternational since 2007 and chaired Touch Bionics (2006 - 2011), an innovative medical device company. He joinedCrawford was also on the board of MITIE Group PLC in 2012.from 2012 to July 2015. He has also held public sector posts in England and Scotland. He was an independent member of the Department of Trade and Industry (2002 - 2007) and chaired its Audit and Risk Committee (2003 - 2007). He is former Chairmanchairman of Scottish Enterprise and of the Confederation of British Industry in London. Crawford’s other current principal external appointments are as Non-executive Directorseniornon-executive director of SSE plc and Standard Life plc. Crawford intends to retire from his position at Standard Life plc in 2016.Chairman of The Edrington Group Limited.

Reuben Jeffery III,Non-executive Director

Reuben joined the Board in July 2009 as anon-executive Director. He is currently CEO, president and a director of Rockefeller & Co Inc. and Rockefeller Financial Services Inc. Reuben served in the US government as under secretary of State for Economic, Energy and Agricultural Affairs, as chairman of the Commodity Futures Trading Commission and as a special assistant to the President on the staff of the National Security Council. Before his government service, Reuben spent 18 years at Goldman, Sachs & Co where he was managing partner of Goldman Sachs in Paris and led the firm’s europeanEuropean financial institutions group in London. Prior to joining Goldman Sachs, Reuben was a corporate attorney with Davis Polk & Wardwell. Reuben has a broad range of financial services experience, particularly investment banking, and in addition brings extensive insight into the US political and regulatory environment. Reuben’s other current principal external appointments are International Advisory Council of the China Securities Regulatory Commission (member), Advisory Board of Towerbrook Capital Partners LP (member), Financial Services Volunteer Corps (Director)(director), and the Advisory Board of J. Rothschild Capital Management Limited (member)The Asia Foundation (trustee).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  325


Additional information

Wendy Lucas-Bull, Non-executive Director

Wendy was appointed to the Board as a non-executive Director in September 2013. She is currently chairman of Barclays Africa Group Limited (formerly Absa Group Limited), one of the largest financial services groups in Africa and majority owned by Barclays. She previously served as an executive director of Rand Merchant Bank and became chief executive of FirstRand Ltd’s retail businesses following the merger of Rand Merchant Bank and First National Bank. She has held senior board positions at the Development Bank of Southern Africa, the South African Financial Markets Advisory Board, Eskom, Aveng Ltd and Nedbank Group Limited. Wendy has also held positions on the boards of Telkom SA, Alexander Forbes Ltd, Dimension Data PLC and Anglo American Platinum Ltd. Wendy’s extensive experience provides the Board with valuable retail, commercial, asset management and investment banking expertise. Her widespread experience stems for board level positions in South African banks, having led some of South Africa’s blue chip companies, most notably as CEO of one of the largest retail banks in South Africa, serving as a senior executive of one of the major investment banks in South Africa, as well as providing consultancy services to the largest banks, financial exchanges and insurers in South Africa and internationally. As a CEO Wendy has a track record of successful financial turnaround and cultural transformation of a major South African bank. Her in-depth knowledge of banking in Africa also provides invaluable insight into banking in the region. Wendy has led or participated in a number of conduct related consultations throughout her career, and such knowledge and experience contribute greatly towards the discussion of culture at Barclays.

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, Executive Director

Tushar joined the Board and Group Executive Committee of Barclays in October 2013 as Group Finance Director. Prior to this, he was CFO, corporate and investment bank at JP Morgan, a role he held on the merger of the investment bank and the wholesale treasury/security services business at JP Morgan. Prior to the merger, he was CFO of the investment bank and held other various roles during his career at JP Morgan.

Tushar qualified as an accountant at Coopers &and Lybrand Deloitte and for most of his career he has worked in investment banking, having held various roles at SG Warburg, JP Morgan and Credit Suisse. Tushar has over 20 years of strategic financial management experience, which prove invaluable in his role as Group Finance Director.

Dambisa Moyo,Non-executive Director

Dambisa joined the Board in May 2010 as anon-executive Director. She is an international economist and commentator on the global economy, with a background in financial services. After completing a PhD in Economics, she worked for Goldman Sachs in the debt capital markets, hedge funds coverage and global macroeconomics teams. Dambisa has also worked for the World Bank and formerly served as anon-executive director of Lundin Petroleum AB (publ) SABMiller PLC (2009- 2016) and Seagate Technology (2015-2017). Dambisa’s background as an economist, in particular her knowledge and understanding of global macroeconomic issues and African economic, political and social issues, provides an important contribution to the Board’s discussion of Barclays’ business and citizenship strategy. Dambisa’s other current principal external appointments are asnon-executive director of SABMiller plc, Barrick Gold Corporation and Seagate Technology plc.Chevron Corporation.

Frits van Paasschen, Non-executive Director

Frits was appointed to the Board as a non-executive Director in August 2013. Frits is an experienced director and CEO. He is the former CEO and president of Starwood Hotels and Resorts Worldwide Inc, one of the world’s largest hotel companies. He served as a non-executive director for two NYSE-listed companies, Jones Apparel Group and Oakley. He previously served as the CEO and President of Coors Brewing Company and has held various senior management positions with Nike, Inc. and Disney Consumer Products.

Frits’ extensive global and commercial experience and role as a CEO of an international business provides valuable strategic insight. In particular, his experience in developing and marketing brands, and a broad knowledge of enhancing business performance and the customer experience in a retail environment, is highly beneficial to many aspects of Barclays’ business.

326  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Diane de Saint Victor, Schueneman,Non-executive Director

Diane was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in June 2015. She2015 and is currently executive director, general counsel and company secretarya member of ABB Limited, the publicly listed international power and automation technologies company based in Switzerland.

Her responsibilities include Head of Legal and Integrity Group. She was formerly senior vice president and general counsel of The Airbus Group, formerly EADS Group, the European aerospace and defence company. Diane’s legal experience and her knowledge of regulatory and compliance matters allows her to provide a unique perspective to the Board of Barclays US LLC, Barclays US intermediate holding company and its Committees. 

Diane Schueneman, Non-executive Director

Diane was appointed to the Board as a non-executive Director in June 2015.Chair of Barclays Services Limited. Diane has extensive experience in managing global, cross-discipline business operations, client services and technology in the financial services industry. She spent 37 years with Merrill Lynch and held senior roles with responsibility for banking, brokerage services and technology provided to the company’s retail and middle market clients, and latterly for IT, operations and client services worldwide as senior vice president and& head of global infrastructure solutions. As a consultant at McKinsey & Company she advised the IRS Commissioner in the US and has held a number ofnon-executive directorships.

Sir Ian Cheshire,Steve Thieke, Non-executive Director

SteveSir Ian was appointed to the Board as anon-executive Director in April 2017 and is Chairman of Barclays UK PLC. Sir Ian Cheshire was appointed Group Chief Executive of Kingfisher plc from January 2014. He has four decades2008 and left the group in early 2015. Prior to this he was Chief Executive of experience in financial services, both in regulationB&Q. His previous roles at Kingfisher from 1998 onwards include Chief Executive of International and investment banking. SteveDevelopment, Chief Executive ofe-Kingfisher and Group Director of Strategy and Development. Before Kingfisher he worked for a series of large and small retail business over 15 years including Sears plc, the Federal Reserve Bankowners of New York for 20 years, where he held several senior positions in creditSelfridges. He is currently the Chairman of Debenhams plc, Chairman of Menhaden plc and capital market operations and banking supervision and later he became a non-executive director atPresident of the FSA. He has also held senior roles in investment banking and risk management with JP Morgan, where he spent ten years.Business Disability Forum President’s Group. He was headSenior Independent Director of Whitbread plc and has previously been Chairman of the fixed income division, co-head of global markets, presidentBritish Retail Consortium and chairman of JP Morgan Securities, Inc. and headChairman of the corporate risk management group, retiring from JP MorganPrince of Wales Corporate Leaders Group on Climate Change. In addition, he chaired the Ecosystem Markets Task Force. Sir Ian retired asnon-executive director of Bradford & Bingley plc eight years ago. Sir Ian has won a number of awards including Lifetime contributions to retailing, green business and the Fortune WEF award for leadership in 1999. Hethe circular economy. Sir Ian was knighted in the 2014 New Year Honours for services to Business, Sustainability and the Environment and is a Chevalier of the Ordre National du Merite of France. Other current appointments include Leadnon-executive director for the Government.

Matthew Lester,Non-executive Director

Matthew joined the Board as anon-executive Director in September 2017. Matthew has significanta strong financial background and extensive board level experience across a range of sectors, including financial services. He is currently anon-executive director of Man Group plc and Capita plc, where he also chairs the Audit and Risk Committees of both in executivecompanies. Matthew was Chief Financial Officer of Royal Mail Group during the period of preparation for privatisation and non-executive roles, including spending sevenfor the first four years as a directorlisted entity, and a member of Risk Metricsthe FTSE 100. Prior to that he was Group CFO of ICAP plc, the world largest interdealer broker. His earlier experience included 10 years in a variety of senior fiancé roles ar Diagio plc including Group Treasurer and Group Financial Controller. He spent eight years at Kleinwort Benson in Corporate Finance.

Mike Turner,Non-executive Director

Mike has considerable business and board level experience gained from his lengthy career with BAE Systems PLC where latterly he was CEO as well as hisnon-executive positions. He has a strong commercial background and experience in strategy and operational performance culture. Mike brings significant

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    287


Additional information

leadership and strategic oversight experience to the Board, particularly from his roles as Chairman of Babcock International Group PLC and Chairman of GKN Plc.

Stephen Shapiro, Company Secretary

Stephen was appointed Company Secretary in November 2017 having previously served as chairmanthe Group Company Secretary and Deputy General Counsel of SABMiller plc. Prior to this he practised law as a partner in a law firm in South Africa, and subsequently in the UK. Stephen has extensive experience in corporate governance, legal, regulatory and compliance matters. Stephen has also previously served as Chairman of the board,ICC UK’s Committee on Anti-Corruption as well as on working groups of the GC100, providing business input into key areas of legislative and nine years on the board of PNC Financial Services Group, Inc.policy reform.

Group Executive Committee

Jes Staley, Group Chief Executive, Executive Director

See above for full biography.

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director, Executive Director

See above for full biography.

Robert Le Blanc,Paul Compton, Group Chief RiskOperating Officer

RobertPaul joined Barclays as Group Chief Operating Officer in 2002 as HeadMay 2016. In this role, Paul is responsible for leading the global Operations & Technology functions, driving the implementation of Risk Managementthe structural reform and cost transformation programmes, and for the Investment Bank, and has been the Chief Risk Officer for the Group since 2004.delivery of other major bank-wide projects. Prior to joining Barclays, Robert spent mostPaul was the Chief Administrative Officer of JPMorgan Chase, and was accountable for overseeing global technology, operations, real estate and general services. Before being appointed in this role in 2013, Paul served asCo-Chief Administrative Officer for the Corporate & Investment Bank, Deputy Head of Operations for JPMorgan Chase, and head of the JPMorgan Chase Global Service Centre in India. Paul started his career at JPMorgan in 1997, and first led the overhaul of the wholesale bank’s credit risk infrastructure, before taking on the role as Chief Financial Officer for the Investment Bank. Previous to JP Morgan, Paul spent 10 years as Principal at Ernst & Young in the capital markets, fixed income, emerging marketBrisbane and credit and risk management areas in New York and London. Robertoffices.. He has previously been a member of the Group Executive Committee since November 2009. From May 2016, Robert will become Vice ChairBoard of Risk and Strategy.

Michael Harte, Chief Operations and Technology Officer

Michael joined Barclays in July 2014, becoming a memberDirectors of the Group Executive Committee. Before joining Barclays, Michael was group executiveDepository Trust and Clearing Corporation (DTCC) American Australian Association and the American Red Cross of enterprise services and chief information officer at the Commonwealth Bank of Australia Group (CBA), where he was responsible for group-wide retail and institutional banking systems and operations, brokerage, wealth and asset management systems. Together with his team, Michael transformed CBA into one of the most respected, customer focused and technology leading banks in the world: one of only 8 AA rated banks and top ten by market capitalisation. In his earlier career, Michael held the posts of executive vice president, chief information officer, IT and operations and technology posts at PNC Financial Services Group, Inc (2001-2006,Greater New York) and at Citigroup (1996-2001, London and New York).York.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  327


Additional information

Bob Hoyt, Group General Counsel

Bob joined Barclays as Group General Counsel designate in October 2013 and became Group General Counsel in November 2013,is responsible for all legal issuesand regulatory matters across Barclays.Barclays as Group General Counsel. Previously, Bob is also a member of the Group Executive Committee. Bob joined Barclays fromwas at PNC Financial Services Group, where he was general counselGeneral Counsel and chief regulatory affairs officer,Chief Regulatory Affairs Officer, having previously served as deputy general counselDeputy General Counsel since 2009. Prior to then he held roles in public serviceBetween 2006 and 2009, Bob served as general counsel atGeneral Counsel of the US Department of the Treasury 2006-2009,where he was the Chief Legal Officer of the department and as special assistant and associate counsela senior policy advisor to Secretary Henry M. Paulson, Jr. Prior to that Bob served at the White House. Bob spent much of the early part of his career in private practice, specialising in securities, litigation and corporate.

Tom King, Chief Executive, Investment Bank

Tom is Chief Executive of the Investment Bank. He is also a member of the Group Executive Committee. Tom joined Barclays in December 2009 as Head of Investment Banking Division (IBD), EMEA, and Co-Head of Global Corporate Finance. In April 2012, he assumed additional responsibility for jointly overseeing the newly combined Corporate Finance/M&A team. He was appointed Deputy Head of IBD in October 2012, and became Head of IBD in March 2013. Tom was appointed Co-Chief Executive of Corporate and Investment Banking on 1 May 2013 and joined the Group Executive Committee, in addition to his Investment Banking responsibilities. Previously, Tom was at CitigroupHouse where he was most recently head of banking for EMEA. Tom joined Salomon BrothersSpecial Assistant and Associate Counsel to President George W. Bush. Earlier in 1989his career, Bob was a partner in the Securities, Litigation and moved to London in 1999 when he was appointed global head of mergers and acquisitions. He was named head of EMEA Investment Banking in 2005, and headCorporate departments of the combined Corporatelaw firm of Wilmer Cutler Pickering Hale and Investment Bank in 2008.Dorr (WilmerHale).

Jonathan Moulds, Group Chief Operating Officer

Jonathan joined Barclays in February 2015 as Group Chief Operating Officer. He also is a member of the Group Executive Committee. Jonathan began his career in finance with Chicago Research and Trading, which was acquired by Bank of America. Jonathan remained at Bank of America Merrill Lynch for over 15 years until 2012 holding a number of positions including head of Latin America, Canada and Europe, head of risk for global markets and head of international global markets. Latterly, Jonathan was Head of Bank of America Merrill Lynch Europe and CEO of Merrill Lynch International. More broadly, Jonathan has been a board member for bodies such as the Association of Financial Markets, Europe and the Global Markets Association. Jonathan is a renowned patron of the arts and was appointed CBE in the 2015 New Year Honours list for his services to philanthropy.

Maria Ramos, Chief Executive, Absa Group and Barclays Africa

Maria is the Chief Executive Officer of Barclays Africa Group Limited (formerly Absa), which is majority owned by Barclays. Prior to joining Absa on 1 March 2009, she was the group chief executive of Transnet Limited, the state-owned South African freight transport and logistics service provider. This was after a term as director-general of the National Treasury of South Africa (formerly the Department of Finance). She currently serves on the executive committees of the World Economic Forum’s International Business Council and Business Leadership South Africa. Maria joined the Group Executive Committee in November 2009.

Tristram Roberts, Group Human Resources Director

Tristram is the Group Human Resources Director. Tristram joined Barclays in July 2013 as HR Director for the Investment Bank. HeHis remit was expanded his remit in May 2014 to include HR responsibilities for BarclaysNon-Core, and became the Group HR Director in December 2015. Prior to Barclays, Tristram was headHead of human resourcesHuman Resources for global functionsGlobal Functions and operationsOperations & technologyTechnology at HSBC Holdings PLC, as well as group head of performance and reward. Previously, he was group reward and policy director for Vodafone Group plc.Plc. Tristram began his career in consulting. He became a partner with Arthur Andersen in 2001 and was subsequently a partner with both Deloitte and KPMG.

328  |  Barclays PLC andTim Throsby, President, Barclays International and Chief Executive Officer, Corporate and Investment Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Michael Roemer, GroupTim Throsby is President of Barclays International and Chief Executive Officer of the Corporate and Investment Bank at Barclays. In May 2017, Tim took on the additional role of interim Head of Compliance

Mike joined BarclaysMarkets. Based in January 2011 as the Head of Internal Audit, before becoming Group Head of Compliance in January 2014 and joining the Group Executive Committee. Mike joined Barclays from CIT Group whereLondon, he was the chief auditor, reporting directly to the board audit committee and having global responsibility for CIT Group’s internal audit function. Mike has 27 years’ experience in internal audit, with 23 years of that time spent at JP Morgan. Mike currently serves on the advisory board of the Make-A-Wish Foundation of Metro New York where he is audit committee chair. He also serves on the board of Ronald McDonald House of New York, Inc. where he is also audit committee chair.

Amer Sajed, Interim CEO, Barclaycard

Amer is the Interim CEO of Barclaycard. He is also a member of the Group Executive Committee. Prior to his appointmentjoining Barclays in January 2017, Tim worked for JP Morgan where he held a variety of senior management roles, most recently serving as interim CEOGlobal Head of Equities. Tim has had an extensive career in banking and asset management, working initially for Barclaycard, Amer servedCredit Suisse and Macquarie, before joining Goldman Sachs in 1995 as CEOa Managing Director andCo-Head of Equity Derivatives for Barclaycard US. During his five years leadingAsia. In 2002, he joined Lehman Brothers to lead the USAsia Equities Division, before relocating to New York in 2004 to run the global Equity Derivatives business it doubled in size to rank as onewell as risk arbitrage. In 2005, he became President of the top ten credit card companies locally. Amer joined Barclaycard in August of 2006. Before assuming the US post,Citadel Asia where he was Chief Executive Officer for UK Cards. From 2010 to 2012, Amer also oversaw the South African Cards Issuinginvestment firm’s Asia business. He serves on the board of Human Dignity Trust, and Acquiring businesses. Before comingis a school governor at the Ark Oval Primary Academy.

C.S. Venkatakrishnan (“Venkat”), Chief Risk Officer

Venkat joined as Chief Risk Officer in March 2016. Venkat is responsible for helping to Barclays, Amerdefine, set and manage the risk profile of Barclays. He has over 20 years of financial market and risk management expertise. Venkat worked at Citigroup for 20JP Morganfrom 1994, most recently as Head of Model Risk and Development and Operational Risk. Prior to this, he worked in fixed income structuring at the JP Morgan Investment Bank. This followed upon 14 years in various roles – most recently overseeingJP Morgan Asset Management where he held senior positions in the travel and affluent segment. Previously, he served in senior finance roles.Global Fixed Income business.

Ashok Vaswani, CEO, Personal and Corporate BankingBarclays UK

Ashok is responsiblethe CEO for the PersonalBarclays UK, covering Retail Banking, Wealth, Business Banking and Corporate Bank.Barclaycard UK. Ashok joined Barclays in 2010, managing the credit card business across the UK, Europe and the Nordics, joining the boardbecoming chairman of Entercard Holdings AB.Entercard. He went on to manage Barclays in Africa, Barclays Retail Business Bank globally and then became CEO for RetailBarclays Personal and Business Banking, covering Europe, AfricaCorporate Banking. Ashok is a member of Barclays Bank UK PLC Board, UK Finance Board and the UK.Trustee Board at Citizens Advice. He also sits on the advisory boards of a number of institutions such as Rutberg & Co and is Founder Director ofLend-a-Hand, anon-profit organisation focused on rural education in India. Ashok has previously served as a Non-executive Director on the Board of Barclays Africa Group Limited, the board of directors, Telenor ASA and on the advisory boards of SP Jain Institute of Management,

288    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Insead Singapore and Visa Asia Pacific. Prior to Barclays, Ashok was a partner atwith a J P Morgan Chase funded private equity firm - Brysam Global Partners, a New York City based private equity firmwhich focused on building retail financial service businesses in emerging markets. Ashok also spent 20 years with Citigroup working in Asia, Middle East, Central Asia, Europe and North America,where his last position beingwas as CEO, of the global consumer bank in Asia Pacific. Ashok is on the advisory board of S. P. Jain Institute of Management and has served on the advisory board of Insead Singapore and Visa Asia Pacific. He is founder director of Lend-a-Hand, a non-profit organisation focused on economic development in India. Ashok represents Barclays as a non-executive director on the board of Barclays Africa Group Limited (formerly Absa Group Limited), having been appointed in February 2013. Ashok has beenwas also a member of the Citigroup Operating Committee, the Citigroup Management Committee and the Global Consumer Planning Group.

Laura Padovani, Interim Group Executive CommitteeChief Compliance Officer

Laura is currently the Interim Group Chief Compliance Officer for Barclays and has worked at the bank since October 2012.joining as the Head of Global Compliance Services in 2015. In 2016, Laura’s role was expanded to cover the Compliance Chief of Staff Office, where she would deputise for the Chief Compliance Officer in various capacities. Laura joined from American Express and has over 25 years of financial services experience. She started her career with American Express in Argentina in 1991 where she established the first Compliance office andco-ordinated their Legal function. Laura moved to New York in 1997 to assist with the development of the Global Anti-Money Laundering Program for American Express. In 2000, Laura broadened her Financial Services experience moving to Aviva as the Head of International Compliance responsible for allnon-UK offices across North America, Europe and Asia Pacific. Laura returned to American Express in 2004, focused on Global Consumer Financial Services and European Emerging Markets, and then as the Global Head of International Regulatory Compliance. Laura obtained a Law degree from the University of Buenos Aires and a postgraduate Masters in Law (LLM) from the London School of Economics and Political Science, with specialisation in Banking Law and Financial Services Regulation. Laura is fluent in Spanish and Italian and has been involved in many networking initiatives for Women, both at American Express and now at Barclays.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  329    289


Additional information

    

    

    

 

 

 

Section 13(r) to the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 (Iran sanctions and related disclosure)

Section 13(r) of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the ‘Exchange Act’“Exchange Act”) requires each SEC reporting issuer to disclose in its annual and, if applicable, quarterly reports whether it or any of its affiliates have knowingly engaged in certain activities, transactions or dealings relating to Iran or with the Government of Iran or certain designated natural persons or entities involved in terrorism or the proliferation of weapons of mass destruction during the period covered by the report. The required disclosurerequirement includes disclosure of activities not prohibited by US or other law even if conducted outside the US bynon-US companies or affiliates in compliance with local law. Pursuant to Section 13(r) of the Exchange Act we note the following in relation to activity occurring in 2015,2017, the period covered by this annual report, or in relation to activity we became aware of in 20152017 relating to disclosable activity prior to the reporting period. Barclays earned totalattributed revenue of less than £28,000 from£18,500 in 2017 in relation to the activities disclosed below.

Legacy guarantees

Between 1993 and 2006, Barclays entered into several guarantees for the benefit of Iranian banks between 1993 and 2006 in connection with the supply of goods and services by Barclays’ customers to Iranian buyers. These were counter guarantees issued to the Iranian banks to support guarantees issued by these banks to the Iranian buyers. The Iranian banks and a number of the Iranian buyers were thensubsequently designated as Specially Designated Nationals (“SDNs”) by the U.S. Treasury Department’s Office of Foreign Assets Control (“OFAC”). In addition, between 1993 and 2005, Barclays entered into similar guarantees between 1993 and 2005 for the benefit of a Syrian bank that is nowwas subsequently designated an OFAC SDN. Some of the underlying buyers related to the Syrian guarantees have also been designated as OFAC SDNs.

The guarantees have beenwere issued with the following conditions:

either on:

(i)On an “extend or pay” basis wherewhich means that, although the guarantee is of limited duration on its face, until there is full performance under the contract to provide goods and/orand services, the terms of the guarantee require Barclays to either maintain the guarantee or pay the beneficiary bank the full amount of the guarantee; or
(ii)Where Barclaysthe basis that Barclays’ obligations can only be discharged with the consent of the beneficiary or counterparty.counter party.

Barclays is not able to exit its obligations under the guarantees unilaterally, and thus maintains a limited legacy portfolio of these guarantees. The guarantees were in compliance with applicable laws and regulations at the time at which they were entered into. Revenue

Since the implementation of the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (“JCPOA”) on 16 January 2016, Barclays has terminated a number of these Iran-related legacy guarantees and intends to terminate the remainder where agreement can be reached with the counterparty, in the amount of less than £15,000 was received in the year ended 31 December 2015. Anyaccordance with applicable laws and regulations. All payments made underin connection with termination of the guarantees arehave been made in compliance with applicable laws and regulations.

Barclays intendsattributed revenue of less than £16,000 in 2017 in relation to terminate each of these legacy guarantees if the applicable law changes so as to allow it.this activity.

Lease payments

Barclays is party to a long-term lease, entered into in 1979, with the National Iranian Oil Company (“NIOC”), pursuant to which Barclays rents part of NIOC House in London to house a Barclays bank branch. NIOC is the custodian trustee for the NIOC Pension Fund. The lease is for 60-years,60 years, contains no early termination clause and has 2422 years remaining. Barclays makes quarterly lease payments to Naft Trading and Technology Ltd, a wholly-owned subsidiary of the NIOC Pension Fund in respect of this lease. NIOC is wholly owned by the Iranian

Government and iswas an SDN.SDN until it was delisted by OFAC and the EU in January 2016 following implementation of sanctions relief under the JCPOA. In December 2012, NIOC Pension Fund was sanctionedadded to a sanctions list in the UK by HM Treasury. From this pointTreasury (“HMT”). As a result of the listing, quarterly lease payments wereare made to a frozen account at Turkiye Is Bankasi in line with UK regulations. However,Sanctions on NIOC Pension Fund were lifted by HMT on 18 January 2017. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2014, Turkiye Is Bankasi refused2017 in relation to accept any further payments into the frozen account. Since then, no further lease payments have been made and Barclays continues to accrue ongoing rental payments on its books. In 2015 an additional payment of under £6,000 was made directly to a UK supplier by Barclays in respect of the upkeep of the branch.

330  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional informationthis activity.

Local Clearing SystemsSystem

Banks in the United Arab Emirates (“UAE”), including certain of the Iranian banks that are or were OFAC SDNs, participate in the various banking payment and settlement systems used in the UAE (the “UAE Clearing Systems”). Barclays, by virtue of its banking activities in the UAE, participates in the UAE Clearing Systems, and its participation in the UAE Clearing Systems is in compliance with applicable lawlaws and regulations. However, in order to help mitigate the risk of participating in transactions in which participant Iranian OFAC SDN banks may be involved, Barclays has implemented restrictions relating to its participation in the UAE Image Cheque Clearance System (ICCS), and the UAE Funds Transfer System (FTS), the Direct Debit System (DDS) Automated Teller Machine (ATM) / Cheque Deposit Machine (CDM) activity, as well as restricting activity via the Wages Protection Scheme (WPS). Barclays attributed no revenue in 2015 from the OFAC SDN banks2017 in relation to its participationthis activity.

Payments notified

Barclays maintains a relationship with HM Revenue & Customs (“HMRC”), a UK government agency, which received funds from an OFAC SDN designated under the Specially Designated Global Terrorism (“SDGT”), Iran, and Iranian Financial Sanctions Regulations (“IFSR”) regimes in relation to the UAE Clearing Systems.settlement of tax liabilities with the UK Government. The payments were received by Barclays and credited to the HMRC account. The payment activity was covered by licenses issued by OFAC and HM Treasury. Barclays attributed revenue under £180 in 2017 in relation to this activity.

Commercial mortgage

On 24 May 2013,In March 2016, a Barclays customer and its director werewas designated by OFAC under the Non-ProliferationSDGT regime by OFAC. The customer’s accounts were closed and Weapons of Mass Destruction (“NPWMD”) regime. Thethe remaining balances were moved to a sundry account in accordance with applicable laws. However, one GBP credit card remained open in error, and the customer continues to hold a commercial mortgage with Barclays. The terms and conditionsmade purchases on the card from October 2016 through January 2017. A review of the commercial mortgage do not allow for an early exittransactions was completed and Barclays is legally requiredno transactions were found to maintainbe in breach of applicable U.S. or other regulations. A block has now been applied to the loan until the maturity date or until the customer defaults on payments. Repayments of the mortgagecard to prevent any further spending and repayments by the customer are being made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Revenues earned by Barclays in 2015 wereattributed revenue of less than £19,000.£2,200 in 2017 in relation to this activity.

New OFAC notification

On 6 September 2012 “Organization for PeaceIn 2010, Barclays froze three customer accounts (denominated in USD, Euro and Development Pakistan” openedGBP) in which the customer was holding funds on behalf of a company that was an account in Pakistani Rupees with Barclays Pakistan. On 7 April 2015 OFAC issued a notification advising that the “Organization for Peace and Development Pakistan” was a new alias for an already sanctioned entity, Revival of Islamic Heritage Society, which has been designated under the OFAC Specifically Designated Global Terrorist (“SDGT”) regime. It has also been listedIranian SDN, owned by the European Union (“EU”)Government of Iran. The Iranian company was removed from the SDN list in January 2016, and in October 2017 it requested that Barclays return the UK by HM Treasury (“HMT”) underfunds directly to it. The balances on the Al Qaida Terrorismcustomer’s Euro and

Terrorism Financing regime since January 2002. At GBP account were repaid to the timeIranian company in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. The customer’s USD account remains frozen. Barclays attributed revenue of less than £90 in 2017 in relation to this activity.

Barclays identified one Euro payment in 2017 that credited the account of a customer from a company believed to be controlled by the Government of Iran. The payment was opened,made via a third party and the payment message contained no reference to Iran. Therefore, Barclays Pakistan was not aware that the remittance was on behalf of a company controlled by the Government of Iran. The payment related to the sale

290    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

of medical goods. Barclays attributed no revenue in 2017 in relation to this activity.

Based on an investigation undertaken in 2017, Barclays identified one GBP payment made in 2015 that credited the account of a customer which Barclays learned had ultimately originated from a Ministry of the linksGovernment of Iran. The payment was made via a third party and the payment message contained no reference to Iran. Therefore, Barclays was not aware that the remittance was on behalf of a Ministry of the Government of Iran. The payment was subsequently disclosed to the designated entity. The account was identified on 7 April 2015, followinglocal regulator, the OFAC notification and was frozen byUK Office of Financial Sanctions Implementation (“OFSI”). Barclays on 9 April 2015.

The account was closed on 12 May 2015 and the funds were held in an account in Barclays Bank Pakistan, pending the sale of Barclays Bank Pakistan to Habib Bank Ltd on 15 June 2015. A licence was granted by HMT to transfer the account to Habib Bank Ltd on 26 June 2015 (AFU/2015/015). The Barclays Bank PLC account holding the frozen funds was transferred to Habib Bank Ltd on 28 August 2015 in accordance with the licence. Barclays derivedattributed no revenue in relation to this account.activity.

ReviewBased on an investigation undertaken in 2017, Barclays identified nine inbound and three outbound Euro payments made in 2013 and 2014 that passed through the account of designation

Mohammad Moinie,a customer which Barclays now believes had ultimately originated from an existing customer, was designated by OFAC as a Special Designated National (SDN) on 6 September 2013, under EO 13599. In April 2015 Barclaycard identified the customer as the SDN designated by OFAC.under the IFSR and theNon-Proliferation of Weapons of Mass Destruction (“NPWMD”) regimes. The SDN was delisted in January 2016. The payments were made via third parties and the payment messages contained no reference to the SDN. Therefore, Barclays was

A reviewnot aware that the remittances were on behalf of the customer’s account establishedSDN. The payments were subsequently disclosed to the account was held in GBP. No US nexus was identifiedlocal regulators, OFSI and the National Crime Agency. Upon identifying these payments that related to an SDN, Barclays issued a notice to close to the customer. Barclays attributed revenue of less than £260 in relation to any transactionsthis activity.

Based on an investigation undertaken on the account. The relationship was exited on 1 June 2015. Barclays derived no revenue throughout its relationship with the customer.

Identification of payments involving OFAC designated entity

In 2015,in 2017, Barclays identified one GBP payment made in 2016 that paymentscredited the account of a customer from their account at another UK Financial Institution. Barclays now believes that the payment related to itslegal advice the customer was providing to an OFAC SDN designated under the IFSR and NPWMD regimes, which is also a media company, had potentially been received indirectly from Press TV via a third partyMinistry of the Government of Iran. The payment message contained no reference to the SDN or Iran. Therefore, Barclays was not aware that the remittance was on behalf of the SDN. Barclays also identified two internal GBP transfers, one in 2016 and another in 2017, between the customer’s client account and the customer’s office account. All payment activity was covered by licences issued by HM Treasury and was made in accordance with applicable laws and regulations. Barclays attributed revenue of less than £10 in 2017 in relation to a weekly news show on Press TV. Press TV is designated by OFAC due to its Iranian government ownership. Payments totalling GBP 138,040.00 have been received by the customer from that third party since April 2013. The accounts of the customer and associated persons were closed in February 2016. Revenue derived in 2015 from all account activity was less than £250.this activity.

 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  331    291


Additional information

    

    

    

 

Payment relating to exports to Iran

In April 2015 Barclays established that it had processed an inbound US dollar payment on 27 October 2014, for which the ultimate remitter was located in Iran. The transaction related to the export of video surveillance products from the UK to Iran, for use on commercial aircraft belonging to state owned entity, ATA Airlines, located in Iran.

A voluntary disclosure of the possible violation of the Iranian Transactions Sanctions Regulations (31 CFR Part 560) under the Economic Sanctions Enforcement Procedures of OFAC, 31 CFR Part 501, Appendix A was made to OFAC on 22 October 2015. There were no US origin goods involved. Furthermore, there was no breach of UK/EU regulations as the payment was below reporting threshold and a UK licence was held for the export of the goods involved. Revenues earned by Barclays were less than GBP 10.00 in 2014, but the case was not identified for disclosure in the 20F filed in March 2015. No revenue was derived in 2015.

The customer’s transactional accounts are to be exited.

Ministry of Industry, Mine and Trade

During 2015, a payment from 2014 was identified as disclosable. The payment was from a London-based Barclays customer made a payment in favour of an entity in Kazakhstan called Joint Stock Company KTZ Express. The payment was stopped in sanctions screening due to a system match unrelated to Iran. However, it was subsequently released based on information provided by the customer that the final destination of the goods was Istanbul and that there was no direct or indirect involvement of any sanctioned countries.

A return of the funds was received in April 2014 from KTZ Express in favour of the Barclays customer and contained the reference “Prepayment return due to unperformed services”. The customer advised Barclays that the seller of the wheat was unable to supply the wheat and that the order was never fulfilled. In response to a Barclays request, the US correspondent bank supplied a copy of the invoice which showed the Government of Iran (the Ministry of Industry, Mine and Trade) as the intended recipient of the wheat and appears to show the customer was acting on behalf of the Government of Iran.

Less than GBP 10.00 of revenue was derived by Barclays in 2014. No revenue was derived in 2015.

332  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Summary of Certain Share and Cash Plans and Long-Term Incentive Plans

 

Summary of Barclays Group share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans

Barclays operates a number of share, and cash plans and long-term incentive plans. The principal plans used for awards made in or, in respect of, the 20152016 performance year are shown in the table below. Awards are granted either by the plan trustee or by the Board Remuneration Committee, and are subject to the applicable plan rules. Barclays has a number of employee benefit trusts which operate with these plans. In some cases the trustee purchases shares in the market to satisfy awards; in others, new issue or treasury shares may be used to satisfy awards where the appropriate shareholder approval has been obtained. Maria Ramos, a member of the Executive Committee and Chief Executive of Barclays Africa Group Limited, also participates in share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans of Barclays Africa Group Limited.

 

Summary of principal share and cash plans and long-term incentive plans

 

Name of plan

 

  

Eligible

employees

 

  

Executive

Directors

eligible

 

  

Delivery

 

  

Design details

 

Deferred Share

Share Value Plan (SVP)(DSVP)

  

All employees (including executive

(excluding Directors)

  

Yes

No
  

Deferred share bonus typically released in annual instalments over a three, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions

  

–  Plan typically used for mandatory deferral of a proportion of bonus into Barclays shares where bonus is above a threshold (set annually by the Committee)

 

–  This plan typically works in tandem with the CVP

 

–  Deferred share bonus vests over three, five or seven years in equal annual instalments dependent on future service

 

–  Vesting is subject to malus, and suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the plan

 

–  Dividend equivalents may be released based on the number of shares under award that are released

 

–  On cessation of employment, eligible leavers normally remain eligible for release (on the scheduled release dates) subject to the Committee and/or trustee discretion. For other leavers, awards will normally lapse

 

–  On change of control, awards may vest at the Committee’s and/or trustee’s discretion

 

–  For SVP awards made in 2015respect of 2016 to materialMaterial Risk Takers (“MRTs”), a holding period of 6 months will apply to shares (after tax) on release

CashShare Value Plan (CVP)(SVP)

  

All employees (excluding

(including executive

Directors)

  

No

Yes
  

Deferred cashshare bonus paidtypically released in annual instalments over a three, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions

  

–  The SVP is in all material respects the same as the DSVP described above. The principle differences are that executive Directors may only participate in the SVP and under the DSVP, if a MRT whose award is deferred over five or seven years resigns after the third anniversary of grant, they will be treated as an eligible leaver in respect of any unvested tranches of that award.

Cash Value Plan (CVP)All employees (excludingDirectors)NoDeferred cash bonus paid in annual instalments over a three, five or seven year period, dependent on future service and subject to malus provisions

–  Plan typically used for mandatory deferral of a proportion of bonus where bonus is above a threshold (set annually by the Committee)

 

–  This plan typically works in tandem with the SVPDSVP

 

–  Deferred cash bonus vests over three years in equal annual instalments dependent on future service

 

–  Vesting is subject to malus, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the plan

 

–  Participants may be awarded a service credit of 10% of the initial value of the award aton the same time as the final instalment is paid (provided they are in active employment)third anniversary of a grant

 

–  Change of control and leaver provisions are as for SVP

 

292    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  333


Additional information

Summary of Certain Share and Cash Plans and Long-Term Incentive Plans

    

    

    

 

Barclays LTIP

  

Selected employees (including

(including executive

Directors)

  

Yes

  

Awards over Barclays shares or over other capital instruments, subject to risk-adjusted performance conditions and malus provisions

  

–  Awarded on a discretionary basis with participation reviewed by the Committee

 

–  Awards only vest if the risk-adjusted performance conditions are satisfied over a three year period

 

–  Vesting is subject to malus, suspension provisions and the other provisions of the rules of the plan

 

–  For awards made for the 2013-2015 performance period, 50% of anyAny Barclays shares released under the Barclays LTIP award (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional two year holdingholder period

–  For awards made for of no less than the 2014-2016 performance period, any Barclays shares released (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional two year holding period

–  For the awards made for 2015-2017, any Barclays shares released (after payment of tax) will be subject to an additional two year holder period.minimum regulatory requirements (currently 6 months).

 

–  On cessation of employment, eligible leavers normally remain eligible for release (on the scheduled release dates)pro-rated for time and performance. For other leavers, awards will normally lapse

 

–  On change of control, awards may vest at the Committee’s discretion

 

Business Unit Long-Term Incentive Plans

Selected senior

employees

(excluding

executive Directors)

within each

business unit

No

Design varies by business unit. Awards made after at least three years, with additional deferral

after this period. Awards typically made 50% in cash and 50% in Barclays share awards

–  Participation on a discretionary basis

–  Risk-adjusted performance conditions vary by business unit to reflect applicable business strategy

–  Minimum plan duration is between three and five years (depending on plan)

–  Award is subject to malus provisions and provisions of the plan rules

–  Participation may cease if the participant leaves Barclays other than for eligible leaver reasons

–  No new awards under business unit long-term incentive plans are expected to be made in 2016

Sharesave

All employees in the UK and Ireland

Yes

Options over Barclays shares at a

–  HMRC approved in the UK and approved by the Revenue Commissioners in Ireland

334  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Summary of Certain Share and Cash Plans and Long-Term Incentive Plans

         
Sharesave

All employees in the

UK and Ireland

YesOptions over Barclays shares at a discount of 20%, with shares or cash value of savings delivered after three to five years

  

–  HMRC tax advantaged plan in the UK and approved by the Revenue Commissioners in Ireland

 

–  Opportunity to purchase Barclays shares at a discount price (currently a 20% discount) set on award date with savings made over three, five or seven year term

 

–  Maximum individual savings of £250 per month (315 in Ireland)

 

–  On cessation of employment, eligible leavers may exercise options and acquire shares to the extent of their savings for six months

 

–  On change of control, participants may exercise options and acquire shares to the extent of their savings for six months

 

–  At 31 December 2015, executive Directors and officers of Barclays PLC (involving 32 persons) held options to purchase a total of 17,206 (2014: 30,398) Barclays PLC ordinary shares of 25p each at prices ranging from 133.01p to 178p under Sharesave. The expiry dates on these options range from 1 May 2016 to May 1 2019.

Sharepurchase

  

All employees in the

UK

  

Yes

  

Barclays shares and dividend/matching shares held in trust for three to five years

  

–  HMRC approvedtax advantaged plan

 

–  Participants may purchase up to £1,800 of Barclays shares each tax year

 

–  Barclays matches the first £600 of shares purchased by employees on a one for one basis for each tax year

 

–  Dividends received are awarded as additional shares

 

–  Purchased shares may be withdrawn at any time (though if removed prior to three years from award, the corresponding matching shares are forfeited).

 

–  On cessation of employment, participants must withdraw shares

 

–  Depending on reason for and timing of leaving, matching shares may be forfeited

 

–  On change of control, participants are

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    293


Additional information

    able to instruct the Sharepurchase trustee how to act or vote on their behalf

Global Sharepurchase

  

Employees in

certain non-UK

jurisdictions

  

Yes

  

Barclays shares and dividend/matching shares held in trust for three to five years

  

–  Global Sharepurchase is an extension of the Sharepurchase plan offered in the UK

–  Operates in substantially the same way as Sharepurchase (see above)

 

294    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Related undertakings

The Group’s corporate structure consists of a number of related undertakings, comprising subsidiaries, joint ventures, associates and significant other interests. A full list of these undertakings, the country of incorporation and the ownership of each share class is set out below. The information is provided as at 31 December 2017.

The entities are grouped by the countries in which they are incorporated. The profits earned by the activities of these entities are in some cases taxed in countries other than the country of incorporation. Barclays’ 2017 Country Snapshot provides details of where the Group carries on its business, where its profits are subject to tax and the taxes it pays in each country it operates in.

Wholly owned subsidiaries

Unless otherwise stated the undertakings below are wholly owned and consolidated by Barclays and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary and/or common shares, 100% of the nominal value of which is held by Group subsidiaries.

Notes

A

Directly held by Barclays PLC

B

Partnership Interest

C

Membership Interest

D

Trust Interest

E

Guarantor

F

Preference Shares

G

A Preference Shares

H

B Preference Shares

I

Ordinary/Common Shares in addition to other shares

J

A Ordinary Shares

K

B Ordinary Shares

L

C Ordinary Shares

M

F Ordinary Shares

N

O Ordinary Shares

O

W Ordinary Shares

P

Redeemable Ordinary Shares

Q

Core Shares and Insurance (Classified) Shares

R

B, C, D, E (94.36%), F (94.36%), G (94.36%), H (94.36%), I (94.36%), J (95.23%) and K Class Shares

S

A Unit Shares, B Unit Shares

T

Class A Residual Shares, Class B Residual Shares

U

A Voting Shares, BNon-Voting Shares

VClass A Ordinary Shares, Class A Preference Shares, Class B Ordinary Shares, Class C Ordinary Shares, Class C Preference Shares, Class D Ordinary Shares, Class D Preference Shares, Class E Ordinary Shares, Class E Preference Shares, Class F Ordinary Shares, Class F Preference Shares, Class H 2012 Ordinary Shares, Class H 2012 Preference Shares, Class H Ordinary Shares, Class H Preference Shares, Class I Preference Shares, Class J Preference Shares
WFirst Class Common Shares, Second Class Common Shares
XPEF Carry Shares
YEUR Tracker 1 Shares, GBP Tracker 1 Shares, USD Tracker 1 Shares, USD Tracker 2 Shares, USD Tracker 3 shares
ZNot Consolidated (refer to Note 37 Structured entities)
AAUSD Linked Ordinary Shares
BBRedeemable Class B Shares
CCA Ordinary, Y Ordinary, Z Ordinary
DDNominal Shares
EEA Ordinary, D Ordinary, ZI Ordinary
FFZ Ordinary
GGClass A1 Ordinary Shares, Class A2 Ordinary Shares
HHClass A Unit Shares
IIA Shares – Tranche I, Premium – Tranche I, C Shares – Tranche II, Premium – Tranche II
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
United Kingdom
– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP
Aequor Investments Limited
Ardencroft Investments Limited
B D & B Investments Limited
B.P.B. (Holdings) Limited
Barafor Limited
Barclay Leasing Limited
Barclays (Security Realisation) Limited
Barclays Aegis TrustD
Barclays Africa Group Holdings LimitedJ, K
Barclays Aldersgate Investments Limited
Barclays Asset Management Limited
Barclays Bank PLCA, F, I
Barclays Bank UK PLC
Barclays Cantal Investments TrustD
Barclays Capital Asia Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Finance Limited
Barclays Capital Japan Securities Holdings Limited
Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à.r.l. TrustD
Barclays Capital Margin Financing Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.2) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees (No.3) Limited
Barclays Capital Nominees Limited
Barclays Capital Principal Investments Limited
Barclays Capital Securities Client Nominee Limited
Barclays Capital Securities LimitedF, I
Barclays CCP Funding LLPB
Barclays Converted Investments (No.2) Limited
Barclays Converted Investments Limited
Barclays Direct Investing Nominees Limited
Barclays Directors Limited
Barclays Equity Holdings Limited
Barclays Equity Index Investments Bare TrustD
Barclays Executive Schemes Trustees Limited
Barclays Financial Planning Nominee Company Limited
Barclays Funds Investments Limited
Barclays Global Shareplans Nominee Limited
Barclays Group Holdings Limited
Barclays Group Operations Limited
Barclays Industrial Development Limited
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Barclays Industrial Investments Limited
Barclays Insurance Services Company Limited
Barclays Investment Management Limited
Barclays Investment Solutions Limited
Barclays Lamorak TrustD
Barclays Leasing (No.9) Limited
Barclays Long Island Limited
Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings TrustD
Barclays Marlist Limited
Barclays Mercantile Business Finance Limited
Barclays Mercantile Limited
Barclays Nominees (Branches) Limited
Barclays Nominees (George Yard) Limited
Barclays Nominees (K.W.S.) Limited
Barclays Nominees (Provincial) Limited
Barclays Pension Funds Trustees Limited
Barclays Private Bank
Barclays Private Banking Services Limited
Barclays SAMS Limited
Barclays Security Trustee LimitedA
Barclays Services LimitedA
Barclays Services (Japan) Limited
Barclays Shea Limited
Barclays Singapore Global Shareplans Nominee Limited
Barclays Stockbrokers Limited
Barclays Unquoted Investments Limited
Barclays Unquoted Property Investments Limited
Barclays USD Funding LLPB
Barclays Wealth Nominees Limited
Barclayshare Nominees Limited
Barcosec Limited
Barclays (Barley) LimitedI, J, K
Barometers Limited
Barsec Nominees Limited
BB Client Nominees Limited
BMBF (No.21) Limited
BMBF (No.24) Limited
BMBF (No.3) Limited
BMBF (No.6) Limited
BMBF (No.9) Limited
BMI (No.9) Limited
BNRI ENG 2013 Limited PartnershipB
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

BNRI ENG 2014 Limited Partnership

B

BNRI ENG GP LLP

B

BNRI England 2010 Limited Partnership

B

BNRI England 2011 Limited Partnership

B

BNRI England 2012 Limited Partnership

B

Carnegie Holdings Limited

I, J, K

Chapelcrest Investments Limited

Clydesdale Financial Services Limited

Cobalt Investments Limited

Condor No.1 Limited Partnership

B

CP Flower Guaranteeco (UK) Limited

E

CP Propco 1 Limited

CP Propco 2 Limited

CP Topco Limited

J, K

CPIA England 2008 Limited Partnership

B

CPIA England 2009 Limited Partnership

B

CPIA England No.2 Limited Partnership

B

DMW Realty Limited

Durlacher Nominees Limited

Eagle Financial and Leasing Services (UK) Limited

Equity Value Investments Limited Liability

B

Partnership

Equity Value Investments No.1 Limited

Equity Value Investments No.2 Limited

Finpart Nominees Limited

FIRSTPLUS Financial Group PLC

Foltus Investments Limited

Gerrard Financial Planning Limited

Gerrard Management Services Limited

Gerrard Nominees Limited

Global Dynasty Natural Resource Private Equity

B

Limited Partnership

Globe Nominees Limited

Greig, Middleton Nominees Limited

Hawkins Funding Limited

Heraldglen Limited

G, H, I

Investors In Infrastructure Limited

J.V. Estates Limited

Keepier Investments

Kirsche Investments Limited
Lombard Street Nominees Limited
Long Island Assets Limited
Maloney Investments Limited

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  335    295


Additional information

    

    

    

 

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

 

Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Menlo Investments Limited
Mercantile Credit Company Limited
Mercantile Leasing Company (No.132) Limited
MK Opportunities LPB
Murray House Investment Management Limited
Naxos Investments Limited
North Colonnade Investments Limited
Northwharf Investments LimitedI, X
Northwharf Nominees Limited
PIA England No.2 Limited PartnershipB
Real Estate Participation Management Limited
Real Estate Participation Services Limited
Relative Value Investments UK LimitedB
Liability Partnership
Relative Value Trading Limited
Roder Investments No.1 LimitedI, Y
Roder Investments No.2 LimitedI, Y
Ruthenium Investments Limited
RVT CLO Investments LLPB
Solution Personal Finance Limited
Surety Trust Limited
Swan Lane Investments Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.1 Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.2 Limited
US Real Estate Holdings No.3 Limited
W.D. Pension Fund Limited
Wedd Jefferson (Nominees) Limited
Westferry Investments Limited
Woolwich Homes Limited
Woolwich Plan Managers Limited
Woolwich Qualifying Employee Share
Ownership Trustee Limited
Woolwich Surveying Services Limited
Zeban Nominees Limited

– Hill House, 1 Little New Street,

London, EC4A 3TR

Barclays BPT (in liquidation)
Barclays Mercantile Highland Finance Limited
(in liquidation)
Boudeuse Limited (in liquidation)
Denham Investments Limited (in liquidation)
Exshelfco (DZBC) (in liquidation)
Greig Middleton Holdings Limited
(in liquidation)
Scotlife Home Loans (No.3) Limited

(in liquidation)

Woolwich Assured Homes Limited

(in liquidation)

Woolwich Homes (1987) Limited

E

(in liquidation)

Woolwich Limited (in liquidation)

– 5 The North Colonnade, Canary Wharf, London, E14 4BB

BBR Holdings Trust

D

Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg Trust

D

CPIA Canada Holdings

B

Leonis Investments LLP

B

Preferred Liquidity Limited Partnership

B
– Aurora Building, 120 Bothwell Street, Glasgow, G2 7JS

R.C. Grieg Nominees Limited

– 50 Lothian Road, Festival Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9WJ

BNRI PIA Scot GP Limited

BNRI Scots GP, LLP

B

Pecan Aggregator LP

B
– Logic House, Waterfront Business Park, Fleet Road, Fleet, GU1 3SB

The Logic Group Enterprises Limited

The Logic Group Holdings Limited

J
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Argentina
– 855 Leandro N.Alem Avenue, 8th Floor, Buenos Aires
Compañía Sudamerica S.A.
– Marval, O’Farrell & Mairal, Av. Leandro N. Alem 882, Buenos
Compañia Regional del Sur S.A.
Brazil
– Av. Brigadeiro Faria Lima, No. 4.440, 12th Floor, Bairro Itaim, Bibi, Sao Paulo, CEP,04538-132
BNC Brazil Consultoria Empresarial Ltda
Barclays Brasil Assessoria Financeira Ltda.
Canada
– 333 Bay Street, Suite 4910, Toronto ON M5H 2R2
Barclays Capital Canada Inc.
Stikeman Elliott LLP, 199 Bay Street, 5300 Commerce Court, West, Toronto ON M5L 1B9
Barclays Corporation Limited
Cayman Islands
– Maples Corporate Services Limited, PO Box 309GT, Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman,KY1-1104
Alymere Investments LimitedG, H, I
Analytical Trade UK Limited
Barclays Capital (Cayman) Limited
Braven Investments No.1 Limited
Capton Investments Limited
Claudas Investments LimitedG, H, I
Claudas Investments Two Limited
CPIA Investments No.1 LimitedV
CPIA Investments No.2 LimitedF, I
Furbridge Investments Limited (in liquidation)
Hurley Investments No.1 Limited
Iris Investments 1 LimitedG, H, I
Mintaka Investments No. 4 Limited
OGP Leasing Limited
Pelleas Investments Limited
Pelleas Investments Two Limited
Pippin Island Investments Limited
Razzoli Investments LimitedF, I
RVH LimitedF, I
– PO Box 1093, Queensgate House, Grand Cayman,KY1-1102
Blaytell Limited
Coskwo Limited
Godler Limited
Harflane Limited
Hentock Limited
Hollygrice Limited
Pilkbull Limited
Strickyard Limited
Winhall Limited
– 190 Elgin Avenue, George Town, Grand Cayman,KY1-9005
Calthorpe Investments Limited
Gallen Investments Limited
JV Assets LimitedL
Palomino LimitedZ
Wessex Investments Limited
Walkers Corporate Limited, Cayman Corporate Centre, 27 Hospital Road, George Town,KY1– 9008
Long Island Holding B Limited
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
China
– Room 213, Building 1, No. 1000 Chenhui Road, ZhangjiangHi-Tech Park, Shanghai
Barclays Technology Centre (Shanghai)
Company Limited
France

– 34/36 avenue de Friedland, Paris, 75008

BBAIL SAS

Germany
– TaunusTurm, Taunustor 1, 60310, Frankfurt
Barclays Capital Effekten GmbH
– c/o SFM Deutschland GmbH, Gruneburgweg58-62, 60322 , Frankfurt am Main
Baubecon Holding 1 GmbH (in liquidation)
– Stuttgarter Straße55-57, 73033 Göppingen
Adler Toy Beteiligungs GmbH
Holding Stuttgarter Straße GmbH
Guernsey
– P.O. Box 33, Maison Trinity, Trinity Square, St. Peter Port, GY1 4AT
Barclays Insurance Guernsey PCC LimitedQ
– PO BOX 41, Floor 2, Le Marchant House, Le Truchot, St Peter Port, GY1 3BE
Barclays Nominees (Guernsey) Limited
Hong Kong
– 42nd floor Citibank Tower, Citibank Plaza, 3 Garden Road
Barclays Bank (Hong Kong Nominees) Limited (in liquidation)
Barclays Capital Asia Nominees Limited (in liquidation)
– Level 41, Cheung Kong Center, 2 Queen’s Road Central
Barclays Asia Limited
Barclays Capital Asia Limited
India
– 208 Ceejay House, Shivsagar Estate, Dr A Beasant Road, Worli, Mumbai, 400 018
Barclays Securities (India) Private Limited
Barclays Wealth Trustees (India) Private Limited
– 67, Maker Tower ‘F’ 6th Floor, Cuffe Parade, Mumbai, 400 005
Barclays Holdings India Private Limited (in liquidation)
– Ground to Fourth Floor, Wing 3 – Cluster A,Eon Free Zone, MIDC Knowledge Park, Pune, 411014
Barclays Global Service Centre Private Limited
– Level 10, Block B6, Nirlon Knowledge Park, Off Western Express Highway, Goregaon (East), Mumbai, 40063
Barclays Investments & Loans (India) LimitedF, I
Indonesia
– Barclays House, 12th Floor, Jl. Jend Sudirman Kav.22-23, Jakarta, 12920
PT Bank Barclays Indonesia (in liquidation)
– Plaza Lippo, 10th Floor, Jalan Jend, Sudirman Kav 25, Jakarta, 12920
PT Bhadra Buana Persada (in liquidation)
Ireland
– Two Park Place, Hatch Street, Dublin 2
Barclaycard International Payments Limited
Barclays Bank Ireland Public Limited Company

296    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Isle of Man
– Barclays House, Victoria Street, Douglas
Barclays Nominees (Manx) Limited
– P O Box 9, Victoria Street, Douglas, IM99 1AJ
Barclays Private Clients International LimitedJ, K
– 2nd Floor, St Georges Court, Upper Church Street, Douglas, IM1 1EE
Barclays Holdings (Isle of Man) Limited (in liquidation)
Japan
10-1, Roppongi6-chome,Minato-ku, Tokyo
Barclays Funds and Advisory Japan Limited
Barclays Securities Japan Limited
Barclays Wealth Services Limited
Jersey
– Third Floor, 37 Esplanade, St. Helier, JE2 3QA
CP Newco 1 Limited
CP Newco2 LimitedJ, K
CP Newco3 Limited
– La Motte Chambers, St Helier, JE1 1BJ
Barclays Services Jersey Limited
39-41 Broad Street, St Helier, JE2 3RR
Barclays Wealth Management Jersey Limited BIFML PTC Limited
– 13 Castle Street, St. Helier, JE4 5UT
Barclays Index Finance TrustS
– Lime Grove House, Green Street, St Helier, JE1 2ST
Barbridge LimitedI, DD
– 13 Library Place, St Helier, JE4 8NE
Barclays Nominees (Jersey) Limited
Barclaytrust Channel Islands Limited
– Appleby Trust (Jersey) Limited, PO Box 207,13-14 Esplanade, St Helier, JE1 1BD
MK Opportunities GP Ltd
Korea, Republic of
A-1705 Yeouido Park Centre,28-3
Yeouido-dong,Yeongdeungpo-gu, Seoul
Barclays Korea GP Limited
Luxembourg
– 9, allée Scheffer,L-2520
Barclays Aegis Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Alzin Investments S.à r.l.
Barclays Bayard Investments S.à r.l.J, K
Barclays Bedivere Investments S.à r.l.

Barclays Bordang Investments S.à r.l.

Barclays BR Holdings S.à r.l.

Barclays BR Investments S.à r.l.

Barclays Cantal Investments S.à r.l.

GG

Barclays Capital Luxembourg S.à r.l.

Barclays Capital Trading Luxembourg S.à r.l.

J, K

Barclays Claudas Investments Partnership

B

Barclays Equity Index Investments S.à r.l.

Barclays Lamorak Investments S.à r.l.

Barclays Leto Investments S.à r.l.

Barclays Luxembourg EUR Holdings S.à r.l

Barclays Luxembourg Finance S.à r.l.

Barclays Luxembourg GBP Holdings S.à r.l.

Barclays Luxembourg Holdings S.à r.l.

I, AA

Barclays Luxembourg Holdings SSC

B

Barclays Luxembourg USD Holdings S.à r.l.

J, K

Barclays Pelleas Investments Limited Partnership

B

Barclays Pelleas Investments S.à r.l.

Blossom Finance General Partnership

B
68-70 Boulevard de la Petrusse,L-2320 Adler Toy Holding Sarl
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Malaysia
– Unit30-01, Level 30, Tower A, Vertical Business Suite, Avenue 3, Bangsar South, No.8, Jalan Kerinchi, Kuala Lumpur, 59200
Barclays Capital Markets Malaysia Sdn Bhd. (in liquidation)F, I
Mauritius
– C/O Rogers Capital Corporate Services, St. Louis Business Centre, Cnr Desroches & St. Louis Streets, Port Louis
Barclays Capital Mauritius Limited
Barclays Capital Securities Mauritius Limited
– Fifth Floor, Ebene Esplanade, 24 Cybercity, Ebene
Barclays (H&B) Mauritius Limited
Barclays Mauritius Overseas Holdings Limited
Mexico
– Paseo de la Reforma 505, 41 Floor, Torre Mayor, Col. Cuauhtemoc, CP 06500
Barclays Bank Mexico, S.A.K, M
Barclays Capital Casa de Bolsa, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Grupo Financiero Barclays Mexico, S.A. de C.V.K, M
Servicios Barclays, S.A. de C.V.
Monaco
– 31 Avenue de la Costa, BP 339
Barclays Wealth Asset Management (Monaco) S.A.M
Netherlands
– Strawinskylaan 3105, 1077 ZX, Amsterdam
Barclays SLCSM Funding B.V. (in liquidation)
– De Boelelaan 7, 1083 Hj Amsterdam
Chewdef BidCo BV. (in liquidation)
Nigeria
– Southgate House, Udi Street, Osborne
Estate, Ikoyi, Lagos
Barclays Group Representative Office (NIG)
Limited
Philippines
– 21/F, Philamlife Tower, 8767 Paseo deRoxas,Makati City, 1226
Meridian(SPV-AMC) Corporation

Russian Federation

– Four Winds Plaza, 1st Tverskaya-Yamskaya Str , Moscow 21, 125047
Limited Liability Company Barclays Capital (in liquidation)
Saudi Arabia
– 18th Floor Al Faisaliah Tower , Riyadh, 11311
Barclays Saudi Arabia (in liquidation)
Singapore
– 10 Marina Boulevard,#24-01 Marina Bay Financial Centre, Tower 2, 018983
Barclays Bank (Singapore Nominees) Pte Ltd
Barclays Bank (South East Asia) Nominees Pte Ltd
Barclays Capital Futures (Singapore) Private Limited
Barclays Capital Holdings (Singapore) Private Limited
Barclays Merchant Bank (Singapore) Ltd.
Wholly owned subsidiariesNote
Spain
– Plaza De Colon 1, 28046, Madrid
Barclays Tenedora De Immuebles SL.
BVP Galvani Global, S.A.U.Z
Switzerland
Chemin de Grange Canal18-20, PO Box 3941, 1211, Geneva
Barclays Bank (Suisse) S.A.

BPB Holdings SA

Barclays Switzerland Services SA

United States

– Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington DE 19801

Archstone Equity Holdings Inc

Barclays BWA, Inc.

Barclays Capital Commodities Corporation

Barclays Capital Derivatives Funding LLC

C

Barclays Capital Energy Inc.

Barclays Capital Real Estate Finance Inc.

Barclays Capital Real Estate Holdings Inc.

Barclays Capital Real Estate Inc.

Barclays Commercial Mortgage Securities LLC

C

Barclays Electronic Commerce Holdings Inc.

Barclays Financial LLC

C

Barclays Group US Inc.

Barclays Oversight Management Inc.

Barclays Receivables LLC

C

Barclays Services Corporation

Barclays US CCP Funding LLC

C

Barclays US Funding LLC

C

Barclays US LLC

G, I

Barclays US Investments LLC

K, GG

BCAP LLC

C

CPIA Equity No. 1 Inc.

Crescent Real Estate Member LLC

C

Gracechurch Services Corporation

Long Island Holding A LLC

C

LTDL Holdings LLC

C

Marbury Holdings LLC

Protium Finance I LLC

C

Protium Master Mortgage LP

B

Protium REO I LP

B

Securitized Asset Backed Receivables LLC

C

Sutton Funding LLC

C

TPLL LLC

C

TPProperty LLC

C

US Secured Investments LLC

C
– 1201 North Market Street, P.O. Box 1347 Wilmington, DE19801

Barclays Bank Delaware

F, I

Procella Investments LLC

C

Procella Investments No.1 LLC

C

Procella Investments No.2 LLC

C

Procella Investments No.3 LLC

C

Procella Swaps LLC

C

Verain Investments LLC

– 2711 Centerville Road, Suite 400, Wilmington DE 19808

Analog Analytics Inc

Protium Master Grantor Trust

D
– 251 Little Falls Drive, New Castle County, Wilmington DE 19808

Barclays Capital Equities Trading GP

B

Barclays Capital Holdings Inc.

G, H, I

Lagalla Investments LLC

Relative Value Holdings, LLC

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    297


Additional information

Related undertakings continued

Wholly owned subsidiariesNote

– 745 Seventh Avenue, New York NY 10019

Alynore Investments Limited Partnership

B

Curve Investments GP

B

HYMF, Inc.

Preferred Liquidity, LLC

J
– CT Corporation System, One Corporate Center, Floor 11, Hartford CT 06103-3220

Barclays Capital Inc.

– c/o RL&F Service Corp, One Rodney Square, 10th Floor, Tenth and King Streets, Wilmington DE 19801

Analytical Trade Holdings LLC

Analytical Trade Investments LLC

BB

– 100 South West Street, Wilmington DE 19801

Barclays Dryrock Funding LLC

C

Wilmington Riverfront Receivables LLC

J, K

– 15 East North Street, Dover DE 19801

Barclays Services LLC

C
– CT Corporation System, 225 Hillsborough Street, Raleigh, NC 27603

Barclays US GPF Inc.

– CT Corporation System, 350 North St. Paul Street, Dallas TX 75201

La Torretta Beverages LLC

C

La Torretta Hospitality LLC

C

La Torretta Operations LLC

C
– 500 Forest Point Circle, Charlotte, North Carolina 28273

Equifirst Corporation (in liquidation)

– Aon Insurance Managers (USA) Inc., 76 St. Paul Street, Suite 500, Burlington, VT05401-4477

Barclays Insurance U.S. Inc.

Zimbabwe

– 2 Premium Close, Mount Pleasant Business Park, Mount Pleasant , Harare

Branchcall Computers (Pvt) Limited

Other Related Undertakings

Unless otherwise stated, the undertakings below are consolidated and the share capital disclosed comprises ordinary and/or common shares which are held by subsidiaries of the Group. The Group’s overall ownership percentage is provided for each undertaking.

 

LOGO

Risk management

strategy, governance

and risk cultureOther related undertakings

  LOGO
Per-
centage

Note
United Kingdom

– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP

Barclaycard Funding PLC

75.00%J

Claas Finance Limited

51.00%K

PSA Credit Company Limited (in

50.00%J, L

liquidation)

Barclays Covered Bond Funding LLP

50.00%B
– 1 Poultry, London, England, EC2R 8EJ

Igloo Regeneration (General Partner)

25.00%L, Z

Limited

– 1 Robeson Way, Sharston Green Business Park, Manchester, M22 4SW

KDC Holdings Limited

37.41%EE, Z
3-5 London Road, Rainham, Kent, ME8 7RG

Trade Ideas Limited

20.00%Z
– Derby Training Centre, Ascot Drive, Derby, DE24 8GW

Develop Training Group Limited

65.47%CC, Z
– 50 Lothian Road, Festival Square, Edinburgh, EH3 9BY

Equistone Founder Partner II L.P.

20.00%B, Z

Equistone Founder Partner III L.P.

35.00%B, Z

– Building 6 Chiswick Park, 566

Chiswick High Road, London W4 5HR

Intelligent Processing Solutions Limited

19.50%Z
– Oak House, Ellesmere Port, Cheshire, CH65 9HQ

Elan Homes Holdings Limited

59.94%J, Z
– 16 Palace Street, London, SW1E 5JD

Barclays Alma Mater Management

30.00%B, Z

Limited Partnership

20-22 Bedford Row, London, WC1R 4JS

Cyber Defence Alliance Limited

25.00%E, Z
– 30 Gresham Street, London, EC2V 7PG

Gresham Leasing March (3) Limited

30.00%Z
– 80 New Bond Street, London, W1S 1SB

GN Tower Limited

50.00%Z

GW City Ventures Limited

50.00%K, Z
– 5th Floor, 70 Gracechurch Street, London, EC3V 0XL

Camperdown UK Limited

74.00%J
– 5 North Colonnade, Canary Wharf, London, E14 4BB

BEIF Management Limited Partnership

30.00%B, Z
– 2nd Floor, 110 Cannon Street, London, EC4N 6EU

Vectorcommand Limited (in liquidation)

30.39%J, K, Z
– 55 Baker Street, London, W1U 7EU

Formerly H Limited (in liquidation)

70.32%J, Z
– Countryside House, The Warley Hill Business Park, The Drive, Brentwood, Essex, CM13 3AT

Woolwich Countryside Limited

50.00%O, Z
– Haberfield Old Moor Road, Wennington, Lancaster, LA2 8PD

Full House Holdings Limited

67.43%J, Z
– 6th Floor 60 Gracechurch Street, London, EC3V 0HR

BMC (UK) Limited

40.18%J, F, Z
– Central House, 124 High Street, Hampton Hill, Middlesex TW12 1NS

Rio Laranja Holdings Limited

45.00%J, Z
13-15 York Buildings, London, WC2N 6JU

BGF Group Limited

24.40%Z

Other related undertakings


Per-
centage

Note

Cayman Islands

– Maples Corporate Services Limited, PO Box 309GT, Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman,KY1-1104

Cupric Canyon Capital LP

40.19%HH, Z

Southern Peaks Mining LP

55.76%HH, Z

Third Energy Holdings Limited

78.94%F, J, K, Z

Germany

– Schopenhauerstraße 10,D-90409, Nurnberg

Eschenbach Holding GmbH

21.70%Z

Indonesia

– Wisma GKBI 39th Floor, Suite 3906, Jl. Jend. Sudirman No.28, Jakarta, 10210

PT Barclays Capital Securities

99.00%

Indonesia (in liquidation)

Korea, Republic of

– 18th Floor, Daishin Finance Centre, 343, Samil-daero,Jung-go, Seoul

Woori BC Pegasus Securitization

70.00%W

Specialty Co., Limited

Luxembourg

– 9, allée Scheffer,L-2520

BNRI Limehouse No.1 Sarl

96.30%R

Partnership Investments S.à r.l.

33.40%I, J ,K ,L

Preferred Funding S.à r.l.

33.33%H

Preferred Investments S.à r.l.

33.33%H, I

Malta

– RS2 Buildings, Fort Road, Mosta MST 1859

RS2 Software PLC

18.25%Z

Monaco

– 31 Avenue de la Costa, Monte Carlo
Societe Civile Immobiliere 31 Avenue de la Costa75.00%

Netherlands

– Alexanderstraat 18, 2514 JM, The Hague

Tulip Oil Holding BV

30.26%II, Z

Sweden

– c/o ForeningsSparbanken AB, 105 34 Stockholm

EnterCard Group AB

40.00%K, Z

United States of America

– 777 Main Street, Fort Worth TX 76102

CRE Diversified Holdings LLC

80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Greenway Plaza SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Crown Land Holding SPV LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential LP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent Plaza Residential, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Resort Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences GP, LLC80.00%C, Z
Crescent Tower Residences, L.P.80.00%B, Z
Crescent TRS Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
CREW Tahoe Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
DBL Texas Holdings LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Development LLC80.00%C, Z
Desert Mountain Properties Limited74.40%B, Z
Partnership
East West Resort Development VII LLC80.00%C, Z

Mira Vista Development LLC

78.40%C, Z

Mountainside Partners LLC

80.00%C, Z

298    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


In this section we describe the approaches and strategies for managing risks at Barclays. It containsAdditional information on how risk management functions are organised, how they ensure their independence and foster a sound risk culture throughout the organisation.

    

    

Related undertakings continued

Other related undertakings


Per-
centage

Note
§– 126 Riverfront Lane , 5th Floor, Drawer 2770, Avon CO 81620A discussion of how our risk management strategy is designed to foster a strong risk culture is contained on pages 337 and 338

Blue River Land Company, LLC

39.55C, Z
East West Resort Development IV, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11B, Z
East West Resort Development VIII, L.P., L.L.L.P.71.11B, Z
East West Resort Development XIV, L.P., L.L.L.P.33.52B, Z

EWRD Summit Holding, L.P., L.L.L.P.

79.57B, Z

EWRD Summit, LLC

79.10C, Z
– 3001 Northstar Drive, C200, Truckee CA 96161

CREW Tahoe LLC

60.80C, Z
East West Resort Development V, L.P., L.L.L.P.74.75B, Z

Gray’s Station, LLC

56.96C, Z

Home Run Tahoe, LLC

60.82C, Z

Northstar Mountain Properties, LLC

60.82C, Z

Northstar Trailside Townhomes, LLC

60.82C, Z

Northstar Village Townhomes, LLC

56.93C, Z

Old Greenwood Realty, Inc.

60.80Z

Old Greenwood, LLC

60.80C, Z

Tahoe Club Company, LLC

60.80C, Z

Tahoe Mountain Resorts, LLC

60.82C, Z

The Glades Tahoe, LLC

60.82C, Z
– Corporation Service Company, 2711 Centreville Road, Suite 400, Wilmington DE 19808

Crescent Fresh Series B Hold Co.

80.00Z

Mountainside Boulders, LLC

60.82C, Z

MVWP Development LLC

30.40C, Z

MVWP Investors LLC

60.80C, Z

Stellar Residences, LLC

60.82C, Z

Stellar Townhomes, LLC

60.82C, Z
– 1701 Wynkoop Street, Suite 140, Box 47, Denver, CO 80202
Central Platte Valley Management, LLC51.78C, Z

St. Charles Place, LLC

47.63C, Z

The Park at One Riverfront, LLC

47.63C, Z

Union Center LLC

51.78C, Z
– Corporation Trust Company, Corporation Trust Center, 1209 Orange Street, Wilmington DE 19801

DG Solar Lessee II, LLC

50.00C, Z

DG Solar Lessee, LLC

50.00C, Z

VS BC Solar Lessee I LLC

50.00C, Z
– East West Partners, Inc., 126 Riverfront Lane, 5th Floor, Avon CO 81620

Tahoe Club Employee Company

60.80Z
– 6600 Mira Vista Blvd., Fort Worth TX 76132

Mira Vista Golf Club, L.C.

76.83Z
– 251 Little Falls Drive, New Castle County, Wilmington DE 19808

Crescent Legacy LLC

80.00C, Z

Surrey Funding Corporation

99.45

Sussex Purchasing Corporation

99.45
– 1415 Louisiana Street, Suite 1600, Houston, Texas, 77002

Sabine Oil & Gas Holdings, Inc.

23.25Z

South Africa

– 9 Elektron Road, Techno Park, Stellenbosch 7600

Imalivest Mineral Resources LP

69.88J, Z

Subsidiaries by virtue of control

The related undertakings below are subsidiaries in accordance with s.1162 Companies Act 2006 as Barclays can exercise dominant influence or control over them.

 

Subsidiaries by virtue of control


Per-
centage

Note

§United Kingdom

– 1 Churchill Place, London, E14 5HP
Oak Pension Asset Management Limited00.00Z
Water Street Investments Limited00.00Z

Cayman Islands

– PO Box 309GT, Ugland House, South Church Street, Grand Cayman,KY1-1104

Hornbeam Limited

00.00Z

Barclays US Holdings Limited

10.00J

Joint Ventures

The related undertakings below are Joint Ventures in accordance with s.18, Schedule 4, The Large andMedium-sized Companies and Groups (Accounts and Reports) Regulations 2008 and are proportionally consolidated.

Joint Ventures


Per-
centage

Note

United Kingdom

– All Saints Triangle, Caledonian Road, London, N1 9UT
Vaultex UK Limited50.00
Joint management factors

The Joint Venture Board comprises two Barclays representative directors, two JV partner directors and threenon-JV partner directors. The Board are responsible for setting the company strategy and budgets.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    299


Additional information

Barclays Africa Group Limited Separation Arrangements

In connection with Barclays’ sell down of its holdings in Barclays Africa Group Limited (“BAGL”) and the anticipated regulatory deconsolidation of BAGL from the Barclays Group, Barclays and BAGL entered into agreements governing the terms on which the separation would occur (the “Separation Arrangements”).

The separation terms included contributions from Barclays to BAGL totalling £765 million, payable in instalments, to support the separation of BAGL from the Barclays Group. Under the Separation Arrangements, Barclays agreed, among other things, to indemnify BAGL against certain potential losses suffered by BAGL, including as a result of (i) the business of Barclays Group, untrue statements or omissions contained in any document issued by the Barclays Group in connection with any placing or marketing of BAGL shares under the sell down of BAGL shares and any failure by any Barclays Group company to discharge any liability in respect of taxation for which the Barclays Group is primarily liable (the “Perimeter Indemnity”); or (ii) BAGL having adhered to any Barclays policy which is not compliant with the laws for which that policy was designed (the “Policy Indemnity”). Barclays’ liability under the Perimeter Indemnity is uncapped and under the Policy Indemnity is capped at £614.7 million.

The Separation Arrangements include a transitional services agreement (the “TSA”) which replaced previous intra-group arrangements between members of the Barclays Group and members of the BAGL group. The TSA came into effect on 6 June 2017 and the term of the TSA will be determined by the timeframes specified for the individual services being provided, which range from three months to three years, subject to extension(s).

The Separation Arrangements also provide for a governance framework which applies during the implementation of the separation. Certain protective covenants (including non-compete arrangements and non-solicit obligations) also apply to the Barclays Group, in respect of the countries BAGL operates in, until 6 June 2020. These protective covenants are subject to certain agreed carve outs, including where Barclays and BAGL continue to cooperate for the benefit of mutual clients, where appropriate.

The Separation Arrangements also include a Transitional Trade Mark Licence agreement (the “TTML”), which came into effect on 6 June 2017, and replaced previous trademark licence agreements between the Barclays Group and the BAGL group. The TTML allows BAGL to continue to use the Barclays brand for up to 12 months in South Africa and for up to three years in other BAGL territories, subject to limited exemptions.

300    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

In this section we describe the approaches and strategies for managing risks at Barclays. It contains information on how risk management functions are organised, how they maintain their independence and foster a sound risk culture throughout the organisation.

The Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF) sets out the tools, techniques and organisational arrangements to enable all material risks to be identified and understood (see page 302).

A governance structure, encompassing the organisation of the function as well as executive and Board committees, supports the continued application of the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF).ERMF. This is discussed in pages 338302 to 341

304.

 

§

The ERMF sets out the tools, techniques and organisational arrangements  A discussion of how our risk management strategy is designed to ensure all material risks are identified and understood (seefoster a strong risk culture is contained on pages 344 and 345)
305.

 

§

Pages 346306 to 353308 describe group-wide risk management tools that support risk management, ExCoExecutive Committee and the Board in discharging their responsibilities, and how they are applied in the strategic planning cycle.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    301


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

 

Introduction

Barclays engages in activities which entail risk taking, every day, throughout its business. This section introduces these risks, and outlines the Group’s strategykey governance arrangements for managing riskthem. These include roles and how risk culture has been developedresponsibilities, frameworks, policies and standards, assurance and lessons learned processes. The Group’s approach to ensure that therefostering a strong Risk Culture is a set of objectives and practices which are shared across the Group. It provides details of the Group’s governance, specific information on policies that the Group determines to be of particular significance in the current operating environment, committee structures and how responsibilities are assigned. The last part of the section provides an insight into how risk management is part of the strategy setting process, including the planning process, the setting of risk appetite and stress testing across the Group.also described.

Risk Management Strategy

The Group has clear risk management objectives and a well-established strategy to deliver them through core risk management processes.

At a strategic level, the Group’s risk management objectives are to:

§identify the Group’s significant risks

§formulate the Group’s risk appetite and ensure that business profile and plans are consistent with it

§optimise risk/return decisions by taking them as close as possible to the business, while establishing strong and independent review and challenge structures

§ensure that business growth plans are properly supported by effective risk infrastructure

§manage risk profile to ensure that specific financial deliverables remain achievable under a range of adverse business conditions

§help executives improve the control and co-ordination of risk taking across the business.

A key element in the setting of clear management objectives is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), which sets out key activities, tools, techniques and organisational arrangements so that material risks facing the Group are identified and understood, and that appropriate responses are in place to protect Barclays and prevent detriment to its customers, employees or community. This will help the Group meet its goals, and enhance its ability to respond to new opportunities.

The ERMF covers those risks incurredsets the strategic direction for risk management by defining standards, objectives and responsibilities for all areas of Barclays. It supports the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO) in embedding effective risk management and a strong Risk Culture.

The ERMF sets out:

  Principal Risks faced by the Group that were foreseeable, continuous, and sufficiently material to merit establishing specific Group-wide control frameworks. These are known as Principal and Key Risks (see Principal and Key Risks on page 345 for more information).

LOGO

The aim of the risk management process is to provide a structured, practical and easily understood set of three steps - Evaluate, Respond and Monitor (the E-R-M process) - that enables management to identify and assess risks, determine the appropriate risk response, and then monitor the effectiveness of the risk response and changes to the risk profile.

§ Evaluate: risk evaluation must be carried out by those individuals, teams and departments who manage the underlying operational or business process, and so are best placed to identify and assess the potential risks, and also include those responsible for delivering the objectives under review.

§ Respond:  Risk Appetite requirements

  Roles and responsibilities for risk management

  Risk Committee structure.

Principal Risks

The ERMF identifies eight Principal Risks and sets out associated responsibilities and risk management standards.

Risk Appetite for the appropriate risk response effectively and efficiently ensures that risks are kept within appetite, whichPrincipal Risks

Risk Appetite is defined as the level of risk thatwhich the Group is prepared to accept while pursuingin the conduct of its business strategy. There are three types of response: i) accept the risk but take necessary mitigating actions such asactivities (see Risk Appetite page 306 for further discussion). Risk Appetite is approved and disseminated across legal entities and businesses, including by use of Mandate and Scale limits to enable and control specific activities that have material concentration risk controls; ii) stopimplications for the existing activity/do not startGroup.

Roles and responsibilities in the proposed activity; or iii) continuemanagement of risk

The Three Lines of Defence

All colleagues are responsible for understanding and managing risks within the activity but transfercontext of their individual roles and responsibilities, as set out in the “Three Lines of Defence”.

First Line of Defence

The First Line comprises all employees engaged in the revenue generating and client facing areas of the Group and all associated support functions, including Finance, Treasury, Human Resources and the Chief Operating Officer (COO) function. Employees in the First Line are responsible for:

  identifying all the risks and developing appropriate policies, standards and controls to another party via usegovern their activities

  operating within any and all limits which the Risk and Compliance functions establish in connection with the Risk Appetite of insurance.the Group

§Monitor: once risks have been identified  escalating risk events to senior managers in Risk and measured,Compliance.

Second Line of Defence

Employees of Risk and controls put in place, progress towards objectives must be tracked. Monitoring must be ongoing and can prompt re-evaluationCompliance comprise the Second Line of Defence. The role of the risks and/or changesSecond Line is to establish the limits, rules and constraints under which First Line activities shall be performed, consistent with the Risk Appetite of the Group, and to monitor the performance of the First Line against these limits and constraints.

Third Line of Defence

Employees of Internal Audit comprise the Third Line of Defence. They provide independent assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control over current, systemic and evolving risks.

The Legal function does not sit in responses. Monitoring must be carried out proactively. In additionany of the three lines, but supports them all. The Legal function is, however, subject to “reporting”, it includes ensuring risks are maintained within risk appetiteoversight from Risk and checking that controls are functioning as intendedCompliance, with respect to operational and remain fit for purpose.conduct risks.

 

LOGO

 

302    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  337


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

The process is orientated around material risks impacting delivery of objectives, and is used to promote an efficient and effective approach to risk management. This three step risk management process:

 

§can be applied to every objective at every level in the bank, both top-down or bottom-up

§is embedded into the business decision making process

§guides the Group’s response to changes in the external or internal environment in which existing activities are conducted

§involves all staff and all three lines of defence (see pages 343 and 344).

Governance structureRisk Committees

Business Risk exists when the outcome of taking a particular decision or course of action is uncertain and could potentially impact whether, or how well, the Group delivers on its objectives.

The Group faces risks throughout its business, every day, in everything it does. Some risks are taken after appropriate consideration – such as lending money to a customer. Other risks may arise from unintended consequences of internal actions, for example an IT system failure or poor sales practices. Finally, some risks are the result of events outside the Group but which impact its business – such as major exposure through trading or lending to a market counterparty which later fails.

All employees must play their part in the Group’s risk management, regardless of position, function or location. All employees are required to be familiar with risk management policies that areCommittees consider Risk matters relevant to their activities, know howbusiness, and escalate as required to escalate actual or potential risk issues,the Group Risk Committee (GRC), whose Chairman in turn escalates to Board Committees and have a role-appropriate level of awarenessthe Board.

There are three Board-level forums which oversee the application of the ERMF (see Risk governance and assigning responsibilities for more information on page 343), risk management processes and governance arrangements.

Furthermore, from March 2016 members of the Board, Executive Committee and a limited number of specified senior individuals will be subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Members of the SMR are held to four additional specific rules of conduct in which they must:

§take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group is effectively controlled

§take reasonable steps to ensure that the Group complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards

§take reasonable steps to ensure that any delegated responsibilities are to the appropriate individual and that the delegated responsibilities are effectively discharged

§disclose appropriately any information to the FCA or PRA, which they would reasonably expect to made aware of.

There are three key Board-level forums which review and monitor risk across the Group. These are: The Board itself, the Board Risk Committee, the Board Audit Committee, and the Board Reputation Committee. Additionally, the Board Remuneration Committee oversees pay practices focusing on aligning pay to sustainable performance. Finally, the main Board of Barclays receives regular information on the risk profile of the Group, and has ultimate responsibility for risk appetite and capital plans.

The Chairman of each Committee prepares a statement each year on the committee’s activities, which is included on pages 22 to 26.

The Board

One of the Board’s (Board of Directors of Barclays Bank PLC) responsibilities is the approval of risk appetiteRisk Appetite (see the Risk Management and Strategy section on page 346), which is the level of risk the306). The Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives. The Chief Risk OfficerCRO regularly presents a report to the Board summarising developments in the risk environment and performance trends in the key portfolios. The Board is also responsible for the Internal ControlERMF and Assurance Framework (Group Control Framework). Itit oversees the management of the most significant risks through regular review of risk exposures and related key controls. Executiveexposures. Responsibilities of management responsibilities relatingwith respect to thisthe Board forums, including reporting of risk information, are set out in the ERMF.

338  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

LOGO

The Board Risk Committee (BRC)

The BRC monitors the Group’s risk profile against the agreed financial appetite. Where actual performance differs from expectations, the actions being taken by management are reviewed to ensureverify that the BRC is comfortable with them. After each meeting, the ChairChairman of the BRC prepares a report for the next meeting of the Board. All members are independentnon-executive Directors. directors. The Group Finance Director (GFD) and the Chief Risk Officer (CRO)Group

CRO attend each meeting as a matter of course.

The BRC also considers the Group’s risk appetiteRisk Appetite statement for operational risk and evaluates the Group’s operational risk profile and operational risk monitoring.

The BRC receives regular and comprehensive reports on risk methodologies, the effectiveness of the risk management framework, and the Group’s risk profile, including the key issues affecting each business portfolio and forward risk trends. The Committee also commissionsin-depth analyses of significant risk topics, which are presented by the Group CRO or senior risk managers in the businesses. The Chair of the Committee prepares a statement each year on its activities.

The Board Audit Committee (BAC)

The BAC receives regular reports on the effectiveness of internal control systems, quarterly reports on material control issues of significance, and quarterly papers on accounting judgements (including impairment). It also receives a half-yearly review of the adequacy of impairment allowances, which it reviews relative to the risk inherent in the portfolios, the business environment, the Group’s policies and methodologies and the performance trends of peer banks.methodologies. The Chairman of the BAC also sits on the BRC.

The Board Reputation Committee (RepCo)

The RepCo reviews management’s recommendations on conduct and reputationalreputation risk and the effectiveness of the processes by which the Group identifies and manages these risks. It also reviews and monitors the effectiveness of Barclays’ Citizenship strategy, including the management of Barclays’ economic, social and environmental contribution.

In addition, the Board Audit and Board Remuneration Committees receive regular risk reports to assist them in the undertaking of their duties.

The Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo)

The RemCo receives a detailed report on risk management performance from the BRC, regular updates on theand risk profile, and proposals for the onex-ante andex-post risk adjustments to variable remuneration. These inputs are considered in the setting of performance incentives.

Summaries of the relevant business, professionalskills, experience and risk management experiencebackground of the Directors of the Board are presented in the Board of Directors section on pages 3 and 4 of the 2015 Form 20-F.5 to 6. The terms of reference and additional details on membership and activities for each of the principal Board Committees are available from the Corporate Governance section of Barclays’ website at: home.barclays/corporategovernance.about-barclays/barclays-corporate-governance.html.

Coverage of risk reports to executive and Board risk committees

Chairs of Risk Committees at executive and Board levels specify the information they require to discharge their duties. Advance committee calendars are agreed with the committee chairman. Topics that are regularly covered include:

  Financial and Operational risk profile

  Risk perspective on medium-term plans and strategy

  Risk Appetite

  Results of stress tests, including Comprehensive Capital Analysis and Review (CCAR)

  Risk inputs into remuneration decisions

  Other technical topics, e.g. Model risk.

In addition to regular topics, committees consider ad hoc papers on current risk topics, such as:

  Political events and their potential impacts on Barclays and its customers

  Economic developments in major economies or sectors

  Impacts of key market developments on the risk management of the Group.

Reports are generally presented by CROs or other accountable executives. Occasionally subject matter experts are delegated to present specific topics of interest. Report presenters are responsible for following processes for creating reports that include appropriate controls and that these controls are operated effectively.

LOGO

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  339    303


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

 

LOGORoles and responsibilities in the management of risk – senior management

Certain roles within Barclays carry specific responsibilities and accountabilities with respect to risk management and the ERMF.

Group Chief Executive Officer (CEO)

The CEO is accountable for leading the development of Barclays’ strategy and business plans that align to the Goal, Purpose and Values within the approved Risk Appetite, and for managing and organising executive management to drive their execution. Managing Barclays’ financial and operational performance within the approved Risk Appetite is ultimately the CEO’s responsibility.

Specifically, a crucial role of the CEO is to appoint the most senior Risk owners at the executive level including the Chief Risk Officer and the Group General Counsel. The CEO must work with them to embed a strong Risk Culture within the Group, with particular regard to the identification, escalation and management of risk matters.

Group Chief Risk Officer (CRO)

The Group CRO leads the Risk Function across Barclays. The CRO’s responsibilities include developing and maintaining the ERMF and clearly articulating Risk Culture objectives. Specific accountabilities include:

  preparing and recommending the Group’s Risk Appetite to the Board Risk Committees

  developing, operating and maintaining a comprehensive risk management framework to monitor and manage the risk profile of the Group

  providing accurate, transparent and timely reporting of the actual Risk Profile of the Group relative to the set Risk Appetite to the Board

  defining the risk taxonomy (Principal Risks) and updating it as needed so that it remains relevant and comprehensive

  bringing a risk perspective to compensation decisions

  reporting to all the relevant stakeholders on Barclays’ risk positions, adherence to Risk Appetite and enterprise wide risks and controls.

Chief Compliance Officer

The Chief Compliance Officer is accountable to the Group CRO for the strategic and function leadership of the Compliance Function. The Group Chief Compliance Officer is a member of the Group Executive Committee, enabling the Compliance Function to discharge its responsibilities properly and independently. Specific accountabilities include:

  overseeing the effective management of the Group’s conduct and reputation risks and escalation to the Board where appropriate

  setting minimum standards through compliance policies applicable globally and monitoring breaches, especially for conduct and reputation risks and financial crime

  inputting into compensation structures, objectives and performance management of employees who can expose Barclays to significant risk

  maintaining is a robust and effectively managed whistleblowing process on an enterprise-wide basis

  using mandate to access any part of the organisation and any information, bringing to the attention of line and senior management or the Board, as appropriate, any situation that is of concern from a conduct or reputation risk management perspective that could materially violate the approved Risk Appetite guidelines.

Group General Counsel

The Group General Counsel is required to:

  develop and maintain the Legal Risk Framework

  define the Legal Risk Policies

  develop the Group-wide and Business Risk Appetite for Legal Risk.

Group Chief Controls Officer

The Chief Controls Office, led by the Group Chief Controls Officer, is responsible for overseeing the practical implementation of operational, conduct and reputation risk controls and control methodologies across the Group. The Chief Controls Office has the following key responsibilities:

  defining a control framework directing businesses to manage risk exposure within approved operational risk appetites, and monitoring its application;

  reviewing tolerances fornon-financial operational risk exposures set by the business, and confirming their appropriateness;

  maintaining the standard for the creation and maintenance of all control documentation in the Group; and

  overseeing the execution of control framework requirements consistently across the Group. Execution includes recording risk events, issues, and the completion of risk and control self-assessments.

Senior Managers Regime

A number of Members of the Board, the majority of the Executive Committee and has overall day-to-daya limited number of specified senior individuals are also subject to additional rules included within the Senior Managers Regime (SMR), which clarifies their accountability and responsibilities. Those designated with a Senior Manager Function under the SMR are held to four specific rules of conduct in which they must:

  take reasonable steps to establish that the business of the Group for risk management underwhich they are responsible is controlled effectively

  take reasonable steps to establish that the business of the Group for which they are responsible complies with relevant regulatory requirements and standards of the regulatory system

  take reasonable steps to make certain that any delegation of their responsibilities is to an appropriate individual and that they oversee the discharge of the delegated authority from the Chief Executive Officer (CEO). The CEO is accountable for proposing a risk appetite that underpins the strategic planresponsibilities effectively

  disclose appropriately any information to the Board for approval, and the CRO is responsible for providing oversight, advice and challenge to the CEO, and preparing and recommending the Group’s risk appetite to the CEO and the Board. Risk appetite therefore sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board level around the Group’s current and evolving risk profile.

The CRO manages the independent risk function and chairs the Financial Risk Committee (FRC) and the Operational Risk Review Forum (ORRF),FCA or PRA, of which monitor the Group’s financial and non-financial risk profile relative to agreed risk appetite. Principal Risk Officers (PROs), reporting to the CRO and supported by Key Risk Officers (KROs) where appropriate, are responsible for establishing a Group-wide framework for oversight of the relevant risks and controls. Their teams liaise with each business as part of the monitoring and management processes.they would reasonably expect notice.

In addition, each business has an embedded risk management function, headed by a Business Chief Risk Officer (BCRO). BCROs and their teams are responsible for assisting business heads in the identification and management of their business risk profiles and for implementing appropriate controls. These teams also assist Central Risk in the formulation of Group policies and their implementation across the businesses. The BCROs’ report jointly to the CRO and to their respective business heads.

The Risk Executive Committee is responsible for the effectiveness and efficiency of risk management and embedding a strong risk culture, approval of the Group’s risk governance framework, and agreement and endorsement of the overall infrastructure strategy for the risk function. It is also the senior decision making forum for the risk function, excluding matters relating to the risk profile. It is chaired by the CRO with a membership comprising senior risk management.

The CEO must consult the Chairman of the BRC in respect of the CRO’s performance appraisal and compensation, as well as all appointments to or departures from the role.

 

340  |  304    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

The Group Treasurer heads the Group Treasury function and chairs the Treasury Committee which:

 

§manages the Group’s liquidity, maturity transformation and structural interest rate exposure through the setting of policies and controls

Frameworks, Policies and Standards

§monitors the Group’s liquidity and interest rate maturity mismatch

Frameworks, policies and standards set out the governance around Barclays’ activities:

§monitors usage of regulatory and economic capital

§has oversight of the management of the Group’s capital plan.

The Head  Frameworks cover the management processes for a collection of Compliance chairsrelated activities and define the Conductassociated policies used to govern them

  Policies set out control objectives, principles and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) which assessesother core requirements for the qualityactivities of the application of the Reputation and Conduct Risk Control Frameworks. It also recommends conduct risk appetite, sets policies to ensure consistent adherence to that appetite, and reviews known and emerging reputational and conduct related risks to consider if action is required.Group. Policies describe “what” must be done

Barclays’ risk culture

In Barclays, risk culture refers to the combination of the individual and collective norms, values, attitudes and behaviours of all of employees, in relation their awareness of risk, and how they take and manage risk.

The taking of risk is a fundamental part of banking, and so for Barclays to be successful it must have good risk management practices underpinned by a strong risk culture. To ensure that this is achieved all colleagues are required to:

§understand that risk management is important in all of our activities

§have an awareness and sensitivity to the risk issues which could arise in their individual roles

§take risk issues and considerations fully into account, before taking decisions and acting

§have good practices on how they manage risk on an ongoing basis as appropriate:

recognise when they are taking risk

discuss and debate risks

take action to manage and mitigate risks

escalate risks where necessary

identify areas for improvement and learn from mistakes

seek to remediate and improve how we manage risk.

§Value and promote these habits, practices and behaviours.

There is a focus on four key areas that evidence a strong risk culture: tone from the top; accountability; effective communication and challenge; and incentives.

Tone from the top

Leaders should demonstrate through their everyday behaviours the importance of strong risk management and ensure that their teams have sufficient resource and capability to manage the risk environment.

Achieving good outcomes for customer and clients is central to colleagues’ approach to managing risk and managers will ensure that their teams identify and resolve risk issues within agreed timeframes and learn from mistakes to avoid repeating them.

Accountability

Barclays has implemented and operates a strong Risk Governance framework and ensures that colleagues understand the business processes, as well as the associated risks relevant to their role and the level of risk they can take, which is consistent with the Group’s risk appetite.

Colleagues must actively manage risk, believe it is the right thing to do and take personal responsibility for risk management issues.

Effective Communication and Challenge

Barclays ensures that colleagues feel empowered and supported to raise issues and that those issues are then appropriately escalated, investigated and reported.

Incentives

The Group’s desired risk management behaviours are supported by appropriate recruitment, performance, reward and promotion decisions. It also ensures that wrong behaviour is defined and that there are visible consequences to such actions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  341


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Sustaining a sound risk culture

Barclays uses a variety of tools to sustain its risk culture including, for example, employee training, semi-annual performance reviews and adjustments to compensation. Employees are provided with regular role-specific mandatory quarterly training courses, which deliver training across the breadth of risk topics; with further optional training courses continuously available.

Semi-annual performance reviews include an assessment of risk and control performance, which is also considered as part of promotion decisions, particularly to Managing Director.

Risk performance is also measured (in the form of employee breaches and any involvement in other risk events) and taken into consideration for compensation purposes.

Risk Appetite and the ‘Tone from the top’

Communicating and enforcing risk appetite in all businesses creates a common understanding and fosters debate around what types of risks are acceptable, and what levels of risk are appropriate at business and Group level.

To develop a consistently strong risk culture across the Group, clear statements have been communicated as to the Group risk appetite for all risk types. In particular, risk appetite:

§articulates the types and level of risk we are willing to take and why, to enable specific risk taking activities. It also specifies those risks the Group seeks to avoid and why, to constrain specific risk taking activities

§is embedded within key decision-making processes including business planning, mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives

§provides a framework for performance management and disciplinary consequences in cases of breach

§is implemented under the direct leadership of the CEO, who is responsible for leading, managing and organising executive management to achieve execution of the strategy and business plans in line with risk appetite

§is owned by the Board.

Improvements to the approach in 2015 have delivered further embedment within the businesses, and improved alignment with stress testing. See risk appetite on page 346 and 347 for more information.

Supporting colleagues to manage risk – in the right way

By supporting colleagues to manage risk in the right way, the Group seeks to ensure that all risk managers share the Barclays’ Values and to promote a common understanding of the role that risk management plays:

§risk management capability and ability to act in a risk aware manner forms part of the assessment process for all new employees and promotion candidates globally

§management of risk and control is assessed as part of the annual performance appraisal process for all colleagues globally. Positive risk management behaviours will be rewarded

§the “Being Barclays” global induction programme supports new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the Group does business and the link to the Barclays’ values

§leadership master classes cover the building, sustaining and supporting a trustworthy organisation and are offered to colleagues globally.

Learning from our mistakes

Learning from mistakes is central to the Group’s culture and values, demonstrating a commitment to excellence, service and stewardship and taking accountability for failure as well as success. The Group seeks to learn lessons on a continuous basis to support achievement of strategic objectives; operational excellence and to meet commitments to stakeholders, including colleagues, customers, shareholders and regulators.

Barclays has implemented a Group Lessons Learnt Standard as part of the ERMF, setting out requirements for completing Lessons Learnt Assessments in response to significant events. The approach to Lessons Learnt builds on the process established for operational risk in

342  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

2012 and fulfils the Group’s Salz commitments by ensuring a consistent and effective approach applicable to all Principal Risks. The approach is directly aligned to the three lines of defence model (see below), with businesses and functions accountable for undertaking lessons learnt assessments; Principal and Key Risk Officers providing input, oversight and challenge; with independent review by internal audit.

Core components of the Lessons Learnt approach include:

§defined triggers for when lessons learnt assessments must be completed

§requirements and guidance for root cause analysis to identify the causes of events within the Group

§templates to ensure conclusions are reported consistently throughout management committees

§a central system to record completed lessons learnt assessments and to facilitate sharing across the Group.

Since its launch at the end of 2014, Lessons Learnt approach continues to evolve and an enhanced approach will be launched in 2016.

Risk governance and assigning responsibilities

Responsibility for risk management resides at all levels of the Group, from the Board and the Executive Committee down through the organisation to each business manager and risk specialist. These responsibilities are distributed so that risk/return decisions are: taken at the most appropriate level; as close as possible to the business; and are subject to robust and effective review and challenge. Responsibility for effective review and challenges resides at all levels.

The ERMF articulates a clear, consistent, comprehensive and effective approach for the management of all risks within the Group and creates the context for setting standards and establishing the right practices throughout the Group. It sets out a philosophy and approach that is applicable to the whole bank, all colleagues and to all types of risk. The ERMF sets  Standards set out the key activities requiredcontrols that must be followed for all employees to operate Barclays’ risk and control environment with specific requirements for key individuals, including the CRO and CEO, and the overall governance framework designed to support its effective operation. See risk culture on page 341 for more information.

The ERMF supports risk management and control by ensuring that there is a:

§sustainable and consistent implementation of the three lines of defence across all businesses and functions

§clear segregation of activities and duties performed by colleagues across the whole bank

§framework for the management of Principal Risks

§consistent application of risk appetite across all Principal Risks

§clear and simple policy hierarchy.

Three lines of defence

The enterprise risk management process is the ‘defence’ and organising businesses and functions into three ‘lines’ enhances the E-R-M process by formalising independence and challenge, while still promoting collaboration and the flow of information between all areas. The three lines of defence operating model enables the Group to separate risk management activities:

First line: Manage operational and business processes; design, implement, operate, test and remediate controls

First line activities are characterised by:

§ownership of and direct responsibility for the Group’s returns or elements of its results

§ownership of major operations, systems and processes fundamental to the operation of the bank

§direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to profit and loss performance.

With respect to risk management the first line responsibilities include:

§taking primary accountability for risk identification, ownership, management and control (including performance of portfolios, trading positions, operational risks etc.) within approved mandate, as documented under the Key Risk Control Frameworks, including embedding a supportive risk culture

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  343


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

§collaborating with second line on implementing and improving risk management processes and controls

§monitoring the effectiveness of risk controls and the risk profile compared to the approved risk appetite

§maintaining an effective control environment across all risks, processes and operations arising from the business, including implementing standards to meet Group policies.

Second Line: Oversee and challenge the first line, and provide second line risk management activity.

Second line activities are characterised by:

§oversight, monitoring and challenge of the first line of defence activities

§design, ownership or operation of Key Risk Control Frameworks impacting the activities of the first line of defence

§operation of certain second line risk management activities (e.g. financial rescue of a firm)

§no direct linkage of objective setting, performance assessment and reward to revenue (measures related to mitigation of losses and balancing risk and reward are permissible).

With respect to risk management the second line of defence responsibilities include:

§defining the ERMF

§establishing the policy architecture for the Key Risks, including Key Risk Control Frameworks, policies, and standards

§defining delegated discretions and setting limits within the control frameworks to empower risk taking by the first line

§assisting in setting the direction of the portfolio to achieve performance against risk appetite

§may define and operate approval processes for certain decisions within the second line to protect the Group from material risks

§communicating, educating and advising the first line on their understanding of the risk framework and its requirements

§collaborating with the first line to support business growth and drive an appropriate balance between risk and reward without diminishing the independence from the first line

§reporting on the effectiveness of the risk and control environment to executive management and Board committees.

Third line: Provide assurance that the E-R-M process is fit-for-purpose, and that it is being carried out as intended

Third line activities are characterised by:

§providing independent and timely assurance to the Board and Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and control.

With respect to risk management the third line of defence responsibilities include:

§assessing the effectiveness of risk management and risk mitigation in the context of the current and expected business environment

§acting independently and objectively.

Following the annual review, in 2016, we have further refined the three lines of defence model by clarifying that responsibilities for risk management and control are defined in relation to the activities individuals undertake as part of their role. The three key activities are: “Setting Policy and Conformance” (second line); “Managing Operational or Business Process” (first and second line); and “Providing Independent Assurance” (third line). Second and third line activities have not changed, however we have emphasised the key responsibilities of the first line, which includes colleagues’ responsibility for understanding and owning the process end to end, and designing, operating, testing and remediating appropriate controls to manage those risks. Performed appropriately and by all colleagues, together these responsibilities will drive a stronger risk and control environment at Barclays, benefitting our customers, clients, shareholders and regulators.

344  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Principal and Key Risks

Principal Risks comprise individual Key Risks to allow for more granular analysis. As at 31 December 2015 the five Principal Risks were: i) Credit; ii) Market; iii) Funding; iv) Operational; and v) Conduct. Since the beginning of 2015, Reputation Risk has been recognised as a Key Risk within Conduct Risk given their close alignment and the fact that as separate Principal Risks they had a common Principal Risk Officer.

Risk management responsibilities for Principal and Key Risks areobjectives set out in the ERMF. Policy to be met, and who needs to carry them out. Standards describe “how” controls should be undertaken.

Frameworks, Policies and Standards are owned by the area responsible for performing the described activity.

The ERMF creates clear ownershipGroup CRO is accountable for overseeing that frameworks, policies and accountability; ensuresassociated standards are developed and implemented for each of the Group’s most significant risk exposuresFinancial Principal Risks, Operational Risk and Model Risk and that they are understoodsubject to limits, monitored, reported on and managed in accordance with agreed risk appetite and risk tolerances; and ensures regular reporting of risk exposures and control effectiveness.

For each Key Risk, the Key Riskescalated as required. The Chief Compliance Officer is responsiblelikewise accountable for developing a risk appetite statement and overseeing and managing the risk in line with the ERMF. This includes the documentation, communication and maintenance of a KeyConduct Risk Control Framework which sets out, for every business across the firm, the mandated control requirements in managing exposures to that Key Risk. These control requirements are given further specification, according to the business or risk type, to provide a complete and appropriate system of internal control.

Business and Function heads are responsible for obtaining ongoing assurance that the key controls they have put in place to manage the risks to their business objectives are operating effectively. Reviews are undertaken on a six-monthly basis and support the regulatory requirement for the Group to make an annual statement about its system of internal controls. At the business level executive management holds specific Business Risk Oversight Meetings to monitor all Principal Risks.

Key Risk Officers report their assessments of the risk exposure and control effectiveness to Group-level oversight committees and their assessments form the basis of the reports that go to the:

Board Risk Committee:

§     Financial Risk Committee has oversight of Credit and Market Risks

§     Treasury Committee has oversight of Funding Risk

§     Operational Risk Review Forum has oversight of the risk profile of all Operational Risk types.

Board Reputation Committee:

§     Conduct and Reputation Risk, Committee has oversightand the Group General Counsel for Legal Risk. The Group CRO and Group Chief Compliance Officer have the right to require amendments to any Frameworks, Policies or Standards in the Group, for any reason, including inconsistencies or contradictions among them.

Frameworks, Policies and Standards are subject to minimum annual review, and challenge by the Risk and/or Compliance functions, unless explicitly waived by the relevant heads of Conduct and Reputation Risks.those functions. Principal Risk Frameworks are subject to approval by relevant committees of the Board.

Assurance

Assurance is undertaken to assess the control environment and to independently assess the ERMF, which includes testing specific elements of the control environment documented in standards and checking that control testing activities are reliable, to provide confidence to the Board in the risk and control framework.

The Credit Risk Review Group (CRRG) provides an independent reviewControls Assurance Standard defines the requirements for Controls Assurance and monitoring of the quality and condition of all the wholesale loan and derivative portfolios through a review of the overall credit sanctioning process. CRRG has a mandate from the CRO and has direct access to the CRO and to the BRC.Controls Testing.

Internal Audit is responsible for the independent review of risk management and the control environment. Its objective is to provide reliable, valued and timely assurance to the Board and executive management over the effectiveness of controls, mitigating current and evolving material risks and thus enhancing the control culture within the Group. The BACBoard Audit Committee reviews and approves Internal Audit’s plans and resources, and evaluates the effectiveness of Internal Audit. An assessment by independent external advisers is also carried out periodically.

Effectiveness of risk management arrangements

The embedding of the ERMF is monitored by executive and board committees as described above. The ERMF and its component key risksPrincipal Risks are subject to control testing assurance reviews to confirm its effectiveness or identify issues to be mitigated. Management and the Board are satisfied that these arrangements are appropriate given the risk profile of the Group.

Learning from our mistakes

Learning from mistakes is central to Barclays’ culture and values, demonstrating a commitment to excellence, service and stewardship and taking accountability for failure as well as success. The Group seeks to learn lessons on a continuous basis to support achievement of strategic objectives, increase operational excellence and to meet commitments to stakeholders, including colleagues, customers, shareholders and regulators.

Barclays has implemented a Group Lessons Learned process, setting out requirements for the completion of Lessons Learned assessments in response to internal and external risk events. The approach to Lessons Learned will be further enhanced during 2018 which with the aim to fulfil the Group’s Salz commitments by putting in place a consistent and effective approach applicable to all Principal Risks. The approach is aligned to the three lines of defence model (see page 302), with businesses and functions accountable for undertaking Lessons Learned Assessments; the Second Line providing oversight and challenge; and independent review by Internal Audit.

Core components of the Lessons Learned approach include:

  Defined triggers for when Lessons Learned Assessments must be completed

  Requirements and guidance for the completion of root cause analysis to identify the causes of risk events impacting the bank

  Standardised Templates to report conclusions consistently to relevant management fora and committees

  Use of a central system to record completed Lessons Learned Assessments and to facilitate sharing across the Group.

Barclays’ Risk Culture

Risk Culture can be defined as “norms, attitudes and behaviours related to risk awareness, risk taking and risk management”. At Barclays this is reflected in how we identify, escalate and manage risk matters.

Our Code of Conduct – the Barclays Way

Globally, all colleagues must attest to the “Barclays Way”, our Code of Conduct, and all frameworks, policies and standards applicable to their roles. The Code of Conduct outlines the Purpose and Values which govern our Barclays Way of working across our business globally. It constitutes a reference point covering all aspects of colleagues’ working relationships, specifically (but not exclusively) with other Barclays employees, customers and clients, governments and regulators, business partners, suppliers, competitors and the broader community.

Embedding of a values-based, conduct culture

The Group Executive Committee reconfirmed

Conduct, Culture and Values as one of its execution priorities for 2017 with the aim of embedding the cultural measurement tool developed in 2016. The effectiveness of the Risk and Control environment, for which all colleagues are responsible, depends on the continued embedment of strong values. Please see Board Reputation Committee report on pages 27 to 32.

Induction programmes support new colleagues in understanding how risk management culture and practices support how the Group does business and the link to Barclays’ values. The Leadership Curriculum covers the building, sustaining and supporting of a trustworthy organisation and is offered to colleagues globally.

Other Risk Culture drivers

In addition to values and conduct, we consider the following determinants of Risk Culture:

  Management and governance: This means a consistent tone from the top and clear responsibilities to enable identification and challenge.

  Motivation and incentives: The right behaviours are rewarded and modelled.

  Competence and effectiveness: This means that colleagues are enabled to identify, coordinate, escalate and address risk and control matters.

  Integrity:Colleagues are willing to meet their risk management responsibilities; colleagues escalate issues on a timely basis.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  345    305


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

 

Management of model risk

Model risk is the risk of suffering adverse consequences from decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports. Management of model risk is an important area of focus for the Group.

Model risk is inherent in each of the Key Risks where models are used for measurement or management and is, therefore, managed as part of each individual key risk control framework and supported by the Group Model Risk Policy (GMRP) and relevant standards.

Model risk is managed by a number of activities, including:

§ensuring that models are identified as per the GMRP definition, across businesses and recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventory

§ensuring that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model, and drives the development/maintenance of the model by a qualified model developer

§ensuring that every model is subject to technical validation by the Independent Validation Unit (IVU) as required by GMRP

§ensuring that every model is approved by appropriately senior and knowledgeable risk individuals in the organisation, following IVU validation

§periodic model risk reporting to the senior management and the Board

§Internal Audit provides independent challenge of model risk management through business line and thematic audits.

The Executive Models Committee (EMC) fulfils the specific requirement of approving the Group’s most material (A*/High and Complex) models; the EMC decisions are based on business reviews and the associated IVU validations for these models. EMC is chaired by the accountable Risk ExCo member and has among its members the Deputy Group Finance Director and the Chief Risk Officer.

Group-wide risk management tools

To support the Group-wide management of risks, the Board uses risk appetite, mandate and scale, and stress testing as key inputs in the annual planning cycle, including setting of the Group’s strategy. The following describes in further detail the group-wide risk management tools used as part of this process.

Risk Appetite

Risk appetite is defined as the level of risk that the Group is prepared to accept while pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible outcomes as business plans are implemented.

Risk appetite sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Group’s current and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

The Risk Appetite Framework is intended to achieve the following objectives:

§describe agreed parameters for Group performance under various stress levels, for example:

Profitability, loss and return metric

Capital levels, CET1 ratio

§consider all Principal and Key Risks both individually and, where appropriate, in aggregate

§assess and communicate the acceptable level of risk for each risk types; this may be expressed in financial or non-financial terms, but must enable measurement and effective monitoring

§articulate the risks the Group is willing to take and why to enable specific risk taking activities; and articulate those risks to avoid and why to constrain specific risk taking activities

§be embedded in key decision-making processes including mergers and acquisitions, new product approvals and business change initiatives

§monitor throughout the year and respond as appropriate.

The risk appetite for financial risks is set by the Board on the basis of severe stress tests as it is during periods of macro-economic stress that losses materialise. In order to articulate the risk appetite for the firm, the Board first defines the deterioration in the firm’s performance it is willing to accept under stressed macroeconomic conditions. The acceptable deterioration is defined through a range of financial performance and capital metrics, which are reviewed by the Board on an annual basis. Barclays have moved to a scenario-based Stress Testing approach from the previous modelled approach of 1 in 7 and 1 in 25 risk events. The new approach continues to assess scenarios under stress conditions. For 2016 these are summarised in the following table.

346  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Measure relevant to strategy and risk                     

Link between strategy and risk profile

Profit before tax,

Return on equity,

Return on RWAs

Fundamental economic and business indicators of the performance of the Bank and underpin the firm’s capacity to make capital distributions.

Common Equity Tier 1 and leverage ratios

Monitor capital adequacy in relation to capital plan and targets.

Loan loss rate (LLR)

Describes the credit risk profile and whether impairment is within appetite.

Return on equity (RoE),

Return on regulatory capital

Risk-return based performance metrics which allow strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

Barclays businesses run the stress test(s) as a fully integrated part of the annual Medium Term Planning (MTP) process, to ensure that the risk appetite business demand is based on the businesses’ most recent strategic plans. The deterioration of financial performance as a result of the stress test is subsequently compared to the tolerances agreed by the Board. Subsequently the risk appetite is allocated back to individual businesses and utilisation is monitored on a quarterly basis. This approach ensures that businesses’ risk appetite proposals are based on their latest strategic plans and allows the Board to allocate risk appetite such that it fully supports the firm’s chosen strategy within acceptable boundaries of risk taking.

Mandate and scale

Mandate and scale is a risk management approach that seeks to formally review and control business activities to ensure that they are within mandate (i.e. aligned with expectations), and are of an appropriate scale (relative to the risk and reward of the underlying activities) based on an extensive system of limits. Using limits and triggers helps mitigate the risk of concentrations which would be out of line with expectations, and which may lead to unexpected losses of a scale that would be detrimental to the stability of the relevant business line or the Group.

For example, for commercial property finance and construction portfolios, there is a comprehensive series of limits in place to control exposure within each business and geographic sector. To ensure that limits are aligned to the underlying risk characteristics, the mandate and scale limits differentiate between types of exposure. There are, for example, individual limits for property investment and property development.

The mandate and scale framework is used to:

§limit concentration risk

§keep business activities within Group and individual business mandate

§ensure activities remain of an appropriate scale relative to the underlying risk and reward

§ensure risk-taking is supported by appropriate expertise and capabilities.

As well as Group-level mandate and scale limits, further limits are set by risk managers within each business, covering particular portfolios. Unapproved excesses of limits will result in performance management and disciplinary consequences.

Stress testing

Group-wide stress tests are an integral part of the MTP process and annual review of risk appetite. They aim to ensure that the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress. The Group-wide stress testing process is supported by a Capital Stress Testing Standard which sets out the minimum control requirements and defines clear roles and responsibilities across businesses and central functions. The diagram below outlines the key steps in the Group-wide stress testing process.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  347


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

LOGO

The Group-wide stress testing process begins with a detailed scenario setting process, with the FRC and BRC agreeing the range of scenarios to be tested. The scenarios are designed to be severe but plausible, and relevant to the business. A wide range of macroeconomic parameters are defined (such as GDP, unemployment, house prices, FX and interest rates), which allows the impact of the scenarios across the wide range of products and portfolios to be assessed across the Group.

Businesses prepare detailed MTP business plans which form the baseline for the stress test assessment. The stress test process is detailed and comprehensive, using bottom-up analysis across the businesses including both on- and off-balance sheet positions, and combines running statistical models with expert judgement. An overview of the stress testing approach by Principal Risk is provided in the table below. As part of their stress test assessments, businesses are also required to identify potential management actions that could be taken to mitigate the impact of stress and document these within their results.

There is robust governance in place with detailed review of stress testing methodology and results both within businesses (including sign-off by BCROs and BCFOs) and by central functions.

The businesses stress test results are consolidated to form a Group view which is used for tax analysis and by Group Treasury to assess the stress impact on the Group’s capital plans. For the latter, capital management actions such as reducing dividends or redeeming certain capital instruments may be considered. The Group also maintains recovery plans which take into consideration actions to facilitate recovery from severe stress or an orderly resolution. These actions are additional to those included in the Group-wide stress testing results.

The overall stress testing results of the Group are presented for review and approval by the FRC and BRC, and are also shared with the Treasury Committee and included as part of the review and sign-off of the MTP by the Board.

348  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

Summary of methodologies for Group-wide stress testing by risk type:

Principal Risk

Stress testing approach
¡     Credit risk impairment: For retail portfolios businesses use regression models to establish a relationship between arrears movements and key macroeconomic parameters such as interest rates and unemployment, incorporating roll-rate analysis to estimate stressed levels of arrears by portfolio. In addition, combination of house price reductions and increased customer drawdowns for revolving facilities leads to higher LGD which also contributes to increased impairment levels. For wholesale portfolios the stress shocks on credit risk drivers (PDs, LGDs and EADs) are primarily calibrated using historical and expected relationships with key macro-economic parameters such as GDP, inflation and interest rates.

Credit risk

¡Counterparty credit risk losses: The scenarios include market risk shocks that are applied to determine the market value under stress of contracts that give rise to Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR). Counterparty losses, including from changes to the Credit Valuation Adjustment and from defaults, are modelled based on the impact of these shocks as well as using stressed credit risk drivers (PDs and LGDs). The same approach is used to stress the market value of assets held as available for sale or at fair value in the banking book.
¡

Credit risk weighted assets: The impact of the scenarios is calculated via a combination of business volumes and using similar factors to impairment drivers above, as well as the regulatory calculation and the level of pro-cyclicality of underlying regulatory credit risk models.

Market risk

¡Trading book losses: All market risk factors on the balance sheet are stressed using specific market risk shocks (and are used for the CCR analysis, above). The severity of the shocks applied are dependent on the liquidity of the market under stress, e.g. illiquid positions are assumed to have a longer holding period than positions in liquid markets.

¡

Pension fund: The funding position of pension funds are stressed, taking into account key economic drivers impacting future obligations (e.g. long-term inflation and interest rates) and the impact of the scenarios on the value of fund assets.

¡The risk of a mismatch between assets and liabilities, leading to funding difficulties, is assessed. Businesses apply scenario variables to forecasts of customer loans and advances and deposits levels, taking into account management actions to mitigate the impact of the stress which may impact business volumes. The Group funding requirement under stress is then estimated and takes into account lower availability of funds in the market.
¡The analysis of funding risk also contributes to the estimate of stressed income and costs:

Funding risk

–     Stress impact on non-interest income is primarily driven by lower projected business volumes and hence lower income from fees and commissions
–  Impact on net interest income is driven by stressed margins, which depend on the level of interest rates under stress as well as funding costs, and on stressed balance sheet volumes. This can be partly mitigated by management actions that may include repricing of variable rate products, taking into account interbank lending rates under stress
–  

The impact on costs is mainly driven by business volumes and management actions to partly offset profit reductions (due to impairment increases and decreases in income) such as headcount reductions and lower performance costs.

Operational risk, and Conduct risk

¡     

These Principal Risks are generally not impacted as they are not directly linked to the economic scenario. Note that operational risk, however, is included as part of the reverse stress testing framework that incorporates assessment of idiosyncratic operational risk events.

The role of stress testing as input to businesses’ plans and setting of strategy is described in more detail in the section below. The results also feed into our internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP) submission to the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  349


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

In 2015, the internal Group-wide stress testing exercise was run as part of the MTP process, where the Group assessed the impact of an “Adverse” global recession scenario. This was used for the MTP Risk Review and risk appetite setting process.

Regulatory stress testing

In addition to running internal Group-wide stress tests , the Group also runs regulatory stress tests.

Additionally in 2015, the PRA ran its annual concurrent stress testing of the major UK banks, which was based on the Bank of England (BoE) stress scenario. The results of the stress test were published in December 2015, and support the BoE’s aim for increased transparency as part of its stress testing framework.

In 2016, the European Banking Authority will run a stress test across the major EU banks. This will be run in addition to the annual BoE stress test.

Reverse stress testing

The Group-wide stress testing framework also includes reverse stress testing techniques which aim to identify the circumstances under which the Group’s business model would no longer be viable, leading to a significant change in business strategy and to identify appropriate mitigating actions. Examples include extreme macroeconomic downturn scenarios (for example in 2015 Barclays ran a ‘Severely Adverse’ global recession scenario), or specific idiosyncratic events, covering both operational risk and capital/liquidity events.

Reverse stress testing is used to help support ongoing risk management and is an input to our Recovery Planning process.

Business and risk type specific stress tests

Stress testing techniques at portfolio and product level are also used to support risk management. For example, portfolio management in the US cards business employs stressed assumptions of loss rates to determine profitability hurdles for new accounts. In the UK mortgage business, affordability thresholds incorporate stressed estimates of interest rates. In the Investment Bank, global scenario testing is used to gauge potential losses that could arise in conditions of a severe but plausible market stress. Stress testing is also conducted on positions in particular asset classes, including interest rates, commodities, equities, credit and foreign exchange.

Risk management in the setting of strategy

The planning cycle is centred on the MTP process, performed annually. This embeds the Group’s objectives into detailed business plans which take into account the likely business and macroeconomic environment. The strategy is informed by a detailed risk assessment of the plans, which includes reviewing the Group’s risk profile and setting of risk appetite. The BRC has overall responsibility for reviewing the Group’s risk profile and making appropriate recommendations to the Board. The Board is ultimately responsible for approving the MTP and the Group’s risk appetite.

The planning cycle is summarised in the diagram below, and shows that the detailed risk assessment of the plans is an integral part of the MTP process. In particular, the risk appetite process ensures that senior management and the Board understand the MTP’s sensitivities to key risk types, and includes a set of limits to ensure the Group stays within appetite. Additionally, stress testing informs management about the impact to the business of adverse macroeconomic scenarios and potential management actions that could be taken to mitigate the impact of stress.

350  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

LOGO

Plan

Businesses prepare detailed business plans as part of the MTP process. A key component of this process is the businesses’ internal risk assessment, which combines running statistical models e.g. to calculate forecast impairments over the period of the plan, and risk subject matter expert judgement. The risk teams work closely with other functions within their businesses to inform the business plans.

Businesses are required to assess each of their portfolios and all Principal Risks (as relevant to their business) when preparing their business plans, and prepare detailed documentation, providing key risk metrics such as projected loan loss rate (LLR) by portfolio. As part of their internal risk assessment, businesses provide performance of their business plans under expected and stressed macroeconomic scenarios, which defines the proposed risk appetite reflected in their plans and feeds into the setting of risk appetite for the Group.

Additionally, businesses assess the performance of their business plans under stress, based on ‘severe, but plausible’ macroeconomic scenarios provided by risk in collaboration with business economists and agreed with the BRC at the start of the process. As part of their stress test assessment, businesses are required to identify and document management actions that would be taken to mitigate the impact of stress, such as cost reductions and increased collections activity to reduce impairments.

Within the businesses, there is detailed risk review of the business plans, involving senior risk managers, with BCROs required to sign off on the risk profile of the plans, including the risk appetite and stress testing assessments described above. The results of businesses’ internal risk assessment and corresponding detailed documentation forms the basis for discussion for the risk review process and setting of risk appetite for the Group, outlined below.

Evaluate

Following submissions by businesses of their MTP business plans, there is a detailed review process led by the central risk team. This includes a robust review and challenge of business’ plans to ensure that the financial projections are internally consistent, value creating, achievable given risk management capabilities (e.g. supported by appropriate risk infrastructure) and that they present a suitable balance between risk and reward. The risk review process is informed by the detailed documentation provided by businesses, which forms the basis for discussion. The format and content of the documentation is pre-agreed to ensure sufficient information is provided to allow a detailed and comprehensive risk review.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  351


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

The risk review process includes a review of the proposed risk appetite by the business, including assessment of business plans under stress which is used to inform the MTP. If the businesses’ plans entail too high a level of risk, management will challenge the businesses’ plans. This assessment is based on a comparison of businesses’ own risk appetite assessment reflected in their business plans (‘bottom-up’ risk appetite) with the central risk team’s view (‘top-down’ risk appetite) based on the financial constraints set by the Board for the Group. Businesses may be asked to update their business plans to ensure the bottom-up risk appetite is within top-down appetite. There is also a detailed review of the stressed estimates and methodology used to translate the economic scenario to stressed estimates, as well as the management actions included in businesses’ results to ensure that these are appropriate and realistic in a stressed environment.

Risk review meetings are held with the CRO and each business, where the senior management of the business present their business plans and the findings from the risk reviews are discussed, including the risk appetite proposals and stress testing results. Businesses may be required to change their business plans as a result of these meetings.

Respond

Following detailed risk review of businesses plans, the central risk team will recommend to the BRC for approval by the Board an appropriate risk appetite for the Group, taking into account businesses’ stress testing results. Mandate and Scale limits are also set. Based on the agreed risk appetite, limits are reviewed for appropriateness by the central risk team, as outlined below, and recommended to the BRC.

Risk Appetite

Risk Appetite is defined as the level of risk which the Group is prepared to accept in the conduct of its activities.

Risk Appetite sets the ‘tone from the top’ and provides a basis for ongoing dialogue between management and Board with respect to the Group’s current and evolving risk profile, allowing strategic and financial decisions to be made on an informed basis.

The Group level loss appetite limit across principal financialRisk Appetite setting process aims to consider the material risks Barclays is setexposed to under its business plans.

Risk Appetite is approved by the Board and must be formally reviewed at least annually in conjunction with the Medium Term Planning (MTP) process.

Risk Appetite is expressed, by the Board, as partthe acceptable level of deterioration in a set of key financial parameters under a severe but plausible stress scenario defined as the annual setting of risk appetite. The allocation is consistent withAdverse stress test scenario. For 2018 the annual MTP risk reviewkey financial parameters are listed above.

Measure relevant to

strategy and risk

Link between strategy

and risk profile

Profit after taxFundamental performance of the Bank and underpins the Group’s capacity to make capital distributions.
Common EquityMonitors capital
Tier 1 (CET1)adequacy in relation to capital plan, targets and regulatory hurdle rates.

Based on the business strategy under stress.specified Risk Appetite, the Group develops mandate and scale limits to control specific activities.

Mandate and scale

Mandate and scale is a risk management approach that seeks to formally review and control business activities to make sure that they are within mandate (i.e. aligned with expectations), and are of an appropriate scale (relative to the risk and reward of the underlying activities) based on an appropriately detailed system of limits. Using limits and triggers helps mitigate the risk of concentrations which would be out of line with expectations, and which may lead to unexpected losses of a scale that would be detrimental to the stability of the relevant business line or the Group.

For example, for leveraged finance and commercial property finance portfolios, there is a series of limits in place to control exposure within each business and geographic sector. To further align limits to the underlying risk characteristics, the mandate and scale limits differentiate between types of exposure. There are, for example, individual limits for property investment and property development.

The mandate and scale framework is used to:

  limit concentration risk

  keep business activities within Group and individual business mandate

  maintain activities at an appropriate scale relative to the underlying risk and reward

  confirm that risk-taking is supported by appropriate expertise and capabilities and take corrective actions otherwise.

The most material mandate and scale limits are designated asA-level (Board level) andB-Level (Group level). Group limits are approved by the appropriate risk committee (e.g. Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee) and are subject to additional escalation and governance requirements.

Further limits are set at Group orby risk managers within each business, level.covering particular portfolios. Unapproved excesses of limits may result in performance management and disciplinary consequences. Business limits are approved by the relevant business risk team and reportable to the relevant risk committee.

§Group limits are approved by the appropriate risk committee (e.g. Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee) and are subject to additional escalation and governance requirements.

§Business limits are approved by the relevant business risk team and reportable to the relevant risk committee.

Limits reflect the nature of the risk being managed and controlled and are measured by total financing limits, LGD, stress loss or other metrics as appropriate. There is explicit identification of the exposures that are captured by limits and any material exclusion must be agreed. Limits are reviewed at least annually. The factors taken into consideration when setting the limit will include:

  Group Risk Appetite

§Group Risk Appetite

  current exposure/MTP forecasts

  risk return considerations

  senior risk management judgement.

Stress testing

Group-wide stress tests are integrated within the MTP process and annual review of risk appetite. They aim to check that the Group’s financial position and risk profile provide sufficient resilience to withstand the impact of severe economic stress, allowing Barclays to make changes to plans as necessary. The Group-wide stress testing process is supported by a Capital Stress Testing Standard which sets out the minimum control requirements and defines clear roles and responsibilities across businesses and central functions. The results also feed into our internal capital adequacy assessment process (ICAAP) submission to the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA).

The following diagram outlines the key steps in the Group-wide stress testing process, which are described below.

 

§current exposure / MTP forecasts

§risk return considerations

§senior risk management judgement.

Mandate and scale limits are split between three types:

§caps: Hard limit, set to limit concentration to a live portfolio or risk

§run off ceilings: Set to monitor legacy positions being managed down over time

§triggers for discussion: Threshold set as trigger for follow up/investigation.
LOGO

 

352  |  306    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

 

Monitor

Risk Appetite

The loss appetite allocationGroup-wide stress testing process begins with a detailed scenario setting process, with the GRC and BRC agreeing the range of scenarios to businesses is tracked using an agreedbe tested. The scenarios are designed to be severe but plausible, and repeatable monitoring measure. The percentage utilisationrelevant to the business. A wide range of appetite is a risk metric that is partmacroeconomic parameters are defined (such as GDP, unemployment, house prices, FX and interest rates), which allows the impact of the business Balanced Scorecard. Appetite utilisation is reportedscenarios across the wide range of products and portfolios to be assessed across the BRC on a quarterly basis. Breaches must be approved and remedial actions mandated.Group.

MandateBusinesses prepare detailed MTP business plans which form the baseline for the stress test assessment. The stress test process aims to support this level of complexity, usingbottom-up analysis across all of our

businesses including bothon- and scaleoff-balance

The limit excess process includes the following key points:

§businesses must have adequate processes in place to monitor limit caps to avoid excesses

§all excesses must be reported to the central risk team within 24 hours

§credit applications that would cause or increase an excess can only be approved once the limit cap is increased

§a remediation plan must be put in place.

A limit breach will have occurred if a limit goes into excess without being authorised by the relevant authority; or where the limit excess process is not adhered to unless the policy or terms sheet positions, and combines running statistical models with expert judgement. An overview of the limit allows for temporary excess.

Stress testing

Stress testing is also used as part of the risk monitoring framework. For example, the stress testing results informapproach by Principal Risk is provided in the retail early warning indicator framework which is designedtable below. As part of their stress test assessments, businesses are also required to triggeridentify potential management actions that wouldcould be taken to mitigate the impact of stress.stress and document these within their results.

The governance process in place includes a detailed review of stress testing methodology and results both within businesses (includingsign-off by business CROs and CFOs) and by central functions.

The business stress test results are consolidated to form a Group view which is used to assess the stress impact on the Group’s capital plans. For the latter, capital management actions such as reducing dividends or redeeming certain capital instruments may be considered. The Group also maintains recovery plans which take into consideration actions to facilitate recovery from severe stress or an orderly resolution. These actions are additional to those included in the Group-wide stress testing results.

The overall stress testing results are reviewed and signed off by the Board, following review by the Treasury and Capital Risk Committee, Treasury Committee, BRC and ExCo.

Summary of methodologies for Group-wide stress testing by risk type
Principal RiskStress testing approach
Credit risk

  Credit risk impairment:For retail portfolios businesses use statistical models to establish a relationship between arrears movements and key macroeconomic parameters such as interest rates, inflation and unemployment, incorporating credit quality migration analysis to estimate stressed levels. In addition, house price reductions (for mortgages) and increased customer drawdowns (for revolving facilities) lead to higher losses which also contribute to increased impairment levels. For wholesale portfolios the stress shocks on credit risk drivers (PDs, LGDs and EADs) are primarily calibrated using historical and expected relationships with key macro-economic parameters.

  Counterparty credit risk losses: The scenarios include market risk shocks that are applied to determine the market value under stress of contracts that give rise to Counterparty Credit Risk (CCR). Counterparty losses, including from changes to the Credit Valuation Adjustment and from defaults, are modelled based on the impact of these shocks as well as using stressed credit risk drivers (PDs and LGDs). The same approach is used to stress the market value of assets held as available for sale or at fair value in the banking book.

  Credit risk weighted assets:The impact of the scenarios is calculated via a combination of business volumes and using similar factors to impairment drivers above, as well as the regulatory calculation and the level ofpro-cyclicality of underlying regulatory credit risk models.

Market risk

  Trading book losses:Market risk factors on the balance sheet are stressed using specific market risk shocks (and are used for the CCR analysis, above). The severity of the shocks applied are dependent on the liquidity of the market under stress, e.g. illiquid positions are assumed to have a longer holding period than positions in liquid markets.

  Treasury and capital risk will apply scenario variables to forecast the Group’s capital, liquidity and IRRBB requirements under stress and review proposed management actions to mitigate the impact of this stress.

Treasury and Capital Risk

  Interest rate risk in the banking book (IRRBB):IRRBB is assessed by considering:

  The analysis of treasury and capital risk also contributes to the estimate of stressed income and costs:

–  Stress impact onnon-interest income is primarily driven by lower projected business volumes and hence lower income from fees and commissions

–  Impact on net interest income is driven by stressed margins, which depend on the level of interest rates under stress as well as funding costs, and on stressed balance sheet volumes. This can be partly mitigated by management actions that may include repricing of variable rate products, taking into account interbank lending rates under stress

–  The impact on costs is mainly driven by business volumes and management actions to partly offset profit reductions (due to impairment increases and decreases in income) such as headcount reductions and lower performance costs.

  Capital risk:Capital risk is assessed by taking all modelled risk impacts as part of the stress test (as listed above) into consideration when assessing Barclays’ ability to withstand a severe stress. The stressed results are considered against internally agreed risk appetite levels but also regulatory minima and perceived market expectations. The MTP can only be agreed by the Board if this is within the agreed risk appetite levels under stress.

  The IAS19 position of pension funds is also stressed as part of the capital risk assessment, taking into account key economic drivers impacting future obligations (e.g. long-term inflation and interest rates) and the impact of the scenarios on the value of fund assets.

Liquidity risk:Liquidity risk is assessed by the internal liquidity risk metric (LRA), which analyses specific liquidity risk drivers such as wholesale funding and contingent funding needs based on the below scenarios:

–  Barclays idiosyncratic liquidity scenario: Barclays faces a loss of market confidence while the market overall is not impacted

–  Market wide liquidity stress scenario: All financial institutions are impacted by a market wide loss of confidence

–  Combined liquidity stress scenario: A simultaneous Barclays idiosyncratic and market liquidity stress scenario

–  Long term liquidity stress scenario: Barclays is unable for a prolonged period of time to access the capital market on a regular basis.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  353    307


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Risk management strategy, governance and risk culture

    

    

 

Summary of methodologies for Group-wide stress testing by risk type continued
Principal RiskStress testing approach
Operational risk

  As part of the reverse stress testing framework, operational risk scenarios are performed to include the assessment of extreme impacts arising from idiosyncratic losses

Model risk

  IVU reviews the models and assumptions used in the MTP and may request the application of overlays to address model deficiencies.

Conduct risk

  Redress/Remediation: Businesses review existing provisions and include additional provisions in MTP if required.

  Litigation: Irrespective of whether a provision had been recognised, stress projections of future losses for conduct risk matters managed by legal are estimated by exercising expert judgment on a case by case basis (material matters) or on a portfolio basis(non-material matters) on accordance with the methodology provided by regulators (EBA, PRA).

Reputation risk

  Reputation risk is not quantified or stressed.

Legal risk

  Legal risk is not quantified or stressed.

In 2017, the internal Group-wide stress testing exercise was run as part of the MTP process, where the Group assessed the impact of an “Adverse” global recession scenario. This was used for the MTP Risk Review and risk appetite setting process.

The Group-wide stress testing framework also includes reverse stress testing techniques, which aim to identify the circumstances under which the Group’s business model would no longer be viable, leading to a significant change in business strategy and to the identification of appropriate mitigating actions. Examples include extreme macroeconomic downturn (‘severely adverse’) scenarios, or specific idiosyncratic events, covering both operational risk and capital/ liquidity events.

Reverse stress testing is used to help support ongoing risk management and is an input to our Recovery Planning process.

Business and risk type specific stress tests

Stress testing techniques at portfolio and product level are also used to support risk management. For example, portfolio management in the US cards business employs stressed assumptions of loss rates to determine profitability hurdles for new accounts. In the UK mortgage business, affordability thresholds incorporate stressed estimates of interest rates. In the Corporate and Investment Bank, global scenario testing is used to gauge potential losses that could arise in conditions of a severe but plausible market stress. Stress testing is also conducted on positions in particular asset classes, including interest rates, commodities, equities, credit and foreign exchange.

Regulatory stress testing

In addition to running internal Group-wide stress tests, the Group also runs regulatory stress tests.

In 2017, the PRA ran its annual concurrent stress testing of the major UK banks, which was based on the Bank of England (BoE) stress scenario. The results of the stress test were published in November 2017, and support the BoE’s aim for increased transparency as part of its stress testing framework.

The Group is also subject to stress testing bynon-UK regulators, which are typically focused at the local legal entity level. This includes the Federal Reserve CCAR process, which will be run in 2018.

Risk management in the setting of strategy

The risk appetite and (internal) stress testing processes described above form the basis of the risk review of the Medium Term Plan (MTP), performed annually. The MTP embeds the Group’s objectives into detailed business plans taking into account the likely business and macroeconomic environment. The strategy is informed by the risk review process, which includes reviewing the Group’s risk profile and setting of risk appetite.

  The MTP risk review process includes a review of the proposed risk appetite by the business, including assessment of business plans under stress which is used to inform the MTP.

  If the business’ plans entail too high a level of risk, management can challenge them. This assessment is based on a comparison of the businesses’ own risk appetite assessment reflected in their business plans(‘bottom-up’ risk appetite) with the central risk team’s view(‘top-down’ risk appetite) based on the financial constraints set by the Board for the Group.

  Businesses may be asked to update their business plans until thebottom-up risk appetite is withintop-down appetite. There is also a detailed review of the stressed estimates and the methodology used to translate the economic scenario to these stressed estimates, as well as the management actions included in the business’ results to verify that these are appropriate and realistic in a stressed environment.

  Risk review meetings are held with the CEO, CFO, CRO and Treasurer of each business, where they present their business plans to the Group CRO and the findings from the risk reviews are discussed, including the risk appetite proposals and stress testing results. Businesses may be required to change their business plans as a result of these meetings.

The BRC has overall responsibility for reviewing the Group’s risk profile and making appropriate recommendations to the Board. The Board is ultimately responsible for approving the MTP and the Group’s risk appetite. The risk appetite process allows senior management and the Board to understand the MTP’s sensitivities by risk type, and includes a set of limits to help the Group stay within it risk appetite, as described above.

LOGO

Management of
credit risk

LOGO  308    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 

This section discusses the organisation specific to the management of credit risks


    

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

This section discusses the organisation specific to the management of credit risks, and provides details of the

calculation of risk weighted assets under the Internal Ratings

Based approach of the Basel framework.

Pages 355310 to 369317 cover the aspects of the Group’s risk management framework specific to credit risk, including committees and the Group reporting structurestructure.

  As 61% of our regulatory capital is for credit risk, we devote pages 318 to 325 to detailing how we approach the internal ratings models, and how the framework supports risk differentiation and management.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    309


Barclays’ approach to managing risks


Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

    

    

 

Credit risk management

The risk of suffering financial loss should anyto the firm from the failure of the Group’sclients, customers clients or market counterparties, failincluding sovereigns, to fulfilfully honour their contractual obligations to the Group.firm, including the whole and timely payment of principal, interest, collateral and other receivables.

 

Overview

The granting of credit is one of the Group’s major sources of income and, as a Principal Risk, the Group dedicates considerable resources to its control. The credit risk that the Group faces arises mainly from wholesale and retail loans and advances together with the counterparty credit risk arising from derivative contracts with clients. This is demonstrated by the impairment charge analysis chart. Other sources of credit risk arise from trading activities, including: debt securities, settlement balances with market counterparties, available for sale (AFS) assets and reverse repurchase agreements (reverse repos).loans.

Credit risk management objectives are to:

 

§ maintain a framework of controls to ensureenable credit risk-taking isrisk taking to be based on sound credit risk management principlesprinciples;

 

§ identify, assess and measure credit risk clearly and accurately across the Group and within each separate business, from the level of individual facilities up to the total portfolioportfolio;

Total credit impairment charge and other provisions – Dec 15 (£2,114m)

 

LOGO

Note: Wholesale and Retail Loans and Advances include charges against contingent liabilities and guarantees

§ control and plan credit risk-taking in line with external stakeholder expectations and avoiding undesirable concentrationsconcentrations;

 

§ monitor credit risk and adherence to agreed controlscontrols;

 

§ ensure thatenable risk-reward objectives areto be met.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Wholesale and retail portfolios are managed separately to reflect the differing nature of the assets; wholesale balances tend to be larger and are managed on an individual basis, while retail balances are larger in number but smaller in value and are, therefore, managed on a homogenoushomogeneous portfolio basis.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  355


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Credit risk management responsibilities have been structured so that decisions are taken as close as possible to the business, while ensuringenforcing robust review and challenge of performance, risk infrastructure and strategic plans. The credit risk management teams in each business are accountable to the relevant BCROBusiness CRO who, in turn, reports to the Group CRO.

Roles and responsibilities

The responsibilities of the credit risk management teams in the businesses, the sanctioning team and other shared services include: sanctioning new credit agreements (principally wholesale); setting policies for approval of transactions (principally retail); setting risk appetite; monitoring risk against limits and other parameters; maintaining robust processes, data gathering, quality, storage and reporting methods for effective credit risk management; performing effective turnaround and workout scenarios for wholesale portfolios via dedicated restructuring and recoveries teams; maintaining robust collections and recovery processes/units for retail portfolios; and review and validation of credit risk measurement models.

For wholesale portfolios, credit risk approval is undertaken by experienced credit risk professionals operating within a clearly defined delegated authority framework, with only the most senior credit officers entrusted with the higher levels of delegated authority.

The largest credit exposures, which are outside the Risk Sanctioning Unit or Risk Distribution Committee authority require the support of the Group Senior Credit Officer (GSCO)Officers (GSCOs), the Group’s most senior credit risk sanctioner.sanctioners. For exposures in excess of the GSCOGSCOs’ authority, approval by Group CRO is required. In the wholesale portfolios, credit risk managers are organised in sanctioning teams by geography, industry and/or product.

The role of the Central Risk function is to provide Group-wide direction, oversight and challenge of credit risk-taking. Central Risk sets the Credit Risk Control Framework, which provides the structure within which credit risk is managed, together with supporting credit risk policies.

Reporting

The Group dedicates considerable resources to gaining a clear and accurate understanding of credit risk across the business and ensuring that its balance sheetto correctly reflectsreflecting the value of the assets in its balance sheet in accordance with applicable accounting principles. This process can be summarised in five broad stages:

 

§ measuring exposures and concentrations

 

§ monitoring performance and asset quality

 

§ monitoring for weaknesses in portfolios

 

§ raising allowances for impairment and other credit provisions

 

§ returning assets to a performing status or writing off assets when the whole or part of a debt is considered irrecoverable.

Measuring exposures and concentrations

Loans and advances to customers provide the principal source of credit risk to the Group although it is also exposed to other forms of credit risk through, for example, loans and advances to banks, loan commitments and debt securities. Risk management policies and processes are designed to identify and analyse risk, to set appropriate risk appetite, limits and controls, and to monitor the risks and adherence to limits by means of reliable and timely data.

LOGO

310    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Loan loss rate (bps) – longer-term trends

LOGO

Notes

aRestated to reflect the impact of IFRS10, which results in some former Exit Quadrant exposures being recorded at fair value from 2012 onwards.
b2015, 2016, 2017 figures exclude Africa.

One area of particular review is concentration risk. A concentration of credit risk exists when a number of counterparties or customers are engaged in similar activities or geographies, and have similar economic characteristics that would cause their ability to meet contractual obligations to be similarly affected by changes in economic and other conditions. As a result, the Group constantly reviews its concentration in a number of areas including, for example, geography, maturity and industry.

Mandate and scale limits are used to maintain concentrations at appropriate levels, which are aligned with the businesses’business’ stated risk appetite. Limits are typically based on the nature of the lending and the amount of the portfolio meeting certain standards of underwriting criteria. Diversification, to reduce concentration risk, is achieved through setting maximum exposure guidelineslimits to individual counterparties.counterparties’ exposures. Excesses are reported to the BRC.

356  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Monitoring performance and asset quality

Trends in the quality of the Group’s loan portfolio are monitored in a number of ways including tracking loan loss rate and coverage ratios.

Loan loss rate

The loan loss rate (LLR) provides a way of consistently monitoring trends in loan portfolio quality at the Group, business and product levels. The LLR represents the annualised impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and other credit provisions as a percentage of the total period-end loans and advances to customers and banks, gross of impairment allowances. Details of the LLR for the current period may be found in the Credit Risk Performance section in the 2015 Form 20-F.

Loan loss rate (bps) – longer-term trends

LOGO

Note a: Restated to reflect the impact of IFRS10, which results in some former Exit Quadrant exposures being recorded at fair value from 2012 onwards

From a full year peak of 156bps at 31 December 2009, the LLR has been on an improving trend. By the end of 2011, the LLR of 77bps had returned to pre-crisis levels and was lower than the long-term average. The LLR fell from 2012 to 2014 and remained at a low level in 2015 at 47bps.page 96.

Coverage ratios

The impairment allowance is the aggregate of the identified and unidentified impairment (UI) balances. Impairment allowance coverage, or the coverage ratio, is reported at two levels:

 

§ credit risk loans (CRLs) coverage ratio, calculated as impairment allowances as a percentage of CRL balances

 

§ potential credit risk loans coverage ratio (impairment allowances as a percentage of total CRL and Potential Problem LoanPPL balances).

See identifying potential credit risk loans on page 361 for more information for the criteria for these categories.

 

LOGO Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report

 See identifying potential credit risk

 loans on Form 20-F  |  357page 313 for more

 information for the criteria for these

 categories.


Barclays’ approach to managing risksLOGO

Management of credit riskNotes

CRL coverage

LOGO

Note: Some Non-Core exposures are not reported as CRLs following the introduction of IFRS10, which accounts for these balances at fair value

aSome Non-core related exposures are not reported as CRLs following the introduction of IFRS10, which accounts for these balances at fair value.
bAll historical figures exclude BAGL.

Appropriate coverage ratios will vary according to the type of product but can be broadly shown to have typical severity rates based upon historic analysis:

§secured retail home loans: 10%-25%

§credit cards, unsecured and other personal lending products: 65%-85%

§corporate facilities: 30%-50%.

CRL coverage ratios would therefore be expected to be at or around these levels over a defined period of time.

product. In principle, a number of factors may affect the Group’s overall coverage ratios, including:

The mix of products within total CRL balances:coverage ratios will tend to be lower when there is a high proportion of secured retailRetail and corporate balances within total CRLs. This is due to the fact that the recovery outlook on these types of exposures is typically higher than retailRetail unsecured products, with the result that they will have lower impairment requirements.

The stage in the economic cycle: coverage ratios will tend to be lower in the earlier stages of deterioration in credit conditions. At this stage, Retail delinquent balances will be predominantly in the early delinquency cycles and corporate names will have only recently moved to CRL categories. As such balances attract a lower impairment requirement, the CRL coverage ratio will be lower.

The balance of PPLs to CRLs: the impairment requirements for PPLs are lower than for CRLs, so the greater the proportion of PPLs, the lower the PCRL coverage ratio.

Write-off policies: the speed with which defaulted assets are written off will affect coverage ratios. The more quickly assets are written off, the lower the ratios will be, since stock with 100% coverage will tend to roll out of PCRL categories more quickly.

Details of the coverage ratios for the current period are shown in the above chart and may be found in the analysis of loans and advances and impairment section inat page 105.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    311


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the 2015 Form 20-F.internal

ratings-based approach

LOGO

Monitoring weaknesses in portfolios

While the basic principles for monitoring weaknesses in wholesaleWholesale and retailRetail exposures are broadly similar, they reflect the differing nature of the assets. As a matter of policy, all facilities granted to corporate or wholesaleWholesale counterparties are subject to a review on, at least, an annual basis, even when they are performing satisfactorily.

358  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Wholesale portfolios1portfolios*

Within the wholesaleWholesale portfolios, the Basel definitions of default are used as default indicators which have been aligned to the IAS 39 objective evidence of impairment. A default is triggered if individual identified impairment is recognised. Group definitions of default used are:

 

§ bank puts the credit obligation on a non-accrued status

 

§ bank makes a charge-off or account specific identified impairment resulting from a significant perceived decline in credit quality

 

§ bank sells the credit obligation at a material credit-related economic loss

 

§ bank consents to a distressed restructuring of the credit obligation where this is likely to result in a diminished financial obligation caused by the material forgiveness or postponement of principal, interest or fees

 

1Includes certain Business Banking facilities which are recorded as Retail for management purposes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  359


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

§ bank triggers a petition for obligor’s bankruptcy or similar order

 

§ bank becomes aware of the obligor having sought or having been placed in bankruptcy or similar protection where this would avoid or delay repayment of the credit obligation to the banking group

§ bank becomes aware of an acceleration of an obligation by a firm

 

§ where the obligor is a bank – revocation of authorisation

 

§ where the obligor is a sovereign – trigger of default definition of an approved External Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) such as a rating agency

 

§ obligor past due more than 90 days on any material credit obligation to the Group.

Wholesale accounts that are deemed to contain heightened levels of risk are recorded on graded watchlists (WL) comprising threefour categories graded in line with the perceived severity of the risk attached to the lending, and its probability of default. Examples of heightened levels of risk may include, for example:

 

§ a material reduction in profits

 

§ a material reduction in the value of collateral held

 

§ a decline in net tangible assets in circumstances which are not satisfactorily explained

 

§ periodic waiver requests or changes to the terms of the credit agreement over an extended period of time.

These lists are updated monthly and circulated to the relevant risk control points. Once an account has been placed on WL, the exposure is monitored and, where appropriate, exposure reductions are effected. Should an account become impaired, it will normally, but not necessarily, have passed through each of the threefour categories, which reflects the need for increasing caution and control. While all counterparties, regardless of financial health, are subject to a full review of

all facilities on at least an annual basis, more frequent interim reviews may be undertaken should circumstances dictate. Specialist recovery functions deal with counterparties in higher levels of WL, default, collection or insolvency. Their mandate is to maximise shareholder value, ideally via working intensively with the counterparty to help them to either return to financial health or, in the cases of insolvency, obtain the orderly and timely recovery of impaired debts. Where a counterparty’s financial health gives grounds for concern, it is immediately placed into the appropriate category.

Retail portfolios

Within the retailRetail portfolios, which tend to comprise homogeneous assets, statistical techniques more readily allow potential credit weaknesses to be monitored on a portfolio basis. The approach is consistent with the Group’s policy of raising a collective impairment allowance as soon as objective evidence of impairment is identified. Retail accounts can be classified according to specified categories of arrears status (or 30 day cycle), which reflects the level of contractual payments which are overdue. An outstanding balance is deemed to be delinquent when it is one day or “one penny” down and goes into default when it moves into recovery, normally 180 days. Impairment is considered at all stages of the customer’s outstanding obligations.

The probability of default increases with the number of contractual payments missed, thus raising the associated impairment requirement.

Once a loan has passed through a prescribed number of cycles, normally six, it will be

*Includes certain Business Banking facilities which are recorded as Retail for management purposes.

312    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

charged-off and enter recovery status. Charge-off refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the full balance. In most cases, charge-off will result in the account moving to a legal recovery function or debt sale. This will typically occur after an account has been treated by a collections function. However, in certain cases, an account may be charged off directly from a performing status, such as in the case of insolvency or death.

The timings of the charge-off points are established based on the type of loan. For the majority of products, the standard period for charging off accounts is six cycles (180 days past due date of contractual obligation). Early charge-off points are prescribed for unsecured assets. For example, in casecases of customer bankruptcy or insolvency, associated accounts are charged off within 60 days of notification.

360  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Identifying potential credit risk loans

The Group reports potentially and actually impaired loans as PCRLs. PCRLs compriseunder two categories of loans:categories: PPLs and CRLs.

PPLs are loans that are currently complyingcomply with repayment terms but where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrower to continue to comply with such terms in the near future. If the credit quality of a wholesaleWholesale loan on a WL deteriorates to the highest category, or a Retail loan deteriorates to delinquency cycle 2, consideration is given to including it within the PPL category.

Should further evidence of deterioration be observed, a loan may move to the CRL category. Events that would trigger the transfer of a loan from the PPL to the CRL category include a missed payment or a breach of covenant. CRLs comprise three classes of loans:

Impaired loans: comprisesloans comprise loans where an individually identified impairment allowance has been raised and also include loans which are fully collateralised or where indebtedness has already been written down to the expected realisable value. This category includes all retailRetail loans that have been charged off to legal recovery. The category may include loans, which, while impaired, are still performing.

Accruing past due 90 days or more: comprises loans that are 90 days or more past due with respect to principal or interest. An impairment allowance will be raised against these loans if the expected cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate are less than the carrying value.

Impaired and restructured loans: comprises loans not included above where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows discounted at the effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised. See Forbearance and other concession programmes on page 365 to 368below for more detail.

Allowances for impairment and other credit provisions

The Group establishes, through charges against profit, impairment allowances and other credit provisions for the incurred loss inherent in the lending book. Under IFRS, impairment allowances are recognised where there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more loss events that have occurred after initial recognition, and where these events have had an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or portfolio of financial assets. Impairment of loans and receivables is measured as the difference between the carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. If the carrying amount is less than the discounted cash flows, then no further allowance is necessary.

As one of the controls to ensure that adequate impairment allowances are held, movementsMovements in impairment to individual names with a total impairment allowance of £10m or more are presented to the GSCOGSCOs for approval.

Individually assessed impairment

Impairment allowances are measured individually for assets that are individually significant, and collectively where a portfolio comprises homogenoushomogeneous assets and where appropriate statistical techniques are available. In terms of individual assessment, the principal trigger point for impairment is the missing of a contractual payment which is evidence that an account is exhibiting serious financial problems, and where any further deterioration is likely to lead to failure. Details of other trigger points can be found above. Two key inputs to the cash flow calculation are the valuation of all security and collateral, as well as the timing of all asset realisations, after allowing for all attendant costs. This method applies mainly in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios.

Collectively assessed impairment

For collective assessment, the principal trigger point for impairment is the missing of a contractual payment, which is the policy consistently adopted across all credit cards, unsecured loans, mortgages and most other retailRetail lending. The calculation methodology relies on the historical experience of pools of similar assets; hence the impairment allowance is collective. The impairment calculation is typically based on a roll-rate approach, where the percentage of assets that move from the initial delinquency to default is derived from statistical probabilities based on historical experience. Recovery amounts are calculated using a weighted average for the relevant portfolio. This method applies mainly to the retailRetail portfolios and is consistent with Group policy of raising an allowance as soon as impairment is identified. Unidentified impairment is also included in collective impairment.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  361


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Impairment for losses incurred but not specifically indentifiedidentified

Unidentified impairment allowances are also raised to cover losses which are judged to be incurred but not yet specifically identified in customer exposures at the balance sheet date, and which, therefore, have not been specifically reported. The incurred but not yet reported calculation is based on the asset’s probability of moving from the performing portfolio to being specifically identified as impaired within the given emergence period and then on to default within a specified period, termed as the outcome period. This is calculated on the present value of estimated future cash flows discounted at the financial asset’s effective interest rate. The emergence and outcome periods vary across products.

Wholesale portfolios

Impairment in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios is generally calculated by valuing each impaired asset on a case by case basis, i.e. on an individual assessment basis. A relatively small amount of wholesaleWholesale impairment relates to unidentified or collective impairment; in such cases, impairment is calculated using modelled Probability of Default (PD) x Loss Given Default (LGD) x Exposure at Default (EAD) adjusted for an emergence period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    313


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Retail portfolios

For retailRetail portfolios, the impairment allowance is mainly assessed on a collective basis and is based on the drawn balances adjusted to take into account the likelihood of the customer defaulting at a particular point in time (PDpit) and the amount estimated as not recoverable (LGD). The basic calculation is:

Impairment allowance =

Total outstandings x PDpit x LGD

The PDpit increases with the number of contractual payments missed thus raising the associated impairment requirement.

In retail,Retail, the current policy also incorporates a high risk segment which is included in the unidentified impairment calculation. High risk segments are those which can be demonstrated to experience higher levels of loss within the performing segment. This segmentation allows for earlier identification of potential loss in a portfolio. Unidentified impairment is also referred to as collective impairment. This is to reflect the impairment that is collectively held against a pool of assets where a loss event has occurred, but has not yet been captured.

Sensitivity of the impairment to key assumptions

Wholesale portfolios

Impairment in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios is generally calculated by valuing each impaired asset on a case by case basis, and is not therefore primarily model-driven. As such, the key assumptions that would have the most impact on impairment provisions in the wholesaleWholesale portfolios are the valuations placed upon security and collateral held and the timing of asset realisations.

When calculating impairment, estimated future cash flows are discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. At present, in wholesaleWholesale portfolios, the impact of discounting is relatively small in itself but would rise with reference rates. In addition, to the extent that a rise in interest rates impacted economic growth and/or serviceability of wholesaleWholesale clients and customers, this would be expected to feed through in future impairment numbers.

In 2015, key judgements were made on a number of identified cases within Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and Wealth and Investment Management.

Retail portfolios

For Retail portfolios, impairment is calculated predominantly using models. The models are developed using historical data and include explicit and implicit assumptions such as debt sale estimates, house price valuations and the distribution of accounts. Model monitoring and validation are undertaken regularly, at least annually, to ensuremake sure that models are fit for purpose. Further to this, the Group accounts for the impact of changes in the economic environment and lags resulting from the design of the models to ensureenable overall impairment adequacy. See Management adjustments to Models for Impairment on page 137114 for more information on key management judgements in 2015.2017. See stress testing (pages 347 to 350)(page 306) for further information.

Emergence and outcome periods

To develop models to calculate the allowance for impairment it is first necessary to estimate the time horizons of these models. These time horizons are called the emergence and outcome periodsperiods. Emergence Periodperiod relates to the time between a loss event occurring and that event becoming apparent via the account becoming delinquent and attracting identified impairment. Outcome is an analytically derived period taken to capture lifetime defaults associated with the observed loss event.

362  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


ThisThe application of this methodology ensuresmeans that the Group captures the loss incurred at the correct balance sheet date. These impairment allowances are reviewed and adjusted at least quarterly by an appropriate charge or release of the stock of impairment allowances based on statistical analysis and management judgement. Where appropriate, the accuracy of this analysis is periodically assessed against actual losses. For further detail, see modelling of risk on pages 318 to 325.

Wholesale portfolios

For wholesale portfolios inthe Corporate Banking and Investment Bank portfolios, the emergence period is portfolio specific and is based on the anticipated length of time from the occurrence of a loss event to identified impairment being incurred. The emergence period in Corporate Banking is derived from actual case file review. This is periodically benchmarked against the time taken to move between risk grades in internal watchlists, from WL1 or 2 into WL3, which is the level of risk that will attract a collective impairment allowance. Both methodologies produce similar results for the emergence period, which is currently six months. Within Corporate Banking, post model adjustments can be made to increase the emergence period for certain industry sectors to reflect, for example, a benign environment. The average life of the Investment Bank portfolio is estimated to be 18 months, during which time Investment Bank is exposed to losses on the portfolio. However, it is expected that incurred losses would become apparent within six months, therefore the Investment Bank also uses a six-month emergence period.

Retail portfolios

During 2015,2017, the Retail Impairment Policy was significantly strengthened and required enhancements to modelling approaches to both emergence and outcome periods. Policy continues to define minimum emergenceperiods across the credit card portfolios, notably UK and US. Emergence periods at a product level, asare shown in the following table.table below.

 

  Emergence and outcome periods

 

    
    

 

Emergence period

 

(months)

 

  Product Type

 

  

            2015             

 

  

            2014             

 

 

  Credit cards

  

 

2

  

 

3

  Current Accounts / Overdrafts

  3  3

  Unsecured Loans

  3  3

  Secured Loans

 

  6

 

  3

 

Policy enhancement now requires businesses to capture lifetime defaults allowing consideration to cure rates and future events, subject to a minimum floor of 80%.

Emergence periods 
    Emergence period (months) 
Product Type  2017   2016 
Credit cards   3-3.5    3-3.5 
Current Accounts   4    4 
Unsecured Loans   6    4 
Secured Loans   8    6 

Businesses undertake regular analysis, at least annually, to validate that the minimum emergence periods above continue to reflect the actual observed time between the occurrence of a loss event and entry to an impaired state, in order to ensureso that they remain appropriate and provide sufficient coverage of future losses.

Where any shortfalls are identified at a business or portfolio level, the prescribed minimum emergence periods are increased to reflect our most up-to-date experience of customer behaviour.

The final approved emergence periods are incorporated within the rates used as part of the overall UIUnidentified Impairment (UI) assessment, which now encompasses total outstanding balances on all accounts that are in order, and for which no identified impairment allowances are held.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  363


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Individual evidence based outcome periods are also derived at a business/portfolio level, businesses are required to capture lifetime defaults allowing consideration to cure rates and future events, subject to thea minimum period in the table above. floor of 80%.

Final outcome periods adopted are re-evaluated on an annual basis to ensureso that they continue to reflect the actual time elapsing from the initial indication of potential default to the default event.

Returning assets to a performing status

Wholesale portfolios

In wholesaleWholesale portfolios, an account may only be returned to a performing status when it ceases to have any actual or perceived financial stress and no longer meets any of the WL criteria, or once facilities have been fully repaid or cancelled. Unless a facility is fully repaid or cancelled, the decision in Corporate Banking to return an account to performing status may only be taken by the credit risk team, while within the Investment Bank, the decision can only be taken by the Investment Bank watchlistBI Watch List Committee.

Retail portfolios

A retailRetail asset, pre-point of charge-off, may only be returned to a performing status in the following circumstances:

 

§all arrears (both capital and interest) have been cleared and payments have returned to original contractual payments

 

§for revolving products, a re-age event (see page 368) has occurred, when the customer is returned to an up-to-date status without having cleared the requisite level of arrears

 

§314    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

for amortising products, which are performing on a programme of forbearance and meet the following criteria may be returned to the performing book classified as High Risk2Risk*:

 

 -no interest rate concessions must have been granted

 

 -restructure must remain within original product parameters (original term + extension)

 

 -twelve consecutive payments at the revised contractual payment amount must have been received post the restructure event.

For residential mortgages, accounts may also be considered for rehabilitation post charge-off, where customer circumstances have changed. The customer must clear all unpaid capital and interest, and confirm their ability to meet full payments going forward.

Recovery units

Recovery units are responsible for exposures where deterioration of the counterparty/customer credit profile is severe, to the extent that timely or full recovery of exposure is considered unlikely and default has occurred or is likely in the short-term.short term. Recovery teams set and implement strategies to recover the Group’s exposure through realisation of assets and collateral, in co-operation with counterparties/customers and where this is not possible through insolvency and legal procedures.

In wholesale,Wholesale, for a case to be transferred to a recovery unit, it must be in default and have ceased to actively trade or be in insolvency. In Retail, the timings of the charge-off points to recovery units are established based on the type of loan. For the majority of products, the standard period for charging off accounts is six missed contractual payments (180 days past due date of contractual obligation) unless a Forbearance programme is agreed. Early points are prescribed for unsecured assets. For example, in case of customer bankruptcy or insolvency, associated accounts are charged off within 60 days of notification. See recovery information included in Analysis of Specific Portfolio and Asset Types section in the 2015 Form 20-F.on page 106.

Foreclosures in process and properties in possession

Foreclosure is the process where the bank initiates legal action against a customer, with the intention of terminating the loan agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property subject to local law and recover amounts it is owed.owned. This process can be initiated by the bank independent of the impairment treatment and it is therefore possible that the foreclosure process may be initiated while the account is still in collections (delinquent) or in recoveries (post charge-off) where the customer has not agreed a satisfactory repayment schedule with the bank.

2 The identification and subsequent treatment of up-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. High Risk includes customers who have suffered recent financial dislocation, i.e. prior forbearance or re-age.

364  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Properties in possession include properties held as ‘loans and advances to customers’ and properties held as ‘other real estate owned’.

Held as ’loans and advances to customers’ (UK and Italy) refers to the properties where the customer continues to retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the asset, or the court has ordered the auction of the property.

Held as ‘other real estate owned’ (South Africa and Portugal) refers to properties where the bank has taken legal ownership of the title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as ‘other real estate owned’ within other assets on the bank’s balance sheet.

Writing off assets

Write-off refers to the point where it is determined that the asset is irrecoverable, it is no longer considered economically viable to try and recover the asset, it is deemed immaterial, or full and final settlement is reached and a shortfall remains. In the event of write-off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment reserve held against the asset is released.

The timing and extent of write-offs may involve some element of subjective judgement. Nevertheless, a write-off will often be prompted by a specific event, such as the inception of insolvency proceedings or other formal recovery action, which makes it possible to establish that some or the entire advance is beyond realistic prospect of recovery. The position of impaired loans is also reviewed at least quarterly to ensuremake sure that irrecoverable advances are being written off in a prompt and orderly manner and in compliance with any local regulations.

For retailRetail portfolios, the timings of the write-off points are established based on the type of loan. For unsecured, assets in the recoveries book will be written-off if the required qualifying repayments are not made within a rolling twelve-month period. For secured loans, the shortfall after the receipt of the proceeds from the disposal of the collateral is written off within three months of that date if no repayment schedule has been agreed with the borrower. Such assets are only written off once all the necessary procedures have been completed and the amount of the loss has been determined.

Subsequent recoveries of amounts previously written off are written back and hence decrease the amount of the reported loan impairment charge in the income statement. In 2015,2017, total write-offs of impaired financial assets decreased 24%increased 6% to £2.27bn (2014: £3.01bn)£2.3bn (2016: £2.2bn).

Total write-offs of financial assets (£m)

 

LOGO

LOGO

Forbearance and other concession programmes

Forbearance programmes

Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a facility in response to an obligor’s financial difficulties. The Group offers forbearance programmes to assist customers and clients in financial difficulty through agreements that may include accepting less than contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, the bank or a third party.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  365


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

Forbearance programmes for wholesaleWholesale portfolios

The majority of wholesaleWholesale client relationships are individually managed, with lending decisions made with reference to specific circumstances and on bespoke terms.

Forbearance occurs when, for reasons relatingmeasures consist of concessions made towards a debtor that is experiencing or about to experience difficulties in meeting their financial commitments.

A concession is a sanctioned action, outside of market terms that is beneficial to the actualdebtor. The concession arises solely due to the financial distress of the debtor and the terms are more favourable than those which would be offered to a new or perceived financial difficulty of anexisting obligor a concession is granted below the Group’s current standard rates (i.e. lending criteria below the Group’s current lending terms), that would not otherwise be considered. This includes all troubled debt restructures granted below our standard rates.

Forbearance would typically be evident where the concession(s) agreed impact the ability to repay debt or avoid recognising a default with a lack of appropriate commercial balance andsimilar risk mitigation/structural enhancement of benefit to the Group in return for concession(s).

The following list is not exhaustive but provides some examples of instances that would typically be considered to be evidence of forbearance:profile. Concessions are represented by:

 

§a reduction of current contractual interest rate for the sole purpose of maintaining performing debt status, with no other improvement to terms of benefitA change or alteration to the Groupprevious terms and conditions of a contract,

 

§non-enforcementA total or partial refinancing of a material covenant breach impactingtroubled debt contract.

The following are some examples of concessions which would be deemed forbearance (where granted to debtors in financial difficulties and outside of market terms):

A restructuring of the counterparty’s ability to repaycontractual terms of a credit facility (such as a reduction in the interest rate).

 

§converting a fully or partially amortising facility to a bullet repayment at maturity, with no other improvement to terms of benefitAn extension to the Group, for the sole purpose of avoiding a payment default due to customer’s inability to meet amortisationmaturity date.

 

§extensionChange to the collateral structure (typically resulting in maturity date for a project finance facility that gives an effective contractual term longer than the underlying project contract being financednet reduction in collateral).

 

§any releaseFavourable adjustment to covenants where repayment profile changes, or non-enforcement of a material security interest without receiving appropriate value by way of repayment/alternate security offered or other improvement in terms available to the Group commensurate with the value of the security released.covenant breach.

Repayment in some form other than cash (e.g. equity).

Capitalisation of accrued interest.

Any other concession made which is designed to alleviate actual or apparent financial stress e.g. a capital repayment holiday.

*The identification and subsequent treatment of up-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. High Risk includes customers who have suffered recent financial dislocation, i.e. prior forbearance or re-age.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    315


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Where a concession is granted that is not a result of financial difficulty and/or is within our current market terms, the concession would not amount to forbearance. For example, a commercially balanced restructure within the Group’s current terms which involves the granting of concessions and receiving risk mitigation/structural enhancement of benefit to the Group would not be indicative of forbearance.

TheForbearance is not deemed to have occurred in the following list (not exhaustive) gives some examples of instances that would not typically be considered to be forbearance:situations:

 

§temporary/permanent waivers/resetsThere is a pending maturity event anticipated at the onset of covenants agreed in line with our current termslending i.e. the loan was never structured to amortise to zero.

 

§amending contractualA maturity extension or a temporary covenant waiver (e.g. short term standstill) is granted to meet current lending terms that results insupport a previously amortising facility having a bullet repayment as a consequenceperiod of shorter maturity datenegotiation, subject to the Group being satisfied that:

 

§equity/warrants taken to increase return to the Group without compromising contractual interestdebtor is actively pursuing refinancing or the sale of an asset enabling full repayment at expiry of the extended term

 

§extension of maturity date where the extensionno loss is within the normally granted terms for the type of facility in questionanticipated

 

§releasepayments of a material security interest where commensurate value is received by way of repayment/other security offered.and capital continues as originally scheduled,

 

Cases where a technical default may have occurred, the Group has decided to reserve its position but does not consider the default to be sufficient to impact the counterparty’s ability to pay, would not typically be considered forbearance (as the counterparty would continue to meet its payment obligations under existing terms).

The Troubled Assets Policy requires that a permanent record is retained of all individual cases of forbearance, and upon granting forbearance the counterparty is placed on WL. The counterparty then remains on WL and is flagged as being in forbearance for a minimum of 12 months from the date forbearance is applied. Counterparties may be removed from WL status within 12 months in exceptional circumstances, e.g. full repayment of facilities or significant restructuring. Counterparties placed on WL status are subject to increased levels of credit risk oversight.

there is a high probability of a successful outcome within a “reasonable” time scale (6 months for bilateral facilities, 9 months for multi-lender).

 

366  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F Immaterial amendments to lending terms are agreed, including changes to non-financial internal risk triggers that are only used for internal monitoring purposes.


Counterparties who have been granted forbearance are classified as a Basel ‘unlikeliness’ to pay default for capital purposes, with PD of 1 throughout the period that they remain classified as being in forbearance. This is on the basis that, without intervention by the Group, the counterparties are unlikely to meet their obligations in full which would lead to default.

Impairment is assessed on an individual basis and recognised where relevant impairment triggers have been reached including where counterparties are in arrears and require renegotiation of terms. Forbearance is considered to be an indicator that impairment may be present and an impairment test is performed for all cases placed in forbearance.

Given that these loans have already been assessed for impairment at the point of being classified as being in forbearance, the Group does not have additional procedures to evaluate the likelihood that these loans would default within the loss emergence and confirmation periods.

A control framework exists along with regular sampling to ensureso that policies for watchlistwatch list and impairment are enforced as defined and to ensure that all assets have suitable levels of impairment applied. Portfolios are subject to independent assessment.

Aggregate data for Wholesale forbearance cases is reviewed by the Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee.

Forbearance programmes for retail portfolios

Retail forbearance is available to customers experiencing financial difficulties. Forbearance solutions take a number of forms depending on individual customer circumstances. Short-term solutions focus on temporary reductions to contractual payments and may change from capital and interest payments to interest only. For loan customers with longer-term financial difficulties, term extensions may be offered, which may include interest rate concessions,concessions. For credit card customers with longer-term financial difficulties, a switch to a fully amortising plan

may be offered, which may include an interest rate concession.

When an account is placed into a programme of forbearance, the asset will be classified as such for the remainder of its term, unless after 12 months it qualifies for reclassification, upon which it will be returned to the up-to-date book and classified as high risk for a further

12 month period. When the Group agrees to a forbearance programme with a customer, the impairment allowance recognises the impact on cash flows of the agreement to receive less than the original contractual payments. The Retail Impairment Policy prescribes the methodology for impairment of forbearance assets, which is measured by comparing the debt outstanding to the revised expected repayment. This results in higher impairment, in general, than for fully performing assets, reflecting the additional credit risk attached to loans subject to forbearance.

Barclays has continued to assist customers in financial difficulty through the use of forbearance programmes. However, the extent of forbearance offered by the Group to customers and clients remains small in comparison to the overall size of the loan book.

The level of forbearance extended to customers in other Retail portfolios is not material and, typically, does not currently play a significant part in the way customer relationships are managed. However, additional portfolios will be added to this disclosure should the forbearance in respect of such portfolios become material.

A retailRetail loan is not considered to be renegotiated where the amendment is at the request of the customer, there is no evidence of actual or imminent financial difficulty and the amendment meets with all underwriting criteria. In this case it would be treated as a new loan. In the normal course of business, customers who are not in financial difficulties frequently apply for new loan terms, for example to take advantage of a lower interest rate or to secure a further advance on a mortgage product. Where these applications meet our underwriting criteria and the loan is made at market interest rates, the loan is not classified as being in forbearance. Only in circumstances where a customer has requested a term extension, interest rate reduction or further advance and there is evidence of financial difficulty is the loan classified as forbearance and included in our disclosures on forbearance.forbearance on page 111.

Please see the Creditcredit risk performance section of the 2015 Form 20-Fon page 96 for details of principal wholesaleWholesale and retailRetail assets currently in forbearance.

Impairment of loans under forbearance

Loans under forbearance programmes are subject to Group policy. In both retailRetail and wholesaleWholesale portfolios, identified impairment is raised for such accounts, recognising the agreement between the Group and customer to pay less than the original contractual payment and is measured using a future discounted cash flow approach comparing the debt outstanding to the expected repayment on the debt.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  367


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk

This results in higher impairment, in general, being held for loans under forbearance than for fully performing assets, reflecting the additional credit risk attached to loans subject to forbearance.

Sustainability of loans under forbearance

The Group monitors the sustainability of loans for which forbearance has been granted.

Wholesale portfolios

In the wholesale portfolios, counterparties that have beenDebtors granted forbearance are classified on watch list (WL) for the duration of the forbearance. Counterparties placed on WL and thereforestatus are subject to increased levels of credit risk oversight. Counterparties then remain on WL and

Forborne debtors are classified for reporting as either Performing (WL 1-3) or Non-Performing (WL4).

Non-Performing debtors are defined as:

More than 90 days past due.

Assessed as unlikely to pay credit obligations in full without realisation of collateral, regardless of the existence of any past due amount or of the number of days past due.

Credit impaired.

Performing forborne debtors granted additional forbearance measures or becoming more than 30 days past-due on a facility obligation.

Performing debtors are classified as beingdebtors that are not past due and are without risk of non-payment.

Non-performing status remains in forbearance with a PD of 1 for capital purposesforce for a minimum of 12 months from the date of classification before the debtor can be considered as performing. Performing debtors remain forborne for a minimum 24 months before forborne status may be reviewed. The minimum time spent in forbearance for a case that is Non-Performing at the point forbearance is applied until satisfactory performancegranted is evidenced. Forbearance status and the related default treatment for capital can be removed after 12 months from being applied if any of the following criteria is met:therefore 36 months.

 

§316    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-Fthe counterparty no longer benefits from a concession below our current market rates or reverts back to their original lending terms (prior to the concession being applied)


§the counterparty ceases to have any actual or perceived financial stress

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

§a significant restructure takes place which leads to a significant improvement in the credit profile of the counterparty.

Counterparties may only be removed from being classified as being in forbearance with a PDManagement of 1 for capital purposes within 12 months in exceptional circumstances, e.g. full repayment of facilities or significant restructuring that materially improves credit quality. Counterparties continuing to benefit from a concession below current market can be removed from WLrisk and no longer be classified as in forbearance provided they do not meet any of the WL criteria and can evidence consistent satisfactory performance throughout the minimum twelve-month period.internal

ratings-based approach

Retail portfolios

In retailRetail portfolios, the type of forbearance programme offered should be appropriate to the nature and the expected duration of the customer’s financial distress. It is imperative that the solution agreed is both appropriate to that customer and sustainable, with a clear demonstration from the customer of both willingness and ability to repay. Before any permanent programme of forbearance is granted, an affordability assessment is undertaken to ensureconfirm suitability of the offer. When customers exit forbearance, the accounts are ring-fenced as a High Risk segment within the up-to-date book for a period of at least twelve months.

For disclosure on the Group’s accounting policy with respect to impairment, see notepages 91 to 93 and Note 7 and pages 361 to 363.of the Barclays PLC financial statements on page 204.

Other programmes

Retail re-ageingre-aging activity

Re-ageingRe-aging refers to the placing of an account into an up-to-date position without the requisite repayment of arrears. The re-age policy applies to revolving products only. No reduction is made to the minimum due payment amounts which are calculated, as a percentage of balance, with any unpaid principal included in the calculation of the following month’s minimum due payment.

The changes in timing of cash flows following re-aging do not result in any additional cost to the Group. The following are the conditions required to be met before a re-age may occur:

 

§the account must not have been previously charged off or written off

 

§the borrower cannot be bankrupt, subject to an Individual Voluntary Arrangement (a UK contractual arrangement with creditors for individuals wishing to avoid bankruptcy), a fraud or deceased

 

§the borrower must show a renewed willingness and ability to repay the debt. This will be achieved by the borrower making at least three consecutive contractual monthly payments or the equivalent cumulative amount. Contractual monthly payment is defined as the contractual minimum due. Funds may not be advanced for any part of this

 

§the account must have been on book at least nine months (i.e. nine months prior to the three-month qualification period)

 

§no account should be re-aged more than once within any twelve-month period, or more than twice in a five year period.

Assets are considered to belong to a separate High Risk pool. Under High Risk, the performance of the assets is a risk characteristic and results in a higher probability of default being assigned to them in impairment models which meet the requirement of IAS 39, AG87-88.

368  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


This results in an appropriately higher impairment allowance being recognised on the assets.

Retail small arrears capitalisation

All small arrears capitalisations are now considered a form of Forbearance, based on the European Banking Authority’s requirements for Supervisory Reporting on Forbearance and Non-Performing exposures.

Refinancing risk

This is the risk that the borrower or group of correlated borrowers may be unable to repay bullet-repayment loans at expiry, and will therefore need refinancing.

From a large corporates perspective, refinancing risk will typically be associated with loans that have an element of bullet repayment incorporated into the repayment profile. Refinancing risk is taken into account on a case by case basis as part of the credit review and approval process for each individual loan. The review will consider factors such as the strength of the business model and sustainability of the cash flows; and for bridge loans, the certainty of the sources of repayment and any associated market risk.

Commercial real estate loans will frequently incorporate a bullet repayment element at maturity. Where this is the case, deals are sized and structured to enable the Group to term out the loan if the client were unable to refinance the loan at expiry. Credit review will incorporate an examination of various factors that are central to this consideration, such as tenant quality, tenancy agreementsagreement (including break clauses), property quality and interest rate sensitivity.

Loans to small and medium enterprises (SMEs) will typically be either revolving credit lines to cover working capital needs or amortising exposures, with periodic refinancing to give the opportunity to review structure, pricing, etc.

Please refer to the maturity analysis for UK CRE and customers with interest-only home loans in theEnvironmental risk

Environmental risk is recognised as a mainstream credit risk performance section inissue and the 2015 Form 20-F for more information.

Environmental Risk

The Group has a dedicated Environmental Risk Management team, as part of the central Credit Risk Management function, recognising that environment is a mainstream credit risk issue.function. Environmental issues are required considerationsconsidered in credit risk assessment, and environmental risk standards are included in the Wholesale Credit Risk Control Framework.

The Group’s approach to environmental credit risk management addresses risk under three categories, namely Direct Riskrisk and Indirect Risk,risk, which are covered below, and Reputation Risk,risk, on which more detail may be found in the Conduct Risk section on pages 408 and 409.page 358.

Direct Riskrisk can arise when the Group takes commercial land as collateral. In many jurisdictions, enforcement of a commercial mortgage by the bank, leading to possession, potentially renders the Group liable for the costs of remediating a site if deemed by the regulator to be contaminated, including for pre-existing conditions. In the UK, the Group’s approach requires commercial land, if being pledged as collateral, to be subject to a screening mechanism. Where required, a further assessment of the commercial history of a piece of land and its potential for environmental contamination helps ensure any potential environmental degradation is reflectedreflect in the value ascribed to that security.security any potential environmental degradation. It also identifies potential liabilities which may be incurred by the Group, if realisation of the security were to become a possibility.likely.

Indirect Riskrisk can arise when environmental issues may impact the creditworthiness of the borrower. For instance, incremental costs may be incurred in upgrading a business’ operations to meet emerging environmental regulations or tightening standards. In other circumstances, failure to meet those standards may lead to fines. Environmental impacts on businesses may also include shifts in the market demand for goods or services generated by our customers, or changing supply chain pressures. Environmental considerations affecting our clients can be varied. The bank has developed a series of environmental risk briefing notes, covering ten broad industry headings ranging from Agriculture and Fisheries to Oil and Gas, from Mining and Metals to Utilities and Waste Management. These briefing notes are available to colleagues in business development and credit risk functions across the organisation, outlining the nature of environmental and social risks of which to be aware, as well as the factors which mitigate those risks.

The growing importance of climate change as a source of indirect risk is increasingly being recognized in credit policy discussions. Climate risk can arise as physical risk, where changing weather patterns may adversely impact a client’s operations, their access to critical resources, their supply chains or their distribution networks, or it can be a transition risk if movement to a lower carbon economy increases the costs or reduces the demand for their products or services. Currently, climate risks are assessed at a relationship level or on a transactional level, such as assessing a client’s perspective on the potential impacts of the climate change agenda on their operations, and the extent to which such impacts are reflected in their business planning assumptions.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  369    317


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

 

Internal ratings based (IRB) approach

The IRB approach largely relies on internal models to derive the risk parameters/ components used in determining the capital requirement for a given exposure. The main risk components include measures of the probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and the exposure at default (EAD). The IRB approach is divided into three alternative applications: Own-Estimates, Supervisory Estimates and Specialised Lending:

Own-Estimates IRB (OEIRB): Barclays uses its own models to estimate PD, LGD and EAD to calculate given risk exposures for various asset classes and the associated Risk Weighted Assets (RWAs).

Supervisory IRB (SIRB): Barclays uses its own PD estimates, but relies on supervisory estimates for other risk components. The SIRB approach is particularly used to floor risk parameters for wholesale credit exposures where default data scarcity may impact the robustness of the model build process.

Specialised Lending IRB: For specialised lending exposures for which PD cannot be modelled reliably, Barclays uses a set of risk weights defined in the relevant regulation, and takes into account a range of prescribed risk factors.

While in the past the industry has used the terms ‘Advanced’, ‘Foundation’ and ‘Slotting’ IRB, the current enforcing regulation (the Capital Requirements Regulation) does not use these terms.

The IRB calculation for credit risk

For both OEIRB and SIRB approaches, Barclays uses the regulatory prescribed risk-weight functions for the purposes of deriving capital requirements.

In line with regulatory requirements, Long Run Average PD and downturn LGD and CF (Conversion Factor) estimates are used for each customer/facility to determine regulatory capital for all exposures in scope.

For the purpose of pricing and existing customer management, point in time (PIT) PD, LGD and EAD are generally used as these represent the best estimates of risk given the current position in the credit cycle. Whilst Long Run Average PDs are always tested at grade/pool level, PIT PDs are also used for the calculation of capital on certain retail unsecured products, in line with regulation.

Applications of internal ratings

The three components – PD, LGD and CF – are the building blocks used in a variety of applications that measure credit risk across the entire portfolio:

credit approval:PD models are used in the approval process in both retail and wholesale portfolios. In high-volume retail portfolios, application and behaviour scorecards are frequently used as decision-making tools. In wholesale and some retail mortgage portfolios, PD models are used to direct applications to an appropriate credit-sanctioning level

credit grading:this was originally introduced in the early 1990s to provide a common measure of risk across the Group. Barclays now employs a 21-point scale of default probabilities.

risk-reward and pricing:PD, LGD and CF estimates are used to assess the profitability of deals and portfolios and to facilitate risk-adjusted pricing and strategy decisions

risk appetite:estimates are used to calculate the expected loss and the potential volatility of loss in the Group’s risk appetite framework. See page 306

impairment calculation:under IAS 39, many collective impairment estimates incorporate the use of PD and LGD models. See page 313

collections and recoveries:model outputs are used to identify segments of the portfolio where collection and recovery efforts should be prioritised

economic capital (EC) calculation:most EC calculations use similar inputs as the regulatory capital (RC) process

risk management information:Risk generate reports to inform senior management on issues such as business performance, risk appetite and EC consumption. Model outputs are used as key indicators in those reports. Risk also generates regular reports on model risk, which covers model accuracy, model use, input data integrity and regulatory compliance among other issues.

Ratings processes and models for credit exposures

Wholesale credit

To construct ratings for wholesale customers, including financial institutions, corporates, specialised lending, purchased corporate receivables and equity exposures, Barclays complements its internal models suite with external models and rating agencies’ information. A model hierarchy is in place requiring users/credit officers to adopt a consistent approach/model to rate each counterparty based on the asset class type and the nature of the transaction. The bank employs 41 internal Wholesale models that are available for regulatory capital calculation under AIRB.

Wholesale PD models

Barclays employs a range of methods in the construction of these models:

statistical models are used for our high volume portfolios such as small or medium enterprises (SME). The models are typically built using large amounts of internal data, combined with supplemental data from external data suppliers where available. Wherever external data is sourced to validate or enhance internally held data, similar data quality standards to those applicable to the internal data management are enforced.

structural models incorporate, in their specification, the elements of the industry-accepted Merton framework to identify the distance to default for a counterparty. This relies upon the modeller having access to specific time series data or data proxies for the portfolio. Data samples used to build and validate these models are typically constructed by appropriately combining data sets from internal default observations with comparable externally obtained data sets from commercial providers such as rating agencies and industry data gathering consortia.

expert lender models are used for those parts of the portfolio where there is insufficient internal or external data to support the construction of a statistically robust model. These models utilise the knowledge and in-depth expertise of the senior credit officers dealing with the specific customer type being modelled. For all portfolios with a low number of default observations, the Group adopts specific regulatory rules, methodologies and floors in its estimates to enforce that the calibration of the model meets the current regulatory criteria for conservatism.

Wholesale LGD models

The LGD models typically rely on statistical analysis to derive the model drivers (including seniority of claim, collateral coverage, recovery periods, industry and costs) that best explain the Group’s historical loss experience, often supplemented with other relevant and representative external information where available. The models are calibrated to downturn conditions for regulatory capital purposes and, where internal and external data is scarce, they are subject to SIRB floors to enforce the calibration of the model meets the current regulatory criteria for conservatism.

Wholesale CF models

The wholesale CF models estimate the potential utilisation of the currently available headroom based on statistical analysis of the available internal and external data and past client behaviour. As is the case with the LGD models, the CF models are subject to downturn calibration for regulatory capital purposes and to floors where data is scarce. The CF models add a term for accrued interest to facility EAD. Thus, projected EAD can exceed current drawn balance even for

318    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

facilities with no headroom.

Retail credit

Retail banking and cards operations have long and extensive experience of using credit models in assessing and managing risks. As a result, models play an integral role in customer approval and management decisions. Most retail portfolios are data rich; consequently, most models are built in-house using statistical techniques and internal data. Exceptions are some expert lender models (similar to those described in the wholesale context) where data scarcity precludes the statistically robust derivation of model parameters. In these cases, appropriately conservative assumptions are typically used, and wherever possible these models are validated/benchmarked against external data. The bank employs 42 internal retail models to calculate regulatory capital for credit exposures.

Retail PD models

Application and behavioural scorecards are most commonly used for retail PD modelling:

application scorecards are derived from historically observed performance of new clients. They are built using customer demographic and financial information, supplemented by credit bureau information where available. Through statistical techniques, the relationship between these candidate variables and the default marker is quantified to produce output scores reflecting a PD. These scores are used primarily for new customer decisioning but are, in some cases, also used to allocate a PD to new customers for the purpose of capital calculation.

behavioural scorecards differ from application scorecards in that they rely on the historically observed performance of existing clients. The statistically derived output scores are used for existing customer management activities as well as for the purpose of capital calculation.

Retail LGD models

Retail LGD models are built using bespoke methods chosen to best model the operational recovery process and practices. In a number of secured portfolios, LGD drivers are parameterised with market factors (e.g. house price indices, haircut of the property value) to capture market trends. For most unsecured portfolios, where recoveries are not based on collateral, statistical models of cash flows are used to estimate ultimate recoveries and LGDs. In all instances, cash flows are discounted to the point of default by using bespoke country and product level factors. For capital calculations, customised economic downturn adjustments, taking into account loss and default dependency, are made to adjust losses to stressed conditions.

Retail CF models

CF models within retail portfolios are split into two main methodological categories. The general methodology is to derive product level credit conversion factors (CCFs) from historical balance migrations, typically for amortising product, such as mortgages, consumer loans. These are frequently further segmented at a bucket level (e.g. by delinquency). The most sophisticated CF models are based on behavioural factors, determining customer level CCFs from characteristics of the individual facility, typically for overdrafts and credit cards. For capital calculations, customised downturn adjustments, taking into account loss and default dependency, are made to adjust for stressed conditions.

The control mechanisms for the rating system

Model risk is a risk managed under the ERMF. Consequently, the Group Model Risk Policy (GMRP) and its supporting standards covering the end-to-end model life cycle are in place to support the management of risk models.

Key controls captured by the GMRP cover:

model governance is anchored in assigning accountabilities and responsibilities to each of the main stakeholders:

model owner – each model must have an owner who has overall accountability for the model

model developers – support the model owner and drive development according to the model owner’s defined scope/ purpose

Independent Validation Unit (IVU) – responsible for independent review, challenge and approval of all models.

externally developed models are subject to the same governance standards as internal models

models are classified by materiality (high/ low) and complexity (complex/non-complex)

all models must be validated and approved by IVU before initial implementation/use

models are subject to annual review by the model owner and periodic validation and approval by IVU

all models must be recorded in the Group Models Database (GMD), which records model owners and developers

model owners must evidence that model implementation is accurate and tested.

If a model is found to perform sub-optimally, it may be rejected and/or subjected to a Post Model Adjustment (PMA) before approval for continued use is granted.

The IVU reporting line is separate from that of the model developers. IVU is part of Model Risk Management (MRM), and the head of MRM reports to the Group CRO. The model development teams have separate reporting lines to the Barclays UK and Barclays International Chief Risk Officers, who in turn report to the Group CRO.

Under the Three Lines of Defence approach stated in the ERMF, the actions of all parties with responsibilities under the GMRP are subject to independent review by Barclays Internal Audit.

Validation processes for credit models

Validation of credit models covers observed model performance but also the scope of model use, interactions between models, data use and quality, the model’s theoretical basis, regulatory compliance and any remediation to model risk that are proposed or in place. The following sections provide more detail on processes for validating the performance of each model type.

Wholesale PD models

To assess model calibration, the IVU compares the model prediction of default frequency to the realised internal default rate both over the latest year and over all observable model history. Due to the relative infrequency of default of large wholesale obligors, a long-run perspective on default risk is vital. Default rates are also compared to external benchmarks where these are relevant and available, such as default rates in rating-agency data. In practice, since financial crises have been infrequent, IVU would expect the model PD used in calculating regulatory capital to exceed the long run observed default rate.

For portfolios where few internal defaults have been observed, portfolio PD is compared to the ‘most prudent PD’ generated by the industry-standard Pluto-Tasche method, using conservative parameter assumptions.

To assess model discrimination performance, the IVU compares the rank-ordering of internal ratings with the pattern of defaults, if any, to construct the industry-standard Gini statistic or similar. The ordering of internal ratings is also compared to the ordering of internal and external comparator ratings where these are available.

Mobility metric and population stability index is also routinely calculated to infer relevant aspects of the model performance (e.g. rating philosophy).

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    319


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Wholesale LGD models

To assess model calibration, model outputs are compared to the LGD observed on facilities that entered default in ‘downturn’ periods, as requested by the regulator. Both internal and external data on observed LGD are examined, but preference is given to internal data, since these reflect Barclays’ recovery policies. Comparisons are performed by product seniority and security status and for other breakdowns of the portfolio. Model outputs are also compared to the long-run average of observed LGD. The time-lapse between facility default and the closure of recovery is varied and may be long. In the construction of observed LGD, recoveries are discounted back to the date of default at a conservative interest rate, following regulatory guidance of at least 9%. As noted above, regulatory floors are in place for the LGD used in calculating regulatory capital for exposure types where few default observations are available.

To assess model discrimination, the IVU compares the rank-ordering of model predictions to that of observed LGD and calculates the Spearman’s Rank correlation coefficient and other measures of discrimination.

Wholesale CF models

To assess model calibration, the conversion factors observed in internal data are compared to model predictions, both in downturn periods as defined by the regulator, and on a long-run average basis. Comparisons are performed separately for different product types. Validation focuses on internal data, with external data used as a benchmark, because conversion factors are related to banks’ facility management practices. Particular care is used in separating cases where facility limits changed between the date of observation and default, as these can lead to measurements of conversion factors that take extreme values. As a benchmark only, total predicted exposure at default for all defaulted facilities is compared to realised exposure at default. This comparison is done because it is relatively insensitive to extreme values for observed CF on some facilities. The primary validation tests are performed on a facility-weighted rather than exposure-weighted basis, however, in line with the relevant regulations.

Retail PD models

To assess rating philosophy, i.e. whether it is a Point-in-Time system or Through-the-Cycle system, the IVU produces migration indices to investigate relevant grade migration.

To assess model calibration, the IVU compares the model prediction of default frequency to the realised internal default rate by grade/pool as required by CRR. As a minimum, IVU expects the expected default rate is at least equal or above the level of observed default rate.

To assess model discrimination performance, the IVU compares the rank-ordering of internal ratings with the pattern of defaults, if any, to construct the industry-standard Gini statistic or similar.

To assess model stability, the population distribution, the character distribution and parameter estimates are assessed individually.

A 0.03% regulatory floor is in place for the facility level PD used in calculating regulatory capital.

Retail LGD models

LGD model components are compared to observed value respectively, this may include but not limited to probability of possession/ charge off, forced sale discount, time from default to crystallisation and discount rate. Where components are similar to PD in nature, the approach stated in the PD section applies to assess the calibration, discrimination and stability of the component.

The calibration of the overall LGD is assessed through the expected against actual comparison by default flow and stock population respectively. The downturn LGD appropriateness is further assessed to implement that the downturn LGD is equal to or above the long-run average of observed LGD. This exercise is performed at grade/pool level according to CRR. In the construction of observed LGD, recoveries are discounted back to the date of default at a conservative interest rate, following regulatory guidance. As noted above, regulatory floors are in place for the LGD used in calculating regulatory capital where appropriate (this includes but not limited to the non-zero LGD floor at account level, the collateral uncertainty consideration, the portfolio level LGD floor and UK property haircut floor).

The primary validation tests are performed on facility-weighted rather than exposure-weighted basis, however, in line with the relevant regulations.

Retail CF models

The calibration of the overall CF is assessed through the expected against actual comparison by default flow and stock population respectively. The downturn CF appropriateness is further assessed to implement that the downturn CF is equal to or above the long-run average of observed CF. This exercise is performed at grade/pool level according to CRR. Particular care is used in separating cases where facility limits changed between the date of observation and default, as these can lead to measurements of conversion factors that take extreme values.

Depending on the modelling approach, the relevant measure used for PD/LGD may be used accordingly to assess calibration, discrimination and stability.

CF is floored so that the exposure at the point of default cannot be less than exposure observed at point of regulatory reporting.

The primary validation tests are performed on facility-weighted rather than exposure-weighted basis, however, in line with the relevant regulations.

Table 93 for credit risk model characteristics shows modelled variables to calculate RWAs (PD, LGD, and EAD) at portfolio level, with number of models and their significance in terms of RWAs, model method or approach, numbers of years of data used, Basel asset class of the customer or client, and regulatory thresholds applied.

Selected features of material models

The table below contains selected features of the Group’s AIRB credit risk models which are used to calculate RWAs. The RWAs reported in this table are based on the models in production as of November 17.

PD models listed in the table account for £108bn of total AIRB approach RWAs as of November 17

LGD models listed in the table account for £115bn of total AIRB approach RWAs as of November 17

320    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Table 93 AIRB_Credit
    Size of associated
portfolio (RWAs)
        

Component

modelled

 Portfolio   BUK (£m) BI (£m) Model description and methodology 

Number of

years loss data

 

Basel asset

classes measured

 

Applicable

industry-wide

regulatory thresholds

PD 

Publicly traded

corporate

 10   24,707 Statistical model using a Merton-based methodology. It takes quantitative factors as inputs. > 10 Years Corporate PD floor of 0.03%
PD 

Customers rated by

Moody’s and S&P

 483 28,662 Rating Agency Equivalent model converts agency ratings into estimated equivalent PIT default rates using credit cycles based on Moody’s data. > 10 Years Corporate, Financial Institutions and Sovereigns PD floor of 0.03% for corporate and institutions
PD 

Corporate and SME

customers with

turnover < £20m

 

 6,285 5,879 Statistical models that use regression techniques to derive relationships between observed default experience and a set of behavioural variables. < 5 Years Corporate, Corporate SME PD floor of 0.03%
PD 

Corporate

customers with turnover >= £20m

 35 8,513 Statistically derived models sourced from an external vendor (Moody’s RiskCalc) 6 – 10 Years Corporate PD floor of 0.03%
PD Home Finance 16,319  Statistical scorecards estimated using regression techniques, segmented along arrears status and portfolio type. 6 – 10 Years Secured By Real Estate (residential and buy-to-let mortgages) PD floor of 0.03%
PD Barclaycard UK 17,058  Statistical scorecards estimated using regression techniques, segmented along arrears status and portfolio type. 6 – 10 Years Qualifying Revolving Retail (QRRE) PD floor of 0.03%
LGD 

Corporate and

Financial Institutions

  54,351 Model based on a statistical regression that outputs a long run average LGD by estimating the expected value of recovery. Inputs include industry, seniority, instrument, collateral and country. > 10 Years Corporate, Financial Institutions LGD floor of 45% based on low default portfolio criteria
LGD 

All business

customers (excluding certain specialised sectors)

  27,543 Model is based on a function estimated using actual recoveries experience. It takes account of collateral value and an allowance for non-collateral recovery. > 10 Years Corporate LGD floor of 5%
LGD UK Home Finance 16,319  Data driven estimates of loss and probability of possession 6 – 10 Years Secured By Real Estate (residential and buy-to-let mortgages) The portfolio average downturn LGD is floored at 10%
LGD Barclaycard UK 17,058  Statistical models combining segmented regression and other forecasting techniques 6 – 10 Years Qualifying Revolving Retail (QRRE) 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    321


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Credit Risk IRB models performance back testing – estimated versus actual

The following tables compare the PDs and LGDs estimated by the Group’s IRB models with the actual default and loss rates. Comparisons are based on the assets in IRB approach portfolios and are used to assess performance of the models. The estimates and actual figures represent direct outputs from the models rather than outputs used in regulatory capital calculations that may be adjusted to apply more conservative assumptions.

Back testing results are reported within each IRB exposure class at overall Bank level both for Retail and Wholesale excluding Africa, as the historical BUK and BI split is not available for the Wholesale obligors. We intend to report back testing results at BUK and BI level in future once adequate data history is available.

Risk models are subject to the Group Model Risk Policy which contains detailed guidance on the minimum standards for model risk management. For example, PDs must be estimated over a sufficient period, show sufficient differentiation in predictions for different customers, show conservatism where data limitations exist, and follow prescriptive techniques. These standards are achieved via an independent validation process through appropriately independent experts. Once validated and correctly implemented, models are subject to regular monitoring to assess they can still be used. Comparing model estimates with actual default rates for PD and loss rates for LGD form part of this monitoring. Such analysis is used to assess and enhance the performance of the models.

 

LOGOFurther detail is provided in the management of model risk on page 354.

PD measures

The model estimated PIT PDs are compared with the actual default rates by PD ranges within each IRB exposure class. PD ranges, estimated PDs and actual default rates are based on the existing models default definitions. UK Cards is the only CRD IV compliant portfolio as of the reference month November 16, for the remaining portfolios CRD IV compliant models are either implemented post the reference month or under implementation or currently under development/approval as per the CRD IV roll out plan agreed with the PRA.

The estimated PDs are forward-looking average PD by the model at the beginning of the twelve-month period, i.e. average PD of the November 16 non-defaulted obligors including inactive and non-borrowers. Both EAD weighted and simple average PDs have been reported.

The estimated PDs are compared with the simple average of historical annual default rates over the past 5 years, starting November 12.

The PIT PD is used as a predicted measure in internal monitoring and annual validation of the models. In contrast, the capital calculation uses TTC or Regulatory PDs (not shown below), calibrated to long-run default averages with additional adjustments where modelled outputs display evidence of risk understatement (including credit expert overrides, regulatory adjustments etc.). The PIT measure is subject to under or over prediction depending on the relative position of the portfolio to the credit cycle.

A mapping has been provided between external ratings and internal PD ranges based on the published reports from the two rating agencies – Moody’s and S&P.
For the wholesale models, the average default probabilities in the tables have been determined from the full scope of clients graded by the IRB model suite, which may include some clients that have either zero exposure or zero limits marked at the time of calculation.

LGD measures

The model estimated LGDs, unadjusted for regulatory floors and for downturn adjustments, are compared with the actual LGDs within each IRB exposure class.

The estimated LGDs are derived from a simple average of LGDs at the time of default for the set of cases closed over the previous twelve months.

The actual LGD rate is the simple average observed loss rate for the set of cases closed over the previous twelve months, regardless of the time of default.

The LGD measures are used as a predicted measure in internal monitoring and annual validation of the models. The capital calculation uses Downturn LGDs with additional adjustments and regulatory floors where modelled outputs display evidence of risk understatement.

LOGO322    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Table 94: Analysis of expected performance versus actual results

This table provides an overview of credit risk model performance, assessed by the analysis of average PDs and average LGDs.

The table compares the raw model output to the actual experience in our portfolios. Such analysis is used to assess and enhance the adequacy and accuracy of models. The raw outputs are subject to a number of adjustments before they are used in the calculation of capital, for example to allow for the position in the credit cycle and the impact of stress on recovery rates.

Asset Class                                            
               Arithmetic             of which:   Average 
           Weighted   Average  Number of obligors  Defaulted   new   historical 
           Average   PD by  As at   As at  obligors in   defaulted   annual 
     External Ratings Equivalent  PD   obligors  Nov   Nov  the year   in the year   default 
Wholesale  PD Range Moody’s  S&P  %   %  ’16   ’17  £m   £m   % 

Central

governments or

central banks

  0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2,  AAA, AA+, AA,   0.02%    0.03%   97    57           0.00% 
   Aa3, A1, A2, A3,  AA-, A+, A, A-,            
   Baa1  BBB+            
  0.15 to <0.25 Baa2  BBB+, BBB   0.20%    0.20%   7    4           0.00% 
  0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1  BBB, BBB-   0.30%    0.36%   8    7           0.00% 
  0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2  BB+   0.00%    0.73%   1    4           0.00% 
  0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1  BB, BB-   0.00%    1.12%   10    7           0.00% 
  2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3  BB-, B+, B, B-   3.65%    4.74%   7    9           0.00% 
  10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2,  B-, CCC+, CCC,   30.00%    22.67%   5    4           0.00% 
   Caa3, Ca, C  CCC-, CC+,CC, C            
   100.00 (default) D  D   100.00%    100.00%                  0.00% 
Institutions  0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2,  AAA, AA+, AA,   0.03%    0.03%    8,657    9,156            0.00% 
   Aa3, A1, A2, A3,  AA-, A+, A, A-,            
   Baa1  BBB+            
  0.15 to <0.25 Baa2  BBB+, BBB   0.18%    0.18%   877    909           0.00% 
  0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1  BBB, BBB-   0.40%    0.40%   379    417           0.00% 
  0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2  BB+   0.57%    0.57%   106    53           0.00% 
  0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1  BB, BB-   1.84%    1.23%   221    223           0.00% 
  2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3  BB-, B+, B, B-   3.55%    5.18%   137    141   1        0.33% 
  10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2,  B-, CCC+, CCC,   11.60%    21.39%   72    46           0.48% 
   Caa3, Ca, C  CCC-, CC+,CC, C            
   100.00 (default) D  D   100.00%    100.00%   15    15           0.00% 
Corporate  0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2,  AAA, AA+, AA,   0.03%    0.05%   1450    1430   1        0.01% 
   Aa3, A1, A2, A3,  AA-, A+, A, A-,            
   Baa1  BBB+            
  0.15 to <0.25 Baa2  BBB+, BBB   0.20%    0.20%   368    375   1        0.05% 
  0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1  BBB, BBB-   0.35%    0.36%   639    622           0.26% 
  0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2  BB+   0.62%    0.62%   297    375           0.26% 
  0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1  BB, BB-   1.36%    1.37%   844    763   4        0.48% 
  2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3  BB-, B+, B, B-   4.33%    5.00%   1,271    1,061   15        1.95% 
  10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2,  B-, CCC+, CCC,   23.15%    20.27%   247    311   15        5.10% 
   Caa3, Ca, C  CCC-, CC+,CC, C            
   100.00 (default) D  D   100.00%    100.00%   183    165           0.00% 
Corporate SME  0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2,  AAA, AA+, AA,   0.07%    0.09%   751    705           0.03% 
   Aa3, A1, A2, A3,  AA-, A+, A, A-,            
   Baa1  BBB+            
  0.15 to <0.25 Baa2  BBB+, BBB   0.19%    0.19%   1,508    1,483   1        0.17% 
  0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1  BBB, BBB-   0.37%    0.37%   2,912    2,764   5        0.14% 
  0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2  BB+   0.65%    0.65%   2,196    2,090   5        0.21% 
  0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1  BB, BB-   1.29%    1.35%   4,412    3,723   14    2    0.50% 
  2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3  BB-, B+, B, B-   5.24%    4.82%   4,724    3,769   69    4    2.93% 
  10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2,  B-, CCC+, CCC,   27.27%    23.90%   528    510   42        9.86% 
   Caa3, Ca, C  CCC-, CC+,CC, C            
   100.00 (default) D  D   100.00%    100.00%   182    178           0.00% 
Specialist  0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2,  AAA, AA+, AA,   0.07%    0.07%   29    28           0.00% 
Lending   Aa3, A1, A2, A3,  AA-, A+, A, A-,            
   Baa1  BBB+            
  0.15 to <0.25 Baa2  BBB+, BBB   0.19%    0.19%   38    31           0.00% 
  0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1  BBB, BBB-   0.37%    0.39%   145    153           0.00% 
  0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2  BB+   0.65%    0.64%   171    140           0.57% 
  0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1  BB, BB-   1.23%    1.33%   222    211   1        0.11% 
  2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3  BB-, B+, B, B-   3.82%    3.92%   135    117   2        2.19% 
  10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2,  B-, CCC+, CCC,   29.13%    28.75%   12    6   2        14.63% 
   Caa3, Ca, C  CCC-, CC+,CC, C            
   100.00 (default) D  D   100.00%    100.00%   60    45           0.00% 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    323


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

Table 94: Analysis of expected performance versus actual resultscontinued

Asset Class                                     
           Arithmetic           of which:  Average 
        Weighted  Average  Number of obligors  Defaulted  new  historical 
        Average  PD by  As at  As at  obligors in  defaulted  annual 
    External Ratings Equivalent PD  obligors  Nov  Nov  the year  in the year  default 
Retail PD Range Moody’s S&P %  %  ’16  ’17  £m  £m  % 
SMEa 0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, AAA, AA+, AA,  0.04%   0.06%   33,916   35,506   13   1   0.04% 
  Aa3, A1, A2, A3, AA-, A+, A, A-,       
  Baa1 BBB+       
 0.15 to <0.25 Baa2 BBB+, BBB  0.20%   0.20%   24,262   26,041   16   1   0.06% 
 0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1 BBB, BBB-  0.36%   0.38%   55,626   60,087   41   7   0.06% 
 0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2 BB+  0.63%   0.64%   45,006   63,355   41   8   0.08% 
 0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1 BB, BB-  1.50%   1.54%   215,431   178,463   340   94   0.15% 
 2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3 BB-, B+, B, B-  4.88%   5.54%    305,617   321,961    1,134   475   0.32% 
 10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2, B-, CCC+, CCC,  24.03%   23.53%   296,712   339,890   13,446   3,402   2.80% 
  Caa3, Ca, C CCC-, CC+,CC, C       
  100.00 (default) D D  100.00%   100.00%   5,097   9,672          
Secured by 0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, AAA, AA+, AA,  0.08%   0.08%   745,590   728,709   528      0.07% 
Real Estate  Aa3, A1, A2, A3, AA-, A+, A, A-,       
  Baa1 BBB+       
 0.15 to <0.25 Baa2 BBB+, BBB  0.19%   0.19%   137,113   131,176   248      0.16% 
 0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1 BBB, BBB-  0.34%   0.33%   60,859   58,609   289      0.34% 
 0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2 BB+  0.58%   0.60%   12,575   9,743   124      0.77% 
 0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1 BB, BB-  1.22%   1.28%   18,452   16,262   348      1.94% 
 2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3 BB-, B+, B, B-  5.30%   5.28%   5,467   4,736   371      6.75% 
 10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2, B-, CCC+, CCC,  37.51%   37.38%   5,270   4,786   1,625      48.93% 
  Caa3, Ca, C CCC-, CC+,CC, C       
  100.00 (default) D D  100.00%   100.00%   11,694   10,858          
Qualifying 0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, AAA, AA+, AA,  0.07%   0.05%   10,551,296   10,874,869   3,407   953   0.04% 
Revolving Retail  Aa3, A1, A2, A3, AA-, A+, A, A-,       
  Baa1 BBB+       
 0.15 to <0.25 Baa2 BBB+, BBB  0.20%   0.20%   1,814,852   1,814,017   2,861   675   0.17% 
 0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1 BBB, BBB-  0.36%   0.36%   2,166,187   2,143,391   6,130   1,008   0.31% 
 0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2 BB+  0.61%   0.61%   1,140,627   1,113,122   5,677   566   0.55% 
 0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1 BB, BB-  1.46%   1.39%   2,703,357   2,633,448   29,311   1,358   1.22% 
 2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3 BB-, B+, B, B-  4.98%   4.87%   1,591,182   1,555,953   72,298   1,326   4.61% 
 10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2, B-, CCC+,CCC,  24.97%   27.67%   494,297   507,976   136,958   114   28.64% 
  Caa3, Ca, C CCC-, CC+,CC, C       
  100.00 (default) D D  100.00%   100.00%   459,598   412,355          
Other Retail 0.00 to <0.15 Aaa, Aa1, Aa2, AAA, AA+, AA,  0.13%   0.13%   60   65         0.56% 
  Aa3, A1, A2, A3, AA-, A+, A, A-,       
  Baa1 BBB+       
 0.15 to <0.25 Baa2 BBB+, BBB  0.22%   0.22%   1,961   2,417   4      0.56% 
 0.25 to <0.50 Baa3, Ba1 BBB, BBB-  0.41%   0.41%   46,159   51,568   125      0.56% 
 0.50 to <0.75 Ba1, Ba2 BB+  0.63%   0.63%   87,454   92,677   237      0.58% 
 0.75 to <2.50 Ba2, Ba3, B1 BB, BB-  1.40%   1.40%   336,579   347,138   3,805      1.24% 
 2.50 to <10.00 B1, B2, B3 BB-, B+, B, B-  4.28%   4.38%   125,042   118,003   6,199      4.50% 
 10.00 to <100.00 B3, Caa1, Caa2, B-, CCC+, CCC,  43.63%   38.05%   26,019   26,353   10,869      37.38% 
  Caa3, Ca, C CCC-, CC+,CC, C       
  100.00 (default) D D  100.00%   100.00%   43,731   41,964          

 Asset Class               
    Number of
resolved cases
over last one year
(Dec’16 to Nov’17)
   Predicted LGD
(Simple Average)
%
   Actual LGD
(Simple Average)
%
 
 Wholesale      
 Investment Bank   29    31    11 
 Corporate Bank   65    47    42 
            
 Retail      
 SME   2,399    82    72 
 Secured by Real Estate   3,812    4    5 
 Qualifying Revolving Retail   291,488    75    74 
 Other retail   23,413    77    80 

Note

aRefer to the notes on page 325 for an explanation of data limitations relating to the Retail SME figures presented in this table.

324    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk and the internal

ratings-based approach

2017 AIRB models back testing summary

The section below provides AIRB model performance summary based on the above back testing results, along with the remediation plans.

Wholesale

The Wholesale book continues to maintain low default rates across IRB exposure classes, with no defaults observed for ‘Central Governments or Central Banks’. The estimated PDs are higher (conservative) compared to actual default rates for most PD ranges within each exposure class. Four wholesale models were decommissioned in August 2017 post implementation of the new SME capital suite; actual default rates based on 8 months performance window (December 2016 to July 2017) has been used for these four models.

There are two key LGD models used for the Wholesale IRB exposures. Both the LGD models overestimate (conservative) on a PIT basis.

Replacement models are being developed to comply with CRD IV requirements with the material portfolios submitted to the PRA over 2017 and 2018. Interim Post Model Adjustments (PMAs) are in place to address existing models’ deficiencies.

Retail SME

A new set of CRD IV compliant models has been approved by the PRA and implemented in September 2017. However, the current backtesting report is based on the models which were in production as of November 2016.

The estimated PDs rank order the historical default experience for the UK SME book, i.e. higher PDs implying higher actual default rates.

The estimated PDs and LGD are much higher (conservative) compared to the actual default rates and LGD. The actual PD is low due to the inclusion of immaterial and dormant customers in the denominator. In addition, there was a temporary default identification issue during the reporting period, which has now been partially rectified. The LGD model is benchmarked to the Corporate LGD model.

Secured by Real Estate

This covers mortgage portfolios for UK and Italy. Rank ordering is maintained across PD ranges.

For UK Mortgages, a new set of CRD IV compliant models has been approved by the PRA and implemented in June 2017. However, the current backtesting report is based on the models which were in production as of November 2016. The PD model is accurate, slightly conservative at an overall level (0.30% expected vs. 0.27% actual). The portfolio maintains low LGD and the model overestimates (1.94% estimated vs. 0.92% actual).

For Italy Mortgages, both the PIT PD and LGD models underestimate (non-conservative) primarily due to a decrease in the House Price Index (HPI). The portfolio has observed significant decrease in recovery as a result of general collateral evaluation driven by a depressed housing market. Additionally the market at origination, when appraisals of the collateral values were carried out, was significantly optimistic. A new set of CRD IV compliant models is due for PRA submission by December 2018. Interim Post Model Adjustments (PMAs) are in place to address existing models’ deficiencies.

Qualifying Revolving Retail

This constitutes UK Cards, Germany Cards and UK Current Account portfolios. The estimated PDs rank order well across all 3 portfolios and at an overall level.

For UK Cards, a slight underestimation is observed in the PD model driven by the high risk bands; 2.25% estimated vs. 2.32% actual at an overall level. The LGD model is slightly non-conservative (71.2% estimated vs.73.4% actual). The existing CRD IV model suite has been re-calibrated to further improve its accuracy and submitted for PRA approval in May 2017.

For Germany Cards, the PD estimates are accurate; 1.35% estimated vs. 1.37% actual at an overall level. The overestimation in the LGD model (84% estimated vs. 74% actual) is primarily driven by a debt sale at a better price. A new set of CRD IV compliant models is currently under development and is due for regulatory submission by March 2019. Interim Post Model Adjustments (PMAs) are in place to address existing models’ deficiencies.

For UK Current Accounts, PD model overestimates primarily due to a decrease in actual default rates over the last year (0.70% estimated vs. 0.49% actual). The LGD model is accurate (81.68% estimated vs. 79.23% actual). A new CRD IV compliant model suite has been approved by the PRA in December 2017 and is currently under implementation.

Other Retail

This covers the Barclays UK loan portfolio. The PD rank ordering holds for all the PD ranges.

The PD model is marginally non-conservative at an overall level (3.34% estimated vs. 3.41% actual) due to quarterly calibration. The LGD (76.87% expected vs. 80.12% actual) model is also marginally under-predicting at an overall level based on a comparison over the past one year.

A new CRD IV compliant capital suite was submitted for PRA approval in December 2016.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    325


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques

and counterparty credit risk

 

ManagementCounterparty credit risk arises from derivatives and similar contracts. This section details the specific aspects of the risk framework related to this type of credit risk. As credit risk mitigation techniques and counterparty credit riskis one of the principal uses of derivative contracts by banks, this is also discussed in this section.

 

  LOGO

Counterparty credit risk arises from derivatives and similar contracts. This section details the specific aspects of the risk framework related to this type of credit risk. As credit risk mitigation is one of the principal uses of derivative contracts by banks, this is also discussed in this section.

§

On page 375319 a high level description of the types of exposures incurred in the course of Barclays’ activity.
activity can be found.

 

§

Mitigation techniques specific to counterparty credit risk are also discussed.

 

§

A more general discussion of credit risk mitigation (covering traditional credit risks) is also included from page 371.327.


 

 

 

LOGO

 

326    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques

and counterparty credit risk

Credit risk mitigation

The Group employs a range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate the counterparty credit risk.risks. These can broadly be divided into three types:

 

§ netting and set-off

 

§ collateral

 

§ risk transfer

The Group has detailedDetailed policies are in place to ensure thatappropriately recognise and record credit risk mitigation is appropriately recognised and recorded.mitigation. The recognition of credit risk mitigation is subject to a number of considerations, including ensuring legal certainty of enforceability and effectiveness, ensuringthat the valuation and liquidity of the collateral is adequately monitored, and ensuringthat the value of the collateral is not materially correlated with the credit quality of the counterparty.

All three types of credit risk mitigation may be used by different areas of the Group for exposures with a full range of counterparties. For instance, Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and other business areasbusinesses may all take property, cash or other physical assets as collateral for exposures to retailers, property companies or other client types.

Netting and set-off

In most jurisdictions in which the Group operates, credit risk exposures can be reduced by applying netting and set-off. In exposure terms, this credit risk mitigation technique has the largest overall impact on net exposure to derivative transactions, compared with other risk mitigation techniques.

For derivative transactions, the Group’s normal practice is to enter into standard master agreements with counterparties (e.g. ISDAs). These master agreements typically allow for netting of credit risk exposure to a counterparty resulting from a derivative transactiontransactions against the Group’s obligations to the counterparty in the event of default, and so produce a lower net credit exposure. These agreements may also reduce settlement exposure (e.g. for foreign exchange transactions) by allowing payments on the same day in the same currency to be set-off against one another.

Under IFRS, netting is permitted only if both of the following criteria are satisfied:

 

§ the entity currently has a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts

 

§ the entity intends either to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Under US GAAP, netting is also permitted, regardless of a currently legally enforceable right of set-off and/or the intention to settle on a net basis, where there is a counterparty master agreement that would be enforceable in the event of bankruptcy.

Collateral

The Group has the ability to call on collateral in the event of default of the counterparty, comprising:

 

§ home loans:a fixed charge over residential property in the form of houses, flats and other dwellings. The value of collateral is impacted by property market conditions which drive demand and therefore value of the property. Other regulatory interventions on ability to repossess, longer period to repossession and granting of forbearance may also affect the collateral valuevalue.

 

§ wholesale lending: a fixed charge over commercial property and other physical assets, in various formsforms.

 

§ other retail lending: includes charges over motor vehicle and other physical assets; second lien charges over residential property, which are subordinate to first charges held either by the Group or by another party; and finance lease receivables, for which typically the Group retains legal title to the leased asset and has the right to repossess the asset on the default of the borrowerborrower.

 

§ derivatives: the Group also often seeks to enter into a margin agreement (e.g. Credit Support Annex (CSA))Annex) with counterparties with which the Group has master netting agreements in place. These annexes to master agreements provide a mechanism for further reducing credit risk, whereby collateral (margin) is posted on a regular basis (typically daily) to collateralise the mark to market exposure of a derivative portfolio measured on a net basis. The Group may additionally negotiate the receipt of an independent amount further mitigating risk by collateralising potential mark to market exposure movesmoves.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  371


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

§ reverse repurchase agreements:collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which have been legally transferred to the Group subject to an agreement to return them for a fixed priceprice.

 

§ financial guarantees and similar off-balance sheet commitments:cash collateral may be held against these arrangements.

For details of the fair value of collateral held, please refer to maximum exposure table on page 113.98.

In exposure terms, the main portfolios that the Group takes collateral for are home loans and Reverse Repurchase Agreementsreverse repurchase agreements with financial institutions.

Floating charges over receivables

The Group may also obtain collateral in the form of floating charges over receivables and inventory of corporate and other business customers. The value of this collateral varies from period to period depending on the level of receivables and inventory. It is impracticable to provide an estimate of the amount (fair value or nominal value) of this collateral. The Group may in some cases obtain collateral and other enhancements at a counterparty level, which are not specific to a particular class of financial instrument. The fair value of the credit enhancement gained has been apportioned across the relevant asset classes.

Collateral for derivative contracts

The collateral obtained for derivatives is predominantly cash or government bonds (G7 and other highly rated governments).

Appropriate haircuts may be applied to non-cash collateral, which are agreed when the margin agreement (e.g. CSA) is negotiated.

Valuation of collateral and impact of market moves

Typically, assets other than cash are subject to regular revaluation (for example via physical review, linking to an external index or depreciation of the asset), to ensure they continue to achieve appropriate mitigation of risk. Customer agreements often include requirements for provision of additional collateral, should valuations decline or credit exposure increase, for example due to market moves impacting a derivative exposure.

The carrying value of non-cash collateral reflects the fair value of the physical assets, limited to the carrying value of the asset where the exposure is over-collateralised. In certain cases, where active markets or recent valuations of the assets are not available, estimates are used. For assets collateralised by residential or commercial property (and certain other physical assets), where it is not practicable to assess current market valuations of each underlying property, values reflect historical fair values updated for movements in appropriate external indices. For further information on LTV ratios in principal home loans portfolios, see the Credit Risk performance - Credit riskreview section of the 2015 form 20-F.on page 146.

Liens over fluctuating assets such as inventory and trade receivables, known as floating charges, over the assets of a borrower are monitored annually. The valuation of this type of collateral takes into account the ability to establish objectively a price or market value, the frequency with which the value can be obtained (including a professional appraisal or valuation), and the volatility or a proxy for the volatility of the value of the collateral.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    327


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques

and counterparty credit risk

For assets collateralised by traded financial instruments, values reflect MTM or mark to model values of those assets, applying a haircut where appropriate. A haircut is the valuation percentage applicable to each type of collateral and will be largely based on liquidity and price volatility of the underlying security.

Valuation of collateral – property

When property is taken as collateral, it is monitored to establish whether the current value is less than its value at origination. Monitoring is undertaken annually for commercial property or via linking to an external index for residential property. More frequent monitoring may be carried out where the property sector is subject to significant deterioration.

Deterioration is monitored principally by geography. Specific exercises to monitor property values may be undertaken where the property sector in a given geography has been subject to significant deterioration and where the Group has a material concentration of property collateral.

372  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Monitoring may be undertaken either at a portfolio level (typically retail) or at an individual level (typically wholesale).

In retail businesses, monitoring on a portfolio level refers to a more frequent process of indexing collateral values on each individual loan, using a regional or national index, and updating LGD values. This monitoring may be a desk top assessment and need not necessarily include physical assessment of properties. In the event of charge-off, an individual valuation of the property is undertaken within 3three months of the charge-off event and subsequently undertaken at least every six months whilst in charge-off.

In wholesale, monitoring is undertaken by individuals who are not part of the sales /sales/ relationship part of the business. Where an appropriate local index is not available, property values are monitored on an individual basis as part of the annual review process for the loan. For larger loans, in addition to the regular annual review, the property value is reviewed by an independent valuer at least once every three years. This review is a more detailed assessment than the standard property monitoring review, and may include a fresh professional valuation. In addition, an independent valuer reviews the property valuation where information indicates that the value of the property may have declined materially relative to general market prices. In addition, trigger points are defined under which property values must be reviewed.

Valuation of collateral – distressed assets

The net realisable value from a distressed sale of collateral obtained by the Group upon default or insolvency of counterparty will in some cases be lower than the carrying value recognised. Assets obtained are normally sold, generally at auction, or realised in an orderly manner for the maximum benefit of the Group, the borrower’s other creditors and the borrower, in accordance with the relevant insolvency regulations. For business customers, in some circumstances, where excess funds are available after repayment in full of the outstanding loan, they are offered to any other, lower ranked, secured lenders. Any additional funds are returned to the borrower. The Group does not occupy repossessed properties for its business use or use assets obtained in its operations.

Additional revaluations are usually performed when a loan is moved to WL. Exceptions to this may be considered where it is clear a revaluation is not necessary, for instance where there is a very high margin of security or a recent valuation has been undertaken. Conversely, a material reduction in the value of collateral held represents an increase in credit risk and will often cause a loan to be placed on the WL.

Any one of the above events may also trigger a test for impairment, depending on individual circumstances of the loan. When calculating impairment, the difference between an asset’s carrying amount and the present value of all estimated cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate will be recognised as impairment. Such cash flows include the estimated fair value of the collateral, which reflects the results of the monitoring and review of collateral values as detailed above and valuations undertaken as part of the Group’s impairment process.

Whether property values are updated as part of the annual review process, or by indexation of collateral values, the updated collateral values feed into the calculation of risk parameters which, in turn, feed into identified and unidentified impairment calculations at each balance sheet date.

Trends in LLRs incorporate the impact of any decrease in the fair value of collateral held.

Risk transfer

A range of instruments including guarantees, credit insurance, credit derivatives and securitisation can be used to transfer credit risk from one counterparty to another. These mitigate credit risk in two main ways:

 

§ if the risk is transferred to a counterparty which is more credit worthycreditworthy than the original counterparty, then overall credit risk is reduced

 

§ where recourse to the first counterparty remains, both counterparties must default before a loss materialises. This is less likely than the default of either counterparty individually so credit risk is reduced.

Risk transfer can also be used to reduce risk concentrations within portfolios lowering the impact of stress events.

Risk transfer transactions are undertaken with consideration to whether the collateral provider is correlated with the exposure, the credit worthiness of the collateral provider and legal certainty of enforceability and effectiveness. Where credit risk mitigation is deemed to transfer credit risk, this exposure is appropriately recorded against the credit risk mitigation provider.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  373


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of counterparty credit risk and credit risk mitigation techniques

In exposure terms, risk transfer is used most extensively as a credit risk mitigation technique for wholesale loans and derivative financial instruments.

Off-balance sheet risk mitigation

The Group applies fundamentally the same risk management policies for off-balance sheet risks as it does for its on-balance sheet risks. In the case of commitments to lend, counterparties/customers will be subject to the same credit management policies as for loans and advances. Collateral may be sought depending on the strength of the counterparty and the nature of the transaction.

Recognition of credit risk mitigation in capital calculations

Credit risk mitigation is used to reduce credit risk associated with an exposure, which may reduce potential losses in the event of obligor default or other specified credit events.

Credit risk mitigation that meets certain regulatory criteria may be used to improve risk parameters and reduce RWA consumption against a given obligor. Collateral that meets these regulatory conditions is referred to as eligible collateral. Eligibility criteria are specified in articles 195 to 204 of the Capital Regulations Requirement (CRR).

The Group’s policies and standards set out criteria for the recognition of collateral as eligible credit risk mitigation and are designed to be fully consistent with all applicable local regulations and regulatory permissions.

Where regulatory capital is calculated under AIRB regulations, the benefit of collateral is generally taken by adjusting LGDs. For standardised portfolios, the benefit of collateral is taken using the financial collateral comprehensive method: supervisory volatility adjustments approach.

For instruments that are deemed to transfer credit risk, in AIRB portfolios the protection is generally recognised by using the PD and LGD of the protection provider.

For exposures treated under the standardised approach, the impact of eligible credit risk mitigation is primarily recognised by reducing the EAD associated with the exposure that benefits from the mitigation.

328    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of credit risk mitigation techniques

and counterparty credit risk

Managing concentrations within credit risk mitigation

Credit risk mitigation taken by the Group to reduce credit risk may result in credit or market risk concentrations.

Guarantees that are treated as eligible credit risk mitigation are marked as an exposure against the guarantor and aggregated with other credit exposure to the guarantor. Limit monitoring at the counterparty level is then used for monitoring of concentrations in line with Group policy.

Commercial real estate lending is another potential source of concentration risk arising from the use of credit risk mitigation. The portfolio is regularly reviewed to assess whether a concentration in a particular region, industry or property type exists, and portfolio limits are in place to control the level of exposure to commercial, residential, investment and development activity. See pages 371 to 37389 and 105 for more information on collateral, valuation and monitoring of concentrations.

374  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Counterparty credit risk

Derivative counterparty credit exposures

The Group enters into financial instruments that are traded or cleared on an exchange, including interest rate swaps, futures and options on futures. Holders of exchange traded instruments provide daily margins with cash or other securities at the exchange, to which the holders look for ultimate settlement.

The Group also enters into financial instruments that are traded over the counter, rather than on a recognised exchange. These instruments range from standardised transactions in derivative markets, to trades where the specific terms are tailored to the requirements of the Group’s counterparties. In most cases, industry standard documentation is used, most commonly in the form of a master agreement, with individual transaction confirmations. The existence of a signed master agreement is intended to give the Group protection in situations where the Group’s counterparty is in default.

Counterparty credit exposure arises from the risk that parties are unable to meet their payment obligations under certain financial contracts such as derivatives, securities financing transactions (e.g. repurchase agreements), or long settlement transactions.

A Monte Carlo simulation engine is used to estimate the Potential Future Exposure (PFE) to derivative and securities financing counterparties. The exposure simulation model simulates future market states and the MTM of the derivative transactions under those states. Simulated exposures including the effect of credit mitigants such as netting, collateral and mandatory break clauses can then be generated.

Credit limits for CCR are assessed and allocated using the PFE measure. A number of factors are taken into account when setting credit limits for individual counterparties, including but not limited to the credit quality and nature of the counterparty, the rationale for the trading activity entered into and any wrong-way risk considerations.

The expected exposures generated by this engine are also used as an input into both internal and regulatory capital calculations covering CCR.

‘Wrong-way risk’ in a trading exposure arises when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty, which in the event of default would lead to a significant MTM loss to the counterparty. Specific wrong-way risk trades, which are self-referencing or reference to other entities within the same counterparty group, require approval by a senior credit officer. The exposure to the counterparty will reflect the additional risk generated by these transactions.

Derivative CCR (credit value adjustments)

As the Group participates in derivative transactions it is exposed to CCR, which is the risk that a counterparty will fail to make the future payments agreed in the derivative contract. This is considered as a separate risk to the volatility of the MTM payment flows. Modelling this counterparty risk is an important part of managing credit risk on derivative transactions.

The counterparty risk arising under derivative transactions is taken into account when reporting the fair value of derivative positions. The adjustment to the value is known as credit value adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the value of a derivative contract with a risk-free counterparty and that of a contract with the actual counterparty. This is equivalent to the cost of hedging the counterparty risk in the Credit Default Swap (CDS) market.

CVAs for derivative positions are calculated as a function of the expected exposure, which is the average of future hypothetical exposure values for a single transaction or group of transactions with the same counterparty, the credit spread for a given horizon and the LGD.

The expected exposure is calculated using Monte Carlo simulations of risk factors that may affect the valuation of the derivative transactions in order to simulate the exposure to the counterparty through time. These simulated exposures include the effect of credit mitigants such as netting, collateral and mandatory break clauses. Counterparties with appropriate credit mitigants will generate a lower expected exposure profile compared to counterparties without credit mitigants in place for the same derivative transactions.

Derivative netting and collateral arrangements

Credit risk from derivatives is mitigated where possible through netting agreements whereby derivative assets and liabilities with the same counterparty can be offset. Group policy requires all netting arrangements to be legally documented. The ISDA Master Agreement is the Group’s preferred agreement for documenting OTC derivatives. It provides the contractual framework within which dealing activities across a full range of OTC products are conducted, and contractually binds both parties to apply close-out netting across all outstanding transactions covered by an agreement if either party defaults or other predetermined events occur. The majority of the Group’s OTC derivative exposures are covered by ISDA master netting and ISDA CSA collateral agreements.

Collateral is obtained against derivative assets, depending on the creditworthiness of the counterparty and/or nature of the transaction. Any collateral taken in respect of OTC trading exposures will be subject to a ‘haircut’, which is negotiated at the time of signing the collateral agreement. A haircut is the valuation percentage applicable to each type of collateral and will be largely based on liquidity and price volatility of the underlying security. The collateral obtained for derivatives is predominantly either cash, direct debt obligation government (G14+) bonds denominated in the domestic currency of the issuing country, debt issued by supranationals or letters of credit issued by an institution with a long-term unsecured debt rating of A+/A3 or better. Where the Group has ISDA master agreements, the collateral document will be the ISDA CSA. The collateral document must give Barclays the power to realise any collateral placed with it in the event of the failure of the counterparty.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  375    329


LOGO 

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

 

Management of market risk

LOGO

This section describes the governance structure specific to the management of market risks, as well as a discussion of measurement techniques.

 

§ Market risks are varied, and a range of techniques must be used to manage them. From page 377331 we provide an overview of the market risks we incur across the Group

 

§ The governance structure specific to market risks is discussed on pages 378 and 379.331 to 332.

The rest of the section is divided intoconsists of traded non-traded and other risks:

 

§ Traded marketMarket risk, the risk of the Group being impacted by changes in the level or volatility of positions in the trading book, is covered on pages 379331 to 388.Measurement337. Measurement techniques such as VaR, are discussed, as well as techniques applied when statistical techniques are not appropriateappropriate.

    

LOGO

§330    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F Non-traded market risks, the risk that the Group is unable to hedge its banking book, mainly arising as a result of lending and deposit taking activities, are discussed from 388 to 390, along with a discussion of how they are managed


§
 Other market risks, such as those associated with Barclays pension obligations, are analysed separately from page 390.


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

    

 

Introduction to the management of market risk

The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions or as the consequence of running a banking book balance sheet and liquidity funding pools.

Market risk

The risk of loss arising from potential adverse changes in the value of the firm’s assets and liabilities from fluctuation in market variables including, but not limited to, interest rates, foreign exchange, equity prices, commodity prices, credit spreads, implied volatilities and asset correlations.

Overview

Overview

Traded market risk

Traded marketMarket risk arises primarily as a result of client facilitation in wholesale markets, involving market making activities, risk management solutions and execution of syndications. Upon execution of a trade with a client, the Group will look to hedge against the risk of the trade moving in an adverse direction. Mismatches between client transactions and hedges result in market risk due to changes in asset prices.

Non-traded market riskOrganisation and structure

Banking book operations generate non-traded market risk, primarily through interest rate risk arising from the sensitivity of net interest margins to changes in interest rates. As the principal banking businesses engage in internal derivative trades with Treasury to manage their interest rate risk to within its defined risk appetite. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from four key sources:

§prepayment risk: balance run-off may be faster or slower than expected, due to customer behaviour in response to general economic conditions or interest rates. This can lead to a mismatch between the actual balance of products and the hedges executed with Treasury based on initial expectations

§recruitment risk: the volume of new business may be lower or higher than expected, requiring the business to unwind or execute hedging transactions with Treasury at different rates than expected

§residual risk and margin compression: the business may retain a small element of interest rate risk to facilitate the day-to-day management of customer business. Additionally, in the current low rate environment, deposits on which the Group sets the interest rate are exposed to margin compression. This is because for any further fall in base rate the Group must absorb an increasing amount of the rate move in its margin

§lag risk: the risk of being unable to re-price products immediately after a change in interest rates due to mandatory notification periods. This is highly prevalent in managed rates savings product (e.g. Every Day Saver) where customers must be informed in writing of any planned reduction in their savings rates.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the pension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase as a result of changes to the market process. The Group monitors the market risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes, and works with the Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances, The Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Insurance risk

Insurance risk is managed within Africa Banking, where four categories of insurance risk are recognised: short-term insurance underwriting risk; life insurance underwriting risk; life insurance mismatch risk; life and insurance investment risk.

Insurance risk arises when:

§aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts are inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies and the expenses associated with the management of the portfolio of policies and claims

§premiums are not invested to adequately match the duration, timing and size of expected claims

§unexpected fluctuations in claims arise or excessive exposure (e.g. in individual or aggregate exposures) relative to capacity is retained in the entity.

Insurance entities also incur market risk (on the investment of accumulated premiums and shareholder capital), credit risk (counterparty exposure on investments and reinsurance transactions), liquidity risk and operational risk from their investments and financial operations.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  377


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

LOGO

Traded marketMarket risk in the businesses resides primarily in Investment Bank,Barclays International and Group Treasury, Africa Banking and Non-Core.Treasury. These businesses have the mandate to incur traded market risk. Non-traded market risk is mostly incurred in PCB and Barclaycard.

Market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees,Committees and Group committees,Committees, including the Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.Committee.

Roles and responsibilities

The objectives of market risk management are to:

 

§ understand and control market risk by robust measurement, limit setting, reporting and oversight

 

378  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


§ facilitate business growth within a controlled and transparent risk management framework

 

§ ensure that tradedcontrol market risk in the businesses is controlled according to the allocated appetite

§control non-traded market risk in line with approved appetite

§control insurance risk in line with approved appetite

§support the Non-Core strategy of asset reductions by ensuring that market risk remains within agreed risk appetite.

To ensuremeet the above objectives, are met, a well established governance structure is in place to manage these risks consistent with the ERMF (evaluate-respond-monitor).ERMF. See page 336pages 302 to 308 on risk management strategy, governance and risk culture.

The BRC recommends market risk appetite to the Board for their approval. The Market Risk Principal Risk Officer (MRPRO)Lead (PR Lead) is responsible for the Market Risk Control Framework and, under delegated authority from the Group CRO, agrees with the BCROsBusiness CROs a limit framework within the context of the approved market risk appetite.

Across the Group, market risk oversight and challenge is provided by business committees, Group committees, including the Group Market Risk Committee and Group Market Risk. The chart above gives an overview of the business control structure.

The Group Market Risk Committee approves and makes recommendations concerning the Group-wide market risk profile. This includes overseeing the operation of the Market Key Risk FrameworksFramework and associated standards and policies; reviewing arising market or regulatory issues, limits and utilisation; and risk appetite levels to the Board. The Committee is chaired by the MRPROPR Lead and attendees include the business heads of market risk, business aligned market risk managers and senior managers from Group Market Risk and Internal Audit.

The head of each business is accountable for all market risks associated with its activities, while the head of the market risk team covering each business is responsible for implementing the key risk control frameworksframework for market risk.

Risk management in the setting of strategy

Appetite for market risk is recommended by the risk function to BRC for agreement by the Board. Mandate and scales are set to control levels of market risk and ensureassist the Group remainsremain within the BRC approved risk appetite. The Group runs an annual Group-wide stress testing exercise which aims to simulate the dynamics of exposures across the Group and cover all risk factors. The exercise is also designed to measure the impact to the Group’s fundamental business plan, and is used to manage the wider Group’s strategy.

See pages 350 to 353 for more detail on

LOGO

See page 308 for more detail on

the role of risk in the setting of strategy.

Market risk culture

Market risk managers are independent from the businesses they cover, and their line management reports into the CRO. This embeds a risk culture with strong adherence to limits that support Group-wide risk appetite. See page 341 to 343

LOGOSee page 305 for more detail on risk culture.

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    331


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of tradedmarket risk

Management of market risk, mitigation and hedging policies

The governance structure helps ensuremanage and understand all market risks that the Group is exposed to are well managed and understood.to.

Traded market risk is generated primarily as a result of market making activities, syndications and providing risk management solutions to clients. Group Treasury supports the businesses in managing their interest rate risk. Positions will contribute both to market risk limits and regulatory capital if relevant.

As part of the continuous monitoring of the risk profile, Market Risk meets with the businesses to discuss the risk profile on a regular basis. The outcome of these reviews includes further detailed assessments of event risk via stress testing, risk mitigation and risk reduction.

Traded marketMarket risk measurement – management view

Market risk management measures

A range of complementary approaches to measure traded market risk are used which aim to capture the level of losses that the bank is exposed to due to unfavourable changes in asset prices. The primary tools to control the firm’s exposures are:

 

Measure  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  379


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Description

  Measure

Description

Management Value at Risk

(VaR)

  

An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day.

Primary stress tests  

An estimate of potential losses that might arise from severe market moves or scenarios impacting key liquid market risk exposures.

Secondary stress tests  

Modelled losses from unfavourable market movements to illiquid market risk exposures.

Business scenario stresses  

Multi asset scenario analysis of severe, but plausible events that may impact the market risk exposures of the Investment Bank.

investment bank.

The use of Management VaR for traded market risk is broader than the application for use of VaR for regulatory capital, and captures standardised, advanced and certain banking books where traded market risks are deemed to exist. The wider scope of Management VaR is what the Group deems as material market risk exposures which may have a detrimental impact on the performance of the trading business. The scope used in Regulatory VaR (see page 383)334) is narrower as it applies only to trading book positions as approved by the PRA.

Stress testing and scenario analysis are also an important part of the risk management framework, to capture potential risk that may arise in severe but plausible events.

Management VaR

Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, over one day for a given confidence level:

estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, over one day for a given confidence level

 

§ differs from the Regulatory VaR used for capital purposes in scope, confidence level and horizon

 

§ back testing is performed to ensuretest the model is fit for purpose.

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at the 95% confidence level is used for all trading books and some banking books. Risk factors driving VaR are grouped into key risk types as follows:summarised below:

 

Risk factor

  

Description

Interest rate  

Changes in the level or shape of interest rate expectations that can impact prices of interest rate sensitive assets, such as bonds and derivatives instruments, such as interest rate swaps.

Spread  

Difference between bond yields and swaps rates that arises when a business has positions in both bonds and interest rate/inflation derivatives instruments. Both assets may trade at different levels but are fundamentally exposed to similar risk.

Foreign

exchange

  The impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.
Equity  

Risk due to changes in equity prices, volatilities and dividend yields, for example as part of market making activities, syndication or underwriting of initial public offerings.

Commodity  

Arises primarily from providing hedging solutions to clients and access to financial investors via financially-settled energy derivatives exposed to a range of commodity products on both a derivative and physical basis, and involves movementschanges in the absolutelevel of energy spot or forward prices and shape of the spot and forward curves.

their volatilities.
Inflation  

Arises from the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives. This arises as part of market marking activities, whereby the Group may be exposed to changes in inflation rates, for example, market making syndications for inflation linked securities.

Traded credit  

Arises from the uncertainty of credit quality impacting prices of assets, for example positions such as corporate bonds, securitised products and credit based derivative instruments, including credit default swaps.

Risk factorDescription
Basis  

The impact of changes in interest rate tenor basis (e.g. the basis between swaps vs 3M LIBOR and swaps vs 6M LIBOR) and cross-currency basis and is primarily generated as a result of market making activities.

380  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


In some instances, historical data is not available for particular market risk factors for the entire look-back period, for example, complete historical data would not be available for our equity security following an initial public offering. In these cases, market risk managers will proxy the unavailable market risk factor data with available data for a related market risk factor.

The output of the Management VaR model can be readily tested through back testing. This checks instances where actual losses exceed the predicted potential loss estimated by the VaR model. If the number of instances is higher than expected, where actual losses exceed the predicted potential loss estimated by the VaR model, this may indicate limitations with the VaR calculation, for example, a risk factor that would not be adequately captured by the model.

The Management VaR model in some instances may not appropriately measure some market risk exposures, especially for market moves that are not directly observable via prices. Market risk managers are required to identify risks which are not adequately captured in VaR (‘risks not in VaR’ or ‘RNIVs’, discussed below).

When reviewing VaR estimates, the following considerations are taken into account:

 

§ the historical simulation uses the most recent two years of past data to generate possible future market moves, but the past may not be a good indicator of the future

 

§ the one-day time horizon may not fully capture the market risk of positions that cannot be closed out or hedged within one day

 

§ VaR is based on positions as at close of business and consequently, it is not an appropriate measure for intra-day risk arising from a position bought and sold on the same day

 

§ VaR does not indicate the potential loss beyond the VaR confidence level.

Limits are applied at the total level as well as by risk factor type, which are then cascaded down to particular trading desks and businesses by the market risk management function.

See page 141 for a review

332    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of Management VaR in 2015.market risk

Primary stress tests

§Key tool used by management to measure liquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

Primary stress tests are key tools used by management to measure liquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class. Stress testing provides an estimate of potential significant future losses that might arise from extreme market moves or scenarios. Primary stress tests apply stress moves to key liquid risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes, namely:

 

§ interest ratesrates:: shock to the level and structure of interest rates and inflation across currencies

 

§ creditcredit:: impact on traded corporate credit exposures and securities structures, including across rating grades, geography, sectors and products

 

§ foreign exchangeexchange:: impact of unfavourable moves in currency prices and volatility

 

§ equityequity:: shocks to share prices including exposures to specific markets and sectors

 

§ commoditiescommodities:: adverse commodity price changes across both physical and derivative markets

§securitised products: stresses to securitised structures and associated hedges.markets.

Primary stresses apply moves to liquid assets incorporating up to 10 days holding period. Shock scenarios are determined by a combination of observed extreme historical moves and forward looking elements as appropriate.

Primary stresses are calculated for each asset class on a standalone basis. Risk managers calculate several stress scenarios and communicate the results to senior managers to highlight concentrations and the level of exposures. Primary stress loss limits are applied across the trading businesses and is a key market risk control.

Secondary stress tests

Secondary stress tests are key tools used by management to measure illiquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

§Key tool used by management to measure illiquid market risks from extreme market movements or scenarios in each major trading asset class.

Secondary stress tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from market risks that are not captured in the primary stress tests.

These may relate to financial instruments or risk exposures which are not readily or easily tradable or markets that are naturally sensitive to a rapid deterioration in market conditions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  381


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

For each asset class, secondary stresses are aggregated to a single stress loss which allows the business to manage its liquid and illiquid risk factors. Limits against secondary stress losses are also applied, which allows the firm to manage and control the level of illiquid risk factors.

Stresses are specific to the exposure held and are calibrated on both observed extreme moves and some forward-looking elements as appropriate.

Business scenario stresses

Business scenario stresses are key tools used by management to measure aggregated losses across the entire trading book as a result of extreme forward-looking scenarios encompassing simultaneous shocks to multiple asset classes.

§Key tool used by management to measure aggregated losses across the entire trading book as a result of extreme forward-looking scenarios encompassing simultaneous shocks to multiple asset classes.

Business scenario stresses apply simultaneous shocks to all risk factors assessed by applying changes to foreign exchange rates, interest rates, credit spreads, commodities and equities to the entire portfolio, for example, the impact of a rapid and extreme slowdown in the global economy. The measure shows results on a multi-asset basis across all trading exposures. Business scenarios are used for risk appetite monitoring purposes and are useful in identifying concentrations of exposures and highlighting areas that may provide some diversification.

The estimated impactimpacts on market risk exposures are calculated and reported by the market risk management function on a frequent and regular basis. The stress scenario and the calibration ofon the shocks are also reviewed by market risk managers periodically for its relevance considering theany market environment.

Scenarios such as afocusing on adverse global recession, deterioration in the availability of liquidity, contagion effects of a slowdown in one of the major economies, slowdown in a major economic regioneasing of global growth concerns, and a historical event scenario are examples of business scenarios. If necessary, market event-specific scenarios are also calculated, such as, a unilateral decision to exit the Eurozone by a member country, and the impact of a disorderly exit of quantitative easing programmes, including unexpected rapid and continuous interest rate rises as a result.as:

See page 142 for a review of business scenario stresses in 2015.

a unilateral decision to exit the Eurozone by a member country

the impact of a large financial institution collapse, or

a disorderly exit of quantitative easing programmes, including unexpected rapid and continuous interest rate rises as a result.

Traded marketMarket risk measurement – regulatory view

Regulatory view of traded positions

For regulatory purposes, the trading book is defined as one that consists of all positions in CRD financial instruments and commodities held either with trading intent, or in order to hedge other elements of trading, and which are either free of any restrictive covenants on their tradability, or able to be hedged. A CRD financial instrument is defined as a contract that gives rise to both a financial asset of one party and a financial liability or equity instrument of another party.

All of the below regulatory measures, including the standardised approach, generate market risk capital requirements, in line with the regulatory requirements set out in the Capital Requirements Directive (‘CRD IV’) and Regulation. Positions which cannot be included in the trading book are included

within the banking book and generate risk capital requirements in line with this treatment.

Inclusion of exposures in the regulatory trading book

The Group maintains a Trading Book Policy, which defines the minimum requirements a business must meet to run trading positions and the process by which positions are allocated to trading or banking books. Trading intent is a key element in deciding whether a position should be treated as a trading or banking book exposure.

Positions in the trading book are subject to market risk capital, computed using models where regulatory approval has been granted, otherwise the market risk capital requirement is calculated using standard rules as defined in the Capital Requirement Regulation (CRR), part of the CRD IV package. If any of the criteria specified in the policy are not met for a position, then that position must be allocated to the banking book.

Most of the Group’s market risk regulatory models are assigned the highest model materiality rating. Consequently, the Regulatory VaR model is subject to annual re-approval at the Executive Models Committee (EMC), which is chaired by the CROIndependent Validation Unit. The Independent Validation Unit makes an assessment of model assumptions and the GFD. EMC considers evidence of model suitability provided by the model owner, as well as an independent validation conducted by the Independent Validation Unit.owner. The following table summarises the models used for market risk regulatory purposes and the applicable regulatory thresholds.

382  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Valuation standards

CRR article 105 defines regulatory principles which need to be applied to fair value assets and liabilities, in order to determine a prudent valuation.

The Prudent Valuation Adjustment (PVA) is applied to accounting fair values where there are a range of plausible alternative valuations. It is calculated in accordance with Article 105 of the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR),CRR, and includes (where relevant) adjustments for the following factors: unearned credit spreads, close-out costs, operational risk, market price uncertainty, early termination, investing and funding costs, future administrative costs and model risk. The PVA includes adjustment for all fair valued financial instruments and commodities, irrespective of whether they are in the trading or banking book.

Page 248 sets out the valuationThe Finance-product control framework for accounting valuations and the related responsibilities of the Finance-Product Control Valuations function and the Valuation Committee. This function and committeeCommittee are also responsible for the oversight of the PVA and ensuringmeeting compliance with article 105 of the CRR.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    333


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Regulatory measures for traded marketMarket risk

There are a number of regulatory measures which the Group has permission to use in calculating regulatory capital (internal models approval). These are listed below::

 

Measure

  

Definition

Regulatory Value at

Risk (VaR)

  

An estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market

Risk (VaR)movements calibrated to 99% confidence interval 10-day holding period.

Stressed Value at

Risk (SVaR)

  

An estimate of the potential loss arising from a twelve-month period of

(SVaR)significant financial stress calibrated to 99% confidence interval 10-day holding period.

Incremental Risk

Charge (IRC)

  

holding period.

Incremental RiskAn estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and
Charge (IRC)defaults, beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR
for the non-correlation trading portfolio. Uses a 99.9% confidence level
and a one-year horizon.

All PriceComprehensive Risk (APR)

  

An estimate of all the material market risk, including rating migration

Measure (CRM)and default for the correlation trading portfolio.

The legal entities for which the PRA has given permission to use internal models for market risk regulatory capital are: BBPlc Trading and BCSL (consolidated), BBPlc Trading, BCSL and BBSA. The legal entity for which the FRBNY has given permission to use internal models is IHC.

Regulatory VaR

§ Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements.

 

§ Regulatory VaR differs from the management approach in the following respects.

 

VaR Variable

  

 

Regulatory

 

  

 

Management

 

 Regulatory Management

Confidence interval

  

 

99%

 

  

 

95%

 

 99% 95%

Scope

  

 

As approved by the regulator (PRA)

 

  

 

Management view of market risk exposures. Includes trading books and banking books exposed to price risk

 

 As approved by the Management view of market risk exposures.
 regulator (PRA or Includes trading books and banking books
 FRBNY) exposed to price risk

Look-back period

  

 

2 years

 

  

 

2 years

 

 2 years 2 years

Liquidity Horizon (holding

period)

  

 

10 days

 

  

 

1 day

 

Liquidity Horizon 10 days 1 day
(holding period)    

Regulatory VaR allows oversight of the total potential losses, at a given confidence level, of those trading books which received approval from the regulator to be covered via an internal model. The Group uses a Regulatory VaR levels contribute to the calculation of themodel that diversifies general and specific market risk RWAs.for regulatory capital. Market risks are captured in the Regulatory VaR model using either full revaluation or an approximate revaluation approach depending on the type of product. When simulating potential movements in risk factors, returns are modelled using a combination of absolute changes, proportional changes or a blended mix of these two approaches.

Management VaR allows the bank to supervise the total market risk across the Group, including all trading books and some banking books.

Management VaR is also utilised for the internal capital model (economic capital).

Regulatory VaR is fundamentally the same as the Management VaR (see page 380)332), with the key differences listed above.

The model is complemented with RNIVs, as described on page 387 and 388.337.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  383


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)

§ Estimates the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements in a stressed environment.

 

§ Identical to Regulatory VaR, but calibrated over a one-year stressed period.

Regulatory capital is allocated to individual businesses. For regulatory capital calculation purposes the Group computes a market risk capital requirement based on a ten-day, 99% VaR metric calibrated to a period of significant financial stress. This Stressed VaR (‘SVaR’) capital requirement is added to the market risk capital requirement arising from regulatory VaR, the Incremental Risk Charge and the All Price Risk on an undiversified basis.

Regulatory capital is allocated to individual businesses. For regulatory capital calculation purposes the Group computes a market risk capital requirement based on a one-day scaled to ten-day, 99% VaR metric calibrated to a period of significant financial stress. This SVaR capital requirement is added to the market risk capital requirement arising from regulatory VaR, the Incremental Risk Charge and the All Price Risk on an undiversified basis.

The SVaR model must be identical to the VaR model used by the Group, with the exception that the SVaR model must be calibrated to a one-year period of significant financial stress (‘the SVaR period’). The Group selects the SVaR period to be a one-year period that maximises the sum of general market risk Regulatory VaR and specific market risk Regulatory VaR for positions in scope of regulatory approval. The SVaR period is reviewed on a quarterlymonthly basis or when required by material changes in market conditions or the trading portfolio.

SVaR cannot be meaningfully backtested as it is not sensitive to current market conditions. Many market risk factors with complete historical data over a two-year period may not have complete data covering the SVaR period and consequently, more proxies may be required for SVaR than for VaR. The SVaR metric itself has the same strengths and weaknesses as the Group’s VaR model.

Incremental Risk Charge (IRC)

§ Captures risk arising from rating migrations and defaults for traded debt instruments incremental to that already captured by Regulatory VaR and SVaR.

IRC captures the risk arising from ratings migrations or defaults in the traded credit portfolio. IRC measures this risk at a 99.9% confidence level with a one-year holding period and applies to all positions in scope for specific risk including sovereign exposure.

The Group’s IRC model simulates default and ratings transition events for individual names. The behaviour of names is correlated with one another to simulate a systemic factor to model the possibility of multiple downgrades or defaults. The correlations between non-sovereign names are based on the Basel-defined correlations stipulated in the IRB approach to measuring credit risk capital, with a fixed correlation between sovereign names.

The Group’s IRC model simulates the impact of a ratings transition by estimating the improvement or deterioration in credit spreads resulting from the transition and assumes that the historically observed average change in credit spreads (measured in relative terms) resulting from ratings transitions provides an accurate estimate of likely widening or tightening of credit spreads in future transitions. For each position, the model computes the impact of spread moves up or down at pre-specified relative movements, and the actual impact is obtained by interpolating or extrapolating the actual spread move from these pre-computed values.

The Group’s IRC model assumes that ratings transitions, defaults and any spread increases occur on an instantaneous basis.

All PriceComprehensive Risk (APR)Measure (CRM)

Captures all market risks affecting the correlation trading portfolio.

Captures all market risks affecting the correlation trading portfolio.

APRCRM covers the correlation trading portfolio and is intended to adequately capture all risk factors relevant to corporate Nth-to-default (on a basket of referenced names) and tranched credit derivatives. The capital requirement is based on a 99.9% confidence interval over a one-year holding period. The model generates a scenario based on a Monte Carlo simulation and revalues the portfolio under the simulated market scenario.

334    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

Table 95: Market risk models selected features
Component modelled

Number of significant

models and size

of associated portfolio

(RWAs)

Model description and methodologyApplicable regulatory thresholds
Regulatory VaR1 model;Equally-weighted historical simulation ofRegulatory VaR is computed with ten-day
£2.8bnpotential daily P&L arising from market movesholding period and 99% confidence level
SVaR1 model;Same methodology as used for VaR model,Regulatory SVaR is computed with ten-day
£6.8bnbut using a different time seriesholding period and 99% confidence level
IRC1 model;Monte Carlo simulation of P&L arising fromIRC is computed with one-year holding period
£3.0bnratings migrations and defaultsand 99.9% confidence level
CRM1 model;Same approach as IRC, but it incorporatesCRM is computed with one-year holding
£0.0bnmarket-driven movements in spreads andperiod and 99.9% confidence level.
correlations for application to correlationAs required in CRD IV, the CRM charge is
trading portfolios.subject to a floor set with reference to
standard rules charge

The model captures the following risk factors in the correlation trading portfolio:

 

§ default and ratings migration over a one-year time horizon

 

§ credit spread volatility

 

§ recovery risk: uncertainty of the recoverable value under default

 

§ correlation risk

 

§ basis risk: basis between credit indices and its underlying constituents

 

§ hedge slippage: portfolio rebalancing assumption.

The Group’s APRCRM model is based on the IRC model but also captures market risks not related to transition or default events, such as movements in credit spreads or correlations. These risk factors are included as part of the Monte Carlo simulation using distributions calibrated to historically observed moves.

384  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


The Group’s CRM model assumes that ratings transitions, defaults and any spread increases occur on an instantaneous basis. The Group applies stress tests to the modelling parameters based on combinations of changes in credit spreads, correlations and default events.

Regulatory back testing

Back testing is the method by which the Group checks and affirms that its procedures for estimating VaR are reasonable and serve its purpose of estimating the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements. The back testing process is a regulatory requirement and seeks to estimate the performance of the regulatory VaR model. Performance is measured by the number of exceptions to the model i.e. net trading P&L loss in one trading day is greater than the estimated VaR for the same trading day. The Group’s procedures could be underestimating VaR if exceptions occur regularlymore frequently than expected (a 99% confidence interval indicates that one exception willis expected to occur in 100 days).

Back testing is performed at a legal entity level, sub-portfolio levels and business-aligned portfolios (shown in the table below and in the charts on the next page) on the Group’s regulatory VaR model. Regulatory back testing compares Regulatory VaR at 99% confidence level (one-day holding period equivalent) to actual and hypothetical changes in portfolio value as defined in CRR Article 366. The consolidated Barclays Bank PLC and Barclays Capital Securities Ltd is the highest level of consolidation for the VaR models that are used in the calculation of regulatory capital.

A back testing exception is generated when a loss is greater than the daily VaR for any given day.

As defined by the PRA, a green modelstatus is consistent with a good working VaR model and is achieved for models that have four or fewer back testing exceptions in a 12-month period. Back testing counts the number of

days when a loss exceeds the corresponding VaR estimate, measured at the 99% regulatory confidence level. For the Investment Bank’s regulatory DVaR model at the consolidated legal entity level, green model status was maintained for 2015.2017.

Back testing is also performed on management VaR to ensureassess it remains reasonable and fit for purpose.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  385


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

The table below shows the VaR back testing exceptions on legal entities aligned to the Group’s business in 2015. A back testing exception is generated when a loss is greater than the VaR for a given day. Exceptions are shown by legal entity rather than asset class as in prior disclosures.at 31 December 2017. Model performance at a legal entity level determines regulatory capital within those entities. Legal entity disclosure also reflects the management perspective as Barclays moves forward with structural change, where VaR and model performance of VaR for a legal entity across asset class becomes more relevant than asset class metrics across legal entity.

    Actual P&L   Hypo P&L 
Legal entity  

Total
    Exceptions

            Statusb   Total
    Exceptions
            Statusb 
BBPlc Trading and BCSL       G    3    G 
BBPlc Trading       G    3    G 
BCSL   5    A    3    G 
BBSAa       G        G 
IHC       G    2    G 

Notes

aBCI back testing has been replaced by IHC back testing from 1 July 2016 (both are included below for their respective periods). Please note that IHC back testing is performed for hypo P&L only as per US regulatory requirements.
bRAG status is accurate as of year-end.

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    335


     

Legal Entities

Total Exception        

Status        

BBPLC Trading and BCSL

3

Green        

BBPLC Trading

4

Green        

BCSL

4

Green        

BBSA

2

Green        

BCI

2

Green        

Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

The charts below show VaR for the Group’s regulatory portfolios aligned toby legal entity where at least one exception has occurred during 2015.entity. The dark blue linesand grey points on the charts indicate losses on the small number of days on which theyactual and hypo P&L respectively exceeded the VaR amount.

The majority of the backtesting exceptions in the year wereIn addition to being driven by markets movingmarket moves in a fashion unanticipated by the model, primarily by increases in realised volatility compared to that predicted by the VaR atexcess of the 99% confidence level. Additionallevel, back testing exceptions arecan be caused by non-VaR type risks which may be related to events, such as corporate actions or pricing remarks in line with valuation policies, which arethat impact P&L not captured directly in the VaR model.

itself but separately captured as non VaR-type, namely Risks Not in VaR (RNIVs).

Exceptions are reported to internal management and regulators on a regular basis and exceptions are investigated to ensurecheck the model performs as expected. Overall back testing for the consolidated legal entity remains in the green zone, suggesting that the VaR remains fit for purpose.

LOGO

 

386  |  336    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

    

    

 

 

LOGO

Management of risks not fully captured in models, including Risks not in VaR (RNIVs)

The Group’s’Group’s risk identification process captures risks that either have been observed to, or have the capacity to, produce material losses in normal and stressed market conditions. To ensureenforce risk coverage, the range of keycore risks is identified following either market convention, regulatory guidance, or the specific historical experience of the Group’sGroup and is considered as part of the new product processes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  387


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

In some instances, the Management and Regulatory VaR model may not appropriately measure some market risks, especially where market moves are not directly observable via prices, the Group has policies to ensure thatenforce add-ons are applied where risks are not captured by the model. RNIVs refer to those keycore risks that are not captured, or not adequately captured, in VaR and SVaR. RNIVs can include:

 

§ risks not fully captured elsewhere and/or illiquid risk factors such as cross-risks;

 

§ basis risks;

 

§ higher-order risks;

 

§ calibration parameters, for instance to model parameter uncertainty; and

 

§ potential losses in excess of fair valuation adjustments taken in line with the Valuation Control Framework. Please see note 18 on page 216 ‘Fair value of assets and liabilities’ for more details on fair value adjustments.

The treatment of RNIVs follows whether the risks are considered VaR type or non-VaR type, which depends on, and can change with, the evolving state of financial markets:

 

§ VaR-type RNIVs:: Typically represent risks that are not well captured in VaR, mainly because of infrastructure limitations or methodology limitations. In this instance two metrics are calculated, a VaR RNIV and a SVaR RNIV, using the same confidence level, capital horizon and observation period as VaR and SVaR respectively and are capitalised using the same multipliers as VaR and SVaR

 

§ Non-VaR-type RNIVsNon VaR-type RNIVs:: Typically represent risks which would not be well captured by any VaR model either because it represents an event not historically observed in the VaR time series (e.g., currency peg break) or a market risk factor which is not seen to move frequently (e.g. correlation). These are typically estimated using stress scenarios. The stress methodology is calibrated equivalently to at least 99% confidence level and a capital horizon of at least 10 days over an appropriate observation period, depending on the liquidity of the risk. For the purpose of regulatory capital, the capital charge is equal to the loss arising from the stress test except when these risks are already adequately captured elsewhere e.g. via the IRC or APRCRM models, which are intended to capture certain risks not adequately covered by VaR

For regulatory capital these RNIVs are aggregated without any offsetting or diversification benefit.

Traded marketMarket risk control

The metrics that are used to measure market risk are controlled through the implementation of appropriate limit frameworks. Limits are set at the total Group level, asset class level, for example, interest rate risk, and at business level, for example, securitised products.rates trading. Stress limits and many book limits, such as foreign exchange and interest rate sensitivity limits, are also used to control risk appetite.

Firm-wide limits are reported to the BRC and are termed A-level limits for total management VaR, asset class VaR, primary stress and secondary stresses and business scenarios. These are then cascaded down by risk managers in order to meet the firm-wide risk appetite.

Each A-level limit is set after consideration is given to revenue generation opportunities and overall risk appetite approved by the Board. Compliance with limits is monitored by the independent risk functions in the trading businesses with oversight provided by Group Market Risk.

Throughout 2015,2017, Group Market Risk continued its ongoing programme of control testing and conformance reviewstesting on the trading businesses’ market risk management practices. These reviews are intended to verify the business’s conformance with the Market Risk Control Framework and best practices.

Traded marketMarket risk reporting

Trading businesses market risk managers produce a number of detailed and summary market risk reports daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly for business and risk managers. Where relevant on a Group-wide basis, these are sent to Group Market Risk for review and a risk summary is presented at the Group Market Risk Committee and the trading businesses’ various market risk committees. The overall market risk profile is also presented to BRC on a regular basis.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    337


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of non-tradedsecuritisation exposures

Securitisations give rise to credit, market and other risks. This section discusses the types of business activities and exposures that we incur in the course of activities related to securitisations.

The objectives pursued in securitisation activities and the types of activities undertaken are discussed on page 339.

A description of the risks incurred in the course of securitisation activities, and how we manage them, is contained on page 340 and 341.

LOGO

338    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

This section discloses information about the Group’s securitisation activities distinguishing between the various functions performed in supporting its customers and managing its risks. It includes traditional securitisations as well as synthetic transactions effected through the use of derivatives or guarantees.

A securitisation is defined as a transaction or scheme where the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures and where the subordination of tranches determines the distribution of losses during the ongoing life of the transaction or scheme. Such transactions are ordinarily undertaken to transfer risk mitigationfor the Group or on behalf of a client.

Certain transactions undertaken by the Group are not disclosed in the quantitative sectionas they do not fall under the regulatory securitisation framework

(defined under Part Three, Title II, Chapter 5 of the CRR, part of the CRD IV package). These include funding transactions for the purposes of generating term liquidity, and certain government guaranteed transactions.

Objectives of securitisation activities

In the course of its business, the Group has undertaken securitisations of its own originated assets as well as the securitisation of third party assets via special purpose vehicles, sponsored conduit vehicles and shelf programmes.

The Group has securitised its own originated assets in order to manage the Group’s credit risk position and to generate term funding for the Group balance sheet. The Group also participates in primary securitisations and distributes bonds to the market to facilitate term liquidity for its clients.

The Group also purchases asset backed loans and securities for the purpose of supporting client franchise, and purchases asset backed securities (ABS) for the purpose of investing its liquidity pool.

Further, the Group makes a secondary market for a range of securitised products globally, including residential mortgage backed securities (RMBS), commercial mortgage backed securities (CMBS) and ABS.

The role and involvement of the Group in securitisations in 2017

The Group adopts the following roles in the securitisation processes in which it is involved:

Originator of assets prior to securitisation

The Group originates or purchases commercial mortgage loans for the purpose of securitisation. The securities are then sold to investors through a broker-dealer subsidiary.

The Group securitises assets otherwise originated in the ordinary course of business including corporate loans, consumer loans and commercial mortgage loans. The Group also provides derivative transactions to securitisations sponsored by itself and third parties. These transactions carry counterparty credit risk and are included in the Group trading book.

Providing warehousing facilities collateralised by third party assets prior to securitisation or exit via whole-loan sale

The Group provides warehouse financing to third party loan originators, including for agency eligible loans that can be securitised by the Federal National Mortgage Association (‘Fannie Mae’), the Federal Home Loan Mortgage Corporation (‘Freddie Mac’), or the Government National Mortgage Association (‘Ginnie Mae’) and for corporate loans that can be securitised via collateralised loan obligations (CLO).

Executor of securitisation trades including bond marketing and syndication

The Group transacts primarily as a principal in RMBS, ABS, CLO and CMBS with institutional investors and other broker-dealers. Agency backed residential and commercial mortgage securitisations include Credit Risk Transfer securities (Fannie Mae-sponsored CAS and Freddie Mac-sponsored STACR bonds). ABS securitisations include consumer ABS (e.g. credit card, student loan and auto) and non-traditional ABS (e.g. timeshares, wireless towers and whole business securitisations). Non-agency commercial mortgage securitisations include CMBS and commercial real estate collateralised loan obligations (CRE CLO). The Group makes secondary market in CLOs and acts as arranger on behalf of clients to structure and place arbitrage CLOs.

Purchaser of third party securitisations to support client franchise

The Group may purchase third party securitisations. The Group also funds on its own balance sheet securitisations similar to the ones funded via its sponsored conduits (see below). In such transactions the Group would not be defined as an originator or sponsor for regulatory purposes.

Sponsoring conduit vehicles

The Group acts as managing agent and administrative agent of two multi-seller asset backed commercial paper (ABCP) conduits,

Sheffield Receivables Company, LLC (Sheffield) and Salisbury Receivables Company, LLC (Salisbury), through which interests in securitisations of third party originated assets are funded via a variety of funding mechanics including the issuance of ABCP.

From a regulatory perspective, Barclays acts as a sponsor of Sheffield and Salisbury. In relation to such conduit activity, the Group provides all or a portion of the backstop liquidity to the commercial paper, programme-wide credit enhancement and, as appropriate, interest rate and foreign currency hedging facilities. The Group receives fees for the provision of these services.

Sheffield and Salisbury hold securities classified as available for sale, measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised through other comprehensive income (OCI) and non-securities classified as loans and receivables, measured at amortised cost on its standalone financial statements. It funds the assets through the issuance of ABCP. Note that Sheffield and Salisbury are consolidated for accounting but not regulatory purposes.

Funding transactions to generate term liquidity

Secured funding forms one of the key components of the Group’s diversified funding sources providing access to the secured wholesale market and complementing the diversification of funding by maturity, currency and geography. The Group issues ABS and covered bonds secured primarily by customer loans and advances.

The Group currently manages four key, on-balance sheet asset backed funding programmes to obtain term financing for mortgage loans and credit card receivables. These programmes also support retained issuances for the Group to access central bank liquidity and funding. The UK regulated covered bond and the residential mortgage master trust securitisation programmes both utilise assets originated by the Group’s UK residential mortgage business. The third programme is a credit card master trust securitisation and uses receivables from the Group’s UK credit card business. The fourth programme is a SEC registered securitisation programme backed by US domiciled credit card receivables.

Risk transfer transactions

The Group has entered into synthetic and cash securitisations of corporate and commercial loans (originated in the ordinary course of business) for the purposes of the transfer of credit risk to third party investors. The regulatory capital requirements of these transactions fall under CRD IV.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    339


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

Securitisation risks, monitoring and hedging policies

Barclays actively seeksCapital requirements against securitisation exposures are subject to minimisea separate framework under CRD IV (see CRR article 449) to account for the particular characteristics of this asset class. For risk management purposes, however, a securitisation is aligned to the risk type to which it gives rise.

Credit risks

In a securitisation structure, the payments are dependent upon the performance of a single exposure or pool of exposures. As these underlying exposures are usually credit instruments, the performance of the securitisation is exposed to credit risk.

Securitisation exposures are subject to the Group Credit Risk policies and standards and business level procedures. This includes the requirement to review in detail each transaction at a minimum on an annual basis. As collateral risk is the primary driver the analysis places a particular focus on the underlying collateral performance, key risk drivers, servicer due diligence and cash flows, and the impact of these risks on the securitisation notes. The risk is addressed through the transaction structure and by setting an appropriate modelled tolerance level. Structural features incorporate wind-down triggers set against factors including, but not limited to, defaults/ charge-offs, delinquencies, excess spread, dilution, payment rates and yield, all of which help to mitigate potential credit deterioration. Qualitative aspects such as counterparty risk and ancillary issues (operational and legal risk) are also considered. Changes to the credit risk profile of securitisation exposures will also be identified through ongoing transaction performance monitoring. In addition, periodic stress tests of the portfolio as part of ongoing risk management are conducted as well as in response to Group-wide or regulatory requests.

The principal committee responsible for the monitoring of the credit risk arising from securitisations is Wholesale Credit Risk Management Committee (WCRMC). Executive responsibility rests with the Regional Heads of Financial Institutions Credit Risk.

Market and liquidity risks

Market risk for securitised products is measured, controlled and limited through a suite of VaR, non-VAR and stress metrics in accordance with the Group’s Market Risk Policies and Procedures. The key risks of securitisation structures are interest rate, credit, spread, prepayment and liquidity risk. Interest rate and spread risk are hedged with standard liquid interest rate instruments (including interest rate swaps, US Treasuries and US Treasury futures). The universe of hedging instruments for credit and prepayment risk is limited and relatively illiquid, resulting in basis risks. In providing warehouse financing, the Group is exposed to mark to market (if counterparty defaults on related margin call).

Hedging

Securitisation and re-securitisation exposures benefit from the relative seniority of the exposure in the capital structure. Due to lack of availability in the credit default swap market for individual asset backed securities, there are no material CDS hedge counterparties relating to the securitisation and re-securitisation population.

Operational risks

Operational risks are incurred in all of the Group’s operations. In particular, all securitised (and re-securitised) assets are subject to a degree of risk associated with documentation and the collection of cash flows.

In providing warehouse financing, the Group incurs potential contingent operational risks related to representations and warranties should there be a need to foreclose on the line and it later be discovered that the underlying loans were not underwritten to agency agreed criteria. Such risks are mitigated by daily collateral margining and ready agency bids. Market risk is also mitigated by employing forward trades.

The Operational Risk Review Forum oversees the management of operational risks for the entire range of the Group’s activities.

Rating methodologies, ECAIs and RWA calculations

RWAs reported for securitised and re-securitised banking book and trading book assets at 31 December 2017 are calculated in line with CRR and UK PRA rules and guidance. The Group has approval to use, and therefore applies, the internal ratings based approach for the calculation of RWAs where appropriate, and the Standardised Approach elsewhere.

The Group employs eligible ratings issued by nominated External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAIs) to risk weight its securitisation and re- securitisation exposure where their use is permitted. Ratings are considered eligible for use based on their conformance with the internal rating standard which is compliant with both CRR and European Credit Rating Agency regulation. The ECAIs nominated by the Group for this purpose are Standard & Poor’s, Moody’s, Fitch, DBRS and Kroll.

As required by CRR, the Group uses credit ratings issued by these ECAIs consistently for all exposures within the securitisation exposure class. For that reason, there is no systematic assignment of particular agencies to types of transactions within the securitisation exposure class.

For Sheffield and Salisbury, the Internal

Assessment Approach (IAA) framework mirrors the ECAI methodology, which also includes Moody’s and Fitch, who rate the

Sheffield and Salisbury programmes. Under the IAA framework, the securitisation exposure must be internally rated, and the bank’s internal assessment process must meet certain requirements in order to map its own internal rating to an ECAI. Cash flow stress analysis on a securitisation structure is performed as prescribed by an ECAI methodology for the relevant ratings level, and is at least as conservative as the published methodology. Stress factors may include, among other factors, asset yields, principal payment rates, losses, delinquency rates and interest rates.

In determining an internal rating, collateral risks are the primary driver and are addressed through the transaction structure and modelled statistical confidence. The analysis reflects the Group’s view on the transaction, including dilution risk, concentration and tenor limits, as well as qualitative aspects such as counterparty risk and important ancillary issues (operational and legal risks). The adequacy and integrity of the servicer’s systems and processes for underwriting, collections policies and procedures are also reviewed. The Group conducts a full due diligence review of the servicer for each transaction. Each transaction is reviewed on, at least, an annual basis with a focus on the performance of underlying assets. The results of any due diligence review and the financial strength of the seller/servicer, are also factored into the analysis. Ratings of the transaction are reaffirmed with the most up to date ECAI methodologies. Any transaction which deviates from the current methodology is amended accordingly.

340    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of securitisation exposures

Summary of the accounting policies for securitisation activities

Certain Group-sponsored entities have issued debt securities or have entered into funding arrangements with lenders in order to finance specific assets. An entity is consolidated by the Group when the Group has control over the entity. The Group controls an entity if it has all of the three elements of control which are i) power over the entity; and ii) exposure, or rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the entity; iii) the ability to use its power over the entity to affect the amount of the Group returns.

The consolidation treatment must be initially assessed at inception and is reassessed if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control.

Typically, assets that are awaiting securitisation on the Group balance sheet are measured at fair value through P&L, using the appropriate method for the asset class as they are classified as held for trading or are designed at fair value through profit and loss, under the IAS 39 fair value option. However some non-derivative assets held prior to securitisation may qualify as loans and receivables and are measured at amortised cost. When securitised assets have been included on the Group balance sheet it is necessary to consider whether those assets may be removed from the Group balance sheet. Assets which have been transferred to third parties (i.e. an unconsolidated Group entity), will remain on the Group balance sheet, and treated as financings, unless the following criteria apply:

substantially all the risks and rewards associated with the assets have been transferred, in which case, they are derecognised in full

if a significant portion, but not all, of the risks and rewards have been transferred, the asset is derecognised entirely if the transferee has the ability to sell the financial asset, otherwise the asset continues to be recognised only to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement.

Any financial support or contractual arrangements provided to unconsolidated entities, over securitised assets, would be recognised as a liability on balance sheet if it met the relevant IFRS criteria, or gave rise to a provision under IAS 37, and have to be disclosed (see Note 39 on page 265). Note, however, that the Group has a

Significant Risk Transfer policy that does not allow for any support to be provided to any transactions that fall under the securitisation framework.

Assets may be transferred to a third party through a legal sale or an arrangement that meets the ‘pass through’ criteria where the substance of the arrangement is principally that the Group is acting solely as a cash collection agent on behalf of the eventual recipients.

Where the transfer applies to a fully proportionate share of all or specifically identified cash flows, the relevant accounting treatment is applied to that proportion of the asset.

When the above criteria support the case that the securitisation should not be accounted for as financing, the transaction will result in sale treatment or partial continued recognition of the assets to the extent of the Group’s continuing involvement in those assets. Gains are recognised to the extent that proceeds that can be measured using observable market data exceed the assets derecognised.

Any retained interests, which will consist of loans and/or securities depending on the nature of the transaction, are valued in accordance with the Group’s Accounting Policies, as set out in the 2017 Annual Report. To the extent that these interests are measured at fair value, they will be included within the fair value disclosures in the financial statements in the Annual Report. As outlined in these disclosures, key valuation assumptions for retained interests of this nature will include spreads to discount rates, default and recovery rates and prepayment rates that may be observable or unobservable.

In a synthetic securitisation transaction, the underlying assets are not sold into the relevant special purpose entity (SPE). Instead, their performance is transferred into the vehicle through a synthetic instrument such as a CDS, a credit linked note or a financial guarantee. The accounting policies outlined above will apply to synthetic securitisations.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    341


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

This section provides an analysis of the management of liquidity, capital and interest rate risk in the banking book by actively hedging thisrisk.

Liquidity risk, with a focus on how it is managed to maintain adequate resources at all times including under stress, is discussed on pages 343 to 345.

Capital risk, including how the risk of insufficient capital and leverage ratios and pension risk are managed, is discussed on pages 346 to 347.

The management of Interest rate risk in the banking book is discussed on pages 348 to 349.

LOGO

342    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

Treasury and capital risk

Liquidity risk: The risk that the firm is unable to meet its contractual or contingent obligations or that it does not have the appropriate amount, tenor and composition of funding and liquidity to support its assets

Capital risk: The risk that the firm has an insufficient level or composition of capital to support its normal business activities and to meet its regulatory capital requirements under normal operating environments or stressed conditions (both actual and as defined for internal planning or regulatory testing purposes). This includes the risk from the firm’s pension plans

Interest rate risk in the banking book: The risk that the firm is exposed to capital or income volatility because of a mismatch between the interest rate exposures of its (non-traded) assets and liabilities.

Overview

Barclays Treasury manages treasury and capital risk on a day-to-day basis with the useTreasury Committee acting as the principal management body. To enforce effective oversight and segregation of duties and in line with the ERMF, the Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for oversight of key capital, liquidity, interest rate products. Atrisk in the banking book (IRRBB) and pension risk management activities. The following describes the structure and governance associated with the risk types within the Treasury and Capital Risk function.

Liquidity risk management

Overview

The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and maintaining that the business is sustainable. There is a control framework in place for managing liquidity risk and this is designed to meet the following objectives:

To maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite as expressed by the Board

To maintain market confidence in the Group’s name.

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Roles and responsibilities

The Treasury and Capital Risk function is responsible for the management and governance of the liquidity risk mandate defined by the Board and the production of ILAAPs. Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing liquidity risk within the set risk appetite. The CRO for treasury and capital risk reports to the Group CRO.

Organisation and structure

LOGO

Liquidity risk management

A control framework is in place for Liquidity Risk under which the Treasury function operates. The control framework describes liquidity risk management processes, associated policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) and is subject to annual review. Internal architecture is in place to record and measure our group wide liquidity metrics reporting

The Board sets the LRA based on the internal liquidity risk model and external regulatory requirements namely the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR). The LRA is represented as the level of risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented in line with the control framework and policy for liquidity risk.

Control framework

Barclays comprehensive control framework for managing the Group’s liquidity risk is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the LRA set by the Board.

The control framework incorporates a range of ongoing business management tools to monitor, limit and stress test the Group’s balance sheet and contingent liabilities and the Recovery Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the level of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds. Together, these tools reduce the likelihood that a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due. The control framework is subject to internal conformance testing and internal audit review

The liquidity stress tests assess the potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the size of the liquidity pool that is immediately available to meet anticipated outflows if a stress occurs.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    343


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

LOGO

The Group maintains a range of management actions for use in a liquidity stress, these are documented in the Group Recovery Plan. Since the precise nature of any stress event cannot be known in advance, the actions are designed to be flexible to the nature and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that can be drawn upon as required. The Barclays Group Recovery Plan also contains more severe recovery options to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress. Any stress event would be regularly monitored and reviewed using key management information by key Treasury, Risk and business representatives.

Risk Appetite and planning

Barclays has established an LRA over Group stress tests to represent the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

The key expression of the liquidity risk is through stress tests. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated net stressed outflows for each of five stress scenarios. Barclays has defined both internal short term and long term LRA stress test metrics.

The LRA for internal stress tests is approved by the Board. The LRA is reviewed on a continuous basis and is subject to formal review at least annually as part of the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).

Statement of Liquidity Risk Appetite: For 2017, the Board has approved that the Group will maintain an amount of available liquidity resources to meet modelled and prescribed regulatory liquidity stress outflows over a period of time (minimum buffer duration):

30 days in a Barclays specific stress

90 days in a market wide stress

30 days in a combined stress

Long term LRA 80% LCR (Pillar 2)

LCR 30 days minimum ratio 100% (Pillar 1 basis) and 90% (Pillar 2 basis)

The stress outflows are used to determine the size of the Group Liquidity Pool, which represents those resources immediately available to meet outflows in a stress. In addition to the liquidity pool, the control framework and policy provides for other management actions, including generating liquidity from other liquid assets on the Group’s balance sheet in order to meet additional stress outflows, or to preserve or restore the Liquidity Pool in the event of a liquidity stress.

344    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

Liquidity limits

Barclays manages limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures, a sample of which is shown in the table below. These limits serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

LOGO

Early warning indicators

Barclays monitors a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk either in the market or specific to Barclays, a sample of which are shown in the table below. These are

designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions. Early warning indicators are used as part of the assessment

of whether to invoke the Group Recovery Plan, which provides a framework for how the liquidity stress would be managed.

LOGO

Recovery & resolution planning

Barclays maintains a Group Recovery Plan (GRP) which is designed to provide a framework to effectively manage a severe financial stress. The GRP is proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the business and is tested to assess that it is operationally robust. The GRP details the escalation and invocation process for the plan, including integration with i) BAU monitoring of capital and liquidity Early Warning

Indicators (EWI) to detect signs of approaching financial stress, ii) existing processes within Barclays Treasury and Risk to respond to mild/moderate stress and iii) a governance process for formally invoking the GRP. The Plan would be formally invoked by the Group Board and would be overseen and executed by the Barclays Crisis Leadership Team (BCLT), a flexible committee of senior management for responding to all types of stress events. In invoking and executing the

plan, the BCLT (in consultation with the Group Board) would assess the likely impact of the stress event on the Group and its subsidiaries and determine the appropriate response for the nature and severity of the stress. The GRP includes a range of recovery options to respond to financial stresses of varying severity and includes detailed information on financial and non-financial impacts of options and a communications plan.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    345


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

LOGO

Capital risk management

Overview

Capital risk is managed through ongoing monitoring and management of the capital position, regular stress testing and a robust capital governance framework.

Roles and responsibilities

The management of capital risk is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management, and is embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate.

Capital risk management is underpinned by a control framework and policy. The capital management strategy, outlined in the Group and legal entity capital plans, is developed in alignment with the control framework and policy for capital risk, and is implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group’s objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, internal stress tests and results of regulatory stress tests, and the Group recovery plan. The Treasury Committee is responsible for monitoring and managing capital risk in line with the Group’s capital management objectives, capital plan and risk frameworks. The Treasury and Capital Risk Committee monitors and reviews the capital risk profile and control environment, providing Second Line oversight of the management of capital risk. The Board Risk Committee reviews the risk profile, and annually reviews risk appetite and the impact of stress scenarios on the Group capital plan/forecast in order to agree the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Local management assures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

Treasury has the primary responsibility for managing and monitoring capital and reports to the Group Finance Director. The Treasury and Capital Risk function contains a Capital Risk Oversight team, and is an independent risk function that reports to the Group CRO and is responsible for oversight of capital risk and production of ICAAPs.

Capital risk management

The Group’s capital management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the risk appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices.

Capital planning and allocation

The Group assesses its capital requirements on multiple bases, with the Group’s capital plan set in consideration of the Group’s risk profile and appetite, strategic and performance objectives, regulatory requirements, and market and internal factors, including the results of stress testing. The capital plan is managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short-term and medium-term financial planning cycles, and is developed with the objective that the Group maintains an adequate level of capital to support its capital requirements.

The PRA determines the regulatory capital requirements for the consolidated Group. Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to and the factors above, and are measured through both risk-based Risk Weighted Assets (RWAs) and leverage-based metrics. An internal assessment of the Bank’s capital adequacy is undertaken through the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and is used to inform the capital requirements of the firm.

The Group expects to meet the minimum requirements for capital and leverage at all times and also holds an internal buffer sized according to the firm’s assessment of capital risk.

Through the capital planning process, capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, capitalised to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Monitoring and reporting

Capital is managed and monitored to maintain that Barclays’ capital plans are appropriate and that risks to the plans are considered.

Limits are in place to support alignment with the capital plan and adherence to regulatory requirements, and are monitored through appropriately governed forums. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to the Treasury Committee, with clear escalation channels to senior management. This enables a consistent and objective approach to monitoring the capital outlook against the capital plan, and supports the early identification when outlooks deteriorate.

Capital management information is readily available to support Senior Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making.

Stress testing and risk mitigation

Internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Recent economic, market and peer institution stresses are used to inform the assumptions developed for internal stress tests and to assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA, and legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of the internal capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to maintain adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible stressed conditions.

Actions are identified as part of the stress tests that can be taken to mitigate the risks that may arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook. As an additional layer of protection, the Group Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available to the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the situation that a stress occurs that is more severe than anticipated.

346    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

Capitalisation of legal entities

Barclays as a group comprises legal entities across multiple jurisdictions. The Group and regulated legal entities are subject to prudential requirements from the PRA and/or local regulators. Sufficient capital needs to be available to meet these requirements both at a consolidated Group and individual legal entity level.

Where aggregate requirements for individual entities in the Group are higher than the consolidated requirement, the firm may use debt or capital other than CET1 to meet these incremental requirements (so called ‘double leverage’). There are regulatory and rating agency expectations that constrain the amount of double leverage that can be used. This might increase the overall level of capital the Group is required to hold.

The capitalisation of legal entities is reviewed annually as part of the capital planning process and monitored on an ongoing basis.

Transferability of capital

Surplus capital held in Group entities is required to be repatriated to Barclays Bank PLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. Pre and post the implementation of ring-fencing, capital is managed for the Group as a whole as well as its operating subsidiaries to enable fungibility and redeployment of capital while meeting relevant internal and regulatory targets at entity levels.

Foreign exchange risk

The Group has capital resources and risk weighted assets denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign exchange rates result in changes in the Sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and RWAs. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements.

The Group’s capital ratio management strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange rate movements. To achieve this, the Group aims to maintain the ratios of foreign currency CET1, Tier 1 and Total capital resources to foreign currency RWAs at the same timelevel as the Group’s consolidated capital ratios.

The Group’s investments in foreign currency subsidiaries and branches, to the extent that they are not hedged for foreign exchange movements, translate into GBP upon consolidation creating CET1 capital resources sensitive to foreign currency movements. Changes in the GBP value of the investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

To create foreign currency Tier 1 and Total Capital resources additional to the CET1 capital resources, the Group issues debt capital in non-Sterling currencies, where possible. This is primarily achieved through the issuance of debt capital from Barclays actively managesPLC or Barclays Bank PLC in US Dollar and Euro, but can also be achieved by subsidiaries issuing capital in local currencies.

Pension risk

The Group maintains a number of defined benefit pension schemes for past and current employees. The ability of the potential assetpension fund to meet the projected pension payments is maintained principally through investments.

Pension risk arises because the estimated market value of the pension fund assets might decline; investment returns might reduce; or the estimated value of the pension liabilities might increase. The Group monitors the pension risks arising from its defined benefit pension schemes and liability mismatchesworks with Trustees to address shortfalls. In these circumstances the Group could be required or might choose to make extra contributions to the pension fund. The Group’s main defined benefit scheme was closed to new entrants in 2012.

Management of pension risk

Many of the Group’s defined benefit (DB) pension funds are established as trusts in order to keep the fund’s assets separate from the sponsor (Barclays). As such the Trustees are responsible for:

Investment strategy including asset allocation and performance of assets.

Assessing the level of technical provision required.

Meeting any minimum funding objectives.

Complying with local legislation.

The legal structure of Barclays’ DB pension funds and changesthe role of the Trustees mean that Pension Risk is not part of the Bank’s risk appetite assessment used to manage other key risks.

Pension Forums

The Pension Executive Board (PEB) has accountability for the effective operation of pensions across Barclays Group. It is the most senior executive body for pensions in Barclays.

The Pension Management Group (PMG) is accountable for the oversight and workflow management of the group’s responsibilities of the pension arrangements operated by Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries globally. The PMG is accountable to the PEB.

The PEB and PMG are not created or mandated under the ERMF. However these forums provide Risk the opportunity to discuss pension risk in a wider context as other relevant stakeholders from HR, Legal, Treasury and Finance are also represented at these meetings.

Key Pension Risk controls and governance include:

Annual review, challenge and proposal of the IAS19 market driven assumptions used for the calculation of the pension scheme liabilities used in Barclays disclosures.

Representation and input at key pension forums.

Input into the Group’s ICAAP for pension risk.

Input into the Group’s strategic planning and stress test exercises.

Provide independent oversight of the Pension risk profiles from the Bank’s perspective.

Coordinates response to regulatory initiatives, developments and proposals on pensions, which may include inputs from material overseas schemes.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    347


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of treasury and capital risk

Interest Rate Risk in the Banking Book

Overview

Banking book operations generate non-traded market risk, primarily through the mismatch between the duration of assets and liabilities and where interest rates on products reset at different dates. As per the Group’s policy to remain within the defined risk appetite, interest rate and FX risks residing in the banking books of the businesses are transferred to Treasury where they are centrally managed. Currently, these risks are transferred to Treasury via funding arrangements, interest rate or FX swaps. However, the businesses remain susceptible to market risk from seven key sources:

Repricing/Residual risk:the impact from the mismatch between the run-off of product balances and the associated interest rate hedges or from unhedged liquidity buffer investments;

Structural risk: the change to the net interest income on hedge replenishment due to adverse movements in interest rates, assuming that the balance sheet is held static;

Prepayment risk: the potential loss in value if actual prepayment or early withdrawal behaviour from customers deviates from the expected or contractually agreed behaviour, which may result in a hedge or funding adjustment at a cost to the bank. Exposures are typically considered (where appropriate) net of any applicable offsetting early repayment charges. This risk principally relates to early repayment of fixed rate loans or withdrawal from fixed rate savings products;

Recruitment risk: the potential loss in value if the actual completion or drawdown behaviour from customers deviates from the expected behaviour, which may result in a hedge or funding adjustment at a cost to the bank. This risk principally relates to the completion timing around the Bank’s fixed rate mortgage pipeline process;

Margin compression risk: the effect of internal or market forces on a bank’s net margin where, for example, in a low rate environment any fall in rates will further decrease interest income earned on the assets whereas funding cost cannot be reduced as it is already at the minimum level.
Lag risk: arises from the delay in re-pricing customer rates for certain variable/ managed rate products, following an underlying change to market interest rates. This is typically driven by either regulatory constraint around customer notification on pricing changes, processing time for the Group’s notification systems or contractual agreements within a product’s terms and conditions.

Asset swap spread risk:the spread between Libor and sovereign bond yields that arises from the management of the liquidity buffer investments and its associated hedges.

Furthermore, liquidity buffer investments are generally subject to Available for Sale (AFS) accounting rules, whereby changes in the value of these assets impact capital via Other Comprehensive Income, creating volatility in capital directly

Roles and responsibilities

The Non-traded Market Risk team provides risk management oversight and monitoring of all traded and non-traded market risk in Treasury and customer banking books, which specifically includes:

interest rate risk assessment in the customer banking books,

review and challenge the behavioural assumptions used in hedging and transfer pricing,

risk management of the liquidity buffer investments and funding activities,

oversight of balance sheet hedging,

review of residual risk in the hedge accounting solution and hedging of net investments,

proposes and monitors risk limits to manage traded and non-traded market risk within the agreed risk appetite.

Management of IRRBB

Barclays seeks to minimise interest rate risk and maintain it is within the agreed risk appetite, whilst actively managing the associated risk which could reduce the value of our investment portfolios.

Non-tradedliquidity buffer investments. Therefore, the primary control for IRRBB is calculating risk measurementmeasures described below and monitoring risk exposure vs. defined limits. Limits are set at an aggregate business level and then cascaded down.

Barclays uses a range of complementary technical approaches to measure non-traded market risk.IRRBB as described below. The risk is measured and controlled using both an income based metric (EaR) and value based metrics (EVE, EC and VaR).

388  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Summary of measures for non-traded market risk

Measure

  

Definition

  Annual earningsEarnings at risk

(EaR)
  

Impact on earningsA measure of the potential change in Net Interest Income (NII) due to an adverse interest rate movement over a parallel (upward or downward) movement in interest rates.

predefined time horizon.

Economic value of equity (EVE)

  

ChangeA measure of the potential change in the present value of the banking book of a parallel (upward or downward)expected future cash flows due to adverse interest rate shock.

movement, based on the existing balance sheet run-off profile.

Economic capital

(EC)
  

Economic Capital (EC) is held to protect against unexpectedA measure of the potential loss (in excess of expected loss) and calculatedfrom a severe stress scenario over a one-yearpredefined time horizon.

horizon at a particular confidence level.

Value at risk (VaR)

  

An estimateA measure of the potential loss of value arising from unfavourable market movements at a specific confidence level, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for a set period of time.

the predefined holding period.

Stress testing

  

Scenario based stress testing using a variety of economic parametersA measure to quantify the impact to profit and loss and the balance sheetassess risk exposures under various levels of stress.

severely adverse market scenarios.

The risk in each business is measured and controlled using both an income metric (Annual Earnings at Risk) and value metrics (Economic Value of Equity, Economic Capital and VaR).

Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)

AEaR measures the sensitivity of net interest income over the nexta one-year period. It is calculated as the difference between the estimated income using the expected base rate forecast and the lowest estimated income following a parallel increase or decrease in interest rates (200bps), subject to a minimum interest rate of 0%. 200bp shocks are consistent with industry best practice and supported by banking regulators.rates.

The main model assumptions are:

The balance sheet is kept at the current level, i.e. no growth is assumed

§The balance sheet is kept at the current level, i.e. no growth is assumed; and

Contractual positions are adjusted for an assumed behavioural profile, more closely matching the actual product life-cycle.

§Balances are adjusted for an assumed behavioural profile. This includes the treatment of fixed rate loans including mortgages.

AEaR is applied to the entire banking book, including the liquidity buffer and internal trades with the trading book to hedge against interest rate risk in the banking book exposures.investments. The metric provides a measure of how interest rate risk may impact the Group’s earnings, providing a simple comparison between risk and returns. The main disadvantage of the metric is its short-term focus, as it only measures the impact on a position in the first 12 months. In order to counter this, the Group has implemented additional economic value risk metrics.

See page 143 for a review

348    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of AEaR in 2015.treasury and capital risk

Economic Value of Equity (EVE)

EVE calculates the change in the present value of the non traded exposure forto a parallel upward and downward interest rate (200bps) shock. This shock is useful for drawing comparisons across portfolios, and is also a regulatory reporting requirement. Note that the EVE calculation measures sensitivity in terms of present value, while AEaR measures income sensitivity.sensitivity, hence complements each other.

The EVE measure is applied to the entire banking book, that is, the same coverage as AEaR, and covers the full life of transactions and hedges ensuringenforcing the risk over the whole life of positions areis considered. The main weaknesses of this model stem from its simplicity. In particular, itIt does not capture the impact of business growth or of management actions, and is based on the balance sheet as at the reporting date.run-off profile.

Economic Capital (EC, for recruitment, prepayment and residual risk)

EC consistent models, based on DVaRVaR methodologies, are used to measure unexpected losses to a 99.98% confidence interval over a one-year period. Within non-traded market risk, this measure aims to capture recruitment, risk, prepayment risk and residual riskrisks for banking book products (see definitions on page 377)348). EC metrics typically measure variations in economic value from specific sources of risk, for example, prepayment risk EC for fixed rate mortgages predicts the cost of hedging in order to reduce any mismatch exposure resulting from the impact of an interest rate shock onunexpected customer prepayment levels.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  389


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of market risk

EC is used in the active management of the banking book. Limits are set against EC metrics and breaches trigger mitigating actions to reduce exposure to appropriate levels. EC modelling is typically applied only to fixed rate products, andwith the majority of variable rate and administered rate portfolios are not subject to an EC measure.

Advantages of EC are that it can calculate unexpected losses to an appropriate degree of confidence given the nature of the risks, and that it covers sources of loss beyond the scope of other models (AEaR(one-year period for AEaR, only covers income changes over a one-year period; EVE only considers existing business and does not includebeing considered for EVE, etc). However, as with any dynamic customer behaviour assumptions). The main weaknesses come from necessary simplifying assumptions. In the case of models based on statistical confidence intervals,model, the choice of the statistical distribution may drive under-prediction of very extreme events, (i.e.i.e. the real distribution may be fat-tailed).fat-tailed. To mitigate this, the Group continues to improve its models using long time series of historical data to capture extreme effects.moves.

See pages 144 for a review of EC in 2015.

Value at Risk (VaR)

VaR is an estimate of the potential loss arising from unfavourable market movements, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for a set period. For internal market risk management purposes, a historical simulation methodology is used with a two-year equally weighted historical period, at thea 95% confidence level for banking book portfolios covered by the measure. This calculation is a present value sensitivity while AEaR is an income sensitivity.level.

Daily VaR is used to measure residual interest and foreign exchange risks within certain banking book portfolios.

Quarterly scaled VaR is used to measure risk in the Liquidity Buffer Investment Portfolio.liquidity buffer investments. The calculation uses a five-yeartwo-year historical period, a 95% confidence level and is scaled from daily to quarterly by an approved constant factor.

Stress testing

Stress losses are calculated for the liquidity buffer portfolio, but not subject to controlled limits.

All non-traded market risk positions are subject to the Group’s annual stress testing exercise, where scenarios based on adverse economic parameters are used to determine the potential impact of the positions on results and the balance sheet.

Non-traded market risk control

Non-traded market risk is controlled through the use of limits on many of the above risk measures. Limits are set at the total business level and then cascaded down. The total business level limits are owned by the BCROs, while the overall Group AEaR limit is agreed with Group Market Risk and approved by the FRC. Compliance with limits is monitored by the respective business market risk team with oversight provided by Group Market Risk.

Businesses manage their interest rate risk exposures by transferring this risk to Group Treasury, who then mitigate this risk using external markets if appropriate to keep the overall exposure within the agreed risk appetite. Group policy prevents non-trading businesses to run trading books; this is only permitted for the Investment Bank, Group Treasury, Barclays Non-Core and Africa Banking.

Non-traded market risk reporting

The Group Market Risk function produces a number of detailed market risk reports on a daily, weekly, fortnightly and monthly basis, for business and risk managers. A risk summary is presented at the Group Market Risk Committee and other market risk forums.

Management of Pension Risk

Pension risk control

The investment strategy of the UKRF is owned and defined by the Trustee who is independent to the bank. As such, pension risk is not governed by the conventional limit framework observed in traded and non-traded market risk. Instead, Group Market Risk have put in place a pension risk control framework to create consistency in the evaluation and monitoring of the risk in a coordinated way with other key risks across Barclays.

The risk and positions are reported monthly to the Market Risk Committee (MRC) and periodically to the Pensions Management Group (PMG), Pension Executive Board (PEB) and BRC.

390  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Group Market Risk is responsible for the ongoing challenge of the risk profile and to that aim will ensure:

§At least annual review of all pension funds shortfalls;

§Detailed review of liability driven data;

§A continuous and detailed interaction exists between Group Market Risk, the pension asset manager and other key stakeholders;

§To conduct, where necessary, any ad-hoc analyses to ensure a consistent view of the risk positions of the fund.

Pension risk measurements

The following metrics are used to describe pension risk:

§Asset/Liability mismatch under IAS19, Funding and Solvency Rules;

§Asset VaR and liability VaR;

§Total pension risk VaR i.e. which captures the hedging effect of the matching assets, and potential diversification between assets and liabilities.

The VaR used for pension risk is calibrated at a 95% confidence level, with a one year horizon to reflect the long-term nature of the risk. Whilst the asset portfolio is sensitive to the volatility to any asset class the pension asset manager invests in, the liabilities are mainly exposed to interest rates and corporate credit spreads which are the main components of the discount rate; and inflation which drives the pension increase assumptions.

Group Market Risk also conduct regulatory and internal stress tests on material pension schemes to assess how these react to potential shock scenarios, the results of which form part of Barclays submission for the EU and Bank of England Stress Tests.

See page 146 for a review of pension risk in 2015.

Management of insurance risk

Insurance risk measurement

Risk measurement is largely based on best practice actuarial methodologies for the measurement of assets and liabilities, capital quantification and the monitoring of exposures against predetermined limits, in compliance with regulatory standards relevant to their application. The methodology can be deterministic or stochastic (both closed-form and simulation), depending on the application. Capital adequacy calculations are calculated at a 99.5% confidence level for regulatory purposes, and a higher confidence level for economic capital purposes. Absa Life extrapolates the underwriting Capital Adequacy Requirement (CAR) by assuming that life underwriting risk follows an appropriate statistical distribution.

The estimation of insurance technical provisions requires a number of assumptions. The appropriateness of the actuarial assumptions are reviewed by the independent external actuaries. Furthermore, the internal risk function acts as second line of defence, and provides oversight, review and challenge to the actuarial functions. Assumptions are made around demographic factors (e.g. mortality, morbidity), statistical factors (e.g. claims incidence, reporting and development patterns), and economic factors (e.g. yield curves, market returns). Stress testing can also be used to isolate and examine the impact of specific, or combinations of, variables.

Insurance risk control

Insurance risk is managed within Barclays Africa Group Limited. From an economic capital perspective, four significant categories of insurance risk and their governance procedures are:

§short-term insurance underwriting risk: monitored on a quarterly basis by the Underwriting Committee to ensure the risk taken is in line with underwriting guidelines and appropriately priced and reserved for. Risk governance is monitored by the Control Review Committee (CRC), the Actuarial Review Committee (ARC) and Key Risk reporting

§life insurance underwriting risk: monitored on a quarterly basis by the Underwriting Committee to ensure the risk taken is in line with underwriting guidelines and appropriately priced and reserved for. Risk governance is monitored by the CRC, the ARC and Key Risk reporting

§life insurance mismatch risk: monitored every other month by the entity’s Capital and Investment Risk Committee. A quarterly review is conducted by the Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance (WIMI) Financial Risk Committee, and an annual review by the ARC

§life and short-term insurance investment risk: monitored by the entity Capital and Investment Risk Committee on at least a quarterly basis.

Short-term insurance underwriting activities are undertaken by Absa Insurance Company and Absa idirect. Life insurance underwriting activities are undertaken by Absa Life, Barclays Life Botswana, Barclays Life Zambia and Woolworths Financial Services (through an Absa Life cell captive). Global Alliance Mozambique underwrites both life and short-term insurance business.

Short-term insurance underwriting risk, life insurance underwriting risk, life insurance mismatch risk and investment risks are core to the business of the insurance entities. The successful management of these risks ultimately impacts the success of the entities. The same risk management frameworks and governance structures that enabled the effective management of risks for the South African entities are implemented and embedded in any new entities.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  391    349


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

    

    

 

 

LOGO

 

ManagementThe sources of operational risk

LOGO  

The sources of operational risks, and how those risks are managed, are detailed in this section.

 

§

The types of risks that are classified as operational risks are described on page 394.
pages 351 and 352.

 

§

Governance, management and measurement techniques are covered on pages 394 to 396.352 and 353.

LOGO

350    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

    

    

 

Operational risk management overview

Operational risk

The risk of loss to the firm from inadequate or failed processes, systems, human factors or due to external events (for example, fraud) where the root cause is not due to credit or market risks.

Any instance where there is a potential or actual impact to the Group resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people, systems, or from an external event. The impacts to the Group can be financial, including losses or an unexpected financial gain, as well as non-financial such as customer detriment, reputational or regulatory consequences.

Overview

The management of operational risk has twothree key objectives:

 

§ minimiseDeliver an operational risk capability owned and used by business leaders which is pragmatic, relevant, and enables business leaders to make sound risk decisions over the impact of losses suffered, both in the normal course of business (small losses) and from extreme events (large losses)long term.

 

§ improveProvide the frameworks, policies and tools to enable management to meet their risk management responsibilities while the Second line of defence provides robust, independent, and effective oversight and challenge.

Deliver a consistent and aggregated measurement of operational risk that will provide clear and relevant insights, so that the right management ofactions can be taken to keep the Groupoperational risk profile consistent with the Group’s strategy, the stated risk appetite, the client franchise, and strengthen its brand and external reputation.other stakeholder needs.

The Group is committed to the management and measurement of operational risk and was granted a waiver by the FSA (now the PRA) to operate an Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA) for operational risk, which commenced in January 2008. The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using AMA (93%(94% of capital requirements), however, in specific areasexcept for small parts of the organisation acquired since the original permission (6% of capital requirements) using the Basic Indicator Approach (7%) is applied.(BIA). The Group works to

benchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the further development of advanced techniques.banks.

The Group is committed to operating within a strong system of internal controlcontrols that enables business to be transacted and risk taken without exposing the Group to unacceptable potential losses or reputational damage.damages. The Group has an overarching frameworkERMF that sets out the approach to internal governance. This guideThe ERMF establishes the mechanisms and processes by which the Board directs the organisation, through setting the tone and expectations from the top, delegating authority and monitoring compliance.

Organisation and Structurestructure

LOGO

A key component is the Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF), the purposeOperational risk comprises a number of which is to identify and set minimum requirements in respect of the mainspecific risks to achieving the Group’s strategic objectives and to provide reasonable assurance that internal controls are effective. The ERMF also defines the characteristics of an effective Control Environment, against which the businesses are assessed. Management, in all three lines of defence, are required to manage their businesses and functions in accordance with the characteristics set out below:defined as follow:

 

§ thereData Management and Information Risk:The risk that Barclays information is a strong tone from the topnot captured, retained, used or protected in accordance with its value and culture supporting the management of controlslegal and regulatory requirements.

Financial Reporting Risk:The risk of a material misstatement or omission within the Group’s external financial, regulatory reporting or internal management reporting.

Fraud Risk:The risk of financial loss when an internal or external party acts dishonestly with the intent to obtain an undue benefit, cause a loss to, or to expose either the Group or its customers and clients to a risk of loss.

Payments Process Risk:The risk of payments being processed inaccurately, with delays, without appropriate authentication and authorisation.

People Risk:The risk that Barclays is exposed to by virtue of being an employer (excluding Health and Safety related risk).

Premises and Security Risk:The risk of interruption to Barclays’ business due to the unavailability of premises and infrastructure as a result of intentional or accidental damage to premises and moveable assets, physical security breaches and safety and security incidents.

Supplier Risk:The risk that is introduced to the firm or entity as a consequence of obtaining services or goods from another legal entity as a result of inadequate selection, inadequate exit and supplier management, resulting in operational, financial, or reputational risk to the bank, failure of services and / or negative customer impact.

LOGO

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  393    351


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

    

    

 

§there is clear individual accountability and responsibility for the management of the control environment, starting at senior levels, and incorporated into performance objectives

§key customer processes and other activities are clearly identified and understood

§the material risks arising from these are identified and assessed

§a risk appetite is established for the variable outcomes in these risks

§a set of comprehensive and sustainable key controls is established and operated to remain within the risk appetite

§any issues, events outside of risk appetite including control failures are identified and escalated

§programmes for the remediation of control gaps or execution failures are established and implemented

§a feedback loop including a “Lessons Learnt” process is used to inform and improve control performance

§assurance is provided by 1st line and 2nd lines of defence on the reliability of control solutions and remediation activities for their own control areas.

The key elements of the Group’s system of internal control, which is aligned to the recommendations of The Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission, Internal Control – Integrated Framework (COSO), are set out in the risk control frameworks relating to each of the Group’s Key Risks and in the Group Operational Risk Framework.

Operational Risk comprises a number of specific Key Risks defined as follows:

§ external supplierTax Risk:: inadequate selection and ongoing managementThe risk of external suppliersunexpected tax cost in relation to any tax for which Barclays is liable, or of reputational damage on tax matters with key stakeholders such as tax authorities, regulators, shareholders or the public. Tax cost includes tax, interest or penalties levied by a taxing authority.

 

§ financial crimeTechnology Risk::The risk that comes about due to dependency on technological solutions and is defined as failure to comply with anti money laundering , anti-briberydevelop, deploy and anti-corruptionmaintain technology solutions that are stable, reliable and sanctions policies. In early January 2016,deliver on the oversight of Financial Crime was transferred to Group Compliancebusiness need.

 

§ financial reportingTransaction Operations Risk:: reporting mis-statement or omission within external financial or regulatory reporting

§fraud: dishonest behaviour with the intent to make a gain or cause a loss to others

§information: inadequate protection of the Group’s information in accordance with its value and sensitivity

§legal: failure to identify and manage legal risks

§payments process: failure in operation of payments processes

§people: inadequate people capabilities, and/or performance/reward structures, and/or inappropriate behaviours

§premises and security: unavailability of premises (to meet business demand) and/or safe working environments, and inadequate protection of physical assets, employees and customers against external threats

§taxation: failure to comply with tax laws and practice which could lead to financial penalties, additional tax charges or reputational damage

§technology (including CyberSecurity): failure to develop and deploy secure, stable and reliable technology solutions which includesThe risk of lossCustomer/Client or Bank detriment due to the Group’s business and customers as a result of actions committed unintentional error and/or facilitated through the use of networked information systems

§transaction operations: failure in the managementend-to-end process of critical transaction processes.initiation, processing and fulfilment of an interaction between a Customer/Client and the Bank with an underlying financial instrument (e.g. mortgage, derivative product, trade product etc.) in consideration.

In order to ensure complete coverage of the potential adverse impacts on the Group arising from operational risk, the operational risk taxonomy extends beyond the operational Key Risks listed above to cover areas included within conduct risk. For more information on Conduct Risk please see pages 406 to 409.

These risks may result in financial and/or non-financial impacts including legal/regulatory breaches or reputational damage.damages.

Operational The Group also recognises that there are certain threats/risk drivers that are more thematic and have the potential to impact the bank’s strategic objectives. These are Enterprise Risk Themes which require an overarching and integrated management approach. These include:

Cyber: The potential loss or detriment to Barclays caused by individuals or groups (threat actors) with the capabilities and intention to cause harm or to profit from attacks committed via network information systems against us, our suppliers, or customers/clients.

Data:The Data Risk theme is aligned to the Data Strategy of the firm and encompasses the Data risks to the firm from multiple Risk Categories including Data Management, Data Architecture, Data Security & Protection, Data Resilience, Data Retention and Data Privacy

Execution:The risk of failing to deliver and implement the agreed initiatives, priorities and business outcomes required to deliver the Group Strategy within agreed timelines.

Resilience:Lack of resilience may threaten an organisation’s ability to survive and prosper in its commercial endeavours in the presence of adverse events, shocks and chronic or incremental changes.

Roles and responsibilities

The prime responsibility for the management of operational risk and the compliance with control requirements rests with the business and functional units where the risk arises. The operational risk profile and control environment is reviewed by business management through specific meetings which cover governance, risk and control. Businesses are required to report their operational risks on both a regular and an event-driven basis. The reports include a profile of the material risks that may threaten the achievement of their objectives and the effectiveness of key controls, material control issues, operational risk events and a review of scenarios.

394  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

The Group Head of Operational Risk as Principal Risk Officer, is responsible for establishing, owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Operational Risk Management Framework and for overseeing the portfolio of operational risk across the Group.

Operational risk managementRisk Management (ORM) acts in a second line of defence capacity, and is responsible for defining and overseeing the implementation of the framework and monitoring Barclays operational risk events,profile. ORM alerts management when risk exposureslevels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite in order to drive timely decision making and material control issues.actions by the first line of defence. Through attendance at Business Unit Governance, Risk and ControlsCommittee meetings, it providesORM provide specific risk input into the issues highlighted and the overall risk profile of the business. Operational risk issues escalated from these meetings are considered by the Principal Risk Officer through the second line of defence review meetings, which also consider material control issues and their effective remediation.meetings. Depending on their nature, the outputs of these meetings are presented to the BRC or the BAC.

Specific reports are prepared by businesses, Key Risk Officers and Group Operational Risk on a regular basis for BRC and BAC.

Operational risk framework

The Operational Risk Strategy and Framework comprises a number of elements which allow the Group to manage and measure its operational risk profile and to calculate the amount of operational risk capital that the Group needs to hold to absorb potential losses. The minimum, mandatory requirements for each of these elements are set out in the group operational risk frameworkOperational Risk Framework and supporting standards.policies. This framework is implemented across the Group:Group with all businesses required to implement and operate an Operational Risk Framework that meets, as a minimum, the requirements detailed in the operational risk policies.

§vertically, through the organisational structure with all businesses required to implement and operate an operational risk framework that meets, as a minimum, the requirements detailed in these operational risk policies

§horizontally, with the Group Key Risk officers required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each operational risk framework element.

The Operational Risk frameworkFramework is a key component of the ERMF and has been designed to improve risk management and meet a number of external governance requirements including the Basel Capital Accord, the Capital Requirements Directive and Turnbull guidance as an evaluation framework for the purposes of Section 404(a) of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act. It also supports the Sarbanes-Oxley requirements.

The operational risk strategy and frameworkOperational Risk Framework includes the following elements:

Risk and Control Self-Assessmentscontrol self-assessments

The Group identifies and assesses all material risks within each business and evaluates the key controls in place to mitigate those risks. Managers in the businesses use self-assessment techniques to identify risks, evaluate the effectiveness of key controls in place and assess whether the risks are being effectively managed within business risk appetite.managed. The businesses are then able to make decisions on what action, if any, is required to reduce the level of risk to the Group. These risk assessments are monitored on a regular basis to ensuredetermine that each business continually understands the risks it faces.

Risk events

An operational risk event is any circumstance where, through the lack or failure of a control, the Group has actually, or could have, made a loss. The definition includes situations in which the Group could have made a loss, but in fact made a gain, as well as incidents resulting in reputational damage or regulatory impact only.

A standard threshold is used across the Group for reporting risk events and part of the analysis includes the identification of improvements to processes or controls, to reduce the recurrence and/or magnitude of risk events. For significant events, both financial and non-financial, this analysis includes the completion of a formal lessons learnt.learnt report.

The Group also maintains a record of external risk events which are publicly available and is a member of the Operational RiskDataRiskdata eXchange (ORX), a not-for-profit association of international banks formed to share anonymous loss data information. This external loss information is used to support and inform risk identification, assessment and measurement.

 

352    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  395


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of operational risk

    

    

 

Operational risk appetite and tolerance

The Group’s approach to determining its operational risk appetite combines both quantitative measures and qualitative judgement, in order to best reflect the nature of non-financial risks.

The monitoring and tracking of operational risk measures is supplemented with qualitative review and discussion at senior management executive committees on the actions being taken to improve controls and reduce risk to an acceptable residual level.

Operational risk appetite is aligned to the Group’s Risk Appetite Framework. The BRC considers, and recommends to the Board for approval, the Group’s risk appetite statement for operational risk based on performance in the current year and the projections for financial volatility the following year.

Key Risk appetite statements are agreed with the Principal Risk Officer, utilising the same approach, and are contained within the respective Key Risk Frameworks.

Key indicators

Key indicators (KIs) are metrics which allow the Group to monitor its operational risk profile. KIs include measurable thresholds that reflect the risk appetite of the business and are monitored to alert management when risk levels exceed acceptable ranges or risk appetite levels and drive timely decision making and actions.

Key Risk scenarios

Key riskRisk scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each Key Riskrisk in each business and function, and include an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios. The Key Riskrisk scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach calculation of regulatory and economic capital requirements (see following section on operational risk measurement). The assessment considers analysis of internal and external loss experience, Key Riskkey risk indicators, risk and control self-assessments and other risk information. The businesses and functions analyse potential extreme scenarios, considering the:

 

§ circumstances and contributing factors that could lead to an extreme event

 

§ potential financial and non-financial impacts (for example reputational damage)

 

§ controls that seek to limit the likelihood of such an event occurring, and the mitigating actions that would be taken if the event were to occur (for example crisis management procedures, business continuity or disaster recovery plans).

Management may then conclude whether the potential risk is acceptable (within appetite) or whether changes in risk management control or business strategy are required.

The key risk scenarios are regularly re-assessed, taking into account trends in risk factors such as mis-selling, conduct and financial crime risks.

Reporting

The ongoing monitoring and reporting of operational risk is a key component of the Operational Risk Framework. Reports and management information are used by the operational riskOperational Risk function and by business management to understand, monitor, manage and control operational risks and losses.

The operational risk profile is reviewed by senior management at the Businesses Risk Committee meetings as well as the second line of defence Operational Risk Review Forum as well asand BRC, BAC and the Board.

Operational risk measurement

The Group assesses its operational riskOperational Risk Capital requirements using the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA). The majority of the Group calculates regulatory capital requirements using an Advanced Measurement Approach. The approach involves estimating the potential rangeAMA (94% of losses that could be incurred in a year from operational risk events, using statistical distributions. Regulatory capital requirements are set to cover 99.9%requirements), except for small parts of the estimated losses. The Group also assesses its economicorganisation acquired since the original permission (6% of capital requirements to cover 99.98% of the estimated losses that exceed the typical losses (diversified across all risk classes).

The potential frequency and severity of losses is estimated for each Key Risk (within the Operational Risk and Conduct risk categories) across the Group’s businesses and functions. The potential range of individual loss severities is represented by a statistical distribution, estimated from the average loss size and three extreme scenarios (from Risk Assessments), as well as loss data from the Operational Riskdata eXchange (ORX).

The capital calculation also takes into account the possibility of dependences between operational risk losses occurring in a year (between businesses and functions and between risks).

In certain joint ventures and associates, the Group usesrequirements) using the Basic Indicator Approach (BIA). The Group works to determinebenchmark its internal operational risk management and measurement practices with peer banks and to drive the capital requirements: some Africa Retail Banking, including Barclays Bank Mozambique and National Bankfurther development of Commerce (Tanzania); the business activities acquired from Lehman Brothers; and the portfolios of assets purchased from Woolworths Financial Services in South Africa, Standard Life Bank, ING Direct, MBNA Corporate Cards, Upromise, RCI, Egg Cards, EdCon, Sallie Mae, Ameriprice, Hawaiian Airlines and US Airways.advanced techniques.

Insurance

As part of its risk management approach, the Group also uses insurance to mitigate the impact of some operational risks.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    353


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of model risk

The types of model risk, and how they are managed, are detailed in this section

The types of risks that are classified as model risk are described on page 175.

Governance, management and measurement techniques are covered on page 175.

LOGO

 

396  |  354    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


LOGO

Management of funding risk

LOGO

This section provides an analysis of the management of liquidity and capital risk.

§Liquidity risk, with a focus on how it is managed to ensure that resources are adequate at all times including under stress, is discussed on pages 398 to 401

§Capital risk, including how the risk of insufficient capital and leverage ratios is managed, is discussed on pages 402 to 405.


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

Funding Risk

The ability of the Group to achieve its business plans may be adversely impacted if it does not effectively manage its capital (including leverage) and liquidity ratios. Group Treasury manage Funding Risk on a day-to-day basis with the Treasury Committee acting as the key governance forum.

LOGO

Capital and Liquidity Risks are managed by two separate areas; these are covered below.

Liquidity Risk

Liquidity risk is the risk that a firm, although solvent, either does not have sufficient financial resources available to enable it to meet its obligations as they fall due, or can secure such resources only at excessive cost. This also results in a firm’s inability to meet regulatory liquidity requirements. This risk is inherent in all banking operations and can be affected by a range of Group-specific and market-wide events.

The Board has formally recognised a series of risks that are continuously present in Barclays and materially impact the achievement of Barclays objectives one of which is Funding risk. Liquidity risk is recognised as a Key risk within Funding risk. The efficient management of liquidity is essential to the Group in retaining the confidence of the financial markets and ensuring that the business is sustainable. Liquidity risk is managed through the Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework) which is designed to meet the following objectives:

§To maintain liquidity resources that are sufficient in amount and quality and a funding profile that is appropriate to meet the liquidity risk appetite as expressed by the Board;

§To maintain market confidence in the Group’s name;

This is achieved via a combination of policy formation, review and governance, analysis, stress testing, limit setting and monitoring. Together, these meet internal and regulatory requirements.

Governance and organisation

Barclays Treasury operates a centralised governance control process that covers all of the Group’s liquidity risk management activities. As per Enterprise Risk Management Framework the Key Risk Officer (KRO) approves the Key Risk Control Framework for Liquidity Risk (‘Key Risk Control Framework’) under which the treasury function operates. The KRO is in the Risk function. The Key Risk Control Framework describes liquidity policies and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA) and is subject to annual review.

398  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of model risk

    

    

Model risk

The risk of the potential adverse consequences from financial assessments or decisions based on incorrect or misused model outputs and reports.

 

 

The Board sets

Overview

Barclays uses models to support a broad range of activities, including informing business decisions and strategies, measuring and limiting risk, valuing exposures, conducting stress testing, assessing capital adequacy, managing client assets, and meeting reporting requirements.

Since models are imperfect and incomplete representations of reality, they may be subject to errors affecting the Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA), over Group stress tests,accuracy of their output. Model errors can result in inappropriate business decisions being made, financial loss, regulatory risk, reputational risk and/or inadequate capital reporting. Models may also be misused, for instance applied to products that they were not intended for, or not adjusted, where fundamental changes to their environment would justify re-evaluating their core assumptions. Errors and misuse are the primary sources of model risk.

Robust model risk management is crucial to assessing and managing model risk within a defined risk appetite. Strong model risk culture, appropriate technology environment, and adequate focus on understanding and resolving model limitations are crucial components.

Organisation and structure

Barclays allocates substantial resources to identify and record models and their usage, document and monitor the performance of models, validate models and adequately address model limitations. Barclays manages model risk as an enterprise level of risk the Group choosessimilar to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations. The approved LRA is implemented and managed by the Treasury Committee through the Key Risk Control Framework.

Liquidity risk frameworkother Principal Risks.

Barclays has a comprehensive Keydedicated Model Risk Control FrameworkManagement (MRM) function that consists of two main units: the Independent Validation Unit (IVU), responsible for managingmodel validation and

approval, and Model Governance and Controls (MGC), covering model risk governance, controls and reporting, including ownership of model risk policy and the Group’s liquidity risk. The Key Risk Control Framework is designed to deliver the appropriate term and structure of funding consistent with the Liquidity Risk Appetite set by the Board.model inventory.

The Key Risk Control Framework incorporates a rangemodel risk management framework consists of ongoing businessthe model risk policy and standards. The policy prescribes group-wide, end-to-end requirements for the identification, measurement and management tools to monitor, limitof model risk, covering model documentation, development, implementation, monitoring, annual review, independent validation and approval, change and reporting processes. The policy is supported by global standards covering model inventory, documentation, validation, complexity and materiality, testing and monitoring, overlays, risk appetite, as well as vendor models and stress testtesting challenger models.

Barclays is continuously enhancing model risk management. The function reports to the Group’s balance sheetGroup CRO and contingent liabilities andoperates a Contingency Funding Plan. Limit setting and transfer pricing are tools that are designed to control the levelglobal framework. Implementation of liquidity risk taken and drive the appropriate mix of funds, which together reduce the likelihood thatbest practice standards is a liquidity stress event could lead to an inability to meet the Group’s obligations as they fall due. The stress tests assess potential contractual and contingent stress outflows under a range of scenarios, which are then used to determine the sizecentral objective of the liquidity pool that is immediately availableGroup. Model risk reporting flows to meet anticipated outflows, if a stress occurred.senior management as depicted below:

The Group maintains a Contingency Funding Plan which details how liquidity stress events of varying severity would be managed. Since the precise nature of any stress event cannot be known in advance, the plans are designed to be flexible to the natureRoles and severity of the stress event and provide a menu of options that could be used as appropriate at the time. Barclays also maintains Recovery Plans which consider actions to generate additional liquidity in order to facilitate recovery in a severe stress.

LOGO

Ongoing business management

Risk Appetite and Planning

Under the Key Risk Control Framework, Barclays has established a Liquidity Risk Appetite (LRA), over Group stress tests, being the level of liquidity risk the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.responsibilities

The key expression of the liquiditymodel risk is through stress test. It is measured with reference to the liquidity pool compared to anticipated stressed net contractual and contingent outflows for each of five stress scenarios.

The LRA for internal stress tests is approved by the Board. The LRA is reviewed on a continuous basis and is subject to formal review at least annually as part of the Individual Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP).management activities include:

 

Correctly identifying models across all relevant areas of the firm, and recording models in the Group Models Database (GMD), the Group-wide model inventory. The heads of the relevant model ownership areas (typically, the Business Chief Risk Officers, Business Chief Executive Officers, the Treasurer, the Chief Financial Officer, etc.) annually attest to the completeness and accuracy of the model inventory. MGC undertakes regular conformance reviews on the model inventory.

Statement of Liquidity Risk Appetite:

Enforcing that every model has a model owner who is accountable for the model. The Board has approvedmodel owner must sign off models prior to submission to IVU for validation. The model owner works with the relevant technical teams (model developers, implementation, monitoring, data services, regulatory) to maintain that the Group will maintain an amount of available liquidity resourcesmodel presented to meet modelledIVU is and prescribed regulatory liquidity stress outflows over a period of time (minimum buffer duration):

remains fit for purpose.

 

       30 days in a Barclays specific stress

      90 days in a market wide stress

 Overseeing that every model is subject to validation and approval by IVU, prior to being implemented and on a continual basis. While all models are reviewed and re-approved for continued use each year, the validation frequency and the level of review and challenge applied by IVU is tailored to the materiality and complexity of each model. Validation includes a review of the model assumptions, conceptual soundness, data, design, performance testing, compliance with external requirements if applicable, as well as any limitations, proposed remediation and overlays with supporting rationale. Material model changes are subject to prioritised validation and approval.

       30 days in a combined stress

 

      LCR 30 days minimum ratio 100% (Pillar 1 basis)

 Defining model risk appetite in terms of risk tolerance, and qualitative metrics which are used to track and report model risk.

Maintaining specific standards that cover model risk management activities relating to stress testing challenger models, model overlays, vendor models, and model complexity

LOGO

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  399    355


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

The stress outflows are used to determine the size of the Group Liquidity Pool, which represents those resources immediately available to meet outflows in a stress. In addition to the liquidity pool, the Key Risk Control Framework provides for other management actions, including generating liquidity from other liquid assets on the Group’s balance sheet in order to meet additional stress outflows, or to preserve or restore the Liquidity Pool in the event of a liquidity stress.

Liquidity Limits

Barclays manages limits on a variety of on and off-balance sheet exposures, a sample of which is shown in the table below. These limits serve to control the overall extent and composition of liquidity risk taken by managing exposure to the cash outflows.

LOGO

Internal Pricing and Incentives

Barclays actively manages the composition and duration of the balance sheet and of contingent liabilities through the transfer of liquidity premium directly to business units. Liquidity premiums are charged and credited to businesses according to the behavioural life of assets and liabilities and contingent liquidity risk under stress. These transfer pricing mechanisms are designed to ensure that liquidity risk is reflected in product pricing and performance measurement, thereby ensuring that the Liquidity Framework is integrated into business level decision making to drive the appropriate mix of sources and uses of funds.

Early Warning Indicators

Barclays monitors a range of market indicators for early signs of liquidity risk either in the market or specific to Barclays, a sample of which are shown in the table below. These are designed to immediately identify the emergence of increased liquidity risk to maximise the time available to execute appropriate mitigating actions. Early Warning Indicators are used as part of the assessment of whether to invoke the Group’s Contingency Funding Plan, which provides a framework for how the liquidity stress would be managed.

LOGO

400  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Contingency Funding Plan

Barclays maintains a Contingency Funding Plan (CFP), which is designed to provide a framework where a liquidity stress could be effectively managed. The CFP is proportionate to the nature, scale and complexity of the business and is tested to ensure that it is operationally robust. The CFP details the circumstances in which the plan could be invoked, including as a result of adverse movements in Liquidity Early Warning Indicators. As part of the plan the Barclays Treasurer has established a Liquidity Management Committee (LMC.) On invocation of the CFP by the Executive Committee (ExCo), the LMC would meet to identify the likely impact of the event on the Group and determine the response, which would be proportionate to the nature and severity of the stress.

The CFP provides a communication plan and includes management actions to respond to liquidity stresses of varying severity. This could include monetising the liquidity pool, slowing the extension of credit, increasing the tenor of funding and securitising or selling assets.

Recovery and Resolution Planning (RRP)

In accordance with the requirements of the PRA Rulebook: Recovery and Resolution, Barclays has developed a Group Recovery Plan. The key objectives are to provide the Group with a range of options to ensure the viability of the firm in a stress, set consistent early warning indicators to identify when the Recovery Plan should be invoked and to enable the Group to be adequately prepared to respond to stressed conditions.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  401


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

Capital Risk

Overview

      Capital risk

      Capital risk is the risk that the Group has insufficient capital resources to:

§Meet minimum regulatory requirements in the UK and in other jurisdictions such as the United States and South Africa where regulated activities are undertaken. The Group’s authority to operate as a bank is dependent upon the maintenance of adequate capital resources at each level where prudential capital requirements are applied;
§Support its credit rating. A weaker credit rating would increase the Group’s cost of funds; and
§Support its growth and strategic options.

Organisation and structure

Capital Management is integral to the Group’s approach to financial stability and sustainability management and is therefore embedded in the way businesses and legal entities operate. Capital demand and supply is actively managed on a centralised basis, at a business level, at a local entity level and on a regional basis taking into account the regulatory, economic and commercial environment in which Barclays operates.

Roles and responsibilities

The Group’s Capital Management strategy is driven by the strategic aims of the Group and the Risk Appetite set by the Board. The Group’s objectives are achieved through well embedded capital management practices:

Capital planning

Capital forecasts are managed on a top-down and bottom-up basis through both short term (one year) and medium term (three to five years) financial planning cycles. Barclays’ capital plans are developed with the objective of maintaining capital that is adequate in quantity and quality to support the Group’s risk profile, regulatory and business needs. As a result, the Group holds a diversified capital base that provides strong loss absorbing capacity and optimised returns.

Barclays’ capital plans are continually monitored against relevant internal target capital ratios to ensure they remain appropriate, and that risks to the plan, including possible future regulatory changes, are considered.

Local management ensures compliance with an entity’s minimum regulatory capital requirements by reporting to local Asset and Liability Committees with oversight by the Group’s Treasury Committee, as required.

402  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Regulatory requirements

Capital planning is set in consideration of minimum regulatory requirements in all jurisdictions in which the Group operates. Regulatory capital requirements are determined by the PRA.

Under these regulatory frameworks, capital requirements are set in consideration of the level of risk that the firm is exposed to which is measured through both risk weighted assets (RWAs) and leverage.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  403


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of funding risk

Capital held to support the level of risk identified is set in consideration of minimum ratio requirements and internal buffers.

Target ratios

The Group’s capital plan is set in consideration of our risk profile, business and regulatory requirements as determined by the PRA. The Group expects to meet the minimum requirements for leverage and capital ratios including the CET1, AT1, T2 and MREL/TLAC minima, both during the transition period and upon full implementation and also hold an internal buffer sized according to the firm’s assessment of various risks including uncontrollable market factors.

Regulatory reform

Further changes to capital requirements may occur due to continued regulatory focus on the risk weighting of assets, including Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) proposals on fundamental review of the trading book, revisions to standardised rules for credit risk, counterparty credit risk, CVA volatility risk and operational risk as well as the application of RWA floor based on standardised approach to limit the use internal models in certain areas.

Additional capital requirements may also arise from other regulatory reforms, including UK, EU and US proposals on bank structural reform and current European Banking Authority (EBA) proposals for ‘Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL) under the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD). Included within these reforms are the Bank of England proposals on MREL requirements for UK banks which were published in December 2015. We expect these requirements to be finalised and communicated to banks during the course of 2016.

However, many of the proposals are still subject to finalisation and implementation and may have a different effect when in final form, the impact of these proposals is still being assessed. For further information see Funding Risk in Material Risks Review and Regulatory Developments in the section on Supervision and Regulation.

Governance

The Group and legal entity capital plans are underpinned by the Capital Risk Framework, which includes capital management policies and practices approved by the Principal Risk Officer. These plans are implemented consistently in order to deliver on the Group objectives.

The Board approves the Group capital plan, stress tests and recovery plan. The Treasury Committee manages compliance with the Group’s capital management objectives. The Committee reviews actual and forecast capital demand and resources on a bi-monthly basis. The Board Risk Committee annually reviews risk appetite and then analyses the impacts of stress scenarios on the Group capital forecast in order to understand and manage the Group’s projected capital adequacy.

Monitoring and managing capital

Capital is monitored and managed on an ongoing basis through;

Stress testing:Internal group-wide stress testing is undertaken to quantify and understand the impact of sensitivities on the capital plan and capital ratios arising from stressed macroeconomic conditions. Actual recent economic, market and regulatory scenarios are used to inform the assumptions of stress tests and assess the effectiveness of mitigation strategies.

The Group also undertakes stress tests prescribed by the BoE and EBA. Legal entities undertake stress tests prescribed by their local regulators. These stress tests inform decisions on the size and quality of capital buffer required and the results are incorporated into the Group capital plan to ensure adequacy of capital under normal and severe, but plausible stressed conditions.

Risk mitigation: As part of the stress testing process actions are identified that should be taken to mitigate the risks that could arise in the event of material adverse changes in the current economic and business outlook.

As an additional layer of protection, the Barclays Recovery Plan defines the actions and implementation strategies available for the Group to increase or preserve capital resources in the event that stress events are more extreme than anticipated.

404  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of fundingconduct risk

    

    

 

Senior Management awareness and transparency:Barclays Treasury works closely with Risk, businesses and legal entities to support a proactive approach to identifying sources of capital ratio volatility which are considered in the Group’s capital plan. Capital risks against firm-specific and macroeconomic early warning indicators are monitored and reported to Treasury Committee, associated with clear escalation channels to senior management.

Capital management information is readily available at all times to support the Executive Management’s strategic and day-to-day business decision making, as may be required.

The Group submits its Board approved ICAAP document to the PRA on an annual basis, which forms the basis of the Individual Capital Guidance (ICG) set by the PRA.

Capital allocation: Capital allocations are approved by the Group Executive committee and monitored by the Treasury Committee, taking into consideration the risk appetite, growth and strategic aims of the Group. Regulated legal entities are, at a minimum, allocated adequate capital to meet their current and forecast regulatory and business requirements.

Transferability of capital: The Group’s policy is for surplus capital held in Group entities to be repatriated to BB PLC in the form of dividends and/or capital repatriation, subject to local regulatory requirements, exchange controls and tax implications. This approach provides optimal flexibility on the re-deployment of capital across legal entities. The Group is not aware of any material impediments to the prompt transfer of capital resources, in line with the above policy, or repayment of intra-group liabilities when due.

Foreign exchange risk:The Group has capital resources and risk weighted assets denominated in foreign currencies. Changes in foreign exchange rates result in changes in the Sterling equivalent value of foreign currency denominated capital resources and RWAs. As a result, the Group’s regulatory capital ratios are sensitive to foreign currency movements.

The Group’s capital ratio management strategy is to minimise the volatility of the capital ratios caused by foreign exchange rate movements. To achieve this, the Group aims to maintain the ratio of foreign currency CET 1, Tier 1 and Total capital resources to foreign currency RWAs the same as the Group’s consolidated capital ratios.

The Group’s investments in foreign currency subsidiaries and branches, to the extent that they are not hedged for foreign exchange movements, translate into GBP upon consolidation creating CET1 capital resources sensitive to foreign currency movements. Changes in the GBP value of the investments due to foreign currency movements are captured in the currency translation reserve, resulting in a movement in CET1 capital.

To create foreign currency Tier 1 and Total Capital resources additional to the CET1 capital resources, the Group issues, where possible, debt capital in non-Sterling currencies. This is primarily achieved by the issuance of debt capital from Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC in USD and EUR, but can also be achieved by subsidiaries issuing capital in local currencies, such as Barclays Africa Group Limited in South Africa.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  405


 

LOGO

Management of
conduct risk
(including
reputation risk)
LOGO  

This section provides an analysis of the management of conduct risk (including reputation risk).risk.

 

 § Conduct risk is the risk that detriment is caused to our customers, clients, counterparties or the Group and its employees because of inappropriate judgement in the execution of our business activities (see pages 407 and 408)page 357).

 

LOGO

§356    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Barclays brand arising from association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical (see pages 408 and 409)


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk

    

    

 

Conduct risk

The risk thatof detriment is caused to customers, clients, counterpartiesmarket integrity, competition or Barclays from the Group becauseinappropriate supply of inappropriate judgement in the executionfinancial services, including instances of our business activitieswilful or negligent misconduct.

Overview

The Group defines, manages and mitigates conduct risk with the goal of providing goodpositive customer and client outcomes, and protecting market integrity.integrity and promoting effective competition. This includes taking reasonable steps to assure the Group’s culture and strategy are appropriately aligned to these goals, products and services are reasonably designed and delivered to meet the needs of customers and clients, as well as promoting the fair and orderly operation of the markets in which the Group does business and that the Group does not commit or facilitate money laundering, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption or breaches of economic sanctions.

The Group has defined seven Key Risks thatProduct Lifecycle, Culture and Strategy and Financial Crime are the main sub-risk types to Conduct Risk:risk categories under conduct risk.

§Our products or services do not meet customers’ needs or have the potential to cause customer detriment

§The way we design and undertake transaction services has the potential to cause customer detriment

§The way we design or undertake customer servicing has the potential to cause customer detriment

§Our strategy or business model has the potential to cause customer detriment

§Our governance arrangements or culture has the potential to cause customer detriment

§We fail to obtain and maintain relevant regulatory authorisations, permissions and licence requirements

§Damage to Barclays reputation is caused during the conduct of our business

Organisation and structure

The Conductgovernance of conduct risk within Barclays is fulfilled through management Committees and Reputation Risk Committee (CRRC) derives its authority fromforums operated by the Barclays Group HeadFirst and Second Lines of Compliance. Defence with clear escalation and reporting lines to the Board.

The purpose ofGRC is the CRRC is to reviewmost senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitormonitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of Conduct and Reputation Risk. In addition, specific committees monitor conduct risk and the control environment at the business level.

LOGOrisk.

Roles and responsibilities

The Conduct Risk Principal RiskManagement Framework (PRF)(CRMF) comprises a number of elements that allow the Group to manage and measure its conduct risk profile.

The PRF is implemented acrossSenior Managers have ownership within their areas for managing conduct risk. These individuals have a Statement of Responsibilities identifying the Group:

§Vertically, through an organisational structure that requires all businesses to implement and operate their own conduct risk framework that meets the requirements detailed within the ERMF

§Horizontally, with Group Key Risk Officers (KROs) required to monitor information relevant to their Key Risk from each element of the Conduct Risk PRF

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  407


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conduct risk

activities and areas for which they are accountable. The primary responsibility for managing conduct risk and compliance with control requirements sits with the business where the risk arises. The Conduct Risk Accountable Executive for each business is responsible for ensuring the implementationFirst Line Business Control Committees provide oversight of and adherencecontrols relating to the PRF.conduct risk.

The Conduct Principal RiskGroup Chief Compliance Officer is responsible for owning and maintaining an appropriate Group-wide Conduct Risk PRF andCRMF for overseeing Group-wide Conduct Riskconduct risk management. This includes defining and owning the relevant conduct risk policies and oversight of the implementation of controls to manage the risk.

Businesses are required to report their conduct risks on both a quarterly and an event-driven basis. The quarterly reports detail conduct risks inherent within the business strategy and include forward looking horizon scanning analysis as well as backward looking evidence-based indicators from both internal and external sources. For details please refer to

The Business Unit Risk Committees and the Risk Review, Conduct and Reputation Risk Performance section of this report (page 175).

Financial Crime Business level reportsOversight Committees are reviewed within Compliance. Compliance then creates Group level reportsthe primary Second Line governance forums for consideration by CRRC and RepCo. The Group periodically assesses its managementoversight of conduct risk through independent auditsprofile and addresses issues identified.

Event-driven reporting consistsimplementation of the CRMF. The responsibilities of the Business Unit Risk Committees include approval of the conduct risk tolerance and the business defined key indicators. Additional responsibilities include the identification and discussion of any emerging conduct risks or issues that breach certain thresholds for severity and probability. Any suchexposures which have been identified.

LOGO

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    357


Barclays’ approach to managing risks or issues must be promptly escalated to the business and the appropriate KRO.

In 2015 Reputation Risk was re-designated as a Key Risk under the Conduct Risk Principal Risk. The Reputation Key Risk Framework outlines the processes and actions requiredManagement of reputation risk

This section provides an analysis of the business. These include regularmanagement of reputation risk.

Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Barclays brand arising from association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders to be inappropriate or unethical (see page 359).

LOGO

358    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of reputation risk

Reputation risk

The risk that an action, transaction, investment or event will reduce trust in the firm’s integrity and forward looking reviewscompetence by clients, counterparties, investors, regulators, employees or the public.

LOGO

Overview

A reduction of currenttrust in Barclays’ integrity and emerging reputation risks so that a topical and comprehensive reputation risk profile of the organisation can be maintained.

Reputation risk is the risk of damage to the Group’s brand arising from any association, action or inaction which is perceived by stakeholders (e.g. customers, clients, colleagues, shareholders, regulators, opinion formers) to be inappropriate or unethical. Damage to the Group’s brand and consequent erosion of our reputation reducescompetence may reduce the attractiveness of the GroupBarclays to stakeholders and maycould lead to negative publicity, loss of revenue, regulatory or legislative action, loss of existing and potential client business, reduced workforce morale and difficulties in recruiting talent. Ultimately it may destroy shareholder value.

Organisation and structure

The GRC is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of reputation risk.

Roles and responsibilities

The Chief Compliance Officer is accountable for developing a reputation risk Framework and policies and that they are subject to limits, monitored, reported on and escalated, as required.

Reputation risk may arise inis by nature pervasive and can be difficult to quantify, requiring more subjective judgement than many different ways,other risks. The Reputation Risk Framework sets out what is required to manage reputation risk effectively and consistently across the bank.

The primary responsibility for example:identifying and managing reputation risk and adherence to the control requirements sits with the business and support functions where the risk arises.

Barclays International and Barclays UK are required to operate within established reputation risk appetite and their component businesses submit quarterly reports to the Group Reputation Management team, highlighting their most significant current and potential reputation risks and issues and how they are being managed. These reports are a key internal source of information for the quarterly reputation risk reports which are prepared for the GRC and RepCo.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    359


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of legal risk

This section provides an analysis of the management of legal risk

 

§ Legal risk is the risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to act in good faith and in accordance with the Group’s values and code of conduct;meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements (see page 361).

 

§failure (real or perceived) to comply with the law or regulation, or association (real or implied) with illegal activity;

 

§failures in corporate governance, management or technical systems;

 

§failure to comply with internal standards and policies;

 

§association with controversial sectors or clients;

 

§association with controversial transactions, projects, countries or governments;

§association with controversial business decisions, including but not restricted to, decisions relating to: products (in particular new products), delivery channels, promotions/advertising, acquisitions, branch representation, sourcing/supply chain relationships, staff locations, treatment of financial transactions;

§association with poor employment practices.

In each case, the risk may arise from failure to comply with either stated norms, which are likely to change over time, so an assessment of reputation risk cannot be static. If not managed effectively, stakeholder expectations of responsible corporate behavior will not be met.LOGO

 

408  |  360    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays’ approach to managing risks

Management of conductlegal risk

    

    

 

Reputation

Legal risk

The risk of loss or imposition of penalties, damages or fines from the failure of the firm to meet its legal obligations including regulatory or contractual requirements.

Overview

The Legal Risk may also ariseManagement Framework (LRMF) prescribes Group-wide requirements for the identification, escalation, measurement and cause damagemanagement of legal risk, covering assessment, risk tolerance, key indicators and governance. The LRMF is supported by Group-wide legal risk policies and associated standards aligned to the Group’s image, through association with clients,following legal risks:

Contractual Arrangements – the Group’s rights and remedies in its relationships with other parties not being enforceable as intended due to the absence of appropriate contractual documentation or defects therein.

Litigation Management – failure to adequately manage litigation involving the Group.

Intellectual Property (IP) – failure to protect the Group’s IP assets or the Group infringing valid IP rights of third parties.

Competition/Anti-trust – failure to adequately manage competition/anti-trust issues or failure to manage relationships with competition/anti-trust authorities.

Use of Law Firms – failure to control instruction of external law firms.

Contact with Regulators – failure to manage interactions with regulators or failure to manage the receipt and handling of regulatory information from a regulatory or government agency appropriately.

The LRMF requires businesses and functions to integrate the management of legal risk within their transactionsstrategic planning and business decision making, including adopting processes to identify legal risk exposures and managing adherence to the minimum control requirements.

In addition to legal risk detailed above, legal outcomes, including losses or their projects if these are perceived by external stakeholdersthe imposition of penalties, damages, fines and sanctions, may arise because of past and future actions, behaviours and business decisions aligned to be environmentally damaging. Wherethe Principal Risk which gave rise to the outcome, including but not limited to conduct and operational risk. Details of current contentious legal matters in relation to the Group is financing infrastructure projects whichare set out in Note 29 on page 239 legal, competition and regulatory matters.

Organisation and structure

Business/function risk forums have potentially adverse environmental impacts, the Group’s Client Assessmentoversight of their legal risk profile and Aggregation policy and supporting Environmental and Social Risk Standard will apply. This policy identifies the circumstances in which the Group requires due diligence to include assessment of specialist environmental reports. These reports will include consideration of a wide rangeimplementation of the project’s potential impacts including on air, waterLRMF. The Legal Executive Committee oversees, challenges and land quality, on biodiversity issues, on locally affected communities, including any material upstreammonitors legal risk across the Group. The Group Risk Committee is the most senior executive body responsible for reviewing and downstream impacts, and on working conditions together with employee and community health and safety. Adherencemonitoring the effectiveness of Barclays’ management of risk. Escalation paths from this forum exist to the EnvironmentalBoard Risk Committee.

Roles and Social Risk Standard isresponsibilities

The primary responsibility for identifying and managing legal risk and adherence to the mechanism by which Barclays fulfilsminimum control requirements sits with the requirementsbusinesses/functions where the risk resides.

On behalf of the Equator Principles. These Principles are an internationally recognised framework for environmental due diligence in project finance. Barclays was onebusinesses/functions, the aligned General Counsel or members of Legal senior management provide oversight and challenge of the four banks which collaborated in developinglegal risk profile, for example by undertaking legal risk tolerance assessments, and providing advice on legal risk management. Legal risk tolerance assessments include both quantitative and qualitative criteria such as:

Risk and control self-assessment, lessons learned, testing and monitoring processes.

Analysis of legal risk material control issues or weaknesses.

Potential legal risks resulting from upcoming changes in the control environment, systems, or internal organisational structures.

Potential implications on the Group of forthcoming changes in the external legal and regulatory environment and/or prevailing decisions from courts and enforcing authorities as they relate to defined legal risks.

The Group General Counsel supported by the Principles, aheadGlobal Head of their launch in 2003 with 10 adopting banks. There are now more than 80 banks worldwide which have adopted the Equator Principles (see www.equator-principles.com).Legal Risk, Governance and Control is responsible for maintaining an appropriate LRMF and for overseeing Group-wide legal risk management.

LOGO

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  409    361


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

All disclosures in this section (pages 410 to 432) are unaudited unless otherwise stated.

Deposits and short-term borrowings

Deposits

Deposits include deposits from banks and customers account. The following table displays these balances on an average balance sheet basis.customer accounts.

 

    

 

Average for the year ended

  

 

 

 

2015 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013 

 

  

31 Decembera

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

 

Deposits from banks

      

UK

   7,402     6,002      8,551  

Europe

   40,389     41,101      52,505  

Americas

   7,439     6,191      6,131  

Asia

   6,744     6,524      6,950  

Africa

   3,710     3,735      4,568  

Total deposits from banks

   65,684     63,553      78,705  

Customer Accounts

      

UK

   283,482     274,468      262,685  

Europe

   44,474     55,121      62,073  

Americas

   70,924     65,433      58,815  

Asia

   10,279     13,444      13,825  

Africa

   39,159     43,101      47,712  

Customer Accounts

 

   

 

448,318

 

  

 

   

 

451,567 

 

  

 

   

 

445,110

 

  

 

Deposits from banks in offices in the United Kingdom received from non-residents amounted to £31,976m (2014: £42,172m). The balances below are on a spot basis as at 31 December 2015, rather than the average basis per the tables included above.

  

Average for the year ended 31 December

  

                2017

 

                £m

   

                2016

 

                £m

   

                2015

 

                £m

 
Deposits from banks      
UK   5,063    5,552    7,402 
Europe   33,031    38,180    40,389 
Americas   4,901    6,633    7,439 
Asia   6,764    6,611    6,744 
Africa   4,028    2,705    3,710 
Total deposits from banks   53,787    59,681    65,684 
Customer Accounts      
UK   319,788    301,730    283,482 
Europe   43,254    41,718    44,474 
Americas   72,785    76,909    70,924 
Asia   7,192    7,914    10,279 
Africa   5,146    12,258    39,159 
Customer Accounts   448,165    440,529    448,318 

Deposits from banks in offices in the United Kingdom received fromnon-residents amounted to £30,548m (2016: £36,976m). The balances below are on a spot basis as at 31 December 2017, rather than the average basis per the tables included above.

Deposits from banks in offices in the United Kingdom received fromnon-residents amounted to £30,548m (2016: £36,976m). The balances below are on a spot basis as at 31 December 2017, rather than the average basis per the tables included above.

 

 

Year ended 31 December

   2015      2014      2013     

                2017

 

                £m

   

                2016

 

                £m

   

                2015

 

                £m

 
   £m     £m     £m  

Customer Accounts

   

 

418,242

 

  

 

   

 

427,704 

 

  

 

   

 

431,999

 

  

 

   429,121    423,178    418,242 

In offices in the United Kingdom:

            

Current and Demand Accounts

            

- interest free

   73,987     68,647      61,343     93,573    85,296    73,987 

Current and Demand Accounts

            

- interest bearing

   33,467     34,047      29,451     39,641    37,200    33,467 

Savings accounts

   119,838     114,828      107,865     125,869    123,833    119,838 

Other time deposits- retail

   13,903     12,100      15,113     15,029    14,526    13,903 

Other time deposits- wholesale

   70,399     72,150      60,457     91,534    84,805    70,399 

Total repayable in offices

   311,594     301,772      274,229  

in the United Kingdom

         
Total repayable in offices in the United Kingdom   365,646    345,660    311,594 

In offices outside

the United Kingdom:

            

Current and Demand Accounts

            

- interest free

   12,777      17,236      15,497     7,328    9,722    12,777 

Current and Demand Accounts

            

- interest bearing

   26,891      23,127      28,558     5,407    5,986    26,891 

Savings accounts

   15,729      16,335      15,620     8,470    9,511    15,729 

Other time deposits

   51,251      69,234      98,095     42,269    52,299    51,251 

Total repayable in offices

outside the United Kingdom

   106,648      125,932      157,770     63,474    77,518    106,648 

Customer accounts deposits in offices in the United Kingdom received fromnon-residents amounted to £47,129m (2014: £48,654m)£55,414m (2016: £51,161m).

Note

a Calculated based onmonth-end balances. The average balance differs to the average balance sheets as the latter excludesnon-interest bearing settlement balances.

 

362    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Short-term borrowings

Short-term borrowings include deposits from banks, commercial paper, negotiable certificates of deposit and repurchase agreements.

Deposits from banks

Deposits from banks are taken from a wide range of counterparties and generally have maturities of less than one year.

 

 
   2015      2014      2013   
 
   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

  

                2017

 

                £m

   

                2016

 

                £m

   

                2015

 

                £m

 

Year-end balance

   47,080      58,390      55,615     37,723     48,214     47,080  

Average balancea, b

   65,684      63,553      78,705     49,938     59,681     65,684  

Maximum balancea

   84,270      72,810      95,808     56,348     66,404     84,270  

Average interest rate during year

   0.3%     0.3%     0.3%     0.8%    0.4%    0.3% 

Year-end interest rate

   

 

0.2%

 

  

 

   

 

0.4%

 

  

 

   

 

0.4%

 

  

 

   0.8%    0.4%    0.2% 
NotesNotes 
a Calculated based onmonth-end balances.a Calculated based onmonth-end balances. 
b The average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter excludesnon-interest bearing settlement balances.b The average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter excludesnon-interest bearing settlement balances. 
Commercial paperCommercial paper 

Commercial paper is issued by the Group, mainly in the United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000, with maturities of up to 270 days.

Commercial paper is issued by the Group, mainly in the United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000, with maturities of up to 270 days.

 

 
  

        2017

 

        £m

   

        2016

 

        £m

   

        2015

 

        £m

 
Year-end balance   7,981     8,132     6,689  
Average balancea   8,375     7,711     9,192  
Maximum balancea   9,056     8,471     13,407  
Average interest rate during year   1.2%    0.8%    0.3% 
Year-end interest rate   1.3%    1.0%    0.3% 
NoteNote 
a Calculated based onmonth-end balances.a Calculated based onmonth-end balances. 
Negotiable certificates of depositNegotiable certificates of deposit 

Negotiable certificates of deposits are issued mainly in the United Kingdom and United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000.

Negotiable certificates of deposits are issued mainly in the United Kingdom and United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000.

 

 
  

        2017

 

        £m

   

        2016

 

        £m

   

        2015

 

        £m

 
Year-end balance   21,874     20,373     14,312  
Average balancea   24,984     15,540     22,298  
Maximum balancea   30,529     20,373     29,216  
Average interest rate during year   0.7%    0.4%    1.0% 
Year-end interest rate   0.8%    0.5%    1.0% 
NoteNote 
a Calculated based onmonth-end balances.a Calculated based onmonth-end balances. 

Commercial paper

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    363


Additional information

Commercial paper is issued by the Group, mainly in the United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000, with maturities of up to 270 days.Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    
   2015      2014      2013   
    

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

Year-end balance

   6,689      7,125      11,269  

Average balancea

   9,192      11,797      15,169  

Maximum balancea

   13,407      16,891      18,320  

Average interest rate during year

   0.3%     0.3%     0.2%  

Year-end interest rate

 

   

 

0.3%

 

  

 

   

 

0.2%

 

  

 

   

 

0.2%

 

  

 

Negotiable certificates of deposit

Negotiable certificates of deposits are issued mainly in the United Kingdom and United States, generally in denominations of not less than $100,000.

 

   

 

 

 

2015 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013 

 

  

    £m     £m     £m  

Year-end balance

   14,312      23,928      20,729   

Average balancea

   22,298      23,947      28,644   

Maximum balancea

   29,216      29,100      36,158   

Average interest rate during year

   1.0%     0.9%     1.0%  

Year-end interest rate

 

   

 

1.0%

 

  

 

   0.9%     0.7%  

Repurchase Agreements

Repurchase agreements are entered into with both customers and banks and generally have maturities of not more than three months.

 

   

 

 

 

2015 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014 

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013 

 

  

    £m     £m     £m  

Year-end balanced

   25,035     124,479     196,748  

Average balancea, b, c, d

   114,933     191,181     246,562  

Maximum balancea, d

   167,343     218,523     280,203  

Average interest rate during year

   0.3%     0.2%     0.3%  

Year-end interest rate

   0.3%     0.2%     0.1%  
    
    

                2017

 

                £m

   

                2016

 

                £m

   

                2015

 

                £m

 
Year-end balance   40,338     19,760     25,035  
Average balancea   37,446     24,966     114,933  
Maximum balancea   43,451     28,057     167,343  
Average interest rate during year   1.5%    0.8%    0.3% 
Year-end interest rate   1.5%    0.7%    0.3% 

Notes

aCalculated based on

a Calculated based onmonth-end balances.

bThe average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter excludes non-interest bearing settlement balances.
cThe average balance differs to the average balance sheet as the latter is stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting of liabilities against assets.
dDuring 2015, reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

410  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Commitments and contractual obligations

Commercial commitments include guarantees, contingent liabilities and standby facilities.

 

Commercial commitments

   

 

Amount of commitment expiration per period

 

  Amount of commitment expiration per period 
  

    Less than

one year

 

£m

   

 

Between

    one to three

years

 

£m

   

Between

    three to five

years

 

£m

   

    After five

years

 

£m

   

Total

amounts

    committed

 

£m

 
   

 

Less than

one year

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Between

one to three

years

 

  

  

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

Between

three to five

years

 

  

  

  

   

 

After five

years

  

  

  

 

Total

amounts

committed

   £m     £m     £m     £m    £m

As at 31 December 2015

          
As at 31 December 2017          

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   15,227     499     47     292    16,065    13,631    227    49    368    14,275 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   4,350     83     114     10    4,557    4,396    199    10    133    4,738 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   718     119     8      845    806    6    -    -    812 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   93          93 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   278,923     1,426     906     114    281,369    314,364    90    259    48    314,761 

As at 31 December 2014

          
As at 31 December 2016          

Guarantees and letters of credit pledged as collateral security

   14,275     205     23     44    14,547    14,498    403    25    377    15,303 

Performance guarantees, acceptances and endorsements

   5,414     260     61     1,042    6,777    4,400    140    64    32    4,636 

Documentary credits and other short-term trade related transactions

   976     115        1,091    1,005    -    -    -    1,005 

Forward starting reverse repurchase agreements

   13,856          13,856 

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

   269,796     4,515     1,847     157    276,315    302,359    102    150    70    302,681 

364    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Contractual obligations include debt securities, operating lease and purchase obligations.

 

Contractual obligations   Payments due by period  Payments due by period
   

 

 

 

Less than

 

one year

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Between

 

one to

 

three years

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

 

 

Between

 

three to

 

five years

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

   

 

 

 

After five

 

years

 

  

 

  

 

  

Total

 

  

      Less than

one year

 

£m

  

 

Between

one to

      three years

 

£m

  

Between

three to

      five years

 

£m

  

      After five

years

 

£m

  

Total

 

£m

   £m     £m     £m     £m    £m
As at 31 December 2015          
As at 31 December 2017          
Long-term debta   30,525      23,101      17,773      31,978     103,377    39,434    19,287    24,160    31,894    114,775 
Operating lease obligations   377      603      535      1,874     3,389    334    522    343    1,337    2,536 
Purchase obligations   485      434      262      276     1,457    292    272    90    82    736 
Total   31,387      24,138      18,570      34,128     108,223    40,060    20,081    24,593    33,313    118,047 
As at 31 December 2014          
As at 31 December 2016          
Long-term debta   46,724      20,820      15,690      32,735     115,969    46,528    20,005    19,829    31,044    117,406 
Operating lease obligations   444      687      566      2,036     3,733    364    547    450    1,520    2,881 
Purchase obligations   511      371      153      208     1,243    342    206    122    127    797 
Total   47,679      21,878      16,409      34,979     120,945    47,234    20,758    20,401    32,691          121,084 

Notes

a Long-term debt has been prepared to reflect cash flows on an undiscounted basis, which includes interest payments.

Net cash flows from derivatives used to hedge long-term debt amount to £5.5bn (2014: £6.3bn)£2.4bn (2016: £3.5bn).

Further information on the contractual maturity of the Group’s assets and liabilities is given in the Funding section of the on page 103.Risk Review.

Notes

aLong-term debt has been prepared to reflect cash flows on an undiscounted basis, which includes interest payments.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  411    365


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

Securities

 

 

Securities at fair value

    

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

    

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

    

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

            
 

As at 31 December

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

  

                2017

 

                £m

  

                2016

 

                £m

  

                2015

 

                £m

Investment securities – available for sale

            
Investment securities – Financial Investments      

United Kingdom government

     

 

17,947

 

  

 

     

 

18,849

 

  

 

     

 

20,580

 

  

 

   15,096    15,351    17,947 

Other government

     

 

49,427

 

  

 

     

 

41,700

 

  

 

     

 

37,258

 

  

 

   29,887    28,750    49,427 

Other public bodies and US Agencies

     

 

5,462

 

  

 

     

 

6,034

 

  

 

     

 

8,890

 

  

 

   474    1,635    5,462 

Mortgage and asset backed securities

     

 

1,082

 

  

 

     

 

1,230

 

  

 

     

 

1,918

 

  

 

   546    804    1,082 
Corporate and other issuers   11,126    16,339    15,360 
Debt securities   57,129    62,879    89,278 
Equity securities   1,787    438    989 
Investment securities – Financial Investments   58,916    63,317    90,267 
Other securities – held for trading      
United Kingdom government   4,380    4,793    4,020 
Other government   20,603    15,134    19,503 
Other public bodies and US Agencies   7,408    5,396    8,683 
Mortgage and asset backed securities   1,974    1,568    2,927 

Bank and building society certificates of deposit

     

 

 

  

 

     

 

38

 

  

 

     

 

42

 

  

 

   21    23    559 

Corporate and other issuers

     

 

15,360

 

  

 

     

 

17,688

 

  

 

     

 

22,610

 

  

 

   16,814    11,875    9,884 

Debt securities

     

 

89,278

 

  

 

     

 

85,539

 

  

 

     

 

91,298

 

  

 

   51,200    38,789    45,576 

Equity securities

     

 

989

 

  

 

     

 

527

 

  

 

     

 

458

 

  

 

   59,338    38,329    29,055 

Investment securities – available for sale

     

 

90,267

 

  

 

     

 

86,066

 

  

 

     

 

91,756

 

  

 

Other securities – held for trading

               110,538    77,118    74,631 

United Kingdom government

     

 

4,020

 

  

 

     

 

7,450

 

  

 

     

 

10,361

 

  

 

Other government

     

 

19,503

 

  

 

     

 

29,720

 

  

 

     

 

40,690

 

  

 

Other public bodies and US Agencies

     

 

8,683

 

  

 

     

 

9,879

 

  

 

     

 

5,820

 

  

 

Mortgage and asset backed securities

     

 

2,927

 

  

 

     

 

7,165

 

  

 

     

 

10,962

 

  

 

Bank and building society certificates of deposit

     

 

559

 

  

 

     

 

240

 

  

 

     

 

182

 

  

 

Corporate and other issuers

     

 

9,884

 

  

 

     

 

11,544

 

  

 

     

 

16,545

 

  

 

Debt securities

     

 

45,576

 

  

 

     

 

65,998

 

  

 

     

 

84,560

 

  

 

Equity securities

     

 

29,055

 

  

 

     

 

44,576

 

  

 

     

 

42,659

 

  

 

Other securities – held for trading

     

 

74,631

 

  

 

     

 

110,574

 

  

 

     

 

127,219

 

  

 

Investment debt securities include government securities held as part of the Group’s treasury management portfolio for asset and liability, liquidity and regulatory purposes and are for use on a continuing basis in the activities of the Group. In addition, the Group holds as investments listed and unlisted corporate securities.

 

Maturities and yield of available for sale debt securities

  

As at 31 December 2015     

 

Maturing with one

year

  

  

     

 

Maturing one but

within five years

  

  

     

 

Maturing after five

but within ten years

  

  

     

 

Maturing after ten

years

  

  

     Total  
     Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield       Amount       Yield  
Maturities and yield of Financial InvestmentsMaturities and yield of Financial Investments 
 
     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

%

 

  

 

    Maturing with one  
    year    
    Maturing one but  
  within five years  
    Maturing after five  
  but within ten years  
    Maturing after ten  
    years    
  Total

As at 31 December 2017

  

  Amount

 

£m

  

      Yield

 

%

   

  Amount

 

£m

  

      Yield

 

%

   

  Amount

 

£m

  

      Yield

 

%

   

  Amount

 

£m

  

      Yield

 

%

   

  Amount

 

£m

  

      Yield

 

%

 

Government

     

 

8,811

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

29,419

 

  

 

     

 

1.4%

 

  

 

     

 

17,583

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

11,561

 

  

 

     

 

2.6%

 

  

 

     

 

67,374

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

   4,253    0.5%    17,412    0.9%    15,073    1.6%    8,244    2.8%    44,982    1.4% 

Other public bodies and US Agencies

     

 

242

 

  

 

     

 

0.5%

 

  

 

     

 

3,368

 

  

 

     

 

1.3%

 

  

 

     

 

1,691

 

  

 

     

 

2.2%

 

  

 

     

 

161

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

5,462

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

       –      117    0.9%        –      357    1.4%    474    1.3% 

Other issuers

     

 

2,322

 

  

 

     

 

1.9%

 

  

 

     

 

11,130

 

  

 

     

 

1.7%

 

  

 

     

 

2,130

 

  

 

     

 

2.1%

 

  

 

     

 

860

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

     

 

16,442

 

  

 

     

 

1.8%

 

  

 

   1,398    1.2%    8,005    1.8%    1,999    1.5%    271    2.6%    11,673    1.7% 

Total book value

     

 

11,375

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

43,917

 

  

 

     

 

1.5%

 

  

 

     

 

21,404

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

     

 

12,582

 

  

 

     

 

2.5%

 

  

 

     

 

89,278

 

  

 

     

 

1.6%

 

  

 

   5,651    0.7%    25,534    1.2%    17,072    1.5%    8,872    2.7%    57,129    1.5% 

The yield for each range of maturities is calculated by dividing the annualised interest income prevailing at 31 December 20152017 by the fair value of securities held at that date.

 

412  |  366    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

 

 

Average balance sheet

Average balances are based upon monthly averages.

 

  

Assets

    2015         2017 
 
       

      Average

balance

   Interest
      presented
within net
interest
income
   Interest
presented
      elsewhere
   Total interest                 Rate 
               

 

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

Total interest

 

  

 

     

 

Rate

 

  

 

 
               £m       £m       £m       £m       %         £m   £m   £m   £m   % 

Loans and advances to banks

    UK         51,597       513              514        1.0     UK    84,327    365    4    369    0.4 

Loans and advances to banks

    Non-UK          48,521       186              191        0.4     Non-UK        103,539    504    -    504    0.5 

Loans and advances to banksa

    Total          100,118       699              705        0.7     Total    187,866    869    4    873    0.5 

Loans and advances to customers

    UK         283,191       8,699       84        8,783        3.1     UK    287,350    8,543    71    8,614    3.0 

Loans and advances to customers

    Non-UK          120,252       6,033       212        6,245        5.2     Non-UK    77,658    3,240    232    3,472    4.5 

Loans and advances to customersa

    Total          403,443       14,732       296        15,028        3.7     Total    365,008    11,783    303    12,086    3.3 

Available for sale investments

    UK         84,291       1,039              1,039        1.2  
Financial investments   UK    54,218    651    -    651    1.2 

Available for sale investments

    Non-UK          9,436       348              348        3.7  
Financial investments   Non-UK    4,316    103    -    103    2.4 

Available for sale investments

    Total          93,727       1,387              1,387        1.5  
Financial investments   Total    58,534    754    -    754    1.3 

Reverse repurchase agreements

    UK         86,322       18       187        205        0.2     UK    2,832    51    20    71    2.5 

Reverse repurchase agreements

    Non-UK          96,187       45       193        238        0.2     Non-UK    14,507    30    374    404    2.8 

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

    Total          182,509       63       380        443        0.2     Total    17,339    81    394    475    2.7 

Other interest incomec

               -       320              320        -        -    144    -    144    - 

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

               779,797       17,201       682        17,883        2.3        628,747    13,631    701    14,332    2.3 

Less interest expense

               -       (4,643     (625)       (5,268)       -        -    (3,786)    (1,245)    (5,031)    - 

Net interest

               779,797       12,558       57        12,615        1.6        628,747    9,845    (544)    9,301    1.5 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    UK         48,360                     UK    81,639         

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK          81,031                     Non-UK    87,253         

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Total         129,391                     Total    168,892         

Total interest earning assets

               909,188                        797,639         

Impairments

             (5,273                     (4,700)         

Non-interest earning assets

               526,448                        422,102         

Total

             1,430,363                        1,215,041         

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

               39%                        36%         

Notes

 

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, includingnon-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.

bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously. During 2015, reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  413


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Assets

    2014  
           

 

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

Total interest

 

  

 

     

 

Rate

 

  

 

           £m       £m       £m       £m       %  

Loans and advances to banks

    UK     48,162       377       -       377       0.8  

Loans and advances to banks

    Non-UK     47,375       262       -       262       0.6  

Loans and advances to banksa

    Total     95,537       639       -       639       0.7  

Loans and advances to customers

    UK     272,463       8,779       74       8,853       3.2  

Loans and advances to customers

    Non-UK     137,122       5,898       184       6,082       4.4  

Loans and advances to customersa

    Total     409,585       14,677       258       14,935       3.6  

Available for sale investments

    UK     74,868       1,323       -       1,323       1.8  

Available for sale investments

    Non-UK     11,130       292       -       292       2.6  

Available for sale investments

    Total     85,998       1,615       -       1,615       1.9  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    UK     155,170       31       589       620       0.4  

Reverse repurchase agreements

    Non-UK     127,670       55       287       342       0.3  

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

    Total     282,840       86       876       962       0.3  

Other interest incomec

          -       346       -       346       -  

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

          873,960       17,363       1,134       18,497       2.1  

Less interest expense

          -       (5,283     (980     (6,263     -  

Net interest

          873,960       12,080       154       12,234       1.4  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    UK     57,070                  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK     56,477                  

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Total     113,547                  

Total interest earning assets

          987,507                  

Impairments

         (6,770                

Non-interest earning assets

          515,020                  

Total

          1,495,757                  

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

          38%                  

Notes

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, including non-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.

bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.
cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

 

414  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    367


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

Assets

    2013         2016 
 
       

      Average

balance

   Interest
      presented
within net
interest
income
   Interest
presented
      elsewhere
   Total interest                 Rate 
          

 

 

 

Average

 

balance

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

within net

 

interest

 

income

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

 

Interest

 

presented

 

elsewhere

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

     

 

Total interest

 

  

 

     

 

Rate

 

  

 

 
          £m       £m       £m       £m       %         £m   £m   £m   £m   % 

Loans and advances to banks

    UK     51,185       383       35       418       0.8     UK    55,902    588    3    591    1.1 

Loans and advances to banks

    Non-UK     61,204       304       1       305       0.5     Non-UK        65,549    197    -    197    0.3 

Loans and advances to banksa

    Total     112,389       687       36       723       0.6     Total    121,451    785    3    788    0.6 

Loans and advances to customers

    UK     271,111       9,098       148       9,246       3.4     UK    290,751    9,665    136    9,801    3.4 

Loans and advances to customers

    Non-UK     142,494       6,515       254       6,769       4.8     Non-UK    92,044    3,293    89    3,382    3.7 

Loans and advances to customersa

    Total     413,605       15,613       402       16,015       3.9     Total    382,795    12,958    225    13,183    3.4 

Available for sale investments

    UK     73,212       1,346       -       1,346       1.8  
Financial investments   UK    71,697    520    43    563    0.8 

Available for sale investments

    Non-UK     14,802       458       -       458       3.1  
Financial investments   Non-UK    7,661    220    -    220    2.9 

Available for sale investments

    Total     88,014       1,804       -       1,804       2.0  
Financial investments   Total    79,358    740    43    783    1.0 

Reverse repurchase agreements

    UK     193,303       8       715       723       0.4     UK    5,949    (7)    71    64    1.1 

Reverse repurchase agreements

    Non-UK     132,488       33       342       375       0.3     Non-UK    14,752    34    287    321    2.2 

Reverse repurchase agreementsb

    Total     325,791       41       1,057       1,098       0.3     Total    20,701    27    358    385    1.9 

Other interest incomec

          -       170       -       170       -        -    31    -    31    - 

Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L

          939,799       18,315       1,495       19,810       2.1        604,305    14,541    629    15,170    2.5 

Less interest expense

          -       (6,715     (1,194)      (7,909     -        -    (4,004)    (214)    (4,218)    - 

Net interest

          939,799       11,600       301       11,901       1.3        604,305    10,537    415    10,952    1.8 

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    UK     65,534                     UK    65,449         

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK     75,763                     Non-UK    78,470         

Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L

    Total     141,297                     Total    143,919         

Total interest earning assets

          1,081,096                        748,224         

Impairments

         (8,009                     (4,669)         

Non-interest earning assets

          575,219                        550,299         

Total

         1,648,306                        1,293,854         

Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK

          39%                        35%         

Notes

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, includingnon-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.
bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously. Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.

 

368    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Assets

       2015 
       
         

      Average

balance

   Interest
      presented
within net
interest
income
   Interest
presented
      elsewhere
   Total interest                 Rate 
       
         £m   £m   £m   £m   % 
Loans and advances to banks   UK    51,597    513    1    514    1.0 
Loans and advances to banks   Non-UK        48,521    131    60    191    0.4 
Loans and advances to banksa   Total    100,118    644    61    705    0.7 
Loans and advances to customers   UK    283,191    9,686    84    9,770    3.4 
Loans and advances to customers   Non-UK    120,252    2,825    3,420    6,245    5.2 
Loans and advances to customersa   Total    403,443    12,511    3,504    16,015    4.0 
Financial investments   UK    84,291    494    -    494    0.6 
Financial investments   Non-UK    9,436    204    144    348    3.7 
Financial investments   Total    93,727    698    144    842    0.9 
Reverse repurchase agreements   UK    86,322    18    187    205    0.2 
Reverse repurchase agreements   Non-UK    96,187    (239)    479    240    0.2 
Reverse repurchase agreementsb   Total    182,509    (221)    666    445    0.2 
Other interest incomec        -    321    -    321    - 
Total interest earning assets not at fair value through P&L        779,797    13,953    4,375    18,328    2.4 
Less interest expense        -    (3,345)    (2,371)    (5,716)    - 
Net interest        779,797    10,608    2,004    12,612    1.6 
Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L   UK    48,360         
Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L   Non-UK    81,031         
Interest earning assets at fair value through P&L   Total    129,391         
Total interest earning assets        909,188         
Impairments     (5,273)         
Non-interest earning assets        526,448         
Total        1,430,363         
Percentage of total average interest earning assets in offices outside the UK        39%         

Notes

aLoans and advances to banks and customers include all doubtful lendings, includingnon-accrual lendings. Interest receivable on such lendings has been included to the extent to which either cash payments have been received or interest has been accrued in accordance with the income recognition policy of the Group.
bAverage balances for reverse repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities borrowed have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.

cOther interest income principally includes interest income relating to hedging activity.
d.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  415    369


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

Liabilities

    2015  
                

 

Average

balance

  

  

     
 
 
 
 
Interest
presented
within net
interest
income
  
  
  
  
  
     
 
 
Interest
presented
elsewhere
  
  
  
     Total interest       Rate  
                £m       £m       £m       £m       %  

Deposits by banks

    UK         46,577       69       5       74       0.2  

Deposits by banks

    Non-UK          12,716       108       -       108       0.8  

Deposits by banks

    Total          59,293       177       5       182       0.3  

Customer accounts

    UK         237,723       402       28       430       0.2  

Customer accounts

    Non-UK          84,304       528       92       620       0.7  

Customer accounts

    Total          322,027       930       120       1,050       0.3  

Debt securities in issue

    UK         45,625       1,130       58       1,188       2.6  

Debt securities in issue

    Non-UK          35,507       592       44       636       1.8  

Debt securities in issue

    Total          81,132       1,722       102       1,824       2.2  

Subordinated liabilities

    UK         20,015       1,564       -       1,564       7.8  

Subordinated liabilities

    Non-UK          818       80       -       80       9.8  

Subordinated liabilities

    Total          20,833       1,644       -       1,644       7.9  

Repurchase agreements

    UK         94,660       -       232       232       0.2  

Repurchase agreements

    Non-UK          93,438       52       231       283       0.3  

Repurchase agreementsa

    Total          188,098       52       463       515       0.3  

Other interest expenseb

               -       118       (65     53       -  

Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L

               671,383       4,643       625       5,268       0.8  

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

    UK         51,164                  

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

    Non-UK          63,779                  

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

    Total         114,943                  

Total interest bearing liabilities

               786,326                  

Interest free customer deposits

    UK         71,763                  

Interest free customer deposits

    Non-UK          14,182                  

Interest free customer deposits

    Total          85,945                  

Other non-interest bearing liabilities

             490,992                  

Shareholders’ equity

               67,100                  

Total

             1,430,363                  

Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK

               37%                  

Notes

aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously. During 2015, reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.

bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

416  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 

   
Liabilities      2017 
       
        

Average

balance

   

Interest

      presented

within net

interest

income

   

Interest

    presented

elsewhere

   Total interest                 Rate 
       
        £m   £m   £m   £m   % 
Deposits by banks  UK   40,103    94    4    98    0.2 
Deposits by banks  Non-UK       4,719    276    -    276    5.8 
Deposits by banks  Total   44,822    370    4    374    0.8 
Customer accounts  UK   258,667    740    17    757    0.3 
Customer accounts  Non-UK   55,704    383    708    1,091    2.0 
Customer accounts  Total   314,371    1,123    725    1,848    0.6 
Debt securities in issue  UK   43,632    831    -    831    1.9 
Debt securities in issue  Non-UK   34,819    84    -    84    0.2 
Debt securities in issue  Total   78,451    915    -    915    1.2 
Subordinated liabilities  UK   23,930    1,223    -    1,223    5.1 
Subordinated liabilities  Non-UK   52    -    -    -    - 
Subordinated liabilities  Total   23,982    1,223    -    1,223    5.1 
Repurchase agreements  UK   22,015    22    202    224    1.0 
Repurchase agreements  Non-UK   15,431    24    314    338    2.2 
Repurchase agreementsa  Total   37,446    46    516    562    1.5 
Other interest expenseb      -    109    -    109    - 
Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L      499,072    3,786    1,245    5,031    1.0 
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  UK   99,332         
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  Non-UK   81,565         
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  Total   180,897         
Total interest bearing liabilities      679,969         
Interest free customer deposits  UK   88,813         
Interest free customer deposits  Non-UK   9,353         
Interest free customer deposits  Total   98,166         
Othernon-interest bearing liabilities     372,021         
Shareholders’ equity      64,885         
Total      1,215,041         
Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK      28%         

 

Liabilities

      2014  
       

 

          Average

balance

  

  

   
 
 
 
 
Interest
presented
        within net
interest
income
  
  
  
  
  
   
 
 
Interest
presented
        elsewhere
  
  
  
   Total interest             Rate  
       £m     £m     £m     £m     %  

Deposits by banks

  UK   41,931     89     -     89     0.2  

Deposits by banks

  Non-UK   15,388     110     2     112     0.7  

Deposits by banks

  Total   57,319     199     2     201     0.4  

Customer accounts

  UK   231,792     744     6     750     0.3  

Customer accounts

  Non-UK   92,337     729     230     959     1.0  

Customer accounts

  Total   324,129     1,473     236     1,709     0.5  

Debt securities in issue

  UK   51,218     1,315     82     1,397     2.7  

Debt securities in issue

  Non-UK   38,515     607     54     661     1.7  

Debt securities in issue

  Total   89,733     1,922     136     2,058     2.3  

Subordinated liabilities

  UK   19,575     1,541     -     1,541     7.9  

Subordinated liabilities

  Non-UK   1,151     81     -     81     7.0  

Subordinated liabilities

  Total   20,726     1,622     -     1,622     7.8  

Repurchase agreements

  UK   166,224     64     376     440     0.3  

Repurchase agreements

  Non-UK   126,347     9     230     239     0.2  

Repurchase agreementsa

  Total   292,571     73     606     679     0.2  

Other interest expenseb

      -     (6   -     (6   -  

Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L

      784,478     5,283     980     6,263     0.8  

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  UK   37,722          

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Non-UK   28,755          

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Total   66,477          

Total interest bearing liabilities

      850,955          

Interest free customer deposits

  UK   65,294          

Interest free customer deposits

  Non-UK   15,033          

Interest free customer deposits

  Total   80,327          

Other non-interest bearing liabilities

     498,675          

Shareholders’ equity

      65,800          

Total

     1,495,757          

Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK

      36%          

Notes

Notes
aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.
bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

 

370    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  417


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

Liabilities

      2013  
       

 

Average

balance

  

  

   
 
 
 

 

Interest
        presented
within net
interest

income

  
  
  
  

  

   
 
 
Interest
presented
        elsewhere
  
  
  
   Total interest             Rate  
       £m     £m     £m     £m     %  

Deposits by banks

  UK   52,518     78     52     130     0.2  

Deposits by banks

  Non-UK   17,308     123     1     124     0.7  

Deposits by banks

  Total   69,826     201     53     254     0.4  

Customer accounts

  UK   228,046     1,285     74     1,359     0.6  

Customer accounts

  Non-UK   94,640     1,371     198     1,569     1.7  

Customer accounts

  Total   322,686     2,656     272     2,928     0.9  

Debt securities in issue

  UK   62,019     1,523     39     1,562     2.5  

Debt securities in issue

  Non-UK   42,114     653     47     700     1.7  

Debt securities in issue

  Total   104,133     2,176     86     2,262     2.2  

Subordinated liabilities

  UK   21,764     1,462     -     1,462     6.7  

Subordinated liabilities

  Non-UK   1,406     110     -     110     7.8  

Subordinated liabilities

  Total   23,170     1,572     -     1,572     6.8  

Repurchase agreements

  UK   205,170     59     428     487     0.2  

Repurchase agreements

  Non-UK   149,651     68     355     423     0.3  

Repurchase agreementsa

  Total   354,821     127     783     910     0.3  

Other interest expenseb

      -     (17   -     (17   -  

Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L

      874,636     6,715     1,194     7,909     0.9  

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  UK   51,498          

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Non-UK   30,333          

Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L

  Total   81,831          

Total interest bearing liabilities

      956,467          

Interest free customer deposits

  UK   58,438          

Interest free customer deposits

  Non-UK   13,784          

Interest free customer deposits

  Total   72,222          

Other non-interest bearing liabilities

     558,116          

Shareholders’ equity

      61,501          

Total

             1,648,306          

Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK

      35%          

   
Liabilities      2016 
       
        

Average

balance

   Interest
    presented
within net
interest
income
   Interest
presented
    elsewhere
       Total interest                 Rate 
       
        £m   £m   £m   £m   % 
Deposits by banks  UK   44,890    145    2    147    0.3 
Deposits by banks  Non-UK       9,469    120    -    120    1.3 
Deposits by banks  Total   54,359    265    2    267    0.5 
Customer accounts  UK   251,738    400    (84)    316    0.1 
Customer accounts  Non-UK   62,127    1,113    74    1,187    1.9 
Customer accounts  Total   313,865    1,513    (10)    1,503    0.5 
Debt securities in issue  UK   39,956    757    -    757    1.9 
Debt securities in issue  Non-UK   25,712    232    -    232    0.9 
Debt securities in issue  Total   65,668    989    -    989    1.5 
Subordinated liabilities  UK   22,437    1,104    -    1,104    4.9 
Subordinated liabilities  Non-UK   228    -    -    -    - 
Subordinated liabilities  Total   22,665    1,104    -    1,104    4.9 
Repurchase agreements  UK   13,736    116    110    226    1.6 
Repurchase agreements  Non-UK   11,424    47    112    159    1.4 
Repurchase agreementsa  Total   25,160    163    222    385    1.5 
Other interest expenseb           (30)    -    (30)    - 
Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L      481,717    4,004    214    4,218    0.9 
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  UK   78,036         
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  Non-UK   69,976         
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  Total   148,012         
Total interest bearing liabilities      629,729         
Interest free customer deposits  UK   78,788         
Interest free customer deposits  Non-UK   10,074         
Interest free customer deposits  Total   88,862         
Othernon-interest bearing liabilities     510,767         
Shareholders’ equity      64,496         
Total      1,293,854         
Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK      28%         

Notes
aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously. Reverse repurchase and repurchase agreements including other similar lending and borrowing in certain businesses have been designated at fair value following a change in accounting treatment to better align to the way the business manages the portfolio’s risk and performance.
bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    371


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

   
Liabilities      2015 
       
        

        Average

balance

   Interest
    presented
within net
interest
income
   Interest
presented
    elsewhere
       Total interest                    Rate 
       
        £m   £m   £m   £m   % 
Deposits by banks  UK   46,577    72    8    80    0.2 
Deposits by banks  Non-UK       12,716    59    49    108    0.8 
Deposits by banks  Total   59,293    131    57    188    0.3 
Customer accounts  UK   237,723    2,185    28    2,213    0.9 
Customer accounts  Non-UK   84,304    (781)    1,401    620    0.7 
Customer accounts  Total   322,027    1,404    1,429    2,833    0.9 
Debt securities in issue  UK   45,625    346    58    404    0.9 
Debt securities in issue  Non-UK   35,507    205    431    636    1.8 
Debt securities in issue  Total   81,132    551    489    1,040    1.3 
Subordinated liabilities  UK   20,015    1,007    -    1,007    5.0 
Subordinated liabilities  Non-UK   818    8    72    80    9.8 
Subordinated liabilities  Total   20,833    1,015    72    1,087    5.2 
Repurchase agreements  UK   94,660    -    232    232    0.2 
Repurchase agreements  Non-UK   93,438    52    231    283    0.3 
Repurchase agreementsa  Total   188,098    52    463    515    0.3 
Other interest expenseb      -    192    (139)    53    - 
Total interest bearing liabilities not at fair value through P&L      671,383    3,345    2,371    5,716    0.9 
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  UK   51,164         
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  Non-UK   63,779         
Interest bearing liabilities at fair value through P&L  Total   114,943         
Total interest bearing liabilities      786,326         
Interest free customer deposits  UK   71,763         
Interest free customer deposits  Non-UK   14,182         
Interest free customer deposits  Total   85,945         
Othernon-interest bearing liabilities     490,992         
Shareholders’ equity      67,100         
Total      1,430,363         
Percentage of total average interest bearing liabilities in offices outside the UK      37%         

Notes

aAverage balances for repurchase agreements and cash collateral on securities lent have been stated on a gross basis prior to any offsetting to provide a more meaningful comparison to the related interest income and expense. The Group balance sheet offsets financial assets and liabilities where there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis or to realise an asset and liability simultaneously.

bOther interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to hedging activity.

 

c.Net Interest Income from discontinued operations is included within Interest presented elsewhere.

418  |  372    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

Changes in total interest – volume and rate analysis

The following tables allocate changes in interest between changes in volume and changes in interest rates for the last two years. Volume and rate variances have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest earning assets and average interest bearing liabilities. Where variances have arisen from changes in both volumes and interest rates, these have been allocated proportionately between the two.

 

  

Interest income

         

 

2015/2014 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

  

  

   

 

2014/2013 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

  

2017/2016 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

   

2016/2015 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

 
  
  Total change               Volume                 Rate       Total change               Volume                   Rate 
         
 
Total
change
  
  
   Volume     Rate     Total change     Volume    Rate  
         £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Loans and advances to banks

  UK     137      28      109      (41)     (24)    (17)   UK   (222)    219    (441)    77    45    32 

Loans and advances to banks

  Non-UK      (71)          (77)     (43)     (74)    31    Non-UK       307    149    158    6    57    (51) 

Loans and advances to banks

  Total      66      34      32      (84)     (98)    14    Total   85    368    (283)    83    102    (19) 

Loans and advances to customers

  UK     (70)     342      (412)     (393)     46     (439)   UK   (1,187)    (113)    (1,074)    31    258    (227) 

Loans and advances to customers

  Non-UK      163      (802)     965      (687)     (249)    (438)   Non-UK   90    (577)    667    (2,863)    (1,274)    (1,589) 

Loans and advances to customers

  Total      93      (460)     553      (1,080)     (203)    (877)   Total   (1,097)    (690)    (407)    (2,832)    (1,016)    (1,816) 

Available for sale investments

  UK     (284)     152      (436)     (23)     30     (53) 
Financial investments  UK   88    (160)    248    69    (82)    151 

Available for sale investments

  Non-UK      56      (49)     105      (166)     (103)    (63) 
Financial investments  Non-UK   (117)    (84)    (33)    (128)    (59)    (69) 

Available for sale investments

  Total      (228)     103      (331)     (189)     (73)    (116) 
Financial investments  Total   (29)    (244)    215    (59)    (141)    82 

Reverse repurchase agreements

  UK     (415)     (216)     (199)     (103)     (150)    47    UK   7    (46)    53    (141)    (332)    191 

Reverse repurchase agreements

  Non-UK      (104)     (79)     (25)     (33)     (14)    (19)   Non-UK   83    (5)    88    81    (358)    439 

Reverse repurchase agreements

  Total      (519)     (295)     (224)     (136)     (164)    28    Total   90    (51)    141    (60)    (690)    630 

Other interest income

         (26)          (26)     176          176        113    -    113    (290)    -    (290) 

Total interest receivable

         (614)     (618)          (1,313)     (538)    (775)       (838)    (617)    (221)    (3,158)    (1,745)    (1,413) 
                 
                 
Interest expense  

2017/2016 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

   

2016/2015 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

 
     

Interest expense

         

 

2015/2014 Change due to

increase/(decrease) in:

  

  

   

 

2014/2013 Change due

to increase/(decrease) in:

  Total change           Volume                    Rate       Total change           Volume                   Rate 
         
 
Total
change
  
  
       Volume     Rate         Total change         Volume    Rate  
         £m     £m     £m     £m     £m    £m  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Deposits by banks

  UK     
(15)
  
        (24)     (41)     (24)    (17)   UK   (49)    (14)    (35)    67    (1)    68 

Deposits by banks

  Non-UK      (4)     (21)     17      (12)     (14)    2    Non-UK       156    (87)    243    12    (31)    43 

Deposits by banks

  Total      (19)     (12)     (7)     (53)     (38)    (15)   Total   107    (101)    208    79    (32)    111 

Customer accounts

  UK             (320)     19              (339)     (609)     22     (631)   UK   441    9    432    (1,897)    124    (2,021) 

Customer accounts

  Non-UK      (339)     (78)     (261)     (610)     (37)    (573)   Non-UK   (96)    (125)    29    567    (201)    768 

Customer accounts

  Total      (659)     (59)     (600)     (1,219)     (15)        (1,204)   Total   345    (116)    461    (1,330)    (77)    (1,253) 

Debt securities in issue

  UK     (209)     (148)     (61)     (165)     (288)    123    UK   74    70    4    353    (56)    409 

Debt securities in issue

  Non-UK      (25)     (53)     28      (39)     (61)    22    Non-UK   (148)    63    (211)    (404)    (145)    (259) 

Debt securities in issue

  Total      (234)     (201)     (33)     (204)     (349)    145    Total   (74)    133    (207)    (51)    (201)    150 

Subordinated liabilities

  UK     23      35      (12)     79      (156)    235    UK   119    75    44    97    121    (24) 

Subordinated liabilities

  Non-UK      (1)     (27)     26      (29)     (19)    (10)   Non-UK   -    -    -    (80)    (33)    (47) 

Subordinated liabilities

  Total      22           14      50      (175)    225    Total   119    75    44    17    88    (71) 

Repurchase agreements

  UK     (208)     (177)     (31)     (47)     (99)    52    UK   (2)    104    (106)    (5)    (344)    339 

Repurchase agreements

  Non-UK      44      (73)     117      (184)     (59)    (125)   Non-UK   179    68    111    (124)    (423)    299 

Repurchase agreements

  Total      (164)     (250)     86      (231)     (158)    (73)   Total   177    172    5    (129)    (767)    638 

Other interest expense

         59           59      11          11        139    -    139    (83)    -    (83) 

Total interest payable

         (995)     (514)     (481)     (1,646)     (735)    (911)       813    163    650    (1,497)    (989)    (508) 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  419    373


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

 

 

Credit risk additional disclosure

This section of the report contains supplementary information that is more detailed or contains longer histories than the data presented in the credit risk management section.

A. Impairment

 

 

Movements in allowance for impairment by geography

                                        
  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

2011

 

£m

 
                  2017                   2016                     2015                   2014                   2013 
  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Allowance for impairment as at 1 January

   5,455      7,258      7,799      10,597     12,432    4,620    4,921    5,455    7,258    7,799 

Effects of the adoption of IFRS 10

                  (1,701)    

Acquisitions and disposals

        13      (5)     (80)    (18)   (5)    (5)    -    13    (5) 

Unwind of discount

   (149)     (153)     (179)     (211)    (243)   (48)    (75)    (149)    (153)    (179) 

Exchange and other adjustments

   (617)     (1,047)     (260)     (206)    (440)   (240)    (736)    (617)    (1,047)    (260) 

Amounts written off:

                    

United Kingdom

   (1,354)     (1,313)     (1,548)     (1,972)    (2,401)   (1,111)    (1,272)    (1,354)    (1,313)    (1,548) 

Europe

   (200)     (742)     (957)     (1,119)    (932)   (157)    (218)    (200)    (742)    (957) 

Americas

   (411)     (535)     (276)     (311)    (954)   (1,038)    (664)    (411)    (535)    (276) 

Africa and Middle East

   (300)     (423)     (534)     (655)    (695)   (9)    (20)    (300)    (423)    (534) 

Asia

   (12)     (24)     (28)     (62)    (183)   (14)    (19)    (12)    (24)    (28) 

Recoveries:

                    

United Kingdom

   281      147      119      127     159    207    241    281    147    119 

Europe

   15      27      18      31     43    18    18    15    27    18 

Americas

   52                       108    104    52    -    - 

Africa and Middle East

   52      46      63      51     56    1    1    52    46    63 

Asia

                         -    1    -    1    1 

New and increased impairment allowance:

                    

United Kingdom

   1,559      1,596      1,687      1,728     2,442    1,714    1,659    1,559    1,596    1,687 

Europe

   399      757      1,131      1,566     1,299    219    350    399    757    1,131 

Americas

   649      378      514      250     438    1,205    1,164    649    378    514 

Africa and Middle East

   438      449      566      853     727    44    73    438    449    566 

Asia

   11      50      31      50     56    5    13    11    50    31 

Reversals of impairment allowance:

                    

United Kingdom

   (320)     (381)     (302)     (356)    (353)   (369)    (288)    (320)   ��(381)    (302) 

Europe

   (141)     (337)     (323)     (463)    (135)   (109)    (90)    (141)    (337)    (323) 

Americas

   (59)     (38)     (4)     (23)    (280)   (13)    (139)    (59)    (38)    (4) 

Africa and Middle East

   (22)     (45)     (45)     (70)    (113)   (21)    (29)    (22)    (45)    (45) 

Asia

   (5)     (8)     (9)     (16)    (50)   (21)    (5)    (5)    (8)    (9) 

Recoveries:

                    

United Kingdom

   (281)     (147)     (119)     (127)    (159)   (207)    (241)    (281)    (147)    (119) 

Europe

   (15)     (27)     (18)     (31)    (43)   (18)    (18)    (15)    (27)    (18) 

Americas

   (52)                      (108)    (104)    (52)    -    - 

Africa and Middle East

   (52)     (46)     (63)     (51)    (56)   (1)    (1)    (52)    (46)    (63) 

Asia

        (1)     (1)     (3)    (7)   -    (1)    -    (1)    (1) 

Allowance for impairment as at 31 December

   4,921      5,455      7,258      7,799     10,597    4,652    4,620    4,921    5,455    7,258 

Average loans and advances for the year

   503,561      505,122      525,995      564,128     548,944    552,874    504,246    503,561    505,122    525,995 

 

420  |  374    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

 

Analysis of impairment charges

                                        
 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

2011

 

£m

  

                2017

 

£m

 

                2016

 

£m

   

                2015

 

£m

 

                2014

 

£m

 

                2013

 

£m

 

Impairment charges:

                       

United Kingdom

   958        1,068        1,266        1,245     1,930    1,138   1,130    960   1,071   1,262 

Europe

   243        393        790        1,072     1,121    92   242    244   392   790 

Americas

   538        340        510        227     158    1,084   921    539   339   510 

Africa and Middle East

   364        358        458        732     558    22   43    7   9   ( 12

Asia

          41        21        31     (1)   ( 16  7    6   41   21 

Impairment on loans and advances

   2,109        2,200        3,045        3,307     3,766    2,320   2,343    1,756   1,852   2,571 

Impairment on available for sale assets

   17        (31)              40     1,860    3   21    18   ( 31  - 

Impairment on reverse repurchase agreements

          (5)              (3)    (48)   -   -    -   ( 5  8 

Impairment charges

   2,126        2,164        3,054        3,344     5,578    2,323   2,364    1,774   1,816   2,579 

Other credit provisions charge

   (12)              17        (4)    24    13   9    ( 12  5   17 

Impairment charges

           2,114                2,168                3,071                3,340             5,602    2,336   2,373    1,762   1,821   2,596 

The industry classifications in the tables below have been prepared at the level of the borrowing entity. This means that a loan to a subsidiary of a major corporation is classified by the industry in which the subsidiary operates, even though the Parent’s predominant business may be in a different industry.

 

Total impairment charges on loans and advances by industry

                                              
                   2017                    2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2013

 

£m

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2012

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

2011

 

£m

  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

United Kingdom:

                          

Financial institutions

   (4)       (9)              30     83    (42)    (1)    (4)    (9)    2 

Manufacturing

   (8)        ��     44        12     41    (11)    39    (8)    1    44 

Construction

   10               23        25     22    10    7    10    8    23 

Property

   11        10        25        82     59    (10)    (13)    11    10    25 

Energy and water

   42                             35    12    42    -    - 

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   38        54        52        109     297    51    38    38    54    52 

Business and other services

   108        73        86        138     138    220    56    110    76    82 

Home loans

   27        28        38        18     66    31    (4)    27    28    38 

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   735        893        980        799     1,200    856    975    735    893    980 

Other

   (1)       10        16        31     19    (2)    20    (1)    10    16 

Total United Kingdom

   958        1,068        1,266        1,245     1,930    1,138    1,129    960    1,071    1,262 

Overseas

   1,151        1,132        1,779        2,062     1,836    1,182    1,214    796    781    1,309 

Total Impairment charges

           2,109                2,200                3,045                3,307             3,766    2,320    2,343    1,756    1,852    2,571 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  421    375


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

Allowance for impairment by industry

Allowance for impairment by industry

Allowance for impairment by industry 
  2017   2016   2015   2014   2013 
  

 

 

 

          2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

          2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

          2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

           2012

 

  

  

 

 

 

              2011

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

   %     £m     %     £m     %     £m     %     £m    %  £m   %   £m   %   £m   %   £m   %   £m   % 

United Kingdom:

                                        

Financial institutions

   10      0.2           0.2      23      0.3      411      5.3      456     4.3    11    0.2    5    0.1    10    0.2    9    0.2    23    0.3 

Manufacturing

   30      0.6      32      0.6      84      1.2      37      0.5      97     0.9    34    0.7    60    1.3    30    0.6    32    0.6    84    1.2 

Construction

   32      0.7      33      0.6      45      0.6      31      0.4      53     0.5    37    0.8    35    0.8    32    0.7    33    0.6    45    0.6 

Property

   122      2.5      140      2.6      73      1.0      118      1.5      121     1.1    48    1.0    89    1.9    122    2.5    140    2.6    73    1.0 

Government and central bank

                       18      0.2                       1    -    -    -    -    -    -    -    18    0.2 

Energy and water

   90      1.8                                           108    2.3    114    2.5    90    1.8    -    -    1    - 

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   124      2.5      137      2.5      124      1.7      243      3.1      378     3.6    186    4.0    143    3.1    124    2.5    137    2.5    124    1.7 

Business and other services

   238      4.8      205      3.8      202      2.8      217      2.8      258     2.4    482    10.4    252    5.5    238    4.8    205    3.8    202    2.8 

Home loans

   157      3.2      123      2.3      111      1.5      129      1.7      134     1.3    137    2.9    144    3.1    157    3.2    123    2.3    111    1.5 

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   1,652      33.6      1,912      35.1      2,228      30.7      2,043      26.2      2,469     23.3    1,671    35.9    1,653    35.8    1,652    33.6    1,912    35.1    2,228    30.7 

Other

   37      0.8      60      1.1      71      1.0      41      0.5      39     0.4    42    0.9    49    1.1    37    0.8    61    1.1    71    1.0 

Total United Kingdom

   2,492      50.6      2,652      48.6      2,980      41.1      3,270      41.9      4,005     37.8    2,757    59.3    2,544    55.1    2,492    50.6    2,652    48.6    2,980    41.1 

Overseas

   2,429      49.4      2,803      51.4      4,278      58.9      4,529      58.1      6,592     62.2    1,895    40.7    2,076    44.9    2,429    49.4    2,803    51.4    4,278    58.9 

Total

   4,921      100.0      5,455      100.0      7,258      100.0      7,799      100.0      10,597     100.0        4,652        100.0        4,620        100.0        4,921        100.0        5,455        100.0        7,258        100.0 
                    
                    

Amounts written off and recovered by industry

Amounts written off and recovered by industry

Amounts written off and recovered by industry 
  

 

 

 

Amounts written off

 

  

  

 

 

 

Recoveries of amounts previously written off  

 
  Amounts written off   Recoveries of amounts previously written off 
  2017   2016   2015   2014   2013   2017   2016   2015   2014   2013 

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

 

 

2015  

 

£m

 

  

 

  

  

 

 

 

 

 

2014  

 

£m

 

  

 

  

   

 

 

2013  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2012  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2011  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2015  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2014  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2013  

 

£m

  

 

  

   

 

 

2012  

 

£m

  

 

  

  

2011  

 

£m

  

 

£m

   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

United Kingdom:

                                        

Financial institutions

             13      55      67           11                  2    2    3    1    13    47    1    8    11    1 

Manufacturing

        13      55      76      28                            2    15    6    13    55    3    3    2    6    4 

Construction

   13      21      26      52      45                            10    5    13    21    26    3    1    3    3    2 

Property

   24      19      34      95      71      13      17                  22    18    24    19    34    1    11    13    17    1 

Energy and water

                                                  32    -    -    -    1    -    2    2    -    - 

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   94      48      78      246      229      17      13           13     39    23    25    94    48    78    8    5    17    13    4 

Business and other services

   65      59      138      200      127      15      10      19      22        105    52    65    59    138    9    10    15    10    19 

Home loans

   22      15      39      36      45                            13    11    22    15    39    -    -    3    2    2 

Cards, unsecured and other personal lending

   1,113      994      1,127      1,184      1,739      214      81      82      73     102    897    1,134    1,113    994    1,127    132    206    214    81    82 

Other

   14      144      37      27      47                            5    10    14    144    37    4    2    4    4    4 

Total United Kingdom

   1,354      1,314      1,548      1,972      2,401      281      147      119      127     159    1,111    1,272    1,354    1,314    1,548    207    241    281    147    119 

Overseas

   923      1,723      1,795      2,147      2,764      119      74      82      85     106    1,218    921    923    1,723    1,795    127    125    119    74    82 

Total

   2,277      3,037      3,343      4,119      5,165      400      221      201      212     265        2,329        2,193        2,277        3,037        3,343        334        366        400        221        201 

 

 

Impairment ratios

                                              
            2017               2016             2015            2014            2013 
  

 

 

 

 

 

2015 

 

%

 

  

 

  

    

 

 

 

 

 

2014 

 

%

 

  

 

  

     

 

 

2013 

 

%

  

 

  

     

 

 

2012 

 

%

  

 

  

  

2011 

 

%

  %   %   %   %   % 

Impairment charges as a percentage of average loans and advances

   0.42        0.44        0.58        0.59     0.69    0.42    0.46    0.42    0.44    0.58 

Amounts written off (net of recoveries) as a percentage of average loans and advances

   0.37        0.56        0.60        0.69     0.89    0.36    0.36    0.37    0.56    0.60 

Allowance for impairment balance as a percentage of loans and advances as at 31 December

   1.10        1.15        1.54        1.65     2.16    1.15    1.05    1.10    1.15    1.54 

 

422  |  376    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

B. Potential credit risk loans

    
Credit Risk Loans Summary                
   2017   2016   2015   2014   2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Impaired loans   4,404     4,614     5,635     6,854     10,510  
Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest   1,268     1,474     1,744     1,912     1,903  
Impaired and restructured loans   322     403     438     723     885  
Credit risk loans     5,994       6,491       7,817       9,489       13,298  
          
   
Credit risk loans           
   2017   2016   2015   2014   2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Impaired loans:          
United Kingdom   2,648     2,688     2,747     3,090     3,986  
Europe   935     1,078     1,198     2,011     4,137  
Americas   687     641     499     317     683  
Africa and Middle East   89     140     1,106     1,353     1,626  
Asia   45     67     85     83     78  
Total   4,404     4,614     5,635     6,854     10,510  
Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest:          
United Kingdom   752     810     848     971     953  
Europe   240     331     300     354     503  
Americas   276     320     185     149     81  
Africa and Middle East       13     411     437     364  
Asia                    
Total   1,268     1,474     1,744     1,912     1,903  
Impaired and restructured loans:          
United Kingdom   179     217     286     559     734  
Europe           33     31     13  
Americas   138     180     117     90     81  
Africa and Middle East               42     56  
Asia                    
Total   322     403     438     723     885  
Total credit risk loans:          
United Kingdom   3,579     3,715     3,881     4,620     5,673  
Europe   1,180     1,415     1,531     2,396     4,653  
Americas   1,101     1,141     801     556     845  
Africa and Middle East   89     153     1,519     1,832     2,046  
Asia   45     67     85     85     81  
Credit risk loans   5,994     6,491     7,817     9,489     13,298  

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    377


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

   
Potential problem loans           
      
           2017           2016           2015           2014           2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
United Kingdom   945     1,302     983     942     1,112  
Europe   124     209     158     208     285  
Americas   328     599     487     146     99  
Africa and Middle East   20     32     408     306     310  
Asia       54     14     10      
Potential problem loans   1,426     2,196     2,050     1,612     1,808  
                      
      
Interest foregone on credit risk loans                         
           2017                   2016                   2015 
    £m        £m        £m 

 

Interest income that would have been recognised under the original contractual terms

          

 

United Kingdom

   87       91       139  

 

Rest of the World

   151          196          151  

 

Total

   238          287          290  
                      
   
Total impairment allowance coverage of potential credit risk loans           
           2017           2016           2015           2014           2013 
As at 31 December  %   %   %   %   % 
United Kingdom   77.0     68.5     64.2     57.4     52.5  
Europe   46.4     48.4     53.3     50.9     53.4  
Americas   112.7     109.3     89.2     89.7     77.4  
Africa and Middle East   93.3     58.2     55.3     54.7     52.7  
Asia   51.1     82.1     70.3     96.5     72.8  
Total coverage of credit risk lending   77.6     71.2     63.0     57.5     54.6  
                          
   
Total impairment allowance coverage of potential credit risk loans           
           2017           2016           2015           2014           2013 
As at 31 December  %   %   %   %   % 
United Kingdom   60.9     50.7     51.2     48.7     43.9  
Europe   42.0     42.2     48.3     46.9     50.3  
Americas   86.8     71.7     55.5     71.1      69.3   
Africa and Middle East   76.1     48.1     43.6     46.9     45.8  
Asia   42.6     45.5     60.4     86.3     71.1  
Total coverage of potential credit risk lending   62.7     53.2     49.9     49.7     48.0  

378    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

C. Maturity analysis of loans and advances

   
Maturity analysis of loans and advances to customers         
   

On

        demand

  

        Not more

than

three

months

  

Over

three

    months

but not

more

than six

months

  

    Over six

months

but not

more

than one

year

  

    Over one

year but

not more

than

three

years

  

Over

three

    years but

not more

than five

years

  

Over five

    years but

not more

than ten

years

  

    Over ten

years

            Total
As at 31 December 2017  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m
United Kingdom                  
Corporate lending   2,699    19,776    1,858    3,274    26,251    12,797    4,860    13,253    84,768 
Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom   3,441    3,528    2,500    5,051    18,048    15,847    35,346    87,930    171,691 
Total United Kingdom   6,140    23,304    4,358    8,325    44,299    28,644    40,206    101,183    256,459 
Europe   4,349    16,863    1,107    1,548    6,590    3,313    2,622    3,843    40,235 
Americas   2,514    25,624    2,502    3,870    10,712    7,236    5,652    6,377    64,487 
Africa and Middle East   166    962    157    127    730    274    102    106    2,624 
Asia   73    4,281    484    626    433    274    95    133    6,399 
Total loans and advances to customers   13,242    71,034    8,608    14,496    62,764    39,741    48,677    111,642    370,204 
As at 31 December 2016                  
United Kingdom                  
Corporate lending   14,810    20,056    1,127    2,929    14,917    14,123    4,478    13,626    86,066 
Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom   3,544    3,768    2,489    5,181    19,484    16,020    34,367    85,377    170,230 
Total United Kingdom   18,354    23,824    3,616    8,110    34,401    30,143    38,845    99,003    256,296 
Europe   5,295    21,497    1,076    1,948    5,618    4,917    2,870    4,515    47,736 
Americas   3,442    35,518    2,330    4,781    13,982    8,822    6,646    6,771    82,292 
Africa and Middle East   210    861    200    307    578    870    93    59    3,178 
Asia   895    4,482    454    764    912    307    74    14    7,902 
Total loans and advances to customers   28,196    86,182    7,676    15,910    55,491    45,059    48,528    110,362    397,404 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    379


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 
Maturity analysis of loans and advances to banks 
   

On

        demand

  

        Not more

than

three

months

  

Over

three

        months

but not

more

than six

months

  

        Over six

months

but not

more

than one

year

  

        Over one

year but

not more

than

three

years

  

Over

three

        years but

not more

than five

years

  

Over five

    years but

not more

than ten

years

  

        Over ten

years

              Total
As at 31 December 2017  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m
United Kingdom   339    9,093    778    9    7    -    -    25    10,251 
Europe   673    10,951    11    -    132    -    -    80    11,847 
Americas   1,195    6,579    70    93    94    -    -    13    8,044 
Africa and Middle East   243    1,232    15    99    107    -    -    18    1,714 
Asia   989    2,372    382    1    -    11    -    52    3,807 
Total loans and advances to banks   3,439    30,227    1,256    202    340    11    -    188    35,663 
As at 31 December 2016                  
United Kingdom   270    5,624    1,485    34    45    -    -    -    7,458 
Europe   1,178    11,398    12    25    61    -    -    -    12,674 
Americas   1,887    14,329    136    211    313    18    -    -    16,894 
Africa and Middle East   224    772    305    331    146    -    -    -    1,778 
Asia   1,299    2,224    815    12    83    1    13    -    4,447 
Total loans and advances to banks   4,858    34,347    2,753    613    648    19    13    -    43,251 

380    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

B. Potential credit risk loans

D. Industrial and Geographical Concentrations of Loans and Advances

 

 

Credit risk loans summary

                       
  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

   2013     2012    2011

As at 31 December

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

£m

Impaired loansa

   5,635      6,854      10,510      11,747     17,326 

Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest

   1,744      1,912      1,903      2,490     3,179 

Impaired and restructured loans

 

   438      723      885      788     837 

Credit risk loans

 

   7,817      9,489      13,298      15,025     21,342 

    

          

 

Credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012    2011

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

   £m     £m    £m

Impaired loans:

          

United Kingdoma

   2,747      3,090      3,986      4,717     5,801 

Europe

   1,198      2,011      4,137      4,433     5,261 

Americas

   499      317      683      357     3,759 

Africa and Middle East

   1,106      1,353      1,626      2,167     2,408 

Asia

 

   85      83      78      73     97 

Total

 

   5,635      6,854      10,510      11,747     17,326 

Accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest:

          

United Kingdoma

   848      971      953      1,227     1,216 

Europe

   300      354      503      476     650 

Americas

   185      149      81      96     110 

Africa and Middle East

   411      437      364      688     1,195 

Asia

 

                      

Total

 

   1,744      1,912      1,903      2,490     3,179 

Impaired and restructured loans:

          

United Kingdom

   286      559      734      615     643 

Europe

   33      31      13      27     60 

Americas

   117      90      81      116     124 

Africa and Middle East

        42      56      25     

Asia

                      

Total

   438      723      885      788     837 

Total credit risk loans:

          

United Kingdoma

   3,881      4,620      5,673      6,559     7,660 

Europe

   1,531      2,396      4,653      4,936     5,971 

Americas

   801      556      845      569     3,993 

Africa and Middle East

   1,519      1,832      2,046      2,880     3,610 

Asia

   85      85      81      81     108 

Credit risk loans

   7,817      9,489      13,298      15,025     21,342 

a2014 impaired loans, accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest and total credit risk loans within the United Kingdom have been revised by £55m, £96m and £151m respectively to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.
 
Loans and advances to customers by industry 
   2017                   2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Financial institutions   74,942    91,826    80,785    103,503    103,703 
Manufacturing   9,316    12,470    12,444    11,849    10,632 
Construction   3,288    3,525    3,798    3,767    4,245 
Property   20,524    20,856    20,019    19,544    20,844 
Government and central bank   9,434    12,029    5,942    7,127    4,999 
Energy and water   6,229    7,565    7,874    8,557    7,547 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   12,680    13,143    14,034    13,635    13,288 
Business and other services   21,001    22,135    26,092    22,803    20,663 
Home loans   147,460    145,184    156,384    167,520    180,295 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   57,245    59,851    63,217    58,914    55,806 
Other   8,085    8,820    13,549    16,003    19,463 
Loans and advances to customers   370,204    397,404    404,138    433,222    441,485 
                          
 
Loans and advances to customers in the UK 
   2017                   2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Financial institutions   20,055    22,214    18,530    23,728    22,101 
Manufacturing   6,234    6,816    5,735    6,274    5,411 
Construction   3,029    3,254    3,164    2,957    3,195 
Property   18,243    18,145    15,556    15,053    15,096 
Government and central bank   7,292    6,654    512    276    819 
Energy and water   2,669    2,348    1,922    2,096    1,715 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   10,623    10,586    10,382    9,997    9,734 
Business and other services   16,391    16,427    16,314    13,944    13,052 
Home loans   134,820    131,945    132,324    132,864    129,703 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   30,786    31,260    30,452    28,061    30,396 
Other   6,317    6,647    6,687    8,944    8,444 
Loans and advances to customers in the UK   256,459    256,296    241,578    244,194    239,666 
                          
 
Loans and advances to customers in Europe 
   2017                   2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Financial institutions   16,374    19,803    16,918    22,126    17,791 
Manufacturing   1,399    2,613    2,352    1,641    2,051 
Construction   80    30    68    193    625 
Property   761    1,047    796    1,175    2,652 
Government and central bank   1,635    3,545    3,415    3,759    1,583 
Energy and water   1,012    1,497    1,280    2,612    3,119 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   871    944    711    1,105    1,524 
Business and other services   1,216    1,170    3,355    1,878    2,882 
Home loans   11,578    12,189    12,503    19,933    35,110 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   4,483    4,283    5,047    5,226    7,146 
Other   826    615    1,743    1,589    2,014 
Loans and advances to customers in Europe   40,235    47,736    48,188    61,237    76,497 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  423    381


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

 

Potential problem loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

2012

 

  

  

 

2011

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

£m

 

United Kingdoma

   983      942      1,112      1,035     1,110 

Europe

   158      208      285      430     530 

Americas

   487      146      99      80     106 

Africa and Middle East

   408      306      310      314     217 

Asia

 

   

 

14 

 

  

 

   

 

10 

 

  

 

   

 

 

  

 

   

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

Potential problem loans

 

  

 

 

 

 

2,050 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,612 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,808 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,860 

 

 

  

 

  

 

1,972 

 

 

   

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

2013

 

Interest foregone on credit risk loans

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

£m

 

Interest income that would have been recognised under the original contractual terms

      

United Kingdom

               139                  195                 194 

Rest of the World

 

   

 

151 

 

  

 

   

 

173 

 

  

 

  

217 

 

 

Total

 

  

 

 

 

 

290 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

368 

 

 

  

 

  

 

411 

 

 

 

Total impairment allowance coverage of credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

2012

 

  

  

 

 

 

2011

 

  

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

United Kingdomb

   64.2      57.4      52.5      49.9      52.3   

Europe

   53.3      50.9      53.4      52.8      48.9   

Americas

   90.5      89.7      77.4      83.0      53.3   

Africa and Middle East

   55.3      54.7      52.7      48.0      40.1   

Asia

 

   

 

57.9 

 

  

 

   

 

 

96.5 

 

 

  

 

 

   

 

72.8 

 

  

 

   

 

86.4 

 

  

 

   

 

90.7 

 

  

 

 

Total coverage of credit risk lending

 

  

 

 

 

 

63.0 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

57.5 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

54.6 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

51.9 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.7 

 

 

  

 

    

          

 

Total impairment allowance coverage of potential credit risk loans

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

  

 

 

 

2014

 

  

  

 

 

 

2013

 

  

  

 

 

 

2012

 

  

  

 

 

 

2011

 

  

 

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

%

 

 

  

 

United Kingdomb

   51.2      48.7      43.9      43.1      45.7   

Europe

   48.3      46.9      50.3      48.6      44.9   

Americas

   56.3      71.1      69.3      72.7      51.9   

Africa and Middle East

   43.6      46.9      45.8      43.2      37.8   

Asia

 

   

 

49.5 

 

  

 

   

 

86.3 

 

  

 

   

 

71.1 

 

  

 

   

 

85.4 

 

  

 

   

 

83.8 

 

  

 

 

Total coverage of potential credit risk lending

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.9 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

49.7 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

48.0 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

46.2 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

45.5 

 

 

  

 

 
Loans and advances to customers in the Americas 
                     2017                     2016                     2015                     2014                     2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Financial institutions   33,455    45,193    39,798    49,171    49,457 
Manufacturing   1,275    2,516    1,562    1,458    1,308 
Construction   147    204    120    119    19 
Property   1,289    1,472    1,720    1,542    944 
Government and central bank   14    125    3    320    371 
Energy and water   2,004    2,720    2,914    2,487    1,496 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   666    985    934    490    473 
Business and other services   3,047    3,904    3,363    3,262    2,227 
Home loans   567    595    624    770    783 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   21,486    23,700    18,140    15,666    12,936 
Other   537    878    1,350    1,775    1,301 
Loans and advances to customers in the Americas   64,487    82,292    70,528    77,060    71,315 

 

a2014 potential problem loans within the United Kingdom have been revised by £121m to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.
b2014 impairment allowance coverage of credit risk loans and of potential credit risk loans within the United Kingdom have been revised to align methodology for determining arrears categories with other Home Finance risk disclosures.
 
Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East 
                     2017                     2016                     2015                     2014                     2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Financial institutions   790    427    1,860    4,169    6,298 
Manufacturing   17    60    2,320    1,856    1,229 
Construction   -    2    363    403    379 
Property   153    96    1,780    1,579    2,029 
Government and central bank   239    483    613    997    1,090 
Energy and water   260    494    1,025    645    739 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   219    328    1,837    1,831    1,378 
Business and other services   65    237    2,685    3,358    2,058 
Home loans   378    357    10,689    13,591    14,347 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   406    494    8,081    8,605    4,043 
Other   97    200    3,047    3,210    7,073 
Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East   2,624    3,178    34,300    40,244    40,663 

 
Loans and advances to customers in Asia 
                     2017                     2016                     2015                     2014                     2013 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Financial institutions   4,268    4,189    3,679    4,309    8,056 
Manufacturing   391    465    475    620    633 
Construction   32    35    83    95    27 
Property   78    96    167    195    123 
Government and central bank   254    1,222    1,399    1,775    1,136 
Energy and water   284    506    733    717    478 
Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure   301    300    170    212    179 
Business and other services   282    397    375    361    444 
Home loans   117    98    244    362    352 
Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending   84    114    1,497    1,356    1,285 
Other   308    480    722    485    631 
Loans and advances to customers in Asia   6,399    7,902    9,544    10,487    13,344 

 

424  |  382    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

C. Maturity Analysis of Loans and Advances

 

 

Maturity analysis of loans and advances to customers

 

  

                    
 As at 31 December 2015  

On

 

demand

 

£m

   

Not more

 

than

 

three

��

months

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than six

 

months

 

£m

   

Over six

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than one

 

year

 

£m

   

Over one

 

year but

 

no more

 

than

 

three

 

years

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

years but

 

not more

 

than five

 

years

 

£m

   

Over five

 

years but

 

not more

 

than ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Over ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Total

 

£m

 

United Kingdom

                  

Corporate lending

   14,634      14,957      2,791      3,301      12,692      13,922      4,585      11,307      78,189   

Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom

   3,811      4,157      2,454      5,248      18,925      15,911      33,604      79,279      163,389   

Total United Kingdom

   18,445      19,114      5,245      8,549      31,617      29,833      38,189      90,586      241,578   

Europe

   4,459      19,236      4,639      1,957      4,865      4,400      3,351      5,281      48,188   

Americas

   3,090      30,144      2,788      5,336      10,987      8,450      4,926      4,807      70,528   

Africa and Middle East

   4,034      3,021      1,503      2,435      7,057      5,855      4,485      5,910      34,300   

Asia

   509      5,169      578      1,410      1,092      544      175      67      9,544   

Total loans and advances to customers

   30,537      76,684      14,753      19,687      55,618      49,082      51,126      106,651      404,138   

As at 31 December 2014

                  

United Kingdom

                  

Corporate lending

   15,773      19,881      1,898      3,339      12,569      12,253      4,774      11,144      81,631   

Other lending to customers in the United Kingdom

   3,974      3,595      2,309      4,574      17,686      16,350      32,634      81,441      162,563   

Total United Kingdom

   19,747      23,476      4,207      7,913      30,255      28,603      37,408      92,585      244,194   

Europe

   5,049      24,717      1,404      1,692      5,901      5,408      5,116      11,950      61,237   

Americas

   2,624      42,198      1,487      3,800      9,219      8,665      4,382      4,685      77,060   

Africa and Middle East

   4,847      2,875      2,126      2,220      8,769      5,552      6,417      7,438      40,244   

Asia

   491      6,103      513      692      1,609      814      170      95      10,487   

Total loans and advances to customers

   32,758      99,369      9,737      16,317      55,753      49,042      53,493      116,753      433,222   
       
Interest rate sensitivity of loans and advances                              
       2017           2016     
           Fixed ratea           Variable rate           Total           Fixed ratea           Variable rate           Total 
As at 31 December  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Banks   15,282    20,381    35,663    14,047    29,204    43,251 
Customers   126,009    244,195    370,204    124,995    272,409    397,404 

Notes

aFixed rate includes settlement balances and othernon-interest bearing loans.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  425


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Maturity analysis of loans and advances to banks

 

  

                    
 As at 31 December 2015  

On

 

demand

 

£m

   

Not more

 

than

 

three

 

months

 

£m

   

 

Over

 

three

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than six

 

months

 

£m

   

Over six

 

months

 

but not

 

more

 

than one

 

year

 

£m

   

Over one

 

year but

 

no more

 

than

 

three

 

years

 

£m

   

Over

 

three

 

years but

 

not more

 

than five

 

years

 

£m

   

Over five

 

years but

 

not more

 

than ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Over ten

 

years

 

£m

   

Total

 

£m

 

United Kingdom

   441      9,520      560           199      13                10,733   

Europe

   1,109      7,885      832      26      66                     9,918   

Americas

   1,193      10,980      244      327      308      26                13,078   

Africa and Middle East

   1,173      880      102      306      404                34      2,900   

Asia

   1,438      2,274      216      175      602           12           4,720   

Total loans and advances to banks

   5,354      31,539      1,954      834      1,579      43      12      34      41,349   

As at 31 December 2014

                  

United Kingdom

   623      6,159      327      325      38                     7,472   

Europe

   2,032      10,375      68           314                     12,793   

Americas

   1,172      10,914      893      186      18      20      24           13,227   

Africa and Middle East

   939      1,086      502      478      245                     3,250   

Asia

   1,109      2,604      1,446      176      22           12           5,369   

Total loans and advances to banks

   5,875      31,138      3,236      1,169      637      20      36           42,111   

426  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F    383


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

    

    

 

D. Industrial and Geographical Concentrations of Loans and Advances

 

                                                                                          

 

Loans and advances to customers by industry

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012     2011  

As at 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Financial institutions

   80,785      103,503      103,703      93,745      93,380   

Manufacturing

   12,444      11,849      10,632      11,907      13,264   

Construction

   3,798      3,767      4,245      4,625      4,931   

Property

   20,019      19,544      20,844      22,575      25,087   

Government and central bank

   5,942      7,127      4,999      4,809      6,135   

Energy and water

   7,874      8,557      7,547      7,638      7,425   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   14,034      13,635      13,288      15,070      16,818   

Business and other services

   26,092      22,803      20,663      24,722      27,214   

Home loans

   156,384      167,520      180,295      172,875      172,106   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   63,217      58,914      55,806      58,863      53,783   

Other

   13,549      16,003      19,463      21,530      23,688   

Loans and advances to customers

   404,138      433,222      441,485      438,359      443,831   
          

 

Loans and advances to customers in the UK

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012     2011  

As at 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Financial institutions

   18,530      23,728      22,101      22,290      20,257   

Manufacturing

   5,735      6,274      5,411      6,078      6,282   

Construction

   3,164      2,957      3,195      3,108      3,444   

Property

   15,556      15,053      15,096      15,283      16,351   

Government and central bank

   512      276      819      198      123   

Energy and water

   1,922      2,096      1,715      2,286      1,598   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   10,382      9,997      9,734      9,810      10,686   

Business and other services

   16,314      13,944      13,052      15,971      16,731   

Home loans

   132,324      132,864      129,703      119,781      112,394   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   30,452      28,061      30,396      31,772      29,881   

Other

   6,687      8,944      8,444      9,476      8,404   

Loans and advances to customers in the UK

   241,578      244,194      239,666      236,053      226,151   
          

 

Loans and advances to customers in Europe

  

 

 

 

2015

 

  

   2014     2013     2012     2011  

As at 31 December

   £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  

Financial institutions

   16,918      22,126      17,791      20,245      20,255   

Manufacturing

   2,352      1,641      2,051      2,827      3,545   

Construction

   68      193      625      663      943   

Property

   796      1,175      2,652      3,242      4,023   

Government and central bank

   3,415      3,759      1,583      2,458      2,167   

Energy and water

   1,280      2,612      3,119      2,376      2,453   

Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

   711      1,105      1,524      2,588      3,134   

Business and other services

   3,355      1,878      2,882      2,985      5,498   

Home loans

   12,503      19,933      35,110      36,965      38,732   

Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

   5,047      5,226      7,146      6,346      6,875   

Other

   1,743      1,589      2,014      2,471      5,711   

Loans and advances to customers in Europe

   48,188      61,237      76,497      83,166      93,336   
          

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  427


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

 Loans and advances to customers in the Americas

    

 

 

 

2015

 

  

     2014       2013       2012       2011  
 As at 31 December     £m       £m       £m       £m       £m  

 Financial institutions

           39,798              49,171              49,457              43,428              46,636   

 Manufacturing

     1,562        1,458        1,308        1,229        1,400   

 Construction

     120        119        19               33   

 Property

     1,720        1,542        944        686        882   

 Government and central bank

            320        371        785        620   

 Energy and water

     2,914        2,487        1,496        1,761        2,170   

 Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     934        490        473        739        661   

 Business and other services

     3,363        3,262        2,227        2,368        1,605   

 Home loans

     624        770        783        480        566   

 Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     18,140        15,666        12,936        12,047        9,691   

 Other

     1,350        1,775        1,301        1,235        1,319   
      

 Loans and advances to customers in the Americas

     70,528        77,060        71,315        64,759        65,583   

     

                    

 

 Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East

    

 

 

 

2015

 

  

     2014       2013       2012       2011  
 As at 31 December     £m       £m       £m       £m       £m  

 Financial institutions

     1,860        4,169        6,298        4,546        2,343   

 Manufacturing

     2,320        1,856        1,229        1,252        1,459   

 Construction

     363        403        379        829        444   

 Property

     1,780        1,579        2,029        3,117        3,618   

 Government and central bank

     613        997        1,090        1,368        2,796   

 Energy and water

     1,025        645        739        822        819   

 Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     1,837        1,831        1,378        1,833        2,170   

 Business and other services

     2,685        3,358        2,058        2,760        3,012   

 Home loans

     10,689        13,591        14,347        15,376        19,912   

 Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     8,081        8,605        4,043        7,540        6,521   

 Other

     3,047        3,210        7,073        7,827        7,660   
      

 Loans and advances to customers in Africa and Middle East

     34,300        40,244        40,663        47,270        50,754   

    

                    

 

 Loans and advances to customers in Asia

    

 

 

 

2015

 

  

     2014       2013       2012       2011  
 As at 31 December     £m       £m       £m       £m       £m  

 Financial institutions

     3,679        4,309        8,056        3,236        3,889   

 Manufacturing

     475        620        633        521        578   

 Construction

     83        95        27        24        67   

 Property

     167        195        123        247        213   

 Government and central bank

     1,399        1,775        1,136               429   

 Energy and water

     733        717        478        393        385   

 Wholesale and retail distribution and leisure

     170        212        179        100        167   

 Business and other services

     375        361        444        638        368   

 Home loans

     244        362        352        273        502   

 Cards, unsecured loans and other personal lending

     1,497        1,356        1,285        1,158        815   

 Other

     722        485        631        521        594   
      

 Loans and advances to customers in Asia

     9,544        10,487        13,344        7,111        8,007   

428  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

 

Interest rate sensitivity of loans and

advances

 

        

 

2015

 

  

 

             

 

2014

 

  

 

     

As at 31 December

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Variable rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Fixed rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Variable rate

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total

 

£m

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

Banks

 

   

 

12,348  

 

  

 

   

 

29,001  

 

  

 

   

 

41,349  

 

  

 

   

 

12,949  

 

  

 

   

 

29,162  

 

  

 

   

 

42,111  

 

  

 

 

Customers

 

   

 

      121,960  

 

  

 

   

 

      282,178  

 

  

 

   

 

      404,138  

 

  

 

   

 

      134,086  

 

  

 

   

 

      299,136  

 

  

 

   

 

      433,222  

 

  

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  429


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

  

Foreign outstandings in currencies other than the local currency of the borrower for countries where this exceeds 0.75% of total

Group assets

  

  

       

As % of

 

     

Total

 

     

Banks

 

and other

 

financial

 

institutions

 

     

Government

 

and official

 

institutions

 

     

 

Commercial

 

industrial

 

and other

 

private

 

sectors

 

 
       

assets

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

 
       
 

As at 31 December 2015a

                    
 

United States

     6.9        76,744        11,648        18,422        46,674   
 

Germany

     1.7        18,564        10,054        5,916        2,594   
 

France

     1.6        18,388        6,250        7,694        4,444   
 

Netherlands

     0.9        10,574        1,074        3,208        6,292   
 

Cayman Islands

     1.0        10,748        78               10,669   
 

Switzerland

     0.8        9,336        1,452        6,642        1,242   
 

    

                                                       
 

 

As at 31 December 2014

                    
 

United States

     6.2        84,606        7,196        23,409        54,001   
 

Germany

     1.4        19,481        8,381        8,620        2,480   
 

France

     2.0        26,884        12,632        5,919        8,333   
 

Netherlands

     1.1        15,080        1,437        3,279        10,364   
 

Cayman Islands

     0.9        12,480        49               12,430   
 

    

                                   
 

As at 31 December 2013

                    
 

United States

     6.3        82,471        7,656        15,997        58,818   
 

Germany

     2.1        27,584        6,757        5,785        15,042   
 

France

     2.9        38,350        18,038        9,422        10,890   
 

Netherlands

     1.2        15,184        3,132        4,450        7,602   
 

Spain

             1.0                12,622        9,111        1,068        2,443   

  

 

Off-Balance Sheet and other Credit Exposures

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

  

As at 31 December

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

 

Off-balance sheet exposures

      
 

Contingent liabilities

   20,621      21,324      21,184   
 

Commitments

           282,307              291,262              275,571   
 

On-balance sheet exposures

      
 

Trading portfolio assets

   77,348      114,717      133,069   
 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   76,830      38,300      38,968   
 

Derivative financial instruments

   327,709      439,909      350,300   
  

Available for sale financial investments

 

   

 

90,267 

 

  

 

   

 

86,066 

 

  

 

   

 

91,756 

 

  

 

           
  

 

Notional principal amounts of credit derivatives

 

  

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

  

As at 31 December

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

   

 

£m

 

  

 

  

 

Credit derivatives held or issued for trading purposesb

 

  

 

 

 

 

948,646 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,183,963 

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,576,184 

 

 

  

 

 
Foreign outstandings in currencies other than the local currency of the borrower for countries where this exceeds 0.75% of total Group assets 
   As % of                       Total   

Banks

and other

financial

            institutions

   

            Government

and official

institutions

   

            Commercial

industrial

and other

private

sectors

 
    assets   £m   £m   £m   £m 
As at 31 December 2017a          
United States   12.8    137,943    10,054    10,294    117,595 
Germany   2.4    24,319    9,618    9,958    4,743 
France   4.3    41,740    26,046    4,937    10,757 
Cayman Islands   2.2    16,408    -    -    16,408 
Switzerland   1.0    11,683    547    9,442    1,694 
Netherlands   0.8    7,154    26    1,825    5,303 
Spain   0.8    7,961    5,059    1,603    1,299 
Hong Kong   0.9    9,931    465    24    9,442 
As at 31 December 2016a,b          
United States   7.9    96,802    11,749    10,149    74,904 
Germany   1.6    18,044    10,204    4,685    3,155 
France   2.9    33,098    20,584    4,182    8,332 
Cayman Islands   2.1    16,312    28    2    16,282 
Switzerland   0.8    10,168    652    7,533    1,983 
As at 31 December 2015a,b          
United States   7.0    78,117    11,648    18,422    48,047 
Germany   1.7    19,541    11,031    5,916    2,594 
France   2.1    23,227    11,089    7,694    4,444 
Netherlands   1.0    10,709    1,209    3,208    6,292 
Cayman Islands   1.0    11,388    78    1    11,309 
Switzerland   0.8    9,336    1,452    6,642    1,242 

Note

 

aFigures are net of short securities.
bPrior year numbers have been restated.

      
Off-Balance Sheet and other Credit Exposures                     
                         2017                            2016                            2015 
As at 31 December        £m   £m   £m 
Off-balance sheet exposures        
Contingent liabilities     19,012    19,939    20,621 
Commitments     315,573    303,686    282,307 
On-balance sheet exposures        
Trading portfolio assets     113,760    80,240    77,348 
Financial assets designated at fair value     116,281    78,608    76,830 
Derivative financial instruments     237,669    346,626    327,709 
Financial investments       58,916    63,318    90,267 

384    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

      
Notional principal amounts of credit derivatives                         
      
                   2017                           2016                           2015 
As at 31 December  £m        £m        £m 
Credit derivatives held or issued for trading purposesa   715,001         947,800         948,646 

Note

aIncludes credit derivatives held as economic hedges which are not designated as hedges for accounting purposes.

430  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Additional information

Additional financial disclosure (unaudited)

Additional Related Parties disclosures

For US disclosure purposes, the aggregate emoluments of all Directors and Officers of Barclays PLC who held office during the year (2015:(2017: 30 persons, 2016: 32 persons, 2014: 33 persons, 2013: 372015: 32 persons) for the year ended 31st December 20152017 amounted to £52.2m (2014: £56.9m, 2013: £70.0m)£88.7m (2016: £71.0m, 2015: £52.2m). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside for the year ended 31st December 2015,2017, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and Officers amounted to £0.3m (2014: £0.3m, 2013: £0.6m)£0.1m (2016:£ 0.2m 2015: £0.3m).

 

Selected financial statistics

   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
   

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

Return on average shareholders’ equitya

   1.4     0.8     1.6     (0.5   5.6  

Return on average total assetsb

   0.1     -     0.1     -     0.2  

Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage of average total assets

   5.2     4.8     4.5     4.2     3.9  
          
    2015      2014      2013      2012      2011   

Selected income statement data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

Continuing operations

          

Interest income

   17,195     17,369     18,315     19,211     20,589  

Interest expense

   (3,882   (5,231   (6,662   (7,561   (8,393

Non-interest income

   13,442     13,677     16,810     13,807     20,927  

Operating expenses

   (20,677   (20,423   (21,974   (21,007   (20,881

Impairment charges

   (2,114   (2,168   (3,071   (3,340   (5,602

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

   47     36     (56   110     60  

Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   (637   (471   6     28     (94

Gain on acquisitions

   -     -     26     2     -  

Profit before tax

   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,865  

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   911     528     963     (306   3,533  
          
    2015      2014      2013      2012      2011   

Selected balance sheet data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

Total shareholders’ equity

   66,019     63,794     63,220     59,923     63,933  

Subordinated liabilities

   21,955     21,685     22,249     24,422     24,870  

Deposits from banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue

   534,537     572,357     574,340     587,787     592,460  

Loans and advances to banks and customers

   441,046     470,424     474,059     472,809     485,277  

Total assets

   1,120,727     1,358,693     1,344,201     1,512,777     1,588,555  

Notes

aReturn on average shareholders’ equity represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average shareholders’ equity.
bReturn on average total assets represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average total assets.
 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Plc 
                   2017              2016              2015              2014              2013 
    (In £m except for ratios) 
Fixed charges      
Interest expense   3,786   4,004   3,345   4,108   4,904 
Rental expense   138   208   157   207   221 
Total Fixed charges   3,924   4,212   3,502   4,315   5,125 
Earnings      
Income before taxes andnon-controlling interests   3,541   3,230   1,146   1,313   1,879 
Less: unremittedpre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (68  (53  (26  (34  102 
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   3,473   3,177   1,120   1,279   1,981 
Fixed charges   3,924   4,212   3,502   4,315   5,125 
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,397   7,389   4,622   5,594   7,106 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges   1.89   1.75   1.32   1.30   1.39 
                      
 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares – Barclays Plc 
           2017            2016            2015            2014            2013 
    (In £m except for ratios) 
Fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations      
Interest expense   3,786   4,004   3,345   4,108   4,904 
Rental expense   138   208   157   207   221 
Fixed charges   3,924   4,212   3,502   4,315   5,125 
Preference share dividends and similar appropriations   245   343   345   443   412 
Total fixed charges   4,169   4,555   3,847   4,758   5,537 
Earnings      
Income before taxes andnon-controlling interests   3,541   3,230   1,146   1,313   1,879 
Less: unremittedpre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (68  (53  (26  (34  102 
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   3,473   3,177   1,120   1,279   1,981 
Fixed charges   4,169   4,555   3,847   4,758   5,537 
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,642   7,732   4,967   6,037   7,518 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations   1.83   1.70   1.29   1.27   1.36 

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  431    385


Additional informationIndependent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s Report

AdditionalReport of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the shareholders and board of directors

Barclays Bank PLC:

Opinion on the Consolidated Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheet of Barclays Bank PLC and subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of 31 December 2017, the related consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity, and consolidated cash flow statement for the year then ended, and the related notes and specific disclosures described in the financial disclosure (unaudited)statements as being part of the consolidated financial statements (collectively, the “consolidated financial statements”). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of 31 December 2017, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for the year then ended, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards, as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board.

Basis for Opinion

These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these consolidated financial statements based on our audit. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (“PCAOB”) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audit in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. As part of our audit, we are required to obtain an understanding of internal control over financial reporting but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion.

Our audit included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audit also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audit provides a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ KPMG LLP

We have served as the Company’s auditor since 2017.

London, United Kingdom

21 February 2018

 

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Plc

 

          
     

 

 

 

 

            2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2013

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2012

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

            2011

 

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

  

 

 

Fixed charges

          
 

Interest expense

   4,643     5,283     6,715     7,557     8,388  
 

Rental expense

 

   

 

211

 

  

 

   

 

261

 

  

 

   

 

254

 

  

 

   

 

251

 

  

 

   

 

268

 

  

 

       
  

Total Fixed charges

 

   

 

4,854

 

  

 

   

 

5,544

 

  

 

   

 

6,969

 

  

 

   

 

7,808

 

  

 

   

 

8,656

 

  

 

 

Earnings

          
 

Income before taxes and non-controlling interests

   2,073     2,256     2,868     797     5,770  
  

Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures

 

   

 

(34

 

 

   

 

(45

 

 

   

 

95

 

  

 

   

 

(113

 

 

   

 

(47

 

 

 

Total earnings excluding fixed charges

   2,039     2,211     2,963     684     5,723  
  

Fixed charges

 

   

 

4,854

 

  

 

   

 

5,544

 

  

 

   

 

6,969

 

  

 

   

 

7,808

 

  

 

   

 

8,656

 

  

 

  

Total earnings including fixed charges

 

   

 

6,893

 

  

 

   

 

7,755

 

  

 

   

 

9,932

 

  

 

   

 

8,492

 

  

 

   

 

14,379

 

  

 

  

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges

 

   

 

1.42

 

  

 

   

 

1.40

 

  

 

   

 

1.43

 

  

 

   

 

1.09

 

  

 

   

 

1.66

 

  

 

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares –

Barclays Plc

 

          
     

 

 

 

 

2015

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2014

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2013

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2012

 

 

  

 

  

 

 

 

 

2011

 

 

  

 

     

 

 

 

 

(In £m except for ratios)

 

 

  

 

 

Fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations

          
 

Interest expense

   4,643     5,283     6,715     7,557     8,388  
  

Rental expense

 

   

 

211

 

  

 

   

 

261

 

  

 

   

 

254

 

  

 

   

 

251

 

  

 

   

 

268

 

  

 

 

Fixed charges

   4,854     5,544     6,969     7,808     8,656  
  

Preference share dividends and similar appropriations

 

   

 

345

 

  

 

   

 

443

 

  

 

   

 

412

 

  

 

   

 

466

 

  

 

   

 

514

 

  

 

  

Total fixed charges

 

   

 

5,199

 

  

 

   

 

5,987

 

  

 

   

 

7,381

 

  

 

   

 

8,274

 

  

 

   

 

9,170

 

  

 

 

Earnings

          
 

Income before taxes and non-controlling interests

   2,073     2,256     2,868     797     5,770  
  

Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures

 

   

 

(34

 

 

   

 

(45

 

 

   

 

95

 

  

 

   

 

(113

 

 

   

 

(47

 

 

 

Total earnings excluding fixed charges

   2,039     2,211     2,963     684     5,723  
  

Fixed charges

 

   

 

5,199

 

  

 

   

 

5,987

 

  

 

   

 

7,381

 

  

 

   

 

8,274

 

  

 

   

 

9,170

 

  

 

  

Total earnings including fixed charges

 

   

 

7,238

 

  

 

   

 

8,198

 

  

 

   

 

10,344

 

  

 

   

 

8,958

 

  

 

   

 

14,893

 

  

 

  

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations

 

   

 

1.39

 

  

 

   

 

1.37

 

  

 

   

 

1.40

 

  

 

   

 

1.08

 

  

 

   

 

1.62

 

  

 

 

432  |  386    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm’s Report

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Barclays Bank PLC

In our opinion, the accompanying consolidated balance sheetssheet as of December 31, 2016 and the related consolidated income statements, statements of income, comprehensive income, consolidated statements of changes in equity and consolidated cash flow statementsflows for each of the two years in the period ended December 31, 2016, present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of Barclays Bank PLC (“the Bank”(the “Bank”) and its subsidiaries at December 31 December 2015 and 31 December 2014,2016, and the results of their operations and their cash flows for each of the threetwo years in the period ended December 31, December 20152016, in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board. These financial statements are the responsibility of the Bank’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on these financial statements based on our audits. We conducted our audits of these financial statements in accordance with the standards of the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States). Those standards require that we plan and perform the auditsaudit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the financial statements are free of material misstatement. An audit includes examining, on a test basis, evidence supporting the amounts and disclosures in the financial statements, assessing the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, and evaluating the overall financial statement presentation. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, United Kingdom

2922 February 20162017

Note that the report set out above is included for the purposes of Barclays Bank PLC’s Annual Report on Form20-F for 2017 only and does not form part of Barclays Bank PLC’s Annual Report and Accounts for 2017.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  433    387


Barclays Bank PLC data

 

[•••] Consolidated income statement

[•••] Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

[•••] Consolidated balance sheet

[•••] Consolidated statement of changes in equity

[•••] Consolidated cash flow statement

[•••] Notes to the accounts

[•••] Additional Financial data

Barclays Bank PLC is a public limited company, registered in England under company number 1026167. The bank was incorporated on 7 August 1925 under the Colonial Bank Act 1925 and on the 4 October 1971 was registered as a company limited by shares under the Companies Act 1948 to 1967. Pursuant to The Barclays Bank Act 1984, on 1 January 1985 the Bank was registered as a public limited company and its name was changed from Barclays Bank International Limited to Barclays Bank PLC.

All of the issued ordinary share capital of Barclays Bank PLC is owned by Barclays PLC.

Barclays approach to disclosures

The Group aims to continually enhance its disclosures and their usefulness to the readers of the financial statements in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. Consequently Barclays disclosures go beyond the minimum standards required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

Barclays continue to support the recommendations and guidance made by the Enhanced Disclosure Taskforce (EDTF). The EDTF was formed by the Financial Stability Board with a remit to broaden and deepen the risk disclosures of global banks in a number of areas, including liquidity and funding, credit risk and market risk. Barclays has adopted the recommendations across the Annual Report and Pillar 3 report.

In line with the Financial Reporting Council’s guidance on Clear and Concise reporting, Barclays has focused reporting on material items and sought to reorganise information to aid users understanding.

It is Barclays view that best in class disclosures will continue to evolve in light of ongoing market and stakeholder engagement with the banking sector. Barclays are committed to engaging with a published Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure (the Code). The Code sets out five disclosure principles together with supporting guidance which states that UK banks will:

Provide high quality, meaningful and decision-useful disclosures;
Review and enhance their financial instrument disclosures for key areas of interest;
Assess the applicability and relevance of good practice recommendations to their disclosures acknowledging the importance of such guidance;
Seek to enhance the comparability of financial statement disclosures across the UK banking sector; and
Clearly differentiate in their annual reports between information that is audited and information that is unaudited.

British Bankers’ Association (BBA) Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Barclays has adopted the BBA Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure and has prepared the 2017 Annual Report and Accounts in compliance with the Code.

Statutory Accounts

The consolidated accounts of Barclays PLC and its subsidiaries are set out on pages 188 to 271 along with the accounts of Barclays PLC itself on pages 193 to 194. The accounting policies on pages 195 to 200 and the Notes commencing on page 201 apply equally to both sets of accounts unless otherwise stated.

The financial statements have been prepared on going concern basis, in accordance with The Companies Act 2006 as applicable to companies using IFRS.

Capital RequirementsCountry-by Country Reporting

HM Treasury has transposed the requirements set out under CRD IV and issued the Capital RequirementsCountry-by-Country Reporting Regulations 2013. The legislation requires Barclays PLC to publish additional information in respect of the year ended 31 December 2017. This information is available on the Barclays’s website:barclays.com/citizenship/reports-and-publications/country-snapshot.html

388    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC

Barclays Bank PLC is a wholly owned subsidiary of Barclays PLC, which is the Group’s ultimate parent company. The business activities of Barclays Bank PLC Group and Barclays PLC Group are fundamentally the same asexcept for the only difference isfollowing differences: the holding company, Barclays PLC. Reporting differences betweenPLC, certain hedging activity and following a restructure in November 2016, the Group Service Company transferring from Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays PLC.

Differences between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC are driven byresults can be summarised as follows:

Balance Sheet Asset size – Barclays PLC £1,133,248m, Barclays Bank PLC £1,129,343m
Income Statement Profit before tax – Barclays PLC £3,541m, Barclays Bank PLC £3,166m

The differences occur primarily due to the holding company and resultingfollowing reasons:

Funding structures

Cash flow hedging

Group Service Company

More detail regarding the main differences in funding structures. The significant differences areis described on the page below.

 

Instrument Type

     

 

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

  

 

  

  Primary reason for difference

Preference shares

 

     

 

-

 

  

 

  

 

5,486

 

  

 

  

Preference shares and capital notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC are included within share capital in Barclays Bank PLC, and presented as non-controlling interests in the financial statements of Barclays PLC Group.

 

 

Other shareholders’ equity

 

    

 

 

 

 

-

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

485

 

 

  

 

  

 

Non-controlling interests (NCI)

 

    

 

 

 

 

6,054

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

 

1,914

 

 

  

 

  

Treasury shares

     (68)    -    Barclays PLC shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes and for trading are recognised as available for sale investments and trading portfolio assets respectively within Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays PLC deducts these treasury shares from shareholders’ equity.

Capital Redemption Reserve (CRR)

     394    24    Arising from the redemption or exchange of Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC shares respectively.
Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    389


Barclays Bank PLC Contingent Capital Notes (CCNs)

Funding structures

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Preference shares   -   5,827 
 Other shareholders’ equity   -   272 
 Non-controlling interests (NCI)   2,111   1 

 

Preference shares and capital notes issued by Barclays Bank PLC are included within share capital in Barclays Bank PLC, and where still outstanding are presented asnon-controlling interests in the financial statements of Barclays PLC Group.

 

 

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Treasury shares   (28   

Barclays PLC shares held for the purposes of employee share schemes and for trading are recognised as available for sale investments and trading portfolio assets respectively within Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays PLC deducts these treasury shares from shareholders’ equity.

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

   

 

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Capital Redemption Reserve (CRR)   394    51 

Arising from the redemption or exchange of Barclays PLC or Barclays Bank PLC shares respectively.

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Derivative financial instruments   237,669   237,987 
 Loans and advances to banks   35,663   36,209 
 Subordinated liabilities   (23,826  (24,193

Barclays Bank PLC has in issue two series of contingent capital notes (CCNs). These both pay interest and principal to the holder unless the consolidated CRD IV CET 1CET1 ratio (FSA October 2012 transitional statement) of Barclays PLC falls below 7%, in which case they are cancelled from the consolidated perspective. The coupon payable on the CCNs is higher than a market rate of interest for a similar note without this risk.

434  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC

The accounting for these instruments differs between the consolidated financial statements of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC as follows:

In the case of the 7.625% CCN issuance, the cancellation is effected by an automatic legal transfer of title from the holder to Barclays PLC. In these circumstances, Barclays Bank PLC remains liable to Barclays PLC. Barclays Bank PLC does not benefit from the cancellation feature although it pays a higher than market rate for a similar note, and therefore the initial fair value of the note recognised was higher than par. The difference between fair value and par is amortised to the income statement over time.

In the case of the 7.75% CCN issuance, the cancellation is directly effected in Barclays Bank PLC. For Barclays Bank PLC, the cancellation feature is separately valued from the host liability as an embedded derivative with changes in fair value reported in the income statement. The initial fair value of the host liability recognised was higher than par by the amount of the initial fair value of the derivative and the difference is amortised to the income statement over time.

390    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Cash flow hedgehedging

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Income Statement   
 Net interest income   9,845   9,748 
 Tax   (2,240  (2,125
 Equity   
 Cash flow hedging reserve   1,161   184 

Barclays PLC cash flow hedging reserve is larger than Barclays Bank PLC, as Barclays Bank PLC is no longer expected to be exposed to floatingthe same variable rate cash flows on assets which had previously been designated in cash flow hedges.flows. This is as a direct result of anticipated bank ring fencing and the transfer of these assets to an entity which is not expected to be consolidated by Barclays Bank PLC (although is expected to be consolidated by Barclays PLC). There is also a difference in the income statement due to variance in income and tax due to cash flow hedging not included in Barclays Bank PLC.

As a result,Group Service Company

The ownership of the Group service company was transferred in November 2016 contributing to the following key differences between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC.

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Staff Costs   (8,560  (6,445
 Infrastructure costs   (2,949  (2,068
 Administration and general expenses   (3,247  (6,476

Employees within the Group Service Company were reallocated from Barclays Bank PLC has recycled amountsas part of the restructure. Therefore these staff costs are only shown in Barclays PLC. The Group Service Company recharges costs to Barclays Bank PLC leading to higher expenses. These are eliminated on consolidation in Barclays PLC.

Instrument type  

 

Barclays PLC

 

£m

  

 

            Barclays Bank PLC

 

£m

 
 Goodwill and intangibles   7,849   4,885 
 Property, plant and equipment   2,572   1,519 
 Customer accounts   (429,121  (429,426
 Debt securities in issues   (73,314  (69,386
 Provisions   (3,543  (3,302

The difference is driven by Group Service Company balances reflected in Barclays PLC only, or in the case of customer accounts, intercompany balances between the Group Service Company and Barclays Bank PLC, which had been deferred into the cash flow hedge reserve pertaining to these cash flows and has prospectively discontinued its hedge accounting relationshipseliminate on these cash flows, which has increased its income statement volatility. During Q4 2015 this has resultedconsolidation in a net pre-tax income of £692m.Barclays PLC.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  435    391


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated income statement

Consolidated income statement

 

         2015       2014      2013

For the year ended 31 December

     

 

Notes

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

     

 

£m

 

  

 

    

£m

 

  Notes   

 

                     2017

 

£m

   

 

                     2016

 

£m

   

 

                     2015

 

£m

 

Continuing operations

                        

Interest income

     a       17,195        17,369       18,315    a    13,631    14,423    13,947 

Interest expense

     

 

a

 

  

 

     

 

(3,882)

 

  

 

     

 

(5,231)

 

  

 

    

(6,662)

 

   a    (3,883)    (2,966)    (2,584) 

Net interest income

          

 

13,313 

 

  

 

     

 

12,138 

 

  

 

    

11,653 

 

      9,748    11,457    11,363 

Fee and commission income

     b       9,679        9,850       10,500    b    8,775    8,625    8,494 

Fee and commission expense

     

 

b

 

  

 

     

 

(1,763)

 

  

 

     

 

(1,662)

 

  

 

    

(1,748)

 

   b    (1,901)    (1,789)    (1,611) 

Net fee and commission income

          

 

7,916 

 

  

 

     

 

8,188 

 

  

 

    

8,752 

 

      6,874    6,836    6,883 

Net trading income

     c       3,627        3,310       6,548    c    3,387    2,795    3,430 

Net investment income

     d       1,138        1,328       680    d    859    1,324    1,097 

Net premiums from insurance contracts

         709        669       732 

Other income

          

 

52 

 

  

 

     

 

182 

 

  

 

    

98 

 

      69    57    35 

Total income

          

 

26,755 

 

  

 

     

 

25,815 

 

  

 

    

28,463 

 

     20,937    22,469    22,808 

Net claims and benefits incurred on insurance contracts

          

 

(533)

 

  

 

     

 

(480)

 

  

 

    

(509)

 

Total income net of insurance claims

         26,222        25,335       27,954 

Credit impairment charges and other credit provisions

     

 

 

  

 

     

 

(2,114)

 

  

 

     

 

(2,168)

 

  

 

    

(3,071)

 

   7    (2,336)    (2,373)    (1,762) 

Net operating income

          

 

24,108 

 

  

 

     

 

23,167 

 

  

 

    

24,883 

 

      18,601    20,096    21,046 

Staff costs

     8       (9,960)       (11,005)      (12,155)   8    (6,445)    (9,211)    (8,853) 

Infrastructure costs

     e       (3,180)       (3,443)      (3,531)   e    (2,068)    (2,937)    (2,691) 

Administration and general expenses

     e       (3,528)       (3,615)      (4,288)   e    (6,476)    (3,200)    (2,983) 

Provisions for UK customer redress

     27       (2,772)       (1,110)      (2,000)   27    (700)    (1,000)    (2,772) 

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     

 

27

 

  

 

     

 

(1,237)

 

  

 

     

 

(1,250)

 

  

 

    

 

   27    -    -    (1,237) 

Operating expenses

          

 

(20,677)

 

  

 

     

 

(20,423)

 

  

 

    

(21,974)

 

      (15,689)    (16,348)    (18,536) 

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

         47        36       (56)     70    70    41 

(Loss)/gains on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

     9       (637)       (471)      

Gain on acquisitions

          

 

 

  

 

     

 

 

  

 

    

26 

 

Profit/(loss) on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   9    184    565    (637) 

Profit before tax

         2,841        2,309       2,885      3,166    4,383    1,914 

Tax

     

 

f

 

  

 

     

 

(1,603)

 

  

 

     

 

(1,455)

 

  

 

    

(1,577)

 

   f    (2,125)    (1,245)    (1,302) 

Profit after tax

          

 

1,238 

 

  

 

     

 

854 

 

  

 

    

1,308 

 

Profit after tax from continuing operations     1,041    3,138    612 
(Loss)/profit after tax from discontinued operations      (2,195)    591    626 
(Loss)/profit after tax      (1,154)    3,729    1,238 

Attributable to:

                        

Equity holders of the Parent

         911        528       963 
Equity holders of the parent     (1,937)    2,867    566 

Non-controlling interests

     

 

n

 

  

 

     

 

327 

 

  

 

     

 

326 

 

  

 

    

345 

 

Other equity holders   l    639    457    345 

Profit after tax

          

 

1,238 

 

  

 

     

 

854 

 

  

 

    

1,308 

 

Total equity holders of the parent     (1,298)    3,324    911 
Non-controlling interests in respect of continuing operations     4    3    3 
Non-controlling interests in respect of discontinued operations      140    402    324 
(Loss)/profit after tax      (1,154)    3,729    1,238 

The note numbers refer to the notes on pages 218195 to 305,271, whereas the note letters refer to Barclays Bank PLC supplementary notes on pages 442400 to 453.408.

Where there are differences between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC, these are set out on pages 390 and 391. Barclays Bank PLC supplementary notes provided on pages 442 to 453 cover the line items where there is a difference to Barclays PLC.provide additional detail.

 

436  |  392    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

Consolidated statement of comprehensive income

 

     2015        2014       2013 

For the year ended 31 December

     

 

£m 

 

  

 

     

 

£m 

 

  

 

    

£m 

 

  

 

                     2017

 

£m

   

 

                     2016

 

£m

   

 

                     2015

 

£m

 

Profit after tax

     

 

1,238 

 

  

 

     

 

854 

 

  

 

    

1,308 

 

(Loss)/profit after tax   (1,154)    3,729    1,238 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for continuing operations:

            
Profit after tax in respect of continuing operations   1,041    3,138    612 
(Loss)/profit after tax in respect of discontinued operations   (2,195)    591    626 
Other comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations:      

Currency translation reservea

                  

- Currency translation differences

     (476)       486       (1,767)   (1,310)    3,027    748 

Available for sale reservea

                  

- Net gains/(losses) from changes in fair value

     44        5,346       (2,730)
- Net gains from changes in fair value   404    2,178    60 

- Net gains transferred to net profit on disposal

     (377)       (619)      (145)
- Net (gains) transferred to net profit on disposal   (294)    (912)    (377) 

- Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to impairment

     17        (31)      (7)
- Net losses transferred to net profit due to impairment   3    20    17 

- Net (gains)/losses transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging

     (148)       (4,074)      2,376 
- Net losses/(gains) transferred to net profit due to fair value hedging   283    (1,677)    (148) 

- Changes in insurance liabilities

     86        (94)      28    60    53    86 

- Tax

     132        (102)      100    (27)    (18)    132 

Cash flow hedging reservea

                  

- Net (losses)/gains from changes in fair value

     (1,091)       2,687       (1,914)   (428)    689    (990) 

- Net gains transferred to net profit

     (276)       (767)      (547)
- Net (gains) transferred to net profit   (602)    (431)    (276) 

- Tax

     221        (380)      571    256    (59)    221 

Other

     

 

19 

 

  

 

     

 

(19)

 

  

 

    

(37)

 

   (7)    47    19 

Total comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit and loss

     (1,849)       2,433       (4,072)
Other comprehensive (loss)/income that may be recycled to profit and loss from continuing operations   (1,662)    2,917    (508) 

Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit and loss:

               
Other comprehensive income/ (loss) not recycled to profit and loss from continuing operations:         

Retirement benefit remeasurements

     1,174        268       (512)   115    (1,309)    1,179 
Own credit   (7)    -    - 

Tax

     

 

(260)

 

  

 

     

 

(63)

 

  

 

    

(3)

 

   (66)    329    (260) 

Other comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

     

 

(935)

 

  

 

     

 

2,638 

 

  

 

    

(4,587)

 

Other comprehensive income/(loss) not recycled to profit or loss from continuing operations   42    (980)    919 

Total comprehensive income/(loss) for the year

     

 

303 

 

  

 

     

 

3,492 

 

  

 

    

(3,279)

 

         
Other comprehensive (loss)/ income for the year from continuing operations   (1,620)    1,937    411 
         
Other comprehensive income for the year from discontinued operations   1,301    1,520    (1,346) 
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year, net of tax from continuing operations   (579)    5,075    1,023 
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year, net of tax from discontinued operations   (894)    2,111    (720) 
Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year   (1,473)    7,186    303 

Attributable to:

                  

Equity holders of the Parent

     457        3,245       (2,979)
Equity holders of the parent   (1,585)    5,947    457 

Non-controlling interests

     

 

(154)

 

  

 

     

 

247 

 

  

 

    

(300)

 

   112    1,239    (154) 
     

 

303 

 

  

 

     

 

3,492 

 

  

 

    

(3,279)

 

   (1,473)    7,186    303 

Notes

aFor further details refer to Note mm.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  437    393


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated balance sheet

Consolidated balance sheet

 

      2015     2014    2013

As at 31 December

   Notes     £m     £m    £m  Notes   

 

                     2017

 

£m

   

 

                     2016

 

£m

   

 

                     2015

 

£m

 

Assets

                

Cash and balances at central banks

     49,711      39,695     45,687      171,036    102,328    49,711 

Items in the course of collection from other banks

     1,011      1,210     1,282      2,153    1,467    1,011 

Trading portfolio assets

        77,398      114,755     133,089    g    113,755    80,255    77,398 

Financial assets designated at fair value

   14      76,830      38,300     38,968    14    116,282    78,608    76,830 

Derivative financial instruments

        327,870      440,076     350,460    j    237,987    346,820    327,870 

Available for sale investments

        90,304      86,105     91,788 
Financial investments   h    58,963    63,365    90,304 

Loans and advances to banks

        41,829      42,657     39,822    i    36,209    43,634    41,829 

Loans and advances to customers

        399,217      427,767     434,237    i    365,553    392,783    399,217 

Reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending

   22      28,187      131,753     186,779    22    12,546    13,454    28,187 

Prepayments, accrued income and other assets

     3,027      3,604     3,919      1,850    4,011    3,027 

Investments in associates and joint ventures

   39      573      711     653    38    718    684    573 

Property, plant and equipment

   23      3,468      3,786     4,216    22    1,519    2,466    3,468 

Goodwill and intangible assets

   24      8,222      8,180     7,685    23    4,885    7,348    8,222 

Current tax assets

        385      334     181    f    376    501    385 

Deferred tax assets

   10      4,495      4,130     4,807    10    3,352    4,763    4,495 

Retirement benefit assets

   35      836      56     133    35    966    14    836 

Non-current assets classified as held for disposal

   44      7,364      15,574     495 
Assets included in disposal groups classified as held for sale   43    1,193    71,454    7,364 

Total assets

      1,120,727      1,358,693     1,344,201       1,129,343    1,213,955    1,120,727 

Liabilities

                

Deposits from banks

     47,080      58,390     55,615      37,906    48,214    47,080 

Items in the course of collection due to other banks

     1,013      1,177     1,359      446    636    1,013 

Customer accounts

     418,307      427,868     432,032      429,426    424,703    418,307 

Repurchase agreements and other similar secured borrowing

   22      25,035      124,479     196,748    22    40,338    19,760    25,035 

Trading portfolio liabilities

   13      33,967      45,124     53,464    13    37,352    34,687    33,967 

Financial liabilities designated at fair value

   17      91,745      56,972     64,796    17    173,718    96,032    91,745 

Derivative financial instruments

        324,252      439,320     347,118    j    238,345    340,487    324,252 

Debt securities in issue

     69,150      86,099     86,693      69,386    75,369    69,150 

Subordinated liabilities

        21,955      21,685     22,249    30    24,193    23,871    21,955 

Accruals, deferred income and other liabilities

   26      10,612      11,432     13,673    26    8,416    8,951    10,612 

Provisions

   27      4,142      4,135     3,886    27    3,302    3,909    4,142 

Current tax liabilities

        930      1,023     1,042    f    494    708    930 

Deferred tax liabilities

     100      255     348      -    4    100 

Retirement benefit liabilities

   35      423      1,574     1,958    35    287    377    423 

Liabilities included in disposal groups classified as held for sale

   44      5,997      13,115     –    43    -    65,292    5,997 

Total liabilities

      1,054,708      1,292,648     1,280,981       1,063,609    1,143,000    1,054,708 

Total equity

        
Equity        

Called up share capital and share premium

        14,472      14,472     14,494    31    14,453    14,462    14,472 

Other equity instruments

        5,350      4,350     2,078    31    8,982    6,486    5,350 

Other reserves

        933      2,322     –   233    32    3,808    4,295    933 

Retained earnings

      43,350      42,650     44,670       38,490    42,190    43,350 

Total equity excluding non-controlling interests

     64,105      63,794     61,009      65,733    67,433    64,105 

Non-controlling interests

        1,914      2,251     2,211    n    1    3,522    1,914 

Total equity

      66,019      66,045     63,220       65,734    70,955    66,019 

Total liabilities and equity

      1,120,727      1,358,693     1,344,201       1,129,343    1,213,955    1,120,727 

The note numbers refer to the notes on pages 218195 to 305,271, whereas the note letters refer to those on pages 442400 to 453.408.

These financial statements have been approved for issue by the Board of Directors on 2921 February 2016.2018.

 

438  |  394    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

   

 

Called up

share

capital

and

share

premiuma

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Other equity

instrumentsa

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  

 

Available

for sale

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Currency

translation

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  


 

Other
reserves and
other

shareholders’

equitya, b

 

£m

 
 
 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Own
credit
reserveb

 

£m

 
 
 

 

 

  

 

Retained

earnings

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  




 

Total
equity
excluding
non-

controlling
interests

 

£m

 
 
 
 

 
 

 

 

  

 

Non-

controlling

interests

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Total

equity

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Balance as at 31 December 2016  14,462   6,486   (22  954   3,054   309   -   42,190   67,433   3,522   70,955 
Effects of change in accounting policies  -   -   -   -   -   -   (175  175   -   -   - 
Balance at 1 January 2017  14,462   6,486   (22  954   3,054   309   (175  42,365   67,433   3,522   70,955 
Profit after tax  -   639   -   -   -   -   -   398   1,037   4   1,041 
Currency translation movements  -   -   -   -   (1,309  -   -   -   (1,309  (1  (1,310
Available for sale investments  -   -   429   -   -   -   -   -   429   -   429 
Cash flow hedges  -   -   -   (774  -   -   -   -   (774  -   (774
Pension remeasurement  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   53   53   -   53 
Own credit reserve  -   -   -   -   -   -   (11  -   (11  -   (11
Other  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (7  (7  -   (7
Total comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations  -   639   429   (774  (1,309  -   (11  444   (582  3   (579
Total comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operations  -   -   (11  4   1,339   -   -   (2,335  (1,003  109   (894
Total comprehensive income for the year  -   639   418   (770  30   -   (11  (1,891  (1,585  112   (1,473
Issue and exchange of other equity instruments  -   2,496   -   -   -   -   -   -   2,496   -   2,496 
Other equity instruments coupons paid  -   (639  -   -   -   -   -   174   (465  -   (465
Redemption of preference shares  (9  -   -   -   -   14   -   (1,343  (1,338  -   (1,338
Equity settled share schemes  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   550   550   -   550 
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under employee share-based payment schemes  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (78  (78  -   (78
Dividends on ordinary shares  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (674  (674  (173  (847
Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders equity  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (242  (242  -   (242
Net equity impact of BAGL disposal  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (359  (359  (3,462  (3,821
Other reserve movements  -   -   -   -   -   -   7   (12  (5  2   (3
Balance at 31st December 2017  14,453   8,982   396   184   3,084   323   (179  38,490   65,733   1   65,734 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    395


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

   


 

Called up

share

capital

and
share

premiuma

 

£m

 

 

 

 
 

 

 

 

  

 

Other equity
instrumentsa

 

£m

 
 

 

 

  

 

Available

for sale

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Currency

translation

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  



 

Other
reserves and
other

shareholders’
equitya, b

 

£m

 
 
 

 
 

 

 

  

 

Own
credit
reserveb

 

£m

 
 
 

 

 

  

 

Retained

earnings

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  




 

Total
equity
excluding
non-

controlling
interests

 

£m

 
 
 
 

 
 

 

 

  

 

Non-

controlling

interests

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Total

equity

 

£m

 

 

 

 

Balance at 1 January 2016  14,472   5,350   338   709   (623  509   -   43,350   64,105   1,914   66,019 
Continuing Operations           
Profit after tax  -   457   -   -   -   -   -   2,678   3,135   3   3,138 
Currency translation movements  -   -   -   -   3,025   -   -   -   3,025   2   3,027 
Available for sale investments  -   -   (356  -   -   -   -   -   (356  -   (356
Cash flow hedges  -   -   -   199   -   -   -   -   199   -   199 
Pension remeasurement  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (980  (980  -   (980
Other  (17  -   -   -   -   -   -   64   47   -   47 
Other comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations  (17  457   (356  199   3,025   -   -   1,762   5,070   5   5,075 
Other comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operations  -   -   (4  46   652   -   -   183   877   1,234   2,111 
Total comprehensive income for the year  (17  457   (360  245   3,677   -   -   1,945   5,947   1,239   7,186 
Issue and exchange of equity instruments  -   1,136   -   -   -   -   -   -   1,136   -   1,136 
Other equity instruments coupons paid  -   (457  -   -   -   -   -   128   (329  -   (329
Redemption of preference shares  -   -   -   -   -   (199  -   (1,378  (1,577  -   (1,577
Equity settled share schemes  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   577   577   -   577 
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under employee share-based payment schemes  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (414  (414  -   (414
Dividends paid  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (978  (978  (235  (1,213
Capital contribution from Barclays PLC  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   114   114   -   114 
Net equity impact of partial BAGL disposal  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (349  (349  601   252 
Net equity impact of Group Service Company disposal  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (806  (806  -   (806
Other reserve movements  7   -   -   -   -   (1  -   1   7   3   10 
Balance at 31st December 2016  14,462   6,486   (22  954   3,054   309   -   42,190   67,433   3,522   70,955 

396    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

 

    

 

 

 
 

 
 

Called up

share

capital

and
share

premiuma
£m

  

  

  

  
  

  
  

   

 
 
 

Other

equity
instrumentsa
£m

  

  
  
  

   

 

 
 

Available

for sale

reserveb
£m

  

  

  
  

   

 

 

 
 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserveb
£m

  

  

  

  
  

   

 

 
 

Currency

translation

reserveb
£m

  

  

  
  

   
 
 

 
 

 

Other
reserves and
other

shareholders’
equitya

£m

  
  
  

  
  

  

   

 
 

Retained

earnings
£m

  

  
  

   
 
 
 
 
 
 
Total
equity
excluding
non-
controlling
interests
£m
  
  
  
  
  
  
  
   

 

 
 

Non-

controlling

interests
£m

  

  

  
  

   

 

 

Total

equity

£m

  

  

  

Balance as at 1 January 2015

   14,472      4,350      578     1,817      (582)     509      42,650      63,794      2,251      66,045   

Profit after tax

   -        345      -        -        -        -        566      911      327      1,238   

Currency translation movements

   -        -        -        -        (41)     -        -        (41)     (435)     (476)  

Available for sale investments

   -        -        (240)     -        -        -        -        (240)     (6)     (246)  

Cash flow hedges

   -        -        -        (1,108)     -        -        -        (1,108)     (38)     (1,146)  

Pension remeasurement

   -        -        -        -        -        -        916      916      (2)     914   

Other

   -        -        -        -        -        -        19      19      -        19   

Total comprehensive income for the year

   -        345      (240)     (1,108)     (41)     -        1,501      457      (154)     303   

Issue and exchange of equity instruments

   -        1,000      -        -        -        -        -        1,000      -        1,000   

Other equity instruments coupons paid

   -        (345)     -        -        -        -        70      (275)     -        (275)  

Equity settled share schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        571      571      -        571   

Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (755)     (755)     -        (755)  

Dividends paid on ordinary shares

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (876)     (876)     (209)     (1,085)  

Dividends paid on preference shares and other shareholders’ equity

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (343)     (343)     -        (343)  

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -        -        -        -        -        -        560      560      -        560   

Other reserve movements

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (28)     (28)     26     (2)  

Balance as at 31 December 2015

   14,472      5,350     338      709      (623)     509      43,350      64,105      1,914      66,019   

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  439


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated statement of changes in equity

  

 

Called up

share

capital

and share

premiuma

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Other equity
instrumentsa

 

£m

 
 

 

 

  

 

Available

for sale

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Cash

flow

hedging

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Currency

translation

reserveb

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  



 

Other
reserves and
other

shareholders’
equitya, b

 

£m

 
 
 

 
 

 

 

  

 

Own
credit
reserveb

 

£m

 
 
 

 

 

  

 

Retained

earnings

 

£m

 

 

 

 

  




 

Total
equity
excluding
non-

controlling
interests

 

£m

 
 
 
 

 
 

 

 

  

 

Non-

controlling

interests

 

£m

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Total

equity

 

£m

 

 

 

 

                              
Balance at 1 January 2015  14,472   4,350   578   1,817   (582  509   -   42,650   63,794   2,251   66,045 

Balance as at 1 January 2014

   14,494      2,078      151      273      (1,142)     485      44,670      61,009      2,211      63,220   
Continuing Operations           

Profit after tax

   -        250      -        -        -        -        278      528      326      854     -   345   -   -   -   -   -   264   609   3   612 

Currency translation movements

   -        -        -        -        560      -        -        560      (74)     486     -   -   -   -   748   - �� -   -   748   -   748 

Available for sale investments

   -        -        427      -        -        -        -        427      (1)     426     -   -   (230  -   -   -   -   -   (230  -   (230

Cash flow hedges

   -        -        -        1,544      -        -        -        1,544      (4)     1,540     -   -   -   (1,045  -   -   -   -   (1,045  -   (1,045

Pension remeasurement

   -        -        -        -        -        -        205      205      -        205     -   -   -   -   -   -   -   919   919   -   919 

Other

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (19)     (19)     -        (19)    -   -   -   -   -   -   -   19   19   -   19 
Other comprehensive income net of tax from continuing operations  -   345   (230  (1,045  748   -   -   1,202   1,020   3   1,023 
Other comprehensive income net of tax from discontinued operations  -   -   (10  (63  (789  -   -   299   (563  (157  (720

Total comprehensive income for the year

   -        250     427      1,544      560      -        464      3,245      247      3,492     -   345   (240  (1,108  (41  -   -   1,501   457   (154  303 
Issue of shares under employees share schemes  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   571   571   -   571 

Issue and exchange of equity instruments

   (15)     2,272     -        -        -        16      (1,683)     590      -        590     -   1,000   -   -   -   -   -   -   1,000   -   1,000 

Redemption of preference Shares

   (7)     -        -        -        -        8      (792)     (791)     -        (791)  

Other equity instruments coupons paid

   -        (250)     -        -        -        -        54      (196)     -        (196)    -   (345  -   -   -   -   -   70   (275  -   (275

Equity settled share schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        693      693      -        693   
Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under employee share-based payment schemes  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (755  (755  -   (755

Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (866)     (866)     -        (866)  

Dividends on ordinary shares

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (821)     (821)     (190)     (1,011)  

Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders’ equity

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (441)     (441)     -        (441)  
Dividends paid  -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (1,219  (1,219  (209  (1,428

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -        -        -        -        -        -        1,412      1,412     -        1,412     -   -   -   -   -   -   -   560   560   -   560 

Other reserve movements

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (40)     (40)     (17)     (57)    -   -   -   -   -   -   -   (28  (28  26   (2

Balance as at 31 December 2014

   14,472      4,350      578      1,817      (582)     509      42,650      63,794      2,251      66,045   
                              

Balance as at 1 January 2013

   14,494      -        526      2,099      59      645      39,244      57,067      2,856      59,923   

Profit after tax

   -        -        -        -        -        -        963      963      345      1,308   

Currency translation movements

   -        -        -        -        (1,201)     -        -        (1,201)     (566)     (1,767)  

Available for sale investments

   -        -        (375)     -        -        -        -        (375)     (3)     (378)  

Cash flow hedges

   -        -        -        (1,826)     -        -         -        (1,826)     (64)     (1,890)  

Pension remeasurement

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (503)     (503)     (12)     (515)  

Other

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (37)     (37)     -        (37)  

Total comprehensive (loss)/income for the year

   -        -        (375)     (1,826)     (1,201)     -        423      (2,979)     (300)     (3,279)  

Issue of other equity instruments

   -        2,078      -        -        -        -        -        2,078      -        2,078  

Equity settled share schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        689      689      -        689   

Vesting of Barclays PLC shares under share-based payment schemes

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (1,047)     (1,047)     -        (1,047)  

Dividends on ordinary shares

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (734)     (734)     (342)     (1,076)  

Dividends on preference shares and other shareholders’ equity

   -        -        -        -        -        -        (471)     (471)     -        (471)  

Redemption of capital instruments

   -        -        -        -        -        (100)     -        (100)     -        (100)  

Capital contribution from Barclays PLC

   -        -        -        -        -        -        6,553      6,553      -        6,553   

Other reserve movements

   -        -        -        -        -        (60)     13      (47)     (3)     (50)  

Balance as at 31 December 2013

   14,494      2,078      151      273      (1,142)     485      44,670      61,009      2,211      63,220   
Balance at 31st December 2015  14,472   5,350   338   709   (623  509   -   43,350   64,105   1,914   66,019 

Notes

aFor further details refer to Note l
bFor further details refer to Note m

 

440  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    397


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated cash flow statement

For the year ended 31 December  

 

                     2017

 

£m

  

 

                     2016

 

£m

  

 

                     2015

 

£m

 
Continuing operations    
Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:    
Profit before tax   3,166   4,383   1,914 
Adjustment fornon-cash items:    
Allowance for impairment   2,336   2,357   1,752 
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles   821   1,232   1,215 
Other provisions, including pensions   1,716   1,726   4,243 
Net profit on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment   (307  (912  (374
Othernon-cash movements including exchange rate movements   1,235   (20,780  (1,189
Changes in operating assets and liabilities    
Net decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks and customers   27,235   (25,439  22,705 
Net decrease in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending   908   14,733   103,471 
Net (decrease)/increase in deposits and debt securities in issue   (11,567  49,961   (33,219
Net increase/(decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing   20,578   (4,852  (99,602
Net decrease/(increase) in derivative financial instruments   6,691   (2,351  (3,309
Net (increase)/decrease in trading assets   (33,472  (5,542  37,079 
Net increase/(decrease) in trading liabilities   2,665   880   (10,877
Net decrease/(increase) in financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value   40,012   807   (3,064
Net (increase) in other assets   (2,119  (3,731  (2,680
Net (decrease) in other liabilities   (2,260  (452  (1,772
Corporate income tax paid   (672  (742  (1,643
Net cash from operating activities   56,966   11,278   14,650 
Purchase of available for sale investments   (83,707  (65,086  (120,061
Proceeds from sale or redemption of available for sale investments   88,298   102,515   114,529 
Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangibles   (954  (2,054  (1,928
Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangibles   3,334   234   393 
Disposal of discontinued operation, net of cash disposed   (1,060  -   - 
Disposal of subsidiaries, net of cash disposed   358   595   - 
Other cash flows associated with investing activities   693   32   516 
Net cash from investing activities   6,962   36,236   (6,551
Dividends paid   (1,555  (1,186  (1,428
Issuance of subordinated debt   3,041   1,457   879 
Redemption of subordinated debt   (1,378  (1,143  (556
Net issue of shares and other equity instruments   2,495   1,125   655 
Capital contribution from Barclays PLC   -   114   560 
Repurchase of shares and other equity instruments   (1,339  (1,378  - 
Net cash from financing activities   1,264   (1,011  110 
Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents   (4,773  10,468   1,689 
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents from continuing operations   60,419   56,971   9,898 
Net cash from discontinued operation   101   405   (1,821
Net increase in cash and cash equivalents   60,520   57,376   8,077 
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year   143,932   86,556   78,479 
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year   204,452   143,932   86,556 
Cash and cash equivalents comprise:    
Cash and balances at central banks   171,036   102,328   49,711 
Loans and advances to banks with original maturity less than three months   32,706   38,099   35,876 
Available for sale treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity less than three months   682   356   816 
Trading portfolio assets with original maturity less than three months   28   -   153 
Cash and cash equivalents held for sale   -   3,149   - 
    204,452   143,932   86,556 

398    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays Bank PLC data

Consolidated cash flow statement

For the year ended 31 December   

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

   

 

2013

£m

  

  

Continuing operations      
Reconciliation of profit before tax to net cash flows from operating activities:      
Profit before tax   2,841     2,309     2,885  
Adjustment for non-cash items:      
Allowance for impairment   2,105     2,168     3,071  
Depreciation, amortisation and impairment of property, plant, equipment and intangibles   1,324     1,279     1,276  
Other provisions, including pensions   4,335     3,600     3,673  
Net profit on disposal of investments and property, plant and equipment   (374)     (620)     (145)  
Other non-cash movements   (2,050)     (1,699)     (2,162)  
Changes in operating assets and liabilities      
Net decrease/(increase) in loans and advances to banks and customers   27,629     3,538     (3,906)  
Net decrease/(increase) in reverse repurchase agreements and other similar lending   103,566     55,021     (10,264)  
Net (decrease) in deposits and debt securities in issue   (37,820)     (1,983)     (13,447)  
Net (decrease) in repurchase agreements and other similar borrowing   (99,444)     (72,269)     (20,430)  
Net (increase)/decrease in derivative financial instruments   (2,862)     2,586     811  
Net decrease in trading assets   37,330     18,350     13,423  
Net (decrease)/increase in trading liabilities   (11,157)     (8,340)     8,670  
Net (increase) in financial investments   (3,757)     (7,156)     (6,114)  
Net (increase)/decrease in other assets   (2,343)     (14,694)     125  
Net (decrease)/increase in other liabilities   (2,236)     7,409     (1,190)  
Corporate income tax paid   (1,643)     (1,590)     (1,558)  
Net cash from operating activities   15,444     (12,091)     (25,282)  
Purchase of available for sale investments   (120,251)     (108,639)     (92,024)  
Proceeds from sale or redemption of available for sale investments   113,048     120,843     69,474  
Purchase of property, plant and equipment   (852)     (657)     (737)  
Other cash flows associated with investing activities   (379)     (886)     632  
Net cash from investing activities   (8,434)     10,661     (22,655)  
Dividends paid   (1,428)     (1,452)     (1,547)  
Proceeds of borrowings and issuance of subordinated debt   1,138     826     700  
Repayments of borrowings and redemption of subordinated debt   (682)     (1,100)     (1,424)  
Net redemption of shares and other equity instruments   655     (1,100)     2,078  
Capital Contribution from Barclays PLC   560     1,412     6,553  
Net redemption of shares issued to non-controlling interests   -     -     (100)  
Net cash from financing activities   243     (1,414)     6,260  
Effect of exchange rates on cash and cash equivalents   824     (431)     198  
Net decrease in cash and cash equivalents   8,077     (3,275)     (41,479)  
Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of year   78,479     81,754     123,233  
Cash and cash equivalents at end of year   86,556     78,479     81,754  
Cash and cash equivalents comprise:      
Cash and balances at central banks   49,711     39,695     45,687  
Loans and advances to banks with original maturity less than three months   35,876     36,282     35,259  
Available for sale treasury and other eligible bills with original maturity less than three months   816     2,322     644  
Trading portfolio assets with original maturity less than three months   153     180     164  
    86,556     78,479     81,754  

Interest received by The Group was £20,370m (2014: £21,372m)£21,783m (2016: £21,981m; 2015: £20,370m) and interest paid by The Group was £6,992m (2014: £8,566m)£10,388m (2016: £7,812m; 2015: £6,992m).

The Group is required to maintain balances with central banks and other regulatory authorities and these amounted to £4,369m£3,360m at 31 December 2015 (2014: £4,448m)2017 (2016: £4,254m; 2015: £4,369m).

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash comprises cash on hand and demand deposits, and cash equivalents comprise highly liquid investments that are convertible into cash with an insignificant risk of changes in value with original maturities of three months or less. Repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements are not considered to be part of cash equivalents.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  441    399


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

    

 

a Net interest income

 

      

 

2015 

£m

  

  

     

 

2014 

£m

  

  

     

 

2013 

£m

  

  

Cash and balances with central banks

     158       193       219  

Available for sale investments

     1,387       1,615       1,804  

Loans and advances to banks

     535       452       468  

Loans and advances to customers

     14,732       14,677       15,613  

Other

     383       432       211  

Interest income

     17,195       17,369       18,315  

Deposits from banks

     (171     (204     (201

Customer accounts

     (1,035     (1,434     (2,602

Debt securities in issue

     (1,593     (1,915     (2,177

Subordinated liabilities

     (1,605     (1,611     (1,572

Other

     522       (67     (110

Interest expense

     (3,882     (5,231     (6,662

Net interest income

     13,313       12,138       11,653  

Interest income includes £149m (2014: £153m, 2013: £179m) accrued on impaired loans.

Other interest income principally includes interest income relating to reverse repurchase agreements and hedging activity. Similarly, other interest expense principally includes interest expense relating to repurchase agreements and hedging activity.

Included in net interest income is hedge ineffectiveness as detailed in the Barclays Plc disclosures in Note 15 Derivative Financial Instruments.

b Net fee and commission income

      

 

2015 

£m

  

  

     

 

2014 

£m

  

  

     

 

2013 

£m

  

  

Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions

     9,521       9,695       10,332  

Foreign exchange commission

     158       155       168  

Fee and commission income

     9,679       9,850       10,500  

Fee and commission expense

     (1,763     (1,662     (1,748

Net fee and commission income

     7,916       8,188       8,752  

 

c Net Trading Income

 

            
      
 
2015 
£m
  
  
     
 
2014 
£m
  
  
     
 
2013 
£m
  
  

Trading income

     3,197       3,276       6,768  

Own credit gains/(losses)

     430       34       (220

Net trading income

     3,627       3,310       6,548  

                                                                  
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Cash and balances with central banks

   583    186    157 

Financial investments

   754    740    698 

Loans and advances to banks

   286    483    481 

Loans and advances to customers

   11,783    12,957    12,512 

Other

   225    57    99 

Interest income

   13,631    14,423    13,947 

Deposits from banks

   (370)    (204)    (123) 

Customer accounts

   (1,123)    (1,808)    (1,510) 

Debt securities in issue

   (898)    (690)    (422) 

Subordinated liabilities

   (1,225)    (988)    (978) 

Other

   (267)    724    449 

Interest expense

   (3,883)    (2,966)    (2,584) 

Net interest income

   9,748    11,457    11,363 
      

b Net fee and commission income

      
      
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Banking, investment management and credit related fees and commissions

   8,646    8,507    8,365 

Foreign exchange commission

   129    118    129 

Fee and commission income

   8,775    8,625    8,494 

Fee and commission expense

   (1,901)    (1,789)    (1,611) 

Net fee and commission income

   6,874    6,836    6,883 
      

c Net Trading Income

      
      
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Trading income

   3,387    2,830    3,000 

Own credit gains/(losses)

   -    (35)    430 

Net trading income

   3,387    2,795    3,430 

 

442  |  400    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

    

d Net investment income

 

         
   

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

2013

 

£m

  

 

  

Net gain from disposal of available for sale assets  374    620    145  
Dividend income  8    9    14  
Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value  238    233    203  
Other investment income  518    466    318  
Net investment income  1,138    1,328    680  

 

e Administrative and general expenses

 

         
   

 

 

            2015

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

            2014

 

£m

  

 

  

  

 

 

            2013

 

£m

  

 

  

Infrastructure costs   
Property and equipment  1,353    1,570    1,610  
Depreciation of property, plant and equipment  554    585    647  
Operating lease rentals  500    594    645  
Amortisation of intangible assets  617    522    480  
Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets  153    172    149  
Gain on property disposals  3    -    -  
Total infrastructure costs  3,180    3,443    3,531  
Administration and general costs   
Consultancy, legal and professional fees  1,191    1,104    1,260  
Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications  760    842    869  
Marketing, advertising and sponsorship  536    558    583  
Travel and accommodation  218    213    307  
UK bank levy  476    462    504  
Goodwill Impairment  102    -    79  
Other administration and general expenses  245    436    686  
Total administration and general costsa  3,528    3,615    4,288  
Staff costsb  9,960    11,005    12,155  
Provision for UK customer redress  2,772    1,110    2,000  
Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange  1,237    1,250    -  
Operating expenses  20,677    20,423    21,974  

                                                                  

d Net investment income

      
      
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Net gain from disposal of available for sale assets

   298    912    385 

Dividend income

   48    8    8 

Net gain from financial instruments designated at fair value

   338    158    193 

Other investment income

   175    246    511 

Net investment income

   859    1,324    1,097 
      

e Administrative and general expenses

      
      
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Infrastructure costs

      

Property and equipment

   954    1,147    1,082 

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

   303    482    475 

Operating lease rentals

   290    550    411 

Amortisation of intangible assets

   478    661    570 

Impairment of property, equipment and intangible assets

   40    97    150 

Gain/(loss) on property disposals

   3    -    3 

Total infrastructure costs

   2,068    2,937    2,691 

Administration and general costs

      

Consultancy, legal and professional fees

   756    1,079    1,078 

Subscriptions, publications, stationery and communications

   455    638    678 

Marketing, advertising and sponsorship

   400    430    451 

Travel and accommodation

   118    132    188 

UK bank levy

   365    410    425 

Goodwill Impairment

   -    -    102 

Other administration and general expenses

   4,382    511    61 

Total administration and general costs

   6,476    3,200    2,983 

Staff costsa

   6,445    9,211    8,853 

Provision for UK customer redress

   700    1,000    2,772 

Provision for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

   -    -    1,237 

Operating expensesb

   15,689    16,348    18,536 

Notes

 

a

Total administration and general expenses of £20,677m (2014: £20,423m; 2013: £21,974m) include depreciation of property, plant and equipment of £554m (2014: £585m; 2013: £647m), amortisation of intangible assets of £617m (2014: £522m; 2013: £480m), goodwill impairment of £102m (2014 £nil; 2013: £79m) and administration and other expenses of £19,404m (2014 £19,316m; 2013: £20,678m).

b

The Group has realigned outsourcing costs from administration and general expenses to staff costs in order to more appropriately reflect the nature and internal management of these costs. The net effect of these movements is to reduce administration and general expenses and to increase staff costs to £1,034mby £847m in 20152017 and £1,055m£1,063m in 2014.

2016.

bTotal operating expenses of £15,689m (2016: £16,348m; 2015: £18,536m) include depreciation of property, plant and equipment of £303m (2016: £482m; 2015: £475m), amortisation of intangible assets of £478m (2016: £661m; 2015: £570m), goodwill impairment £nil (2016: £nil; 2015: £102m) and administration and other expenses of £14,908m (2016: £15,205m; 2015: £17,389m).

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  443    401


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

    

f Tax

 

      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

    

2013 

 

£m 

Current tax charge

            

Current year

     2,068           1,448          2,031    

Adjustment for prior years

     (183)          (19)         156    
      1,885           1,429          2,187    

Deferred tax charge/(credit)

            

Current year

     (360)          92          (96)   

Adjustment for prior years

     78           (66)         (514)   
      (282)          26          (610)   

Tax charge

     1,603           1,455          1,577    

 

Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax credit of £19m (2014: £19m charge) principally relating to share based payments.

 

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to The Group’s profit before tax.

 

      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

    

2013 

 

£m 

Profit before tax from continuing operations

     2,841           2,309          2,885    

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014:21.5%, 2013:23.25%)

     575           496          671    

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

     309           329          559    

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

     283           -          -    

Non-UK profits at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     274           253          328    

Non-deductible provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange

     261           387          -    

Non-deductible expenses including UK Bank Levy

     207           285          296    

Impact of change in tax rates

     158    ��      8          (155)   

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

     30           21          (13)   

Non-deductible impairments and losses on disposal

     26           234          -    

Non-taxable gains and income

     (241)          (282)         (234)   

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (105)          (85)         (358)   

Changes in recognition and measurement of deferred tax assets

     (77)          (183)         409    

Other items

     (54)          74          135    

Non-UK losses at statutory tax rates different from the UK statutory tax rate

     (43)          (82)         (61)   

Tax charge

     1,603           1,455          1,577    

Effective tax rate

     56.4%        63.0%       54.7% 

                                                                  

f Tax

      
      
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Current tax charge/(credit)

      

Current year

   659    1,147    1,772 

Adjustment for prior years

   44    (359)    (188) 
    703    788    1,584 

Deferred tax charge/(credit)

      

Current year

   1,487    392    (360) 

Adjustment for prior years

   (65)    65    78 
    1,422    457    (282) 

Tax charge

   2,125    1,245    1,302 

Tax relating to each component of other comprehensive income can be found in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income which additionally includes within Other a tax charge of £6m (2016: £49m credit) principally relating to share based payments.

The table below shows the reconciliation between the actual tax charge and the tax charge that would result from applying the standard UK corporation tax rate to The Group’s profit before tax.

                                                                  
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

  

 

 

 

2015

 

 

    £m    £m    £m 

Profit before tax from continuing operations

   3,165    4,383    1,914 

Tax charge based on the standard UK corporation tax rate of 19.25% (2016: 20%, 2015: 20.25%)

   610    877    387 

Impact of profits/losses earned in territories with different statutory rates to the UK (weighted average tax rate is 29.8% (2016: 29.5%, 2015: 28.1%))

   333    415    151 

Recurring items:

      

Non-creditable taxes including withholding taxes

   191    277    309 

Non-deductible expenses

   82    114    67 

Impact of UK bank levy beingnon-deductible

   70    82    96 

Banking surcharge on UK profits

   6    75    - 

Tax adjustments in respect of share based payments

   4    34    30 

Non-taxable gains and income

   (191)    (208)    (197) 

Changes in recognition of deferred tax and effect of unrecognised tax losses

   (72)    (178)    (71) 

Impact of Barclays Bank PLC’s overseas branches being taxed both locally and in the UK

   (61)    (128)    (35) 

Adjustments in respect of prior years

   (21)    (294)    (110) 

Other items

   111    81    142 

Non-recurring items:

      

One offre-measurement of US deferred tax assets

   1,177     

Impact of the UK branch exemption on deferred tax assets

   (276)     

Non-deductible provisions for UK customer redress

   129    203    283 

Non-deductible provisions for investigations and litigation

   72    48    261 

Non-taxable gains and income on divestments

   (39)    (180)    (50) 

Non-deductible impairments and losses on divestments

   -    27    39 

Tax charge

   2,125    1,245    1,302 

Effective tax rate

   67.2%    28.4%    68.0% 

 

444  |  402    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

    

 

Current tax assets and liabilities

Movements on current tax assets and liabilities were as follows:

 

      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

Assets

     334       181  

Liabilities

     (1,023     (1,042

As at 1 January

     (689     (861

Income statement

     (1,885     (1,429

Other comprehensive income

     145       (1

Corporate income tax paid

     1,643       1,590  

Other movementsa

     241       12  
      (545     (689

Assets

     385       334  

Liabilities

     (930     (1,023

As at 31 December

     (545     (689

a   Other movements include current tax amounts relating to acquisitions, disposals and exchange gains and losses.

        

g Trading portfolio assets

 

        
      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

     45,626       66,035  

Equity securities

     29,055       44,576  

Traded loans

     2,474       2,693  

Commodities

     243       1,451  

Trading portfolio assets

     77,398       114,755  

 

h Available for sale financial investments

 

        
      

 

 

2015

 

£m

  

 

  

     

 

 

2014

 

£m

  

 

  

Debt securities and other eligible bills

     89,278       85,552  

Equity securities

     1,026       553  

Available for sale financial investments

     90,304       86,105  
                                            
   

 

 

 

2017

 

 

  

 

 

 

2016

 

 

    £m    £m 

Assets

   501    385 

Liabilities

   (708)    (930) 

As at 1 January

   (207)    (545) 

Income statement from continuing operations

   (703)    (788) 

Other comprehensive income

   26    295 

Corporate income tax paid

   672    742 

Other movements

   94    89 
    (118)    (207) 

Assets

   376    501 

Liabilities

   (494)    (708) 

As at 31 December

   (118)    (207) 

g Trading portfolio assets

 

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  445


                                            
    2017    2016 
    £m    £m 

Debt securities and other eligible bills

   51,195    38,804 

Equity securities

   59,338    38,329 

Traded loans

   3,140    2,975 

Commodities

   82    147 

Trading portfolio assets

   113,755    80,255 

Barclays Bank PLC datah Financial Investments

Notes to the accounts

 

                                            
    2017    2016 
    £m    £m 

Available for sale debt securities and other eligible bills

   52,020    57,704 

Available for sale equity securities

   1,834    485 

Held to maturity debt securities

   5,109    5,176 

Financial Investments

   58,963    63,365 

i Loans and advances to banks and customers

 

        

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Gross loans and advances to banks

       41,829     42,657  

Loans and advances to banks

       41,829     42,657  

Gross loans and advances to customers

          404,138           433,222  

Less: allowance for impairment

       (4,921   (5,455

Loans and advances to customers

       399,217     427,767  

 

j Derivative financial instruments

 

              
   
 

 

Notional contract
amount

£m

  
  

  

   
 

 

Fair value
Assets

£m

  
  

  

   

 

Liabilities

£m

  

  

Year ended 31 December 2015

     

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

  29,437,102     326,933     (323,788

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

  316,605     937     (464

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

  29,753,707     327,870     (324,252

Year ended 31 December 2014

     

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

  32,624,342     438,437     (438,623

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

  268,448     1,639     (697

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

        32,892,790     440,076     (439,320

 

k Subordinated liabilities

 

              
        

 

2015

£m

  

  

   

 

2014

£m

  

  

Undated subordinated liabilities

    5,248     5,640  

Dated subordinated liabilities

       16,707     16,045  

Total subordindated liabilities

       21,955     21,685  

                                            
    2017    2016 
    £m    £m 

Gross loans and advances to banks

   36,209    43,634 

Less: allowance for impairment

   -    - 

Loans and advances to banks

   36,209    43,634 

Gross loans and advances to customers

   370,205    397,403 

Less: allowance for impairment

   (4,652)    (4,620) 

Loans and advances to customers

   365,553    392,783 

 

446  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    403


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

    

 

j Derivative financial instruments

    

 

Notional contract
amount

 

£m

   

Fair value
Assets

 

£m

   

Liabilities

 

£m

 

Year ended 31 December 2017

      

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   35,747,945    237,741    (237,242) 

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

   175,785    246    (1,103) 

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

   35,923,730    237,987    (238,345) 

Year ended 31 December 2016

      

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for trading

   36,261,030    345,834    (339,647) 

Total derivative assets/(liabilities) held for risk management

   261,314    986    (840) 

Derivative assets/(liabilities)

   36,522,344    346,820    (340,487) 

k Subordinated liabilities

                                            
    2017    2016 
    £m    £m 

Undated subordinated liabilities

   4,192    4,495 

Dated subordinated liabilities

   20,001    19,376 

Total subordinated liabilities

   24,193    23,871 

l Ordinary shares, share premium, and other equity

Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid

    

 

 

Ordinary

share capital

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Preference

share capital

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

Share

premium

£m

  

  

  

   

 

 

 

 

Total share

capital and

share

premium

£m

  

  

  

  

  

   

 

 

Other equity

instruments

£m

  

  

  

As at 1 January 2015

   2,342     38     12,092     14,472     4,350  

AT1 securities issuance

   -     -     -     -     1,000  

As at 31 December 2015

   2,342     38     12,092     14,472     5,350  

As at 1 January 2014

   2,342     60     12,092     14,494     2,078  

AT1 securities issuance

   -     -     -     -     2,272  

Other movements

   -     (22   -     (22   -  

As at 31 December 2014

   2,342     38     12,092     14,472     4,350  
Called up share capital, allotted and fully paid                       
      
    

Ordinary
share capital

 

£m

   

Preference
share capital

 

£m

  

Share
premium

 

£m

   

Total share
capital and
share
premium

 

£m

  

Other equity
instruments

 

£m

 

As at 1 January 2017

   2,342    28   12,092    14,462   6,486 

AT1 securities issuance

   -    -   -    -   2,496 

Other movement

   -    (9  -    (9  - 

As at 31 December 2017

   2,342    19   12,092    14,453   8,982 

As at 1 January 2016

   2,342    38   12,092    14,472   5,350 

AT1 securities issuance

   -    -   -    -   1,136 

Other movement

   -    (10  -    (10    

As at 31 December 2016

   2,342    28   12,092    14,462   6,486 

Ordinary shares

The issued ordinary share capital of Barclays Bank PLC, as at 31 December 2015,2017, comprised 2,342 million ordinary shares of £1 each (2014:(2016: 2,342 million).

Ordinary share capital constitutes 60% (2014:(2016: 60%) of total share capital issued.

Preference shares

The issued preference share capital of Barclays Bank PLC, as at 31 December 2015,2017, comprised 1,000 Sterling Preference Shares of £1 each (2014:(2016: 1,000); 31,856 Euro Preference Shares of100 each (2014:(2016: 31,856); 20,930 Sterling Preference Shares of £100 each (2014: 20,930); 58,133 US Dollar Preference Shares of $100 each (2014:(2016: 58,133); and 237106 million US Dollar Preference Shares of $0.25 each (2014: 237(2016: 161 million). In the first quarter of 2017, 55 million US Dollar Preference Shares of $0.25 each were redeemed. In the fourth quarter of 2017, 20,930 Sterling Preference Shares of £100 each were redeemed.

Preference share capital constitutes 40% (2014:(2016: 40%) of total share capital issued.

404    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

Sterling £1 Preference Shares

1,000 Sterling cumulative callable preference shares of £1 each (the £1 Preference Shares) were issued on 31 December 2004 at nil premium.

The £1 Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive Sterling cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, semi-annually at a rate reset semi-annually equal to the Sterling interbank offered rate forsix-month sterling deposits.

Barclays Bank PLC shall be obliged to pay such dividends if: (1) it has profits available for the purpose of distribution under the Companies Act 2006 as at each dividend payment date; and (2) it is solvent on the relevant dividend payment date, provided that a capital regulations condition is satisfied on such dividend payment date. The dividends shall not be due and payable on the relevant dividend payment date except to the extent that Barclays Bank PLC could make such payment and still be solvent immediately thereafter. Barclays Bank PLC shall be considered solvent on any date if: (1) it is able to pay its debts to senior creditors as they fall due; and (2) its auditors have reported within the previous six months that its assets exceed its liabilities. If Barclays Bank PLC shall not pay, or shall pay only in part, a dividend for a period of seven days or more after the due date for payment, the holders of the £1 Preference Shares may institute proceedings for thewinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC. No remedy against Barclays Bank PLC shall be available to the holder of any £1 Preference Shares for the recovery of amounts owing in respect of £1 Preference Shares other than the institution of proceedings for thewinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC and/or proving in suchwinding-up.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  447


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

On awinding-up or other return of capital (other than a redemption or purchase by Barclays Bank PLC of any of its issued shares, or a reduction of share capital, permitted by the Articles of Barclays Bank PLC and under applicable law), the assets of Barclays Bank PLC available to shareholders shall be applied in priority to any payment to the holders of ordinary shares and any other class of shares in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC then in issue ranking junior to the £1 Preference Shares on such a return of capital and pari passu on such a return of capital with the holders of any other class of shares in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC then in issue (other than any class of shares in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC then in issue ranking in priority to the £1 Preference Shares on awinding-up or other such return of capital), in payment to the holders of the £1 Preference Shares of a sum equal to the aggregate of: (1) an amount equal to the dividends accrued thereon for the then current dividend period (and any accumulated arrears thereof) to the date of the commencement of thewinding-up or other such return of capital; and (2) an amount equal to £1 per £1 Preference Share. After payment of the full amount of the liquidating distributions to which they are entitled, the holders of the £1 Preference Shares will have no right or claim to any of the remaining assets of Barclays Bank PLC and will not be entitled to any further participation in such return of capital.

The £1 Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, subject to the Companies Act 2006 and its Articles. Holders of the £1 Preference Shares are not entitled to receive notice of, or to attend, or vote at, any general meeting of Barclays Bank PLC.

Euro Preference Shares

140,000 Euro 4.75%non-cumulative callable preference shares of100 each (the 4.75% Preference Shares) were issued on 15 March 2005 for a consideration of1,383.3m (£966.7m), of which the nominal value was14m and the balance was share premium. The 4.75% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive Euronon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, annually at a fixed rate of 4.75% per annum on the amount of10,000 per preference share until 15 March 2020, and thereafter quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 0.71% per annum above the Euro interbank offered rate for three-month Euro deposits.

The 4.75% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on 15 March 2020, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

Sterling Preference Shares

75,000 Sterling 6.0%non-cumulative callable preference shares of £100 each (the 6.0% Preference Shares) were issued on 22 June 2005 for a consideration of £743.7m, of which the nominal value was £7.5m and the balance was share premium. The 6.0% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive Sterlingnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, annually at a fixed rate of 6.0% per annum on the amount of £10,000 per preference share until 15 December 2017, and thereafter quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 1.42% per annum above the London interbank offered rate for three-month Sterling deposits.

The 6.0% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC,were redeemed in whole but not in part only,full on 15 December 2017, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at £10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

448  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

2017.

US Dollar Preference Shares

100,000 US Dollar 6.278%non-cumulative callable preference shares of $100 each (the 6.278% Preference Shares), represented by 100,000 American Depositary Shares, Series 1, were issued on 8 June 2005 for a consideration of $995.4m (£548.1m), of which the nominal value was $10m and the balance was share premium. The 6.278% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollarnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, semi-annually at a fixed rate of 6.278% per annum on the amount of $10,000 per preference share until 15 December 2034, and thereafter quarterly at a rate reset quarterly equal to 1.55% per annum above the London interbank offered rate for three-month US Dollar deposits.

The 6.278% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on 15 December 2034, and on each dividend payment date thereafter at $10,000 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

30 million US Dollar 6.625% non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 6.625% Preference Shares), represented by 30 million American Depositary Shares, Series 2, were issued on 25 and 28 April 2006 for a consideration of $727m (£406m), of which the nominal value was $7.5m and the balance was share premium. The 6.625% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollar non-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 6.625% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

The 6.625% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole but not in part only, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

55 million US Dollar 7.1%non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 7.1% Preference Shares), represented by 55 million American Depositary Shares, Series 3, were issued on 13 September 2007 for a consideration of $1,335m (£657m), of which the nominal value was $13.75m and the balance was share premium. The 7.1% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollarnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 7.1% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

The 7.1% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC,were redeemed in whole or in part,full on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

46 million US Dollar 7.75% non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 7.75% Preference Shares), represented by 46 million American Depositary Shares, Series 4, were issued on 7 December 2007 for a consideration of $1,116m (£550m), of which the nominal value was $11.5m and the balance was share premium. The 7.75% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollar non-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 7.75% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

The 7.75% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole or in part, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.15 March 2017.

106 million US Dollar 8.125%non-cumulative callable preference shares of $0.25 each (the 8.125% Preference Shares), represented by 106 million American Depositary Shares, Series 5, were issued on 11 April 2008 and 25 April 2008 for a total consideration of $2,650m (£1,345m), of which the nominal value was $26.5m and the balance was share premium. The 8.125% Preference Shares entitle the holders thereof to receive US Dollarnon-cumulative cash dividends out of distributable profits of Barclays Bank PLC, quarterly at a fixed rate of 8.125% per annum on the amount of $25 per preference share.

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  449    405


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

    

 

The 8.125% Preference Shares are redeemable at the option of Barclays Bank PLC, in whole or in part, on any dividend payment date at $25 per share plus any dividends accrued for the then current dividend period to the date fixed for redemption.

No redemption or purchase of any 4.75% Preference Shares, the 6.0% Preference Shares, the 6.278% Preference Shares, the 6.625% Preference Shares, the 7.1% Preference Shares, the 7.75% Preference Shares and the 8.125% Preference Shares (together, the Preference Shares) may be made by Barclays Bank PLC without the prior approval of the UK PRA and any such redemption will be subject to the Companies Act 2006 and the Articles of Barclays Bank PLC.

On awinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC or other return of capital (other than a redemption or purchase of shares of Barclays Bank PLC, or a reduction of share capital), a holder of Preference Shares will rank in the application of assets of Barclays Bank PLC available to shareholders: (1) junior to the holder of any shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking in priority to the Preference Shares; (2) equally in all respects with holders of other preference shares and any other shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking pari passu with the Preference Shares; and (3) in priority to the holders of ordinary shares and any other shares of Barclays Bank PLC in issue ranking junior to the Preference Shares.

The holders of the £13m 6% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes and the $569m 6.86% Callable Perpetual Core Tier One Notes of Barclays Bank PLC (together, the TONs) and the holders of the £35m 5.3304%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments, the $159m 5.926% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments, the £33m 6.3688%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments, the $117m 7.434% Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments and the £3,000m 14%Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments of Barclays Bank PLC (together, the RCIs) would, for the purposes only of calculating the amounts payable in respect of such securities on awinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC, subject to limited exceptions and to the extent that the TONs and the RCIs are then in issue, rank pari passu with the holders of the most senior class or classes of preference shares then in issue in the capital of Barclays Bank PLC. Accordingly, the holders of the preference shares would rank equally with the holders of such TONs and RCIs on such awinding-up of Barclays Bank PLC (unless one or more classes of shares of Barclays Bank PLC ranking in priority to the preference shares are in issue at the time of suchwinding-up, in which event the holders of such TONs and RCIs would rank equally with the holders of such shares and in priority to the holders of the preference shares).

Subject to such ranking, in such event, holders of the preference shares will be entitled to receive out of assets of Barclays Bank PLC available for distributions to shareholders, liquidating distributions in the amount of10,000 per 4.75% Preference Share, £10,000 per 6.0% Preference Share, $10,000 per 6.278% Preference Share, $25 per 6.625% Preference Share, $25 per 7.1% Preference Share, $25 per 7.75% Preference Share and $0.25 per 8.125% Preference Share, plus, in each case, an amount equal to the accrued dividend for the then current dividend period to the date of the commencement of thewinding-up or other such return of capital. If a dividend is not paid in full on any preference shares on any dividend payment date, then a dividend restriction shall apply.

This dividend restriction will mean that neither Barclays Bank PLC nor Barclays PLC may (a) declare or pay a dividend (other than payment by Barclays PLC of a final dividend declared by its shareholders prior to the relevant dividend payment date, or a dividend paid by Barclays Bank PLC to Barclays PLC or to a wholly owned subsidiary) on any of their respective ordinary shares, other preference shares or other share capital or (b) redeem, purchase, reduce or otherwise acquire any of their respective share capital, other than shares of Barclays Bank PLC held by Barclays PLC or a wholly owned subsidiary, until the earlier of: (1) the date on which Barclays Bank PLC next declares and pays in full a preference dividend; and (2) the date on or by which all the preference shares are redeemed in full or purchased by Barclays Bank PLC.

Holders of the preference shares are not entitled to receive notice of, or to attend, or vote at, any general meeting of Barclays Bank PLC. Barclays Bank PLC is not permitted to create a class of shares ranking as regards participation in the profits or assets of Barclays Bank PLC in priority to the preference shares, save with the sanction of a special resolution of a separate general meeting of the holders of the preference shares (requiring a majority of not less than three-fourths of the holders of the

450  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

preference shares voting at the separate general meeting) or with the consent in writing of the holders of three-fourths of the preference shares.

Except as described above, the holders of the preference shares have no right to participate in the surplus assets of Barclays Bank PLC.

Other equity instruments

Other equity instruments of £5,350m (2014: £4,350m)£8,082m (2016: £6,486m) include AT1 securities issued by Barclays Bank PLC. In 2015,2017, there was one issuancewere two issuances of Fixed Rate Resetting Perpetual Subordinated Contingent Convertible Securities, with a principal amount of £1.0bn.amounts totals to £2.5bn.

The AT1 securities are perpetual securities with no fixed maturity and are structured to qualify as AT1 instruments under CRD IV.

Other shareholders’ equity

Other shareholders’ equity        
   The Group    The Bank  
        2015          2014           2015          2014   
   £m   £m    £m   £m  
 As at 1 January  485    485    549    549  
 As at 31 December  485    485    549    549  

                                                                                        
    The Group  The Bank 
   2017   2016  2017   2016 
    £m   £m  £m   £m 

As at 1 January

   271    485   335    549 

Redemption

   -    (214  -    (214

As at 31 December

   271    271   335    335 

Included in other shareholders’ equity are capital notes which bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance, based on London interbank rates. These notes are repayable in each case, at the option of the Bank, in whole on any interest payment date. The Bank is not obliged to make a payment of interest on its capital notes if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC.

406    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

m Reserves

Currency translation reserve

The currency translation reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on the retranslation of the Group’s net investment in foreign operations, net of the effects of hedging.

As at 31 December 2015 there was a debit balance of £623m (2014: £582m debit) in the currency translation reserve. The increase in the debit balance of £41m (2014: £560m decrease to a debit balance) principally reflected the depreciation of ZAR and EUR against GBP, offset by the appreciation of USD against GBP. The currency translation reserve movement associated with non-controlling interests was a £435m debit (2014: £74m debit) reflecting the depreciation of ZAR against GBP.

During the year a £65m net loss (2014: £91m net gain) from recycling of the currency translation reserve was recognised in the income statement.

Available for sale reserve

The available for sale reserve represents the unrealised change in the fair value of available for sale investments since initial recognition.

As at 31 December 2015 there was a credit balance of £338m in the available for sale reserve (2014: £578m credit). The decrease of £240m (2014: £427m increase) principally reflected a £350m loss from changes in fair value on Government Bonds, predominantly held in the liquidity pool, £148m of losses from related hedging, £378m of net gains transferred to net profit, partially offset by £396m gain from changes in fair value of equity investments in Visa Europe and an £86m change in insurance liabilities. A tax credit of £132m was recognised in the period relating to these items. The tax credit on AFS movements represented an effective rate of tax of 35.5% (2014: 19.4%). This is significantly higher than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) due to AFS movements including the VISA Europe gain that will be offset by existing UK capital losses for which a deferred tax asset has not been recognised.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  451


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

Cash flow hedging reserve

The cash flow hedging reserve represents the cumulative gains and losses on effective cash flow hedging instruments that will be recycled to the income statement when the hedged transactions affect profit or loss.

Own credit reserve

As at 31 December 2015 there was a result of the early adoption of the own credit balanceprovisions of £709m (2014: £1,817m credit) in the cash flow hedging reserve. The decrease of £1,108m (2014: £1,544m increase) principally reflected a £1,062m decrease in theIFRS 9 on 1 January 2017, own credit on financial liabilities designated at fair value of interest rate swaps held for hedging purposes as interest rate forward curves increasedthrough profit and £255m gains recycled toloss which was previously recorded in the income statement is now recognised within other comprehensive income. Amounts in line with when the hedged item affectsown credit reserve is not recycled to profit or loss partially offset by a tax credit of £206m. The tax credit on cash flow hedging reserve movements represented an effective rate of tax of 10.6% (2014: 19.8%). This is significantly lower than the UK corporation tax rate of 20.25% (2014: 21.5%) duein future periods.

Other reserves and other shareholders’ equity

Other reserves relate to the tax rate changes introducedredeemed ordinary and preference shares issued by the UK Summer Budget increasing associated deferred tax liabilities.group.

Included in other shareholders’ equity are capital notes which bear interest at rates fixed periodically in advance, based on London interbank rates. These notes are repayable in each case, at the option of the Bank, in whole on any interest payment date. The Bank is not obliged to make payment of interest on its capital notes if, in the preceding six months, a dividend has not been declared or paid on any class of shares of Barclays PLC.

                                            
    2017    2016 
    £m    £m 

Currency translation reserve

   3,084    3,054 

Available for sale reserve

   396    (22) 

Cash flow hedging reserve

   184    954 

Own credit reservea

   (179)    - 

Other reserves and treasury shares

   323    309 

Total

   3,808    4,295 

Note

aAs at 31 December 2017, the amount of own credit recognized in the Group’s other comprehensive income was a debit balance of £179m. Upon adoption of IFRS 9, an opening debit balance of £175m was recognized, with a further £4m loss (net of tax) recorded during 2017.

nNon-controlling interests

 

    
 
Profit attributable to Non-
Controlling interest
 
  
   

 

Equity attributable to Non-

Controlling interest

  

  

   

 

Dividends paid to Non-

Controlling interest

  

  

   2015      2014      2015      2014      2015      2014   
    £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m  
Barclays Africa Group Limited   325     320     1,902     2,247     209     189  
Other non-controlling interests   2     6     12     4     -     1  
Total   327     326     1,914     2,251     209     190  

Barclays Bank PLC owns 62.5% (2014: 62.3%) of Barclays Africa Group Limited.

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited

Summarised financial information for Barclays Africa Group Limited, before intercompany eliminations, is set out below:

    
 
Barclays Africa Group
Limited
  
  
   
 
Barclays Africa Group
Limited
  
  
   2015      2014   
    £m     £m  

Income statement information

    

Total income net of insurance claims

   3,418     3,530  

Profit after tax

   781     765  

Total other comprehensive income for the year, after tax

   26     (7

Total comprehensive income for the year

   807     758  

Statement of cash flows information

    

Net cash inflows

   923     43  

Balance sheet information

    

Total assets

   49,471     55,378  

Total liabilities

   45,200     50,150  

Shareholder equity

   4,271     5,228  

452  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

    

Profit attributable to Non-

Controlling interest

   

Equity attributable to Non-

Controlling interest

   

Dividends paid to Non-

Controlling interest

 
   2017   2016   2017   2016   2017   2016 
    £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Barclays Africa Group Limited

   140    402    -    3,507    173    235 

Othernon-controlling interests

   4    3    1    15    -    - 

Total

   144    405    1    3,522    173    235 

o Dividends on ordinary shares

Ordinary dividends were paid to enable Barclays PLC to fund its dividend to shareholders.

The 20152017 financial statements include £876m (2014: £821m)£674m (2016: £638m) of dividendsdividend paid. This includes the final dividend declared in relation to 2014the prior year of £476m (2014: £512m) and£165m (2016: £502m), interim dividends of £400m (2014: £309m), resulting£208m (2016: £119m) and an additional £301m dividend paid to Barclays PLC which was then contributed to Group Service Company. These result in interim dividends of 17p (2014: 13p) per ordinary share and a total dividend for the year of 37p (2014: 35p)29p (2016: 27p) per ordinary share paid during the year.share.

Dividends paid on the 4.75%100 preference shares amounted to £339.67£415.65 per share (2014: £394.46)(2016: £370.20). Due to share buybacks in 2014 no dividends wereDividends paid on the 4.875%6.278% US$100 preference shares (2014: £385.81)amounted to £483.37 per share (2016: £467.05). Dividends paid on the 8.125% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.58 per share (2016:

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    407


Barclays Bank PLC data

Notes to the accounts

£1.49). Dividends paid on the 6.0% £100 preference shares amounted to £600.00 per share (2014:(2016: £600.00). Dividends paid on which was redeemed during the 6.278% US$100 preference shares amounted to £410.28 per share (2014: £383.45). Dividends paid on the 6.625% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.09 per share (2014: £1.02).year. Dividends paid on the 7.1% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.17£0.36 per share (2014: £1.09). Dividends paid on(2016: £1.30) which was redeemed during the 7.75% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.28 per share (2014: £1.19). Dividends paid on the 8.125% US$0.25 preference shares amounted to £1.34 per share (2014: £1.25).year.

Dividends paid on preference shares amounted to £343m (2014: £441m)£242m (2016: £339m). Dividends paid on other equity instruments amounted to £348m (2014: £252m)£639m (2016: £462m).

p Capital

The Barclays Bank PLC Group’s policies and objectives for managing capital are the same as those for the Barclays PLC Group, disclosed on pages 103 and 104.page 346.

The table below provides details of the Barclays Bank PLC Group at 31 December 2015.2017.

 

Regulatory capital

  

2015             2017

 
    

£m

Fully loaded Common Equity Tier 1 capital

   40,74145,232 

PRA Transitional Tiertransitional tier 1 capital

   52,63458,325 

PRA Transitional Total Capital Resourcestransitional total regulatory capital

   66,52773,339 

The capital composition of Barclays Bank PLC Group is broadly equivalent to Barclays PLC Group shown in the table on page 150.

q Segmental reporting

Segmental reporting by Barclays Bank PLC is the same as that presented in the Barclays PLC financial statements, except for:

 

the difference in profit before tax of £768m (2014: £53m)£0.4bn (2016: £1.2bn) between Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC is included in the Head Office Functions and Other Operations and Investment Bank;Functions; and

 

the difference in total assets of £715m (2014: £787m)£3.9bn (2016: £0.9bn) is represented by holdingsmainly due to transfer of PPE and Intangible assets to Barclays PLC shares held for employee share schemes and the loan notes issued by Barclays Bank Plc issued loan notesPLC to fund the derivatives created in Barclays Plc.PLC.

r Related Parties

The aggregate emoluments of all Directors and Officers of Barclays Bank PLC who held office during the year (2015:(2017: 30 persons, 2016: 33 persons, 2014: 34 persons, 2013: 382015: 33 persons) for the year ended 31st31 December 20152017 amounted to £52.5m (2014: £57.0m, 2013: £70.3m)£88.7m (2016: £71.3m; 2015: £52.5m). In addition, the aggregate amount set aside by the Bank and its subsidiaries for the year ended 31st31 December 2015,2017, to provide pension benefits for the Directors and Officers amounted to £0.3m (2014: £0.3m, 2013: £0.6m)£0.1m (2016: £0.2m; 2015: £0.3m).

 

408    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  453


Additional Financial data

    

    

    

 

Selected financial statistics

   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
   

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

  

 

 

 

%

 

  

Return on average shareholders’ equitya

   1.4     0.8     1.6     (0.5   5.6  

Return on average total assetsb

   0.1     -     0.1     -     0.2  

Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage of average total assets

   5.2     4.8     4.5     4.2     3.9  
          
    2015      2014      2013      2012      2011   

Selected income statement data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

Continuing operations

          

Interest income

   17,195     17,369     18,315     19,211     20,589  

Interest expense

   (3,882   (5,231   (6,662   (7,561   (8,393

Non-interest income

   13,442     13,677     16,810     13,807     20,927  

Operating expenses

   (20,677   (20,423   (21,974   (21,007   (20,881

Impairment charges

   (2,114   (2,168   (3,071   (3,340   (5,602

Share of post-tax results of associates and joint ventures

   47     36     (56   110     60  

Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures

   (637   (471   6     28     (94

Gain on acquisitions

   -     -     26     2     -  

Profit before tax

   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,865  

Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent

   911     528     963     (306   3,533  
          
    2015      2014      2013      2012      2011   

Selected balance sheet data

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

  

 

 

 

£m

 

  

Total shareholders’ equity

   66,019     63,794     63,220     59,923     63,933  

Subordinated liabilities

   21,955     21,685     22,249     24,422     24,870  

Deposits from banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue

   534,537     572,357     574,340     587,787     592,460  

Loans and advances to banks and customers

   441,046     470,424     474,059     472,809     485,277  

Total assets

   1,120,727     1,358,693     1,344,201     1,512,777     1,588,555  

      
Selected financial statistics                  2017                   2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 
    %   %   %   %   % 
Return on average shareholders’ equitya   (3.3)    4.5    0.9    0.1    1.7 
Return on average total assetsb   (0.2)    0.2    -    -    0.1 
Average shareholders’ equity as a percentage of average total assets   5.0    5.1    4.9    4.6    3.9 

      
                   2017                   2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 
Selected income statement data  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Continuing operations          
Interest income   13,631    14,423    13,947    14,200    14,361 
Interest expense   (3,883)    (2,966)    (2,584)    (4,056)    (4,851) 
Non-interest income   11,189    11,012    11,445    11,665    14,553 
Operating expenses   (15,689)    (16,348)    (18,536)    (18,178)    (19,534) 
Impairment charges   (2,336)    (2,373)    (1,762)    (1,821)    (2,601) 
Share ofpost-tax results of associates and joint ventures   70    70    41    28    (65) 
Profit on disposal of subsidiaries, associates and joint ventures   184    565    (637)    (473)    6 
Gain on acquisitions   -    -    -    -    26 
Profit before tax   3,166    4,383    1,914    1,365    1,896 
Profit attributable to equity holders of the parent   (1,937)    2,867    566    85    963 

      
                   2017                   2016                   2015                   2014                   2013 
Selected balance sheet data  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Total shareholders’ equity   56,751    60,947    64,105    59,444    58,931 
Subordinated liabilities   24,193    23,871    21,955    21,685    22,249 
Deposits from banks, customer accounts and debt securities in issue   536,718    548,286    534,537    572,357    574,340 
Loans and advances to banks and customers   401,762    436,417    441,046    470,424    474,059 
Total assets   1,129,343    1,213,955    1,120,727    1,358,693    1,344,201 

Notes

aReturn on average shareholders’ equity represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average shareholders’ equity.

bReturn on average total assets represents profit attributable to the equity holders of the parent as a percentage of average total assets.

 

454  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    409


 


Additional Financial data

    

    

 

Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Bank Plc (unaudited)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
    (In £m except for ratios)  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges          
Fixed charges          
Interest expense   3,882     5,231     6,662     7,561     8,393  
Rental expense   211     261     254     251     268  
Total fixed charges   4,093     5,492     6,916     7,812     8,661  
Earnings          
Income before taxes and non-controlling interests   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,974  
Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (34   (45   95     (113   (47
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   2,807     2,264     2,980     537     5,927  
Fixed charges   4,093     5,492     6,916     7,812     8,661  
Total earnings including fixed charges   6,900     7,756     9,896     8,349     14,588  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges   1.69     1.41     1.43     1.07     1.68  
          
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares – Barclays Bank Plc (unaudited)   2015     2014     2013     2012     2011  
    (In £m except for ratios)  
Combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations          
Interest expense   3,882     5,231     6,662     7,561     8,393  
Rental expense   211     261     254     251     268  
Fixed charges   4,093     5,492     6,916     7,812     8,661  
Preference share dividends and similar appropriations   345     443     412     466     514  
Total fixed charges   4,438     5,935     7,328     8,278     9,175  
Earnings          
Income before taxes and non-controlling interests   2,841     2,309     2,885     650     5,974  
Less: unremitted pre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (34   (45   95     (113   (47
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   2,807     2,264     2,980     537     5,927  
Fixed charges   4,438     5,935     7,328     8,278     9,175  
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,245     8,199     10,308     8,815     15,102  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations   1.63     1.38     1.41     1.06     1.65  

      
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges – Barclays Bank Plc                     2017                       2016                       2015                       2014                       2013 
   
        (In £m except for ratios) 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges      
Fixed charges      
Interest expense   3,883   2,966   2,584   4,056   4,851 
Rental expense   118   204   157   207   219 
Total fixed charges   4,001   3,170   2,741   4,263   5,070 
Earnings      
Income before taxes andnon-controlling interests   3,166   4,383   1,914   1,365   1,896 
Less: unremittedpre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (68  (53  (26  (34  102 
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   3,098   4,330   1,888   1,331   1,998 
Fixed charges   4,001   3,170   2,741   4,263   5,070 
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,099   7,500   4,629   5,594   7,068 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges   1.77   2.37   1.69   1.31   1.39 
                  
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges and preference shares – Barclays
Bank Plc
  2017  2016  2015  2014  2013 
   
        (In £m except for ratios) 
Combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations      
Interest expense   3,883   2,966   2,584   4,056   4,851 
Rental expense   118   204   157   207   219 
Fixed charges   4,001   3,170   2,741   4,263   5,070 
Preference share dividends and similar appropriations   242   343   345   443   412 
Total fixed charges   4,243   3,513   3,086   4,706   5,482 
Earnings      
Income before taxes andnon-controlling interests   3,166   4,383   1,914   1,365   1,896 
Less: unremittedpre-tax income of associated companies and joint ventures   (68  (53  (26  (34  102 
Total earnings excluding fixed charges   3,098   4,330   1,888   1,331   1,998 
Fixed charges   4,243   3,513   3,086   4,706   5,482 
Total earnings including fixed charges   7,341   7,843   4,974   6,037   7,480 
Ratio of earnings to fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations   1.73   2.23   1.61   1.28   1.36 

 

410    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  455


Glossary of terms

    

    

 

 

Glossary of terms

‘A-IRB’ / ‘Advanced-Internal Ratings Based’ See ‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’.

‘ABS CDO Super Senior’ Super senior tranches of debt linked to collateralised debt obligations of asset backed securities (defined below). Payment of super senior tranches takes priority over other obligations.

‘Acceptances and endorsements’ An acceptance is an undertaking by a bank to pay a bill of exchange drawn on a customer. The Group expects most acceptances to be presented, but reimbursement by the customer is normally immediate. Endorsements are residual liabilities of the Group in respect of bills of exchange which have been paid and subsequently rediscounted.

‘Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital’ In the context of CRD IV, a measuretype of a bank’s financial strengthcapital as defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR).

‘Additional Tier 1 (AT1) securities’ Securities that are tradedtreated as additional tier 1 (AT1) capital in the context of CRD IV.

‘Adjusted attributable profit’ Adjusted profit after tax that is attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent adjusted for the after tax amounts of capital securities classified as equity.

‘Adjusted basic earnings per share’ Basic earnings per share, based on adjusted attributable earnings.

‘Adjusted compensation: net operating income’ Compensation costs as a proportion of adjusted net operating income (adjusted income less credit impairment charges and other provisions).

‘Adjusted cost: income ratio’ Adjusted operating expenses (defined below) compared to adjusted income (defined below).

‘Adjusted income’ Total income net of insurance claims adjusted to exclude the impact of own credit, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology and gain on US Lehman acquisition assets.

‘Adjusted total operating expenses’ Total operating expenses adjusted to exclude impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

‘Adjusted profit after tax’ Adjusted profit before tax (defined below) less tax.

‘Adjusted profit before tax’ Profit before tax adjusted to exclude the impact of own credit, impairment of goodwill and other assets relating to businesses being disposed, provisions for UK customer redress, gain on US Lehman acquisition assets, provisions for ongoing investigations and litigation including Foreign Exchange, loss on sale relating to the Spanish, Portuguese and Italian businesses, Education, Social Housing, and Local Authority (ESHLA) revision of valuation methodology, and gain on valuation of a component of the defined retirement benefit liability.

‘Adjusted return on average risk weighted assets’ Adjusted profit after tax as a proportion of average risk weighted assets.

‘Adjusted return on average shareholders’ equity’ Adjusted profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments.

‘Adjusted return on average tangible shareholders’ equity’ Adjusted profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Advanced Measurement Approach’ Under CRD IV, operational risk charges can be calculated by using one of three methods (or approaches) that increase in sophistication and risk sensitivity: (i) the Basic Indicator Approach; (ii) the Standardised Approach; and (iii) the Advanced Measurement Approach (AMA). Under the AMA the banks are allowed to develop their own empirical model to quantify required capital for operational risk.

456  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

Banks can only use this approach subject to approval from their local regulators.

‘Africa Banking’ The previously reported Africa Retail and Business Banking combined with other businesses across Africa previously reported within Barclaycard, the Investment Bank, Corporate Banking and Wealth Management. The Africa head office function is also included in Africa Banking. This combined Africa Banking business is managed under three primary businesses: Retail and Business Banking; Wealth, Investment Management and Insurance; and Corporate and Investment Banking. The resulting African business comprises the Barclays Africa Group Limited (BAGL) listed entity, together with Barclays Egypt and Zimbabwe businesses.

‘Agencies’ Bonds issued by state and / or government agencies or government-sponsored entities.

‘Agency Mortgage-Backed Securities’ Mortgage-Backed Securities issued by government-sponsored institutions.entities.

‘All price risk (APR)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default for the correlation trading portfolio.

‘American Depository Receipts (ADR)’ A negotiable certificate that represents the ownership of shares in anon-US company (for example Barclays) trading in US financial markets.

‘Americas’ Geographic segment comprising the USA, Canada and countries where Barclays operates within Latin America.

‘Annual Earnings at Risk (AEaR)’ Impact on earningsA measure of the potential change in Net Interest Income (NII) due to an adverse interest rate movements over a parallel (upward or downward) movement in interest rates.predefined time horizon.

‘Application scorecards’ Algorithm based decision tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on available customer data at the point of application for a product.

‘Arrears’ Customers are said to be in arrears when they are behind in fulfilling their obligations with the result that an outstanding loan is unpaid or overdue. Such customers are also said to be in a state of delinquency. When a customer is in arrears, their entire outstanding balance is said to be delinquent, meaning that delinquent balances are the total outstanding loans on which payments are overdue.

‘Arrears Managed accounts’Accounts’ Arrears Managed accountsAccounts are principally Business Lending customers in arrears with an exposure limit less than £50,000 in the UK and100,000 in Europe, supervised using processes designed to manage a homogeneous set of assets.

‘Asia’ Geographic segment comprising countries where Barclays operates within Asia (including Singapore, Japan, China and India), Australasia and the Middle East.

‘Asset Backed Commercial Paper’ Typically short-term notes secured on specified assets issued by consolidated special purpose entities for funding purposes.

‘Asset Backed Securities (ABS)’ Securities that represent an interest in an underlying pool of referenced assets. The referenced pool can comprise any assets which attract a set of associated cash flows but are commonly pools of residential or commercial mortgages and, in the case of Collateralised Debt Obligations (CDOs), the referenced pool may be ABS or other classes of assets.

‘Attributable profit’ Profit after tax that is attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parentBarclays PLC adjusted for the after tax amounts of capital securities classified as equity.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    411


Glossary of terms

‘Average allocated tangible shareholders equity’ Calculated as the average of the previous month’s period end allocated tangible shareholders’ equity and the current month’s period end allocated tangible shareholders’ equity. The average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity for the quarter / year is the average of the monthly averages within that quarter / year.

‘Average tangible shareholders equity’ Calculated as the average of the previous month’s period end tangible shareholders’ equity and the current month’s period end tangible shareholders’ equity. The average tangible shareholders’ equity for the quarter / year is the average of the monthly averages within that quarter / year.

‘Back testing’ Includes a number of techniques that assess the continued statistical validity of a model by simulating how the model would have predicted recent experience.

‘BAGL’ or ‘Barclays Africa’ Barclays Africa Group Limited, which was previously a subsidiary of the Group. Following a sell down of shares resulting in a loss of control, the Group’s shareholding in BAGL is now classified as an Available for Sale asset.

‘Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ In the context of the credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating marked to market LTVs derived by calculating individual LTVs at account level and weighting it by the balances to arrive at the average position. Balance weighted loan to value is calculated using the following formula: LTV = ((loan balance 1 x MTM LTV% for loan 1) + (loan balance 2 x MTM LTV% for loan 2) + ... ))) / total outstandings in portfolio.

‘The Bank’ Barclays Bank PLC.

‘Barclaycard’ An international consumer payments companybusiness serving the needs of businesses and consumers through credit cards, consumer lending, merchant acquiring, commercial cards and point of sale finance. Barclaycard has scaled operations in UK, US, Germany Iberia and Scandinavia.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  457


Glossary

‘Barclays Core’ The Core Barclays business of Personal and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard, Africa Banking and the Investment Bank, along with Head Office and Other Operations. See also ‘Barclays Non-Core’

‘Barclays Core Operating businesses’ The Corecore Barclays businesses operated by Barclays UK (which include the UK Personal business, of Personalthe small UK Corporate and Corporate Banking, Barclaycard, Africa BankingUK Wealth businesses and the Barclaycard UK consumer credit cards business) and Barclays International (which include the large UK Corporate business; the international Corporate and Wealth businesses; the

Investment Bank. See also ‘Barclays Non-Core’Bank; the international Barclaycard business; and Barclaycard Business Solutions).

‘Barclays Direct’A Barclays brand, comprising the savings and mortgage businesses acquired from ING Direct UK in March 2013.businesses.

‘Barclays Non-Core’International’ ThisThe division of Barclays which will not ultimately be ring-fenced as part of regulatory ring fencing requirements. The division includes the large UK Corporate business; the international Corporate and Wealth businesses; the Investment Bank; the international Barclaycard business (consisting of the US, German and Nordic consumer credit cards businesses); and Barclaycard Business Solutions (including merchant acquiring).

‘BarclaysNon-Core’ The previously reported unit groups togethercomprising of a group of businesses and assets that are not strategically attractive to Barclays and that will bewere exited or run down over time. See also ‘Barclays Core’by Barclays, which was closed in 2017.

Basel 2’Barclays UK’ The seconddivision of Barclays which will be ring-fenced as part of regulatory ring fencing requirements. The division includes the Basel accords. It sets a framework of minimum capital requirements for banks – coveringUK Personal business; the small UK Corporate and UK Wealth businesses; and the Barclaycard UK consumer credit operational and market risk; supervisory review of banks’ assessment of capital adequacy and disclosure requirements.cards business.

‘Basel 3’ The third of the Basel Accords on banking supervision. Developed in response to the financial crisis of 2008, setting new requirements on composition of capital, counterparty credit risk, liquidity and leverage ratios.

‘Basel Committee of Banking Supervisors (BCBS or The Basel Committee)’ A forum for regular cooperation on banking supervisory matters which develops global supervisory standards for the banking industry. Its members are officials from central banks or prudential supervisors from 27 countries and territories.

BCBS 270 leverage exposure’ The denominator of the internationally agreed Basel III leverage ratio. The exposure measure makes certain adjustments to Total assets under IFRS in accordance with the requirements stated in BCBS 270 (“Basel III leverage ratio framework and disclosure requirements”).

Basis point(s)’ / ‘bp(s)’ One hundredth of a per cent (0.01%); 100 basis points is 1%. The measure is used in quoting movements in interest rates, yields on securities and for other purposes.

‘Basis risk’ Measures the impactIndex/Tenor risk, that arises when floating rate products are linked to different interest rate indices, which are imperfectly correlated, especially under stressed market conditions.

412    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of changes in tenor basis (e.g., the basis between swaps vs. 3 month (3M) Libor and swaps vs. 6 month (6M) Libor) and cross currency basis.terms

‘Behavioural scorecards’ Algorithm based decision tools used to aid business decisions and manage credit risk based on existing customer data derived from account usage.

‘Book quality’ In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, changes in RWAs caused by factors such as underlying customer behaviour or demographics leading to changes in risk profile.

‘Book size’In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, changes in RWAs driven by business activity, including net originations or repayments.

‘Businesses’ In the context ofNon-Core Analysis of Total income, Barclays Non Core Businessesbusinesses comprise ongoing businesses seeking to besold-off or run down including Europe retail andnon-core elements of the Investment Bank and other non strategic businesses.

‘Business Lending’ Business Lending in Personal and Corporate BankingBarclays UK that primarily relates to small and medium enterprises typically with exposures up to £3m or with a turnover up to £5m.

‘Business scenario stresses’ Multi asset scenario analysis of extreme, but plausible events that may impact the market risk exposures of the Investment Bank.

‘Buy to let mortgage’ A mortgage where the intention of the customer (investor) was to let the property at origination.

‘Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB)’ Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held under CRD IV to ensure that banks build up surplus capital outside periods of stress which can be drawn down if losses are incurred.

‘Capital deduction approach’ An approach available to institutions when calculating risk-weighted assets for securitisation exposures. It is the same as a deduction from capital where the most punitive risk weight of 1250% is applied (assuming 8% Capital Adequacy ratio).

‘Capital ratios’ Key financial ratios measuring the Group’s capital adequacy or financial strength. These include the CET 1CET1 ratio, Tier 1 capital ratio and Total Capitalcapital ratio.

‘Capital requirements’ Amount to be held by the Group to cover the risk of losses to a certain confidence level.

458  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR)’ Regulation (EU) No 575/2013, which accompanies CRD IV and sets out detailed rules for capital eligibility, the calculation of RWAs, the measurement of leverage, the management of large exposures and minimum standards for liquidity.

‘Capital requirements on the underlying exposures (KIRB)’ An approach available to banks when calculating risk weighted assets (RWA) for securitisation exposures. This is based upon the RWA amounts that would be calculated under the IRB approach for the underlying pool of securitised exposures in the program, had such exposures not been securitised.

‘Capital resources’ Financial instruments on balance sheet that are eligible to satisfy capital requirements.

‘Central Counterparty’ / ‘Central Clearing Counterparties (CCPs)’ A clearing house mediating between the buyer and the seller in a financial transaction, such as a derivative contract or repurchase agreement (repo). Where a central counterparty is used, a singlebi-lateral contract between the buyer and seller is replaced with two contracts, one between the buyer and the CCP and one between the CCP and the seller. The use of CCPs allows for greater oversight and improved credit risk mitigation inover-the-counter (OTC) markets.

‘Charge-off’ In the retail segment this refers to the point in time when collections activity changes from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the full balance. This is normally when six payments are in arrears.

‘Chargesadd-on and non VaR’ In the context of risk weighted assets,Risk Weighted Assets, any additional Market Risk not captured within Modelled VaR, including Incremental Risk chargesCharges and Correlation Risk.

‘Client Assets’ Assets managed or administered by Barclays on behalf of clients including Assetsassets under Managementmanagement (AUM), Custodycustody assets, Assetsassets under Administrationadministration and client deposits.

‘CLOs and Other insured assets’ Highly rated CLO positions wrapped by monolines,non-CLOs wrapped by monolines and other assets wrapped with Credit Support Annex (CSA) protection.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    413


Glossary of terms

‘Collateralised Debt Obligation (CDO)’ Securities issued by a third party which reference Asset Backed Securities (ABSs) (defined above) and/or certain other related assets purchased by the issuer. CDOs may feature exposure tosub-prime mortgage assets through the underlying assets.

‘Collateralised Loan Obligation (CLO)’ A security backed by the repayments from a pool of commercial loans. The payments may be made to different classes of owners (in tranches).

‘Collateralised Mortgage Obligation (CMO)’ A type of security backed by mortgages. A special purpose entity receives income from the mortgages and passes them on to investors of the security.

‘Collectively assessed impairment allowances’ Impairment of financial assets is measured collectively where a portfolio comprises homogenous assets and where appropriate statistical techniques are available.

Combined Buffer Requirement’ In the context of the CRD IV capital obligations, the combined requirements of the Capital Conservation Buffer, the GSII Buffer, the OSII buffer, the Systemic Risk buffer and an institution specific counter-cyclical buffer.

Commercial paper (CP)’ Short-term notes issued by entities, including banks, for funding purposes.

‘Commercial real estate’estate (CRE)’ Commercial real estate includes office buildings, industrial property, medical centres, hotels, retail stores, shopping centres, farm land, multifamily housing buildings, warehouses, garages, and industrial properties and other similar properties. Commercial real estate loans are loans backed by a package of commercial real estate. Note: for the purposes of the Credit Risk section, the UK CRE portfolio includes property investment, development, trading and housebuilders but excludes social housing contractors.

‘Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission Framework (COSO)’ A joint initiative of five private sector organisations dedicated to providing development of frameworks and guidance on enterprise risk management, internal control and fraud deterrence.

‘Commodity derivatives’ Exchange traded andover-the-counter (OTC) derivatives based on an underlying commodity (e.g. metals, precious metals, oil and oil related, power and natural gas).

‘Commodity risk’ Measures the impact of changes in commodity prices and volatilities, including the basis between related commodities (e.g. Brent vs. WTI crude prices).

‘Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital’In the context of CRD IV, a measuretype of capital that is predominantly common equity as defined by the Capital Requirements Regulation.Regulation, predominantly consisting of common equity.

‘Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio’ A measure of the Group’s Common Equity Tier 1 capital as a percentage of risk-weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets under CRD IV. The Group must meet a prescribed ratio.

‘Compensation: income ratio’ The ratio of compensation to employeesexpense over total income net of insurance claims.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  459


Glossary

income. Compensation represents total staff costs lessnon-compensation items consisting of outsourcing, bank payroll tax, staff training, redundancy costs and retirement costs.

‘Comprehensive Risk Measure (CRM)’ An estimate of all the material market risks, including rating migration and default for the correlation trading portfolio. Also referred to as All Price Risk (APR) and Comprehensive Risk Capital Charge (CRCC).

‘Constant Currency Basis’ ExcludesExcluding the impact of foreign currency conversion to GBP when comparing financial results in two different financial periods.

‘Contingent capital notes (CCNs)’ Interest bearing debt securities issued by Barclays PLC or its subsidiaries that are either permanently written off or converted into an equity instrument from the issuer’s perspective in the event of Barclays PLCthe Group’s core tier 1 (CT1) or common equity tierCommon Equity Tier 1 (CET1) ratio, as appropriate, falling below a specified level.

‘Core deposit intangibles’ Premium paid to acquire the deposit base of an institution.

‘Correlation risk’ Refers to the change in marked to market value of a security when the correlation between the underlying assets changes over time.

414    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘Corporate and Investment Banking (CIB)’ Barclays Corporate and Investment Banking businesses which form part of Barclays International.

‘Cost: income ratio’ Operating expenses compared todivided by total income net of insurance claims.income.

‘Cost of Equity’ The rate of return targeted by the equity holders of a company.

‘Cost: net operating income ratio’ Operating expenses compared to total income net of insurance claims less credit impairment charges and other provisions.

‘Cost to Achieve (CTA)’Non-recurring investment in initiatives to drive cost and business efficiency across Barclays through rightsizing, industrialisation and innovation.

‘Cost to income jaws’ Relationship of the percentage change movement in total operating expenses relative to total income net of insurance claimsincome.

‘Counter-Cyclical Capital Buffer (CCCB)(CCyB) CET1 Capital of up to 2.5% of risk weighted assets that is required to be held under CRD IV rules to ensure that banks build up surplus capital when macroeconomicsmacroeconomic conditions indicate areas of the economy are overheating.

‘Countercyclical leverage ratio buffer (CCLB)’ A macroprudential buffer that applies to all Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) regulated institutions from 2018 and is calculated at 35% of any risk weighted countercyclical capital buffer set by the Financial Policy Committee (FPC). The CCLB applies in addition to the minimum of 3% and anyG-SII additional Leverage Ratio Buffer that applies.

‘Counterparty credit risk’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk, a component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss in derivatives, repurchase agreements and similar transactions resulting from the default of the counterparty.

‘Coverage ratio’ In the context of the creditCredit risk disclosures, impairment allowances as a percentage of credit risk loanCredit Risk Loan balances.

‘Covered bonds’ Debt securities backed by a portfolio of mortgages that are segregated from the issuer’s other assets solely for the benefit of the holders of the covered bonds.

‘CRD IV’ The Fourth Capital Requirements Directive, an EU Directive and an accompanying Regulation (CRR) that together prescribe EU capital adequacy and liquidity requirements and implements Basel 3 in the European Union. CRD IV came into effect on 1 January 2014.

‘Credit’Credit conversion factor (CCF)’ Factor used to estimate the risk fromoff-balance sheet commitments for the purpose of calculating the total Exposure at Default (EAD) used to calculate risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets (RWAs).

‘Credit default swaps (CDS)’ A contract under which the protection seller receives premiums or interest-related payments in return for contracting to make payments to the protection buyer in the event of a defined credit event. Credit events normally include bankruptcy, payment default on a reference asset or assets, or downgrades by a rating agency.

‘Credit derivatives (CDs)’ An arrangement whereby the credit risk of an asset (the reference asset) is transferred from the buyer to the seller of the protection.

‘Credit enhancements’ See ‘Liquidity and Credit enhancements’.

‘Credit impairment charges’ Also known as ‘credit impairment’. Impairment charges on loans and advances to customers and banks and in respect of undrawn facilities and guarantees (see ‘Loan impairment’) and impairment charges on available for sale assets and reverse repurchase agreements.

‘Credit market exposures’ Assets and other instruments relating to commercial real estate and leveraged finance businesses that have been significantly impacted by the deterioration in the global credit markets. The exposures include positions subject to fair value movements in the Income Statement, positions that are classified as loans and advances and available for sale and other assets.

460  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Credit Products’Represents Creditcredit products and Securitised Products income.Products.

‘Credit quality step’ In the context of the Standardised Approach to calculating credit risk RWAs, a “credit quality assessment scale” maps the credit assessments of a recognised credit rating agency or export credit agency to credit quality steps that determine the risk weight to be applied to an exposure.

‘Credit Rating’ An evaluation of the creditworthiness of an entity seeking to enter into a credit agreement.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    415


Glossary of terms

‘Credit risk’ The risk of the Group suffering financial loss if a counterparty fails to fulfil its contractual obligations to the Group under a loan agreement or similar. In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk, it is the component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss in loans and advances and similar transactions resulting from the default of the counterparty.

‘Credit Risk Loans (CRLs)’ A loan becomes a credit risk loan when evidence of deterioration has been observed, for example a missed payment or other breach of covenant. A loan may be reported in one of three categories: (i) impaired loans,loans; (ii) accruing past due 90 days or more,more; and (iii) impaired or restructured loans. These may include loans which, while impaired, are still performing but have associated individual impairment allowances raised against them.

‘Credit risk mitigation’ A range of techniques and strategies to actively mitigate credit risks to which the bank is exposed. These can be broadly divided into three types; Collateral, Nettingcollateral, netting andset-off, and Risk Transfer.risk transfer.

‘Credit spread’ The premium over the benchmark or risk-free rate required by the market to accept a lower credit quality.

‘Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)’ The difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the counterparty’s risk of default. The CVA therefore represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the counterparty due to any failure to perform on contractual agreements.

‘CRL Coverage’ Impairment allowances as a percentage of total CRL (See ‘Credit Risk Loans’). Also known as the ‘CRL coverage ratio’.

‘CRR leverage exposure’ Is calculated in accordance with article 429 as per the CRR which was amended effective from January 2015.

‘CRR leverage ratio’ As per the CRR which was amended effective from January 2015, is calculated as the using theend-point CRR definition of Tier 1 capital for the numerator and the CRR definition of leverage exposure as the denominator.

‘Customer assets’ Represents loans and advances to customers. Average balances are calculated as the sum of all daily balances for the year to date divided by number of days in the year to date.

‘Customer deposits’ In the context of Funding Risk, Liquidity Risk section, money deposited by all individuals and companies that are not credit institutions. Such funds are recorded as liabilities in the Group’s balance sheet under Customer Accounts.

‘Customer liabilities’ Customer deposits.

‘Customer net interest income’ The sum of customer asset and customer liability net interest income. Customer net interest income reflects interest related to customer assets and liabilities only and does not include any interest on securities or othernon-customer assets and liabilities.

‘CVA volatility charge’ The volatility charge added to exposures that adjusts formid-market valuation on a portfolio of transactions with a counterparty. This is to reflect the current market value of the credit risk associated with the counterparty to the Bank. The charge is prescribed by the CRR.

‘Daily Value at Risk (DVaR)’ An estimateA measure of the potential loss which might ariseof value arising from unfavourable market movements under normal market conditions,at a specific confidence level, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day, measured to a specified confidence level.day.

‘DBRS’ A credit rating agency.

‘Debit Valuation Adjustment (DVA)’ The opposite of credit valuation adjustmentCredit Valuation Adjustment (CVA). It is the difference between the risk-free value of a portfolio of trades and the market value which takes into account the Group’s risk of default. The DVA, therefore, represents an estimate of the adjustment to fair value that a market participant would make to incorporate the credit risk of the Group due to any failure to perform on contractual agreements.obligations. The DVA decreases the value of a liability to take into account a reduction in the remaining balance that would be settled should the Group default or not perform in terms ofany contractual agreements.obligations.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  461


Glossary

‘Debtbuy-backs’ Purchases of the Group’s issued debt securities, including equity accounted instruments, leading to theirde-recognition from the balance sheet.

416    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘Debt securities in issue’ Transferable securities evidencing indebtedness of the Group. These are liabilities of the Group and include certificates of deposit and commercial paper.

‘Default grades’ Barclays classify ranges of default probabilities into a set of 21 intervals called default grades, in order to distinguish differences in the probability of default risk.

Default fund contributions’ The amount of contribution made by members of a central counterparty (CCP). All members are required to contribute to this fund in advance of using a CCP. The default fund can be used by the CCP to cover losses incurred by the CCP where losses are greater than the margins provided by that member.

Derivatives’ In the context ofNon-Core Analysis of Total income, Derivatives comprise non strategic businesses from thenon-core Investment Bank

‘Derivatives netting’ Adjustments applied across asset and liabilitymark-to-market derivative positions pursuant to legally enforceable bilateral netting agreements and eligible cash collateral received in derivative transactions that meet the requirements of BCBS 270.

‘Diversification effect’ Reflects the fact the risk of a diversified portfolio is smaller than the sum of the risks of its constituent parts. It is measured as the sum of the individual asset class DVaR (see above) estimates less the total DVaR.

‘Dodd-Frank Act (DFA)’ The US Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act.Act of 2010.

‘Early warning lists (EWL)’ Categorisations for wholesale customers used within Personal and Corporate Banking to identify at an early stage those customers where it is believed that difficulties may develop, allowing timely corrective action to be taken. There are three categories of EWL, with risk increasing from EWL 1 (caution) to EWL 2 (medium) and EWL 3 (high). It is expected that most cases would be categorised EWL 1 before moving to 2 or 3, but it is recognised that some cases may be categorised to EWL 2 or 3 directly.

‘Early Warning List (EWL) Managed accounts’ EWL Managed accounts are Business Lending customers that exceed the Arrears Managed Accounts limits and are monitored with standard processes that record heightened levels of risk through an EWL grading.

‘Earnings per Share contribution’ The attributable profit or loss generated by a particular business or segment divided by the

weighted average number of Barclays shares in issue to illustrate on a per share basis how that business or segment contributes total EPS.earnings per share.

‘Economic Value of Equity (EVE)’ ChangeA measure of the potential change in the present value of the banking book of a parallel (upward or downward)expected future cash flows due to an adverse interest rate shock.movement, based on existing balance sheetrun-off profile.

‘Encumbrance’ The use of assets to secure liabilities, such as by way of a lien or charge.

‘Enterprise Risk Management Framework (ERMF)’ Barclays Riskrisk management responsibilities are laid out in the Enterprise Risk Management Framework. ThisFramework, which describes how Barclays identifies and manages risk. The framework which was introduced in 2013, creates clear ownership and accountability, ensuresidentifies the Group’s most significant risk exposures are controlled, understood and managed in accordance with agreedprincipal risks faced by the Group; sets out risk appetite requirements; sets out roles and ensures regular reporting of bothresponsibilities for risk exposuresmanagement; and the operating effectiveness of controls. This framework also clarifies the definition of the three lines of defence and extends its scope to all businesses and functions.sets out risk committee structure.

‘Equities’ Trading businesses encompassing Cash Equities, Equity Derivatives & Equity Financing

‘Equity and stock index derivatives’ Derivatives whose value is derived from equity securities. This category includes equity and stock index swaps and options (including warrants, which are equity options listed on an exchange). The Group also enters into fund-linked derivatives, being swaps and options whose underlyings include mutual funds, hedge funds, indices and multi-asset portfolios. An equity swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange periodic payments, based upon a notional principal amount, with one side paying fixed or floating interest and the other side paying based on the actual return of the stock or stock index. An equity option provides the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a specified stock, basket of stocks or stock index at a specified price or level on or before a specified date.

‘Equity risk’ In the context of trading book capital requirements, the risk of change in market value of an equity investment.

‘Equity structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge in place to managereduce earnings volatility of the volatility in net earnings generated by businesses onovernight / short term equity investment and to smoothen the Group’s equity, with the impact allocated to businesses in line with their economic capital usage.income over a medium/long term.

 

 

462  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    417


Glossary of terms

    

    

    

 

 

‘Euro Interbank Offered Rate (EURIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the European interbank market.

‘Europe’ Geographic segment comprising countries in which Barclays operates within the EU (excluding UK), Northern Continental and Eastern Europe.

‘European Securities and Markets Authority (ESMA)’ An independent European Supervisory Authority with the remit of enhancing the protection of investors and reinforcing stable and well-functioning financial markets in the European Union. ESMA replaced the Committee of European Securities Regulators (CESR) on 1 January 2011.

‘Expected losses’ The Group’s measure of anticipated losses for exposures captured under an internal ratings based credit risk approach for capital adequacy calculations. It is measured as the Barclays modelled view of anticipated losses based on Probability of Default (PD), Loss Given Default (LGD) and Exposure at Default (EAD), with a one year time horizon.

‘Expert’Expert lender models’ Models of risk measures that are used for parts of the portfolio where the risk drivers are specific to a particular counterparty, but where there is insufficient data to support the construction of a statistical model. These models utilise the knowledge of credit experts that have in depth experience of the specific customer type being modelled.

‘Exposure’ Generally refers to positions or actions taken by the firm, or consequences thereof, that may put a certain amount of a bank’s resources at risk.

‘Exposure Atat Default (EAD)’ The estimation of the extent to which Barclays may be exposed to a customer or counterparty in the event of, and at the time of, that counterparty’s default. At default, the customer may not have drawn the loan fully or may already have repaid some of the principal, so that exposure may be less than the approved loan limit.

‘External Credit Assessment Institutions (ECAI)’ Institutions whose credit assessments may be used by credit institutions for the determination of risk weight exposures according to the Capital Requirements Directives (CRD).CRD IV.

‘F-IRB / Foundation-Internal Ratings Based’ See ‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’.

‘Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)’ The statutory body responsible for conduct of business regulation and supervision of UK authorised firms from 1 April 2013.firms. The FCA also has responsibility for the prudential regulation of firms that do not fall within the PRA’s scope.

‘Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)’ The UK’s fund for compensation of authorised financial services firms that are unable to pay claims.

‘Financial collateral comprehensive method (FCCM)’ A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which applies volatility adjustments to the market value of exposure and collateral when calculating risk weighted asset values.

‘Fitch’ A credit rating agency.

‘Forbearance’ Forbearance programmes to assist customers in financial difficulty through agreements to accept less than contractual amounts due where financial distress would otherwise prevent satisfactory repayment within the original terms and conditions of the contract. These agreements may be initiated by the customer, Barclays or a third party and include approved debt counselling plans, minimum due reductions, interest rate concessions and switches from capital and interest repayments to interest-only payments.

‘Forbearance Programmes for Credit Cards’ Can be split into 2 main types: Repayment plans- A temporary reduction in the minimum payment due, for a maximum of 60 months. This may involve a reduction in interest rates to prevent negative amortization; Fully amortising- A permanent conversion of the outstanding balance into a fully amortising loan, over a maximum period of 60 months for cards and 120 months for loans.

‘Forbearance Programmes for Home Loans’ Can be split into 4 main types: Interest-only conversions- A temporary change from a capital and interest repayment to an interest-only repayment, for a maximum of 24 months; Interest rate reductions- A temporary reduction in interest rate, for a maximum of 12 months; Payment concessions- An agreement to temporarily accept reduced loan repayments, for a maximum of 24 months; Term extensions- A permanent extension to the loan maturity date which may involve a reduction in interest rates, and usually involves the capitalisation of arrears.

418    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘Forbearance Programmes for Unsecured Loans’ Can be split into 3 main types: Payment concessions- An agreement to temporarily accept reduced loan repayments, for a maximum of 12 months; Term extensions- A permanent extension to the loan maturity date, usually involving the capitalisation of arrears; Fully amortising- A permanent conversion of the

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  463


Glossary

outstanding balance into a fully amortising loan, over a maximum period of 60 months for cards and 120 months for loans.

‘Foreclosures in Progress’ The process by which the bank initiates legal action against a customer with the intention of terminating a loan agreement whereby the bank may repossess the property subject to local law and recover amounts it is owed.

‘Foreign exchange derivatives’ The Group’s principal exchange rate-related contracts are forward foreign exchange contracts, currency swaps and currency options. Forward foreign exchange contracts are agreements to buy or sell a specified quantity of foreign currency, usually on a specified future date at an agreed rate. Currency swaps generally involves the exchange, or notional exchange, of equivalent amounts of two currencies and a commitment to exchange interest periodically until the principal amounts arere-exchanged on a future date. Currency options provide the buyer with the right, but not the obligation, either to purchase or sell a fixed amount of a currency at a specified exchange rate on or before a future date. As compensation for assuming the option risk, the option writer generally receives a premium at the start of the option period.

‘Foreign exchange risk’ In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in foreign exchange rates and volatilities.

‘Front Arena’ A deal solution that helps to trade and manage positions and risk in the global capital markets.

‘Full time equivalent’ Full time equivalent units are theon-job hours paid for employee services divided by the number of ordinary-time hours normally paid for a full-time staff member when on the job (or contract employees where applicable).

‘Fully loaded’ When a measure is presented or described as being on a fully loaded basis, it is calculated without applying the transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of the CRD IV Regulation.IV.

‘Fully loaded CET1 ratio’ An estimatedA risk based ratio calculated as CRD IV Common Equity Tier 1 capital divided by CRD IV Risk Weighted Assets (before the application of transitional provisions set out in CRD IV and interpretive guidance published by the PRA).

‘Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS)’ Scheme launched by the Bank of England in July 2012 to incentivise banks and building societies to lend to UK households andnon-financial companies through reduced funding costs, the benefits of which are passed on to UK borrowers in the form of cheaper and more easily available loans.

‘Funding mismatch’ In the context of Eurozone balance sheet funding exposures, the excess of local euro denominated external assets, such as customer loans, over local euro denominated liabilities, such as customer deposits.

‘Funding risk’ The risk that the Group may not be able to achieve its business plans due to being unable to maintain appropriate capital ratios (Capital Risk), being unable to meet its obligations as they fall due (Liquidity Risk), rating agency methodology changes or of adverse changes in interest rate curves impacting structural hedges of non – interest bearing assets/ liabilities or on income or foreign exchange rates on capital ratios (Structural risk).

‘Funds and fund-linked products’ Includes holdings in mutual funds, hedge funds, fund of funds and fund linked derivatives.

‘Gains on acquisitions’ The amount by which the acquirer’s interest in the net fair value of the identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities, recognised in a business combination, exceeds the cost of the combination.

‘General market risk’ The risk of a price change in a financial instrument due to a change in level of interest rates or owing to a broad equity market movement unrelated to any specific attributes of individual securities.

Globally-SystemicallyGlobal-Systemically Important Financial Institutions (G-SIFIs)Banks(G-SIBs orG-SIIs) Global financial institutions whose size, complexity and systemic interconnectedness, mean that their distress or failure would cause significant disruption to the wider financial system and economic activity. The Financial Stability Board (FSB) and the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (BCBS) have identifiedpublish a grouplist of 30 globally systemically important banks.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    419


Glossary of terms

‘G-SII additional leverage ratio buffer(G-SII ALRB)’ A macroprudential buffer that applies to globally systemically important banks(G-SIBs) and other major domestic UK banks and building societies, including banks that are subject to ring-fencing requirements. TheG-SII ALRB will be calibrated as 35% (on a phased basis) of the combined systemic risk buffers that applies to the bank.

Grandfathering’GSII Buffer’ Common Equity Tier 1 capital required to be held under CRD IV to ensure thatG-SIBs build up surplus capital to compensate for the systemic risk that such institutions represent to the financial system.

’Grandfathering’ In the context of CRD IV capital resources, the application of the rules on instrument eligibility during the transitional period as defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation.

464  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Grosscharge-off rates’ Represents the balancescharged-off to recoveries in the reporting period, expressed as a percentage of average outstanding balances excluding balances in recoveries.Charge-off to recoveries generally occurs when the collections focus switches from the collection of arrears to the recovery of the entire outstanding balance, and represents a fundamental change in the relationship between the bank and the customer. This is a measure of the proportion of customers that have gone into default during the period.

‘Gross new lending’ New lending advanced to customers during the period.

‘Group’ Barclays PLC together with its subsidiaries.

Group Service Company’ or ‘BSerL’ Barclays Services Limited, the Group services company set up to provide services to Barclays UK and Barclays International to deliver operational continuity.

Guarantee’ Unless otherwise described, an undertaking by a third party to pay a creditor should a debtor fail to do so. It is a form of credit substitution.

‘Head Office and Other Operations’ A business segment comprising Brand and Marketing, Finance, Head Office, Human Resources, Internal Audit, Legal and Compliance, Risk, Treasury and Tax and other operations.

‘High Net Worth’ Businesses within PersonalBarclays UK and Corporate BankingBarclays International that provide banking and other services to high net worth customers.

‘High Risk’ In Retail,retail banking, ‘High Risk’ is defined as the subset ofup-to-date customers who, either through an event or observed behaviour exhibit potential financial difficulty. Where appropriate, these customers are proactively contacted to assess whether financial assistance is required.

‘Home loan’ A loan to purchase a residential property. The property is then used as collateral to guarantee repayment of the loan. The borrower gives the lender a lien against the property and the lender can foreclose on the property if the borrower does not repay the loan per the agreed terms. Also known as a residential mortgage.

IHC’ or ‘US IHC’ Barclays US LLC, the intermediate holding company established by Barclays in July 2016, which holds most of Barclays’ subsidiaries and assets in the United States.

IMA / Internal Model Approach’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk Type, Risk Weighted Assets for which the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a PRA approved internal market risk model.

‘IMM / Internal Model Method’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, Risk Weighted Assets for which the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a PRA approved internal counterparty credit risk model.

‘Impairment allowances’ A provision held on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for incurred

losses in the lending book. An impairment allowance may either be identified or unidentified and individual or collective.

‘Impairment coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against balances in specific LTV band expressed as a percentage of balances in the specific LTV Band.

‘Income’ Total income, net of insurance claims, unless otherwise specified.

‘Incremental Risk Charge’ An estimate of the incremental risk arising from rating migrations and defaults beyond what is already captured in specific market risk VaR for the non correlation trading portfolio.

420    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘Independent Commission on Banking (ICB)’ Body set up by HM Government to identify structural andnon-structural measures to reform the UK banking system and promote competition.

‘Individual liquidity guidance (ILG)’ Guidance given to a firm about the amount, quality and funding profile of liquidity resources that the PRA has asked the firm to maintain.

‘Inflation risk’ In the context of DVaR, the impact of changes in inflation rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives.

‘Insurance Risk’ The risk of the Group’s aggregate insurance premiums received from policyholders under a portfolio of insurance contracts being inadequate to cover the claims arising from those policies.

‘Interchange’ Income paid to a credit card issuer for the clearing and settlement of a sale or cash advance transaction.

‘Interest only home loans’ Under the terms of these loans, the customer makes payments of interest only for the entire term of the mortgage, although customers may make early repayments of the principal within the terms of their agreement. The customer is responsible for repaying the entire outstanding principal on maturity, which may require the sale of the mortgaged property.

‘Interest rate derivatives’ Derivatives linked to interest rates. This category includes interest rate swaps, collars, floors options and swaptions. An interest rate swap is an agreement between two parties to exchange fixed rate and floating rate interest by means of periodic payments based upon a notional principal amount and the interest rates defined in the contract. Certain agreements combine interest rate and foreign currency swap transactions, which may or may not include the exchange of principal amounts. A basis swap is a form of interest rate swap, in which both parties exchange interest payments based on floating rates, where the floating rates are based upon different underlying reference indices. In a forward rate agreement, two parties agree a future settlement of the difference between an agreed rate and a future interest rate, applied to a notional principal amount. The settlement, which generally occurs at the start of the contract period, is the discounted present value of the payment that would otherwise be made at the end of that period.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  465


Glossary

‘Interest rate risk’ The risk of interest rate volatility adversely impacting the Groups net interest margin. In the context of the calculation of market risk DVaR, measures the impact of changes in interest (swap) rates and volatilities on cash instruments and derivatives.

‘Internal Assessment Approach (IAA)’ oneOne of three types of calculation that a firm with permission to use the Internal Ratings Based (IRB) approach may apply to securitisation exposures. It consists of mapping a firm’s internal rating methodology for credit exposures to those of an external credit assessment institutionExternal Credit Assessment Institution (ECAI) to determine the appropriate risk weight based on the ratings based approach. Its applicability is limited to ABCP programmes related to liquidity facilities and credit enhancement.

‘Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)’ Companies are required to perform a formal internalInternal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) as part of the Pillar 2 requirements (BIPRU) and to provide this document to the PRA on a yearly basis. The ICAAP document summarises the group’s risk management framework, including approach to managing all risks (i.e. Pillar 1 andnon-Pillar 1 risks); and, the group’s risk appetite, economic capital and stress testing frameworks.

IMM’ / ‘InternalInternal model method’method (IMM)’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk Type, Risk Weighted Assets for which the exposure amount has been derived via the use of a PRA approved internal counterparty credit risk model.

‘Internal Ratings Based (IRB)’ An approach under the CRR framework that relies on the bank’s internal models to derive the risk weights. The IRB approach is divided into two alternative applications, Advanced and Foundation:

 

 Advanced IRB(‘A-IRB’): the bank uses its own estimates of probability of default (PD), loss given default (LGD) and credit conversion factor to model a given risk exposure.

 Foundation IRB: the bank applies its own PD as for Advanced, but it uses standard parameters for the LGD and the credit conversion factor. The Foundation IRB approach is specifically designed for wholesale credit exposures. Hence retail, equity, securitisation positions andnon-credit obligations asset exposures are treated under Standardisedstandardised orA-IRB.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    421


Glossary of terms

‘Investment Bank’ ConsistsThe Group’s investment bank which consists of origination led and returns focused markets and banking business.business which forms part of the Corporate and Investment Banking segment of Barclays International.

‘Investment Banking Fees’ In the context of Investment Bank Analysis of Total Income, fees generated from origination activity businesses – including financial advisory, Debtdebt and Equityequity underwriting.

‘Investment grade’ A debt security, treasury bill or similar instrument with a credit rating of AAA to BBB as measured by external credit rating agencies.

‘ISDA Master Agreement’ The most commonly used master contract for OTC derivative transactions internationally. It is part of a framework of documents, designed to enable OTC derivatives to be documented fully and flexibly. The framework consists of a master agreement, a schedule, confirmations, definition booklets, and a credit support annex. The ISDA master agreement is published by the International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA).

‘Key Risk Scenarios (KRS)’ Key Risk Scenarios are a summary of the extreme potential risk exposure for each Key Risk in each business and function, including an assessment of the potential frequency of risk events, the average size of losses and three extreme scenarios. The Key Risk Scenario assessments are a key input to the Advanced Measurement Approach calculation of regulatory and economic capital requirements.

Lag risk’ Arises from the delay inre-pricing customer rates for certain variable/managed rate products, following an underlying change to market interest rates. This is typically driven by either regulatory constraint around customer notification on pricing changes, processing time for the Group’s and/or Entity’s notification systems or contractual agreements within a product’s terms and conditions.

‘Large exposure’ A large exposure is defined as the total exposure of a firm to a counterparty or group of connected clients, whether in the banking book or trading book or both, which in aggregate equals or exceeds 10% of the firm’s eligible capital.

‘Lender Option Borrower Option (LOBO)’ A clause previously included in ESHLA loans that allowed Barclays, on specific dates, to raise the fixed interest rate on the loan, upon which the borrower had the option to either continue with the loan at the higher rate, orre-pay the loan at par.

Lending’ In the context of Investment Bank Analysis of Total Income, lending income includes net interest income, gains or losses on loan sale activity, and risk management activity relating to the loan portfolio.

‘Letters of credit’ A letter typically used for the purposes of international trade guaranteeing that a debtor’s payment to a creditor will be made on time and in full. In the event that the

466  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

debtor is unable to make payment, the bank will be required to cover the full or remaining amount of the purchase.

‘Level 1 assets’ High quality liquid assets under the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR), including cash, central bank reserves and higher quality government securities.

‘Level 2 assets’ Under the Basel Committee’s Liquidity Coverage Ratio high quality liquid assets (HQLA) are comprised of Level 1 and Level 2 assets, with the latter comprised of Level 2A and Level 2B assets. Level 2A assets include, for example, lower quality government securities, covered bonds and corporate debt securities. Level 2B assets include, for example, lower rated corporate bonds, residential mortgage backed securities and equities that meet certain conditions.

‘Leverage ratio’ A measure of the Group’s Tier 1 capital to total leverage exposure under CRD IV.

‘Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)’ The ratio of the stock of high quality liquid assets to expected net cash outflows over the next 30 days. High-quality liquid assets should be unencumbered, liquid in markets during a time of stress and, ideally, be central bank eligible. These include, for example, cash and claims on central governments and central banks.

‘Liquidity Pool’ The Group liquidity pool comprises cash at central banks and highly liquid collateral specifically held by the Group as a contingency to enable the bank to meet cash outflows in the event of stressed market conditions.

‘Liquidity risk appetite (LRA)’ The level of liquidity risk that the Group chooses to take in pursuit of its business objectives and in meeting its regulatory obligations.

422    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework)’ The Liquidity Risk Management Framework (the Liquidity Framework), which is sanctioned by the Board Risk Committee (BRC), and which incorporates liquidity policies, systems and controls that the Group has implemented to manage liquidity risk within tolerances approved by the Board and regulatory agencies.

‘Litigation and conduct charges’ Litigation and conduct charges include regulatory fines, litigation settlements and conduct related customer redress.

‘Loan loss rate’ Is quoted in basis points and represents total loan impairment divided by gross loans and advances to customers and banks held at amortised cost at the balance sheet date.

‘Loan to deposit ratio’ The ratio of loansLoans and advances todivided by customer accounts calculated for PCB, Africa Banking, BarclaycardBarclays UK and Non-Core Retail.Barclays International excluding investment banking balances other than interest earning lending. This excludes particular liabilities issued by the retail businesses that have characteristics comparable to retail deposits (for example structured Certificates of Deposit and retail bonds), which are included within debt securities in issue.issue

‘Loan to value (LTV) ratio’ Expresses the amount borrowed against an asset (i.e. a mortgage) as a percentage of the appraised value of the asset. The ratios are used in determining the appropriate level of risk for the loan and are generally reported as an average for new mortgages or an entire portfolio. Also see ‘Marked to market (MMT)(MTM) LTV ratio.’

‘London Interbank Offered Rate (LIBOR)’ A benchmark interest rate at which banks can borrow funds from other banks in the London interbank market.

‘Long-term refinancing operation (LTRO)’ The European Central Bank’s 3 year long term bank refinancing operation.

‘Loss Given Default (LGD)’ The fraction of Exposure at Default (EAD) (defined above) that will not be recovered following default. LGD comprises the actual loss (the part that is not expected to be recovered), together with the economic costs associated with the recovery process.

‘Macro Products’ Represents Rates, Currencycurrency and Commoditiescommodities income.

‘Management DVaR’VaR’ For internalA measure of the potential loss of value arising from unfavourable market risk management purposes, the investment bankmovements at a specific confidence level, if current positions were to be held unchanged for predefined period. Corporate and Investment Bank uses a Daily Value at Risk (DVaR)Management VaR with atwo-year equally weighted historical period, at a 95% confidence level, for all trading portfolios and certain banking books.with a one day holding period.

‘Mandatory break clause’In the context of counterparty credit risk, a contract clause that means a trade will be ended on a particular date.

‘Marked to market approach’ A counterparty credit risk exposure calculation approach which uses the current mark to market value of derivative positions as well as a potential future exposureadd-on to calculate an exposure to which a risk weight can be applied.

‘Marked to market (MTM) LTV ratio’ The loan amount as a percentage of the current value of the asset used to secure the loan. Also see ‘Balance weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio’ and ‘Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) ratio.’

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  467


Glossary

‘Market risk’ The risk of the Group suffering financial loss due to changes in market prices. In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, by Risk, it is the component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss resulting from fluctuations in the market value of positions held in equities, commodities, currencies, derivatives and interest rates.

‘Master netting agreements’ An agreement that provides for a single net settlement of all financial instruments and collateral covered by the agreement in the event of the counterparty’s default or bankruptcy or insolvency, resulting in a reduced exposure.

‘Master trust securitisation programmes’ A securitisation structure where a trust is set up for the purpose of acquiring a pool of receivables. The trust issues multiple series of securities backed by these receivables.

‘Matchbook (or matched book)’ An asset/liability management strategy where assets are matched against liabilities of equivalent value and maturity.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    423


Glossary of terms

‘Material Risk Takers (MRTs)’ Categories of staff whose professional activities have or are deemed to have a material impact on Barclays’ risk profile, as determined in accordance with the European Banking Authority regulatory technical standard on the identification of such staff.

‘Methodology and policy’ In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, the effect on RWAs of methodology changes driven by regulatory policy changes.

‘Minimum capital requirement’ Under Pillar 1 of the Basel framework, the amount of capital required for an exposure.

‘Model updates’ In the context of the Funding Risk, Capital Risk section, changes in RWAs caused by model implementation, changes in model scope or any changes required to address model malfunctions.

‘Model validation’ Process through which models are independently challenged, tested and verified to prove that they have been built, implemented and used correctly, and that they continue to befit-for-purpose.

‘Modelled—VaR’ In the context of risk weighted assets, marketRisk Weighted Assets, Market risk calculated using value at risk models laid down by the CRR and supervised by the PRA.

‘Money market funds’ Investment funds typically invested in short-term debt securities.

‘Monoline derivatives’ Derivatives with a monoline insurer such as credit default swaps referencing the underlying exposures held.

‘Moody’s’ A credit rating agency.

‘Mortgage Current Accounts (MCA) Reserves’ A secured overdraft facility available to home loan customers which allows them to borrow against the equity in their home. It allows draw-down up to an agreed available limit on a separate but connected account to the main mortgage loan facility. The balance drawn must be repaid on redemption of the mortgage.

‘Multilateral development banks’ Financial institutions created for the purposes of development, where membership transcends national boundaries.

‘National discretion’ Discretions in CRD IV given to member states to allow the local regulator additional powers in the application of certain CRD IV rules in its jurisdiction.

‘Net asset value per share’ Calculated by dividing shareholdersshareholders’ equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Net interest income’ The difference between interest income on assets and interest expense on liabilities.

‘Net interest margin’ Net interest income divided by the sum of the average assets and average liabilities for those businesses.customer assets.

‘Net investment income’ Changes in the fair value of financial instruments designated at fair value, dividend income and the net result on disposal of available for sale assets.

‘Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)’ The ratio of available stable funding to required stable funding over a one year time horizon, assuming a stressed scenario. The ratio is required to be over 100% with effect from 2015.. Available stable funding would include such items as equity capital, preferred stock with a maturity of over 1 year, or liabilities with a maturity of over 1 year. The required amount of stable funding is calculated as the sum of the value of the assets held and funded by the institution, multiplied by a specific Required Stable Fundingrequired stable funding (RSF) factor assigned to each particular asset type, added to the amount of potential liquidity exposure multiplied by its associated RSF factor.

468  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Net tangible asset value per share’ Calculated by dividing shareholders equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, less goodwill and intangible assets, by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Net trading income’ Gains and losses arising from trading positions which are held at fair value, in respect of both market-making and customer business, together with interest, dividends and funding costs relating to trading activities.

‘Net written credit protection’ In the context of leverage exposure, the net notional value of credit derivatives protection sold and credit derivatives protection bought.

424    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘New bookings’ The total of the original balance on accounts opened in the reporting period, including any applicable fees and charges included in the loan amount.

‘Non-asset backed debt instruments’ Debt instruments not backed by collateral, including government bonds; US agency bonds; corporate bonds; commercial paper; certificates of deposit; convertible bonds; corporate bonds and issued notes.

‘Non-customer net interest income(NII)income (NII)’ / ‘Non-customer‘Non-customer interest income’ Principally comprises the impact of product and equity structural hedges, as well as certain other net interest income received on government bonds and other debt securities held for the purposes of interest rate hedging and liquidity for local banking activities.

‘Non-model method (NMM)’ In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, Counterparty credit risk, Risk Weighted Assets where the exposure amount has been derived through the use of CRR norms, as opposed to an internal model.

‘Non-performance costs’ Costs other than performance costs.

‘Non-performing proportion of outstanding balances’ Defined as balances greater than 90 days delinquent (including forbearance

accounts greater than 90 days and accounts charged off to recoveries), expressed as a percentage of outstanding balances.

‘Non-significant holdings in financial institutions’ Investments that the Group holds in the capital of banking, financial or insurance entities that are outside the scope of regulatory consolidation and where the bank owns less than 10% of the issued share capital of the entity.

‘Non-performing balances impairment coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against non performing balances expressed as a percentage of non performing balances.

‘Non-Traded Market Risk’ The risk of a reduction to earningsthat the current or capital due to an inability to hedgefuture exposure in the banking book balance sheet.(i.e.non-traded book) will impact bank’s capital and/or earnings due to adverse movements in Interest or Foreign Exchange Rates.

‘Non-Traded VaR’ Reflects the volatility in the value of the available for sale investments in the liquidity pool which flow directly through capital via the available for sale reserve. The underlying methodology to calculate non traded VaR is similar to Traded Management VaR, but the two measures are not directly comparable. The Non Traded VaR represents the volatility to capital driven by the available for sale exposures. These exposures are in the banking book and do not meet the criteria for trading book treatment.

‘Notable items’ Notable items are considered to be significant items impacting comparability of performance and are shown for each of the business segments.

‘Notch’ A single unit of measurement in a credit rating scale.

‘Notional amount’ The nominal or face amount of a financial instrument, such as a loan or a derivative, that is used to calculate payments made on that instrument.

‘Operational risk’ The risk of loss resulting from inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems or from external events, including legal risk. In the context of Risk Weighted Assets, it is the component of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets that represents the risk of loss resulting from these risks.

‘Operational RiskDataRiskdata eXchange (ORX)’ The Operational Riskdata eXchange Association (ORX) is anot-for-profit industry association dedicated to advancing the measurement and management of operational risk in the global financial services industry. Barclays is a member of ORX.

‘Origination led’ Focus on high margin, low capital fee based activities and related hedging opportunities.

Origination exposure model’ A technique used to measure the counterparty credit risk of losing anticipated cash flows from forwards, swaps, options and other derivatives contracts in the event the counterparty to the contract should default.

‘OSII’ Other systemically important institutions are institutions that are deemed to create risk to financial stability due to their systemic importance.

Over-the-counter (OTC) derivatives’ Derivative contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties. They offer flexibility because, unlike standardised exchange-traded products, they can be tailored to fit specific needs.

‘Own credit’ The effect of changes in the Group’s own credit standing on the fair value of financial liabilities.

‘Owner occupied mortgage’ A mortgage where the intention of the customer was to occupy the property at origination.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    425


Glossary of terms

‘Past due items’ Refers to loans where the borrower has failed to make a payment when due under the terms of the loan contract.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  469


Glossary

‘Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) redress’ Provision for the settlement of PPI miss-selling claims and related claims management costs.

‘Pension Risk’ The risk of the Group’s earnings and capital being adversely impacted by the Group’s defined benefit obligations increasing or the value of the assets backing these defined benefit obligations decreasing due to changes in both the level and volatility of prices.

‘Performance costs’ The accounting charge recognised in the period for performance awards. For deferred incentives and long-term incentives, the accounting charge is spread over the relevant periods in which the employee delivers service.

PersonalPeriod end allocated tangible equity’ Allocated tangible equity is calculated as 12.0% (2016: 11.5%) of CRD IV fully loaded risk weighted assets for each business, adjusted for CRD IV fully loaded capital deductions, excluding goodwill and Corporate Banking’ An operating segment that combines core elements of UK Retail and Business Banking, global Wealth and Investment Management, and global Corporate Banking. Transfers tointangible assets, reflecting assumptions the Non-Core segment includeGroup uses for capital planning purposes. Head Office tangible equity represents the UK retail insurance underwriting and investment businesses; selected non-core corporate banking in Europedifference between the Group’s tangible equity and the Middle East and certain long-dated corporate loans; local Wealth operations in certain overseas locations; and certain asset managementamounts allocated to businesses. The African businesses of Corporate Banking and Wealth Management have been moved to Africa Banking.

‘Pillar 1’ The part of the Basel framework that sets outs the rules that govern the calculation of minimumMinimum capital requirements for credit, market and operational risks.    

‘Pillar 2’ The part of the Basel framework that covers the supervisory reviews of the bank’s internal assessment of capital to ensure that firms have adequate capital to support all the relevant risks in their business.

‘Pillar 3’ The part of the Basel framework that covers external communication of risk and capital information by banks to promote transparency and good risk management.

‘Post-model adjustment (PMA)’ In the context of Basel models, a PMA is a short term increase in regulatory capital applied at portfolio level to account for model input data deficiencies, inadequate model performance or changes to regulatory

definitions (e.g. definition of default) to ensure the model output is accurate, complete and appropriate.

‘Potential Credit Risk Loans (PCRLs)’ Comprise the outstanding balances to Potential Problem Loans (defined below) and the three categories of Credit Risk Loans (defined above).

‘Potential Future Exposure on Derivatives’ A regulatory calculation in respect of the Group’s potential future credit exposure on both exchange traded and OTC derivative contracts, calculated by assigning a standardised percentage (based on the underlying risk category and residual trade maturity) to the gross notional value of each contract.

‘Potential Problem Loans (PPLs)’ Loans where serious doubt exists as to the ability of the borrowers to continue to comply with repayment terms in the near future.

‘PRA waivers’ PRA approvals that specifically give permission to the Bank to either modify or waive existing rules. Waivers are specific to an organisation and require applications being submitted to and approved by the PRA.

‘Primary securitisations’The issuance of securities (bonds and commercial papers) for fund-raising.

‘Primary Stress Tests’ In the context of Traded Market Risk, stress testingStress Testing provides an estimate of potentially significant future losses that might arise from extreme market moves or scenarios. Primary stress testsStress Tests apply stress moves to key liquid risk factors for each of the major trading asset classes.

‘Prime Services’ Involves financing of fixed income and equity positions using Repo and Stock Lendingstock lending facilities. The Prime Services business also provides brokerage facilitation services for Hedge Fundhedge fund clients offering execution and clearance facilities for a variety of asset classes.

‘Principal’ In the context of a loan, the amount borrowed, or the part of the amount borrowed which remains unpaid (excluding interest).

‘Principal Investments’ Private equity investments.

Principal Risks’ the principal risks affecting the Group described in the risk review section of the Barclays PLC Annual Report.

426    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

Private equity investments’ EquityInvestments in equity securities in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange. Investment in private equity often involves the investment of capital in private companies or the acquisition of a public company that results in the delisting of public equity. Capital for private equity investment is raised by retail or institutional investors and used to fund investment strategies such as leveraged buyouts, venture capital, growth capital, distressed investments and mezzanine capital.

470  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Private-label securitisation’ Residential mortgage backed security transactions sold or guaranteed by entities that are not sponsored or owned by the government.

‘Probability of Default (PD)’ The likelihood that a loan will not be repaid and will fall into default. PD may be calculated for each client who has a loan (normally applicable to wholesale customers/clients) or for a portfolio of clients with similar attributes (normally applicable to retail customers). To calculate PD, Barclays assesses the credit quality of borrowers and other counterparties and assigns them an internal risk rating. Multiple rating methodologies may be used to inform the rating decision on individual large credits, such as internal and external models, rating agency ratings, and for wholesale assets market information such as credit spreads. For smaller credits, a single source may suffice such as the result from an internal rating model.

‘Product structural hedge’ An interest rate hedge that converts short term interest marginin place to reduce earnings volatility on product balances with an instant access (such asnon-interest bearing current accounts and managed rate deposits) intoand to smoothen the income over a more stable medium term rate and which is built on a monthly basis to achieve a targeted maturity profile.medium/long term.

‘Properties in Possession held as ‘Loans’Loans and Advances to Customers’’ Properties in the UK and Italy where the customer continues to retain legal title but where the bank has enforced the possession order as part of the foreclosure process to allow for the disposal of the asset or the court has ordered the auction of the property.

‘Properties in Possession held as ‘Other Real Estate Owned’’ Properties in South Africa, Spain and Portugal where the bank has taken legal ownership of the title as a result of purchase at an auction or similar and treated as ‘Other Real Estate Owned’ within other assets on the bank’s balance sheet.

‘Proprietary trading’ When a bank, brokerage or other financial institution trades on its own account, at its own risk, rather than on behalf of customers, so as to make a profit for itself.

‘Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA)’ The statutory body responsible for the prudential supervision of banks, building societies, insurers and a small number of significant investment

firms in the UK from 1 April 2013.UK. The PRA is a subsidiary of the Bank of England.

‘Prudential valuation adjustment (PVA)’ A calculation which adjusts the accounting values of positions held on balance sheet at fair value to comply with regulatory valuation standards, which place greater emphasis on the inherent uncertainty around the value at which a trading book position could be exited.

‘Public benchmark’ Unsecured medium term notes issued in public syndicated transactions.

Qualifying Revolving Retail Exposure (QRRE)’ In the context of the IRB approach to credit risk RWA calculations, an exposure meeting the criteria set out in BIPRU 4.6.42 R (2). IncludesIt includes most types of credit card exposure.

‘Rates’ In the context of Investment Bank income analysis, trading revenue relating to government bonds and linear interest rate derivatives.

‘Re-aging’ Re-aging is theThe returning of a delinquent account toup-to-date status without collecting the full arrears (principal, interest and fees).

‘Real Estate Mortgage Investment Conduits (REMICs)’An entity that holds a fixed pool of mortgages and that is separated into multiple classes of interests for issuance to investors.

‘Recoveries Impairment Coverage Ratio’ Impairment allowance held against recoveries balances expressed as a percentage of balance in recoveries.

‘Recoveries proportion of outstanding balances’ Represents the amount of recoveries (grossmonth-end customer balances of all accounts that havecharged-off) as at the period end compared to total outstanding balances. The size of the recoveries book would ultimately have an impact on the overall impairment requirement on the portfolio. Balances in recoveries will

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    427


Glossary of terms

decrease if: assets arewritten-off; amounts are collected; or assets are sold to a third party (i.e. debt sale).

‘Redenomination risk’The risk of financial loss to the Group should one or more countries exit from the Euro, potentially leading to the devaluation of local balance sheet assets and liabilities.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  471


Glossary

‘Regulatory capital’ The amount of capital that a bank holds to satisfy regulatory requirements.

‘Renegotiated loans’ Loans are generally renegotiated either as part of an ongoing customer relationship or in response to an adverse change in the circumstances of the borrower. In the latter case renegotiation can result in an extension of the due date of payment or repayment plans under which the Group offers a concessionary rate of interest to genuinely distressed borrowers. This will result in the asset continuing to be overdue and will be individually impaired where the renegotiated payments of interest and principal will not recover the original carrying amount of the asset. In other cases, renegotiation will lead to a new agreement, which is treated as a new loan.

‘Repricing lag risk’ The risk that when underlying interest rates change it can take a number of months to change the customer rate e.g. should rates decrease then we would need to let our variable savings rate customers know that we would be decreasing their savings rates. This could result in a loss of income as thisit may take several months, whereas the “funding/investment” benefit reduces immediately.

‘Repurchase agreement (repo)(Repo)’ / ‘reverse‘Reverse repurchase agreement (reverse(Reverse repo)’ Arrangements that allow counterparties to use financial securities as collateral for an interest bearing cash loan. The borrower agrees to sell a security to the lender subject to a commitment to repurchase the asset at a specified price on a given date. For the party selling the security (and agreeing to repurchase it in the future) it is a repurchaseRepurchase agreement or repo;Repo; for the counterparty to the transaction (buying the security and agreeing to sell in the future) it is a reverseReverse repurchase agreement or reverseReverse repo.

‘Re-securitisations’The repackaging of securitised productsSecuritised Products into securities. The resulting securities are therefore securitisation

positions where the underlying assets are also predominantly securitisation positions.

‘Reserve Capital Instruments (RCIs)’ Hybrid issued capital securities which may be debt or equity accounted, depending on the terms.

‘Residential Mortgage-Backed Securities (RMBS)’ Securities that represent interests in a group of residential mortgages. Investors

in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and/or principal).

‘Residual maturity’ The remaining contractual term of a credit obligation associated with a credit exposure.

‘Restructured loans’ Comprises loans where, for economic or legal reasons related to the debtor’s financial difficulties, a concession has been granted to the debtor that would not otherwise be considered. Where the concession results in the expected cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate being less than the loan’s carrying value, an impairment allowance will be raised.

‘Retail Loans’ Loans to individuals or small and medium sized enterprises rather than to financial institutions and larger businesses. It includes both secured and unsecured loans such as mortgages and credit card balances, as well as loans to certain smaller business customers, typically with exposures up to £3m or with a turnover up to £5m.

‘Return on average risk weighted assets’Risk Weighted Assets’ Statutory profit as a proportion of average risk weighted assets.Risk Weighted Assets.

‘Return on average shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity, excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments.

‘Return on average tangible shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary equity holders of the parent, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests and other equity instruments, adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

428    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

‘Return on average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders, including an adjustment for the tax credit in reserves in respect of other equity instruments, as a proportion of average allocated tangible shareholders’ equity excluding non-controlling interests and other equity instruments adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.equity.

‘Risk Appetite’ Risk Appetite is defined as theThe level of risk that Barclays is prepared to accept whilst pursuing its business strategy, recognising a range of possible outcomes as business plans are implemented.

‘Risk weighted assets (RWAs)’ A measure of a bank’s assets adjusted for their associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel rules as implemented by CRD IV and local regulators.

472  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Risks not in VaR (RNIVS)’ Refers to all the key risks which are not captured or not well captured within the VaR model framework.

‘Roll rate analysis’The measurement of the rate at which retail accounts deteriorate through delinquency phases.

‘Sales commissions, commitments and other incentives’ Includes commission-based arrangements, guaranteed incentives and Long Term Incentive Plan awards.

‘Sarbanes-Oxley requirements’ The Sarbanes-Oxley Act 2002 (SOX), which was introduced by the U.S. Government to safeguard against corporate governance scandals such as Enron, WorldCom and Tyco. AllUS-listed companies must comply with SOX.

‘Second Lien’ Debt that is issued against the same collateral as higher lien debt but that is subordinate to it. In the case of default, compensation for this debt will only be received after the first lien has been repaid and thus represents a riskier investment than the first lien.

‘Secondary Stress Tests’ Secondary stress tests are used in measuring potential losses arising from illiquid market risks that cannot be hedged or reduced within the time period covered in Primary Stress tests.Tests.

‘Securities and loans’ In the context ofNon-Core Analysis of Total income, BarclaysNon-Core Securities and Loans comprise non strategic businesses, predominantly from thenon-core Investment Bank and Corporate.Corporate Bank.

‘Securities Financing Transactions (SFT)’ In the context of risk weighted assetsRisk Weighted Assets (RWAs), any of the following transactions: a repurchase transaction, a securities or commodities lending or borrowing transaction, or a margin lending transaction whereby cash collateral is received or paid in respect of the transfer of a related asset.

‘Securities financing transactions adjustments’ In the context of leverage ratio, a regulatoryadd-on calculated as exposure less collateral, taking into account master netting agreements.

‘Securities lending arrangements’ Arrangements whereby securities are legally transferred to a third party subject to an agreement to return them at a future date. The counterparty generally provides collateral against non performance in the form of cash or other assets.

‘Securitisation’ Typically, a process by which debt instruments such as mortgage loans or credit card balances are aggregated into a pool, which is used to back new securities. A company sells assets to a special purpose vehicle (SPV) which then issues securities backed by the assets. This allows the credit quality of the assets to be separated from the credit rating of the original borrower and transfers risk to external investors.

Securitised Products’ A business within the Investment Bank that offers a range of products relating to residential mortgage backed securities, commercial mortgage backed securities and other asset backed securities, in addition to restructuring and unwinding legacy credit structures.

‘Set-off clauses’In the context of counterpartyCounterparty credit risk, contract clauses that allow Barclays to set off amounts owed to us by a counterparty against amounts owed by us to the counterparty.

Settlement balances’ Are receivables or payables recorded between the date (the trade date) a financial instrument (such as a bond) is sold, purchased or otherwise closed out, and the date the asset is delivered by or to the entity (the settlement date) and cash is received or paid.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    429


Glossary of terms

‘Settlement risk’ The risk that settlement in a transfer system will not take place as expected, usually owing to a party defaulting on one or more settlement obligations.

‘Slotting’Slotting is a Basel 2 approach that requires a standard set of rules to be used in the calculation of RWAs, based upon an assessment of factors such as the financial strength of the counterparty. The requirements for the application of the Slotting approach isare detailed in BIPRU 4.5.

‘South Africa’ The operations of Africa Banking based in South Africa.

‘Sovereign exposure(s)’ Exposures to central governments, including holdings in government bonds and local government bonds.

‘Specific market risk’ A risk that is due to the individual nature of an asset and can potentially be diversified or the risk of a price change in an investment due to factors related to the issuer or, in the case of a derivative, the issuer of the underlying investment.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  473


Glossary

‘Spread risk’ Measures the impact of changes to the swap spread, i.e. the difference between swap rates and government bond yields.

‘Standard & Poor’s’ A credit rating agency.

‘Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments’ Agreements to lend to a customer in the future, subject to certain conditions. Such commitments are either made for a fixed period, or have no specific maturity but are cancellable by the lender subject to notice requirements.

‘Statutory’ Line items of income, expense, profit or loss, assets, liabilities or equity stated in accordance with the requirements of the UK Companies Act 2006 which incorporatesand the requirements of International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS). See ‘Adjusted profit before tax’ for details of the adjustments made to the statutory results in arriving at the adjusted profit.

‘Statutory return on average shareholders’ equity’ Statutory profit after tax attributable to ordinary shareholders as a proportion of average shareholders’ equity.

‘STD’ / ‘Standardised approach’Approach’ A method of calculating Risk Weighted Assets that relies on a mandatory framework set by the regulator to derive risk weights based on counterparty type and a credit rating provided by an External Credit Assessment Institute.

‘Stress Testing’ A process which involves identifying possible future adverse events or changes in economic conditions that could have unfavourable effects on the Group (either financial ornon-financial), assessing the Group’s ability to withstand such changes, and identifying management actions to mitigate the impact.

‘Stressed Value at Risk (SVaR)’ An estimate of the potential loss arising from a 12 month period of significant financial stress over a one day horizon.

‘Structured entity’ An entity in which voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding control. Structured entities

are generally created to achieve a narrow and well defined objective with restrictions around their ongoing activities.

‘Structural hedge’ / ‘hedging’ An interest rate hedge which functionsin place to reduce earnings volatility and to smoothen the impact of the volatility of short-term interest rate movementsincome over a medium/long term on positions that exist within the balance sheet that carry interest rates thatand do notre-price in line with market rates. See also ‘Equity structural hedge’ and ‘Product structural hedge’.

‘Structural model of default’ A model based on the assumption that an obligor will default when its assets are insufficient to cover its liabilities.

‘Structured credit’ Includes legacy structured credit portfolio primarily comprising derivative exposure and financing exposure to structured credit vehicles.

‘Subordinated liabilities’ Liabilities which, in the event of insolvency or liquidation of the issuer, are subordinated to the claims of depositors and other creditors of the issuer.

‘Supranational bonds’ Bonds issued by an international organisation, where membership transcends national boundaries (e.g. the European Union or World Trade Organisation).

‘Synthetic Securitisation Transactions’Securitisation transactions effected through the use of derivatives.

Systemic Risk Buffer’ CET1 capital that may be required to be held as part of the Combined Buffer Requirement increasing the capacity of UK banks to absorb stress and limiting the damage to the economy as a results of restricted lending.

430    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary of terms

Tangible net asset value’ Shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Tangible net asset value per share’ Shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill, divided by the number of issued ordinary shares.

‘Tangible shareholders equity’ Shareholders’ equity excludingnon-controlling interests adjusted for the deduction of intangible assets and goodwill.

‘Term premium’ Additional interest required by investors to hold assets with a longer period to maturity.

‘The three lines of defence’ The three lines of defence operating model enables Barclays to separate risk management activities between those parties that: ownclient facing areas of the Group and takeassociated support functions responsible for identifying risk, operating within applicable limits and implement controlsescalating risk events (first line); overseecolleagues in Risk and challengeCompliance who establish the limits, rules and constraints under which the first line provide second line risk management activityoperates and support controlsmonitors their performance against those limits and constraints (second line); and, colleagues in Internal Audit who provide assurance thatto the Evaluate, RespondBoard and Monitor (‘E-R-M’) process is fit-for-purpose,Executive Management over the effectiveness of governance, risk management and that it is being carried out as intendedcontrol over risks (third line).

‘Tier 1 capital’ The sum of the Common Equity Tier 1 capital and Additional Tier 1 capital.

474  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F


Glossary

‘Tier 1 capital ratio’ The ratio which expresses Tier 1 capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets.Risk Weighted Assets under CRD IV.

‘Tier 2 (T2) capital’ In the context of CRD IV, a measuretype of a bank’s financial strength, including qualifying subordinated debt and other Tier 2 securitiescapital as defined in the Capital Requirements Regulation.

Tier 2 (T2) securities’ Securities that are treated as Tier 2 (T2) capital in the context of CRD IV.

Total capital ratio’Total regulatoryRegulatory capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets.Risk Weighted Assets.

‘Total outstanding balance’ In Retail,retail banking, total outstanding balance is defined as the grossmonth-end customer balances on all accounts including accounts charged off to recoveries.

‘Total return swap’ An instrument whereby the seller of protection receives the full return of the asset, including both the income and change in the capital value of the asset. The buyer of the protection in return receives a predetermined amount.

‘Total balances on forbearance programmes coverage ratio’ Impairment allowance held against Forbearance balances expressed as a percentage of balance in forbearance.

‘Traded Market Risk’ The risk of a reduction to earnings or capital due to volatility of trading book positions.

‘Trading book’ All positions in financial instruments and commodities held by an institution either with trading intent, or in order to hedge positions held with trading intent.

‘Traditional Securitisation Transactions’Securitisation transactions in which an underlying pool of assets generates cash flows to service payments to investors.

‘Transform’ Package of measures to realise Barclays goal of becoming the ‘Go- to’ Bank, including delivering returns on equity higher than cost of equity in all of the Group’s businesses, and longer-term action in culture, rewards, control and costs.

‘Transitional’ In the context of CRD IV a measure is described as transitional when the transitional provisions set out in Part Ten of the CRD IV Regulation are applied in its calculation.

Turnbull guidance’Unencumbered’ The Turnbull guidance sets out best practice on internal control for UK listed companies, and assists them in applying section C.2 of the Combined Code on Corporate Governance.Assets not used to secure liabilities or otherwise pledged.

‘United Kingdom (UK)’ Geographic segment where Barclays operates comprising the UK. Also see ‘Europe’.

‘UK Bank levy’ A levy that applies to UK banks, building societies and the UK operations of foreign banks. The levy is payable based on a percentage of the chargeable equity and liabilities of the bank on its balance sheet date.

UK leverage exposure’ Is calculated as per the updated PRA rulebook, where the average exposure calculation also includes the FPC’s recommendation to allow firms to exclude claims on the central bank from the calculation of the leverage exposure measure, as long as these are matched by deposits denominated in the same currency and of identical or longer maturity.

Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    431


Glossary of terms

‘UK leverage ratio’ As per the updated PRA rulebook, is calculated as the average capital measure divided by the average exposure measure for the quarter, where the average is based on the capital and exposure measure on the last day of each month in the quarter.

US Partner Portfolio’Co-branded credit card programs with companies across various sectors including travel, entertainment, retail and financial sectors.

‘US Residential Mortgages’ Securities that represent interests in a group of US residential mortgages.

Unencumbered’Utilisation rate’ Assets not used to secure liabilities or otherwise pledged.Utilisation of MCA balances expressed as a percentage of total MCA reserve limits.

‘Valuation weighted Loan to Value (LTV) Ratio’ In the context of credit risk disclosures on secured home loans, a means of calculating marked to market LTVs derived by comparing total outstanding balance and the value of total collateral we hold against these balances. Valuation weighted loan to value is calculated using the following formula: LTV = total outstandings in portfolio /totalportfolio/total property values of total outstandings in portfolio.

‘Value at Risk (VaR) See ‘DVaR’.

‘Weighted off balance sheet commitments’ Regulatoryadd-ons to the leverage exposure measure based on credit conversion factors used in the standardised approachStandardised Approach to credit risk.

‘Wholesale loans’ / ‘lending’ Lending to larger businesses, financial institutions and sovereign entities.

‘Write-off’ Refers to the point where it is determined that an asset is irrecoverable, or it is no longer considered economically viable to try to recover the asset or it is deemed immaterial or full and final settlement is reached and the shortfall written off. In the event ofwrite-off, the customer balance is removed from the balance sheet and the impairment reserveallowance held against the asset is released.

‘Wrong-way risk’ Arises, in a trading exposure, when there is significant correlation between the underlying asset and the counterparty, which in the event of default would lead to a significant mark to market loss. When assessing the credit exposure of awrong-way trade, analysts take into account the correlation between the counterparty and the underlying asset as part of the sanctioning process.

 

 

432    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  475


Shareholder information

Contents

Resources for shareholders including contact details for shareholder enquiries

Page

Shareholder information        

§   Your Barclays shareholding

477

§   Useful contact details

478

476  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2015 Annual Report on Form 20-F 


Your Barclays shareholding

Shareholder information

    

LOGOShareholder information

Barclays shareholding

 

Key dates

5 April 2016

Final dividend payment date

27 April 2016

Q1 Results Announcement

28 April 2016

Annual General Meeting

19 September 2016a

Interim dividend payment date

  Key dates

  5 April 2018

  Final dividend payment date

  26 April 2018

  Q1 Results Announcement

  1 May 2018

  Annual General Meeting, at 10.00am

  17 September 2018

  Interim dividend payment date

Annual General Meeting (AGM)

This year’s AGM will be held at the Royal Festival Hall, SouthbankQEII Centre, Belvedere Road,Westminster, London SE1 8XXSW1P 3EE, on Thursday, 28 April 2016Tuesday, 1 May 2018 at 11.00am.10.00am.

The Chairman and Chief Executive will update shareholders on our performance in 20152017 and our goals for 2016.2018. Shareholders will also have the opportunity to ask the Board questions at the meeting.

 

LOGO

LOGOLOGO 

You can find out more at

home.barclays/agm

Returning funds to shareholders

Over 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Rights Issue cheques which were sent out in September 2013.

During 2015, we conducted a tracing process to reunite these shareholders with their monies together with any unclaimed dividends. At the end of 2015, we had returned over £2.2m to our shareholders.

Note

aPlease note that these dates are provisional and subject to change.

LOGO

DividendsDonations to charity

We have declaredlaunched a final dividendShare Dealing Service in October 2017 aimed at shareholders with relatively small shareholdings for whom it might otherwise be uneconomical to deal. One option open to shareholders was to donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift. As a result of 3.5 pence per share, making 6.5 pence in total for 2015. However, we intend to pay a dividend of 3.0 pence for both 2016 and 2017. This will help us accelerate the imperative rundown of Non-Core. We recognise the importance of paying a meaningful dividend as part of total shareholder returns and are committed to doing so in the future. We will pay dividends semi-annually from 2016 rather than quarterly.

How do Barclays shareholders receive their dividends?

As at 31 December 2015, Barclays shareholders received their dividends in the following ways:

LOGO

1 Direct to your bank account

2 Cheque

3 Scrip dividend programme (new shares)

52%

27%

21%

You can choose how you would like to receive your Barclays dividends – save time and receive your dividends faster

You can have your dividends paid directly into your bank or building society account. It is easy to set up and your money will be in your bank account on the dividend payment date. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can provide your bank or building society details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you holdthis initiative, more than 2,500 shares, please write£61,000 was donated in 2017, taking the total donated since 2015 to Equiniti.over £299,000.

Scrip Dividend Programme (the Programme)Returning funds to shareholders

Shareholders can chooseOver 60,000 shareholders did not cash their Shares Not Taken Up (SNTU) cheque following the Rights Issue in September 2013. In 2017, we continued the tracing process to havereunite these shareholders with their dividends reinvested in new ordinary Barclays shares throughSNTU monies and any unclaimed dividends. By the Programme. More information, includingend of the Programme Terms and Conditions and application form, are available onyear, we had returned over £4.5m to our website.shareholders.

LOGO

To find out more, contact Equiniti or visit

home.barclays/dividends

Donation to charity

We launched a special share dealing service in October 2015 for shareholders holding 4,000 shares or less. Shareholders could donate their sale proceeds to ShareGift if they wished. Our shareholders donated nearly £130,000.

Action for shareholders

Keep your personal details up to date

Please remember to tell Equiniti if:

 

§ Youyou move house

 

§ Youyou need to update your bank or building society detailsdetails.

If you are a Shareview member, you can update your bank or building society account or address details online. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can update details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares you will need to write to Equiniti. You must provide a copy of your share certificate, Sharestore statement or most recent dividend tax voucher.confirmation. If these are not available, you will need to provide a copy of a utility bill or bank statement dated in the last three months.

Dividends

The final dividend for the year ended 31 December 2017 will be 2.0 pence per share, making the 2017 total dividend 3.0 pence.

 

Barclays understands the importance of the ordinary dividend for our shareholders. Barclays is therefore committed to maintaining an appropriate balance between total cash returns to shareholders, investment in the business, and maintaining a strong capital position. Going forward, Barclays intends to pay an annual ordinary dividend that takes into account these objectives and the medium-term earnings outlook of the Group. It is also the Board’s intention to supplement the ordinary dividends with additional returns to shareholders as and when appropriate.

The Board notes that in determining any proposed distributions to shareholders, the Board will consider the expectation of servicing more senior securities.

For 2018, Barclays anticipates resuming a total cash dividend of 6.5p, subject to regulatory approvals.

How do Barclays shareholders receive their dividends?

As at 31 December 2017, Barclays shareholders received their dividends in the following ways:

LOGO

Save time and receive your dividends faster by choosing to have them paid directly into your bank or building society account

It is easy to set up and your money will be in your bank account on the dividend payment date. If you hold 2,500 shares or less, you can provide your bank or building society details quickly and easily over the telephone using the Equiniti contact details overleaf. If you hold more than 2,500 shares, please contact Equiniti for details of how to change your payment instruction.

Scrip Dividend Programme

Shareholders can choose to have their dividends reinvested in new ordinary Barclays shares through the Scrip Dividend Programme.

More information, including the Terms and Conditions and application form, are available on our website.

.LOGO

To find out more, contact Equiniti or

visit home.barclays/dividends

 

 Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F  |  477    433


Shareholder information continued

    

    

    

 

Useful contact details

Equiniti

LOGOThe Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about
your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti by visitingshareview.co.uk

LOGO

Equiniti

0371 384 2055a

(in the UK)

+ 44 121 415 7004

(from overseas)

0371 384 2255a

(for the hearing impaired in the UK)

+44 121 415 7028

(for the hearing impaired

from overseas)

LOGO

Aspect House, Spencer Road,

Lancing, West Sussex BN99 6DA

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

ADRs represent the ownership of Barclays PLC shares which are traded on the New York Stock Exchange. ADRs carry prices, and pay dividends, in US dollars.

LOGOIf you have any questions about ADRs, please contact J.P.Morgan:
J.P.Morgan: jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.com or visit adr.com

LOGO

J.P.Morgan Shareholder Services

+1 800 990 1135

(toll free in US and Canada)

+1 651 453 2128

(outside the US and Canada)

LOGO

JPMorgan Chase Bank N.A.

PO Box 64504

St Paul

MN 55164-0504

USA

Shareholder Relations

LOGOTo give us your feedback or if you have any questions, please contact:
privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com

LOGO

Shareholder Relations

Barclays PLC

1 Churchill Place London

E14 5HP

Share price

LOGOInformation on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available
at:home.barclays/investorrelations

LOGO

Managing your shares online

Shareview

An increasing number of Barclays shareholders can go online to manage their shareholding and find out about Barclays’ performance.Barclays performance by joining Shareview.

By joiningThrough Shareview, you:

 

§ will receive the latest updates from Barclays direct byto your email

 

§ can update your address and bank details online

 

§ can vote in advance of general meetingsmeetings.

LOGO

To join Shareview, please follow these 3three easy steps:

Step 1  Go to shareview.co.ukportfolio.shareview.co.uk
Step 2  Register for electronic communications by following the instructions on screen

Step 3

  

You will be sent an activation code in the post the next working day

Shareholder security

 

Shareholder Security

Shareholders should be wary of any cold calls with an offer to buy or sell shares. These fraudsters

Shareholders should be wary of any cold calls with an offer to buy or sell shares. Fraudsters use persuasive and high-pressure techniques to lure shareholders into high-risk investments or scams. You should treat any unsolicited calls with caution.

Please keep in mind that firms authorised by the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) are unlikely to contact you out of the blue. You should consider getting independent financial or professional advice from someone unconnected to the respective firm before you hand over any money.

 

LOGO

Report a scam.scam

If you suspect that you have been approached by fraudsters please tell the FCA using the share fraud reporting form atfca.org.uk/scams.scams. You can also call the FCA Helpline on 0800 111 6768 or through Action Fraud on 0300 123 2040.

Equiniti

LOGO

The Barclays share register is maintained by Equiniti. If you have any questions about your Barclays shares, please contact Equiniti:shareview.co.uk
Equiniti

LOGO

0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

+44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

0371 384 2255a (for the hearing impaired in the UK)

+44 121 415 7028 (for the hearing impaired from overseas)

LOGO

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing

West Sussex

BN99 6DA

Shareholder Relations

LOGO

To give us your feedback or if you have any questions, please contact:privateshareholderrelations@barclays.com
Shareholder Relations

LOGO

Barclays PLC

1 Churchill Place

London

E14 5HP

American Depositary Receipts (ADRs)

LOGO

If you have any questions about ADRs, please contact J.P. Morgan:jpmorgan.adr@wellsfargo.com or visitadr.com
J.P. Morgan Shareholder Services

LOGO

+1 800 990 1135 (toll free in US and Canada)

+1 651 453 2128 (outside the US and Canada)

LOGO

JPMorgan Chase Bank N.A.

PO Box 64504

St Paul

MN 55165-0854

USA

Share price

LOGO

Information on the Barclays share price and other share price tools are available at:home.barclays/investorrelations

 

Alternative formats

Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or Braille free of charge by calling Equiniti. 0371 384 2055a (in the UK) +44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

Audio versions of the Strategic Report will also be available at the AGM

LOGO  

Note

Alternative formats

LOGO  

Shareholder documents can be provided in large print, audio CD or braille free of charge by calling Equiniti.

 0371 384 2055a (in the UK)

 +44 121 415 7004 (from overseas)

  Audio versions of the Strategic Report will   also be available at the AGM.

Note

aLines open 8.30am to 5.30pm (UK time) Monday to Friday, excluding public holidays.

434    Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 2017 Annual Report on Form 20-F


LOGO

Front cover image

Out of Africa, into new territory

After more than 150 years on the continent, the decision to sell down Barclays’ investment in Africa was not an easy one. But with people like Win Chung and Sophia Aluko working hard to ensure a thoughtful separation, we broke new ground for Barclays in 2017.

LOGO

This Report is printed on Cocoon Preprint made from 100% FSC® Recycled certified fibre sourced fromde-inked post-consumer waste. The printer and the manufacturing mill are both credited with ISO14001 Environmental Management Systems Standard and both are FSC® certified. By printing this publication on Cocoon Preprint, the environmental impact was reduced by: 4,952 kg of landfill, 732 kg CO and greenhouse gases, 102,989 litres of water, 9,490 kWh of energy and 8,046 kg of wood.

Source: Carbon footprint data evaluated by Labelia Conseil in accordance with the Bilan Carbone methodology. Calculations are based on a comparison between the recycled paper used versus a virgin fibre paper according to the latest European BREF data (virgin fibre paper) available.

Registered office: 1 Churchill Place, London E14 5HP

© Barclays Bank PLC 2018                                                                              000000

Registered in England. Registered No: 48839

Designed by FleishmanHillard Fishburn www.fhflondon.co.uk

 

 

478  |  Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC 20152017 Annual Report on Form 20-F    435


Signatures

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

Date March 1st, 2016

Barclays PLC

(Registrant)

By

/s/ Tushar Morzaria

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form 20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

Date March 1st, 2016

Barclays Bank PLC

(Registrant)

By

/s/ Tushar Morzaria

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibit

  

Description

1.1  Articles of Association of Barclays PLC (incorporated by reference to the Form6-K filed on May 2nd, 2013)
1.2  Articles of Association of Barclays Bank PLC (incorporated by reference to the Form6-K filed on May 13th,13th, 2010)
2.1  Long Term Debt Instruments: Neither Barclays PLC nor Barclays Bank PLC is party to any single instrument relating to long-term debt pursuant to which a total amount of securities exceeding 10% of either Barclays PLC’s or Barclays Bank PLC’s total assets (on a consolidated basis) is authorised to be issued. Each of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC hereby agrees to furnish to the Securities and Exchange Commission (the “Commission”), upon its request, a copy of any instrument defining the rights of holders of its long-term debt or the rights of holders of the long-term debt of any of its subsidiaries for which consolidated or unconsolidated financial statements are required to be filed with the Commission.
4.0    4.1  Rules of the Barclays Group Performance Share Plan (2005) (incorporated by reference to the 2006 Form 20-F filed on March 26th, 2007)
4.1  Rules of the Barclays PLC Renewed 1986 Executive Share Option Scheme (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-153723) filed on September 29th, 2008)
4.2  Rules of the Barclays PLC Approved Incentive Share Option Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-153723) filed on September 29th, 2008)
4.3  Rules of the Barclays PLC Unapproved Incentive Share Option Plans (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-153723) filed on September 29th, 2008)
4.4  Rules of the Barclays PLC Executive Share Award Scheme (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-173899) filed on May 3rd, 2011)
4.5  Rules of the Barclays Group Special Award Performance Share Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-153723) filed on September 29th, 2008)
4.6  Rules of the Barclays Group Incentive Share Plan (incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-153723) filed on September 29th,29th, 2008)
4.7    4.2  Rules of Barclays Bank PLC 1999 Directors Deferred Compensation Plan (amended and restated, effective January 1, 2008) (incorporated by reference to Barclays Bank PLC’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-149301) filed on February 19th, 2008)
4.8  Rules of Barclays Bank PLC Senior Management Deferred Compensation Plan (amended and restated, effective January 1, 2008) (incorporated by reference to Barclays Bank PLC’s Registration Statement on Form S-8 (File no. 333-149302) filed on February 19th, 2008)
4.9  Rules of the Barclays Group Share Value Plan (incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form20-F filed on March 14th,. 2014)
4.10  4.3  Rules of the Barclays PLC Long Term Incentive Plan (Incorporated by reference to the Barclays PLC Registration Statement on FormS-8 (File no.333-173899) filed on May 3rd,3rd, 2011)
4.11  4.4  Rules of the Barclays Group Deferred Share Value Plan (incorporate by reference to the 2016 Form20-F filed on Feburary 23rd, 2017)
  4.5Contract of Employment – Tushar Morzaria (Incorporated by reference to the 2014 Form20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.12  4.6  Appointment Letter – Reuben Jeffery III (incorporated by reference to the 2009 Form20-F filed on March 19th, 2010)
4.13  4.7  Appointment Letter – Dambisa Moyo (incorporated by reference to the 2010 Form20-F filed on March 21st, 2011)
4.14  4.8  Appointment Letter – Tim Breedon (incorporated by reference to the 2012 Form20-F filed on March 13th, 2013)


4.15  4.9  Appointment Letter – Diane de Saint Victor (incorporated by reference to the 2012 Form 20-F filed on March 13th, 2013)
4.16Appointment Letter – Michael Ashley (Incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.174.10  Appointment Letter – Wendy Lucas-Bull (Incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form 20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.18Appointment Letter – Stephen Thieke (Incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form 20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.19Appointment Letter – Frits van Paasschen (Incorporated by reference to the 2013 Form 20-F filed on March 14th, 2014)
4.20Appointment Letter - Letter—Crawford Gillies (Incorporated by reference to the 2014 Form20-F filed on March 3rd, 2015)
4.214.11  Appointment Letter -Letter— John McFarlane (Incorporated by reference to the 2014 Form20-F filed on March 3rd, 2015)
4.224.12  Appointment Letter – Sir Gerry Grimstone (incorporated by reference to the 2015 Form20-F filed on March 1st, 2016)
4.234.13  Appointment Letter – Diane Schueneman (incorporated by reference to the 2015 Form20-F filed on March 1st, 2016)
4.244.14  Contract of employment – James E Staley (incorporated by reference to the 2015 Form20-F filed on March 1st, 2016)
4.15Transfer of Employment – James E Staley (incorporate by reference to the 2016 Form20-F filed on Feburary 23rd, 2017)
4.16Transfer of Employment – Tushar Morzaria (incorporate by reference to the 2016 Form20-F filed on Feburary 23rd, 2017)
4.17Appointment Letter – Mary Francis (incorporate by reference to the 2016 Form20-F filed on Feburary 23rd, 2017)
4.18Appointment Letter – Sir Ian Cheshire
4.19Appointment Letter – Mike Turner
4.20Appointment Letter – Matthew Lester
7.1  Ratios of earnings to fixed charges. The calculations can be found in the Barclays Bank PLC financial data on page 455410 of theForm  20-F.


7.2  Ratios of earnings to combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations. The calculations can be found in the Barclays Bank PLC financial data on page 455410 of theForm 20-F.
7.3  Ratios of earnings to fixed charges. The calculations can be found in the Barclays PLC financial data on page 432385 of theForm  20-F.
7.4  Ratios of earnings to combined fixed charges, preference share dividends and similar appropriations. The calculations can be found in the Barclays PLC financial data on page 432385 of theForm 20-F.
8.1  List of subsidiaries –subsidiaries. The list of subsidiaries of Barclays PLC can be found in Note 36on pages 295 to 300 of the Barclays PLC financial statements on pages 285-286 and in Note 46 of the Barclays PLC financial statements on pages 299-305 of the Form20-F.
11.1  Code of Ethics
12.1  Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240.13(a)-14(a)
13.1  Certifications filed pursuant to 17 CFR 240. 13(a) and 18 U.S.C 1350(a) and 1350(b)
15.1  Consent of KPMG LLP for incorporation by reference of reports in certain securities registration statements of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC.
15.2Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP for incorporation by reference of reports in certain securities registration statements of Barclays PLC and Barclays Bank PLC.
15.2Letter from PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP regarding change in registrants’ certifying accountant
15.3Chief Executive Officer – Strategy Update (incorporated by reference to the Form 6-K filed on March 1st, 2016)
99.1  A table setting forth the issued share capital of Barclays PLC and the Barclays PLC Group’s total shareholders’ equity, indebtedness and contingent liabilities as at 31 December 20152017
99.2  A table setting forth the issued share capital of Barclays Bank PLC and the Barclays Bank PLC Group’s total shareholders’ equity, indebtedness and contingent liabilities as at 31 December 20152017


Signatures

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

Date February 22nd, 2018

Barclays PLC

(Registrant)

By

/s/ Tushar Morzaria

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all of the requirements for filing on Form20-F and that it has duly caused and authorised the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

Date February 22nd, 2018

Barclays Bank PLC

(Registrant)

By

/s/ Tushar Morzaria

Tushar Morzaria, Group Finance Director